^ , y: ^^-^ '^ ^^ ^^. ^/^^r 



# 



LIBRARY OF CONGRESS, 



#|li»i! ' lopmjW ?5[o I 

I UNITED STATES OP AMERICA. ^ 



GRAMMAR 



^:» 



OF 



THE GREEK LANGUAGE, 

FOR THE USE OF 

HIGH SCHOOLS AND COLLEGES. 

BY 

DR. RAPHAEL KUHNER, 

CONRECTOR OF THE LYCEUM, HANOVER. 

TRANSLATED FROM THE GERMAN 
BY 

B. B. EDWARDS, 

PROFESSOR IN THE THEOLOGICAL SEMINARY, AND 

S. H. TAYLOR, 

PRINCIPAL OF PHILLIPS ACADEMY, ANDOVER. 



.?f 



O 



ANDOVER: 
ALLEN, MORRILL AND WARDWELL. 

NEW YORK : MARK H. NEWMAN. 
LONDON : WILEY & PUTNAM. 

1844. 









^ 






f 



^ ifmm- & 



Entered according to Act of Congress, in the year 1844, by 

ALLEN, MORRILL ic WARDWELL. 
in the Clerk's Office of the District Court of Massachusetts. 






AND O VE R: 

ALLEX, MORRILL AND WARDWELL, 
PRINTERS. 



F 



PREFACE. 



Ra.phael Kuhner, the author of the following Grammar, was 
bom at Gotha, in 1802. From 1812- to 1821, he studied at the 
celebrated g^^mnasium in his native city. Among his classical 
teachers were Doring, Rost and "Wustemann. From 1821 to 1824, 
he enjoyed, at the University of Gottingen, the instructions of 
Mitscherhch, Dissen and Ottfried Miiller. ^Miile here, he pre- 
pared an essay on the pliilosopliical A^Titings of Cicero, which re- 
ceived a prize. Since 1824, he has been a teacher in the Lyceum 
at Hanover. The principal works from the pen of Dr. Kiihner are 
the following : 

1. Versuch einer neuen Anordung der Griech. S^Titax, mit Bei- 

spielen begleitet. 1829. "Attempt towards a new An-ange- 
mentofthe Greek Syntax," etc. 

2. M. Tull. Ciceronis Tusculan. Disputationum hbri. 1829; ed. 

altera 1835. 

3. Sammthche AnomaHen des Griech. Verbs in Attisch. Dialecte, 

1831. "Anomahes of the Greek Verb," etc. 

4. AusfiJrliche Gmmmatik der Griech. vSpi-ache, in 2 Tlieilen, 1834, 

1835. " Copious Grammar of the Greek Language, in two 
Parts." The second Part of this grammar, containing the 
Syntax, translated by W. E. Jelf, of the University of Oxford, 
was pubhshed in 1842. Tlie first portion is now in press. 
This work is, however, only in part a tmnslation, ]\Ir. Jelf be- 
ing the author of the remarks on the CaseSj the particle av, the 
compound verbs, etc. 

6. Schulgrammatik der Griech. Sprache, 1836; zweite durchaus 
verbesserte u. vermehrte Auflage, 1843. " School Graimnar 
of the Greek Language, second edition, improved and en- 
larged." The present volume is a translation of tliis Gram- 
mar, from the sheets, furnished for this purpose by the author. 

6. Elementargrammatik der Griech Sprache. Dritte verbesserte 
u. verm. Aufl. 1842. "Elementary Grammar of tlie Greek 
Language." A translation of the second edition of this Gra.m- 



IV PREFACE. 



mar, by John H. Millard, of St. John's College, Cambridge, 
has been published in England. The Exercises, which are 
omitted in Mr. Millard's translation, will be retained in the 
translation of the tidrd edition, which the editors of the pre- 
sent volume will prepare as early as practicable. 

7. Xenophontis de Socrate Commentarii, 1841. 

8. Elementargrammatik der Lateinischen Sprache, 1842. 2d Aufl. 

1843. 

9. Vorschule zur Erlernung der Lat. Sprache, 1842. 

10. Schulgrammatik der Lat. Spr. nebst eingereihten Deutsch. 
Uebersetzungsaufgaben, 1842. " School Grammar of the 
Latin Language, with a Series of Exercises for Translation." 
From the above stEttements, it will be seen, that Dr. Kiihner has 
enjoyed the most favorable opportunities for preparing the work, a 
translation of which is now presented to the public. The names 
of his early instructors are among the most honored in classical 
philology. For thirty years, he has been a teacher in one of the 
principal German gymnasia, and has thus had ample facilities for 
testing in practice the principles which he has adopted in his 
Grammars. At the same time, he has pursued the study of the 
classical authors with the greatest diligence, in connection with the 
productions wliich his learned countrymen are constantly pubHsh- 
ing on the different parts of Latin and Greek grammar. Of com*se, 
his works might be expected to combine the advantages of sound, 
scientific principles, and a skilful adaptation to practical use. The 
" School Grammar of the Greek Language," being liis latest publi- 
cation, contains the results of his most mature studies. Its chief 
excellences, it may be well, perhaps, briefly to indicate. 

First, The grammar is based on a profound and accurate know- 
ledge of the genius and piinciples of the Greek language. The 
author adopts subtantially the views which are maintained by 
Becker, Grimm, Hupfeld and others, and which are fully unfolded 
in the German grammars of Becker. According to these views, 
the forms and changes of language are the result of established 
laws, and not of accident or arbitraiy arrangement. Consequently, 
language may be subjected to scientific analysis and classification. 
The multitude of details may be embraced under a few compre- 
hensive principles, and the whole may have somewhat of the 
completeness and spirit of a, living, organic system. Dr. Kiiliner's 
grammar is not a collection of detached obsei*vations, or of rules 
w^hich have no connection, except a numerical one. It is a natural 



PREFACE. 



classification of the essential elements of the lan^iage, an orderly 
exliibition of its real phenomena. It is, at the same time, a truly- 
practical gitimmar, fitted for its object, not by a theorist in his closet, 
but by an experienced instructor in his school. 

Second, The author has adopted a clear and satisfactoiy arrange- 
ment of his materials. This can be seen by an examination of the 
table of contents. To those, indeed, who are familiar only with 
the common distribution of subjects in our Greek grammars, the 
arrangement of Dr. Kiihner may appear somewhat obscure and 
comphcated. A sHght acquaintance, however, ^vith the plan on 
which the Syntax, for example, is constructed, Avill show that he 
has followed the true and logical method. Abundant proofs of the 
justness of this remark may be seen in the exhibition of compound 
sentences. The particles are treated, not as isolated, independent 
words, but as a component and indissoluble part of discourse. 

Third, Fulness and pertinence of illustration. The correctness 
of eveiy principle advanced, especially in the Syntax, is vouched 
for by copious citations from the classics. If, in any case, a prin- 
ciple is stated in an abstract form, or if a degi-ee of obscurity rests 
upon the enunciation of it, its meaning may be readily discovered 
by reference to the illustration. The paradigms contain much 
more complete exemplifications of conjugation and declension than 
are to be found in the grammars in common use in tliis country. 
In this connection, it may be stated, that Dr. KiJlmer has chosen a 
pure verb as the model of regailar inflection. He can thus exhibit 
the stem unchanged, throughout the entire conjugation. 

Fourth, The perfect analysis to which the forms of the language, 
especially of the verb, is subjected, may be mentioned as another 
excellence of the grammar. In learning a paradigm, in the man- 
ner which the author points out, the pupil first resolves the verb 
into its elements, and then rearranges these elementary parts into 
a complete forai. Li this method, and m no other, can he attain a 
mastery of this most difiicult portion of the subject. 

Fifth, Every part of the grammar is equally elaborated. The 
closing pages exhibit the same fulness and conscientious accuracy, 
which characterize the forms, or the first portions of the Syntax. 
No part can be justly charged with deficiency or with superfluous 
statement. The view of the Third Declension, the scientific list 
of L-regular A'erbs, the Dialectic peculiarities, the obsen^ations on 
the Use and Position of the Article, on the Middle and Passive 
Verbs, and on the difference between the usage of the Participle 



VI PREFACE. 



and Infinitive, may be referred to as specimens of careful observa- 
tion and nice analysis. 

The J\ppendix on Versification has been snppHed by the trans- 
lators, the grammar of Kiilmer containing nothing on that subject. 
The materials were drawn from a variety of sources. A more full 
view is less necessary, as a work on Metre, translated by Profs. 
Beck and Felton, is now in press. It was the intention of the trans- 
lators to subjoin some remarks on the Pronunciation of Greek, and 
on the Accents, together with a short system of Prosody, but the 
fear of enlarging the volume too much led them to abandon the 
design. 

Much pains have been taken in verifying the almost innumera- 
ble references to classical authors. The very few exceptions are 
those cases where the author made use of an edition of a classic 
not accessible to the translators. In this verification, the following 
editions of prose authors were used, viz. Kiihner's edition of the 
Memorabilia ; Weiske and Tauchnitz's editions of the other works 
of Xenophon; Schafer and Tauchnitz's editions of Herodotus; 
Bekker and Tauchnitz's editions of Thucydides ; Dobson's edition 
of the Oratores Attici; and Stallbaum's Plato. There are sHght 
variations in numbering the lines of poetry in different editions, par- 
ticularly in the tragedians. 

The references to sections in the grammar itself, as well as those 
in the Indexes, have also been verified. 

The small enclosed figures on the right of the section-marks, re- 
fer to the sections in the first edition of the grammar. 

In conclusion, the translators would acknowledge with gratitude, 
the encouragement and aid which they have received from several 
gentlemen. Especial obhgations are due to Professor Felton of 
Harvard University, to whom a large portion of the manuscript, in- 
cluding the whole of the Syntax, was read. His accurate know- 
ledge both of the Greek and German languages, and his experience 
as an instructor, enabled him to suggest many valuable corrections 
and improvements. 

If the Grammar shall prove to be an acceptable present to the 
Public, much credit wiU be due to the enterprising publishers, who 
have spared no pains or expense in regard to the typography, and 
the entire external appearance of the volume. 

Andover^ June 1, 1844. 



TABLE OF CONTENTS. 



ETYMOLOGY. 



CHAP. I. — SOUNDS OF THE LANGUAGE. 

Sect. I. — Letters and Sounds of the Language. 



Alphabet § 1 

Sounds of the Letters ... 2 
Articulation of the Sounds . . 3 
Vowels . . . . .4 

Consonants ..... 5 
Spiritus Lenis and Spiritus Asper 6 
Changes of Letters ... 7 
Changes of the Vowels . 8 — 16 

Hiatus 8 

Contraction of Vowels . . 9 

Crasis 10,11 

Synizesis 12 

Elision . . 13, 14 

JV 'Eife?.y,. ; ovT(o(?) ; »| and Ix ; ot; 

and ovx ..... 15 
Strengthening and Weakening of 

Vowels 16 



Prolongation, Shortening and Va- 
riation § 16 

Influence of a Vowel or Consonant 16 
Syncope, Omission of a Vowel . 16 
Euphonic Prothesis ... 16 
Changes of the Consonants 17 — 25 

Mutes 17 

Liquids ..... 18 

Mutes and Liquids, Liqs. and Mutes 19 
Sibilant a with Mut. and Liq. . 20 
Change of Consonants separated 

from one another ... 21 
Metathesis of Liquids ... 22 
Doubling of Consonants . . 23 
Strengthening and Addition of Con- 
sonants 24 

Expulsion and Omission of Conso- 
nants 25 



Sect. H. — Syllables. 



Nature and Division of Syllables 

Quantity of Syllables . 

Quantity of the Penult 

Accents 

Change and Removal of the Accent 
by Inflection, Composition and 
Contraction .... 

Change and Removal of the Ac- 
cent IN CONTINUED DISCOURSE 31-35 



26 


1. Grave instead of the acute 


. 31 


27 


II. Crasis .... 


. 31 


28 


111. Elision 


. 31 


29 


IV. Anastrophe 


. 31 




V. Atonies or Proclitics . 


. 32 




VI. Enclitics . 


33—35 


30 


Division of Syllables 


. 36 




Punctuation Marks — Diastole 


. 37 



CHAP. II. — GRAMMATICAL FORMS. 

Division of the Parts of Speech. — InfL ection 

Sect. 1. — The Substantive. 



Nature and Division of the Sub- 
stantive 39 

Gender of Substantives . . 40 

jS umber, Case and Declension . 41 

First Declension .... 42 



I. Feminines .... 43 

II. Masculines .... 44 
Quantity and Accent . . 45 

Second Declension ... 46 

Contraction of the second Dec. 47 



VJIl 



CONTENTS. 



Attic second Declension 
Accenluation 
lloinarks on Gender 
Third Declension 



§ 4H 
41) 
50 
51 



Remarks on the Case-endings 52, 5;i 
ParadijTMis . . . 54-6:i 

(Quantity 64 

Accentuation .... 65 
Gender Gii 



Anomalous Nouns . . §67,68 
Delbctive Nouns . .69 

Chanire of Form in the Declen- 
sions .... 70 — 72 

I. Redundant Nouns . . 70 

II. Ileteroclites . . .71 

III. Metaplasts ... 72 
Indeclinable and Defective Nouns 7IJ 



Sect. II. — Tirn Adjectivk and Participle. 



Nature, Gender and Declension . 74 
Accentuation .... 75 

Summary of the Adjective and Part. 
Endings .... 76 — 80 

I. Adjectives and Participles of 
three Endings . . 76, 77 

II. Adjectives of two Endings 78,79 

III. Adjectives of one Ending 80 



Comparison of Adjectives 

A. -rtoog, -T^ou, -Tf (iov ; -ruroc, 

TuT}], rurov 
i3. -tcor, -lov, -(uv, -ov ', -lOToc, 
-?j, -ov .... 

Anomalous forms of Comparison 
Comparison of Adverbs 



81 

82 

83 
84 
85 



Sect. III. — The Pronoun. 



Nature and Division of Pronouns 86 

I. Personal Pronouns . 87 — 90 

II. Demonstrative Pronouns . 91 

III. Relative Pronouns . . 92 



IV. Indefinite and Interrogative 

Pronouns ... 93 

Correlative Pronouns ... 94 

Lengthening of the Pronoun . 95 



Sect. IV. — The Numerals. 



Nature and Division of Numerals 
Numeral Signs . . . . 



96 I Summary of the principal classes 98 

97 Remarks on the Numerals . . 99 



Nature and Division 



Sect. V. — The Adverb. 

. 100 I Formation of Adverbs 



. 101 



Sect. VI. — The Verb. 



Nature and Division of the Verb 102 
Classes . . . . .102 

Tenses 103 

Modes 104 

Infinitive and Participle . . 105 
Persons and Tenses . . . 106 
Conjugation of Verbs in -oj . . 107 
Stem, Augment, Reduplication and 

Characteristic .... 108 
Inflection-endings . . . 109 

a. Tense-characteristic and End- 

ings ..... 110 

b. Personal-endings and Mode- 

vowels . . . Ill — 114 
Conjugation of Regular Verbs in -o 115 
Remarks on the Inflection-endings 116 
Remarks on the Formation of the 

Attic Future .... 117 
Accentuation of the Verb . .118 
Special view of Aug. and Redup. 119 
Syllabic Augment . . . 120 



Temporal Augment 
Reduplication 



121,122 
. 123 



Attic Reduplication . . .124 
Aug. and Redup. in Compounds 125-6 
Formation of the Tenses of 

Verbs in -co . . . 127—167 
Division of Verbs in -co according 

to the Characteristic 
Derivation of Tenses . 
I. Formation of the Tenses of Pure 
Verbs ..... 

a. With a short Characteristic- 

vowel .... 

b. With a in Aor. Pass, and Perf. 

Mid. or Pass, 
Paradigms of Pure Verbs . 132— 



A. Uncontracted Pure Verbs . 
(a) Without a in the Mid. or 



127 
128 

129 

130 

131 
-137 
132 

132 



Pass. .... 
(b) With a in the Mid. and 

Pass 133 

B. Contract Pure Verbs . 134—136 
Remarks on the same . .137 
II. Formation of the Tenses of Im- 
pure Verbs . . . .138 



CONTENT 



^ 



IX 



Strciigthoningof the Stem . § 

Variation of the Stem-vowel 
Remarks on the Secondary Tenses 

A. Formation of the Tenses of 

Mule Verbs . . . US- 

Remarks on tlie Characteristic 
Paradigms of Mute Verbs J 45 — 

B. Formation of the Tenses of Li- 

quid Verbs 
Paradigms . . . 150 — 

Peculiarities in the Formation of 

Single Verbs .... 
Syncope . . . 

Metathesis 

Verbs in -w with Stem of the Pres. 
strengthened 

I. Verbs with >■ inserted . 

II. Verbs with the syllable vs . 

III. Verbs with dr or u/r . 

IV. Verbs in -a/o, -la/v} 

V. Verbs in -t^w 

VI. Verbs with Reduplication . 

VII. Verbs whose Pure Stem- 
A'^owel a is strengthened by t 

VIII. Verbs which assume e . 
Verbs which assume an t in form- 
ing the Tenses . . . ■ . 

Verbs whose Tenses are formed 
from different Roots ." . 

Conjugation- of Verbs ik -at 

Division of Verbs in -i<t 

Characteristic-vowel and Strength- 
ening of the Stem of the Pres. . 

Mode-vowels .... 

Personal-endings . . . 

Formation of the Tenses . 173, 



140 
141 

144 
141 
148 

14!) 
153 

154 
155 
156 

157 

158 
151) 
160 
161 
162 
163 

164 
165 

166 

167 

168 
169 

170 
171 
172 
174 



Paradigms . . , . § 175 

Remarks on the Paradigms . . 176 
Summary of Verbs in -ui . 172 — I'JO 
1. Verbs in'-nt which annex the 
Personal-endinos to the Stem- 



(^) 



(b) 



vowel 177 

Verbs in -a . . .177 

t^>„ut 178 

Deponents .... 17'J 
Verbs in -e . . . 180 

Verbs in -«, hui, siui . 181 

II. Verbs in -in wliich annex nv 

or vv to the Stem-vowel . 182 
Formation of the Tenses . . 182 
Summary of this class of Verbs 183 — 88 

A. Verbs whose Stem ends in a 

Vowel . . . 183—186 

(a) m-a . . . . 183 

(b) in -£ . . . . 184 
(c1 in -I . . . . 185 
(d) in -0 . . . . 186 

B. Verbs whose Stem ends in a 

Consonant . . 187, 183 

(a) in a Mute . . .187 

(b) in a Liquid . . .183 
Inflection of yeuiai and hiai 189,190 

Verbs in -o analogous in Formation 

to those in -ul . . . 191—196 
I. Second Aor.' Act. and Mid. 191.-2 



II. Perf. and Plup. Act.^ . 193, 
■OiSu and I'oiy.a . ^ ^ 

III. Present and Imperfect 
Summary of Deponent Passives .. 
Summary of Active Verbs with a 

Fut. Mid 



Sect. VII. — Prepositions, Conjunctions and Interjections 



194 
195 
196 

197 

198 



199 



SOUNDS AND FORMS OF THE DIALECTS. 



A. Sounds. 
Digamma or Labial Breathing F. 200 
Interchange of the Vowels . . 201 
Interchange of the Consonants, 202-204 
Change of the Vowels, . 205-207 
Contraction, Diaeresis . , 205 
Crasis, Synizesis, Elision, N. lif,i).y.. 

Hiatus 206 

Lengthening and Shortening of the 

Vowels, Syncope, Apocope . 207 
Prothesis and Insertion of Vowels 207 
Changes of the Consonants . . 208 
Quantity . . . . . 209 

B. Forms. 
Declensions .... 210-214 

Homeric Suflix (/ 1 or (fiv . . 210 
First Declension . .211 

Second Declension . . . 212 
Third Declension . .213 

Anomalous and Defective Words, 
Metaplasts . .214 

2 



The Adjective . . . .215 
Comparison . . . .216 

Pronouns 217 

Numerals . . . . .218 
The Verb .... 219-230 
Augment and Reduplication 219 

Personal-endings and Mode-vow- 
els ..... 220 
Epic and Ionic Iterative Form . 221 
Contraction and Resolution in 

Verbs 222 

Formation of the Tenses . . 223 
Conjugation in -ui . . . 224 
Ei'ui and Eifti. . . 225, 226 

Verbs in -w with a Sec. Aor. an- 
alogous to Verbs in -,«t , . 227 
Verbs in -dj with a Perf. and Plup. 

Act. like Verbs in -^u . ■ 228 
Verbs in -o with a Pres. and Impf. 

Act. like Verbs in -m . ■ 229 
List of Dialectical Verbs . . 230 



CQNTENTS. 



CHAP. Ill— FORMATION OF WORDS. 



Radical Words, Stems, Derivatives 231 

A. Derivation . . . 232-235 

1. Verbs .... 232 

11 Substantives ' . . 233 



III. Adjectives . § 234 

IV. Adverbs . . . 235 
B. Compounds . . . 236 

Formation of Compounds 237 



SYNTAX. 



CHAP. I. — SYNTAX OF THE SIiMPLE SENTENCE. 
Sect. I. — Parts of a Simple Sentence. 



Nature of a Sentence, Subject, Pre- 
dicate 238 

Comparison, Attribute and Object 239 
Agreement . . . . . 240 
Exceptions to rules of Agreement 241 
Agreement of several Subjects . 242 
Remarks on peculiarities in use of 

number ..... 243 
The Article . . . .244 

Position of the Article . . 245 
Use of the Article with Pronouns 

and Numerals . .' . 246 

As a Demon, and Rel. Pronoun 247 

Classes of Verbs . . . .248 

A. Active form . . . 249 



B. Middle . . 250 

C. Passive . . .251 
Remarks on Deponents . . 252 

Tenses and Modes . . . 253 

A. Particular View of the Tenses 254 

(a) Principal tenses, Pres., Perf., 

Fut 255 

(b) Hist. Tenses, Aor., Impf., 

Plup. — . ... 256 
Tenses of the Subord. Modes . 257 

B. Tarticular View of the Modes 258 
Usage of the Subj., Opt. and Imp. 259 
The Modes with uv . . 260 
Position and Repetition of uv . 261 



Sect. II — Attributives. 



Ellipsis of the Substantive 
(a) Attributive Adjective 



263 
264 



(b) Attributive Genitive 

(c) Apposition . 



265 
266 



Sect. III. — Objective Relation of Sentences. 



I. The Cases . . . . . 268 
Nominative and Vocative , 269 

(I) Genitive . . . .270 

A. Relations of Space . . 271 

B. Causal Relation . . 272 

(a) Gen. as the expression of 

action .... 273 

(b) Causal Genitive . . 274 

(c) Gen. denoting mutual rela- 

tions .... 275 

(II) Accusative . . . 276 

A. Relations of Space . . 277 

B. Causal Relations of the Ace. 278 

(a) Ace. denoting effect, . 278 

(b) Ace. of the Object on which 

the action is performed 279 



Two A.ccusatives . . 280 

Remarks on the Ace. with the 
Passive .... 281 
(III) Dative . . . .282 

A. Local Dative . . .283 

B. Dative as a personal Object 284 

C. Dative of the thing . . 285 
II. Construction of Prepositions 286 

(1) Prepositions with the Gen. 

only .... 287,288 

(2) With the Dative onlv . . 289 

(3) With the Accusative" only . 290 

(4) With the Gen. and Ace. . 291 

(5) With the Gen., Dat. and Ace. 292 
Remarks on peculiarities of the 

Prepositions .... 293 



Sect. IV. — The Pronoun as Subject, Predicate, Attribute and Object. 



I. Personal Pronouns . 

II. Remaining Pronouns 



302 ] Prospective and Retrospective Use 

303 of the Pronoun . . . .304 



CONTENTS. 



Xl 



Sect. V, — The Infinitive and Participi.k i srn v; an Attiubute am 

Object. 



A. The Infinitive . . § 305 
(I) Inf. as an Object witliout the 

Article . . . .306 
Noin., Gen., Dat. and Ace. 
with the Inf. . . .307 
(H) Inf with the Article . 308 

B. The Participle . . .309 
(I) The Part, as the Completion 

of the Verbal Idea . . 310 i 



Remarks on tlie Difference 
between the Use of the 
Part, and the Inf . § 311 

(II) Part, used to ^xpress Ad- 
verbial Subordinate Rela- 
tions .... 312 

Special Peculiarities in the 
Participial Construction . 313 



Sect. VI. — The Adverb as expressing the Objective Relation. 

A. Jil, diiTa,'^}]%\, dr^Sev, dtlTiovdev, I C. Emphatic Suffixes, yc', 7r*'j, rot 317 
Sal . . * . . . . 315 D. Negative Particles . .^ . 318 

B. Confirmative Adverbs . . 316 i 



CHAP. 11. — SYNTAX OF THE COMPOUND SENTENCE. 
Sect. Vil. A. — Coordinate Sentences. 

Different Forms of Coordinate Sen- ! III. Disjunctive Coordinate Sen- 
tences 320 I tences . . • . 323 

I. Copulative Coordinate Sen- j IV. Causal Coordinate Sen- 

tences .... 321 j tences .... 324 

II. Adversative Coordinate Sen- | Remarks on the Asj'ndeton . 323 

tences .... 322 i 



Sect. VIII. B. — Subordinate Sentences. 



I^rincipal and Subordinate Sentences 326 
Sequence of Tenses in Subordinate 

Sentences .... 327 

I. Substantive Sentences . . 326 

A. Introduced by on or wc, that 329 

B. Introduced by tj a, so ^Aaf, etc. 330 

II. Adjective Sentences . . 331 
Agreement of the Rel. Pron. . 332 
Modes in Adjective Sentences . 333 
Connection of several Adjective 

Clauses . . . .334 

Exchange of the Subordinate 
Clause with the Adj. Clause 334 

III. Adverbial Sentences . . 335 
A. Adverbial Sentences of Place 336 



B. Adverbial Sentences of Time 337 

C. Causal Adv. Sentences 338—340 
I^ DenotinDT Cause . . 338 
II. Conditional . . 339, 341 
HI. Denoting Consequence or 

Effect . . . .341 

D. Adverbial Clauses denoting 

Way and Manner and Quan- 
tity .... 342,343 

I. Comparative Adv. Clauses 

which express Way and 
Manner . . . .342 

II. Comparative Adv. Clauses 

which express Quantity 343 



Sect. IX. — Interrogative Sentences. 



I. Interrogatives .... 344 

II. Oblique Discourse . . . 345 

III. Special Peculiarities in the 
Construction of Words and Sen- 
tences . . .. . 346, 347 



Ellipsis, Brachylogy, Contraction, 

Pleonasm 346 

Anacoluthon .... 347 






Xll CONTENTS. 



Skct. X. — Position OK Words .... 348 

ArpKNDiN — VorsiHration . Page . 560 I Greek Index . . Page .585 

hulc-V ol" Hiilijcfls . . 57.'j I Index of the Forms of Verbs .'i-!) 



Abbreviations. — Aesch. ^esc/njJns, Ag. JJiramemnon, S. Scptem adv. Th. — Ar. 
^Aristophanes .-^Dcm . Demosthenes, Ol. Olijnth., Pli. Phiiipp., Cor. Corona., Chers. 
C/iersojies., Aph. Jlphobus. — Eur. Euripides, M. Medea, C. Cyclops, H. Hecuha, 
O. Orestes, H. F. Hercules Furcns, Hipp. Ilippohjtus. — Her. hlerodolvs. — Isae. 
Iscaus. — Lys. Ltjsias — PI. Plato, Cr. Crito, L. Le<rfs, Th. Tlteaires, JNIen. Meno, 
Soph. Sophista, Crat. Cratijivs, Vxoi. Protagoras, Vh\\. Philebus, Rp. Rcspublica. — 
Soph. Sophocles. OC. Ocd/pvs Colonevs, OR. Oedipus Rex, Ant. .Hntiirone, Ph. 
Philoctetes, Aj ^'Jjax^ El. Eiectra. — X. Xevophon, C. Commentarii, An .finabasis, 
H. lieUeuica, S. Sywposiuvi, R. Ath Respublica Athitiiens., R. L, RespubL Lacc^ 
daem., O. Oecouomicus, Ag- JJgcsilaus, R. Equ. /?. Equesfris. 



GREEK GRAMMAR 



DIALECTS OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 

1. The Greek language was divided into many different 
dialects, the most Mghly cultivated of which were the ^olic, 
Doric, Ionic and Attic. The ^olic prevailed in Boeotia, Thes- 
saly and in the JEolian colonies in Asia Minor; the Doric, 
throughout the Peloponnesus, and in the Dorian colonies in 
Asia IVIinor, Italy and Sicily ; the Ionic, in the Ionian colonies 
in Asia Minor; the Attic, in Attica. 

2. The ^olic and Doric dialects are characterized by hard- 
ness and roughness, being the opposite of the Ionic, which is 
distinguished for delicacy and softness. The Attic dialect holds 
a beautiful medium between the two former and the Ionic, as it 
skilfully combines the soft and pleasant forms of the Ionic with 
the strong and full-toned forms of the Doric. 

3. The Ionic dialect is divided into the Older and the Later 
Ionic. The Older Ionic is the language of Homer and of his 
school, although these poets were not satisfied with their own 
dialect merely, but knew how, in accordance with the true prin- 
ciples of art, to select, from all the dialects, those forms which 
corresponded to the nature of their poetry ; and to employ — since 
the regular laws of versification had much influence in forming 
the language — a peculiar and definite poetic language, called 
the Epic or Homeric. This had a great effect on the language 
of all the Greek poets even to the latest times. We find the 
Later Ionic in the works of the historian Herodotus, born 484 
B. C, and of Hippocrates, b. 460 B. C. 



14 GREEK DIALECTS. 



4. The Attic dialect is divided, in accordance with certain 
peculiarities, into the Older, the INIiddle, and the Later Attic. 
The Older is used by Thucydides, b. 472 B. C, the tragic poets, 
^schylus, died 456 B. C, Sophocles, b. 497 B. C, d. 405 B. C, 
Euripides, b. 480 B. C, and the more ancient comic writers, 
c. g. Aristophanes, d. 390 B. C. The Middle Attic is used by 
Plato, b. 430 B. C, and Xenophon, b. 447 B. C. The Later 
Attic is employed by the orators, the later comic wTiters, and 
the prose authors in more recent times, who sought to preserve 
in their works the language of the earlier writers. 

5. After the freedom of the Greeks had been destroyed by 
Philip, king of Macedon, the Attic dialect came to be the com- 
mon written language. As it extended, not only over aU 
Greece, but also over the Macedonian provinces of Syria and 
Egypt, it lost much of its peculiar stamp by the introduction of 
foreign forms and words, and it then received the name of the 
Common or Hellenic language, ri aoivr^ or 'EXXt^viyiTj diulexrog. 
It w^as used, e. g. by Apollodorus, Diodorus, and Plutarch. 



ETYMOLOGY. 



CHAPTER I. 

SOUNDS OF THE LANGUAGE. 







SECTION I. 




Letters 


and Sounds 


of the Lan 


guage. 






§1. Alph 


abet. 


(1.) 


he 


Alphabet 


of the Greek Ian 


iguage consists of the follow- 


tvve 


nty-four letters : 








FORJI. 


Sound. 


Name. 




A 


a 


a 


AXf^cf. 


Alpha 


B 


^ 


b 


Brita 


Beta 


r 


r 


g 


rdfi^ia 


Gamma 


A 


d 


d 


Ailtct 


Delta 


E 


e 


e short 


"£ 'Kbilov 


Epsilon 


Z 


r 


z 


Zrira, 


Zeta 


H 


V 


e long 


'Hra 


Eta 





^ 


th 


Gijra 


Theta 


I 


I 


i 


'lata 


Iota 


K 


X 


k 


KannoL 


Kappa 


A 


X 


1 


Adjx^da 


Lambda 


M 


^ 


m 


Mv 


Mu 


N 


V 


n 


'Nv 


Nil 


*w 


1 


X 


At 


Xi 








o short 


''0 {llXQOV 


Omikron 


n 


71 


P 


m 


Pi 


p 


Q 


r 


'p^ 


Rho 


2 


(J 9 


s 


^lyfia 


Sigma 


T 


T 


t 


Tav 


Tau 


T 


V 


u 


'T ^pilov 


Upsilon 


^z*. 


^ 


ph 


m 


Phi 


X 


X 


ch 


Xi 


Chi 


^ 


a/, 


ps 


^r 


Psi 


^ 


ca 


o long 


1^ fieya 


Omega. 



16 SOUND OF THE LETTKRS. [§§ 2, 3. 

Remark 1. Sigma a takes at the end of a word the form j, e. g. 
(TEidfiog. This small g may also be used in the middle of compound words, 
if the first part of the com[)Ound consists of a word ending with Sigma, 
e. g. 7TQog(piQ(o or ngoacpiQO}, dvgyivi'jg or dvaysvrig. 

Rem. 2. When a and x come together, both letters may be expressed by 
one character, g, Sti or Stigma. 

§2. Sound of the Letters. (2.) 

The sound of the letters is indicated by the Roman characters 
opposite. The following things only need be noted : 

y before the Palatals* (§ 5.) y, x, y, |, where it is used instead 

of the nasal v (§19, 3.), is sounded as ng- in angel^ ayye- 

logj Lat. angelus, 'Ayylar^gj Anchises, ovy-AOTirj, syncope, 

laQvy^, larynx. 
t is sounded like ds or a soft z. 
-0- is the English th. 
6y never form one sound, lilvc the German sch^ but are always 

pronounced separately, IDte the Latin, e. g. Alcyvlog = 

AiS"chylos ; so in Lat. Aeschylus = Aes-chylus. 
7t is sounded lil^e ti, wdthout a hissing sound, as FaXatla ; it 

is never sounded like the Lat. ti before a vowel, e. g. 

Galatia = Galashia. 

§3. Articulation of the Sounds, (3.) 

1. The sounds of language are articulate or organic, i. e. such 
as preserve a definite form by means of the organs of speech. 
Hence by the articulation, or organization of sounds, is to be 
understood the forming of the voice by the organs of speech, so 
as to express sounds of a determinate kind. The organs of 
speech, in addition to the cavity of the mouth, are the throat, the 
tongue and the lips. 

2. The sounds which are emitted almost without any action 
of the throat, tongue and lips, and which proceed in the freest 
manner from the breast, are called Vowels ; the rest are Con- 
sonants. 

* Gvtturds in German, as tlie Germans pronoimce these letters in the 
throat. — Tr. 



§ 4.] VOWELS. 17 

§4. Vowels. (4.) 

1. The principal vowels are, «, a, v, which may be short or long. 
The subordinate vowels are, « and o, which are always short, 

?/ and CD, which are always long. 
The € is intermediate between « and a, the o between « and v ; 
ri and w are produced by lengthening £ and o. The short vow- 
els are indicated by w, the long by -, e. g. «, a. The marks, 
12, show that the vowel may be either short or long, e. g. «. 

2. When two vowels are so combined with each other, that 
they form but one sound, namely, a mixed sound, this sound 
is called a diphthong. 

3. The Greek diphthongs originate from the union of the 
vowels, «, £, 0, V, 7], CO, with the vowels i and Vj thus, 

a -\- t or V = txL, aVj pronounced ai, au as in laud, «l|, vavg 
s -|- t or f = Si, tv, " ei, eu, dsivog, STiXsvaoi 

o -[- L or V = 01, ov, " 01, ou as in our, xoivog, ovQavog 

V -|~ * = VI, " ui, nearly like uy, fivla 

ri ■\- V = '^v, " ou as in you, rjv^ov 

0) -j- V = (ov, " OM, like oum sound, or Germ, dit, tovtog, 

Ionic only. 

Here belong the three improper diphthongs, a, ri, co,— i. e. d -{- 
ij rj -\- I, (o -{- I, — e. g. aioxQfi, >J«(0«j t^, '2'^- 

Remark 1. The pronunciation above given is that proposed by Erasmus 
in the 16th century. That defended by Reuchlin in the same century, 
and which accords with the modem Greek pronunciation, soimds rj, v, siy 
01, VI like e, «t like e in met ; av, tv, tjv, ojv, ai'e intermediate between af and 
av, ef and et', if and w, of and ov. It caimot be determined with certainty 
how the ancient Greeks pronounced these diphthongs; yet the Erasmian 
pronunciation seems to be nearer the truth than the Reuchlinian.* The 

* For the benefit of those who may wish to compai-e the two modes, the 
following explanation of the Reuchlinian is exti'acted from the Greek Gram- 
mar of Sophocles : " a and a are pronounced like a in father ; after the 
sound I[i,r], si, oi, v, vl) it is pronounced like a in peculiarity, ai like b. av, 
sv, T]v, (i)v, before a vowel, a liquid, or a middle mute (/S / 5) are pro- 
nounced like av, ev, eev, ov, respectively ; m all other cases, like af, ef, eef 
off. /5 like v. y before the sounds E and I is pronoimced nearly like y in 
yes, York ; in all other cases it is guttiural, like the German g in Tag. yy 
and yx like ng in strongest, y^ like nx. yx like ng-h, nearly. 8 like th in 
that. € like e m fellow, nearly, u like l. sv, see av. ^ like z. rj and j] like t. 
rjv, see av. ■& like th in thin, i like i in machine, v. like k. X like Z; before 
the sound /, like II m William. ^ like m. (in like mh, as t^nQoad^sv pro- 



18 CONSONANTS. [§ 5. 

following oxamples will show how tho Romans soundod these dii)hthongs : 
ai is expressed by the tli[)litliong ae, h by I aiid e", v by ?/, ol hy oe, ov by m, 
e.g. 

fPaldQog, Phacdriis, Jj^uQog, Eurus, OQuxeg, Thraces, 

JTAaDxo?, Glaucus, BoKoxla, Boeotia, Oo^acrn, Thressa, 

iVctJlo?, Niliis, Mowa, Musa, tguyajdog^trdg^^UB^f^J 

AvxsloVf Lyceum, EiXsi&VLa, Ilithyia, 

In words adopted later, the Romans expressed w like 6, as o)di], ode. The 
diphthongs a, tj, o), do not differ in pronunciation from the simple vowels a, rj, 
0), yet the ancient Greeks probably gave the t a slight sound after the other 
vowel. 

Rem. 2. Where uncial, i. e. capital, letters are used, the Iota subscript of 
«, T], 0), is placed in a line with the vowels, e. g. TJII KAASII = lot x«A&J, 
Tfo "AlSi], but fidrj. 

Rem. 3. Ov is numbered among the diphthongs on account of the com- 
bination of two vowels. 

Rem. 4. When two vowels, which, according to t?ie rule, form a diph- 
thong, should be pronounced separately, it is indicated by two points, called 
diaeresis, placed over the second vowel, l, v, e. g. aldoi, for aldol, o'ig, 
(ivnvog. If the acute accent is on the l or _y, it is placed between the 
points ; if the circumflex, over, as oii'drjg, tcXs'idi, ngavg. 

§5. Consonants . (s.) 

1. The consonants are divided, first, according to the differ- 
ent organs of speech, by which they are formed, into : 

Palatals, y '^ x 
Linguals, 8 r d- v X q a 
Labials, ^ tz op ^i. 

nomiced embrosthen. ^xp (ftTitr) like mhs. v like n; before the sound I, like 
n in oNion. The words tov, ti)v, iv, ai'v, before a word beginnmg -with x 
or I, are pronomiced like to/, t/)/, iy, uvy before x or | (see yx, /|), e. g. 
Tov xaiQov, iv Ivloxy, pronounced loyxaigov, iy^vX6;(ca ; before n or ip they 
are pronoimced tou, t7]{i, f;U, (ri/^u, e. g. tov tiovijqov, avv ipv/f], pronounced 
To^novr^Qov, (rvf^ipv/ri. vx like nd, as svTifiog pronoimced endimos. | Uke x 
or ks. like o mpoiier. oi like l. ov like oo m moon, tt, q, like p, r. a like 
s in soft ; before ^, y, d, pi, g, it is sounded like ^, e. g. xoupLog, o-iSiaai, SpivQ- 
vt], pronounced xo^uog, ^^iffcti, ZpLvgvri ; so also at the end of a word, xoig 
^acnlug xi]g yijg, pronounced xov^^atnlug xrf^yi]g. x like t in tell, v like v. 
VL like i. qp like^/i or/, x li^^ the German ch or Spanish J. ^) Yike ps. w 
and o) like o. mv, see uv. The rowg?i breathing is silent in modern Greek. 
So far as quantity is concerned, all the short vowels are equivalent to the 
long ones. The wTitten accent guides the stress of the voice. The accent 
of the enclitic, however, is disregarded in pronunciation. But when the 
attracting word has the accent on the antepenult, its last syllable takes the 
secondarj^ accent ; e. g. dn^ov fxai, pronoimced dsl^ovfioi, but XiXexxal pioL has 
the primaiy accent on the first syllable P.e, and the secondaiy on xioft." — Tr. 



§5. 



CONSONANTS. 



19 



Remark 1. The consonants, which are produced by the same organ of 
speech, are called Jwmonymous consonants, i. e. of the same class. 

2. Consonants are divided again, according to the greater or 
the less influence of the organs of speech in their formation, in- 
to the tln-ee following classes, which are called, 

(a) The Breathings or Aspirates, which make, in some de- 
gTee, a transition from the vowels to the consonants. The 
Greek language has three, namely, the lingual breathing 
(T, the Spiritus Asper ', con-esponding to our h, § 6, and 
the labial breathing, Digamma F, on which see the re- 
marks upon the Dialects. 

(b) The Liquids, X (/, v q, which are so called, because they 
easily coalesce with the other consonants and form one 
somid. 

Rem. 2. The Breathings and Liquids ai'e, also, included under the com- 
mon name of semivowels. 

(c) The Mutes, i. e. the consonants which are formed by the 
strongest agency of the organs of speech, namely, § y d 'd- 
'A n r q) X' 

8. The Mutes are divided, 

(a) According to the organ of speech, into three Palatals, three 
Linguals and tliree Labials ; 

(b) According to their names, into three Kappa-mutes, tliree 
Tau-mutes and three Pi-mutes ; 

(c) According to the stress of articulation, into three smooth 
Mutes, three medial Mutes and three rough Mutes. 





SMOOTH. 


MEDIAL. 


ROUGH. 




Palatals 


X 


7 


X 


Kappa-mutes 


Linguals 


r 


8 


d- 


Tau-mutes 


Labials 


71 


^ 


(f 


Pi-mutes 



Rem. 3. The consonants, which stand at the same grade of articulation, 
are said to be of the same order. 

4. From the coalescence of the Mutes with the Breathing (?, 
three double consonants originate, — 



20 BREATHINGS. [§§ 6, 7. 

}p from 710" jSa qxT, as tv^o) (Tra), ;|fo>lt;«// (/Sa), xarfiiiy/ ((jpa), 

I from xtr ya x^> as xopoj (xcr), ic'^w (^o-), ovvj [nfc), 

^ is not, like xp and ^, to be regarded as the sound of two compound 
consonants, but as a soft hissing sound, to be pronounced like a soft 
2. Only in the adverbs in ^, is ^ to be considered as composed 
of o-J, e. ^.^A&riva^z instead of ^A&rivagde, also, ^v^iv, dose, for /5t(7- 
di]v, from ^vvi(o^ to stop, Perf. jSi^vafiuL. It may be regarded, per- 
haps, as a transposition of sounds, as when the JEoVic and Doric dia- 
lects use, in the middle of a word, ad instead of g, e. g. f^sXladsrat 
for nsXl^srai. 

§6. Spiritus Lenis and Spiritus Asper. (C) 

1. Every vowel is uttered with a Breathing (Spiritus). This 
is either a smooth, or a rough Breathing. The former, Spiritus 
Lenis, is indicated by the mark ' ; the latter, Spiritas Asper, by 
the mark '. Either mark may accompany the initial vowel of a 
word, as 'Amllcov, Apollo, lorooia, historia. The rough Breath- 
ing answers to our h. The smooth Breathing is connected ^\"ith 
every vowel which has not the rough Breathing. 

Resiark. In diphthongs, tlie maik for the Breathing — as it belongs to 
both vowels which ai*e united in one soimd — is placed over the second 
vowel, e. g. Otoe, svd-vg, avxUa. Still, in the improper diphthongs, «, jj, 
o), tlie mark for the Breathing in the uncial letters, is placed over the first 
vowel, as these three diphthongs are regarded, to a certain extent, as sim- 
ple vowels, e. ^.^Aidriq, adr^g', 'Hi, 'SIl, tj, w, 

2. The liquid q has the rough Breathing, and hence retains 
at the beginning of words the mark of the Breathing ', e. g. qu3- 
^og. In the middle and end of a word, however, this mark is 
omitted, e. g. ).vQa, x^iq. When the letter q is repeated, the first 
is pronounced with the smooth Breathing, the last, with the 
rough, e. g. TLvoQog, Pyrrhus. 



CHANGES OF LETTERS. 

§ 7. Gener al Remark. 
Both the vowels and consonants are subject to a variety of 
changes. These changes occur in part from the tendency of the 
language to euphony ; they have in part a grammatical signifi- 



§§ 8, 9.] HIATUS. CONTRACTION OF VOWELS. 21 

cance ; and, finally, they result from the difference of dialects. 
The last will be considered in treating of the Dialects. 



I, Changes of the Vowels. 

§ 8. Hi atus. (16.) 

The concurrence of two vowels in two successive syllables or 
words, occasions a hardness in the pronunciation, which is call- 
ed Hiatus. Various methods have been sought in order to 
prevent this Hiatus, namely, Contraction, Crasis, Synizesis and 
Elision. The poets, particularly the Attic, were decidedly 
averse to the Hiatus of two vowels in two successive words ; 
among the prose-writers, the orators sought most carefully to 
avoid it. 

Remark. In the Iambuses of the ti-agic poets, the Hiatus is allowed in 
the interrogative rl ; quid, what ? e. g. xl ovv ; t/ sinEg ; among the comic 
poets, its use is mostly confined to t/, oti, tisqI, w, e. g. otv ig, ott ov/l, tisqI 
v^ubjv, also in ovds {firjds) slg (IV), ne unus quidem, to distinguish it from ov- 
dsig, nidlus. In addition to its use in the Iambic measure, the Hiatus is 
found frequently even in the Tragedians, who endeavored to avoid it when 
possible ; still it is mostly limited to special cases, e. g. to interjections and 
imperatives, e. g. it is found in w, val, «Va, up! V&t, as I'd-i, l&i fiov naLOJV, 
Soph. Ph. 832 ; aX^ avu, el hSgavoiv, Aj. 194. On the Hiatus in the Epic 
dialect, see the observations on the Dialects, § 200. 



§9. A. Contraction of Vowels. (9.) 

Contraction is the union of two successive vowels in the 
same word, into one long sound. These contracted sounds are 
either such as arise from the natural coalescence of two suc- 
cessive vowels, in accordance with the laws of euphony, or such 
as have also undergone grammatical changes. The importance 
of the grammatical ending, prevents the usual contractions, es- 
pecially if the form of the word would thereby become doubtful. 
The first species of contractions is called euphonic, the latter, 
grammatical. In the Common Language, the following con- 
ti'actions occur ; 



23 EUPHONIC CONTRACTION OF VOWELS. [§ 9. 



i c C o 11 1 r;i c lions. 

atXaa = aiXu 

(flht = q)IXH (Conip. No. 11.) 

noQTii = nugii 

vooq = vovg 

rifias = t///m 

yriQu'l = /')(J« 

TlfldofiEl' = TlfXOifjeV 

ii^atig = ii/jug 
Tiiinr^g = rifjag 

TlfXaOl/Al = T/|UW|Ut 
TlfXaOV = TfjUW 

TH/ftt = Til/f} (Comp. No. n.) 

Til'/H = T£t;^£i 

cpdiofxav = cpdovfisv 

q)iXso} = cpdbj, odTstij = oatoj 

TVTixsaL = Tvnij] 

cpdisig = (jpiAst? 

cpdijig = q)d]]g 

cpdsoig = cpdotg 

cpdsov ==. cfdov 

vlriiGGa = v?S}a(Ta 

OQificraa = Ogfjacra 

ji.^i]Ei.g = Tf////? 

7io()Tta5 = ncQTlg 

nOQTUg = TTO^Ti? 

ftt^oa = aidbj (Comp. No. 11.) 
fiia&os = (xla&ov 

fXl(T&6r]TS = flL(T&(>)TS 

aldo'l == aidol 

fxia&6(0 = |M(o-«^cu, 7iX6(a = nXb) 

anloai = anXal 

fiia&oEL = fzKT&oH (Comp. Rem. I.) 

ixia&ori = ^La&di 

fil(J&6oifJ.l = ULdd^olbfit 
(JlKJ&OOVai = fiL(T&0V(7L 

i/&vag = i/d^vg 

Ix&vsg = Ix&vg 

dsixvvrjTat, = dsiyvvjai (rarely) 

ijQcoa = i]Q(o (only in Ace. of some Sub. 

XuifjTog = Awcrioj, [of 3d Dec. 





I. Eupl 


o r 


(a) a 4- « 


= M 


as 


f 4- t 


= £t 


it 


^ + t 


= i 


u 


0+0 


= ov 


u 


(b) « 4- a ) 


= „- 




« + t 


= *? 


u 


« + > 


= CO 


u 


« + w ) 




u 


« + £t i 


== « 


u 


a +v ) 




u 


a -\- OL 


= w 


(( 


a -\- ov 


= D) 


(( 


(c) e + a 


== ^ 


u 


s + « 


= a 


(( 


s + i 


= SL 


ii 


S + 


= OV 


u 


£ + « (w) 


= ft) (o>) 


u 


£ + «t 


= V 


u 


6 4- SL 


= ft 


il 


s +rj 


= ?? 


ii 


S + 01 


= 01 


ii 


s -\- ov 


= ov 


ii 


(d)V + I 


= V 


ii 


n +. 


= V 


ii 


7J + £i 


= V 


ii 


(e) ^ + « ) 


. 


ii 


t + e / 




ii 


(f ) + « 


= ft} 


ii 


+ 8 


= ov 


ii 


-^r if\ 


= ft) 


ii 


4- * 


= ot 


ii 


+ CO (w) 


= ^ (^^') 


ii 


4- Ofi 


== at 


ii 


+ £t ) 




ii 


-hrj [ 


= OL 


ii 


+ ot j 




ii 


4- oi; 


= ou 


(; 


(g) ^ + « ) 




ii 


1/4-8 V 


-L 


u 


^ 4-7? j 




il 


(h) 0) + a 


= ft) 


(1 


w + t 


= ft> 


ii 



^ lO.I nRA:\IMATICAL CONTRACTION. CRASIS. 23 



n. Grammatical Contractions. 

(a) 8 -f- ^ = ^5 particularly in the third Dec, e. g. jQiT^ges = Tgu'iQri, 

ysvsE = ysvt]. 

(b) € + a = a in the second Dec, e. g. o(nia = o(rTtt,/^wfa =xQvau, 

and elsewhere, if a vowel precedes, e. g. IleQixU-sa = 
TIsgLxXm, aXs-sa == ;{As«, v/i-sa = tf/m ; in the Ace 
PI. Fern, of Adjectives in sog, sot, sov, e. g. %Qvai-ag == 
XQvaag ; finally in the Fern, of Adjectives in sog, ecc, 
£ov, Avhen these endmgs are preceded by a vowel or 
a Q, e. g. iQE-sog, E-ia, s-eov = igsovg, i qeu , igEovv, 
agyvQEog, sa, eov == ovg, a, ovv. 
s + « = «t m Accusatives PI. in sag of third Dec, e. g. aacpi-ag = 
(TDKfElg, so TToAftc, TTVj/Eig, i/x^hig. 

(c) 4" « = a in Adjectives in oo?, orj, 6ov, e. g. wTrXo-a = uttIoc. 
o -{• t} =^ 7] in Adjectives in oog, or], 6ov, e. g. «7rAo-7; = a:/!^?/. 
o + a == ov in Accusatives PL of ^ovg, also of fiEiCovg. 

Remark 1. The contraction of oei into ov is found only in the Inf. Act. 
of verbs in ow, and is accounted for from the fact that the Inf originally 
ended in ev, not in elv — consequently not fxiaS^otiv = fiiad^ovv, but fxia^oEV 
= (XLcrd^ovy — and in adjectives in osig, e. g." OjioEig =" Onovg, in which the 
root ends in oevt, and consequently the l does not belong to the root. On 
the accentuation of contract forms, see § 30. 

Rem 2. The Attic poets sometimes neglect the contractions on account of 
the measure, e. g. yialiw Aesch. Ag. 147. rgofiiojv Prom. 542. vEiv.Eog Sept. 
936. EJiEO Soph. OC. 182. evqeI Trach. 114. 



§ 10. B. Cr a sis. (i3.) 

1. Crasis, y.Qaaig, is the coalescence of two vowels, in two 
successive Avords, so as to form one long sound ; one vowel ends 
the first word, the other begins the next word, e. g. ro ovofj,a = 
tovvofia, TO ETtog = tovTzog. 

Remark 1. The mark of the Crasis is that of the Spu'itus Lenis, and is 
named Coronis. It is placed over the vowel or diphthong formed by the 
Crasis, but is omitted when the word begins with such a vowel or diph- 
thong, because it would then coincide with the Spuitus Lenis, e. g. t« aya&a 
= Totya&a ; a av = otv ', w avd-gcxms = ojv&qm-ite. On the accentuation, see 
§ 31, n. ; on the change of the smooth Mute into tlie rough Mute before 
the Spiritus Asper, as to vdwg = '&oi'8o}g, see § 17, Rem. 3. 

2. The Crasis is found only in such words as are closely 
connected, and the first of which is unimportant; hence it most 
frequently occurs, (a) in the article, e. g. o dri^Q = dvtJQ, zov dvdgog 
= zdvdQog ; — (b) frequently in y>ai and the interjection w, e. g. xat 



24 MOST COMMON INSTANCES OF CRASIS. [§ 11. 

aQBtri = naQETTi, w liv&QCOTie = oov&Q(one, w ayad-t = (oya&ty o) ava^ = 
(ova^ ; — (c) somewhat often in fy^ ^^^i^^ ®^^" '^^^^^ o7/iat, e. g. 
iycodcif iyojfiui -^ — (d) less often with the neuter of the relative 

and a, with to/, [xtvzoi, ovroi, particularly in connection with 
av, UQU, e. g. rui', Tana, fievrav, ovraQa, rarely with tiqo, e. g. tiqovq- 
yov for TT^o 6()j'ov, especially in composition, as nQovdcaxa. 

3. Hence the second word, being the most important, has 
properly a greater influence on the form of the Crasis, than the 
first ; hence, also, it is evident, that the Iota subscript is supplied 
only when the i belongs to the last of the two vowels, e. g. xae 
lira = nara, iyco oida = iyq>8a ; on the contrary, xae meircc = aa- 
Tteita, at dyad-ai = dyad-ai, T(p o/Xo) = rwy^.oo. 

4. When the Crasis occurs with the article, and an a follows, 
the vowels of the article— ^ even ov and co — are combined with 
the following a into a long a, and, if the article is aspirated, the 
Spiritus Asper is changed into the long a, e. g. o dvriQ = avriq, 

01 dvdQsg = dvdQsgf to akri&tg = TaXr^d-ag, to. dXXa = TokXa, tov dv- 
dgog = TdvdQ6g, tod dv8Qi = Tdv8Qi'^ also, tov avTov = TavTov, toj 
avT(^ = TavTc^. 

Rem. 2. Also with the word trsQoq, the forms of the article ending in a, 
o, ov, (0, ft), Ob, at, among the Attic poets, combine and form a long a ; hence 
this Crasis includes such cases as the Doric axsgog instead of Eisgog, e. g. 

TO. sTsga = d-aiEQCt 6 sisgog = uTegog tov stbqov = S^cntgov 

Tw sisga = -d-uniga ol eisgoi = aTsgoL at EngoLi = OTsgott. 

5. Li the particle -^ai, the ai in the Crasis is absorbed by the 
following vowel, e. g. ^cu iy^eivog = ad'Aeivog, 'Aal av = xar, xai iv = 
Tidvj aai iyco = :idyc6, nai el == nsl, nal sig = astg, 'Aal t^Xd'ov = -at^X^oVj 
nal ov = xov, xat svdaifi(ov = asvSaifjicov. 



§11. Summary of the most common instances of 

Crasis . (i4.) 

(a) The following cases conform to the rules of contraction 
given in § 9 : 

a-{- ci = a; «-]-€ = «; a-{- o = a; o-\- o = ov] 
o-\-8 = ov; o-\- 1 = 01', ij-(-e = ij; tj)-f-a=Q). 

(b) The following instances belong to Crasis only : 



§12.] 








SYNIZESIS. ELISION. 25 


H 


hv 


= OV 


as: 


TO vdwQ = -^ovduQ (§ 17, Rem. 3.) 


H 


-ccv 


= av 


a 


TO OCITO = Tai'TO 


H 


h«t 


= « 


u 


TO ai'riov ==thitov 


H 


- ot 


= (t) 


(( 


oivoq == o)vo? 




-»; 


= V 


(( 


TO i]^ixBQ0v = ^tifiiisQOv (§ 17, Rem. 3.) 




-8 


= ft) 


(( 


TO) «|Uftl:=TWUc5 




-0 


= ft) 


(( 


Tw o(p&aXfi(x) = Twg)^ai/iO) 


o. H 


- a 


= « 


a 


[ASVTOi av = ixsvrav 


Ofc - 


- € 


= ou 


u 


flOL sdoHEL = flOvd6}(8L 


ov - 


- £ 


= ov 


a 


710V SCTTIV = nOVOTlV 


ov - 


- 


= ov 


n 


Tov ovofiaiog = iovv6(iaroq 


ov - 


-V 


= ov 


u 


xov v8ttxoq = i9^ol'5«To? (§ 17, Rem. 3.) 


V - 


-V 


""1 


u 


■ifi riiisQa = ■&i]^iQa (§ 17, Rem. 3.) 


(0 - 


- 01 


= ft) 


u 


iyb) old a = iywda 


ov _ 


-V 


= •>; 


ii 


tov ^fxeiigov = d^rt^Exiqov (§ 17, Rem. 3.) 


ov - 


- ov 


= ov 


ii 


Tov o{i^a)'oi) == Toi'^avoi/ 


at - 


- EL 


= cc 


a 


nal aha = xaxa. 



(c) Here belong the examples which are particularly given 
under § 10, 4 and 5. 



§ 12. C. Stjnizesis . (iv.) 

1. Synizesis is the contraction of two vowels into one sound 
— ^mostly into a mixed sound — which is not written out, but 
contracted only in the pronunciation ; e. g. when fjirj ov is pro- 
nounced as a monosyllable. 

2. In the Attic poets, the Synizesis is confined almost wholly 
to, (a) 87181, ^, ?/, with ov or ovdeig following, e. g. iTzal ov, ?/ ov 
deig, dissyllable ; also, jW^ ov, monosyllable, firj allot, iyoj ov, dis- 
syllable ; (b) single words and forms, e. g. r^^oi = d-oi, mono- 
syllable, ic6oay>a = coqaxa, trissyllable, dveopyfisvog = avmyiiivog, four 
syllables, particularly in the lomc- Attic Genitive «co?, as Qijcmg, 
dissyllable. 

§13. D. Elision. (is.) 

1. Elision is the omission of a vowel before another short or 
long vowel. The following vowel remains unchanged. 

Reiviark 1. The mark of Elision is that of the Spiritus Lenis, and is 
called apostrophe, as toi;t Xgilv, yivoit av. 

2. The Elision occurs generally in a succession of separate 
words; often also in compound words, where, however, the 
apostrophe is omitted. 



26 USE OF ELISION IN THE POETS. [§ 14. 

Rem. 2. In Elision, the vowel is omitted ; but in Crasis, the sound is 
prolonged, e. g. ra uXln = t«AAm, Crasjs, «AA liye^ Elision. This distinc- 
tion, however, does not hold, when the second word begins with a long 
vowel or diphthong, e. g. to aviu = xuvzo. 

3. In prose writers, the Elision is confined mainly to the fol- 
lowing cases, where it often occurs : 

(a) In the prepositions, which end in a vowel, with the exception ofntgl 
and 71(j6, but rarely in tpsxa, e. g. di oixov, in ouov^ but nfql oixov, tcqo o\- 
xov. The same holds in composition, e. g. avsX&elv, but nEQiogav ; 

(b) In conjunctions and adverbs, «AA«', «^«, utga, uua, tiia, snura, fiu)M, 
fju)u(Tia, and in many other adverbs ending in a before uv ; also in the fol- 
lowing adverbs and conjunctions, ha, yi, is, da (with the compounds, oldij 
(/•rjdi), wgxE, ore (not ort), noxi (with the compounds, as ovjiots), tots, lit, oi- 
X8TI, fxtjy.sTL', e. g. wAA' aviog, uq ovv, fiaXiaT av; 

(c) In forms of pronouns in a, o, s, as TaiTa, Toiavia, navTa, ixkXa, xeVa; 
TioTfQa more rare ; tovio, avio, ifxi, au (never in to t«), e. g. tki/t atiw, 
notvT a/a&a,7iav&' oaa; 

(d) In q}T}fil, oida, oia&oc, and especially in verbal forms in //^, (tl, i, a, s, 
0, e. g. q)^fl i/O), old" avSga, iXiysx txv, iivmovT av, ysvon av ; of the 
forms which can admit the v icpdxvatixov, § 15, in prose eVi^ only often 
suffers elision ; 

(e) In certain familiar forms of speech, as vi] Jt scprj. 

Rem. 3. A vowel, followed by a punctuation-mark, cannot be elided. 
Hence, in words closely connected, as W; z/t' ecprj, the comma is omitted, 
for in such cases, without doubt, the ancients pronounced the words in 
quick succession. 

§14. Use of Elision in the Poets. (i9.) 

1. The use of the Elision in the poetic language is very frequent, and is 
much more extended than in prose ; yet the following points are to be 
noted : A word ending in v is never elided ; neither is the article to nor 
tieqI — at least among the Attic poets- — nor oTt, t/, and substantive adverbs 
of place ending in &l {o&l excepted), and very rai'ely the Optative ending sis. 

2. The Elision of the i in the Dat. of the third Dec, particularly in the 
Sing, is, in the Attic poets, very rai'e, and is even doubted by many. 

3. The verbal endings, fxai, xai, (j&ai, which ai'e short in respect to the 
accent, are rarely elided in the Attic poets ; the Datives ^ol and gov never 
suffer elision. 

4. In the verbal forms which may take the v iqiEXxvaxncov, the poets use 
the Elision or the v according to the necessities of the verse. 



§ 15.] N ^EcpeXxvartxov. 27 

5. Sometimes in Attic prose, a weak and grammatically unimpoitant 
syllable is excluded by a preceding long vowel ; this is specially the case 
with tlie augment f, e. g. Tnxsl'noQsvaav, Soph. OC. 1602, insl 'ddxQvaay 
Phil. 360. This omission of the vowel is called aphaeresis, acpttigscng. StUl, 
such cases may be more properly regarded as Crasis or Synizesis. 

§15. A'^ iopsXxvaT I xor. — OvT(o{g). — '£"1 and i/.. — Ov{'a). 

(21. 22.) 

1. Another means of avoiding the concurrence of two vowels 
in two successive words is by appending a r, called a r iq)el- 
xvczixov, to certain final syllables, viz. 

(cc) to the Dat. PL in gi, to the two adverbs, Tzagvai, in the last 
7/ear, navxaTiaai, universally^ and. aU adverbs of place in 
ci, as TiaGiv els^a • ij UXataiaaiv rjyefxovia ; 

{§) to the third Pers. Sing, and PL in cr/, as rvTtrovoiv f^uf, rldri- 
6iv Iv rrj TQaTZE^ri ; so also in fVrt ; 

(7) to the thu'd Pers. Sing, in e, e. g. hvTzrev ifxe-, 

(d) to the numeral eixoai, although even before vowels the v 
is often omitted, e. g. eixoaiv avdQeg and eixoot avdQeg ; 

(e) to the Demonstrative / but rarely, and then always after 
c, e. g. ovtOGiv, iy.eivoaip, zovtovgiv, ovtcogiv ; 

(C) to the Epic particles, vv and x£, and to the Epic suffix qpt, 
hence voacpi. 

Remark. The poets place the v icpsXy.. before a consonant so as to make 
a short syllable long by position. In the Attic prose, it stands regularly at 
the end of complete sections ; it is, also, sometimes found before punctua- 
tion-marks, and sometimes elsewhere for the sake of greater emphasis. 

2. The adverb ovrcog, so, always retains its full form before a 
vowel, but drops its final consonant g before another consonant, 
e. g. ovrcog iTtoirioEv, but ovrto ttoim ; still ovzcog may stand also be- 
fore consonants, when it is to be pronounced emphatically, e. g. 
ovtcog ye, Xen. C. 3. 6, 9. 

3. In lilie manner the Prep, i^, ex, retains its full form before 
vowels and at the end of a sentence, but before consonants takes 
the form iy>, e. g. i^ dq^vrig, elgfii^rig f |, but i/. rrjg dqri'vr^g ; so also in 
composition, e. g. iieXavveiv, but iatEleiv. 

4. The same holds, finally, of the negative ovy., not, e. g. 
ovy, aiaxQog, and before a Spu'itus asper ov'/, e. g. ov^ ifivg, but ov 



28 STRENGTHENING AND WEAKENING OF VOWELS. [§ 16. 

x«Xo?; SO also, by analogy, of ovat'n: ^t^xtri (instead of (jitj tn). 
But when ov stands at the end of a discourse, or of a sentence, 
and is to be pronounced with emphasis, then ov may be marked 
with the acute accent even before a vowel ; in which case there 
must be an actual break in the discourse, as occurs when ov 
stands at the end of an answer expressed interrogatively, with- 
out connection with what follows, as Tlojg yuQ ov ; ^q ovv xtX. 
Xen. C. 4. 2, 37 ; or when it is found in the answer only, and 
corresponds to our No ; it is found especially in antithetical sen- 
l^ ^ S u tences, e. g. Tayad-d, tads ^a^Aa o v : 'Eav dt -atL Xen. C. 1. 2, 42 ; 
I , '' Aid^ovg Eig tov TZotafiov soqitttovv, i^iy.vovvro ds ov, ovte t^lanrov ov- 

dsva. An. 4. 8, 3. If, on the contrary, the following sentence is 
closely connected with the preceding, then it is written ovx, e. g. 
0i5x,an«xr;..Xen.C.2.6,11.13.4.6,2; ovx^r^vyaL HeU. 1.7,19. 



ni 



i-i- 



§ 16. Strengthenings Weakenings Prolongation^ Shortening, 
Transposition and Variation of Voioels, — Influence of a 
Vowel or a Consonant 07i another Voivel. — Syncope. — 
Omission of a Voivel. — Euphonic Prothesis, 

The changes, which fuither take place in vowels, are, 

1. Strengthening of vowels, which consists lq changing a weaker vowel 
into a stronger. There are different degrees of strength in the vowels ; the 
weakest is s. The strengthening of a sound takes place, e. g. m words of 
the third Dec. in o?, Gen. -soq ; the simple stem of these words i».«l«nged 

/I iirto sq ; in the Nom., however, which prefers fliller forms, the weaker s 

is changed into the stronger o (in Latin into m), e. g. yhog, genus, Gen. 
ydveog, instead of ysvea-og, gener-is. In yovv and doQv, Gren. /ovax-og, do- 
Qux-og, a, the final vowel of the stem, is changed into the stronger v. 

2. The weakening of vowels, which is the opposite of the change just 
described, occiu's, e. g. in substantives of the third Dec. in Ig, t , vg, v ; m 
these, the sti'onger vowels of the stems l and v are changed into the weaker 
e, e. g. Tiohg, ttoAsoj? ; nij/vg, nrixBOig ; (jlvani, (TivcxTisog ; acriv, aaTeog. The 
same is true of adjectives in vg, v, e. g. yXvy.ig, yXvxv, Gen. -sog. 

3. Prolongation of vowels, by which a short vowel is changed into a long 
vowel, or a diphthong, viz. a into rj or «i, i into I or si ; v into v or sv; e 
into 7] or 8l; o into w or ov. This prolongation takes place either for the 
sake of euphony, or on grammatical principles, or fi*om both together ; in 
the poets often on account of the metre. The usage of protracting soimds 



§ 16.] TRANSPOSITION AND VARIATION OF VOWELS. 29 

is very widely extended in the Greek language. One instance only is here 
mentioned, namely, tlie strengtlieuing of the Present tense in Mute and 
Liquid verbs, e. g. xqivcj, TiXvvta, A/ji^w, cpaho), Xtijia, cpsvyo) instead of 
XQtvUyTiX'vvb), Xudo), qpaVw, AiTTw, qpt/w. — The reason of the prolongation is 
ver}^ often found in the omission of a v witli a Tau-mute, rarely of a mere v, 
or of a a after a Liquid, or in the omission of a final Sigma, e. g. odovg in- 
stead of odovrg, didovg instead of didovig, ^ovXsvojv instead of (jovXsvovTg ', 
fiiXag instead of ^i).avg\ e(rq)TjXa instead of tcrcpaXaa, ijyysda instead ofijy- 
ysXaa, scp&siga instead of f(jpi9^£^(ra ; Qijiag instead of ^^jzo^?, noi^i]v instead 
of TTOijUfV^, 8ui{^o)v instead of dal^ovg, aldcog instead of aldoag, alri&rjg instead 
of uX7j&iag. 

4. Shortening of vowels. See the remarks on the Dialects, § 207. 

5. Transposition of vowels ; this consists in the softening of a long vowel 
into a short ; and to compensate for it, the short vowel immediately following 
is lengthened. Thus in the Ionic and Attic dialects, s(o instead of ao, e. g. 
Ufw?, wv, instead of Udog, ov, Xeciog instead of Xuog, vsojg instead of vdog, Mevs- 
Xsbig mstead of MsveXuog ; fiuther, in the Attic dialect, ^aariXiwg, (iaaiXid 
instead of the Ionic (^aaiXijog, ?/«; so also, n6XE(ag,nri/scog, Attic, instead of 
noXiog, TiTj/vog ; s is weaker than l and v, see No. 2. 

6. Variation, i. e. the change of the radical vowel s into o and a, so as to 
form the tenses, § 140, and the derivatives, § 231, 6 ; w^hen the radical 
vowels e and t in the Present tense are prolonged into ei, o is substituted 
in the first case, oi in the last case ; e. g. loscpw, TST^oqpa, hqacfr^v ; Xslnoj, 
XiXoina', cpd^elgoi, Ecp&oga, i(p&aQr}V', q)Xsy(a, (pX6$', rgsya), rgo/og; rgicpco, 
rQoq)rj, jgocfsig, Tgaq)8Q6g. Comp. Germ, stehle, gestohlen, stahl, etc. 
The Tj is changed into co, e. g. ccgi^yca, agooyi]. 

Resiark 1. Whether the « is to be regarded as a variation, or rather as 
a euphonic change of s, introduced by a preceding or following Liquid, 
particulai'ly g and X, sometimes even jj, and v, may be doubted. Comp. 
iiganoi', iTg(xq)riv, taigdcprjv, i^gdxrjv, iddgtjv, icpd^dgrjv, i(7TdXi]v, siajxov, %•/.- 
larov with tipsyrjv, stsxov. 

7. Change of a vowel by the influence of another vowel, or of a conso- 
nant. Here belong two special cases. 

(a) The Attic writers change the Ionic r} into a after the vowels s and t 
and the diphthongs ending with t, sometimes even after other vow^els, 
and after the Liquid g, e. g. Idia, aocpla, ;^§ft«, ■fJi^sgcc, dgyvgd, inldva, 
inigdva ; 

(b) £, as a union-vowel, is changed into o before the terminations of the 
inflections beginnmg with ^ or v, of verbs in w, e. g. ^ovXevoj^sv, ^ov- 
Xsvovrat, iiSovXsvoixsv, i^ovXsvovTO. 

8. Syncope, avYxont], i. e. the omission of an e in the middle of a word 

5 



30 MUTES. [§ 17. 

between a Mute and a Liquid, or between two Liquids, or between nr ; 
the same, also, occurs in certain substantives of the third Dec, e. g. na- 
TQog instead of naiigog ; in tlie forming of the Present tense of certain 
verbs, e. g. ylyvo^iai instead of ytyirof^iai, nlnjo) instead of niniio), filfivu) 
instead of^/^ucVa); and in the formation of the tenses of some verbs, e. g. 
V/Qoi-irjv from i'/iiqw ; Syncope rarely occurs after a, e. g. ta/ov, ea7i6fir{V, 
saim instead of i'af/ov, iainoijriv, taETui. A striking example of Syncope 
is found in liX&ov instead ofrjkvx^ov, from ^EAETOSl. Comp. § 155. 

9. Apocope. See on the Dialects, § 207. 

10. One of the vowels «, f , o is prefixed to several words, for the sake of 
euphony. This is called euphonic prothesis, e. g. uanQoni] and o-tj^oti?;, 
u(TTaq)ig and cnaqlg, ix&tg and /&ig, iy.Hvog and y.uvog, i&iXb) and x^£- 
Aw, oxQVOEig and y.gvog, odvQofiUL and dvQOfxai,, oxeXXw and y.iXlo}, etc. 

Rem. 2. Cai*e must be taken to distinguish the « from these euphonic 
sounds, when it stands for ano, e. g. a-(xiyfLV, to avert, also fivvT], comp. 
munire, or. when used instead of avd, e. g. afxvGcrHv, to tear up, or instead 
of the « or « copulative with the meaning of a^n, fi-om wiiich also the so- 
called a intensive has been formed to strengthen the signification ; further, 
the £, if it is used instead of f| or sV, e. g. i/EiosLv, to w-ake up, f^ji'/fir, 
cructare, egsdELv, iVritare ; finally, the o with the meaning of ofiov, e. g. c^l/h]. 

II. Changes of the Consonants. 

§ 17. a. Mu tes. (23—27.) 

1. The changes of the consonants arise, in a gi'eat degree, 
from the tendency of the language to assimilate different sounds. 
This assimilation is either a mere resemblance in sounds, e. g. 
when lilEy-rai is changed into Islexiai, since the smooth Mute 
r and Likewise the medial 7 is changed into a smooth JNIute, 
e. g. into >J ; or it is a complete identity in sounds, e. g. when 
ovv-QiTzrco is changed into ovqqitttoj. — Sometimes, however, the 
language shuns even a sameness in sound, and seeks to remove 
it by changing similar sounds into dissimilar, e. g. Tra-cpilrfAa for 
g)s-q)ili]y.a, Za7iq)(a for 2^aq)q)(o. 

2. A Pi-mute, 71 ^ cp, or a Kappa-mute, y- y x^ before a Tau- 
mute, r d d; must be homogeneous to a Tau-mute, i. e. only a 
smooth Mute, 7t y., can stand before the smooth Mute r ; only a 
medial, ^ 7, before the medial d ; only an aspirate, (jp /, before 
the aspu'ate &[; consequently, nr and xr; /55 and yd ; <:p& and 
X^y e. g. 



M7. 



MUTES. 



31 



^ 


befor 


C T 


into n 


as: 


from tqI^o) 


jsTQi^-raL 


= XETQITITUI, 


<f> 


u 


T 


u 


TT 


a 


ii 


'/QUCpO) 


ys/Qacp-iat 


= yEyQamaL 


r 


(( 


T 


ii 


X 


ii 


ii 


Uyw 


XEksy-Tca 


= UlEXjat, 


X 


u 


T 


ii 


K 


a 


ii 


/5^£/W 


(SipQEX-TCtO 


= ^El^QEXTUL 


n 


u 


J 


ii 


/5 


ii 


ii 


XVTlUxi 


xvn-da 


= xv^ihx 


^ 


u 


(5 


ii 


/5 


ii 


ii 


/QC/CpW 


yQaq)-drjV 


= yQdiSdrjv 


X 


ii 


(5 


ii 


^^ 


a 


a 


nlimi 


nUy.-8riv 


= nXEySrjv 


X 


u 


d 


ii 


/ 


a 


a 


(3(jEyoj 


(iqiX-^riv 


= ^geydfjv 


n 


u 


& 


ii 


(P 


ii 


a 


7TSf,inb) 


E7lSjJ7l-d7]V 


= snEfA(pi>r]V 


p 


u 


s- 


ii 


<P 


a 


ii 


IQ I'Po) 


siQli3~&rjV 


= STQlcp&')]V 


X 


ii 


S- 


ii 


X 


a 


ii 


Tiliy.a 


EnUy-d^riv 


= inXEx&rjv 


Y 


u 


& 


ii 


X 


a 


a 


Xe/m 


iXiy-^riv 


= eXex<^i]v. 



Remark 1. The preposition eh does not undergo this change, e. g. i/.- 
dovvcti, EH&EXvai,, etc., not iydovvai, Ex&i~ivca. 

3. The smooth Mutes, ^ x r, are changed into the cognate as- 
pirates, cp X '^^ not only in inflection and derivation, but also in 
two separated words before a Spiritus Asper, since the smooth 
Mute receives the breathing, and the vowel loses it ; theme- 
dials, ^ y ^j however, are thus exchanged only in the inflection 
of the verb ; in other cases they remain unchanged ; hence : 

ccTi ov = occp ot', tnijfiEQog from int, rjfiiga = Ecp-tifiEgog 
eJTvqxxlvb) from in I, icpcxlvo) = icpvcpalvoi, riivn-u = rhvcfa 
OLx 6(Ti(x)g = oi'x ocr/o/c, dEy.rjjuEQog from dina, vfisQu = dsxv/usQog 
avt wf = ai'd' MP from nvrl, avTiXy.M == (xv&eXxm from apiL, I'Axw 
slloy-a = eIXoxoc, but Xsy hsQav not Xsx etequv 
TEXQi^-a. =z jiiQiqia, but T^i^5' umcag not zglq) oi;xco?. 

Rem. 2. The negative ova [ov] thus becomes ovx, e. g. ovx ridvg-, yet this 
principle does not apply to the aspirate g, e. g. ov QimM, In some com- 
o^ ^r pounds, the s mo o ]^ JBf^thing is retained in the Attic dialect, also, accord- 
ing to the Ionic usage, e. g. unrjXimrjg, the east wind, from (xno and rjXiog, 
XEvy.innog, one who has a white horse, from Xivy.og and Xrcnog, KQaTmnog, etc. 

Rem. 3. This change of the smooth Breathing before the rough takes 
place also in Crasis, § 10 and 11, e. g. ra ETs^a = dccTEoa, to i^diiov = 
S^olfidTiov, X(xi ETEQog = /of'rfoo?, xtxl '6(Ta, ogug, onotg = xit'^oc, X''^?^^?^ X^''^^^'=' 
— ^When two smooth Breathings precede, both must be changed into Aspi- 
rates, No. 2, e. g. Eq)ifijfxEQog instead of kjiTrjfAEQog fi*om stttu, rjfAE^ix, vvx^ 
oXriv instead of viyi olriv. 

Rem. 4. In some compounds, the aspirated liquid q changes the preceding 
smooth Breathing into the Aspirate, e. g. (fqoi^iov, formed by Crasis from 
nqoolixiov, from nqo and oiuoq, d^gdaaca fi'om Tugdaaco ; so cpgoiJdog from 
ngo and odog. 

4. On the contrary, before an Aspirate, the same Aspirate can- 
not stand, but the first, in that case, is changed into the corres- 



32 LIQUIDS. [§ 18. 

ponding smooth, e. g. ^ancfw, J?fix/o?, rird^ri, 'At&ig ; but not 
-Taqpgpco, Bci/xog, zid^&tj, 'AO^d-ig ; for the same reason, the first As- 
pirate disappears, where the q is doubled, e. g. UvoQog. 

5. A Tau-mute, r 8 d-, before another Tau-mute is changed 
into (T, but before a x, it disappears, e. g. 

t7isl&~&rjv from nd&bj becomes inslad^rjv 

7iSL&-Tiog " nsl&b) " nsttniog 

^]QELdSi]V " eQsidb) " i]Qtla&r]V 

nsneLd-'xa " tieI^oj " nenstxa. 

6. The r, which in the Attic dialect, usually passes into cr, is of- 
ten changed into 6 by the influence of a following i, e. g. nlovaiog 
instead of nXovtiog, from Tzlovzog, Afia-O-ovoiog instead of '^^^a- 
'&ovvr-wg, Mdrjaiog from MiXijrog^ Ay^EQovaiog instead of 'Axb- 
Qovt-iog, ovaia instead of 6vt-ia^ ysQovaia instead of yeQovr-ia^ 
Inavciog from iviavtog. Also in the case of other Tau-mutes, 
as well as in the case of the Palatals, i has sometimes this power 
of assimilation ; thus in the forms of the Comparative in catov 
and t,()3v, e. g. ^Qadvg, ^Qciaacov poet., na'fvg, Ttdaacov poet, fjisyagy 
fiei^mv instead of fiey-icov^ ta^vg, '&daocov instead of rax-icov. 

§ 18. b. Liquids . (34.) 

1. The Liquid v is sometimes changed into «. This takes 
place, e. g. in the Ace. Sing, third Dec. of substantives, whose 
stem ends with a consonant, since the Greek does not. Like the 
Latin, use the union-vowel, e. g. 'aoqoE, -AOQav.-a, la^Tidg, lafiTtdd-a. 
The same change, also, sometimes takes place in the third 
Pers. PL Perf. and Plup. Mid. and Pass, of mute and liquid 
verbs, which properly should end in vzai and vto like pure verbs, 
e. g. ^e^ovlev-vrai, i^e^ovXev-vTO, e. g. retQiqjdtai, izETQicfdzo, 7ie- 
TtXsxciTai, TEtdxccrai, eay.evdddrai, 'AexcoQiddrai, iqjd-aQdtai instead of 
rsTQi^vtai, iTstQi^vTo, etc., from tqi^-co, TtXey.-co, tda6-(o, axEvd^-co, ^co- 
Qi^-co, cpd-EiQ-co. See § 116, 15. 

2. A^ before a Liquid is changed into the same Liquid, e. g. 

crvv-Xoyl^o) becomes crvlXoyl^o) avv-nBTQia becomes avfifAsrgla 
iv-fiiv(o " B^nivio avv-Qi7iT(o " avq^lnxw. 

Remark. An apparent assimilation takes place in oXXvfxi, instead of 
oXvvfii. — 'Ev before q is not assimilated, e. g. ivqlinoa ; yet egQV&i.iog is more 
frequent than svgv&fiog ; on the contrary, evXaxxeixo stands instead of eXXax. 



§19. 



MUTES AND LIQUIDS. 



33 



3. M initial before a Liquid is changed into |3, e. g. 

fjllirsiv from fiiXt becomes §XIxthv 

f.iXw(Txoi " fioXiiv " /SAwffXfu 

figoiog " fiogog, mors " (^goxog. 



§ 19. c. Mn tes and Liquids .- 

(31.33.) 



Liquids and Mutes, 



1. A Pi-mute, tt ^ q, before fi is changed into |W, 





a Kapps 


L-mute, y.y I, 


u 


11 


a 


" 7, 




a Tau-mute, t 8 &, 


u 


11 


a 


" (y,e.g. 


(«) 


Pi-mute : 


Tixgi^-^ai 


from 


I jglijo) 


becomes 


; liTQlfijAUL 






XiXun-^au 


u 


Xhtioj 


li 


XiXu^^av 






yiyqacp-ixai 


u 


yqacfcxi 


a 


yiyqa^Hav 


(/5) 


Kappa-mute : 


: TiEJihy.-fiUL 


a 


nXiy.b} 


u 


nsJilryf^UL 






XiUy-^ai 


(( 


Xsyo) 


remains 


Xihynttv 






^i^qr/-lxaL 


u 


Pgi/o) 


becomes 


\ ^i^qty^ai 


(/) 


Tau-mute : 


7]vvr-nai 


a 


avt'Tbi 


(; 


riVVajUUi 






i'jQsid-fxcci 


a 


eoelda 


li 


riqHCTfxaL 






ninu^-liai 


a 


ndd^oi 


u 


nin^KT^ai 






y.Ey.6^ui5-fiai 


a 


xofiiQco 


u 


y.v/.ouL(i^aL, 



Remark 1. lu some words, the Kappa and Tau-mutes are not changed 
before y., e. g. uyfjn], noxuog, Xci/jxog, -xtv&f^ojv, etc. In some words, even % 
stands before /^, instead of the original x or /, e. g. \o)xy6g from tojxw, nXo^- 
fxog from nXiy.w, na/vr] from nay-rivai. The preposition ex, in composition, 
forms an exception, e. g. sy.uuv&avoj. 

2. The medial ^ before ^ is changed into [^, e. g. 

(Ts^-v6g fi-om (jEiSoyocL becomes aeyvog 
iqsiS-vog " tqs^og " igsfivug. 

3. A^ before a Pi-mute, tt § cp \p, is changed into fi, 
TV before a Kappa-mute, y. y x ^, is changed into '/, 
A^ before a Tau-mute, r d d;is not changed, e. g. 



iv-ntiqla becomes ifxnEiqla 
iv-^dXXco " ijAijaXXbi 

Ev-q:q(x)v " l^/tjp^cov 

tv-ipi/og " sfxifjv/og 

but avvjilvca, avvdioi, avvd^iw. 



(TVv-yaXio3 becomes avyy.aXiw 
(jvv-yiyvuxTy.ca " (Tiy/f/vwo'xw 
(Tvv-xqovog " Gvyyqovog 

avv-^iv} " avy^ioi ; 



Rem. 2. The enclitics form an exception, e. g. ovTif^, rovys. 

Rem. 3. Also at the end of a word, v before a Pi-mute, as well as before 
/I, was, without doubt, pronounced like ,u, and before a Kappa-mute, like 
y; and so it is found in ancient inscriptions, e. g. TOMIIATEPAKAI 
THMMHTEPA, T0rXPHMATI2M0N i. e. xov naxiqa y.al x^v ynxioa, xhv 



34 THE SIBILANT (T WITH MUTES AND LIQUIDS. [§ 20. 

XQrjfiaTiafiov. So also X and a are used instead of v before X and c, e. g. 
'EAAIIMNOI, 'ji2'yAM0£ I e. eV ^7;//»'oj, w -2:«>o). 

§20. d. The Labial Br eat h in g^ or Sibilant a, to it h 
Mu te s and Liquids . (32. 35.) 

1. A Pi-mulc, 71 ^ cp, before 6 is changed into op, 
A Kappa-mute, >« 7 /, before a is changed into J, 
A Tau-mute, r 8 -0-, disappears before (T, e. g. 



(a) Pi-mute: 


XelTiaio 


from Af/zro) 


becomes 


Xelipo) 




TQi^aoj 


a 


XQi^b) 


u 


Tgiifjto 




youcpaio 


u 


yQacpoj 


u 


/QUlpb) 


(/5) Kappa-mute 


nUxao) 


u 


nXey.bi 


a 


nXi^b) 




li'/GOi 


li 


Xi/b) 


u 


Xi^o) 




^^Qszao) 


a 


^M'f'^ 


(( 


/?0£|W 


(/) Tau-mute: 


ayvTaoj 


^i 


VLVVT03 


u 


wyuo-Q) 




(Qeldtib) 


li 


eQeido) 


(( 


SQslaw 




nsl&(TM 


ii 


nu&M 


u 


ndcroj 




ilTiidao} 


a 


iXjii'ioj 


i( 


iXjilab}. 



Remark 1. The Prep, sx before a is an exception, e. g. iy,aco'^(t). — In novg, 
Gen. TTod-og, and in the Perf. active Part, in coc, Gen. oT-og, after the Tau- 
mute disappeai-s, the precedmg vowel is lengthened. 

2. A^ disappears before 6 and ?; but when ^ is joined with a 

Tau-mute, both mutes disappear before a, but the short vowel 

is lengthened before a, namely, e into ei, into ov, u, i, v into « 

r, y, e. g. 

avv-^vyla becomes av^vyla daluov-cn becomes dttlf.iO(n 

Tvq)&svx-aL " Tvcfd^staL Xiovx-crt " ^fc'oi^ort 

aTlBvd-crca " (rns'iacti sXfiird-ai " il^iGL 

navT-di " 7r«(7t dsiy.vvvr-ai " ^t/xri'a"* 

tinpavT-ai " Tvipudi !isroq)(ovT-aL " Zn'OCpMai. 

Rem. 2. Exceptions: '^r, e. g. ivcrniloM, ev^nyvvfiL', naXiv, e.g. naXlv- 
CTHioq ; also some forms of inflection, and derivative forms in o-(/6 and o-t? 
from verbs in alvw, e. g. nicfavaai from cpnivco, ninavcng from nsnaU'w, and 
the substantives, ?'/ Elfitvg, earth-ivorm, 7j neloivc, ivagon-hasket, 1) Tl^vvg. — In 
composition, the v in avv is changed into u before cr, e. g. ffvaa-M^b), from 
ffir and (Tw^w ; but when a consonant folloM^s a, a disappears, e. g. aiv~ 
(jTr/ua becomes avaTTj/ua. — In xaqltdL, vi is di'opped ; on tlie conti-ary, ui 
T«A«c, fAsXag Gen. -avog, y.xeig, Eig Gen. evog. slg, and in the third Pers. 
PI. of the primaiy tenses, e. g. (iovXivovat instead of ^ovXevovai, the omis- 
sion of the simple v is compensated by lengthening the vowel. 

3. On the contrary, in the Aorist of Liquid verbs, a is omitted 
after the Liquid, but the omission is compensated, by lengthen- 
ing the stem-vowel, e. g. 



^21.] CHANGE OF CONSONANTS. 35 

ijyysX-aa becomes vyysiXa svffi-aa becomes eveifiu 

6(pap-aa " scprjva B(f)&£Q-aa " tcp&ELQU. 

The same takes place in the third Dec. with the final Sigma, 
when a V or q precedes c, e. g. Etacov instead of eixov-g, Tioifiriv in- 
stead of 7Zoifitv-g, QrjrojQ instead of QijtoQ-g, ai&riQ instead of aidt'Q-g. 
The Futm-e in co of Liquid verbs is formed by inserting « be- 
tween the Liquid and the ending aco, for the sake of softening 
the pronunciation, by di-opping o and contracting tea into (o, 
e. g. dyyeX-s-aco, dyyEloj. — T and o, are omitted in substantives 
and participles ending in ojv, Gen. ovr-og, but, as a compensa- 
tion, is lengthened into w, e. g. 

XiovT-g becomes Xewv ^ovlsvovz-g becomes ^ovXsvwv. 

Rem. 3. In i'vvvfxi — instead of i(T-.vv.ui, ves-tio — the a is assimilated to the 
following V, and in at^u/ — instead of ia-fxl — a is omitted, but s is lengthened 
into ft. 

§21. e. Change of Consonants lohich are sepa- 
rated from one another . (28. 29.) 

1. Sometimes a consonant has an influence on other conso- 
nants, although they do not immediately follow one another, but 
are separated by a vowel or even by two syllables. Thus, one 
^ changes another I into q, e. g. xecpalaQyia instead of xecpaXaXyia 
from dXyeiv, ylcoaaaqyia instead of yXioaoaXyia, aQyaXtog instead of 
dXyaXsog from dXyei)^ ; the suffix (alrj becomes coQr^, when a X pre- 
cedes, e. g. '&aX7zoQTJ.j^^ L>i-^- - -- 

2. When, in the reduplication of verbs, whose stem begins 
with an aspirate, this aspirate is to be repeated, then the first 
aspirate is changed into the corresponding smooth Mute ; thus, 

cps-cplXrjy.tt fi'om (piXm is changed into nifplXiY/.a 
ys-x^ya " yico " y.iyvy.a 

S^8-&vxa " -iSvco " Ts&vy.a 

■&i-&rj{XL stem OE " xi^ri^i. • ' 

The two verbs, -Qveiv, to sacrifice, and Tid^ivai, stem OE, to place, also 
follow this rule, in the passive forms which begin with ■& : 

ixv-d-Tjv, T:v-d^r,(TO}iai, eTS-d-rjv, Ts-d^r^ao^au instead of i&v-d^rjV, i&i-^r^v. 

For the same reason, the Greek avoids the reduplication of g, and instead 
of it writes £oy-, e. g. sQ^vrjy.a. 



36 METATHESIS OF THE LIQUIDS. [§§ 22, 23. 

3. In words whose stem begins with t and ends with an As- 
pirate, the aspiration is ti'ansferred to the preceding smooth r, 
when the Aspirate before the final syllable beginning with (7, r 
and ft, must, according to the laws of euphony, §§ 17, 2 ; 19, 1 ; 
20, 1, be changed into a smooth consonant; by this transposi- 
tion, r is changed into the Aspirate x>. Such a change is called 
the Metathesis of the aspiration. 

Thus, Toicp-o), isTQOCpa Perf., is changed into {-^QiTi-aoj) ■dQsipo}, ^Qi7i-ji]n, 

Taqp?;, TAfp-cj, jacp^jvai, second Aor. Pass., into -^uifjo), ^a7r-Tw, 
[li&an-txai) ri&ai.iuai, but tliird Pers. PI. TETucpmui, e. g. Her. 
6, 103, "vvith one of the better Codd. is to be read instead of t£- 

TQvcpog, TPT(P-o) into d-qvipw, ^qitt-toj, [js&gvTi-^uai) ti&QVfifiai] 
iqix-u> into {d^Qsn-aofjai) &Qs^ouai; — TQi/-6g into S^gl^, S^qi^iv, 
7tt/ig in the Comparative becomes d^uaauv. For the same reason, 
the Fumre I'|q), from i'/w, to have, is the proper form, because 
the Spii'itus Asper is considered as an Asi)Lrate. 

Remark 1. Tu'^a fi-om ifi'/w, and tqi^m from x^r/w, remain unchanged. 

Rem. 2. ^Miere the passive endings of the above verbs, TQscfoj, TA^I^Jl 
{^amca), TPT0S1 {^qvhto}), begin with ■&, the aspiration of (p&, the two 
final consonants, changes t, the initial consonant of the stem, into &, e. g. 

id-Qsq;--&r,v, -d-QiCp-^rivai, d^QiOp-d^rifjsa&ai 

Rem. 3. In the imperative ending of the first Aor. Pass., where both syl- 
lables shoidd begin with -d^, namely, d^ri&i, the fii'st aspirate remains un- 
changed, but the last is changed into the corresponding smooth mute, thus 
•d^rjii, e. g. xicp&^iL. 

§ 22. Me tathe sis of the Liquid s . 
The Liquids, and also the Lingual t, when tz precedes, often 
change place mth a preceding vowel, for the sake of euphony. 
The vowel then usually becomes long. This lengthening of 
the vowel constitutes the difference bet^veen Metathesis and 
Syncope ; the latter being the mere omission of e, e. g. ^a-finjoxco 
from the root i.ier, comp. mens, d-vt;Gy.co from d-av-elv, zhiJtjy.a from 
rsu-sTv, ^E^h]y.a from ^cO.-eh', TTTijaoiica from Tztzouai. 

§ 23. Doubling' of Consonants . (37.) 

1. Consonants are doubled, in the first place, for the sake of 

euphony, e. g. ^u&vqooog from ^a&v and ^sco ; 'looeov instead of 



§24.] STRENGTHENING AND ADDITION OF CONSONANTS. 37 

egeov; in the second place, in consequence of the concurrence 
of like or assimilated sounds, in the inflection and derivation, 
e. g. u'-vofiog from iv and vofiog, il-ldnco instead of IvX., ovfi-fiuyog 
instead of avvfi., Xelsifi-fiai instead of lileiTZfi., Itjfi-fxa instead of 
Xl^TifiCiy xofi-fia instead of yion^ia, tuo-oco or rdr-zco instead of rdy-a- 
0), Tjaacov or tjTzcov instead of r;y.-io3r, fid)lov instead of ^dl-iov, dl- 
)'0g instead of dhog, alius. 

2. In the Common Language, only the Liquids, P., n, v, q, the 
Sibilant (T, and the Mute t, can be doubled; moreover, ;r and 
X are also doubled in single words, e. g. iTZTzog, a horse, y.oxy.og, a 
berr/j. It has already been seen, § 17, 4, that t\vo Aspirates, in 
Greek are not doubled. 

3. Q is doubled when the augment is prefixed, e. g. eQQSov, and 
in composition, when q is preceded by a short vowel, e. g. dQ- 
Qr^'ATog, ^u&voooog ; but ev-Qcoazog from ^v and ocovvvfii. 

Remark. In imitation of Homer, the Tragic writers also double the o-, 
yet much less frequently than Homer, e. g. joaaov, Soph. Aj. 185 ; oliaaug, 
390; iaai&T}, 294; fiiacrj], Ant. 1223; taasrai, Aesch. Pers. 122; so also in 
the Dat. PI. of the thu'd'Oec. saai. 



§ 24. St re ng then i ng a nd Addition of Consonant s. 

1. Consonants ai'e fi*equently sti-engthened, in the inflection, by the addi- 
tion of a corresponding consonant, namely, 

(a) The Labials, /j tt qp, by t, e. g. ^Idn-T-a instead of /5/.a/5-w, tl'ti-t-w 
instead of tv/t-co, ^ltt-t-cj instead of olcp-oj ; sometimes also by o", 
wliich assimilates the preceding Labial, therefore aa, Attic tt, e. g. 
niaao}, Att. nhjoj, Future niipw, the poetic oaao^iai, Fut. oipo^ai ; in 
diipco instead of ^f'qpw, <jp and a ai'e changed into \p ; 

(b) the Palatals, '/ y. /^ are strengthened by tr, which assimilates the pre- 
ceding Palatal, therefore cro-, Att. tt, or, though more seldom, the Pala- 
tal unites with the cr and is changed into ^, e. g. TaV-cr-w, Att. tcct-t-w 
instead of T«/-a», cpQla-cT-w, Att. q^gii-r-oj instead of qp^/x-w, ^r^a-a-w, 
Att. ^ijT-T-b) instead of ^rj'/-(i)', y.Qoc'Cbi instead of ygd'/o), tql'Coj instead 
of To//w; a Kappa-mute with a is seldom changed into |, e. g. av^co, 
aug-eo, ciU^oj, odu^a and odd^oj ; tlie strengthening x is foimd only in 
nixTb) and t/ztw ; 

(c) the Linguals, 5 r ^, are strengthened by tr, which with the preceding 
Lingual is changed into ^, e. g. qp^a'^w instead of (pgudo), or, though 

6 



38 EXPULSION AND OMISSION OF CONSO.NANTS. [§ 26, 

more seldom, a assimilates the ])rece(ling Tan-mute, c. g. Xhao^tn 
and Xijo^iai, ('(jtaub), ioiriu) instead of f^eiw, xo^iVtra) instead o{ xofjiO^u. 

2. The eoiicurrenee of ^^ and vq in the middle of some words, which 
was un])leasant to a Grecian ear, and was occasioned by the omission 
of a vowel, is softened by inserting a /5 or d, thus, in ^iari^-i^-Qiu formed 
from }.iiijr,^i{)L(i, fuiaijuolve, ya^-^-qog from yufi-i-^6g, yr/fioog, uy-d-Qog 
from (xrigog, uvquc. 

3. 1\" also is used to strengthen consonants, namely, the Labials, espe- 
cially m poctiy, so as to make a syllable long by position, e. g. lifiJiavov 
from TiTT-T-ti), ajQuiu<jog from (TTQicfoj', -d^au^og, 7u(pog', yoQip^rj, y.oov(f>ri'j 
■d^QOfi^Sog, TQi(psiv', oi-iffih f^^f^*'; 't'^ficfiT], nubere ; O'^qi^og and ofi-'jQtfiog, 
v(uvv[iog and v(x)vi\urog. In the present of many verbs, this strengthening 
is found, e. g. nvfdmojjo'i, -O-iyyuvM, Xau^dvM instead of nv&o^ai, ■dlyw, 
Xu^io. On the change of v, see § 19, 3. On the v iqs/.y.., see § 15, 1. 

4. 2 also is prefixed to many words, but mostly to such as begin with 
^, e. g. ^w(5t| and a^oidi^, fiixQog and aijixgog ; further, a strengthening tr is 
inserted before fx and t in the Perf. JMid. or Pass., and before -& in the first 
Aor. Pass., e. g. Tejils-cT-fiai, TSTsU-(T-jai, inU-a-^riv, § 131 ; also in the 
derivation and composition of words, a is fi-equently inserted for the sake 
of euphony, e. g. (lei-cr-fiog, instead of a, & also is inserted before ^, e. g. 
fivxrj-d^-j^og, og/Tj-^-juog, ay.aq-d^-ixog from (ry-algoi, noQ-^-j-iog fi'om Tuigo), 
nuv-(T-m'?i.iog, (xoyo-a-Toy.og, etc. 

§ 25. Exp III sion and O m is sion of Co nso n a n t s. (v. s.) 

1. It is an important grammatical principle, that, in the inflection, a is very 
often omitted betsveen t^vo vowels, e. g. linir,^ iiimov, linioio instead of 
rvjiTE-a-ai or TVTCTri-a a L, STims-a-o, jiTiTOL-a-o', ysrs-og, /fj'f-cov instead 
of ysve-a-og, yevs-cr~o)v, comp. gene-r-is, gene-r-um. At the end of a word 
and after Pi and Kappa-mutes, it is retained, e. g. yevog, ti'^w = iin-acoj 
nU^o) = nXsy-aoj, but after the Liquids, in inflection, as well as commonly 
at the end of a word, it is omitted, e. g. ijyysda instead of I'lyyeX-a-a, ay- 
ysXu instead of ayyeX-i-a-b), ccyysX-s—ca, gt'iTcog instead of grjTOQ-g. Comp. 
§20,3. 

2. What has been said of the omission and retaming of cr in inflection, 
holds in general of the Digamma softened into tlie vowel i', § 200. This is 
omitted : (a) in the middle of tlie word between tvvo vowels, e. g. b}6v{a}F6v), 
OYam, oig{oFig),oyis, alco f [alFuv], aexum, viog{riFog), novus, ayuiog {(jy.ai- 
F6g\ scae^iis, ^oog {^oFvg), bovis ; -^tw, tiXsoj, nveo), sXacj instead of ^eFo, 
etc. ; (b) at the beginning of the word before vowels and g, e. g. oivog [Fol- 
vog), vinum, tag [Feag], ver, i'g [Fig] vis, oiy.og [Fdiy.og], ^icus, ide7v {Fideiv), 



§•2-').] KXPILSION AND OMISSION OF CONSONANTS. 39 

videre, iadt'ig {Fsa&ijg), vestis, Qri/vi\ui {FQriyvi\ui\ frango. On the contra- 
ry, it is expressed in connection Avith a preceding «, e, o, with which it 
then coalesces and forms a diphthong, (a) at tiie end of a word, e. g. ^ov 
instead of /Jo J', ^aadsv, etc. ; (/?) before a consonant, e. g. ^oi'g {(^oFg, bovs, 
bos), vavg {vdF<:), navis, ^oiv, ^ovalj ^SaaiXsvg, ^uaiXtvai, ^siaofiac, nhmo- 
fjai, nptmof.iai, eXavro). J3ut when an i or t; precedes it, then it disappears 
before a consonant, but lengtliens the i or i-, e. g. yug instead ofyAFg^ aig 
instead of aiFg, l/d^vg instead of l/&vFg, Ace. xiv, avv, Ix&vv ; but it dis- 
appears, even in this case, in the middle of a word between vowels, e. g. 
Ji-og, yi-6g, av-og, Ix&v-og instead oi AiF-6g^ xlF-ogy avF-og, t/d^vF-og. 

3. As the Greek language admits an accumulation of only three conso- 
nants in composition, and in simple words, only when the fii'st or the last 
is a Liquid, then, if in the mflection of the verb, a termination beginning 
with ad^ is appended to the consonant of the root, the cr is excluded: 

).tXHTt-tT&ojv from XsItt-oj becomes XeXslcp&av {§ 17, 2.) 
Xdsy-(T&(XL " Xsy-o) " liXsx&ai (§ 17, 2.) 

iaiuX-ad^m " aiiXX-ix) " iaidX&ai. 

Remark. On the omission of a Tau-mute, and a v and vt before a, and a 
(T after a Liquid, see § 20. In composition, v is often omitted, e. g. IIv^o- 
xiovog, "AnoXXo-dtaQog instead of IIvd^oyy.T., "AitoXXovd. 

4. Several words can di-op their final consonant, either to avoid an accu- 
mulation of consonants, or, in verse, to prevent a syllable becoming long 
by position. In addition to the words mentioned under § 15, namely, oux 
{ov\ i^[iy.), oiTWfe^ (oltw), which usually retain their fmal consonant before a 
vowel to prevent the Hiatus, but drop it before consonants, there belong here, 

(a) adverbs of place in ■&sp, e. g. ngoffdsv, otikt&sv, vtisq&sv, etc., which 
never di-op the v before a consonant in prose, but veiy often in Epic 
poetiy, more seldom in the Attic poets ; 

(b) (li/gig and axgig, which, however, in the best classical ^mters, have 
dropped their cr, not only before consonants, but commonly before 
vovrels, e. g. (xs/ql ^Ava'iayoQov, PL Hipp. Maj. 281, c. fxi/QL iviavd^a, 
Id. S\Tnp. 210, e. ^ixqi oiov, X. C. 4. 7, 2. y^i/Qi igv&qug d^aXaTTtjc, 
Id. Cy. 8. 6, 20 ; 

(c) the adverbs, uTgifiag, E^Trag, fiearrjyvg, avxr/.Qvg, avsag, Sq:vMg, which in 
poetry can drop their cr, but never in prose ; in the Ionic dialect, nu- 
meral adverbs in dy.ig also frequently drop the a before consonants, 
e. g. noXXdy.u Her. 2, 2. 

5. A pure Greek word can end only in one of the thi-ee Liquids, v, a 
{ipf I, i. e. 7i(T, X0-) and g. The two words, ova, not, and i/., out of, form 
only an apparent exception, since, as Proclitics, § 32, they incline to the 
following word, and, as it were, become a part of it. This law of euphony 



40 NATURE AND QUANTITY OF SYLLABLES. [§§ 26, 27. 

occasions either the omission of all other consonants, or it changes them 
into one of the three Liquids just named; lience, aoifia, Gen. aufiaz-og in- 
stead of acofxttT, yaXa, Gen. yaXam-oq instead of yaXttxx, Xiojv, Gen. Xeovx-oi; 
instead of Xsovt, i.SovXtvov instead of i^oiXsvovt ; — itQug, Gen. linax-oq in- 
stead of xiouj, xsQag, Gen. niQuj-og instead of xigaT, i^iXi, Gren. fiiXiT-og in- 
stead of fiiXiT. 



SECTION II. 
Syllables. 
§26. Nature and Division of Syllable s . (4i.) 

1. Every vowel, pronounced by itself, or in connection with 
one or more consonants, is called a syllable. 

2. A word consists of one or more syllables. When a word 
consists of several syllables, a distinction is made between the 
stem-syllables and the syllables of inflection or derivation. The 
stem-syllables express the essential idea of the word, the sylla- 
bles of inflection or derivation, the relations of the idea. Thus, 
e. g. in ye-yqacf-a, the middle syllable is the stem-syllable, the 
two others, syllables of inflection ; in TiQciy-iia, the first is the 
stem-syllable, the last the syllable of derivation. 

§27. Quantity of Syllables . (42—45.) 

1. A syllable is short by nature, when its vowel is short, 
namely, £, 0, a, i, v, or when a vowel or single consonant follows 
a short vowel, e. g. 'evoimgu, 'eTTv&ero. 

2. A syllable is long by nature, when the voAvel is a simple, 
long vowel, ?/, co, d, i, v, or a diphthong, e. g. "rjQwg, -xqivoS, ysq:vQa, 
laxvQovg, nmdev^g, hence contracted syllables are always long, 
e. g. '^dxcov formed from de-ACJv, ^ozQvg formed from ^orovug. 

3. A syllable mth a short vowel is made long by position, 
when two or more consonants or a double consonant, ^ § 'ipj 
follow the short vowel, e. g. 'ey.orelXco, Tvipdvieg, xo^ag (xo^axo?), 

Remark 1. The pronunciation of a syllable long by natui-e, and one long 
by position, differs in this, that the former is pronounced long {producitur), 
but the latter not When a syllable natm-ally long, is long also by position, 



§28.] QUANTITY OF THE PENULT. 41 

it must be protracted in pronouncing. Hence a distinction is made in pro- 
nouncing such words as tiquito), ngvi^ig, nquy^ci («) and twttw, Ja^iq, idy- 
(xa (a). 

4. But when a short vowel stands before a Mute and Liquid, 
it commonly remains short in the Attic, inasmuch as the Liquid 
sounds are less distinct than the Mutes, and hence are pro- 
nounced with less hesitation, e. g. azt:ivog, anlitkoq, ^olv.\i7]j ^otQvgj 
didgax^og. Such a position is called a iveak position. In two 
instances, however, the position of the Mute and Liquid makes 
the short vowel long : (a) in compounds, e. g. 'earsfico ; (b) when 
one of the Medials, ^ y S, stands before one of the three Liquids, 
I [^ V, e. g. ^i§log, evddfiog, ninllyiiai ; also ^l, in Tragic trimeter, 
lengthens the preceding short vowel. Finally, it will be evi- 
dent, that a vowel long by natm-e cannot be shortened by a 
Mute and Liquid, e. g. (ii^vuzqov. 

5. A syllable which contains one of the three doubtful vow- 
els, a, I, V, cannot, in the same word, be pronounced long and 
short, but must be either long or short. 

§28. Quantity of the Penult. (46,47.) 

It is important, in order to pronounce correctly, to be able to 
determine, with certainty, the quantity of the three doubtful 
vowels, «, I and v, in the penult of words of three or more syl- 
lables. The following summary will present the principal in- 
stances, in which the penult is long. The quantity of the syl- 
lables of inflection will be considered in treating of the Forms. 

The penult is long, 

1. In substantives in dcav, Gen. -aovog or -atoyo?, in substantives of two 
or more syllables in iwv, Gen. -lovoq ; but lojv, Gen. -itavog^ and in forms 
of the comparative in iwy, io»', Gen. -lovog, e. g. onaoiv, -ovog, 6, ?;, com- 
panion, Uoasidacav -(avog ; xlojv, -ovog, ^, pillar, ^qayloiv, -ovog, o, arm, A^- 
q)L(av, -ovog; but ytsvxaXtojv, -(ovog; xaXkiav, naXXiov, more beautiful. 

Exceptions. The two oxytones, t) rficov (?), shore, and generally ^ /lajv, 
snow. Homer always uses the comparatives in iav, lov, as short, where the 
versification admits. 

2. In oxytoned proper names in oivog, and in compounds in uyog from 
«/a), to lead, and ayvvfjn,, to break, avcog and xgavog, e. g. "Aaivivog, lox^yog, 
captain, vavayog, naufragus, Bidvojg, dtTtgavog, having two horns. 



42 QUANTITY OF THE PENULT. [§ 29. 

3. In adjectives in dijg Fern, d'i^, derived from verbs in uoj, in proper 
names in nxrjg, in substantives in trr/?, Fem.1rig, and in those in vxrjg of the 
first Dec, Fern, vitg, and in proj)er names in iit], e. g. u^Qui^c, unlouched, 
EvcpQuTrjg, MiO-QiduTTjg, noXlrrjg, -ou, citizen, Fern. noXliigj ngtv^iiiTjgj -ov, old 
man, "AcpQodiTr}, "'AfxcfinQixri. 

Exceptions: (a) to the proper names in airig: raluT-rjg, JuX/xuTrig, Zaq- 
fiuTrjg, all in (Sutrjg and cpujrjg, and compounds formed from verbal roots, 
e. g. I'bJKQaiTjg', — (b) xQixijg, judge, from the short root xgi, xTiTijg, 
builder, and ^vxrig, one ivho sacrifices. 

4. In Proparoxytones in iXog, llov, iv og, iv ov, in words mivi],lva, 

V V Tj, V V a, m those in vvo g, when a does not precede the ending, in Pro- 
paroxj^tones in iJ ^ a, and in adjectives in v g o g with a preceding long syl- 
lable, e. g. 

'O ofiiXog, muUitv/ie dwuvr], gift 6 y.lvdvvog, danger 

Tcidllov, shoe Al'ylva, yi(pi()a, bridge 

1] nafilvog, oven ata/vvr], shame la/\;(Jog, strong 

aiXlvov, parsley a}xvva, defence but o/vgog and ixi'g6g,Jirm. 

Remark 1. The following may be added to the Proparoxjlones in iv og 
and V Q a, namely, o /RAiyo?, rein, 6 igivog, wild fg-tree, and r^ y.okXtga, 
coarse bread. 

Exceptions. Ell ant vi], feast, and compounds in yv v og from /uy?), 
ivoman, e. g. avdgoyvvog, and no g v vi], dub. 

5. In substantives in vt o g, whose antepenult is long, and in compound 
adjectives in daxgvjog and t g vi og from day.gvb), rgvai, and also in sub- 
stantives in V p, a, V y7) and v y mv, and in adverbs in v d 6 v, e. g. 

xwxtTo?, ivailing argviog, indestructible ololvyri, idulatus 

uday.gvTog, without tears Idgvpa, -aiog, seed oXolvyojv, uhdatus 

^oxgvdov, in clusters. 

Exception. Magpayvyt], splendor. 

6. In dissyllabic oxytones in Hog, ipog, ivog, 1 6 g, v log, v p 6 g, 

V v6 g, and in Paroxytones in v prj, v vrj, e. g. 

ipllog, bare i] glvog, skin o gvuog, pale ^vvog, common 

o /ilog, fodder o^log, dart o ^ipog, mind lipv, injury 

6 llpog, hunger o /ij log, juice so, udvuog, etc. pvv^i excuse. 

Exceptions. Biog, (6), bow, nlvvog [o), washing-trough. 

7. In dissyllables in u o g, dvo g (oxytoned), and in dissyllables in t a, 
which begin with two consonants, e. g. 

ovuog, temple (puvog, brilliant ax^a, pebble cplicc, door-post. 

Rem. 2. The following may be added to dissyllables in la, namely, xoilid, 



§29.] ACCENTS. 43 

shedj oiyia, trouble, xovta, dust, and to those in uog, the variable 'iXaog, and 
proper names in uog, e. g.'jli.t(pi<x(jaog; Olvofiuog is an exception. 

Exceptions. Taog or mug (o), peacock, axia [i), shadoiv. 

8. The following single words should also be noted : 

I. «. 

AxQUTog, unmixed rsavig, young girl tiAqu, turban 

ixviiXQog, troublesome onadog, attendant cpaluQog, clear 

av^udijg, self-sufficient alvunt, mustard o (plvuQog, tattle. 

Also the proper names, "'A^oiaig, "dvunog, ^'Aqaiog JrinctgixTog, Osuvca, 
Jdaojv, Ilfiiujiog, -S'a^w;ift,' (Serapis), 2zi}x(fdlog, <Pdgcru),og. 

n. I. 

'AxQi^/jg, exact ivintj, rebuke nuQ&svoninrig, gallant. 

l'q)9lfxog, strong egi^og, day-laborer 

to rdglxog, picldedjish 6 i] xdldwf, swallow 

Also the proper names, l.4v/i'(r?jc, rQuiiy.og, JEvQinog, Kd'ixog{l), "Oalqig, 
JBoialQig. The following dissyllables should be noted for the sake of the 
compounds: tI^i], honor, vlkt], victory, cpZlr], tribe, "vXrj, forest, luog, little, 
ftiygog, small, e. g. aiifxog. 

m. V. 

'Afii(i(ov, blameless eQixM, to hold back XdcpvQov, booty 

viai'lov, asylum 6 ikijog, den tj ndntgog, papyrus 

dvn'jiv), war-cry i/vvrj, the ham nhvQov, bran. 

Also the proper names, ^'A^vdog, "AQxvxag, Bi&vvog, AioviJaog, Kufi^varjg, 
Kigxvga, Koixviog. And the dissyllables, xpvxri, soul, u rvgog, cheese, o nv- 
gog, wheat, 6 xQ^^^og, gold, Xvnr], grief, ipvxgog, cold. 



§29. Accents. (48-51.) 

1. The accentuation of a polysyllabic word consists in pro- 
nouncing one syllable with a stronger or clearer tone than the 
others. By this means, the unity of the connected syllables is 
indicated. The accentuation of the Greek is principally rlipth- 
mical, and in this it differs from the accentuation of the Ger- 
man, for example, which is almost wholly logical, and also 
from that of most compound English words, which is generally 
logical. The logical accent, which refers to the meaning of the 
syllables, gives emphasis to the stem-syllable, which expresses 
the essential idea of the word, in preference to the syllables of 
derivation and inflection, which express only the relations of 



44 ACCENTS. [§ 29. 

the idea, as the German, verderblicher, unvergesslicher, entfal- 
ten, and the English, destructible^ immortal. The rhythmical 
accent, which expresses the relation of the tone to the syllables of 
a word, has particular reference to the quantity of syllables, and 
very often emphasizes the syllables of derivation and inflection, 
in preference to the stem-syllable, without regard to the signifi- 
cation of the syllables, e. g. narriQ, natQog^ yQacpofievogy yQucpoixtvr^, 
ytyQaqja, ysyQaqicog, ysyQu^fitvog. 

2. The English and Greek accent differs also in this, that in 
the former the accented syllable is always considered long,* 
but in the latter it can be either long or short, e. g. yQaq)6ii€vogy 
ysygafpcog ; and that in the former, the accented and unaccented 
syllables are distinguished by the strength and feebleness of the 
tone, in the latter, by the rising and falling of the tone. 

3. Even a monosi/Uabic word must be accented, so as to form 
in connected discourse, an independent sound. 

4. The Greek has the following marks for the tone or accent 
(^TtQogcpdiai) : 

(a) The acute {nQogcobia o^Eia, accentus cicutus) - to denote 
the sharp or clear tone, e. g. loyog ; 

(b) The circumflex {nqogqidia neQionaiiivri, accentus cir- 
cumflexus) - to denote the protracted (as it were the 
ivinding or long-drawn) tone, e. g. cana. This accent 
consists in uniting the rising and falling tone in pro- 
nouncing a long syllable, since, e. g. the word a^iia was 
probably pronounced as cooiia ; 

(c) The grave [TiQogcpdia ^aqela, accentus gravis) - to denote 
the falling or heavy tone. 

Reiwark 1. The mark of the falling tone was not used. Hence the 
Greek did not write, av^oMnoq, loyoq, but avdQwnoq, loyog. The mai'k 
of the gi-ave was used only to distmguish ceitain words, e. g. itc, aliquis, 
some one, and Ttg, quis ? who ? and, as wdll be seen in § 31, I, instead of the 
acute on the final syllable of words in connected discourse. 

Rem. 2. The accent stands upon the second vowel of diphthongs, and 
at the beginning of w-ords commencing with a vowel the acute and 
grave stand after the breathing, but the circumflex over it, e. g. ana^, av- 
Xeiog, u.v eittijq, ivqoq, a[ua. But in uncial letters, in connection with the 

* In English, however, the w^ords long and short refer only to the em^ 
phasis. — Tr. 



§ 29.] ACCENTS. 45 

diphthongs a, j], m, the accent and the Breathing stand upon the first 
vowel, e. g."Aid}]g. On the diaeresis, see §4, Rem. 4. 

Rem. 3. In j)ronouncing a Greek word, two things must be noted, the 
accent and the quantity. Hence an effort shoukl be made to indicate the 
accented syllable by raising the voice, but especially to make the long and 
short, as well as the accented and unaccented syllables, perceptible. But 
in many instances, it is not possible for us to express the nicer distinctions, 
which the Greeks must have made in their pronmiciation ; thus, e. g. in 
Tifiij and Ttfifi, yvufjLUi and yvufiaig. 

5. The accent can stand only on one of the last three sylla- 
bles of a word, because the raising of the voice is impossible 
beyond the last three syllables. The English in many words 
disregards this law, e. g. amplification. 

6. The acute stands on one of the last three syllables, whether 
this is long or short, e. g. Y>aX6g, dv-d-QcoTzov, 7T6Xe[iog ; yet upon the 
antepenult, only when the last is short, and is not long by posi- 
tion, e. g. av&QcoTiog, but dvd-QWTTov. 

7. The circumflex stands only on one of the last two syllables, 
but that syllable must always be long by nature, e. g. rou o(a^a ; 
it stands upon the penult, however, only when the ultimate is 
short, or long only by position, e. g. reixog, XQVl^^y nqdlig, avla^. 
Gen. -d'Aog, y.aXavoo'ip, xarrjXii^, ^Tjfiojva^. Also in substantives 
ending in 1'^ and ij^, Gen. -ly.og, -vaog, the i and v long by nature, 
are, according to the views of the ancient Grammarians, treated 
as short in respect to the pronunciation, e. g. qpomS, Gen. -Txo?, 
'atJqv^, Gen. -iJnog. 

8. If therefore the antepenult is accented, it can have only the 
acute ; but if the penult is accented, and is long by nature, it 
must have the circumflex, when the ultimate is short, e. g. teix^g, 
TtQarre, but the acute, when the ultimate* is long, e. g. reixovg, 
TiQartco ; if it is short, it has uniformly only the acute, e. g. zdzTco, 

* Hence the accent often enables us to determine the quantity of sj'lla- 
bles, e. g. from the acute on the antepenult of non^TQia, [ittd^i]TQia, we infer 
that the ultimate is short, othenvise the accent could not stand fiirther back 
than the penult, No. 6, above, — from the cu'cumflex on altog and nga^ig, 
that those syllables are long by nature, 7, — from the circumflex on f^olga 
and (nElga, that the ultimate is short, 7, — from the acute on /jiga, otga and 
"Hga, that the ultimate is long, otherwise the penult of these words must 
be circumflexed, 8, — from the acute on q)lXog and noixlXog, that the penult 
of these words is short, otherwise they must have been circumflexed, 8. — ^Tr, 
7 



46 CHANGE AND REMOVAL OF THE ACCENT. [§ 30. 

raTTE. On the ultimate, either the acute or the circumflex stands, 

e. g. TlUTl'lQj TIUZQOJV. 

Rem. 4. In the inflection-endings, a l and o /, and in the adverbs, ijQona-- 
Xat and txTraAwt, tlie diphthongs, in resi)ect to the accent, are considered 
short, e. g. jQUJif'^ai, rvjireiai, yXtxurauij uvr^qmnoi, xittqoi. The optative end- 
ings, 01 and «i, are exceptions, e. g. n^riaai, txhlnoi, Xtlnoi, and the adverb 
ovxoi, domi, at home, on the contraiy, olxoi, tiouses, from oixoc. 

Rem. 5. In the old Ionic and in the Attic declension, since o) takes the 
place of 0, it is considered as having only half its nsual length, and hence, 
in respect to the accent, is treated as short, e. g. MivihixK, um'r/tMv, — no- 
Xscag, 7i6hb)v : — XXiioc;, ayr}QMg, Gen. VAeo), ix/tjoo) : but if such adjectives are 
declined according to the third Dec, they are accented regularly, e. g. cpi- 
XoyiXwg, cpdoyiXcaTog', so also in the Dat. Sing, and PL, as well as in the 
Gen. and Dat. Dual, where the penult is long, e. g. uytjowg, utyi'igoj, uyriQOK, 
uyrjQtov. 

Rem. 6. In the words, sl'&s, O that, val/i, certainly, the penult has the 
acute, apparently contrary to the rule ; but these must be treated as separate 
words. The accentuation of the words, hts, ovTf, okttfq, ijiig, rovgds, etc., 
is to be explained on the gromid, that they are compoimded with Enclitics, 
§33. 

Rem. 7. According to the accentuation of the last syllable, words have 
the following names : 

(a) Oxjtones, when the ultimate has the acute, e. g. TCTi-qpcu?, xaxog, S^i'iQ ; 

(b) Paroxjtones, when the penult has the acute, e. g. jvmoi ; 

(c) Proparoxy tones, when the antepenult has the acute, e. g. uvS^Qoonog, 
TvnrojABVog, viv&Qwnoi, ivmo^ivoL ; 

(d) Perispomena, when the ultmiate has the cu'cumflex, e. g. y.ay.Cig ; 

(e) Properispomena, when the penult has the circumflex, e. g. noay^ia, 
(piXovaa ; 

(f) Barytones, when the ultimate is imaccented, e. g. nquy^aza., rtqay^ia. 

§ 30. Ch ang-e and Removal of the Accent hy In- 
flection^ Compo sition and Contraction. (5a-54.) 
1. When a word is changed by inflection, either in the quan- 
tity of its final syllable or in the number of its syllables, then, 
according to the preceding rules, there is generally also a change 
or removal of the accent. 

(a) By lengthening the final syllable, 

(a) a Proparoxy tone, as noX^iiog, becomes a Paroxytone, 

e. g. TzoXsfiov ; 
(§) a Properispomenon, as reTyog, a Paroxytone, e. g rei- 

Xovg; 
{y) an Oxytone, as d^sog, a Perispomenon, e. g. deov. Yet 
this change is limited to particular cases. See § 45, 7, a. 



§30.] CHANCR AND RI'.MOVAL OF THE ACCENT. 47 

(b) By shortening the final syllable, 

(a) a dissyllabic Paroxytone with long penult, as cptvyco, 
becomes a Properispomenon, e. g. (ftvye, but xuttcj, 
Tutre ; 

(^) a polysyllabic Paroxytone, whether the penult is long 
or short, becomes a Proparoxytone, e. g. §ov),tv(o, ^ov- 

(c) By the accession of a syllable or syllables at the beginning 
of a word, the accent is commonly removed towards the begin- 
ning of the word, e. g. q^evyco, tcpsvyov ; the same occurs com- 
monly in compounds, e. g. odog cvvodog, d^eog cptlod^sog, tiiiij 
azifiog, cpevys dTroqjevya. By an accession of syllables at the 
end of a word, on the contrary, the accent is removed towards 
the etid of the word, e. g. Tvntw, ivTtTOfied^cc, rvcp&ijooiie'&a. 

Remark 1. The particular cases of the change of accent by mflection, 
and the exceptions to the general mles here stated, will be seen below un- 
der the accentuation of the several parts of speech. 

2. Li respect to contraction, the following principles apply : 

(1) When neither of two syllables to be contracted is ac- 
cented, then the contracted syllable also is unaccented, and the 
syllable which, previous to contraction, had the accent, retains 
it also after the contraction, e. g. (piXee = (piXsi, but cpiltac = (pileT, 
yivii = ytvst; but ysvtojv = ysvwv. 

(2) But when one of the two syllables to be contracted is ac- 
cented, then the contracted syllable also is accented, 

(a) the contracted syllable when composed of the antepenult 
and penult, takes the accent which the general rules re- 
quire, e. g. 

ayandofiUL = ayanwijiaL cpdeofitvog = (fdovfiEvog 

saiaoTog == saroirog oQ^oovai = ogd^ovai 

vXrjEcraa z= vXrjaau JifxaovTiov = TinbJVtbJV, 

(b) the contracted syllable, when it is the ultimate, takes : 
(a) the acute, when the last of the syllables to be con- 
tracted has the acute, e. g. iazacog = iazcog ; 

(|3) the circumflex, when the first of the syllables to be 
contracted, is accented, e. g. rixoi = riioT. 

Rem. 2. The exceptions to the principles stated, will be seen below un- 
der the contracted declensions and conjugations. 



48 CHANGE OF THE ACCENT. [§ 31. 



CHANGE AND REMOVAL OF THE ACCENT IN CONNECTED 

DISCOURSE. 

§31. I. Grave instead of the Acute. — 11. Crasis. — 
III. Elision, — IV. Anas tr op he. (5;^57.) 

I. In connected discourse, the Oxytones receive the mark of 
the grave, i. e. by the close connection of the words with each 
other, the sharp tone is weakened or depressed, e. g. El fiTj fitj- 
TQVi/j TTBQiy.cdXtjg 'HsQi^oia ijv. But the acute must stand before 
every punctuation-mark, by which an actual division is made 
in the thought, as weU as at the end of the verse, e. g. '0 iih 
KvQog iTTSQaae rov Ttorafjov, oi ds TtoXsfiioi am^pvyov. 

Exceptions. Tig, t/, qiiis? wlvo'^ quid? ivhaf? always remain oxytoned. 

Remark 1. When an Oxjtone is not closely connected with the other 
words, i. e. when it is treated gi'animatically, the acute remains, e. g. h to 
firj Xsysig — to av^Q ovofia. 

II. By Crasis two words are united in one, § 10. Hence, 
words united in this way can have but one accent, namely, that 
of the second word, which is the more important ; this accent 
does not change its place, e. g. rayad^ov from to dya&ov. When 
the second word is a dissyllabic Paroxytone mth a short final 
syllable, the accent, according to § 30, 2, (2) (a), is changed into 
the circumflex, e. g. to sTiog = rovnog, r« a)la = talXa, to sQyov 
= TovQyov ; to, OTzla = S'coTtla, iyco olfiai = iycpf^ai. 

III. When by Elision, § 13, an unaccented vowel is elided, 
the accent of the word is not changed, e. g. rovr sativ. But if 
the eHded vowel is accented, its accent is thrown back upon 
the preceding syllable, as an acute ; yet, when the word, from 
which a vowel has been eHded, is a preposition or one of the 
particles, dlXd, ovdi, ^r^ds, and the poetic rjd^, ide, the accent of the 
elided vowel w^hoUy disappears, and also when the accented 
vowe] of monosyllabic words is elided, e. g. 

TioXXa sncc&ov = noX)^ stiu&ov 
dsLva igcarag = delv igcoToig 
(prjiu iy(t = cpvil iyoj 

alaxQ^ £A£|ag = oucrxQ^ tX^lag 
enm 7](TCiv = btit r{(jav 



naga sfxov 


= 


TtUQ 


ifiov 


ano 


eavTOV 


= 


acp 


eavTov 


dXXa 
ovds 
7/ ds 


e/a: 
OS 


= 


aXX' 

old' 


iyw 
iya 
og. 



§ 32.] ATONICS OR PROCLITICS. 49 



IV. Anastrophe. When a preposition is placed after the 
word which it should precede, the tone of such preposition na- 
turally inclines back to its word, and hence, the accent is 
removed from the ultimate to the penult ; this drawing back of 
the accent is called Anastrophe, di>aarQog)rj, e. g. 

finxv^ I'n^t but inl i^ii/rig vfwv uno but ano viMV 

Rem. 2. The prepositions, «jU(jpt, avrl, nvd, did, and the poetic VTial, 
inuQ, dial, nuQal^ do not admit Anastrophe. If the preposition stands be- 
tween an adjective and a substantive, according to Aristarchns, the Anas- 
trophe is found only when the substantive stands first, e. g. Zdv&M stii di- 
vr,svri, but divijtvTc inl Zdv'&co. Other Grammarians reject the Anastrophe 
in botli cases. 

Rem. 3. Prepositions, moreover, admit Anastrophe, when they are used in- 
stead of abridged forms of the verb, e. g. dva instead of dvdairj&L ; ,u£tm, ndgcc, 
tni, vno, nsQt, svl instead of the indicative present of slvoci., compounded 
with these prepositions, e. g. iyoj ndqa instead of ndqu^i^ tvsql instead of 
TifgUaxt ; further, when the preposition is separated from the verb and 
placed after it, which is often the case in the Epic dialect, e, g. oUaaq vino 
ndviag kiaiqovq. But the accent of wtto is di'awn back Avithout any reason, 
in such phrases as dnb ■&aXd(T(iTjg olxtlv, duo axonov, an eXnldog and the 
like ; in such cases it is properly on the ultimate. 



§ 32. Y. Atonic s or Proclitics . (58.) 

Some small words are termed Atonies or Proclitics, being, in 
connected discourse, so closely united to the following word, 
that they, as it were, coalesce with it, and lose their accent. 
They are : 

(a) the forms of the article, o, ri, oi, at ; 

(b) the prepositions, Iv, in, elg [eg), into, h («?), ex, (og, ad; but 
if f'J is after the word which it governs, and at the end of a 
verse, or before a punctuation-mark, it retains the accent, 
e. g. '/.ay.wv e^ II. |, 472. 

(c) the conjunctions, cogj as, that, so that, tuhen, d, if; but if wV, 
as, follows the word which it should precede, it has the 
accent, e. g. xaxo^ oaV, for w? 'auxol; 

(d) ov (^ov-A, ovx), not; but at the end of a sentence and with 
the meaning No, it has the accent, ov (ovx). Comp. § 15, 4. 



60 ENCLITICS AND INCLINATION OF ACCENTS. [§33,34. 

§ 33. VI. Enclitics . (59.) 

Enclitics are certain words of one or two syllables, which, in 
a connected discourse, are so closely joined, in particular cases, 
to the preceding word, that they either lose their tone, or throw 
it back upon the preceding word, e. g. q^llog tig, noltiiog tig. 
They are: 

(a) the verbs u^l, to he, and (fri^l, to say, in tlie Pres. Indie, except tlie 
second Pers. Sing, el, thou art, and (f^g, tJiou sayest ; 

(b) the following forms of the three personal pronouns in the Attic 
dialect : 

I. P. S. juot- n. p. S. GOV ni. p. S. ov Dual, acfxaiv PI. acfldL [v] 

fioi aol oi 

l^i as s, vlv ; 

(c) the indefinite pronouns, tIq, tI, through all the cases and numbers, to- 
gether with the abridged forms xov and tw, and the indefinite adverbs nwg, 
Tioj, 711], nov, 7C0&1, 710&SV, TioL, 710TS ; the corresponding inteiTOgative pro- 
nouns are, on the contraiy, always accented, e. g. rig, il, nwg, etc. ; 

(d) the following paiticles m the Attic dialect, t£, xot, yi, vvv, nio, ^yjv, 
and in the Epic, xs, y.sv, vv, qoc, and the inseparable pai'ticle, di, § 34, Rem. 2. 

Remark. Several small w^ords, which are so combined with enclitics, as 
to have a peculiar meaning, ai*e written together, e. g. die, ome, fxijTe, ojgTS, 
wgnsQ, ogjig, etc. 



§ 34. Inclination of the Ac cent . (6o, ei.) 

1. An Oxytone is so combined with the following enclitic, 
that the accent, which is commonly gTave in the middle of a 
sentence, § 31, I., again becomes acute, e. g. 

S^rig Tig for -O^^jq zlg y.otkog iativ for xaXog eaxiv 

y.nl Tireg " mxl tivig noia^og ys " noraiAog yi 

aaXog ts " xaXog xi noTcc^ol Tiveg " 7ioTa(xol Tirsg. 

2. A Perispomenon coalesces with the following enclitic 
without further change of the accent, e. g. 

(jpw? Tt for cp^g xl (piXel rt? for cpdel xlg 

q)(ag eaxiv " cprag iaxlv xaXov rivog " tcaXoii xivog. 

Remark 1. A Perispomenon, in connection with a dissyllabic encHtic, is 
regarded as an Ox}i:oue. Long syllables in enclitics ai'e treated in respect 
to the accentuation as short ; hence olvxivolv, ojvxlvojv ai'e viewed as sepa- 
rate words, e. g. xaAwv tlvojv. 



^ 30.] ENCLITICS ACCENTUATED. 51 

3. A Paroxytone coalesces with the following monosyllabic 
enclitic without fui'ther change of the accent, though there is no 
inclination when the enclitic is a dissyllable, e. g. 

qilXog f.iov for cplXog fiov, but qp/Ao? iajtv, (plXoi qsaalv^ 
alXog nwg " uXXog nutg, " aXXog noji, aXXaiv Tivaiv. 

4. A Proparoxytone and a Properispomenon coalesce with' 
the following enclitic, since they retain an acute accent on the 
last syllable, so that this S3dlable forms the tone-syllable for the 
following enclitic, e. g. 

av&Q(on6g rig for av&Qwnog t/c cm^u jv for o-oj^ua jI 

uf^Qwnol Ttvsg " av&gconoi -nvig aui^d iaiiv " OM^a iaxiv. 

Exception. A Properispomenon, ending in | or i//, does not admit the in- 
chnation of a dissyllabic enclitic, e. g. uvXix^ Tivog, aiXa^ iaxiv, (pdlvi^ iaiiv, 
xriQV^ iajLV, XuiXaip iaiiv. 

Rem. 2. The local suffix ds {^s), which expresses the relation of fo a place^ 
whither, coalesces with substantives according to the rules of inclination, e. g. 

^OXvfinuvds ^cpriTTtvSs ovQavovds IIv&(ods from IIv&co 

SQS^ogds EXivalvads JlIe/aQads dof^ovds. 

So ^A&i']va'C,t i. e.^Ad^rivagds, nXaraiu^e {IlXaiainl), /nfjo^e ixnudg Ace). The 
suffix ds when appended to the Demon. Pi-onoun draws the accent of 
this pronoim to tlie syUable before ds. Li the oblique cases, these strength- 
ened pronouns are accentuated according to the rules for OxAtones, § 45, 7, 
(a), e. g. 

toaog — Toaogds, joaovds, Toaajds, xoarivds, ToaoJvSe, 
Tolog — Toiogds, xrjXiy.og — jr^XixogSs, xoiai — TOiaide, 
ivd^a — ivd^dde. 

5. When several enclitics occur together, each throws back 
its accent on the preceding, e. g. ei jieg rig 6s iioi q:r^6i tiote. 



§ 35. Enclitics accentuated (oQd^orovov^evai). (62.) 

1. The enclitics at the beginning of a sentence, retain their accent, e. g. 
^Tjfil i/b) joi'to. — Tivig Xiyovcnv. — Elal ■&iol. — But instead of eor/ (v) 
at the beginning of a sentence, the form lori (v) is used, also, if it stands m 
connection with an Inf for i^mxi (v), and after the particles aU, ??, ot'x, |U7;, 
wc, x«/, ^iv, oTt, not', also after the pronoun toi't, e. g/'Ean &f6g. — "Eaii 
aocfog dvijO. — ^Eaiiv oltwc. — ^Eaiiv Idtlv, ldt7v tanv, licet videre. — El saxiv, 
ol'y. 'iajiv, roiz taiiv. 

2. 0rifxl and the other persons of the Lidic. retain the accent, if they are 
separated from the preceding word by a punctuation-mark, e. g.^'Eariv unjQ 
dya&og, cpTjfii. 



52 DIVISION OF SYLLABLES. PUNCTUATION. [§§ 36, 37. 

3. Of the enclitic Pers. pronouns, the following retain tlieir accent, namely, 
aov, aol, ui, ol, orqptat (i'): 

(a) wJieu an accentuated Prep, precedes, e. g. naQct aov^ fisTu ai, nqog 
aol. In this case, instead of the enclitic forms of the Pron. of the 
first Pers., the longer forms, regularly accentuated, are chosen, e. g. 

•jiuij tfjiov not TiuQa fiov, TiQog iuol not ngog (joi, 

y.ixT eus " y.wTM fis, tisqI ifwv " nfQL fiov. 

Remark. The unaccented prepositions are united to the enclitic forms, 
e. g. sx fiov, ev fioi, eg ae, eg (.is, ex crov, tv aoi. 

(b) after copulative or disjunctive conjunctions, e. g. e/js xal ai, ifxs rj o"£, 
especially when the pronouns are empliatic, e. g. in antitheses. 

(c) The forms ov, ot, t, are accentuated only when they are used as re-, 
cipraeal pronouns. 

•^tiX'i' »^* *^- 4, There is no inclination, when the accent of the word on which the 
^ '^^ enchtic rests disappears by Elision, e. g. y,akog 8' iailvj but y.aXog di ia- 

Tiv — nollol 5' H(jlv, but nolXol ds slaiv. 

§ 36. Division of Syllable s , (64.) 

1. Syllables end with a vowel, and begin with one or more 
consonants. Hence if a consonant is between two vowels, it 
belongs to the following syllable,* e. g. Tzo-ra-fiog, o-i/;o-|wat, i- 
(yzQa-tev-od-fii]v, s-6xov, s-^Xa-ipa, y,8-xii7]-xa. 

Exception. A compound word, or one formed by a syllable arising from 
inflection and derivation, is best divided, according to its constituent parts,t 
e. g. avv-sy.-qiOJi'r^aig, rvn-ioi, nQO-aiuj^jg, nQog-axsixw. 

2. If two similar consonants, e. g. titt, IX, etc., or a smooth 
Mute with a corresponding Aspirate, Tzq) xx rd; occur together, 
or if a consonant follows a liquid, X ^i v q, (with the exception of 
liv,) then one consonant belongs to each syllable, e. g. tut-toj, 
Bdy.-xog, dl-yog, eq-yov, yet d-iivij [but with us diA-V7j\. 

§37. Punctuation' marks — Diastole. (65.) 

1. The colon and semicolon are indicated by a point above 

the line, e. g. Ev tls^ag • navtEg yccQ coizoloyt^oav. The interroga- 

* The more usual division m our schools is noT-a-fioq, not no-ta-fiSg, 
oip-o-fAai, etc. See also Appendix on Accents and Pronunciation. — Tr. 

f Wlien, however, the first part of a compoimd word ends with a vowel, 
and the fii'st vowel of the simple word is short, the fii'st consonant of that 
word is united to the preceding vowel, e. g. TTQo&saig, and not nQo-^sfng, 
avd^-aaig, not dva-fjacrig, a^-uTog, not u-^arog. — Tr. 



§3S.] DIVISION OF THE PARTS OF SPEECH. INFLECTION. 53 

tion-mark is our semicolon, e. g. Tig ravta inou^G^v ; who did ^ 
this? The period, comma and exclamation-point have the 
same characters as in English. 

2. The Diastole, or Hypodiastole, which has the same charac- 
ter as the comma, is used to distinguish certain compound 
words from others of like sound, but of dissimilar meaning, e. g. 
0, 71, iL'hatei'cr, and ozi, that, since ; o, re, ivhatever, and ozs, lohen. 
Such words are now merely separated in writing, e, g. o rr, 

IE, TO TS. 



CHAPTER II. 

GRAMMATICAL FORMS, 

§38. Division of the Parts of Speech. — Inflec- 

ti0 7l. (66.) 

1. Grammatical forms relate to the natm*e and inflection of 
the Parts of Speech. 

2. The Parts of Speech are : 

(1) Substantives, which express an obj ect, — person or thing, — 
as man^ rose^ house, virtue ; 

(2) Adjectives, which express a property, as great, small, red, 
heautifid, hateful; 

(3) Pronouns, which refer to an object, as I, thou, he, this, 
that, mine, thine, his; 

(4) Numerals, which express the number or quantity of an 
object, as one, tioo, three, many, few ; 

(5) Verbs, which express action, as to bloom, to ivake, to 
sleep, to love, to censure ; 

(6) Adverbs, which express the relations of place, time, man- 
ner, quality and number, as here, yesterday, beautifully = in a 
beautiful manner, perhaps, often, rarely ; 

(7) Prepositions, which express the relation of space, time, 
etc. of an object to an action or thing, as before the house, after 
sunset, before mourning ; 

8 



54 NATURE AND DIVISION OF THE SUBSTANTIVE. [§ 39. 

(8) Conjunctions, which express the mutual relations of sen- 
tences, as cind^ bvt, because. 

3. In addition to these parts of speech, tliere are in the lan- 
guage, peculiar organic sounds, called interjections, as alas ! 
oh! ah! 

4. Words are either essential words, i. e. such as express a 
notion or idea, which are the substantive, the adjective, the verb, 
and the adverbs derived from those parts of speech ; or formal 
words, i. e. such as express the different relations of the idea ; 
these are the pronoun, the numeral, the preposition, the con- 
junction, the adverbs which are derived from those parts of 
speech, and the verb ehai, to be, when, in connection with an 
adverb or a substantive, it has the inflection of a verb. Inter- 
jections express neither an idea, or its relation, and hence are 
not properly regarded as words. 

Remark. Prepositions, conjunctions, and adverbs derived from pronouns, 
are included under the common name of particles. 

5. By inflection is understood the variation or modification 
of a word in order to indicate its different relations. The in- 
flection of the substantive, adjective, pronoun and numeral, is 
termed declension ; the inflection of the verb, conjugation. The 
remaining parts of speech do not admit inflection. 



SECTION I. 

The Substantive. 

§ 39. JVa ture and Division of the Sub slant iv e. (224.) 

1. The Substantive is used to denote a person or a thing, e. g. 
man, ivoman, lion; earth, floiver, virtue, ivisdom, host. 

2. If a substantive indicates an object, which has an inde- 
pendent existence, it is termed a Concrete, e. g. man, luoman, 
lion, earth, floioer, host; but if the substantive indicates a 
simple quality or action, independent of a subject, it is called 
an Abstract, e. g. virtue, ivisdom. 

3. The Concretes are. 



§40.] GENDER OF SUBSTANTIVES. 55 

(a) Proper nouns, when they refer only to individual per- 
sons or objects, and not to a species, as Cyrus^ Plato, Hellas, 
Athens ; 

(b) Appellative nouns, when they indicate an entire species, 
or an individual of a class, as mortal, tree, man, ivoman, floiver ; 

(c) Material nouns, when they indicate the simple material, 
e. g. milk, dust, water, gold, coin, grain ; 

(d) Collective nouns, when they designate a number of single 
persons or things as one whole, e. g. mankind, cavalry, people, 
herd, fleet. 

§40. Gender of Substantives . (225-227.) 

The Gender of substantives, which is three-fold, as in Latin, 
is determined partly by their meaning, partly by their endings. 

I. Determination of Gender by the Meaning. 

1. The names and designations of males, names of nations, 
the months, rivers and winds, are masculine, e. g. §aaiXevg, 
the king, 6 '^anqog, the hoar, 01 ''EXlrjveg, 6 Fafxi^hcov (January 
nearly), like firjv, the month, 6 '^Icpeiog, the Alpheus, like nora- 
{Mg, the river, 6 evQog, the south-east wind, lilte avefiog. 

Exception. Diminutives in v, which are not proper names, as to fisiga- 
xiov, the lad, also to avdQanodov, a slave, and some rivers, as r) Ari^r}. 

2. The names and designations of females, names of countries, 
islands, cities, trees and plants for the most part, are feminine, 
e. g. ri ^aaiXeia, the queen, ^ Isaiva, the lioness, ^ Aiyvnzog^ like ?J 
X^qa, the land, ri 'Podog, like ^ vrjaog, the island, /J TQOi^rjv, like ^ tto- 
hg, the city, ^ Tzvhg, the box-tree, ^ ufiTtelog, the vine, ^ §v^log, 
the papyrus, ^ Qcicpavog, the horse-radish, rj vaqdog, the balsam-tree. 

Exceptions. A. Countries and cities according to then- endings ; Of the Mas- 
culine are, (a) nouns in -r^g, Gen. -tjTog, e. g. u Muarjg ; — (b) in -Evg, e. g. o 0a- 
votivg ; — (c) in -ot, PL, e. g. ol (J^ifhnnoL ; — (d) those which vaiy between -og, 
(Gen. -ov), -oov, -ovg and -«?. — Of the Neuter gender are, (a) those in -a, PI., 
e. g. T« AsvxTQtt ; — (b) in -ov, e. g. to ^'iXiov ; in -og, Gen. -eog, e. g. to *'AQ/og. — 
B. Trees and plants ; igiveog, the tmld fg-tree, cpsXkog, the cork-tree, X(o- 
tog, the lotus, 6 xviiavg, the willow, cpolvL^, the palm, naiog, the ivy ; of the 



56 GENDER OF SUBSTANTIVES. [§40. 

Masc. and Fern, gender are, o tj nanvQog, the papi/riis, u »; xoxivog, the wUd- 
olive, 6 1} xofiuQog, tJie strawberry-tree, o rj xigucrogf the cJverry-tree. 

3. Of the Neuter gender are the names of fruits, diminutives, 
with the exception of proper names of females, e. g. rj yitovxiov, 
the names of the letters, infinitives, all indeclinable words in the 
Sing, and PL, and all words used as the mere symbol of a sound, 
e. g. TO fioQov, the fruit of the mulberry (rrjg iioQtag)^ to ^r^Xw, the 
apple^ TO i^eiQamov, Dim. of i^eiQa^) boy, to Xaii^ba, to tvmuv, the 
striking, to fii^trjQ, the word mother. 

4. The names of persons which have only one form for the 
Masc. and Fem. are of Common gender, e. g. 6 i^ d^eog, god and 
goddess, 6 ^ nalg, boy and girL 

Remark 1. Moveable substantives are such as change their endmg so as 
to indicate the natural gender, e. g. o ^ixadn'g, king, ?; ^aalhia, queen. — 
The change of the endmg itself is called motion. 

Rem. 2. From nouns of Common gender, those termed Epicenes [inlxoLva) 
must be distmguished, i. e. such substantives as indicate both the natural 
genders by only one forai of gender, either Masc. or Fem. To these epi- 
cenes belong, first, most of the names of beasts, e. g. /) aXoinrj^, the fox, 
M^hether the male or female fox, i) aqxiog, the hear, i] xafiVjlog, the camel, 6 
fivg, the mouse, ^ /sAt^cov, the swallow, r/ oig, the sheep, 6 ^ovg, the ox; in the 
PL, however, commonly at ^oeg, al Innoi ; but when the natm-al gender is 
to be distmguished, uqqtjv, male, or -d^vilvg, female, is added, e. g. Xa/ojg 6 
-^rilvg, the female hare, alwnrj^ i) ag^rjv, the male fox ; or the gender may be 
indicated by the prefixed article, or by another adjective, e. g. ?; ^oig, the 
cow, o (XQXTog, the male hear. — Here belong, in the second place, the Masc. 
names of persons in the PI., which include the Fem., e. g. ol yovug, the pa- 
rents, ol Tialdeg, the children, liberi (sons and daughters). 

II. Determination of Gender by the Endings. 

1. The difference between the Masc. and Fem. gender is de- 
finitely developed in the adjectives and substantives of the first 
Dec. only, the characteristic of the Masc. being cr, of the Fem. 
cc or r], e. g. dixai-a, aiaxQ-ci, iiaX-rj, 6 veavia-g, ^ q)cov-ij. But in 
substantives of the second and third Declensions, the t^vo gen- 
ders are determined only by the signification, the final o being 
common to both genders, e. g. o koqu^ and i] cplo^, 6 loyog and ^ 
voGog, etc. Still, this a, which is the sign of the Masc. and 
Fem. genders, is often omitted, as wdll be seen in the third Dec, 
e. g. hfiriv instead of h^8vg, Gen. hjxiv-og, 6 rj ai&rjo instead of 
aid-eQg, Gen. al'&sQ-og. Comp. §§ 16, 3, and 20, 3. 



§§41, 42.] NUMBER, CASE AND DECLENSION. FIRST DEC. 57 

2. The Neuter gender is characterized by exhibiting the naked 
stem, e. g. Masc. fit'Xd^^ instead of iitlavg, Gen. fitldv-og, Neut. 
fteldv. Often, however, for the sake of euphony, the pure stem 
undergoes a change, as will be pointed out in the third Dec. 
This subject will be further treated under the particular declen- 
sions. 



§41. Number, Case and Declension. (228—230.) 

1. The Greek has, in addition to the Sing, number, which 
expresses unity, and the PL, which expresses plurality, a parti- 
cular number for duality, namely, the Dual. 

2. The Greek has five Cases, namely, 

(1) Nominative, the case of the subject; 

(2) Genitive, the whence-case ;* 

(3) Dative, the where-case ; 

(4) Accusative, the whither-case ; 

(5) Vocative, the case of direct addi-ess. 

Remark. The Nom. and Voc. are called casus recti, direct cases, the 
others, casus obliqui, oblique cases. Substantives and adjectives of the Neu- 
ter gender have the same form in the Nom., Ace. and Voc. of the three 
numbers. The Dual has only two forms for cases, one for the Nom., Ace. 
and Voc, the other for the Gen. and Dat. 

3. There are in the Greek three different ways of inflecting 
substantives, distinguished as the First, Second and Third De- 
clensions. 



§ 42. First Decle7ision.-\ (231.) 

The first declension has four endings, « and r^ feminine ; dg 
and rig masculine. 

* See a fuller statement under the Cases in the Syntax, § 268 seq.— Tr. 

t The following " Remarks on the Formation of the Cases," are trans- 
lated from the Lai'ger Greek Grammar of Kiihner. — Tr. 

1. The Nominative Singular. The Thu-d Declension is, undoubtedly, 
the oldest and the original form. Subsequently, the two other declensions 
were developed from it with few alterations ; and the three declensions are so 
distinguished from each other, that words whose stems end in a conso- 
nant, or In the vowels, I, v, are inflected according to the Third Declen- 
sion ; but those, whose stems end in a, according to the First Declension ; 



58 



FIRST DECLENSION. 



[H2. 



Endinpa. 




Singular. 


riural. 


Dual. 


Nom. 


a 


a 


or 71 


dg or 7]g 


ai 


d 


Gen. 


ng 


dg 


r^g 


ov 


CJV 


aiv 


Dat. 


V 


d 


V 


« V 


uig 


Uiv 


Ace. 


av 


av 


t^v 


av ifP 


ug 


d 


Voc. 


d 


d 


V' 


a r/, a. 


(U. 


a. 



Remark. The original ending of the Dat. PI. was ^t.(Ti{v\ as in the se- 
cond Dec. iff i'{v\ e. g. dUaiai,, ralai, xafxnaTai, Stolen, (Tjniy.QolaL, a/a&dlai. 
This form is also found in the Attic poets, and is not foreign even to 
prose, at least to that of Plato. 

and, finally, those whose stems end in o, according to the Second Dec. 
Stems in 8 are not foimd. It is very probable, that in the original develop- 
ment of the language, all substantives had but one form of declension for 
both genders, and that the forms of the fii'st and second declensions, which 
denote the gender, a [rj) and ag [rjg], and og, are wholly foreign to substan- 
tives, and belong exclusively to adjectives. Now the form of the fii-st and 
second declensions is precisely that which occurs in adjectives of the three 
genders, and, besides, in veiy many substantives of these declensions, the 
adjective meaning is not easily to be mistaken, e. g. xogog and xoqt), lad and 
lass, S-iog and &sd, god and goddess, dovXog and dovXrj, etc. 

2. The Genitive Singular. The characteristic of the Gen. Sing, is g pre- 
ceded by 0, thus og, e. g. xogn^, wQa^-og (in Sanscrit, 5, sya, as and as). 
In the feminmes in a and ?j of the first Dec, the vowels a and ri coalesce 
with the ending og, and form ag or rig, e. g. oiyoQU-og = uyofjug, liyv^-og = 
Tsxvrjg. In the second Dec. and in masculines of the fii'st Dec. ending in 
ag and rjg, the o- disappears from the ending og, and o is appended to the 
stem-vowel «, and is contracted with it, e. g. X6yo~og, l6yo-o = loyov, vsavlag. 
Gen. vsttvla-og, vmvla-o = vmvlov. The Thessalian Gen. of the second 
Dec. has t before the ending, e. g. loyoio, like quojus [cujus), illius, solius, 
istius. The g is still found in the Dor. dialect m the Gen. of the pronouns, 
t^oL'c, ijxsog, ey,svg, riog, Ttvg, etc., instead of sfiso, ffjov, aio, gov. 

Remark 1. The ending oio corresponds to the Sanscrit Gen. ending m 
s]a (tlie Indian « is equivalent to the Greek o), which have the masculines 
and neuters in as and in dm, whose stem ends in a, thus loy6-<no, jexvo-aio 
= XoyoLo, liy.voLo = loyov, livov, zolo, Indian ta-sia, BoQta-ffio, Boqeu-lo, 
Boged-o, noliiu-o-io == noXlraio, noliido, Att. noVtxov, Dor. nolltd. The 
accentuation oiloyoLO instead of Ao/oto, noUxaio, nolhdo, instead of noXi- 
Tolo, noXiiao, is analogous to the accentuation of evvoia mstead of iivola, 
uXij&sia instead of aXrjd^sla. 

3. Dative Singular. The characteristic of the Dat. Sing, is i, e. g. xo- 
gay.-i, ayoqa-L = ayoqa, loyo-i = Ao/w ; so still in adverbs of place in oi, 
e. g. nv&ol, oi'y.oL, and in the pronouns, e'liol, col, ol, quoi{cui). In the Com- 
mon Language, the o of the second Dec. is lengthened into w, e. g. Xoyoj. 

Rem. 2. The Greek differs altogether in the inflection of the Sing, and 



§ 43.1 NOUNS OF THE FEMININE GENDER. 59 



§43. 1, Nouns of the Feminine Gender. (239.) 

1. (a) The Nom. ends in d or «, and the a remains in all 
the cases, if it is preceded by (>, the vowel c, or t, e. g. x^(>"» 
land^ uh'a,form, cocpla, ivisdom^ XQ^^'^y utility^ dvoia, benevolence ; 
here also belong the contracts in a, see No. 2, e. g. iivd. Some 

PI. Dative from the other languages of the Indo-Germanic family, in which 
the Dat. Sing, ends in a long vowel, in the Indian in e [ae] and m, in Lat. l. 
The Greek Dat. corresponds rather to the tidian Locative, both in the Sing. 
I, and in the PI. su or dsu (Greek ct, «o"t, l(ji\ e. g. pat, pes, novg, nod-6g, 
Locative Smg. pati, in pede, nod-l, Loc. PI. patsU, nod-al, noal or nodeai, 
datri, 8ou]q, datiisu, doTijQcn. The Loc. form of the original language has 
been accordingly altered in the Greek to the Dat. form, since the Dat., at 
the same time, performs the office of the Locative. 

4. Accusative Singular. The characteristic of the Ace. Sing, is v, e. g. 
^ovv, ygavv, vXv, Xlv, noXiv, i/dyv, ayogdv, jsxvrjv, Xoyov. The v corres- 
ponds to the Lat., Sanscrit and Zend m in the Accusative [gin, the moun- 
tain, Ace. ginm), but which in Greek must be changed to v, since the lan- 
guage does not admit ^ at the end of a word. But when the stem ends in 
a consonant, the Ace. iu Sanscrit ends in dm, e. g. miid, peace, Ace. mv.ddm. 
Li Greek, the Ac-c. of such substantives must, consequently, end in av, e. g. 
naiEQav,patrem, Sans, pitdrdm ; but the v is omitted, and the a only, suffices 
to denote the Ace, e. g. najsQu. 

5. The Vocative Singulai\ The form of the Voc. Sing, is commonly 
like that of the stem, e. g. ^ov, dalfiov, tkxkq, if the laws of euphony per- 
mit. The first Dec. forms the Voc. Fem. like the Nom. In the second 
Dec. the Voc. is either like the Nom., or has the form of the stem, still, so 
that the fuller o is changed into the weaker s. 

6. Nominative Plural. The characteristic of the Nom. PI. is eg, yet it 
retains this letter only ia the thu'd Dec, e. g. xoQay.-sg. In the first and 
second declensions, the g is omitted, the s is changed into i, and coalesces 
with the stem-vowels a and 0, and forms ai and ot. The iEol. dialect still 
shows these contractions in the second Dec. by the accent., e. g. q)do(T6(poi, 
MsvddoL, nwlov^ivoi, y.alovfiivoi, dcoQOVfisi>oi. 

7. Genitive Plural. The characteristic of the Gen. PI. is cov (originally, 
perhaps, ectojv, like the old Lat. erum, e. g. lapiderum, regerum], e. g. yoQccx- 
wv. In the first and second declensions, this ending coalesces with the 
stem-vowels « and 0, and forms ojv, e. g. Ti^d-oov JEoh, 7itjs-o}v Ion., ti- 
ixbjv Att. ; loyo-MV = Xoycav. The fii'st Dec. still shows the contraction by 
the accent, and in the second Dec, the Doric writers, except Pindar, often 
have the circumflexed ending, e. g. olxojv, avy.uv, tovtojv, from oiyog, aiyov, 
ovxog. 

8. Dative Plural. The characteristic of the Dat. PI. is eg (characteristic 
of the PI.) and t or lv (the characteristic of the Dat. Sing.), thus fo-t [v), 
e. g. §iki-i(jaiv, xvv-sai ; so ^Eol. dfifxicnv instead of i^fxiaiv, '^yfiv. The At- 



60 NOUNS OF THE FEMININE GENDER. [§43. 

substantives in a, e. g. d},aXd, war-cry, and some proper names, 
e. g. ^AvdQOfieddy ^r]8d, FtXa, <DiXofii^Xd, Gen. -ag, Dat. -«, Ace. -av. 

Remark 1. Tlio following words, whose stem ends in ^, take the ending 
7j instead of a, y.6(ji], maiden, xoQorj, cheek, 8s(jtj, neck, uddgr], water-grud ; the 
t] tlien remains through all the cases of the Sing. If another vowel, as c or 
I, precedes, the Nom. and all the cases of the Sing, liave r}, c. g. vncotj, cfvi], 
<Txtv/j, ^uu} ; exceptions are noa, grass, xqou, color, (ttou, porch, yi'u, field, at- 
xva, gourd, xagva, walnut-tree, skua, olive-tree, dXojUjthreshing-Jloor, Navaixua. 

(b) The Nom. ends in a, but the a remains only in the Ace. 
and Voc. ; and in the Gen. and Dat., it is changed into »/, if the 
a is preceded by X, XX, a, aa, (zz), f, J, i/;. 

Rem. 2. A commonly occurs when v precedes ; though t] is often found, 
as is always the case iii the suffix avrrj, e. g. tvcpgoavvrj, also d^olvrj, nQifivr) 
and TiQV^va, nslvt] and neiva. 

(c) In the remaining cases, the Nom. ends in r], which re- 
mains throughout the singular. 

2. If a is preceded by £ or a, ta is contracted in some words 
into rj, and da into d in all the cases. The final syllable remains 
circumflexed in all the cases. 

tic writers reject s before civ, e. g. ^iXtai, y.vgl, xoga^i, ri^tv, vfuv. In the 
first and second declensions, the s is changed into i, thus iai (Sans, ischu), 
S-VQr](TL{v), X6yoi(n{v). 

9. Accusative Plural. The characteristic of the Ace. PI. is y or « (cha- 
racteristic of the Ace. Sing.) and c: (characteristic of the PL), thus vg or a?, 
but the V before g is changed into «, thus ag, e. g. y.l-g, Ace. PI. xl-vg = xt- 
ag, ix^vg, Ace. PL Ix&v-vg = l/^v-ag, naTSQ-ag. In the first and second 
declensions, the v disappears, but the pi'eceding short vowel is lengthened, 
e. g. Ts/vavg = Tsxvdg, as ^ilavg = fiiXdg, Xo/ovg = Xoyovg (comp. ivmovau 
from rvmovdi). In the JEol-Doric dialect, an i is inserted as a compensa- 
tion for V omitted, e. g. jsyvaig, loyoig. 

10. Dual. The characteristic of the Nom., Ace. and Yoc. Dual is s, 
which in the first and second declensions coalesces wdth a and o, and 
forms « and w, the characteristic of the Gen. and Dat. is iv. In the In- 
dian, the characteristic is du, which in the Veda dialect is often abridged 
into a, and commonly in the Zend dialect into « or « ; this a con'esponds 
to the Greek s ; thus «V5^£ is in Veda nar-ci, and in the Zend nar-a. The o 
in the Gen. and Dat. of the third Dec, oiv, seems to be a mere imion- 
vowel, comp. xorvlridov-o-cfLr. 



§44. 



MASCULINE NOUNS. FIRST DECLENSION. 



61 






Paradigms, 
a. T] through all the cases. 







Justice. 


Honor. 


Opinion. 


Fig-tree. 


Sing. Nom, 
Gen. 
Dat. 


T7jg 

1 


■ di x-rj 
dix-j]g 
dix-ri 


riiirj 

rifirjg 

rifiri 


yvcofXT] 

yvcojAT^g 

yvcojir} 


6vx-{ta)ri 

Gvx-rjg 

avx-y 


Ace. 


trjv 


dix-t]v 


rifi7]v 


yvc>}fj.7]V 


avx-Tjv 


Voc. 


(O 


dlX-l] 


rifiT] 


yvcofitj 


6VX-TJ 


Plur. Nom. 


at 


8 IX- at 


rtf^al 


yvwfiai 


cvx-al 


Gen. 


TCOV 


dix-av 


rifiojv 


yvcoficov 


OVX-0)V 


Dat. 


raig 


dix-aig 


rifiaig 


yvcofxatg 


avx-aig 


Ace. 


rag 


8ix-ag 


rifiag 


yvM^iag 


ovx-ag 


Voc. 


CO 


dix-ai 


rijiai 


yvcofiai 


avx-ai 


Dual. N. A. V. 


ra 


dix-d 


rijia 


yvcofid 


avx-d 


G.andD. 


raiv 


dix-aiv 


rifiaiv 


yvoj^iaiv 


ovx-aiv. 





b. a 


through I 


ill the cases. 


c. 


a G. rjg. 








(a) long «. 






b) short a. 






Shadow. 


Country. 


Talent. 


Hammer. 


Muse. 


Lioness. 


S.N. 


V 


(jxi-a 


XCOQa 


fiv-{da)d 


ocpvQci 


MovGa 


Isaivd 


G. 


rrjg 


axL-ag 


Xcoqag 


liv-ag 


oq)VQag 


MovGTig 


Xeaivrig 


D. 


n 


Gxi-a 


XCOQa 


liv-a 


acfVQct 


MOVGT} 


XeaivTj 


A. 


rrjv 


axi-dv 


XcoQav 


liv-av 


acpvQav 


MovGav 


Xiaivdv 


V. 


03 


axi-d 


XCOQa 


f^v-a 


acpvQa 


MOVGCC 


Xsaivd 


P.N. 


al 


6X1- ai 


Xc^Qai. 


fiv-ac 


GCpVQai 


MovGai 


Xsaivai 


G. 


rcov 


(TXl-COV 


XCOQCOV 


liv-cov 


6q)VQCOV 


MOVGCOV 


Xeaivojv 


D. 


raig 


cxi-aig 


XcoQaig 


liv-aig 


GcpvQaig 


MovGaig leaivaig \ 


A. 


rag 


Gxiag 


Xo^Qag 


liv-ag 


GCpvQag 


MovGag 


Xeaivdg 


V. 


CO 


axi-ai 


XcoQai 


liv-ai 


GCpVQai 


MovGai 


Xiaivai 


Dual. 


ra 


6 XI- a 


XCOQd 


fiv-d 


GcpvQd 


MovGa 


Xsaivd 




raiv 


axi-aiv 


XcoQaiv 


liv-aLV 


GcpvQaiv 


MovGaiv 


Xeaivaiv- 



§44. \1. Nouns of the Masculine Gender. (233.) 

The Gen. of masculine nouns ends in ov ; those which end 
in ag retain the a in the Dat., Ace. and Voc, and those which 
end in ^? retain the rj in the Ace. and Dat. Sing. The Voc. of 
nouns in -rig ends in a, (1) all in -r?/^, e. g. ro^ori^g, Voc. 
ro^ordy TiQocpi^rrjgy Voc. TZQOcpijrd-j (2) all substantives in -ri? 
9 



62 



MASCULINE NOUNS. FIRST DECLENSION. 



[§44. 



composed of a substantive and a verb, e. g. yea^eTQTjg^ Voc. yecofit- 
tgd, fivQoncoXtjg, a salve-seller, Voc. iivQonwld ; (3) national names 
in -r^g, e. g. TltQa^g, a Persian, Voc. TltQau. — All other nouns in 
-i]g have the Voc. in ?/, c. g. TltQoijg, Perses, Voc. TltQar^. — The 
PI. of Masc. nouns does not differ from that of Fem. — The re- 
marks on contracted Fem. nouns, § 43, 2, apply to Masc. nouns 
contracted from -tag, e. g. 'EQfiijg, §OQQug. In ^oQtug, the ta is 
contracted into a, and not into ^, since q precedes, § 43, 1, (a). 
The doubling of the q in ^ooQcig is merely accidental. 

Remark 1. Contrary to the rule given, § 43, 1, compounds in fiiiQtjg end 
in 7j^ instead of ag ; so Hkewise several proper names, e. g. the ending of 
JliXonldag and yevvadag, a noble, is in -ag instead of -Tjg. 

Rem. 2. Several masculine nouns in -dg have the Doric Gen. in «, name- 
ly, naTQalolag, firji^aXoiug, patricide, matricide, OQvi&o&i'jQag, fotvler ; also 
several proper names, particularly those which are Doric or foreign, e. g. 
"Tkag, Gen."Tka, Sv.onag, -a, "Avvli^ug, -a, Svllag, -d ; (the pure Greek, and 
also several of the celebrated Doric names, e. g. 'Ao/vrug, Aitavlbug, ^Ena- 
fifivcovdug, IlavfTavlag commonly have ov) ; finally, contracts in ag, e. g. 
^ogqag, derived from ^ogsag. 



Paradigms 





Citizen, 


Mercuiy. 


Youth. 


Fowler. 


Boreas. 


Sing. N. 


7T0ltTt]g 


'EQfi{sag)7Jg 


vEavidg 


oQVi&o&iqQdg 


^ooodg 


G. 


ttoUtov 


'Eq[aov 


vEaviov 


OQVi&Oi^^Qd 


^OOQd 


D. 


TToXirr] 


'Eqiixi 


veavia 


OQwd-od^riQcl 


^OOQd 


A. 


TtoXlTT/V 


EQfAijV 


veanuv 


OQVir&o&rjodv 


^onodv 


V. 


TzoXlzd 


EqiiTi 


veana 


OQVld-O-d-rjQd 


^OQQd. 


Plur. N. 


TToXTzai 


'EQiial 


veaviai 


OQVl&O-d'TJQai 




G. 


Ttohziav 


'Eq^kov 


vsaviojv 


OQVl&od^rjQWV 




D. 


TtoXkaig 


EQfA,aTg 


vsaviatg 


OQVid-od^riQaig 




A. 


TioXirdg 


'EQjAdg 


veaviag 


OQVi&od^rjfjdg 




V. 


TioXizai 


'EQiial 


veaviai 


OQVi&o&rJQai 




Dual. 


TioXizd 


'EQfJLd 


veavid 


6Qri&od-/jQd 






TToXizaiv 


'EQfialv 


vsanaiv 


OQVld-O&iiQUlV 





Rem. 3. The Ionic ending of the Gen. -fco of Masc. nouns in -tj?, § 21], is 
retained also in the Attic dialect m some proper names, e. g. OaXico fi-om 
OaXrig, Ti]Qeo3 from Ti]Qi]g. — The contract ^og^ag, is also found in the Attic 
■writers in the uncontracted form, thus, ^ogiug X. An. 5. 7, 7. PI. Phaedr. 229, 
b. ^oQsov Th. 3, 23. ^ogiav 3, 4. 

Rem. 4. The ending i]g occurs, also, in the third Dec. To the first Dec. 
belong (a) proper names in -/(57;g and -adr,g, e. g. Oovy.i8idrig,''ATQsldrjg, from 
^Atqs and Idrjg, MiXziudrjg, also the gentUe noims, e. g. ^nagiiaTrjg; (b) de- 
rivatives from verbs in ^zrjg, e. g. noii^TTjg fi-om noisa ; (c) compounds form- 



§ 45.] QUANTITY AND ACCENTUATION. FIRST DECLENSION. 63 

cd by the union of a substantive with a verb, or with a substantive of the 
tliird Dec. e. g. TiaidoTgijStjg, ^ifihonMXrjg, UQX^dtxrjg. 



§ 45. Quantity and Accentuation of the fir st D e- 

dens ion. (234.) 

a. Quantity. 

1. The Nom. ending a is short in all words, which have the Gen. in -tjs ; 
but long in those which have the Gen. in -«?, e. g. jiTfAsw, crxta, aocplcc, nni~ 
diid, ;^^«ta, XQ'^^'^t noa, rifisQcc, ylridu, ulaXu, etc. ; the same is true of the 
Fern, ending of adjectives, e. g. iXsv&sQoi, dLxald. 

Exceptions . 

(a) Dissyllabic, and some Polysyllabic, names of places, have -a i d, e. g. 
^lailaia, nXomxia; 

(b) Trissyllables and Polysyllables have -s i a, e. g. aXii^sia^ Mi]8Ha, 
^atrlXsia, queen, yXvxsla, except abstracts from verbs in -sv oj, e. g. 
^aaiXdd, kingdom, dovXiid, servitude, from ^aatXevej, dovXsvcj ; 

(c) the names and designation of females, etc. in -rgia, have -t «, e. g. 
ipdXiQLa, a female musician, words in -via, e. g. fxvla, xnvcpvia, the nu- 
meral ^iu, and, finally, some poetic words ; 

(d) Trissyllables and Polysyllables have -0 1 «, e. g. evvolu, dvoia ; 

(e) words whose penult is lengthened by a diphthong, (except av), by 
V, or by q^, have -qd, e. g. nuQa, ^a/aiga ; yecpvQK, acpvga', niggd ; 
exceptions are, szalgd, naXahtgd, Al&ga, 0aldga, aoXXiga. 

2. The Voc. ending a is always short in nouns in -r,g ; but always long in 
nouns in -dg, e. g. noXtzd from noXhrig, vsavld from vsaviag. In Fem. nouns 
in -a and -a, the Voc. is like the Nom. 

3. The Dual ending a is always long, e. g. Movad from Movaa. 

4. The Ace. ending av is like the Nom., e. g. Momdv, x<^Qdv from Mov- 
ad, xojgd. 

5. The ending ag is always long, e. g. lag igani^dg from Tgdneto^, vm- 
vldg, Tovg vtavidg, ttJ? olaldg, rag olxiag. 

b. Accentuation. 

6. The accent remains on the tone-syllable of the Nom., as long as the 
laws of accentuation permit, § 30. 

Exceptions, 

(a) The Voc. Sianora from dEanotrjg, lord; 

(b) The Gen. PI. always has cov circumflexed* on the last syllable of the 

* This is caused by the conti'action of the old form doov or icav. — Tr. 



64 



SECOND DECLENSION. 



[§46. 



first Dec, e. g. Xeaivoiv from Xeaiva, vtavidv from veavlag. — But the 
substantives, xQ^i(TTr}g, creditor, uapvr], anchov}/, iii^aiai, monsoons, and 
Xloi'vriq, wild-boar, arc exceptions ; in the Gen. PI. they remain Par- 
oxytones, thus /^tjatcuv, acpvoiv. 

Reaiark. On the Adjectives, see § 75. 

7. The accent of the Nom. is changed, according to the quantity of the 
final syllable, thus : 

(a) The Oxytones become Perispomena in the Gen. and Dat of the three 
numbers, e. g. Tinriq, -J, -wv, -aiv, -alg ; this holds, also, in the second 
Dec. ; e. g. S^eog, -ov, -w, -wv, -o2v ; 

(b) The Paroxytones with a short penult remain so through all the cases, 
except the Gen. PL, which is always circumflexed on the last s}llable ; 
on the contrary, Paroxjtones with a long penult become Properis- 
pomena, if the last syllable is short, which takes place in the Nom. 
PL and Voc. Sing, in a of Masc. nouns in -r^g, e. g. yvojjjr}, yvojfiai, but 
yvo)fxb)v ; nolln^g, noXlia, noXlxai, but noXixiay ; on the contrary', 5i xi;, 
5ixat, but diaajv ; 

(c) Properispomena become Paroxytones, if the last syllable is long, e. g. 
Movaa, Mov(jr}g ; 

(d) Proparoxytones become Pai*ox5l;ones, if the last syllable is long, e. g. 
XiuLva, Xsalvrig, 



§46. Second Declension. (237.) 

The Second Declension has Uvo endings, og and ov ; nouns 
in -og are mostly masculine, but often feminine, § 50, nouns in 
-ov are neuter. Fem. diminutive proper names in -ov are an 
exception, e. g. ?/ rXvAsgioVj § 40, 3. 





End 


mgs 


' 








Singular. 


Plural. 


Dual. 


Nom. 


og ov 


01 




a 


(0 


Gen. 


ov 




(OV 




oiv 


Dat. 


V 




oig 




oiv 


Ace. 


OV 


ovg 




a 


0) 


Voc. 


og and s ov. 


Oi 




a. 


03. 



Remark 1. On the form of the Dat. PL oi(ji{v), see § 42, Rem. 



H7.) 



CONTRACTION OF THE SECOND DECLENSION. 



65 



Paradigms. 





Word. 


Island. 


God. 


Messenger. 


Fig. 


S.N. 


l6y-og 


tJ vtjaog 


d-eog 


uyyeXog 


ro ovy.ov 


G. 


rov Xoy-ov 


ryg vtjcov 


rov 'O'eov 


dyyeXov 


rov avxov 


D. 


t(p Xoy-cp 


I'd vijacp 


TO) S^ec^ 


dyyeXqt 


rep GVAO) 


A. 


rov Xoy-ov 


rrjv vrjaov 


rov -d-EOv 


dyyeXov 


ro 6vy,ov 


V. 


CO X6y-e 


CO VT]6S 


CO '&£6g 


dyyeXs 


CO ovxov 


P.N. 


ol Xoy-oi 


al vijaoi 


ol S-eoL 


dyyeXoi 


rd av'Aa 


G. 


rcov Xcy-(ov 


T(ov mjacov 


rav d^mv 


dyytXcov 


rojv avxojv 


D. 


rolg Xoy-oig 


raig vrjooig 


roig S^eoig 


dyyeXoig 


roig avyioig 


A. 


rovgXoy-ovg 


rag vi]6ovg 


rovg&Eovg 


dyytXovg 


ra Gvxa 


V. 


CO Xoy-oi 


CO vri<50i 


CO d-EOl 


dyyeXoi 


CO Gvna 


D. 


Tco Xoy-co 


rd vri6(o 


roo i9"6oo 


dyysXco 
dyysXoiv 


rco ovxco 




roiv Xoy-oiv 


raiv vijaoiv 


toiv -d-eoLV 


roiv (JVKoiv. 



Rem. 2._The Voc. of words in -og commonly ends in e, though often in 
-0?, e. g. (a (jpt'Ae, and (o cplXog ; always c5 d^eoq. 



§47. Contraction of the Second Declension. (238.) 
1. A small number of substantives, where an o or an « pre- 
cedes the case-ending, suffer contraction in the Attic dialect, 
§9. 

Paradigms. 





Navigation. 


Circumnavigation. 


Bone. 


S.N. 


nXoog nXovg 


TTEQiTzXoog TieQiTtXovg 


ro oartov ocrovv 


G. 


nXoov TtXov 


TZSQlTzXoOV TtEQlTlXoV 


oorsov oarov 


D. 


TzXoqt 7lX(^ 


TtSQlTlXoCp 7T8Ql7tX(p 


oarsq) oarcp 


A. 


nXoov nXovv 


TiEQiTiXoov mqinXovv 
TZeQiTzXos TteqiTiXov 


oaraov oarovv 


V. 


nXos nXov 


oareov oarovv 


P.N. 


nXooi TtXoi 


TlSQlTzXoOi TTEQlTlXoi 


06ria ocrd 


G. 


TiXocov TlXoJV 


TZSQlTtXoCOV TteQlTlXmV 
TtEQlTtXoOig TTSQlTtXoig 


oarscov ocrcov 


D. 


nXooig nXoig 


oarsoig oaroig 


A. 


nXoovg nXovg 


ntQinXoovg mqmXovg 


oar 8 a oar a 


V. 


TiXooi nXoX 


mqinXooi tzeqitiXol 


oarsa oara 


D. 


nXom 7tX(o 


TtEQlTtXoCO TZEQLTlXm 


oarsm oarco 




nXooiv TtXoiv 


TTEQlTlXoOlV TTEQlTlXoiV 


oreoiv oaroiv. 



Only the following nouns are contracted in. this manner : o voog, vovg, the 
mind, o Qoog, govg, a stream, 6 /voog, x^ovg, down, o adeXqiidEog, -dovg, a ne- 
phew, -d^vyaigideog, -dovg, grandson, o dvsijJLadeog, -dovg, son of a sister^s child. 



66 



THK ATTIC SECOND DECLENSION. 



[§§48,49, 



Remark. Uncontractcd forms sometimes occur in the Attic dialect, though 
seldom in substantives, e. g. yoo), Plato, Prot. 344, a ; much oftener in ad- 
jectives. 

§48. The Attic Second Declension. (240.) 
Several words, substantives and adjectives, have the endings 
0)?, Masc. and Fern., and (ov, Neut., instead of og and ov, and 
retain the w through all the cases instead of the common vow- 
els and diphthongs of the second Dec, and place under the w 
an Iota subscript, where the regular form has o) or 01 ; thus, ov 
and a become co ; og, ov and ovg become cog, ov and cog ; ot, oig 
and oiv become cp, q)g and ojv ; — co, oj and cov remain unchanged. 
The Voc. is the same as the Nom. 

Paradigms. 





People. 


Table. 


Hare. 


Hall. 


Sing. N. 


Xs-cog 


7] naX-cog 


Xay-cog 


TO dvc6y8-cov 


G. 


Xe-c6 


nciX-co 


Xay-co 


avcoye-co 
dvcoye-cp 


D. 


Xa-^ 


:idX-cp 


Xay-^ 


A. 


Xe-cov 


ndX-cov 


Xay-cov 


avcoye-cov 


V. 


Xe-cog 


TidX-cog 


Xay-cog 


avcoye-cov 


Plur. N. 


Xe-cp 


KccX-cp 


Xay-cp 


dvcoye-co 


G. 


Xe-cov 


KciX-cov 


Xay-dov 


avcoye-cov 


D. 


Xs-cpg 


xaX-qjg 


Xay-cpg 


avcoys-cpg 


A. 


Xs-cog 


aaX-cog 


Xay-cog 


avcoye-co 


V. 


Xs-cp 


x(xX-cp 


Xay-op 


avcoye-co 


D.N.A.V. 


Xs-c6 


xaX-co 


Xay-c6 


dvc6ys-co 


G. and D. 


Xe-c^v 


y^dX-cpv 


Xay-qip 


avcoye-cov 



Remark 1. Some words of the Masc. and Fern, gender reject the v in 
the Ace. Sing., namely, o Xaycog, the hare, xov Xayaiv and Xaya, and common- 
ly rj £0)?, the dawn, rj aXtag, a threshing-Jloor, rj Ksuig, rj Kwg, 6 ^A&wg, v Tiag, 
and the adjectives a/riQcog, not old, inln'ki(og,full, vnsfj/gecag, guilty. 

Rem. 2. This Declension is termed Attic, because, if a word of this 
class has another form, e. g. Xsag and Xaoc, vsug and raog, MsviXecag and 
Msvikaog, the Attic writers are accustomed to select the form in -stag. On 
the expulsion of the long vowel in this declension, see § 16, 5. 



§49. Accentuation of the Sec 071 d Declension. 

(239—241.) 

1. The accent remains on the tone-syllable of the Nom. as long as the 
quantity of the final syllable permits ; the Voc. adsXcps from adsXcpog, bro- 
ther, is an exception. 



§ 50.] REMARKS ON THE GENDER OF THE ENDING og. 67 

2. The change of the accent is the same as in the first Dec, § 45, 7. The 
Gen. PI. is not uniformly a Perispomenon, as in the first Dec, since the 
accent retains the place which it has in the Nom. See the Paradigms. 

3. Excei)tions in the contract declensions, to the rules stated § 30, 2, 
are, (a) nXooj = nX (o, o<ns(o = o cr t m, instead of ttAw, o(JT(^ ; — (b) com- 
poimds and polysyllabic proper names, which retain the accent even on 
the penult, when as a circumflex it should be on the contracted syllable, 
e. g. 7iiQLTiX6-ov = 7i8Qi7ilov, iustcad of TtEQmXov, from mQinXooq = ns- 
glnXovg, IIelqi&o-ov = nsiQi&ov, instead of IIsiqi&ov, from nsLQi'&oog = 
IlEiQi&ovg ', also adjectives, e.g. svyo-ov = svvov, not evvov, from, svvoog 
= svvovg ; yet the accent is never removed to the antepenult, thus, ikqItiXol^ 
not niqmXoL, xaxovoi, not xaxovoL ; — (c) to y.dvaov = y. a v ovv, instead of 
xdvovvj basket ; — (d) similar words in -dtog = dovg, e. g. udsXifidEog = udtX- 
qtidovgf nephew, mstead of adtXqtidovg. All simple substantives and adjec- 
tives in -sog and -oog take the circumflex on the contracted syllable, hence 
xavovv, ddsXcpLdovg, xQvaovg fi-om ^gvas-og. 

4. In the Attic Dec. the Proparoxytones retain the acute accent on the 
antepenult through all the cases and numbers. See § 29, Rem. 5. The 
Oxj'tones in -hig retain the acute accent in the Gen. Sing., contraiy to § 45, 
7, (a), e. g. Xtco. The absoi-ption by w of o, the inflection-vowel of the Gen., 
accounts for this unusual accentuation, thus Xsco instead of Xem-o. 



§50. Remarks on the Gender of the Ending og- 

(242.) 

Substantives in ~og are regularly Masc. ; yet many are Fem. In addition 
to the names of lands, cities, islands, trees and plants, mentioned under the 
general rule in § 40, the following exceptions occur, which may be divided 
into general classes: 

(a) Substantives which denote certain products of trees and plants, e. g. 
?; txxvXog, acorn, rj ^dXavog, acorn, ?; ^vaaog, fine linen, o] doxog, a beam, 7} 
qd^dog, a staff; 

(b) Such as denote stones and earths, e. g. o '^ Xl&og, a stone, ?; Xl&og, par- 
ticularly a precious stone, rj ipi]q)og, a small stone, ?] ^dadvog, a touch-stone, t) ' f, 
i}XEy.TQog, dedrum, i] fj^aQay^og, a smaragdus, i] ^6jXog,me, i) yiipog, gypsum, 
9^ vuXog, glass, r] jhavog, chalk, ?) w^p'Uo?, day, t) nXlv&og, brick, t) aa^oXog, 
soot, ij y.ongog, mud; 

(c) Words which denote a hollow or cavity, e. g. 7; mgdonog, kneading- 
trough, f} TtL^wTog and v %r}X6g, a box, i] aogog, a coffin, rj Xrjvog, a unne-press, 
9; Xrjuv&og, an oil-flask, 7; y.dfi2vog, an oven, 1) (fXxiQia^og, a chest ; 

(d) Words which express the idea of a way, e. g. 7) 6d6g, a road, 7J afxa^t- 



I <■ 



- < 



68 



THIRD DECLENSION. 



[§§51,52. 



TO?, sc. odog, a carriage-road, ^ x^l^og and ^ axqanog, sc. odog, a foot-path, 
1] tdcpgog, a ditch ; 

(e) Many of the above substantives, were originally adjectives, and ap- 
pear as feminine nouns, because the substantives with which they proper- 
ly agree are feminine. There are also many others, e. g. 7; avXsiog, sc. S^v- 
Qu, house-door, rj avvSgog, sc. yij, thirsty land, desert, rj viog, sc. ;^wpof, a fallow 

fdd, Tj vijaog, from vsiv, sc. yi], an island, 7] diaXsxiog, sc. cpavi^, a dialed, 
17 diai^eTQog, sc. /Qa^fii}, diameter, etc. ; 

(f ) Several feminine nouns which stand alone, and hence specially to be 
noted, e. g. 1] voaog, sickness, ^ yva^og, jaw-hone, tj dgoaog, dew, tj firj^iv&og, 
twine ; 

(g) Some words which have a different meaning in different genders, 
e. g. o C^/og, yoke, ri ^vyog, balance, mnog, horse, ri mnog, mare, also cavalry, 
6 XM&og, pea, ^ Xixi&og, the yolk of an egg. 

Remark. On the diminutives in -ov, see § 40, 1, 3. 

§51. Third Declension. (244.) 

The third Declension has the following Case-endings : 





Singular. 


Plural. 


Dual. 


Nom. 

Gen. 

Dat. 

Ace 

Voc. 


g 

og 

I 

V and d 

mostly as the Nom. ; 


Neut. — 

Neut. — 
Neut.— 


Eg; Neut. a 

03V 

61 [v) 

dg; — d 

eg; — d. 


s 

oiv 

oiv 

B 
E. 



Remarks on the Case-endings. (245.) 

§52. A. Nominativ e . 
1. Masculine and Feminine nouns in the Nom. end in g, 
§ 40, II, e. g. j(o^«| instead of Koqayi-g, ^ Xaila^ instead of ^ai- 
Xan-g. Still, the laws of euphony in Greek do not always al- 
low the g to be annexed to the stem, but either reject it, or, as 
a compensation, lengthen the short final vowel of the stem, 
§ 16, 3. But, when the g is annexed to the stem, the usual 
changes, which the laws of euphony permit, § 20, occur in the 
stem ending in a consonant. 



♦">. 



§52. 



THIRD DEC. NOMINATIVE CASE. 



69 



2. In this manner all Masc. and Fern, nouns may be divided 
into three classes: 

(a) The first class includes such words as in the Nom. take 
s as characteristic of gender, e. g. 

' (pXf^-og 

aoQax-og 

> lct(i7i(xd-og 

'S i Y^yf^vT-og 

^ 8il(fiv-og 

^o-6g 

(b) The second class includes such words as in the Nomina- 
tive reject ? the characteristic of the gender, but as a compensa- 
tion, lengthen the short final vowel of the root, viz. £ or o into 
ri or CO, §§ 16, 3, and 20, 3, e. g* 



I. 


xoqan 
X(x^Jiad 




> 





cpXi^-g 

yoQixx-g 

XafiTidd-g 


(fXiifj (§ 20, 1.) 
KO^«|(§20, 1.) 
Xa^ndg (§ 20, 1.) 


yiynvx 

§6F{^ov 
JiF 


bov) 


"i 

o 


yiyavx-g ;///«? (§20, 2.) 
dek(piv-g dsX<ptg{§W, 2.) 
7] ^6F-g{bdv-s) /3or?,feo5(§25,2.) 
zJtF-g /Jig {§25, 2.) 



s 

02 



TlOlflSV 

Xeovt 
aidog 



o noifitjv 

6 [Xiojvx) Xi(ov 

[^Tj aidojg 



fnoLfiiv-og 
G XsovT-og 
O 1 (jr]TOo-og 



[_ ( aid6(7~og) aldo-og ; 

(c) The third class includes such words as in the Nomina- 
tive have the stem pure, since it neither assumes 9, the charac- 
teristic of the gender, nor lengthens its final vowel, e. g. 



S atwv 

a; < c o < c 

1^ dafiUQT 



' o d/jQ instead of S^i]Q-g 
" aloiv-g 
ot)Q(og '' 

^/] ddfxccQ ' 



S^r]Q-6g 
„ J albjv-og 
r]Q(aG-g O i {riQ03(T-og)riQ(x)-og 

docficcgT-g, ddfiagx l^du^agx-og. 



3. Neuters have their stem pure in the Nominative, § 40, II, 2. 
Yet the euphony of the Greek language does not permit a 
word to end in t. Hence, where this is the case, the t is either 
wholly rejected, as in the masculine Xsoov, Gen. Xiovr-og, or is 
changed into the corresponding consonant g, § 25, 5, e. g. 



niTtEQl. 




TO TlinSQl 


1 azXag 


S 


TO asXag 


^ j aw^ax 




TO (o-w^«t) o-w/ice 


[^xiqax 




TO (t£^«t) xigag 



0) ^ 

u 1 



TisTisQi-og or £-og 
(o-gAwcr-o?) csAa-o? 
(rct|UaT-og 
^T«^aT-o$ 

Remark. The stem nvQ is lengthened in the Nominative, contrary to the 
rule : to nvg, Gen. nvg-og. 

10 



70 THIRD DKC— DATIVE AND ACCUSATIVE CASES. [§53. 



§53. B. The remaining- Cases. (240,247.) 

1. The remaining cases, with few exceptions, which will be 
particularly ti-eated in the sequel, are formed by appending the 
case-endings to the stem, e. g. 

Stem xogax Nom. xoga^ Gen. xogax-og Pi. Nom. xogax-ig. 

2. In forming the Dative plural by appending the syllable 
ci to such stems as end with a consonant, the same changes 
take place, as have been noticed in the Nominative of these 
words, §52, 2, (a), e. g. 

(fXe^-al = (phipl xoQax-dL = xoQa^L Xa^nad-ai = Xafindat 

The following principles should also be noted : 

3. (a) The Accusative singular has the form in v with mas- 
culines and feminiiies in -iSj -vg, -avg and ^ovg, whose stem ends 
in -h -V, -av and -ov, e. g. 

Stein noXt Nom. noXtg Acc.noXtv Stein ^otqv 'Nom.^oTQvg Acc^otqw 

vaF vav vdFgvavg vuFvvavv ^oF ^ov ^oFg ^ovg ^oFv^ovv. 

But the Accusative has the form in «, when the stem ends 

in a consonant, e. g. q)le^, q)Xi\pg, cpXe^a ■ — 'aoqux, xo^a|, xoQax-a 

— XafxTiad, Xa^Tidg, Xafi7zdd-a. 

(b) Yet barytoned substantives in -ig and -^vg, of two or more 

syllables, whose stems end with a Tau-mute, in prose, have 

only the form in v, e. g. 

Stem iQid Nom. sgig Ace. egiv poetic sgid-a 

oQvid" ogvig oqviv " ogviS^-u 

XOQV& XOQVg XOQVV " XOQV^-a 

Xagt^t xdgig /a^iy " xdgLX-a. 

There are but few exceptions in prose, e. g. rigyi^a, X. H. 3. 1, 
15, and elsewhere, instead of Fegyiv from ^ F^qyig ; x^Q''^^ in- 
stead of /«(>tj^, lb. 3. 5, 16. rdmda, X. An. 7. 3, 27. The goddess 
Xdqig is always VvTitten Xdg ir a in the Ace. 

Remark 1. Oxytones of one or more sjllables have only the regular 
form in a, e. g. {nod) novg, Ace. ncda ; {iXnid) iXnig, Ace. iXnl8-a ; {^Xa- 
(ivd) x^oi^T^g, Ace. ;^>La/ii;5-a. The monosyllable xXsig, Gen. xXsi,d-6g, con- 
trary to the rule, usually has xXuv in the Accusative, instead of xXnda. 



§53.] THIRD DECLENSION VOCATIVE CASE. 71 

4. The Vocative is like the stem, e. g. daificov, Gen. dai^iov-ogt 
Voc. dar^ov. Still, euphony does not always allow the stem- 
form to appear. Hence the following principles should be 
noted : 

(1) The Vocative is like the stem in the following cases : 

(a) When the final vowels of the stem are lengthened in the 
Nominative, viz. s and o into rj and w, the short stem-vowel 
reappears in the Vocative, e. g. 

dnlfiwv Gen. 8al^ov~oq Voc. dat^iov 

ysQcop ysQovT-og yigov instead of ysQOVJ 

fii}Tr]Q firjtsQ-og ^iJTSQ 

^'(oxQdirjg ^caxQotTs-og mstead of sa -og ^wHQaitg. 

Exceptions. Oxytoned substantives — not adjectives — retain the length- 
ened vowel, e. g. 

noi{ii>]v Gen. noi}iiv-og Voc. jioi(n^v — not noiixiv, 

except the tlii-ee oxytones, najrjg, avriQ and dariq, which, in the Vocative, 
take again the short stem-vowel £, but with the accent drawn back, e. g. 
di TidrsQ, avsQ, daeg. — The three substantives, ''AnolXoov, Gen. -oovog, II o- 
asidwv, -oJvog, and (T(x)T'/]q, -ijgog, according to the analogy of the sub- 
stantives mentioned under (a), shorten, in the Vocative, contrary to the 
rule, the origmal long vowel of the root, w and rj, but also with the accent 
di'awn back, thus, 

(W *'A7ToXXoV, Il6(TSl80Vj (TaT8Q. 

According to this analogy, even 'llQa}iX{ir])7]g, stem 'HgaAseg, is shortened, 
in the Vocative, by the later vvriters, into "HgaicXEg. 

(b) Adjectives in -a?, -a^o?, and also adjectives — not partici- 
ples — see Rem. 5, whose stem ends in vt, have, in the Vocative, 
a form like the Neuter or the stem, e. g. 

HiXag^ Gen. av-og Neut, and Voc. (iiXav 

XoiQisig svT-og xaQiev instead of ;^a§t£>'T, § 52, 3. 

So substantives in -dg, Gen. -avrog, have the Vocative in -ccv, 
instead of -avr, § 52, 3, e. g. 

ylyag Gen. avx-og Voc. ylyav instead of ylyavx 
KaXxoig avT-og KdXxuv 

Ai'oig avT-og Aidv. 

Rem. 2. Some substantives in this class, with the t reject at the same 
time the v also, but as a compensation, lengthen the short a, e. g. ^'AxXdg, 
Gen. avT-o?, Voc. ^'AiXd., IloXvddixdg, Voc. IloXvdd^d. 

(c) Substantives in -ig, -vg, -avg, -evg and -ovg, whose stems 



72 THIRD DECLENSION VOCATIVE CASE. [§53. 

end in -t, -v, -av, -sv and -ov, have the Vocative like the root, 
since they reject the g of the Nominative, e. g. 

^avjig, Voc. /iu'yrt ; Tigia^v;, YocTigia^v; /nvg, Yoc.fiv; crvg, Voc. av; 
Xlg, Voc. AT; ygavgj \oc. ygav, ^uaiXevg, \oc. ^uadtv', ^ovg, Voc. /5oD. 

The word Tiaig, Gen. naid-og, has Tzai in the Vocative, since, by 
rejecting the 8, [comp. the Ace. of substantives in v, under No. 
3. (b)], the stem seems to end in a vowel. 

Rem. 3. Substantives in -ig, -vg, -ovg, whose stems end in a consonant, 
have the Vocative like the Nominative, e. g. w ogvig, xogvg, novg. Yet 
some in -ig, Gen. -Lvog, have the Vocative hke the stem, e. g. cu ddcpiv, 
also ddcpig, fi'om delcplg, Gen. -lvog. 

(d) The Vocative is like the stem in all words, which, in the 
Nominative, have their stem pure, e. g. -^iiQ, ulcovy etc. 

(2) The Vocative, according to the laws of euphony, is not like 
the stem, but like the Nominative, in most words, whose stems 
end in one of the consonants, which, according to the laws of 
euphony in the Greek language, cannot stand as the final letter, 
§25, 5, since after the stem-consonant is dropped, the stem 
frequently cannot be distinguished, e. g. from o cpcog, Gen. 
q:(0T6g, the Vocative would be (f(o instead of (pcot, from riWj 
Gen. nq:-6gy Voc. n instead of riq:, from occo^, Gen. oaoy.-ogj 
Voc. cfaQ instead of odox, from ojip, Gen. (07t-6g, Voc. w instead 
of coyT, from Tiovg, Gen. nod-og, Voc. ^6. 

Rem. 4. The A^ocative of ava^, king, in common discourse, is like the 
Nominative, ca ava^, or by Crasis, wva|, but in the solemn language of 
prayer, a «'v«, in Homer and the Attic poets, e. g. Soph. OC. ]485. Zev ixvoy 
aol qxavoj or diva, instead of ixvaxi, according to § 25, 5. 

(3) Substantives in -co and -cog, whose stem ends in -og, have 
the Vocative neither like the stem nor the Nominative, but, 
contrary to all analogy, in -oT, e. g. 

Stem 7)/o5 Nom. •>}/« Gen. 7}x6-og for ^j/oa-og Voc. rixol for ^/oa-i, ri/c-'l 
aldog aldcog aido-og " aldoa-og uldol " aldoa-i, aibc-'i. 

_ Rem. 5. The Vocative form of all participles is like the Nominative, e. g. 
to TLTiTcov, jsTV(f(hg, Tiipug, jiijjwv, dsixvvg. "Aqxojv, Voc. agx^v, when it 
becomes a substantive, is an exception. 



§54.] 



THIRD DEC. THE NOM. ADDS G TO THE ROOT. 



73 



A. Words which in the Genitive have a consonant before the end- 
ing -Og, I. E. WORDS whose STEM ENDS IN A CONSONANT. 

§54. I. The Nominativ e adds c to the root. (249-252.) 

(a) The stem ends in l\ thus, 6 ^/ al-g, Gen. al-6g, Dat. PL 
al-Gi(v). 

(b) The root ends in a Pi or Kappa-mute — /3, ^, g) ; 7, yy, y.y 
Qx (jj accQ^y aaQK-og), and x- See ^ 52, 2, (a). 





7), Storm. 


0, Raven. 


0, Throat. 


i)y Hair. 


Sing. N. 


Xalla\l^ 


y^oqa^ 


U^vyl 


H^^ , 


G. 
D. 


XaiXaTi-og 
XailaTi-i 


yoQay.-og 
y.OQciy-i 


Xaqvyy-og 
XciQvyy-i 


TQil-og 


A. 


Xaihi7T-a 


y.ooay.-a 


XaQvyy-a 


TQr/-a 


V. 


Xailuil) 


yoQut 


XccQvy^ 


-dQi'^ 


Plur. N. 


Xaildn-eg 


y.oQuy.-eg 


XuQvyy-eg 


rglx-eg 


G. 


lailaTt-mv 


y.oQay.-cov 


XaQvyy-(ov 


ZQiX-cov 


D. 
A. 


XailaWi{v) 
Xailan-ag 


y.oQahiv) 
yoQciy-ag 


XuQvy^i{p) 
XocQvyy-ag 


TQix-ag 


V. 


laiXan-eg 


yoQay.-sg 


XuQvyy-eg 


TQil-eg 


Dual. N. A. V. 


XaiXoiTz-E 


yoQax-s 


XccQvyy-s 


tQlX-E 


G. and D. 


laiXan-oiv 


yoQay-oiv 


Xaqvyy-oiv 


tQiy-OiV. 



Remark 1. The stem of those in i/> and | commonly ends in the smooth 
n and k ; the stem of those in ^$ ends in //, except r, Xv/^, Gen. Iv/x-og, 
lynx, but rj Ai;/!, Gen. lvyy-6?, hiccough. — Instead of cpaQvyyoq from 17 cfa~ 
QV/^, throat, the poets are permitted, on account of the necessity of the 
verse, to use qiuQV/og also. On ^^t| see § 21, 3. 

Rem. 2. The word 1) lilg, Gen. uk-6g, signifying sea, and in the feminine 
gender, is only poetical, and the singular o lilg, signifying salt, is only Ionic 
and poetic, elsewhere, merely ol uXsg, salt, occm*s. PI. Symp. 177, b, Lys. 
209, e. 



(c) The stem ends in a Tau-mute 
§52, 2, (a). 



z, y,z, d^, vd-. See 



74 



THIRD DECLENSION. PARADIGMS. 



[§54. 





y), Torch. 


?]. Ilcliiiet. 


6, i), Bird. 


6 J King. Tj Eaith-worrn. 


Sing. N. 


XufiTZug 


'AOQVg 


OQvi'g 


dva^ tXfiivg 


G. 


Xafi7iu8-og 


>i()()vO--og 


oQvi {y-og 


uvuxr-og tX^iv&-og 


D. 


Xaf.i7Tu8-i 


xoovO-i 


onvid^-i 


UVlCAT-l tXfliV&-l 


A. 


Xa^Ttdd-a 


XOQVV 


OQVL V 


uvu'AZ-a tXiJ.iv&-a 


V. 


Xa^Tidg 


noQvg 


oQvi g 


dvu^ tXiitvg 


Plur. N. 


XafiTidd-sg 


'AOQVd-'Sg 


aQvid-sg 


avayit-eg tXfiivd--eg 


G. 


XaiXTTcHd-ODV 


X0QV0--(X}V 


OQvid'-COV 


dvdx7-(ov tXiiivd^-mv 


D. 


Xafi7zd-6i{v) 


'A6Qy-(Jt{v) 


0Qvi-ai[v) 


dva^i[v) tXfxi-ai{v) 


A. 


XafiTzdd-ag 


aoQvd'-ag 


aQvi-O-ag 


avaxr-ag tX^iv&-ag 


V. 


Xa[A,7idd-eg 


yioov^-eg 


o()Vid--eg 


avaxT-tg tXiiivd--eg 


Dual. 


Xafi7idd-E 


XOQV&'E 


OQVrd-S 


dvaxT-e tXfiiv&s 




XufiTidd-oiv 


XOQV&-OIV 


6qvIx>-oiv 


dvdxT-oiv iX^ivd--oiv. 



Rem. 3. Here belong also the contracts in - ?; Ig, Gen. -r]l8 o g = -tj g, 
-jjdog, e. g. -t] nuQijg, cheek, TiaQjjdog. 

The stems of neuters belonging to this class, end in r and xr. 
On the rejection of r and ya, and the change of t into o, see 
§ 52, 3. On the omission of t before ai in the Dat. PI., see 
§ 20, 1. In the words, ro '^'ovv, knee and to 86qv, spear ^ from the 
stems yovar and 8oQar, a, the final vowel of the root, is changed, 
in the nominative, into v, § 16, 1. 





TO J Body. 


TO, Knee. 


to, Milk. TOy Wonder 


. TO, Ear. 


Sing. N. 
G. 


0(6 fiat- og 


yovv 
yovaz-og 


ydXa zEQag 
yaXaxr-og ziqar-og 


[Mg) ovg 
(6z-6g 


D. 


6(0fAUr-l 


yovaz-i 


ydXava-i ziqoLX-i 


COZ-l 


A. 


(jcofia 


yovv 


ydXa TEQag 


ovg 


Plur. N. 


6(6 ^ar- a 


yovar-a 


ydXaxr-a ztQat-a 


(6z-a 


G. 


0(o[AaT-(ov 


yovaz-cov 


yaXdxz-ojv zsQdz-oov 


(OZ-(OV 


D. 


6(6fia-ai{v) 


yova-(Ji{v) 


ydXa^i{v) ZEQa-6i{v) 


(66l{v) 


A. 


ooj[Aaz-a 


yovat-a 


yaXaxz-a ztQaz-a 


coz-a 


Dual. 


0(6 fiat- 8 


yovar-E 


ydXaxz-E zequz-e 


(OZ-E 




aod^ar-oiv 


yovat-oiv 


yaXdxz-oiv zegdz-oiv 


ODZ-OtV. 



Rem. 4. The word to rigag usually admits contraction in the plural, after 
T is dropped, e. g. r£'^«, tsqojv, but TSQarn X. C. 1. 4, 15; to ysQcig, reward 
of honor, to yiJQug, old age, to y.Q8ag,Jlesh, and to y.sgag, horn, reject the t in 
all numbers, and then suffer contraction in the Gen. and Dat. Sing., and 
throughout the Dual and PL, except the Dat. PI. ; besides these forms, how- 



§55.] 



THIRD DEC. THE NO^T. REJECTS G. 



75 



ever, xigccg lias also the regular Ibrnis with t. When in the poets, « con- 
tnicted Ironi «« is used as short, it must be considered a case of elision, 
and not ot* contraction ; the same is true also of neuters in -aj, -aog, -o$, 
-€0$, e. g. axina instead of axind, xAf « instead of xXid. 



Sing. N. 
G. 
D. 
A. 



TO xsQag 
>itQaT-og 

mqag 



and [xsQu-og] 
and {xtQa-}) 



xsQcog 



ro nQsag 
[yiQta-og) 
{xQta-l) 
xQtag 



KQEOJg 



Plur. N. 
G. 
D. 
A, 



HhQar-a and {usQa-a) xtgd 
y>8Qdr-cx)v and [aeQa-cov 'aeqojv 

:<EQat-a and {n8Qa-a) asQd 



[nQsa-a) TiQsd 
{ycQed-cov) XQeav 
y.Qm-ai[v) 
[nQsa-a) xQsd 



D. N. A.V. 
G. and D. 



'Asgar-s and [yjQa-e 'ASQd 
'AEQar-oiv and {x8Qa-oiv) xeQc^v 



{xQ8a-e) HQtd 



(d) The root ends in v or vt^ See 



52,2, 



(a). 





?/, Nose. 


o, Dolphin. 


6j Giant. 


oy Tooth. 


Sing. N. 


Qig 


d8lq}'ig 


yiydg 


o^ovg 


G. 


Qi v-og 


d8Xq)iv-og 


yi^avx-og 


686vr-og 


D. 


QIV-L 


delqjiv-i 


yijavr-i 


6d6vT-i 


A. 


QIV- a 


delcpiv-a 


yiyavr-a 


6d6vT-a 


V. 


QIV 


d£lq)ig{tv) 


yiyav 


odovg 


Plur. N. 


Qiv-eg 


dsXcpTv-Eg 


ylyavr-Eg 


6d6v7-8g 


G. 


Qi r-cov 


88lq)tv-cov 


ytyavt-03V 


odovz-cov 


D. 


Ql6l(v) 


dsXcpi-aiiv) 


yiyd-ai{v) 


6dov-oi{v) 


A. 


QLV-ag 


d8l(piv-ag 


yiyavT-ag 


odovt-ag 


V. 


Qiv-eg 


88Xcfiv-8g 


yiyavt-8g 


odovT-sg 


D.N. A.V. 


QIV -8 


d8Xq)iv-s 


yiyavr-8 


odovr-E 


G. and D. 


Qi V-OLV 


d8Xcptv-oiv 


yiyavr-oiv 


68ovr-oiv. 



Rem. 5. Here belong also compounds in -6 s i g, Gen. -6sviog= -ovg, 
^ovvTog, e. g. o nXaxovg, cake, Gen. nXaxovvjog ; in -tjSLg, Gen. -7]svx og = 
-fig, -vvTog, e. g. TifJjjg, honorable, tifiijvTog. 

Rem. 6. For the ii-regular lengthening of the vowel m xrslg, dg, ^iXdg and 
-idXdg, see § 20, Rem. 2. 



§55.11. The Nominativ e rejects a^ hut lengthens 
the short final vowel of the stem, s or o into rj 

or (0, ^ 16, 3. (253, 254.) 

1. The stem ends in v, vr and q. For the omission of v and 



76 



THIRD DEC. THE NOM. REJECTS C. 



[§55< 



vt before crt, see § 20, 2, and for the omission of t in the Nomi- 
native of stems ending in vr, e. g. Xtwv, see § 25, 5. 



Sing. N. 
G. 
D. 
A. 
V. 


c, Shoplierd. 
7ioiiitv-og 

TTOljiriV 


(J, A Divinity, o, Lion. 

daif^cjv Xtcov 
duif^ov-og Xtovr-og 
daifiov-i XtovT-i 
daifiov-u Xtovr-a 
daifiov Xtov 


6, Air. 

aldrjQ 

ai&tQ-og 

aidtQ-i 

aid^tQ-a 

atx^riQ 


0, Orator. 

QtjrOQ 

()}'jroQ-og 

()rjroQ-i 

QqroQ-a 

Q^rOQ 


Plur. N. 
G. 
D. 
A. 
V. 


7T0f{A,tv-eg 

7ZOI[A,tV-(OV 

7tOlfl8-(jt{v) 

Ttoi^iv-ag 
7T0(iA,ev-£g 


baijiov-tg Xtovr-eg 
dcufiov-cov Xaovr-cov 
daifio-oiW) Xt'ov6i{v) 
daipiov-ag Xtovr-ag 
dai{A.ov-8g Xtovr-tg 


al{)^8Q-8g 

ald^tQ-wv 

aix}tQ-oi{v) 

alOtQ-ag 

ai{)^tQ-8g 


QiqroQ-tg 

Qf]r0Q-0!)V 

QriroQ-ai{v) 

Qr}roQ-ag 

Qi^roQ-sg 


Dual. 


Tzoiiisv-e 

TtOlfltV-OiV 


daifiov-8 Xtovr-8 
daifA.ov-oiv Xeovr-otv 


aid^tQ-e 
ai&tQ-oiv 


QTirOQ-E 

QriroQ-oiv 



Remark 1. The substantive t) / e i q, hand, belongs to this class of sub- 
stantives, and differs from them in not lengthening s of the stem, x^q, into 
T), but into 81, e. g. x^h instead of x^Q?i and is irregular in retaining a in 
the inflection, thus, ^sIq, xsiQog, etc., except the Dat. PI. and the Gen. and 
Dat. Dual, XEg(Tl{v), /equlv. Yet in poetiy, both the short and the long form, 
through all the cases, is used, as the verse requkes, e. g. %£ig6g and /Egog, 
XiQoiv and xeiqoIv, /s^o"/ and x^t,QE(Ti. 

Rem. 2. The following in -ojv, Gen. -ovog, reject the v in particular 
cases, and suffer contraction: 7^ Eixbiv, image. Gen. Eiaovog and Ely.ovg, Dat. 
Euovi, Ace. Elaova and ftxa'y, Ace. PI. tlaovaq and fixoiV, — the irregular ac- 
centuation of ftxw and sixovg should be noted ; 7^; arjdwv, nightingale, Gen. 
arjdovog and ar]dovg, Dat. uTj^ot; i) xtXidcav, swallow. Gen. /di^oyo?, Dat. 
XElidot. 

2. The following substantives in -f]Q are added to the preced- 
ing paradigms, viz. o TrarrjQ, father, »; f^Trjr7]Qj mother, ^ d-vydzr^Q, 
daughter, ^ yaar^Q, belly, ^ ArjiirizriQ, Demeter (Ceres) and o dvriQ, 
man, which differ from those of the above paradigms only in 
rejecting « in the Gen. and Dat. Sing., and in the Dat. PL, 
§ 16, 8, and in inserting an a in the Dat. PI. before the ending 
ci, so as to soften the pronunciation. The word dvriQ, stem dveq, 
rejects 8 in all Cases and Numbers, except the Voc. Sing., but 
inserts a ^, § 24, 2. 



§56.] 



THIRD DEC. THE STEM OF THE NOM. IS PURE. 



77 



Sing. N. 
G. 
D. 
A. 
V. 


„, Father. 
7taTt]n 
TtaiQ-og 
natQ-i 

TtaTEQ 


;^, Mother. 

fl1]TQ0g 
fXtJIQl 

^iJTEQ 


/;, Daughter. 

{yvydrriQ 

^vyatQcg 

d^vyazQi 

'&vya7tQa 

•d^vyazEQ 


y, Man. 

avriQ ^ 

av-d-Qog 

av-d-Qi 

dv-d-Qa 

dvEQ 


Plur. N. 
G. 
D. 
A. 
V. 


TzatEQ-eg 

TZaTEQ-COV 

7zaTQ-a-Gi{v) 
TtaTEQ- ag 
TzazsQ-eg 


^r]T8QEg 

flt^TEQCOV 

firj7Qdai{v) 
firjTEpag 

fl7]TEQEg 


xi-vyatEQEg 

'&vyaT8Q(ov 

'&vyaTQdai{v) 

S^vyazEQag 

^vyatEQEg 


dv-d-QEg 

dv-d-Qwv 

dv-8-Q-d-oi[v) 

dv-d-Qug 

dv-d-Qsg 


D.N.A.V. 

G.andD. 


TZatSQ-S 
TZaXEQ-OlV 


fjyrsQE 

IITJTEQOIV 


'&vyaTEQS 
d-vyatEQOiv 


av-8-QE 
dv-d-QoTv. 



Rem. 3. To this class belongs also the word o rj ^APH'N, lamb, the Nom. 
of which being obsolete is supplied by o ^ dfxvog, Gen. aqvog, Dat. aqvi^ 
Ace. uQvUy Nom. PL a ^yf?, Gen. a^vwv, Dat. dgvoiaiiv). Ace. uQvag; fur- 
ther, the word o acriijQ, -igog, star, which belongs to this class on account of 
the Dat. PL, uaiQaativ), is not syncopated. By Syncope, the accent of the 
Gen. and Dat. Sing., and, in the word dvijo, also that of the Gen. PL and of 
the Gen. and Dat. Dual, is removed to the last syllable, and that of the Dat. 
PL to the penult, e. g. nargog, naxQl, avSgav, 7taTQ(X(n{v). The word i] /Ir]- 
firiTTjg has a vaiying accent, vijz. /lr\in^TQog, J rj (ztjtq i, Voc. /lr,^r]t sq, 
but Ace. JrjfirjTSQU. So also S^v/ujeq from d^vydzriQ. For the Voc. of 
TiaTJjQ and avvQ, see § 53, 4, (1), (a). In poetry, according to the necessities 
of the verse, S^v/atQeg, S^v/aigoiv, /ti'jfirjiQa, as well as, on the contrary, 
Tittiigog, ■&vyaiBQog and fir}TEgi, are found. 



^56, III. The Stem of the Nominative is pure. (255.) 

The g is omitted without changing the final vowel of the 
stem. The stem ends in v, vt, q, and in qt, but only in ddfiaQ, 
loife. The case-endings are appended to the Nominative with- 
out change. On the omission of t in stems ending in vt and 
Qtj see § 25, 5, and on the omission of v, vx before ci, see § 20, 2. 



11 



78 



THIRD DEC. WORDS IN -fc^^', -UV^i, -ovg. 



[§•57. 







o, l^U'iUl. 


0, Ajrc. 0, 


Xenophon. o, 


Wild Beast. 


7.J, Nectar. 


s. 


N. 


naidv 


UIOJV 


StV0(p(OV 


a'>/;o ^ 


Vr/.7UQ 




G. 


Tiaidr-og 


aibiv-og 


>zevocpo)V7-og 


{h,Q-og 


vf/.Tuo-og 




D. 


Tiuiav-i 


UlMV-l 


^tvocpcavT-i 


'Oi^o-i 


VtAIUQ-l 




A. 


naiav-a 


uiwv-a 


^EVOCpMVT-a 


d^ijo-a 


VtX7U(J 




V. 


naiav 


aicov 


ctvocpcjv 


^nQ 


Vt'/.tUQ 


p. 


N. 


Ttaiav-sg 


aimv-sg 


Zevocp(ovT-eg 


OiJQ-tg 


vtitruQ-a 




G. 


Tzaiav-cov 


aioov-cjv 


^evoq)(ovT-(ov 


-O^tiQ-ajv 


vt'/auQ-cov 




1). 


7TUld-6l{v) 


Ul(0-Gl{v) 


Stvoqi(o-oi{v) 


{h^(j-oi{v) 


Vt'/.TUQ-Oliv) 




A. 


naiav-ag 


aiwv-ug 


>zevocfcovi-ug 


-OiiQ-ag 


i^t'/.TUQ-a 




V. 


7iuiuv-eg 


aicjv-eg 


^tvocfcovT-eg 


-OriQ-eg 


vey.zuQ-a 


Dual. 


Tzaiuv-e 


alcJV-8 


Sevo(f:cJVT-8 


^//e-£ 


VtHZaQ-S 






Tiaidv-oiv 


UICJP-OIV 


^evOCfCOVT-OiV 


■&/^n-oiv 


Vt'/.TUQ-OlV. 



Remark 1. The three words in -wv, Gen. -covo?, \\z. "AnoXloiv, Iloaei- 
dwv, fj ulbjv, threshing-JIoor, drop v in the Ace. Sing., and suffer contrac- 
tion, thus, ^AnoXXix), UoasLdbj, «Ao) ; on wAw, comp. §48, Rem. 1, on xfxcw, 
§213, 11. Also the Ace. yXrJx^ fromj^ yXij/wv or ^A7jx(av, pennyroyal, Gren. 
-ojvog, is found in Aristophanes. 

Rem. 2. The neutersbelonging to this class all end in -q, {-ag, -og, -ag, 
-vg), e. g. TO riy.iag, rjiog, niXag, nvg, Gen. nvg-og. The word to eag, 
spring, can also be conti'acted, e. g. vgog. 



B. Words which have a Vowel before the Endog -og of the 

Genitive. 

§57. I. Words in -svg, -avg, -ovg. (256.) 

1. The stem of substantives in -evg, -avg, -ovg, ends in v, 
which is formed from the Digamma F; g is the characteristic 
of the gender. On the omission of v between vowels, see 
§25,2. 

2. Those in -evg have -f« in the Ace. Sing., and -s'dg in the 
Ace. PL, formed from sFa, aFag ; the omission of the F length- 
ens the a and ag. These same have the Attic form in the Gen. 
Sing., viz. -ecog instead of -eog, and in the Dat. Sing, and Nom. 
PL, they admit contraction, which is not usual in the Ace. PL 
When a vowel precedes the ending -evg, as, e. g. /0£iV, Ev^oevg, 
the endings -ecog, -icov, -id, -&dg, are also contracted into -cog, -coy, 
-a, dg. Those in -avg and -ovg are contracted only in the Ace. PL 



§57.] 



THIRD DEC. WORDS IN -«Vff, -avff, -OVQ. 



79 





0, Kin^. 


0, A measure, o, rj, Ox. /, 


An old Woman. 


S. N. 


^aailevg 


Xotvg §ovg, bos for bovs 


jQavg 


G. 


(iaaiXt-(og 


')(^o{t(o)Mg ^o-6g, bov-is 


yQCi-og 


D. 


^aodei 


Xoel /io/-, bov-i 


yQa-i 


A. 


^aath'-d 


)^o{Hl)d ^ovv 


yQCWV 


V. 


^aadev 


Xotv ^ov 


yqav 


P. N. 


§a(jiXETg 


Xoerg §6-8g 


yqd-tg 


G. 


^aai)J-wv 


Xo{t(o)oov ^o-ojv, bo-um 


yQa-MV 


D. 


^a6(l8va({v) 


X0£V6t{v) ^0VOl{v) 


yQavci{v) 


A. 


^aaile-dg {and 


eig) xo{8'd)dg (^oag) ^ovg 


lyQa-ag) yqavg 


V. 


^aoileig 


yoeTg ^o-eg 


yga-eg 


Dual. 


^aoi)J-B 


Xoh §6-8 


ygd-e 




^aaila-oiv 


yoioiv §o-oiv 


yga-oiv. 



Remark 1. The Gen. Sing, of nouns in -evc, among the Attic poets, 
sometimes ends in -s'o^mstead of -icag, thus, Orjaiog, agitniog; and the Ace. 
Sing., not only among the Attic poets, but among all the poets, sometimes 
ends in -i] mstead of -id, e. g. Ugrj, ^vyygaq)!]. The Nom. and Voc. PI. in 
the older Attic %vTiters, in Thucydides, for example, end also in -TJg, e. g. 
^aaiXrjg, Innrig, TlXaxairig instead of nXonaLslg. The Accusative ending 
~flg instead of -sag, is found not imfi'equently in Xenophon, e. g. johg in- 
nng, C. 3. 5, 19. xovg yovslg, 2. 2, 14. yvacpsig, (jy.vxHg, xaXxelg, 3. 7, 6. lovg 
^ucnXilg, 3. 9, 10. and elsewhere, but more seldom among the other Attic 
prose %vriters. The Accusative form vlelg is regular among all the Attic 
writers. 

Rem. 2. The following are declined like xosvg, viz. ITsLQauvg, Gen. IIh- 
gaiojg, Ace. IIsiQaia, 6 nyvLstg, altar before the door, Gen. ayvLojg, Ace. uyv- 
la, PL Ace. ayvLug, and several proper names, e. g. "Egstgioig, ZisiQiwg, Mrj- 
Xia, Ev^otog, Ev(jou, Ev^oag, UXaxaidg, Jcagiug; yet the uncontracted forms 
also are frequently found in proper names, e. g. Osffnisojv, Osamsag, SxsiQisa, 
JlXttXttiiwv, IlXaxaiiag,^EQsxQLS(av, /twqdmv, nuQaiiodv, in Th., X., PI., Dem. 
The uncontracted forms ai*e regular in aXisvg, fisherman, aXisag, aXistx, 
aXiiag. 

Rem. 3. Among good Attic wi'iters, the Nom. PI. of ^ovg and ygavg are 
always unconti-acted, ^osg, ygasg ; in the Ace, on the contrary, only povg, 
ygctvg, vavg, are generally used, /Sda? very seldom. 

Rem. 4. Only o xovg, congius and a mound, and 7] govg, vinegar-tree, ai'e 
declined like ^ovg, but both without contraction in the PI. ; only ■^ vnvg 
{vdFg, navis), which, however, is in many instances u'regular, is declined 
like ygavg. See § 68. 



80 THIRD DEC. WORDS IN -7jS AND '^i,'' [§§^8, 59, 



§58. 11. Words in -//?, -eg, Gen.-eog; -cog, Gen. -(aog, 
-cog and -co, Gen. - oog; - ag , Gen . -ccog , -o^*, Gen. 

-80g . (257.) 

The stem of words, belonging to this class, ends in g. On 
the omission of the (X, see §25, 1. In the Dat. PL a (T is 
omitted. 

§ 59. (1) Wo rds in -rig and -eg . (257.) 

1. The endings -?/?, -eg, belong only to adjectives, the ending 
-Tjg being masculine and feminine, and -eg neuter, and to pro- 
per names in -q)dvTjg, -fievrjgj -ysrrjg, -xQutr^gy -[ii^dTjg, -neid-rig, -a^e- 
vrig and (-x^/jy?) -ulrig, having the termination of adjectives. The 
stem of the neuter is pure, § 52, 3 ; but in the masculine and 
feminine, the short final vowel of the stem is lengthened, e 
into n^ §52, 2, (b). 

2. The words of this class suffer contraction, after the omis- 
sion of (T, in all cases, except the Nom. and Voc. Sing, and the 
Dat. PI., and those in -y^lerjgi which are already contracted in the 
Nom. Sing, into -xA^?, suffer a double contraction in the Dat. Sing. 





Singular. Plural. 


N. 


aaqiT^g, clear. Gaqjsg {aacps-eg) aaqjeig [oacpe-a) (jaq)rj 


G. 


[cacps-og) oaqiovg [aacps-cov) aa(p(ov 


D. 


[oacps-i) oafpei aaq)s-(ji{v) 


A. 


{(Jacps-a) aaq)ij cacpig [aacps-ag) aaq)eTg {cacpe-a) aa(pri 


V. 


aaqjsg oacpeg {oag)£-eg) cacpeig {aacpe'-a} aag)rj 




Dual N. A. V. 


Gaqje-e oacpr] 




G. and D. 


(jaq)8-oiv aacpoiv. 




Singular. Plural. Dual. 


^• 


^ '^QiT^grjg, trireme. {TQirjQe-eg) TQiJQeig [rgiriQe-e) rqirjQrj 


G. 


{tQiriQe-og) rqiriQOvg tqit^qs-cov and tqitjqcov {7Qii]QS-o(v)'rQ(7]Qotv 


D. 


{tQii^Qe-i) TQimei iQiriQe-ai^v) 


A. 


[TQiriQe-a) TQir^grj {TQirjQe-ag) rqiriQeig 


V. 


TQir^Qeg {xqiriQe-eg) TQirJQeig 




Singular. 




N. 


^co'AQoizrjg {IleQiyJJfjg) IJeQixXtjg 




G. 


2JcoyiQdtovg {nsQiyles-og) TleQi-Aeovg 




D. 


l^coKQarei {neQiy.)Je-'i) [TleQrAki) IIsQiy.Xei 




A. 


ZfoyQarri {TleQiy.Xee-a) UeQiyled 




V. 


Zco'AQdteg {TlEQrAXeeg) TleQiy.Xeig. 



§60.] 



THIRD DEC. WORDS IN -(0$. 



81 



Remark 1. On the contraction in the Dual of fc into rj — not ei — and in 
the Ace. PI. of -sag into -eig, see § i), II. When a vowel precedes the end- 
ings -1]?, -sg, in proper names in -xX^g, -m is always contracted into -«, and 
commonly also in adjectives, §9,11, e. g. n(Qiy.XiE-a = UtQixUa ; axXei'ig, 
without fame, uxXd-a = axXea, tyir,g, health/, vyisa = vyiu, ivdsijg, poor, 
ivdfsa = ivdsn, vnegcpvijc, supernatural, vnBQCpvia = vniqcfva. Ace. Sing, 
masculine, and Nom., Ace. and Voc. PI. neuter ; but sometimes also the 
contraction into -i] is foimd, e. g. vyiri, di(pvi\, acpvi], aviocpvi], X. R. Equ. 7, 
11. in all Codd. 

Rem. 2. Proper names with the above endings, and a\so"AQrig, form the 
Ace. Sing., both according to the first and third declensions, and are there- 
fore called Heteroclites, e. g. ^'ojxQair] and ^(x}xQdT7]v, according to the first 
Dec, ^AXxttfiivr] and -(asvijv, "Avtlg&bvt] and -a&ivriv, 'Aqi] and -tjv, etc. ; Plato 
commonly uses the form in -rj, Xenophon that in -r]v, other wi-iters both 
forms -without distinction. The Genitive of "Agrjg, in good prose, is "Agsojg, 
otlen in Plato ; among tlie poets, however, "Agsog is also used, according to 
the necessities of the verse. Among later WTiters, the Ace. of words in 
-xXijg usually ends in -y.Xilv. The formation of the Ace. PI. is doubtful, 
although the inflection, according to the fii'st Dec, seems to be predomi- 
nant, e. g. Tovg ^AQicnocpuvai, in the Nom. also ^AgicnocpuvaL, Tovg /irn^iod^ivag. 

Rem. 3. The Gen. PI. of r^trj^Tj? occurs also in the uncontracted form, 
e. g. TQiriQmv ; but all the others are unifoiTnly contracted ; the Dual also is 
foimd uncontracted in words of this class in the Attic dialect, e. g. ^vy- 
yives, and the Tragedians use the imconti*acted forms of proper names in 
-xXir^g = -xXvg, according to the necessities of the verse, e. g. "HQaxXirig, 
Dat. -xXiu, Voc. -xXs^q. The contract Ace. in -xAtJ is seldom found. The 
Voc. a "HQuxXeg, as an exclamation, belongs to the later prose. 

Rem. 4. The irregular accentuation of the Gen. PI. ign^gcav instead of 
TQirjQOjv fi-om TQiTjQEMv, is w^orthy of notice. In addition to this Avord, ad- 
jectives in -Tjd-fjc and the word avTotQy.i^g, e. g. avi'rj&icav = avvri&av, av- 
Taoxiwy = aviagxav, have this accentuation. 



60. (2) Words in -ojg, Gen. -ojog, and in -cog and -co, 
Gen. 'oog . (258.) 



(a) - 03 g , Gen. - (o og. 


S. N. o,7j^toV, Jackal. PI. &M-eg 
G. '&(a-6g d^oj-cov 
D. ^co-L d-a-aii^) 
A. i '&(o-a S'(a-ag 
V. 1 d-cog d-oj-eg 

D. N. A. V. '&6o-E, G. and D. ^c6-oiv. 


S. ^'pojg, Hero. PI. tJQco-Eg 
rjpoj-og rjooj-cov 
jgoj-i ^ iJQm-Giiv) 
TJpa-a and tJqco r^{)(x}-ag and riQwg 
TJQoag ^ ^ TJQW-Sg 

D. jJQa)-S, 7]Q03-01V. 



(b) - CO ? and - eo , Gen. -oog. 
Substantives of these endings are always feminine. The 
stem ends in -og ; the short final vowel o is lengthened into w, 



82 



TillRD DEC. — -WORDS IN -«? AND -og. 



[§6L 



according to § 52, 2, (b). The ending -co?, however, is retained 
in the Attic and Common Language only wiih the substantive 
cu8(6g, stem uidog, and in poetry with ^co?, morning'^ (in Eurip.), 
in all other words it has been changed into a smoother form, 
so that the Noin. ends in -w, e. g. /J;fw, stem rjxog. On the Voc. 
in -oi, see § 53, 4, (3). The Dual and Plural are formed like 
substantives in -og of the second Dec, thus atdoi, tjxoij etc. 




/) atdojg {Stem aldog), shame. 
{(itdo-og) aidovg 
{atdo-i) aldoi 

{aido-a) aido) 
{aido-'i^ aidoi. 




§61. (3) Words in 



ag , Gen 
- s og . 



and 



Gen. 

(259.) 



(a) -ag, Gen. -aog. 

Only the neuters to asXag, lights and to dsTtag, goblet, belong 
to this class. 



Sing. N. 


ro aelag, light. PI. aela-a and aslcl Dual. otXa-e 


G. 


(jfiXa-og oeXd-cop ceXa-oiv. 


D. 


(Tflw-i" and (jelfit 08'Xa-oi{v) 


A. 


(jsXag oeXa-a and o^'Xu 



Remark 1. On the poetic shortening of the contracted a, see § 54, Rem. 
4. In the four following neuters in -ag, the a in the Gen., Dat. and in the 
PL is changed into the weaker s, according to the Ionic usage, e. g. 

^QEiag (poet), image, Gen. (SQExsog, PL jSQhea and iSgsTTj, ^Qniav 
KMug (poet), j^eece, PI. in Homer, y.ma, yMiaiiv) 
ovdag (poet.), ground, Gen. ovdeog, Dat. ovds'i and oidsi (Hom.) 
xvicpag (poet and prose), darkness, Gen. avicfaog Epic, xvicpovg Attic, 
xvscpa'i Epic, tcveqia Attic* 



(b) -og, Gen. -sog. 
Substantives of this class are all likemse neuter. In the 
Nom., £, the stem vowel of the last syllable, is changed into o, 
§ 16, 1. 



§62.] 



THIRD DEC. WORDS IN -<?, -Vff, -t, -V. 



93 



jMiiir. 



N. 
G. 
D. 
A. 



Plur. 



N. 
G. 
D. 
A. 



Dual. 



TO ytrog for ytvtg, genus. 
{ytv£-og) ytvovg 
{yivE-'C) yivEi 
ytvog 



TO y.)Jog for y.)Jtgy glory. 
{•/.Xh-og) xltovg 
(•A)Je-'i) n)Mi 
y.Xtog 



(ysve-a) ytvij 
yevE-wv and yevoiv 
y8ve-ai{v) 

(ytre-a) ylvij 



{y.lte-a) '/.ltd 
(y.Xat-cjv xXewv 
y.Xh-6i{v) 
(yXte-a) y.XlH 



(yeve-s) 
(yevs-oiv) 



(yXiE-t) y.Xttj 
(y.Xtt-oir) y.Xeoiv. 



Rem. 2. On the contraction of fs into i] instead of ft, and of i« into « in- 
stead of 7], when a vowel precedes, see § 9, 11. On the poetic shortenmg 
of the contracted « in xXsa, see § 54, Rem. 4. 

Rem. 3. The uncontracted form of the Gen. PI. is not unusual, e. g. 
OQSiov, ^dicov, xsQdsb)v, and almost without exception avdiwv, in PI. Polit. 
260, a, the uncontracted Dual form in ts is found, tovio) tw yspss. 



in. Words in - ig, -vg, - 1, -v. 

§62. (1) Words in -Cg, -vg. (26o.) 

Substantives in Cg and vg, originally ending in I'Fg, vFg. See 
§ 25, 2. 



Sing. N. 


yJg, corn-worm. 


ri avg, sow. 


6 ii&vg, fish. 


G. 


'M-og 


av-og 


ix^v-og 


D. 


'AL -I 


av-L 


Ix&v-i 


A. 


y,tv 


GVV 


lyd^vv 


V. 


y.i 


av 


Plur. N. 


nt-eg 


a^-eg 


l^&^-eg 
I'/d^v-cov 


G, 


ai -cov 


6V-(0V 


D. 


y,i-6i{v) 


Gv-ai{v) 


tX&v-ai{v) 


A. 


ai-ag 


6v-ag and 


ovg ly&v-ag, rarer ly&vg 


V. 


yi-eg 


6^-8g 


iX&v-eg 


Dual. 


y.t-8 


OV-E 


ly&v-E 




y,i -Oiv 


OV-OIV 


ly&v-oiv. 



Remark. The contracted Nom. PI. at aqy.vg is found in X. Ven. 2, 9. ; 
6, 2. ; 10, 2. 19. 



84 



THIRD DEC. WORDS IN -I g, -I, -vg, -V. 



[§63. 



§ 03. (2) Wo r ds in -ig , - 1, -v g j -v. (aei.) 

The stem of tliese substantives ends in i or v. The stem- 
vowels t and V remain only in the Ace. and Voc. Sing., in the 
other cases they are changed into e, § 16, 2. In the Gen. Sing, 
and PL, substantives denoting persons take the Attic form in -(og 
and -cov, in which the co has no influence on the accent, comp. 
§ 29, Rem. 5. In the Dat. Sing, and in the Nom. and Ace. PL, 
contraction takes place. 





r;, City. 


0, Cubit. 


TO, Mustard. 


TO, City. 


Sing. N. 


TioXig 


Trr^xvg, 


oivam , 


uajv, 


G. 


7i6XE-(og 


Tzrjxe-cag 


aivu7te-og 


uare-og 


D. 


Tiolei 


nmu 


oivunei 


acrei 


A. 


tioXlv 


Ttriivv 


a IV am 


aarv 


V. 


noXi 


nmv 


aivam 


aarv 


Plur. N. 


TioXeig 


nr^pig 


Givdnri 


darrj 


G. 


7i6Xe-(ov 


7ll]l£-(y)V 


aiiaTze-cov 


acte-cov 


D. 


7t6l^-6l[v) 


7T)]xe-ci{v) 


aivdne-at{v) 


da7e-0L{v) 


A. 
V. 


Tiolsig 
TZoXsig 


niipig 
nrixug 


(yivuTtrj 
Givdnrj 


aatri 
cioTt] 


Dual. 


7i6Xe-e 


7iriXE-E 


(TivaTTe-s 


aare-8 




TioXt-oiv 


ni]yt-oiv 


aivane-oiv 


aort-oiv. 



Remark 1. Here belong all substantives in -^lq, -ipig, most in -aig and many 
others, e. g. t] xovig, dust, 6 (AuvTig, prophet, ?/ oqng, serpent, ?; nlaTig, faith, t] 
v^Qig, abuse; 6 niXsuvg, axe, 6 nosa^vg, old man; to ttstcsql, pepper, to iiy- 
yd^agi, cinnabar, to nbjv (poet.), herd, Avithout conti'action. Adjectives in 
-ijg, -Ha,~v ai-e declined in the masculine and neuter like nijx^g and ao-ii', 
except that the Gen. masculine takes the regular forms -sag, -sav, not -sojg, 
~E03V, e. g. Tj^ug, ')]5iog. 

Rem. 2. Among the Attic poets, yet probably only in Ljiic passages, the 
Gen. in -sog from substantives in -ig ; occurs, e. g. noXsog. 

Rem. 3. In X. An. 4. 7, 16, the contracted Gen. nrix(av is found. Instead of 
tlie Dual form in -es also one m r] is used, e. g. ttoAt;, (pva-q ; also a form in -bl 
instead of -ss is cited, by the ancient Grammarians, from Aeschines. — The 
Ace. PL of nouns in -vg ai"e sometimes foimd imcontracted among the At- 
tic poets, e. g. niy/fctg. 

Rem. 4. Neuters in -i and -v have the Attic Gen. Sing, very seldom, e. g. 
uaxmg Em*. Bacch. 838. (831). Or. 761. (751). 

Rem. 5. Adjectives m -Ig, -l. e. g. XSqlg, X8qi ^ skilful, and some sub- 
stantives in -i"c, which are partly poetic, have the regular inflection, e. g, 
i-og, L-i, i-eg, etc., or both forms together, e. g. tj ixrfVig, anger, also (xrivLdog, 
etc., ^ olg, sheep, to ninsQi, Gen. -igtog and -eog, pepper, 6 i] noQTig, coif, 



§§ 64, 65.] THIRD DEC. QUANTITY AND ACCENTUATION. 



85 



u i) Tioaig, spouse, Gen. noaiog, but Dat. always noarsi, i] TQontc, keel, also 
TQoTxtdog, etc., // Ti-^trfc, /ozrer, Gen. rvQaiog X. An. 7. 8, 12. Ti\j(n»' ib. 1.3., 
but Pi. Ti^netg, rvQaeiri, i] ^idyadig, Gen. -log, Dat. fiuyddf X. An. 7.3,32.; 
some proper names, e. g. ^fi-gVyfo-i?, '/^fc, Gen. -log, etc. X. An. 1. 2, 12 ; 
(J. 2, 1. (5. 10, 1.), finally one noun in -vg, // sy/sXvg, but only in the singular. 



Sing. N. 


0, i] noQiig, calf. 1^ 


tyytlvg, eel. 


0, r^ olg, sheep. 


G. 


noQii-og 


iyytlv-og 


oiog 


D. 


noQzi-i and ttoqti 


iyytXv-i 


ou 


A. 


TTOQTIV 


hyeXvv 
syyeXv 


oiv 


V. 


710QZL 


oig 


Plur. N. 


TTOQTi-eg and noqiig 


iyyjleig 


oleg 


G. 


noQzi-av 


iyyele-cov 


oicov 


D. 


7i6qTI-6i{v) 


EyyJlE-6i[v) 


oiai{v) 


A. 


TTOQTi-ug and TtoQiig 


iyyjleig 


olag, rarer olg 


V. 


noQTi-eg and noqtig 


iyyjleig 


oieg 


Dual. 


TtOQTl-S 


iyyjle-s 


oh 




TZOntL-OlV 


iyyeli-oiv 


OlOiP. 



Rem. 6. Xenophon uses the Ionic forms of olg, viz. oiv, o'isg, oicav, ocag 
and oig. 



§ 64. Quantity of the Th ird Declension. (263.) 

1. The inflection-endings -«, -i, -v and -ag are short. 

Exception. The a in the Ace. ending in the Sing, and PI. of substantives 
in -sig, is long, e. g. tov legsa, joig isgidg from 6 iegevg, priest. 



2. Words whose Nom. ends in -«|, 



-«i//, -ti//, -ri/^, -ig and -i;$, 



have the penult of the Cases which increase, either short or long, according 
as the vowel of the above endings is short or long by natm'e, e. g. o •«9^w^«|, 
coat of mail, -ay.og, 6 qt\p, reed, ^Inog, rj dy.iig, ray, -ivog, but rj /5wAm|, clod, 
-dxog, t) iXntg, hope, -tdog. See more full explanations in the Larger Gram- 
mar, Pai-t I. § 291. 



§ 65. Accent u ation of the Th ird Declension. (264.) 

1. The accent remains, through the several Cases, on the accented syllable 
of the Nom. as long as the laws of accentuation permit, § 30, e. g. to nqdy- 
pa, deed, nQctypurog, but nQaypdrcav, to ovopa, 'name, ovoparog, but ovo/ua- 
Twv, 6 1] yf)A8Mv, swallow, yjlidcvog, Zsvocpbiv^ -aivrog, -ojvztg, -ravxojv. The 
particular exceptions have been noticed in the paradigms. 

2. Words of one syllable are accented, in the Gen. and Dat. of all Num- 
bers, on the final syllable, and the long syllables 03v and olv are circumflex- 
ed, e. g. 6 pi'iv, pr^vog, prjvl, privolv, prjvav, pTjcrl{v). 

12 



86 ACCENTUATION OF THE THIRD DECLENSION. [§65. 



Exceptions . 

(a) The following nine substantives are j)arox}'toncfl in the Gen. PI. and 
in the Gen. and Dat. Dual : t] dug, torch, o ^/io'j? slave, 6 ^ &iog, jackal, to 
KPA-, ])oetic, Gen. yQaioQ, head, loovq, Gen. euro?, ear, oriuuiq, child, oai]g, 
moth, o 1] Tqcog, Trojan, i) (pojg. Gen. cpojdog, a burning, to (po)g. Gen. (fonog, 
light ; e. ^. dudcDv, dudoiv, v^wwv, xqutojv, onuv, inToiv, nuidojv, naidoiVj 
aibjv, TQb)ojv, q)iodbJv, qiatjcav ; on the contrary, twv dfxoiojv from ul dfiwuif 
iwv Tqmojv from al Tqoiai, joiv cpaTutv fi'om 6 q)0J?, man, twv ■&b)(jjv from 
i] &b}i], injury. 

(b) The following contracts, according to the nature of the final sj'llable, 
are either Properispomena or Pai'oxjtones, in the Gen. and Dat. of all Num- 
bers, as in the other Cases, viz. to tjq, Epic, from tag, spring, x7;q, Epic, 
from y.iaQ, heart, o Xcig from Xijiag, stone, o ttqwv from 7r^?;cuj', hill, e. g. I'j^og, 
rjgi, y.r^Qog, yS-gi, luog, Xai, A«wv, TiQuvog, ngoJvL. 

Remark 1. The following contracts, on the other hand, follow the prin- 
cipal rule (No. 2), viz. aTsag = o-tt;^, tallow, (niaxog = (nr^rog, q^Qsag, well, 
qjQsaTog = (pQ7]T6g, PI. (pQrjTMV, Ogu^, Ogfi^, 0gr,'iy.og = Ogay.og, and Ogjjxog, 
olg, olog, oil, oicov, oi(Tl{v). 

(c) Monosyllabic participles, as well as the pronoun t / ? ; quis ? retain 
the accent, tlii'ough all the Cases, on the stem-syllable, but the pronoun 
nag and o Ilav is an Ox}tone in the Gen. and Dat. Sing., in the other cases, 
either a Parox3i:one or a Properispomenon, according to the natine of the 
final syllable, e. g. qpi;^, cpvviog, wV, ovxog, ovti, ovxojv, ovai{v), ovroiv, xlg, ilvog, 
tIvi, etc. ; nug, navTog, navil, navioov, navTOiv^ 7iaat{v\ o IJav, Uavog, totg 
IIa(n{v). 

3. The follow ing are accented in the Gen. and Dat. of all Numbers, like 
monosyllabic substantives : 

(a) 7] / vv 1], woman [yvvaiy.og, yvvaixl, yvvamolv, yvvaiyMV, yvvai^^v) ; but 
yvvouya, yvvalyeg, etc.) ; o ■?; x i; w v, dog [xwog^ xvvi, xwolvj xvyaVj 
y.val{v) ; but avva, y.vvig, etc.) ; 

(b) syncopated substantives in -rjg, on which see § 55, 2 ; 

(c) compoimds of tig, unus, in the Gen. and Dat. Sing., e. g. ovdslg, ov8e- 
vog, ovSevI; but ovdavcav, ovdiai{v), so ^r^dug, {^rjdsvog, etc.; 

(d) the Attic poetic forms, dogog, dogl from dogv. 

4. For the accentuation of substantives in -ig, -vg, Gen. -fwg, see §63; 
of those in -w, §60, the irregular accentuation of the Ace. Sing, of ?^;^ott = 
7)Xbj instead of t/j/cu, should be noted. 

5. (a) In the Vocative of syncopated substantives, § 55, 2, in -r^g, the ac- 
cent, contraiy to the prmcipal rule, is di-awn back as far as possible, e. g. 
w TiuiEg, &iyaTEg, Jri}j.r]Tsg, avtg ; so also in the following substantives, 
^AnoD.Mv, -bjvog, IloasidbJv, -wvog, ctcot^o, -^igog, ^A^cflwv, -lovog, darig, -igog, 
thus (x)"AtcoI).ov, noasLdov, aojTEg, ^'AfACpLov, dixEg ; and in compound substan- 
tives and adjectives ; in adjectives also in the neuter, e. g. "Aya^s^xvov from 
^AyafiEixvojv, Agicnoysnovfi'om. ^AgiaToyEltbJv, ^ooygaiEg, /ir,n6a&EVEg^'Oin2o3- 
x^«T7jc, /irifioa&ivrjg ; av&adr^g, w and to av&adEg, cpilotXrjd'Tjg cpiXdlrj&Eg (but 
aXrj&rjg, -ig, uncompounded), avTugxr^g aviugy.Eg, y.ay.oi]^r^g y.ay.ovi&Eg, and so 
all adjectives in -al^Kxiv and -I'j^cav, e. g. iXti'i^wv iXir^^ov, Evdaluwv evdaifxav ; 



^66.] GENDER OF THE THIRD DECLENSION. 87 

the same liolds true of comparatives in ~tu)v, -iov, e. ^. o) and to xdXXiov. 
The following are exceptions: w ylaxEdaifiov from yiaxtdmfxMv, com|)ounds 
in -qpQcoy, e. g. o* AvxofpQOv from ylvxocpQWVj Ev&vcpgov from Evx>\;(pq(jiv, 
da'i'cpQm' diuq)Qov, and adjectives and substantives in -ojdrjq, -(orjg, -ojXrjg, 
-MQtjg^ -r]Qt]g^ e. g. evMdrjg slwdsg, ttfiq)Mr]g oijxcpbisg, navcoXrjg navoJXsg, vsojgrjg 
vswQsg, ^i(p)']Qi]g ^i(ptigfg, zlt,(og7]g, w /ii,MQEg. 

Rem. 2. On the contrary, JTaXalficov JIaXalixov, (InXrifiMv ^InXiifiov, Noi^^tov 
Noijf.iov, '/xfTtt'cov "ixsTtxov, Maxaoov Maxo^ov, 'AqsIwv ^Agsiov, 'idaov lacrov, 
"AQstdwv Aqstuov, not compounded, and also all in -(og, both compound 
and simple, e. g. oixijimq -ijtoq, noXvf^tjdTWQ -ijaiog, avTOxgm(ag -onog, 
'l^XTTijvcag -ijvog, 'AvTtivcag -rivog, ngoiKXTcog -dxog. 

(b) The Vocative of nouns in -ai'$, -svg, -ovg, -w and -cog is Perispome- 
non, e. g. ygav, ^aaiXsv^ /?ou, Sancpoi, alddl. 



§ 66. Gender of the Th ird Declension. (262.) 

The natural gender — the masculine and feminine — is distinguished in 
the third Declension, as has been seen above, § 40, not by a special form, 
but partly by the signification, partly by the forms, and also in part by 
usage alone. The following rules will aid in determining the gender : 

I. (a) Substantives in - dv, -vv, - a ?, Gen. -avog, -avTog, -svg, -tj^, 
are masculine, %vitliout exception ; — (b) also those in ~ r} v, - (o v, Gen. -ojvog, 
-T] g, - € i (>, -V g, - b) g, -rj g, Gen. -rjTog, - ovg, - (o g, Gen. -onog, and - ip, 
with the followmg exceptions : 

(a) in -rjv: o 17 ddijv, -svog, gland, and 7'j cpgriv, diaphragm; 
(/?) in -(ov: 1) aXojv, threshing-Jloo?', i] ^Xi'i/wv or yXi]X(x)v, pennyroyal, ri 
firjxbiv, poppy, ?'/ jgi^gojv, pigeon, 6 ?; avXuv, ditch, 6 rj xcodcov, bell ; 

[y] in -Tig', t] yaaiijg, belly, 1) xrjg, xrjgog, fate, rj gaiairig, hammer, and 
neuters contracted from -sag into -rjg, e. g. to o-t^^, tallow ; 
{d) in -eig: i] /slg, hand ; 
{s) in -vg: to nvg,fire; 

(^ in -(a g, the neuters tXdodg, ivish, sXcag, booty, TviXojg, monster, axcog, 
excrement, Tsxfiojg, object, vdoog, water; 

[t]) in -r^g, all absti'acts in -oTrjg, -vzrjg, e. g. rj ^s^aioxrjg, -ojrjTog, firm- 
ness, and r, iad-rig, -^jrog, vestis ; 
{&■) in -ovg: to ovg, ear; 
{i) in -tog: to cpwg, light, 7] dug, gift; 

(x) in -xp: 1] xaXavgoxp, crook, fj y.aTi]Xnp, roof, tj XalXaip, hurricane, rj hip, 
voice, 1] cpXsip, vein, '^ yjgvixp, washing-water, rj, seldom o, wip, eye. 

n. (a) Substantives in - a ?, Gen. -ddog, -avg, - lv g, -vvg, -to and 
-wg, -oog, abstracts m -oxrjg, -vxrjg, are, without exception, feminine ; 
— (b) those in - £ t ?, - t ? and -iv, -vg and -cav, -ov og, with the follow- 
ing exceptions, are feminine : 
(a) in -sLg: 6 xrelg, comb; 

(/3) in - Lg and - tv: xlg, corn-worm, 6 yXdvig, a kind of fi^h, 6 Xtg, Epic, 
lion, Gen. -log ; 6 dsXcpig or deXcplv, dolphin, 6 Ixxlv, kite, 7j S^lg, heap, 6 xtX- 
fiig, mud, Gen. -tvog ; xontg, dagger, 6 og/ig, testicle, c oqitg, serpent. Gen. 
-ecag, oi and al xvg^eLg, -eojv, law-tables ; and many names of animals of the 



88 ANOMALOUS NOUNS OF THE THIRD DEC. [§§67, 68. 

common gender, e. g. o ») o^vig, ^id^og^ bird, 6 ^ ilyqiq, -tog, -t(5off, tigeTf 
6 V s;(ig, -f (05, viper, o r, xoQig, -i(ng, hug ; 

(/) in -v?: 6 ^uTQig, cluster, 6 &(}i}vvg, footstool, o IxO^ig, fisk, o fitg, 
mouse, o vixvg, corpse, 6 attixvg, ear of com, 6 rj vg or avg, swine, Gen. -tog; 
6 niXfxvg, cure, 6 nij^vg, cubit. Gen. -siog; 

{d) in - w V, Gen. -ovog: 6 uy-nbiv, anvil, v aavoiv, rule, o ulixiQvojv, cock, 
o i] xtb)v, pillar, Gen. -ovog. 

Re^iark 1. Those in -^ var}^ between the mascuHne and feminine gen- 
der, except those in -r}^, Gen. -tjxog, which are masculine, and Properispome- 
na in - a |, e. g. t) fjoiXa^, -ccy^, -ay/og, - l^, - ly^, -v$, - vy^, which are 
feminine. 

III. Nouns of the Neut. gender are, (a) all substantives in -a, -tj, -oq, 
~o}Q, -og, -I and -v; and (b) those in -uq and -ag. Gen. -uTog, -aog, and 
contracts in -i]q, except 6 ipag, starling, and o Xixg, stone. 



§67. Anomalous Nouns of the Third Declension. 

(2C9.) 

All substantives, whose inflection differs from the rules and 
analogies above given, are included under the in-egular sub- 
stantives of the third Dec. All the anomalous forms of the 
thu'd Dec. may be divided into three classes : 

(a) The first class includes those substantives, whose Nom. has a form 
which cannot be derived, according to general analogy, from the Genitive- 
stem, e. g. i) yvvTj, ivoman, Gen. yvvaix-og. 

(b) The second class includes those substantives, which, with one Nom. 
form, have in particular Cases, or in all the Cases, two modes of formation, 
both of which, however, may come, in accordance with the general rules, 
from one form of the Nom., e. g. o ?; ogvig, Gen. -l&og, a fowl, PI. ogvL^sg 
and oQvsig, as if fi'om ogvig, Gen. -ecog. These substantives may be termed 
Heteroclites. 

(c) The third class includes those substantives, which, with one Nom. 
form, admit, in particulai* Cases, or in all the Cases, tsvo modes of formation, 
one of which may be derived from the Nom. form, but the other supposes 
a diflferent Nom. form, e. g. ■dsQanojv, -oviog, a servant, Ace. ■^sQanovxa, 
and poetic & sq ana, as if fi-om -^igaiiJ. This formation may be called 
Metaplasm, and the substantives included under it, Metaplasts. The Nom. 
form, presupposed in this case, is termed the Theme. 

§68. Nummary of the Anomalous Forms of the 

Th ird Declension. (27o.) 

1. r6vv, to, knee, and Soqv, to, spear, see §54, (c). 

In the tragic poets, the Epic forms, yoviara and yoiva, yoiracn,, occur; 
also, in the Attic poets, the Gen. 8 ogog, Dat. 8oql, and even dog^i, and 



§ 68.) SUMMARY OF ANOMALOUS FORMS OF THIRD DEC. 89 

PI. SoQi} instead or(5c'ottTa, arc formed fi-om 86gv] and in the phrase, doQl 
kkfh', to take a prisoner of war, this Dat. form is retained even by the Attic 
prose writers. 

2. Fwri, ;/, ivoman^ Gen. ywmx-og, Dat. yvvaix-i, Ace. yvvaix-a, 
Voc. yvvai ; PI. yvvalxeg, yvpaixcov, yvvai^iiv), yvvaixag. 

3. /ioQv, see yovv, No. 1. 

4. Zevg, Gen. /Iiog, Dat. /^u, Ace. /^la, Voc. Zev. 
Poet, corresponding forms are Zrjvog, Zr^vi, Zr\va. 

5. OegaTi (ov, 6, servant , -ovrog. In Eurip. Ace. d-tQUTta, PI. 
^SQansg, §67, (c). 

6. KuQa, TO, /i^«f?, an Epic and poetic word. Gen. xQar-og, 
Dat. y.Qari and '/.aQa, Ace. to xfiooc, zo y.oaia (rov 'Aqdza, § 214) ; 
Ace. PL rovg xQazag, § 67, (c). 

7. KXeig, jJ, ^'e7/, Gen. xA£^5-oV, Dat. y.leid-i, Ace. y.leid-a, and 
commonly xP.fr*', § 53, Rem. 1 ; Nom. and Ace. PI. y.lsig, and 
7i).Eideg, yXeldagy §67, (b). 

Old Attic, itXfig, yX^dog, xXf]di, xXfjda. 

8. Kv (o V, 6, 7], dog', Gen. yvv-6g, Dat. ywi, Ace. xwa, Voc. y.vov^ 
PI. xy^fS", yvv(^v, XV a I, xvvag. 

9. ui /^ a, TO, o?7, fatness, in the Epic dialect always in the 
phrases, aXelipaod^ai Xin iXcdc^, XQ''^^^ ^^^ XQioaad^ai Xin IXalop, and 
so also in the Attic prose, aXdcpEod-ai, xQieod^at Xina ; Xina is thus 
an abridged Dat. instead of Xinai, 7Jna, from to ^Jna, Gen. -ctog, 
but tXaiov must be considered as an adjective from tXda, olive, 
so that XiTta eXaiov means olive-oil. 

10. MaQtvg, 6, loitness, Gen. ^aQtvQog, Dsit fiagrvQi, Ace. (^olq- 
rvQu, rarer iiaqzw ; Dat. PI. fiaqrijoi^v). 

11. N avg, 71, ship, Gen. vmg, Dat. vriij Ace. vavv, Voc. want- 
ing; Dual, Gen. and Dat. ^£0M^, Nom. and Ace. wanting; PL 
vijeg, veav, vavoi{v), vavg. Comp. yQccvg, § 57. 

12. "Oqvi g, 0, ^, 6zV<^, Gen. oQvld--og, etc. The PL has a form 
declined like noXig, except the Dat., ogvldsg and oQveig, oqviS-cov 
and oQvecov, oqv'kji, oQvl&ag, and oQveig and o^n?, § 67, (b). 

In the Attic writers the t is sometimes short, oqvig, oqviv, Aristoph. Av. 
16. 270. 335. but oqvig, ognv, 70. 103. 73. 

13. IIvv^,^, place of meeting', Gen. Ttvxv-og, Ddit tzvxvi, Ace. 
nvxva. 



90 DEFECTIVES OF THIRD DEC. REDUNDANT NOUNS. [§§69,70. 

14. ^Tjg, 6, moth, Gen. (ye-og^ PI. atsg, Gen. (T*W, etc. 

15. 2:xojQ, TO, dirt. Gen. cxatog, etc. 

16. "Td(OQ, TO, water, Gen. vdazog, etc. 

17. fl^{>6ig, (p&oig, 6, art of cooking-, Gen. (pO^oi-og and (from 
gji^oiV) (fO-otd-og] PI. qid-oEig and cpOoidEg. 

18. X V ^', 0, a ma55, /oo?, /o/, /oyr, /of?, ^O"^? Z0^<^*'» P"^ ^^^^ 
|3ov?, § 57, also Gen. /ow?, Ace. /oa, Ace. PL /o«?, as if from x^^^^- 
The later forms are preferred by the Attic writers ; /ov? with 
the meaning of mound, is inflected only like ^ovg. The form xo^v? 
is Ionic, Dat. ;fO£i". 

19. XQcog, 0, skin, /(>«7-oV, ;f^coT/, ;f^oara. Corresponding 
forms in Ionic and the Attic poets, are. Gen. XQ^-^^^ 7.Q^^^ XQ^"' 
like al^cog. The Dat. XQ^ is found in certain phrases with *V, 
e. g. fV ;f^cp xEiQEod^ai, Xen. Hell. 1. 7, 8. Ji^(>«t ev XQ(^, to be in ex- 
treme peril, Soph. Aj. 786. 

§ 69. T> efe ctiv e No uns of the Th ird Declension. 

(271.) 

Some nouns of the third Dec. are wanting in one or more of the Cases, 
and are, consequently, called Defectives. Existiag forms, however, of such 
substantives, are found, for the most part, only in certain phrases, e. g. 
Xqso} (?, TO, debt, Ionic- Attic form for the Nom., Gen. and Ace. ; the defec- 
tive forms are supplied by to XQsog, Gen. xQ^ovg and /Qscag, PI. toc zgsa. 

Change of Form in the Declensions. 

§70. I. Redundant Nouns. (2T2.) 

The term Redundant is applied to substantives, which have 

double forms in the Nom. (but often only in the Nom. PI.) and 

throughout aU or in most of the Cases. 
A. In the same declension, 

(a) with the same gender, e. g. 

o Img and Xuog, people, 6 vsug and vaog, temple, 6 Xayag and Xayog, hare, 
o itdXojg, rope, PI. also y,aXoi, i] aXcog, threshmg-foor, PI. also at aXoi. 

(b) with different genders (heterogeneous), e. g. 

rmog and to vwiov, hack, (the last form was regarded by the Atticists 
as the only proper form, still lov vojiov Xen. R. Equ. 3, 3.) ; o ^170? and 
TO ^vyoy, yoke. — In the PI. of these heterogeneous nouns, the neuter form is 
predominant, and oi ^vyol is probably not found. 



§ 71.] THIRD DEC. HETEROCLITES. 91 

B. Li different declensions, and commonly with difierent 
genders (heterogeneous), e. g. 

o (f&oy/oQ and ?/ (pd^oyyi^, voice, 6 %ojgog and i] ;^w()a, space, i] dlipct and to 
diipOQ, thirst, i) vtinr] (the older form) and to vanog, valley, etc. Still, it should 
be mentioned, that the word o TiQia^v^, elder, has only Ace. nqiaiivv, Voc. 
nqia^Sv, tlie other three forms are almost entirely poetic, of which nqia^v- 
TfQog and nQsaiSirarog, are in most frequent use ; in the Common Lan- 
<ruage, Tigscr^vTijc, -ov, elder, (in the meaning of messenger, the Common 
Language uses in the Smg. 6 Trgsa'Sivrrig, -oi ; m the PI., however, oi and 
Toi'$ UQsalSsig, jiQia^iwv, ngia^iai); also, to 8ay.QVov and to duxQV, tear. 
The later and the older forms are retained in the poetic dialect ; still, the 
Dat. PI. ddxQVffL is found in the Attic prose-writers, Thu. 7, 75 ; Dem. c. 
Onet. I. § 32. 

§ 71. II. He ter oolites . (273.) 

Heteroclites, § 67, (b), have a double form, either of the same 
Dec, namely of the third, or of different declensions. Hetero- 
clites of the third Dec. ai-e placed together, § 68. Heteroclites 
of different declensions are, e. g. the following : 

A. Ofthe First and Third Declensions. 
Several substantives in -^g are inflected, either in whole or in 
part, according to the first and thu'd declensions : 

(a) Some in -?;?, Gen. -ov and -7]Tog, through all the Cases and according 
to both declensions, o fiw.rjg, mushroom, Gen. fxvycov and fj.vxr]Tog, and some 
proper names, e. g. XuQTjg. The name OaXijg, in the ancient Attic waiters, 
has, together with OaXrjjog, the Ionic Gen. form Oaksoj, Dat. OoiXrjTL and 
OaXj], Ace. OdXrjTa and OaXrjp; 

(b) The proper names mentioned, § 59, Rem. 2, have t] as well as tjv in 
the Ace. Sing. only. 

B. Ofthe Second and Third Declensions. 

(a) The Common second and third declensions. Several 
substantives in -og as masculine are inflected according to the 
second Dec, but as neuter, according to the third Dec, e. g. 
and ro oyog, chariot, rov oyov and oyovg, tov oyov and to oyog ; 
and TO ay.6rog, darkness. 

(b) Compounds of the second and third declensions : 

Tigo/oog, rj, watering-pot, Att. ngo/ovg, Gen. nQo/ov, etc., Dat. PI. tt^o- 
Xovai like ^ovg, (iovaiv. 

Oi8lnovg, Gen. Oldlnodog and poet. Oldlnov, Dat. OldlnodL, Ace. Oldl- 
noda and Oldlnovv, Voc. Oidinov. 



92 THIRD DEC. METAPLASTS. [§ 72. 

(c) The Attic second and third declensions : 

In tlie Arc. Sing, o yiXaig, laii^liier^ yiXuTog, ytloni, Ace. yiXiata and 
ysXtaVy and the tliree Ibllowiiig, ndiijug, palruus, fjii]jQb)c, avunculus, and 
Mivwg, wliicli, in the Gen. and Ace. Sing., are inflected according to the third 
Dec. and the second Attic ; in the other Cases, according to the third Dec. 

naTQMQ, Gen. tkxtqo) and ttktoojo?, Dat. nujiiWL, Ace. nuiQOiv and ni'trqiaa ; 

Mlrwg, Gen. Mlro) and Mlviaog, Dat. Mlvai, Ace. JkftVw, § 48, Rem. 1, 
Mhfav and Mlpua. 



§ 72. III. Metaplasts. (ta.) 

Metaplasts, § 67, (c), like Heleroclites, have a double forma- 
tion, either of the same declension, or of different declensions. 
Metaplasts of the same delension have been treated, § (SS^ under 
the third Dec. Metaplasts of different declensions are, e. g. the 
following : 

(a) The Common second and third declensions, 

Jiv^Qov, TO, tree, Gen. dirdgov, etc.; but in the Dat. PI. among the 
Attic writers, divd^icn (from the stem to /iEN/lP02) and 6iv5qoig ; the 
fii-st form is regarded by the Atticists as the better. To this stem belong, 
also, the forms tw divdqsi and to; divdqrj, which occm- in the Attic poets, 
and in later prose-%\Titers. 

Koiv ojvog, 6, partaker, Gen. xoivcovov, etc. ; Xenophon uses the forms 
ol y.oLVMPsg and lovg y.oiv(vvag, from KOINJljy. 

KqIvov, to, lily, Gen. xqIvov, etc., with the corresponding form m the 
Dat. PI. xglvfo-L, in Ai'istoph. fi'om the PI. y.qivm, (in Herod.). Comp. divdQov. 

A a g, 6, stone, Gen. Xaog and in Soph. O. C. 196. Xuov. 

" O V s iQ g and to ovslqov, dream, Gen. oveIqov and ovstQUTog. 

nil Q, TO, Jire, nvgog. PL, however, t« nvgd, watch-fires, according to the 
second Dec. 

"Tlbg, 0, son. Gen. I'toi;, etc. Together with this formation, there is 
another according to the third Dec, much in use, particularly in the Attic 
writers, fi-om the theme ^TIET2, Gen. vUog, Dat. vlu, (Ace. vliu is rejected) ; 
PI. vlttg, Gen. vUojv, Dat. vUgl, Acc. vUag, commonly vUlg ; Dual vlh, Gen. 
vUoLv. 

(b) The Attic second and third declensions, 

The three substantives, i) aXcxig, threshing-floor, o Taaig, peacock, and o rvcpwg, 
whirlwind, have, together with the common inflection according to the Attic 
second declension, another, according to the thkd declension, in -avog, etc., 
e. g. Tiqpaiya. 

Remark. TJie words r, a X co g and o r « w ? are generally declined ac- 
cording to the Attic second Dec, Acc Sing. aXoir, raiov ; still, the v is com- 
monly rejected from aXcag in the Acc, § 48, Rem. 1. But the forms aXojvog, 
aXwpsg, aX(a(ji{v), Taojvi, laaveg, taojtriv, etc., are used on account of their 
greater perspicuity. 



§§ 73, 74.] THE ADJECTIVE AND PARTICIPLE. 93 



§73. Indeclinable and Defective Nouns. (275.) 

1. Those substantives are termed indeclinable that have but one form to 
denote the Case. Besides the foreign proper names, like u l4,.?o««/<, rov 
'A^Qadft, and most cardinal numbers, all indeclinable nouns of the neuter 
gender are included. Thus, e. g. indeclinable nouns are, 

(a) The names of the letters, e. g. to, toD, to) wAqpa; 

(b) Most of the cardinal numbers, e. g. dixa vtvdQMv; 

(c) To, Toi', 70) XQeitiv, necessiti/, destiny, and d^i^xK; with uvai and several 
foreign words, e. g. to, toD, to* nufj/a', 

(d) The substantive infinitives, e. g. to, tol-, toj y^oKpsiv. 

2. Some substantives are used only in the Sing., or only in the PI. Such 
words may be termed Defediva numero. The reason of it is found, either in 
the meaning of the word, or simply in usage, e. g. 6 alOijo, ether, ol iiricrlut, 
the Etesian winds, ai ^Ad^rivai, Athens, xa ^Olv^iiLa, the Olympic games. Comp. 
fui'ther, Syntax, § 243. 

3. It has been already noted, § 69, that some substantives are found only 
in single Cases [Defediva casu). 



SECTION II. 

The Adjective and Participle. 

§ 74. Na ture, Gender and Declension of the Ad- 
jective and Participle. (276.) 

1. The Adjective and the Participle express a property, which 
is considered as ah'eady belonging to a subject, e. g. the red 
rose, or as now first affirmed of a subject, e. g. the rose is red. 
In both instances, in Greek and in Latin, the Adjective and 
Participle agTee with their substantive in Gender, Number and 
Case, e. g. odyad'og TzaTTjQ and TtaTTjQ dyad-og iariv, ri dy a&ri 
fir^Tr^Q and ^ f^^^^iQ dy a&rj saTiv, to dy aS^ov rs'y.vov and to ti'/.vov 
dya-d-ov iariv. 

2. Hence the Adjective and the Participle, like the Substan- 
tive, have a three-fold inflection for the gender, which is termed 
motion, § 40, Rem. 1. Still, many Adjectives have only two 
endings, namely, one for the Masc. and Fem. gender, the other 
for the Neuter gender, e. g. oco q) qcov dvf^Q, rj acocpQcov yvvrj, 
70 oacpQov rty.vov. Many Adjectives, still, have but one end- 
ing, by which they commonly indicate only the Masc. and Fem. 

13 



94 ACCENTUATION OF ADJECTIVES AND PARTICIPLES. [§ 75. 

genders, rarely the Neuter gender, and never the Noin., Ace. 
and Voc. Neuter, e. g. o c/ v y a g dv/jQ, rj cfvy u g yvvrj. In Ad- 
jectives and Participles of three endings, the Masc. and Neuter 
always belong to the same declension, and the Neuter varies 
from the Masc. only in the Norn., Ace. and Voc. ; the Fern, is 
always declined lilvo the first Dec. 

3. The dec'lension of Adjeclivcs and Participles differs only 
in a few points from that of the Substantive; these will be no- 
ted in the follov/ing pages. It may be renriarJced as an essen- 
tial deviation in the Participles, that the Voc. of the third Dec. 
is always like the Nom., § 53, Rem. 5. 



§75. Accentuation of Adj e ctiv e s and Participles. 

The accentuation of Adjectives and Participles is like that of Substantives, 
with a few exceptions, wliich are now to be noted: 

1. The Fern, is accented on the same syllable as the Masc. through 
all the Cases, where the natiu-e of the jfinal syllable permits, e. g. y.aXoq, xa- 
Xi], xaXov ; KOvg)og, y.ovq)r}, xovcpov ; xaQisig^;(UQi((jCfa, '/aqUv ; fxelag, fiiXaivu, 
(j.£Xav ; TSQ')]V, tsQsivcc, TSQ8V ; ^aqic, (SaQHoc, ^agv ; (jovXsvaag, ^ovXemixcra, 

Remark 1. Li Adjectives in -o?, -% -ov, or -og, -oi, -ov, the Fern., on ac- 
count of the length of the final syllable [rj, a), must be a Paroxjtone, when 
the Masc. is a Proparoxytone, or a Properispomenon, e. g. uv&QojTiivog, av~ 
S^gcanlrt], avd-gioTiivov ', iXevd^sgog, iXiv&sgci, iXfv&fgov ', y,ov(pog, xo{q)7], hov- 
q)OV', ffTiovSaTog, (movdala, (TnovSoilov', but, when tlie final syllable in the 
declension is short, it again takes the accentuation of the Masc, i. e. it be- 
comes again a Proparoxytone, or a Properispomenon, e. g. av&Qanivai, 
iXsv&sgaL, y.ovq^ai, anovdalaL, like av&gcajiivoi, iXev&sgoL, y.ovq)Oi, anovdaloi. 

2. In Participles, when the nature of the syllables permits, the same sylla- 
ble is accented in the Neuter Nom. as in the Masc, e. g. 

7icad8vcav, n a l8 sv ov Tifirjacov, t l fii] a ov 

(fiXojv (piXovv Xt-JTCov, Xltiov. 

Rem. 2. Yet Adjectives, sometimes deviate from this rule, see § 65, 5. 

3. Contracts in -ovg, -ij, ~ovv^ from -sog, -£«, -eov, -oog, -6i], or -6a, -oov, 
(except the Nom. and Ace Dual of the Masc and Neuter genders, which 
are ox}'toned, § 49, 3), are Perispomena through all the Cases and Num- 
bers, though such as are derived from -fo? in uucompounded forms, are 
Proparoxytoned, e. g. ag/vgsog = agyvgoig, ugyvgiov = agyvgovv. On 
contracted compounds in -oog, -oov, e. g. ivvovg, tivovv, see § 49, 3. 

4. In the Gen. PI. the Barytoned Fern, is a Perispomenon, § 45, 6, (b), on- 



§76.] ADJECTIVES AND PARTICIPLES OF THREE ENDINGS. 95 

ly in tlioso Adjortivcs and Participles, whose Masc. is lik(; tlic tliird Dec, 
while all the remaining Cases, retain the aeeent of the Masc., c. g. 

^uQii:, -sta, -V Gen. PI. ^agawv, (3 aQsi m v 

;(u()ietg, -ieaaa, -hv " /(xqUvtuv, % oc q l E(t a mv 

(.tikag, (.leXitivu, (xilav " fifluvMV, ^tiXaiv mv 

nag, na<jtt, nay " narTcov, naa mv 

T vq)&ft'g, -slaa, -sv " Tvcp&ivibiv, rvcp&EKTbJV 

Tvipag, rvipaaa, Tiipttv " TVii/avT(av,rvipa(T(xiv;hut, 

ar&Qionivog, -Ivt], -lvov " vtvd^Q(}inlvoiv,<xB Masc, F. and N. 

(Xtix^sQog, -sQii, -tQov " iXsv&SQwv, as Masc, F. and N. 

jvmonsvog, -ivi], -wov " t f tt x o ;u s y w y, as Masc, F. and N. 

Rem. 3. On the accentuation of the monosylhible nag, and of monosyl- 
labic partici|)les in the Gen. and Dat, see §()5, 2, (c). 

Rem. 4. On the accentuation of the Nominative form of compoimd ad- 
jectives, the follow^ing- things are to be noted : 

(a) Those in -o^, when the last part is formed of a substantive or adjec- 
tive, folloAV the general rule, §30, 1, (c), and are Proparoxytones, e.g. 
(piXoTiy.vog, from tsxvov, na/xaxog, from y.ay.og. But if the last part is 
formed of a verb, tlien those adjectives, whose penult is long, are 
Ox\'tones, e.g. ipv/ononnog, ^sXonoiog, dsLvconog, 6dr]/6g; but those, 
whose penult is short, are commonly Paroxytones, if they have an ac- 
tive sense, but if a passive, Proparox} tones, e. g. 

Xi&o^oXog, one casting stones, h&6^3oXog, cast down by stones, 

fjriTQoy.Tovog, matricide, fiviTgoTiiovog, slain hy a mother, 

■&riQOTg6q)og, nourishing wild beasts, S^i^QOTgocpog, nourished by ivild beasts. 

Those compomids that are formed of prepositions, « privative and 
intensive, iv and dvg, and asi, ayav, agi, agri, igi, ri^n, ^a, nav and 
noXv, are exceptions to the rule which applies to those Avords that 
have a short penult ; words compounded with these particles are al- 
ways Proparox} tones. 

(b) Verbal adjectives in -xoc remain Oxytones, in compound words, if they 
have three endmgs, but are Proparoxytones, if they have only two 
endmgs. See § 78, I, (c). 

(c) All compounds in -nXi]% -goo^, -rgo)^, -uqxx^, are Oxytones. 



Summary of the Adjective and Participial Endings. 

§76. I. Adjectives and Participles of three 

Ending's . (278— ssi.) 

I. -og, -7}, -ov: Nom. aya&og, aya&i], aya&ov, good, 
Gen. ayu'&ov, aya&ijg, aya&ov 
Nom. oydoog, oydorj, oydoov, eighth, 
Gen. PI. oydoMV, oydowv, oydocjv {§ 75, 4.) 
Nom. ygacpofiEvog, ygacpofisvr], ygacpojiiEvov 
Gen. PI. ygacpofisrav, yga(foy.iv{av, ygaq)0fiivojv 



96 ADJECTIVES AND PARTICIPLES OF THREE ENDINGS. [§76. 

-0?, -a, -oy: Nom. dlxaiog, dtxixiu, dlxaiov, j^istj 
Gen. diy.uluv, dLy.uitxi;, div.uiov 
Gen. PI. dty.aioiv, 8iyaio)v, diy.iao)V 
Nom. e/J)Q6g, exO^(ju, f'/f^Qov, hostile, 
Gen. t/&()ov, e/\}()ug, f'/O^rjot 
Nom. u&Qooq, u&(j6u, udi)6ov,full, 
Gen. u&Qoov, u&Qcug, ui^Qoov 
Gen. PI. u&q6(x)v, ud^(ju(i)v, u{}quiov. 

Most of the adjectives belong to this class. The Fem. ends in a, when 
preceded by i or q, § 43, 1. Still, adjectives in -ooc have -6a in the Fem., 
when a q precedes the o, elsewhere -otj, e. g. udqoa, yet oydorj. On the 
accentuation of adjectives in -og, -■»?(«), -ov, see §75. 

Adjectives in -sog, - s w, - c o v, which indicate the material, e. g. XQvaiog, 
golden, afj'/VQSog, silver, xeQUfieog, earthen, and multiplicative adjectives in 
-oog, -Of], - 6 ov, e. g. wttAooc:, single, dmXoog, double, suffer contraction. 
On the accentuation of adjectives in -sog, -ia, -lov, see §75, 3, and on the 
contraction of adjectives in -ia into -«, -ori into -i], and -oa into a, see 

§9,n. 



;^^i;o--£0?, 


XQva-s(x, 


XQva-wv 


XQV(T-ovq, 


XQV(T-ij, 


XQV(T-01IV 


igs-sog, 


i()E-sa, 


igs-sov 


igs-ovg. 


sQS-a, 


EQS-OVV 


agyvQ-Eog, 


aQ/VQ-ia, 


agyvQ-Eov 


aQ'/vg-ovg, 


agyvQ-a, 


ag/vg-ovv 


8iTil-6og, 


8inl-6ij, 


di7iX~6ov 


dmX-oiig, 


dinX-i], 


8t,nX-ovv. 



Remark 1. Attic writers rarely omit the contraction, e. g. /^vafa, Xen. 
Ag. 5, 5 ; yet a & g 6 o g, ~ 6 6i, - 6 o r, crowded, is rarely found contracted ; 
d ixg oog, -6 a, -oov, two-pronged, is commonly contracted in the Masc. 
and Neut., dixgoig, dixgovv, but in the Fem. the uncontracted form is 
usual, ?; diy.goa ; 6/5 o o ? is always uncontracted. 

n. -V g, - sla, -V : Nom. ylvy.vg, ylyxBia, ylvy.v, sweet. 
Gen. ylvyJog, yXvy.dag, yXvxiog 
Gen. PI. yXvxsMv, yXvxEiojv, yXvy.ioiv (§75, 4). 

The declension of the Masc. is like nrixvg, but with the common geni- 
tives in -iog, -sojv, the declension of the Neut. is like uaiv, yet always im- 
contracted in the PI. (-£«). The only deviations from the regular accentua- 
tion are, ri^iiavg,i]^l(jua, riuiav, half, ■driXvg, female, ngia^vg, old (used only 
in the Masc), and some poetic forms. 

Rem. 2. The adjective i](xi,(jv g, in the Attic \^Titers, has both the con- 
ti'acted and uncontracted forms, rjiAlasig and Vi^hmg in the Ace. PI. ; also 
the Neut. ij^iaea is found in several passages in Demosthenes in the con- 
tracted form i]{Ai(TT]. Sometimes the Ionic Fem. form -£« occm-s, e. g. 
nXaiiu, X. R. Equ. 1, 14. (in all Codd.). rnuiasag, PI. Menon. 83, c. in the 
best Codd. 



§ 76.] ADJECTIVES AND PARTICIPLES OF THREE ENDINGS. 97 

III. -vg, -vaa, -vv: Noni. dfixvvc, deiyvvan, dsixvif^ shoiving, 
Gen. dfixriiTOi;, duy.yiarjc:, dfiyvvvjog 
Gen. PL dfixvvyxMv, 8Hxvi'au)i',dsixvvvx(jjv{^75,A.) 
Nom. cpvg, (jpitrw, (pvv, produmig^ 
Gen. (fvvTog, cpvai^g, cpvvTog [§65, 2, (c).] 
Gen. PI. (pvvTOJv, (pvaojv, (fvvjwv. 

So the participles of the Pres. and second Aor. Act. of verbs in -/it. For 
the declension of the Masc. and Neut., see §54, (d). 

rV. -£t?, -£(T(r«, -€v: Nom. xaQtsig, -/aqiiaaa, /w^/sv, lovely, 
Gen. /a^UvTog, /agLsaaijc, /aglfvrog 
Gen. PI. xaguvTcav, xugitaaojv, xagievTuv. 

For the declension of the Masc. and Neut., see § 54, (d), only that the 
Dat. PI. ends in -eai, not -etai, e. g. /uQuai. The Masc. and Neut. is in 
the Nom. a Paroxjtone, in the Fern, a Proparoxj'tone. 

Rem. 3. Some adjectives in - ?; s t g, - »; £ o- o" a, - rj 8 j', and -6 £ ig, - 6 sa- 
a a, -6 sv, admit contraction, e. g. 

Nom. Tifii]-ug, Tifx^-scraa, zifx^i-sv, honored, 

Ti(Af]g, riijrj(T(Ttt, tijaiJv 
Gen. rifxijvrog, Tiixrjcrarjg, Tifirfvrog 
Nom. fisXno-eig, fisXiro-scraa, fisXno-sv, Iwnied, 

IxEliiovg, fxslnoiaau, jusXnovv 
Gen. f^EXiTOvviog, ^zXaomar^g, (.uXiiovvxog. 

V. - £ / 5, - sT 0- a, - £ y : Nom. Xsicpd^Elg, Xucpd^uaa, Xucf&iv, relictus, 

Gen. XsLq)d^ivTog, Xficp&sia-i^g, XsLcpd^Evrog 
Gen. PI. Xsicp&ivTMv, Xsicp&eLacap, Xsiq)&ivi(av 
Nom. Ti&Eig, XL&Eicra, x l 3^ iv, placing, 
Gen. TL&svxog, XL&Eiarjg, xi&ivxog. 

For the declension of the Masc. and Neut., see §54, (d), and also in the 
Dat. PI., e. g. Tvcp^slai. So likewise the Part. Pass, of the fu*st and second 
Aor., and the Pres. and second Aor. Active Part, of xL&tjixl and 'irjfii, e. g. 
isig, Islaa, liv, Eig, slatx, IV, ^slg, d^staa, x^iv. 

VI. -ag,- a IV a, - a v: Nom. fisXag, fxiXctira, fiiXuv, black, 

Gen. (isXavog, (isXalvrjc, fiiXnvog 
Gen. PI. fxsXuvcov, fisXaivojv, /xsXavojv. 

In the same manner only xaXug, xaXmva, xaXav, unhappy. For the de- 
clension of the Masc. and Neut., see § 54, (d), with Rem. 6. 

Vn. - a g, - a (T a, - u V : Nom. nug, naaa, nav, all, every, 
Gen. Txavxog, nuarjg, navxog 
Gen. PI. nuvxwv, naaojv, nuvxoiv. 

In the same manner only the compounds of nag, e. g. wttmc, unuaa, 
anav, (Ji\u7i(xg, ngonag, and the remaining compounds which have a short 
« in the Neut. See § 54, (d), for the declension of the Masc. and Neut., and 
§ 65, 2, (c), for the accentuation of the simple adjective in the Gen. and Dat 
PI. and Dual. 



98 ADJECTIVES AXD PARTICIPLErf OF THREE ENDINGS. [§ 7G. 

Vin. -dg, -dcroij^av: Nom. Xsliijvig, lilifjuaa, Xtttpuv, having left, 
Gen. IfiipavTUQ, XfniJuarjC, Xnipuvrog 
Gen. PI. lenpuvKuy, Xnipuawv, XinjjHvTiav. 

So the first Aor. Act. Part., and also the Part. Pres. and second Aor. 
Act. of 'ijTTjfji, laiag, -uaa, -ixv, dTug, -uaa, ~uv. For the decleusiou, see 

§54,(d). 

IX. -T]v, -eiva, -sv'.^om. rigr^v^ riQSiva, TiQ(p,Jine. 

Gen. TSQtvog, TfQslrrjg, rioevog 
Gen. PL jsqsvojv, reQHVbJv, TfQevbJV. 
No other adjective is thus dechned. For the declension, see § 55, 1. 

X. ~ V c, - V (T (X, - 6 V : Nom. didovg, didoZan, didov, giving. 

Gen. diduvrog, didovarig, didovTog 
Gen. PI. didovTOJv, didovam; didovicov. 
Thus only the Part. Pres. and second Aor. Act. {-dovg, -dovcra, -dov, Gen. 
-dovTog, -domrjg, Gen. PL in Fem. --dov(jb)v) of verbs in -w^ut. 

XL - CO y, - ova a, -6v: Nom. sy.MV, ixoma, exov, imlling, 
Gen. exovTog, ky.oiarjg, exoviog 
Gen. PL exovTMV, iy.ovaojv, exovTcap. 
Thus only the compound uixojv, commonly Hxmv, uxovaa, dxov. For the 
declension, see § 54, (d). 

Xn. - b)v,-ov(T a, -ov: Nom. Xelnwv, Xslnovo-a, XsiJiov, leaving, 
Gen. XslnovTog, XstJiovcrrjg, Xunovzog 
Gen. PL XsLnoviwv, Xunovdwv, Xsltioptcov. 
So, also, the Pres. Part., Fut. and second Aor. Act. For the declension, 
see § 54, (d). In the same manner, the Present particij^les of contract verbs 
in -aw, -£w and -oca, e. g. 

Nom. Tif^MV, -waa, -ojv Nom. qnXwv^ -ovaa, -ovv 

Gen. TiuMVTog, -atcrrjg, -bJvTog Gen. PL cpiXoivTcov, -ovaajv, -ovvxav. 

Gen. PL zi^imzaf, -(aaojy, -(avxwv. Nom. ^kt&mv, -ovaa, -ovv 

Gen. PL ^la&ovvrwv, -ovaoJv, -ovvTcav. 

The Fut. Part. Act. of Liquid verbs is declined like cpiXaiv, cpdovaa, cpi- 
Xovv, Gen. (piXovvTog, etc., e. g. (jTvegaiv, -ovaa, -ovv, formed from ajisgeoiv, 
etc., from (TJiugoj, to sow. 

Xni. - w ?, -via, -6g: Nom. 7trv(f)wg,T8TV(pv7ci,TETvqi6g,havingstnLck, 
Gen. xiTvq)6Tog, Ttivcpvlag, xsTVcpoTog 
Gen. PL -tsxvqoTOiv, xexvcpvibji', xexvcpoxcov. 

On the form eaxcag, -wcra, saxojg and -6g, etc., see below, § 193, 3. 

XIV. The adjectives, f.isy ag, ^isy dXr], fisy a, great, noXvg, noXXi], 
noXv, much, and n q u og, n g a ela, n g aov, soft, deviate in their declen- 
sion from the usual formation; even noXXov instead of noXiv or noXv, oc- 
curs in the Attic poets ; Aeschines, p. 824, uses the Voc. fiiy aXs. Ilgd og 
has, throughout the Fem., in the PL and Dual Neut., as also in the Gen. 
PL Masc, and sometimes, also, in the other Cases of the Masc. PL, a form 
like Tigavg, -{la, -v (comp. yXvxvg, -siu, -v,) which occurs in the Dialects. 
See the Paradigm. 



§77. 



ADJECTIVES. PARADIGMS. 



99 



§ 77. Paradigms 



(28=2.) 



S.N. 


flya{^-6g 


dyaO--{j 


dyaO-ov, good 


cpCki-og cfi)J-d 


(plh-ov, \o\e\y 


G. 


ayaO'-ov 


dyaO'-ijg 


dyaO-ov 


Cfih-ov cpih-dg 


qih'-ov 


D. 


dyaO-ci) 


dyaO-ii 


dyai^-cp 


(pili-q) (fill- a 


cpih'-cp 


A. 


dyaO--6v 


ayaO-i.v 


dyad--6v 


(plh-ov (fiXi-dv 


cpih-ov 


V. 


dya&s' 
dyaiy-OL 


ayax^-ii 
dyaO-ai 


dyad--6v 
dya\}-a 


cpiXi-E (fdi-d 


(plh-ov 


P.N. 


cpih-oi (fih-ai 


qjtXi-a 


G. 


dyaO-cov 


dyaO-cjp 


dyaO--cov 


cpdi-cov (pih'-cov 


cptXi-cov 


D. 


dya&-oig 


ayaiy-aig 


ayax}-oTg 


(pih'-oig (pili-aig 


cpiXi-oig 


A. 


dya&'Ovg 


dyaO-dg 


dyaO-a 


(pih-ovg qili-dg 


(piXi-a 


V. 


dya&-oi 


dyad^-ai 


dyaO-d 


(fill- 01 (pili-ai 


(piXi-a 


Dual. 


dya{y-c6 
dya&-oTv 


dya\}-d 
ayax}-aTv 


dyad--(6 
ayaO-Oiv. 


cpili-cj cpili-d 
rpiXi'OiV. cpi)J-aiv 


(piXi-(o 
(piXi-oiv. 


S.N. 


ylvAvg 


ylvy.tla 


ylvAV, sweet 


TiQaog TToaEia 


TTodov, soft 


G. 
D. 


ylv'/J-og 
ylvy.H 


yXvxeidg 
ylvy.eia 


ylvyJ-og 
yXvy.Ei 


TtQa.ov TiQaEiag 
TTQacp TZQaEia 


TiQaov 
Tzodfo 


A. 


ylvAvv 


ylvy.eiav 


yXvy.v 


nqaov TzqaEiav 


TTQaov 


V. 


ylvxv 


ylvy.eia 


ylvy.v 


TtQaogyE) TZQaEia 


TTQaov 


P.N. 


ylvy.tig 


ylvxaiai 


ylvyJa 


TZQaoi, TtQasig TZQaeiai TiQaia 


G. 


yXvyJmv 


ylvy.eiojv 


ylvya'cov 


TTQUECOV TlQaElCOVTlQaECOV 


D. 1 ylvyJc)i{v 
A. ylv'AtJg 


) ylvxEiarg 
ylvy.eidg 


ylvyJGi{v) 
ylvy.ia 


Ttqaoig, tt q ueg i tz q as i aig nQasGi 
TTQaovg, nqaeig TZQaEidg Ttqaaa 


V. 


yKvyug 


ylvxeiai 


ylvyJa 


TToaoi, 7T Q aEig 7T Q as lai tz q as a 


Dual. 


ylv^h 


ylvxeid 


yXv'Ase 


7tQd(0 TZQaEi d 


TTQaOJ 


1 ylvAioiv 


ylvy.eiaiv 


yXvyJoiv. 


noaoiv 71 Q a £ f a ( V TZQaoiv. j 


S. N. yjwieig 


'yaQ(£GGu 


yaQiev 


lEixp&Eig lEicpd^Eioa 


XEixpd-av 


G. yaQitvTog 


)[aQi8GGi;g 


'/aQievTog 


lEicp {ytvzog lEiqid'EfGr^g 


XaicpO-avzog 


D. yaQiavTi 


XaQieaaij 


XaQiavzi 


XtKpd^EVZl lEKpO-Eiai] 


XElCpO-EVZl 


A. yaQiEvza 


yaQi£(j6av 


yaQiEV 


lEicpdEvza lEicp&Eioav 


X£iq)&av 


V. yaQiev 


yaQtaaoa 


yjiQiav 


lEiCpdEig lEicpO-Eioa 


XEiq;&Ev 


P. N. yanltvieg 


yaniaaaai 


yaQisvza 


lEixpOavzEg l£i(p{>£ioai 


XEixp&avza 


G. yuQiei^Tcov 


y(Wl£(700JV 


yaQitPZcov 


Iei (p {yEvzcop Xaixp (yEiooJv 


XEiq&avzojv 


D. yaQf£0({v) 


yaoitaaaig yaQieai{v) 


XEicpO-£i(ji{v) ),£iq){)Eiaaig lEi(px}Erai(v) \ 


A. yaQitvrag yaoitoodg 


yaniivza 


l£tq){>Evzag lEicpOEiadg 


XElCpd^EVZa 


V. yaQitvieg 


yaoieaaai 


yaniavza 


lEicp' OavTEg lEicp &Et6ai 


XEiqd'avza 


Dual. yaoUvze 


yaoitoad 


'/aoiEvze 


Iei (p x}a'p z£ Xaicp d^aiod 


Xaicpd-tvzE 


yjwitvzon 


yanitaoan 


yaniEvzoiv. 


laicp {yavzoiv laicp {fEioan 


' XEicpOa'vToir. 



100 



ADJECTIVES. PARADIGMS. 



[§77. 



XQvae-og 


XQvae-d 


XQVGE-OVjgolden 


anXo-og 


dnX()-i] 


dnX/j-ov, simple 


XQvcovg 


XQvai 


XQVOOVV 


dnXovg 


anXri 


UTl/.OVV 


XQvaov 


XQvoijg 


XQvaov 


anXov 


dnhjg 


dnXov 


XQVOOJ 


XQvai] 


XQVGO} 


dnXcf) 


uttXtj 


anX(7) 


/Qvaovv 


XQV61JV 


XQVOOVV 


dnXovv 


anXriv 


dnXovv 


doubtful 


XQvoq 


XQVOOVV 


doubtful 


dnXri 


uttXovv 


XQvaoL 


XQvaai 


XQVOd^ 


anXol 


anXal 


aTzXd 


XQvoojv 


XQvacov 


XQV60JV 


anXoiv 


UTlXoJV 


dnXojv 


yQvooig 


XQvaaig 


XQvooig 


dnXolg 


dnXaXg 


dnXolg 


yQvaovg 


XQvoag 


XQvaa 


dnXovg 


anXdg 


d,7iXd 


XQVOOL 


XQvoat 


XQvaa 


anXol 


dnXal 


dnXd 


XQV(y(x) 


XQVGCI 


XQi'OCO 


dnXoj 


dnXd 


anXw 


XQVOOIV 


XQvaaiv 


XQV601V. 


anXoiv 


d,nXaTv 


dnXoiv. 


TtoXvg 


TToXXrj 


TioXv, much 


fXEyag 


fAEydXrj 


^Ey a, great 

liEydXov 

[A,EydXq> 


TtoXXov 


TioXXrjg 


TZoXXov 


fiEyaXov 


fXEydXr^g 


TloXXi^ 


TzoXXrj 


TToXXip 


fiEydXo) 


liEydXri 


TIOXVV 


TtoXXrjv 


TloXv 


fAEyav 


^EyaXr^v 


fiEya 


TloXv 


TioXhj 


TtoXv 


fiEy a 


liEydXij 


(AEy a 


noXXoi 


noXXai 


noXXd 


liEydXoi 
fXEydXcov 


liEydXai 


[lEydXa 


TioXXcjv 


7ZoXX(OV 


TioXXav 


fjEydXcov 


fiEyaXcov 


TToXXolg 


TioXXalg 


TToXXoig 


fiEydXoig 


fiEydXaig 


^sydXoig 


noXXovg 


TtoXXdg 


noXXd 


fxsydXovg 


^EydXag 


fiEydXa 
{XEydXa 


TtoXXoi 


TZoXXca 


TToXXa. 


fiEydXoi 


liEyuXai 








fXEydXco 


fXEydXa 


fiEydXa) 








liEyaKoiv 


^EydXcuv 


liEydXoiv. 


6rdg 


ordaa 


oxdv, standing 


Xinihv 


Xmovaa 


Xinov, leaving 


atavrog 


ataaijg 


crravTog 


XiTtovzog 


Xi7Tov(y?]g 


Xmovzog 


(jtavTi 


araoTj 


cravTi 


Xinovzi 


XiTtovarj 


Xinovzi 


aiavta 


oraaav 


orav 


XiTzovza 


XiTtovaav 


Xinov 


arag 


Gtaaa 


orav 


XlTTOJV 


XiTtovaa 


Xinov 


ardvreg 


ordaai 


ardvra 


XlTTOVZEg 


XlTTOVOCU 


Xmovza 


aiavTcov 


oraocov 


GZaVTCOV 


XlJlOVZCOV 


XlTTOVOOJV 


XlTZOVZCOV 


(JTd6i(v) 


OTcwaig 


6zd6i{v) 


Xinov6i{v) 


Xmovacug 


Xi7tovoi{v) 


otavzag 


araaag 


Gzavza 


Xmovzag 


Xmovoag 


XinovzoL 


oravreg 


azaaai 


otavta 


XinovzEg 


XiTTovaai 


Xinovza 


ardvTE 


Gzaad 


azavzE 


XmovzE 


Xinovod 


XinovzE 


azavroiv 


ozaoaiv 


ozavzoiv. 


Xinovzoiv 


XfTTovacuv 


XlTZOVZOlV. 



§78.] ADJECTIVES OF TWO ENDINGS. 101 



§ 7S. II. Adjectives of two Endings. (283.) 

I. -og , -ov; 1] uXoyog, to aXo/ov, irrational. 

To this class belong, 

(a) A few simple Adjectives without particular derivative-endings, e. g. 
o 1] /5«^;ja()oc, not Greek, la^Qoc, vehement, tj^uf^oc, gentle, XoldoQog, calumnia- 
ting, Tiduaog, mild, /ioaog, unfruitful, 7](jv/og, silent, ddnuvog, extravagant, 
tioXog, yesterday ; 

(b) Most simple xVdjectives with the derivative-endings -log, -siog, and 
-tfiog, e. g. 6 i) (Tun/jQiog, saving, o i) ^aalluog, regius, -a, o rj yvwqi^og, re- 
cognizable ; 

(c) All compounds, e. g. o ?/ aXoyog, ro uloyov, irrational, 6 i) uQyog, in- 
stead of vcsQyog, inactive, but ugyog, -t] -6v, skilful, 6 -tj nayxaXog, very fair, 
but y.cuog, -?), -6v, 6 ?; naXXtvxog, very skilful, but XhV/.og, -i], -6v, -d^sonvsvcFiog, 
-ov, divinely inspired, but nvEvaiog, -?j, -6v ; Adjectives compounded with Ad- 
jectives in -y.og are Proparoxytones, e.. g. o i] yjavddiTiy.og, not pure Attic, but 
\4niy.6g, -i], -ov, 6 rj iJ.i(ToneQ(Tr/.og, but Jlsgar/.og, -?/, -ov. 

Adjectives derived from compound verbs with the derivative-endings 
-y.og, - T c, are excepted ; these remain Oxytones : those in -t so g, also, 
(which remain Paroxytones) are excepted, e. g. sjridsiy.Tiy.og, -rj, -oi', from 
emSsiy.vvjAi, y.uTccay.EvadTog, -ij, -ov, from y.aTaffy.svd'^o), dv^y.iog, -rj, -ov, from 
uvixb). (Some words in -xog, which take a pure Adjective meaning, have in 
this case only two endings and are Proparoxytones, e. g. o n e^uLQerog, pre- 
eminent, inlXr^nxog, blameworthy, 7ifQi(j6riTog, familial', vnonxog, suspicious, 
etc.). But when compounds in -toc, -r?/, -lov, are again compomided, they 
have the regular endmgs, and are Proparox}^toues, e. g. o i] uy.ajaay.svuaiog. 

Remark 1. Comparatives and Superlatives have three endmgs, even 
when the Positive has but two, though there are some rare exceptions, e. g. 
unoQbJTSQog rj Xijipig, Thu. 5, 110. dvgi^^oXwxaTog i] Aoy.qig, Id. 3, 101. 

II. - V g, - vv \ 1] Evvovg, to vuvovv, benevolent. 

Adjectives with these endings are, 

(a) Those compounded Avith the contracted Substantives vovg and TiXovg, 
and hence in the 3Iasc. and Fem. are declined like these, but in the Neuter 
like t/(TTOLT, § 47, yet the Neuter PI. in -o« does not admit contraction, 
consequently t« svvoa. On the accentuation, see § 49, 3. 

Rem. 2. Attic writers sometimes omit the contraction in the PI., e. g. xct- 
y.ovooig X. Cy. 8. 2, L ygvipivoovg X. Ag. 11, 5. dvgvooi X. H. 2. 1, 2. 

(b) Such as are compounded w^ith the Substantive novg, e. g. o rj noXi- 
novg, TO noXinovv, and also like Oldlrcovg, § 71, B, (b), admit a double in- 
flection, and follow partly compound nouns of the second Dec, and partly 
those of the third Dec, e. g. Gen. noXvnodog and noXvnov; Ace noXvnoda 
and noXmovv, etc 

Rem. 3. In many Adjectives of this kind, e. g. unovg, ^qadvnovg, dmovg, 
dvinionovg, the inflection does not follow the second Dec. 
14 



102 ADJECTIVKS OF TWO KNDINGS. [^ '^^' 

in. - 0) ?, - CD y ; 6 'i\ 'ikfcjg, to Ueojv, compassionate. 
Adjectives of these endings are like the Attic second Dec, § 48. 

Rem, 4. The Ace. ends commonly in -wv, but in a number of compound 
■words, it ends in -to, § 48, Rem. 1, e. g. u^i6x() fo), avunhot, i/yrjQb) (in re- 
spect to the accentuation, see § 29, Rem. .5), inlnho, vnio/oto). 

Rem. 5. The simple Adjective ttUmc, nXiu, 7i).ib)v,fuU, Gen. nlioi, nliagj 
n).i(x), PI. nXsin, nUuL, nXia has three endings, ; the compounds are either 
of common gender, e. g. 6 /) uvanXiMq, lo avunliMv, PI. ol ul ty.Tclto) [iTiniig £x- 
nlHo X. Cy. 6. 2, 7. ty.nUo) TQuns'Cai X. Ilier. 1, 18), t« ty.nhb) X. Cy. 3. 1, 28. 
1. G. 7., and even the Nom. PI. nXioj, of the simple Adjective is often used 
for the Masc. and Fem., or they have, (yet more seldom), three endings, 
e. g. Ml tt/rAfO)?, aranXia, PI. Phaedon 83, d., ixrdnXiMv. Eur. Ale. 730, has 
nXsov, after the example of Homer, as Neuter Sing. So, likewise, the plural 
compounds, e. g. s\unXioi PI. Rp. 6. 505, c. and very often in the Neuter, 
e. g. ty.nXm X. Cy. 6. 2, 7 and 8. uiQinXm 6. 2, 33. Also from Uiag PI. 
Phaedon 95, a. has Uia as Neuter PI. 

Rem. 6. '0 i] awe, to <jojv, salvus, is formed from the old word 2A02 
by contraction. This word forms, in addition to the Nom. o-wc, awr, only 
the Ace. Smg. aav like the Attic second Dec. ; it has also the Ace. awov. 
The Fem. ua occurs in Eurip. Fr. 629. (Dind.) The PI. is combined of 
forms from aojg like the second Dec. and from forms of the lengthened 
ffwo?, namely : 

PI. N. ol al (TO)?, from acosg, and ol aoooi, al abiai, N. crwa, rarely aoc, from trua, 
A. Tor? rcig aug, from aaiag, and jovg acjovg, N. ooju, rarely aa. 

Rem. 7. The compounds of y.sQag and yiXcog are partly like the Attic 
second Dec, partly like the third Dec, e. g. o ij /Qvaoy.fgojg, to /Qvacxsgav, 
Gen. yQvaoy.EQOi and xQ^'^oysQ(x)Tog\ o i] cpiX6yeXb)g, to qnXo/fXojv, Gen. cpiXo- 
ysXo) and (piXoysXcxnog ; ^ovy.sQcag, Gen. f^ovxeoco and ^ovxeQwiog, so fci'xf^wg. 
The Adjective dvgsQMg follows the third Dec. only, e. g. ^tct^wTo?, etc. 
Forms like the Common second Dec originate from forms of the Attic 
second Dec, e. g. diy.sQov, vijy.EQOL, axsgu. On the accentuation, see § 29, 
Rem. 5. 

rV^ - (ov , -ov;lS^. 6 1] aaxpQwv, to aa)q:Qov, prudent. 

G. Tov lijg jot (Ta)q)Qovog, according to § 55, 1. 

Rem. 8. From 6 7] n lav, fat, comes also the Fem. form nUiga even in 
prose-writers ; so also nQocpQaaaa from o i] ngocpQcav, occurs in the poets. 

Rem. 9. Here belong, also, forms of the Comparative in -cov, -ov, -icav, -Tov, 
in respect to the declension of which, however, it is to be noted, that, after 
the rejection of v, they suffer contraction in the Ace Sing., and in the Nom., 
Ace and Voc PI. See the Paradigms, § 79. In the Attic writers uncon- 
ti-acted forms in ~o v a, -o v s g, -o v a g, frequently occur, e. g. ixilQova, iXui- 
tova, xaXXiova, iXdnovsg, xayJoveg, fiii^oveg, ^sXjlovEg, nXdov^g, rixxovag, ^tX- 
Tiovag, iXdizovag X. Cy. 5. 2, 36. 7. 5, 83. 2. 1, 23. 2. 1, 13. 5. 2, 36. Hell. 
6. 5, 52. Cy. 7. 5, 70. On the accentuation, see § 65, 5. 

V. - ?j c , - f ? ; N. 7] viXrjd^riC, to dXrjd^ig, true. 

G. TOV Tr,g jov otXrjd^sog, dXrj&ovg, § 59. 



^ 78.] ADJECTIVES OF TWO ENDINGS. 103 

On the contraction of -ea into -«, instead of -i}, where a vowel pre- 
cedes, sec § 51), Rem. 1. 

Rem. 10. Compounds in -injc, from eioi;, are eitlicr of tlie common gender, 
e. g. TioQelav /duii] PI. Rp. 10. 615, a. TifQiodoj x/i xdisjn, Phaed. 249, a., 
or they take a particuhir Feni. form, namely - £ r t ?, Gen. -sr Ldog, e. g. 
kmsr7}g, F. emhig; jQitty.ovTovildMV trriopdMP Tli. 1, 87. 

Rem. 11. Simple Adjectives arc Oxytones, except nh']Qi]c, nlr^Qig, full. 
On the accentuation of the Voc. and of the Neuter, see § 65, 5, and on the 
accentuation of the Gen. PI. § 59, Rem. 4. 

VI. - r^v , - ^v] N. 7/ aQ^Tjv, to agQEV, 

G. 70V Trig jov aQQsvog, § 55, 1. No other word liJ<:e this, 

VII. - CO Q, - Q ; ISi . 6 1] aTKXTWQ, TO hnmoq, fatherless, 

G. Tov TTJg Tou untxjogog, § 55, 1. In hke manner only, 
ay.i]ra)g, a^rfiOQ. 

Vni. - ig, - L\ (a) N. ?; l^Qig, to X^qi, knowing, 

G. TOU TTy? ToD X^QLog, § 63, Rcm. 5. 

In hke manner, only vricrric, temperate, and TQOcpig, nourished. In addition 
to the form in -log, these Adjectives have another in -idog, but rare, and 
only poetic, e. g.^dgtda, I'dgidsg. 

(b) N. ij sv/ngig, to sv/agi, agreeable, 
G. TOU T'tjg TOV sv^dgLTog. 

Here belong the compounds of ;^agig, naTgig, eXnig, cpgovTig, which ai*e 
declined like the simples, e. g. sviXnig, evdvn, Gen. sieXnidog; cpdonaTgig, 
Gen; (pdondigidog ; but compounds of nohg, when they refer to persons, 
are inflected in the Attic dialect in -i8og, e. g. cpdunoXig, Gen. -idog, yet in 
the Ace, cpdoTioliv and -ida ; still, as epithets of cities, etc., they are inflected 
like Tioltg, e. g. xaXXlnoXig, diy.aioTroXig, etc., Gen. xaXXLnoXsojg, etc. 

IX. -vg , -v, (a) N. 7/ udaxgvg, to vcdaxgv, tearless, etc. 

In like manner compounds of daxgv; yet these inflect only the Ace. 
Sing., like the third Dec, e. g. uday.gvv, Neut. uday.gv. The form udom- 
gvTog, -ov. Gen. -ov, according to the second Dec, is used instead of the 
other Cases. 

(b) N. o 7} blnrixvg, to dinrjxv, two ells long, 
G. tov Ti]g Toi dmrixEog. 

Here belong the compounds of mjx^?: the declension is like yXvxvg, 
yXvxv, §§ 76, II. and 77, except that the Neuter PL in -sa is contracted into 
-rj, like ttoT?;, e. g. dm/jxi]. 

X. - V g, - v; N. 6 i} fxovodovg, to fiovodov, one-toothed, 

G. Tou Trig tov {xorodovTog. 

So the remaining compounds ofodovg. For the Dec, see § 54, (d). 



104 



PARADIGMS OF ADJECTIVES, 



[§79. 





§79. 


Pa?' ad 


'i<^7ns . 


(287.) 


S.N. 


tu7i).{o-og)ovi; bvnX[o-ov)ovv 


iXeojg iXhojv 


G. 


tvnXov 


iXeo) 


D. 


evTzXcp 


iXao) 


A. 


t'vnXovv 


iXecov 


V. 


doubtful 


iXe(og iXscov 


P.N. 


tvnXoi t.vnloa 


D.£i>9 'lX8C0 


G. 


tvizXcov 


llaoip 


D. 


evnloig 


iXaqig 


A. 


svTilovg svTiXoa 


'iX80jg iX80J 


V. 


^imloi svTzXoa 


iXeo^ 'lX8(0 


Dual. 


evTiXco 


iX8(0 




EVTtXoiV. 


iX8q)V. 


S.N. 


avdaifACxiv evdcufAOv 


IxO'lcov 


hdiov 


fXEL^COV fiali^ov 


G. 


tvdaifiovog 


ix-O-ioTog 


^aii^ovog 


i). 


evdaif.iO'PL 


lid 


ion 


fA.8l^0Vl 


A. 


8vdaifA0va evdarfiov 


i^O'iova - 


loa s^diov 


ll8l^0Va -co fl8ll^0V 


V. 


avdaifiov 


h^ 


lOV 


[J.8C(^0V 


P.N. 


evdaifxoveg evdatfji.ova 


ix&iovsg 


8/Jfiova 


fJl8l^0V8g fi8iXovu 






ix&iovg 


8/^0 1 (O 


li8iiovg fmi^o) 


G. 


evdaifiovcov 




lOVCOV 


^El^OVCOV 


U. 


£vdai^io6i{v) 


iOGl[v) 


fjl8lX06l{v) 


A. 


evdoctfxovag evdai^ova 


8X&iovag 


ix^-iova i^8iZovug f/8tZova 






axd-iovg 


ixd^ico ii8i^ovg [X8ii^(o 


V. 


8vdai(j,ovsg evdaifxova 
evdaifiove 


like the ] 


Vominative. liketheNominative. 


Dual. 


h^ 


10V8 


^l8lX0V8 




evdaijiovoiv. 


h^ 


lOVOiV. 


ll8l'C,6vOlV. 


S.N. 


dXrj&i^g aXrid-eg 


v'/i7]g vyi8g 


G. 


aXrid'[e-og)ovg 


vyi{8-og)ovg 


D. 


dXl]x)-{s-l)8l 


vyi{8-'i)8i 


A. 


dXt]&{ s- a );/ dhi&tg 


vyi{8-a)d^ vydg 


V. 


dhj&k 


vyitg 


P.N. 


dX7]'&i8-Eg)£Tg dX7]0-{8-a)rj 


vyi{ 8-8g)8ig vyi{8- a)d\ 


G. 


dXrj&{8-cov]cov * 


vy({E-cov)oJV 


D. 


dXt]d-8oi{v) 


vyi86i[v) 


A. 


dXrjd-{8-ag)8ig dX7]d-{8-a)tj 


vyi{8-ag)8ig vyi{8-a)d 


V. 


like the Nominative. 


like the Nominative. 


Dual. 


dX7]d^{8-8)rj 


vyi{8-8)rj 




dXj]d-[8-OLv)oh 


)v, § 59, R 


vyi{8-oiv)oTv. 


*bu 


t Gwrid-s-cov = avvr^d'a 


em. 4. 


t § 59, Rem. 1. 



§80.] ADJECTIVES OF ONE ENDING. 105 



§S0. III. Adjectives of one Ending. (288.) 

In poetry, these adjectives sometimes occur in Cases where the Neut. 
form is Hke that of the Masc. and Fem., i. e. in the Gen. and Dat. ; also in 
connection witli Neuters, e. g. fiavuxaiv Xvaai]^a(nv, Eur. Or. 264. iv tiei'T}- 
Tt (Tw^aTf, Id. El. 375. But they very seldom take a particulai* form for 
tlie Neut, e. g. srrtjXvg, STtrjlvda ed-vsa, Her. 8, 73. 

Endings. 

I. -a?, Gen. -ov: u fiovlug, Gen. fiovlov, single, Paroxytones. 

These adjectives occur only as Masculines, i. e. in connection with sub- 
stantives of the Masc. gender. 

II. - ag, Gen. - av x o g: 6 i] vmu^ag, Gen. -aviog, unwearied, Paroxytones. 
in. -«?, Gen. -a8og: 6 i] cpvyag, Gen. (pv/adog, fugitive, Oxjtones. 

These adjectives are commonly foimd only in connection with sub- 
stantives of the Fem. gender, e. g. noXcv'^ElXada, and where the substan- 
tive is understood, they are used as substantives, e. g. i) "Elldg sc. yi]. 

IV. - a ^, Gen. -aqog: only fxaxag, though the Fem. form fiuxaiga is 
sometimes found. 

V. -rjg, Gen. -ov: 6 e&sXovrrjg, Gen. i&sXovTov, voluntary. 

These adjectives generally occur with substantives of the Masc. gender 
only, yet some take, in connection with Fem. substantives, a peculiar Fem. 
form in -ig, Gen. -udog, e. g. svwnrjg, Fem. svojiiig, fair-looking. They are 
Paroxytones, except i&sXovTrig and exovji^g. 

VI. -t;?, Gen. -rjTog: 6 ^] oigyjjg, Gen. ag/i^Tog, wise. 

So all compounds in -d^vrjg, -Sjj.i]g, -fih'jg, -nh'\g and -icixtjg, and some 
simple adjectives, e. g. yvfzv-i'jg, naked, /sgrr/g, needy, nivrig, poor, nXuvrjg, 
wandering, etc. 

VII. - 7] V, Gen. -ilv o g: 6 i] ami]v. Gen. u.mrivog, unfeaihered. In like 
manner no other. 

Vin. - (ag, Geii. - w t o ? : 6 ?] ayvug. Gen. ayvojiog, unknown. 
So all compounds in -^gug, -yvwg and -xg^g, and also a.mug,firm. 

IX. -ig. Gen. -idog: o ?] otvaX/ug, Gen. avalxidog, powerless. 

These adjectives are commonly used only as Feminines, and when the 
substantive is omitted, as substantives, like those in -ag, -ddog, e. g. tj nu- 
igig, sc. yH], native land. 

X. -V g. Gen. -v 8 og: o ^ vsrjlvg, Gen. vEiqXvdog, one lately come. 
In like manner only a few other compounds. 

XI. - 1, Gen. -yog, -xog, -%og: 6 t) agna^. Gen. -yog, rapacious 

6 1] tjXi^, " -y.og, equal 

o 7} {xmij^, " -xog, one-hoofed. 



106 COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. [§ ^1. 

XIJ. - ip, Gen. -nog: o 7/ alylhip, Gen. -inog, high. 

XIII. Sucli as end in a substantive wliicli lias undergone no change, 
e. g. IcTKxig, diildless, (.lay.Qo/jio, lonfr-hrmdcd, avjo/eiQ, done ivith one's own 
Jiand, ^(xxoui(i)v, lon<i;-lived, |U«x^wi'/?jv, louf^-necktd, hixuamg, having a white 
shield. Tiie declension of the adjectives is like that of the substantives, 
e. g. fiaxQuv/Evog. On the compounds of noi'g, conip. §78, II, (b). 



§ 81. Co mp arison of A dj e ctiv e s . (289.) 

1. The property expressed by an adjective, may belong to 
several objects, either in the same or a different degree, since 
one object has this property in a higher degree than another, or 
one object has it in the highest degree. The language has a 
particular inflection, which is termed Comparison, in order to 
express these degrees of Comparison, the higher and the highest. 

2. That form of inflection, which expresses the higher degree, 
is called, Comparative, and that, which expresses the highest. 
Superlative. The Superlative, in Greek and in Latin, often 
expresses only a very high degree, and may then be called Ela- 
tive. That which expresses the simple idea, without Compari- 
son, is called Positive ; e. g. Plato was learned ; Plato was more 
learned than Xenophon ; Plato was the most learned of the dis- 
ciples of Socrates. 

3. Only the adjective and adverb are susceptible of compari- 
son ; participles do not admit it, except in a few rare cases, where 
the participle has the meaning of an adjective, e. g. ioQcofisvogy 

-ioTEQOg, -tOTUTOg. 

4. The Greek language has two forms to indicate the two de- 
grees of comparison ; the one, and by far the most common, 
for the Comparative, is -zegog, -zsqcc, -reQov, and for the 
Superlative, -Tatog, -r drri, -z azov] the other, which is used 
much more seldom, for the Comparative, is - 1 ojv, -To v, or - co v, 
- V, and for the Superlative, -lozog, -taz?], -lozov. 

Remark. Instead of the single forms of the Comparative and Superla- 
lative, the Greek, like the Latin, can prefix fxalXov (magis) and fidXicrcx 
(maxime) to the Positive. This periphrasis is necessary in all adjectives, 
which, for the sake of euphony, have no Comparative form. 



§ S2.] ADJECTIVES.— FIRST FORM OF COMPARISON. 107 



§82. A. First Form of Comparison. (290—2*2.) 
Comparative, -zegog, -zeQcc, -teqov] 
Superlative, -Tarog,-rdtT^,-TaTov. 
The following adjectives annex these forms in the following 
manner ; 

I. Adjectives in - ?, - // ( - a ), -or. 

(a) Most adjectives of this class, after dropping o, annex 
the above forms to the piu'c stem, and retain the 0, when a syl- 
lable long by natm-e or by position, § 27, 3, precedes, (a mute 
and liquid always make the syllable long here), but is length- 
ened into CO, when a short syllable precedes, — whicli is done to 
prevent the concurrence of too many short syllables, e. g. 

xoiq)-os, light, Com. y.ovq)-a-rsQog, Sup. y.oi'qj-o-rarog, -tj, -ov, 

taxiQ-cg, strong, " la/VQ-o-TSQog, " la/i^Q-o-TaTog, 

XsTiT-oc, thi7i, " ).s7iT-6-TeQog, " hjiT-o-Taiog, 

(T(fodg-cg, vehement, " acpodo-6-ifQog, " (iq^odQ-o-jaTog, 

Ttr/.Q-og, hitter, " TiLy.Q-o-ieQog, " 7i ly.Q-o-imog, 

ao(f-cg, icise, " aocp-o'i-Tfoog, " aGCf-a-Tarog, 

i/ig-6g,Jirm, " s/ig-oj-Tfoog, " i/iQ-ca-Tuiog, 

tt^i-og, worth}/, " u^i-u-Tsgog, " «|i-cu-TaTOt,\ 

Remark 1. The Attic poets sometimes, on account of the verse, disre- 
gard the \aw by which a mute and hquid makes a vowel long by po- 
sition, e. g. sijsy.rbnajog from sviEy.vog, Em*. Hec. 579. 618. (Pors.), dignoi- 
fiotnga, Id. Ph. 1367. 

(b) Contracts in -eog = -org and -oog = -org suffer contraction 
in the Comparative and Superlative also, since in the fii'st, e is 
absorbed by w, but those in -oog, after dropping og, insert the 
syllable eg, which is contracted with the preceding 0, e. g. 

nogq:{g-Eog = nogcfvg-ovg un).-6og = anX-ovg 

nogcpvg-io'nsnog =7iog^.vg-m~TBgog unlo-ia-TEoog = ujiX-ota-Tsgog' 
nogcpvg-efjJZuTog = nogcpvg-uj-Tuiog uTi/.o-ia-xuiog = ujil-oia-JUTog. 

Here belong also contracts of t^vo endings m. -ov g and -ovv, e. g. ttV- 
oog = ivv-ovg, Neut. ivv-oov = ivv-ovv, Com. sl'vo-in-xigog = hiv-oid-xs- 
Qog, Sup. svvo-ia-Taiog = Evv-ova-xuTog. 

Rem. 2. Adjectives in -oog take also the uncontracted and regular forms of 
the Comparative and Superlative in -owxfgog, -ocoiuTog, e. g. sinvocjifgoL, 
X. R. Equ. 1, 10. u/gowTsgog, X. O. 10, 11. 

(c) The following adjectives in -a tag, viz. yeqaiog, okl^ 
nuXaiog, ancient^ nena 10 g, on the other side, axolalo g, at 



108 ADJECTIVES. FIRST FORM OF COMPARISON. [§82. 

leisure^ drop -og and append -t EQog and -tarog to the root, 



'/(qaL-og, Com. yiQui-iiqoq^ Sup. ytQul-ruTog, 
7iu).aL-6g, " TiaXai-TfQog, " nttXal-raioc. 

Rem. 3. IlaX u i6 g and ax oXalog have also the usual forms of the 
Coini)arative and Superlative, naXaiojsQog, axoXaioTegog, so also '/eQuioTSQog, 
Antiph. 4. p. 125, 6. 

(d) The following adjectives in -0?, viz. evd log, calm, ijov- 
Xog, quiet, i'd i o g, peculiar, ic o ?, equal, ^saog, middle, oQ-O-Qiog, 
early, oiptog, late, and 7iQ(6i'og, in the morning', after dropping 
'og, insert the syllable ai, so that the Comparative and Superla- 
tive of these adjectives ai-e like the preceding in -aiog, e. g. 

fxiiT-og, Com. fXEa-ai-TEQog, Sup. fisa-ai-JUTog, 
i'di-og " idi-ui-Tfooc, " idi-ai-Tuiog. 

Rem. 4. Sometimes also the common form is found, e. g. i](Tvxf.oT(Qog, 
rt(TV/(x)TUTog; (fiXojiEQOQ, qnXd-raiog. The adjective cpiXog has three forms, 
(piXaTEQog, -MTUTog, cpiXaliEQog, -aliUTog, and q}iXTEQog, cflXiaTog, the last of 
which is the most usual, but the second also is frequently found among the 
Attic v/riters ; the fii'st occurs veiT seldom. In addition to these three 
forms, also the Superlative (plXiaTog (as in Homer the Comparative cpiXicav) 
is found in Attic poetiy. 

Rem. 5. The two adjectives, ^ia o g, middle, and v iog, young, have a 
special Superlative form, fisaaiog, viuTog, but which is in use, only 
when a series of objects is to be made prominent, (.aaarog denoting the very 
middle of the series, and viazog the last or most remote, Avhereas uEaaliEQog 
expresses the idea of the middle in general, and vEMtaiog retains the pri- 
mary signification of the adjective, young, new. In prose, riaiog is used 
only in reference to the tones of music [viuiog cp&o/yog); and then the 
Feminine is contracted, vi]ir], the lowest line or siring. 

(e) Two adjectives in -og, viz. ioQOjfit'vog, strong-, and axQu- 
t og, unmixed, after dropping -og, insert the syllable eg, e. g. ^6- 
QOJixev-so-TEQog, iono3f.(Ev-86-7a7og, d'/.Qaz-ao-zsQog, ay.QaT-so-raxog. So 
also aiboig has aidoiiaratog in the Superlative. 

Rem. 6. Further, the adjectives, u cp & ov og, rich, an o vd aiog, zealous, 
and uafiEv og, glad, take the above form, acpd^ovsajEoog, -iaraiog, together 
with the common form, -ioiEoog, -uiajog. From «'o-u67'o? is formed aafisvcj- 
zEQog, and the adverbial neuter, aa^Evaliaia and uafiEvsaTuia. Several 
other adjectives, also, have this formation, yet for the most part only in 
poetry, e. g. sv^wgog, unmixed (of ^A^ne), ?j(5i'^o?, sweet, iTclnsdog, flat [inms- 
dsaTEQog, X. H. 7. 4, 13), and all contracts in -ovg, comp. (b). The forms in 
-saiEQcg, -saraiog, belong properly to adjectives in -v/g and -coy. 



§ 82.] ADJECTIVES. FIRST FORM OF COMPARISON. 109 

(f) The following adjectives in -og, viz, luXog, talkative^ 
fioyocfdyog, eating- ahnc, oxpo(pdyog,dainti/, and ti r coy 6 g, 
poor, after dropping og, insert the syllable ig^ e. g. Idl-og, Com. 
Xal-ta-7€Qogy Sup. XaX-ia-rarog. 

Rem. 7. These endings properly belong to adjectives in -riq, Gen. -ov. 

II. Adjectives in -rig, Gen. -of, m'\^.'ypEv^g, -eg, Gen. -tog, 
shorten the ending -^? into - / g, e. g. ylim-rfi. Gen. -ov, thievish, 
Com. y.l&TZT-ia-TEQog, Sup. '/.XeTit-ia-ratog ; ipevdLOteQog, xpevdiorarog. 

Exception. 'T^ q lati] g, -ov, insolent, lias v^giaioTSQog, v^giaioiaTog, 
X. An. 5. 8, 3. C. 1. 2, 12. 

III. Adjectives of the third Declension: 

(1) Those in -vg,-Et:a,-v, 7]g, -eg, Gen. -sog, ag, -avj 

and the ^Yord fid nag, happy, append the endings of Compari- 
son immediately to the pure stem, which appears in the Neuter 
form, e. g. 

ylvAvg, Neut. -v — yXvy.v-TSQog ylvy.v-jaiog 

ukr^^rig, Neut. -eg — aXrid^ia-rsgog u).t]&Ea-Tajog 

(ueXag, Neut. -av — fiddv-ifgog ^fluv-Tuiog 

idlttg, Neut. -av — xalav-Ttgog jaXdv-Tarog 

[idxag, — (iay.dg-rsgog fiay.dg-jaTog. 

Rem. 8. The adjectives vdvg, xa%vg and noXvg are compared in 
-ib)v and -cov. See § 83, I. 

(2) Compounds of / « ^ f ? insert co, e. g. 

inlxccgig, Gen. en I'/dgix-og, pleasant, 

Com. i7iixocgLi-(o-Tegog, Sup. inixoigLt-a-JocTog. 

(3) Adjectives in - (o v, - o v, Gen. -ovog, insert £?, e. g. 

ildalfiojv, Neut. svdaifiov, hippy, 

Com. El8aip.ov-i(j-Tsgog, svdaifiov-ia-jaTog. 

(4) Adjectives in -| sometimes insert eg, sometimes ig, e. g. 

acpriXit, Gen. acpriXix-og, groiving old, agna^, Gen. «(»7ra;'-o?, rapax, 
Com. a(p7}Xiy.-s(T-Tfgog, Com. agituy-la-Ttgog, 

Sup. ucpTjXi/.-ia-TUTog, Sup. agnay-ia-Tuiog. 

(5) Adjectives in -£ t ?,-£ y, insert (T, the «' of the stem be- 
ing dropped, § 20, 2, e. g. 

XugUig, Neut. yagltv, pleasant, 

Com. ;jfa^tf-o-T£^og, Sup. %agis-aTaTog. 
15 



110 SECOND FORM OF COM. ANOMALOUS FORMS. [§§83, 84. 

§83. B. Second Form of Comparison. (293.) 

Comparative, -t(ov, NciU. - 1 y, or - w r, Neut. - v. 

Suporlalivc. -larog, - lonj, -laro v. 

Remark 1. On the quantity of i in -twy, -lov, see § 28, 1, on the declen- 
sion, § 78, Rem. 9, and on the accentuation, § G5, 5, (a). 

This form of Comparison includes, 

I. Some adjectives in -i^?, which drop -v? and append -'W, 
etc.; this usually applies only to ri^vgy siveet, and r«xv?, swift 
(the other form of these adjectives in -vzeQog, -vrazog, is some- 
times used, but not by Attic writers). Ta^vg has in the 
Comparative 'Odaocov, (Att. 'Odzzcov'jj Neut. -O^daoov (d^uTtov). 
Comp. §§21, 3, and 17, 6. Tayjoov is found only among the 
later writers. Thus, 

')]d-vg, Com. r}d-io)v, Neut. 7]d-iov, Sup. ijd-iazog, -r], -or, [ttrio?. 

rax-vg " S^daacav, Att. S^ajTcav, Neut. S^aaaov, Att. -d^anoiv, Sup. tdx- 

Rem. 2. The others in -vg, as ^a&vg, deep, ^uqvc, heavy, ^q advgj 
slow, ^ Q a % vg, short, ylvuvg, sweet, d aavg, thick, ev q vg, wide, o | v ?, 
sharp, n Q su ^vg, old, wxvg, swift, have the form in -msQcg, -viuiog, § 82, 
ni; in Attic poetr}^, however, single examples of these adjectives are 
found with the other form, e. g. ^gaxiaiog, ngsa^iaiog, cJxiaTog. 

II. The following adjectives in -Qog, viz. aioxQog, base, 

iX'&Qog, hostile, -AvdQog, honorable, and olarQog, ivr etched 

(but always in the Comparative, olxzQoreQog), the ending -Qog 

here also being dropped, e. g. al^xQog, Com. cdoyAwv, Neut. 

aiax-lov, Sup. aiaxiorog. 

Rem. 3. Besides this form, which is preferred by the Attic AM-iters, the 
above adjectives have also, though seldom, the other form in -ojsQog, 
-ojaiog, e. g. sx&QOTaTog, oty.jQOTaTog, in Demosthenes. 



§84. Anomalous For jus of Comparison. (294.) 

Positive. Comparative. Superlative. 

cififhojv, Neut. d(.isivov doicnog 



1. ayu&og, good, 

2. xaxog, bad, 

3. aalog, beautiful, 



^slxicav 

{^slTtQog, Poet.) 



XtOOJV 

{(fSQTEQog, Poet.) 

XSlQbJV 

i'jadbJV, Att. T/TTCOV 

y.(xlXi(av 



^slxLaiog 
{^iliaxog, Poet.] 



yQflaawv, Att. Kquinav jiQaiiaTog 



Xioaiog 

{cpigraTog, cpigicrTog, Poet.] 

y.dy.LcrTog 

xdgiffiog 

y.dlUaTog 



§ 84.] ADJECTIVES. ANOMALOUS FORMS OF COMPARISON. Ill 





I'ositivo. 


Comparative. 


Superlative. 


4. 


dXysivog, painfii!, 


dXy>:ivox(Qog 
uXy'm)v 


aXysivoTttJog 
uXyiajog 


5. 

6, 


fiaxQ6g, long, 


(AtXXQOXtQOg 

{^dtracov. Poet.) 

(AlXQOlfQOg 

ekdaffwv, Att. iXdiioiV 


fj.ay.q6iuTog 
fxijXLcrTog 
fiiy.Qoiarog 
eXd/KTiog 


7. 
S. 
9. 


oU/og,few, 
fieyug, great, 
nolvg, much, 


nidoiv or nXswv 


6Uyi(Tiog 
fiiyiaiog 
nXsiaiog 


10. 
11. 
12. 


Q(xSiog, eas\), 
nsTTOjy, ripe, 
Tiim;fat, 


qtfMV 

nma'mqog 

nioTsgog 


gauTog 

nanalimog 

niotajog. 



Remark 1. Tlie poetic Superlative (pig l(Tt o g is found iii Plato, in the 
exclamation o) (pigicnsl O most worthy ! The h'regular forms of fiiy.gcg, viz. 
iXdaao)v, iXd/iffiog, express both the idea of smallness and fewness [oXiyog); 
but fiduv generally ex-presses the idea of feloness, seldom that of smallness ; 
tlie regular forms of {xiygog, viz. /nixgoisgog, -jarog, always retain their 
original idea of smallness, and also oXlyicnog t\\s.t of fewness, although oXlyog 
often signifies small. 

Rem. 2. The use of the longer and shorter form of the Comparative 
nXiiwv, nXiwv, deser\'es to be particularly noted. The Neuter nXsov is 
more frequent than nXnov, especially when it is used adverbially ; nXiovog 
and nXslovog, nXiovi and nXdovi, Ace. nXica, nXiova and nXslo), are used 
indiscriminately; PI. Nom. and Ace. nXdovg is usual, also nXdovsg and 
nXilorag (but not nXiovg) ; nXdoi is much more frequent than nXim ; uXho- 
vMv and nXdodi are more frequent than nXs.6v(xiv and nXioai. Finally, 
the shortened form of the Neut. Smg. nXiiv (formed from nXnov), but 
limited to such phrases as tiXhv ij (ivgioi and the like, requii-es to be men- 
tioned as a special Atticism. 

Several adjectives which contain the idea of an orde?" or se- 
riesj have only the Comparative and Superlative forms, because 
on account of their signification they cannot be used absolutely, 
but only in comparison. An adverb of place is usually the 
root of these forms of Comparison, e. g. 

from ngo, ngorfgog (prior), ngbjrog [primus), frst. 
" livb), dvatTsgog (superior), uvcoiarog (supremus). 
" vjieg, lnsgTfgog[supenor),h{gher, hnigxaiog, Poet. t;;r«TO? (supremus). 
" vno ? TLdTzgog (posterior), later, vaiaTog (postremus), last. 
" e% Xaxazog (extremus), outermost. 
" nXrjdluv (prope), {nXrjo-log, Homeric), TtXriaiahsgog or 7iXi](ns(n£gog 

(proprior), nearer, nXriaiuhatog, -sajaxog (proximus), nearest. 
" 7ig6(j(x),far, ngoabingog, farther, ngoaosiazog. 

Rem. 3. Other adjectives in the Comparative and Superlative, which 
are also derived from adverbs, have no Positive form of the adjective, e. g. 
i]gipu, quietly, r]geij,s(jisgog, rjgtpiaiaiog ; ngo'vgyov, useful, ngovgyialiegog, 
more useful, ngovgyiahcnog. 



112 COMPARISON OF ADVERBS. [§85. 

Rem. 4. The Greek forms Comparatives and Superlatives from substan- 
tives also. Here two circinnstances are to be noted : (a) when the substan- 
tive, both in form and signification, has a Positive from which the Com- 
parative and Su})erlative may be formed, i. e. when the substantive can be 
considered as an adjective, e. g. doiXog, slave, dovXoifQog, more slavish; — 
(b) when the substantive, in respect to the signification, does not liave a 
Positive, but only in resj)ect to the form can be considered as the basis of 
the Comparative and Superlative, since the proper Positive form has been 
lost (comp. xQuiLdiog from the Epic x^^aiu?, iXsyxiaTog from the Epic iXsy- 
Xrig). Examples of the last kind may be found in great numbers in Epic 
poetry. See § 216, Rem. 2. 



§ 85. Co mp ari son of Aclv erbs . (297.) 

1. Adverbs derived from adjectives, when compared, have 
commonly no independent adverbial ending, but, in the Com- 
parative, use the neuter singular, and in the Superlative, the 
neuter plural of the corresponding forms of comparison in ad- 
jectives, e. g. 

Com. (TocpcoTigov Sup. crocpcoTaTa 

(jaq)Bax£Qov aacpiaxaia 

XOLQiidisqov yaQLiaiaTa 

svdaifiovsaTSQOV Evdaifxovidiaia 

aXaxiov alcrxtaTa 

rjdiov i]di(jTa 

■&aaaov, -ziov xw/io-ia. 

Remark. But sometimes these adverbs also retain the adverbial ending 
of the Positive -w?, in the Comparative, e. g. /aAjn^wrf^cog, aXii&sajsQag, 
^oxd^rjQOTsgwg, xaXXLovojg, especially jxsi'Qoyojg, etc. The neuter singular 
is seldom used in the Superlative, and belongs mostly to poetr}^ 

2. All original adverbs in -co, e. g. dvco, y.drco, «Joo, eaco, etc., 

retain this ending regularly in the Comparative, and for the 

most part in the Superlative, e. g. 

«rtd, above Com. avcorigoj Sup. avojTaTCo 

XttTW, below y.axoiTBQO} aatcattxTO). 

In like manner, most other original adverbs have the ending -co 

in the Comparative and Superlative, e. g. 

uyxov, near Com. ayxoTsgco Sup. ayxordio} 

nsga, ultra TXEQaLTsgd) Sup. wanting 

TTjXov^far Tr]XoTsgco T7;Aot«t&) 

kyug,far haaTsga ey-aaraTO) 

iyyvg, near iyyvisgoj iyyviixKa and 

iyymsQov iyyvraia. 



crocpojg from 


(joopog 


aacpwg " 


aacpvg 


XagiBVTwg " 
£vd(xi(x6v(jjg " 


Xagiug 
svdaifiav 


alffxwg " 
rjdicag " 


aiGXgog 
'fjdvg 


xayjojg " 


Taxvg 



§§86,87. 



THE PRONOUNS ByO), (TV, OV. 



113 



SECTIOiN III. 
The Pronoun. 
§86. Nature and Division of Pronouns. (298.) 

1. Pronouns do not, like substantives, express the idea of an 
object, but only the relation of an object to the speaker, since 
they show whether the object is the speaker himself (the first 
person), or the person or thing addressed (the second person), 
or the person or thing spoken of (the third person,) e. g. / (the 
teacher) give to you (the scholar) it (the book). 

2. All Pronouns are divided into five principal classes : (1) 
Personal, (2) Demonstrative, (3) Relative, (4) Interrogative, (5) 
Indefinite Pronouns. Pronouns are again divided, according 
to their signification, into Substantive, Adjective and Adverbial 
Pronouns, e. g. iyco tavra 87ioi^6a, I did this, o liiog narriQ {loi 
D-e^E, my father said to me, ovzcog i7zoir^68, he did so. 



I. Personal Proivouns. 
A. Substantive Personal Pronouns. 
§87. (a) The simple 8y(6,ego, 6v,tu, ov,sui. (299, soo.) 





Singular. j 


Nom. 
Gen. 
Dat. 
Ace. 


fiov ifiov), ifiov, of me 
fiOL (fioi), ifioi, to me 
{18 iixe), ifis, me 


6V, thou 

60V [6ov), of thee 
601 ((70/), to thee 
68 [68), thee 


ov [ov), of himself etc. 
oI{oi), to himself etc. 
8 [s), himself, etc. 




Dual. 1 


N.A. 
G.D. 


v(6, we both, us loth 
VMV, of us both, to Its 
^both 


6Cpc6, you both 
6q)o)v, of you both, 
to you both 


6Cpodtv {6Cp03yv), of them 
both, to them both 




Plural. 1 


Nom. 
Gen. 
Dat. 
Ace. 


jfieig, we 
rj ficjv, of us 
f^fitv, to us 
riiidg, us 


vfisTg, ye [v) 
vi^oSv, of you {v) 
vjiiv, to you {v) 
vfidg, you {v) 


6cpeLg, Neut. 6q)8a, they 
6(p0JV, of them 
6cpi6t{v) {6cpi6i), to them 
6q}dg, Neut. 6q)8a {6cp8a), them. 



Remark 1. The forms susceptible of inclination are put in a parenthesis, 
without any mark of accentuation. Comp. §§ 33, (b), and 35, 3. On the 
accentuation and use of the third Pers. of the Pronoun, see § 302, Rem. 3. 



114 TJIE REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS tflUVtOV, GtUVTOV, tUVtOV. [§88. 

The Vocative is liere, as in the following jjaradigms, omitted, because, 
when it occurs, it is always like the Nominative. 

Rem. 2. The Gen. Sing, of these three pronouns, in imitation of Homer, 
often has, among the Attic poets, also the forms ifAt^Bv, ai&EVj t-d^ev^ 
these forms are always oxytoned, except when t&sv is not used as a re- 
flexive {siti\ but as a ])ronoun of the third i)^erson [ejus). Comp. §35, 3, (c). 

Rem. 3. The Ace. Sing, and PI. from ou has in Attic poetry also the 
form vlv [viv) signifying him, her, it, PI. them, e. g. Soph. OR. 8(38. 1331, in- 
stead oi' avTovg and amaq. See the Dialects, §217. 

Rem. 4. The endings of the Dative and Accusative plural -tv, -«$, of the 
first and second Pers. are sometimes shortened by the poets and then writ- 
ten, i]iilv, vii^dg, vfxlv, vfxdg, or also rjjXLv, »/|U«?, vfiiv, vfxag. The shorter form 
of the pronoun of the third Pers. is used in the Dat. and Ace. PI. by the poets 
(also by the Attic writers), e. g. Dai. o-qpt or acpiv instead of acpi(Ti, to them, 
Ace. (jcpi instead of acpug, them. Both forms, acpi and ncplv, although seldom, 
ai*e used as the Dat. Sing., the form acps, on the contrarj^, is used much 
more frequently as the Ace. Sing, instead of aviov, -riv, -o, also as refleidve 
instead of eaviov. 



§88. (b) The Reflexive Pronouns , ii^avzov, oeav- 
zov, 8 avrov . (302.) 

1. The Reflexive Pronouns of the first and second person 
decline in the PI. both pronouns of which they are compound- 
ed, each by itself, e. g. rif^(ov amcov ; that of the third person is 
either simply savzojv, avrcov, etc., or ocp^v avzojv, etc. 



ijiavzov, -rjg, of 

myself 
ifiavT(p, -y, to 

myself 
S[j-avz6v, -^v, 

myself 

'^ficov avzav, of 

ourselves 
riiuv avzoig, -atg, 

to ourselves 
^fidg avzovg, -dg, 

ourselves 



Singular. 
oeavzov, -ijg, or 
aavzov, -rig, of thyself 
oeavzoi, -y, or 
aavT^, -fi, to thyself 
oeavzov, -^v, or 
aavzov, -riv, thyself 

Plural. 
VfKav avzojv, of your- 
selves 
vfxTv avzoig, -dig, to 

yourselves 
vfA,dg avzovg, -dg, 
yourselves 



savTOV, -ijg, or {self 

avzov, -tjg, of himself, of her- 
savz(^, -y, or [to itself 

avz(p, -y, to himself, to herself, 
aavzov, -riv, -6, or [itself 
avzov, -I'lV, -6, himself, herself 

savzav or avzojv, or 
(jq^ojv avzoJv, of themselves 
s avzoig -aig, or avzoig -aig, or 
ocpiaiv avzoig -aig, to thems^ves 
eavzovg, -dg, -d, or avzovg, 

-dg, -d, or 
ocpdg avzovg, -dg, ccf^a av- 

zd, themselves. 



^^ 80 91.] RECIPROCAL AND DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 115 



§89. (c) Reciprocal Pronouns. (303.) 

To express reciprocal relation, the Greek has a special pro- 
nominal form, which is made by the coalescence of allot dllwvy 
aXkoi dlXoigj dXXoi aXXov^f into one word. 



Plural Gen. 
Dat. 
Ace. 



ulh'j)MV, of one another 
dV.i,loiv, -aig, -oig, 
d).h'j).ovg, -ag, -a, 



Dual dDJfloiv, -aiv, -oiv 
dXXriXoiv, -aiv, -oiv 
d)JJj).co, 'd, -0). 



§90. B. Adjective Personal Pronouns. (304.) 

Personal pronouns having the form of adjectives are called 
Possessive pronouns, since they denote possession. They are 
formed from the Genitive of substantive personal pronouns : 

ifiog, -Tj, -6v, mens, a, urn, from e^uoi'; ■t]usTsgog, -ts'om, -tsqov, noster, -tra, 

-tnun, from ijfxatv ; 
aog, -»), -6v, tuns, -a, -urn, from aot ; vfUTEgog, -tsqu, -tsqov, vester, -tra, 

-tmm, fi-om V|uai»'; 
acpsTfQog, -rsQu, -xfoov, suns, -a, -um, from (jqpwy, used in speaking of 

many ; when single persons or things are spoken of, tlie Att. prose 

always uses the Gen. laviov, -rig. 



§ 91. n. D E M >^ S T R A T I V E P R O N O U N S 



(305.) 









Singular. 








the 






hie haec 


hoc 


ipse ipsa ipsum 


Nom. 





V 


ro 


ovTog avTTj 


TOVZO 


avzog avzt] avzo 


Gen. 


tov 


rng 


rov 


TOVTOV TaVT7]g 


TOVTOV 


avzov avrr^g avzov 


Dat. 


zq) 


n, 


TOJ 


TOVTCp ravrri 


TOVTO) 


UVZCp aVTT} aVT03 


Ace. 


rov 


Tr,v 


TO 


TOVTOV TavTr,v 


TOVTO 


avzov avTijv avTo 








Plural. 






Nom. 


01 


ai 


TU 


OVTOL avTai 


Tavza 


avToi avrai avzd 


Gen. 














tOJV 


real' 


TCOV 


T0VT03V T0VT03V 


TOVTCDV 


avTcov avzojv avzcov 


Dat. 


roTg 


TuTg 


Toig 


Tovzoig ravxaig rovToig 


avzoig avzaig avzoig 


Ace. 


rovg 


Tag 


TU 


TovTovg Tavzag 


Tavza 


avTOvg avzai avra 








Dual. 






N. A. 


zoo 


(id) 


Tco TovTco (Tavra) 


TOVZCO 


avzcj uvza avTco 


G. D. 


TOiV 


talv 


ToTv TOVTOiv Tavraiv tovtoiv 


avzoiv avzairavzoiv. 



Like o, ri, to is declined, o5f, i]8s, lods, Tovds, jTJgds, PI. oi5f, aids, Tads ; 

like ol'iog: rocroviog, xotravxi], zogovio[v), tantus, -a, -um, zoioliog, Toiui'Tt], 
TOiovio[v), talis, -e, xrjXiy.oiiog, irjXiy.avjrj, j7iXiy.ovro{v), so great, so old ; it 
is to be noted, (a) that the Neuter Sing, besides the fonn in o, has also 



116 



RELATIVE PRONOUN. 



[§§ 92, 93. 



the common form in ov ; (b) that in all forms of oviog, which begin with 
T, tlio T is dropped ; 
like alrog : ixtlvog, tjctivrj, ixtlvo, /le, slie, it, ixXXog, ui).X% ulXo, alius, alia, 
aliud. 

Remark 1. The Neuter form in o seems to liave rejected a d, as may be 
inferred from the Latin, is, ea, id, ille, a, -ud, alius, -a, -ud. — The Dual forms, 
T« and xaviu, seem not to have been in use among the ancients. — Instead 
oi' ixHvog, the Ionic niivog is also used in Attic poetry ; this word occurs 
somewhat frequently in Jlttic prose, but always after a long vowel or diph- 
thong ; hence Crasis, § 14, 5, must be assumed here, as r/ "ysivojg PI. Rp. 2. 
370, a. 





Singular. 


Plural. 


Nom. 


roaovtog rooavrrj rooovro{v) 


zooovzot zooavzui zoaavza 


Gen. 


roaovTov Toaavrrig zooovzov 


ZOOOVTMV Z0G0VZ03V ZOGOVTCOV 


Dat. 


zooovTM zoaavTi] urocjovzo) 


zooovzoig zooavraig zoaovzoig 


Ace. 


zooovzov zofjavztjv zooovzo[v) 


zooovTovg zooavrag zoaavza 




Dual. 




N. A. 1 zoaovzM zooavra zooovzw 




G. D. 1 zooovzoiv zooavzcav zooovroiv. 



Rem. 2. The Article usually coalesces by Crasis, § 10, with aviog and 
forms one word, viz. avxo g, instead of o avzog, idem, avTi] , zavzo , 
usually zavTov, instead of to avxo, xavzov, but t?^? ai/r^c, xavTia, 
T txlxfi (to distinguish it from xavT?/, this), but zov avTov, xi]v «lt?)v, avxo I, 
avx ai, x uvxd, mstead of xa avxa, (to distinguish it from xavxa, hate), but 
Twy avxojv, xolg avxolg, etc. 



§ 92. in. Relative Pronoun. 



(307.) 





Singular, 






Plural. 






Dual. 




Nom. 


0? y 

OV rjg 





01 


ai 


a 




a 


CO 


Gen. 


r 
OV 


T 

(OV 


T 

cov 


cov 


oiv 


alv 


oiv 


Dat. 


(0 


oig 


a'lg 


oig 


o'lv 


cdv 


oiv 


Ace. 






<■/ 




» 








ov 7]V 





ovg 


ag 


a 


CO 


a 


CO. 



§ 93. IV. Indefinite and Interrogative Pronouns. (308.) 
The Indefinite and Interrogative Pronouns are indicated by 
the same form, but are distinguished by the accent and position, 
the Indefinite being enclitic, § 33, and placed after some word 
or words, the Interrogative being accented and placed before. 

Remark 1. When the Interrogative Pronouns stand in an indirect ques- 
tion, they place before their stem the relative o, which, however, (except in 
the case of ogxig), is not inflected, e. g. ondlog, bnoaog, onoxigog, etc. 



§94.] 



CORRELATIVE PRONOUNS. 



117 



Sing. N. 


rig, some one N. ri, some thing 


rig ; quis? ri ; quid? 


G. 


rirog or tov 


rivog or rov 


D. 


Tivi or rep 


tin or ro) 


A. 


rud N. ri 


riva ri 


Plur. N. 


rn'e'g N. rtvd and art a 


rivsg riva 


G. 


ripbjp 


71V03V 


D. 


rioi{r) 


ri6i(v) 


A. 


rivdg N. rivd and art a 


rivag riva 


Dual N. A. 


rivs 


rivs 


G. and D. 


rivolv 


rivoiv. 


N. 
G. 


ogrig, lolioever ^rig o ri 
ovTivog or oiov rigrivog 


ohiveg alrivEg driva or urra 
covnvcov (rarer otcjv) _ [rio({v) 


D. 
A. 


(pnn or ozco mivi 
ovriva tJptivu o ti. 


oigri6i[v) (rarer or nig) aigriGi{v) olg- 
ovgrivag agrivag aziva or arra 


Dual N. A. C0TIV8, uTivE, G. D. oivzivoiv, aivnvoiv. | 



Rem. 2. The form uxxa not enclitic (Ion. aaaa) is often used instead of 
TLVu in connection with Adjectives, e. g. dsLva ana, fiiy.ga ana, or placed 
first, e. g. i]v yuQ dt) ana TOLads PI. Phaedon. 60, e. On the accentuation 
of d)VTtvu)v, ohiivoiv, aivrivoiv, see § 34, Rem. 1. The negative compounds 
of Tt?, viz. oi/Tic, oi'Tt, (jn']Tic, l^^tL, no one, nothing, inflect the simple rig 
merely, e. g. ovnrog, oinivsg, etc. 



Sing. N. 


Tj to daiva, some one, 


some thing 


Plur. 


01 deTveg 


G. 


rov r^g rov deivog 






rcov dsivo3v 


D. 


Tcp ry rw da in 






wantmg 


A. 


rov rjjv ro deiva 






rovg deivag. 



Rem. 3. /luva is also used indeclinable, though seldom, e. g. rov tw tov 
Sstva. 



§94. Correlative Pronouns. (310,311.) 

1. Under Correlative Pronouns are included all those which express a 
mutual relation (correlation) to each other, and represent this relation by a 
con'esponding form. This mutual relation is either a general one, as in 
rig; ri ; quis? quid? ug, rl, aliquis, aliquid, so ode, omog, he, this, og, who, 
which, or it is a definite relation. 

2. The definite correlation has four diflferent forms, viz. the Interrogative, 
Indefinite, Demonstrative and Relative. This fourfold correlation belongs 
both to Adjective and Adverbial Pronouns. All the four forms come from 
the same root, but they are distinguished, partly by a different accent, partly 
by a diflferent initial, since the Interrogative begins with tt, the Indefinite 
has the same form, though with a diflferent accent, the Demonstrative be- 
gins with T, and the Relative with the Spiritus Asper. The indirect inter- 

16 



118 



CORRELATIVE PRONOUNS. 



[§94. 



rogatives, as sliown above, § 93, Rem. 1, [)lace tlie 6, which comes from the 
relative, before the initial tt. 

3. Correlative Adjective Pronouns cx])ress relations of qwmtity and quali- 
ty, correlative Adverbial Pronouns, the relations of place, timt and manner 
or cojidition. 



(a) Adjective Correlatives. 



Interrogative. 

TToaog, 7], ov; 
how great? how 
much ? quau- 
tus? 


Indefinite, 


Demonstrative. 


Rclat. and De- 
pend. Interrog. 


noaog, 7], ov, 
of a certain 
size, or num- 
ber, aliquantus 


roGog, 7], ov, so great, so 
much, taiitus 

70(jOgdt,IOGridE,7060vd8 

iooovzog,-avz7^,-ovzo[v) 


06og, 7j, ov and 

onooog, ?/, ov, 

as great, as 

much, quantus 

olog, a, ov and 
onoiog, a, ov, 

of what kind, 

qualis 


TTOiog, a, ov ; 
of what kind ? 
qualis ? 


Ttoiog, a, ov, of 
a certain kind. 


roTog, a, ov, of such a 
kind, talis 

roiogde, zoidds, roiovde 
xoiovzog, -avz7j,-ovzo[v) 


Tiijl [Kog, 7], ov ; 
how greats liow 
oW? 


wanting 


7riliy.og,ri,ov,sogreat,so old 
zr^Xr/.ogde, -ride, -ovds 
TTjXr/.oviog, -aiirj, -oiJo{v) 


T]'},i'Aog,ri,ovSindi 

OTTt^Xiy.og, 7j,ov, 

as great, as old. 



Remark 1. The simple forms loaog and toToc are seldom used in 
prose. 



(b) Adverbial Correlatives. 



Interrogative. Indefinite. 


Demonstrative. 


R-elative. 
OV, where, 


Indirect 
Interroo;. 


7Z0V ; where ? Ttov, somewhere. 


wanting (hie. 


7 

07tov,ivhere, 


ubi ? alicubi 


ibi) 


ubi 


ubi 


Tto&ev; whence'? Tzo&evfromsome 


wanting (liinc, 


oO-tv,ivhence, 


OTZOx^EV, 


unde ? place, alicunde 


inde) 


unde [u'^7ice,nndej 


TTOt; whither? not, to some 


wanting (eo) 


oi, ichither. 


OTTOi, whi- 


quo ? ; place, aliquo 




quo 


ther, xquo 


TZOZS ; when ? Ttoti, some time. 


zoze, then, tum 


otE, tvhen. 


omzE, 


quando ? \ aliquando 




quum 


when, 
quando 


7TTjny.a ; quo w^antmg 


Z7]VL- ~] hoc 


7]viy.a,when, 


07t7]viy,a, 


temp oris pun- 


y.6dE 1 ipso 


quo ipso 


when, quo 


cto ? quota ho- . 


rr^vt- 1 tem- 


tempore 


ipso tem- 


ra? 1 


y,avza} pore 




pore 


7T(ag ; how ? nmg, some how 


ovzM{g)ojdE,so 


cog, how 


OTZOjg, how 


Ttri ; ivhitlmr?- n{],to some place, 


ZTide j hither 


1], where. 


oni;, where. 


how ? thither, insome way 


zavzij \ or here 


whither 


whither. 



§95.] LENGTHENING OF THE PRONOUN. 119 

Rkm. 2. The forms to express the idea of here, there, (hiuc, ibi), omitted 
in tlie Common language, are supplied by ivjavdu, iv&ads, and the idea 
of hence, by ir&irde, syrsid^sv; h'&u and syd^sv in the old poetic language 
have both a demonstrative and relative sense, but in prose only a rela- 
tive sense, except in certain phrases, e. g. tv&a ^isv — evd^a 8s^ hie, illic, 
IVu^ev xal sy^sv, hinc, illinc, and when the signification of place is changed 
to that of time, e. g. ty&a Xsyn, then he says, ey&sv, thereupon. The forms 
Ttu^, thus, ifi, hither, here, are poetic ; oic, instead of ovxbig, is also for the 
most part poetic ; in ])rose it is confined almost wholly to certain phrases, 
e. g. x«t ug, vel sic, ov^ (,t"/<5') w?, i^e sic qiiidem, and in comparisons, w§ — 
oi?, ut — sic, PI. Rp. 7. 530, d. Prot. 32(j, d. 



§ 95. Le ng the n i ng of the Pr o n oun. (312.) 

Some small words are so appended to the Pronouns for the purpose of 
giving a particular turn to then- signification, that they coalesce and form 
one word. They are the following : 

(a) The enchtic y& is joined to the Personal Pronouns of the first and 
second person, in order to make the person emphatic. The Pronoun f/cu 
then draws back its accent in the Nom. and Dat., e. g. syw/f, ef^ov/i, 
e fi I y s, fixi/s, avys. As /£ can be joined with any other word, so also 
with any other Pronoun, but is not so united with it as to form one word, 
e. g. otrc'c /f. 

(b) The pai'ticles 8 ?], more commonly dijnoTs, and v v, are appended to 
Relatives compounded of Interrogatives or Indefinites, as well as to oaog, 
in order to make the relative relation general, i. e. to extend it to eventhing 
embraced in the object denoted by the Pronoun, e. g. ogTiqdr,, ogTic8)]7iojs, 
ogrigovv, t\TLgoiv, otlovv, quicunque (Gen. ovrivogovv or otovoIv, ligiirogoiv, 
Dat. oniviovv or oicoovv, etc.); — onoaogdy'], onoaogovv, ocrogdijjioTS, quantus- 
cunque ; — ojiriliy.ogovv, however great, how old soever. 

(c) The sufiix ds is joined with some Demonstratives for the purpose of 
strengthening their demonstrative relation, e. g. ods, ijds, rods ; loiogds', to- 
<Tcg8s ; jvi'/.Ly.ogds, fi-om rolog, Toaog, Trjlr/.og, which change then- accent after 
^ £ is appended, § 34, Rem. 2. 

(d) The enclitic ni q is appended to all Relatives, in order to give the 
relative relation still more prominence over a demonstrative ; hence it de- 
notes, even who, which, e. g. octhq, ^jnfQ, ott?^ (Gen. ovnig, etc.); oaognsg, 
olognsQ (Gen. ouovthq, oXovtisq, etc.); oS^LTisg, od^ivneQ. 

(e) The inseparable Demonstrative i, is appended to Demonstratives and 
some few other adverbs, always giving them a stronger demonstrative sense. 
It takes the accent and absorbs every short vowel immediately preceding 
it, and also shortens the long vowels and diphthongs: 

OL'TOfji, this here (hicce, celui-ci), uvrij'i, tovti. 

Gen. jovjvvi, xavTrtnt, Dat. tovtml, TavTT]C, PI. ovioii, aiiaii, raviZ ; 

o8\, i]8'i, Todt from ods', b)dl from ajde', oijotai from oviojg; 

iviiv&svi fromivTsidEy; iv&adt from iv&ade; vvvi from vvv ', dsv^i from 

dtlQO. 



120 NATURE AND DIVISION OF NUMERALS. [§96. 



SECTION IV. 
The Numerals. 
§ 96. Na ture and Divis i on of Nu merats. (3i3, 314.) 
1. Numerals express the relation of number and quantity. 
They ai*e divided into the following classes, according to their 
signification : 

(a) Cardinals, which express a definite number absolutely, 
and answer the question, hoiv much? e. g. one, two, three. 
Almost all olher Numerals are derived from these. The first 
four Numerals and the round numbers from 200 (diay.ooioi) to 
[ivQioi and its compounds, are declined ; but all the others are 
indeclinable. The Thousands are expressed by adverbial Nu- 
merals, e. g. rqigyjhoi, 3000. 

(b) Ordinals, which denote a series and answer the question, 
ivhicli one in the series ? They all have the three endings of 
adjectives, -og, -t], -ov, except devreQog, which has -og, -a, -ov. All 
up to 19, except 2, 7, 8, end in -rog and have the accent as 
near as possible to the beginning of the w^ord. From 20 up- 
wards they end in -orog. 

Remark 1. Adverbial Ordinals, which also denote a succession, are ex- 
pressed by the Neut. Sing, or PI. with or without the article, but sometimes 
also with the adverbial ending -w$, e. g. tt^cutov, to tt^wtov, ti^wtw, t« ti^w- 

T«, TlQCOTCOg. 

(c) Multiplicatives, which show the number of parts of which 
a whole is composed, and answer the question, hoiu ^nanyfold? 
They are all compounded oi nlovg, and are adjectives of three 
endings, -ovg, -^, -ovv, §§76, I, and 77. 

anXovg, -rj, -nvv, single, dmlovg (2), TQinXovg (3), isTganXovg (4), nzvja- 
TiXovg (5), e^anXoig (6), emanXovg (7), oy.TanXovg (8), evvnnXovg (9), dsxu- 
nXovg (10), eymTovranXovg (100), /dforTrAoi'? (1000), fivgiajiXoig (10,000). 

Rem. 2. The adverbial Multiplicatives in answer to the question, how 
many fold "^ or into how many parts'^ are formed from the Cardinals with 
the ending -/a or -yf] and -/cue, e. g. nsvTa/a, TiEVTaxi], nsvrciy^wg. 

(d) Numeral adverbs, which answer the question, hoiv many 
times? Except the first three, they are formed from the Cardi- 
nals with the ending -ax/?, e. g. TrevTaxig, five times, § 9S. 



§ 97.] NUMERAL SIGNS. 121 

(o) Proportionals, which denote a proportion, and answer 
the question, how many times more ? They are all compovinded 
with the ending -nlaaiog, -id, -lov^ more seldom -Tilaaiwv, -ov, e.g. 
rAaTorraTtXaaicov, -ov : 

SmXaniog, twice as much, rQinXnaiog (3), rsTganXdaiog (4), nevTanXoKTiog 
(5), t^anXdaiog (6), knrajildcnog (7), oxTciJiXdcriog (8), ivvanXdaiog (9), 8fy.a- 
nXuffiog (10), exaroyTaTiAwo-fO? (100), xiXionXuinog (1000), fivgionXdaiog 
(10,000). 

(f) Substantive Numerals, which express the abstract idea 
of number. Except the first, they are all formed of the Cardi- 
nals with the ending -dg, Gen. -ddog : 

Tf fiovdg, from fiopog, alone, more seldom ?'/ svdg, unity, dvdg, duality, jQLug 
(3), TtTQiig (4), nsvTcig or nsfxmug (5), 6|«§ (6), s^doiidg (7), oydoug (8), ivvidg 
(9), ^cxa? (10), e/xa? (20), jQiaxotg (30), Tfiriof^axoiTw? (40), Titvir]y.ovidg (50), 
exoviovTw? (100), /dm? (1000), /it'^m'§ (10,000) (5^0 fivgiddeg (20,000). 

2. In addition to the Numerals mentioned above, there is 
still another class, which does not, like those, express a definite 
number, but either an indefinite number or an indefinite quan- 
tity, e. g. enoi, some, Tzavzag, all, tzoXXoi, many, oliyoi,few, ollyov, 
oXiya, a little, ovdeig, no one, ovdsv, nothing, etc. 

3. Numerals, like pronouns, are divided, according to their 
signification and form, into Substantive, Adjective and Adver- 
bial Numerals, e. g. TQeig j^Xd^ov, 6 tQirog dvi^Q, tQig. 



§97. Numeral Signs. (315.) 

1. The Numeral Signs are the twenty-four letters of the Greek Alphabet, 
to which three obsolete letters are added, viz. after f, Bav or the Digamma F 
or 2il, 5 ; — Konncc, 5, as the sign for 90; — ^'a^uTrt, ^, as the sign for 
900. 

2. The first eight letters, i. e. from ato & with the Bav or ^il, denote the 
Units ; the following eight, i. e. from t to tt with the Konna, the Tens ; the 
last eight, i. e. from ^ to to with the 2a^uTi1, the Hundreds. 

3. Up to 999, the letters, as numeral signs, are distinguished by a mark 
placed over them, and when two or more letters stand together, as nu- 
meral signs, only the last has this mark. With 1000, the Alphabet begins 
again, but the letters are distinguished by a mark placed under them, thus, 
a' = l, a = 1000, t' = 10, t = 10,000, e i// ^ /5' = 5742, ^« to ^u /5' = 1842, 
Q = 100, ^q = 100,000. 



122 



PRINCIPAL CLASSES OF NUMERALS. 



§98.] 



§ 98. S u m m a r y of the Princ ip a I Clas ses of Nu - 

merals. c.m—M'j.) 

Cardinals. Ordinals. 



1 a 

3 7 

4 d' 

5 8 

6 g 

7 r ■ 

9 'O- 

10 I ^ 

11 la 

12 if 

13 ly 

14 id' 

15 // 

16 ig 

17 iC 

18 It]' 

19 tx'>' 

20 x 

21 x(z' 
30 A' 
40 [/ 
50 / 

60 r 

70 o' 

80 ;?' 
90 5' 
100 ()' 
200 d' 
300 / , 
400 if U 
500 g)' 
600 X 
700 V 
800 w' 
990 nr>' 
1000 a 
2000 '/5 
3000 V 
4000 '5 
5000 's 
6000 'g 
7000 'C 






TznojTog, -J], -ov, primus, -a, 
dtvTtQog, -u, -ov 
TQaig, TQia zQt'rog, -rj, -ov 

TEzraQsg^ -a, or ztaaaQeg, -a ztiufjzog, -i], -ov 



-um 



7TSVTS 

t^ , 

STizd 

OXTOJ 

Ivvta 

dexa 

tvdexa 

dcodexa 

tQigxaidey.a 

TSztaQegxcudexa 

Ttevzexaidexa 

ixy.atdty.a 

ETtiaxaidexa 

oxzojxaidsxa 

IvvEaxaidexa 

erAOOiyv) 

eixoGiv dg, (Aia^ tv 

TQidxovza 

ZETzaQaxovTa 

TievzffAovza 

t^rjxovza 

ffidofArjxovta 

oydor^xovza 

ivEv/^xovza 

ixazov 

didxooioi, -ai, -a 

TQidxooioi, -ai, -a 

zsTQaxooioi, -ai, -a 

Ttevzaxooioi, -ai, -a 

ihixooioi, -ai, -a 

STtzaxootoi, -ai, -a 

oxzaxooioi, -ai, -a 

ivraxooioi, -ai, -a 

Xihoi, -ai, -a 

digxihoi, -at, -a 

zQigXihoi, -ai, -a 

ZEZQaxigxihoi, -ai, -a 

TiEvzaxigyJXioi, -ai, -a 

E^axig/Jhoi, -at, -a 

snraxigxihoij -ai, -a 



7ZEfJ,7l70g, -7]f -ov 

Exzog, -Tj, -ov 
I'Sdof^og, -J], -ov 
bydoog, -?], -ov 
ivazog, -;/, -ov 
dsxazog, -r], -ov 
Evdtxazog, -i], -ov 
dojdExazog, -t], -ov 
tQigxaidtxaTog, -t], -ov 
TEZzanaxatdi-xazogj -rj, -ov 
TZEvzExaidExuzog, -t], -ov 
ixxaidExazog, -?/, -ov 
ETZzaxaidtxaTog, -t], -ov 
oxTcoxcuStxazog, -?], -ov 
ivvEaxuidexazog, -rj, -ov 
Eixoozog, 7/-, -ov 
Eixoozog, -rj, -ov, TiQcotog, -rj, 
7Qidxo6z6g, -1], -ov 
zETzaQaxoazog, -rj, -ov 
TiEVzrjxoozog, -tj, -ov 
i^axocjzog, -iq, -ov 
E^dopLtixoGzog, -?/, -ov 
ojdotixoGzog, -i], -ov 
EPEvrixoGTog, -//, -ov 
exazoozog, -rj, -ov » 
didxoGioozog, -rj, -ov 
ZQidxooiGOZGg, -rj, -ov 
zezQaxoGioozog, vj, -ov 
TiEvzaxoGioazog, -?/, -ov 
i^axoatoGzog, -r], -ov 
sxzaxoGioGzog, -?/, -ov 
oxzaxooioazog, -rj, -ov 
ivvaxoGioGTog, -j^, -ov 
XihoGzog, -vj, -ov 
digyjhoozog, -//, -ov 
tQigXihoozog, -q, -ov 
zEZQCixigyihoozog, -{], -ov 
TiEvzaxigyihoGTog, -7j, -ov 
Etaxigxihoozog, -;/, -ov 
inzaxigxihoGzog, -i], -ov 



§99. 



REMARKS ON THE NUMERALS. 



123 



8000 

9000 

10,000 

20,000 

100,000 

1,000,000 



Cardinals. 
oxTuy.tg/ihoi, -ui, -a 
trray.igyJXioiy -at, -a 
HVQioif -at, -a 
digfiVQioi, -ai, -a 
dtxayigfivQioi, -ai, -a 
ty.aTovTCiyjgitvQioi, -ai. 



2,000,000 X n d(ccAooiay.tgfivQioi, -ai, -a 



Ordinals. 
oy.TaxigyiXtOGTog, -//, -6v 
Ivvay.igyiXtoaTogy -//, -6v 

flVQlOOTOg, -//, -ov 

digiivQioozog, -tj, -6v 
dey.ay.igiivQioazog , -rj, -ov 
rAaTOVTayjgfiVQioGJog, -^, 
diay.oaia'AigfivQioazog, -^, 



-ov 
■ov. 



Numeral Adverbs 



1 dnai, once 

2 dig, twice 

3 TQig 

4 TSTQaxig 

5 nevzdy.ig 

6 ttdy.ig 

7 iTZTu/.tg 

8 o/.zdy.tg 

9 ivvedy.ig, ivvdy.ig 

10 dexdy.ig 

11 hdb/.d/.ig 

12 dcodty.dyig 

13 TQigy.uidey.dyjg 

14 TeTTaoegy.aidey.dy.ig 

15 Ttepiey.aidtydy.ig 

16 iy.y.aidaydyjg 

17 tTTTayaidsydyig 

18 oy.zcoy.aidey.dy.ig 



19 


ivveayaidey.d/.ig 


20 


er/.06uy.ig 


21 
22 


eiy.ooay.ig anal;, 
er/.ooay.ig 8fg 


30 


TQiay.ovzay.ig 


40 
50 
69 
70 

80 


T8zzaQay.ovzay.ig 

Ttevzijy.ovzay.ig 

i^r^y.ovidy.ig 

f^ho^riy.ovzdy.ig 

6y8ot]y.ovzdy.ig 


90 Ivtvtjy.ovTayug 
100 iy.azovzuyjg 
200 diay.ooidxig 


300 TQiay.oaidxig 
1000 yihdy.ig 
2000 ^/^^rP.^fixf? 
10,000 fivQidy.ig 
20,000 digjivQidxig. 



§ 99. Remarks , (sn.) 

1. The rarer subordinate forms of 13, 14, etc., are dsy.aTQHC, Neut. dsy.aiQia, 
dexaTSTTaQtg, -a, dsy.ansvTs, etc. — In TiiiaQ^gy.uldsy.a, the first part is de- 
clined, thus, reiTUQcxy.aidsy.a hr}, TSTzaQaiy.aldiy.ix ersffiv. 

2. Mi'QLoi, 10,000, when ParoxAtone, fzvg lot, signifies innumerable. 

3. In compomad numerals, the smaller number with y.at is usually placed 
before the larger, often also the larger without y.al is placed first, some- 
times with y.al, e. g. 

25 : TtEVTE yal H'y.ocTL, or slyoai nsvis, 
345: TiEiTe y.ul isTTUQuy.ovia y.ul TQtuy.oaioi, or zgiay.. tett. n. 
The same holds of the Ordinals, e. g. 

TtifXTtTog y.al slxoaTog or dy.oaihg niumog. 

4. The Tens compounded with 8 or 9 are frequently expressed in the 
form of subtraction, by means of the participle of dslv, to want, referring 
to the lai-ger number, e. g. 

49 : nfVTViy.ovTa fj-oc dsovTu ett], undequinqnaginta anni, 
48 : nsvTijy.ovTa dvdtv diovzu hr], duodequinquaginta anni, 
39: vrisg i^uig diovaai TETTaguy.ovTa, undequadraginta naves. 



124 NATURE AND FORMATION OF ADVERBS. [§§100,101. 

So in the Ordinals, e. g. 

49 : krog dsoiv mvTTjy.oaiog uit'iQ, iindeqiiinquagesimus vir. 
5. Decloiision of the linst four Nimicrals: 



Norn. 


Eig 


fiia tv 


dvo 


Gen. 


tvog 


fAfug evog 


bvolvy very seldom dvtiv 


Diit. 


tn 


fiia tvi 


dvoiv, dvai{v) Ionic and Th. 8, 101. 


Ace. 


tva 


fllUV hV 


dm 


Norn. 


ZQsTg 


Neut. tQia 


TtTTaQeg or rtaaaqtg Neut. ttttuQa 


Gen. 


TQICJV 




rETTanow 


Dat. 


7Ql6t\v) 


ZhTZaQ<jl[v) 


Ace. 


TQeig 


Neut. TQia 


TtTZUQag Neut. reTtuna 



Remark. Like fig are also declined oidelc and /U7/5f/c, no one, ovdilc, at- 
Sfi.da, oldsv, Gen. ovdevcg, ovd^fxiixg, Dat. oidivl, oideijiu, etc., PI. ovdivfg 
{/jTidh'sg), -spb)v, -e<n{v), -svug. Tiie irregular accentuation of fiiuc, (jiix, 
should be noted. Comp. further §65,3, (c). The form diw instead of ^ro 
seems to be foreign to the Attic dialect, z/i'o is often used as indeclinable 
in all Cases. ^'Afiqica, both, is declmed like dvo, Gen. and Dat. u^cfotv. Ace. 



SECTION V. 

The Adverb. 
§ 100. Na tur e and div i s ion of Adv erh s . (^o.) 
Adverbs are indeclinable words, by which a relation oi place 
or time^ or the relation of manner^ modality, and of intensity and 
repetition^ is denoted. These are formed either from essential 
words, viz. Substantives, Adjectives, Participles, or horn formal 
words, viz. Pronouns and Numerals, 

(a) Adverbs o^ place, e. g. ovqavo&fv, coelitus, navTayr^, ubi\is ; 

(b) Adverbs of tune, e. g. vvktojq, noctu, vvv, nunc; 

(c) Adverbs of manner, e. g. v.alwg, ot'Tw(?) ; 

(d) Adverbs of modality, which, e. g. ral and oi(x), express an affirmation 
and negation, or e. g. (.u'lV, toI, 7], r\ ^i]v, d/j, lacog, nov, av, navTcag, etc. 
which express ceiiainty, dejiniteness, uncertainty, conditionality ; 

(e) Adverbs of intensity and frequency, e. g. f.idku. Tidvv, noXi; oaov, etc.; 
TQig, three times, av&ig, again, noXXdy.ig, often, etc. 



§101. Formation of Adverbs (321,322.) 

1. Most Adverbs are formed from Adjectives by the ending 

•(og. This ending is annexed to the pure stem of the Adjective, 



§ 101.] FORMATION OP THE ADVERBS. 125 

and as the stem of Adjectives of the third Dec. appears in the 
Gen., and as Adjectives in the Gen. PL are accented like Ad- 
verbs, the following rule for the formation of Adverbs from Ad- 
jectives may be given : 

The ending of the Adjective in the Gen. PI. namely, -ojVy is 
changed to -co^, e. g. 

q)lX-og, lovely, Gen. PI. qill-cov Adv. cpil-cog 

x{xX-6g,fair, " naX-MV xaX-wg 

xttiQi-ogj timely, " y.aiql-Mv xaiQl-wg 

anX[6-og)ovg, simple, " ctTiX(6-Mv)6jv anX{6-oig)(}jg 

evv{o-og)ovg, benevolent, " (sivd-wv) slvcov [svvo-cag) svpojg 

nag, all, nixvTog, " 7idvT~(ov navT-wg 

awcpQcov, prudent, " aaxpgov-cav acocpgov-cog 

Xcigliig, pleasant, " %aQisvT-(x)V %aQiivx-(ag 

ict'/vg, swift, " Ta/s-ojv Ta/fi-co? 

(iiyag, great, " ^iyaX-mv. fisydX-ojg 

uXrjd^ijg, true, " dXrid{s-(av)o}V dXr}&{£-a)g)(t}g 

avn'j&rjg^ accustomed, " {(Tvvri&i-ojv) avvij&cov [avvri-&s-oig) <jvvr\d-(ag. 

Reriark 1. On the accentuation of compounds in -')]&wg, and of the com- 
pound avraQxojg, see § 59, Rem. 4, also on the accentuation of svvojg, instead 
of svvcog, § 49, 3. On the comparison of Adverbs, see § 85. 

2. In addition to the Adverbs that end in -cog, there are many, 
which have the endings of the Gen., Dat. or Ace. 

(a) The inflection of the Gen. appears in many adverbs in 
-rig and -ov, e. g. s^^g, icpe^ijgf in order, i^amvtjg, siiddenJij, nov, all- 
cubi, nov, uhi ? otzov, ov, uhi, avrov, ibi, ovdafiov, nowhere ; nqoiy.og, 
(from TtQoi'^, gift,) gratuitously. 

(b) The Dat., or an obsolete Abl. inflection and forms de- 
noting js/ac^, occm* in the following Adverbs, 

(a) In Adverbs with the ending -I, e. g. riqi, in the spring, comp. ?;(>, 
spi'ing, dojQL, unseasonably, sy.r]Ti (Dor. Ixati), diy.f]Ti, sy.ovit, dsyovTu ', 
m Adverbs of manner in -u and -\, from Adjectives in -og and -r]g, 
and almost exclusively in Adverbs compounded of a privative and 
Tia? or avTog, e. g. navoq^d and navoQ^L On the use of both forms, 
see Large Grammar, Part I. § 363, /?. 

(/?) In local Adverbs in -ol, commonly derived from substantives of the 
second Dec, e. g. ^IcT&fio'l from "la&ixog, IIv&o% from Hv^co, MsyaQol 
(tw MiyaQa), niigaidl, Kiyvvvol from ?/ Kly.vvva), ot, onoi, quo, whither, 
oXy.oi, domi, from oiyog. 

Rem. 2. Adverbs in -ol, derived from substantives, denote an indefinite 
where, but those derived from pronouns commonly denote the direction 
whither, yet sometimes the indefinite wlwre. 
17 



126 CLASSES OF THE VERli. [§ 102. 

(;') In local Adverbs in -ai. This ending occurs only in a few forms, e. g. 
Xaf^otl, liunii, TiaAtti. To tliis form correrijKJiids the PI. of Adverbs of 
place, - rjcr i{v), or -u a iv preceded by i, derived from substantives of 
the first Dec. ; this ending originally belonged to plural substantives 
only, but was transferred later to substantives in the singular number, 
o. g. 0{](irfGL from Oijjjuij ^Adrjvr^cn from ^Axtrivai, JD.uiaiucn i'roin 
TlXuTutcti; JIiQ/uaijCTL from JleQ'/aai], "Olv^niuai from'OXviJ.nia. 

((5) In Adverbs in -rj and -«, e. g. uXXt], sTsgr], th'C^j, on foot, y.ovcfij, Xotd^qu, 
tlari^ temere, ovdaui], drjfxoala, puhlice, xoivij, in common, Idlu, privatim, 
i<o(^idij, diligenter ; also ttt], onr], naviri, ?/, ti], li^ds, tuvit], etc.; ij and 
« commonly have an Iota subscript. 

(c) The Ace. inflection occurs in the following forms, 

(a) In the endings -rjv and -av, e. g. nQan]v, ^av.Qav, widely, niqav and 

Ttegrjv, trans, but tisqu, vllra, etc. ; so also of substantives, e. g. dly.riv, 

instar, ayfiijv, [acme] scarcely, dcoQiav, gratis. 
(/5) In the ending -ov, e. g. drjgov, diu, (rrjfisQov, kodie, nvQiov, to-morrow, 
{/) In the endings -d ov, -d tjv, -da, (Adverbs of manner), e. g. alioa^ 

;(sd6v, cominus, xuvdov, innoTgoxccdrjv, unoaTada. 
[o) In some substantive forms in the Ace. of the third Dec, e. g. x^Q'^^if^^ 

the sake of, gratia, ngoty.a, gratuitously. 



SECTION VI. 

The Verb. 

Nature and Division of the Verb. 

§102. Classes of the Verb. (67,68.) 

1. The Verb expresses an action, which is affirmed of a sub- 
ject, e. g. the father ivrites, the rose blooms^ the boy sleeps^ God 
is loved. 

2. Verbs are divided, in relation to their meaning and form, 
into the following classes : 

(1) Active verbs, i. e. such as express an action, that the sub- 
ject itself performs or manifests, e. g. yQcicpoj, to lurite, &dX- 
Xg3, to bloom ; 

(2) Middle or Reflexive verbs, i. e. such as express an action, 
that proceeds from the subject and again returns to it, 
i. e. an action which the subject performs on itself, e. g. 
^ov/.evofiai, I advise myself I deliberate. 

(3) Passive verbs, i. e. such as express an action that the sub- 



§§ 103, 104.] VERBS. THE TENSES AND MODES. 127 

ject receives from another subject, e. g. rvntonai dnb rivogj 

I am smitten by some one. 
3. Verbs, which arc used only in the Middle form, are called 
Deponent They have either a reflexive or intransitive mean- 
ing. They are divided into Middle Deponents, which construct 
theur Aorist and their Future w^ith a Middle form, e. g. laQil^oiiaiy 
gratijicor^ Aor. ixaQiadntiv^ Fut. laQioviiai^ and into Passive De- 
ponents, which construct their Aorist with a Pass, form, but 
their Fut. commonly with a Middle form, e. g. ivd-vfxsofxcu, mecum 
reputo^ Aor. ind-vfi/jd-iiv, mecum reputavi, Fut. ivd^vfxrjoofiai, mecum 
reputabo. Comp. § 197. 

§103. The Tenses. (69, 70.) 

1. The Greek language has the following Tenses: 
I. (1) Present, §ovlsvco, I advise, 

(2) Perfect, §E^ovXsvHa, I have advised ; 
II. (3) Imperfect, e^ovXsvovj Iivas advising-, 

(4) Pluperfect, i^s^ovXEvxeiv, I had advised, 

(5) Aorist, i^ovlevaa, I advised, (indefinite) ; 
III. (6) Future, ^ovXsvaco, I shall or will advise, 

(7) Future Perfect only in the Middle form, ^a^ovXevao- 
fiai, I shall deliberate, or I shall advise myself. 

2. All the Tenses may be divided into, 

a. Principal tenses, Present, Perfect and Future ; 

b. Historical tenses, Imperfect, Pluperfect and Aorist. 

Remark. The Greek language has two forms for the Perf. and Pluperf 
Act., two for the simple Fut. Pass., and two each for the Act., Pass, and 
Mid. Aorist ; these two forms may be distinguished as Primary and Second- 
ary tenses. Still, few verbs have both forms ; most verbs construct the 
above tenses with one or the other form. No Verb has all the tenses. 
Pure verbs, § 108, 5, form, with very few exceptions, only the primary 
tenses. Mute and liquid verbs may form both the primaiy and secondary 
tenses. The Fut. Perf, which is found in but few verbs, is almost entirely 
wanting in liquid verbs. 

§104. The Modes, (71.) 

The Greek has the following Modes : 

I. The Indicative, which expresses an action or effect, e. g. 
the rose blooms, bloomed, loill bloom. 



128 PARTICIPIALS. PERSONS AND TENSES. [§§ 105 107. 

II. The Subjunctive, which expresses a condition. The Sub- 
junctive of the historical tenses may be called the Optative. 
Comp. YQcicpoijii with scriberem. 

Remark. Sec § 257, Rem. 1 and 4, for the manner in which the Aorist 
may use both forms of the Subj. and how the Fut. may have an Optative. 

III. The Imperative, which is a direct expression of one's 
will, e. g. ^ovIevs, advise. 

§105. Participials. — Infinitive and Participle . 

(72.) 

In addition to the modes, the verb has two forms, which, as 
they partake, on the one hand, of the nature of the verb, and, on 
the other, of the nature of the substantive and adjective, are 
called Participials, namely, 

(a) The Infinitive, which is the substantive participial, e. g. 
td-iloo ^ovleveiVj I ivish to advise^ and to ^ovlsveiv, the 
advising-. 

(b) The Participle, which is the adjective participial, e. g. 

^ovXevcor dvrjQ, a counsellor. 

Remark. These two participials may be called verbum infinitum ; the re- 
maining forms of the verb, verbum Jtnitum. 

§106. The Persons and Tenses. (73.) 

The personal forms of the verb show whether the subject of 
the verb be the speaker himself, J, first person ; or a person or 
thing addressed, thou, second person ; or a person or thing spo- 
ken of, he, she, it, third person. ' They also show the relation of 
number. Singular, Dual and Plural, comp. § 41, 1, e. g. §ov).8V(o, 
I, the speaker, advise ; ^ovXevsig, thou, the person addressed, ad- 
visest; ^ovlsvei, he, she, it, the person or thing spoken of, advises; 
§ovXev87ov, ye two, the persons addressed, advise ; ^ovXevovai, they, 
the persons spoken of, advise. 

Remark. There is no particular form for the first Pers. Dual in the Act 
and Pass. Aorists, but it is expressed by the form of the first Pers. PL 

§107. The Conjugation. (74.) 

Conjugation is the inflection of the verb designed to denote 

the Person, Number, Mode, and Tense. The Greek has two 



§ 108.] VERBS. STEM, AUGMENT AND REDUPLICATION. 129 

forms for conjugation, that in -co, which includes much the 
larger number of verbs, c. g. (invlev-coj to advise^ and the older, 
original, conjugation in -/xt, e. g. larti-fii, to station. 



Conjugation of Verbs in -oj. 

§108. Stem, Augment and Reduplication. — Char- 
acteristic. (75.) 

1. Every verb is divided into the stem, which contains the 
ground-form of the verb, and into the syllable of formation, by 
which the relations of the action expressed by the verb, are deno- 
ted. See §§ 102 — 106. The stem is found in most verbs in -w by 
cutting off the ending of the first Pers. Ind. Pres., e. g. ^ovXev-co, 

),Ey-OJ, TQl^-CO. 

2. The syllables of formation are either annexed as endings 
to the stem and are then called inflection-endings, e. g. ^ovXev-m, 
^ovXev-co), ^ov).£v-(jo^uai, or are prefixed to the stem, and are then 
called Augment and Reduplication, e. g. i-^ovXevov, I ivas advis- 
ing-, §e-^ov).£vy>a, I have advised. An euphonic change, which may 
be called Variation, occurs in the stem of many verbs, e. g. 
tQS7t-(a, tE-TQOCp-a, i-rgaTt-T^v. See § 16, 6. 

3. The Augment, which belongs to the Indicative of all the 
historical tenses, i. e. the Imperfect, the Aorist and the Pluper- 
fect, is s prefixed to the stem of verbs which begin with 
a consonant, e. g. i-^ovlEvaa, I advised; but in verbs, which 
begin with a vowel, it consists in lengthening the first stem- 
vowel, a and e being changed into tj (and in some cases 
into £t), I and v into I and v, and o into co. 

4. Reduplication, which belongs to the Perfect, Pluperfect 
and Future Perfect, consists in repeating the first stem -conso- 
nant together with «, in those verbs whose stem begins with a 
consonant; but in verbs whose stem begins with a vowel, it is 
the same as the augment, e. g. ^e-^ovXEvaa, I have advised,' rAs- 
ravyittj I have supplicated, from 'lhetev-co. For a more full defini- 
tion of the Augment and Reduplication, see § 119 sq. 

5. The last letter of the stem, after the ending -co is cut off, is 
called the verb-characteristic, or merely the characteristic, be- 



130 VERBS.— INFLECTION AND TENSE-ENDINGS. [§§ 109, 110. 

cause it determines the class of verbs in -«; according as the 
characteristic is a vowel, or a mute, or a liquid, verbs are divi- 
ded into pare, mute and liquid verbs, e. g. ^ovXav-w, to advise, 
7ifid-cjy to honor, iQf^-co, to rub, cpaiv-co, to shoiu. 

§109. Inf lection- endiiig-s . (89.) 

In the inflection-endings, so far as they denote the relation of 
tense, mode and person, there are three different elements, 
namely, the tense-characterisLic, the mode-vowel, and the per- 
sonal-ending, e. g. ^ovXev-G-o-fiai. 

§110. (a) Tense-char acteristic and Ending's . (89.) 

1. The tense-characteristic is that consonant which stands 
next after the stem of the verb, and is the characteristic mark of 
the tense. In pm-e verbs, j« is the tense-characteristic of the 
Perf. and Plup. Ind. Act., e. g. 

(Ss-^ovkEV-x-a i-^s-^ovXsv-y-siv ; 

that of the Fut. and first Aor. Act. and Mid. and the Fut. Perf. 
is cT, e. g. 

^ovXsv-(T-(o ^ovlsv-ff-Ofxai ^s-^ovXsv-a-Ofxab 

i-§ovlsv-u-n i-PovXsv-ff-dfiTjv ; 

that of the first Aor. Pass, is '& ; the first Fut. Pass, has, in ad- 
dition to the tense-characteristic (T, the ending -d-tj of the first Aor. 
Pass., thus, 

i~^ovXsv-S^~7]v ^ovhvS^7]<T-o^txi. 

The primary tenses only, see § 103, Rem., have a tense-cha- 
racteristic. 

2. The tense-characteristic, together with the ending follow- 
ing, is called the tense-ending. Thus, e. g. in the form ^ovXevaco, 
(T, the tense-characteristic of the Fut., and the syllable oco, are the 
tense-ending of the Fut. The stem of the verb, together with 
the tense-characteristic and the augment or reduplication, is 
called the tense-stem. Thus, e. g. in i^ovXevo-a, i^ovXeva is the 
tense-stem of the first Aor. Act. 



111,112.] VERBS. PERSONAL-ENDINGS AND MODE-VOWELS. 131 



§111. (b) Per sonal-endings and Mode-voivels. 

(92.) 

The personal-ending takes a different form according to the 
different persons and numbers ; and the mode-vowel takes a 
different form according to the different modes, e. g. 



1 Pers. Sing. Ind. Pres. 


M. 


^ovXsv-o-fiai 


Siibj. ^ovXsv-oj-fiai 


3 " " " Fut. 


11 


^ovXsv-<T-s-TaL 


Opt. ^0VXSV-(T-0L-T0 


1 " PI. " Pres. 


(( 


^ovXsv-6-[itd^a 


Subj. ^ovXsv-co-f^s&a 


Q U U ii U 


(( 


^ovXEv-s-a&E 


" ^0VX£V-7J-(T^S 


1 " Sing. " A.I. 


il 


i^ovXsv-a-a-^Tjv 


" ^ovXsv-a~b}-fxai 


o a li il il 


a 


s[jovXsv-(T-a-To 


Opt. ^OvXBV-<T-aL-TO. 



Remark. In the above forms, ^ovXev is the verb-stem, and [jovXsv, ^ov- 
Xbv(t and i^ovXsva are the tense-stems, namely, of the Pres., Fut. and fii*st 
Aor. Mid.; the endings -/u«/, -rat, etc., are the personal-endings, and the 
vowels 0, 0), €, 01, r}, a, ai, are the mode-vowels. 



§112. Summary of the Mode-voivels. 



(93.) 





Indicative. 


Subj. 


Opt. 


Impr. 


Inf. 


Part. 


Person. 


Pres. and Fut. Impf., A. II. A. and 
Active. i M. and Pr. and F. 31. 


Act. Mid. 










S. 1. 


oa 


CO 


CO 


01 


— 


8L, 8 


CO, 


2. 


H 


8 


V 


V 


01 


£ 






3. 


£1 


s 


V 


n 


01 


£ 






D.l. 


- 







CO 


01 


— 






2. 


E 


£ 


n 


V 


01 


£ 






3. 


£ 


€ 


7] \ 7] 


01 


£ 






P. 1. 








CO I OJ 


01 


- 






2. 


8 


£ 


7] 1 7] 


01 


£ 






3. 








CO CO 


01 


£ 








Indicative. 


Optative. 


Impr. 


Infinitive. 


Person. 


Plpf. 


A.LM. Y'-\tT^ 


A. I. A. 

and M. 


A. I. A. and M. 


A. I. A. and M. 

a 


S. 1. 


ei 


a 1 a 


(U 


— 


2. 
3. 


£i 
81 


d \ a 
a ; 8 


ai 
ai 


a 
a 






D.l. 


- 


a - 


at 


- 


Participle. 


2. 


81 


a 


a 


at 


a 


A. I. A. and M. 


3. 


81 


a 


a 


ai 


a 


and Pf. A. 


P. 1. 


81 


a 


u 


ai 


_ 


a 


2. 


81 


a 


a 


ai 


a 




1 ^ 


[ei) 8 


a 


a 


Ul 


a 





132 VERBS. PERSONAL-ENDINGS OF VERBS IN -(O. [§ 113, 114. 



§113. PersoiK 


J- ending's 


of Ve rbs 


in -03. (94.) 


]. Active Form. 


11. xMiddle Forn». | 


A. Ind. and Subj. 
tlio Princ. tenses. 


B. Ind. and Opt. 
tlio Hist, tenses. 


A. Ind. and Subj. 
tile Princ. tenses. 


B. Ind. and Opt. 
the Ui.st. tenses. 


Sing. 1. 




V, Opt. jUt 


(A.at 


fl7iV 


2. 


? 


S 


aai 


ao, 


3. 




— 


rat 


ro 


Dual 1. 
2. 


rov 


tov 


fied^ov 

od-OV 


fie&ov 
o&ov 


3. 


TOV 


t1]V 


od^OV 


(y&Tjv 


Plur. 1. 

2 


fiev 
re 


[ISV 

rs 


6d-8 




3. 


[vZi) 61, IV 


V, oav 


vr at iarai) vro [aro] 


C. Imperative. 


C. Imperative. 


Sing. 2. 


3. rw 


Sing.2. ((7o)o3. (yi9-ca 


Dual 2. 


70V 3. TCOV 


Dual 2. (jxTov 3. 6^cov 


Plur. 2. 


rs 3. rcoaav 


Plur. 2. (T^£ 3. od^(ooav,6&(x)v 


D. Infinitive. 


D. Infinitive. 


V Pres., Fut. and Aor. II. 


ad^ai 


vai Perf. Act. and Aor. I. and II. Pass. 




at Aor. I. 




E. Participle. 


E. Participle. 


Stem vr, with exception of the Perf., 
whose stem ends in -or. 


^evog, fisv)], ^evov ; 
fiEvog, fi8vr], {xsvov, Perf. 



Remark. The Personal-endings follow so directly the mode-vowel, and 
are often so closely joined to it, that they form one whole, e. g. ^ovXsva-jjg, 
instead of ^ovXEm-r]-ig, ^ovXev-tj, instead of povhv-s-ai. 

§114. Difference hetioeen the Per sonal-eyiding s 
in the Principal and the Historical Tenses. (95.) 

1. The difference between the Princ. and Hist, tenses is impoitant. The 
Princ. tenses, foim the 2d aiid 3d Pers. Dual in - o »*, e. g. ^ovXtv-s-joy 
§ovUv-s-Tov ; ^ovlsv-s-a&ov ^ovXsvs-a&ov ; the Hist, tenses also form the 
2d Pers. D. in - o v, but the 3d in - ?; v, e. g. 

i^ovXsv-s-T V i^ovXsv-s-T 1] V, i^ovXEV-s-a & ov i^ovXsv-i-cr S^rjv. 

2. The Prmc. tenses form the 3d Pers. PI. i\.ct. in-a l{v), from -vTi,-v(7i, 
and the Mid. in -vt a i; the Hist. Act. in - v, and Mid. in - y t o, e. g. 

^ovXev-o-v a l = ^ovXEV-ovai[v) e-^ovXev-o-v 
^ovXev-o-v t a l e-^ovXev-o-v t o. 

3. The Princ. tenses in the Sing. Mid. end in -uat, -aai, -lat ; the Hist, 
in -fir]v, ~(T0, -to, e. g. 

§ovXev~o- fia l s^ovXev-o- fxtjv 

§ovXev~e- <j a i = ^SovXEV-rj, s^ovXev-e- ct o = i^ovXev-ov 

^qvXev-e- t « t £§ovXev-e- X 0. 



§ 115.] CONJUGATION OK THE RKGULAR VERB IN -W. 133 

4. The Personal-endings of the Subj. in the Princ. tenses are like those of 
the Intl. in the Siime tenses; the Opt. are like those of the Ind. Hist, tenses; 
2 and 3 Du. Ind. Pr. ^ovXsve- xov Subj. ^ovXsirj- xov 

^ovXsvs- (T-& ov " ^ovXfVTj- a& ov 

3 PL " " ^oi'Xevov-(ti{v) " /?ovA£i'w-(ri(y) 

(iovleio-vT ai " ^ovIsvoj-vt a l 

IS. " " ^ovhio-fiac " ^ovXivw- [iUL 

2" " " ^ovXev-j] " ^ovXtv-ri 

3" " " ^ovXsvs-T at " ^ovXivfj- T a L 

2 and 3 Du. " Impf.eSovXsve- tov, -i- Trjv Opt. ^ovXtvoi- xov, -oi- xrjv 

e^ovXsvE-(Td^ov,-£-(J&r]V " ^ovX8Voi-(jd^oV)-oi-CF&r)V 
3Ph " « i^ovXsvo-v " ^ovXevoi'SV 

e^ovXivo- V X o " ^ovXsvoL-vx o 

IS. " " i^ovXsvo- fXTjV " ^ovXsvol- firjv 

2" " '' [s^ovXsvs-ao) 0ovXsv-ov " {^ovXevoi- (t o ) ^ovXsvot-o 
2" " " i^ovXsvs-xo " ^ovXsvoi-xo. 

§115. Conjugation of the Regular Verb in -03.(101.) 

1. Since the pure verbs do not form the Sec. tenses, § 103, Rem., these 
tenses are supplied in the Pai'adigm from two mute verbs and one liquid verb, 
so as to exhibit a full Conj., e. g. tqI^-m, XeIti-co, stem yllll, cfaiv-o}, 9AN. 

2. In learning the table we are to note, 

(1) That the meaning in English is opposite the Greek forms. 

(2) That the Greek forms may alwaj's be resolved into, (a) Personal-end- 
ing, (b) Mode-vowel, (c) Tense-characteristic, (d) Tense-stem, (e) Verb- 
stem, (f ) Augment or Reduplication. 

(3) The spaced forms, e. g. ^ovXev- exov, SovXsv- -ijx ov, 3d Pers. Du. Ind. 
and Subj. Pres., may call attention to the differences between the Hist. 
tenses in the Ind. and Opt. and the Princ. tenses. 

(4) Similar forms, as well as those that differ only in accentuation, are 
distinguished by a star *. The learner should compare these together, e. g. 
^ovXsvaM, 1. S. Ind. Fut. Act. or 1. S. Subj. Aor. I. Act. ; ^ovXivaaL, 2. S. Imp. 
Aor. I. Mid., ^ovXsvaai, 3. S. Opt. Aor. I. Act., ^ovXevaai, Inf. Aor. I. Act. 

(5) The accentuation, § 118, should be learned with the form. The fol- 
lowing general rule Avill suffice for beginners ; The accent in the verb is 
as far from the end as the final syllable Avill permit. Those forms, whose 
accentuation deviates from this rule, are indicated by a cross t. 

(6) When the paradigm is thus thoroughly learned, the pupil may first re- 
solve the forms either of (SovXsvai, or any pure verb, into their elements, i. e. 
Personal-ending, Mode-vowel, etc., observing this order, viz. ^ovXemo) is, (1) 
1st Pers., (2) Sing., (3) Ind., (4) Fut., (5) Act., (6) from ^ovXsvb), to advise ; then 
he may arrange the elementaiy parts of the form, and in the following order, 
(1) Verb-stem, (2) Augment or Reduplication, (3) Tense-characteristic, (4) 
Tense-stem, (5) Mode-vowel, (6) Tense-stem with Mode-vowel, (7) Personal- 
ending, (8) Tense-stem with Mode-vowel and Personal-ending. E. g. What 
would be the form in Greek of the phrase, he advised himself, using the Aor. 
of the Pres., ^ovXsv-co, to advise ? Answer : The Verb-stem is ^ovXsv-, Aug- 
ment, £, thus i^ovXtv ; the Tense-characteristic of the first Aor. Mid. is a, thus 
Tense-stem is i-^ovXsv-a ; the Mode-vowel of the first Aor. Ind. Mid. is a, 
thus i-lSovXEV-a-n ; the Personal-endmg of the thu'd Pers. Sing, of an Hist. 
tense of the Mid. is to, thus i-^ovXEV-a-a-xo. 

19 



134 



PARADIGM OF THE REGULAR VERBS IN -o). 



[§115. 









ACT 




Tenses. 


x. — 


THE 


1 1 • . is) 11 1) i u n c t i V e 




Present, 
Tense- 
stem : 

^0V).EV- 


S. 1. 

2. 

3. 
D.2. 

3. 
P. I. 

2. 

3. 


^ouXiv-co,'' I advise, 
fiovXtv-Ei^', thou adviseM, 
^ov/.tv-E(, he, she, it advises, 
^ovXev-etov, ye two advise, 
^ovXkv-E T V , they two advise, 
^ovXev-o^ev, we advise, 
^ovXev-ete,^ you advise, 
^ovXev-o V 1 [v], thei/ advise, 


^nv).tv-oj,* I may advise, 
^ovXEV-ijg, thou mayest ad. 
^ovXEV-ri,*he,she, it may ad. 
^ovXev-TiTOV, ye two may a. 
^ovXEV-ri z v,th'y two m^ya 
^ovXEV-(OfiEv, we may adv. 
(iovXav-r^zE, you may adv. 
3nvXav-(t30i{v),they may ad. 




Imperfect, 
Tense- 
stem : 

i-^ovXav- 


S. 1. 

2. 

3. 
D.2. 

3. 
P. 1. 

2. 

3. 


e-^ovXev-ov,* I was advising, 
E-^ovXtv-Eg, thou wast advisinf^, 
E-'^ovXEV-E{v),he,she, it was advising, 
e-^ovXev-etov, ye two were advising, 
e-^ovXev-ez tj V , they two were adv''g, 
e-^ovXev-ouev, we were advising, 
e-^ovXev-ete, you were advising, 
e-^ovXev-ov,* they ivere advising. 






Perfect L, 
Tense- 
stem : 
^e-^ovXev-x 


S. 1. 

2. 

3! 
D.2. 

3. 
P.l. 

2. 

3. 


^e-^ovXev-'A-u, I have advised, 
^E-^ovXEV-y.-ag, thou hast advised, 
^E-^ovXEV-y.-E{v),^he,she, it has advised, 
^E-^ovXEv-x-arov, ye two have advised, 
^E-^ovXEV-y,-a z ov, they two haveadv. 
^E-^ovXEV-y.-aiAEv, we have advised, 
^E-^ovXEv-y.-aiE, you have advised, 
^E-^ovXav-y.-d 1 {v),theyhave advised. 


^a-^ovXav-y.-(x),Im'yh'vea. 

^E-^ovXav-y.-^g, thoumay- 
est have advised, etc., 
like the Subj. Pres. 




Pluper- 
fect L, 
Tense- 
stem: 
i-lle- 
^ovXev-'a- 


S. 1. 

2. 

3! 
D.2. 

3. 
P.l. 

2. 

3. 


e-^e-^ovXev-x-eiv, I had advised, 
E-^E-^ovXEv-y.-Eig, thou hadst advised, 
i-^a-^ovXEv-y.-Ei,he,she,ithad advised, 
e-^e-^ovXev-'a-eitov, ye two had adv. 
E-^a ^0 vXev-'a-e 17 7; p, they two had ad. 
E-^a-^ovXav-A-EijAEV, we had advised, 
E-^E'^ovXav-y.-aiZE, you had advised, 
e-^e-^ovXev-a-e a av , they had adv. 






PerfU., 
PlpflL, 




7TE-Cfriv-a,^ I appear, 7ZE-(j:i^v-(o, I may appear, 
E-7tE-q)ijv-Eiv,^ I appeared. 




Aonst I., 
Tense- 
stem : 

e-^ovXev-o- 


S. 1. 

2. 

3. 
D.2. 

3. 
P.l. 

2. 

3. 


E-^ovXEv-6-a, I advised, (indefinite) 
E-^ovXEV-6-ag, thou advisedst, 
e-^ovXev-g-e{v), he, she, it advised, 
E-^ovXEV'6-aTOV, ye two advised, 
i-^ovXav-6-a t r^ v , they two advised, 
8-^ovXav-o-afxav, we advised, 
E-^ovXEV-a-azE, you advised, 
E-^ovXEV-a-a v , they advised. 


^ovXEV-g-oj,^ I may advise, 
^ovXEV-o-i^g, thou mayest 

advise, etc., like the 

Subj. Pres. 




Aor. U., 
i-XiTT- 


S. 1. 
2. 


E-Xin-ov, I left, 

E-Xi7T-Eg, etc. declined like Inipf. Ind. 


Xi7Z-03, etc., like the Subj. 
Pres. 




Future, 
^ovXev-6- 


S.l. 


^ovXev-6-co,^ I shall advise, 
like the Indie. Pres. 






1 The inflection of the 


second Perf. in all the Modes and Participles, i 


s like that of the first Perf. 


^^ 



§ 115.] 



PARADIGM OF THK REGULAR VERBS IN -O). 



135 





T Y K . 








MODES. 


P a r t i c i p i a 1 s . | 




Optative 

i. p. Siihj. of Historical ti'nscs. 


Inii)crative. 


Infin. 


Parti ci p. 






^ovXev-mv 
^ovXev-8, advise, ^ovX£v-f ^ovXev-ovool 
^ovXev-etco, let him advise, Eiv, ^ovXeij-ovj 
^ovXtv-ETOV, ye two advise, to \G.^ovXiv-ovjog 
^ovXEV-ETOjr, let them both ad. advise, (^ovXsv-omrjg, 

advising, 
^ovXev-ete,* do ye advise, 
^ovXEV-ETCoaco', usually ^ovXev-ovtcov,* Id them adv. 




^ovXEv-oifu, I might advise, 
(iovXav-otg, tlwu mightest adv. 
^ovXev-o(, he, she, it might adv. 
I^ovXev-oiiov, ye two might ad. 
^ovXev-o it rj v,they two mig. a. 
^ovXev-oiiiev, we might advise, 
^ovXev-o(te, you might advise, 
^ovXev-o I £ V, they might adv. 












[^E-^ovXsv-y.-E,^] etc., like 
the Imp. Pres., yet only 
a few Perfects, and such 
as have the meaning of 
the Pres., form an Imper- 
ative. 


^E-^OV- 

Xev- 
y.-Evai,\ 
to have 
advised, 


^s-^ovXiv-y.-(ag\ 
^B-^oiXev-y.-vla] 
^3s-^ovXsv-y.-6g\ 
G.-y.-6Tog,-y.- 

viag, having 

advised, 




(iE-^ovXEV-y.-oifii,I mH have a. 
^E-^ovXEV-x-oig,thou mightest 

have advised, etc., like the 

Opt. Impf. 










Tte-fftiv-oiiii, I might appear, 


TZS-cpr^v-E, appear, 


7i£-q)?j- 
vi-v(jn,\ 


7is-g)i]v-(6gj 




^ovXEV-6-aifii, Imight advise, 

^ovXEv-o-aig or -Eiag 

§ov£XEv-a-ai*^ or -£i£{v) 

^ovXEv-o-aitov 

^ovXev-6- a I T r^ V 

^ovXsv-G-atfiEv 

^ovXEv-o-aiT8 

§ovXev-(J- a lev or -Slav 


^ovXev-6-ov, advise, 
^ovXEv-o-aroj 
^ovXev-o-utov 
^ovXav-a-drcov 

^ovXEv-a-ars 


§ov- 
Xev- 

o-ai,*\ 
to 

advise, 


^ovXEv-G-dg, 

^ovXsv-G-daa 

^ovX£v-6-uv\ 

Genitive : 
^ovXhV-a-avtog 
^ovXsv-a-aar]g, 
having advised. 




^ovXEv-a-dxwaav, usually -( 


jdvTCJV* 




Xin-oifii, etc., like the Opt. 
Impf. 


Xin-£, etc., like the Imp. 
Pres. 


Xm- 


Xm-(av,ovaa,6v] 
G. ovTOQ,ovarig, 




^ovX£v-G-oifii, I would advise, 
like the Opt. Impf. 




^ovXev- 

0-ElVy 


fiovXEv-G-av, 
etc.hkePr.Pt. 




- rne inriection of the second Plupe 


rf. is like that of the first Pluperf., bo 


th in the In 


d. and Opt. 



136 



PARADIGM OF THE REGULAR VERBS IN -CO. 



(§115. 



MID 





■t L 


THE 


Tenses. 


~ - -7 








'?, ^ 


Indicative. 


Subjunctive 

(iftli.- rrinri[ial tciis.-s. 






S. I. 


^ovXhv-omn , I (UWbtralt, or ^ovXtv- (o fi u t , I may 






2 


^^ovXtv-ij* [am admsed, 


^ovXev-Xj* [deliberate, 




Present, 


\v 


^nvXtv- ez ai 


^-iovXEu- r^T at 






D. 1. 


^-jOL'XtV-0(J8{)'OV 


[iovX8v-(^lJi80ov 








^ovXtv-taOov 


]:iovX8v-7f6()ov 




Tense-stem : 


\\. 


^OvXtV- 8(7 {y OV 


^ovXev- i.axlov 




l^ovXtv- 


p. 1. 


^ovXtv-ofAtd^a 


^0VX8V-C>}fl8 0u 






2. 


pouXtv-toO'E* 


^ovXEv-r^ndh 






a 


^ovXtv- ovT ai 


^OvXtV- (OVTUl 






S. 1. 


e-^ovX£v-6fif]Vy I was delibe- 








2. 


i-^ovXtv- V [rating, 






Imperfed, 


D. 1. 
2. 


i-^ovXev- £7 
i-^ovXev-6{A£&ov 

i-^0vX£V-£6&0V 






Tense-stem : 


3. 


E-^OvXeV- £a d'l]V 






i-^ovXev- 


P. 1. 
2. 
3. 


i-^ovXEv-6fi£&a 
i-^ovXev-Ead-e 
8-^ovXev- ovr 








S. 1. 


§£-^ovX8V-fi a I- , I have detibera- 


^8-^0vX8V-fAtV0g CO, I 






2. 


^8-^ovX8v-o at [ted, 


may Jiave deliberated. 




Perfed, 


3. 
D. 1. 

2. 


^e-^ovXev- r a i 

^E-^0vX8V-flEd-0V 
^8-^0vX8V-6&0V 






Tense-stem : 


3. 


^8-^0vX8V- 6d- OV 






§8-^0vX£V- 


P. 1. 

2. 
3. 


^8-^OvX8V-}A8d-a 

^s-^ovXev-o&e* 
^e-^ovXev- vt at 








S. 1. 


8-^8-^ovX8V- ^iriv , I had delib- 








2. 


8-^8-^ovX8v-ao [erated, 






Pluperfed, 


3. 
D.l. 


8-^8-^0vX8V- t 
8-^8-^0vX8V-\i8^0V 








2. 


8-^8-^0vX8V-O&0V 






Tense-stem : 


3. 


i-^8-^ovX8v- ad-riv 






i-^e-^ovXev- 


P. 1. 
2. 
3. 


8-^8-^0vX8V-ll8d-a 
8-^8-^0vX8V-O&E 
£-^8-^0vX8V- VT 








S. 1. 


8-^ovX8V-6-a [At]v, I delibera- 


^ovXev-o- (o^ai, I may 






2. 


8-§ovX8V-(j-(o [ted, (indefinite) 


^ovXEV-6-ri* [deliberate, 




Aorist L, 


3. 
D.l. 

2. 


i-^ovX8v-a- a TO 

i-^OvX8V-(J-dfA8d-OV 
8-^OvX8V-6-aod'OV 


etc., like Pres. Subj. 




Tense-stem : 


3. 


8-§ovX8v-(j- da&Tjv 






i-^ovXsv-a 


P. 1. 

2. 
3. 


8-^ovX8v-a-aii8&a 

8-§0vX8V-6-a6&8 
8-^Ov7.8V-C- aVTO 






Aorist II., 


S. I. 


8-Xi7T-6(ir^v, I remained, like 


Xi7i-(x)fiai,Imay remain. 






Ind. Imperf. 


like Pres. Subj. 




Future, 


S. 1. 


^ovXEV-6-Ofiai, I shall deliberate, 






like Pres. Indie. 




Put Per/., 


S. 1. 


^£-^ovX£v-c-oiJiai, I shall ddib- 








erate, like Pres. Indie. 







§115. 



PARADIGM OF THE REGULAR VERBS IN -q}. 



137 



DLE. 



MODES. 



Optative 

i. I'. Siilij (.iilic Hist. tt'ns(v 



I 111 pe ra ti vc . 



Purtic i p i als. 



Jrifin. 



Purticip. 



§ovXev-ov, ddiherate, 



^ovXtv- 
ecd-cu, 
to ddihe- 
rate. 



^ovXtv-()ntvo<s' 

^ovXtv-oiitvri 

^ovXtv-Ofitvov. 

deliberating, 



^ovXev-Eads* 

^ovXev-tad^mGaVy usually fiovXi'v-Eod^cov^ 



^ovXsv- oifi7]V, I might 
^ovXev- I [deliberate, 
^ovXsv- otto 
^ovXev-oifi8&ov 
^ovXsv-oifjd^ov 
^ovXev-o i (J d- 7] V 
^ovXev-oi\ued-a 
^ovXev-oiG&s 

^OvXtV-O IV T 



^s-^ovXev- 
oxf-ai,] to 
have delib- 
erated, 



^e-^ovXev-oo, deliberate, 

^E-^0vXEV-Gd-(O 
^E-^OvXEV-od-OV 

[iE-jiovXEv-ad-cov* 

^e-§ovXEv-a'&E* 

^E-^ovXEv-G&aaav, usually ^e-^ovXev-G'&cxjv 



^e^ovXev-^evt] 

^E^OvXeV'IIE- 

vov,\ having 
deliberated, 



^E-^ovXEv-fiEvog Eir^v, I 
might ddiherate, 



^ovXEv-a-a i[A,yv, ImigH 
^ovXev-o-u I [deliberate, 
^ovXev-6- a ir 
povXEv-o-ai{,iEd-ov 
^ovXEv-cj-aiod-ov 
^ovXev-6- a 1 6 -& rj V 
^ovXEV-G-aifiE'&a 

^OvXEV-G-aiGd^E 

^ovXev-6- aivro 



^ovXev- 
(j-aa-d'ai, 
to deliber- 
ate. 



^ovXev-o-cu,* deliberate, 
^ovXEV-a-do'&co 

^ovXEv-(j-a6dov 

^OvXEV-G-dod-QOV* 

^ovXEv-a-aad-E 

^ovXEv-6-dad^maav, usually ^ovXEV-a-dad'ov* 



^ovXsv-a-dfiEvog 

(SovXEva-afjEvTj 

^OvXEV-(T-dfi£VOV 

Jmving delibe 
rated. 



XiTT-oifiTiV, I might remain, 
like Opt. Impf. 



Xi7t-ov,\ -Eod-o), like Pres. 
Imp. 



^ovXEV-G-oi(xriV,Im^ht have 
deliherated,\ike Opt.Impf. 

^E-^ovXEV-(5-oiiir^v,Ishoidd 
cfeZiftercrfe, like Opt. Impf. 



Xi7i-Eod^ai\ 



Xin-o^Evog, -0- 
f^e'v}], -ofXEvov 



^ovXev- 
o-E6&ai 



]e-^ovXev- 

G-EG'&ai 



^ovXEv-a-ofiE- 
vog, -1], -ov _ 

^E-^OvXev-6-6 

(lEvog, -1], -ov. 



138 



VERBS. REMARKS ON THE INFLECTION-ENDINGS. 



[§110. 



PAS 



Tenses. 


= " o 


T 11 E 


Indicative. 


Subjunctive 

(if the Principal lenses. 




Aorist I 
Tense- 
stem: 
i-^ovXtv-\y- 


S. 1. 

2. 

3. 
D.2. 

3. 
P. 1. 

2. 

a 


i-^ovXtv-O-ijV, J was advised, 

i-^-iovXtv-rhT^g 

i-^ovXEv-d'-r] 

t-^ovXt.v-d--rjrov 

l-^ovXtv-d'-ritriv 

i-^ovXev-d'-i^fiev 

i-^iovXev-'d'-i^TS 

i-[iovXsv-d'-7]aav 


jiovXtv-O-o), Imif^^d luive 
[iovXtv-d'-i\g \})een adv. 
(iovXtv-'0--fj 
liovXtv-\y-rJ70v 

^OvXtV-d-- TJZOV 
^OvXtV-d--MlliiV 

^ovX8v-'&-rjre * 
^ovXev-d-- djGl{v) 




Future 1. 


S. 1. 
2. 


^ovXev-d-n-6-o^ai, I shall be advised 
^ovXEV-d-7]-6-ri, etc., like the Ind. 
Pres. Mid. 






Aorist IL 


S. 1. 

2. 


i-tQi^-7]V, I was rubbed, 
i-TQt^-7]g, etc., like the fii'st Aor. 
Ind. Pass. 


ZQi'^-w, Im^yhaveVn r^Vd, 
TQi^-fig, etc., like the 
first Aor. Subj. Pass. 




Put Perf. 


S. 1. 

2. 


TQi^-i^-a-o^ai, I shall be rubbed, 
rqi^-ij-G-xi, etc., like the fii'st Fut. 
Ind. Pass. 






Verbal Adjectives : ^ovXev-zog, -rj, -oV, advised, 



§116. Remarks on the Infle ction-endings . (96—99.) 

1. The personal-endings of verbs in -w are apocopated forms, as may 
be shown fi'om the older conjugation in -^ii, and in part from the dialects ; 
thus, -|Ui in the first Pers. Sing, fiii'st Aor. Ind. and -tl in the third Pers. 
have disappeared, e. g. (iovlEV-a instead of ^ovXsv-o~ixl or ^ovXsv-a-fii, 
^ovXev-u instead of ^ovXsv-s-tl ; in the first Pers. Sing, fii'st Aor. Ind. Act., 
V has disappeared, e. g. s^ovXevct a instead of i^ovXsvaav ; in the second Pers. 
Sing. Imper. Act., except the fii'st Aor., -d^i has disappeared, e. g. ftovXsv-s 
instead of ^ovXsv-e-&l. 

2. The second Pers. Sing. Act. has the ending -a^a in the Common 
language in the following forms only : 

ola-d- a, nosti, from the Perf olda ; i] d elct S^ a and ^ di]cr S^ a, Plpf of 
oida ; EcpTjtrd- a, Impf fi'om cprjfil, to say ; t] <!■&«, Impf fi-om eI^I, 
to be ; jjELud^ a, Impf from £i^t, to go. 

3. There is no special form for the first Pers. Dual Act., or for the first 
and second Aor. Pass. ; the fii'st Pers. PI. is used for this purpose. Comp. 
§ 106, Rem. 

4. The original form of the fii'st Pers. PI. Act. is - /u £ $ (not -^uav). Comp. 
the Dialects, § 220, and the Latin ending -mus, e. g. '/gacp-o-fZEg, scrib-i-miw. 



§116.] VERHS. REMARKS ON THE INFLECTION-ENDINGS. 139 



s n\E 



MODES. 


Participials. | 




1 Optative t^ 

1 i. 0. .==uhi. of th. Mistorirai to,,.... Imperative. 


Infin. 


Participle. 




^ovXev-O-eu,}', I might be 
^ovXEv-O-Eijig [advised, 
^ovXev-{}-eiij 
^ovXev-O'-euitov 
^ovXev-x^- e I y rtjv 
(iovXEV-&-Eif;fiEV and -EifiEv 
§ovXev-x)--eujte and -eite 
^ovXev-&- elev 


§ovXev-{>-t]T(., he thou ad- 
^ovXEv-xf-fjTO) [vised, 

^OvX£V-d^-7JTOV 
^OvXEV-d^-tjtOJV 

^OvXEV-d--7jT£ * 

^ovXEv-d--rir(aaav 


^ovXev- 
x^-yvai, 
to be ad- 
vised. 


^ovXEV-d^-Eig] 
^ovXEv-O-Eiaaf 
^ovXev-O-ev t 

Genitive : 
^ovXev-d'-t'vzog 
^ovXEv-d^-Eiarjg, 

being advised. 




fio vXev- &ii-(y- oi^i 7iv, I should 
he advised, etc., like the 
Impf. Opt. Mid. 




^ovXev- 

^y-CJE- 

a&ai 


^ovXEv-'&rj-G-o- 

flEPOg, -7], -ov 




TQi^-Eiyv, I m.ight be rubbed, 
tQi^-Eiyg, etc., like the first 
Aor. Opt. Pass. 


rQip7]^i, -?/zaj, etc., like 
the first Aor. Imp. Pass. 


rivai 


rqij^-Eig,] etc., 
like first Aor. 
Part. Pass. 




iQi^-ij-a-oifiyv, I should he 
rubbed, etc., like the first 
Flit. Opt. Pass. 




6E6d^ai 


TQi^-7i-6-6flEVOg 
-7j, -OV 


^ovXEv-rtog, -tecc, -teov, to he advised. j 



5. The original form of the thkd Pers. PI. Act. of the Principal tenses is 
-vTi; when t was changed into a, v was dropped, e. g. ^ovXEvovai = 
^ovXsiovai. On the irregular lengthening of the vowel preceding the v, 
see § 20, Rem. 2. 

6. In the first Pers. Sing. Plup. Act., Attic writers use, together with the 
form in -slv, a form m -rj, which arises fi'om the Ionic ending of the Plup. 
-ea, e. g. e^tj3ovXsvy.-7] instead of -x-ftv. The mode- vowel sl in the thkd 
Pers. Pl.^ is commonly shortened into s, e. g. i^s^ovXsv-y.-s-aav instead of 
i^s^ovlsv-y.-si-aav. 

7. The fii-st Pers. Sing. Opt. Act. has the ending -fxt m verbs m -co, e. g. 
7iaiSsv-oi-^L, naidua-ai-fii; but the ending -7]v in the fii'st and second 
Aor. Pass., accordmg to the analogy of verbs in -^t. This r] remams 
through aU the Persons and Numbers, though it may be dropped in the 
Dual and PI., and then, sirjfi8v = stfxsv, sItjie = hie, EiriGav = iLev, e. g. 
TtaidEV&ElrjfAEV and naidEV&Elfisv, fivria^El^Ts and -^eUts, (pavElr](Tav, X. H. 6. 
5, 25. nQoxQi^slriaav, Ibid. 34. TjsfKp&Elrjtrav, Th. 1, 38. and ^^eIev {-e2ev). 

8. The Optative endings -rjv, -j]g, -tj, etc., and the third Pers. PI. -ev 
(rarer -rjaav) take the fonn in -w, in the following cases, which is called 
the Attic Optative : 



140 VERBS.— REMARKS ON THE INFLECTION-ENDINGS. [§ 116. 

(a) Most commonly in the Imperf. of contract verbs, e. g. Tifiojrjv, (piXoirjV, 
fiiffd^olTjv ; 

(b) In all Futures in -w, e. g. (pavoitjv, Soph. Aj. 313. igoii], Xen. Cy. 3. 
1, 14, from the Fut. (jpayw, igoj ; 

(c) Somewhat often in the second Plup., e. g. iy.nsq>svyoiT}v, S. O. R. 840. 
nQodr)Xv&olT]g, X. Cy. 2. 4, 17. nsnoi&oir], Ar. Acharn. 940 ; 

(cl) In the second Aor. axolrjv uniformly [ta/ov from l/w) ; still not gene- 
rally in compounds, e. g. naQatrxoifxi. 

9. The ibrms of the first Aor. Opt. Act. in - s tag, - e i 8{v), ~s lav, in- 
stead of -txtg, -at, -atv, have passed from the ^Eolic Opt. in - £ ^ a, - « t a ?, 
etc., into common use in all the dialects, and are employed by the Attic 
writers more frequently than the regular forms, e. g. ^ovXbva- eiag, -eie (v), 
-E lav. 

Remark. The second Pers. Dual Act. of the Historical tenses often ends, 
among the Attic writers, in - vy v instead of -ov, e. g. eIttettjv, PI. Symp. 
189, c. ijtEd7}^ur]adTijv, Euthyd. 273, e. riajrjv, 294, e. ikE/hriv, L. 705, d. 
E}ioiv()ivr]aaTr]v, lb. 753, a. On the Dialects, see § 220, 9. 

10. The JMiddle endings -a a i and -a o, W'hen immediately preceded 
by a mode-vowel, drop cr, § 25, 1, and then coalesce with the mode-vowel, 
except in the Opt., e. g. 

^ovXsv-s-aaL ^ovXev-s-ai = ^ovXev-t] 

^ovXsv-Tj-cai ^ovXsv-rj-aL = povXsv-i] 

^ovXsv-oi-ao ^ovXsv-oi-o 

i(iovXsv-E-ao £i3ovXev-8-o = i^ovXei-ov 

e^ovXsva-a-(TO i^ovXeva-a-o = e/jovXeva-oi. 

11. In the second Pers. Sing. Pres. and Fut. Mid. and Pass., the Attic 
WTiters use a subordinate ending in -ei, together with the endmg -?;, e. g. 
^ovXsh-j] and -sl, ^oiXsia-i] and -ei, ^s^ovXeva-rj and -ei, ^ovXEv&i]ff-j] and 
-El, tql3{](tij and -el, noifi and -ft, oXfi and -u. This forai in -ft passed from 
the Attic conversational language, into the written language ; hence it is the 
regular form in the Comedies of Aristophanes, but is avoided by the trage- 
dians. Thucydides and Xenophon use it ; other wTiters, as Plato and the 
orators, employ both forms, yet three verbs always take the form -el, namely, 

(3ovXoi^(xi ^ovXei (but Subj. (SovXi]) 

ol'ofiai oI'el (but Subj. ol/]) 

oipo^aL Fut. oipEi. 

12. Together with the endings of the third Pers. PI. Imperative Act. and 
Pass. -h(0(Tav, -aTcoaav, -(i&aaav, the abbreviated forms -6vt car, - a t « y, 
-(T&aVj are used ; and since they are employed very fi-equently by Attic 
writers, they are called Attic forms. These abbre^dated Imperatives of the 
Active Voice ai'e like the Gen. PI. of the Participle of each tense respect- 



§ 116.] VERBS. REMARKS ON THE INFLECTION-ENDINGS. 141 

ively, except the Perfect ; and the Middle form -(rduv is like the third 
Pers. Dual, e. g. 

Pres. Act. ^ovXfvirwaav and ^ovXsvovxwv 

Perf. " 71 f TT 1 1) ST loaav " nsTtoid^ovTcav {Gen. Vart. nenoid^oTbyv) 

Aor. I. " ^ovXivadrcoaav " ftovksvauKov 

Pres. Mid. ^ovlevia&waav " ^ovXiviad^cav 

Aor. " aysipuad^biaav " cx£ipaa&(ov. 

The Aor. Pass, ending ~iv t wv or - 7^ t to v, abridged from -ijTOjaav, is 
found in Pi. Legg. 856, d. nsficp^ivKov, and Ibid. 737, e. diavsiirj&t'iKov (ac- 
cording to several Codd.). 

13. Besides the simple form of the Subj. Perf. and the Opt. Pliip. Act., 
a periphrasis, formed by the Perf Part, and Subj. or Opt. of sivai, to be, m, 
iirir, is very frequently used, e. g. nsTitti8i.vy.03g w, educaverim, Tisjiaidsvy.ojg 
(i't]v, edumvissem. Yet this form seems to denote a circumstance or condition, 
more than a simple completed action ; comp. PI. Hipp. M. 302, a. si x sy.fi ?]- 
x£u$ Tt, 7/ rsTQMixsvog, i] nsTilrjyfiSvog, 7] cxl]i bziovv n sn ovO^ o) g sy.<tTSQog 
fjfiojv sl'rj, ov y.al afiCpoTsgoi av tovto Ttsnovd^OLfisv; examples of the 
simple forms are, tt7isdi](prj, PI. Rp. 614, a. slh'icpcjatv, Polit. 269, c. sfiTtsn- 
ruKOi, X. All. 5. 7, 26. yrxTuXsXoiTioisv, H. 3. 2, 8. uTioxexagi^yoi, 5, 23. -£71?;- 
Qsxr}y.0L, 5. 2, 3. nsnoiiyAOL, Th. 8, 108. igfts^Xi]y.oisv, 2, 48. — The Imp. Perf. 
is very seldom found, e. g. yi/ojvs, Em\ Or. 1220. 

14. The Perf and Plup. Mid. or Pass, append the personal-endings to 
the tense-stem without a mode-vowel, and hence they cannot form the Subj. 
and Opt. (with few exceptions which will be further treated below), but 
must also be expressed periphrastically by means of the Participle and 
etvai, e. g. nsTcaidsvfiivog w, sl'rjv, educatus sim, essem. 

15. The third Pers. Ind. Perf and Plup. Mid. or Pass, of pure verbs ends 
\n - VT a I, -VTO, e. g. ^s^ovXsvvxai, i^s^ovXsvvTo ; but in mute and liquid 
verbs, this formation is not possible. Hence the Attic writers usually ex- 
press this person periphrastically, by means of the Perf Part, and slal[v), 
sunt, ridttv, erant ; the older and middle Attic wi'iters, however, sometimes 
use the Ionic form -uTai, -ajo, instead of -viai, -vxo ; the a of these endings 
is aspirated before the Kappa and Pi-mutes, but not before the Tau-mutes ; 
thus, 

TQi^-a, to rub, Perf. Ts-TQifi-ficti 3 P. xsTqlcpttiai for tstqi^vtui Pip. hsTQicpazo 
nXiy.-(a, to twine, ni-nXsy-fiaL " ntnXsxoiTui " nsjiXsxvTut snsnXsxoixo 
xdxx-ca, to arrange, xs-xay-fiai " TfTa/arat " xixayvxai exsxaxaxo 

XmqIi^-oj, to separate, xs-x(OQi(T-fx(XL^^ y.s/ojQlduxai^^ icsxaigtdvxat ixs/wQldaxo 
q)&sig-a), to destroy, £-(p&aQ-fittL " icpS^dgaxaL " scpd^agvxav icf&aguxo. 

16. The two Aorists Pass, follow the analogy of verbs in -fii, and hence 
they cannot be further treated here. 

20 



142 VERBS. ATTIC FUTURE. ACCENTUATION. [§§ 117, 118. 

§117. Remarks on the Form at ion of the Attic 

Future. (i '><'•) 

1. Wlicn tlio sliort vowels «, f, i, in the Fiit. Act. and Mid. of verbs in -(7o>, 
"(jo^iui, from stems of two or more syllables, precede tr, certain verbs, instead 
of the regular form, have another, which, after dropping a, takes the circurn- 
flexed ending -w, -ovf^ui, and because it was frequently used by the Attic 
writers, it is called the Attic Future, e. g. iXiioj (usually eKuvpo)), to drive, 
ilu~(T-b), Fut. Att. fAw, -(xg, -«, -uTov, -a;,u«y, -uje, -6j(n{v)', rdsb), to finish, 
ThXi-a-b}, Fut. Ati. Tild, -stg, -si, -siiov, -ov^sp, -uje, -ovai{v]; ztlia-oixui, 
[tsXio^ai), TiXov^ai, -ft, -iijai, etc. ; yofil^oj, to carry, Fut. xofuffw, Fut. Att. 

aOHloJ, -L(tg, -Ul, -LELIOV, -lOV^lV, -IHI8, ~L0l'(n{v)', ■HO^XLOV^UL, -lit, -lELTttl, 

-loi'i-is&ov, etc. 

2. This form of the Fut. is found only in the Ind., Inf. and Part., never in 
the Opt, thus, TfAw, TtXEtv,i£X(ap ; but rsXiaoi[j,L. The verbs which have this 
form are the following : [a] il aot) [slavva), to drive, teXso), to finish, v. a- 
Xia, to call, and, though seldom, uXsai, to giind; — (b) all polysyllables in 
- / ^ 0) ; — (c) a few verbs in - a ^ co, very generally ^i(3(x'C(a ; — (d) of verbs 
in -fiL, all in -dvvvfiL and vcfKpiEvvvf^i, to clothe [afxcpLOj, -lelg, etc.). 
Exceptions to this Fut. are found also in the Attic dialect, e. g. iXdato, X. 
Cy. 1. 4, 20. idsaovaiv, 8. 6, 3. y.aXiaEig, 2. 3, 22. vo^iaovai, 3. 1, 27. (ac- 
cording to the best Codd.) iprjcpiffEoSs, Isae. de Cleonym. hered. § 51. 

§ 118. Accentuation of the Verb. (104, 105.) 

1. Primaiy law. The accent is di'awn back from the end of the word 
towards the beginning, as far as the nature of the Bnal syllable permits, e. g. 
^ovXevs, ^ovXEvofiai, navE, Tvms, ^ovXev(jop, nuvaop, Tiipov, but ^ovXEvsig, 
§ovXeveiv. 

2. This law holds good in compomid words, yet with this limitation, that 
the accent cannot go back beyond the syllable of the preceding word, 
which, before the composition, had the accent, nor beyond the first two 
compounded words, neither beyond an existing augment, e. g. 

(fEQE TlQOgCfEQE XeItTE UTIoXeLJIc d(ay.EV Evdoi/UEV 

cpsvys ExcpEvys oida avpoida ij^uL y.(x&i]jxai ; 

but ngogElxov like el/ov, 7iaQEa%ov like Ed^op, e^tj/op like riyop, nQogi]y.ov like 
7\nov, ujiEigyov like Eigyop (not TiQogEi/ov, nagEo/op, etc.), but Imp. anEigyt. 

Exceptions to the Primary Law. 

3. The accent is on the idtimate in the following forms : 

(a) In the Inf second Aor. Act. as circumflex, and in the Masc. and Neut. 
Sing. Part, of the same tense as acute, e.g. XiTtElv, Xmc^v, -op, and in these- 



§ 118.] VERBS. ACCENTUATION. 143 

coiul Pers. Siii^'. Imp. second Aor. Act. of the five verbs, htis, iXOi, tvQiy 
XaiSs and Ids (but in composition, ocTCfiTif, unoXa^e, txjxsX&s, dgids. 

(b) Also in the Imi). second Aor. Mid. as circumflex, e. g. A«/5oD, i9oi; 
from Ti&t]i.ti. 

Remark 1. In compounds, the Imp. (not Participials) of the second Aor. 
Act. (h-aws back the accent in all verbs according to the primary law, e. g. 
l'x/5«Af, e^sX&i-, exdog, exdors, anodog, ujiodoTs, ^siudog, fxeiadoTS (but not 
linodog, fisTudog, see No. 2), but £y.[3aXetv, iy.^alwv, i/.XinHV, i'^sX^wv, etc. 
But in the Imp. Sing, second Aor. IMid. of verbs in -w, the circumflex re- 
mains on the ultimate in compounds also, e. g. ix^ceXov, ucpiy.ov, txXmoVf 
imXadov, oi(f>sXov, spsvsyxoi", so in verbs in -fxi, when the verb is com- 
pounded with a monosyllabic preposition, e. g. ngodov, sv&ov, oicpov', yet 
the accent is drawn back, when the verb is compounded with a dissyllabic 
preposition, e. g. anodov, y.aid&ov, uno&ov, but in the Dual and PI. of the 
second Aor. Mid., the accent is in all cases drawn back, e. g. iy.^aXscr&E, 

(c) The acute stands on the ultimate in all participles in -g (Gen. -to?), 
consequently in all active Participles of verbs in -fii, as well as in those of the 
first and second Perf. Act. and first and second Aor. Pass, of all verbs, e. g* 
^s^ovXsvxug, Gen. -orog, nscprjvcog, Gen. -oiog, ^ovXsv&Eig, Gen. -ivzog, Tvnslg, 
Gen. -iviog, laTug, Gen. -di'jog, Tid-slg, Gen. -svTog, didotg, Gen. -ovTog, dsiy.vvg, 
Gen. -vvTog, diaaidg, iy.&iig, ngodovg, Gen. diaaidvTog, iy.&svTog, nqodovxog. 

Rem. 2. The fii'st Aor. Act. Part., which is always paroxytone, is an ex- 
ception, e. g. naidevcFug, Gen. naidsva-uvTog. 

(d) In the Sing, of the first and second Aor. Subj. Pass, as circumflex, 
e. g. ^ovXsv&b), jQt^oJ. 

4. The accent is on the penult in the following forms : 

(a) In the Inf. of Perf. Mid. or Pass., of fii'st Aor. Act. and second Aor. 
Mid. ; also in all infinitives in -vul, hence in all active infinitives according 
to the formation in -/it, as well as in the Inf of first and second Aor. Pass, and 
of the Perf. Act. of all verbs, e. g. TSTvcpd^av, ^s^ovXevad-ai, TtJifxTlff&ai, ns- 
q)LXi](T&aL, iisfXLd&cxJa&aL', — cpvXd^ai, ^ovXeiKTUi, Ti^ijaai, q)iXrjaaL, ^Kj&waaL^ 
— Xtnia&HL, ix&iad^ai, diadoa&ac ; — laTavai, TiS^ivai, didovai, dsiy.vvvai, ottJ- 
vai, iy.(TTrjVttL, S^elvai, ixd^slvai, dovvai, [j,ETadovvaL ; — (iovXBV'&i]vaL,TQi§riv(XL\ 
— ^i^ovXevxivac, XiXoLnivai. 

(b) In all Optatives in - o t and -at, see § 29, Rem. 4. 

Rem. 3. The three corresponding forms of the Inf fiii'st Aor. Act., Imp. 
first Aor. Mid. and the third Pers. Sing. Opt. first Aor. Act., when they con- 
sist of three or more syllables, whose penult is long by natm-e, are distin- 
guished from one another by the accent, in the following manner : 

Inf. fii'st Aor. Act. ^ovXEvaai, Imp. first Aor. Mid. ^ovXsvaac, 
noiijaai noiTjaaL 

Opt first Aor. Act. (iovXtvaai^ 



144 VERBS. — Tin: syllabic augment. [§§ 119, 120. 

But when the penult is short by nature or long only by position, the Inf. 
first Aor. Act. corresponds with tlie third Pcrs. Sing. Opt., first Aor. Act, 
e. g. (pvXu^ui ; but Imp. first Aor. Mid. (pvXa^aL. 

(c) Li the Part. Pcrf. Mid. or Pass., e. g. ^e^ovXevfiirog, -fisvi], -fxivov, le- 
Ti^rjfisvog, 7is(pdr}ixEvog. 

§ 119. A more par tic ular vieiu of the Augment and 
Red up lie at ion. (to.) 

1. After the general view of the Augment and Reduplication 
in § 108, 3, it is necessary to treat them more particularly. 

2. As has been already seen, all the historical tenses, viz. the 
Impf., Plup. and Aor. take the augment, but retain it only in the 
Ind. There are two augments, the syllabic and temporal. 

§ 120. (a) Syllabic Augment. (76.) 

1. The syllabic augment belongs to those verbs whose stem 
begins with a consonant, and consists in prefixing «* to the 
stem, in the Impf. and Aorists, but to the reduplication in the 
Plup. In this way, the verb is increased by one syllable, e. g. 
^ovXevm^ Impf. i-^ovXsvov, Aor. i-^ovlevoa, Plup. i-^s-^ovlevxsiv. 

2. If the stem begins with q, this letter is doubled when the 
augment is prefixed, § 23, 3, e. g. qltttco, to throiv, Impf. '^QQinrov, 
Aor. SQQi-ipa. 

Remark 1. The three verbs ^ovlo^ai, to will, dvv afiai, to be able, 
and fxsXXo) , to be about to do, to intend, take among the Attic writers tj, m- 
stead of £, for the augment ; still this is foimd more with the later Attic 
wi'iters, than with the earlier, e. g. i^ovXijd^tjv and i]3ovli]d^riv ; idvvcifxrjv and 
rjdvvaiJ.rjv, sdvvri&rjv and Tjdvprj&rjv (but always idvvaadrjv); S{.ieXXov and 
TjfisXXov (the Aorist is very seldom T}iAsXlr,cru), comp. X. H. 7. 4, 16. 26. 

Rem. 2. Among the Attic writers the augment £ is often omitted in the 
Plup. in compounds, for example, when the preposition ends with a vowel ; 
in simples, when a vowel which is not to be elided, precedes, e. g. ava- 
§E^i]>tu X. An. 5, 2, 15. xaTudsdQufiijxecrav X. H. 5. 3, 1. y.aTuXsXsinio X. 

* According to analogy, we may suppose that s is prefixed to all verbs 
in the augmented tenses, whether the verbs begin with a vowel or conso- 
nant. If the verb begins with a consonant, « appears as an additional syl- 
lable, e. g. s-ngajTov, but if with a vowel, c is assimilated with that vowel 
and lengthens it, if it is not already long, e. g. ayo), Impf sayov == tj/ov ; 
i&iXoj, Impf. eix^eXov = ^&eXov ; oaiXXco, Impf. ioxeXXov = wkeXXov. If the 
word begins with a long vowel, it absorbs s, e. g. rjXu<jy.(a, Impf iijXaaxov 
= TiXaaxov ; m&I'Coj, Impf. ia&i^ov = (a&i^ov. When the verb begins with 
8, the augment s is sometimes contracted with this into el, e. g. elyov, instead 
of Tjxov. — Tr. 



§§121,122.] 



VERBS. TEMPORAL AUGMENT. 



145 



£ 


u 


V^ 


u 


ikni^ca 


ii 


t 


u 


t, 


u 


IXSTiVM 


, a 





u 


w, 


u 


0^l}.E(x) 




V 


a 


^, 


ii 


'"v^Qt'CoJ 




Ui 


i( 


?/' 


u 


aLQSO) 




av 


it 


tjv, 


ii 


avlib) 




01 


a 


V> 


u 


oly.xiCoi 





i]Xniy.a 


(( 


f]}.niy.iLV 


IXS-TEVXa 


u 


lY.SlSVy.SLV 


wfilXrjxa 


u 


b\udljXElV 


"'vpQLKa 


u 


'viSqIxsiv 


r^Qtjxa 


u 


rjQrjxsiv 


rjiXfj^a 


u 


TjvXrjXEiv 


o)XTixa 


u 


OXTtXSlV. 



Cy. 4. 1, 9. yatansjiTbiyei TIi. 4, 90. al avvv^rixni yfysvrjvio X. Cy. 3. 2, 24. 
(according; to the best Codd.); but in the Jinpf. and Aorists, the syHubic 
uu«rrnent is omitted only in poetry, and very seldom even here ; the ImyA'. 
X (^V^ y ^vhich together with e x QV^ is used in prose, is an exception. 

§ 121. (b) Temporal Augment. (78.) 

The temporal augment belongs to verbs, whose stem begins 

with a vowel, and consists in lengthening the first stem-vowel ; 

thus the quantity of the word is increased, e. g. 

a becomes t], e. g. "tx/w Impf. i]yov Perf. ?)/« Plup. i^x^iv 

i']Xni^ov 
"lyhavov 
Mjxlkovv 

"v^QL^OV 

fiQOVV 

7jvk0VV 

olyit^ov 

Remark. Verbs which begin with t], t~, v, w, ov and el, do not admit the 
augment, e. g. rjTTaofiUL, to be overcome, Impf. rjirb'ifirjv, Perf. ^']nrjfiui, Plup. 
jjn)ii.irjv ; ^ itt 6 oj , to pi'ess, Aor. ""rTrwaoc ; "v n v 6 oi, to sleep, Aor. "vnvbjaa ; 
b) (f) eXs w , to benefit, JmY^f. wcpiXovv ; ot'Ta^co, to wound, Impf. oviu^ov ', 
Ei'xb), to yield, Impf. elhov, Aor. eI^u ; eIxvi'^w, to liken, is an exception, which 
among the x\ttic writers, tliough seldom, is augmented, e. g. ti'yn^ov, seldom 
fixa'Qov ; fi'yaaa, seldom ^yuaa ; El'y.aafiai, seldom r\y.a(T^ai. Also those verbs 
whose stem begins with su, are usually without an augment, e. g. Ei'xofxai, 
to supplicate, Evx6fir]v, more rarely r]vx6/uir]v, but Perf. rjv/fivci, not ev/^ul ; 
BVQtiTXb), to find, in good prose, always omits the augment. 

§ 122. Rem a r k s . (79.) 

1. Verbs beginning with a followed by a vowel, have « instead of rj ; but 
those beginning with «, ctv and 01 followed by a vowel, do not admit the 
augment, e. g.'« t w , to perceive (poetic), Impf. "« toy ; "a i] d l^o (xa i , to have 
an unpleasant sensation, Impf '(xi]di^6fi7]v ; av a iv ca , to dry, Impf. avaivov ; 
oi ax 1^(0, to steer, Impf oiotxL^ov; also avaXiay.oj, to destroy, although no 
vowel follows a, has avaXcoira, avaXojxa as well as dvrjXojatx, uvrjXoixa. But 
ol'o(^rxi, to believe, and the poetic aEldoj (prose udoi), to sing, and ainaoj (Att. 
aVo-w), to rush, take the augment, e. g. MOfirjv, ^JEidov (prose rjdov), TJ'i^a (Att. 

2. Some verbs, also, beginnhig with ol and followed by a consonant, do 
not take the augment, e. g. oIxovqe oj, to guard the house, Aor. olyovgrjcru ; 
oiv 6 (o, to intoxicate, Perf. Mid. or Pass, olvwfisvog and Mvmixivoq ; olaz qeo) , 
to make furious, Aor. ol'aTQtjaa. 

3. The twelve following verbs, beginning with s, have el instead of tj for 
the augment, viz. £« to , to permit, Imipf. eI'ojv, Aor. El'aaa', i^i^co, to ac- 
custom, (to which belongs also Ei'a&u, to be a£customed, from the Epic ex^w) ; 
Eia a , poetic Aor. (stem '£/!), to place, ElaDiiArjv in prose, I established, found- 
ed; kXlaa oi , to wind ; eXxco^ to draw ; Aor. EiXxvaa (stem "EylKT) ; eIXov^ 



146 VERHS. UKDUPLICATION. [§ 123. 

to takej Aor. (stem ii'yf ) of alQio) ; en o ^ a i, to follow ; i {iy a'Qo ytn l, to 
ivork ; (QTi (0, 6Q7iv'C(o, to creep, to go ; ecn itx u), to entertain ; t/ o) , to 
have ; on the Ei)ic eifiat, see § 230. 

4. Tlie six Ibllowing verbs take the sylla])ic, instead of the temporal, 
auginent. 

u yv V (X L, to break, Aor. m^a, etc. 

aX iff no fi a I, (•a|)ior, Perf. hukoixa and ijXojyta. 

avdavo), to please, (Ion. and poet.), Jmpf. tavdavov, Perf. t«5a, Aor. 

i'udov. 
ov Q SCO , niingere, ioiQovv, etc. 
0) & s(x) , to push, i(x}x}ovv, etc. sometimes without the augment, e. g. 8ib)- 

■Oqvvto Th. 2, 84. tlwail^Tjcrwv X. H. 4. 3, 12. 
(ov so fxa i, to huTj, Impf. imvovy.r^v {b)vovi.irjv Lys. Purg. Sacril. 108. §4. 

e^MvovvTO Aeschin. c. Ctcs. c. 33. uvtoiveHio Andoc. p. 122.), Aor. 

£(avrjff(xu'r]v (see however § 192.), Perf. ib)vr^fjUL. 

5. The verb 8 o ^ t « ^w , to celebrate a feast, takes the augment in the se- 
cond syllable, Impf. ecj^ra^ov. The same is true of the following forms of 
the Plup. : 

EIKSl, second Perf soiy.oc, I am like, Plup. iajxELV . 
tlno(.iai, to hope, second Perf. solna, I hope, Plup. i o^ Ires lv . 
EFFJl, to do, second Perf. eogya, Plup. i mq y s iv . 

6. The three following verbs take the temporal and syllabic augment at 
the same time : 

o Q a b) , to see, Impf. ecjqojv, Perf. ewoay.a, eaigajxai. 

avoly w, to open, Impf. avhr/ov, Aor. aviojlu (Inf. uvollai), etc. 

ullax ^a I , to be taken, Aor. saXcjv, (Inf. aXoifai, a) and i]Xa)V. 

§ 123. Reduplication. (si, 82.) 

1. The reduplication is the repeating the first consonant of 
the stem with s. This denotes a completed action, and hence is 
prefixed to the Perf.,* e. g. le-Xv/.a, to the Fut. Perf., e. g. y.e-y.oa- 
pjooiiai, I shcdl be adorned, from y.oaiilm, and to the Plup., which 
as a historical tense, takes also the augment £ before the redu- 
plication, e. g. i-^E-^ovXevxEiv. This remains in all the modes, 
as well as in the Inf. and Part. 

* Strictly, we may say that the first letter of all verbs is repeated in the 
Perf, whether the verb begins with a vowxl or a consonant. If the verb 
begins with a vowel, the vowel is doubled and the two coalesce, if the mi- 
tial vowel is short, and thus form a long vowel ; but if the initial vowel 
is long, it absorbs the other, e. g. 

ciya, Perf. properly uaxa = t'jya 

iysiQO), " " isysQy.(x = ijysQxa 

oiy.SM, " " ooi/.i]y.(x = ojxtjxci. 

Sometimes when the verb begins with f, the double s, instead of coalescing 

into -rj, is contracted into -si, e. g. iixw, Perf d'axa, instead of 7/axa. — Tr. 



§123.] 



VERBS. REDUPLICATION. 



147 



2. Those verbs only admit the reduplication, whose stem be- 
gins with a single consonant or with a mute and li(|uid ; verbs 
beginning with q, yv, yl, ^ly* except §t^Xa(pa, ^t'^Xafifiai from 
^XciTTTcOy to injure, §tfXa6(piif^)jxa from ^Xaacprj^tco, to blaspheme, §e- 
^XdaTt]xa and s^XdattjKa from ^Xaardvco, to sprout, are exceptions, 
since they take only the simple augment, e. g. 



Xva, to loose, 
S^vco, to sacrifice, 
q)vi8io), to plant, 
XOQtvo), to dance, 
yQOKfco, to lorite, 
xXivoj, to bend doum, 
Tiglvw, to judge, 
nvi(o, to breathe, 
S^Xub), to bruise, 
^LTiJb), to throw, 
yvcaQL^o), to make known, 
^XaxEVca, to be slothful, 
ylicpoj, to carve. 



Perf. Xi-Xvv.a 

" T£-^l'X« (§ 21, 2.) 
" 7T£-9tTfl'X«(§21,2.) 

" y.t-xoQivyta (§ 21, 2.) 

" v.i-yiXiy.a 

" y.i-y.Qiy.Or 

" ni-nvevxtt 

" TB-'&Xay.a § 21, 2.) 

BQQKpa 

i-yvMQixa 
i-^Xccy.evy.a 



Plup. i-Xs-Xixsiv 

" i-i£-&vy.eiv 

" i-ne-cpviEVxsiv 

" S-yS-XOQSL'XSlV 

" i-ys-ygdcpstv 

" e-y.s-yXiy.Eiv 

" i-y.s-ygly.Eiv 

" e-Tis-nvsixELV 

" E-TE-S^XdxElV 

" igolcpELV 

" E-yvoo(jly.Eiv 

" £-^XaXEVXElV 

" i-yXvcpEiv. 



" e-yXv(pa 

3. The reduplication is not used (the cases mentioned above 
with Q, yv, §X, yX, excepted), when the stem of the verb begins 
with a double consonant or two single consonants, which are 
not a mute and liquid, e. g. 

CrjXocj, to emidate, Perf. i-^ijXcaxa 

^svoca, to entertain, " s-^svcaxa 

ipdXXco, to sing, " s-ipaXxa 

anEiQM, to sow, " E-anaQxa 

xtl'Cw, to build, " %-y.Tiy.a 

mvaaa, to fold, " E-mi'xa 

Remark 1. The two verbs }ii (ivrjcrxco, stem MNA, to remind, and 
y.rd (xa I, to acquire, although their stem begins with two consonants, 
which are not a mute and a liquid, still take the reduphcation, ^jE-fivrjinai, 
xi-xTT]fxaL, s-i^E-fxvTifxrjv, E-y.E-y.T7}}uriV. The regular form £yTi]fiai, is Ionic, but 
it is found also in Aesch. Prom. 792, and sometimes also in Plato, likewise 
in Th. m. 62. ngogsxTrifiEva (as it is according to the Codd.). Perfects 
formed by Metathesis or Syncope, are seeming exceptions, e. g. didfxTjxa 
nsmujxau etc., §§ 16, 8, and 22. 

4. Five verbs beginning with a liquid do not repeat this let- 



Plup. 


. E-'Qi]Xb)yELv 


u 


E-^EV(OXELV 


ii 


i-ipdXy.av 




E-aTiagxELV 




t-y.Tly.ELV 


u 


e-nzv/Eiv. 



ter, but take ei for the augment : 



Xanl3av(x), to take, 
XayxdvbJ, to obtain. 



Perf EllvjCpa 
" E\Xrixtt 



Plup. ElXl]cpElV 

" eIXtixeiv 



* Words beginning with these letters are excepted on account of tlie 
difficulty of repeating them. — Tr. 



148 VERBS. ATTIC REDUPLICATION. [§ 124. 

Xiyo), (TvXXiyio^ to colled, Pcrf. avvsiXoxa Pluj). avvuXoxuv 

'^PJJl, to Sm/, " ll'QTjXa " H07]X81V 

fAHQOfiui, to obtain, " H^afjTUL (with rough Breathing'), it is fated. 

Rkm. '2. 'IMio ifuiilar rediiphcation is soniotiiiics fbuiid in tiio Attic poets, 
c. g. XfXi}fi^it&a, ^vkXiXey^uivog. — /t l uXiy o fia i , to converse, Jjas Perf. 
d LslXsy fiat, though tlio simi)le Xiyo) in the sense of to say, always takes 
the reguhir rediii)lication, XsXeyfiai, d ictus sum (Perf. Act. w^anting). 

§124. Attic Reduplication. (84-sg.) 

1. Several verbs, beginning with a, a or o, repeat, in the Perf. 
and Plup. before the temporal augment, the first two letters of 
the stem. This augmentation is called the Attic Reduplication. 
The Plup. then very rarely takes an additional augment ; //x- 
7/xo£/r has the regular Attic reduplication. 

2. The verbs, which in the Attic dialect have this reduplica- 
tion, are the following : 

(a) Those whose second stem-syllable is short by nature : 
uXioj, -w, to grind, sfiioj, -6), to vomit, 

{aX-riXsxa) aX-i]Xs(7firxL ifi-t'jixfxa i^-rifiEafxai, 

{aX-TjXsHSLv) aX-rjXsafiTjv Efx-rjjjiy.fiv sn-rjuiafir/V 

UQoo}, -co, to plough, iXdb) [iXavvcxi], to drive, 

{ag-rjQoy.a) ocQ-rjQOfxat iX-i]Xay.a EX-t']}.ct^aL 

{ccQ-TjQoy.sLv) a(j-7]QCfir]v iX-rjldy.siv sX-r}Xdi^r}v 

"OMOSl, ofivvfii, to swear, "OAlLQ., oXXvfii, to destroy, 

ofx-wfioy.a o^i-bi^od^xai oX-coXey.a Perf. 11. oX-wXa ^OAfL) 

6fi-b)n6y.£iv 6fi-ojfi6(TiJ.i]v oX'boXiiisiv Plup. 11. oX-caXsiv 

iXiyyca, to convince, oqvttco, to dig, 

{iX-i'/Xsyxtt) iX-i]hy^aL oq-caqvya oQ-wqvy^ai and loQvyixai 

{iX-7]Xsyxfiv) iX-7]Xsyfxrjv og-cogv/siv og-ojQiyfnjv and b}Qvyfj.r]v. 

Further: s X i a a at, to loind, {iX-i]Xi/(x), iX-vXiyfiac [the rough breathing 
being rejected), and uliy^ai ; o ^w (O/JSl), to smell, od-oida ; cpig (o (lEIVi- 
KSl), to carry, iv-rjvoya, iv-rivsyfiaL; scr-& I ca (E/ISI), to eat, iS-i'jdoy.a, ed- 
rjdsdfiai ; a y oj, to lead, Perf. usually ?}/ a ; rarely dyyjoyn, instead of «;'?;- 
yoya, so as to soften the pronunciation ; but Perf 3Iid. or Pass, always ijyfxai. 

(b) Those which in the second stem-syllable have a vowel 
long by nature, and shorten this after prefixing the reduplication 
(except igeidoj'j : 

dXd(f)(o, to anoint, dxoiaj, to hear, 

dX~i]Xiq>ot dX-i]Xifiiuat dx-T^aoa i]y.ov(Tfiai 

aX~riXl(f>fiv dX-riXififXT]v rjH-rjicosiv r^y.ovaiArjV 

"EyiETOSl, igyofxaL, to come, igndoj, to prop, 

iX-TjXv&a ig -rigs IX a ig-r,gei(Tfiai 

iX-rjXv&Eiv sQ-Tjgsly.SLV ig-rjgsia^wqv 

dyugm, to collect, iyelgoj, to wake, 

ay-r\yigy.a dy-')']y£guaL [ey-riytgy.a) iy-riysg^at 

dy-7]yigy.siv ay-rjysg(irjv {fy-7]yegxsiv) iy~T]ysgixT}v. 



§125.] VERBS. AUG. AND REDUP. IN COMPOUNDS. ^ 149 

So from f/flgo) comes the second Perf. f/gij/oQa (on account of euj)li()ny 
instead ot' ey-ij/oQu), I wake, second Plup. e'/^JTj/o^ftv, I aivoke. 

Remark 1. The forms included in parentheses are such as are not used 
by the older writers. 

Rem. 2. In imitation of the Epic dialect, the verb a/o), to lead, forms the 
second Aor. Act. and Mid., and cpigoi, to carry, forms all the Aorists with 
this reduplication, with the difference, however, that the vowel of the re- 
duplication takes the temporal augment only m the Ind., and the vowel of 
the stem remains pure : 

tt/w, to lead, Aor. II. ^//-a;'oj', Inf ayaysiv, Aor. II. Mid. ijyayofiTjV 
(Aor. I. ;)|a, a^ai, rarely) ; 

q)iQ M, to carry, stem "EFK, Aor. 11. i]v-s/y.ov, Inf. iv-f/xslv, Aor. I. 7y'y- 
syxa. Inf. iv-iynai, Aor. Pass, rjv-s/'&rjv, Inf. iy-i;(d^7}vai. 

§125. Augment and Redtiplic ation in Compound 

Wo rds. (87.) 

1. First rule. Verbs compounded with prepositions take the 

augment and reduplication between the preposition and the 

verb ; here prepositions which end with a vowel, except neQi 

and TtQo, suffer Elision, § 13, 3, (a) ; tiqo frequently combines with 

the augment by means of Crasis, § 10, and becomes nqov, and 

Iv and cvv resume their v which had been assimilated, § 18, 2, 

or dropped, § 20, 2, or changed, § 19, 3, e. g. 

ano-(iaX'k(o, tothroicfrom, Im. an-i^aXXov Pf. uno-^i^Xi]Ka Plp.w7r-f/56^A7ixftv 

nsQi-SdXXo}, to throw around, nsQL-s^aXXov 7isQL--^s^Xt]xa 7rf^t-f/5f/5A?;x£tv 

TiQO-^aXXw, to throw before, ngo-i^aXXov 7iQ0-^s^X7]xa ngo-StSe^Xrixsiv 

ngo-^aXXbi, to throw before, ngov^aXXov 7tQ0~^i^Xrjxa 7iQov^s^Xriy.sLV 

ifi-^aXXco, to throw in, iv-s^aXXov ifx-^s^Xrjy.a iv-f(3s^Xi]y.siv 

iy-ylyvo^au, to be in, iv-syiyvofiTjV iy-yiyovu iv-sysyovHV 

av-fficsvoi^cj, to pack up, avv-eaxsva^ov (Tvv-say.svaxa avv-say.svuy.siv 

<TVQ-qlnT(a, to throw together, avv-igqinTov avv-iggicpa avv-iggicpsiv 

avX-Xiyco, to collect together, avv-sXsyov avv-tlXoxa ovv-slXoxsi-v. 

2. Second rule. Verbs compounded with dvg, take the aug- 
ment and reduplication, (a) at the beginning, when the stem of 
the simple verb begins with a consonant or a vowel which does 
not admit the temporal augment ; (b) but in the middle, when 
the stem of the simple verb begins with a vowel which ad- 
mits the temporal augment, e. g. 

dvq-Tvxio}, to be unfortunate, i-dygTV/ovv dE-dvgrvxrjxa i-ds-dvgTVxrjaeiv 

dvg-ojnsw, to make ashamed, i-dvgcoTtovv 

dvq-otQeaiib), to be displeased, dvg-ijQecnovv dvg-TjQsaTrjy.a. 

Remark 1. Verbs compounded with sv may take the augment and I'edu- 
plication at the beginning or in the middle, yet they commonly omit them 
at the beginning, and svegyEjia) usually in the middle, e. g. 
21 



150 VERBS. REMARKS. [§ 126. 

fi-Tt'^fc'w, to he fortunate, rjl-jixovv, coinnionly iv-iv/ovv 
(v~Myionui, to feast welt, fv-M/oifuiiV 

tl'-fQ/tJtb), to do good, ii-7]oyiiovv, Perf. sv-tjoyijrjxa, coirimoiily tv~ 

fQ/tTovv, tv-igytirjy.u. 

3. Third Rule. All oilier compounds take the augment and 
reduplication at the beginning, e. g. 

f.ni&oXoyi(a, to relate, €[xvx)^oX6yovv fit^uvdolo/Tjua 

oiy.o8oixsb), to huild, o)xod6iuovp ojxodofxrixtt. 

Rem. 2. Lyciirg. c. Leocr. § 139. has lTi7ioisTQ6(pr}y.(v. 

§ 126. Remarks . (ss.) 

1. The six following words compounded with prepositions take the aug- 
ment in both places, viz. at the beginning of the simple verb and l>efore 
the preposition : 

aixnixoixai, to clotJie one^sself, ImpfJ] fun six 6 ^7]v or unnei/. Aor. ij^maxoftriv 

uvixo^ui, to endure, " riviix6^i]v " rjViaxofii^v 

a/xcpiyvoEOj, to be uncertain, " ')]fxcpfyv6ovv and i]^cpiyv. 
avoQ&cb), to raise up, " ^ivcagd^ovv Yerf.ipcjQ^ojxu " r^r^qdMaa 

ivoxXsM, to molest, " ^jvcoxlovv " i]V(x)yl'riy.(i " I'jvcu^ATjo-a 

7iccQ0Lvi(o, to riot, " snagMVOVv " nsnctgojvrjy.a " inagbjvrjaa. 

2. The analogy of these verbs is followed by three others, which are not 
compounded with prepositions, but are derived from other compound 
words, viz. 

diaLraa, from diuixa, food, (a) to feed, (b) to he a judge, Lnpf idirjibiv and 

dnjTOJV, Perf. dsdifiTr]xa 
diccxovsM, to serve, fi'om dcaxovog, servant, Impf. idirixovovv and dirjxovovv, 

Perf. dsSi7jy.6vi]ii(x 
aficpiCT^rjTsca, from AM^>I2BHTH2, to dispute, Impf r>^(fi(j^i]Tovv and 

^i^cpia^riiovv. 

3. Exceptions to the first rule. There are several verbs compomided 
wdth prepositions, which take the augment before the preposition, since they 
have nearly the same signification as the simple verbs, e. g. 
aficpiyvoi(a{voE(a),toheuncertain, Jinpf.rifKpiyvoovv or rjficpsyvoovv (No. 1) 
afucpLsvvv^i, to clothe, Aor. ijijcplecra, Perf i]}i(pleaij.ai 
ijiiaiafiai, to know, lnipf.7}7ii(ji(Xfi7}v 

a(flr]^i, to dismiss, " acplovv and r}q)lovp or ^}(pi£iv 

na&iCo3, to set, " iy.d&i^ov, old Att. xax^l^ov, Pf itexa&ixa 

ita&i^ofiai, to sit, " ixa&e^oixrjv and y.ccd^sC. (without Aug.) 

x(x-&rj}iai, to sit, " iy.a&i^}iT]v and Ha&i]iur]v 

xad^sidoi, to sleep, " imx^Evdov, seldom xa&rjvdov. 

4. Those verbs are apparently an exception to the fu'st rule, wiiich are 
not formed by the composition of a smiple verb with a preposition, but by 
derivation fi*om a word already compounded, e. g. 

ivavTiovfiai, to oppose one^s self to, from ivavrlog Impf ^jvavnoifiTjv 
avTidixsb), to defend at law, " avrldixog " i^viidixovv 

i^nsdoa, to establish, " sfinedog " rmni^ow. 



§§ 127, 128.] VERBS IN -0). DERIVATION OF TENSES. 151 

5. Many verbs, however, whicli arc formed only by derivation, arc tn^-ited, 
even by tiie best classical writers, as if they were cornj)oiindcd of a simple 
verb and a preposition, since the Greek considers the j)reposition by itself, 
and does not reg^ard the compound as a whole. Thus, naQavo^ia), naqri- 
rofiovv and naQsvoixovv, nciQijvoixrjaa, Perf. nagavofirjua, although it is not 
from nagix and vtvoiiko or vofxeu, which two verbs are not in use, but from 
the com])ound nagdvo^og ; so further, i y % s l q b u), from ^l^rXEIF02, to 
take in fiand, Impt'. ivex^^Qovv ; in i&v f^s o}, from 'ElITOTMO^S, to desire, 
Impf. i7is&i\uovv ; xaTt] yogiw (from xaii^/oQog), to accuse, Impf aaTrjyo- 
Qovv, Perf y.ajriyoQrixa ; n g oS^v fiov fia i (from ngo&vfiog), to desire earn- 
estly, Impf. ngov&vfiov fif]v and TXQO&VfiOi'fxriv; so eyamixiaQuv, ngoqttixEVHV, 
ivEdgevsiv, ixnlrjina^SLV, etc. 



Formation of the Tenses of Verbs in -co. 

§ 127. Division of Verbs in - <» according to the 
Characteristic, (loe.) 

Verbs in -co are divided into two principal classes, according 
to the different nature of the characteristic : 

I. Pure verbs, whose characteristic is a vowel; these are 
again divided into two classes : 

A. Uncontracted verbs, whose characteristic is a vowel, ex- 
cept «, £, 0, e. g. 7taidev-oj, to educate, Iv-oj, to loose ; 

B. Contract verbs, whose characteristic is either a, e or o, e. g. 
Tifid-co, to honor, qjds-oj, to love, {iiax^o-oj, to let. 

II. Impure verbs, whose characteristic is a consonant ; these 
are again divided into two classes : 

A. Mute verbs, whose characteristic is one of the nine mutes, 
e. g. XeiTt-G), to leave, ttIsx-oj, to tiuine, neid'-oo, to persuade ; 

B. Liquid verbs, whose characteristic is one of the four 
liquids, I, ft, v, q, e. g. dyysll-oj, to announce, vb^-gj, to di- 
vide, (paiv-oj, to shoiv, (f&siQ-co, to destroy. 

• 
Remark. In respect to the accentuation of the first Pers. Pres. Ind. Act., 
all verbs are divided into, 

(a) Barytones, whose final syllable in the fii'st Pers. Pres. Ind. Act. is not 
accented, e. g. Au-w, ttAex-w, etc. ; 

(b) Perispomena, whose final syllable is ckcumflexed in the first Pers. ; 
these are consequently contract verbs, e. g. xi^a, cpdoj, (uia&a. 

§128. Derivation of Tenses. (9o.) 

All tenses are formed from the stem of the verb, since the inflection- 

endmgs mentioned above, are appended to this. Only the Primaiy tenses 



152 FORMATION OT THE TENSE OF PUIIE VERBS. [§129. 

have a distinct tense-characteri.stic, § 110 ; this is always wanting in the Pres. 
and Ini])f., since tlie mode-vowels and personal-endings are sufficient ; but 
the Pres. and Inipf. very frequently strengthen or increase the pure stem, 
e. g. TL'TTT-w, pure stem 7T/7, w/xa^T-ayw, pure Btem'AMAFT'^ the Second- 
ary tenses never admit such an increase, but are formed from the pure 
stem, and without the tense-characteristic ; yet, in certain cases, they admit 
a change of the stem-vowel. Hence, certain tenses, which are formed from 
a common stem, may be classed by themselves. Tenses included in such 
a class, may be said to be derived from one another. The principal 
classes are the three following : 

I. Tenses, which can strengthen the pure stem. These are the Pres. 
and Impf Act., Mid. or Pass., e. g. 

(pure stem TTJI) Tvn-x-w zim-T-ofiat 

i-TVn-X-OV i-tV7l-T-6(^T)V. 

U. Tenses, which have a tense-characteristic. These are the Primary 
tenses, e. g. 

(a) First Perf. and first Plup. Act., e. g. {Tie-cpgad-xa) ni-cpQU-'Aa, i-m- 
q)Q<x-xsLV ; 

(b) Perf and Plup. Mid. or Pass. These are, in most cases, derived 
from the first Perf Act., and do not have the tense-characteristic ; 
from them is derived the Fut. Perf, e. g. TB-zv^-fiai mstead of 
xhvTi^at, ii8Tvy,fi7]v, 7s-jvipo^at ; 

(c) First Fut. and Aor. Act. and Mid., e. g. Tvipo) rvipo^ai 

%~xv\pa i-TVipd^rjv ; 

(d) Fu-st Aor. and first Fut. Pass., e. g. i-Tvcp-S^rjv TVcp-d^D^aofiai. 
ni. Tenses, which are formed fi*om the pure stem Avithout a tense-charac- 
teristic, may yet, in certain cases, admit a change of the stem-vowel. 
These are the Secondai-y tenses, e. g. 

(a) The second Perf and second Plup. Act. e. g. li-TVTi-a, i-xs-ivn-nv ; 

(b) The second Aor. Act. and Mid., e. g. s-Xoi&-ov, i-Xa&-6^7]v firom 
lavd^avo), pure stem AAO\ 

(c) The second Aor. and second Fut. Pass., e. g. s-tvtt-tjv, Tvu-ritrofiai. 

§ 129. I. Formation of the Tenses of Pure Verbs. 

(107.) 

1. In pure verbs, both Barytoned and Perispomena, the tense- 
endings are commonly appended to the unchanged verb-cha- 
racteristic, e. g. ^ovXev-aco, §e^ovXev-xa. Verbs very rarely form 
the Secondary tenses pure, but only the Primary tenses ; the Perf. 
with >i (xcc), the Fut. and Aor. mth (T (ctoo, 6a). Pure verbs, how- 
ever, are subject to the following regular change in the stem : 

2. The short characteristic vowel of the Pres. and Impf., viz. 
I and V in Barytones, and d, s and o in Perispomena, is length- 
ened in the other tenses, viz. 



§ 130.] TENSES OF PURE VERBS WITH SHORT VOWEL. 153 

I into i, e. g. firjriu), to be (nui;n^, fut^vl-aMy i-^i]vi(jix, etc. 
V " iJ, " n(x)Xv-M^ to hinder^ yiMkv-aio^ xE-xaiXviJttt., etc. 
e " T], " qp/Ac'-co {(fiXaj), to love, qptAj'j-aw, ns-q)tX7]-xa, etc. 
o " (o, " ma&o-M {uktOoj), to let out, jxia&oj-aoj, fis-fiia&co-na, etc. 
o " f], " Tt|U«-w (Ti|Uto), /o honor, Tt^^j-crco, jE-jlfiTj-xa, etc. 
Remark 1. o is lengthened into «, when ?, t or ^ precedes it, comp. § 43, 

ia-(o, to permit, id-aca ; eatiu-w, to entertain, edTiu-aco ; (pojQu-b), to steal, 
qxoQii-aco ; but iyyva-ta, to give as a pledge, tyyv-r^aoi ; ^oda, to call out, 
§oi](TO}iat., f(i6r](ja, like oydor]. 

The following belong to those in -saw, -iw'w, -Qaca, viz. 
d Xod- oj, to strike, to pound, old Att. Fut. dXod-aM ; but usually dXor^(T(a ; 
axQOtt-OfiaL, to hear, Fut. dy.Qodcrof^ai, Aor. 'tiXQodadfirjv, like d&qoa. 

Rem. 2. The verbs XQ <^ ^i io K^ve an oracle, / g do fxu i,to use, and t i~ 
T gd(a,to bore, although a g precedes, lengthen a into rj, e. g. xg^f^ofxai, jgi^aca. 

§130. Formation of the Tenses of Pure Verbs 
ivith a short Characteristic-voioeL (los— no.) 

The following pure verbs, contrary to the rule, § 129, 2, retain 
the short characteristic-vowel, either in forming all the tenses, 
or in particular tenses, viz. the uncontracted verbs retain I and 
V, the conti'act pure verbs, «, £ and o ; most of these verbs, in 
the Perf. jNIid. or Pass, and first Aor. Pass., as well as in the 
tenses derived from these, assume a c, which appears through- 
out the Pass, as c, see § 131. 

(a) -to^. 

Xgt(a,to prick,Y\xi. xgiafxi, Aor. l/^Iaa, In^. xglaau Pass, with a-; but 

X g loj, to anoint, Fut. ;^oto-a), Aor. sxglau. Inf. /^To-ttt, Aor. Mid. ixgl- 

adjXTjv; Perf. Mid. or Pass, xixgiufiixi, xexgHfrd^ai', Aor. Pass. sxQ^^^V^' 

Remark 1. ind'Cw, to perceive, of the Ionic dialect, belongs here, § 230. 

The poetic «ta) is found only in the Pies, and Impf., "«iov, § 122, 1. 

(b) 4o3. 

1. "Avv (Ji (also old Att. avvib}), to complete, Fut. uvvuw ; Aor. rjvvaa. Pass, 
with a. 

u gv (a (also old Att. dgvTa)], to draw water, Fut. dgvaco ; Aor. rjgvo'a. Pass. 

with (T. 
f.1 V 0), to close, e. g. the eyes, Fut. n'vao), Aor. l]uto-a ; but Perf (li^vy.a, to be silent 
It TV (a, to spit, Fut. TiTvaoj ; Aor. sTiTvaa. Pass, with a. 
Idgvo), to cause to sit, Fut. Idgvaoo ', Aor. i'^^wa (later ldgva(o,'idgvaa); 

Aor. Pass, idg'vx^riv; but Perf Mid. or Pass. \8gvp.ai. Inf. Idgi-a&ai. 

2. The following dissyllables in -voi lengthen the short characteristic- 
vowel in the Fut. and Aor. Act. and Mid., and 5lw also in the Perf and 
Plup. Act., but they resume the short vowel in the Perf and Plup. Act., 
(except 5 1 to), also in the Mid. or Pass., and in the Aor. and Fut. Pass.: 

d V CO, to ujrap up, Fut. 8vaw Aor. tbiiaa Perf didxjy.a de8vfj,ai Aor. Pass, idvd^rjv 
-d-vo), to sacrifice^ " -^vao) " sd^vaa " Tid-vxaTi-&ij(iaL " " iii^r}V 
Xv b), to loose, " XicFbi " tXi'dct " XiXvxa XiXviiai " " iXv^r^v. 



154 TENSES OF PURE VERBS WITH SHORT VOWEL. [§ 130. 

Rem. 2. When the vowel in tlie Fut. Act. is lonjr, and short in llie Pcrf. 
Mid. or Pass., the Fut. Perf. resumes tlie Ion*; vowel, l)Oth hi uncontracted 
verbs and in contracted pure verbs, e. g. Auw, Xtkiiaofxai. 

(c) -uco. 

I'eXdo), to laugh, Fut. yeXuaofiuL (seklom ysXuab)); Aor. iyiXuaa. Pass, 
with a. 

iXixbi (usually iXavvM), to drive, Fut. iXuao) (Att. iXoj), etc. See § 158. 

■i>Xa(a,to bruise, x>Xaao), etc. Pass, with a. 

xXd bi, to hreaJc, xXixacx), etc. Pass, with a. 

X aXa b), to loosen, /aXuau, etc. Pass, with a. 

h a^aoi (usually dafxaCw), domo, Aor. idoifiaaa. Pass, with a. 

n s Q a M, to transport, to sell, Fut. 7iegaa(o ; Aor. iniquaa ; Perf. nEnsgaTca ; 
but nsQao), to pass over, Intrans., Fut. nsQuorb); Aor. tJisQuaa. These 
seven verbs have a liquid before the characteristic-vowel «. 

(T7T a (a, to draw, Gnolcrw, etc. Pass, with a. 

G/^dbi, to loose, to open, axaaoi, etc. 

(d) -Ico. 

1. AldsofiaL,to reverence. See § 166, 1. 

ayso(j. a t, to heal, ayiaofiaL, 7}XE(ja[j,rjv', Perf. Mid. or Pass. 7;x£(7^at ; Aor. 

Pass. rjXEdd^Tjv. 
uX s(o, to grind, to beat, aXiaa, Att. «^(u ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. aXi]Xs(Tfiai, 

§§ 117, 2. and 124, 2. 
a Qy.s b) ,to suffice, etc. Pass, with a (also to be sufficient). 
ifj^ia, to vomit, Fut. i^iaoj, etc. ; Perf. Act. i(xr}usxa ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. 

ifi^fiEcr^uL, § 124, 2. 
^ £ ft) , to boil, usually intrans., and C^vvvfiL, usually trans. Pass, with cr. 
I £ 0) , io scrape. Pass, with a. — t £ ^ £ w , to accomplish. Pass, with cr, § 117, 2. 
% Q ib) , to tremble. — X ^^^ ^^ pour. See § 154, Rem. 1. 

2. The following have in some tenses the long, in others, the short vowel : 
alvifd , to praise, Fut. alvECFb) ; Aor. rjveaa ; Perf j'jVEy.a ; Aor. Pass, f^vid^riv ; 

but Perf Mid. or Pass. rivrip.aL. 
olIq Eb3 , to choose, Aor. Pass, jjqs&tjv ; also ?/ ; algmbi, fjgrjyia, figrjfiat. 
yafZEb), to marry, Fut. yafzu ; Aor. Eyrjixa ; Perf yEyocfirjy.oi ; Aor. Pass. 

iyan'i']d^riv [I was taken to wife). 
8 £b), to bind, d}]<Tb}, adrjaa, iSrjdiXf.itjv ; but didExa, didEfxai, idid-rjv', Fut. Perf. 

6Edi](T0fiai, Avhich takes the place of the Fut. Pass. dEd^t]aop.aL not 

used by the Attic writers. 
naXi CO , to call, Fut. naXEabu, Att. xaAw, § 117, 2. ; Aor. ixdXEaa ; Perf Act. 

y.iy.lri^a ; Perf Mid. or Pass. yixXtJixai,, lam called; Fut. Perf iiEy.h](J0juaL, 

I slmll be called ; Aor. Pass. iyXt'id^rjv ; Fut. Pass. xXTj^ricrofiai ; Fut. Mid. 

xaXov(j,tti ; Aor. Mid. Ey.aXEudpi]v. 
noS- sb) , to desire. Ion. and in Plato nod-£cro(xai, inod-Eaa ; elsewhere, TTod-T}- 

aw, EJio&rjaa ; Perf Act. nETio&rjxa ; 7ieti6S-7]U(xl ; Aor. Pass, ijiod^icr&rjv. 
novEOi, laboro, Fut. novijabj, etc. [to work)', novicrb) [to be in pain); Perf. 

nETtorrjya in both senses. 

(e) -ooj. 
^Agob), to plough, Fut. dgoabj, Aor. ijgocra', Perf Mid. or Pass. dg7]gofio(L, 

§ 124, 2. ; Aor. Pass, rigo&riv. 



§ 131.] VERBS. AOR. AND FUT. PASS. AND PLUP. MID. OR PASS. 155 

§131. Formation of the Aor. and Fut. Pass.^ and 
Pluperf, Mid. or Pass, with a- (112— ih.) 

1. Pure verbs, which retain the short characteristic-vowel in 
forming the tenses, unite, in the Aor. and Fut. Pass., and in the 
Perf. and Plup. Mid. or Pass., the tense-endings '0-riv, (lai, etc. 
to the tense-forms by inserting cr, § 130, e. g. 

ieXs-co i-T(Xi-(T-S^r}v JS-TsXE-a-i^ai 

TsXs-(J-dt](TOfXaL i-TE-TsXB-(T-lJr]V. 

2. Besides these verbs, several others also, which either have 
a long characteristic- vowel in the stem, or lengthen the short 
characteristic-vowel of the stem in forming the tense, take the 
same formation, viz. 

ttxovco, to hear, Aor. Pass, ly/.ov-a&riv^ Fut. Pass. uy.ov-a-&i]ao^tti, Perf. 
Mid. or Pass. I'jy.ov-a-fiai, Plup. rjy.ov-ar-ixriv ; i v av a , to kindle ; y. sXsv (o , 
to command ; xv a I o), to scratch ; xvXt ca, to roll ; Xev w , to stone ; v s a 
(secondaiT form vij&co), to spin, Perf. Pass, vsvi^yai and vswiafxai, but Aor. 
Pass, ivij&rjv and the verbal adjective vi^rog; ^ v m , to scrape ; n a I to , to 
strike ; n aXal w, to urestle ; rtXi w, to sail ; n q I w, to saw ; m al(a,to strike 
against, to stumble ; y « / w (poetic), to destroy ; a s I co , to shake ; v ca , to rain, 
Aor. Pass. va-d^Tiv, I was rained upon, Perf. Pass, vafiai [tcpva^ivoq X. Ven. 
9, 5.), Fut. vaoixai, instead of va^ricro^aL ; cpQSM, to let through, occurring 
only in compounds, e. g. uacp., hep., Fut. cpQijcro), etc., Mid. cpQy'iaofxai, Aor. 
Pass. icpQTiad^Tjv ; % 6 (o , to heap up ; % qci a, to give an oracle, § 129, Rem. 2 ; 
X Q lai, to anoint, § 130, (a) ; ipav (o, to touch ; 

3. The following vary between the regular formation and 
that with (T : 

ysv(o, to cav^e to taste. Mid. to taste, to enjoy, Perf Mid. or Pass, ye'/svixul 

(Eui-ip.) ; but Aor. Pass, probably eysva&r]v. Comp. ysvfia, but ysvff- 

jsov, yivaiiaog. 
dgdib}, to do, Fut. dgaaai, etc. ; Perf didgaxa ; Perf Mid. or Pass, didga- 

(iUL and dedQa(rfxaL (Th.) ; Aor. Pass. idQaa&Tjv (Th.) Verbal adjective 

dgacTTog, dgaaTSog. 
S^gavb), to break in pieces, Perf Mid. or Pass, je&gavafiai (Plat, le&gav- 

/iftt) ; Aor. Pass. id-Qnva&rjv. Verbal adjective d-gavaiog. 
yiXctlw, Att. yXdw, to weep, Perf Mid. or Pass. yAy.Xavf.iaL and yiyXavd^iai. 
xis/ M , to shut, Perf Mid. or Pass. Att. y.iy.XruiaL and HiyXuauai ; Aor. Pass. 

exXela&Tjv and iy.X]jadrjv (Th.) 
xoXovo), to maim; Perf Mid. or Pass. y.iy.oXov^ai and K^y.oXovcrixui; Aor. 

Pass. ixoXov(Td^r]v, more rarely ey.oXov&rjv. 
ygovb), to strike upon, Perf Mid. or Pass. y.ey.govfAdt and y.sy.govcrfiaL; Aor. 

Pass. iy.govad^Tjv. 
via), to heap up, Fut. vi^aa, etc. ; Perf Mid. or Pass. vivrjfiaL and vivrjafiai ; 

Aor. Pass. ivi]&r]v. Verbal adjective vriTog. 
xputa, to rub, Perf Mid. or Pass, ixpr^^ai and tiprjdfiai ; Aor. Pass, iipij^riy 

and itin}<T&7)v. 



156 



UNCONTRACTED PURE VERBS WITHOUT (T. 



[§ 132. 



4. The following verbs assume c in the Aor. Pass., but not 

in the Perf. : 

{LUfivrjffyb) {MNA-fl), to remind^ Pf. fii^vrjfifXL, J remember , A. P. i^vr^adriv 
nvto), to bloiv, niirvvfAaL (poet.) invtm&rjv 

XQ(*OfjiaL {/QOjfAat,), utor, itt/()rjiiiui i;(gri(j&T}v 

navo), to cause to cease, to finish, ninav^ai, inuvadriv 

and inuv&rjv, nccvd^i'jaofiaL in Th. Verbal adjective nuvaiioq. 

5. The following verbs, although they do not retain the short 

characteristic-vowel, never assume a: 

dvo), ^vo), Xvo), § 130, (b), 2, eAaw, § 130, (c), alvico, algeoi, dicx) § 130, (d), 2, 
ccQooj, § 130, (e), /£co, § 154, Rem. 1, aEvoj, to excite, § 230. 



Paradigms of Pure Verbs. 
A. Uncontr acted Pure Verbs. 
§132. (a) IV it h out o in the Mid. and Pass. (H5.) 



xooAi^oo, to hinder. 



ACTIVE, 



Pres. 
Impf. 



Ind.xooAtf-co Subj.xcoAii'-a) Imp.j<coAi;-£lnf ;<caAt;-£ty Part.xcoAv-wy 
Ind. l-'AooXv-mv Opt. oioXv-oifii t 



Perf. 
Plup. 



Ind. x€-xft)Xi7-xct Inf aa-xcoXv-xevai Part. y.s-'AOiXv-'Acog 
Ind. E-xE-xcoXv-aeiv 



Put. 

Aor. 



Ind. hodXv-gco Opt. xayXv-aoifii Inf xaXv-oeiv Part. xcoXv-gcov 
Ind. i-xcoXv-(ja Subj. xooXi;-(yoa Opt. 'AaXv-aaijii 
Imp. xooXi;-(Toi^ Inf xcoXv-aui Part, xcolt^-cra?. 



MIDDLE. 



Pres. 

Impf 



Ind. xooXv-Ofxcu Subj. y.ojXv-ojfiai Imp. y.coXv-ov Inf ycoXv-eo&ai 

Part. 'AmXv-oijevog 
Ind. i-xo3Xv-6f^i]v Opt. ycoXv-oi{jr^v 



Perf 



s 


1. 




2. 




3. 


D 


1. 




2. 




3. 


P 


1. 




2. 




3. 



Ind. 



xa-ycoXv-fiai 

y.e-y.ojXv-oai 

ya-xcoXv-rai 

ys-yojXv-[A£d^ov 

ye-ycjXv-cy&ov 

xs-xojXv-ad^ov 

xs-xcoXv-fied-a 

xe-xcoXv-G&e 

x8-yojXv-vrai 



Imperative 
>c€-xoaX{'-(JO 
xs-y,coXv-o&co 

xe-x(oXv-ad^ov 

XS-XOoXv-6&03V 



Infinitive 
xe-xcoXv-od^at 

Participle 
x8-xcoXv-ii£vog 

Subjunctive 
xE-xwXv-fxavog co 
xe-xcoXv-ad^s 
x8-x(xiXv-6&036av OX xe-xo:)Xv-6&(ov] 



S.l. i-xs-xojXv-fx.j]v D.i-x8-x(oXv-[AS&ov F.i-xE-xojXv-fxe&a Opt. xe 

2. i-xs-xojXv-ao i-xE-xojXv-ad^ov i-xE-xcoXv-od-E [xojXv-fia'- 

3. E-XE-X(6Xv-tO i-XE-XC0Xv-0&7]V i-XE-Xc6Xv-VtO [vog ElTjV 



Plup. 
Ind. 



Put. 

Aor. 



Ind. xoXv-ooixaL Opt. xcoXvooifir^v Inf xcoXv-OEad^ai Part. 

xoj7,v -60 fXEVOg 
Ind. i-xcoXij-odfi7]v Subj. xcoXv-ccof^ai Opt. xojXv-aatfXTjv Imp* 

xaXv-oai Inf xcoXv-aaaS-ai Part. xcoXiJ-C)d{XEvog. 



§§ 133, 134.] UNCONTRACTED AND CONTRACT PURE VERBS. 157 



PASSIVE. 



Aor. 
Fut. 



Ind. i-xcolu-&)iv Subj. 'acoXv-O-cj Opt. ycoXv-dsitjv 

Imp. xcoXv-&r]n Inf. ycoXv-d^iivca Part. yooXv-d-aig 

Ind. y(x)Xv-d^i]aonca Opt. y,coXv-d-t]GoifiijV Inf. yMXu-d)]o8o0ai 
Part. y,(oXu-&ij66{^8rog. ^^^^^ 



§133. (b) ivith G in the Mid. and Pass. §131. 



(117.) 



xeXsvcd, to command. ACTIVE. 


Pres. y.8X8v-(o Perf. ya-yJXav-xa Fut. yaXavGOj 
Impf l-yJXav-ov Plup. 8-y.8-y.8X8v-y8iv Aor. 8-yJX8v-Ga. 


MIDDLE. 


Present 


y.8X8v-o^ai Impf. i-y,8XEV-6i^7]v \ 


Perf. S. 1. 

Ind. 2. 

3. 

D.l. 

2. 

3. 

P.l. 

2. 

3. 


xE-y.tXav-a-iAai 

'A8-yJX8v-Gai 

ys-yJXEv-G-zat 

HS-y.8X8V-G-fi8d-0V 

ite-yJX8v-G&ov 
Ke-'AEXav-G-Oov 
ns-y8X8v-G-fi8d-a 

XS-X8X8V-G&8 
'A8-y,8X8V-G-fl8V0l 8lGl 


Imperative 

y8-'A8X8V-G0 
y.8-y.8X8V-G&CO 

y.8-y.8X8v-Gd-ov 

:<S-X8X8V-Gd-03V 

:iS-yJX8v-G'&8 

'A£-y.£X8V-Gx)-(OG 


Infinitive 
y.8-y.8X8v-G&at 

Participle. 
y,8-y.8X8v-G-fi8vog 

Subjunctive 

X8-y.8X8V-G-fA^8'vog CO 

uv or y8-y,8X8v-G&a)v] 


Plup. S. 1. 

Ind. 2. 

3. 


i-y8-y.8X8v-G-ixrivD.s-y.8-y8X8v-G-fAS&ovT.8-y8-y,8X8v-G-f.i8&a 

8-y.8-y8X8V-G0 i-'A8-y,8X8V-Gd-0V 8-y.8-ytX8V-Gd-£ ^ 

8-y.8-y.8X8v-G-ro i-'AE-y.8X8V'Gd-r]v y8-y8X8v-G-^8voiriGav 


Opt. 1 y.8-y.8X8v-G-n8vog 8(}]v 


Future y.sXavGOfAai Fut. Perf. y,8-y8Xsv-G0fA,ai Aor, i-yEXav-Gafiriv. 


PASSIVE. 


Aorist 1 8-y.8X8v-G-d-r^v Future xaXav-G-d-riGOfiai. 



B. Contract Pure Verbs. 



§ 134. Pr eliminary Remark. 



(118.) 



Contract pure verbs are such as have for theu* characteristic either a, s 
or 0, § 127, and contract these with the mode-vowel following. The con- 
traction, which is made according to the rules stated above, § 9, belongs 
only to the Pres. and Impf. Act. and Mid., because in these two tenses on- 
ly, is the characteristic-vowel followed by another vowel, On the tense- 
formation, see §§ 129 — 131. 

23 



158 



PARADIGMS OF CONTRACT VERBS. 



[§ 135. 











§ 135. 


Par ad i firms of 




ACTIVE 






<2 


X umbers 

and 
Persons. 


Present. 




Characteristic a. 


Characteristic 8. 


Cliaracteristic o. 






S. ]. 


7rii{u-co)dj, to honor, 


cpil{8-(x))(o, to love, 


1 (xiG{){6-b))oJ, to let, 






2. 


7ii^[a-&g)ag 


<:pi.l{8-8ig)8lg 


^tGx){6-8ig)oig 






3. 


Tl[i{d-8l)(/. 


q)lX[8-8l)8L 


fllGd{6-8l)0l 




Indic- 
ative, 


D. 1. 

2. 


Tif4d-E)d-rov 


q}ll{8-8)H-Z0V 


fiioO{6-8)ov-zov 






3. 


tifA,(d-8)d-Toy 


q)ll{8-8)8l-Z0V 


lHO{y{6-8)0V-Z0V 






P. 1. 


rilA{d-o)co-fisv 


(pil{8-0)0V-fl8V 


f^iaO{6-o)ov-fi8v 






2. 


Tifi{a-8)d-rs 


Cpll{8-8)8l-Z8 


I.ua0[n-8)ov-z8 






3. 


7:(ii{d-ov)6j-ai{v) 


cpi}.{8-ov)ov-ai{v) 


liiod[()-ov)nv-of{v) 






S. 1. 


Tiii{a-(o)co 


? 


q)ll{8-03)(O 


|M/.f7x'>(o-OC>)oJ 






2. 


7iiA{d-rig)ccg 


o 


cp(l{8-rjg)^i 


inod[()-r^g)oig 






3. 


riii{d-ri)a 


o 


q)d{8-Ti)lI 


liiod-{6-r[)oi 




Sub- 
junc- 


D. 1. 




s^s. 








2. 


TiiA{d-7])d-rov 


m 


q)0{8-7f)ri-zov 


fXlO\}{6-J])^-Z0V 




tive, 


3. 


7:i.li{d-i])d-zov 


_o < 


q)(l{8-7])rj-zov 


fnad-{6-ri)o}-zov 






P. 1. 


Tlfl{d-(x))(0-fA8V 


^ 


q)ll{8-03)cO-lJ8V 


filOx>{6-Oj)cO-^8V 






2. 


ti[A,ia-7])d-rs 


r 


(pil{8-?])/i-Z8 


liiGd-{6-ri](a-z8 






3. 


Tifi{a-co)cj-6i{v) 


» 


q)(l{8-(o)oj-oi{v) 


fl(Gd-{6-0j)(O-Gt{v) 






S. 2. 


zifA.{a-8)a 


q)ll{8-8)8l, 


^tGx}{0-8)0V 






3. 


'n[x{a-8)d-tco 


(pil{8-8)8i-Z03 


[AIG\}{0-8)0V-Z0D 




Imper- 
ative 


D. 2. 
3. 


7:ifj.{d-8)d-zov 
tifA,{a-8)d-rcov 


(p(l{8-8)8l-T0V 
g)ll{8-8)8l-Z03V 


fllG\}{6-8)OV-ZOV 
HlGd^{0-8)0V-Z(OV 






P. 2. 


Tl.[A,{d- 8)0,-18 


(pil{8-8)8T-ZS 


IXIG&[6-8)0V-Z8 






3. 


7ifA{a-8)d-ro3aav or 


cpil{8-8)8i-zG)(jav or 


fllGx>{0-t)0V-Z(X)Gav 








7:i{A{a-6)a-vzcov 


q)(X{s-o)ov-vzo}v 


or fiiGd-{o-6)ov-vzav 




Infin. 




T:(fi{d-8iv)av 


Cp(l{8-8iv)8l1f 


{AIG&{6-81V)0VV 






Norn. 


t(ji{d-cov)6jv 


(pil{8-0JV)mV 


[AiGx^{6-COV)(OV 




Parti- 




tiii[d-ov)^-aa 


cpiX{8-ov)ov-(ja 


IAIG&{6-0V]0V-Ga 




ciple, 




Ti^{a-ov)ojv 


q)il{8-ov)ovv 


^lG'd'[0-0v)0VV 




Gen. 


7iiA{a-o)(o-vtog 


q)il{8-o)ov-vzog 


lnG{y[6-o)ov-i>zog 








ti^{a-ov)w-Grjg 


q)il{8-ov)ov-67]g 


fxiGd^[o-ov)ov-Gt]g. 




Imp e rfe c t . 






S. 1. 


8z[ji{a-ov)wv 


8(flX{8-0v)0VV 


ifiiG-&{o-ov)ovv 






2. 


kifi{a-sg)ag 


8q}il(8-8g)8ig 


8fiiG&{o-8g)ovg 






3. 

D. 1. 

2. 


izi[A,(a-8)a ^ 


icpll{8-8)8(, 


8fAlG&{0-8)0V 




Indic- 
ative, 


izifi{a-s)d-zov 


icpil{s-8)8i-zov 


8[AIG&{6-8)0V-Z0V 




3. 
P. 1. 


8Zi[i{a-8)d-zr]v 
izifi{d-o)(a-fX8v 


8Cpll{8-8)8l-ZriV 

icpd(8-o)ov-^8v 


i{XlGd-{n-8')0V-ZT]V 
i[A,lGd'{6-0)0V-fl8V 






2. 


iziu(d-8)d-ze 


iq)l'k(8-8)8l-ZS 


8iiiGd-{6-8)ov-za 








&ziii[a-ov)wv 


1 


8q)il{8-(yv)ovv 


if4.iGd-{o-ov)ovv 





§135. 



PARADIGMS OF CONTRACT VERBS. 



159 



Contract Verbs. 



(119.) 





3I1DDLE. 




Present. 




Characteristic a. 


Cliaracteristic 8. 


Cliaracteristic o. 




Z(fi{a-o)(o-f4ia 


q}i}.{8-o)ov-fi(a 


l.aG'0{6-o)ov-[Aat 




Tili{(c-r,)fc 


cpil{t-\])(} 


liiGd{6-\i)oi 




rin{d-t)u-TUi 


(pil{t-8)8L-Tai 


IXIG{>[6-8)0V-7(U 




T(f({cc-6)co-[xt\}ov 


q)ll{8-6)OU-fA8{)-OV 


fjllG{){0-6)0V-}J.8d0V 




Tlf^l{u-t)d-6{yOP 


q)tl{t-t)8i-aOov 


lJLlGd{6-8)OV-Gd-OV 




Tiu{d-t)d-()0-ov 


(pll{t-8)8l-Gd'0V 


IIIG{^[6-8]oV-G'0'OV 




rifi{a-6)oj-fi£{ya 


q)(M£-6)ov-{A,8da 


flLG{^{0-6)0V-[i8{)-a 




Tifi{d-E)d-oO-e 


q)ll{8-8]8l-0d-8 


luG'0{6-e)ov-G{)-8 




Tt^i{d-o)(o-vzai 


q)il{8-o)ov-v7ai 


fi(Gd^{6-o)ov-vzai 




Tiji{a-(o)(o-[A.ai 




q)il{8-co)co-fjLaL 


[AlGx}{0-0j)m-[AaL 




tiH{d-ij)fl 


t;: 


Cp(l[i:'-ri)ll 


liiGO[6-ri)oi 




Ti[A,{a-ri)d-Ta( 


n 


q)(X{8-r])ij-7ai 


{AiG{)-{6-7j)co-7ai 




~ 


Cpll{8-(6)ca-fl8d-OV 


[AlGd'{0-0j)cx)-fA.8&0V 




Tif/{a-ti)d-ax}ov 


4 


qi(l{8-rj)tj-od'ov 


liiGd-[6-ri)(a-Gd-ov 




r(IJ,{d-ri)d-o\}ov 


a' 


cpiX[8-tj)ij-od-nv 


lXiG{){6-7])co-G{)-OV 




Tifi{a-(6)oj-fA8x>a 


|. 


(piX{8-c6)(6-^8d-a 


p(7i9(o-co)oo-^£i>a 




7tfl{d-fj)d-G{>E 


a 


(pil{8'-t])ij-0d'8 


jWt(7t'>(0-?/)cu-ax>£ 




rifi{d-(o)oj-vTai 




cpil{8-co)(o-v7ai 


fiiG{>{6-co)(o-vzat 




tilA,{d-ov)co 


Cpi.l[8-QV)0V 


fxiG'0'{6-ov)ov 




Ti^{a-t)d-od-(xi 


q}il{8-8)ei-ad-(a 


llLG{y{0-8)0V-Gd-G} 




7iiA{d-t)d-oO'ov 


CplX{8-E)8T-G'0-OV 


fllG'0{6-8)0V-G{)-0V 




7(H{a-t)d-G{)^(x)v 


q)ll{8-8)Si-0d-C0V 


IAI,g{}{ - 8)0V-G\r(j3V 




r(li{d-e)d-6&8 


CpiX[8-8)8l-G&8 


{XlG{)-{6-8)0V-Gds 




rui{u-t)d-oi}G}r)av or 


q)il{8-8)8i-Gd-coGav or 


l/.iGO{o-8)ov-GO-coGav or 




7l.fl(a-8)d-Gx}C0V 


q)il{s-8)8i-Gd-(ov 


^lGd-[0-t)0V-Gd^mv 




TilJ,{d-8)d-o{)-fu 


q)(l{8-8)8l-G-d-ai 


^lGd-[6-8)0V-Gd-ai 




Tifi{a-6)(6-{A.8vog 


cpil{8-6)ou-iA8vog 


lJ,lGd^{0-0)0V-[A.8V0g 




Tilx{a-o)cx}-fAtvr] 


q}(l{8-0)0V-IUV7] 


lAiG\}{0-0)0V-fX8V7J 




7:ifi{a-6)(6-iA8Pov 


q)ll{c-0)0V-{A.8V0V 


lJilG{y[0-0)0V-fA8V0V 




xiji[a-o)o3-fi8vov 


(pil{8-0)OV-[A8VOV 


[AiG0^{0-0)nv-fX8V0V 




7ifA,{u-o)cj-fX8vr^g 


Cp(X{8-0)0V-fl8Vi]g 


[UG-(}{0-0)0V-fA8V)]g. 




Imp erfe ct. 




l7iiJi{a-o)oi-iiriv 


icp(X{8-6)0V-[A7]V 


8fA.lGd^{0-0)0V-{AriV 




hm[d-ov)(a 


8q]i.X{8-ov)ov 


£fAlGd{6-0V)0V 




hiii{d-t)d-xo 


iq)lX{8- 8)81-70 


8lXlGx>{6-8)<)V-70 




infi{a-6)M-{X8d-ov 


i(piX{£-6)0V-fA8{>0V 


ilxiG{f^{o-6)ov-fj.8x}ov 




£zt{-i{a-e)d-a\}ov 


iq)lX{8-8)8l-Gx)-0V 


8^iG{)-{6-8]OV-Gx>OV 




£zi}i{u-t)U'Od^riV 


iq>(X{8-t)8L-Gd-riv 


ifiiG-Oio-Epv-G-O-fiv 




iTiii{a-6)(6-[A8d-a 


iq)(X{8-6)ov-pi8d-a 


8lxiG'0[o-o)ov-ix8{ya 




£7lfA.{d-8)d-Ox)-8 


iq)iX{8-8)8i-G\>e 


ifii.Gd-{6-8)ov-G{)-e 




87tlA{a-0)dj-VZ0 




iqii}^e-o)ov-vTo 


£[XIG{^6-o)OV-VZO 



160 



PARADIGMS OF CONTRACT VERBS. 



[§136. 



Modes 

and 

Participial.s. 


i 'A 


Impcrftct. 




Cliaractorislic a. 


Characteristic e. 


Characteristic o. 




Opta- 
tive, 


S. 1. 

2. 

3. 
D. 1. 

2. 

3. 
P. 1. 

2. 

3. 


Til.({a-oi)(i)-^ii 
Tifi{d-oig)(pg 
TifA{d-oi)q) 

rifi{d-oL)(»-rov 
rifA,(a-oi)c{>-Triv 
7iix{a-0i)q}-fA,8V 

7lfl)d-0l)(l)-T£ 

T:iiA{d-oi)q)-£v 


Cpl7.{£-0l)0l-jll 

qjilik'-oigjoig 
(pd{E-oi)oi 

(pil{£-oi)oi-rov 

(pil{£-Ol)Ol-TT^V 
Cpd{£-Ol)Oi-fl£V 
Cptl{£-Ol)Ol-ZE 
(piX[E-0l)0i-£V 


liiod{o-oi)ol-fii 
^io&{6-oig)oig 
ixio{>{6-oi)oi 

fiia{>{6-oi)oi-70v 
[iiad-{o-OL)oi-TriV 

[XlGd^{()-Ol)Ol-flEV 

1116{>[6-01]0L-IE 

lllOd^[6-0l)0l-EV 




Attic 
Opta- 
tive, 


S. 1. 

2. 

3. 
D. 2. 

3. 
P. 1. 

2. 

3. 


T(ji{a-oi)c6-j]v 

riji{a-0L)q)-7]g 

riji[a-oi)oy7i 

rili{a-oi)o)-7jrov 

ri^{a-oi)q)'7]TriV 

zili{a-oi)c6-r^^£v 

Tili[a-oi)cg-r^t8 

tlfx{d-Oi)cp-£V 


Cpll{E-0l)0L-7JV 

(piX[£-oi)ot-7jg 
(piX[E-oi)oL-rj 
(piX{E-oi)oi-7irov 
(piX{£-oi)oi-7jrrjV 

(p(X{£-0i)0l-r^^£V 

(piX{£-OL)oi-riT8 
q)iX{8-oi)oi-£v 


inodio-oi)oi-rjv 
fiiad^{o-oi)oi-rig 

fXlod{0-0l)0l-7] 

fiiad^{o-oi)oi-rirov 
liio\>[o-oi)oi-7ir7iv 
liiOx)^^[o-oi)oi-riiiEv 

fllGd{0-0l)0l-riZS 
{AlGd'{0-0l)0l-EV 




Indi- 
cative, 


Perf. 


ZS7lfA,7]Xa 
TTECpCOQdxa 


7ZEq)iX7]xa 


llEllLO&W/.a 




Plup. 


izF.IifjlTJXSlV 

i7T8q}C0Qdxeiv 


£7ZE(piX7l'A£lV 


ifiEfxiO'&ojy.Eiv 




Fut. 


zifiTjom (pcoQaaco 


qjiXi^aco 


fiiad^coaco 




Aor. 


£TiiA.7jGa icpcoQccaa 


£q)iX7j(ya 


ilAiod^cooa 




F.Pf. 


1 






PAS 


Aorist, 1 iri.fi7j'&7]v icpcoQa&Tjv \ iq)ili]&tiv \ iiAio-O-cod^r^v \ 


Verbal adjectives : rtiA,t]-reog, -tea, -reor, cpcoQa-zeog, -tea, -te'oVj 



136. With short Voivel 



ACTIVE. 



Tenses. 



Characteristic a. \ Characteristic e. \ Characteristic o. 



Present, 

Imperfect, 

Perfect, 

Pluperfect, 

Futm*e, 

Aorist, 



07i[a-G})M, to draw, 

£()7l[a-0V)(OV 

'iandxa 
EOTtdy^Eiv 

OTiaGCO 



Z£X{8-(o)co,to com- 

£Z£X[e-ov)ovv [plde, 

TEtiXExa 

ezeteXexeiv 

zeXoj 

ezeXegu 



aQ{o-oj)co, to plough, 

riQ[o-ov)ovv 

aQ-riQO'Aa 

dQ-riQOXElV 

aQooo) 
riQooa 



PAS 



Aorist, 



{EOTid-a-'&riv \ iz eXe- 6 -x^ ?] v | /^Qodr^v 



Verbal adjectives: cna-G-ziog, -zla, -ziov, 



§ 136.1 



PARADIGMS OF CONTRACT VERBS. 



161 



Imperfect. 



Cluinu-toristic a. 



Cliamcteristic £. 



Characteristic o. 



rifi{d-0()(o-o 

Tlli{d-0i)(0-70 

Tiuia-otyo-iiEO^ov 
rifi{(i-o()ci)-aO'ov 

T//((«-o/)fo-//€i>a 

riji[d-oi)o:>-o&e 

Tifi{d-oi}(a-vTO 



qiX{e-oi)oi-{itiv 

(Jll{t-0l)0l-0 

q)il{t-oi)oi-To 

q)(l{E-oi)oi-^exyov 

q:().{t-oi)oi-(7x}ov 

(f;il{e-0()ot-GO-r,v 

q)il{e-ot)oi-fi£d-a 

q)il{s-oi)oi-a&e 

q:(X{e-oi)oi-vTO 



lnad^[o-oi)oL- 

[H6d{6-0()01- 
IJ((jx)'{6-0l)0i- 
^IO\}{0-0t)0{- 

^(gO-{6-oi)oi- 

fAlOx}{0-0l)ol- 
^t6\}{0-0l)0l- 

[xi(j'0-{6-Oi)oi- 

lH6'd-{6-0i)0l- 




TO 

iiE{yov 

od-QV 



TETiiaifiai 
7i£q:c6odixai 



STZeCfCOQdflTjV 



7zsq)iXi]{.iai, 



i7Z£CflX]^{l7]V 



l^E[Al6&03^ai 



lllEtllO&WllilV 



ztfir^oo^cu q:coQdaofiai 



qiiXrjaofiai 



sTifiTjaafiriv sq)ODQuGafiriv 



eqjiXrjaafxJiV 



TETija]60[A,cu7ieqojodGouai 



7TECf(h'^G0pi(U 



^iad-(ooofjiai 



£[jio&co(jdfirjv 



IxEuio&oJOoiiai, 



SIVE 



Future, ] Tijxrjd-rjOOfAai qjCOQaO-fiGOi^ai. \ CfiXrid^fjao^at \ iii6&(od^)]O0fAt 



(flhj-ZEOg, -TEa, -TEOV, lAlGd-OJ-ZEOg, -teci, -zeov. 



i n fo r ming the Tenses. 



(120.) 



31 1 D D L E . 



Characteristic a. 



Chai-acteristic e. 



Characteristic o. 



67i{a-o]o}-fAai 
i67t{a-o)(6-fxi]v 
Eana-a-iiat 
ioTT d-o- fir^v 

andaofxai 



7El{E-0)0V-fJ,ai 
izEl{E-6)OV-fJ,7]V 

ZET eXe- - fiai 

iz EZeXe-O- fl7]V 

zEXoviiai 
EZEXEodiniv 



aQ[o-o)ov-y.ui 

'^Q{0-6)0V-fl7]V 

dQ-riQOfx.ac 
dQ-}]Q6fA.r^v 
doooofiai 
riQaadfir^v 



SIVE. 



I Future, | o n a- o -{^ ijo o iiai \ z eXe- a - &/] o o iiai I don&i]aoiicu 
zeXE-G-ZEog, -a«, -eov, dgo-ZEvg, -Ea, -tov. 



162 REMARKS ON THE CONJ. OP^ CONTRACT VERBS. [§ 137. 

Remark. On the formation of the Perf and Aor. with tr, see §§ 130, 131 ; 

on the omission of the a in uori()Ofiixi, ri()tdr]v, see §131, 5; and on the 
Attic Keduphcation in a(j-ij()oixui, see § 124, 2. Tlie furtlier inflection of 
t(T7ia-(T-fAtn^ e(jJT(x-a-fxT]v, rtjske-ff-fuai, eTSJfXi-cr-f^Tjv, is like that of yt/.ilsv- 
a-fiai, § 133. On the Attic Fut., ifXiau) = rtAw, -tig, etc., juiaofxuL = 
rsXovixai, t^^fi, [«')] etc., see § 117. 

§137. Re 7)1 arks on the Conjug-ation of Contract 

Verbs . (121.) 

1. The Attic dialect omits contraction only in Poetry, and there very 
seldom ; yet verbs in -tea with a monosyllabic stem are a uniform exception, 
e. g. nXict), to sail, nvio), to blow, -^iix), to run, etc., which are contracted only 
into -tt(from ~ih or -fs) ; in the remaining forms they are uncontracted, e. g. 
Act. Pr. Ind. nliw, nXug, nltl, nXio fxev, tiIhtb, nXiovaL{v), 

Subj. 71 X i w, n X £ j] c, nX s r/, n X s m fi e v, n X iT}T e, nXi o)a i[v ). 
Imp. nXil. Inf. nXnv. Part. nXsbJV. 
Impf. Ind. £71 A £ y, tnXsig, snXsi, inXsofXEV, inXuis, etzXeo v. 
Opt. n X s t fx L, nXio ig, etc. 
Mid. Pr. Ind. n Xso fx a i, n Xs tj, nXuruL, tiXeo iub& ov, nXEla&ov, etc. 
Iiif nXEldd^ai. Part. nXsofiEvog. Impf inXEOfirjv. 

2. The verb d s o), to bind, is commonly contracted in all the forms, par- 
ticularly in compounds, e. g. to dovv, tov dovvjog, dtadui\uai, y.uiEdovv. 
But d 6 1, necesse est, and d Eo^cii,to need, follow the analogy of verbs in 
-£0), with a monosyllabic stem, e. g. to deov, d80}.iai, diHa&ai ; uncontracted 
forms of dboixai occur, instead of those contracted into -el, e. g. (5«Tat, 
dsEcrd-ai, e8eeto, Xen., and sometimes also forms of other verbs belonging 
here are uncontracted, e. g. etiXeev, X. H. 6. 2, 27. tcXeel, Th. 4, 28. 

3. Several verbs deviate in contraction from the general rules, e. g. 

(a) -«£ and -uel are contracted into -ri and -?/, instead of into -a and -«, 
e. g. S(a - 0)) c5, to live, ^j]g, -^, —iliop, -'ijte, Lif ^j]v, Imp. Jj], Impf e^ojv, 
-r}g, -T], -TjTOV, -tjTrjv, -■J/Ts ; — n e i v [u - u) uj, to hunger, Inf. TiEivfjv^ 
etc.; — d np{d-(o)bJ, to thirst, diipffg, etc.. Inf. d up fiv; — y.v{a-w)bi, 
to scratch. Inf. y.vfjv; — or ^ (a- to) oi, to run, Inf o-jU/Jv ; — j/^(«-w)c5, 
to rub, Inf. ipfjv ; — / q{(x- o)bj- fxa i, to use, /^f], yQi]Tai, ^Qr/iT^ai,', 
so a n X Q oj jj. a I, to have enough, u7Toxoi](j&(iL ; — « tt / ^ ?; (abridged 
fvovci uTioxQ]]), it suffices. Inf. a^o/fjiiv, Impf. anExori; — /^(«-a))a>, 
to give an oracle, to prophesy, xqji, XQli'^- 

(b) -00 and -oe are contracted, in the Ionic manner, into -co, instead of 
into -ov, and -0/; into -w, instead of into -oi, e. g. QLy{6-(xi) w, to freeze, 
Inf. ^lycov, Aristoph., but qiyovv, X. Cy. 5. 1, 10. Part. G. ^lydyTog, 
Aristoph., but Qiyovvrmv, X. H. 4. 5, 4. and Qiyioaa, Simon, de mu- 
lier. 26. Subj. gtyo), PI. Gorg. 517, d. Opt. Qiyo)r]v, Hippocr. 

Remark 1. The Ionic verb 18 q 6 w, to sweat, corresponds with ^ i / o' co, 
to freeze, though Avith an opposite meaning: IdqCJai, IdQcoriv, ISfjojaa, \8Q(x}VTEq. 

4. The following things are to be noted on the use of the Attic forms of 
the Opt. in - riv, § 116, 8, namely, in the Sing, of verbs in -sw and -ow, the form 
in -olriv is far more in use than tlie common form, and in verbs in -wco it is 



§ 138.] FORMATION OF THE TEN3ES OF IMPURE VERBS. 163 

used almost exclusively ; but in the Dual and PI. the common form is more 
in use. The third Pers. PI. has always the shorter form, except that 
Aeschin., 2. § 108. Bekk., uses doxoi'ijaav. 

5. The verb Xov co, to wash, though })ro])erly not a contract, admits contrac- 
tion in all the forms of the Impf. Act. and of the Pres. and Impf Mid., which 
end in -s or -o, e. g. eXov instead of f'AoiT, eXoifzev instead of eXovofxev, Mid. 
Xovfiai, (Aoff), Xovrai, etc., Imp. AoD, Inf. Xovcr^ai, Impf. ilov^rjv, eXoi, iloino, 
etc., as if from the stem viOESl-, still, micontracted forms are found, e. g. 
Xovo^uttt, eXovovTo, Xen. 

Rem. 2. On the change of the accent in contraction, see § 30, 2. 



n. Formation of the Tenses of Impure Verbs. 

§ 138. Gene r a I Remarks, (i26.) 

Pure and Impure Stem. — Theme. 

1. Impure verbs, i. e. those whose characteristic is a conso- 
nant, undergo a variety of changes in the stem ; a part of these 
are occasioned by the formation of the tenses ; the stem of the 
verb admits, 

(a) Either a strengthening of the consonants, e. g. tvu-t-m, stem TTII; 
y.Qcx^-M, stem KPAF; q^gd^M, stem (l^PA/J ; even an entire syllable is 
inserted, e. g. afiaQT-nr-M, stem "AMAPT -, 

(b) Or a strengthening of the stem-vowel, e. g. (fsvy-oi, stem (I^IT; Xi]d^-(a, 
stem AAO\ u/x-w, stem TAK-, 

(c) Or a change of the stem-vowel in the tenses ; this change may be 
called a Variation, § 16, 6, e. g. nXim-w, i-xXu7i-rjv, ai-ylocp-a ; comp. 
Eng. steal, stole, stolen. 

2. The two stems of verbs, which are thus changed in 
the formation of the tenses, are to be distinguished, namely, the 
original and simple stem, and the strengthened stem ; the first 
is called the pure stem, the last, the impure. The Pres. and 
Impf. of these verbs commonly contain the impure stem ; the 
Secondary tenses, when such are formed, and specially the 
second Aor. as a general thing, contain the pure stem ; the re- 
maining tenses may contain either the pure or the impure stem, 
e.g. 

Pres. TV3T-T-W, to strike, Aor. IT. Pass, e-tv n-i]v Fut. Act. txupa [tvtx-(tm) 
" Xdn-b), to leave, " Act. i-Xin-ov " " XslipM {Xslji-aa}) 

" (T$iu'C-(t), to kill, " Yass. i - a (f a / - rjv " " crcfa'^b} 

" cpaiv-M, to show, " " e~(fuv-'r}v " Mid. q) a v - ov^ai 

" (f^HQ-ia, to destroy " " i-cp&ug-rjv^^ Act. q) & e q - w. 

3. For every form of a verb, which cannot be derived from 



164 IMPURE VERBS. STRENGTHENING OF THE STEM. [§ 139. 

the Pros, tense in use, another Present is assumed, mostly for 
the mere ])iirpose of formation ; this may be termed the Theme, 
d^t^a, and it is printed in eapitals, so as to distinguish it from 
tlie form of the Pres. in actual use, thus, e. g. qtvyoj is the Pres. 
form in use, <I^Tr^ is the assumed Pres. form, or the Theme, 
in order to construct the second Aor., 'i-cpvy-ov. 



§139. Strengthening of the Stem. (127.) 

1. The strengthening of the stem by a consonant is merely 
the strengthening of the simple characteristic consonant of the 
stem by means of another consonant, e. g. 

TLTiTw, to strike, Aor. 11. Pass. i-Tv n-rjv 
TttTTO), to arrange, " " i-T ocy-rjv 

xgd'Cco, to cry, " Act. e-xgoiy-ov. 

2. Yet the stem, strengthened in this way, is found only in 
the Pres. and Impf. ; in the other tenses the simple stem ap- 
pears, e. g. 

Pres. xviiTbj Iinpf. eivjijov Aor. IE. Pass, iivmjv Fut. Tvip(o {Tvucrw). 

Remark 1. The characteristic of the pure stem, e. g. n in TTU-fL is 
called the pure characteristic ; that of the impui'e stem, e. g. nx in zvm-a, 
the impure characteristic. 

3. In order to strengthen the stem by the prolongation of the 
stem-vowel, the short stem-vowel of many verbs is lengthened 
in the Pres. and Impf. ; this short vowel reappears in the second 
Aor., and in liquid verbs in the Fut. Thus, 

« is changed into 7^ in mute verbs, e. g. ( I'-Aa ^-0 y ) )J]d^(xt 

a " at Uquid " " ( g? a v - c5 ) cpalvo) 

S " 8L " " '' {(p'&SQ-CO) (p^sigb) 

t " u mute " " (I'-yLiTT-oj') Idnb) 

I " i " and liquid verbs, " { i-x qH ^-r}v) xgl^a 

V " V " " " " ^^{s~q>gvy-7]v) cpgiyoi 

V " 8V mute verbs, " [t-cpv y -ov) (psvyco. 

Rem. 2. The difference between the Lnp£ and the second Aor. Lid. and 
Opt., and between the Pres. and second Aor. Subj. and Imp., depends upon 
this strengthening of the stem, e. g. sy.ga^ov sy.gayov, y.ga'Coifii y.gayoifii, 
y.ga^o) ygocyu, y.gd^s y.gdys', — ekemov ilinov, lunoifii }unoL^i, luna Xtjioj, 
leins line. 



§ 140.] VERBS. CHANGE OF THE STEM-VOWEL. 165 



§140. Change or Variation of the Stem-voiveL 

(133, 134.) 

1. Tlie change or variation of the stem-vowel, § 138, 1, (c), oc- 
curs only in the Secondary tenses, except in a few first Perfects. 

2. Most mute, as well as liquid, verbs, with a monosyllabic 

stem and with £ as a stem-vowel, take the vowel of variation, 

namely, short d in the second Aor. instead of £, e. g. 

jQin-o}^ to tuni, Aor. U. Act. s-tqciti-ov 

y.XsJi-T-oj, to steal, " Vass. i-y.i a ti-tjv 

TQScp-a), to nourish, " " i-r g « €p - 7]v 

(TTQsq)-(x}, to turn, " " i-aTQ&cp-rjv 

/5o£/-G), to u'et, " " s-§ Q iy. x-'>]V 

dsQ-03,toJlay, " " i-duQ-rjv 

(TTslX-oj, to send, " " i-aju X-tjv 

(TTIsIq-O), to sow, " " E-tTTtaQ-rjV 

cf)&HQ-(o, to destroy, " " i-cp&aq-'riv 

isf^v-o), to cut, " Act. s-xa fz~ ov. 

(The Aor. 11. tiafiov is veiy rare and mostl)- doubtful, commonly hffxov.) 
But polysyllables do not undergo this change, e. g. i^yysXov, rj/ysXrjv, b)q)eXov, 
'ti/SQOfiTjv. The fii-st Aor. Pass, of t^sttw is iTQiq)d^r}v, of jQeq)(o,s&g£(pd^r]v, tV- 
7Q£if&^v is rather poet., ixXsq)d^7]v is Ion. and Eur. Or. 1380. ; but i^gix^rjv 
is prose, i^Sgoixrjv is rare ; the fii'st Aor. Pass, ofdigca, atsXXa, cFTislgoj, cpd^slgo), 
is not found. 

Remark 1. This change of the stem-vowel does not occur in the second 
Aor. Pass, of some verbs of this class, (the second Aor. Act. not being used), 
because the second Aor. Pass, cannot be mistaken for the Impf., see § 141, Rem., 
e. g. j(5 A £ TT CO , to see, Impf. B-^Xm-ov, second Aor. Pass. i-§Xin-riv (first Aor. 
Pass, is wanting) ; Xiyw, to collect (in compounds), second Aor. Pass, xkts- 
Xiy-Tjv, (TvvEXiyriv (and <TVV£Xs/&r]v, b^bXbx&i]v ; with the meaning to say, al- 
ways bXbx^tjv)', so also Xbtv-o), to peal, i-XsTT-rjv first Aor. Pass, wanting; 
71 A £ >J - w , to braid, i-nXda-r^v and B-7iXsii-'i]v (fu'st Aor Pass. inXix^rjv 
Aesch. Eum. 259.); qpAs/- w, to burn, i-cpXBy-')]v, rarely tcpXix^riv; ipsyo), 
to censure, i-ipiy-tjv, first Aor. Pass, wanting. 

Rem. 2. The verb ttXijtt oo, to strike, retains the rj in the second Aor. 
Pass, as a simple, but when compounded, it takes the vowel of variation, 
namely, a, thus, i-nX^^y-Tjv, i^s-nXuy-rjv, y.aTE-nXcty-rjv. 

3. Liquid verbs with monosyllabic stems and with the stem- 
vowel £, take the short a, not only in the second Aor., but also 
in the first Perf. and first Plup. Act. and the Perf and Plup. 
Mid. or Pass, and the first Aor. Pass., e. g. 

aiiXXb}, to send, Fut. areX-oj Pf B-criaX-yct B-GTaX-nai Aor. i-(TTocX-&rjv 
cpd^slga, to destroy, Fut. q)&Bg-M Pf. B-cpd^ag-aa B(pd^ag-y.ai. 

But polysyllables do not undergo this change, e. g. ilyyeXxa, ^jyyiX&Tjv from 
ayyiXXb), ayriyBQfioti, rjyigd^rjv from otyiigw. Comp. No. 1. 
23 



166 VERBS. REMARKS ON THE SECONDARY TENSES. [§ 141. 

4. Those mute verbs, which have an « in the final stem-syl- 
lable of the Pres., take the o of variation in the second Perf. ; but 
those which have ei in the final stem-syllable, take the oi ; 
li(]nid-v('rl)s, wliich have e or ei in this syllable, take the o, e. g. 

dsQy.Ofiui, (poet.) to see, di8oQ-/.a ^too), to Jim/, dedoQu 

TQeqio, to nourish, lerQoipu iytl(j(i),to ivake, f'/yi'i/oQu, I aivoke, 

luTTb), to leave, Xiloina anuQb), to sow, tanoQu 

nilx^oi, to persuade, nsnoi-&a, I trust, (f>d^d{)W, to destroy, tcf&OQa. 

Rem. 3. Here are classed the following anomalies in the second Perf., 
I'5^w (Epic), Hojda instead of si&a, to he wont, dwdirai, HO}&b)g, Plup. flai- 
•&iiv ; — 'jj^T/Ifl, video, olda, I know ; — "JJKSI, Eoixa, to be like, to appear, 
Plup. iojasLv; — uttio (poet.) to cause to hope, eoXna, I hope, Plup. iudneiv, J 
hoped; — ^EPm, to do, toQyu,V\u\). iwoynv, — ^ijy-vv^i, to break, toijoiya, 
I am broken. 

5. The following take the o, the vowel of variation, in the 
first Perf., contrary to the rule in No. 1. 

xXsTiTw, to steal, first Perf y.iy.locpa , but Perf Mid. or Pass. vAylf^^iai (veiy 
rare and only poet. ysylayi^aL). 

Xiyci), to collect, first Perf ^vvsiXoxa, s^elXox a; but Perf Mid. or Pass. 
avvelkfyf/ai. 

TiSfiTTO), to send, first Perf ninoncpa', but Perf Mid. or Pass, nanspi^ai. 

TQSTia), to tui-n, " " JST Qoq) a, (like the second Perf of TQscpM, to 
nourish, and T£T^«qpa ; still, this last form is rare, the more usual form is 
TSTQOcpa. The a in the Perf. Act. is not found elsewhere, and is pro- 
bably here used only to distinguish it from isiQocfa Perf. of T^£q)a}. 

6. The following mute verbs with a monosyllabic stem and 
with the stem-vowel £, take, lilve liquid verbs, No. 3, the a of 
variation in the Perf. Mid. or Pass. ; still the a is not found in 
the first Aor. Pass., as is the case in liquid verbs, e. g. 

aTQscpoj, to turn, Pf. Mid. or P. Xaj q a ^i ^u i, but first A. P. saTQScp&rjv 

TQeixM, to turn, " TixQa^iiaL, " " ijQscp&r^v 

igecpbi, to now'ish, " TS^Qa^^ai, " " i&QscpdrjV, 
On yXimo), see No. 5. 

§141. Re 771 arks on the Secondary Tenses. (135,135.) 

1. The Secondary tenses difier from the Primaiy, partly in wanting the 
tense-characteristic, and consequently in appending the personal-endings, 
-ov, --6}iT]v, -7]v, -ijcrofiuL, -a and -slv, to the pui'e characteristic of the verb, 
e. g. second Aor. X-lin-ov, but first Aor. i-naldsv-a-a ; partly in being form- 
ed throughout from an unchanged pure verb-stem, (except the Perf which 
prefers a long vowel, see No. 2.), e. g. Xhtko I'-Ai^i-or, cpsvyoi e-cpvy-ov; 



§ 141.] VERBS. REMARKS ON THE SECONDARY TENSES. 167 

and partly in taking the vowel of vaiiation, e. g. aiqiifxa i-at qu (p- tjv 
(TTQix q> - )]aoijai, but e-axQi(p-&'i}y. 

"2. The second Perf. lengthens the sliort stem-vowel, i. e. a into t], and, 
when it stands after other vowels or after q, into a, e. g. 

x()«3a), to cnj out, second Aor. s-xQuy-ov second Perf. y.i-y.oay-a 
(poiaaai, to shudder, stem : <I>FfK [i) " 7te-(pnly.-a 

SixXXct), to bloom, Fut. t9^wA-w " li-^rjk-a ; 

so, 7Tsq}rjra, XsXij&a fi-oni flL4N-M, AAO-w, or it retains the long vowel or 
diphthong of the Pres., e. g. nicfzyyoi, from (psvyoi, but second Aor. Act. 
sq:vyov, tixr^y.u trom t?)xw, but second Aor. Pass. eTuy.rjv; a short vowel oc- 
curs only in the cases referred to in § 124, and § 140, 4. 

Remark. Those verbs whose second Aor. Act. would not be distinguish- 
ed from the Impf , or at least, be distinguished only by the quantity of the 
stem- vowel, have no second Aor. Act. and Mid., but only the second Aor. 
Pass., since this last form has a different ending from the Impf., e. g. 
ygacpo) I. syQucpov A. I. Xyqaxpa A. II. Act. want.A.n.P. eyQacpi]v (A. I. P. does 

not occur) 
xXivo) " ty.llvov " vAiva " " " (y.Xivi]v (A. I. P. iylt- 

■dr]v in Aristoph.) 
ip\i/^(a " eipv/ov " tipv^vi " " " eipv^riv Plat, (in later 

writers stpiyijv ; A. I. eipvx&^v Plat.). 

3. The following things are to be noted ; (a) There is no verb which forms 
the three fii-st Aorists, together with the three second Aorists ; (b) There 
is no verb which has in use at the same time the second Aor. Act. and 
Mid., and the second Aor. Pass. ; but all verbs, which form the second Aor., 
have either the second Aor. Act. and Mid. only, or the second Aor. Pass, 
only. A single exception in regard to both the particulars specified, is seen 
in the verb TQsnb), to turn, which has three first Aorists together with three 
second Aorists, exqanov (Ion. and poet.) sTQUJiofzrjv^ sTqunrjv, BTosipa (the 
common form in Attic prose), sTQeipd^rjv transitive, e. g. TQEipaad^aL sig 
(fvyriv, to put to JligM, sTQscp&rjV rarely; but m compounds, e. g. ijiLjgicp&i]- 
vaL Antiph. 4. 126, 4. 127, 5. 

On this last point (b) there are but few exceptions, since either the second 
Aor. Act. and Mid. or the second Aor. Pass., occur but rarely, and mostly 
in the poet, dialect, e. g. hvnov Eur. and iivTirjv', Umov and iXtntjV Horn. 

4. It is rare that a verb has both Aor. forms in the Act., Pass, and JMid. ; 
where this is the case, the two forms are used under cei*tain conditions, 
namely : 

(a) The two Aor. forms of the Act. and Mid. have a different meaning, 
i. e. the first Aor. has a transitive meaning, the second Aor., an intransi- 
tive, as will be seen below. The same thing is true of the two forms 
of the Perf., where they are constructed from the same verb. 



168 FORMATION OF THE TENSES OF MUTE-VERBS. [§ 142. 

(b) The two forms of tlie Aor. belong either to different dialects, or dif- 
ferent periods, or to diflerent species of literature, i)ro»e or poetry. Thus 
the older Attic writers prefer the fuller form of the first Aor. Pass. ; the 
later, on the contrary, the softer second Aor. Pass., c. g. tax&rivai and t«- 
yijvaL. Still, in some verbs both forms occur in prose, e. g. anriXXd/^rjv 
and uni]XXix/rjv, etc. Several verbs in poetry have a second Aor., which 
in prose have commonly a first Aor. only, e. g. xtdvo), to kill, Aor. prose, 
iHTsivoc, poet. EKiavov and sxiav. 

(c) The two Aorists stand in such a relation to each other, that the forms 
of one Aorist take the place of the forms of the other not in use, and in 
this way each supplies, respectively, the place of the other, as will be seen 
under the verbs tI&ijjil and didoj^ii. 

A. Formation of the Tenses of Mute-Verbs. 

^M2. Introduction. (137.) 

Mute verbs are divided, like mute letters, into three classes, 
according to their primary sounds; in each of these classes, 
verbs with a pure characteristic in the Pres. and Impf. are dis- 
tinguished from those with an impure characteristic, § 139, 2. 

1. Verbs, whose characteristic is a Pi-mute, /?, tz, q) pure char- 

acteristic ; Tzt,^ 24, 1, impm-e characteristic, e. g. 

(a) pure characteristic, 7Ts{17t-co, to send, tQi^-co, to rub, yQdq)-(o, 
to ivrite ; 

(b) impure characteristic, rv7zt-(o, to strike, pure character- 
istic 71, pure stem TTII, ^laTtz-co, to injure, (/5, BAAB), 
Qint-(o, to hurl, (g), !P/f/J). 

2. Verbs, whose characteristic is a Kappa-mute, x, 7, x pure char- 

acteristic ; 6G or Attic rr, ^ 24, 1, impure characteristic, e. g. 

(a) pure characteristic, Ttliyi-coj to iveave, ay-co. to lead, revx-coj 
to prepare ; 

(b) impm-e characteristic, qiQifja-coj Att. cpQitt-a, to shudder, 
pm-e characteristic 'a, pm-e stem 0PIK, rdoG-co, Att. 
tdzT-oj, to arrange, (y, TAP), ^tjaa-a, Att. ^rirr-w, to covgh, 
{X.BHX). 

3. Verbs, whose characteristic is a Tau-mute, r, d, -&, pure 

characteristic ; t, § 24, 1, impure characteristic, e. g. 
(a) pure characteristic, dvvt-co, to complete, ad-co, to sing, 
7isid--co, to persuade ; 



§ 143.] MUTE VERBS. REMARKS ON THE CHARACTERISTIC. 169 

(b) impure characteristic, q^Qa^-oj, to say^ pure characteristic 
8, pure stem ^bPAJ. 

§143. Remarks on the Characteristic. (129,130.) 

1. The following mute verbs in -nxta and -anta (-ttw) form the Secondary 
tenses, esi)ecially the second Aor. Pass., and have for their characteristic, 

71 : xAcTiT-w, to steal, xojit-m, to cut, tujit-m, to strike, second Aor. Pass. 
i-xXa n ~7]v, etc. 

/? : (iXixTCT-b), to injure, and kq vtiz-03, to conceal, second Aor. Pass. i-^Xa § - 
7} V and e^5},(X(f&i]v, i-xQv^-tjv and ixQVCp&rjv. 

cp: panx-(x), to tinge, ^dm-oj, to bury, x^qvut-oo, to break, ^«7it-w, to sew 
together, qlm-bi, to cast, ay-dm-o), to dig, second Aor. Pass. «-/?« 9- 
r]v, i - T a q) - 7} V, i-TQvq>~rjv, i q-qu cp -tjv, ig-^tcp-rjv and 
ig^lq&Tjv, i-atcuq-rjv. 

X : qQiaao), to shudder, second Perf. ni-qgiy.-a. 

/: dXkdaaM, to change, second Aor. Pass. « XXd y-rjvai, first Aor. Pass. 
dXXix/diivai, Soph., Eur., Aristoph., fxuaaco, to knead [fxd y-ijvai), 
ogvaaco, to dig {6Qijy-i]vai and ogv/d^rivai), 7tli]ua(a, to strike {i- 
nXrjy-r^v, i^s- n Xu y- rjv), nQuatTM, to do [ni- n q a y - a), (JcpdrxM, to 
kill [i- a (pa y - rjv, rarely eaqdx^rjv), juaaw, to arrange [xaydg, 
Eur., elsewhere iidcx^rjv), qgdaao), to hedge round [icpQccy-rjv and 
e(fQux&r]v. 

2. Two verbs strengthen the pure characteristic x by t, like verbs with 
the impure characteristic tit : 

TTsxT-w (commonly nsxTsca, also nHy.io), to shear, to comb, Fut. ni^oj, 
etc. ; still y.siQeiv is commonly used for nixTstv with the meaning 
to shear, and y.Tsvi'QHv and ^rdvstv with the meaning to comb ; 

xly.T-oi (formed from Ti-T£x-co), to beget, Fut. li'^o^ai, second Aor. Act. 
Euy.ov, second Perf ts'toxw. 

3. The following verbs in -o-o-w, -ttw have a Tau-mute — not a Kap- 
pa-mute — for the pure characteristic : « ^ ju t t w (m^jUo^w), to Jit, Fut. -otrco ; 
— ^XItto), to cut honey combs, Fut. -tcco ; — (iqdaam (rarer pgd^o)), to 
shake ; — ig s(T(t m, to row, Fut. -sVw ; — n da a w, to scatter, Fut. -daw ; — 
nXd(T(7(o, to form, Fut. -acrw; — ml era a, to pound, Fut. -t'lrco ; — and 
Poet. I fj, d a a (x), to whip, Fut. -daw ; z v ca a a co, to sleep, Fut. -coaca ; Xsvaa o), 
to look, Fut. Xsvaoj ; Xlaa ofi ai (especially Hom., also XIto ^a i), to pray, 
Aor. iXiadfAtjv, iXLj6(^r]v ; vlaaofiai, vslaao^ai, to go, Fut. vslao^ai ; 
y Q V a a 0), to rust (Epic Perf xs-x6 gv & -fiui). 

Here are classed derivatives in -wttco: X i ^ ui t t oj, to hunger, 6v s i- 
g WTT 0), to dream, vnv (oxx a, to be sleepy. 

4. The following verbs in -a a w vai-y between the two formations : 
V da a (a, to press together, to draw, Fut. vd%(a, etc. ; Perf Mid. or Pass, vi- 
vaafiat ; verbal Adj. vaaxog ; — ucpvaa (o (Poet.), to draw water, Fut. -v^o), 
Aor. )](fvaa, 7]cpvadfj.r]v. 

5. Of verbs in -^w, whose pure characteristic is a Tau-mute, commonly 
d, there are only a few primitives, e. g. s^ojxai. Poet., xad^s^ofiai, prose, 
T seat myself , V^w, commonly xa&i'Cco, to seat, ax't'^f^-, to separate, ye^oi, 
alvum dejicere ; yet there are many derivatives, namely, all in -d^w and most 
in -it,(a, e. g. i&l'Cco, Hxd^o), etc. 



170 FORMATION OF THE TENSES OF MUTE VERBS. [§ 144. 

6. Verbs in -^w, whose ])ure clmracteristic is a Kappa-mute, commonly 
y, are mostly Onoifuttopodics, i. e. words wliose sound c(^rresponds to the 
sense; the greater part of these denote a call or soimd, e. g. a t « ^oj, /o 
groan^ Fut. «t«'jcu; uXuXaQu)^ to shout; {uidu'^u(Txf(XL, to sjjeak, Aor. 
wanting in Her.); xoi'CoJ, to squeak, to grunt (like a swine), Fui. >coV?oj ; 
X Q u^b), to scream, Aor. ty.{tuyov ; x q m Q o), to crash ; fi n a 1 1 C o), to whip ; 
d u ^(x), to scratch ; o i fi O) ^ o), to lament, Fut. oiiub)^Ojuai ; o ). o X v C o), to 
howl; 1^ V a T (X C 01, to tease ; aTw^to and a t uXui^M, to trickle ; ajEvd'^o), 
to sigh ; ai 7j Q i^u), to make firm ; ax l^ a>, to stick ; a v q I ^ (O, to whistle ; 
Fut. avql^oiiui, etc.; avQiaM, etc., later and not Att. ; acpu^oj (Att. 
(JcpixTJO)), to kill ; G (pv'QM, to undulate ; t q I'Q w, to chirp {ibt()V/(x) ; (plv^o), 
to bubble, and tlie Poet. ^ix'Cm, to chat, Fut. /5«?oj, third Perf. Mid. or Pass. 
/5f/5axr«t ; 8 ql Qoi, to slumber (/5(n|«t) ; 8 a. t'Qto, to divide, to kill ; iXsX I'Cw, 
to ivhirl, to tumble ; ivaqi^oj, spolio ; qi'Qoi (properly, to stretch, to stir), to 
do (toQ/a). 

7. The following verbs in -^w vary between the two modes of forma- 
tion : l3 a a T a C Cxi, to bear, Fut. —(xrrm, etc., Aor. fljuaiu/d^jjv ; — d ktt d yco, 
to doubt, dicTTixaoi), from which the verbal Subst. diaraypug and diajdaig; — 
vv a J a C bJ, to nod, to sleep, Fut. -liuo) and -«|a) ; — tt « / ^ w, to jest, Fut. 
naL^ov[iaL and 7iul^o(xai, Aor. Att. snuiaix (in later writers enai^a), Perf. 
Mid. or Pass. Att. jisnaitrpuL (in later writers ninaiy^ca) ; — u ^ttw^o), to ^ 
rob, Att. agnuaofiai, o]nd(ja, etc. (but in the Epic and Common language '^^ 

Sy\ aQTiu^w and -wcrw, et^ second Aor. Pass. i]Qnuyriv); — iiv'Qw, to groan, has 
D. d, 20. inspv^av, but in Hippocr. epvasv. 

8. The following verbs in -^w have for a pure characteristic //: xXd- 
L,(x>, to sound, to cry, Perf. xi-y.Xayy-a, Fut. xXuy'^a), Aor. dy.Xay^a ; — nXd^M, 
to drive round, Fut. nXdy^a, etc., Aor. Pass. enXdyx&rjV ; — a aXn l^oj, to 
blow a trumi)et, Fut. -ly^o), etc. (later also -hco, etc.). 

§ 144. Fo r m ation of tlie Tenses. (i38.) 

Mute verbs form the Fut. and the first Aor. Act. and INIid. 
with the tense-characteristic (T, and the first Perf. and first Plup. 
Act. with the aspirated endings -« and -£<V, when the charac- 
teristic is a Pi-mute or a Kappa-mute ; but with the endings 
-'/AC, - y.eiv, when the characteristic is a Tau-mute. Still, the 
Tau-mute is omitted before x, as also in the Perf. Mid. or Pass. 
before p, § 19, 1 ; and r, § 17, 5, is changed into o ; but this (T 
is omitted before o of the personal- endings, e. g. nei&w, to per- 
suade^ TttTteia^ai, -arai'^ (pQcH^oo^ to speak, TzdifQaGpca, -arai] still, 
the second Pers. is Tzinei-Gai. The vowels «, i, v are short in 
the verbs which have a Tau-mute as a characteristic before 
endings with the tense-characteristic c and x (-xa, -y.Hv), Cc g. 
qp^cc^oj, cpQciaa}, iqjoaca, mcpQccxa; Tildaoco, to form, nldccx)', w[iiZ(o, 
to think, ivofiioa-, y.Xv^oj, to ivash, -aIvoco, etc. 



§145.] 



PARADIGMS OF MUTE VERBS. 



171 



Remark 1. On the cliaiigcs -vvliich the Mutes undergo ])y tlio addition 
of the endings begiiniing Avith a, &, fj, or t, and hefbre the aspirated end- 
ings -«, -fiv, see §§ 17, 2 and 3. 19, 1. 20, 1 ; on tlie lengthening of -s into 
-ti belbre <j of verbs in -ivdco or -bvx^m, e. g. ansvd-b), to make a libation, 
Fut ((Tnivd-(JM) cnxdaio, Aor. Eiinfiau, Perf. INIid. or Pass. tanfLcr^ai, see 
§20, 2; on the omission of cr in endings beginning with or^, e.g. xiygicp^ixi 
instead of xsxQvip&at., nfTjliyJ^cti instead of nsnXs^&tti, see §25, 3; on the 
endings of the third Pers. PI. Perf. and Plup. Mid. or Pass., - « t ce t and 
- « TO instead of -viai, -vto, see §§ 18, 1 and 116, 15; on the vowel of va- 
riation in the Secondary tenses, and in some first Perfects and Perfects 
Mid. or Pass., see § 140 ; on the Att. Fut. of verbs in -oc'Cm and -/^w, e. g. 
^li^a^u), Fut. ^i^onTM, l3i(jb), -Ixg, -ix, -utov, -oj^sv, etc., X0|u/^w, Fut. y.Ojutao), 
xofiio), -lilg, etc., see § 117. 

Rem. 2, When ft precedes a Pi-mute, which serves as a characteristic, 
e. g. in ni^n-M, the ^ is rejected in the Perf. Mid. or Pass, before endings 
beginning with ^u, thus, nefin-b), to send, ns-ns^-^ui [instead of ns-nsiun- 
Hai, Tis-nffuiu-fztti), nsne^uipai, nsTiffimca, etc.. Inf. ntnfficp&ai, Part, nsnffi- 
fisvog; so xotfjnT-oj, to bend down, y.i-y.a^-^ui (instead of x£-x«|U7r-^^Ki, y.i- 
xafin-iAui). When tlie letter / would be regularly repeated before fi, one 
y is omitted, e. g. acplyy-w, to tie, e-a(piy-(.icei, (instead of s-acpiyy-f^ai), 
s(Tq)iy^ai, tacfuyxiai, etc.. Inf. iacflyy&ai, Part, iacpiyfxevoc', so t^dEyyoi, to 
convince^ i^fX-iiXfy^at, (instead of i^eXijXiyx^ai, i^eXijyyiiai), e^eXt^Xey^ut, etc. 



Paradigivis of Mute Verbs. 

§145. A. Verbs, id hose Characteristic is a Pi- 
mute, ^, 71, q) . (139.) 



(a) Pure Characteristic, /3, n , g), Fut. -ipm. 
tQ^^co, to rub. 



Pres. 
Impf. 
Perf. 

Plup. 
Fut. 
Aor. I. 



ACTIVE. 



Ind. tQi^-(o Subj. TQ'i^-co Imp. tqT^-b Inf. tqi^-fiv Part. rQi^-ojv 

Ind. s-tqT^-ov Opt tQi^-oi[Ai 

Ind. {rt-7Ql^-d) zk'-TQLcp-a Subj. re-T^t g^-co Imp. not used, Inf. 

TE-jQlcf-ivai Part. 'ze-TQTq}-c6g 
Ind. [i-Tt-Tol^-eiv) l-xe-TQiXf-Eiv Opt. te-tg'Kp-oifAi 
Ind. {tqi^-ooj) T0i\po3 Opt. zQixpoi^ii Inf. rQixpeiv Part. TQixpojv 
Ind. e-TQiU'a Subj. tqiUxo Opt. TQi\pai(ii Imp. tQixpov Inf. 

jQiWai Part. iQiWag. 



MIDDLE. 



Pres. Ind. TQ\^-oiiai Subj. zot^-cofiai Imp. rqi^-ov Inf. TQ'i^-eod'ai 

Part. 7Qi^-6fievog 
Impf. j Ind. i-zQi^-ofAriV Opt. TQi^-oifirjv 



172 



PARADIGMS OF MUTE VERBS. 



[§146. 



Perf. 


Ind. 


{rt-TQip-fiai) 


Imperative. 


Infinitive. 




S. 1. 


m-TQi^i-liai 


(T€-r(J//?-(70) 


(Tfc-r(;r/^-i>«t 




2. 


Tt-TQllpUl 


Tt-TQllpO 


tE-TQlCp-d^Ul 




;j. 


Tt-TQin-rai 


TE-r()lCf-d^(f) 






DA. 


7E-T()lfi-fAE&0P 




Participle. , 




ty 


Tt'-TQICf-{)OV 


rk'-TQlCf-x^OV 


zE-TQi[A-[itvog, -i]y -or 




;i. 


re-TQiCf-x^ov 


TE-TQtCp-OcoV 






P. 1. 


7E-TQ(fl-l^Ed^a 




Subjunctive. 




'2. 


rt-TQicp-OE 


rt-TQICp-dE 


rE-tQiji-fitvog w 




3. 


'TE-T(J(fA,-^EVOt Eiat{v) 


rE-TQicp-d^coaav 








or rt-TQicp-atai 


OrTE-T()l(p-d-(f3V\ 1 


Plup. 


S. 1. 


i-rE-7Ql^-ll7^V D. E-TE-TQI^-IIEOoV p. E-TE-TQllJ.-^E&a 


Ind. 


2. 


i-TE-TQlWO E-7E-Z(JlCp-{}0V i-rt-7Qiq)-\)^E 




Ji. 


E-XE-TQin-rO i-TE-ZQlXp-d-ilP TE-TQIfl-lJlEVOl 7]GaV 


Opt. 




TE-TQffl-^EVOg Ell]V [oY E-TE-rQiq-ato 


Fut. 


Ind. TQi\pofA,ai Opt. TQiivoifitiV Inf. tniivtoihu Part. rQi.ipofxtvog 


Aor. I. 


Ind. i-tQiUiufit]v Subj. TQiipcofiai Opt. TQixpaiiiriV Imp. toiiVai 




Inf. tQixpuodai Part. rQiipd^tvog 


F. Pf. 


Ind. 78-7Qi\pofiaL Opt. zE-TQiyjoifAr^v Inf. Te-TQi'ipea'&ai Part. r«- 




7()^li^0ftf^0^. 


PASSIVE. 1 


Aor. I. 


Ind. {i-TQi^-d-rfp) i-rQicp-d-rjv Subj. rgixp-doS Opt. TQiqj-d^Ei/jv 




Inf TQiqj-'&TJvaL Imp. TQicp-O^riti Part. TQicp-dsig 


Fut. I. 


Ind. tQixf-d-ljaofiai Opt. TQiq)-'&riooi[j.}jv Inf. TQicp-d^rjaEod'ai 




Part. TQi(f-d-7](j6fi£vog 


A. II. 


Ind. i-TQi^-jjv Subj. tqi^-oj Opt. iQi^-Eir^v Imp. rql^-ri^i 




Inf TQl^-TJvm Part. tgJ^-Eig 


F. II. 


Ind. TQ^§-rjoofiai Opt. tq)^-)iO0iix}]v Inf. TQ^^-riOEod^ai Part. 




r(»J^|?-?/(jOja£ro^'. 


Verb 


al adjective : [tqi^-rog] rqin-Tog, -i], -6v, TQin-ztog, -la., -eov. 



146. (b) Impure Characteristic, ttt in Pres. and Impf. 

Fut. -1//W. (i-io.) 



ACTIVE. 


MIDDLE. 1 PASSIVE. 


Pres. 


J{0;77'-C0 


yoTtr-o^cu 


Impf. 


€-xo;rr-oi' 


E-y.07T7-0f^r^V 


Perf I. 


{x8-'A07z-a) yJ-'AO(fi-a 


y.E-y.Ofi-f^cu, like ZE-TQijXfxai 


Plup. I. 


i-xE-x6q;-Eiv 


i-TiE-'AOfi^r^v, like i-rs-TQifAfiriV 


Perf 11. 


TiE-'AOTi-a (Horn.) 




Plup. II. 


E-'AE-'AOTZ-EIV 




A. I. i-y.6q:-d-)jv 


Fut. 
Aor. I. 


{'Aon-aa) y.oxpa 
£-y,o\pa 


yoxbouai 
i-yoWafir^v 


F. I. y.occ-d^raofxai 

A TT ' ' 

A. 11. E-xoTZ-r^v 


Fut. Pf. 




y,E-yoU)o^ai 


F .11. yon-rjcoiiai 


V€ 


;rbal adjective : aoTT-zog, -tj 


-6v, y,07Z-TEog, -Ts'a, -teov. 1 



M47.] 



PARADIGMS OP MUTE VERBS. 



173 



Inflection of the Perf. Mid. or Pass. 
xdfi:T-r-co, to bend down [y.txaft-^tai for xtxai^fi-fiai, § 144, Rem. 2). 


Ind. 


S. 1. 

2. 

3. 
D.l. 

2. 

a 
p. 1. 

2. 
3. 


xtxauftai 

xtxiifiil'ca 

yJxaiiTiTca 

xtxdufiaO-QV 

xtxaficf&ov 

xt'x(cucf{yov 

xexuftiitxya 

xtxafACfiys 

xtxaniaroi dai{v) 


Imperative. Infinitive. 
xt'xa{nf>o xexa^cpd^ai 
x,y.u,.q.»o> Participle. 
■Jy.at.cp9ov "eyaH^ivo,, -y, -ov 
xsxdficfOcov Subjunctive. 

y.Exa^litvog w 
y.iy.an(p&e 
y.£xdfiq)d-co6av or y.f-xdfAXf{y(ov] 


Verbal adjective : xauTiiog, -?/, -or, xafATrn'og, -zaa, -ztov. | 



§147. B. Verhs^ ivhose Characteristic is aKappa- 
mute^ 7, X, %. (i4i.) 

(a) Pure Characteristic, y^ x, %. (b) Impure Characteristic in the Pres. and 
Impf., (Tcr, Att. TT, rarer 'C. 

7T)Jy.-co, to weave. Fut. -tco. rdoGco, Att. rdrrco, to arrange. 



ACTIVE. 1 MIDDLE. | 


ACTIVE. 


MIDDLE. 


Pres. 


7l)Jx-M 


Ttlix-oiiai 


zaaa-(o 


zu(J6-0fiai 


Impf 


t-7i).ey.-ov 


i-7i).8x-6^ir^v 


8-za66-ov 


8-ZaG6-0p]V 


Perf 


{7i8-7zley.-d) 


{7T8-7Zl8X-[iai) 


[zi-zay-d) 






Tze-nXsy-oc TTt-TiXey-f^ai 


z8-zay-a 


z8-zayfiai 


Plup. 


i-Tze-Tzhy-aiv i-7i£-7ilty-fA}jv 


8-z8-zai-8iv 


8-Z8-zay-piv 
zd^o^ai 


Fut. 


{7Z}.8X-600) TzXe^CO 


Ttla'^Ofiai 


[zd.y-Gixi) zd^G) 


Aor. 


t-Tilt^a 


i-Tila^diJtjv 


8-za^a 


i-za^diir^v 


F. Pf. 




TTS-Tlh'^Ofiai 




T8-za^0fiat 


PASSIVE. 1 


Aor. I. 


[i-nlex-d-r^v) i-Tzlaj-^riv 


[i-zdy-'&riv) e-zd)(^-d^r^v 


Fut. I. 


7i}.8y-&r^60{iai 


zay-'&ijaoiiai 


A. II. 


i-7T).dy.-7jv and i-nXax-ijv 


8-zay-7]v 


F. II. 


TtXax-^GOfAUl 


zay-ijGOiiai 


Verbal Adj. Ttlexiog, -/], -ov ; Tzlex-rt'og, -zm, -zaov; zaxtog^zaxthog. 


Inflection of the Perf Mid. or Pass. 


r&(SG(x), to arrange, and ocftyyco (§ 144, Rem. 2), to bind. 


Ind.S.l. 
2. 


Z8zay\iai 
Z8zalai 


86CpiyfiaL 
86q)iy^ai 


Imper 
ziza^o 


ative. 
aacpiy^o 


3. \rtTuyaai, 


86(^iyy.zai 


zezdx^co 


iaqjiyX'&oD 


D. 1. rsTdyfjie&ov 


8(JCfiy^8d-OV 






2. TEzay&ov 


aacpiyX-d-ov 


zlzayd^ov 


86(piyxS-ov 


3. zezuy&ov 


aocptyyd-ov 


zezdy&oiv 


iacpiyx&cov 


P. 1. zETuyfisd^a 


i<jq:iyfi8&a 






2. \ztza7{>8 


86q}iyy&£ ^ ^ 


Z8zayp8 


8(jCpiyX^£ 


3. Izezayfitvot eiGi{v 


8OCpiy^8V0lEl6l{v) 


zazdyd-coaup 


8GCfiyyd-coaav 


1 or zezuyuzai 




or zazdy&cov 


or 80 cfi I yxOoJV 


Inf. zetd'j^d^ai la(fiyy&ai Part, zezay^ivog iaqnyfiivog. 1 



24 



174 



MUTE VERBS. LIQUID VERBS. 



[§ 148, 149. 



§148. C. Verbs, whose Characteristic is a Tau- 
mute , d , r, O . (142.) 

(a) Pure Characteristic, d, t, &. (b) Impure Characteristic in Pres. and 
Impf., ^, rarer acr. — Fut. (tw. 



ACTIVE. 


MIDDLE. 


ACTIVE. 1 MIDDLE. | 


Pres. 


yj8vd-co, 


'W8vd-0fia(j 


(fQU^-CO, 


cpQu^-ofiai, 




to deceive. 


to lie, 


to say. 


to think, 


Impf. 


t-W8v8-ov 


i-\p8v8-6firiv 


t-q:Qa(^-ov \ i-cpQui^-o^r^v 


Perf. 


(t-\p8vd-y.a) 


{8-ip8vd-fiUi) 


(Tzt-cpQud-xa) : {nt-c^nad-iiai) 




8-\p8V-'Aa 


8-\p8V()-fiaL 


7T8-CfQ(i-'AU 718-CfOUO-^ai 


Plup. 


8-\i)8V-'A8iV 


i-xp8vo-^riv 


i-7Z8-Cfnd-X8lV : 8-7Z8-CfQd(J-f^t]V 


Fut. 


{Ui8v8-oco) 


{\l)8vd-(J0^cu) 


{cfQ(id-o(o)\ (cfoud-aofiai 




\p8V0-C0 


\p8v-aouai 


cpQU-Goj 1 q:Qa-60(i(u 


Aor.I. 


8-\p8v-oa 


i-Xp8V-0U^lt]V 


8-cpQu-(ja 8-cpQa-aafu^v 


F.Pf. 




8-\p8V-r)0^ai 


7t8-CpQa-60^Ul 


PASSIVE. 




Aor. 1. 


{i-\p8vd-d-7jv) i-\p8V6-d-t]v [l-cpQab-x^riv] 


i-cpQua-d^r^v 


Fut. 1. 


1p8V6-'d'rJ60fiai 


cpQao-^Tjoofxai 


Verbal. Adj. {\p8vd-r8og)ip8V(7-Ttog, -tea, -rtov ; qQua- 


TtOg, -T8a, -780V. 


Inflection of Perf. Mid. or Pass. | 


Ind. S. 1. 


8\p8va-fjLat. 


Imper. 


Infinitive. 


2. 


8W8V-Gai 


8\l^8v-ao 


8-XtJ8VG-S^ai 


3. 
D.l. 


8\p8v6-rai 

8\p8Va-ll8d-OV 


8\p8V-6'&03 


Participle. 


2. 


8\p8V-6d-0V 


8\b8V-od^OV 


8-xp8va-fi8vog, -rj, -or 


3. 
P. 1. 


8\p8V-a&OV 

8\V8V6-^8d^a 

8\p8V-6&8 


i\f>8v-ad-03v 


Subjunctive. 


2. 


sxp8v-a&s 


8-\p8V(J-[l8VOg 03. 


3. 


iu>8va-{x8voi 8iai{v) 


i\psv-6d^tt>aav or ixpEV-G-d^ayv] \ 



§ 149. Formation of the Tenses of Liquid-Verbs. 

(143—145.) 

1. Liquid verbs, i. e. verbs whose characteristic is one of the 
liquids I, fi, v, q, form the Fut. Act. and Mid. and the first Aor. 
Act. and Mid. without the tense-characteristic 6, § 20, 3, but the 
Perf. Act. with the tense-characteristic a, e. g. 

aq>oiXX(o, stem 2^AA, Fut. acfaX-m, first Aor. 'i-acpriX-a, Perf. t-aqxtX-na. 

Remark 1. The endings of the Fut. in liquid verbs, namely, -w, -ov^ai, are 
contracted from -iata, -iaoiiai afi;er the rejection of c, § 20, 3. The inflection 
of these contracted endings is like that of contracts in -e'w in the Pres. 
Act. and Mid. (jpd-w, cpd-ovfiaL, § 135. The Fut. Perf is wanting in hquid 
verbs. 



§ 149.] FORMATION OF THE TENSES OF LIQUID-VERBS. 175 

2. The P*resent tense of the above verbs — ^with the exception 
of a few whose stem-vowel is e — is strengthened, either by doub- 
ling the characteristic ^, or by inserting the liquid v after the 
characteristic, or by either lengthening the short stem-vowel, as 
is the case in all verbs in -tvco, -vvco, -vqco, or by changing it into a 
long vowel or diphthong, § 16, 3, e. g. (j(fdl-k-co, 78f4,-v-co, hqiv-co^ 
ci^ivv-o), n7eiv-co, (paiv-co, stem Z(l)u4A, TEM, KPIN{i\ JtMTN{v) 
KTfN^, ^VAN) ; but jw/r-oj, j's^-co with a pure stem. 

3. All the tenses are formed from the pure stem, yet the vowel 
in the final syllable of the stem in the first Aor. Act. and Mid., 
is lengthened, see No. 5, e. g. cr 9 a X X - ca {ZfhAA), Fut. acpdX-Mj 
second Aor. Pass. i-(jcpaX-7]Vj first Aor. Perf. 8-6(faX-xa, first Aor. 
Act. 8- GcprjX -a. The second Aorists Act. and Mid. rarely oc- 
cur, and very seldom in prose ; on the contrary, the second 
Aor. Pass, is more in use than the first Aor. ; the first Aor. is 
wholly wanting in many verbs. 

4. In liquid verbs with an impure characteristic, the ground- 
form of the stem is not borrowed — as is the case with mute- 
verbs — from the second Aor., but from the Fut., since only a 
few verbs of this class form a second Aor. Act. and Mid. 

5. Liquid verbs are divided into four classes according as the 
stem-vowel of the Fut. is a, e, i or v before the ending -w. In 
the first Aor. Act. and Mid., a is lengthened into y, s into si, 
into h y into v, § 16, 3. Thus : 

I. Class with a in the Future. 
Pres. Fut. Aor. 

acfalX-b), to deceive, a (pa X- to e-acptjX-a 

xdfiv-b), to labor, nd ^ -ov^im wanting 

Tiit(j.aiQ~(a, to point out, tbh^u q-m i-TstcfitjQ-a 

cpalv-(o, to show, (pdv-m s^cprjv-a. 

n. Class with s in the Future. 
fiiv-w, to remain, fisv- a s-fxsiv-a 

dy/iXX-(o, to announce, dyysX-a riyyed-a 

ti^v-(o,to cut, Tsy.-oj wanting 

V6fi-(a, to divide, vs{a>-m 8-vsift-a 

XTHV-CO, to kill, XT EV-OJ %-HTHV-a 

i^stQ-b), to desire, ifAEQ-6i Hixug-a. 

ni. Class with i in the Future. 
tiXX-a, to pluck, jiX-(a s-riX-a 

xQiv-w, to separate, xglv-w s-xglv-fx. 



176 FORMATION OF THE TENSES OF LIQUID-VERBS. [§ 149. 



IV. Class with v in tlie Future. 
Pres. Fut. Aor. 

(rvQ-(Oj to drawy cv q-m t-avg-a 

a^vv-w, to defend, a^vv-txi i}(ivv-a. 

Rem. 2. The following vcrhs in -aivw of the first class take « in the Aor. 
instead of tj, namely, la/votlvw, to make eniad(tied,{i'axvuv(x , laxvuvaL^xiQ^alvWy 
to gain, {ey.i()d(xva, xsq^uvul), xoiXalvM, to hollow out, [ixoiluva, xoiXuvai), Xsv- 
xulvb), to whiten, ofjyaivb), to enrage, nsnalvo}, to ripen ; also all verbs in -quIvo), 
e. g. nsQixlfoi^ Fut. nsQavco, Aor. insQiiva, Inf nsQoivaL (except isTQulva), to 
lore, iiiTQTjva, Tci^ijvat), and all in -luvvw, e. g. maivoi, to make fat, inlava, 
ntavai (except fiiulvb), to stain, (iiijvai, rarely fAiuvai). — The verb (rrjfiahaj 
to give a signal, has both oTjfiijvai, which is usual among the Attic writers, 
and <s't]^uvm. Also aXqoj, to raise, and ctXko^iat, to leap, are formed with a, 
UQUt, aXixad^ai, but in the Lid. the « is changed into ri on account of the 
augment, e. g. ?]^a, i]Xa^riv (second Aor. ^I'kop.riv is not used in the Ind. and 
very rarely elsewhere). Comp. on «, § 16, 7. 

6. The first Perf. Act. of verbs with the characteristic v, ac- 
cording to § 19, 3, must end in -/xa, e. g. {xeiAiay-xa from fiiaivco 
instead of ^E-fjiiav-y.a, 7itq)ayyM from (paivoj, TZaQco^vyxa from Tzag' 
(o^vvoj, to excite. But this form is found only among later wri- 
ters. The best writers endeavor to avoid it, sometimes by drop- 
ping the V, e. g. y,8X8Qdd'yia from y.8Qdaiv(o, or also, as in 'Areiroo, by 
using the form of the second Perf., e. g. hrova, in the sense of the 
first Perf., or, as in the case of verbs in -«Voa, by not forming any 
Perf., or, as e. g. in iitvoy, by forming it from a new theme, as 
lie^8vi]ya from MEA^E^l. 

7. The three following verbs with the characteristic v drop 
that letter, not only in the Perf. and Plup. Act., but also in the 
Perf. and Plup. IVIid. or Pass, and in the first Aor. Pass. : 

xglvb), to separate, xixQiya zixQifjicei iy.QiS^7]v 

yllvto, to bend down, yJaXiya TtsxlificcL ixkt&')]v 

nXvvu), to wash, ninlvza ninlv^au inXv&rjv. 

Rem. 3. Tsivco, to stretch, and ktuvw, to kill, form the above mentioned 
tenses from new themes, viz. TASl, KTANn., KTAP., thus : 

exrana and SHTocyxa sxTa(xaL h.xud^riv {iiiTav&i]v among the later writers) ; 
yet the forms of TtTuvto here presented, are not Attic. The Attic writers 
use szTOva as the Perf. Act., see No. 6, and instead of Exia^at and iaTad^rjv, 
substitute Ti^vrjxa and ani&avov in passive phrases with vtio and the Gen. 

Rem. 4. Kglva, xXlvca, nXvvM and xteIvoj, among the poets, often retain v 
in the first Aor. Pass, according to the necessities of the verse, e. g. ixXlv- 
-d^r^v, inXvv^r]v ; in prose these forms seem to be doubtful, yet naisicXlvd^r] is 
found in X. Hell. 4. 1, 30., in all the copies. 



§ 150.] PARADIGMS OF LIQUID-VERBS. 177 

8. On the formation of the Pcrf. Mid., the following things 
should be noted : 

Verbs in -aivoj and -vvco, usually drop the v before the endings 
beginning with /x, and insert ff to strengthen the syllable, e. g. 
(paip-oj 7ii'q)a-a-^ia( Tze-qjd-a-^ed^a — atjixatvo) 086JjfA,a(yfA,aL — niiQaivcx) m- 

Xvafiai — Xvfiaivo^cu Xelvfiaafievoi eiGcv — fiiaivco lie^laaiua ; but 
some verbs of this kind assimilate the v to the following jw, e. g. 
^i]Qaiv-co, i^iJQaji-[A.ai and i^yQaa^ai instead of i^i^Qav-fA.ai,, TiaQo^vvcOj 
to excite J 7zaQc6^vf(jiai, aiaxvv-o) yaxvfifiai ; a very few verbs drop v 
without substituting a strengthening a ; the vowel, however, is 
made long, e. g. tQaxvv-co, to make roughs re-rQaxv-jxai also terqa- 
yycimi and TSTQaxvfJifiat' It is evident, that in the personal-end- 
ings, except those beginning with ^, the v remains, e. g. nt- 
(paa-^at, Tzscpav-aai, Tzaqjav-Tcu, Ih'jQaii-iiaij -avcai, -avxai, riGXV(ifiaij 
-vvoat, -vvTcu, -v^-fA,ed'ov. See cpaiv-fo and ^7]Qaivco, page 179. 

Rem. 5. On the omission of a in endings beginning with (t&, see § 25, 3 ; 
on the «, the vowel of variation, in the first Perf Act. and Mid. and in the 
first Aor. Pass., and also in the second Aorists of liquid verbs with a mono- 
syllabic stem and the stem-vowel s, see § 140 ; on the Perf of ayuQM and 
e/slgoi with Att. Redup., see § 124. 

9. In the second Perf, which, however, belongs only to a few 
verbs, the short stem-vowel before the ending -a, is lengthened, 
as in the first Aor. Act., except in verbs with « in the Fut., which 
take 0, the vowel of variation, § 140, 4, e. g. (pafv-co, first Aor. 
i-(fiiv-a, second Perf. ni-Qpijv-a ; but gtteiq-o), Fut. otzeq-m, second 
Perf. s-CTTOfj-a. 

§150. Par adigms of Li quid -Verbs. (i46.) 

ayyilX(yiy to announce. 



ACTIVE. 



Present, 
Impf 



Ind. ayyiXX-w Subj. ayy^XXoo Imp. ayyE.XXe Tnf ayy^XXeiv 

Part. ayyiXXdov 
Ind, riyyeXX-ov Opt. ayyiXXoijii 



Perf I. 

Plup. I. 
Perf. II. 



Ind. riyyeX-'Aa Subj. riyyiXyico Imp. not in use Inf riyyeXy.ivai 

Part. fiyyEXKMg 
Ind. i^yyaX-xeiv Opt. riyyiX-yioiiii 
8-q)&0Q-a, perdidi, from (pd-EiQ-oy, perdo; Plup. II. i-cp-d-QQ-siv 



178 



PARADIGMS OF LIQUID VERBS. 



[§ 150. 



Fut. Ind. 



Aor. I. 
Aor. II. 



S. 1. 

2. 

3. 
D.2. 

3. 
P. 1. 

2. 

3. 



uyyeX-cj 
dyyeX-eig 
dyytX-Ei 
dyytl-tirov 
uyyeX-tiTOv 
dyytX-ov{iev 
dyytX-Hze 
dyyeX-ov6i{v) 
Inf. dyyeXeiv 



Opt. dyyeXoifii, 
dyyeXoig 
dyyeXoc 
dyytXoirov 
dyyeXoiTtjv 
dyyeXoTfisv 
dyyeXoize 
dyytXoiev 



or 



dyytXoiTjv 

dyytXotr^g 

dyyeXoit] 

dyytXoimov 

dyytXotJjTT^v 

dyytXair^fitv 

dyytXoi>]7e 

dyyeXoitv 



Part. dyyEXojv, -ovoa, -ovv 



Ind. 7iyy€iX-a Sabj. dyyeiXco Opt. dyytiXaifii Imp. dyyuXov 

Inf. dyyeiXat Part. dyysiXag 
Ind. rjyyEX-ov Subj. dyytXco Opt. dyyeXotfii Imp. dyyeXs 

Inf. dyyeXeiv Part. a^^'^lcoV, -ovoa, -6v. 



MIDDLE. 



Pres. 
Impf. 



Ind. dyytXX-ofiui Subj. dyyt'XXojfiai Imp. dyyeXXov Inf. aj'- 

ysXXea&ai Part. dyyeXXofievog 
Ind. 'i^yyEXX-6fi?jv Opt. dyyeXXoi[iJ]v 



Pf. Ind. 



S. 1. 

2. 

2. 
D.l. 

2. 

3. 
P. 1. 

2. 

3. 



TjyyeX-fiai 

ijyyeX-aai 

TiyyEX-tai 

Tjyye'X-fie&ov 

TJyyaX-d-QV 

ijyyEX-d-ov 

riyytX-iiEd-a 

riyyEX-&E 

TiyyEX-^EVoi Ei(ji{v) 



Imperative. 
iryyEX-oo 
TjyyEX-d'co 



^yyEX-&ov 
yyyEX-d^cov 



Infinitive. 
r^yiX-d^oLi 

Participle. 
riyyEX-ycEvog 
Subjunctive. 
riyyEX-fiEvog co 



TJyyaX-x^s 

riyyEX&maav or riyyEX-^mv] 



Pip. Ind. 



r}yyEk-fj,T]v, -ao, -to, -fisd^ov, -S^ov, -&rjv,-iis&n, -d^E, i]yyik}iivoi i](jav 



Fut. Ind. 



S. 1. 

2. 

3. 
D.I. 

2. 

3. 
P. 1. 

2. 

3. 



ayyaX-ov^ai 

dyyaX-'^ or -eT 

dyyEX-Eitai 

dyyaX-ovfiEx^ov 

dyyEX-EiG&ov 

dyyEl-Ei6&ov 

dyyEX-oviiE^a 

dyysX-ELO&s 

dyyEX-ovvtai 



OptayyEX-oifiriv 
dyyEX-oTo 
dyyEX-oiTO 
dyyEX-oifiE&ov 
dyyaX-oiod^ov 
dyyEX-oia&riv 
dyyEX-oifiE&a 
dyyF.X-oiod-E 
dyyeX-oivro 



Infinitive. 
dyyEX-Elo&ai 

Participle. 
dyyEX-ovfiEvog 



Aor. I. 
Aor. II. 



Ind. 7]yyEiX-dfA,7]v Subj. dyysiX-cofxai Opt. dyyEiX-aiixtjv Imp. 

dyyEi-Xai Inf. dyyEiX-aad-ai Part. dyrEiX-dfxavog 
Ind. rjyyEX-ofJLTiv Subj. dyyEX-cof^cu Opt. ayyaX-oii^r^v Imp. 

dyyEX-ov Inf. dyyEX-sad-ai Part. dyyEX-ofiEvog. 



PASSIVE. 



Aor. I. 
Fut. I. 
Aor. 11. 
Fut. II. 



Ind. TJyyeX-d-tjv Subj. dyyaX-O-co Opt. dyyEX-&Eir^v Imp. dy- 
yEX'&TjTi Inf. dyyEX-d^ijvai Part. dyyaX-^sig 

Ind. dyyEX-d-rjOoiiai Opt. dyyEX-^ijooijir^v Inf. dyyEX-d-i^asa- 
d^ai Part. dyyE.X-d-rjaofiEvog 

Ind. riyyEX-iiv Subj. cc/j'sX-ca Opt. dyysX-etrjv Imp. dyyiX-rid^i 
Inf. dyyEX-fivai Part. a//£X-€/s" 

Ind. dyyEX'ijaofiaiy etc., like the first Fut. Pass. 



Verbal adjective : dyyEX-zeog, -zsa, -zeov. 



§151.) 



SHORTER PARADIGMS OF LIQUID VERBS. 



179 



§151. Shorter Paradig-ms, arrang-ed according 
to the stem -vowel of the Fu ture. (147.) 

(a) with « in the Future, <!q)dXXco, fallo; cpaivco, to show. 
Mid. to appear. 



ACTIVE. 


MIDDLE. 


ACTIVE. 


MIDDLE. 


Pres. 


6CfCiXX-CO 


GcpaXX-o^iai 


q)cuv-co 


cpaiv-o^ai 


Impf. 


s-6CpaXX-ov 


i-ocpaXX-6fir]r 


8-cpaiv-ov 


8-q)aiv-ofj.i]v 


Perf. I. 
Plup. I. 


8-acpal-xa 
l-GCfd.l-'Aaiv 


E-6(paX-^ai 
E-acpciX-fiT^v 


{7t8-cpay-y.a) 
{i-7rE-q)ay-xeiv 


nt-cpaa-^ai 

1 8-7lE-(TCt6-[^7JV 


Perf. II. 






TZE-cpip-a, I appear, 


Plup. II. 






E-TZE-cpriv-Eiv, I appeared. 


Fut. 


6(pdX-co,8Tg,Ei 


wanting 


cpav-co 


qiav-ov^cw 


Aor. I. 


i-ocfrfk-ci 


wanting 


8-(fi]v-a 


i-q)7]r-(iixr]v^ 


^ / shall appear, dnofp., I shall affirm. ^ Prose dnsfp., it was affirmed by me. 


PASSIVE. 


Aor. I. 


l-6Cf)dl-&rjv 


i-(fav-&t]v, I appeared, 
qxiv-d^/jGOfiai 


Fut. I. 


ocpaX-d^ijaofiai 


Aor. II. 


s-acpdX-ni> 
(jcpciX-rjaofica 


E-cpdv-Tjv, I appeared. 


Fut. II. 


(fdv-i'jGOfiai, I will appear. 


Verbal adjective ; oqjul-ihg, -tt'a, -zeov, cpav-riog. 


Inflection of the Perf. Mid. or Pass, of 


(f aiv- CO , to show, ^7] Q aiv- CO , to dry, and r e iv - oj , § 149, Rem. 3, 


to stretch. 


Ind. S. 1. 


Tit-q)aa-^ai 


i'^i^Qafi-fxai 


TE-rd-fiai 


2. 


7ZE-(pav-cai 


i-^rjQav-aai 


tE-ra-oai 


3. 


718-cpav-rai 


E-^rjQav-rca 


lE-ra-rai 


D. 1. 


TTE-Cpcia-flEd^OV 


E-^riQa^-fjiEd^ov 


TE-Ta-yE'&OV 


2. 


7l8-CfClV-{^0V 


E-lriQav-&ov 


t8-ra-6-&ov 


3. 


TTE-CpaV-d-QV 
TTE-Cpda-fAEd^a 


E-^riQav-d^ov 


rs-ra-ad^ov 


P. 1. 


E-h]Q(lfl-fAEd-(X, 


TE-rd-fiEd^a 


2. 


TTE-CpUV-'&S 


E-irjQav-d^E 


TE-ra-ad^E 


3. 


TtE-CpaO-IJLEVOl El6l{v) 


E-h]QaiA,-[i8voi e16i[v) 


TE-TiX-Vtai 


Imp.S.2. 


{7iE-q)av-6o) 


{i-triQav-(7o) 


TE-rd-ao 


3. 


TlE-CpCiV-d^CO 


i-^TJQciv-'&OJ 


tE-td-O&CO 


D.2. 


TZE-qjav-d-Qv 


E-^riQav-d^ov 


TE-ra-od^ov 


3. 


TZE-Cfdv-d'COV 


i-^rjQccv-d^cov 


TE-rd-od^ojv 


P. 2. 


TTE-CpaV-d^E 


i-^i]Qav-d^E 


TE-ra-a-&£ 


3. 


7rE-q)av-\}oj(yav or 


E-'^riQCiv-&coaav or 


TE-rd-ox^cooav or 




TtE-Cfdv-^ycov 


E-'^riQO.V-'&COV 


tE-rd-Gd^cov 


Inf. 


TZE-cpciv-d^ai 


E-^rjQav-d^ai 


TE-td-cOai 


Part. 


TiE-cfaa-fiivog 


i-^r]Qafi-fi8vog 


tE-rd-f^svog. 



180 



SHORTER PARADIGMS OF LIQUID VERBS. [§§ 152, 153. 



§ 152. (b) w i t li £ in t li e Future, i^ /i £ /(> - w (Ion. and Poet.), 
to desire, and (7Tt').).My to send. (148.) 



ACTJVi:. 


MIDDLi:. 


ACTlVi:. 


MIDDU:. 


Pres. 


lfl8t(}-(0 


IfisiQ-ojAca 


GZtXl-0} 


azM-ofxai 


Impf. 
Pf.I. 


lUtlQ-OV 


lU8l(>-0^7jV 

ifA8()-fi(a 


t-GTkXl-OV 

t-GTuX-y,a 


t-(lItl).-0fl1iV 

t-GTa).-fiat 


Pip. I. 


iUbQ-'/MV 


IfltQ-fAJiV 


t-azdl-xeiv 


i-azdl-iAriV 


Pf. II. 






t-q;\}o()-a fr.Cfdkio-co.I have destr. 
i-cpd^OQ-Eiv, I Ihod destroyed. 


Plp.II. 






Fut. 


IU8Q-C0 


(fl8Q-0VfAai 


0T8l-(0 


OTtl-ovfiai 


Aor. I. 


IfltlQ-U 


ifi8in-dfii]v 


8-OTnl-a 


i-aT8il-diAriV. 


PASSIVE. 


Aor I. 


ifltQ-d^t/V 


i-atul-d'rjv A. 11. i-ozctX-r^v 


Fut. I. 


lfl8n-d^tlG0UCU 


<y7aX-{y/jao^cu F. II. araX-t'jaofiai 


Verbal Adj. ifieQ-rog,-?], -or, inEQ-ztog, -rta, -ztov, aTa).-rog,(JTu).-rtog. 


Remark. The inflection of the Perf. Mid. or Pass, is like jjy/el-fjai. 



§153. (c) With L and v in the Future. (149.) 

{a) rill-co, to pluck, ovqoj, to draiv, noXvv-co, to defile. 



Pres. 


ri)l-co 


OVQ-(0 


fAoXvr-03 




TiXX-oiiai 


ovQ-oiiai 


fioXvv-Ofiai 


Perf. 


ri-Tik-'Aa 


08-0VQ-'Aa 


{[i8-fi6Xvy-y,a) 




rs-rd-fiat 


68-0VQ-^(a 


fA8-^6Xv6-fXCU 


Fut. 


iiX-a 


OVQ-O) 


IJ,oXvv-(a 




ziX-ovixai 


ovQ-ovfxai 


f^oXvv-ovficu 


Aor. I. 


a-ziX-a 


8-avQ-a 


i-^oXvv-a 




8-Tl X-dfl7]V 


8-GvQ-afir^v 


8-fioXvv-dix£v 


A. I. P. 


i-7iX-&r^v 


8-0VQ-&riV 


i-fioXvr-&}]v 


F.I.P. 


TiX-&/l60fiai 


GVQ-d-TJoo^ai 


fioXvv-'&i^aofiai 


Aor. 11. and Fut. 11. P. i- 


ovQ-r^v, aijQ-i^aofiai 




Verbal Adj. TiX-rog, ril-rtog 


, ovQ-rog, 6VQ-T8og, fi 


vXvv-rog, ^vXvv-r8og. 


Remark 1. The inflection 


of the Perf. Mid. or P 


ass. of Ts-TLk-fiai, as- 


avQ-^ai, is hke ij/ysX-fiai, anc 


i that of i^E'fiokvcr-fiaL 


like ns-cpaa-fxai, that 


of fjcrxvjj.-fxaL, formed from ai 


a/vv-oj, to shame, like 


i-^i]Qafi-i^ai. 



{^) y.Xiv-co, to bend down, 7tXvv-co, to wash, with v dropped, § 149, 



ACTIVE. 



Pres. 
Perf 
Fut. 
Aor. I. 



y,Xtv-co 

x8-yXL-ya 

y.Xiv-w 

8-yXlv-a 



MIDDLE. 



y,X'iv-oiA.aL 
n8-y.Xi-ixcu 
yXiv-ovfiai 
8-yXiv-dii^v 



ACTIVE. 



MIDDLE. 



nXvv-(x> 
7i8-7iXv-y.a 

7tXvv-co 
8-7tXvv-a 



TiXvp-ofiai 

7Z8-7lXv-fl(U 

TrXvp-ovficu 
i-7tXvv-d}ir^r 



PASSIVE. 



Aor. I. 
A. IL 



8-yXt-d-riv Fut. I. yXi-^rjooiiaL 
8-y.Xtv-riV Fut. II. yXi v-riaoiiai 



8-7iXv-^t]v TiXv-'&i^aofA.ai 



Verbal Adj. y.Xi-zog, -?/, -6v, y.Xi-ziog, -xia, -liov, nXv-rog, nXv-tiog. 
Rem. 2. The inflection of the Perf. Mid. or Pass, of xi-xXi-fiai, and ni- 
7iXv-(j.aL is like TE-jd-fiui, and corresponds with that of pure verbs. 



§ 154.] PECULIARITIES IN THE FORMATION OF VERBS. 181 

§154. Special Peculiarities in the Formation of 
single Verbs ^ both Pure and Impure. (i5o— ir,3.) 

1. Tlie Future of very many Active verbs is in the Middle 
form, e. g. «xotco, to hear^ Fut. uy.ovoofiaif I shall hear, Aor. 
tjxovaa, I heard. See §198. 

2. The following verbs in -alco or -dco and -t(a, whose stem 
ended originally in -av and -ev [aF, eF), resume the v in the 
Aorist and Future, §25, 2 : 

xal(o, Att. x«w (without contraction), to burn, Fut. y.avaco ; Aor. tnavaa ; 

Perf. xfcx«i'xa ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. yAnav^ai] Aor. Pass, ly.av^rjv; Fut. 

Pass, xotv&rjaoi^ai; verbal Adj. xavajtog, xavaiog, y.aviog; but second 

Aor. Act. exdr]v, I burned, Intrans., in the Ion. and later "SATiters. 
yckauo, Att. xluco (without contraction), to weep, xXamofittL or xlavaovfiaL, 

No. 3, exXuvdu, etc. See § 166, 18. 
^i(o, to run, Fut. ^svcrojAai or d^svaovfxai, No. 3 ; the other tenses are 

wanting. See rgi^oj, § 167. 
via), to swim, Fut. vsvcrofiai or vsvaovfAUL, No. 3 ; Aor. spEvaa. 
nXiw, to sail, Fut. nksvaofAai, usually nXevaov^ai, No. 3; Aor. STiXsvaa; 

Perf. TiinXsvy.a ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. ninXsvafiai ; Aor. Pass. inX^va^riv ; 

verbal i^dj. nXivajiog. 
nvib), to blow, Fut. nv^vGo^cu or nvsvaovfiai, No. 3, but the compounds, 

e. g. (Jv^-, ifi-nvemoj ; Aor. sjivEvaa ; Aor. Pass, snvsia&tjv. 
qibi, to flow, Yni. qsv(jo}ini', Aor. tq^EVfrn', neither form belongs to the 

Attic, which uses instead of them QyTjaofiai, fg^vr]v, §192, and so also 

the Perf. igQvrjy.a. 
Remark 1. The verb /ico {xiFco, /svoi), to pour out, differs from the pre- 
ceding verbs ; Fut. x^a ; Fut. Mid. x^Of^aL, see No. 4 ; Aor. sxicc, Subj. /eco, 
Inf. x^"h Imp. x^ov, /fMiw, etc. ; Aor. Mid. f/£a'|U?jv, see No. 7 ; Perf Act. 
yixvy.a; Perf Mid. or Pass. y.Exv^ai', Aor. Pass. ixv&7}v, §223. The forms 
with Ev belong only to the Epic ; Fut. /£i;£o ; Aor. exEva. 

o. Doric Future. The circumflexed Fut. form of liquid 
verbs is used by the Doric waiters with verbs whose tense- 
characteristic is (J, e. g. rvipoj, -eTg, -sT, -ov^ev, -Etre, -ovvzi; rvipov- 
^ai, etc., and this form prevails in common use in the follow- 
ing verbs, yet only in the Middle form, with the signification of 
the Fut. Act. : 

q)sv/-(o, to flee, Fut. cpEV^ov(iai and q)EV^Ofiai> 

7iai^-(a, to sport, " nai^ovfiaL " nal^ofiai 

X^^-(o, alvum exonerare, " x^^^^'l^'^'^ 
nljiT-bJ, to fall, " nEffovfxai [IIETSl) 

Tivv&dvofiai, to inquire, " ntvaovficti, usually nevcro^at 

and in those mentioned under No. 2, y.Xai(o, nXioj, nvioj, 

vio), S^ica. 

25 



182 PECULIARITIES IN THE FORMATION OF VERBS. [§ 154. 

4. Future without the tense-characteristic. The following 
verbs have a Future, which, as it wants the Future character- 
istic (J, and has the inflection of the Present, takes, throughout, 
the form of a Present, viz. 

id-(o, Epic, usually ea&i(a, to eat, Fut. td-oixui ; nlv-co {IITSl), to drink, 
Fut. Til-ofiai ; ^ico, to pour out, Fut. /«' w, ;f «!?, x^h etc. ; Fut. Mid. x^ofiat, 
see Rem. 1. 

5. Also two mute verbs take the Future form of liquid verbs 
in -ov^iai without o : 

Htxx-o^uL, tofght, Fut. fiax-ovfioii, formed from the Ion. /ua^-cffo/^at. 
tCfinai (E^fL), to sit, Fut. (£(5-oi/|Uat) xa&sd-ovixai. 

6. The Fut. Perf. of the following verbs has an Active form : 

-^vmato, to die, Perf. ri&vrjy.a, I am dead, Fut. Perf. zs^v^^a or -^onoti, 

I sliall he dead; 
xXd^a, to cry out, Perf xixXayyct, I am crying out, Fut Perf xexXay^co or 

-^oftai, I shall he crying out ; 
'i<ji7]fii, to station, Perf saTrj-Ace, I stand, Fut. Perf e(7T7j|w or -^ofiai, I shall 

stand. 

7. The three following verbs, which are not liquid, form the 
first Aor. according to the analogy of the second Aor., without 
the tense-characteristic (t: 

eItteIv, second Aor., to say, fii'st Aor. sln-a ; qjigoj (^EFKIl), to hear, first 
Aor. 7jvsyy.-(x, second Aor. iiveyy.ov ; ;^€a), e/sa, see Rem. 1. 

8. The verb x^^-^ [XE/l^), alvnm exonerare, forms the 

second Aor. according to the analogy of the first Aor., i. e. with 

the tense-characteristic c, viz. siecov. The first Aor. iieoa is 

more frequent. 

Rem. 2. In the second Aor., sn sao v, from UET-ia [nlnxbi], to fall, the o" 
is not the tense-characteristic, but belongs to the stem, since the t has here 
been changed into u. Dor. I'Ticioy. The fii'st Aor. Iniaa. is later, but is 
found in Eurip. 

9. The following verbs, pm*e and impure, but which by as- 
suming an « as their characteristic in forming the tenses, are 
analogous to pure verbs, form the Perf. Subj. and Plup. Opt. 
Mid. or Pass, without the aid of an auxiliary verb : 

XToe-o/uat, to obtain, Perf. xixTrjfiai, I possess, Subj. v.iHTbi^ai, -fi, -t/tw/ ; 

Plup. iy.ey.Tr>iJ.riV, I possessed. Opt. xsxTfiiurjv, y.sxTjiO, xsxzfiTo or y.EXTcofXTjv, 

-ao, -WTO. 
fiifiv'n(rii(a (MNAIl), to remind, Perf. (iifivrjfiai, I remember, Subj. fiffi- 

vwfiUL, -]i, -^Tttt; Plup. ff.ieiJ.vTjHT]v, Opt. fAffivi^fxrjv, -fjo, -JiTo or fiSfiva- 

fj,r)v, -wo, -WTO, and in X. An. 1. 7, 5. fiifivoLO. 



§§155, 156.] VERBS.— -SYNCOPE. METATHESIS. 183 

^uXXm, to throw [BAA), Peif. ^s^kr}(im, 2 Pers. PL Perf. Subj. diafie- 

(ikiiiiOe, Aiuloc. p. '>>. §24. 
MuXiM, to name, Perf. xixkrjfiai, I am named; Plup. ixixh'jfirjv, Opt. xc- 

xXtj^T}V, -jlO, -riTO. 

Rem. 3. ixisrfii'ja&ov may be found in PI. Rp. 564, c ; at present, how- 
ever, tlie riglit reading in most Codd. is iy.Tti^i](jsa&ov. 

§155. Syncope , (154.) 

1. A few verbs, in certain forms, suffer Syncope, § 16, 8. 
The following prose words, e. g. belong here : 

TiSTOfiai, to fly, Aor. ijnoiirjv, nTsa&at 

iyii{)Oi, to wake, second Aor. rjygo^rjv (also the Inf. s/gsa&at with the 

accent of the Pres.), I aivohe._ 
SQX^f^^h to go, second Aor. t]Xd^ov, Inf. iXd^elv, etc., from "EAETOSl, 

§ 167. 

2. This Syncope occurs most frequently after the reduplica- 
tion ; thus, e. g. 

a. In the Present: 
yiyvofiai, to become, instead of yL-yivofiai, stem FENfL, 
filfivm, to remain, Poet., instead of ^t-^uerw. 

nlmoi, to fall, instead of TtL-nixta, stem JJETSl. 

b. In the Perfect: 
nsjttvvvfii, to spread out, nsnTafiai. 

§156. Metathesis. (153.) 

1. Metathesis, § 22, occurs in the formation of the tenses of 
several verbs, most frequently in the Perf., Plup., first Aor. Pass, 
and first Fut. Pass., seldom in the second Aor., sometimes also 
in the Passive, both for the sake of an easier or more euphonic 
form, and, in poetry, for the sake of making a syllable long by 
position. 

2. In the Common language, the following verbs are subject 
to Metathesis : 

/5aA/Lw, to throw, Fut. /5aA(u {^ttXh]a(o, Aristoph.) ; Aor. e^aXov ; Aor. Mid. 

i^alofitjv ; BAA ; Perf. ^i^Xrjxa', Perf. Mid. or Pass. fii^Xr}(j,at', 

Aor. Pass. s^Xri-d-r}V. 
dafitto), usually da^d^oj, to tame, Fut. dafiaaa ; Aor. iddfiaaa ; AMA ; 

Perf. Ssdf^Tjxa', Perf. Mid. or Pass. dsdfxrjfiaL; Aor. Pass, id fin- 

■&rjv, idafifjv. 
difKo, to build, mostly Poet, and Ion., Aor. edsL^a ; Aor. Mid. ideLfxafitiv ; 

AME', Perf di df^rjxa', Perf. Mid. or Pass. Sidfirjixat. 



184 VERES IN -(O WITH STEM OF PRES. STRENGTHENED. [§ 157, 

•L> y ?; (T X ft), to die, Aor. t&avov ; Perf. t i&vrjxa. 

'i} (J (X) (T X (f), to leap, Aor. tOofJOV. 

xaliio, to call, VovA. y ixli'i ay. oj, like ^^j'tjctxo), Fut. xaAw ; Perf. xiicXtjica. 

nafxvii), luhoro, Aoi. txajxov ; Perf. -At-x fxrjy. a. 

ax&Xlix), axflioi, to make dry, second Aor. taxlTjv; Perf. taxlrixa; Fut. 

(T xXtj a jxa I. 
TB(ivM, to cut, Aor. trsfiov, Perf. TSTfii^xn. 
rk^ a Oft a I, f will hear ; Aor. ejXTjV', Perf. TExXtjxa, from the stem 

Remark. When the stem of the verb is dissyllabic, then the vowel trans- 
posed by Metathesis coalesces with the following vowel ; (a) Li inflection : 
xEQoc-rvvfiL, Poet, xsqix-co, to mingle, Fut. xEQuao); Perf. Mid. or Pass, xi- 

x(j a -fiUL instead of xs-x^sa-fjai ; Aor. Pass, ix q vix^ tj r. 
n in Q aa xb3, to sell, instead of nmEQuaxo}, TunQsunxb), from ufQata, 

hence Fut. nEqiiaw, Perf. n in q u xa, nsngafxat; Aor. Pass. 

inqad-riv', Fut. Perf. nsngdaoixat. 
aiogs-vvvfit, to streiv ; secondary form GT(}d)Vvv^i instead of cT^fo- 

vwiii ; Fut. GT Q M<j oa; Aor. egtqwg a,; Perf. Mid. or Pass, s (j x ^ w- 

fi a l; Aor. Pass, iai q (a-&rjv. 
TiEXd^o), appropinquo, to bnng to, neld^M, nlu-& w, Aor. Pass. insXdad^rjv ; 

Poet. Att. enlu&riv', second Aor. Att. STild (iriv, Perf. Mid. or 

Pass. Att. nsTiXafiai. 
(b) Also in the stem of the verb S^quttoj, to disturb, formed fi*om tuquitw, 
rqadixixt, secondary Attic form of jw^ao-fftu ; Aor. e&gix^a. 



§ 157. Verbs in -co loith the Stem of the Pr e s ent 
strengthened. (ise.) 

1. It has already been seen, §§ 13S — 140, that the stem of 
many verbs is strengthened in the Present; but this strengthen- 
ing remains only in the Present and Imperfect. Besides the 
mode of strengthening there mentioned, by r [m, xz), (j, {gg, f), 
and by lengthening the stem-vowel, there are others, which 
will now be specified. 

2. In this specification, aU the forms which are assumed for 
the sake of constructing the tenses in use, are indicated by capi- 
tals, § 138, 3. As many verbs do not form the Fut. and fi^rst 
Aor. Mid., every verb, which has these tenses, is denoted by 
the abbreviation. Mid. The abbreviations, D. M., signify De- 
ponent Middle., and D. P., Deponent Passive^ § 102, 3. The 
ft I, placed in parenthesis, shows that the form standing before 
it, is analogous to the conjugation in - jK i, to be treated more at 
large below. See § 191, 



§ 158.1 VERBS. PURE STEM STRENGTHENED. 185 



§ 158. I. Verbs, lohose Pure Stem is strengthened in the Pres. 
ami Lnpf. by inserting v before the ending. (ir>8.) 

Preliminary Remark. Balvoi has lengthened the stem- vowel a into m ; 
ikavvoi, a into av ; dvvcj and nivco, v and i into v and I. 

1. §aiv(o, to go, (BA-), Fut. ^riaoiiai; Perf. /3%xa, § 194 ; second 
Aor. k^riv (ill, § 191) ; Pass, in compounds, e. g. ava^alvonai, dva- 
§£^dfiai, TiaQa^t'^ufiai, dve^a&rjv, ttuqs^u&tjv, §§ 130, (c) and 131, 5. 
Verbal adjective ^aiog. 

Remark. Fu'st Aor. Act. s^Jida, and Fut. /J^jcrw, are transitive, / brought, 
will bring, and belong only to the poetic Ionic and later writers. 

2. dvvmy to go in, to go under, to emerse, to put on. The un- 
strengthened verb 5yca (xaradvco). Fut. duaco and first Aor. Act. 
tdvca has a transitive signification in the Pres., to tvrap up, to sink ; 
Aor. Pass, idv&riv, § 130, (b) 2. But the Mid. dvofxai, dtdijfiai, 
dvGonai, idvadfir^Vy to lorap up one's self, to go into, or under, to clothe 
one^s self; the Perf. 8t8vxa and the x4.or. tdw (iii, § 191), have 
the same signification. 

3. D.avvco, to drive, secondary form ilco, -ag, etc. poetic, yet also 
in X. Cy. 8. 3. 32. aTzsXa Imp., Fut. iXaaco, Att. iloj, -ag, -a, Inf. 
i).av, § 117; Aor. rjldaa; Perf. iX^Xuxa, ilrjXdfiai; Inf. llrjldox^ai, 
§ 124; Aor. Pass, rjld&r^v [d in the tense-formation, § 130, (c) ; 
without (J, § 131, 5]. — Mid. — Verbal adjective ilazog, llaziog 
(X. Hipparch. 2, 7.). 

4. ^vvoa and -d^va (poet.), to rage, Fut. x^vaoj, etc. ; second Aor. Part. 
-^vfiEvog ifiL), raging. i 

5. Tiivco, to drink, moiiai, § 154, 4, among the later writers mov- 
fiat, but also, in X. Symp. 4, 7. muG^e ; second Aor. 'iniov. Inf. 

) / meXv, ^^wsb ' . " mwv. Imp. ^r^t, § 192, poet, nk; 770- Perf. ^fWcox« ; 
^XU/y Perf. Mid. or Pass. TzeTzofiai; Aor. Pass. eTiod-rjv, §§ 130, (c) and 
131, 5. Verbal adjective nozog, nor log. 

6. t'Ivm, to expiate, to satisfy, Fut. Tiam ; Aor. hlca ; Perf. Act. 
itzi'Aa; Perf Mid. or Pass, rsriaiiai, Aor. Pass, mjv?-//*', § 131. 
Mid. rivoftai, to avenge, to punish, riGOfiai, izladiir^v. 

Tia, to honor, TLffo), eiiaa, T£Ti,wat, Poet. 

7. cp&uvo), to anticipate, Fut. cpd^7]ao{Aai, more rarely cp&dacoy 



186 VERBS WITH PURE ROOT STRENGTHENED [§ 159. 

e. g. X. Cy. 5. 4, 38 ; first Aor. ecpd^aoa ; second Aor. ^cpOr^v and 
i(px>d(itjv (fiiy § 19:3) ; Perf. tcp&uy.a. 

8. q>dtv(o (poet., rarely prose and only in the Pres., e. g. PI. Pljaedr. 24G, 
e. Syinp. 211, a.), to perish, (seldom to consume), Fiit. cp&'tab) and Aor. tcf&iaaj 
trans, to consume. — Intrans., Fut. cpOlcrofiuL ; Perf. icpdinai, icpi^ivTai ; Plup. 
and second Aor. eqt&tfiTjv, Subj. qi&iwfiai, Opt. cp&lfxrjv^ q)&lio, Imp. cp&ia^ 
•^tu, Inf. (p^iadai, Part, (p&l^ivog, e. g. X. Cy. 8. 7, 18. xolq cp^ifiivoiq, to 
the dead, {(xi, § 192). Verbal adjective cpdnog. 

Here belong also three verbs, whose pui-e stem ends with a consonant : 

9. ddy.voj, to bite, Aor. idunov ; Fut. d/^^ofiui ; Perf. Aor. dtdr^x^ ; 
Perf. Mid. or Pass. dtdf]y^ai ; Aor. Pass, id^xd-rjv. 

10. yidfivoj, laborOj Aor. e^dfiov ; Fut. 'Aafiovfiai ; Perf. :<txfirj'Aa, 
§ 156, 2. 

11. TEfivco, to cut, Fut. rfjMca; Aor. aVf^oj' (irafiov, §140, 2); 
Perf. rkiiijyia, ^ 156, 2) ; Perf. Mid. or Pass, rlmrifiai, Subj. th- 
liriad-ovy § 154, Rem. 3 ; Aor. Pass, iri^y-^r^v ; Fut. Perf. retiir^ao- 
fiai — Mid. 

§ 159. II. Verbs, ivhose Pure Stem is strengthened in the Pres. 
and Impf. by inserting the syllable ve before the ending, (leo.) 

1. ^v-vm, to stop up, Fut. ^vGco ; Aor. t^ijoa ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. 
^y ^i^vGiiai^ Aor. Pass. i§vad^r^v, § 131. 

^^ Pres. ^vca, not used by the Attic writers. 

2. vA-vk^ai, (the simple is seldom used in prose, e. g. Th. 5, 
40. PI. Phaedr. 276, d., the compound being generally used in- 
stead of it) dcpiy>v80[xai, to come, Fut. dcpi^ofAai ; Aor. dq)l}i6[ir^Vy 
d(prAE(j&ai', Perf. dcpTyfiai, dcply&ai', Plup. dq)iy^t]v, dcpTazo. 

3. y.v-vtw, to kiss, Fut. avooj; Aor. hvaa, § 130, (b). But TiQog. 
y.vv8(o, to worship, Fut. 7TQog'Avvi^o(o ; Aor. TZQogexvvj^aa (also poetic 
TtQogsyvaa, Inf. TtQogyvcai). 

4. vTziox-veof^ai (v7ti6x-o^ai Ion.), /o promise, Aor. vTiEOX-ouriV, 
Imp. vTiooxov; but Fut. v7io6X7jaofiai ; Perf. vTZsaxrjfiai. So, a^w- 
m6xvoviiai or dfiTzayof^ai, to clothe, from df^TTtjm, to surround, Fut. 
dfiq)e^co, Aor. iiiiTiioxov, dfiTzioxslr, Fut. dfixpe^o^ca; Aor. r^^TiiaxofArjv 
and rjii7zeox6(i7jv, § 126, 1. 



§ 160.] VERBS WITH PURE ROOT STRENGTHENED. 187 

§ 160. III. Verbs, whose Pure Stem is strengthened in the Pres. 
ami Impf. by inserting the syllable «»', more rarely aiVj before 
the ending. (lei.) 

a. a V or aiv is inserted witlioiit any change. 

Preliminary Remark. All verbs of this kind form their tenses fi-om a 
tliree-fold stem, viz. tlie Pres. and Impf. from the strengthened stem, the 
second Aor. from the pure stem, the Fut. and Perf. from a third stem, con- 
sisting of a pure stem and f , which is changed in the inflexion into tj. — The 
a in the ending -dvo) is short Attic, but the Epic is long ; in ixuvo) it is long 
both among the Attic and the Epic wiiters. 

1. aio&-ur-OLicu (seldom ai'o&ofiai), to perceive, Aor. riod-S^r^v, 
ala&ioxfai ; Perf. r^a&^iiai ; Fut. alo&ijGOfxai. 
^ 2. 'afiuQzdvcoy to miss, Aor. ^fiaQTov; Fut. d[^aQTTj60fiai ; Perf. 
^^aQTr^xa; Perf. Pass. ^iA.dQTTifiai; Aor. Pass. ruiaQtri&r^v (X. An. 5. 
9, 21. Vect. 4, 37). 

3. aTiexd-uvofiui, to be hated, Aor. uTtrj^&ofiriv (poet, rix^ofir^v) ; Fut. 
UTiex^riao^ai ; Perf. dnrn&^iiai, I am hated. 

4. «y|«ra) (and «y^co), to increase, Fut. «yJ;J(7a); Aor. ^/i^'I'/cra ; 
Perf. r/vtr]y.a; Mid. and Pass, to thrive, Perf. r^v^ijfiai; Fut. av^rj- 
60fiat; Aor. rjv^ij&r^v. 

5. p.u<jTdv(o,to sprout, Aor. 'i^laorov: Fut. p.aorriaco ; Perf. ip.da- 
rr^y.a and ^ep.dorr^y.a, § 123, 2. 

6. duQ&dvoj, commonly in composition, yuzad., to sleep, Aor. 
y.aTt8ao&ov (^yazadaQ&lvta Aristoph. PJut. 300.) ; Fut. y.uTadaod-rj. 
GOfxai; Perf. y.aTadeddQ&r^ya. 

7. lidvco and y.a&i^dvco, secondary form from f'^w, ya-d-i^co. 
See § 166, 16. 

8. y.).cr/'/dv(o, used of dogs, a secondary form from xhua), to cry 
out, Fut. yld'/i(o (y.ey.Xd'/^ofiai Aristoph. Vesp. 930, see § 164, 6) ; 
Aor. tyluy^u, lyldyov Eur. Iph. T. 1062. ; Perf. yJy.layya (old 
form y.t'ylrja). 

9. olddvco, oiduipoj (also olddco, ot^foa), to swell, Fut. oidf^aco. 

10. 6lio&dv(o {-aivco not used by the Attic ^Titers), to slip, Aor. 
wXtad^ov; Fut. oha&riao) ; Perf. c6).i6d^}]y,a (first Aor. wP.fW^/cra later). 

11. oacfoaivouat, to smell, Aor. coacpQoiir^v ; Fut. 6a(fQi]O0^ai. 

Pres. oacp^aad^ai was a rare Attic form ; Aor. oicrcpgriad^riV and oacpqav- 
■&ii]yai, later. 



188 VERBS. oiv BEFORE THE TENSE-ENDING. [§ 160. 

12. 6(pXia'Aav(o, (Inf. oqiXtiv, Part. oq)l(ov, seldom), to be liable to 
a fine, to incur punishment — the double strengthening tcrx and 
av is to be noted — Aor. ojqjlov, Fut. oqjh'jaco; Perf. coqpP.?^xa; 
Perf. Mid. or Pass. (acpXTjfiai. 

First Aor. (xpXijaat, later. 

b. av is inserted before the Tense-ending, and v is in- 
serted before the Characteristic-consonant 
ofthe Pure Stem. 

Preliminary Remark. The short vowel in the middle of the pure stem, 
is changed into a long one, in inflexion. The v suffers the usual changes 
before the Pi and Kappa-mutes, § 19, 3. 

13. iQvyydvcoj instead of iQv-v-ydvco, riictor, Aor. rJQvyov ; Fut. 
SQev^ofiai. 

14. 'Oiyydvw, to touch, Aor. ad-Hyov; Fut. '&ihfiai. 

15. kayx^vM, to obtain by lot, Aor. tlaxov ; Fut. Xri^ofiai ; Perf. 
eilrixcc, rarely leloyxa from AEFX-, comp. ntnov&a, nad^eiv, ntvOog ; 
Perf. Mid. or Pass. eilr^yfA.ai, § 123, 4 ; Aor. Pass. ilr^X'^rt^- 

16. XafA^dvco, to take, Aor. eXa^ov, Imp. Id^s and Attic Xa^tj 
§ 118, 3, (a) ; Fut. Iri^poiiai; Perf. e'ilricpa-^ Perf. Mid. or Pass. 
EihjfifAai, § 123, 4 ; Aor. Mid. ila^o^r^v ; Aor. Pass. iXrjcp&r;v. 

17. Xavd-dvco (poet, and also X. O. 7, 31., also l^&co)^ to be 
concealed, Aor. ilad-ov; Fut. lijooi-^ Perf. lEhid^a, I am concealed, 
Mid. lav&dvoiJLai (Ion. and poet, also hjO-ofxai), to forget, Fut. 
ItJGoixai ; Perf. XtXriaixai, ^ 131 ; Aor. lXa&6iii]v. 

18. XifA,7zdvoo, rare secondary form from Xeitzco. 

19. {lav&dvo), to learn, Aor. a^ad-ov ; Fut. iA,ad^rj(JOfi(a ; Perf. 
f^sfidd-i]xa. — The a remains short, and the Fut. and Perf. are 
formed from the stem MAQE, according to No. a. 

20. TTvv&dvo^ai, to ask, Aor. Invd-oii^v ; Perf. Timvoiiai, ninvaaij 
etc., § 131 ; Fut. nEvaoiiai (very rarely Tiavoovixai, § 154, 3). Ver- 
bal adjective navorog, Tievotiog. 

21. rvyxdvco, to happen, Aor. hvyov] YuX. rev^oiiai {TETX-); 
Perf. reTvxi]>ia {TTXE- according to No. a.). The transitive of 
this verb is the poetic rsvyco, paro. 

22. cpvyydvco, secondary form from cpevyco, to flee, Fut. qsv^ofiai 
and -^ovfiui, § 154, 3 ; Aor. ecpvyov ; Perf. Tzecpsvya. Verbal adjec- 
tive q)evii76g, -zaog. 



§161.] VERBS. STRENGTHENING OF THE PRES. AND IMPF. 189 

23. ;f«i'5«i'a), to take, Aor. sxddov; Perf. with a Pres. signifi- 
cation yf'xcti'da ; Fut. ;f£<Vo/^ccr, stem XEA^z/-, comp. 'inad^ov, miao- 
Hai. 

§ 161. IV. Verbs, lohose Pure Stem is strengthened in the 
Pres. and Impf. by annexing' the tivo consonants an or the syl- 
lable «(TX. (162, 163.) 

2x is aiiuexed, when the stem-characteristic is a vowel, and to-jt, when it is 
a consonant; xv-'CaxM, and xQ^'i^f^^o^ai are exceptions. Most verbs, whose 
piu-e stem ends with a consonant, form the Futm-e, etc. according to the 
analog)^ of pm*e verbs, e.g. d'Q-iaxo), Fut. evQi]-a(a from 'ETFE-; ufA^Uaxw, 
Fut. afi^lcj-act) from "AMBAO-. Some of these verbs, in the Pres. and 
Impf, take a reduphcation also, wliicli consists in repeating the first con- 
sonant of the stem witli t. 

1. al-io'A-onai, to be taken, to be conquered, Impf. '^hax6fi7]v ; 
[AAO-) Fut. dXcoaof^ai ; second Aor. ^Icov, Att. idlcov and ^jloyv 
(fit, § 192), I ivas taken; Perf. tjlcoxa, and Att. sdlcoxa and 7]Xg3- 
xa, I have been taken ( Aug., § 122, 4 and 6). The Active is sup- 
plied by aiQeiv, signifying, to take captive, to conquer. 

2. dfApJaxco (seldom df^p.6(o), to miscarry, 'AMBAO-, Fut. 
d^pMcco ; Aor. ijup^cooa ; Perf. ijfi^looy.a. 

3. dva^tcoaxo^ai, (a) to recall to life, (b) to live again, Aor. 
dve^icoad^t^v, I lived again; but second Aor. dvs^icov (^wt, §192), 
I recalled to life. 

4. dvdXiaHco (also dvdXoco), to spend, to consume, Impf. dvrj- 
hay.ov (^dvdlovv without Aug.) ; Fut. dvdlcoaco ; Aor. dvi^looGa and 
dvdl(oca, y.azr^vdlcoaa ; Perf. dvi^Xeoaa and dvdXcoya ; Perf. Mid. or 
Pass. dvr^Xcofiai and dvdXco(Aai ; Aor. dvdXcod^rjv. 

5. dQsaaco, to please, Fut. dgsaco ; Aor. rJQEoa, § 130, (d) ; Perf. 
(^dQTjQ£y.a is mentioned as in use) Mid. or Pass. rjQEGfiai-, Aor. 
Pass. riQS6&r^v Mid. 

6. §i§Qc6ay.co, to eat (Fut. Att. sdofiai from ia&ico, second Aor. 
scpdyov), Vexi ^t^QcoHa; Vwct ^e^gcog, §194; Perf. Mid. or Pass. 
^i^Qw^ai', Aor. Pass, s^qco&tjv. 

7. yeym'laxb), mostly Poet., to call, to make known, Fut. yiytov't](T(xi ; Aor. 
iyr/iavrjaa ; Perf yiywvu, with a Present signification ; — further, yeyavdiM, 
Xen., yrywvHv, Poet., seldom prose, e. g. PL Hipp. M. 292, d, from the 
Prim. rErSlNESl. 

26 



190 VERBS. STRENGTHENING OF THE PRES. AND IMPF. [§ 161. 

8. yi]Qaax(o or y>,(>u(o, to <^ro20 old, Fut. '/tinuoofjui, seldom yi]- 
QCiGco-^ Aor. tyi'iQiloa, in Aosch. Suppl. 901., 'JVans. to cause to 
s^roiv old, Inf. yttQuaai (iilso ytjQuvai from an old second Aor. 
iy/j()av, fu, § 192) ; Perf. ytyi]QivAa. 

9. yiyvMO'Aw {ylv(aay.(x)), to know, {TNO-) Fut. yKoaofiai] second 
Aor. tyvcov (fiiy § 192) ; Perf. tyvcoaw^ Perf. Mid. or Pass, tyrcoafxai, 
§ 131 ; verbal Adj. yvcoaiog (old form yvojtog)^ yvcoattog. 

10. did()dax(o, to run aivay (usually in compounds, e. g. ano8.y 
ind., diad.), Fut. dQaooiiai] Perf. dtdnd'/.a-^ second Aor. idQuv 
{{^i, § 192). 

11. EVQiaxo), to find, second Aor. evQov; Imp. svqs, §118, 3, (a); 
(ETPE-) Fut. EVQijow'^ Perf. EVQrf/.a] Perf. Mid. or Pass. evQTjiiai'j 
Aor. Pass. evQt&}]v, § 130, (d) ; Aor. Mid. evQoiir^v (Aug., § 121, 
Rem.) ; verbal Adj. evQEtog. 

12. 7/|3cc(Txft), to become marriageable, Aor. ^|3;/cra (r;^oi(Oj to be 
young, but dv7]^dco, to become young again). 

13. xhi^axco, commonly aTiod^vj^Gxco, to die (Metathesis, § 156, 
2), (0-y^A^-) Aor. dnt&dvov (Poet. E\}avov; 'O^avcov, ol &av6vTEg, 
the dead, also in prose) ; Fut. dno^avoviiai, Poet. 'Oavovficw^ Perf. 
TE&vrjxa both in prose and poetry, tE&vdfiEv, § 1 94, etc.. Inf. rEdvd- 
vai] Fut. Perf. ts&vrj^co, old Att., § 154, 6, and zE&vi^^ofiai, I shall 
be dead. 

14. lldaxoiAai, to propitiate, Fut. iluaofiai ; Aor. ildadfir^v. 

15. 'AviGy.co and ymaxo^ai, to conceive, inchoative, from y.v(o. 

16. iiE&vayi(x), to intoxicate, Fut. f^Ed^voco-^ Aor. ifit&vca. But 
^Ed^vco, to be intoxicated, borrows its tenses from the Passive, 
e. g. i{/-E&vod-rjv, § 131. 

17. fiijivi^ayco, to remind, (MjY^-) Fut. ft^^'aco; Aoi\ Efivr]6a'^ 
Perf. Mid. or Pass. fiE^v7]fiai, memini, I remember, I am mind- 
fid (Redup. §123, Rem, 1), Subj. ]M£//j^a}/i«f, -^, -^t«/, §154,9, 

Imp. iiEiivrjco ; Plup. if^Efivi^fir^v, I remembered, Opt. f^Efivrjfir^v, -Jo, 
-yto, or fiEfiv(pfA,j]v, -0)0, -cpro, § 154, 9; Fut. Perf. ^lEiivriao^ai, I shall 
be mindful; among the Tragedians also, I icill mention ; Aor. 
i{ivi^a&rjVj I remembered, ii^vrjadfirjv Poet.; Fut. i^vija&r^aofiaiy I 
shall remember. 

18. ^da^co, formed from Tzdd^aKcoj by transferring the aspira- 
tion to X, to experience a sensation, to suffer, Aor. sTzdd'ov] 
{TIENQ-) Fut. TtEiao^ai'^ Perf. Ttmov&a. Verbal Adj. na^rirog. 



§§ 162, 163.] VERBS. SECONDARY FORM IN -Oco. 191 

19. niTTia'AMy to s;ive to drinh% Fut. niam ; Aor. tTiTaa. 

20. TrcznuGxco, to sell^ Fut. and Aor. in the Common langiKigc 
expressed by ctTiodcoffOfiai, u7Ttd6(4)]v '^ Perf. ntnQd'Mif ^ 156, Rem.; 
Perf. Mid. or Pass. mnQdiua (Inf. nanQciaOca often instead of the 
Aor.); Aor. iTtQa&iiv; Fut. Perf. TzeTZQmoiAai in the sense of the 
simple Fut. nQaOi'ioo^ai. 

21. 6isQtax(o (seldom (yzEQtco)^ to deprive of, Fut. crTf^/^rrco; Aor. 
«(7r/o//(7« ; Perf aGzeQtjxu ; Mid. and Pass. OJeQioxo^ai, ozeQOVjxaiy 
privor, araQOfiai, I am deprived, Fut. ozsQ^aoixai; Perf. lottQijiiai'^ 
Aor. iarsQi'j&riv ] Fut. 6TEQ7]{)-rJ60[iui. The simple occurs most 
frequently in the INIiddle form ; in the Active, the compound 
ano6TBQia'A(o is more frequent. 

22. tiTQ(ao-A(o, to loound, Fut. tQooaoi ; Aor. erQcoaa ; Perf. Mid. 
or Pass. rsTQcofiai, Inf. reiQMcOai, Part. rezQcoiitvog ; Aor. iTQc6&7]v ; 
Fut. TQcod^ijaofica and tQojao[A,ai. 

23. (pdoxco, to say, to think (Ind. not used), Impf. 'icpacAov^ 
Fut. gp^cTw; Aor. ecprjaa. 

24. /«(?xw, ^0 g-o/^e (X^A'-j among the later writers xaivm)^ 
Aor. ex^crov ; Fut. xdvoviiai ; Perf. y-^xriva, to stand open. 

Remark. Li 8 i 5 a (J y. m, doc-eo, the x belonging to the stem is strength- 
ened by 0- prefixed ; hence the x remams in forming the tenses, Fut. 8l- 
(Jtt'lw ; Aor. ididvt^a ; Perf. dfdldaxa ; Perf. Mid. or Pass, didida/iuai ; Aor. 
Pass. idiStxx&rjv. This is found in the Epic and poetic verbs, aXd^ii<jy.(o, 
aXiaao}, kixaxca. See § 230. 

§162. V. Verbs IV hie h have a Secondary Form 

in -d-CO . (166.) 

Several verbs, particularly in poetiy, have secondary forms in -&b), e. g. 
(jp/lf/fL^ctv, poetic, instead of (pXs/siVj to burn; ^lyEQid^ovxaL and i^f^e- 
■&0PTai, Epic, instead of aysigovTai, and anqovzui. Here belong also the 
Pres. and Impf endings, -d&uv and -a&ov, which are used even in Attic 
prose, e. g. aki^ca, to ward off, tragic Inf. uXxdd^siv, stem AAK\ oifivvco, to 
ward off, dfAVvd&Eiv, Impf riy.vvad^ov ; — 8i(ox(o, to pursue, diwHad^eiv, Impf. 
idiojxa&ov, also prose; — d'xco, to yield, hnpf. sVaad ov; — slgyca, to shut up, 
Impf and Aor. ttqya&ov ; — l/w, to have, (Txidsiv, in Homer a-/£i9^£'£tj' as Aor. 

§ 163. VI. Verbs, ivhose Pure Stem- is strengthened in the Pres. 
and Impf. by prefixing the Reduplication. (im.) 

The reduplication consists in repeating the fii-st consonant of the root 
with the stem-vowel i. In the Epic and poetic dialects, there are also verbs, 



192 VERBS WHOSE PURE STEM TAKES S. [§§164, 165. 

which take the Attic reduplication, i. e. they rej)eat the first two letters of 
the root, see uxu/iyoj, unacpiay.u, u^aQiaxco, § xi30. 

1. §1^(1^(0, to make g-o, to convey, Fut. §i^daw, Att. /^^|3w, -ag, -«. 

2. yiyvofiui. (commonly yivofiai) instead of yiytvoixaij § 155, 2, 
to become, (FEN-) Aor. iytvofiriv; Fut. yevrjaofiai. (PI. Farm. 141, 
e. yevliaezcujjiet, and moreover yevE'&t'jaetai, efficietur) ; Perf. y^y^- 
V7]fiaiy I have become, factus sum, exstiti, and ytyova with a present 
signification, I am. 

3. m7ZT(x), instead oimntrco, § 155, 2, to fall. Imp. ^rtl^rf ; (JIET-) 
Fut. TTEGovfiai, § 154, 3 ; Aor. ineaov (very seldom first Aor. eneaa), 
§ 154, Rem. 2 ; Perf. Ttmrcoxa with irregular vowel of variation 
(Part. TTETiTwg, nEntwxog Poet., § 194). 

4. TiTQaco, to bore, Fut. r()?J(7oa ; Aor. tzQriaa. More usual the 
secondary form zeTQaivco, Fut. TetQavw ; Aor. irhQtjva, § 149, Rem. 
2 ; Perf. ihgr^xa, r8tQ7]fiai. — Mid. 

Several verbs of class IV, § 161, belong here, as yL/vwaxa, and several 
verbs in -fii, as didcofxi. 

§ 164. VII. Verbs, ivhose Pure Stem-voivel a is 
strengthened in the Pres. a7id Impf. by i. (le?.) 

Here belong the dialectic verbs, mostly Epic and poetic, ayalofiai, to he 
indignant, daloj, to divide and burn, fiaiofxai, to rage, valco, to dwdl. See § 230. 

§ 165. VIII. Verbs, IV hose Pur e Stem takes e in the 
Pres. and Impf. (i7o.) 

1. yaiim, to marry (of the man), Perf. yeydfAv^xa; but Fut. ya- 
fjioj; Aor. 'iyriiia, yijiiai (iydfirjaa in Lucian. ; ya^rioeiag with the 
better reading yafA,j]6Ei£ig in X. Cy. 8. 4, 20). Mid. ya^ioviiai (with 
the Dat.), to marry (of the woman, nubo), Fut. yafAovf^ai; Aor. 
iyr]fid^r,v. Pass, in matrimonium ducor, Aor. iyafii^-d-r^Vy etc., 
§130, (d)2. 

2. yyjd^EOi}, usually Perf. yiyr^^a, (also prose), to rejoice, Fut. 

3. 5ox£oo, to seem, videor, to think, Fut. 5o?oa ; Aor. ido^a ; Aor. 
Pass, idox'&r^v, Perf. Mid. or Pass, bidoy^ai, visus sum. 

4. xiVTiioj (Poet.), to resound, Fut -ijaa^ etc. ; second Aor. ixrvnov (Epic 
and S. O. C. 1450); first Aor. imvnriuoi (ib. 1606). 



§ 166.1 VERBS WITH PURE STEM IN PRES. AND IMPF. 193 



5. fjtaQtvQscoj to tvitness^ Fut. fiaQtvQ/jaco, etc. But fiaQzvQOfiai, 
Dep. Mid. to call as ivitnesses. 

6. ^i'(>f CO, to shave, Mid. ^vqo^cu ; Aor. i^vQafitjv ; but Perf. t'^v- 

7. aJi>t'Q}, to jyz^s//, Impf. ico&ovv; Fut. coaw and wx^/Jcyco; Aor. 
8(0(ja, (x>acu ; Perf. «coxa ; Perf. Mid. or Pass, ma^ai ; Aor. iwod^ijv 
(Aug., § 122, 4).— Mid. 

§ 166. Verbs, whose Stem is Pure in the Pres. and Impf. but 
ivhich assume an s in forming- the tenses. (les.) 

This change has taken place in the formation of verbs in -soj, partly from 
necessity, as is the case with verbs whose characteristic is |, ip, partly for 
the sake of perspicuity, that the root may not wholly disappear by the in- 
troduction of consonants, as in verbs whose characteristic is ax, x&, and 
partly from mere choice or the desire of euphony, as in verbs whose char- 
acteristic is 5, T, ^, A, Q, n, y., %, a, ai, s, oi. The s is changed into rj in in- 
flexion. Exceptions : al'doiiai, tJi/&ofinL and fiaxofxaL, § 130, (d). 

1. al'dojxai, to he ashamed (Pres. and Impf. old poetic, in the Common lan- 
guage atdeofiat,), Impf oiido^rjv without Aug.; Fut. aldiao^ai and -7}aofiai; 
Aor. fidscnxfirjv, to regard a suppliant, and fjdsa&riv, I was ashamed. 

2. alt^w, to luard off, Fut. oIe^ticko] Mid. to loard off from my- 
self Fut. dls^rjaoixai, seldom dls'^o^ai (from AAEK-) ; Aor. rile- 
^diir^v (Inf. second Aor. dhAad-eiv, used by the Trag., § 162). 

3. «v|ca, to increase, see av'^dvod, § 160, 4. 

4. dx^ofiai, to be vexed, Fut. d^d^eaofiai; Aor. tjx-O-sod-rjv, § 131 ; 
Fut. dx-Oeod-r^aofiat having the same signification as did^iaoiiai. 

5. /^ocrxoo, to feed, Fut. §o(7X7]6a) ; Aor. i^oaxtjca ; Mid. I fed, 
intransitive. 

6. ^ovXofiat, to wish, (second Pers. ^ovX^i, § 116, 11), Fut. ^ov- 
Irjaofxai ; Perf. ^E^ovlrjiiai ; Aor. E^ovliqd-riv and ri^ovl. (Aug., § 120, 
Rem. 1). 

7. ^fiw, to ivant, to need, usually Impers. Set, it is luanting, it 
is necessary, § 137, 2, Subj. 5/?/, Part, biov, Inf. Mv; Impf. Uu^ 
Opt. 5£0t; Fut. ^f^crefc; Kox, i8iri6E{v); VerL ded8r]yi8{v); Mid. ^£0- 
/^«', to need, Fut. derjaofjiai ; Aor. ids7]d-7]v. 

8. «iO-Aco and ^^^w, to will, Impf. i^d-slov and £i9^£Ao^ ; Fut. €^«- 
XTi<y(o and d-eXi^aoj ; Aor. ^d^slijaa and id-eXijaa ; Perf. only ^■d-elr^y.a. 



194 VERBS WITH PURE STEM IN PRES. AND IMPF. [§ 166, 

9. Bi^(o, siXXco, i'Xlco, also {iltco, to press, to shut vp, Fut. eilr^aco ; 
Perf. Mid. or Pass. etlt]fiai ; Aor. Pass. tlh]{friv. 

10. tlxw, to draiVj Fut. tX^(o (which more commonly has the 
other form iXxvcoo from 'EAKT9.) ; Aor. eiXxvaa, § 122, 3, ilxvaat 
(more common than elX^u) ; Aor. Pass, and Perf. Mid. or Pass. 
only alXy.vaO^r^v, eiXxv6[j.ai Mid. 

1 1. 'EIPOMAI, Aor. rjo6{i7]v, I inquired, iQsc&ai, sQcofiai, igoifiTjv, 
iQov, enofievog ; Fut. iQtjaofjai. The other tenses are supplied by 
i()(OTav; but the Aor. i^Qcotr^oa is rejected. 

12. tQQcOj to go forth, Fut. ioQi^aco ; Aor. yoQr^oa. 

13. evdm, commonly xad^evdco, to sleep, Fut. Tia-Oevdi^cco (Aug., 
§§121, Rem. and 126, 3). Verbal adjective Ha&F.vdr/rtov. 

14. f/w, to have, to hold, Impf. elxov, § 122, 3 ; Aor. eaxovj in- 
stead o(s-<jExor, Inf. cx^tv, Imp. axk, TiaQuaxeg according to verbs in 
f^i (in composition also TzaQaax^), Subj. (t/w, -rig, TiaQaaxco, naqd- 
<yXV^^ etc.. Opt. oxoi7]v (fit, § 192, Rem.), Part. (T/wV ; Fut. ^%(o and 
oXtjaco; Perf. fV/^xa; Aor. Mid. iaxofiTjv, Subj. ax^fiai, Opt. cr/ot- 
f^f]v, Imp. (T/ov, TTaQciaxov, Inf. 6x^6&aij TiaQaaxsad-ai, Pass, axofievog; 
Fut. (Jxrjaofxai; Perf. Mid. or Pass, hxru^ai; Aor. Pass. iaxB&r^v. 
Verbal adjective gxroV and ox^rog. 

15. fV^' ^0 6'oo^', Fut. iiptjow. Verbal adjective £gpi?-oV or e^^' 
tog, 8\prirtog. 

16. tt«, commonly xa&i^co, to seat, to sit, Perf. i-Aad^i^ov, 
old Attic '/.ad^l^ov ; Fut. xwO^fw ; Aor. iy>d&ioa, old Attic xa-&i(ja, 
§ 1 26, 3 ; Perf. -Aeadd^rAa ; Mid. / seat myself, Fut. xa&iii]GO[iai ; 
Aor. ixad^L6dfA,T]v, I seated for mi/self I caused to sit. But 
aad-s^ofiai, I seat myself, I sit, Impf. ixad-ei^oi^riv ; Fut. xa- 

17. x;/'^aj, to make anxious, (Act. only Epic), Fut. yjidrjaco ; Perf. 
'AExr^dcc, I am anxious ; Mid. yridoiiai, to be anxious in prose only 
Pres. and Impf. ; in Aesch. S. 138. is found Imp. Aor. Mid. 
KYibeaai. 

IS. 'Aaim, to weep, Att. xA«oa without contraction, Fut. yXcw- 
(To^at {yXoi.v(iov\iai, § 154, 3, in Aristoph.), rarer ylair](5(xi or yXa^6(i)\ 
Aor. €>cXav(ya; Perf. xexXavfxai and y^iaXava^ai, § l3l, 3. Comp. 
§ 154, 2. — Mid. — Verbal adjective y-lavoTog and y-lavrog, y.Xav- 
6t8og. 



§ 166.] VERBS WITH PURE STEM IN PRES. AND IMPF. 195 

19. ftaxofiai, tofig'ht^ Fut. ^axovficu, § 154, 5; Aor. IfiaxeadfiTjv ; 
Pcrf. fi£U(c/i;iiai. Verbal adjective ^la'iettog and fiax)]rtog. 

20. fitV.co, to intend, to consider, to be about to do, hence to delai/, 
Impf. s^ellov and i'j^elXov ; Fut. fiEXX/iaco ; Aor. i(it'lXi]6a ; Pass. 
fi(XXEa&cci, to be put off, (Aug. § 120, Rem. 1). 

21. fit'Xei^oi, curae niihi est (rarely personal ^t'Xco), Fut. ^hrj6H ; 
Aor. i^£XriC£(v) ; Perf. fiefi£XtfA£(v) ; IMid. fAt'Xofiar, commonly Itzi- 
fisXafiai (and iTtifieXovfiai) ; Fut. imfieXtjaoiiaL (sometimes sTzifisXrj- 
'&ijaofica) ; Aor. iTTe^utXij&i^p. 

The compounds, e. g. i^Era^iXsi poenitet, are used as impersonals only. 
Epic Perf. ^ifxrjXs, I am concerned about ; ^sfitjXa has in prose the sense 
of the Pres. as well as of the Perf., euro, curavi, ^f/i;jAw?, caring for. 

22. iwy'bW, to suck, Fut. juy^/^-jM, etc. 

23. o^^co, to smell, Fut. oif^doj; Aor. Wb'/f^cc; Perf. o^co^cc with 
the meaning of the Pres., § 124, 2. 

24. o't'of-icu and olfica, to think, second Pers. o/fc/, §116, 11; 
Impf. (^Ofiijv and (a.ur^v ; Fut. olijaofiai ; Aor. (^tj&^v, olr^&rjvai, (Aug., 
§122,1). 

The abbreviated forms, o i fi a i , Mfi7}v,are used in prose as a mere 
parenthetic expression, hke the Lat. credo, and hence are often employed in 
an ironical sense; oVofia i, on the contraiy, has such a sense, only when 
it is a governmg verb ; still, this difference of usage is not fully observed 
even by the best Attic writers. 

25. o//o,u«/, to go away, abii, Inf. ^ion:^v, I went aivay ; Fut 
oixi]ooiiai ; Perf. <p/?/,m«/, in the Common language only as a com 
pound, e. g. nanorir^iiai, Ion. and Att. Poet, or/w/.a, (so origi 
nate, oixaj or/.-(oxcij o'lx^-(£)'Aa., comp. the Epic oxw/a from fi/o), § 230) 

26. 6q)dX(x), to be obliged, to oioe, debeo, Fut. og)£/X//o-a3 ; Aor 
(oqiEiXr^oa ; second Aor. ojq)sXov, -eg, -8{v) (first and second Pers 
PI. not used), in forms expressing ivisli, imprecation, utinam. 

27. Tiaico, to strike, Fut. Ttalaoj (Att. secondary form ti airiaoa 
in Aristoph.) ; xior. tnaioa ; Perf. nmai'/.a ; Pass, with c, § 131, 2. 
—Mid. 

28. TZEQdo), emittere flatum, Aor. maQbov ; Fut. TzaQdi^aofiai ; Perf. 
mnoQda, § 140, 4. 

29. TitTOfxaiy to Jlfj, Fut. (nEti^aofiai, Aristoph.) commonly Trri^' 
couai ; Aor. mroiiriVy nzia&ai (rarer 'inrriv and inrd^rjV, § 1 92, 2) ; 
Perf. nETtorr^iiai. — Syncope, § 155, I. 



196 VERBS. TENSES FORMED FROM DIFFERENT ROOTS. [§ 167. 

30. cxtllco or axeXtco, to dnj, Aor. taalriv, § 192, 4, and Perf. 
taxhjHu and Fat. axh'^ao^ai, intensive, to dry itp. — Metathesis, 
§156,2.^ 

31. rvTiico, to strike. Instead of ivipw the Attic dialect has 
rvTTT/iaco, but Aor. hv\pa, second Aor. only in Eur. Ion. 766 ; 
Aor. Pass. izvTir^v. Verbal Adj. rvnrrirtog. 

32. x^'-'Q^^ io rejoice, Fut. x^^Q^]^^] Aor. ixaQr^v (^t, § 192, 8) ; 
Perf. aexaQij-Aay I have rejoiced, and y.exaQri^cii, I am glad. 

Remark 1. Of the preceding classes, there belong here verbs in -ayw, 
§ IGO, and vniaxvionai^ mentioned in § 359. 

Rem. 2. With these verbs several liquid verbs are classed, § 149, 6 ; still, 
these form the Fut. and the Aor. regularly, e. g. 

^sVo), to remaim, Fut. /ucvw ; Aor. sfisiva ; Perf fisfiivrjy.a. Verbal 

Adj. fisvETSog. 
rinM, to divide, Fut. vsfxu ; Aor. svii^ia ; Perf vsvinrjxa', Aor. Pass. 
iv sfiij&rjv. — Mid. vifiofiai, Fut. vf^ot/zai ; Aor. ivH fid ^rjv ', Perf 
Mid. or Pass, v ev i^r^jLa l. Verbal Adj. v EixrjTEog . 

§ 167. Verbs, ivhose Tenses are formed from different Roots, 
and luhich are classed together only in respect to Signifi- 
cation. (171.) 

1. aiQiod, to take, to capture, e. g. a city, Impf. riQow; Fut. 
aiQYiao^'^ VexL xiQ-q-Aa] Aor. (from 'EA) tilov, eltlv^ Aor. Pass. 

^ '^E&rjv'j Fut. Pass. aiQsd^rjaofiai, § 130, (d). — INIid. to choose, 
Fut. aiQ7]6oiA,ai ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. ^Q7]^ai ; Fut. Perf. rjQi^ao^aif 
PI. Prot. 338, b. Verbal Adj. aigerog, -rtog. 

2. sQxopiai, to go, to come, (the remaining modes and partici- 
pials are borrowed from e/jw/,, § 181, thus iQioiiai, Tw, i&i, Isvai, lav), 
Impf. VQX^f^V^'^y commonly rjeiv and rja, Opt. loifii ; Fut. slfii, I shall 
go, ij^(o, Ishallcome; — (EAETQ-) Perf. ilf;)Ma, § 124,2; Fut. 
iXsvaofiai almost exclusively poetical and later prose, still also 
Lys. p. 165, § 11 ; Aor. tjX&ov, sX-^oj, 'iX&oiiii, iX&i, § 118, 3, (a), 
iXd-eiv, iXd-wv. Verbal Adj. sXevaTsov. — "EQXoiiai has in common 
the signification of to come and to go ; the idea of coming com- 
monly belongs to the form from iXd-eiv, and the idea of going 
to that of f/jWf. But in compounds, each of these three verbs 
expresses both ideas, and only the preposition limits it to the 
one or to the other signification. 

3. iad^ioj, to eat, ImpLrio^iov, (edco, Ep.) Fnt.s^o^cii, § 154,4; 



§ 167.] VERBS. TENSES FORMED FROM DIFFERENT ROOTS. 197 



Perf. fd'/;(5ox«; Aor. ecpayoy, (faytTv^ Perf. Mid. or Vass. tdi'^dea- 
fiat, § 124, 2; Aor. Pass, iidsa&ijv. Verbal Adj. idtarog. 

4. OQUM, to seCj Impf. ^^(xoy; Perf. icoQuxa, Poet, also toqay.aj 
(Aug., § 122, 6) ; Aor. (from '/z/-) mov, i'dco, 'idoi^i, Idt, § 1 18, 3, (a), 
idsh; idcor. Oil the second Perf. olda, I know ^ see § 195. Fut. 
(from '0/7) oxfouat, 2. p. oipei, § 116, 11. — Mid. or Pass, oodjfica] 
Perf. Mid. or Fass. i(OQdfiai or coftf.iai, (oxpai, etc.; Inf. wg;t>«/; 
Aor. Mid. sib'ofn^i; IdtaO-ai, idov (and ^^-ith the meaning ecce, idov), 
as a simple only Poet. ; Aor. Pass. ojcp-O^tjr, oQfOijrca ; Ful. oqO-ij- 
Go^ai. Verbal Adj. oqmog and ontog. 

5. TQr^co, fo7'i(n, [/1PEM-) Fut. dna^ovfiai'^ Aor. tdQa^ov] Perf. 
dedQuiitj-Au ; Perf. INIid. or Pass. dedQcc^r^fiai. 

^gi^ouai, 't^&gs^a very rai'e. — Epic second Perf. didgofia [JPEMJl). 

6. (fiocoy to bear, (0I-) Fut. oiaco (Aor. Imp. ohe, oiaitco, bring-, 
in Ai'istoph., see § 230, under cptQco) ; — (EFK-) Aor. ijveyroif !}/ 
(rarer iinyxa), -eg, -e{v), -oixer, -eze, -ov (and -ufievy -azSy -av), §124, 
Rem. 2, Opt. iv^yy.oifii, etc. (rarer -«//(/, etc.), Inf. iveyy.eTvj Part. 
fVfyxcoV and ivsynag^ Imp. fveyxe, -hco, etc. ; — (EA'EK-) Perf. 
ivi^vo'ia, § 124, 2 ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. ir/;riyfica, -y^ai, -yv.rai, or 
ivr^vsxTai ; Aor. Mid. rjieyxufir^v, sveyy.ai, -aad-ui, -dfi&vog ; Aor. Pass. 
^v^X^r^v^ Fut. ivex&r^GOfiai, rarer oiG&/;<jOfiui. — Verbal Adj. olazog, 
olarkg, Poet. (fEQTog. — Mid. 

7. qpJ^.M^ § 178, ^o sa?/, Impf. fgcj/f with the meaning of the Aor., 

also (fdvai and qpa?, § 178, Rem. 2 ; — ('^^-) Aor. eIttov, eitzco, ei- 

Tzoifiiy E17T8, § 118, 3, (a), (the other forms of the Imp. are rarely or 

never used, compound ttqoeitie), eItzeTv, eIttwv, first Aor. Elna, not 

very frequent in Attic writers, more frequent Elnag, very frequent 

EmaiE, rarely EiTiav, Imp. eiTzov rarely, very frequent Eindtcoy Eina- 

rov, EiTzaTcov, and always Ei'TzatE ; all other forms wanting in the Att. 

From the Epic Pres. e'/qco^ come Fut. eqoj^ Perf Ei'Qr^ya, Perf. 

Mid. or Pass, eigr^iiaij § 123, 4 ; — ('^^-) Aor. Pass, eoqi^^t^v (eq- 

Qt&r^v appears to be not Attic), Qii&rjvai, Qr^^^Elg] Fut. Pass. Qfj-d-i^- 

co^ai and EiQ/jOo^at Mid. only in compounds, Fut. dTZEQovfim 

and first Aor. dnEinac&ai, to deny, to despair, Like dnEiTiEiv. — 

Verbal Adj. Q^rog, Q^zEog. 

Compare anayoQivw, to forbid^ unuTcov, I forbade ; avrdiyo), to contra- 
dict, avxilnov, I contradicted, oftener than unrj/ogsvca and apiiXe^oc. So, 
a/ogeiio jira xaxus, but apTilnov xaxbjg. 
27 



198 CONJUGATION AND DIVISION OF VERBS IN -fll. [§§ 168, 169. 

§ 168. Conjugation of Verbs in -f*(- (172.) 

1. Verbs in -lu arc principally characterized by taking in the 
Prcs. and Lnpf., (also in the second Aor. Act. and Mid. of seve- 
ral verbs) personal-endings, different from those of the conju- 
gation in -co, and also by omitting the mode-vowel in tlie Ind. 
of the tenses just named. The formation of all the remaining 
tenses of these verbs is like that of verbs in -co, with a few ex- 
ceptions. 

2. Several verbs in -p, which have a monosyllabic stem, 
take, in the Pres. and Impf., a reduplication, § 163, which con- 
sists in repeating the first consonant of the stem with i, when 
the stem begins with a simple consonant, or with a mute and 
liquid; but, W'hen the stem begins w^ith or, tit, or with an as- 
pirated vow^el, I with the rough Breathing is placed before the 
stem. These verbs are the following : 

^TA 'i-(nr}-iJ,L IIP A Til-fi-ngrj-fAL 

XPA y.l-xQri-^i JE {dl-drj-ixi) didsaat 

JBA {^L-(3rj-^i) ^L^ag OE Tl-&t]-yiL 

JIT A X-nra-ftat 'E 'i-rj-fiL 

HAA 7ii~ii-7ilr]-fj,L jJO 8l-8(a-^u. 

Remark. Most verbs in -^l do not follow this conjugation througliout in 
the tlu'ee tenses above named, but only in some particular forms ; four verbs, 
ti&ri^i, to place, 'lairj^xi, to station, didbiixi, to give, and hjfii, to send, liave this 
conjugation complete, thoug-h even in these verbs there are forms in use 
(together with several forms. of the mflexion in -^ui), which are borrowed 
fi-om the conjugation in -w. See § 172, Rem. 8. 

§ 169. Division of Verbs in -fii- (irs.) 

Verbs in -^t are divided into two principal classes : 

1. Such as annex the personal-ending to the stem-vov\'el. 
The stem of verbs of this class ends, 

(a) in a, e. g. V-oTTj-^t, to station. Stem 2TA- 

(b) " €, " Ti-dri-^i, to place, " OE- 

(c) " o, " dl-8(o-fiL, to give, " ^0- 

(d) " /, " dfictogo, « ^J- 

(e) " 0-, " sl^i, instead of eV/zt, to be, " ^E2-. 

2. Such as annex to their stems the syllable -rvv or -vv, and 
then append to this syllable the personal-endings. The stem 
of verbs of this class ends, 



§ 170.] VERBS I\ -fU. STEM OK THE PIIES. STRENGTHENED. 199 

A. In one of ihe four vowels, a, €, t, o, and assumes -vvv. 

(a) in a, e. g. axidd-vvv-m, to scatter^ Stem J^KJCJA- 

(b) " f, " xoQS-vvv-fii, to satisfi/, " iCOPii- 

(c) " t, only il-vvv-i.a, to atone " 77- 

(d) " o, e. g. aTQ(x)-vvi-ui, to spread out^ " 2TP0-. 

B. In a consonant, and assunaes -vv. 

(a) in a mute, e. g. dsU-vv-fii, to show, Stem zlETK- 

(b) " liquid " ofi-vi-fxi, to swear, " '0M-. 

Remark 1. AVhen a diphthong precedes the final consonant of the stem, 
then that consonant is omitted before the -vv, except it is a Kappa-mute, e. g. 

nl'-vi\uai> Stem ^ATP (comp. nl'Q-b), aq-vv^ai) 

dal-vvfXL " JjlIT (comp. dixlg, duLi-og) 

xai-vvnuL " KAIJ from KAJ (comp. Perf. y.ixad-fiai, xixacrfiai) 

xTH-vviii " KTETN from KTEN (Fut. xifv-w) ; but 

8slx-vvfii, itgy-vvfii, ^sv/-vvfii, ol'/-vv^i. 

Rem. 2. Verbs of the second class — those in -Vfii — form only the Pres. 
and Impf. like verbs in fit,, and even m these tenses, forms m -vfit and -via 
often occur indiscriminately, and m the Sing. Impf. the accompanying fonns 
in -vo) are predominant, and in the Pres. Subj. and in the Impf Opt., 
these are the regular forms. The verb a^s-vvv-fiL fi-om the stem 2BE-, 
is the only verb of tliis class which forms the second Aor., namely I'ff^Tjv ; 
tliere are, also, several verbs m -to, which form then* second Aor. according 
to tlie analogy of these verbs, e. g. dvoi, tdvv. 



§170. Char acteristiC'Voiu el and Strengthening' 
of the Stem of the Pr esent. (174.) 

1. In verbs of the first class, the short characteristic-vowel of 
the stem, «, e, 0, is lengthened in the Pres., Lxipf. and second 
Aor. Act., as follows : 

a and b into r], and mto co. 

Still, this prolongation extends in verbs in -e and -0 only to the 
Sing. Ind. of the three tenses above named, but in verbs in -a, 
to the Dual and PI. Ind., and also to the entire Imp. and Inf. 
of the second Aor. Act. Li the second Aor. Inf. Act. of verbs 
in -€ and -0, the -£ is lengthened into -£t, and -0 into -ov, e. g. 
x^ei-vaij dov-vai. In the second Aor. Mid., however, the short 
characteristic-vowel remains throughout. 

2. In verbs of the second class in -vfic, the stem ending in a 
vowel, and which annexes -^w, retains the short characteristic- 
vowel, except those whose stem ends in -0, e. g. arQ(6-vvv[iij 



200 VERBS IN -fll. iMODE-VOWELS. [§ 171. 

2TP0- ; but the stem ending in a consonant, which annexes 
'VVy is strengthened in the Pres. by prolonging the stem-vowel, 
namely, 

a becomes ?j, as in ni]y-vv(ii, second Aor. Pass, inuy-rjv 
a " at, " al-vi'(ui, insie'dd of UQW/AUL, si(itn'AP,''AIP 

£ " H, " deix-vvfii, stem zJEK, hence Ion. tdi^a 

V " sv, " ^svy-vvfxi, second Aor. Pass, i^vy-tjv. 



§ 171. Mo de-voiu els . (175.) 

1. The Ind. of the Pres., Impf. and second Aor. do not take 
the Mode-vowel, § 168, 1, and hence the personal-endings axe 
annexed to the verb-stem, e. g. 

t - cr T « - {xsS^a i-T L-S- E- fis&a i-do- fiE&a. 

2. The Subj. has, like verbs in -w, the mode-vowels cq and 
t], but these vowels coalesce with the characteristic-vowel, so 
that the following deviations from the verbs in -co in respect to 
contraction are to be noted, namely, 

ar) and di] coalesce into rj and ij (not, as in contracts in -aw, into a and q.) 
6t} coalesces into <J (not, as in contracts in -ow, into 01), e. g. 

l-aiu-(o = t-o"ic3 l-ffTa-r^g = i-ajfjg l-cnd-rj-Tat, = t-(JT»J-Ta* 

crT«-w = oriw cid-riq = (Txfjg 

ti-S-i-ct) = Ji-d^w Ti-&i-rjg = Ti-S^fjg TL-^i-(x)-(xaL = xi-i^oi-fiai, 

di-do-co = di-d(o di-do-rjg == di-dug di-do-Tj = dL-do). 

Remark 1. This form of the Subj. of i'cjTTj^ut and jld^rj^i is like the Subj. 
of the two Aorists of the Pass, of all verbs, e. g. Tvq)&oJ, -7)5, -fj, etc., 
TVJT-w, -fig, -ij, from tvti-to), aTa-^cj, -f/g, -jj, from Mirifii. 

Rem. 2. The Subj. of verbs in -r^t is like that of verbs in -i;a), e. g. 
dsixvvb), -vjjg, etc. 

3. The Impf. and second Aor. Opt. have the mode-vowel i, 
which is annexed to the characteristic-vowel, and with it forms 
a diphthong, e. g. 

Opt. Impf A. l-aia-i-riv = i-aTttl-'t]V Aor. 11. A. aial-riv Impf. M. l-aTal-jurjv 

di-do-L-rjv = di-dol-ijv dol-7)v di-dol-fiviv 

Rem. 3. The form of the Opt. of verbs in -s {tI&tjj^i) is like the Opt. of 
the Aorists Pass, of all verbs, e. g. (TT«-6^£i-7jv, Tvcp-del-rjv, tvji-iI-tjv. 

Rem. 4. The Impf Opt. of verbs in -v^i, like the Subj. Pres., follows the 
form in -w, e. g. dHxvvoifii. The few exceptions will be considered below. 



§173.] 



VERBS IN -jt«. PERSONAL-ENDINGS. 



201 



§ 172. Pe r sonal-e ndi 7ig s . (i76-i78.) 

1. The personal endings for the Act. are the following: 
(a) Indicative Present, 



Sing. 
Dual 


1. 
2. 
3. 
2. 


-g (properly -o-t) 
-aL[v) properly -it) 

-TOV 


X-airj-g 

X-aTrj-ffi{v) 

'i-Gxa-xov 


Plur. 


3. 
1. 
2. 


~XOV 

-fiEV (properly -fisg) 

-TE 


l-ffTU-TOV 

X-(ncc-f.isv 
X-aia-TS 




3. 


[-vai{v)] (properly -vii) 


[V-oTK-yzt ( 



The ending of the third Pers. PL -v a l [v] is changed into -a(n{v\ and then 
is contracted with the preceding stem-vowel of the verb. Still, the Attic 
dialect admits contraction only in the stems ending in -of, thus : 

from X-aTOi-v(Ti is formed i-ffTwo-i {j>-(jTa-a(Ti) 

" TL-d^E-Vai " Tl-d-HCTL Att. xi-di-dai 

" 5l-do-r(Ji " di-dolai, " di-do-daL 

" dsix-vv-v(TL " diix-vvai " dsiy.-vv-aai. 

Remark 1. The uncontracted form in -iuai, -oaai, -vaai, is the com- 
mon form of the Attic writers, though it, also, occm*s in the Ionic dialect ; 
the contracted form in -hcti, -ovgl, -lat, is the usual form of the Ionic and 
of the older Attic writers, as, also, of writers in the Common language. 
From'irj^ui — Stem'jE — fo^enrf, comes the Attic laai,, conti-acted from l-i-aai^ 

(b) The personal endings of the Pres. and second Aor. Subj. 
do not differ from those of verbs in -co. 

(c) The following are used for the Impf. and second Aor. 
Ind. 

Sing. 1. -»> Impf 'L-(TTr)-v i-xl-&r]-v 

2. -g 'i-ffTTj-g i-xi-d^ri-g 

3. - 'i-<Jiri E-xl-d^ri 
Dual 2. -xov A. n. i'-axr]-xov t-&s-xov 

3. -xtjv i-<jxri-xrjv i-d^i-xtjv 

Plur. 1. -fisv [properly -fisg) s-(Txrj-iJ.sp e-x^E-fxiv 

2. -Xe E-(TXT)-XS E-d^S-XS 

3. -actv e-fjTTj-aav s-&e-(Tap. 

Rem. 2. The Ind. of the two Aorists Pass, of all verbs is like the second 
Aor. I'o-TTjv, e. g. ixvn-tjv, i-axvi-d^riv, -r,g,-r],-r]xov,-rixT]v,-Tj^EV, -tjxs, -riaav. 

(d) The personal-endings of the Opt. Impf. and second Aor. 
—except the first Pers. Sing. — differ from those of the Opt. 
of the historical tenses of verbs in -oa only, that in verbs in -in, rj 



202 VERBS IN -jMt. PERSONAL-ENDINGS. [§ 172. 

precedes the endings mentioned under (c) above, comp. Opt. 

^ovltvotfACf ^ovXtvaatfiiy etc. with 

(Tial-rjv l-aial-T)V d^il-t]v -[i-Otl-r^v doi-rjv di-dol-r]V. 

Rem. 3. In the Dual and PI. Impf. Opt, the -rj in the Attic dialect is 
conmionly rejected, and the ending of the third Pers. PI. -rjaav is regularly 
shortened into -sv, e. g. 

JL&si-rjfiSV = Tld^EljiEV tOTWt-TJTS = laialjE 

jix/El-Tjaav = Ti&tiEv 8idol-ri(jav = didolEV. 

The same holds of the Opt. of Pass. Aorists of all verbs, e. g. naidsv&slrjfiev 
= naidEV&-nfifv — wholly like xid^drjv. — On the contrar}^, in the second 
Aor. Opt. Act., the abbreviated forms are very rare, except the third Pers. 
PL, which is commonly abridged. 

Rem. 4. The forms didojrjv and dojrjv also occur, 
(e) The endings of the Pres. and second Aor. Imp. are, 



Sing. 2. 


-^L 


{'L-(nct-&i) 


{ll-&8-'&l) 


{dl-do-&L) 


3. 


-TQ} 


I-OTW-TW 


Jl-&S-T(0 


dl-do-Tb) 


Dual 2. 


-TOV 


V-ora-TOV 


tI-&e-tov 


8l-do-Tov 


3. 


-TCOV 


i-aTa-TOJV 


Tl-S^e-TCOV 


8l-d6-Tb)V 


PI. 2. 


-xe 


V-o-ia-TS 


tI-^s-ts 


di-do-js 


3. 


-Twaav 


1-(TIU-T0)(T(XV 


TL-^s-Tcoaav 


di-dc-ruKiav 






or l-(TzdvT(ov 


Jl-d-SVTOlV 


di-doyTOJV. 



Rem. 5. The second Pers. Sing. Pres. Imp. rejects the ending -d^i, and 
as a compensation lengthens the short characteristic-vowel, namely, « into 
1], s into ft, into ov, v into v, 

X-dia-d^L becomes X-aii f] ri-&s-x)^L becomes Ti-d^fi 
dl-do-d^L " 8l-dov dsly.-vii-d-L " delxvv. 

The ending -^t in the Pres. is retained only in a veiT few verbs, e. g. 
(pu&L from cpriixl, i'crd-c from tifil, I'&l from Eifii, and some others ; also in 
simple forms of the Perf of verbs in -w, e. g. TsS^va&u 

In the second Aor. of Tl&rjf.u, \ul and dLdb)fxi, the ending ^d^i is softened 
into g, thus '&8-&L becomes S^sg, s-^t = eg, do-d-i = 86g ; but in the second 
Aor. of 'idTTJixi, the ending S^l is retained, thus (jTri-&L, also in the two 
Aorists Pass, of all verbs, e.g. TV7irj-&i, Tiaidev&riTi,, instead of ntti8ev^7]-&ij 
§ 21, Rem. 3. In compounds of crziid^i, in the Poet, dialect and in other 
Aorists belonging here, the ending -ijd^L is often shortened mto «, e. g. 
nagdaTa, anoaia, ngo^a, xaid^a. 

(f ) The ending of the Pres. and second Aor. Lif. is -vai. 
This ending is appended in the Pres. to the short characteristic- 
vowel ; but in the second Aor., to the lengthened vowel, a be- 
ing lengthend into ^, s into ei, o into ov, § 170, 1, thus, 

Pres. l-(TTix-vaL xi-d^i-vai di-do-vai dsLX-vv-vat 

Second Aor. (iiTj-vat -d^u-vai dovvai. 



§ 172.] VERBS IN -fll PERSONAL-ENDINGS. 203 

Rem. G. The Inf. of Pass. Aorists of all verbs is like aTijvat, c. g. tktitJ- 

(g) The endings of the Pres. and second Aor. participle are 
-yr?, -vTaciy -vr, which are joined to the characteristic-vowel ac- 
cording to the common rules, thus, 

L-GTa-vrg = i-ardc, l-aTuaa, i-axviv (nag, (iTuau, cridv 

ji-&e-rTg = ti-x^sIq, -sTaa, -iv -^fic, -O^uffa, d^iv 

di-do-vig = di-dovg, -oicra, -6v 8oig, -oma, -6v 
dfix-vv-vrg = dny.-vvg, -vau, -vv. 

Rem. 7. The partici})les of the two Pass. Aorists of all verbs are like the 
Part, ii&flg or &eig, e. g. rvn-slg, -uau, -iv, ^ovXsv&-eig. 

2. The Personal-endings of the Mid. are like those of verbs 
in -co, except that in the second Pers. Sing. Pres. and Impf. Ind., 
and in the Imp., the Personal-endings retain their full form, 
-Gcct. and -ao, almost throughout. Still, the following things 
are to be noted, 

(a) The second Pers. Pres. Ind. of verbs in -a is, in the Attic prose 
writers, only -aa-ciL; the contracted form is found, from the earliest period, 
only in the poetic dialect, e. g. irtlaia from iniarai^ai, in Aesch., dvvtj — 
from the Ionic ending -eai — instead of ^tya, in Soph, and Em-ip. — Li the 
second Pers. Imp. and in the Impf tar to, sniaTOJ, ri n I a toj, diviOy 
1] d vv w, are explained by the old grammarians as used instead of the bet- 
ter Attic forms Votuo-o, ijilaiacro, etc. ; still they are very often found in the 
Attic poets. 

(b) In verbs in -s, both the uncontracted and contracted forms of the 
Pres. and Impf are used, e. g. jld^mai. and tI^ji, iil&^ao and irl&ov, iI&bcto 
and tld^ov ; the regular forms of the second Aor., both of verbs in -e and 
-0, are those which are contracted, e. g. i^ov, -d^ov, sdov, dov. But in verbs 
in -o, the contracted forms are not used in the Pres. Ind., though in the 
Impf and Imp. both forms occur: idldoao and ididov, dldocro and dldov. 

(c) The contracted forms are uniformly employed throughout the Subj. ; 
in the Opt, as in verbs in -w, the a is always omitted, yet the form remains 
uncontracted. 

Rem. 8. The Sing. Impf Act. of tl&ri^i and blSa^i is generally formed 
from TI0EJI and JTzlOJl widi the common contractions. Of verbs in -t^/, 
the corresponding forms of -vto may be used throughout the Pres. and Impf, 
and exclusively in the Pres. Subj. and Impf Opt., e. g. dsixvico, ofivvb), av^- 
fiiyvvb), together with dslxrvfjii, o^vv^i, avaulyvv^i. — In Attic poetry, there 
are also contracted forms of TlS^rj^u and V?},ui in the second and third Pers. 
Sing. Pres. Ind. Act., e. g. ji&eig, Ulg, ii&sl, Isl. 



204 



VERBS IN 'fll TENSES AND PARADIGMS. 



[§173. 



Formation of the Tenses 



§ 173. I. First Class of Verbs in -fii . (i79.) 

1. In forming the tenses of the Act., as well as of the Fut. 
and first Aor. Mid., the short characteristic-vowel is lengthened, 
namely, a into rj, s into J], and in the Perf. Act. of riOr^f^i and 
tVp» * i^to £h and o into co ; but in the remaining tenses of the 
Mid., and throughout the Pass., the short characteristic-vowel is 
retained, with the exception of the Perf. and Plup. Mid. and 
Pass, of Ti&t]fii and it]fii, where the ei of the Perf. Act., rt&eixa, 
ri&Eijiaij eUa, eifxai, is retained. 

2. The first Aor. Act. and Mid. of zid-rifii., irnii and didcofjt, has 
X for the characteristic of the tense, not o, thus, 

e-&r}-y.-a, ^]-x-a, e-d(a~x-a. 

The forms of the first Aor. Act. s&7]xa^ ^y.a and edcoxa, are, how- 
ever, used only in the Ind., and, for the most part, only in the 
Sing. ; in the other Persons, as well as in the other Modes and 
Participials, the Attic writers used the forms of the second Aor. ; 
still, the first Aor. is sometimes employed in the PL Ind., and 
somewhat often in the third Pers. PL, e. g. i'&i^xaiiEv, X. C. 4. 2, 15. 
iScoxaiiEv, O. 9, 9. 10. idojy.atE, Antiph. 138, 77. sdcoxav, X. Cy. 
4. 6, 12. E&rfAav, H. 2. 3, 20. «g)/>aj^, Cy. 4. 5, 14. Also the 
forms of the second Aor. Mid. of riS^r^fii, Iri^ii and didcofiij are 
used by the Attic writers instead of the first Aor. On the con- 



§175. Paradigms of 



ACTIVE. 





»3 


m 

i 




B^t 


s 


^ ^ 



2TA-to station. 



OE- to place. 



z/0- to give. 



/lEIK- to show. 





S. 1. 




2. 




3. 


i 


D. 1. 


■^ 


2. 


5j 


3, 




P. 1. 


S 


2. 




3. 



i-crrj-iii. 

l-GTCC-TOV 

'l-ord-rov 
i-oru-fXEv 

l-Gld-TE 

i-6td-oi{v) 
(from lard-aGi) 



Ti-d^E-rov 
Ti-^E-rnv 

ri-d-E-flEV 
ri-^E-ZE 

ti-d-E'dat!\v) 
and ri-'&EiO([v) 



di-8co-fAi 
di-8(o-g 

dL-d03-0({v) 

di-do-zov 
di-do-zov 

dl-do-^EV 
'di-do-TE 

-d6-dot{v)and 
di-dovai{v) 



dEiy.-vvfii^ 

dei'y.-vv-g 

dE(x-vvci{v) 

dEiy-vv-Tov 

dEiy.-VV-70V 

deix-vij-^Ev 
dsix-vv-ZE 
dEiy.-vv-d(}t{v)et 
dEiy,-vv(ji{v) 



1 And dsLxvv-a, -cf?, etc., especially d£ixvvov(Ti{v). Also Impf. idzUvvov^ 



§174.] 



VERBS IN '(It. TENSES AND PARADIGMS. 



205 



trary, tlie forms of the second Aor. Ind. Act. of riO-r^fu, ujfu and 
didcofUy namely, ^^f]'^y V'f'y ^d(0Vj are not in use. 

3. The verb MTf^fn forms the first Aor. Act. and Mid., like 
verbs in -co, with tlie tense-characteristic cr, e. g. t-6TJj-6-a, i-artj-a- 
«////r. The second Aor. Mid. ioTa[xi^v is not used. This tense 
is formed, however, by some other verbs, e. g. ETiTdf/r^v, iTiQiufxr^v. 

Remark 1. The second Aor. Mid. and the second Fut. Mid. are wanting 
in tliese verhs, also tlie Fut. Perf., except in 'lairjfii, the Fut. Perf. of which 
is £frr»/|w old Att., and £(rr»||o,u«t, '^ 154, G. 

Rem. 2. On the meaning of the verb 'iortjfji, the following things are to 
be noted : the Pres., Iinpf., Fut. and fii-st Aor. Act. have a Trans, meaning, 
to station ; on the contrary, the second Aor., the Perf. and Plup. Act., and 
tlie Fut. Perf, have a reflexive or Intrans. meaning, to station one's self, to 
stand, namely, taTtjv, I stationed myself, or / stood, iiTir,y.cx, I have stationed 
myself, I stand, sto, sarijxfiv, stabam, t(jn]^M, svrrrf^o^ni, stabo, — a(fiari]%(x), 
I shall withdraw. The Mid. denotes either to station one^s self, to stand 
erect, to stand, consistere, or to let one^s self he stationed, i. e. to he stationed, 

§174. 11. Second Class of Verbs in -f^i. (i79.) 
The formation of tenses of verbs of the second class, § 169, 2, 
has no difficulty. All the tenses are formed from the stem, after 
the rejection of the ending -vvvfii or -vvfxt. Verbs in -o, which 
in the Pres. have lengthened the o into ca, retain the co through- 
out the tenses, e. g. otQw-rrv-fxi, ^c6-vvv-[j,i, Qco-vvv-fii, Fut. dT^oa-ffca, 
etc. But verbs, whose stem ends in a liquid, take, in forming 
some of the tenses, a Theme ending in a vowel, e. g. ofA-vv-iii, 
Aor. (a^-o-6a, from 'OMO^. The second Aor. and the second 
Fut. Pass, occur only in a few verbs, e. g. ^Evy-vv-[j,i. See § 182. 



Verbs 



n -f^i 



(180.) 





MIDDLE. 1 




ZTA- to station. 


OE- to place. 


JO- to give. 


/IE IK- to show. 




i-aTa-nui 


Tt-'&E-lACa 


di-8o-fiai 


dEl'/.-VlJ-fAat 




i-aza-oai 


Ti-O^s-aai and ri-xf^rj 


di-do-6ai 


d£ix-vv-(jai 




i-ara-rai 


Ti'x^E-rai 


di-do-zai 


bEiy.-vv-zai 




i-ara-iiE&ov 


ri-d^t-iiE&ov 


di-do-fXE&ov 


dEtx-vu-^EOov 




i-ara-o&ov 


ri-d-e-cx^ov 


di-do-a{^ov 


dElX-VV-od-OV 




i-aza-Gd^ov 


Ti-d-e-a&ov 


dt-do-Gd^OV 


8Eiy,-vv-6<yov 




l-aTu-^iE&a 


Tl-OB-llE&a 


di-do-fiEOa 


dtiy.-vv-^£y}a 




l-6Ta-0&8 


ZL-&E-0<yE 


dl-do-a&E 


dhr/.-vv-adE 




I'OTa-vzai 


Ti-d^E-vzai. 


di-do-j^zai 


dEix-vv-vzai 




"Vsg, -vt{v), and the 


; Participle usually dsi) 


KVii-oiv, -ovora, -ov, § 


172, Rem. 8. 



28 



206 



PARADIGMS OF VERBS IN -fU. 



[U75. 









ACTIVE 


. 






i 

c 


1 




2:TA- to station. 


0/:,'- to place. 


/lO- to give. 


/iE IK- to show. 








S. 1. 


1 l-OTOJ 


zi-Oco 


dt-do) 


8ei/.-vv-(o 








2. 


\ {-(y^lri>' 


Ti-Oi]-g 


di-dci)-g 


8tiy.-vv-r^g, 








3. 


1 i-ozu 


Tt-x>5 


di-do) 


etc. 








D. 1. 
















2. 


(-(JTlj-ZOV 


Zl-{y7l-T0V 


di-8o~i-zov 


, 






•^ 


a 


i-ozFj-rov 


Ji-{}/j-ZOV 


di-dbJ-zov 








!g 


p. I. 


l-OTOJ-y.EV 


ZL-d(0-^8V 


dl-ddj-flEV 










2. 


I aiij-zt 


ZL-&/J-Z8 


di-d(o-zE 










3. 


l-()TCO-Ol{v) 


7i-{)-6j-gi{v) 


8i-d(x}-Gf{v) 








S. 2. 


i-GTt] 


Tl-x>8l 


di-dov 


88(y.-vv 




e 






(from hTCcOi] 


{from ri{y8&i) 


(from dt'do&i) 


(from 88iy.vvd-i) 




lis 




3. 


l-GZa-TCO 


Tl-d-E-ZOJ 


8i-86-zoj 


8817. VU -70} 






c 


B. 2. 


i-oza-TOV 


t(-(^8-T0V 


di-do-zov 


8tiy.-vv-70v 






1. 


3. 


i-GTU-7C0V 


ZL-Ot-ZOJV 


di-do-zojv 


88iy.-rv •703V 






t 


P. 2. 


l-azd-te 


ZI-&8-Z8 


8i-do-7S 


88iy.-rv-78 






S 


3. 


i-oza-ra)Gav 


Zl-&8-T(OGaV 


di-d6-Z03GaV 


88iy.-rv-70}Gav 










et i-ozdvzojv 


et Ti-^evzmv 


et di-dopTOJV 


and 88iy.-vvvzo3V 




In fin. 


l-ozd-vcu 


Ti-&8-vai 


di-do-vui 


88iy.-vv-vai 




Part. 


l-6zdg,daa,av 
G. dvzog 


r(-&8ig,8lGa,8v 
G. Evzog 


8L-d0VC^0l(TU,6v 

G. oviog 


88iy.-vvg, vGa, vv 
G. vvzog 








S. 1. 


L-0Z7]-V 


i-zi-&ovv 


t-di-dovv 


8-88iy.-vvv 








2. 


i-ozrj-g 


8-zi-{f8ig 


i-8i-dovg 


i-88iy.-vvg 








3. 


i-azTj 


8-Ti-&8L 


i-di-dov 


E-88iy.-vv 






.» 


D. 1. 














1 


2. 


i-Gtd-rov 


l-Zt-{>8-T0V 


i-d(-do-70v 


E-88iy.-VV-70V 








3. 


l-Gzd-ztjv 


8-Zl-&8-Zt]V 


E-8i-du-zjjv 


E-88(y.-vv-7riV 






P. 1. 


l-Gzd-HEV 


S-Zl-d'E-f^EV 


i-8i-8o-fi8v 


i-88iy.-vv-{^8v 




;j 




2. 


l-Gzd-T8 


E-Zl-{^8-Z8 


E-8i-8o-Z8 


E-88iy.-rv-z£ 




1^ 




3! 


i-Gzd-Gav 


i-Ti-d^E-Gav 


i-8i-8o-Guv 


E-88iy.-vv-Gav 






S. 1. 


l-Gzai-i]v 


71-&EI-JJV 


8i-8oi-),v 


88iy.-vv-oiiii 




^^ 






1^. 


i-Gzai-ijg 


zi-&8i-r^g 


8i-8oi-)jg 


8siy.-vv-otg, 








3. 


l-Gzai-ri 


Zl-x^El-lj 


8i-8ot-ij 


etc. 






g 


D. 1. 














•i 


2. 


i-Gzai-tov ^ 


zi-&Ei-rov 1 


8i-8oT-7ov^ 








1- 


3! 


i-Gzai-zr^v 


TL-&El-Z^V 


8i-8oi-zr^v 








P. 1. 


i-Gzcd-^ev 


z(-x}ei-^Ev 


8i-8oi-fi£v 










2. 


i-Gzai-zs 


ZI-&81-T8 


8i-8or'Z8 










3! 


l-Gzai-ev 


ZI-&EI-8V 


8i-8o('-Ev 










S. 1. 


t T 

t-Gzr^-v, I 


[l-^ij-v] ) A.I. 


{e-8oj-v)^ A.I. 










2. 


'i-Gzri-g \stoo4, 


{E-d-rj-g) > used 


{E-8o3-g) > used 






fcj 


^ 


3! 


e-GTTJ 


{s-&7i) } for it 


{e-8co) ) fork 






,s> 


D. 1. 












_V3 


"^ 


2. 


S- GTV -ZOV 
l-GtlJ 'TTfV 


E-&E-ZOV 


8-8o-70V 


wanting. 






^ 


3. 


8-{}E-Z7jV 


E-86-Z^V 






^ 


^> 


P. 1. 


8' arrj -fisv 


8-d^8-(l8V 


E-80-llEV 










2. 


E'G rr] -re 


8-d-8-Ze 


E-80-7S 










3. 


S-GT7J -Gav 


B-d-E-GaV 


8- 8 0- Gav 






Ig 


See 


§172, Re 


m. 3. 2 On the ii 


regular accentu 


ation ofijilojafii 


XI, etc., see § 176, 1, 





§ 175.] 



PARADIGMS OF VERBS IN 'fit' 



207 





MIDDLE. 1 




2:T^' to staliun. 


OE- to place. 


//O- to give. 


/JEIK- to show. 




i-ffTcH-^icu - 


n-Oco-^ica 


di-8co-fiai 


8ErA-vv-(x)fiai 




j-(Trj/ 


ti.-&}l 


di-d(p 


8E(.>i-vv-ri, 




i-aTi'i-Tcu 


7i-i))j-zai 


d(-d(o-zai 


etc. 




i-67C0-fi€OoV 


z^-l)co-/^£l^OJ' 


di-da-f/EOov 






t-GTlj-GiyOV 


ri-Oij-Gxyov 


di-ddJ-aOov 






l-(JTFi-Oi>OV 


Tl-O-fj-GO-OV 


8l-d(0-G\)^OV 






l-GTco-neihi 


Ti-\}M-{(tx}a 


di-dco-^E-d-a 






t-(Tr//-Oi>€ 


7t-\>/}-(7i>£ 


8i-d(o-G\)-e 






l-ardi-vzai 


rt-d^co-vzat 


di.-d(o-vzai 






i'Gzd-oo and 


Zi-d^e-oo and 


di-do-Go and 


8Eiy.-vv-G0 




l-GTOi 


71-&0V 


di'-dov 






1-6X0.-0x^(0 


Ti-Oe'-GOco 


di-do-G&a) 


8Eiy.-VV-Gd'03 




i-aza-ax^ov 


ri-d'S-Gd^OV 


di-do-Gd-ov 


8ErA-vv-Gd-ov 




l-6Ta-6{}03V 


Tl-di-GiyaV 


di-do-G&ojv 


8E(y.-vv-Gd^ojv 




i-ara-oO-E 


zi-xye-G&s 


di-do-Gd-s 


8eU-vv-g&e 




iard aOcooavand 


Ti-Ot-Gd^coGav and 


8i-d6-Gfo3Gav and 


8Eiy.-vv-G&()3Gav 




i-6Td-C){yoov 


7i-{>t-Gxymv 


di-do-Gd-MV 


and 8Eiy-vv-G'&(ov 




i-Gza-ad^ui 


ri-d^e-G&cu 


8i-do-G-&(u 


8El'A-VV-G&(a 




l-azd-fitvoi;, ;/, ov 


ri-{>t-iitvoi;, 7], ov 

i-7i-{y£-fAtiV [d^OV 


di-do-iAEvog, ij, ov 


8£(y-vv-ixEvog, rj, 
ov 




[-nzd-n>]v 


E-d(.-d6-[iriv [dov 


E-8ElX-VV-flt]V 




I azd-60 and rarco 


i-Ti-ds-Go and i-zi- 


E-di-do-GO and £-5/- 


E-8Eiy.-VV-G0 




rozd-zo 


i-zi-O^e-zo 


i-di-do-zo 


E-8Eiy.-vv-zo 




razdf^itOov 


i-zi-{yt-ix£\}op 


E-8i-d6-fAE&OV 


E-8Eiy.-vv-j.i£-0-ov 




rara-a&ov 


I-zl-Oe-gOov 


i-di-do-Gd-ov 


E-8Er/.-vv-Gd-ov 




razd- iiyqv 


i-zi-d^t-GOr^v 


E-8i-d6-G&fjV 


E-8Eiy.-VV-G'd-}]V 




laza-iJLe\>a 


i-zi-d^t-fieO^a 


i-di-do-iAE&a 


E-8Eiy-vv-fiEd^a 




raza-60-8 


i-zi-de-G&B 


E-dl-do-Gd-E 


E-8Eiy.-vv-G-d-E 




l-oza-vzo 


E-Zl-d^S-VZO 


E-8i-do-vzo 


e-8eix-vv-vzo 




i-GTCH-H^V 3 


Zl-d^Ol-ll^V ^ 


8i-8oi-[i7]v 4 


8Eiy.-vv-oi[A.riV 




i-azal-o 


Zl-d'Ol-O 


8i-8oi-o 


8Eiy-vv-oio, 




i-ozat-TO 


zi-Ooi-zo 


81-801-zo 


etc. 




i-azai-fiEOov 


zi-O-oi-jjeOov 


81-801-fiEd^ov 






l-azai-aO^ov 


zi-Ooi-gOov 


81-801-G&0V 






l-Gzai-od-iiv 


Z(-\}0l-G&l]V 


8i-8oL-G{)-riV 






t-ozai-{i£\}a 


zi-d^of-^e&a 


8i-8oi-fiE{)^a 






l-GZai-G&S 


Zl-Ooi-G-d-E 


8i'8oi-G{)-8 






t-Gzai-vzo 


zi-Ooi-vzo 


81-801-vzo 






{s-Gzd-{4,7jv does 


i-d^a-fitiv 


E-86-fA,fjV 






not occur, but 


E-d-ov {from E&SGo) 


E-8ov (from e8ogo) 






i-nzd-fA,r]v 


E-d^t-ZO 


E-8o-zo 






B-7ZQia-ljLr]V) 


E-d^E'llEd^OV 


E-8o-fAEx)-OV 








e-Oe-gOov 


E-80-G'{}0V 


wanting. 






E-xfE-GOr,V 


E-86-GOriv 








E-OE-^Ed-a 


E-86-iiEOa 








E-&E-G&E 


E-80-Gd^e 








s-d-e-vzo 


8-80-vzo 






3 On the accentu 


ation in inlaiaiOf etc. 


, see § 176, 1. 4 


See § 176, 2. 



208 



PARADIGMS OF VERBS IN 'flL 



[§175. 



ACTIVE. 




or' 

C 


X 


= = ? 
■=. " ^ 


XT A- to station. 


OE- to place. 


zJO- to jonre. 


/IE IK- to show. 






S. 1. 


6TM 1 


{^M i 


dcj 1 








2 


(7r/~,- 


-^'Hr^' 


d(p-g 








g 3- 


(77?/ 


0(l 


do) 








•S'D.l. 














s 2. 


(TrA/-TOr 


'&fj-TOV 


d(0-70V 








;&' 3. 


(77//-70y 


Oq-TOV 


8(a-7<)V 








!g P- 1. 


O70J-fJ,EV 


-d^ca-fiev 


dco-fl8V 








2. 


a trite 


{^tj-te 


d(0-78 








3. 


azco-aiiv) 


d-co-otiv) 


dco-a({v) 








S. 1. 


OtUl-ljV 


d^ei-t^v 


doL-r^v 












<jtai-}]g 


'&8i-rig 


doi-)]g 










3. 


ozai-ri 


'&d-ri 


doi-r] 






t^ 




D.l. 
















2. 


Gtai-rjzov 2 


'&ei-?]tov 2 


doi-r]70v 2 






•2 


^ 


3. 


OZai-7]t7]V 


'&H-^ti]V 


doi-^ttiv 






^ 


P. 1. 


atcu-rifiev 


{yti-rj^tv 


doi-rifA8v 








2. 


07ai.-7]T8 


d^El-7]TS 


d0l-7]7S 










3. 


6tai-EV 


d^El-tV 


doi-8v 








S. 2. 


6T}]-&1 3 


{Teg id-t&i) 4 


dog [do&i) 4 








W 


3. 


6T7] -TO) 


i9-f-Z03 


86-703 










D.2. 


(JT?] -rov 


'&8-70V 


86-70V 








<2 
5^ 


3. 


o ZTj -rmv 


'd'S-703V 


do- 1 03V 








§H 


P. 2. 


ar?] -re 


^t-7E 


86-78 








►^ 


3. 


G7 7]-rcooav 
and ardvtcov 


'&8-7cooav and 

{)-8V7COV 


86-7036av and 

80Vt03V 






Inf. 


arrj-vai 


'&£i-vai 


8ov-vai 






Part. 


arag, daa, dv 


-d^eig, Eioa, tv 


8ovg, ovaa, ov 










Gen. otdvtog 


Gen. d^sv7og 


Gen. 86vtog 






Futifre. 


6Tr]-aco 


■&l^-0(0 


8 CO -a 03 


881^(0 




Aorist I. 


s-arr^oa, I sta- 


8-&)]-y.a 


8-8co-y,a 8-88tta 






[tioned, 


Instead of these forms the second Aor. is j 






used in the Dual and PI. Ind. and in the i 








other Modes and Participials, v) 173, 2. 




P 


erfect. 


t-airj-'Aa ^ sto 


78- '& si.-y.a 


88- 8 03 -xa 88-8£ixa 




P 


luperfect. 


s-otrj-xeiv and 


8-78-0- 8 i-y.ElV 


8-8e- 8 0) -aaiv i-88-8sixeiv 




1 


El-6T)l-'ASlV 








Fut. Perf. 


i-attj^co oldAtt. 


wanting. 


wanting. | wanting. 




PAS 


Aor. L 1 


i-6ta-&riv 1 


i-78-&rjv^ 1 8-86-&t]v 1 i-d8ix-&?]V \ 


1 The comi 


Dounds, e. g. anoo 


rc5, fxt>o), diado), have the same accentuation as 


the simpl 


es, e. g. unoanx,a 


I, iyMi]xov, diadbifxEv. 2 See § 172, Rem. 3. 


3 In com| 


position, TTaQuaTTji 


^/, nnQixiJia ; an6aT7]&L, anoaKx, § 172, Rem. 5. 


4 In com^ 


josition, nsQt&EQ, 


srOsg; unodog, txdog; ns()i&ST8, sy.doTS, §118, 




Re 


m. 1. 


5 See §176, 3 


6 iisi^rjv an 


d je&TjcropaL inst 


Bad ofiOi&Tjv 





§175. 



PARADIGMS OF VERBS IN -p. 



209 





M 1 1) 1) L E . 1 




^I'yl- to station. 


OE- to place. 


ZiO- to give. 


/lEJK- to show. 




{cTCO-fiiu does not 


'Ocj-^ai 7 


dco^ai, "^ 






occur, but TTQIM- 


*« 


do) 






fiai, -{i, -ijTai, 


-O^ij-rai 


d(0-TCU 






etc.) 


{ycj-vzai 


doj-ixsifov 
doj-Gd^ov 
da-Gx^ov 
doj-n8\}a 

d(O-G0-8 

8(a-vzai 






((y7«A,M/^i' does not 


{yoi-iir^v 8 


8oi-fxriv 8 






occur, but 7r^/a/- 


{>0l 


8oi-o 






fiili, -uio, -alio, 


d-ol-TO 


801-10 






etc.) 


{ioi-fAsOov 

{)^ot-fi8\}a 
d^oi:-o{>8 


8oi-fX8&OV 

801-Gd^ov 

8oi-G{yt]v 

8oi-{i8\}u 
80l-Gi}8 








d^oi-vzo 


8oi vzo 






{aTU-ao or azco 


■OOV {{)-8G0) 9 


8od {86go) 9 






does not occur, 


^t-6{^CO 


86-Gx>0} 






but 7iQia-oo or 


{)-8-G{r0V 


86-g{^ov 






TIQIM) 


{)8-Gd^C0V 
S-i'-Gd-S 

'&8-Gd-(OGav and 
-O-e-gO^wv 


86-Gd^(OV 

86-G&S 

86-Gd-(oGav and 
86-gO-ojv 






{6zd-a&ai)7iQia6. 


O-i-G&CU 


86-G&(u 






{azd-fievog) nqia- 


&8-}l8V0i:, -T], -ov 


86-{A,8'Pog, -//, -ov 






liEvog 










GZTi-OOliai 


[d^i^-GO(Aai ^] 


80J-GOIJ.CU 


88i^o{Aai 




i-azr^-ad[irfV 


[E-xfr^-y.a-firiv) 

Instead of these forms 
used by tlie Attic write 


[8-8o)-Ka-(iijv] 

;he second Aor. Mid. is 
rs, $ 173, 2. 


i-88l^dlA,7]V 




t-azd-fjai 


78- d- 8 I -fXCU 


88-80-fiai 


88-88iy-iiai 




i-aru-fniv 


8-T8- & 8 1-IX7]V 


8-88-80- fltjV 


E-88-88lY-^7]V 




t-(jZl'ji^OfA(U 


wanting. 


v/anting. 


wanting. 


S I V E. 1 


1 Fut. 1. 1 aza-d-riaoi 


lai 1 TE-driGoiiai 6 


8o-'&rjGO[Aai 88ii-d^riGO}iai 


and d^E-d^ijaofiai, ^ 


21, 2. 7 Also i 


n composition, iv^(0(xtti, -]], -^}tccl, 


etc., ano&u,^ai, - 


fi, -ijTat, etc., £x5a 


juai, -a>, -onai, etc., dno8o)fjai, -(f). 


-mm, etc. 8 


See § 176, 2. 9 


In composition, xard^ov, anod^ov ; 


nsQidov, anodov; 


yMTd&f(T&f, TTfQldoa 


&e; evd^ia&s, ngodoa&s', hut ii&ov, 


tU&ov] 7igo8ov, ii 


^(5oi', §118, Rem. 1. 





210 SUMMARY OF VERBS IN "ftt- [§§ 176, 177. 



§ 17(3. R e m a r k s o n t It e P a r a d i g- m s . 

1. Tlie verbs d vv u fi a l , to he able, iniajafiai, to know, yqi^ofiui, to 
liang, and TjfjluaOai, to buy, have a (lilfereiit accentuation froiri 'iiriufiai in 
the Pres. Siihj. and liiij)f". Opt., namely, Suhj. (JtyoY'^f, inlaxiDijai^-rj, -r,iai, 
-ijtTdor, -7j(/t/5, -o)Pi(Xi', Opt. dvtaijjrjv, iinnaiijrjv, -uio, -una, -utadov, 
-aiaO^f,, -uit'TO', so also urai'fit]!', -«io, -uno (§ 177, 4.) 

2. The forms of the Opt. Im|)f and second Aor. Mid. in -o<, viz. Tidoi\urjVf 
■&olfxr}v, are more common than those in ~si^ viz. ridH}ji]Vj -tio, -nro, etc., -dtt- 
ljT}v, -ilo, -Hio, etc. In compounds the accent remains as in simi)les, thus, 
ivitotfn]v [ifdd^Tjv), iy&olo [ii'd-ilo], etc. The same is true of compounds 
of doljjr}v, e. g. diudoifAtjv, diudulo, etc. 

3. On the abbreviated form of the Perf. and Plup. : t-cnu-rov, c-ora-^E*', 
e-aia-Ts, s-a-i(x~ai{v), see § 193. 

4. The forms of the Impf. iil&ovv, -sig, -«, idldovv, -org, -ov, are con- 
structed according to the Conjugation in -£w and -oo). The other forms, iil- 
■&r)v, -rj<;, -i], edlduiy, -wc, -w, are not used, § 172, Rem. 8. 

5. Verbs in -vfii, as has been seen, form the Suhj. and Opt. like verbs 
in -ho:. Still there are some examples where tliese Modes follow the anal- 
ogy of verbs in -u<, otto)? uI] 8 i uaxs d uvv v t a i — instead of -iV/t«j. — PI. 
Phaedon. 77, b. ipv/oiTo tt xal n syv iii o (from vlto, instead of voito) Ibid. 
118, a. 

6. In later writers the Perf. and Plup. are found with the Trans, meaning, 
/ have stationed, namely e<jt a xa, ha t u xs iv . 

Summary of Verbs in -/ut. 

1. Verbs in -/zt which annex the Personal-endings to 
the Stem-vowel. 

§ 177. (a) Verbs in -a, {l-crri-fn, ZTA-). (iss.) 

1. 'M-iQi]-iii, to lend,, to hestoiv^ XPA-, xr/Qavai, Fut. /(>^/(Tw, etc. 
Mid. to borroio^ Fut. xQrjaoiiai — Aor. IxQ^^^F^i'^ in this sense is 
not used by the Attic writers. To the same stem belong, 

2. xQ^'h oportet, stem XPA- and XPE-, Subj. /ofj, Inf. /oTjjwt, Part, (to) 
XQfbiv ; Impf. f/^T/v or XQ^'^t 0\>i. XQei't] from XPE-. 

Inf. /('/yr, unoxQ]]v, in Eurip., by contraction from xQf^^iv. 

3. itTzoxQT], it suffices, sufficit ; besides those formed regularly from XPASl ; 
aTToxQoJdLV, Inf. ixnoxofiv; Impf. ansxQr]; Aor. ansxQriae{v), etc. Mid. uno- 
XQOJfxai, to have enough, uaoxQi}(T&uL, inflected like xQ^o/xai, § 129, Rem. 2. 

4. ovivrjixi, to benefit^ 'OAA-, onvdvar, Impf. Act. wanting: 
Fut. 6v/j(jo3 ; Aor. ojvtjoa, Inf. ovtjaai (for ovijvai, like arrival, in PI. 
R.p. 600, d.). Mid. oviva^uai, to be profited, Fut. 6v)]aofiai ; Aor. 
Mvriiiriv (K^vdpjv later, but also in Eur. ajvaoOe), -riao, -riTo, etc., 
Imp. ovipo, Part. 6v/]^evog (Horn.), Opt. ovaifxr^Vy -aio, -aizo, § 176, 



§178.] 



SUMMARY OF VERBS IN -fll. 



211 



1., Inf. ovaa&at ; Aor. Pass, covt'jxytjv instead of covr^fiijv. The re- 
maining- forms are supplied by MCftltiv. 

5. m-fi-7ihj-fH, to Jill^njA-y mfiTildvai; Impf. smixnl^v] Fiit. 
7tX)i6(o) Aor. f7rA//cr«; '^Yid. 7i!iAnlanai,7t(iinlao&ai\ \m\){. IttihtiXu- 
fifir; Perf. jMid. or Pass. TztTiXi^ofiai; Aor. Pass. iTzhjoOr^v § 131; 
second Aor. iTzX/ifiijv Poet. — Mid. 

The ft in tlie reduplication of this and the following verb is usually 
omitted in composition, when a /x precedes the reduplication, e. g. ifxniTiXu- 
//(u, but iffjiifinXafuriv. Contraiy to this rule, however, forms with and 
without fi are both used by the poets, according to the necessities of the 
verse. 

6. 7TifA7TQr,fii, to burn, Trans., in all respects like m)mlr,f^f. 

7. TylH-MI, to endure, Pres. and Impf. wanting, (instead of 
them VTTOf^ivcoy avrjiouai)] Aor. hlr^v, (zlco,) rlaiijv, t).^&i, zldg ; 
Fnt. rltjoofiar, Perf. rtzX^-Aa. 

8. (jD/r/^/, to say^ (stem 0.^^-), has the following formation: 







§178. 


(1S4.) 








Present. ACTIVE. 


Imperf. j 


Indi- 


S. 1. 


Cfl^Jll 


Indi- 


S. 1. 


eqjr^v 


cative 


2. 


^^^^'v V 


cative. 


2. 


'iq)ng, us'ly Ecpriod-a 




3. 


q)riai{v) 




3. 


m [§116,2. 




D. 2. 


cpazov 




D.2. 


Ecpazov 




3. 


cpazov 




3. 


icpuTijV 




P. 1. 


(pan8v 




P. 1. 


scfafASv 




2. 


cpazs 




2. 


eqjuTS 




3. 


Cfuai{v) 




3. 


eccuGav 


Subj. 


qpw, (jpi;^, qjfi, cfjjzoi; cfoj^ev, 


Opt. 


qjaujv, q:a,r^g, cpau], (paffjzov 




(pilTEy Cfc5Gl{v) 




and (paizov, cpau]zr^v and 


Imp. 


(fu&l or g:«i>/., qpazco, g=a- 




cpamjv, (palriixev and cfcd- 


Inf. 
Part. 


10V, quTcor, (puTe, (puroj- 
(juv and cpdvicov 




fiEv, (fatrjiE and Cfaizs, -fev 


Fut. 


cpr^aco 


q^arui 

(pdg, qparr«, q^dv 


Aor. 


£(fr]<ya. 




G. cfavTog, (paar^q 






MIDDLE. 1 


Perf. 


[mp. ntqaoOw, let it he said. Aor. 


Part, (pdfievog, affirming. 




Verbal adjective 9«7oV, 


cpazEog. 



Remark 1. In tlie second person cp^g, both the accentuation and the 
Iota subscript is contrary to all analogy. In compounds it retains the accent 



212 DEPONENTS BELONGING TO VERBS IN 'fit. [§ 179. 

on the ultiniato, e. g. uvricpfig, but avfjcp7]fii, unocpijfiL, (rifjcpaOi, etc. On 
the inclniation ofthi.s verh in the Pres. Ind. (except (fi'iq), see § 'i^i. 

Rem. 2. Tliis verb has two significations, (a) to say in jL'eneral, (b) to af- 
firm, (aio) to assert, etc. The Fut. qpijaw, however, has only tlie lust signifi- 
cation ; the fust is expressed by Xi^o), c'^tu. Tlie Lnpf! t(p rj v with (pavat 
and (p a g, is used also as an Aorist. 

Rem. S. With (prjfil the verb i) fj, I, inquam may be compared, which, like 
inquqm, IS used in the s|)irited repetition of what had been said; the imper- 
fect i)v, i] is used in the phrases ^v d' iyu, I said, 7] (5' ii?, Jie said, to describe 
a conversation. 

§ 179. The folloioing Deponents also belong here. 

(185.) 

1. ayaixai, to luonder, Impf. iiydiiriv; Aor. ^ydodr^v; Fut. dyd- 
aoiiai. 

2. dwafxai,, to be able^ second Pers. bvvaoai {8vvr] from the Ion. 
dvvEai, Poet, and later,) Subj. 8vvco^ai, § 176, 1, Imp. dvvaoo, Inf. 
dvvaad-ai, Part, dvvdfievog ; Impf. idwdf^T^v and rjdvv ; second Pers. 
idvvco {-aoo more rarely), Opt. dvvai'ijr^v, dmaio, § 176, 1 ; Fut. 
dw/jaofiai ; Aor. idvrrj&r^v, yd. and idwdaO'/jv, the last Ion. and in 
Xen. (Aug., §120, Rem. 1.); Perf. 8edvvr]fAai. Verbal adjective 
dvvarog, able ^nd possible. 

3. imara[xai, to knoiv, (properly, to stand upon something', to be 
distinguished from iq^laia^ai), second Pers. imazaoai {imara sel- 
dom and only Poet.), Subj. iTZiazco^ai, § 176, 1, Imp. Imozco (more 
seldom Inioraao) ; Impf. riTn^rdixriV, tittigtco (more seldom t]niora- 
cro). Opt. iTZKJtatiir^v, STiiGTaio, § 176, 1 ; Fut. tniariiaoiiat ; Aor. 
rimatrid-}jv, (Aug., § 126, 3). Verbal Adj. InKsxyidg. 

4. eQafiai, to love, (in the Pres. and Impf. only poetic, in prose 
igdmis used instead of it) ; Aor. tiodod-t^v, amavi ; Fut. iQaod-r;6o- 
[lai, amabo. 

0. y.QSfiaf4,ai, to hang, pendeo, Subj. -/.Q^'f^M^ai, § 176, 1, Part. 
age^idi^Evog ; Impf. inQefidf/riV, Opt. '/.Qnnaln^r, -aio, -aizo, § 176, 1, 
(Arist. Vesp. 298, 'aqehoio&s, comp. ^dQvufiai, § 230, and i^e^voi- 
liyv, § 154, 9; Aor. iy.QSfida&^jv; Fut. Pass. y.()S[iaad^t](joiia(, I shall 
be hung ; Fut. Mid. xQefiijoo^cu, pendebo, I shall hang. 

6. 7tQiaa&ai, to buy, InQidn^v, (the Attic wTiters employ an 
Aor. Mid. of this verb, instead of the Aor. of coveofiai, viz. iavt]- 
Gd{A7jv, which is not used by them, § 122, 4, Subj. TZQiafiaij 
§ 176, 1 ; Opt. TiQimn^v, -aio, -euro, § 176,1 ; Imp. TZQiaao or ttqico ; 
Part. 7TQid[A,evog. 



§190 



VERBS IN ^h WITH THE STEM IN -«. 



213 



§ 180. (b) Verbs in -e {ri-On-^u, QE-). (lee.) 

"I-^-iu (stem 'E-)^ to semi. Many forms of this verb are found 
only in composition. 



ACTIVE. 1 


Pres. 


Ind. u;u(, u^g, u]6i{v) ; 'lerov : I'tfitv, hxe, iugi{p) or itiGi{v). 
Subj ]m, Ui^, ({i ; ujTov ; iojutv, ItJTe, i()3ai{v} ; dq^icj, difiiig, 

dcfifl {ucfiij ill Xen.), etc. 
Imp. (/£i>/), m, U'tco, etc. — Inf h'vca. — Part, leig, hiGc/., Itv. 


Impf. 


Ind. low (from lEfl), dcfinvv or ricplovv (seldom Uiv, TZQomv, 

i]q:(ui'), 'itig, ler ; lezov, Itn^v ; itfiev, hze, hoav, i^q^ieaav. 
Opt. ia(/;v (second Pers. PJ. dcfioite Plat.). 


Perf. 
Aor.II. 


ei/.a. — PI up. ar/.eir. — Fut. jjcrco. — Aor. I. ?;x« (§ 173, 2). 

Ind. Sing, is supplied by Aor. I. (§ 173, 2) ; Dual thov, 
tiTtjv ; Plur. tuw, commonly with Aug. tiiiev, y.ad^er^usv, ezSj 
commonly hif, dvuts, taav, commonly noav, dcftlaav. 

Subj. al, ig,dq(a, dcf^g, etc. 

Opt. tu^v, iit^g, tii;; kizov, eh^v; tijiev, Eize, ekv. 

Imp. f'V, u(^tg, tzoj ; t'zoj\ tzcov ; tzF, ezcooav and tvzcov. 

Inf. tivai, acftlvai. — P. ei'g, tiaa, ;V, Gen. tvrog, tiar^g^dqiivzog. 



Remark 1. On the Aug. oi uffir^ui, see § 126, 3. 

Rem. 2. The form of the Impf u]v is veiy doubtful, and also the forms 
Vtjc, V/j are veiy rare. The form hiv has the ending of the Plup., as the 
Impf. of ft^ut, to go ; it is Att. and Ion., a secondary form fiom Voir. 



MIDDLE. 



Pres. Ind. ifficu, leaai, i8zai, etc. — Subj. IcofAca, dqicotjiat.,!^ «(pa] etc. 
Imp, leao or I'ov. — Inf laa&af. — Part, h'utvog, -r], -ov. 



Impf itixtjv, moo, etc. — Opt. leiiji^v, Att. loifiriv^ loio, dq:ioio, etc. 
Aor.II. Ind. uurv 



Subj. ojfiai, aqdj^iui, j], «gp/], rjzai, acfijzui 
e'lGo, dcfHGo Opt. TTQooiur^v, -010, -olzo, -offxeOu, -oia{ye, 
dzo, dq:aLZO -oivzo: {ttqosTzo, ttqosio&e, TiQoaivzo 

£i[ie&a, etc. are rarer forms), 

Imp. oi), aod^oj, etc. 

Inf aoOai. — Part. afASvog, -r], -ov. 



Ver^.aifjai, fia{yai[Aai ; Inf aiad^at, txaOaiad^ai. — Plup. al'fiTjV, alao, d(fai 
60, etc. — Fut. fjau^at. — Aor. I. rj-Adnr^v, § 173, 2. 



PASSIVE. 



A. I. aL{}r^v, P. aOa'g. — Fut. s&rjGOfiai. — Ver. Adj. iiog, azaog,[dqa.og] 



Rem. 3. Besides the two verbs li^rt^L and i'jjjUf, only the following dia- 
lectic verbs belong here, viz. \4II-MT, Jf-zirf-Mf [JK), {Sidiuai, however, 
from the last is found in X.), di;rju(xi and JIH-MI. 

29 



214 



VERBS IN -fit, WITH THE STEM IN -t. 



[§191, 



§ 181. (c) Verbs in -t, onli/ tliii (7), to go. 

Preliminary Remark. The verbs tl^ut, to ^o, and tlfii, to fee, are 
presented tojretlier, tl)Ou<ili tlie last, on account of its stem Vi'-^', does not be- 
long here, in order to exhibit to the eye the agreement and disagreement of 
the two verbs in their formation. 



:> 



PRESENT. 1 


Ind.S.l. 


Siui, to he ! 


Subj. CO 


Ind. 


8l{A.l,, to go 


Subj. i'ca 


2. 






2. 


tl 


'!/? 


S. 


Eati{v) 


f 


3. 


8l6i{v) 




D. 2. 


86z6v 


7]tOV 


D.2. 


itov 


t'7]T0V 


3. 
P. 1. 


iazov 
loiitv 


iJTOV 

ojfiev 


3. 
P.l. 


i'lov 
i'uev 


i'rizov 
I'ojfjev 


2. 


8678 




2. 


Its 


i7]ze 


3. 


£t0l{v) 


3. 


ulaiiv) 


((iJOl(v) 


Imp.S.2. 


i'ad-i 


Inf. dvai 


Imp. 


i-Oi, 7T()6gi.'&i 


Inf u'vai 


3. 


SOTCO 






(seld. TTQogai) 




D. 2. 


sazov 


Part.ooV,oy(ja, 


3. 


izCO, TlQOgiZO} 


Part. i(ov,iov- 


3. 


8(JTC0V 


ov 


D.2. 


i'zov 


6a, lov 


P. 2. 


'late 


G.ovTog,ovor]g 3. 


lZ(f3V 


Gen. lovzog, 


3. 


80TC0(jaV 




P. 2. 


'iZ8 


lov6r^g. 




andtarcov 




3. 


izoaai^ or 






(OVTCOV 






loVZCOV {(ZCOV 






Plat.) 




! Aesch. E. 32.) 




IMPERFECT. 1 


Irid. 1 Opt. 1 


Ind. ] Opt. 1 


S. 1. 


riv, I was 


ei'rjv 


S. 1. 


i^eiv or ijajlwent 


loi^t or 


2. 


i]6d'a,§ 116,2. 


8irig 


2. 


Xisig, us'ly ^sio-O-a 


loig 


3. 


7JV {i^roxn rjs-v) 


Eiri 


3. 


W- 


lOl 


D.2. 


ijorov (mov) 


F.U^tOV 


D.2. 


ijeizov, us'ly rjtov 


('oizov 


3. 


7](JTJ]V {tJzTJV) 


8lt]rt]V [{A8V 


3. 


yeizifV, " pijv 


lolzijv 


P. 1. 


rj6(xsv 


8UJ118V (seld. 8L- 


P. 1. 


{leijlEV, " 7JIAEV 


toifiev 


2. 


7 / '^ \ 


Eirjre (seld. she) 


2. 


ijsize, " yzs 


I'oize 


3. 


aiijaav and elav 


3. 


rieoav i'oiev 1 


Fut. ioo(Aai, I shall be, tor}' or eoei, toxai, etc. — Opt. iooii-ii^v. — Inf 


'iota&ai. — Part. ioofiEvog. — Verbal Adj. ioTtov, ovvtoztov. 


Middle Form, Pres. i'e^Aai, is6ai or nj, i'ercu, etc., Imp. laoo, Inf. i'aa- 


TL>af,Part. it^avog ; Thelmpf. h'^iriv, hoo, etc., signifying to hasten, 


ought probably to be written with the rough breathing, which is 


strongly confirmed by the manuscripts, and to be referred to /j^^t- 


— Verbal Adj. Izog, hiov or Itj^tov, iTf^zt'or. 



§18i] 



VERUS WHOSE STEM ENDS WITH «, S or 0. 



215 



Rkmark 1. On tlie iiicrmatioii of the Jnd. of slfil, to he (except the sfu'-oiul 
IVrs, ti), see §f^i. In C()ni[)onM(ls, the accent is on the prej)osition, as fin* 
back as the general nUes of accentuation ]>errnit, e. g. 7iixQfif.u, ttuqh, tiuq- 
faii, etc., Jnip. ndciicri^i ; but int{)}i\v on account of the teni|)oral augment, 
TiaQtarui on account of the omission of s {iiafJtaeTtxi), nuQilpui fike infini- 
tives >vith tiie ending -vai, nacjui, -i/c, -ij, etc., on account of the contrac- 
tion ; the accentuation of the Part, in com])Ound words shoukl be particu- 
larly noted, e. g. nufjiiiVj Gen. TiixQoriog, so also nuQiwv, Gen. nuQioviog. 

Rem. 2. The com})ounds of iij.ii, eo, follow the same rules as those of 
«//t, sum ; hence several forms of these two verbs are the same in com- 
pounds, e. g. TinQEiiAt, nccQsi and Trdonai, third Pers. Sing, of dfiL and third 
Pers. PI. of fi^at; but Inf. naQitvai, Part. naQiMV. 

Rem. 3. The form iitv, esto, he it so, good, shortened from htj and strength- 
ened by a V, must be distingnished from the shortened form dsv instead 
of £t>j(Trtv of the third Pers. PI. Opt. Impf A secondary form of the third 
Pers. Imp. tjto) instead of tajw is found once in PI. Rp. 361, c. The form 
of the first Pers. Impf. is often i], among the Attic poets, and sometimes 
also in Plato ; the form ijfitjv is rare, e. g. X. Cy. 6. 1, 9. The form of the 
second Pers. Inipf ?]$ is foiuid frequently in the later writers, and rarely 
in lyric passages of the Attic poets. The Dual forms with a are preferred 
to those without a. 

Rem. 4. The form of the third Pers. Sing. Impf. r,Eiv instead of jjel is found 
in the Attic poets only before vowels, Arist. Plut. 696. nQoar^tiv [Senarius). 

Rem. 5. The Pres. of sIiai, to go, particularly the Ind., also the Inf and 
Part., among the Attic prose WTiters, has almost always a Future significa- 
. tion, / shall or iviU go, or come. Hence the Pres. is supplied by I'^/o^at, 
§ 167, 2. 



n. Verbs in - fxi which annex the Syllable vvv or vv to 
the Stem-vowel and append to this the Personal- 
endings. 

§182. Formation of the Tenses of Verbs ivhose 
Stein ends with a, s, o, or ivith a Consonant. 

(19.5.) 

A. Verbs whose Stem ends with a, £ or o. 



Voice. 


Tenses. 


a. Stem in a. 


b. Stem in e. 


c. Stem in o (co). 


Act. 


Pres. 


oy.eda-vvij-fii* 


yoQE-vvv-iiL * 


6TQc6-VVV-[JLL * 




Impf. 


l-cy.tda-vvv-v * 


i-XOQS-VVV-V * 


i-6TQc6-VVV-V * 




Perf. 


E-oy.^8oi-y,a 


xE-y.0Q8-ya 

£-XE-ytOQ8-yElV 


s-GTQOj-ya 




Plup. 


i-oyeda-xeiv 


E-aZQW-XElV 




Fut. 


oy£du-0(o, 


yOQ8-6CJ, 


(J7Q0J-60J 




Aor. 


Att. ayedm, -ag, -a 
e-ay.eda-aa 


Att. y.oQw, -Eig, -si 
i-yoQE-oa 


8-atQ(o-6a 



216 VERBS. STEM ENDING WITH A CONSONANT AND «. [§ 183. 



Mid. 


Pres. 

Irnpf. 
Perf. 
Plup. 
Fut. 
A or. 
F. Pf. 


6'Atdd-VfV-[iM 

i-ay.t.bu-vvv-iiriv 

i-axtdu-o-fxai 

i-aAtdu-a-iMtjv 


XOQt-VVV-fAai. 

E-y.OQt-vvv-fir^v 
y.e-y.6ot-a-fx(u 
i-y.f^^-y.oQt-a-iitjv 
y.onb-a-oaai 
i-y.ont-a-afirjv 
y.t-y.0()t-G-0{.iui 


azQio-vvv-iiai 

f-GZQCJ-VVV-fXTjy 
i-CZQW-lXUl 

i-azQOj-fir^v 


Pass. A or. 
Fut. 


i-(jy.e(^d-a-{}riv 
oy.tdu-o-O/jfjofiai 


i-yo()h-a-y}r^v 
yoot-a-O^t'^aouai. 


i-GiQco-Or^v 
arQOJ-O/jaofiai 


Verbal Adj. 


oy.tdu-a-Tog 
oy.hda-o-ztog 


y.OQS-a-tog aiQcj-zog 
y.one-a-rtog azQco-jiog. 

> — xogs-vvvoj, i-y.oQi-vvvo)' — ot^w- 


"^ And (Txeda 
vvvui, i-aiii(xi-v 


-VVVO), ((TXidiX-VVl'Oi 

noy [v always slior 



B. Verbs whose Stem ends with a Consonant. 



Pres. 


6).-lv-^i,^ perdo, 


oX-Xv-fiai,peYeo, 


6f^-VV-fJl * 


OfA-VV-fA,Ul 


Irnpf. 


oiX-lv-v * 


cjX-Xv-ur,v 


(OfX-VV-V * 


(xiii-vv-fir^v 


Perf. I. 


6l-ojle-y.a (OAESl), perdidi, 


0{A.-OJflO-'Aa 


oiA.-cono-[iai 




§ 1-24, 2. 


(OMOSi) 




Perf. II. 


oX-o^X-u, perii, 


§ 124, 2. 




Plup. I. 


6X-(fi'kt-y.Hv, perdideram, 


ofi-cofio-aeiv 


Ofj,-co[4.o-firiv 


Plup. 11. 


6X-(jdX-^iv, perieram, 






Fut. 


oA-oo, 'Eig, -fci 


oX-ovi^ai, -El 


ofi-ovfiai, -u 




Aor. I. 


wXe-Ga 


A. U. c6X-6[i7]v 


(ofio-aa 


cofio-aufxrv 




A. I. P. cofio-G-O^tjv et c6ii6\>7]v 




1 
v-ov — ofAvv-a), 


I. F. P. OfiO-a-d^/jGOflM. 


* And oAAl'-o), wAi 


^)UPV-ov (alwa] 


rs V). \ 



Remark. ^'Olki\ui comes by assimilation from ul-vvfiL, § 18, Rem. For 
an example of a stem-ending with a mute, see dti'y.pi'iji above, under the 
paradigms, § 175. The Part. Perf. Mid. or Pass, of o/ju'iai is o^w^ou- 
fiEfog. The remaining forms of the Perf. and Plup. commonly omit the a 
among the Attic writers, e. g. ofiw^oiai, o/iw/^oto. 



Summary or the Verbs belongipcg here. 
The Stem ends, 
A. In a Vowel and assumes ^vvv. 
§183. (a) Verbs luhose Stem ends in a. (i98.) 
1. ^EQd-vvv'iii (poetic secondary form y.(Qvdco, yAovr^iir^ Epic 
and Poet. xf()«co), to mlr, Fut. xf(>«(7co, Alt. ^£^00; Koy. iytQaaa^ 
Perf. x«x()f?xa; Perf. Mid. or Pass. yiEyQajxai; Aor. Pass. lyQa&riv, 
Att. also inegda&riv ]\Iid. — Metathesis, § 156, Rem. 



§§ 184, 1S5.] VERBS WHOSE STEM ENDS IN € and t. 217 

2. xoeftd'vrv'ftt, to hansr, Fut. x()f^«(7w, Att. xQe.fico ; Aor. ixQB- 
fidaa ; ]\Iid. or Pass. 'AQ^iidvvv^ai, I hang' mjjself or am hung (but 
xQffidfiai, to hang, §179,5); Fut. Pass. x^fijuctdt^^cjOjuat; Aor. 
ixQefiday>/jv, I luas hiitig-, or I hung'. 

3. nerd-vvv'^i, to spread out, to open, Fut. mrdcwj Att. ^rerw ; 
Perf. Mid. or Pass, nmzd^ai, § 155, 2 ; Aor. Pass. sTiezda-O-rjV. 

4. (Jxedd'vvv-fii, to scatter, Fut. O'Asddaco, Att. crxf^oa ; Perf. Mid. 
or Pass. ia-Atdaoiiui ; Aor. Pass. iaxeddaOr^v. 

§ 1S4. (b) Verbs whose Stem ends in e. 

Preliminary Remark. The verbs ti'vx'(ji, (Tj^iwvjxi, and also ^mvvv^i, 
§ 186, do not properly belong here, since their stem originally ended in a, 
*i:y-, conip. ves-tire, J^/iA-T-, comp. uafinr-ioQ, ZSl^-^ comp. ^wa-r/)^, 'Qwa- 
t^ov, ^(x')(T-jT}!;, CoiiT-Tog ; but by the omission of the cr, they become analogous 
to verbs in -s and -o. 

1. E-vvv-iii, to clothe, in prose dfjicpit'vvvf^i, Impf. dficpitwvv with- 
out Aug. ; Fut. dfiQpitaco, Att. «,uqpraj ; Aor. rj^cpiE6a ; Perf. Mid. 
or Pass, ri^cpiea^uai, j]^uq){eaai, TJficpiaGTai, etc., Inf. rnK^iiad^ai', Fut. 
Mid. dfiqjtaofiai, Att. dficpiovfiai. (Aug., §§126, 3. and 230). 
As in diKfihvvixi, so generally in other compounds, the preposi- 
tion is not elided, e. g. Initoao-O-ai. 

2. ^t-vvv-ii(, to boil. Trans., Fut. C^crco ; Aor. 'i^^oa ; Perf. Mid. 
or Pass, e^eauat; Aor. Pass. i^^taOriv. — (^^sco, on the contrary, is 
usually intransitive). 

3. 7iOQ8-vvv-{ii., to satiate, Fut. y.oQi'aco, Att. JiO()co; Aor. iy.oQeaa; 
Perf. Mid. or Pass. nExoQeGfiat ; Aor. Pass. i'AOQead-riv. — I\Iid. 

4. o^i-vvv-iii, to extinguish, Fut. 6'^k(o ; first i^or. h^eoa, I ex- 
tinguished; second Aor. eo^r^v, I ceased to burn; Perf. ec^ri'/.a, I 
have ceased to burn. — Mid. a§8vvvfiai, to cease to burn, Perf. Mid. 
or Pass, so^ecfiai; Aor. Pass. i(j§ta&7]v. No other verb in 
-vvfii has a second Aor., § 19J , 2. 

5. (j70Q8-vrv-fii, to spread out, shortened form ctoqwiii, Fut. cxo- 
geaw, Att. Gtooa; Aor. iazoQSGa. The other tenses are formed 
from aTQwvvviii ; 'loTQcoiiai, iazQcod^riv, czQwzog (not Att. lazoQtcd-^v 
and laroQri&^v). See § 182. 

§185. (c) Verbs, lohose Stern ends in i. i^^^-) 
jl-vvv-fjiL (77-), to expiate^ Mid. xl-vvh^^iui, to punish, to avenge, second- 



218 VERBS. STEM ENDING IN A MUTE. [§§ 186, 187. 



ary Epic form ofTtVw and jlvo^iai. — In Attic poetry the Mid. is often found 
and witli one r, Jivvfuat. 

§186. (d) Verbs in o, ivith the o leng-thened into w. 

(199.) 

1. ^oj-vvij-fii, to gird, Fut. ^cocrco; Aor. t^ojou; Perf. Mid. or 
Pass, sucocfiai, § 181.— Mid. 

2. ()c6-vvv-f^i,to streng'then, Fut. qcogco; Aor. toocoau; Perf. Mid. 
or Pass. eoQcofiai, Imp. 8()Qco6o,fareiuell, Inf. iooooa-O^ai; Aor. Pass. 
inn(6aO-7]v, § 131. 

3. OT()0j-vvv-{u, § 182, to spread out, Fut. (Ttqcooco ; Aor. tazQwoUy 
etc. See ozoQevviJ{A.i, § 184, 5. 

4. xQco-vvv-fUj to color, Fut. x^oo(tw ; Aor. eyQwaa ; Perf. IMid. or 
Pass. y^tiQwixca. 

B. Verbs whose Stem ends in a Consonant and assumes 

-vv . 

§ 187. (a) In a Mu t e . (200.) 

1. ay-vv-[Ai., to break, Fut. ci^co; Aor. ea^a, Inf. «Jat (P. Lys. 
100, 5. xaiad^avTeg with the Aug.) ; second Perf. t'aya, /am bro- 
ken; Aor. Pass, f^^/^/i' (Aug., § 122, 4.) — Mid. 

2. deix-vv-iAi, see § 175. 

3. eiQy-pv-fxi, [or siQyco), to shut in, Fut. eiQ^co; Aor. eF^Ja, Inf. 
eiQ^ai, Part. tQ^ag (PL Polit. 285, b.), TiSQiaQ^avzEg (Th. 5, 11), 
^vvsQ^avTog (PL Rp. 5. 461, b), Subj. xa&eiQ^rjg (with the variation 
y.a&SQ^rig) PL Gorg. 461, d; Aor. Pass. £iQxO-i]v; Perf. eiQyfiai. 
(But fr^^'Q), e/'^Jco, £?^J«, EiQiOijv, to shut out, etc.) 

4. ^Evy-vv-fAi, to join tog-ether, Fut. ^sv^co ; Aor. «?£!'?« ; Perf. 
Mid. or Pass. E^evyixai; Aor. Pass, l^evi&r^v and more frequently 

5. ^uy-vv-fii, to m.ix,{iii(yyoo, Poet secondary form), Fut. lu/Jco; Aor. 
£^/|a, ^r^cci; Perf. ^sixlxa; Perf. Mid. or Pass. ixEfAiy^ai, ^ue^uTy&ai; 
Aor. Pass, ^^(x^ijv more frequently ifuyriv; Fut. Perf fisf^t^oi^ai. 

6. o\'y-vv-iii, usually as a compound, droiyvvfiL (but instead of 
it dvoi'yco is more frequently used in the Pres. and dvtcpyov always 
in the Impf.), to open, Fut. dvoi^co ; Aor. dvecp^a, dvoihu (in X. 
HeJl. rivoiyov, TJvoi^a signifying to put to sea, to tueigh anchor) ; 
first Perf wj^fw/a, I have opened; second Perf dvtajya, I stand 



§§ 188, 189.] VERBS WHOSE STEM ENDS IN A LIQUID. XtTfiai. 219 

open^ instead of which Alt. dn'cpy^m; Impf. Mid. dvecpyoixt^v; Aor. 
Pass. (ive(ox^'i^i dvmxO^ijvai (Aug., § 122, 6). 

7. 6iwQy-yv-fu, to luipe oj]\ Fut. o[i6()i(xi ; Aor. ajioQ^a. — Mid. 

8. ni'iy-vv-m, to fasten^ Fut. 7111^03 \ Aor. 'inri^a] first Perf. ntnri- 
X(t, I have fastened; second Perf. Tttntiya, I stand fast; Mid. n^y. 
vvftai, I stick fast; Perf. mniiynai, I standfast; Aor. Pass. Inayriv 
(more seldom intjiiytiv) ; Fut. Pass. Trayrjaofiai. — Mid. 

9. nijy-vv-fu, to rend, Fut. qij^oj ; Aor. t(wr,^a ; second Perf. tn- 
Qcoya, I am rent, § 140, Rem. 3; Aor. Pass. ioQayr^v; Fut. Qay/^- 
60fica, 

10. (fody-rv-^i, secondary form of qQuaaco, (fQUTrco, § 143, 1, to 
shut up, Impf. icfQayvvv (Thuc. 7, 74) ; Fut. cpQa^o) ; Aor. eqjQu^a ; 
Perf. Mid. or Pass. nscpQuy^ai; Aor. Pass. iq)Qdxd-rjv{iqiQuyrjv'dmong 
the later writers). — Mid. 

§ 188. (b) Verbs luho s e Stem ends in a Liq u i d. (201.) 

1. ixQ-vi-ficxL (Epic and also in Plato), to take, obtain, secondaiy form of 
aiQOfiui, and used only in particular phrases, to ohtain, to acquire, namely, a 
reward, spoils, etc. Impf. ijQvvfirjV. The remaining forms come from aigofxai. 

2. 'ATEi-vv-ni, commonly \\Titten, '/.rivvvfii in the Codd., to pid 
to death, Att. prose secondary form of '/.zaivoj, is used in the Pres. 
and Impf. The stem is KTEIN-, lengthened from KTEN-. 
The V of the stem is omitted on account of the diphthong, § 169, 
Rem. 1. 

3. 6l-).v-fii instead of ol-rv-fit, to destroy. See § 182, B. 

4. ofi-vv-^i, to sifjear. See § 182, B. 

5. ozoQ-Tv-fii, to spread out. See gzoq^wvih, § 184, 5. 

§189. Inflection of the two forms of the Perf. 
y.el^ai and ij^iai. (212,) 

Preliminary Remark. The two forms of the Perf. xslfxai and ^,a«t, 
are so essentially different, in theu' formation, from tlie other verbs in -^t, 
that they require to be treated by themselves. 

a. KeT^aif to lie. 
KsTixat, properly, I have laid myself doiun, I am lying- doivn, 
hence to lie, (e. g. dvdx£i{iai, I am consecrated, (yvyxeirai, com- 
positum est, constat, but cwTi&sirat vtio zivog, it has been agreed 



220 VERBS. INFLECTION OF THE PERF. XSTfiai AND TJfiai. [§ 190. 



bi/ some one) ; this verb is a forin of the Perf. without redu- 
plication, from the stum A/iV-, coiitraclcd from KEE-. 

Ptrf. Ind. xHiuni^ y.n(Tai, y.iiTai, xft'fifdu, y.uj&s, xuviai ; 

Siibj. y.icouui, y.tr/, xsijTitt, etc. 

Iiiip. xHcro, xf/(/i'tij, etc. ; — Inf. xna^ai ; — Part, xttfxfvog. 
Imp/. Ind. i/.ii'fjriv, ixfiuo, txtno, third Pers. PI. laiivTO. 

Opt. y.bulfir^i', xsoto, xiono, etc. 

Fut. Xf/(70,(/tti. 

Compounds UKixfipni, xnTuxfipm, ymuxsKrat, etc.; — Inf. xaraxilff&aij 
— Imp. xuiuy.nao, t/xttao. 



'^Wd. h.^Hfiai, to sit. (203.) 

1. '^Hfiai, properly, / have seated myself^ I have been seated^ 
hence to sit, — also Ion. and poetic of inanimate objects, instead 
of idQVfiai, I have been established, erected; — this verb is a Perf. 
form of the Poet. Aor. Act. t'lca, to set, to establish. The stem 
is 'H/1-, comp. ria-rai instead of rfi-rai, according to § 17, 5, and 
the Lat. sed-eo. 

Remark 1. The active Aorist forms of Hcrn are dialectic, § 230, and Poet., 
hut the Mid. signifying to erect, to establish, belongs also to Attic prose, 
iliTiifjrjv ; Part. nacti.iEvog Th. 3, 58. iaaaytvoc; Imp. ttrui, i'dfTui [tcpfaaai]', 
Fut. poetic I'lTopttL, iaaoj^ai [icpsaaopai). The defective forms of this word 
are supplied by Idgib). 



Perf. 
Plup. 



Ind. r,(jiaL, i]rrni, r,tjTai, ijpf&a, Vja&f, i]VTttL ; 

Imp. /"jc/o, r,ijd^(xt, etc.; — Inf r/ndai', — Part, ijpsvog. 

i]{.n]i', 7/0-0, ijaio, tjfit&a, r/a&s, ijfxo. 



2. In prose, the compound -AdO^r^ym, is commonly used instead 
of the simple. The inflection of the former differs from the lat- 
ter in never taking cr in the third Pers. Sing., and in the Plup., 
only when it has the temporal Augment : 

Perf. xa^Tiiiai, xn&r^(Tai, xd &7]j a l , etc. ; — Subj. y.n&Mfjnt, xdd^T], 

xtid^i]jiti, etc.; — Imp. xad^^ao, etc.; — Inf. xad7iudai ; — 
Part. xiitd^r,pfrog. 

Plup. ixadijutjv and y.n&rjuTiv, iyddrjcro and xn^ijao, ixddrito and 
X a & 1] J 1 o, etc. ; — Opt. xtx&olnVjV, xdOoio, xddono, etc. 

Rem. 2. The defective forms of r^fiui are supplied by I'^iv&ai or 'i^ta&uiy 
prose nadi'Quj&ai., xa&t^iadai. 



§ 191.] VERBS IN -CD WITH TENSES LIKE THOSE IN -fll. 



221 



Verbs in -co, which follow the analogy of Verbs in -p, in forming 

THE second AoR. AcT. AND MiD., THE PeRF. AND PrES. AcT. 

§191. I. Second Aor. Act. and Mid. (':oi.) 

1. Several verbs with the characteristic a, e, o, v, form a 
second Aor. Act. and, though rarely, a second Aor. Mid., accord- 
ing to the analogy of verbs in -fu, since it wants the mode-vow- 
el, and hence appends the personal-endings to the stem. But 
all the remaining forms of these verbs are like verbs in -co. 

2. The formation of this second Aor. Act., through all the 
modes and participials, is like that of the second Aor. Act. of 
verbs in -//v.. The characteristic-vowel, with some exceptions, 
is lengthened, as in sarr^v, viz. d and e into ^, o into co, t and v 
into < and v. This lengthened vowel remains, as in eatriv, 
throughout the Ind., Imp. and Inf. The third Pers. PL in -rj^av 
(Char, a) and -vaav shortens the vowel, w^hen the poets use 
the abridged form in -v, instead of -aav, e. g. s^dv, '18 iv. 
The Subj., Opt. and Part., with some exceptions, which 
will be noticed in the following tables, are like verbs in -in, e. g. 
^alriv (aTaiTiv), a^Eir^v (d-erriv), yvoii]v (8oiijv), yvovg (8ovg). The Imp., 
like arrjO-i, in the second Pers. Sing., takes the ending -&i, and 
the stem-vowel remains long through all the persons ; in com- 
pounds of §aivco, §t]d-i is also abridged into §d, e. g. aazd^d, tzqo- 
§d, Eig^d, i^^d, Ini^d instead of xard^rjd-i, etc. 



Modes 


a. Character, a 


b. Characteristic 6 


c Characteristic o 


d.Charact.v 


and 


BA-^, ^alvoj, 


2BEQ,G^tvvvixi, 


rNO-Q. ytyvujG- 


<5'i;'-Cy^ 


Persons. 


to go. 


to erti.na-vish . 


aojj to know. 


to lorap up. 


Ind.S.J. 


e-Bri-v, I went, 


sa^i]V, I ceased 


8yv(ov, I knew, 


'18 vv, to go 


2. 


HrrS 


EO^rjg [to burn, 


eyvcog 


'88vg [in or 


3. 


i.^n 


SG^f] 


iyvco 


'88u [under, 


D.2. 


k-^rj-rov 


EG^rjrov 


eyvooTov 


88uTOV 


3. 


i-^rj-t7]v 


iG^rJ77]V 


iyvcot7]v 


i8vTi]V 


P.l. 

2. 






eyvcoixev 


88vfl£V 

88vts 


3. 


a-^ri-aav 


ea^tjaav 


kyvcoaav 


88v(jav 




(Poet. 8^dv) 




(Poet, tyvcov) 


[FoeUSvv) 



30 



222 



VERBS WITH A SECOND AOR. LIKE VERBS IN 'fit. [§ 192. 



Subj. S. 


/^c.^(%,/^/ii 


6{iw, yg, ^ 1 


yf(o, ypcog, yvq)^ 


8vo},7^g,rj^ 


D. 


^IITOV 


O^il^jTOP 


yVbJTOV 


bvt^TOV 


P- 


Il/W/UT, iJTE, 


6dM(XEV, tjZE 


yVOJflEVf OJTEj 


dvWflEV, 




cjai(v) 


aai{i') 


W()l{v) 


7jlE,(x)ai{v) 


Opt.S.l. 


^afifV 


C^tl)jV 


yrofijv 2 




2. 


^au^g 


G^Etrjg 


yvouig 




:3. 


^uui 


Gl'Jtll] 


yvoitj 




D. 2. 


(iau}xoveXcntov 


a^driTovGlniov 


yvolrjTov et olzov 




11 


l3aLijT')]vciaiTr}v 


a^si'i]iriv et uiriv 


yvou']ii]v et ohriv 




P. 1. 


[J(ni]fi£vetulixev 


(T^eirjfiEV et ufxev 


yvoiij[XEveloT}Aiv 




2. 


^abjTE et alts 


aijflrjxe et elie 


yVOlTjlE et OLTE 




3. 


(iaitv (seldom 
(jalrjauv) 


(T^HEP 


yvoLEv (rarely 
yvolricrav) 




Imp. S. 


^ri\}i, // 2-0)3 


0^tj\>l, ^TCO 3 


yPCa&l, CO TOO 3 




D. 1. 


Snzov, tiTcop 


6[irizov, fito:)V 


yVMTOV, bJTCOV 


dviov,VT(or 


P. 2. 


1 ~ 


O^tJTE 


yvcozE 


dvTE 


3. 


pijTcoaav and 


o^rjtojauv and 


yvcoTcooav and 


di'ioiaavet 




^firrcor 


O^tVTMV 


yvovTcov 


dvPTb)V 


Inf. 


^tjvai 


a^ijvcu 


yvMvai 


dvvaL 


Part. 


^dg, d6a, dv 


o^Eig, Eiaa, tv 


yvovg, ovaa, 6v 


8vz,v(Tn,vv 




G. ^dvTog 


G. o^tvTog 


G. yvovrog 


G.divTog. 



^ Compounds, e.g. ava^at, dva^fjC, etc.; unoa^oJ; diayvttj', uvadvM, 

2 Aeschyl. Suppl. 230 (215) av/ypoji]; but in the 3Iid. form crvyyioiTO. 

3 Compounds, e. g. apd/jrj&i, avd^tjTE', ocTToa^rjd^i; didyvoj&t', npu5v&L. 



Remark. The Opt. form dvrjp instead of dvii]v, is not found in the Att. 
dialect, but in the Epic, § 227. 

§ 192. Sum m ary of Verb s ivith a second Aor . like 
Verbs in -[ii. (205—210.) 

Besides the verbs mentioned above, some others have this form, 
^ 1. didQafiKO), to run away, § 161, 10, Aor. {zlPA-) t^qSv, -«^, -m, -ufjfv, 

-CITE, -duap [e8q(xv Poet), Subj. dqu, dgag, dgd dQarov, dgojfiEP, dguiE, dgoi- 
o-i(v), Opt. dgalfjP, Imp. dga&L, -uzo), Inf dgupai, Part, dgug, -daa, -dv. 

2. TiETOfictt, to Jiy, § 166, 29, Aor. [IITA-) Ejni]v, Inf. mijpui, Pait. tttw?; 
Aor. Mid. imdjxrjP, nxda&ai. 

3. TiQlixd&aL, see § 179, 6. 

4. (jy.illo3 or o-xsAs'co, to dry, second Aor. [2KAA-) sanXrjv, to ivither, Intrans., 
Inf. ai{li]paL, Opt. axXairjv. 

5. (p&d-v(a, to come before, to anticipate, § 158, 7, Aor. ecpd^rjv, q)&rjvai, cp^dg, 
q)&bj, cp&altjv. 

6. xaico, to burn. Trans. § 154, 2, Aor. {KAE~) ixdrjv, I burned, Intrans. ; 
but first Aor. sxavaa, Trans. 

7. qi(a, to f 010, § 154, 2, Aor. (PTE-) sgQvtjv, I flowed. 

8. ;f«/^w, to rejoice, § 166, 32, Aor. {XAPE-) ixaQrjp. 

9. dXlay.ofiai, Aor. (AAO-) i\X(av, Att. suXwv, § 161, 1. 



§ 193.] VEllliS IN -O) LIKE VERUS IN -fit. 223 

10. /SioM, to live, Aor. i^kov, Siibj. /Jfw, -ol?, -w, etc., Opt. ^Lcorjv, (not 
^loirjv, as yvou]v, to distinguish it iVoni the Opt. Lnpf. §ioli]v\ Inf. [iiuvat, 
Part. fSiovg; but the Cases of\5foi'§ are supplied by the first Aor. Part. ftio')aag. 
Thus, avs(Sl(ay, to recall to life, from ava^iojaxofiai^ § IGl, 3. The Pres. and 
Inipf.are but Httle used by the Attic writers ; instead of these, they employ ^a»> 
of which only the Fut. ^}}(teiv was in good use among Attic writers; the re- 
maining tenses were borrowed from /5iow; thus, Pres. ^w; Lnpf. I'^cov, 
§ 137, 3 ; Fut. ^uoao^ai, more rai'ely ^?Jo-(u ; Aor. 0i(ov ; X. 0. 4, 18. has also 
i^Utiffiv ; Perf. jSe^icoxa ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. ^e^lcoTai, Part. (St^SiMftivog. 

11. (fib), to produce, second Aor. sq)vv, to be produced, to he born, cpvvai, 
q>vg, Subj. (pvcj, Opt. wanting in the Attic dialect ; but the first Aor. ecpvcra, 
to produce ; Fut. (pvaw, I will produce. The Perf. nicpvy.a, also has an in- 
transitive sense, so also the Pres. Mid. qjtofiai, and the Fut. cpvaofxai. 

Remark. Here also belong the forms crx^g and (txoItjv of the second 
Aor. sffxov from sx(o, to have, § 166, 14, and nl& l of the second Aor. etilov 
from Tilvb), to drink, § 158, 5. 

§193. II. Perfect and Pluperfect. (211.) 

The Attic dialect, in imitation of the Epic, forms a few 
Perfects of pm-e verbs immediately from the stem, e. g. /IJ.-^, 
to fear^ ds-di-a, and then, in the Dual and PL Ind. Perf. and 
Plup., and also to some extent in the Inf., rejects the mode- 
vowel, e. g. dt-di-^Ev instead of de-di-a-fiev. In this way, these 
forms of the Perf. and Plup. become wholly analogous to the 
Pres. and Impf. of verbs in -jwt, e. g. i-ata-fisv. The stem-vowel 
remains short, e. g. dsdii^ev, zizldiiev, rerXavai ; but in the third 
Pers. PI. Perf., the mode-vowel is not rejected, e. g. de-di-doi ; 
with verbs in -«a3, however, a is contracted with the stem- 
vowel, e. g. te-7).u-d(j( = Te-rld-ai. 

Remark 1. Except the forms of dsdiivai and ecrravai, all the other Per- 
fects of this kind belong to poetry, particularly to the Epic. 

Rem. 2. The Imp. of these Perfects is also in use, since it not only 
wants the mode-vowel, but takes the ending -&l in the second Pers. 
Sing., thus conforming wholly to the analogy of the forms in -^i. So the 
Inf. Both append their terminations to the short stem-vowel ; dsdiivai is 
an exception. The Subj. Perf. and the Opt. Plup. of verbs whose stem- 
vowel is «, are formed like verbs in -fxi, since the Subj. Perf. admits the 
contraction of the stem-vowel with the ending, and the Opt. Plup. ends in 
-altjv, e. g. ecnd-b), ecnoj, ~fjg, etc., xsiXalrjV. The Part, of verbs in -ttw 
contracts the stem-vowel a with the ending -ag and -6g, e. g. kuictwg = 
kdTag, eorce-og = earwg and earog, and also have a peculiar feminine form 
in -wfftt, e. g. E(TT(o(ia ; all the Cases retain the w, e. g. iacmog, saKaarjg, etc. 



224 



VERBS WITH A PERFECT LIKE VERBS IN 'fit. 



[§ 194. 



Rem. 3. Tlio uiicontracted form in s is rf;tain(3(l in some participles, 
in the Ionic. ilial(;ci, e. j,'. hinfoK;, standhifr Jinn, and so ifOvto'ig (never 
Tfx}yu'iQ), togetiier wiijj itt}vi]y.oi(; lioin Tidv^y.it, is retained in the Attic 
dialect also. In tiiese forms, w remains in all the Cases, e. g. 

iaiKiiQ, eineoiaa, h(TTio)g, (jJen. iajiuiioc, -omtjg. 

Tidvsa'ig, TSx/vfbJaa, iiO^rsoK, Gen. itOpionoq, -omr/g. 
Bifirjxa and iiih]y.a never have this form of the participle. 





Perfect. 1 Pluperfect. 


Perf 


Plup. 


Ind. S. 1. 


d8-8i-a 


idtdUiv 


'e-2:ta-a 




2. 


dt-dii-ag 


idtdhig 






3. 


dt-dl-tiv) 


idf^d'i.ei 






D.2. 


dt'-dll-TOV 


idbd'^TOv 


t-Gta-tov 


torazov 


3. 

P. 1. 

2. 


dt-dl-TOV 
ds-dl-fxev 

dt-dl-TE 


idtdtzfjv 
ididtfjiEv 
idt'dlrs 


t-oza-zov 
t-azd-fiEv 
t-ozu-ze 


EGzdzjiv 
tozd^EV 

EOzdzE 


3. 


de-dVd6i{v) idsdlaavandidedieaav 


S'Ozu-ai{v) 


Eozdaav 


Imp. 


dt-di-O-i, dadiTco, etc. 


'i-ozd-Oi, etc., 3. pl. 


Subj. de-di-(o, -yg, -?/, etc. 


iazdrcoaav and -arzojv 


Inf. 


da-di-t'vai 


8-6z&-vai 




Part. 


de-di-cog, -via, -6g, Gen. -ozog 


s-ozcog,-(ooa, 


-G)4^and-o?, 






Gen. -(ozog 


-o:i6^g 


Subj. Pf. 
Opt. Plup. 


sarojy -yg, -y, etc. 

sotau]v, Dual eazanjiov and -airo^ 
fA.ev, etc., third Pers. PI. toraiEV 


V, PI. 86rai7]fiev and -ai- 



Rem. 4. The Plup. of \(ni]j.ii, in this form never takes the strengthened 
augment si. The Imp. Perf EdTad^i, etc., and the Opt. Plup. iaralrjv, etc., 
are poetic only. But the Inf miavai seems to have taken the place of 
the full form hairjy.ivai throughout. 



§194. Summary of Verbs ivith a Perfect like 

Verbs in -f^i. (212.) 

Besides these two, the following verbs have this form of the Perfect : 

1. yiyvofjMi, to become, FEPAA, stem FA ; Perf. (Sing, ysyova, -ag, -s) 
ys/tx^iv, -die, -ddaiv, Inf. yiyay,Ev (Epic), Part, yeymg, yiywaa, yiycog, Gen. 
ysya,Tog. 

2. ^alv(x>, to go, Terf. ^E^rjy.a, BEBAA; Vl. ^i^duEV, -drs, -aai, third 
Pers. PI. Subj. f>/5f/5w(7t, PI. Phaedr. 252, e, Inf ^^^urai. Part. /5f/5a;c, X. 
Hell. 7. 2, 3, ^stSvla {^s^waa, PI. Phaedr. 254, b), /?f/5oj?. Gen. fif^mog ; 
Plup. s^siSdfxev, -dxE, -daav. These abridged forms are almost wholly poetic 
and dialectic, § 230. 

3. ■&vmyu, to die, js&vrjya, TEONAA ; PI. ji&vdfisv, zi&vuTB, rs^vvtaij 
Imp. zid^vdd^i, Part. Ts&vrjxwg, Ts^vrjuvla, zed^vrjxcg, or led^vewg, xci^ytwca, 



§ 195.] IRREGULAR VERBS Otda AND eoota. 225 

Deniostli. 40, "2-i., jfx^vnog, Inf. Tf&vuvai, Aesch. le&vuvai from jiOvasvai,', 
PJup. hiOritiTuv, Opt. rsOvalr/r. 

4. TJAIl, to bear, Perf. jsiXtjxu, TETAAA ; Dual liiXmov, PI. rhXafisVj 
lirhhf, ifxXu(jL{v), Imp. liiXa&i, -utm, etc., Subj. wanting, Inf. teiXuvui, 
but Part. Tf lA/yxto? ; Pliip. ere'rAa/ify, erfiTActie, iisiXaauv, Dual iiiiXuxov, 

hsiXuTTjV, Opt. TtlXtthjV. 

5. Here belong the two participles of, 

^i^Q(o(Txb}, ^ IGl, 6, /o ea^, Perf. ^sSquxu, poetic (if^Qojg, Gen. -wto$. 
nimw, § 163, 3, to fall, ntJiiuxa, Att. Poet. TTs/irw?, comp. § 230. 

Remark. There tu-e also found, in imitation of Homer, -Asy.Qny ^iv and 
the Imp. XEXQ a/S^ I, from the poetic Perf xex^cJ/a (from xQa^M, to cry out) ; 
also the Imp. JiinHa&i, from nsnoid^a, to trust (from nii^bi, to persuade), is 
found in Aesch. Eun). G02. See § 230. The Perfects oida aiid l'oix« require 
a distinct consideration. 

§195. 02 da and ioi'/.a. (215,21G.) 

1. Old a, Perf from "EUR (second Aor. ndov, I saw, Inf \8hv, videre), 
properly / have seen, hence I know. Its inflection is as follows : 



PERFECT. 



Ind. S. 1. I oida Subj. Eidco Imp. 

2. I olad-a 1 eidrjg \'a&i Inf 

3. ! oldsiv) Eidfj lazco eidsvai 
D. 2. 3. i i'arov, ictov Eidrirov,-rjrov lorov, i'aiojv 

P. 1. i iaiAEV EidcofjiEV Part. 

2. j i'aze Eid/JTS 'I'aze sldag, -via, 6g 

3. I i'adaiiv) aldcoaiiv) 'loxoicav 



PLUPERFECT. 
Ind. S. 1. '^i^Eiv =^ Dual ^ PI. {jdEifisv, Poet. ijapiEV 



(jdEig and -EiG&a i xi^Eirov, Poet. f^GTOv ydEitE " f/trre 



Opt. Sing. EidEh]v,-r]g,-)]; Dual EidEfritov, -ijzriv; F\. ei 8 EUifiEv {seldom 
EidEif^Ev), EidEi'iiTE, EidElEV, (seldom EidEuiaav). 

Fut. Ei'aoixai (Ion. eid/j603, although Isocr. ovvEid/](JEig), I shall 

know. — Verbal Adj. igteov. 



2vvoi8a, compounded of oida, I am conscious, Inf avveidtvai, Imp. 
avnG&i, Subj. avvEidcj, etc. 



1 § 116, 2. 

2 First Pers. f,8i], second fjSrjod^a, third i]drj, are considered as Attic 
forms; yet ri8siv, I'ldnird-a (also fjStig), IjSei, are found in the best Attic 
writers. Ol'dn^fv, ol'dixjf, oi'Saa-i, instead of I'lTfisv, etc., are rarely found 
in the Attic writers. Comp. X. An. 2. 4, 6. Antiph. p. 115, 3. PI. Ale. 
141, e. Eur. Suppl. 1052. X. O. 20, 14. ol8ag occurs in X. C. 4. 6, 6. 



226 PRES. AND IMPF. DEPONENT PASSIVES. [§§ 196, 197. 

Remark. The Perfect, / have knoum^ is expressed by eyvwxa, and the 
Aorist, I knew, by tyvoiv. 

2. "EoL^a, I am like, I seem, Perf. from "ETKP- {hue, the Iinj)f. of which 
is used in Homer), poetic una instead of toixot, dxivat instead of ioiy.ivai, and 
(instead of ioixaai) the anomalous Att. third Pers. PI. at^aat, even in prose, 
Part, ioixojg, in the Attic writers only in the sense of like, Att. elxojg, only in 
the sense of probable, likely, right, hence especially in the neuter sixog, as atg 
ily.og, as is natural ; Plup. icoy.siv, § 122, 5, Fut. d'^co. 

Here belongs the abridged form sol/ixsv, among the Tragedians, in- 
stead of eoi'y.ansv, comp. ianEV. The poetic Mid. forms iji^uL, Eur. Ale. 
1065, second Pers. Sing. Perf, and rfi/.To, thu'd Pers. Sing. Plup., are con- 
structed according to the same analog}^ 

§196. HI. Pre sent and Imperfect. (sis.) 

There are also some Present and Imperfect forms, mostly in the Epic 
dialect, Avhich, according to the analog}^ of verbs in -^i, take the personal- 
endings w ithout the mode-vowel. See § 230, under avvoi, tuvvo), iQixo, 
(TEVb), sdo), (pi^)o} ; oly,a l, § 166, 24, of the Common language, belongs here. 

§197. Summary of all the Deponent Passives. 

§102,2,3. 

^'AynfiuL, to wonder, diaXi/oixai, to converse, rj5o^ttt, to rejoice, [hot, 

aidiouai, to reverence, diavoso^aL, to think, ■d^eoofiuL {Foet.), to become 

aXixo^ai, to loander, dvvui-iai, to be able, ygsuufxcti, to hang, 

oifidXaofini, to contend, dvgaQeaiiofiai, to be dis- iiulvo^ai, to be mad, 

a»'TtoO|U«i(Poet.),adversor, satisfied, (xvadtio^uui, to loathe, 

a7Tovoso}xui,tobedistracted,ivavTi6ofiai, to resist, vs^usaaoiAtn, (Poet.), to be 

UTioQsonai, tobeperplexed,iv&vnioiiaL, to reflect, justly indignant, 

aQKTioy.Qaxionai, to have ivvoio^UL, to consider, oI'o^iul, to suppose, 

an aristocratic govern- enifislofxaL and -social, olLyaq/Jo^ai, to have an 

ment, to take care, oligarchy, 

UQviofiai, to refuse, iTiLvoioixai,to refiect upon, neiououai, to try, 

ay&oij.(xi,to be displeased, intcnaixai, to know, TiQO&vfisofxaL, to desire, 

^ovloiiui, to wish, sga^ttL (Poet.), to love, nqovoiopixL, to foresee, 

^Qvyuo(xaL, to roar, £v&vpio{xaL, to be happy, ae^joiuai, to reverence, Aor. 

diofxui, to ivant, svXa;jsojjai,tobecaidious, sascp&riv, PI. Pliaedr. 

diQy.ouai [Foet.], t€ see, «L'vo^£o,u«i, bonis legibus 254, b. [tious, 

driixoxQuiEo^ai, to have a utor, cfiXoTLiudofiai, to be ambi- 

denwcratic government, evTroQEoiuaL, to be opulent, vnoTonEO{.iai, to conjecture. 

Remark 1. AvXH^opai, to lodge, inivoio^ai, to reflect upon, Xoidogio^ai, 
to reproach, oQEyouai, to desire, have both a iMid. and Pass, form for their 
Aorist. Several verbs have a Mid. and Pass, form for their Future, e. g. 
diaXiyoiiai, colloquor, has tlie Fut. diaXex^rj<TOfAai and diaXs^oixai ; ax&ofiaif 



§198.] 



ACTIVE VERBS WITH A MIDDLE FUTURE. 



227 



§ 15(3, 4 ; (TitfisXofiaty § KK), 21 ; i'jdofiaL, to rejoice, has only f]a&r,(TOfiai ; the 
poetic tfjafiiit, § I7}>, 4, lias i(juffdi']ao^cn,. 

Rem. *2. All the other Deponents are Middle Deponents, or are used only 
in the Pres. and Inipt'., and almost all are confined to poetiy. 

Rem, 3. Among the Deponent Passives, are very many Active verbs, 
which in the Mid. express a reflexive or intransitive action, but have a 
Passive tbrm for their Aorist ; on the contrary, a Middle form for their 
Future, e.g. g)0/5fa), terreo, to ternfy, (poftTjS^ijvoti and q)o(ir,(Tea&aL, 
timcrc, to fear. Here belong all verbs in -ulvsiv and - 1; v f t v, derived 
from substantives and adjectives, almost all \n-ovv, and most in -l^tLV, 
e. g. ivq:Qalv£iv, to gladden, sv(pQuvd^i]vai, ivcpQaveiai^ai, to he happy, ninul- 
vsiv, to make ripe, TifTinv&i]vaL, nsrtavHa&ai, maturescere, to ripen, alaxv- 
vtiv, to shame, alaxw^iivai, cnaxvvuu&ai, to feel shame, ilaixovv, to make less, 
iXarioj&ijvai, eXkaTitoasa&oci, to be inferior, to be conquered, xolovv, to make 
angry, xoXca&ijvai, xoXuasa&ai, succeusere, to be angry, (iaXay.i'^eiv, to make 
effeminate, fiaXaxicr&ijvcti, fiaXaxiHd&ai, to make one^s self effeminate, oQyi^siv, 
to make angry, oQ/ia&rjvuL, oQyiua&aL, succensere, to be angry ; there are 
very many others also, of which only those most in use will be mentioned 
here : 



U/flV ''^ 

ayvvvtti 
ttviixv 
algsiv 
aXXdiTfiv 

UQfiO^HV 

oktxoXhv 

ftdXXsiv 
ijiilyuv 



effiK^v 
{vtoxtiv 

'tJTli'iV 
IdQVSlV 

yuflv 

xXivEiv 

xoi/uav 

xofui^eiv 

y.qlviiv 

Xiysiv 



Xelneiv 

XVSLV 

ps&iaysiv 

piyvvvttL 

pipvi'iaxsiv 

oqpav 

bxHv 

nslSsiv 

nriyvvvttL 

TiXd^siv 



nXavdv 
nXi'iTTsiv 

TTOQSVSIV 

^riyvvvai 
Qojvvvvai 
cnUiv 

(Tl'lUHV 

axsdavvvvaL 

anav 

aisXXnv 



(TTQ£q)£lV 

(TcpdXXav 

TQSTIEIV 
TQSCpElV 

(palvHV 

CpSQELV 

q)o^3Eiv 
Xslv 



§198. Sum mar 
w i t h 

Ayvoiw, not to know, 
adct), to sing, 
ay.ovQ}, to hear, 
aXaXix^bi, to cry out, 
otfiaQTixvo), to miss, 
unavTaw, to meet, 
cmoXctvo), to enjoy, 
uQJid'Co), to seize, 
/5a^/^to, to go, 
/SatVw, to go, 
§l6w, to live, 
^Xinoi, to see, 
^od(a, to cry out, 
yeXdoi, to laugh. 



y of the Active Verbs most in use 
a Mi dclle Fu t u r e , § 154, 1. (222.) 

yr}Q(x(Ty.b), to gi'ow old, d^riquw, d^rjQsv(o, to hunt, 

yiyvuxTXM, to know, S^iyydvoj, to touch, 

ddxvoj, to bite, S^vriayw, to die, 

dttQ&dvbJ, to sleep, ■d-Qoxruo), to leap, 

dslaai, to fear, xap-vw, to labor, 

didQacrxo), to run away, y.Xaico, to weep, 

diwyco, to pursue, xXsTnca, to steal, 

iyytopid^o), to praise, KoAa^co, to punish, 

slfii, to be, ycopd^o), comissor, 

inaivsbj, to praise, [self, Xayxdvco, to obtain, 

ijiioQy.ioj, to perjure one^s Xap^dvco, to take, 

iadlo), to eat, Xixf^dca, to lick, 

■&avp.d^(a, to wonder, p-av&dvoj, to learn, 

d^i(a, to run, vsw, to swim. 



* From dvdysiv come avax^^ivat and dvayctyia^ai in the sense of in 
mare provehi. 



228 



PREPOSITIONS AND CONJUNCTIONS. 



[§ 199. 



o<(5«, to know, 
o/uti')^'", to lament, 
olokv^u), to howl, 
hijvi'iji, to swear, 
6(}if.o), to see, 
7inlC,M, to sport, 
Timr/h), to suffer, 
Tirjdixo), to leap, 
Txii'b), to drink, 
711711(0, to fall. 

Remark. Some have 
the Middle, however, is 



7T).Eb), to sail, [nvfiao), crvoiTTbi, to ivhistle, etc., 
nriot, to blow {\)\\t avfu.- ilxroi, to produce, 



7ivt/a), to strarifrle, 
noifio), to desire, 
TTQogxuvEo), to reverence, 
^to), tojlow, 
aiyuo), to be silent, 
aimnub), to be silent, 
ay.bmib), to sport. 



7Qf/(i), to run, 
T(jor/o), to gnaw, 
■ivy/uibj, to obtain, 
iMdaQoi, to rail at, 
(fsv/b), tojlee, 
cpOdroi, to come before, 
/day.b), to gape, 



(TTiovdu^b), to be zealous, /ojoia), to cordain. 

both the Active and Middle form for the Future ; 
preferred, e. g. uyvoib), dio)y.o), inaivib), etc. 



SECTION VII. 

§199. Prepositions and Conjunctions. (323.) 

Besides the Substantive, Adjective, Pronoun, Numeral, Ad- 
verb and Verb, there are also the two following parts of speech, 
viz. Prepositions and Conjunctions. On the forms of these 
nothing need be said ; hence these parts of speech are treated 
in the Syntax, so far as it is necessary. 



PECULIARITIES OF THE DIALECTS, 



PARTICULARLY OF THE EPIC DIALECT. 



A. SOUNDS. 

§200. Digamma or Labial Breathing F. (7.) 

1. The Greek language had originally, in addition to the Spiritus Asper 
J, and the Lingual Breathing <t, a Labial Breathing, the sound of which 
corresponds nearly to the Eng./. In accordance with its form, F, which 
is like one Gamma standing upon another, it is named Digamma, and as 
the Cohans retained it longer than the other Grecian ti-ibes, it is called the 
iEolic Digamma. It has the sixth place in the Alphabet, namely between 
s and ^, and is named Bav. Comp. ^ 25, 2. 

2. This character disappeai-ed veiy early ; but its sound, was in some 
cases changed, in some of the Dialects, into the smooth Labial /5, e. g. 
/9/«, vis, Fix — later I'c ; in other instances it was softened into the vowel v, and 
after other vowels, coalesced with v and formed the Diphthongs at; ev, rji; ov, 
(av, e. g. vavg — vdFg — navis, %ti(a {xsFoj), JEol., §ovg — ^oFc, — bovs, bos, 
Gen. bovis ; in others still it was changed, into a mere gentle breathing, 
which at the beginning of a word is denoted by the Sphitus Lenis, but in the 
middle of a word and before q is not mdicated, e. g. Fig, vis, I'g ; oFig, o\ds, 
oig ; (IXeoi, volvo ; Fgodovy ^odov, etc ; it was also changed in the begin- 
ning of some words, into a sharp breathing, which is denoted by the Sphi- 
tus Asper, e. g. santgog, vesperiis, h'vvvfii, vestio. 

3. In the Homeric poems no character exists to denote the Breathing F; 
but it is veiy clear that in the time of Homer, many words were sounded 
with tbe Digamma, e. g. ayvvm, aru^, uvuaaw, avdavoj, saQ, ver, the forms 
of EUSL, video, I'otxa, uxodi, viginti, sljxa, vestis, eItthv, Exr]Xog, I'vvvfii, ves- 
tio, kog and o?, suus, oi/, sui, oi, sibi, i'aTisQog, vesperus, oixog, vicus, oivog, 
vinum, etc. ; tliis is obvious from the followmg facts ; (a) words that have 
the Digamma cause no Hiatus, e. g. ngo t&£v = jiqo Fsd^fv ; (b) hence also 
a vowel capable of Elision, when placed before such a word, cannot be 
elided, e. g. Xlntv 8s e = di Fs, uno i'o == ano Fio ; (c) the v icpEXxvaTixov 
is wanting before words which have the Digamma, e. g. daii ol = Soli Fot ; 

31 



230 DIALECTS. CHANGE OF THE VOWELS. [§201, 



— (d) 01* instead of oix or 017, is^pfoiind before the Digamma, e. g. inh 
ov e 0^ Bv tail yjoilojv = ov Fidiv ; — (e) in eonipounda neither EHsion nor 
Crasis (contraction) occurs, e. g. 8i(xH7iijj.fv = diuFsmiiAiP, uuyriq = aFayijg; 
— [£) a word, having tlie Digamma, makes togetlier with a preceding con- 
sonant, a vowel long by j)osition, e. g. yuQ k&iv; — (g) long vowels are not 
shortened before words that have the Digamma, e. g. y,u).h'i'7i aii).^o)v x« T 
hi^Luai = y.al Fit'iAuai 11. /, 392. 

§ 201. In I e r c h a n g e of ilie Vowels. (38.) 

Preliminary Remark. The dialectic peculiarities in the change of 
vowels, as well as of consonants, never extend to all the words of a dialect, 
but are uniformly limited to ceitain words and forms. 

1. The three vowels, s, o, «, called — § 140, 2, and 4 — vowels of Varicb- 
tion — [TQsqxx), tijQocpn^ iiQucprjr) undergo various changes in the dialects. 

a is used instead of 6, Ion., e. g. iqutim, lufivM^ fisyuSog instead of jginM, 
ii(iv(a, fxiyi&oQ ; so also Doric iQucfM, ay.ia{)tq/'A(Jnt(jiiQ instead of, iqi- 
cpo), aaifQcg/'AQiff^Lg ; and in several particles, e. g. oxw, tox«, ttoxm in- 
stead of oTf , TOTE, nore. 

E instead of a in the Ionic dialect in the following Liquids, e. g. liaafQeg, 
BQcVjV, veXog, ^f^s^oov, Ion., mstead of lio-aaQsg, four, aQarjV, a male, 
valog, glass, ^uQa&Qov, guf; besides in veiy many verbs in -uoi, e. g. 
cponico, oQSUi, Ion., instead of cpoiia(o, o^aw. 

s instead of o, Doric, e. g. e^ds^rjy.ovTa instead of i^do^ur,y.ovTu. 

o instead of a often, ^olic, e. g. cTTQOTog instead of aiQuTog, army. 

a mstead of o, Ion., in vc^^ojdnv instead of og^udHf. 

2. The following cases are to be noted in addition : The long « is a spe- 
cial peculiarity of the Doric dialect, and causes, in particular, the so-called 
Plateiasm, i. e. the broad pronunciation of the Dorians, e. g. ufiSQU, y.unoc, 
advg, Jai^ionrjQ. The Older and the later Ionic have softened this grave 
« into T]. The Attic writers use the letters, a and f,, interchangeably, § 16, 
7. Com]!. Dor. afAsga, Ion. rifiigrj, Att. ijiusga ; Ion. oocplrj, Dor. and Att. 
Gocpla ; Ion. Scjqtj^, Dor. and Att. Swgu^.- — So, also, a in the diphtliong «t', 
in the Ionic writers, is changed into t], vrjvg, yqriig, mstead of vavc, yQitvg\ 
likewise in the diphthong ai in the Dat. PI. of the first Dec, tjc and ;;o-t Ion. 
instead of «f? and niuL. — Still, in certain words, the Dorians retain the ?;, as 
the lonians do the «. 

ri mstead of el ^Eolic and Doric, e. g. a(X(xi]ov, xT^vog, o'^i,n, so the Infin- 
itives, e. g. Xa^ijv, y.aXijv instead of arjixslov, xflvog, o|h«, Icc^hv, y.ulEU'. 
av mstead of si, Doric, e. g. cp&algoi instead of cpd^HQo), 
V ofl;en instead of o, ^Eolic, e. g. cricjpoc, oVt'^w instead of (ro(p6g, ovofia ; 
so in Homer ixyvQig instead of ccyogd ; and m the Connnon Language, 
EV(x)vv(xogj navi'iyvQig, etc. 



§§ 202, :20o.J DIALECTS. CHANGES OF THE CONSONANTS. 231 

w instead of ov before a Liquid and o-, and at the end of a "word in the 
tenninations of the second Dec, and in the stem of several words ; — oi in- 
stead of 01' before the Brcathin'j; o" in the third Pers. PI. oi(n{v) instead of 
ovai{v) and in the Participle ending -oiaa instead of -ovaa, and in Mulaa 
and 'AQidoia« instead of Moioru, and\4^s&ovau; the first is Dor., yet not 
in Pindar ; the last is ^olic and in Pindar, e. g. 

7a"i ((fUiSo) instead of lov fqp»i,5oi', a'lv (also Ion. and Pindar) instead of 
oi'i', dutXog instead of dovXog, w^wyot; instead of ovquvoc, ^iog instead of 
^ois; — iinToi(Ji{i-) instead of rv7itovai{v\ tvnroida instead of zvinovaa, 
ifiXioiaiv instead of (jptAoLcrtj', exoiaa instead of e/ovcra. 

Some other instances will be considered below in treating of the Declen- 
sions and Conjugations. 

§202. Iiiterchang-e of the Consonants . (39,40.) 

The change of consonants in the different dialects depends on the two 
following laws : 

Consonants of the same order — § 5, Rem. 3, — interchange with each 
other ; and the consonants which are called homonymous, § 5, Rem. 1, 
mterchange with the homonymous. 

§203. I. Interchange of Consonants of the same 

order. 

A. The Mutes ; (a) The smooth* Mutes n and y.. The interrogative and 
indefinite pronouns, tiw^, nois, Tiotoc, ondlog, etc., are in Ion. xw,', v.otb, etc. 

X instead of t; tiots, noii, ois, tots, otiots, iaXXots, are in Dor. noy.a, noxd, 
oxa, Tox«, oJioxa {FoeL 6 Ji6y.y.a), aXXona ; so oxm (shortened from 'oy.uy.a) instead 
of or«y. On the contraiy x instead of x, e. g. irivoq Dor. instead o^yuvoq, iyttvog. 

n instead of x ^ol. and Dor., e. g. ni^nt instead of nivxt. 

(b) The jMedials /? and / ; e. g. (^Xv/ojv, penny-royal, Att., is in Ion. yXrjxm>, 
^XicpaQov, eye-lash, is yXicpaQOV. 

d instead of / Dor., e. g. da instead of yi) ; hence JrjurjirjQ instead of 

8 instead of/?, Dor., in odsXog instead of b^dog. 

/5 instead of d in the ^Eol. words ^tXcpiv, BsX(fol instead of dsXq>iv, JsXipol^ 

(c) The Aspirates d- and (p ; e. g. -^riq, heast, d^Xuv, &Xl^siv, ov^uq, udder, 
are in Dor. qp>)^, cpXuv, (pXlSsiv, ovq)UQ (uber) ; cpi'jQ and cpXl^stv also in Homer. 

X instead of & ; ix^fxa is in Dor. j/^a and ogvi&og, etc. (from oQvig) is o^vv 
Xog, etc. 

B. The Liquids ; (a) The Liquids interchange with one another : v instead 
of X before ^ and z often in the Dor. dialect, e. g. i]vd^ov, ^eviiarog Dor. in- 
stead of t]X&ov,^iXTi(TTog', also Ion. and Att. nXsv(i(av, pulmo, instead ofnvev- 
fiijjv, Xlxqov instead of vliqov. 



232 DIALECTS.— THE HOMONYMOUS CONSONANTS. [§ 204. 



Q is rarely used instead of X, e. g. xoi^avog, oven, Att., instead of xXl^arog. 

(b) The Liquid q and the Breatliing a in the Later and often in the Mid. 
Attic ; Q^ instead of the Ion. and old Attic q(t, e. g. aqa^v and uq^tjVj a male^ 
yoQffT} and yoQ^rj, back. 

§ 204. IL In tercha ng- e of the so called Ho moyiy- 
mous Consonants. 

(a) The Palatals y and n, e. g. v-vacpivg, fuller, is preferred by the Attic 
writers to the other form, yvucpsvg. 

X and / in dixoficxL, Ion., instead of ds/onai. 

(b) The Linguals -^9- and t, e. g. avTig Ion. and Epic, instead of av&ig, 
again. 

Remark. In some words a change of the aspiration, from one syllable to 
the other, occurs, e. g. yaOmv Ion., instead of /itwv, iv&aiTu, hie, ei&ivTiv, 
hinc Ion., instead of svtuv&u, svisv^tv; xin^(jrj Ion., instead of x^tQa, pot. 

0" and T, e. g. UoTsiddv, etistov, Eixati, zv, ts Dor., instead of Iloasidbjv, 
Ijiftrov, HxacTL, av, as. The Attic forms tevtXov, beet, rrjXla, sieve, (from a^- 
•^0)), TVQ^iri (from avqia), turba, TtjfAfQov, to-day, and TrjTig, this year, (the tAVo 
last only in the comedians, but in tragedians and in other Attic writers o-^- 
^(Qov, ariTsg), is in the Ion. and Common Language asinXov, arjXla, gvq^tj. 

aa and tt. The Later, and often, also, the Middle Attic dialect uses, in 
most words, tt, instead of aa, which are employed by the older and the 
later Ionic, and in most other dialects, e. g. Tuaao), yXataau ; but Att. twttw, 
yXaina. Still, the Ionic forms prevail, not only in the older Attic writers, 
but are, also, found in other authors, as some words always have aa, e. g. 
ndaao}, to scatter, tttwctw, to crouch, (^vaaog, a deep, niiaaca, to stamp, 
TiTvaaoj, to fold, ^Quaaa), to move, TiTOjaao), to cower, igeaab} {tgiTio} is reject- 
ed), etc. 

(T and V in the Dor. verb-ending -a5C, e. g. jVTiTOfisg, instead of the 
common form rvmo^sv, see § 220, 6; also alig Dor. instead of «t£V. 

dd instead of ^ in the Lacon. dialect, e. g. jiovalddsLV instead of fiv&i^nv, 
fxddda instead of ^«^«. 

ad instead of ^^ol., so also in Theoc, but only in the middle of words, 
e. g. fifXladsTui, fisadatv instead of fisXi'^ftcii, fjs^iov or ^uf/^wv, not at the be- 
ginning of words, nor if ^ precedes, or a follows, e. g. fto/dl^oiri,, inicp^v- 
^oiaa. 

^ and tt, avQlneiv, dq^ouHv Att., instead of avgl^eiv, a^^d^jtV. 
Here belong, 

$ and er and aa, e. g. l^vv Epic and old Attic instead of avv ; di^og and 
TQi^cg Ion. instead of diaaog, rgiaaug ; xXd^ Dor. instead of xXatg {xXiig) ; even 



§ 205.] DIALECTS. CONTRACTION AND DIAERESIS. 233 

in the Fnt. aiul Aorists, the Dorians, and also Homer, in several verbs, use J 
instead of c, see ^ 234, 4. 

(c) The Labials <jp and tt, — the first Att., the last Ion. — e. g. uacpuQayog 
Att., aanttQuyoq Ion. So J)^o\. and Dor. tt, instead of qp, e. g. ct^nl JEiOX.^ in- 
stead of «,uqr't; hence in the Connnon language, a^mixsiv, etc. 

(A and 71, e. g. 7rf5« Dor., instead of find. 

(d) The double consonants | and ip and the two of which they are composed, 
tliough transposed, in the ^ol. dialect, e. g. axsvog, (indXig instead of ^ivog, 
ipaXig, but only at the beginning of a word. So acp and ip, e. g. ipi Dor. in- 
stead ot' aq^i. 

Change of the Vowels. 
§205. Contraction and Diaere sis . (lo— 12.) 

1. In the Dialects, the following contractions, which differ from those 
mentioned in § 9, are to be noted; — so and eov, sometimes, also, 00 and os 
are contracted into ev in Dor. and Ion. — not, as commonly, into ov; so'ao, 
aov and oov Ion. are contracted into ev — not, as is usual, into w and ov, 
e. g. (pilsv from q)diov = (piAoC ; nlEvvsg from nXeovsg ; nXrjQfvvTsg from 
7tXr,o6ovrfg = rcXrjoovvTtg ; idtxcclsv from idLy.aios = idiy.ulov, siQonsvv from 
floc^Tnov = HCMTiov ; ytlivdtx from yildovcra = /fAwcra ; di^itLivai from 81- 
xnioovat==dr/Miovai. But commonly the Dorians contracted ocinto a) — instead 
of ou — e. g. TVQOEVia = xvQbJvta instead ofxvQOVvra^ Qiyuv instead of ^<;^oi;i'. 

2. Ao, aov and aw are contracted in the Dor. dialect into a — instead of 
oj, — namely, in verbs in -«(«, in genitives in -ao and -«o)v, in substantives 
in -«wv, Gen. -dovog, and in proper names in -Xaog, e. g. cfvadvug^ ;^«Aa(Tt, 
yeXdv from (pvadovjig, /liXdovai, yddwv ; — tuv xogav from rawv yoQacov 
= Twy xoowv ; — Iloasidav, — dvog, Att. UoaeidoJv, — ojvog ; — MsviXdg, "Aq- 
xffflXdg, Gen. -«, Dat. -«. 

3. ^e and ast are contracted in the Dor. (but not in Pindar) into tj and rj 
instead of « and «, in verbs, e. g. icpohri, q)0Lifig instead of iopolia, cpouag. 
See § 222, IH, ( I). See 221. 

4. The Attic dialect is the opposite of the other dialects, particularly of 
the later Ionic, as it almost always admits contractions, while the other dia- 
lects, and the later Ionic commonly, avoid them. The tendency of the later 
Ionic towards uncontracted syllables is so great, that it even resolves the 
long sounds (which are never resolved in the other dialects) into their sim- 
ple elements, e. g. (piXisai instead of cpiXj], which had been contracted from 
<f)i,Xiri. Epic poetry often uses, indiscriminately, contracted and uncon- 
tracted forms, according to the necessity of the verse, e. g. wexwi' and uy-wv. 

5. On the contraiy, it is a special peculiarity of the Ionic dialect, that 
while it delights to avoid contractions, it still, in particular cases, admits 



234 DIALECTS. CRASIS, SYNIZESIS, ELISION. HIATUS. [§ 206. 

them, where the Attic (halert does not, e. jr. louc (t ), loivc, lofiaua&ui Ion., in- 
stead oftfoo?, etc., and (^specially the contraction (A' or] into w, particularly in 
the verhs fSour and runv, e. g. ti%)<Tu, tyo)au, {u/ro'iiTudy.fv Worn, from uyvoioj)^ 
ivyiriiixa, instead ot"f;?o»/(/«, tyoi,cru, ivvivoriv.u; so (}'/5i')/.ovnt in Homer, in- 
stead ot"o/(5o/Jxo»'T«. 

G. The oj)i)osite of contraction is diaeresis — diulofatg — which separates 
a diphtliong into its vowels. Diaeresis is specially used in the Al,o\. dialect. 
The use ot'it in Homer, also, is not rare, where it is found, most frequently, 
in such words as separate the two vowels by means of the Digamma, namely, 
«i' in nuig; uv in u'vTf.n], breath (from uFtifAi), ui<ttuIboc, dirty; u in tWxoj, 
to make like, etxro, ei/.top, eiy.ii]V', I'ii very often in the adverb i'v (= eu, well), 
e. g. iv'y.girag, ivxiifisvog; when jx, r, q or o" follows iv in compounds then 
they are doubled, e. g. ivy^ifUrjc, ivpvrjTog, iuQ^oog, ivaaslfAog ; o'i in *oig 
{uFig, ovis), b'i'ofiDCL (comp. opinor), oiaiog, oj'i^u, ai'i^av (from oiyriyi). 

§ 206. Cr as is , St/ niz e sis , Elisio n^ N icpely.vorinov. 

Hiatus. (15,10,17,19,21.) 

1 . In particular mstances the Dialects differ from the law s of Crasis stated 
in§§ 10 and 11 ; namely, in the Ionic dialect and in Pindar and Theoc, the 
oof the Article coalesces with « and forms w, and with ui and forms w, e.g. 
TO uyuXfiu =jatyalfia, so zb]).7]&ig, Twtro, (x)P}j(), wi'dgig, aiv&Qbmot,, (Itnokoi, 
from TO aXrj&ig, to uvto, o ixp/]o, ol ardgeg, ol apd^obinoi, ol uIttoXoi. In 
Herodot. occur, bjoiaiog, ovrog, (vIXol, with the Spiritus lenis, mstead of the 
Spiritus asper (from 6 uQiaxog, 6 aviog, ol aXXoc); Homer uses the Crasis 
seldom, namely, only in olQiffTog, mvioc, tuXXu, ovfwg instead of o f\u6g, toI'- 
VEyji, oviExa instead of ou IVfxa ; y.uyoj is doubtful. 

2. Instances of Crasis in Doric are, twA;'£oc, twVtom instead of toi' aXyeog, 
tw uvTQb) ; so and g = w, ai and f = t], e. g. o ilacfog = bJXu(pog, o «$ = 
0)?, xai iy. = y,ijy.^ y.tu iiTis = y.fjTTE, y.al iav or 7]i' = y.i]v, which last is also 
Ion. 

'3. Ionic writers admit the common Crasis in ov, in the Masc. and Neut of 
the Art. and in h'rfQog, e. g. oitsqcc, tovteqqv. 
4. The use of Synizesis, § 1'2, is very frequent in the Homeric poems, 

(a) In the middle of words, it is oftenest found in the following connected 
vowels, eu, ;«, ««/, f «c ; to, toi, iov; sco, fo) ; e. g. aTj'j&Ea, 7jfii' 
ag, ^iol, yQV(Tboig,iE&t'S(xiis; much rarer in as, la, lui, ir], irj, io,e. g. 
UE&Xsvair, nuXiag, noXiog ; oo only in oydoov ; voi only in day.gvoicri ; 
Tji in dvjioio, drjiwv, dt^toiai, r,ia ; 

(b) Benveen two words in the following connected vowels, 7] a, tj e, 

ri 7], 7] SI, 7} ov, 7] ol; iL ov, (x) a, (a ov, The first word is either 



§206.] DIALECTS. CRASIS,SYNIZESIS, ELISION. HIATUS. 235 

ij, V> •'')' f^V ""^1 ^^^'> o** ^ word with the inflexion-endings, t], o), e. g. 
tj, or, di) u(pyfiuTUTog, (ui] ixXXoi, HXanlvi] ?y£ yd^og, ucr^'iiaio) oi6^ viov. 
,5. Elision, §§ 13 and 14, is found very often in Homer; namely, 

(a) The « in the V\. Neut. and the Ace. Sing, of the third Dec., rarely 
in the Aor. ending -an, e. g. «Af/j// ifis Od. ^, 200; commonly in the 
pai'ticle «^a ; 

(b) The f in tkevfnnaniiQMMBrs, ^'^£' -us -ai, etc., in the Voc. of the 
third Dec, in the Dual of the third Dec, in verb-endings and in par- 
ticles, e. g. Si, T£, ToTf, etc. — but never in Ids ; 

(c) The t in the Dat. PI. of the third Dec ; much rarer in the Dat. Sing., 
and only when it could not be mistaken for the Ace e. g. /oIqe 8s 
Toi oQvid^ ^Odvasvg, II. x, 277; in «^,ut, i fifxi, and acpi', in adverbs 
of place in -^/, except those derived from substantives; in it'zoyt ; 
finally in all verb-endings ; 

(d) The in utto, vtio, but never in tt^jo, hi Svo, in the Neut. of pronouns, 
except those hi -to, and in all verb-endings ; 

(e) The at, in the verb-endings -fiai, -tui, -a&ui, aai only in 7;a oliyr,- 

ns}J(x)v II. o, 245, and at in the Nom. of the fii'st Dec in u^u odvpai 
II. X, 272 ; 

(f) The 01 in jaoi, to ine, and in the particle, roi. 

6. The V (cf.s).y.v(Tny.uv, § 15, is commonly rejected in Ion. prose, e. g. 
nuai tlf^a. 

7. The Hiatus, § 8, is admitted by Homer in the following cases, 

(a) In long vowels or diphthongs either in the Arsis* of the verse, e. g. 
uvTi&i I 0) 'O^u I a7fi; or in the Thesis, in which case the long vowel 
or diphthong is short, e. g. ol'/.oi s \ auv ; 

(b) AVlien the vowel does not admit Elision, or but rarely, e. g. nai6l a^v- 
nv ; 

(c) When two words are separated by a punctuation-mark, e. g. a).)! ava, 
il fii^nvdc yi ; 

(d) In the Fem. Caesura, (i. e. the caesura succeeding a short syllable) 
after the first short syllable of the third foot of the verse, e. g. 

Kfivi] I 8k T(jv(pii I leia || uu j lamTO \ /f/ot 7ia \xiirj II. y, 376. 
Tbiv ol I f I fys \ vovio I! £ I vl jAr/d | qoktl ys | vi&h] II. f, 270 . 

(e) In the Diaeresis (i. e. the division of the verse which is occasioned by 
a foot ending with a word) after the first and fourth foot of the verse, 
g'g- 

* Arsis is that part of a foot on which the Aveight or stress of the voice 
falls. The rest of the foot is called Thesis. The Arsis is on the long 
syllable of a foot. E. g. the Arsis of the Iambus fxspca is on w; the Arsis 
of the Dactyle nlro^sv is on nl. — Tr. 



236 DIALECTS. LENGTHENING AND SHORTENING VOWELS. [§ 207. 

s/Xfi I Idofifvi'jog ayavov /JtvxaXlduo II. (ji, 117. 

nifiipai in'AiQtidji'A/afiifivovL \ oilov'OvnQOv II. /5, G. Comp. ^, 422; 

(f) Wlicre the first wor<l has the apo^stroplie, e. g. difSfji t&akXev ; 

(g) Sometimes in jM-oper names ; 

(li) Words, whicli liave the digamma oecasion no Hiatus, § 203, 3, e. g. 
ov I 8s ovg I nntdag b\ aaxev (= olds Fovg). 



§207. Lengthening' and Shortening of the 

V 10 els. 

1. The following vowels are lengthened : 

A in Homer is sometimes lengthened into ai ; this occurs in «».£to?, ««/, 
ayalouai, instead of usTog, etc.; so also 7r«^«t (also y.aiuii^uTui), in the Tra- 
gedians dial, and the analogous form vnitl instead of 7r«f>M, diu, vno. 

a into 7j in Homer in r,fijed^orTC(L, ij/^gsdovTai, ijVffAOSig in the Arsis, con- 
sequently on account of the metre. 

« into «/. before a, JEol., in the Ace. PL of the first Dec. as also in luuaig 
and rviXaig instead of (xakag, raXag, xutg instead of zug, Y.uXmg instead of 
noiXotg^ in Pindar in the first Aor. Act. Part, e. g. xvipaig, -aiia instead of 
-a?, -a(Ta ; but always nag. 

Av into (xi'v, Ion., in TQavya, -d^avfioc, and its derivatives, e. g. in jQojvfia, 
S-mfiu, ■&a)ViAot^(o, and in pronouns compounded with avTog, e. g. icovTov, 
a£(o'iiov, s{is(x)'vt6v instead of eavjoVy etc.; so also xcot'to instead of Twtxo. 

E into ti in the Ion. writers before a Liq. in a number of words, e. g. 
sivExa — also in Attic prose — xtivog, ^elvog, aisivog, ct^anctw. Homer uses 
this lengthened syllable according to the necessities of the verse in other 
words also, which in Ionic prose have e, e. g. slv, vtisIq, TiHQag, end, cpQsiciKx, 
from cpQEag, a well; also before vowels in adjectives in -sog, e. g. ygiasioc, 
in substantives and pronouns, e. g. ajiHog, ifiuo, in verbs m -i(o, e. g. te- 
Xdco, nvdo), also in e'lmg instead of ao?, unto, sometimes also in the Augment 
and Reduplication, e. g. slXi'iXov&a, HoiKVictL, diidia, dsids/uTai. 

E into rj, in Hom. and in the Dor. dialect, in the Dec. of substantives in 
-Evg, e. g. ^aaiXEvg, Gen. -ijog, etc. ; farther, also, Ion., in adjectives in -siog, 
e. g. ^aadrfiog, regius; finally, in single words, e. g. yJifig, xAryi'^'oc, etc., 
instead of yJelg, Ion., in very many substantives, e. g. aXTj&rfLTj instead of 
(xX^d^sia. 

H sometimes into ai, JEo\., e. g. S^valaxo) instead of i^yjjffxw. 

O into oi. Ion. and Hom., before a vowel in several words, e. g. notrj, 
noirjEtg, XQon'], goirj, etc. ; in Homer in the Gen. of the second Dec, e. g. 
•d^eoto instead of Saov, and in cpolviog, xogoiivniri, odoLnogiov, uyaolvj^crLV 
and i]yvol7](TS. 



§207.] DIALECTS. LENGTHENING AXD SHORTENING VOWELS. 237 

is cliaiiirod into or, Ton. and Honi., before a Liq. or Si^wna, still only 
in a ctM-tain nuniher of words, and, in the Dor., before a Liq. into o), e. g. 

xonog Ion. y.oiQog Dor. y.oiQog (xovoq Ion. (jovvog 

orofiu '• oiVo^a " lovo^ua 'Okvynog " Ohkvfinog', 

also the obhqiic cases of 8uqv and yovv. But substantives, which have the 
vowel of variation o, cannot be tlius lengtliened, e. g. novog from Tihofiai, 
dofiog from difico. 

into w in Homer, on account of tlie verse, in jLO)vvaog, y.rfTmig, rgM/^uio, 
7Zb)Ti'iot.tui, and also r(jo;^aco, noraoiuai. 

T into ov often. Dor., e. g. ^ovyaTi]o instead of ^v/uttiq. Li Homer m 
tlXijXov&a, 

2. The Epic dialect resolves the contracted sounds, namely, u into ««, 
« into ace; ?j into f?;, sir], i^rj', o) into ow, ojo, wo) ; particularly in declining 
verbs, e. g. oQaag instead of oQug, xgip^vov instead of y.gi'ivov, ugooj instead 
of o^/ft, ysXwovisg instead of yskoivTigy ij^utoau instead of r/^uaa ; also cpowg 
instead of (jpo)?, light, from cpuog, and proper names in -qpcuv, e. g. zJri^uoq^ouv. 

3. The Epic dialect has a different lengthening of the vowel, which 
arises from the resolution of an original Digamma or a Spiritus Asper into 
a vowel, e. g. tvy.TjXog and i'y.r]Xog [Fixrilog] oi'oog instead of o^o?, lound, ov- 
Xog instead ofoXog, veXiog instead of I'jXtog, ucrog instead of iaog, nXlaaia in- 
stead of eA/(jo-o), comp. volvo, i]ug instead of iMg. Li the Ionic, and some- 
times in the Epic dialect, the to, contracted from «o and aw, is resolved by 
s, e. g. ixeTEw instead of ly.irao, nvXicav instead ofnyXuMV. 

4. The following vowels are abridged, 

Ai into u before a vowel often in the JEo\. dialect, e. g. uQ^uog, ^AXyutog, 
instead of auxalog, ^AXy.alog; in Homer in eruQog, kiaqri, erctgiCfaSai. 

El into £ before liquids in the Ion., and in Hom., in the forms yjqog, yjgl, 
from yilo, hand, so also Att. yjoolv, yjQcrl ; also Ion. and Dor. before a vow- 
el, in a Proparoxytoue in -ffoc, and in Properispomena in -na; in Homer 
only in a few Fem. adjectives in -vc, e. g. 

iTtLii]8wg, -it], -sov Ion. instead of -siog Mxsa instead of oixsla fi'om oy/.ig 
rsXiog, -etj, -fov " " -siog ftu&sT} " ^a&Eia " (jud^vg 

BvgerjfromsvQvg " " -a« daah] " duaua " daavg ; 

so also in Hom. '^Eg^ia instead of 'EofAsla ; also ft in Ion. is abridged into 
f, when two consonants follow which make the vowel long by position, 
e. g. aJicdf^ig instead of anudfL^ig, (jt'Co^v instead of ^fi'Ciov, xgeaabu' instead 
of y.gil(nTO)v : finally in the Dor. verb-forms, e. g. uiidfg instead ofaildng. 

Remark L In tlie ^Eol. dialect, ft before a liquid is veiT often shortened 
into f, and the Liq. is doubled, e. g. xt£»'»'0), aniggoi, oiXiXXa, instead of xnl- 
»(u, aniigw, onsiXtj. 

32 



238 DIALECTS. LENGTHENING AND SHORTENING VOWELS. [§ 207. 

Jl is cliaii«r<Hl into c in Horn, in a^ynf, unymx^ from uQyi]g, -^"/to?, shining^ 
and in the Sijl)j. ondinj^ -ns instead ol'-Tjif, ho also -oixiv instead of -w/xty, 
e.g. sideie, %) Mfjij^ofxtv. 

Oi into often in the Dor. and tEoI. dialectH, e. g. noio instead of noiw. 

Ov into in Iloni. in tiie compounds of novg, e. g. ufX).67ioc;, aQTlnog, 
often in Theocritus in tlie Ace. PI. of the second Dec, e. g. to)^ lixog in- 
stead of TOL"? Ivy.ovg', also iEol. (joXXa instead of /jorAr), and so also in Iloni. 
pSlsjai, (SoXtaOt from (jovlo^iui. 

5. On the Ionic-Attic change of the vowels, see § IG, 5. 

6. Homer often uses Syncope, § IG, 8, namely, in verh-forms, as will 
be seen below ; he also has jlmt instead of t/ttots, y)My.JO(fuyog instead of 
yaXaxTOCpciyog. 

7. Apocope — anoy.oni'i — is the rejection of a short ultimate vowel before 
a word beginning with. a consonant. It is employed by the Epic and Doric 
poets, sometimes also by the Ionic, and in a few single forms even by Attic 
prose writers. It occurs in the prepositions, e. g. ara, y.uiu, 7ia(j(x, rarely 
in ciTio and vno, and in the Epic conjunction uga. The accent is then 
thrown back ; « v before (j, tt, (p, fi, is changed into « fi, § 19, 3, e. g. a fx 
^b^udlai, uf-iPalvsLV, ufj- n&layog, liy, cpovov, ajjfisvo)', the t in xw't is always 
assimilated to the following consonants, except that the corresponding 
smooth mute stands before the aspirate, § 17, 4, e. g. y.ud diivaficv, xan 
cpdlaga, y.aa xEq)aXrig, nay yovv ; examples of ajio and vno are, ajiTtifupn, 
v^^aXXeiv, Horn. ; examples from Attic prose, afi^djrjg, ufA^oXug, X. Cy. 
4. 5, 46. 7. 5, 12, uy-nonig. 

Rem. 2. In the concuiTeuce of three consonants, assimilation is omitted, 
and one consonant is rejected, e. g. xuxjave, y.aaxi&s, uy-vaan, instead of 
y.ay.y.Tavs, xuaaxs^s, a^^vda^L. 

8. The Prothesis, §16, 10, occm's in Homer in daTzgom] and o-if^oTr?), 
i&iX(o and S^iXw, ixstvog and yalvog, iQvo^ai and ^vo^ai', Homer also often 
resolves the F into the vowel ?, namely, isQuri, hdva, isixoin, i'i'crog, eeinov, 
ieXdo}xuL, isQfdvog. 

9. Sometimes, for the sake of the metre. Homer inserts s, e. g. ddsX(pwg, 
nsvsog, instead of udsXcpog, y.evog; so also in the Gen. PI. Fem. avTsojv, ngcj- 
TSbiV. To prevent the accumulation of short syllables, lie inserts in several 
compound words an t] in place of a short vowel, e. g. TctvrjXsyiog, ini'ipoXog, 
inrjsTavog, bXiyrj-nsXib), iXa(pr]p6Xog, instead of lavvX., snip., sttiet., oXiyon., 
iXacpo^oXog. An v is found in Homer after ol in ofiouog instead of oftoiog, 
and in the Dual -ouv instead of -oiv. 

10. The Later Ionic, also, sometimes inserts an s before a long vowel, 
namely, (a) in the Gen. of some substantives, in Fem. pronouns before co, 
and in ovTog, jotovTog and avTog before long inflection-endings, e. g. oy- 



§208.] DIALECTS. CHANGES OF THE CONSONANTS. 239 

doicov, j^rymoi', exsiveMv, tovtemv, aviicov, (xvtso); (b) in some verb-forms 
before a Ion i^ vowel, e. jj^. laiiciai, dwEM^ut, dvriwvTai,', (c) some verl)s in -to 
have forms as if from -£co, e.g. /jmAAm (rv^^otXXio^svoq^ vnfQ^aXXieLV] 
nii^co nif^fiufvog {ii\»o in IToin. Tr/E^fi'v instead of tTrif^f or) ; also fipes, 
ivfl/Bs, wqXff, from eipco, ivi/M, wqp^ov ; finally the three forms of the Perf. 
in -fs instead of-f, o?/wxff, ojiiojiEe, iu)\}se. 

§208. Changes of the Cons 7i ants. (25,36,37.) 

1. In the Ion. dialect, the rough Breathing has no effect on the preceding 
smooth nuite, e. g. ccti ov, inrjfis^)og, ovx officag, etc. 

2. In the Horn., Ion. and Dor. dialects, a ^ or ^ remains before ^ in cer- 
tain words and phrases, contrary to § 19, 1, e. g. odfirj instead of off^?), Vdfitv 
CQ%Tj&ju6g, inim&f^tiv, xsxoQv&fiivog', also in the Horn, dialect, the v remains 
before cr, contrary to §20,2, in avcrrdg, avayj&iuv, navavdlrj instead of 
TTttaavSir^ ; finally x before ,u, contrary to § 19, Rem. 1, in ancc/iusvog, acute. 

3. The Metathesis, § 22, of q often occurs in Horn, and in other poets, 
e. g. nQudlrj instead of xaQdla, Jieart, xaQiEQog and xQvtTeQog, strong, xuqtkt- 
log, (SuoSiarog, from iSQudvg, slow, also in the second Aorists sjiga&ov, edga- 
■&0V, tSquxov, from nig&M, perdo, duQd-avw, to sleep, dbgxofiai, to see; here 
belong also i]^^goiov instead of tj/u^wtov = rifiagjov, according to §24,2. 

4. Homer doubles a consonant, comp. § 23, Rem., after a short vowel, 
according to the necessities of the verse, namely, in the following cases : 

(a) The liquids and Sigma on the addition of the augment, mostly when 
there are three successive short syllables, e, g. sXXa^ov, t^fxa^ov, IV- 
vEov, taasva ; 

(b) In compounds, also, the liquids and Sigma are doubled, e. g. viol- 
Xovioc, from viog and Aouw ; tx/jifiogog, cpLXoiu{X£ldr]g ; avvicpXog, i'vvvijiog ; 
^ad-vgooog; ivaasXaog; 

(c) In the inflection of the Dat. in -at, and of the Fut. and Aor., e. g. 
rixvcrcri, doii^iaaai ; xaXtana, oy-ouaai, (pQaffao^rxL, i^slvi.aaa ; 

(d) In the middle of several words, e. g. oiktov, xoaaov, onlcraca, ngoaaoj, 
fiiaaog, v^^iaaa, vs^uiffarj^slg, -d-vaaavosig. 

Homer doubles the mute n in Interrogative pronouns Avhich begin with 
on, e. g. ouTiojg, etc.; — x in niXsxxov, rteXexxdo}', — t in otti, otzeo, oiisv ; 
— d in sddsiat, nsgiddelaaaa, dddsig, addrjv. 

Remark. The doublmg of g, w^hich always takes place in the Common 
language when the augment is prefixed, and in compounds when a short 
vowel precedes, may be omitted in the Epic dialect, according to the ne- 
cessities of the verse, e. g. sgi'Cov from gs^M, /gvaogvTog. For the same 
reason, one of the consonants, which is elsewhere doubled, is omitted in 
the Epic dialect, though rarely, e. g. ''Oduaeig, "A/iXsvg, cpdgv/og, instead of 
'Odvaasig, ^A%iXXsvg, cpdgvyyog. 

5. Homer often places a consonant before a syllable, so as to make a 



240 DIALECTS.— QUANTITY. [§ 209. 



sliort syllable long by position, iianicly, v in run'Vfivog, uTiu)Mfivog, 15qi'v&t}, 
ufAivv&i], vnt^iyi,^vy.i ; a z alter n in 7nc).tf.iog, Jiro'/uc, nxo).ltO(>ov \ a x^ after 
X in /i}uu(A).og, dty&u, tqix^u, tuqos/Ou, and alter X or o in (jdkifaxoc, 
iy(j7)y6^')a(Tt,; or lie places a y before d in tglydovnog, €/(5oi7ir^(7f, and a a 
before fx and x in aiAixQog [nho Att., §24, 4), nrxf^ttriT^z, coni[). ^{/(Ji'jjjUt, 
crfAoy((jb)g, conip. fioysQ^g^ afitfjdixXsog. Here belongs tlie Epic prefix of /u 
(= y, according to §24, 3), before words conij)onnded with -/5^oto$, so as 
to strengthen the long syllable, e. g. ixfXiSQoiog, j^QiptylS^oJog, and in u[j(pa- 
(jlri instead of occpixaiq. 

§209. Quantity. (45.) 

1. In Epic poetry, a mute with a liquid, § 27, 4, commonly makes a syl- 
lable long by position ; a shortening of the vow el occurs, for the most part, 
only w hen the form cannot otherwise be suited to the verse, e. g. TELynri- 
nXijia. 

2. The final syllable of a word in verse, is uniformly long by position, 
(a) when it ends with a consonant, and the following word begins with 
a consonant, e. g. y.a&L\a6v T^(x)\ag; also (b) when the final syllable 
ends with a short vowel, but the following w ord begins with a double con- 
sonant, or with t^vo single consonants, which are not a mute and liquid, 
e. g. ad^ui'i I TTjv, t/]v | ovTica v | no ^vyov | riyaysr \ avrjf) II. x, 293. But a mute 
and a liquid in this case, always make the syllable in the Arsis long ; on 
the contraiy, the syllable in the Thesis, may be either long or short, accord- 
ing to the necessities of the verse ; e. g. (.a', ^xoi \ dwQ iga | t« ngocps | qe 
XQv\ airjg "AcpQo \ dUrjg II. y, 64; on the contraiy, in the Thesis, avToiQ^o | 
nlrjatov \ etiTTj \ xh B. d, 329 ; but avd^u \ ^vrjiov i | cvTa, ntx \ let nt \ ttqw- 
fiivov I aXari II. tt, 441. 

Remark 1. In the names J^xafiardgog, Zay.vv&og,ZiXsia, (tx, and ^ even, do 
not make a syllable long by position in Homer ; an \ ena axs \ naqvov Od. 
t, 237, also occurs. 

3. A long vowel, or a diphtliong at the end of a word, in Homer com- 
monly becomes short before a w^ord beginning with a vowel, when it is in 
the Thesis, but it remains long when it is in the Arsis, or when the follow- 
ing word has the digamma, e. g. ?//ifV?y | iv ^sv \ d^saaiv II. «, 358. vhg, 6 \ 
fisv Kisix I 70V, 6 d' UQ I EvQVJov I 'AxzoqI I (avog H. /5, 621. ai'TvcQ o [ eyvdi | 
riffiv i I vl (pQscrl | q)b)vi] | aev ts {Jj(tlv = Ffjcriv). Exceptions sometimes oc- 
cur of the shortening of a long vowel in the Thesis before words w^hich 
have not the digamma, namely, in the fourth foot of an Hexameter, e. g. tw 
fii] I ijot naii I Qug no^ 6 \ fioif] \ ev^w \ Ti^ifj II. ^,410, and before a punctu- 
ation-mark, e. g. y.uud-aT, \ alt in a \ fivvov II. e, 685. 

4. A long- vowel or a diphthong before a follow mg vow^el is shortened by 



§ 210.] DIALECTS. HOMERIC SUFFIX Cpi {cpiv). 241 

the poets in tlic inidillo of a word, yet seldom, and, for the most part, 
in certain ^vords and Ibrnis; thus, e. g. in Homer, t/rf nj ( v/ v-. _ ), t^- 
naiog ( -v./ w \ oios [^ ^ ), ^s(^lr,aL ( o o _), and often in the Iambuses of 
the Attic dramatists, e. g". olog, ttoioc, toiovioc, Toiocds, ol'ei (from ol'ofiut\ noi- 
HV\ and always before the demonstrative t in pronouns, e. g. lovxov'C^ uituu. 

5. A short syllable, whicli is in the Arsis, and which is regarded in Epic 
poetry as long, may stand at the beginning of a word, e. g. aiTnldog \'ay.dfin 
I 70V 71 i'o II. f , 4 ; or at the end, in which case it is followed either by a li- 
quid, X, ,u, V, ^, or a (T or a d, the sound of which is easily doubled in pro- 
nunciation, or by a word with the digamma, e. g. -/mI irsdl | a Ao) | Tsiviu II. 
fi, 283. ^i7«T£ \ Qu i]v {= Ft'jy) 11. X, 226. 

Rem. 2. A syllabic in itself short, may be used as long or short in the 
same word, according as it is or is not, in the Arsis, e. g. 'ji(jsg*'A \ gsg (iqo- 
10 I Ao</f ; — uidgfg i'\ aaaiv and nluova | Xaatjiv. 

6. Not unfrequently in Homer a short vowel is measured as long in the 
Thesis, when a short vowel stands between two long vowels, from the 
mere necessities of the verse. This occurs in the middle of a word, and 
oftenest in /, e. g. vno \ di^i \ t] II. (, 73. i](n ttqo \ &vfit \ i](n II. /5, 588 ; this 
is rarely the case at the end of a word, e. g. nvxvu | ^(oyals \ tjv Od. g, 198. 
Tjl 5' inl \fisv Fog I '/M ^loav | QMirig \ iaiecpu | rono 11. A, 36. 



B. DIALECTIC FORMS. 

§ 210. Ho VI eric Suffi x qp t {(piv). (236.) 

1. In the Homeric dialect there is, together with the marks for the Cases, 
a Suffix, (fi[v), which properly and originally denotes the indefinite where, 
like the local Dat, see the Syntax, but whicli is, also, used to express other 
relations of the Dat., namely, the Dat. of the instrument, and which may 
also be used in connection with prepositions, (that in the Lat. govern the 
Abl.) instead of the Gen. 

2. The Suffix gji is found in substantives of the three declensions, and 
is always annexed to the unchanged stem of the word ; 

I. Declension only in the Singular: (a) Dat. a/ilrj-cpi, cc'/Xu'i'Tjcpi, ■&vQrjq)i, 
(in several ancient editions rjcpi is incoiTectly vs^itten with an Iota 
Subs. ^?(jpt); (b) Gen. (Lat. Abl.) ano v£VQi](piv luXXeiv, i^ svvricpL ■&oqhv. 
n. Declension both Suigular and Plural. All these forms, without respect 
to the accentuation of the Nom., are paroxytone (-oqptv), (a) Dat. day.Qvo- 
(piv, S-eocpiv, he/ore the gods; — (b) Genitive (Abl.) ano or sx naaaaXo- 
cpiVf ex -diocfiv, an laKocpiv. 



242 DIALECTS. FIRST DECLENSION. [§ 211. 

IQ. Declension almost exclusively in the 1*1. fJnv is liere used in a small 
iiiiiMber of iKuiter substantives in -og, ((ien. -fog), also in yoivXrjdojv and 
vaug, f\ g. xoTvkrjdovocpiv (with the union vowel o), ruicpt, ; in words in 
-og, the ending -og, must always be restored to its original form -eg, 
since (fi is always annexed to the pure stem, thus u/s(T(pL{v), avv o^sacpt,, 

§ 211. Fir s t D eel ens i o n . (235.) 

1. (a) The Epic and Ionic writers use rj instead of the original long a, 
(which the Dorians use) through all the Cases of the Sing. e. g. rifiu, -ug, 
~a, -uv Dor. ; (roqp/?;, -?;?, -?/, -rjv, S^vqt], -rjg, vsavlr^g, -rj, -rjv Epic and Ion. ; 
so nr}vdoT[Si7]g, n>]VEXoTT8U], from IlrjVEloTieia, cpQrjTQr], BoQsrjg, Boqej], Boqetjv. 

Exceptions in Homer are &eu, goddess, -ug, -a, -dv, Navaiy.ua, fl'da, also 
Alviiag, Avyeiag, "Eq^xildg, and some other proper names in -ag pure. The 
Voc. of vvficprj is vvficpa instead of vv^cprj II. y, 130. Od. d, 743. 

(b) In substantives in -Eia and -oia, derived from adjectives in -rjg and 
-ovg, as also in certain other feminines, the short -« in the Epic and Attic 
dialects is changed into -tj, e. g. aXtj&ELtj, avaidEir], tvnXolrj, y.vlfjat^ instead of 
u}.)]&ELa, avaldeia, EVJtloLa, Kvhaa. 

(c) The ^o\. and some other dialects have -a instead of -tj?, as the 
Masc. ending Nom. Sing., like the Latin. The Epic also uses this form, 
according to the necessities of the verse, in a great number of words, par- 
ticularly in -Tot, e. g. trtTioTa, al/fxrjrix, xvavoxulza, vEfpEhriyEQETa, ImirikaTa^ 
fi7jTlETa, EVQVOTia. The Voc. retains the ending -a in all these w^ords. 

2. The Gen. Sing, of masculines in -rig and -aq originally ended in -do ; 
-«o was then contracted into -co (Dor. into -«). In Horn, both the uncon- 
ti'acted and contracted form is found ; besides, Hom. resolves the -co, origi- 
nating from -ao, by means of t, comp. § 207, 3 ; it is further to be remark- 
ed, that the -w in respect to accent is considered short, § 29, Rem. 5, and 
the E is always pronounced with the Synizesis ; -f w becomes -w w^hen a 
vowel or q precedes (still AIveIeo) II. e, 534). Thus there occur m Homer 
"EQiiEiag, Gen/EQ^siao and*ii^|Mfta) ; BoQsrjg, Gen. Boqeuo and Boqsco ; 'AtqeI- 
drjg \4TQkldao and ^Aigeldso}, ly.sxao and lyJiBO) ; iviAfAEXica, "Aalco. The Gen. 
ending -eco, becomes, in the Ion. writers, the usual ending, e. g. noXlxEb), 
^diQsideco. 

3. The Ace. Sing, and PI. of masculines in -r^g is commonly found in the 
Ion. dialect like the third Dec, e. g. lov dEcnoiEu, Tovg dedTroiEag from dEcr- 
noirig, -ov, MiliiddEa from MdTid8t]g, -ov. 

4. The Gen. PI. of all the endings w'as originally in -awv; -aoiv vras af- 
terwards contracted mto -wv (Dor. into -av). Homer uses both the uncon- 
tracted and contracted forms, e. g. &Ed(ov and S^ecov, 7iagEL(xo)v and nagEicjv. 



§ 212.] DIALECTS. SECOND DECLENSION. 243 

lie also, in the Gen. Sing., again resolves the -Ctv originating from -(iwv, by 
means off; thus -e'wv, which is commonly pronounced with the Synizcsis, 
e. g. TivXiwv^ OvQHxiv, ayoQEwv. The Gen. ending -sojv becomes in the Ion. 
writers, the common form, e. g. JMovaiojv, Tifiiuv. 

5. The Dat. PI. originally ended in -aiaiiv)-, the same ending is found, 
also, in Homer, in the Dor. writers, in the Att. poets, and even in the older 
Att. jirose writers ; in the Ion. writers, -aiai was changed into -ri(n{v) and 
-7j$ ; and in the Att. and Common Language, -ami was shortened into -aig. 
These three endings are, also, found in Homer, yet the last only in S^sulg 
and axTalg. 

6. The Ace. PL, in the ^ol., ends in -aig, (as in the second Dec. in -oig 
instead of -ovc), and Dor. in -«c, as in the second Dec. in -og instead of 
-oi'c, e. g. Tttlg Tifioig /E,o\., instead of rag Ji^ag, but Dat. PI. jl^cugl', naaag 
xoiQug Dor., instead of naaag y.ovQoig. 

§ 212. Second Declension. (243.) 

1. Nominative Sing. Proper names in -Xaog are changed in the Dor. 
dialect mto -Xixg, (Gen. a, Dat. a), e. g. j\hvilag instead of Mtvilaog, Nixo- 
Xag, 'AQxealXug. 

2. Genitive Sing. Homer uses both the common form in -ov, and that 
in -010 ; the tragedians, also, in the lyric passages, use the ending -010. 
Theocritus has the Dor. ending -co. 

3. Genitive Sing, and PI. There are some forms of the genitive analo- 
gous to the first Dec. (a) Herodotus has some Masc. proper names in -og 
with the ending -soj of the Gen. Sing., e. g. Bdzztoi instead of Boitiov, 
Kqolai(a, KXso/x3(j6ts(o, Mefji^XLugEbJ, and some Masc. common nouns with 
the ending of the Gen. PI. -scov, e. g. Tisaasojv ; (b) The ending -dcDv instead 
of the Ion. -scor belongs to the Dor. (comp. al/dv instead of al/dcov from 
«I|, § 213, 5). 

4. The Gen. and Dat. Dual in the Epic dialect ends in ~ouv instead of 
-oiv, e. g. Mfiouv instead of ufMOiv, § 207, 9. 

5. The Dat. PI. originally ended in -oiaL{v). This form is found, to- 
gether with the abridged form in -oig, in Homer and in all the poets, and 
in the Ion. prose. 

6. The Ace. PI. ends, in the Dor. writers, except Pindai*, in -coc, and m 
-og, like -dg in the first Dec, § 211, 6, e. g. rug vojxbjg, vofiog, so also jwg 
Xayog, the Imre ; JEiOl. in -oic, e. g. naaaaXoig instead of -ovg. 

7. Attic Declension. The Gen. Sing, in the Epic dialect ends in -wo in- 
stead of -co in n7]vsXea>o II. |, 489 ; still, most Codd. have UtpsXioio from 
nrjviXscag, and TZsTtwo from nheiog. In ydXwg, sister-in-law, " Ad- b)g and Kug, 
the 0) originating by contraction, is resolved, in the Epic dialect, by means 



244 



DIALECTS. THIRD DECLENSION. [§ 213. 



of 0, /«Aow?, AO^omq, Kobig, Gen. -do. On the words yi).b)g, Idnoig, if)0)g, 
see § 21S, 7. 

8. Contracted forms of tlie second Dec. are rare in Homer, namely, vovg 
only Od. X, 240, (elsewhere voog)^ xn^ii/o^ovg Jl. /, 4J>.*i, yet v, J.'i^f. /ftfiug- 
^oog and x^'^fQ^ot 11. (5, 452, also Iluv&ovg, /larOov, JIuvdo). Ilomer does 
not contract other words ; in words in -iog, -iov, he lengthens either the c 
into «(, § 207, 1, or employs Synizesis, as the measure requires. 

§ 213. Th ird Declension, (265, 2r,G.) 

1. In the Dor. dialect the long a here takes the place of?;, e. g. ^xuv, fiu- 
vog, etc., "EXXixv, "EU.avsg, noifxwv instead of 7T0ifii]v, Gen. -evog, reoTug, 
-uTog instead of vtoTi^g, -rjiog. 

Excepted from this usage of the Dor. are al&7]g, -t^?;^, ^i'lgtg and all 
names of persons in -t?)^. 

2. In the Epic and Ion. dialects, on the contrary, t] commonly takes the 
place of the long a, as, also, elsewhere, e. g. ^wqij^, ol'if^, Xgrj^ instead of 

3. The Dat. PL in the Epic dialect, ends, according to the necessities of 
the measure, in -(n{v), -(T(n[v), -saL{v) and -scraiiv). The ground-form 
is - £ 0- i (>') and the strengthened form is -sa a i{v). This ending is always 
annexed, like the other Case-endings, to the pure stem, e. g. y.vv-SiraL from 
xtwv. Gen. xvv-6g, vsKV-taai from viy.vg, -v-og. The ending -^at is found 
in Homer onlj' in i'vsaiv, ouaiv, xslgscn and urixxi-saLV from ixpa^, ayuxi-og. 
In Neuters, which have a radical tr in the Nom., the o* is omitted when it 
stands betw^een two vowels, §25, 1, e. g. sns-tatTL instead of inia-faac 
from TO enog, 8snu-f(j(nv fi'om to dinag. In stems in -nv, -tv, -ov {aF, sF, oF) 
the V [F] must be omitted, according to § 25, 2, thus ^jo-wcn instead of ^6F- 
sacTi, iTinrj-eacn instead of ImiijF-Ecrcn. The ending - a a l is annexed almost 
exclusively to the stems which end in a vowel, e. g. rixv-uai from rsxvg, 
-v-og; but also Yql-ugiv from iqig {-idog) and commonly noacrl from Tioig 
{nod-6g). The Dat. form in -ucfl does not admit this doubling of a. The 
ground-form -sai is exclusively used by the Dor. poets and prose-writers ; 
also the Ion. prose has this form frequently in stems ending in -v, e. g. 

4. The Gen. and Dat. Dual ends in -oiiv {i\s in the second Dec, § 212, 
4), in the Epic dialect, e. g. nodoTiv, Saqiivonv. 

5. The Gen. PI. in the Ion. dialect often ends in -i(av , e. g. yrtviixn', ar- 
dgswv, §207, 10. In Theocrit. occur lutv ar/av instead of ja,v al'/Mv from 
t) al%, a goat, after the analogy of the first Dec. 

6. The Epic dialect sometimes forms the Ace. Sing, of nouns in -vg (stem 
v) in a instead of r, e. g. evQ&a noriov^ ly^&iot^ via from yalg. 



§ 2i3.] DIALECTS. TIIIUD DECLENSION. 245 

7. Tlie words yiXug, laua;hter^ Idgcjg, sweat, tQug, love, which arc properly 
like the third Deo., Ibllow in Homer, in particular instances, the Attic second 
Dec, e. g. IdQu, Idgco instead of IdgMTot and IdfjoHii, ysXw and yiXwv, ytXoj 
instead of yiXMia and yiXonCj s^oj instead ofsQcoii. 

8. To §54,* (c) belong -ig, Gen. -tdog. The Horn., Ion. and Dor. 
dialects ot\en inflect these substantives, particularly proper names, in -log, 
e. g. fiiiviog Horn., Osfiiog Herod., Ohiog, Dat. Ohl Horn. Of those ending 
ill -ig, -idog, the Epic dialect has the Dat. only in -* instead of ~di. The 
substantives in -ij'i'g, -ifidog, are sometimes contracted in the inflection, 
by the poets, e. g. itaQrlig, nuQfjdog, NrjQifi'g, NTjQfjdsg. 

9. § 54, (c). The Neut. ovg, ojiog, ear, is in Dor. wg, onog, etc., and in 
Homer ovag, Gen. oiatog, PI. ovajoc, the Neuters, aTiotQ,fat, ov&aQ, udder, 
and TiHQttQ, end, have -ujog in the Gen., namely, aiiarog, ovd^ara, TislQaia, 
TtBiQcxai. In the words isQag, xigag, xgiag, the Epic writers reject t, e. g. 
Tf()«a, -ator, -dscrai', xsQce Dat.; PI. y.iga, xsgawv, -dsacri and -aai; PI. y.^iot, 
xQiUMv, nQfOiv and y.gsiMV, y.giacnv. Among the Ion. writers these words 
are like ^qiiug, etc., § 61, Rem. 1. The a is often changed into f, e. g. y.i- 
qiog^ ^igm, xfgi(av, ta TSQsa, y.qiia<TLv. 

10. § 55, 2, 71 « T ^ ^ . etc. In words of this kind. Homer either retains or 
rejects the c through all the Cases, according to the necessities of the verse, 
6. g. avigog and dvdgog, uvigi, and dfdgl, etc., but only dvdgcjv, uvdgdat and 
-iaai ', yaffTj'jg, yaaxigog, -sgt a^d yimxgog, yaaigl, yaaiiga, yaaTsgeg ; Jr}- 
ftijTrjo, -sgog and -r/jgog, /Ji](j7]rsga; d^vyuirjg, -Tsgog and -rgog, etc., -d^vya- 
TEOfaai, but ^vyargwv ; fiyjrrig and naxt'jg, -xigog and -igog, etc. 

11. § 56. In Homer, the word lx(og, blood of the gods, has in the Ace. ixai 
instead of t/Mga, and xvxewv, o, mia:ed drink, has in the Ace. xvxiou or xvxsiS. 
Comp. § 5G, Rem. 1. 

12. ;§ 57, -ttv g, -sv g, -ovg. From ygavg in Homer, there occur on- 
ly the Norn. ygr]vg and ygrj'vg, Dat. ygrit and the Voc. ygrjv and yQV^- In 
the Ion. dialect, also, the long « is changed to tj, thus, Gen. ygrjog, PI. ygi}sg ; 
this, also, appears in vavg, navis, see the Anomalies. The word ^ ovg, 
does not admit contraction in the Epic and Ion. dialects. On the Epic Dat. 
^osacn, see No. 3. Li Doric, the Nom. is /?t5c, Ace. /5ajv. This form of the 
Ace, also, occurs in the II. rj, 238, in the sense of bulVs hide, a shield made 
of a hulPs hide. 

13. In common nouns in -svg, and in the proper name AxdXsvg, i] is used 
instead of s in the Epic dialect in all the forms in which v {F) of the stem 
is omitted, in order, by the length of the vowel, to compensate for the omit- 
ted V [F), thus, ^aaiXsvg, Voc. -sv ; Dat. PI. -eicti (except dQi(ni]£<T(nv from 

* These references are to the sections in the first part of the Gram. — Tr. 
33 



246 DIALECTS. THIRD DECLENSION. [§ 213. 

ciQKTTSvg), but -ijogf -iji, -i]u, -tJf?, -i'jmv, -?/«?. Yet in the Att. dialect the 
long a in the Ace. -£«, -sug, again becomes short. Of proper names, the 
following are to be specially noted, e. g. 'Odvaatvg, Gen.' 08vaa^}og or'OSva^og 
and \)dvauiog, also 'Odvuivg Od. d), 8!)8, Dnt. ' Odvrni'i, and ' OSvvfl, Ace. 
' 0(5i'(jrcrJJ« and ' 0(5i;(r(j£a, also " Obvai] Od. t, 13(); Jlrjhvg, IIrj}S,og and T/tj- 
Aeo?, JTtjXiji and Ilrjlu, Jlrjlijag; the remainder, as "AtQsvg, Tvdng, retain the 
-£ for the most j)art, and contract -tog m the Gen., by Synizesis, and some- 
times -£« in tlic Ace, into -t], thus Tvdiog, ~i'i, -iu and -^. The inflection 
with r] in common nouns in the Ion. of Herodotus, is very doul)tful; in pro- 
per names, the s is regular, e. g. /Zf^o-f'o?, JMoihg, fPoxioiv, jloXiug. 

14. § 59, - 7j ? , and -eg, Gen. -co?. In Homer, the Gen. Sing, remains 
uncontracted. In the Epic and Ion. dialects, both the uncontracted form 
-EEg, and the contracted form -eig is used for the Nom. PI. The Gen. and Dat. 
remain uncontracted (except when a vowel precedes the ending -iu)v ; con- 
traction then takes place, e. g. 'Qu'/qumv from 'QaxqYiinn')\ also the Ace. PL 
ending ~mg for -sig. ^'Agrjg has in Homer ^'Agrjog and ^'Aotog, ^'Aqrii ov^'Aqj], 
^'Aqu,"AQr] vcqA^'Aqtiv Ih f, 909, 'Aq^g miA^'Aqtg, § 209, Rem. 2. 

15. In proper names m -nliig, the Epic dialect contracts ?f into ij, e. g. 
'HqayJirjg, -ylijog, -TJ'i, -rja, Yoc/HQoncltig ; but in adjectives in -srjg it vai'ies 
between -el and -?;, e. g. «/axA«Jc, Gen. u/aytkrjog, but ti}xXHa$ (Ace. PI.) 
fi-om Ei'xAf?;?, ii'qqtyjg, Gen. ii/qqEiog. The Ion. and Dor. writers, and some- 
times the poets for the sake of the verse, reject an s in these words, e. g. IIe- 
QiaXiog, -i't, etc. ; so also in Homer, dvgxXsa H. /5, 115, and VTifqdia II. q, 330. 

16. §60, {a) -(ag, -coog. In Homer, the conti'acted forms, 7jqo) Dat. 
and Mtv(o Ace. occur, (b) -cog and -w. Gen. -oo?. Words of this kind 
have, also, in the Epic and Ion. writers, as well as in the Attic, always the 
micontracted form, except xqcog and its compounds, e. g. XQOog, xqo'i, xqoa. 
The Ion. dialect forms the Ace. Sing, in -ovv instead of -w, e. g. ^la," loiv, 
^cug, rjovv. The JEol. Gen. ends in -to?, e. g. aldcog, ^JocTKpwg instead of at- 
dovg, ^ancpovg, thus in Moschus, ■tug^Axoig. 

17. § 61, (a) - (xg, Gen. ~ao g. In Homer, the Dat. Sing, is either mi- 
contracted or contracted, according to the necessities of the verse, e. g. yt]- 
qa'i and yrjqa, dina, usla. But the Nom. and Ace. PI. is alwaj^s contracted, 
e. g. 8ina. On those in -«c, Gen. -Eog, see above § 61, Rem. 1. 

(b) -og, Gen. -Eog. The Epic dialect, according to the necessities of 
the verse, has sometimes the uncontracted and sometimes the contract 
forms, except in the Gen. PI., which is always uncontracted. The Gen. 
Sing, is also unconti'acted, except in some sidistantives which contract -Eog, 
as in the Dor., into -Evg, thus "Eqi^Evg, S-uqaevg, '/svEvg, S^dfu^Evg, S^sqivg ; 
Dat. Shag. ^sqEi and S^iqsL, xakXEi and xuXXel. Nom. and Ace. Plm-als in -£«, 
commonly remain uncontracted, but they must be pronomiced with Syni- 



§ )iii4.] DIALECTS. ANOMALOUS AND DEFECTIVE WORDS. 247 

zesis, i. e, as one syllabic, c. ij. vdxfa, ^sXea. The Ion. dialect is ]\ko. the 
Epic. Ill aniog, xXiog, dsog, XQSog, tiie l'i)ic dialect lengtiieiKS t, sonietiines 
into It, sometimes into tj, e. g. Gen. anelovg, Dat. anili, Ace. aniog and <j7islog, 
Gen. PI. (TndbiVy Dat. a-nsaai and or7T7)«(r(rt ; XQ^^? ^^^^ /(»no? ; xAeu and xhux, 

18. § G2. - i g, Gen. - 1 o ? ; - v g, Gen. - i^ o ?. The Epic dialect conti'acts 
those in -vg, in the Dat. Sing., e. g. oi'Cvl, tiXtj^vI, vixvi ; the Ace. PI. 
appears with the contracted or uncontracted forms, according to the 
necessities of the verse, although more usually contracted, e. g. i/^vg in- 
stead oflxd^vug, d^vg; vsy.vag is always uncontracted; the Nom. PI. never 
suffers contraction, but is pronounced with Synizesis. The Dat. PI. ends 
in -vaai and -vsaai (dissyllable), e. g. Ix&vaaiv and Ix'&vwaiv. 

19. § 63. -Ig and - 1, Gen. -iog^ Att. -Kx)g ; -v g and - v, Gen. -v og^ 
Att. -ttag. 

(a) The words in - 1 ?, Att. Gen. -«co?, in the Epic and Ionic dialect, re- 
tain i of the stem through all the Cases, and in the Dat. Sing, always suffer 
contraction, and usually in the Ace. PI. in the Ionic writers, and sometimes 
also in Homer, viz. -u = -i, -Lotq = -^g, e. g. noXig, -log, -I, -iv, -tsg, -iiav, 
-lai, -lag and -Ig. In the Dat. Sing., however, the ending ~h and -ft is 
found in Homer, e. g. noati and noast from noaig ; in some words, the l of 
the stem is changed into s in other Cases also, e. g. inock^sig instead of 
intiX^iag, indX^sdLV, especially in noXtg, which, moreover, according to the 
necessities of the verse, can lengthen s into t], thus. Gen. noXTog, noXsog and 
noXtjog, Dat. noXt'i, noXu and noXrii^ Nom. PI. noXng and 7ioA?jf$, Gen. tto- 
a/wv, Dat. noXUcraL, Ace. noXiag, noXsig, noXr^ag ; from o'ig, ovis, Dat. PL 
di'icrcnv, oi'eaiVj osaiv. 

(b) The words in -vg, whose Gen. in the Attic ends in -sojg, in the Ionic 
make the Gen. in -eog, e. g. nrj/sog, except sy/sXyg, Gen. -vog ; in the Dat. 
Sing., both the contracted and uncontracted forms are found in Homer, e. g. 
svgsi, nijxsi, nXaxu. In the Nom. PL, the form can be either contracted 
or uncontracted ; in the Ace. PL, the uncontracted form in -sag is regular, 
which, when the verse requu'es, can be pronomiced as a monosyllable, e. g. 
mXixtag (trissyllable), 

§ 214. A n omalous and D efe ctive JVo rds. — 31 e - 

taplasts. (270.) 

1. jTovi', to, knee, and doQV, to, spear, §54, are declined in Homer as 
follows : 
Sing. yovvaiog and yovvog dovgajog and dovQog dovgaji and dovgl 
PL Nom. yovvuia " yovva dovgarcc " dovga — Dual dovga 
Gen. yovvwv dovgojv 

Dat. yovvavL and yovvscn dovgaat, and dovgsaai. 
The form yovvuaaL II. t, 488. g, 451, 569, has little authority. 



248 DIALECTS. METAPLASTS. [§ 214. 



2. Tlie following forms of x « ^ a, to, htad, § GS, G, are found in the Ho- 
meric dialect, 

Sing. Nonj. huqtj Gen. y.uQT)rog yaQTjUTog xouiog xQuarog 
Dat. xMjjTjTt xuQy]aiL x^ujL xQuait 
Ace. icd()t], luv y.quTvt. Od. x>, IJ*i, and inl xug IL ti, 392. 
PI. Nom. xagu xugy'iaxu ; secondary form xufjrji'u 
Gen. xptxTtDy " xM^ojvwv 

Dat. x^ao-Z 
Ace. xQiiaia " y.u(jTiva. 

3. yi u a ?, 6, 5/o7ie, Horn., instead of Au?, Gen. >lwo?, Dat. Aut, Ace. Xuuv, 
Gen. Pi. Artwy, Dat. Ideaai. 

4. Mslg, 6, month, Gen. ^tji'oc, Ion., instead of /i7jv, -oc, but also in Plato. 

5. Navg^i], ship, is inflected in the Epic, Ionic and Doric dialects as 
follows : 

Sing. Nom. Ep. and Ion. vTjvg vrfvg Dor. vavg 

Gen. yiyos (also Tragic) reog yaog (also Trag.) 

Dat. vrfc ^ vd'C 

Ace. yr^a via vavv and vuv 

Dual Nom. Ace. Voc. vi]E vas 

Gen. and Dat. vsoTv vaolv 

PI. Nom. vn^g visg rung 

Gen. v'r]ojv{yavq)i on\yY.ip.)ve(!}V vaoJv 

Dat. vrivaL " " vi]i(j(n, vhuai vaval 

Ace. vriag viug vuag. 

6. 'O^vt?, o ?^, 6iVc?, Gen. ogvid^-og, Doric 6gvl/-og, etc., §203. 

7. XeIq, Tj, hand, Ion. /tgog, yjQh X^Q^j Dual ;^fl^f, /^Qotv, Poet, also ;jfst- 
^oty, PI. ;^f^f?, /f^cuy ix^Qcrl, xsiQmiv and -sacnv in Homer), /sQag. 

Remark 1. Metaplasm, § 72, occurs in Homer in the follo^ving words, 
dlxr,, Tj, strength, Dat. dXxi from Nom. "AyJ^ ; "Atdrjg, -ov, o, Gen. «V(5oc, Dat. 
uidi, "AIS; 'AviLcpdirjg, -ao, 6, Acc/AviicpaTria, "A^sTMiATET^-, loiy.}],i), 
pursuit. Ace. lwhcc, "ifLs! ; vajxtvr], i], battle, Dat. vafiiri {va(j.ig) ; — UaTQoyloc, 
Gen. IIuTQoxXov and -xAtjoc, Acc.-xP.oy and -xAtik, Voc.-xAe/c, HATPOKyiH^ ', 
avd^unodov, to, slave, Dat.'P]. dvdganodsaat,; TtQ6(Tomov,TU,face, 'Pl.nQogw- 
nara, nQocMjiacri ; vlog, 6, son, has from '^TIET2 and "TIS the following 
forms. Gen. vtsog and vlog, Dat. vlu and ra. Ace. i;t£« and via ; Dual tie ; 
Nom. PI. vlhg and viug and ixf^, Dat. vldai. Ace. ftea? and rtag; — Oldl- 
novQ, Gen. Oi(5mo(5«o, ^01zlinO/lH2. 

Rem. 2. The following are defective in Homer, Xn'i Dat. and t« Alia, 
Zinen ; Tig and AT?' = Ascov and Xiovra ; fxdffTL and ^danv = (xdaiiyi and -a ; 
(TTLxog, Gilx^g, orZ/ac, roii? ; oVo-f, tco, Nom. and Ace. Dual, 6o//i ej/es ; hcf^Xog, 
advantage, and i)8og, pleasure, in the Nom. only ; rga, something pleasing, 
and dsi^ac, form, in the Ace. only; ^jhog, befooling, Voc. //Af and ^]Xss, be- 
fooled; finally, dw, xqI, liXcpL, as Nom. and Ace. Sing., from which come the 
forms dd)(.ia, house, xgi&i], barley, aX(piTov, dried barley. 



§§215,216.] DIALECTS. ADJECTIVES.— COMPARISON. 249 



§ 215. Adjectives. (279,282.) 

1. Some adjectives in -vg, ~(ia, -v, have sometimes in the Homeric dia- 
lect, the tl'ininine tbiin -in or -f//, viz. ^adirig and ^u&tltjgj ^a&irjv, atxia ; 
so also in Herodotus, -en, seldom -sia, e. g. (Su&ia, -erj and -tla, /?«^ea, 
«i^£«, Idvg, -iu and -s7u, x>i]Xsa from -d^ijlvg, vfilasa. 

Remark. In the Epic and Doric poetry, some adjectives of this kind, and 
also some in -6s ig and -i] sig, are of the common gender, e. g/llQr]^i]- 
Xvg iov(ja II. t, 97; so i^^vq ui'mri Od. |U, 309, and the irregular noXvg, no- 
Xvy i(p v/Qiiv II. X, 27; so iifiu&osig^ uvS^ffiosig, aQ/ivong, noirjfig, agreeing 
with feminine substantives. The Epic iig or r/vg, A'eut. ifi} — i'v and r,v on- 
ly in an adverbial sense — wants the femiume form ; in II. oj, 528, is found 
dojQcov o'la 8i8a)ai xotxojv, iisQog ds iuav {sc. 5 coo cov), therefore idcav as 
the Gen. PI. Neut., unless perhaps from dojcjwv the cognate doasoiv is to be 
supplied tor iuwv to agree with, as in 8unr,(jig iuiov sc. doascop ', Gen. Sing. 
is itjog. 

2. Adjectives in -vug, -vtsaaa, -Tjty, ai'e often found in Homer in the con- 
tracted form -JJ?, -ii]aaa, -))»', e. g. Tinfig and Tifxi]sig, xi^ijvTa ; those in -oeig, 
-offfffa, -osv, contract -os into -iv, e. g. mdla XojTstvTa. 

3. In the Epic dialect, noXig is regularly inflected in the masculine and 
neuter, viz. Norn. noXvg and tioi'AvCj Neut. noXv, with the secondary forms 
noXXoCj noXXov, Gen. noXiog, Ace. noXvv and novXvr, noXv and noXlov ; 
Nom. PI. noXifg and noXiig^ Gen. noXifav, Dat. noXitJiv, noXiaaiv and no- 
Xiiaai, Ace. noXiag and TroAft?. The Ionic dialect inflects no/.Xog, -i], -6v, 
regularly throughout. 

4. Compound adjectives in -og often have in Homer a feminine ending, 
viz. -rj, e. g. a&avdrrj, dajjiajj], noXvqjOQ^r], dgiCijArj (but also tfQi^rfXoi uvyal 
B. ;!f, 27), d^cfiijoorri, dy/LcfXri, uq'/vqotte'Cu, u{ucpiQirri ; on the contrary, xXvjog 
as a feminine is found in L. /5, 742. Od. s, 422, from the simple xXviog, -^, 
-6v. Also the ending -o? of the superlative is sometimes found as femi- 
nine, e. g. oXoa'.Taxog odfiri Od. d, 442. x«Ta nQwicaiov OTtcani'iv H. Cer. 157. 
Comp. § 78, Rem. 1. 

5. Compound adjectives in -novg, -now, Gen. nodog, in the Epic dialect, 
can shorten -novg into -nog, e. g. 'Igig uiXlonog H. i9^, 409. iglnog II. ;^, 443. 

6. Eoiriosg from eQirjoog, i^vGuQiiaxig and -«? from i^vaaQfiuTog, are ex- 
amples of Metaplastic forms of adjectives in Homer. 

§216. Comparison. (294,296.) 

1. In the Epic dialect, the endings -ojtsgog and -ojiaxog are used for the 
sake of the metre, even when the vowel of the preceding syllable is long, 
e. g. o'i^iQojTSQOC, oi^vowxaxog, y.ay.o^eLvo}XEQog, XuQuxaxog. ^Avitjqoc, trouhle- 
somef has the Comparative uvLr^gsaxsgov Od. /5, 190, and a/agig, disagrteahle, 



250 



DIALECTS. PRONOUNS. 



[§217. 



axaQiai^Qog Od. v, 392. Coirip. § 8"2, Rem. G. Adjoctivos in -vg and -Qog, 
in the Homeric dialect, form the Comparative and Suj)erlative in -twv, -lov 
and -iffTog, ~t], -ov, sometimes also regularly, e. g. f/.«^iV, little^ ikaxKiToc, 
ylvxig yXvHLOJV, ^aO^vg ^u&i(Tiog, xvdQog xidiaiog, oiy.j()6g oi'>itiaiog and otx- 
TQOiaiog, Tut^ig naxicnog, ngia^vg n^ta^icrTog, wavg b')y.i(jTog. 

2. Besides the anomalous forms of comparison mentioned under § 84, 
the following Epic and dialectic forms recjuire to be noticed, 
uyax^og, Com. aQsloiv, kio'i'ojp, ImTS^og, (Ion. x^cWcoy, Dor. y.uguo)v,) 

Sup. au.QTHTiog. 
X axo g, xaxcorsQog, xsiQoxsQog, /s^f/wv, /egeiois^og (Dor. x^^i]^)v^ Ion. ta- 
o-wv), Sup. r\KHJTog, (II. y/, 53], with the variation 7;'xtCTio5, which Spitzner 
prefers). 
oXlyog^ oXi^ovsg tjo-wv, populi suberant statura minores, D. a, 519; /uiiwv 

Bion, 5, 10. 
Q // 'Id Log Ion., Com. ^rjuegog (Ion. ^rjt'rav), Sup. grfiTaiog and QifiaTog. 
p Q a d vg, slow, Comi ^Qaaacov, Sup. ^uiydiGiog (by Metathesis). 
fiax Q 6 g, long, fAaaacjv ; — n a /v g, thick, naaaojv. 

Remark 1. The positive XEPH2 {/igrih X^Qr^a, /SQi^sg, x^QV^) ft>und in 
Homer, and belonging to /f^s/wv, always has the signification of the Com- 
parative, /e55, &a^e?-, weaker. The PI. TiAecg and Ace. nXbug are found in Homer 
from the Com. TrAf'wj'. 

Rem. 2. In the Epic dialect, the forms of the Comparative and Superlative, 
in many instances, are derived from Substantives ; some of these forms have 
been transferred to the common language : o ^ aa ilevg ^aaLhviEQog ; to 
xs ^ d eg, gain, xs^diov, more lucrative, xsgdiazog ; to aXy og, pain, alyl(x)V, 
more painful, ttlyiazog', to glyog, cold, qly lov, coldtr, more dreadful, qlyia- 
Tog; Toxijdog, care, xy'jdLaTog, most dear; 6 ^) xvujv, dog, xvvxEQog, more 
sJiarmless, xivTaxog. 



§ 217. P R O N O U .N' S . 



(301. 308.) 



1. S.N. 
G. 

D. 
A. 



e/coand( before a vow- 
el) eyMv Epic ; eyoj 
and eycav ^Eolic | 
ifiio, sfiEV, (Asv [fisv] I 
Epic and Ion. 
ifxslo Epic I 

ifxid^sv Epic j 

e(iEvg, suovg Doric | 

iljlol,flol{flOl),EfJ,OLJEiO\. 

ifitv Doric j 



£,af , fis {(is) Epic 



(TV Epic ; TV Dor. and 
JEoh ; TVPTj Epic 

TEV Dor. ; aio [aeo), 
GEV (o-6u),Ep.andIon. 

aelo and tsoIo Epic 

crs^tv Epic 

lEvg, TEovg Dor. 

col Epic 

xiv Dor. ; taV Dor. et 
Ep.(usuallyOithot.). 

Tol (rot) Ep. and Ion. 

as [as] Ep. ; ts Dor. 

TV (tu) Dor. 

Tiv in Theocritus 



I'o [so), Ev {ev) Epic 
and Ion. 
HO Ep. ; sHO later Ep. 
e&sv [k&ev] Epic 
eovg Dor. 

I'p Dor. (usually or- 

thotone) 
eol, ot,(ot)Ep.(Reflex.) 
££,!'(£) (as Neut. H. a, 

236.) 
vlt'iviv) Dor.(and Att. 

Poet.) [hijn, her, it) 
filv [fiiv) Ion. [him, her, 

it; seldom PI.) 
acps Dor. et Att Poet 



^217.] 



DIALECTS. PRONOUNS. 



251 



D.N. 


vbi'i 


! 


aq>ci)ip {acpco'iy)! 




G. D. 


vmv 


► Epic i 

i 




acfbuv, acpojiv 1 


A. 


vm, vio 




aqp aJi, (rqpcu j 


(j(jpoj£, acpo)S > 








ff()pW5 o-(pto j 


P. N. r,^iflg Epic ; r,uisg Ion. 


c 

rua^' Ep. ; vf^ieg Ion. 






uftigDor.; «(U|UfC Ep. 


I'^t'c Dor. ; v^fxfg Ep. 




G. 


iifiib)v Ion. and Epic 


I'^Ewr Ion. and Epic 


o-qpewr, crcjpcwv Ion. 

and Epic 
acp(ov Epic 




r\^H(ov Epic 


vfiilwv Epic 


crcfHwv Epic 




ufifiiav Mo\. ; uuojv 


v^^usbiv JEo\. 






Dor. 






D. 


Vfuv, r,uiv, 7]ulv Epic 


vfilv, i\uLv, lulv Ei)ic 






ufifii{v)JEo\. and Ep. ; 


i\u^i[r) Epic 


aqp/, o-qpt Ion. ; afflai, 




«/zIy and ufiiv Dor. 


- 


acfLCTL, acplv, o-qpiv, 
o-^t, o-qpt Ep. ; uaq)i 
JEo\. 




u^uiai JEiOl. 






A. 


r,fiiag Ion. and Epic 


x'jU£«$ Epic and Ion. 


(jcfsag, (Tt^fftclon. and 








Epic 




»j^ac, %uug Epic 


i\uag, I'fidg Epic 


(T(jp«c, crqiiag Epic 




o/i/ic Epic ; ofii Dor. 


vfjfxs Epic ; lus Dor. 


o-q:£ Epic (11. T, 265.) 
uVqpE JEol. j 


Remark. The forms suscep 


tible of inclination are those written without 


an accent. 



2. The compound forms of the reflexive pronouns, ii^avToi; asavrov, etc. 
are never found in Homer ; mstead of them, he uses the personal pronoims 
and the pronoun aviog together, e. g. sfl aijcv, ifiol avTco, ifxsv ottT)/?, ? av~ 
TJj'v, 01 avzji. \Mien the pronoim ki-toc stands fii-st, it signifies himself, her- 
self, itself even. But the Ion. Avriters use the compomid forms ifxeaviov, 
aeoiiroL', ecaviov, etc., Comp. § 207, 1. 

3. Possessive pronouns ; t6oc, -i], -6v Dor. and Epic, instead of crug ; hog, -r„ 
^ov and o?, r\, ov, suus, Epic ; a-nog, -Vj, -ov Dor. and Epic, a^^og, ufifiiisgog 
JEol., instead o£ ijusisgog; runzfQog, of us hoik, Epic ; v^og, -rj, -ov Dor. and 
Epic, vuuog j£o\., instead of vfisiEQog ; acpmiEQog, of you hoth, D. «, 216 ; 
0-930?, -r,, -ov ^ol. and Epic, instead of ac^ixi^og. 

4. Demonsti-ative pronouns; (a) o tj to; Dor. M instead of^; Gen. tw 
Dor., Tolo and teD Epic, xug Dor. : Dat. xa Dor. ; Ace. xav Dor. ; PI. xol and 
ToX Dor. and Epic ; Gen. xo.^^^v Epic, xav Dor. ; Dat. xoiai, xalai, x],ai and 
T^^? Epic ; Ace. toj?, to? Dor. 

(b) 5 fc ; Epic Dat. PI. xo\g^iui and xo\z^iaai mstead of xolq^i ; Epic Dat. 
xoiaidE instead of xolgSs is found also in the tragedians. 

(c) oi'Toj and ulxog', an £ stands before the long inflection-endings 



252 DIALECTS. THE NUMERALS. THE VERB. [§§ 218, 219. 

in tlio Ion. dialect, §207, 10, e. g. TOVTtov, lai'TETjc, Tovrioj, rovjiovg, avTir}^ 
avjscjv. 

(d) ixtlvog is written in Ion. and also in Att. j)oetr\' xai'oc, iEol. xrjvog, 
Dor. jijvog. 

(e) On the Ion. forms (ovtog, twvto instead of o aviog, to alio, see §§206, 
1, and 207, 1. 

5. Relative pronouns ; o Dor. and Horn., instead of og ; olo Ion. and Epic ; 
oov Epic seldom, ttjg II. n, 208; jjai and fjg instead of aig. Besides o?, i), 
the other forms of the pronouns are supplied, in the Dor. dialect, by the 
forms of the aiticle, e. g. to instead of o, tov instead of oi*, t?5§ instead ofrjg, 
etc. The Epic dialect uses both forms promiscuously, according to the 
necessities of the verse. In the Ion. dialect also, the forms of the article are 
frequently used instead of the relative. 

6. Indefinite and interrogative pronomis ; [a) tig, xl; Gen. lio (if o) 
Epic and Ion., tiv [tev] Epic, Ion. and Dor., Dat. t£&) {reo)), t&5 (to)) Epic and 
Ion. ; PL uaaa Neut., brnioV aacra Od. t, 218, Gen. tscjv (tsav) Epic and 
Ion., Dat. Tf'o/fft Epic and Ion. [jolai S. Trach. 984). 

(b) Tig, Tt; Gen. tso Epic and Ion., tsv Epic, Ion. and Dor. xfo) Ion. 



[c) ogiig, Nom. oTig, Neut. on, oni. Epic. 
Gen. oTEV Epic and Ion. otso, 

oTzeo, OTTsv Epic. 
Dat. oxf w, oTw Epic and Ion. 
Ace. oTiva Epic, Neut. on, 

oil I Epic. 



Neut. PI. onva Hiad. 
oTscov Epic and Ion. 

oTEoiGi Epic and Ion., orirjai Her. 
uTivng Epic, Neut. anva and uaaa 
Epic. 



§218. The Numerals. 
The JEol. and secondaiy form of fxla is i'a, n;c, I't], I'av, also ico II. ^, 422, 
is instead of hi. z/i'o, aud-^uw are indeclinable in Homer; the secondary 
forms are doiu), doi.ol, doial, doia, Dat. doolg, doolcn. Ace. 8oiu>, doiovg, -ixg, 
-a. nlavQEc, -a tEoI. and Epic, instead of TsaaaQsg, -a. Jvadiy.a and 
dvoy.nldsy.a Epic, and dcodsxa. lE-'s/xoo-i Epic, mstead of Eiy.oai. " Oydwy.ovia 
and ivvrjy.ovTa Epic, instead of oydoi'iic., ivEviy/.. ^Evvmyilov and dry.a/iXoi, 
Epic, instead of ivvuy.igxihoi and ^vqioi. The endings -ay.ovia and -uy.6- 
aiOL in the Epic and Ion. become -/jxor'Tot, -rjy.oaioi. The Epic forms of 
the ordinals are iQhaiog, TiiQaiog, k^dofxmog, o/doajog, evaiog and tlvaTog. 

The A'" e r b . 
§ 219. I. Aiigment. — Ptednplication. (tt, so, 83, 85, se.) 

1. All the poets, except the Attic, may reject the augment, according to 
the necessities of the verse, e. g. Xms, arf llavio, S^icrav, oQtxxo, sle. The 
Ion. prose, as well as the Epic dialect, may omit the temporal augment ; it 



§ 219.] DIALECTS. AUGMENT. REDUPLICATION. 253 

inny also omit it in the Porf., e. g. 'dfifiai, tQyctiT^iai, oVxrjfiUL, which is done 
bv tlio Epic Avritcrs only in the case of wrw/w and i\)xaiai fVoni h(j'/m. 

2. On the omission of the Epic dialect to double the g when the augment 
is prefixed, e. j;. i'oi^ttg, and on the doubling the semi-vowels, e. g. IWcva, 
see § !208, 4, and Rem. 

3. a in the Dor. writers is changed into « by the augment, and au suf- 
fers no change, e. g. dyov instead of i]yov, uigfov instead of jiqiov. 

4. Verbs which have the Digamma, always take, in Homer, the syllabic 
augment, according to the rule, e. g. ardixvb), to please, Impf. iuvdavov, Aor. 
eadov ; — tidofiat, videor, idad^rjv, also in the participle isiadfKvog. On 
account of the verse, the s seems to be lengthened in fioiy.vta, evade [sFads) 
from avduvM. 

5. In Homer, the verbs olvoxoio) and «»'<5«)'(w, take the syllabic and tem- 
poral augment, at the same time, viz. ioivoxosi, II. d, 3, yet more frequently 
on'o/oii ; €))»'(5«»'£ and i'jvdavE. 

6. The reduplication of ^ is found in Homer, in Q^QvnMfiivoc, from ^vnoo), 
to make dirty. On the contraiy, the Epic and poetic Perfects, Ef^fioga from 
fisiQOjxai and taav^ni from aivia, are formed according to the analogy of 
those beginning with q. The Epic and Ion. Perf. ofxTccofictL is ty.Trjfiat. A 
strengthened reduplication is found in the Hom. forms dsidixmai and dsl- 
dsxio. 

7. In the Epic dialect, the second Aor. Act. and Mid. also often takes the 
reduplication, which remains through all the modes. In the Ind. the sim- 
ple augment s is commonly omitted, thus, e. g. ytdfiv (o, to grow weary, Subj. 
Aor. y.fxdfio) ; xikofiaiyto command, iy.suXofiTjv ; k ^ i^ w , to hear, Aor. Imp. 
xixXidi, y.sx?.vt8', Xayydvoj, to obtain, Xilaxov , kafi^dvco, to receive, 
kiXa^iff&ai', lavxtdvo3, lateo, Xiladov ; nslS^o), to persuade, tistil&ov, 
nsTiix^ofiTjv ; tigit (a , to delight, xiignno^riv ; rvyxccvb},to obtain, Teivxuv, 
-siT&ai', fliENSl, to murder, Ejtscpvov, nicpvov, (pgd^a, to say, to show, 
TxiifQadov, ETiicpQadov. Aorists with the Att. reduplication, comp, § 124, 
Rem. 2, commonly take the augment, e. g.^APSl, to Jit, iJQ-aQov, "AXSI, 
to grieve, ilx-a/ov; uks^o), to ward off, ^jX-aXxov, dkaXxHV, oQwyn, to 
excite, oiQ-ogov ; iv Im co ,to chide, iv-innov. Two verbs in the Aor. take 
the reduplication in the middle of the word, viz. ivlnxM ^ rjvAnaniv, and 
iQvxb), to restrain, r\QV-xuxov, igyxaxsEiv. Comp. the Presents, ovlvr]^i, 
dtiidXXo}, 6nniTEV(a. 

8. In the Dialects, there are still other forms of the Perf. and Plup. with 
the Att. reduplication, § 124; thus, e. g. alg iw , to take. Ion. dq-atQtixa^ 
aQ-aiQ7]fiai ; dXdo(iai ^ to wander. Epic Perf. with a Pres. signification 
aX-uXtjficet; 'APJl {dQttQlay.ca), to Jit, Poet, ag-dgoi, I Jit, (Inti'ans.) Ion. lig- 
rjga; 'AXJI («xa//^w), to grieve. Epic and Ion. dx-rj/E/iai, dx~dxrj!^cxt ; 

34 



254 DIALECTS. PERSONAL-ENDINGS AND MODE-VOWELS. [§ 220. 

JllS'IlKfL ((jp£^w), to carnj, Ion. iy-7jpir/i.iui; eQelnoj, to demolish, VoeU 
ig-ijQina, E])ic iQ-iqimo] kQi'Qbi, to contend, E])ic tQ-rioiu^ai. 

§220. Per sonal- ending s and Mode-v ow els . (102.) 

1. First Pers. Sing. Act. The original ending -^ t of the first Pers. Sing., 
is found in the Epic dialect in several subjunctives, e. g. xuivw/i/, uyof/Mfii, 

2. Second Pers. Sing. Act. Li the Dor., and particularly in the JE,o\. and 
Epic dialect, the lengthened form -aS^a is found, § 116, 2. In the Ind., 
this is retained almost exclusively in the conjugation in -«t, e. g. liOr/a&a, 
cpijcT&a, didoiada, nocQi'ia&u. In Homer this ending is frequent in the Subj., 
e. g. idsXr/a&a, HiT]](T&a, more seldom in the Opt, e. g. ylaloiada, ^uXoia&a. 

3. Instead of the ending ~sig, the Dor. frequently has the old form -sg, 
e. g. Tvnrsg instead of rvmEig', so in Theocritus avQladeg = avQi'^fig. 

4. Third Pers. Sing. Act.' In the Epic dialect, the Subj. sometimes lias 
the ending -trt formed from -it, e. g. ii>£Xri(ji{v), uyi^ai, oiX(xh.r,(Tr, the Opt. 
only in naqacpd airmen, 

5. Instead of the ending -n in the Pres. Ind. of the Dor. dialect, the form 
-ri is used, though seldom, e. g. diddxy.Tj instead of 5i,8(iijy.ii. In the second 
and tliu'd Pers. Sing. Perf Act., Theocritus uses the endings -tjg, -r} instead 
of-«?, -£, e. g. 7iE7i6v&r]g, onianr] instead o? ninovd^ag, ottwtt?. 

6. Fu-st Pers. PI. Act. The Dor. dialect has retained the original ending 
-;Uf ?, e. g. rvntofieg instead of tymo^sv, § 204. 

7. The thii'd Pers. PI. Act. of the principal tenses, in the Dor. dialect, ends 
throughout in -vti, e. g. tvtijovtl (instead of tl-tttoio-/), rvipovii, TtTTTwyrt (in- 
stead of Tt'/TTWfft), TS7V(pavTi, iTTUiviovTi, i^ajiaTbivTi. In the 7E0I. and Dor., 
this ending in the Pres. and. Fut. is -oiat instead of -ovcri, e. g. nsQinvioi- 
aL{v), valoi(n{v). 

8. Personal endings of the Plup. Act. In the Epic and Ion. dialects, the 
following forms occur : 

First Pers. Sing., -sa the only Epic and Ion. form [-t] old Att., § 116, 6), 
e. g. it s S^i]n sa, ff d sa, nsn l& sa instead of 
iiE&7}Tisiv, etc. 

Second " " -£«?, e. g. sis&rjnEag Od. ta, 90, instead of iTe&7]nEig. 

Third " " -iE{v], e. g. iyeyovES, xaiakEkolTiEE, i^E^qaixEEV. 

Second " PI. -eute, e. g. avv^jdiaxE Her. 9, 58. 

Remark 1. The third Pers. Sing. Plup. Act. in -el, as well as the same 
Pers. of the Impf in -ei, is found in Homer before a vowel with the r IcpEl- 
^vcfTiy.ov, thus, Eaii])iEiv II. \^, 691. ^e^Ii'jxeiv II. e, 661. -d; 270. $, 412. ^£- 
dsinvrixEiv Od. g, 359 -j-r-raiCEiv L. /, 388. 

9. The second and third Pers. Dual of the historical tenses are sometimes 



§ 220.] DIALECTS. PERSONAL-ENDINGS AND MODE-VOWELS. 255 

cxcliaii^ed for eiicli other. Thus in Homer, the forms -rov and -a&ov 
stand instead of -ti^i' and -a&rjv^ e. g. dioiXEJov 11. x, 364. Xacfiaanov 11. a, 
583. OwQi'iaata&ov II. y, 301. On the Att. exchange, see § 116, Rem. 1. 

10. The second Pers. Sing. Pres. Ind. and Subj., Imi)f. Ind. and Opt. Mid. 
or Pass., the first Aor. IMid. Ind., appear to be uncontracted in the Ion. and 
often in the Epic dialect, after o* is dropped, e. g. sTrniXXsai ; Homer uses 
eitlier these forms, e. g. Xdneai, Xdubui, dcpUr^ai, i^iacrscti, inuvgrjai, vns- 
Xvaao, e/iivao ; or the contract forms, -tj (from -««^), -iv (from -so), -w (from 
-ao), e. g. enXsv, h^X^^'i <3P?«^si'5 iy-Qiiiw. When the characteristic of the verb 
is s, it is very frequently omitted in the Ion. dialect, before -5«t and -so, 
6. g. (fiXiai instead of cpiXisai, cpiXio instead of cpiXiso; so in Homer, iy.Xs H. 
w, 202, yet with the variation ty.Xi from xXioucci. Comp. § 222, B, (3). The 
ending -so in Homer is lengthened into - c t o , e. g. sqsio, antlo, and the 
ending -ssai is contracted into -suxi, in verbs in -e'w, e. g. fiv^slm, vslai. 
Homer sometimes drops g in the second Pers. Sing. Perf. and Plup. Mid. 
or Pass, also, viz. fxsfivai and (is^ry], ^i^SXrjai, saavo. 

11. Thte Dual endings -ti^v, -a&rjv, and first Pers. Sing, -^r^v, in the 
Doric are, -tuv, -ad^uv, -(iuv, § 201, 2, e. g. ecpQaaocfidv. In the later 
Doric, the change of rj into « is found, though seldom, even in the Aor. 
Pass., e. g. itvTidv instead of iiiijirjv. 

12. The Dual and PI. endings -[xsdov, -fis&a, in Epic, as well as in Do- 
ric, Ionic and Attic poetry, often have the original forms -^lad^ov, -fisa&Uj 
e. g. xvTXTOfiscrdov, Tvmofifa&a. 

13. The tliird Pers. PI. Perf. and Plup. Mid. or Pass., in the Ionic and 
Epic dialect, very generally ends in - aTai, -kto, instead of-yiat, -via, 
e. g. ns7i(i&uTai,7isnavaTrxi, L^s^ovXsvaio, iaxdXaio ; very often also the third 
Pers. PI. Opt. Mid. or Pass. - o laro, - alaro, instead of -olvto, -ixivto, 
e. g. tVTixoiaio instead of xvnxoivio, ugrjaalaxo (Homeric), instead of «^7j- 
auivxo. Also the ending -ovto, in the Ionic dialect, has this change, yet the 
o passes into £, e. g. i^3ovXiaxo instead of siSovXovxo. In verbs in -«w and 
-ecu, the tj in the ending of the Perf. and Plup. -rjvxai, -rjvxo, is shortened 
in the Ionic into s, e. g. oly.iaxai instead of coy.rjvxai from otxsw, ixsxiuiaxo 
instead of ixsxinrjvxo from xifuxoj. Also instead of -avxac, the Ionic dialect 
has -saxuL instead of -daxai, e. g. nsnxsaxai instead of nimavxaL. "Anlxa- 
xai, in Herodotus, from the Perf. dqu/f^ai, Pres. uq)iy.viofitti, is the only 
example in which the rule stated § 116, 5, is not observed. 

Rem. 2. Two Perf. and Plup. forms are found in Homer with the ending 
-daxtti, -daxo, from verbs whose characteristic is not ^, \\z. iXavvco 
(iXdca) iXijXa^ai iXr]Xddaxo Od. tj, 86, and «xa;^/^w dxi'i/sfxai, dxriysdaxai B. q, 
637 ; yet it is to be noted, that the reading is not wholly settled ; the forms 
igoddaxai and (ooddaxo, from gaivu), must be derived from the stem 
'PAZSL, comp. Qaacrais Od. v, 150. 



256 DIALECTS. PERSONAL-ENDINGS AND MODE-VOWELS. [§ 220. 



14. The third Vers. V\. Aor. Vans. -ijaav is ahridgod into -sv, in the 
Doric, and also frequently in the Epic and poetic dialect, e. g. iQa(pEv in- 
stead of iiQttcprjfTitv. In the Opt. this abridged form is regular in the Com- 
mon langMng(!, § 11(3, 7, e. g. JV(f&iiiv instead of jKp^tlriauv. 

15. The third Pers. PI. Imp. Act. in -iwauv, and Mid. or Pass, in a&iaaav, 
is abridged in the Ionic and Doric dialect, and always in Homer, into -Tojy 
and -(Tl>w>', <5 ^l^j 12, e. g. TVTiT6vib)v instead of ivmijioauv, ntnoi^ovTOiv 
instead ofnsnoiOsKoaav, rvnxiadaiv instead ofxvniiadwtjav. 

16. The long mode-vowels of the Subj., viz. w and % are very frequently 
shortened in the Epic dialect into o and «, according to the necessities of 
the verse, e. g. lo^xtv instead of Xwii^v ; cp&io^sad^u instead of -ufie&a ; aiQicp- 
tiuL instead of-ijiat, §207, 4. 

17. The first Aor. Opt. Act, in the iEolic dialect, ends in -«ta, -siag, 
-SIS, etc., third Pers. PI. -siav instead of -aifii, -aig, -at, etc., third Pers. 
PI. -aisv. See § 116, 9. 

18. Infinitive. The original full form of the Inf. Act. is -fisvai, and 
with the mode-vowel, -sfisvat., which is found in the Epic, Doric and ^olic 
dialects. This form is sometimes shortened into -fxev {-ifxsv), sometimes 
into "voti. But in the Epic dialect, the ending -siv also is found, formed 
from 'if^sv, and in contract verbs, and in the second Aor., also the endings 
-Esiv and -slv. The Pres., Fut. and second Aor. take the mode-vowel s 
and the ending -^sv, hence -sftsv, e. g. tvtit-s-usv, jvii>i}iev, tlnifisv. 
Verbs m - « w and -sco, as they contract the characteristic-vowel « and 
s with the Inf ending -ifisvat, have the form -rjfisv a i,,e.g. yor,^svai (vo«o»), 
(pih']iAsvaL [(pilim), (pogijijisvai {cpogi(o). With the ending -i]}jLsvaL corres- 
ponds that of the Aorists Pass., e. g. Tvmjfisvai instead of rvnijvm, aoXkia- 
■&{}fisvai ; so always in the Epic dialect ; but the Doric has the abridged 
form in -ri^sv, e. g. ivntj^sv. In the Pres. of verbs in -fxi, the ending -{.isv 
and -fisvat is appended to the unchanged stem of the Pres., and in the 
second Aor. Act., to the pure stem, e. g. TL&i-(.isv, nds-^svai, 1(jtcx-^sv, 
laid-fj-svuL, dido-fxsv, dido-fisvai, 8siy.vv-y.sv, dstxiv-ysvuL ; d^s-fisv, d^i-ysvai, 
86-y.sv, do-ysvai ; so also in Perfects derived immediately from the stem of 
the verb, e. g. js&vaysv, ^s^uysv. The following are exceptions, viz. ii&i]- 
fisvocL II. ifj, 83 — with which the forms of the Pres. Part. Mid. TLd^}]fisvoq, 
mXiiysvog, coiTespond — didoivai H. w, 425, also the Inf second Aor. Act. of 
verbs in -a and -v, wliich also here retain the long vowel, § 191, 2, e. g. 
(yit]-(iiraL, ^7]-fisvai, dv-fxsvai, instead of o-zf/yat, dvvai. 

19. Besides the forms in -iysvai and -iysv, the Doric dialect has one in 
-sv abridged from these, e. g. uysv instead of u/siv, Fut. uQyoasv; second 
Aor. I8sv instead of I8eiv, Xa^iv instead of Xa^s~tv, etc. In the Doric of 
Theocritus, the ^Eohc ending -j^v is found, e. g. xo^tgrjv, second Aor. Xu§i]v, 
instead of ;jjat^£t>', Xafisiv. 



§221.] DIALECTS. Eric AND IONIC ITERATIVE-FORM. 257 

20. Tlie Inf. ending of the Aor. Pass. -I'l^tvai, -ij^fv, is abridged into -tjv 
in tlie Doric writers, yet only after a preceding long syllable, e. g. lAiOvaOriv 
instead of -dtivai. The Inf. ending of the Perf Act. varies between -tjv 
and - ttv in the Doric and ^olic writers, e. g. -le&iioQijxTjv, /f/ovsiv, in- 
stead ofjf&ewQTjxivaij yf/ovsvai. 

21. Participle. The ^olic dialect lias the diphthong o i instead of ov 
before a in piuliciplcs, and a i instead of «, e. g. tvjijwv, tvjitoktoi, jvji- 
Toy, Xa^ulaUf Xinoiaa instead of -oiua', jinpaig, -aiaa, instead of riipfJg, 
-afftt, §§201, 2, and 207, 1. The Epic dialect can lengthen the accented o 
into 0) in the oblique cases, e. g. fjiffxabjiog, 7isq)V(aTag. The Perf. Act. 
Part., in the Doric dialect, sometimes takes the ending of the Pres., e. g. 
ne(pQixovi!g instead of ni(pQiy.6isg. 



§221. Epic and Ionic Iter ativ e- for m, (io3.) 

1. The Ionic and particularly the Epic dialect, and not unfrequently, in 
imitation of these, the Tragedians, have a special Impf and Aor. form with 
the ending -axov, to denote an action often repeated in time or space. 
This is called the Iterative-form. It is usually without the augment. 

2. But it is generally found only in the Sing, and in the third Pers. PL Ind. of 
the above named tenses, and is inflected like the Impf, since in the Impf and 
second Aor. Act. and Mid., the endings -axov, -ax(g^-ax([v\ -axo^ur^v, -axov{Eo, 
cv), -axsro instead of -or, -ofitjV, are commonly preceded by £ (which is 
a union-vowel), and in the first Aor. Act and Mid., the endings -aaxov, 
-aaxoftrfV are used instead of -a, -a}ur,r, e. g., 

(a) Impf. divsv-eaxov, S^iX-iaxfg, e7i-(axs{v), nsX-iaxno, ^oarx-iaxovTO. In 
verbs in -dta, -diaxov is abridged into -aaxov, which, according to the ne- 
cessities of the verse, can be again lengthened into -daaxov, e. g. vixuaxo^tv, 
vaierdaaxov. Verbs in -cw have -isaxov and -iaxov, e. g. xaXs-saxe, /5ou- 
xoXieaxs ; oi/vsaxov, nwXiaxsTo, xaXicrxsTo ; w hen the verse requires, -tsaxov 
can be lengthened into -maxov, e. g. vEixdsffxov; verbs in -ow do not have 
this Iterative-form among the older authors ; verbs in -^i omit the mode- 
vowel here also, e. g. lid^t-axov, dldo-axov, dsixw-axov ; in some verbs the 
ending -aaxov has taken the place of -iaxov, e. g. qljix-aaxov, xgvm-aaxov^ 
from ^imoj, xQVjnb) ; 

(b) Second Aor. sX-^axs, ^dX-taxB, cpvy-EaxB ; in verbs in -^i, without a 
mode-vowel, e. g. aid-axE = tairi, naoiSdaxs = nagi^r], doaxs, dvaxs ; also 
an Iterative-form of the second Aor. Pass, is found, viz. (fdveaxs, instead of 
i(fdvrj II. ;i, 64. Od. /i, 241, 242 ; 

(c) First Aor. iXda-aaxsv, avdrja-aaxsv, coa-aaxs, fivj^a-daxsro, d/vcia- 
offxf, instead of dyvoi'iaaaxt from dyvoio). 



258 DIALECTS. CONTRACTION AND RESOLUTION IN VERBS. [§ 222. 

§222. Contraction and Resolution in Verbs. 

(12->— 125.) 

I. The Epic dialect. In the Epic dialect, verbs in -ato, -£0), -ow, are 
subject to contraction, but not to so great an extent as in the Attic. The 
contraction is made according to the general rules, \vith few exceptions, as 
will be seen in the following remarks. 

A. Verbs in - « w. (1) In these verbs, the uncontracted form occurs only 
in single words and forms, e. g. nsQaov, xaieaxlaov, vaindovai ; always in 
vXvcoj, and in verbs which have a long a lor their characteristic, or whose 
stem is a monosyllable, e. g. dupuMv, n(ivoio)v, s/qus, e/Queis from xguta, 
to attack. 

(2) In some words, a is changed into s, viz. fisvoiveov from fisvoivata, ^V- 
rsov from uviaa, ofioy.ksov from ofioxXaw. Comp. §201, 1. 

(3) Instead of the uncontracted and contracted forms, there is a resolution 
of the contracted syllable, as often as the versification requires it, since a 
vowel similar to that formed by contraction, commonly shorter, more seldom 
longer, is placed before that vowel ; in this way, « is resolved into «« or 
au, and w into ow or t»jw, § 207, 2. The short vowel is used here, when 
the syllable preceding that contracted is short, e. g. [oqoj) ogoa', but if this 
syllable is long, the long vowel must be used on account of the verse, e. g. 
■tj^MOJvra. The resolution does not take place with the vowel « before a 
personal-ending beginning with t, e. g. ogix-Tai, ogu-ro. Thus, 

{oQocfig) ogug o q ix a q [oQitw) oqo) 6 q 6 (O 

{uoccta&ai) ogua&ttL o q cc ua & a i [ogaovaa) oQotaa o go (a a a 

i^evoivasi) ^ivoLva ^sv o iv a a {^odoviri) ^ooiac ^ooaai 

{itX7]g) sag dung [oqcxoi^l) ogo^fXL o q 6 oj fi i 

{uvdta&aL) (ivaG&ai ^ivaaa&ui {dguovcn) dgwcn dguKDai. 

Remark 1. In the following Dual forms, as is contracted into t], ngog- 

avdi'iirjv, orAijTTjv, ai'vavn'iTrjv, cpoLTijTr-v instead of -uti]v ; so also in the tvvo 

verbs in -f'w, 6iJ.agTiiir}v, unfAijirjv instead of -f/rTjv. 

4. When vt comes after a contracted vowel, a short vowel may follow 
such a contracted syllable, e. g. r,^(oovTa instead of r/^ouyrw, yElojoyTfg, (^v(o- 
ovio ; in the Opt. also, the protracted - ojo l instead of -oj is found in ij^Swol- 
fii mstead of i)^ao I [iL = ri^oj^ii. The following are anomalous forms, vaii- 
TUMda instead of -owcra, auu), second Pers. Imp. Pres. Mid. and third Pers. 
Sing. Impf Act. from 2:AS1, to save. 

Rem. 2. On the Inf in -rj^tvaL of verbs in -aa and -f w, see § 220, 18, 
and on the Epic and Ionic contraction of or] into w, see § 205, 5. 

B. Verbs in - i co. The conjugation of these verbs includes also all Fu- 
tures in -£0) and -ionat^ all second Persons in -so, -cat and -Tjat, second 
Aor. Lif. Act. in -e'ctv, and the Aor. Pass. Subj. in -f'w and -c/w. 



§ 222.] DIALECTS. CONTRACTION AND RESOLUTION IN VERBS. 259 

(1) Contraction does not take place in all forms in wliich e is followed by 
the vowels w, o>, rj, i], oi and ov, e. g. cpiliwytv, <f>iXeoifji, etc. ; yet such 
forms must commonly be read w ith Synizesis. In other instances, the con- 
traction is either omitted according to tlie necessities of the verse, e. g. 
q)diHy €QE(o Fut., oTQVviovaa Fut., fiuXesiv second Aor. Act., Tuai^aOaL Fut. 
Mid., ftiyibKTi second Aor. Siibj. Pass. ; or contraction takes place, in which 
case it is also to be noted, that when so is contracted it becomes iv, § 205, 1, 
e. g. alftfinTjv, u'vTsvv, yiviv; except arfQ^inrovv and inoQ&ovp. 

(2) Sometimes « is lengthened into ei, § 207, 1, e. g. eieXdno, iriksiov, 
itXsisiVj oxi'siw: — dafizlca instead of Sa^ai, fnysijj instead of ftiyj], second 
Aor. Sul)j. Pass. 

(3) In the ending of the second Pers. Sing. Pres. Mid. or Pass., either 
two Epsilons coming together are contracted, as in the thii-d Pers., e. g. 
fivdi-tvii = fiv&slai, like (ivduiai, vitai, like vHjni, or one g is elided, e. g. 
fivdiai, nbiUai. This Elision commonly occurs both among the Epic and 
Ionic writers, in the second Pers. Impf and Imp. Pres. Mid. or Pass., e. g. 
(fo^so, «x£o, aliio, i%r,yio. In such cases, the accent is on the penult, 
whether the word ends with -jat or -fo, § 220, 10. 

Rem. 3. On the irregular contraction in the Dual, see Rem. 1 ; on the Inf. 
in -ijfiEyai, see § 220, 18. 

C. Verbs in -o ou These verbs follow either the common rules of con- 
traction, e. g. yovvov/jai, yovvom&ai, or they are not contracted, but lengthen 
into w, so that the forms of verbs in -ow resemble those of verbs in -da, 
e. g. idoo)OVTa, IdQMovaa, vjivwovxaq (comp. -ij^ojovra), or they become whol- 
ly analogous to verbs in -uof, since they resolve -ovai — thu'd Pers. PI. Pres. 
— into -o 0) a i, -oivio into -o w v t o, and -oiiv into -o o) s v, and consequent- 
ly a contraction like that of verbs in -«w is supposed, [vcQoovrn] uQovab 
a Q 6 0)0- 1 (comp. vQcoiai), {drj'Loovio) drjiovvio dyi'iowvro (comp. vQooivJo) 
[drlioouv) dr/iol(v 5 rj'i 6 oj ev {com\). ogoojiv). But this resolution into -dto 
or -0)0 is confined to such forms as admit it in verbs in -ato ; hence, e. g. 
the Pres. tt^otc, oiqoT., dgoms, and the Inf.dgovv do not admit tliis resolution. 

n. Ionic dialect. (1) In the Ionic dialect, only verbs in -«' w and -o w suf- 
fer contraction; verbs in -iw commonly omit it, except the couti-actiou of -to 
and -sov into -sv, which frequently occurs, § 205, 1, e. g. cpdEVfjEv instead 
o^ cpdiofiEv = (piXovfiEv, iq)UEVv instead of icplXsov = i(piXovv, cpiXEv instead 
of (pdEOV = q)d.ov. 

(2) The uncontracted forms exliibited in the table, § 135, of the second 
Pers. Sing. Pres. and Impf. Mid. or Pass, in -it], -drj. -or}, -eov, -dov, -oov, 
e. g. q)dETj, iifjorjj, (iiadoTj, qdiov, Ti^dov, fiicrdoov, etc., are found in no 
dialect, and are presented merely to explain the contraction. The Ionic 
writers also use here the contracted forms of verbs in -«w and -ow, e. g. 



260 DIALECTS. FORMATION OF THE TENSES. [§ 223. 

Tifttx, fiKT&oi, n^iu)^ fxid^ov, ct(!. ; ])ut of verbs in -e'o), as also in barytone 
verbs tbcy do not use tlie ondinjrs -?/, -ou, but -tai, -to, e. g. xvm-tai, ixvnx 
-fo, cpiU-eai, i(piXs-io. — On the elision of s in tlie ending -iso, see above 
No. 1, B, (3). 

(3) Verbs in -uoj follow tlie common rules of contraction ; but in tbe un- 
contracted form, the « is changed into s, e. g. oqem, ooiofiiv instead of oQua), 
Xgisrai, ;^^£o»'Toet instead of ;^^«£Tat, etc. Comp. §201, 1. 

(4) Ao in the uncontracted forms is frequently lengthened into e'w, § 207, 
3, 6. g. /^Ewyiat, sxTscovTOj oQEOJVxeg, niiQtbintvoq instead of [xqaovxai] XQ^*'~ 
xai, etc. 

(5) From the change of the a into t, as in oqbo}, it is evident, that the Ionic 
writers sometimes contracted ao and aov, and also so and tov in verbs in 
-EO), into -fv, § 205, 1, e. g. eiQwxsvv instead of eIqwiuov, ydivaa instead of 
y^Xixovaa, uyansvpxfg instead of ayandovxfg. So also in the Doric dialect, 
e. g. /eXevvxi instead of yskdovai. This contraction into sv instead of ov is 
often found even in verbs in -oo), e. g. SiyMisvaL instead of [dixuioovai) di- 
xaioidL, diy.aisvv instead of diy.aiovv, idiyMisw, aTiq)avsivx(jii fromaxscpnvoo). 

(6) In Ionic prose, the Epic resolution is found but seldom in verbs in 
-«a), e. g. xo/iofoo-/, rjyoQowvro^ Herod. 

in. Doric dialect. (1) Contraiy to the common usage of the Doric, as 
and as i are contracted into rj and j], § 205, 3, e. g. xifiilxs instead of xiudtxs 
= xifiiixi, (poixfiQ instead of cpoixag, oQijv instead of oquv. The Inf is writ- 
ten without an i subscript, as the uncontracted form originally ended in -asv. 
Comp. also II, 5. 

(2) The Inf in verbs in -i(o has a double form, either the abridged form 
in -FV instead of -av, e. g. noiiv instead of noielv, or according to the anal- 
ogy of verbs in -«o», a fomi in -r^v from -iijv, e. g. (pi}Sjv instead of (pdisiv 
z= (piXflv, y.odfjiiv instead of y.oai^uv, q)()ovi}v instead of qiQovslv. 

(3) In the Doric and ^olic dialect, -ao, -aov and -aw are contracted into 
a, § 205, 2, e. g. mivd^sg instead of nuroinsv [nsivdofnv), nzivdvxi instead 
of 7rft»'(«-oi')a)(rtj ysXdv mstead of yfX{d-(av)(x)Vy (pvcruvxsg instead of (pva[d-o) 
wvxeg. 

Rem. 4. On the contraction into -sv instead of -of, see §205, 1. — A strik- 
ing peculiarity of the Doric dialect, especially of the later Doric as used by 
Theocritus, is, that it fi-equently has a long a even in the inflection of verbs 
in -t'oj, e. g. enovacra instead of inovrjaa fromnovioj, ecplXaaa instead of icpl- 
Xrjaa from (pLXsco. 

^22S. Formation of the Tenses, (isi.) 

1. Besides the verbs mentioned § 130, in the Homeric dialect, the follow- 
ing also retain the short characteristic-vowel in forming the tenses, viz. 



§ 223.] DIALECTS. FORMATION OF THE TENSES. 261 

xorc'oi, to have a a^nid!i;e, vsixsco, to quarrel, javvw, to stretch, i()vb}, to draw. 
On the contrary, ircairkyi, to approve, lias in^vi^aa. 

'2. In tJie first Fut. and first Aor. Act. and Mid. of pure verbs, which re- 
tain the short characteristic-vowel in forming the tenses, and in the same 
tenses of verbs in -^o), -aaw (-ttoj), the cr can be doubled in the ending, in 
Homer and other poets not Attic, § 208, 4, e. g. iyelaaas, nonoadiitvoq, 
oftoaaai, ijdvvaas, dixdaaai, xofuaas. 

3. The Attic Fut., as it is called, §117, occurs in the Homeric dialect in 
verbs in -t^w, e. g. xTsgiovai, dyla'iuad^ai, also ogfj-liTaoftsv, xonglaaovTEg, 
xovliT(Tovaiv. From verbs in -ew, -aw, -voj, Hom. forms Futures which are 
similar to those in -i^(a, viz. in verbs in -e'w, he often uses the ending -ia 
instead of -eVw, e. g. yogisi II. -d; 379. y-ogieig II. v, 831. fxaxioviai II. /5, 366 ; 

— in verbs in - «' w, after dropping g, he places before the vowel formed 
by contraction, a corresponding short vowel, e. g. dviiooj, elowai, daf^da ; 

— in verbs in - vai, iQvovat, and zavvovai are found. 

4. In the Doric dialect, all verbs in - ^ o) take | instead of o- in those 
tenses, whose characteristic is o", i. e. in the Fut. and Aor., e. g. ^txa'^co, 
(5txa$w, fdtxa^a, instead of diydaco, idly.viaa. But the other tenses of verbs 
with the pure characteristic d, follow the regular formation, e. g. idiy.dadi^v, 
not idiydx&W' This peculiarity of the Doric appears also m single verbs 
in -doj, which, in forming the tenses, retain the short a, and in this respect 
are analogous to those in -^w, which likewise have a short vowel, e. g. 
yeXdo), iyila^a instead of iyiXaaa, yet not viyuM, mu^b), but viy.daoj (Att. 
viyiiffM). In Doric poetiy, the regular form of all these words can be used, 
according to the necessities of the meti-e. 

5. The following verbs in -^w have, in Homer and the Ionic dialect, 
f instead of a, through the whole formation, viz. u^QOid'Cw, to wander; 
dXan d^f^, to empty, Fut. dXand^co, etc., also Xenoph. ; dvonaXl^o), to 
shake ; d a'i'C w» io divide, to put to death ; iyyv ak i^b), to give ; iv ag ICoJ) 
to spoil a dead enemy ; S^ q v X X i ^ cj, to break in pieces ; fi e g fi rj q i '^ oj, to re- 

Jled ; niXiy.iL,b},to shake ; noXenl^o), to contend ; crxvcpsXl^ oj, to beat. 

6. Liquid verbs in - aLv ai, which in the Attic dialect form the Aor. with 
the ending - uva instead of -riva, § 149, Rem. 2, have « in the Doric, and 
Tj in the Epic and Ionic. The following liquid verbs, in the Epic and 
poetic dialect, of all periods, form the Fut. and first Aor. with the ending 
- (T ft) and -a a, viz. y.sXXo), to land, y.iXaai, comp. y.ivaai from ysyrib), to 
goad; f]lM, to crowd together, eXacci', yvgca, to meet, to fall upon; dqotQtay.w, 
'AP-SI, to Jit, rjocra, ugaaL', og-vvpc, to excite, ogaoi, digaa', diacp&figoj, to de- 
stroy, dia(pdigam in Homer; xsigoj, to shave, ixigaa in Homer, but first Aor. 
Mid. ixEigduTiv ; cpvgM, to mix, to knead, cpygaca, i'cpvgaa, nicpvgaopai. Epic 
and older poetic ; second Aor. Pass, icpvgrjv m Lucian, who also has the 

35 



262 DIALECTS. FORMATION OF THE TENSES. [§ 223. 



poetic Pcrf. nicpvq^ai, wliilo in prose the verb q^vgdo, iqvgaau, jiicpvQoifiaty 
etc., is used. The Opt. ocfdXhiev Od. (i, t334. II. tt, G51, is formed accord- 
ing to the usage of the yEohc. 

7. To verl)s which form the Fut. witliout the tense-cliaracteristic tr, 
§ 154, 4, belong tlic following forms of the Epic dialect, viz. ^iojjui or (jEio[uai, 
second Pers. ftir], I shaU live, pcrhaj)s from /5«tVw, to go, to live, also from 
/tAJl, to knoiv, to learn, and KEW^, yufiai, to lie down, bf^o), (5/;?t?, diiOfitv, 
d)]sTS, I slmll view, find, and xctw or y.iui, usii^sv, mloyv, y.iwv. 

8. To verbs which form the first Aor. without the tense-characteristic <r, 
§ 154, 7, belong the following forms of the Epic and poetic dialect, viz.;f£ci), to 
pour Old, s/EVcx Homer ; Att. £/£« ; o-£io;, to shaJce, taatva and iacrfvanTjv 
Homer., uUo^ai and uXsvo^iat, to avoid, i]Xsvuto, etc., §230; y.viloi, to hum^ 
exrja, ixeia Epic, exta Tragic, § 230. 

9. To verbs which have an active form for the Fut. Per/., § 154, 6, belongs 
also the Epic itsxaQr,(Titi (and xs/aqiiaofiai,), I shall he joyful, from x'^iQ'^' 

10. The exchange of the endings of the second Aor. with those of the 
first Aor., § 154, 8, is somewhat frequent in the Epic dialect, e. g. /5a/*'ct>, 
to go, i^rjffSTO, Imp. /5j;(jf ; dvo^ai, to jplunge, idimsTo, Imp. ^I'o-fo, 
'Part, dvaofxsvog; a/a, to lead, «|£Tf, aiifitv, ly.viofiai, to come, i^ov; 
ilE/fii^v, I laid myself down to sleep, Imp. li^o, As'lso; ogvvfiL, excito. Imp. 
oQffso, oQ(TEV', cpigw, to bear, oIge, oXtJEiE, olcrhca, oiaovTMv, olaifisv, 
oiffifiEvai, oiGE is also Att. ; aEldco, to sing, Imp. a s la so. 

11. Several second Aorists, in Homer, are formed by a Metathesis of the 
consonants, § 156, in order to make a dactyle, e. g. tdqay.ov instead of tbaq- 
xov from deqyofifin, triQad^ov from niod^w, tdga^ov from duQ&dyo), i]^^QOToy 
instead of 7/'^o!§tov from u^agTavoi. For the same reason. Homer synco- 
pates the stem, §155, e. g. d'/QoiiEvoq ^roir\ uyEQE(jd^ciL{dyElQw, to collect)', 
e/QETO, e/QEo Imp., e/qoljo, s/qe(t&uc with the accent of the Pres., iyqo^E- 
vog from i/Eqsa&UL [iyilqoa, to ivake)', nxo^xr^v, imofitjv, miaduL, mofXEvoc, 
TiETonciL, to fly; iy.iylETO, y.iylEXO, y.by.lo^hvoq, yilo^ai, to awake; nicfvov, 
B7iEq)vov, fliENSl, to kill. 

12. In the fii'st Aor. Pass. Homer inserts a v, according to the necessities 
of the verse, not only as other poets, § 149, Rem. 4, in y.qlvoi and nXlvoy, 
e. g. diay.qw^i'jTE, y.qiv&slg, iy.klv&7], but also in Idqvoi, to establish, and nvita, 
to bloiv, e. g. I8qvvd^7]v and Idqv&rjv, dfiTivvv&r]. 

13. Homer forms a fii-st Perf. only from pure verbs, and such impure 
verbs as in the tense-formation assume an s, § 166, or are subject to Meta- 
thesis, § 156, 2, e. g. %alqto y.Eyuqtjy.a from XAIPE-Sl, §dlX(a ^i^krjya from 
BAA. Moreover, he forms only second Perfects which belong commonly 
to intransitive verbs, or have an intransitive signification ; but also in pure 
verbs and in the impure verbs mentioned above, he rejects the x in single 



§223.] DIALECTS. FOIIMATION OF THE TENSES. 263 

persons aiul modes, uiitl regularly in the Part. ; in this way, these forms 
become analo^^ous to those of the second Perf. These participles either 
lengthen « and t into ij, e. g. ^f^3(xgijwg, burdened, from BAPLfl, y.iy.oQtjotg 
from xoQi-vvi\u{, xsxojijo)? from y.oiio), mirjoigy troiibkd, from TIER, TiT).r,o')g 
from TJAR, x(y.acf)i]d)q, to gasp for breath, from KAfPLfL, y.iyfniwg from y.ufx- 
Vb), nmrt^ug from 7iT>](jaa), to shrink through fear, jsdvrjiog, xfyirjort, y.fyjxQr^Mg 
from ^at^w ; or they retain, though more seldom, the stem-vowel without 
change, e. g. /5f/5«wj from /?««•«, BAH, ixytyavia from ylyvofiai, FAfl, 
dtducjg from diduaxio, JAJl, nf(pvi^ia from (pibj, haiaojgfrQin 'iaTr]iAi, 2TASI, 
fiffiuwg and fiffiucog and {.nfiuorsg from MASl. The accented o of the ob- 
lique cases can, in the first instance, according to the necessities of the 
verse, be lengthened into w, hence Jt&vrjtTog and -coto?, Te\)^vi]6ia and -ana, 
xixfiTjoTU and -a'tw ; but when the Nom. has a short penult, co is always 
used, e. g. ^e^ucZiog. The ending -to?, formed by contraction, is resolved 
by s into nsTinma from nljiioj, ts&vsojzi, and according to the necessities 
of the verse, s can be lengthened into si., e. g. is^vEtauog. The feminine 
form -(oaa is found only in peSoJaa Od. v, 14 ; in some feminine forms, 
the antepenult, which properly would be long, is shortened on account 
of the verse, e. g. ctgaQila Fem. of a^rjQojg, from aQaglaxo}, (x^fiuxvla of 
(if^ir}y.(og from ^vixao^on, Ts&aXvlu o£ Tt^rjX(^g from S-alXco, XEXaxvla of XeXtj- 
xwg from Xuaxio, nznadvia from Tida/co. 

Remark 1. The form resolved by e, in the Ionic dialect, belongs to some 
participles, e. g. eaiEo/g, standing firm ; so is&vsMg (never Ts-d-vaig) and Tf 5- 
v/jxwj' from isO^rrfxa, remains even in the Attic dialect. In these forms, the 
0) remains through all the cases, e. g. 

e(JiiO)g, £(TTfW(ra, kcnEMg, Gen. saTsurog, -coatjg 
jE&vHog, T(&vib)cra, Ts&vECijg, Gen. Ts&vsojTog, -atcrrjc. 
Bi^rjxa and liiXrixa never have these forms. Comp. § 193, Rem. 3. 

14. Some verbs, which in the stem of the Pres. have the diphthong ev, 
shorten it in the Epic and poetic dialect into r, in the Perf. Mid. or Pass., 
and in the first Aor. Pass., e. g. 

7iiv^o^ai,to ask, ttstcv a fia l; aEvu, to shake, Mid. and Fass. to hasten, 
saav (i ai, first Aor. Pass, ia av -d-Tjv; lev/w Poet., paro, Perf. rsTvy- 
fiai, Aor. ixvy^riv, cpsvyco, tofiee, Perf. n scpvy fisv og. 

Rem. 2. Xiat (formed from ;^£'Fti), xsvoy), to pour out, follows the analogy 
of these verbs, in the forms xsyvxa, xB/v^ai, dyvd^rjv ; these forms have 
been transferred to the Common language also, § 154, Rem. 1. Contrary 
to the analog)' just stated, the v is long in the Homeric form ninvvfiat from 
nvib) [tiveFw), to blow. 

Rem. 3. In Homer, Od. tr, 238, the third Pers. Opt. Plup. XiXiio instead 
of XeXvIto is found, according to the analog}' of nriyvvTO, dalvvio. 

Rem. 4. The Homeric Perfects axaxn^tvog, aXaX^fxevog, agrjQSfisvog, iXi]- 
Xdp.ivog, dxdxrfd&ai, dXixXrjcrd^ai, have the accentuation of the Pres. 



264 DIALECTS.-— CONJUGATION IN -/«. [§224. 

§224. Conjugation in -ft*. (les.) 

1. On ihe lengthened form of the second Pers. liOr^aOa^ didolada^ see 
§ 220, 2 ; on the Jleraiive forms in - a x o y, see § 220 ; on the Inf. forms in 
-fi!vai, -fiev, see §221, 18. 

2. Li the Epic, Ion. and Dor. writers, forms of -ew and -ow, § 172, Rem. 8, 
are frequent in the second and tliird Pers. Sing. Pres. and Impf., e. g. Tt- 
■&i7g, ii&il, didoXg, didoi, irl&si, ididovg, idldov, Vf t ; — contracted forms of 
\<TTi]^L are very rare, e. g. laia instead of 'iairifn Her. 4, 103. Resolution 
takes place in the Ion. second Aor. Opt. Mid. ■& eoi^Tjv, as if from OJiSl, 
e. g. n^og&ioiTO, TiQog&ioia&E. 

3. Verbs in -v^l form, in the Epic dialect, an Opt., not only in the Mid., 
as sometimes in Attic writers, e.g. dalvvTo II. (o, 665. (comp. Xilvio, §223, 
Rem. 3), from daivt'naL, but also in the Act., e.g. ly.dZfisp (instead of «x(5t'tj;- 
(lEv) from ixdvb}, (ptr} instead of q>vlT} from cpva ; so cp^lo, (pOtio Opt. of 
iopd'hiTiv fi'om qj&ico. 

4. The third Pers. PI. Impf and second Aor. in -s-aav, -r^-auv, -o-aav, 
-co-aav, -v-(Tav, are abridged in the Epic and Dor. dialects into -sv, -av, 
-ov, -iv, e.g. citify instead of «T/i^£a-«»', ed^ev, &iv instead of t&fuav; IVii/v, 
ffittv mstead of icnr^aav, (fd^uv instead of Xcf^r^aav, i^Sav, ^ixv instead of 
s^Tjaav, tdidoi/, dldov instead of idldoaav, Idov, Sgv instead of tiJoaav ; tcpvy 
instead oftcpiaav. 

5. The second Pers. Sing. Pres. Imp. Act. has in Hom. the common form 
'i<Tirjj but H. I, 202. y.a&l(TTa ; ttotc&ei. in Theoc. instead of noxl^ig or nqog^ 
■&£g from TIOEfL. In the second Pers. Sing. Pres. and second Aor. Mid. 
Imp., Homer rejects the a and admits the uncontracted form even when it 
could be contracted, e. g. dalvvo, (xugvao, cpuo, avy&io, tv&£0. In the Ion. 
dialect, the first « of the ending -aauL, second Pers. Mid. or Pass, is changed 
into s, after the rejection of the «j, e. g. sTt l (Txsai, dvvsai, instead of 
inidTuaai, dvvaaai, § I7'2, 2; hence the contracted forms Inlcnr^ in the 
Ion. poets, and also dvvrim the Tragedians. 

6. The short stem-vowel is sometimes used as long before personal- 
endings beginning- with ^ and y, according to the demand of tlie measure, 
e. g. iLd^i'intvog^ didovvaL; so also didcod^i, Xlr^&t, instead of'i).a&i. 

7. The third Pers. Sing. Subj. has often in the Epic dialect the ending 
-(Tif §220, 4, e. g. dwtcTi and 5w/;(ti (instead of ^w), lue&lrii. 

8. The contracted Subj. of verbs with the characteristic « and e is some- 
tames resolved in the second Aor., Epic dialect, and regularly in the Ion. by 
means of e, 

(a) Verbs in -a (taiTjui): 

(loTtt-) Icnu Ion. lcni-(o, io-te'-tj?, Itni-afisv, -i-rjTE, -e'-wcr* 

(oTtt-) (TTO) " OT€-a), (Tie-TJC, CTTf-WfiEV, CtC. 



§224. 



DIALECTS. CONJUGATION IN -p. 



265 



Remark 1. So also in Herod., nQOEariajs and kaiiaai, iaiftog, instead of 
-ttixai, -awe, Gen. ea-TfOiTog, Neut. taifcoc, Feni. iartuKTa. So also in the 
Att, tsd^yecog and ii&vt,xiog, jedvfcJaa, Tex}i'e(ag, Gen. jE^vswiog. 

(b) Verbs in c {rl&i][^i), 

Ti&(o Ion. Tidi-oj, Ti&i-Tjg, ti^s-wjjUv, -b-tjts, -i-aav 
ji&WfiaL " Jid^s-ojfitti, iidi-ri, etc. 

■&oJ " -de-M, S^s-)]g, ds-(x)uiv, etc. 
■&6jfjtai " S^i-fa^uai, etc. 

Rem. 2. Here also the two Aorists of the Pass, of all verbs are like the 
verb li&Tjixi, e. g. 

TU7TW, -ijg Ion. Tl'TTEW, -£//?, -SW^USV, -itJTS 

fVQS&w, ^fjg " ti'Qt&iw, -ejig, etc. 

(c) Verbs in o ((5tJo)/it) ; the contracted second Aor. Subj. is resolved in 
Homer by means of w, e. g. 5w wcrt instead of duaL. 

9. In the Subj. second Aor., Homer uses the following forms, according 
to the nature of the verse : 







Contracted, 


Resolved and lengthened forms, 


S. 


1. 


(TlbJ 


(TTEft), oTt/o), ^do^at 




2. 

3. 




aii]j]g 


D. 




(TTi]TOV 


Tiai}(Tir,nov 


P. 


1. 


aioifjiev 


(nsufisv dissyllabic, (txho^usv, y.oLTcn§HO(itv 




2. 


ffxijlE 


(txiUjs 


S. 


3. 
1. 


&bj 


aTB(a(Ti{v), 7tsQiaTi](a(Tt, 11. g, 95. 


D. 


2. 
3. 




S-srjg, drijig and ^ilrig 
-dsTj, ■&i]r], avi]7] and ixE&sij] 


P. 

S. 


1. 
2. 
3. 
1. 


'&b)jABV 

«5c5 


da^dijs 


P. 


2. 
3. 
1. 
2. 


db) 

dbJrs 


ddi7](n and dwj] 

duOflEV 




3. 


5wcn{v) 


dbm(n{v). 



Rem. 3. The resolution by means of e is found in verbs with the stem- 
vowels « or £ ; the a is commonly lengthened, (a) into ei before a Pi-mute ; 
(b) into T} before t] in verbs with the stem-vowel a ; (c) sometimes into h, 
sometimes into r/ before r], in verbs with the stem-vowel s. Verbs with the 
stem-vowel o are resolved by w. 

10. The Impf hl&rjv, or commonly iil&ovv, has in the Ion. the 
form ixi^sa (like iuivcpstt Ion. instead of iinvqtsiv, § 220, 8), iti&sig, 
-c€, etc. 



266 



DIALECTS. CONJUGATION IN -fll.'~'El[ll\ T O B E . [§ 225. 



11. In Homer a shortened form of I'trTTjo-ay, first A or., is found, name- 
ly I'orao-ttv, tfiey placed, II. //, 56. Od. y, 182, or, 307 ; also larrjie (with another 
form idUjTs) II. 5, 243, 24G, instead of taiuic (iffTi/xttic). 

12. In the third PI. IMid. or Pass, tlic v before the personal-endings -rat 
and -TO is regularly rhaiigcd, by the Ion. Avriters, into «, § 220, 13, e. g. 

Tiv>£«ra£, diSoaToci, edsixvvaTo Ion., instead ofjldivTui, etc. 
But when an a })recedes the v, the a is changed into f, and v into a, e. g. 
laiiuxaL Ion., instead of ((jTwjrat, lariaro Ion., instead of t'o-TavTO. 

13. Tlie thii-d Pers. Sing, is like the Dor. -ti, e. g. Xaiixxi, tI&tjti, dldojTi, 
ddy.vvTi, and the third Pers. PI. ends in -vii, e. g. IcnavTi, iidivit, didovii, 
dsiy.vvvTi. 

14. The forms of the first Aor. Mid. i&rjy.ufirjv and idcaxufjrjv and the 
Part. ^rjy.ocfiEi'og are found in the Ion. and Dor. writers ; on the contrary, 
the Att. writers use here, the forms of the second Aor. Mid. The remain- 
ing Modes, as also the Part. dooyMfarog, are not found. 

15. From didcofit, Homer has a reduplicated Fut. di5a)ao}Asv and didMaeiv. 



225. EliJii(EZ-), to he. 



(190.) 



PRESENT. 1 




Indicative. 


Subjunctive. 


S. 1. 


ilj{il JEoh, instead of ia-fit 


1. Iw Ep. and Ion. utTiita Ep. 


2. 


iiial Epic, also Em\ Hel. 1250. 


2. 1}?? Ion. 




dg Ion. 


3. t/?, £/][o-i, 7/0-/, ft); Epic, I'tj 


3. 


irtl Dor. 


Epic and Ion. 


P. 1. 
2. 


d^xiv Epic and Ion. 
iaii regular 


PI. E(x)UEi\h]TF,Ea)ai Ep.andlon. 


Imperative. 
S. 2. t'o-o-o ^ol. and Epic 
P. 3. i6vTb)v Ion. 


3. 


l'(Jfri(v) Epic and Ion., hd Dor. 


Inf. ffifvai, Bfifiirai, i'^tsv, I'p^sv Epic 
rj^iv or ij}iEg, h/xev or HfXEg Dor. 


Participle. 




iouv, iovan, iuv Ep. and Ion. 


IMPERFECT. 




Indicative. 


Optative. 


S. 1. 


I« (comp. ixl&sa), i)a, eov, taxov Ep. and Ion. 




2. 


ii]a&n Epic, tag Ion. 


Eoig 


3. 


£/yv Ep. and Ion. i]riv, i]ev, e(txs Ep., i]g Dor. 


Eoi Epic and Ion. 


D. 3. 


r,(TT7jv Epic 




P. 1. 


TifiEv or >]^if?, EifXEv or f/^5$ Dor. 




2. 


I'^Tf Ion. 


eIte Epic 


3. 


Edup {sTxeaav) Epic and Ion. ; d'aio instead of 
i]vw Od. I', 106. 


£i«v Epic 


Fut. taofiui and taao^cd, etc. Epic, according to the necessities of the 


verse, 2. easuL, 3. ecTSiai, idHiai. 



§§ 226, 227.] DIALECTS. VERBS IN -0) LIKE VERBS IN -fit. 267 



§226. Eljii (I-), to g-o. (192.) 

Pres. hid. S. 2. ilaOa Epic, iiq Ion. Suhj. S. 2. Yrfada Epic 

//i/. t//5»'«/, /jufv Epic 

Imp/. Lid. S. 1. ifia (and j^'ftv) Epic and Ion., ij'iov Epic 

2. 7)'^? (i^'i<^ /;t'^'), /f? Epic 

3. )l'is (and ?;'«) Epic and Ion., ififv Epic, //£(»'), l'f('') Epic 

P. I. 7;0jUSV 

3. i'l'iov Epic, l/io-ay and r/aay Epic and Ion., I'aav Epic 
D. 3. £>?}»' Epic 
0/?f. S. 3. i'oL Epic, t£/?j II. T, 209. (al'/^v and fl'/j H. o, 83. w, 139. 
Od. ^, 496, come from ilfii). 
Fat. and ^or. Mid. sl'ao^cxL, Hnuro, tliii'd Pars. Dual efi(Tua&T}v U. o, 544. 

Verbs in -co, which ix the Pres. and Perf. and in the second Aor. 
Act. and Mid., follow the analogy of Verbs in -^u. 
§227. (1) Second Aor. Act. and Mid. (204-210.) 
In addition to the Aor. forms mentioned §§ 191, 192, the poetic and espe- 
cially the Epic dialect has the following : 

A. The Characteristic is a Vowel. 

(a) S t e m - V o w e 1 « [s^rjV) ^^-) - 

^dXXto, to throw, Epic second Aor. Act. {BAA-, i'^lr]v) ^Vfj^lrjirjv Od. qp, 15, 
Inf. ^vfi^^h'jfisvai instead of -Tivai, II. (p, 578 ; Epic second Aor. Mid. (c/^A?)- 
firjv) t^XrjTO, ^ifii5Xr}VT0 II. $, 27, Inf ^Xija&ai, Part, ^b'jfuvog, Subj. |i|i- 
^).TjTai, §Xi]nai instead of (Sb'irixai, Od. q, 472, Opt. ^Xtlo (from BAE-y 
comp. nlfi7tli]ui) II. v, 288. Hence the Fut. (jh']ao^a.i. 

yrioLtbi, or yr^Quaxb), to grow old, second Aor. third Pers. Sing. iyi]Qu II. q, 
197, yarr/riQu Herod. 6, 72, Inf. (Att.) yr^Quvai, Part. (Epic) '/rjoag. The u 
is used instead of tj on account of the preceding q. See 8i8()n(jy.(t}, § 192, 1. 

xtelvm, to kill. Epic and Poet, second Aor. Act. [KTA-) ; v/.iuv retains the 
short vowel, thus s/.tu^sv, ty.Turs, thu'd Pers. PI. also txiur instead of 
imuaav, Subj. xtw, (first Pers. PI. xif tn//«r Epic), Opt. y.JtxhjV, Lif xravai, 
Epic xTufisv, y.iafjivca. Part, y.iag', Epic second Aor. Mid. with Pass, 
sense, uniy.Jtno, y.iaa&ai, y^aTaxToiusvog. 

ovidw, to wound, Epic second Aor. Act. ovia third Pers. Sing., Inf. oira- 
(isvai, oviafjiv (the a remains short as in I'y.Tuv) ; Epic second Aor. Mid. 
ot't«,ufj'o?, wounded. 

ntlu^ix), to approach. Epic second Aor. Mid. inh]ni]v, (Att. inXufxrjv), tiatjto, 

TlXijVTO. 

nXvid^b) {jiifmXTjfii,), to Jill, Epic second Aor. Mid. tnXi^TO and tiXijto, I'tt^tjvto, 
also in Aristoph., in the following forms also, Imp. ttAj^o, Part. i^nXr^- 



268 DIALECTS. VERBS IN -» LIKE VERBS IN 'fil. [§ 227. 

fiivog. Opt. i(j.T[lrifiT}v with the variation iiinXti^i]v, as XQiiri from XQ^'r 

(aw) and ^Ulo from i^h]^riv [BAA-]. 
TtJijaiToi, to shrhi/c with/ear, Epic second Aor. Act. [TITA-) [Xjitiiv) xaTanjiizijv 

tiiird Pers. Dual. 
(p&ayb), to come before, Epic second Aor. Mid. cp&dfifvog. 

Remark. From tiSrjv {(ialvM) are found in Homer the forms ^uTr,v (third 
Pers. Dual) and vnig/juaav (third Pers. PI.) with the short stem-vowel. 

(b) S t e m - V o w e 1 e {^a^rjv, 2BE-) : 
JAJl, Epic, stem of diduay.a, to teach, second Aor. Act. {JAE-) iddrjv, I 
learned, Subj. 8abj, Epic duslo), Inf datjvca, Epic daijfiEvai. 

(c) Stem- Vowel i: 
(jp^t-yw, to consume and to vanish, Epic second Aor. Mid. i(p&tfi7)v, q>&h&ai. 
cp&ifxEvog, (pdia&b), cp&iojiiai, Opt. (p&t^riv, (pdlio. 

(d) Stem- Vowel o {i'yvm', FNO-]: 
^iSoojay.fa, to eat, Epic second Aor. Act. I'/Sfjav. See § 161, 6. 
Trilwa) (Epic and Ion. corresponding form of nXica), to sail. Epic second 
Aor. Act. ETiXtav, mXoj^Ev, Part, nltxiq, Gen. nXwvxog. 

(e) Stem- Vowel i;(£5i7»'). 
x>li;w, Poet., to hear. Epic Imp. second Aor. Act. y.Xv&i, v.Xvjs and Kiy.Xv&iy 

xixXvis, § 219, 7. 
AuM, /o Zoose, Epic second Aor. Mid. Xvto, Xvvio. 
nvko, to breathe. Epic second Aor. Mid. [TINT-, from nviFoa, ttvsvo)) u/invvTO 

histead of «v£7r»'VT0, to breathe again. 
(Tsvto, to shake. Epic second Aor. Mid. iaavfurjv, I strove, IWuo, amo. 
xib), to pour, Epic second Aor. Mid. [XT-, from xiFoj, /no)) xvvxo, %vfi£vog. 

B. The Characteristic is a Consonant. 
aXXouat, to leap, Epic second Aor. Mid. uXiio, dXto, indXfiBvog, inidX^svogf 

Subj. uh]Tai. 
ccQUQiay.oi (AP), toft, Epic ag^svog,ftted. 
yivio, to take, Epic, from FiXio, since the Digamma is changed into y and 

the radical X before x is changed into v, § 203, B. 
yiyvofiai, to become, Poet, l/ti'io, yivTO. 
di/oyai, to take. Epic eSshto, Inf ^£/;!^«i, Lnp. di^o. The first Pers. iSiyfiip' 

and the Part. diyi.nyog\mYe, like the Perf didr/nai, the sense to expect. 
iXfXl^co, to whirl, Epic iXiXixto. 

Ixviouai, to come. Epic i/.to, 'ly-ixsvog and ly.^svog, favorable. 
AEXSl, to lie down, Epic iXiyfirjv, eXr/.TO, (same sense as iXs^dfirjv), Imp. Xi^o. 

uiiyw, to collect, to choose, to count, Od. i, 33.5. iXiy^rjv, Od. d, 451. Xixio 

agt&fioVf he recounted the number. 



§ 228.] DIALECTS. PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT ACTIVE. 269 

/imtVw, to soil, Epie fitav&rjv (tliird Dual, instead o{ ifiiuv-adtjv). 

filayai [filyyvfii), to mix, E\nc //txro. 

oQvCta {oQvvjji\ to excitCj Epic (oqto, Inf. oQ&ai, Part. oQfiivogf Imp. ogao, 

OQfflO. 

TxdXXo), to brandish, Epic ndkro, he struck, 

nsQ&b), to destroy, perdo. Homer uses ni^d^ai instead of niQd--(T\)^ai. 

JlErSl [jftj/vvfjii), iojix, Epic ni\niOj xajBTirjxto. 

§228. (2) Perf. and Plup, Act. (Comp.^^ 193, 194). 
(a) The Stem ends in a Vowel. 

yi/vofiai, to become ; FEFAA, Stem FA, Perf. (Sing, yiyova, -ag, -s) Epic 
and Poet, yiyufisv, -ate, daaiv, Inf Epic ysydfisv, Perf. Part yeybjg, yt- 
ywaa, ysydtg, Gen. ysymog ', — Plup. Epic iytyfydiijv. 

(itxlv(a, to go, Perf. ^i^rjxa, BEBAA, Epic and Poet. PI. ^e^a^ev, -urs, -aat 
and ^e^ixaar, third Pers. PL Subj. ^i^i^Siai (PL Phaed. 252, e), Inf /Jc- 
^uvai., Part Epic ^s^aiLq (also Attic prose /9f/Sa^?, Xen. Hell. 7. 2, 3), -via 
(/5f/?a)(Trt Pi. Phaed. 254, b),Gen. /5c^5awro$ {An. ^sffwiog); — Plup. i/ii^a- 
fiEv, -aif, -daav. 

dslSco, to fear; besides the forms mentioned § 193, the following Epic 
foiTiiS are to be noted, e. g. dEidifxsv, dBidng ; Inf dsi-SinEv instead of ds" 
disvai', Imp. deidi-di, Ssldits; — Plup. idsidifiEv, idsidiaav. 

£(>;fo^at, to come, Perf Epic (Ikrjkov&a instead of ik^lv&a, PI. Elh'jXov&fisv. 

^vi^axd), to die, Perf. Ti&vrjxa, TE0NA4i ' ^^* t^^voi^Ev, li&vajE, te&vSuji^ 4 
Imp. jE&vud-t, Part tE&vrjxwg, TE&vrjvla XE&vrjxog or jE&VEwg {TE&VEbiaa. 
Demosth. 40, 24), tE&VEoog (Epic TE&vtjaig, -(atog, -rjojog), Inf tE&V(xvai> 
( Aesch. 7E&vdvaL from xs&vaivai, Epic TE&vufiEV, -d^Evai) ; Plup. hi&va- 
(jav, Opt jE&vali}v. 

TAASl, to endure, (second Aor. l'r>L?;v), Perf. liiXrixa, TETJAA; Dual T«r>la- 
tov ; PI. xixld^EV, xixXaxE, xExX(xai{v), Imp. xixXd&i, -a tw, etc., Subj. want- 
ing, Inf xExXuvtti (Epic xExXd^Ev),\)ut Part. Epic xExXritag', Plup. Dual ixi- 
xXaxov, ixExXaxijv, PI. ixixXdfiEV, ixixXaxE, ixixXdaav, Opt xexXuItjv. 

MASl, to strive, Perf. (iifiova ; MEMAA ; Epic fiifAoifiEv, -axov, -axE, -daai, 
Imp. /xf/uttTW, Part. (iEfiacag, Gen. ^efxamog and ^Ejivioxog, third Pers. PL 
Plup. fii^uffav. 

Here belong the two participles of 

^i^Quaxb), to eat, (second Aor. E^gav), Perf ^i^gojxa, Poet /5c/?^w?, Gen. 

nlnxta, to fall, nsTixwxa, Epic nEnxEotg, Att. Poet, ttctitg)?. 

(b)The Stem ends in a Consonant. 

The following is to be noted in respect to the formation : When the con- 

36 



Perf. 


Ind.S. 
D. 2. 

Q 




P. 1. 

2. 
3. 



270 DIALECTS. PRESENT AND IMPERFECT. [§ 229. 

sonant of the 8teni comes before the personal-ending begining with t, the i 
is changed into i?>, and thus these forms assume the appearance of a Mid. 
form, e. g. 

Ttei&b), to persuade,7iinoi&a,io trust, Epic Plup. ijisni&fnv, Imp. in Aeschyl. 
Eum. 602, niniiadi instead ofninKT&i. 

Remark. So the Epic form niioa&f, stem IIENO with o the vowel of 
variation {I/ONO), instead of mnorOaif from nud'/o) ; from nmorOmi 
comes n^gTTOi'^Tf; and hence (;T67roj'OTf) TifTrocrTf, (comj). i5-ii = Xaii)\ final- 
ly, this form, as has been seen, assumed the appearance of the Mid. form 
[■&i) and so became ninouO^s. 

y.sy.Q(x'/tt,-ag,-^v){7<Qoi^(0, to bawl), Plup. iy.r/.odyeiv, -fig, -ft 
y.v/.f^ayaTOV y.i/.Qcr/Jfov iy,iy.()d/Hrov l/.iy.Q(r/d^ov 

y.iy.qiiyajov y.s/.Qiy.y&ov iysyQixytirrji- iyfyQux^^v 

y.v/.Quya^w yJy.Qayfxtv ixsyQirybtuiv fy.iy.Quyfisv 

yy/.QayaTS y.iy.Qay&s iy.sy.QayeiTs h.iy.Qu/^B 

yEy.Qixyacn{v) eyEXQayeiaur, -forxv 

Imp. y.i/.Qax&i, -ax&w, -ay^s, etc. Lif. yr/.gr/yivai. Part. y.t>:Quyo)q. 

So the Epic Perf. urwya with the sense of the Pres. / command, uvwyagf 
avcoys, PI. uv coy ^ev, Imp. uv(oys and uvo)/ & l, avbryiiOi) and a v w- 
%& (a, avMysi8 and civ coy & e; Subj. avcoyr] ; Inf. ufojysy.sv ; Plup. r^vcxtytu , 
i]vcx}yu ; Opt. avixryoig. 

iyEtQco, to awaken, Perf. iygrjyoQa (stem "EFEP with the vaiiable o), to wake 
up ; from this, Homer has the forms, Lnp. ey()ijyoQ&s instead of iy^rjyo- 
gcxTS, Jnf. fygrjyoQ&UL {as if froui iygrjyog^uai) and iygriyugd^uaiv instead 
ofiygtjyogaaiv tliu'd Pers. PI. 

oldtx, I know, the regular forms ol'dttfxBv, oldars, ol'dcxcri are found but rarely 
in the Ion. and Att. writers, § 195, 1), second Pers. oldag in Hom. and 
Ion. (rarely Att. § 195, 1). The form Id-fiev is Epic, Ion. and Doric. Inf. 
i'dfisvcxt and I'dfisv Epic, Subj. Idica Epic instead of eldoj (Ion. Hdaca), Part. 
Idvicx Epic and sidvla. 

Plup. 1. Pers. Sing, fjdsa (hence the Att. i]8r]) Epic instead of ijdsiv ^ ^"^"^ - 

2. " " 7;£/(5fi? and ?)6£(J7;c Epic instead of j^'(5fic [Herod. ""^ 

3. " " risldet and rj£id)],ridsf, yjdssv Up. instead ofjid8i; — rjtids 
3. " PL i'aav Epic instead of fidtaav. 

Fut. HdrjCTco Epic and sl'crofiai. 
soiy.a, I am like. Epic, e'lxtov, Dual, sl'yjrjV Plup. Dual ; hence in Plup. Mid. 
or Pass. uxio. 



§229. (3) Present and Imperfect. (2i8.) 

Finally, there occur certain forms of the Pres. and Impf mostly in the 
Epic dialect, which after the analogy of verbs in -^l, take the personal- 
endings without the Mode- vowel. Thus, 



§230. 



DIALECTS. VERBS TO BE SPECIALLY NOTED. 



271 



aviio to complde, in Tlieocritus Imi)f. avv-fifg, instead of ?;vi;o;U6v, uvv-io, 

int^teacl ot'/)»'itTO. 
xavvoi, to stretchj to span, II. q, 393. loivv-jai, instead of TaviExat. 
iQvo), to draw, Sfjvxai, siqvio, sqvto, sqkto, ()1'(T&(xi, §230. 
asi'M, to shake, Epic Pres. (tevt»l and, by variation, ffovjai, Imp. o-ovao and 

abridged aor, aovd&e, croia&u^to move one^s self, to liasten. The Imp. has 

passed into the common language of conversation. 
%8(a, commonly ia&lco, to eat. Epic, Inf. edfisvai. 
qcc'^w, to carry, Epic Imp. (psQTE instead of cpsgeie. 



§ 230. Alphab etical List 
to be sp e ci 

^Aata {aFvKo), to hurt, to deceive ; Hom. 
has the following forms, Aor. uuaa 
and «o-« ; Pres. Mid. ««t«(, Aor. 
ua(SOi^i]v, Aor. Pass. caia&rfV. Verbal 
Adj. auTog ((/-««to?). 

ayctiof.tai, Ep. and Ion. prose, § 164, 
and uyuofAai, Ep., to wonder, and in 
the Pres. Ep. also to grudge, to envy, 
Fut. u/oi<Jufi(xi ; Aor. ijyucrocfirjv. 

a/iloo), to collect, Ep. second Aor. 
Mid. u/sQovTo, Part, aygofisvog, 
§223, 11; Plup. «/7/7f'^aTo; Aor. 
Pass. dysQ&T}, third Pers. PI. uytQ- 
■&fv ; Ep. Pres. riyi(ji&o^ai, § 162. 

ayvoib), to he ignorant, Ep. Aor. riy- 
voliias, § 207, 1, ayva'iaaay.E, § 205, 5. 

ayrvfji, to break, Aor. Ep. ij^a instead 
of £«!« ; third Pers. PI. Aor. Pass. 
aysv Ep. instead of eayrjoav. 

aycx), to lead, Ep. second Aor. Imp. 
of'lfTS, Inf. a^iuspni,, a^ifitv, §223, 10; 
first Aor. Mid. a^ua^t, a^avio. 

asi8(x), prose «(5w, to sing, Ep. second 
Aor. Imp. (ItLaso, § 223, 10. 

uiiQw, prose uiQca, to raise, Ep. first 
Aor. Act. UEiija, 3Iid. afiqafxriv. Pass. 
aeQ&r}v ; Ep. second Aor. Mid. agc- 
^i]v from tttjoo) ; Ep. Plup. cccdqto 
instead of 7]^to with the vowel of va- 
riation, and transposition of the aug- 
ment; Ep, Pres. 7)f^6^o,u«f, ^162. 

^AHMI, (aE-,) to blow ; in Homer are 
the following forms, e. g. Part. ocEig, 
uivTog ; third Pers. Sing. Impf. «//, 



of Verb s in the Dialects 
ally noted. 

au, diasL (^AJEJl) ; in the remaining 
forms, the tj remains, contrary to 
the analogy of %l&r]^i, §224,6, m?j- 
lov, aijvui, arifitvui ; Mid, and Pass. 
urijUttL, to blow, vofiEvog y.ctl ctijfXEvog, 
wet through and cold with wind; 
Impf Mid. arjTo. 

uldo/Atti and aidsofiai in Hom., to be 
ashamed, Ep. ai8{](jo^ai, fidi(Tv>7]v 
and fi8E(r6^riv. 

al'vvfii, Ep., to take, instead of at'^ru- 
fxai, § 169, Rem. 1, only Pres. and 
Impf. 

alqko, to take. Ion. Perf, aQotigrjy.a, 
aQalgrifiai, § 219, 8 ; Ep, second 
Aor. Mid. yivro instead of I'AiTO, 
§ 227, B. 

aiaaca, Ep. («, but vjiai^eL II. cp, 126; 
i) instead of ricro-w, to rush, Ep. forms 
i'fC^a, Subj. ac^M, Part, ai^ag-, Aor. 
Pass, ifCxdi]v, Inf aix^ijvui ; the Att. 
Tragedians use the followmg forms, 
a(j(T()} and auaw, commonly uiToa, 
axTM, fi^a, tt^ai and ^^«, «^«^. 

«tw, Ep., to hear, only Pres. and Impf 
a'iov. Comp, endiw. 

«xa/t^a), Ep,, to trouble, stem ^AXSl, 
second Aor. 7/'x«/ov ; Fut, ax«/7;crcu, 
fii'st Aor. i]Kayricru ; Mid. UHuyl^o- 
^ai, a/Ofiai or a/vvfiai, to be sad, 
Aor. r,y.ax6fiT}v, §219, 7; Perf «x??'- 
;^f^«t(§219,8, comp. aQi]Qf(^ai, oQco- 
QffjiaL) and axa%r,fiaL, third Pers. PI. 
ax??;f£5«Tai, § 220, Rem. 2, and wxtj- 



272 



DIALECTS.— VERBS TO BE SPECIALLY NOTED. 



[§230. 



Xionai, Part, uxijxsfievog and uxaxr]- 

fitvog, Inf. axa^7^yv^«t, §22:3,110111. 

4 ; Pliip. Kj). axaxdaio. 
axu/fitvogy Ej)., sfmrpened, pointed, 

from ^AKSl, acuo, instead of uxuy- 

fiEvog, §§19, Rom. 1, and 208, 2. 

The X comes from tlie Pcrf. Act. 
ax7]de(t), to neglect, Aor. axiideatv. 
aXaoixai, to wander about, Ep. Perf. 

aXdlrjfiUL, § 219, 8, ctXaki^(j,evog, aXa~ 

;t7j(/^af, §223, Rem. 4. 
aXdaivo), to make increase, Ep. Aor. 

ijXdave. 
aXi^o), to keep off, Ep. second Aor. 

^XaXxov, § 219, 7, from "AAKJI, 

aXaXxHV, aXaXxojv ; Fut. aXaXxijab). 
aXiofiai and aXEVo/Aui, Ep., to shun, 

Aor. TjXsva^rjv, Subj. ft>l€?jTat, Opt. 

M/lsatTO, Imp. aXiaffd^s, Inf uXsvaa- 

■&av and aXiaa&ai, § 223, 8. 
wAt^^^Jo-xw, aX&iaxbj, Ion. prose, <o fteoZ, 

Fut. aA^e'^w, etc. 
aXiTCilvw, Ep. and Poet, <o sin, Fut. 

aXiTrjtrw ; Aor. ^Xiiov, aXiTOfiriv, aXi- 

Thu&ai ; Perf. aXtti^fisvog, sinful, 

§223, Rem. 4. 
aXXop,m, to spring, Ep. second Aor. 

Mid. «A(7o, etc., §227, B. 
aXvxjia, to he greatly trouhled, Ep. 

Perf aXaXvxTTjfiai, § 219, 8. 
aXvaxo), Ep., to escape, aAvlw, i]Xv^a. 
aX(paiv(o, Ep., to find. Sec. Aor. aAqpcIr. 
otfiaQTttVM, to miss, Ep. Aor. ^jfx^Qo- 

Toy, §§223, 11, and 208, 3. 
a^nXttxiaxo), Ep. and Poet., <o err, 

Fut. a(xnXaxi](i(a ; Aor. ijfinXaxov. 
avddvo), Ep., Poet, and Ion., <o please, 

Impf cav^ftvor Herod., €7Jv5. and 

7JV5. (Ep.); Aor, I'a^oy Herod., adov, 

(Ep.); Inf dduv; Perf I'd da; Fut. 

dd7](T(o. Aug., § 219, 4, 5. In Theo- 
critus la^s; Ep. Aor. st'tt^oy, §§219, 

4, and 207, 3. 
avi'ivo&e, to spring up, Ep. Perf with 

Att. Reduphcation, § 219, 8, from 

"ANE0/1. 
dvtdoi), to meet, Ep. ijVTeov, § 222, A, 

(2); (TVvavT7]Triv, §222, Rem. 1. 
dvva), to complete, Ep. Impf in Theoc. 
avvfjisg, avvTOf § 229. 



iivo)ya, E[). and Poet. Perf to com- 
mand, ufojyjxtv. Imp. dvwxO^iy etc., 
§228; Phij). -^yw/fw, §220,8. In 
certain forms this Perf is changed 
into tlie inflection of the Pres., 
e. g. third Pers. Sing, dviayii, Impf. 
i'jvwyov and urojyov ; Fut. cxvw^w ; 
Aor. i'jvia^a. 

dnavQUb), Ep., to take away, Impf. 
unrji'Qojv, -ag, -« ; first Aor. Act. 
Part, unovgag ; first Aor. Mid. dnriv- 
(jixTO, Pa^ unovQdfiBvog. \}f^ /~s 

UTiacpiaxb), Ep., <o deceive, Fut. utto- 
qp7;aco, second Aor. Act. TJnaqiov, 
Opt. Mid. andcpOLTo. 

uTtsLXico, Ep. a;r«t>l?3Tijv, §222, Rem. 1. 

dnoeQae, an Ep. Aor., he hurried along, 
Subj. unosQaj}, Opt. a7ro£^(T«ts. 

uTiTfu, to join to, Ep. Aor. Pass, ect^- 
^rj,fell on. 

aQaqlaxw, Ep., <o /<, stem^Pil, first 
Aor. 7)^(ra, ctQaai, § 223, 6 ; first Aor. 
Pass, dgd^sv instead of T^Q^rjuav ; 
second Aor. ^Qagov, § 219, 7 ; also 
Intrans. to be adapted, to please, more 
usual than the first Aor. ; Perf o^«- 
Q(x, Ion. vcQTjQa, § 219, 8, / am fitted, 
Intrans., Ep. dgagvla, §223, 13, 
Perf. Mid. or Pass. dgrjQfpai, dgrj- 
Qspsvog, § 223, Rem. 4 ; Aor. aqp,t- 
vog, adapted, § 227, B. 

"APASI, dgdopni, to pray, Ep. second 
Aor. uiQi]fiEyaL Od. /, 322. 

agvvpai, to gain, § 188, 1. 

'ASI, Ep., (a) to hloiv, see arjfii ; (b) to 
sleep, Aor. aeaa, aaa^iv ; (c) to sa- 
tisfy, also Intrans. to be satisfied, Inf. 
*'dpevaL instead of dip,svat ; Fut. 
aaca ; Aor. ofVa, aaaa&aL ; verbal 
Adj. aajog, diog. 

Bahbj, to walk, to go, Ep. forms, Perf. 
^i(^afisv, etc., §228; second Aor. 
Dual ^dT7]v, third Pers. PI. vnig^a- 
(Tccv, §227, Rem., third Pers. PI. 
t(iav, §dv, § 224, 4, Inf ^ijusvai, 
Subj. /5«/w, /57]>;, puofxEv, and /?w. 
§ 224, 9 ; first Aor. Act. and Mid. 
Trans., to lead, s^Vjaa, il5r]adpr]v ; 
second Aor. Mid. i^i'iasTO, Imp. 
impricFto, §223, 10. Ep. form, /5t- 



§230.1 



DIALECTS. VERBS TO BE SPECIALLY NOTED. 



273 



{iu<T&(*)V, to slnlk, strengthened cor- 
responding ibrni lioni ^nlvu) ; also 
^i^«, l^i^uiyia, ^i^waa and ^t^dg 
from BIIillMl ; finally, Imp. ^uaxs, 
and Inf. tTii^aaxiufv. 

^liXXb), to throw, Ep. second Aor. 
f^Ajjv, 'f^X7un]v, § 227, A, (a), Fut 
^h}(TOfitti ; Ep. Perf. ^((ioXri^ai, used 
of the mind; but ^i^krj^ui, of the 
body. 

(SaQso), Ep., to be heavy, ^(^a^rjcjg, 
§ 223, 13. 

^epQu&oig, Ep., to eat, histead of /?<- 
figtuaxoig. 

fiiofiai and iSdofiai, to live, Ep. Fut. 
/5f/;, ^z6}ii<jx^a, ^ 223, 7. 

^laofiai, Ep., instead of ^la^ofjitti, to 
force, f/5t7/tr«To, ^e^lrjxs. 

^i^Q(i)ax(a, to eat, Ep. Aor. l'/5(>0)>', 
§227, A, (d); Perf Fart ^f/Sgc^g, 
-bJTog, § 228. 

pi.(x)(TX(ii, Ep. and Poet, to go, instead 
of (xXwaxo), § 18, 3, Aor. tftoXov, fxo- 
Xiiv, fioXwv ; Perf. fiSfi^Xcaxa instead 
of fiffisXcaxa; Fut. (xoXovfiai. 

I^odb), to cry out, Ep. Aor. I^wcra in- 
stead of t^SoTjaa, §205, 5. 

^ovXofiai, to imlly Ep. ^6Xnai,^6Xi(T&B, 
§207, 4, 7iQo(ii^ovXit, to prefer. 

^Qvxtto^ai, to roar, Ep. Perf ^e^Qv^a, 
with the sense of the Pres. 

FttiJiioi, to marry, Ep. Fut yix^i(a ; Ep. 
Fut. yafiiaaExai II. i, 394, will give 
in marriage. 

ydvxjfxai, Ep., to be cheerful, yavviai; 
Fut. yavvaasTttL. 

FAIL, Ep. Perf, yiya^ev, to have be- 
come,etc., § 228. 

yiy(ovu, Ep. and Poet Perf with the 
sense of the Pres. to cry out; in Horn., 
third Pers. Sing, ytyavs, also with 
the sense of the Aor., Part, yeyw- 
yw^. Inf. ysywvifiev; Plup. iytyoivti. 
From the Perf a Pres. has been 
formed, of which there are in Horn, 
the forms, Inf ysyotvtiv, Impf iye- 
yaivtvv. 

ynvofiai, Ep., to be bom, to be produced; 
Aor. Mid. to beget, to bear, Subj. ysi- 
vtai instead of ysivrjai. 



yivjo, to seize, § 227, B. 

ytjfidw, to grow old, second Aor. iyi]- 
qa, etc., § 227, A, (a). 

yodoi. Poet, to tvail, Ep. third Pers. 
PI. Aor. yoov. 

/Jalvi'fxi, Ep., to entertain, to feed, 
instead of daii-vv^i, § 169, Rem. 1, 
Fut dalao); Mid. daivvfiai, to feast, 
to spend, second Pers. Sing. Impf 
Ind. dalvv, dulvvo instead of e5«t- 
vvao, §224,5, third Pers. Sing. Opt 
dalviJTO instead of -vno, third Pers. 
PI. dociviaxo ; Aor. idaiadprjv. 

duloi, Ep., (a) to divide, § 164, Fut 
tVio-o/zat ; Aor., also prose, idaadfirjv ; 
Perf. Pass, dsdaiaxai, to be divided, 
broken ; (b) to bum, to inflame, Perf. 
8i8ris, he burnt ; Mid. to blaze, In- 
trans., second i\.or. Subj. ddrjxat.. 

dafivdo) and ddfivrj^ui, Ep. secondaiy 
form from dapdo), to subdue, from 
which comes thu'd Pers. Sing. Pres. 
dapvd ; third Pers. Sing. Impf. 
iddfjva and ddpvn, ddpvaaxs ; se- 
cond Pers. Sing. Pres. Mid. dapva ; 
— ddpvricn, ddpvufxai, etc. 

duQ&dvM, to sleep, Ep. Aor. sdgad^ov, 
§223, 11. 

duTeopai, Ep. secondary form, used 
in the Pres. and Impf, from 6aio- 
pai, to divide. 

JAP-, Ep. and Poet., (a) to teach (= 
8i8d(jx(x)), (b) to leam{= diddaxo- 
pfXL ; to (a) belong the Ep. second 
Aor. didae Hom., edae Theoc. and 
Apoll. ; to (b) belong dednatg Hom., 
^s^«a(7t in other authors; Ep. second 
Aor. Act iddrjv, I learned, §227, 
A, (b), from which Ep. du^(Topai, 
dsdarixa, dsdaijfisvog. From the 
Perf a new Ep. Pres. has been 
formed, dsddaa&ai, Inf Here be- 
longs also the Ep. Fut di'jw, about 
to find, to meet with, bring, dyjOfiiv, 
^^jm, §223, 7. 

dearo, Ep., it seemed, Aor. dodaaaxo, 
third Pers. Sing. Subj. dodaasjat 
instead of -rjiai. 

dsldb), to fear, the Pres. occurs only in 
the first Pers., Fut dnaofiui ; Aor. 



274 



DIALECTS. VERBS TO BE SPECIALLY NOTED. 



[§230. 



tdsKTUf Kp. iddiiua (as is prohahio 
originally tdFn(j(x), Perl! lOp. 8h- 
doix(x instead of didoix(x, and dtldiu 
Kp. instead of didiu, § 22K 

8iixvi(.ii, to show, ]on. {/I J IK) di^o), 
tds^u, etc. ; Mid. dfiy.vvfiui, m the 
Ep. dialect it also has the sense, to 
greet, to welcome, to drink to ; so also 
in the l\ni'. dddf/fuxL with the sense 
of the Pres., Sfidi/arui third Pers. 
Pi. ; Pliip. StldixTo, to welcome, 5ft- 
dsxaxo. 

SeQy.ojKxi, to see, E]). second Aor. 
Ed()(Xi(ov, § 223, 11. 

di/ofiai, to receive, Ion. daxo^uciL ; in 
Horn, this verb signifies also, to 
take, excipere, to await, e. g. an 
attack, a wild beast, in the follow ing 
forms, ds/aTai. histead of ds/ovKxi, 
§220, 13, 'll. ft, 147; Perf didtyfim 
with the sense of the Pres., Fut. 
dida^ofiai, excipiam, second Aor. 
Mid. £(5fxTo, etc., § 227, B ; Perf. 
Mid, dedoy.r]iJs.i>og, awaiting, lurk- 
ing, II. o, 730. 

dsvo) instead of dsFbi, Ep. instead of 
dsi}),to want, which comes from sdevr]- 
as, he wanted, drjaev, he was in want 
of; Mid. deiofiai, to he wanting, Fut. 

divfi(TOfJ(Xl. 

Jl/IHMI [/iE-), Ep. and older lonic- 
Att., Xen., corresponding to 5s m, 
to hind, didinai Xen. ; Impf. dldr] 
instead of edldi] II. A, 105. 

dl^rjiuttL, Ep. and Ion., to seek; it re- 
tains the T], (contrary to § 170, 1, 
comp. "AHMI); idi'CtjTO, idiCtjVTO, 
drCr,ff&ai, di^rjfAEvog in Herod. ; dl~ 
^TjiXL Horn., dipai Theoc. ; Fut. 
di^vaoficxL', Aor. idi^rjcrafir]v. 

JIIIMT, /JTE-, of the Act. only iv- 
disanv, third Pers. PI. Impf., II. a, 
584, they drove away; Mid., to make 
one run, to make flee, oftener to scare, to 
chase (specially with the Inf ), SUv- 
tai II. ip, 475, dlea&aL II. fx, 304, 
Subj. du]jui, diMviuL, Opt. diono, 
comp. ji&oiTO. 

dlb), Ep., to flee, dts, dddis, Slav, I fled. 



dovnib), Ep., to sound, ]*erf. dtdov- 
noviog', Aor. idovnriau and r/dov- 
nrjau from I/JOTJI-, comi). -ixjnxo) 
and xTi'Tifco). 

dvvuf^ui, to be able, second Pers. Ion. 
dvvtfxi', Aor. Ep. idvfdadrjV and 
edwrjaoifiriv. 

8vb), to wrap up, Ep. dififvai instead 
of duvui from 'idvv; Ep. second 
Aor. Mid. dvcrtio, dvuio, 8va6^ivoq, 
§223, 10. 

^EyuQM, to awake, Ep. Aor. lyquo, I 
awoke, etc., §223, 11 ; Ep. forms of 
Perf. i/gi'i/OQa are iyQi'iyoQ&s, etc., 
§228. From the Perf has been 
formed the Pres. iygriyoQObiv, watch- 
ing, Od. V, 6, as if from fygriyoQuo). 

tdoj and ta&b), Ep., to eat {== itr^lbt), 
Inf sdfisvaL, §229; Impf edov and 
edtaxov ; Perf idr}8b)g ; Perf Mid. 
or Pass. idi]doTai. 

^EOSl, from Avhich come the Ep. e^mv, 
wont, accustomed, and the Perf ilbJ- 
^a, § 140, Rem. 3. 

^EI/ISl, 'fzlSl, Aor. ildov, I saw, Ep. 
i'dov, Inf idhiv, Subj. i'5o)jUt ; Ep. 
Pres. Mid. si'dsTai, it seems, eidoixE- 
voc, appearing, making like ; Fut. 
il'aofiaL ', first Aor. elao!^ur}v and isiad- 
l^7]v, H(joc}.in'og and ssiadufvog, § 219, 
4; second Aor. Idoijrjv, I saw. 

"EIKSI, third Pers. Sing. Impf dxe, 
it appeared, II. cr, 520 ; Perf soixa, 
I am like, Ep. third Pers. Dual 
uy.rov and Pliip. i'i'y.Trjv, § 228, Part. 
eoty.fjig and II. qp, 254. dy.b'ig, Hxvla 
and II. (T, 418. doiy-muL ; Ep. Plup. 
Mid. I'iiy.TO and ukjo, it was like. 

slXvo), Ep., to cover over, slkiabj, fi'lv- 
fiai, third Pers. PI. hIv(xtcci', from 
iXvb} comes Aor. Pass. iXm&rjv. 

sllbi, to press, to drive, from which in 
Hom. only nXof-isrog ; in the same 
author, hUm, ieUfov ; the rest are 
from ^EA, e. g. skacxv, Inf sX(T(xl and 
iiXaai, Part. iX(7(/.g, §223, 6; ssXji4aL, 
edusvog ; second Aor. Pass. idXrjv 
from sXXm, third Pers. PI. aXsVf 
dXrfVai, and dXr/fisvai, dXsig. 



§230. 



DIALECTS. VERBS TO BE SPECIALLY NOTED, 



275 



fi>/, /o6e, §225. 

(ifiij to "fo, § 22(). 

fifjyci), to shiU out, E|). Inii)f. tQya&oy, 
§ lt)2. Conip. tQ/b). 

ilQOjjai, Il\). and Ion., to ask, Inii)f. 
tly6fit]v; Flit. HO}'i(TOfini', second 
Aor. ijoujjtjv, Siibj. s'fjaijjfd^a, Opt. 
l'(joiTo, inf. tofddttL in Horn, ^vitli 
the accent of the Pres. ; — Ep. cor- 
responding forms of tlie Pres. (a) 
iQBOfiai, soiffTx)^ni ; Ini])f. eoiorio ; 
(b) sgio), Subj. egebt^fv, Opt. igioi- 
(Aiv, Part. eQebw. 

""EIPrMI, see f^rw. 

HQbi, Ep. and Ion., sero, to string, 
first Aor. i^tioag, exserens, Herod. 
3, 87 ; Ep. Perf Mid. or Pass. !>()- 
fxai, fs^insvog, in Herod. eQfxivog, 

Phip. hQTO. 

a'oti), to say, Pres. only Ep., Fut. iow, 
Ep. eoib). 

siaa, Ep. Aor. I placed, from the stem 
"^EJ-, comp. sed-eo, Opt. uviaai^i. 
Imp. Hdov, Part, hang [urtaavTfg; 
VTiiiaag Her. 3, 126. 6, 103), Inf 
iffitraui ; Aor. 3Iid. ifrri^r^v and tfcr- 
ffttTo, Part, iq^saad/xsrog (Her. 1, 66. 
flaiijusvoi), Imp. icpiaaai ; Fut. iqia- 

iXttiro), to drive, Pres. e7«w, Ep. tAo'o) ; 
Impf. Ep. UMv ; Fut. Ep. iXocoai 
instead of e).b)cn ; Ep. Perf elr/'/.d- 
fifvog, §223, Rem. 4, third Pers. 
Sing. Plup. iXr,XddHTo, § 220, Rem. 
2; Ion. Perf i).ri).ua}iaL and Aor. 
Pass. TiXdirdr/V. 

iXdiXbi, to whirl, Ep. second xlor. 
Mid. iXs).LATo, § 227, B. 

ivBJTbi or irrinb), Ep., fo Sflf?/, ^o fe/Z, 
Impf with the sense of the Aor. 
Evsnov, svvfnov, Aor. hviauov, (comp. 
iaTTo^TjV from tnouai), Imp. ivlamc, 
Subj. (viffrtbJ, Opt. erlanotfui, Inf 
ivKTUHv, Fut. ivlifjbi and hL<snr\a(a. 

ivijvo&a, Ep. Perf from 'ENOSl or 
'LNEOH with the sense of the 
Pres. and Impf, infrr,rod£, to sit on, 
II. /5, 219. /o /?e on, H. Cer. 280. 

iylmo), Ep., /o c/iu/e, second Aor. eV- 
mTTOJ', riv-tnansv, § 219, 7. 



i'rvvfji, to clothe, E[). and Ion. fiVr/it; 
Ej). Fut. fWoj ; Aor. laau and t'aa, 
6CTff«iU?/v, iiaauxo, haaa&in ; Perf. 
fi^cfi, fio-«t and raaa/, ftiMt, etc., 
flfAsroc ; second Pers. Phip. iuao, 
third Pers. t'o-roand I'iaro, third Pers. 
Dual f'a&riv, third Pers. PI. fVwro ; — 
on Uaauro, fWro, comp. § 219, 4. 

toiy.u, I am like, § 228. Comp. 'ElKfL. 

ijiaib), to understand, Aor. inriiua [i] 
Herod, and ApoUon., § 130, Rem. 1 ; 
the Poet. «tw is found onh* in Pres. 
and Impf 

inuvijlcyy.o^uL, Ep. and Poet, to re- 
ceive advantage or injiuyfrom a thing, 
Aor. ejirjVfjojjrjV, innVQsa&ui, first 
Aor. inTjVQdurjv in Aeschyl. and in 
the later writers ; Fut. inavi)r,aofiaL. 
The Act. in the sense, to touch, to 
injure, is found in Homer, e. g. se- 
cond Aor. Subj. inaigrj, Inf inav- 
QHV, e:iuVQSusv. 

inlaju^ai, to know, second Pers. ijiia- 
TTj Ion. Poet. 

I'.TO), as a simple, in x\ct. only Ep. in 
the sense tracto aliquid II. ^, 321 ; 
generally used as a compound, 
e. g. ntoiinw, dunb), etc., second 
Aor. Act. ecrnov instead of ta-snov, 
in Homer inianov, inianHr, inia- 
7ib)v ; Fut. Ep. eq^eiptLg ; Mid. also as 
a simple, generally signifying, to fol- 
low ; Impf Ep. kn6}.ir,v instead of 
ujioijriv; Fut eipojuai ; second x\or. 
Mid. ecrjiofAVtV, aTTsa&ai; Ep. fonns, 
auHO, ecTTiecrf^w, Subj. t(j7ib)^ai. Opt. 
eanoljjriv, Inf sauiaduL and anea- 
d^ai. Part kajTOfisrog. Herodot has 
from TtiQUTiM also nsQUCpdi'jPai and 
negiiipBad^aL instead of nsQucp&ri- 
(Tta&ui. 

s(jyo}, commonly iioyo), Ep., instead 
of Jtjo/D), to shut in and shut out, with 
the corres]ionding££^/vt^a<, ioyd^oi, 
iiQyd&b), Aor. to^u ; Perf Mid. or 
Pass, hoy^ai, third Pers. PL I'^/a- 
T«t, third Pers. PI. Plup. Hqxccto 
and sQ/uTo ; Aor. Pass. iox&Big. 

eodb) and qsCm, Ep., to do, Fut ^£?w, 
Aor. iQ^B^a and tQs^a, or %|w, tQ^a ; 



276 



DIALECTS. VERBS TO BE SPECIALLY NOTED. 



[§230. 



Perf. t'oo/fjf, Pliij). iuQ/Hv, § 140, 
Rem. 3, Perf. Mid. or Pass. t(Q/- 
(jtirog, Aor. Pass. ^f/L^f/?, ^fx&ijvai. 

igsldb), to propf Ep. Perf. i(jrioiduxai, 
§ 211), 8. 

igdnw. Poet, and prose, to throw doimi, 

E]). Plup. EQBQniJO, ^ 2PJ, 8. 
iQidahd), Ep. tojight, Aor. Mid. igidi^- 

sQi^o), to fight, Ep. iQi^ofiai, Perf. Mid. 

sQi^Qicrpai, § 219, 8. 
EQ^b), to wander, Ep. Aor. igtrai, 

hurry away ! § 223, 6. 
tQi'^aivw, Poet., to redden, Fut. igv- 

igyxbi, to keep off, Ep. second Aor. Act. 
TjQmaxov, sQVxaxhiv, § 219, 7. 

igixo and sIqvw, Ion. and Ep., <o draw, 
Fut. iQviJio {(Td) and Ep. sQVovffi', 
Aor. I'^vtra ((Ttr) and Eigvaa', Fut. 
Mid. igvaofiUL and Ep. igmaS^ai ; 
Aor. 6QV(jdiJ,i]v {aff) and dgvadprjv; 
Perf. Pass, third Pers. PI. nqvajat 
D. I, 75, and Plup. etiowio H. o", 69. 
UQvajo H. o, 654, (of ships dra^^^l to 
land, V long in the Ai'sis); Plup. 
Mid. (Xqvto (cpdayayov^ had drawn 
the sword, v long in the Arsis) ; Od. 
X, 90. Secondly the Mid. in Horn, 
and Poet, takes the sense to save, 
to shelter [froin danger) ; in this sense 
there are the following forms, sqU- 
ao, iiQvxo and hqvjOy which are to 
be regarded as sjucopated forms of 
the Impf. The sense, to guard, has 
tvvo Mid. corresponding forms, (a) 
Ep. ^EIPTMI, Inf. HQi'iitvai Hes. 
Opp. 816 ; Mid. uqvmm to guard, in- 
stead of Hfjvvuxi, Inf Eova&m, £t'- 
Qva&ttL ; — (b) Ep., Poet, and, though 
veiT rare Att. prose gio^ai. Inf. 
Qva&ai instead of Qvsa&ai ; Impf. 
third Pers. Sing, eqvto, ivas watched, 
Hesiod. Th. 304, third Pers. PI. 
gvar instead of sgvovio {were pro- 
tected)', Aor. iggvadfir^v and Ep. gv~ 
ad^r]v, but H. o, 29, Qvadfirjv. 

EQxo^ani, to go, Ep. Perf slXi]Xov&a, 
first Pers. PI. elXtilov&fievj Ep. Aor. 

7j}.V&0V. 



€/ft), to have, E[). Aor. taxi&ov, a/E&oy 
and taxov, § 162; Ep. Perf. o;|fajxa; 
Ep. Phip. indixoLio, they were dosed, 
II. /u, 340. 

Jf(iai, to sit, i'aiai, laro Ion. and ua- 
jui, f'iajo Ep., instead ofyjvjai, yjVTO. 

r}fiV(a, Ep., to sink, Perf. vntfivripijxe, 
to let the head sink, II. ^, 491. This 
form has the Att. redupHcation 
iji-Tjpvxi, § 219, 8, and strengthened 
by V, § 208, 5. 

Oigofiai, Ep., to warm, one^s self, Fut. 
■&6gaoijai, §223, 6; Aor. i&igrjv, 
Subj. S^egico. 

■drjXib), Ep. and Poet, to sprout, Fut. 
d^rilriata, etc. ; Perf. js&rjXa [lex^a- 
Xvla Ep., § 223, 13 ; second Aor. 
e&aXov. 

OHnSl, Ep., to stun, Perf. le&rjna; 
Plup. kii^rinm ; second Aor. (from 
TAfliPJ) httcpov. 

^vrtcrxa, to die, Perf. ji&vrjxa, PI. t«- 
^va^sv, etc., § 228. 

^gataxw, Ep., Ion. and Poet., to spring, 
Aor. sd^ogov ; Fut. -^ogov^m, Ep. 
■d^ogio^at,; Perf. Ts&oga. 

'idgoca. Ion., to sweat, ldgfj)ai, IdgojVTtg, 
Idgojcra, Idgcaijv, § 137, Rem. 1. 

'irjfit, to send, Ep. and Ion., Aor. srjxa ; 
Fut. i]cr(o, but Od. a, 265, dviasi ; in 
the Ep. and Ion. dialects, there 
are several forms from the theme 
'ill, e. g. ttvlei instead of dvirjai, 
Her., ^vviov instead of ^vvUaav 
Hom., ffisiUxo and (isfisrifiivog He- 
rod., instead of fis&uTo, fis&stpi- 

VOQ. 

Ixviofiai, to come, Ep. Pres. ha and 
Lnpf. ixov ; Ep. Aor. l^ov, § 223, 10, 
and Ixio, etc., § 227, B. 

"IJHMI instead oflylA, to he merciful. 
Of the Act. only the Ep. Imp. Urj^i, 
be merciful (in addresses to the gods) 
instead of Ud&i, § 224, 6, as in 
Theoc. 15, 143, Subj. Ep. IXrjxtjffi ; 
Plup. Opt. Ep. U^'xot; Mid. Poet. 
Uafiat, to appease, 

I'adjuL^ Dor., to know, I'atig, Xadji, t'cra- 
p,iv, Part. Xdoig. 

Kalvvfiai, £p., instead of xttidvv(jiai, 



§ 230.] 



DIALECTS.— VERBS TO BE SPECIALLY NOTED. 



277 



§ Itji), Rem. 1, from tlic thonio KA/t, 
to excel, P(Mf. xixu[jf.i(xi ; Plui). «xf- 

x«tw, to burn, Ej). Aor. t'x»;«, Trag. 
txf«, Suljj. unofiiv instead of-o)|Uf»', 
Opt. third Pers. Sinjr. y.i]ai, third 
Pers. PI. x>;«/f»', Inf. ySnn (in the 
OdASS. also xfm/, niioj-nv, y.tiavxfo)', 
Aor. Mid. fxt]iiiji]v, y.r/i^fvoq (in tlie 
Od} ss. y.H(ii/.teroc, yeiavio) ; second 
Aor. Act. ixar^v, I burned, Intrans., 
Inf. x(xi]}tsvui. 

xdfivb}, to weary one's self, Ep. xexut]- 
(oc, -bJToc, -oroc, § 2Q3, 13, Ep. se- 
cond Aor. Subj. xfx«'/ia), §219, 7. 

xtifiui, to lie, in Horn, y.eoviui, as if 
from yJo^iai ; Ej), and Ion. y.inaif 
yMffdai ; second Pers. Sing. 'Aiiaai 
and >£H«i, third Pers. PI. y.uviui and 
Ep. y.fiaiai, and Ion. xiuTai, Subj. 
xe'tDua/, third Pers. Sing, xfjiat ; Impf. 
xEUTo and y.siuro Ep., instead of 
Ixfij'To ; yiaxETo ; Ep. Fut xf/co, xe'w, 
xsloir, y.i(x)v, y.sii^fv. 

xd'obi, to shear, Ep. xsqcoj, exsgaa, § 223, 
G, but ty.iioafji]v. 

yskkb), to drive, Ep. txsXa-a, § 223, 6. 

xelouixi, Ep. and Poet., /o wrg-e, Fut. 
xfh'jaofKni, first Aor. iy.eXrja(ii.ir]v', 
second Aor. iy.sy.X6fj.Tjv, etc., § 223, 
11. 

XEVTEO), Ep., <o sting, stimulo, Aor. 
airaai, § 223, 6. 

HiQnvvvfii, to mix, Ep. X6(>«w (;«£() wv- 
Tffc) and y.foalb), (Imp. xsQaif), xigvao) 
{xigrag, Impf. e/.iQvn) and y.cQvrjfxi 
(Impf e)ii(/rr], y.iQvuc); Ep. Mid. x£- 
QMviaL (as if from xsQafiai) ; Impf. 
xf^owjTo Ep., instead of sxf^ituyTO 
from xfott'w. 

ttfodixlfot, to gain, in Ion. and later wri- 
ters e/iQdr](T(x ; y.fQd/jasd&ui and xe'^- 
davsoLtiv in Herod. 

x(v&b), Ep., ^0 conceal, Fut. y.fvaa), Aor. 
£x5i'fT« ; Perf. y.i/.w&a ; second Aor. 
txvSov, xidov, Subj. y.fxv&bj, § 219, 
7 ; Mid. only Pres. and Impf 

x»i(5o», fo ma/ce aiwioiLS, in the Act. only 
JEp. Fut. xij5i/'(rw; Perf xsxrjda, I 
37 



am anxious ; Ep. Fut. xundi'-aoijoii 
II. ;^, 353. 

xldrct/jni, Ep. corresponding form of 
cxtduvrifiai, to scatter, only Pres. 
and Impf 

xtrvfiui, Ep., instead of xiviofxrn, to 
stir one's self, to be moved. Pass. xi~ 
vi'fifvoq. 

xiQvub) and xIqvtjui, Ep. correspond- 
ing form of y.({}uvi'ifii, to mix, from 
which comes the Pait. xiqvaq, Impf. 
ixLQva and xIqvtj. 

xi/ixfcj and xi/jn'ofxai, Ep. and Poet., 
io reach, Aor. sxl/ov, Fut. xi/)iaofiai, 
not found elsewhere in the Att. 
poets; but Ep. Impf ixlyuvov, se- 
cond Pers* ixi/fig (from KIXE-) ; 
second Aor. Subj. xz/o) and xi/do), 
Opt xi'/driv. Inf. xi/i]V(ti, Part, xiyjig 
and Mid. y.ixt]f/£vog ; Aor. Mid. f xt- 

xtw, Ep., /o g-o, only Pres. and Impf. 
The Part, x/ojv is accented like taiv ; 
Aor. fiijsxia&ov, § ]62, 

xXa^M, to sound, Ep. Perf with the 
sense of the Pres. xixXriya, xsy-XTj/oig, 
PL xiyXi'jyoriig (as if from y.sxli]yo}) ; 
Aor. exXayov. 

xXiio), to shut, Ep. jmd Ion., x/.r//'c.), Aor. 
ixXt'fiaa (i), xXifLani; Perf. Mid. or 
Pass. xExXjjifxai, third Pers. PI. x£- 
xXsaTixi instead of xsxXrjaTaL', Aor. 
Pass. ixXrfLij&riv ; from the Ion. xP.?/'/'o) 
come the forms often found in the Att. 
Aviiters, viz. xA/^w, I'xAr/crw, xExXjificxi. 

xXsoj, Ep., ^0 celebrate, of which only 
xXsfiaL, Impf fxAs'o instead of fxAc'fo, 
§220,10. 

xAiw, Ep., ^0 ^ear. Imp. xXvs, xXveis ; 
second Aor. Imp. xXi&i, xXiJrs and 
y.iy.Xii&L,y.iy.XvTBj §227, A, (e); the 
Impf ixXvov is used instead of the 
Ind. Pres. 

xomo), to strike, second Perf xixona 
in Horn., instead of xexocprx. 

xoqivvifxi, to satisfy, Ep. Fut. xogiat 
andxoQEabi, Perf. y.ixoQTjftai, to which 
the Part, xsxoijr^cog, § 223, 13, in re- 
spect to its meaning belongs. 



278 



DIALECTS. VERBS TO BE SPECIALLY NOTED. 



[§ 230, 



9(0780) and xononui, Ep., to be anfpnj, 
first Aor. Purt. xoiiang-, Peri'. Part. 
x£xonj(.)c, § '^^'i, 13 ; Mid. Fiit. xoie- 
aofiui ((/a); Aor. ^xojfat'tfjiTjv {aa). 

xpMi'oj, to bawl, Poot. Pci-t". xiy.()ix/u, 
xixQity^iv^ etc., § 228. 

xoaivoi, E|). and Poet., /o complete, Ion. 
commonly xQaiuiyb), hn\)i'. i/.Qitlai- 
vov\ Ep. Fut. xoMj'EOj; x\or. bXQi^vu 
and Ep. fy.Qipjva, Imp. x^ijyov and 
Ep. x^t/Jjji^ov, Inf. xoijvat, and Ep. 
xQijijiui ; Ep. Perf. Pass. xf/.Qnaviui 
(Eur. xixQuvjcti) ; Ep. Fut. Mid. x^a- 

xTiivb), to kill, Ep. Fut. v.jcvioi) (Ep. 
Part. xT«)'£o?'Ta, xajnxrariovuiv and 
nuTifxmviia&t with the variable «); 
Aor. Ep. and Poet. I'xTttvo*'; Ep. 
second Aor. Act. Ixiwr, etc., § 227, 
A, (a) ; first Aor. Pass, third Pers. 
PI. bxTux^sv Ep., instead of exTa&r]- 
aav. 

y.VQSM, rarely xi^w, Ep. and Poet., to 
Jind, to reach, Aor. BxvQaot, § 223, 6, 
and more rare ixiQrjcra, Fut. xi'Qaoi 
and more rare xi'^^iffw ; Perf. xfy.t- 

Aay/avb.), topariaJie, Ion. Fut.Att'lo^at; 
Ep.Aor. Subj. Af^w'/w, § 2] 9, 7, Trans. 
<o ?naA;e partaker in the phrase i&«- 
fovTix nvQcg ; Perf. hXoyxa Ep., in- 
stead of fi>l?j/a, Od. X, 304. Ado//a- 
fft. 

AAZTMAI = Aa^o,u«i, fo Me, Ep. 

Xap^uvca, to receive. Ion. Xijtp.xpop.aif is- 
Xa^3r,xn, XsXufipai, XsXapcp&ai, iXaix- 
(p&r,v, )MfATiJ£og; also Dor. Xda^rjy.a, 
but XiXd/jpai, XsXuq}&ai ; in Drama- 
tists XiXrjppai ; Ep. Aor. XsXa^ia&ai, 
§ 219, 7. 

A«v^«»'ft), Ep. oflen P.?ji^oj, ;fo te hidden ; 
Ep. second Aor. Act. Subj, XfXu&o) 
and Mid. Xda&6pjtv, § 219, 7 ; Perf. 
Mid. Xfla<Tptti', in Theoc, Xaa^jjpsv 
= Xriad^m'tti instead of Xu&sa&ai ; 
i7id)]dM and exA/j^w, io caii^e to for- 
get, Ep. Aor. ircsX'Tjaa; exXsXa&ov. 

Xaay.a, Ep. and Poet., Aor. I'Aaxov: 
Ep. PerC XsXfjxa (Poet. AeAuxo and 



ixXiXaxa even in Demos.) with « 
the sense of the Pres. ; Ep. Vvm.\w 
AfAijxoj?, AfAwxiIrt, §223, 13; Fut. 
Xuxi]aopui ; first Aor. Poet. iXuxnaa^ 
Ef). Aor. Mid. AfAfixoiro, § 219, 7. 

AIlXSl, Ep., /o cai/5e /o /j> </(/i^*?i, 'iXt^Uy 
iXiiapr,v, I laid mi/self doivn, I lay, I 
rested, Ep.Aor. fXe/^rjv, etc., §227, B. 

XovM, to wash, Ep. Xotb), Xoitoi, Impf. 
iXoviov, iXotov ', Aor. Inf. XoiiTauif 
Part. Xoiaaag', second Aor. Act. 
tkooy, tliird Pers. Sinjr. Xc'.e Od. x, 
361, Xoov, Mid. Pres. Inf XovtaOut 
and Xova&ixi ; Fut. Mid. Xoeairofiui ; 
Aor. Mid. Inf. Xoiaaaa&dii ; Part. 
Aofcraaiufyos ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. 

AsAoi|UKfc. 

Xvb), to loose, Ep. second Aor. Mid. 
Alto, Xvvto, § 227, A, (e) ; Ep. Plup. 
Opt. AdDro, §224, 3. 

Mulfopai, to rave, [ixpnlrbi, to make 
raving, also Aor. f^TjVa Arist.); se- 
cond Perf. fjipTjVtt, I am raving, 
(Theoc. 10, 31, y.FfiUPripai). 

palopui, Ep., to seek, Fut. paaopat 
[inipuaaiTUL)', Aor. fpnau^riv. 

pav&avbd, to learn, FuL in Theoc. pa- 
■&nptti, like pn/oiuai. 

paQvapai, Ep., to figld, only Pres. 
and Impf, like dvvapai, but Opt. 
puQvoluTjv Od. A, 513. 

pot/optti, to contend, Ep. paxiornxi, 
paxHiai, ^uyioijo ^pnyioivxo. Part. 
paxEio^ifvog and pa/ioipEvoQ', Ep. 
Fut. p(xyi]ao^u(xi and ^ux^oopai ; Aor. 
if.i(x/8(jnpriV. 

MAR, Ep., to strive, Perf. with the 
sense of the Pres. in Sing, fiifiova, 
comp. yiyova Mith FEFAA, pipa- 
Tov, f-tspapEv, etc., § 228. 

pHQopuL, Poet., to obtain, Ep. sppoQS 
third Pers. Sing". Perf (and 11. «,278) 
third Pers. Sing, second Aor. Act. 
(Augment, § 219, 6); Perf. Pass. «- 
pfxQjai, it is determined, § 123, 4. 

peXb), commonly Impers. piXfi, it 
concerns, Ep. Perf. uf'^uTjAf, Part 
pffivilbic', Ep. Perf Mid. ^spfiXsTai 
and Plup. ^tsjj^Xsio instead of (jepr- 
XrjTai, ipspijXTjTO, comp. /5Atoffxw. 



§ 230.] 



DIALECTS. VERBS TO BE SPECIALLY NOTED. 



279 



fitvoifdojy fift'Oi'vfov, § 222, 1, A, (2). 

fitjxuufiitt, to bleat, Ej). Pcrf*. f^sfji^aa 
with the souse of the Pres., (.ufiii- 
xvla, ■§ '223, 13 ; Aor, ^uay.cjv ; lioin tlie 
Porf. the Jni[)f; (^f{ii]xov is foniied. 

fitai'vio, to stai7i, Ep. second Aor. {^lur- 
Srjp, § 227, B. 

filyy i'ut, to mix, E p. Aor. ft Into, § 227, B. 

fiVAaofiai, to roar, Ep. fiiuvxa, sfivy.ov. 

Naiw, Ep. and Poet., to dwell, first 
Aor. ivudfjtty I caused to dwell ; JMid. 
together with Aor. Pass, to set- 
tle dowii ; raaaojuai, untvaaauiutjv, 
itandriv. 

veixio), Ep., Poet, and Ion. to quarrel, 
Fut. veixido} ; Aor. ivHXitra, § 223, 1. 

viaaonai, Ep., to go, Fut viaofxai (the 
form vshaofiui is rejected). 

'OJr^:^OMAr, Ep., Aor, wdvadfjTjv, 
to be angry, 6d vaauiifvog ', Perf. odu- 
dvafiai with the sense of the Pres., 
j 219, 8. 

Old a, to know, § 228. 

ol'ojjtxi, to think; Ep. ol'ca, d'Cw, o'Cofiai, 
th'icfiTjv, oi'otTO ; Aor. Mid. o'iadfjiTjv ; 
Aor. Pass, ona&rjv, uiffd^itq. 

ovofiai, Ep. and Ion., to blame, ovoaai, 
third Pers. PI. upopTut, Imp. opoao ; 
Impf bn'OfiriP, Opt. opolfxrjV, ovono ; 
Fut. civoaofjocL; Aor. bnoauixrjv and 
bjyoadrjv ; Ep. oi;vfo-i9^f II. to, 241, in- 
stead of oviffifs and this instead of 
oVo(ri!^£ (comp. ouAO|U«i'o?)from''OiV-; 
Ep. Aor. Mid. mvuto. 

o(»«o), <o see. Ion. o^e'w, Impf. w^fov ; 
Ep. second Pers. Sing. Pres. Mid. 
oQijut, third Pers. Sing. Impf ogijio ; 
Ion. Perf on am a. 

"OPKrNTMl, from which Ep. hqfy- 
vvQ, stretching out ; oQiyM, to stretch ; 
Mid. to stretch one's self, to reach after, 
Ep. Perf Mid. oQbiQr/ficti, third Pers. 
PI. 6()0)Qi/aTai, § 219, 8, Plup. third 
Pers. PI. oQ(x){jixaro. 

oQvvfji, Poet., to excite, Fut. ogao), 
Aor. bioija, § 223, 6 ; Ep. Perf In- 
trans. 00019a, § 219, 8, Subj. oqwqj], 
Phip. uQb'wst and (oquqsi', Ep. Aor. 
o)(jogtp', Mid. oqpxj^ai, to lift one's 
self up, Ep. Fut, ogtliai, Aor. w^o- 



//7JV ; Ep. Aor. Mid. 0*1070, etc., § 227, 
B ; Ep. Perf 6()(x)giiui, Subj. o^jw- 
Qr]r(XL, § 219, 8. 

oacpgaivo^ui, to smell, Ion. Aor. Mid. 
o(T(p(japio. 

olxdo), to ivound, Ep. Aor. ovia, etc., 

^§227, A, (a). 

6q)iii.(x), to owe, ought, must. Ion., Poet, 
(except in tlie dramatic dialogues 
of Att. writers) and in later prose 
vffslov, -zg, -£, Ep. wffiXlov, ocpdXov 
in forms which express a wis'u 

ocpsUM, Ep., to increase, only Pres., 
Impf and Opt. Aor. ocpeXXtuv Od. 
/?, 334. 

IlvtXXbi, to shake, Ep. second Aor. Act. 
dfxnsuaXojv, § 207, 7, and 219, 7, and 
second Aor. 3Iid. ncdzo, § 227, B. 

ndaxta, to suffer, Ep. mna&vir]^ as if 
from Tiina&a; Ep. Perf nsjioiT&s, 
§ 228, Rem. 

naiE0{iai, Ion., <o to^fe, to eat, Aor. 
eTtdadfxtjv ', Perf. ninuafiai. 

nsl&b), to persuade, Ep. second Aor. 
Act. ns7ii-&ov, Subj. nsnl&bj, Opt 
nsnld^oifii, Inf n^nid^iiv, Part. 7T57ri- 
i5^ov, Imp. nsntd^s, § 219. 7 ; second 
Aor. Mid. inido^rip, to trust, Opt 
TiBTil&oLTo ; from the second Aor. 
come 7ti&rj(T(x}, to be obedient, nsrr- 
i&i'iiKa, to be convinced, nidi}(Tag, 
obedient; on in in id^jxiv and ninua- 
■&1, see § 228. 

TiEluCb), to draw near, Trag. TTfAa- 
19^0), TiXd&oj, Fut 7if/l«o-oj, Poet, 
commonly TraAw; Ep. Aor. Pass. 
ijtE).ua&7}v, Poet Att inhx&rjv, Ep. 
inXi']}iriv, etc., Att. inkdfxj]v, § 227, 
A, (a); Ep. Perf nmXi^^ivog, Att 

ni(j&M, Poet., <o destroy, Fut niqaoi ; 
first Aor. enfQo-a, § 223, 6 ; second 
Aor. iuQoi&ov, § 223, 11 ; Ep. sec- 
ond Aor. Mid. 7i£9.9at, § 227, B. 

TisTOfiui, to fly, second Aor. ijiroprjp, 
etc., § 223, 11. 

ntv^o^tti, Poet instead of nvpd^dpo- 
fiut, Ep. second Aor. Mid. Opt ne- 
Tivd-oiio ; Perf ninvcrum, § 223, 14. 

nicppov,tiit(pvov, Ep. second Aor. Act 



280 



DIALECTS. VERBS TO BE SPECIALLY NOTED. 



[§ 230. 



of <liJj:NfLy to H/, §219, 7, FamiJJfnvWyVoet., to Ttwve^ Mid. tohaslCfEip, 



ne(fv(jjv witli irrei^iilar uccoiituatioii ; 

Ep. Vcvi'. Pass. nk(fjuT(xi, nupuatJai ; 

Fut. Port'. m-ifi'idofjKxi^ (coiiij). dt6)\- 

tro^Hxi from dtdtixm). 
nrj'/yvfAL, to fix, Ep. Aor. nijxio, xwu- 

717^x10, §2-i7, B. 
nlkpu^ui, Ep.) corresponding form 



Aor. ttmn'u and i/tvu, effotviifxtv 
and atiri/i?/*-, §'2'^3, 8; Peril taai'- 
^ui, § 2'^y, 14 ; Plup. tuavfii^f ; sec- 
ond Aor. Mid. ia(ji^i]v, etc., §227, 
A, (e); Aor. Pass. taavOr^v, Soph., 
i'^nTii/tjv, Horn. — On the Ep. atv- 
JUL^ auvtiii, etc., see §2*29. 



from ndu'Cu), to draw near only Pres. axidyu^ui, to scatter , Ep. correspond- 

and Impf ing lorm of uxtduyyvfiui, only Pres 

nlnnhji^i, to fill, Ep. Aor. Mid. n)S}io, andlinpf 

etc., § 227, A, (a). aiefjtoj, to rob, first Aor. Inf anqiaai 

jilnTM, to fall, Ep. TiEmeatg, § 228. Ep. instead of aii(jr,aai. 

nnvaoj and nlivrnxL, Ep. correspond- uivyioj, to fear, to halt, Ep. second 

m^ i^oYUio? nsiavvxjyi, to spread out, Aor. tuiv/ov; first Aor. tifiv^Uj 

from which come Impf niiva in- Trans., to make fearfxd. 

stead of c/itrvw, and Pass. 7riTy«$. TAIJI, Ep. second Aor. inuywVf 

7iA?j(ja(y, to strike, Ep. second Aor. seizing. 

Act. tninlriyov, nmXrjyov and ns- TAAAJl, to endure, Ep. Aor. ijtxlaaa, 

nXrjyo^rjv, § 219, 7. Subj. jukdaub) ; second Aor. uXrjv, 

nlixiw. Ion., to sail, Ep. second Aor. § 194, 4 ; Perf. t£tA?jx«, jixkufnv. 

Act. I'nrAwy, etc., §227, A, (d) § 228 , Fut. ikrujo^ui. 

nvioj, to breathe, in Horn. Perf ninvv- lavvoi. Poet., to stretch, Ep. xdvijiui, 

fint, § 223, Rem. 2, to &e animated, § 229. 

intelligent,', second Aor. Act. Imp. Tuqaoctoi, to disturb, 'Eip. second Perf. 

ajjLTivvE, second Aor. Mid. ixy.nvv-' tsiqtjxcc, I am disturbed. 



TO, § 227, A, (e) ; Aor. Pass, afi- 
nvvv^T] instead of a}invv&7j, § 223, 
12. 
7itii(T(Tby, to stoop down, Aor. smrj^a ; 
second Aor. xttT«7rT«xwy, Aeschyl. 
Eum. 247 ; Perf Bmrjya„ Part. Ep. 



TEMft, to meet, Ep. Aor. tTST^ov, § 

219, 7. 
lifjno), to delight, Ep. izuQCp&Tjv, iiaQ- 

ni)v, hqanriv, Subj. fii'st Pers. PI. 

iQttnuo^sv ; second Aor Mid. ti^a- 

nofii^v and T£T«^7ro^?p,§219, 7. 



nsTiTTjag, ojiog, §223,13; Ep. se- levxta, Poet., to obtain, Fut. t£i'|w ; 



cond Aor. }i(xiaTiT7]j7}v, §227, A, 

'PaipM, to sprinkle, in Horn, igqada- 

Tttt, §220, Rem. 2. 
^£^0), see I'^^w. 
^t/fw, Ep. and Poet., to shudder, Fut. 

Qiyriab)', Aor. egqlyrjaa', Perf Ep. 

2Ju6o}, GMw and ffoco, Epic, to save, 



Aor. IVfu^w, Perf Ep. ifisi'/wc, /lat;- 
^ng• obtained; Fut. Mid. nii^opuL; 
Aor. Mid. isi'^ua&at', Perf t£ii'/- 
^«i, § 223, 14, third Pers. PI. Ep. 
TSTsiXajai, Inf Jsji'x&UL ; Plup. cit- 
TiyfiTjV, third Pers, PI. Ep. ijeTsv- 
Xcio', Aor. Pass. iTV/dT]v; Fut. 
Perf Tsxsi^ofitxi; — Ep. Aor. t£tu- 
xav, tsivHovTO, tnvy.iai^cxi, §219, 7. 



(= atii^w); fi-om o-wow, Fut. o-acoffw; T/E/2, Ep. Perf Act. xfUTjo)?, -cto?, 

Imp. Pres. Act. (t«w, §222, I, A. ar2r2'ow5,and Perf Mid. /awanarfoiw, 

(4) ; third Pers. Sing. Impf Mid. second Pers. Dual Ttilrja^ov, Part. 

ffftoi^ instead of fcr«0£ and (T« CO ; Aor. iHLri^ivoc. 

iudaxra ; Fut. Mid. (Tuwaoi^ai, Aor. xlvvv^ixi, Ep. corresponding form of 

Pass. iaa(t)d^r]v ; from auco Part, (tw- ilvo^ui, to punish ; in the Att. poetiy 

ovTc? and Impf amay.ov ; from aow with one v, zivv^m, § 185. 

Subj. Pres. uori, aorjg, aoojai. "^l^vy^^, Ep. corresponding form of 



§231.] DIALECTS. FORMATION OF WORDS. 281 

js^vM, to cut, first Aor. TfAtjtng', Aor. (rw ; Aor. stjp&uTa] Mid. / pass 

Pass, tliird Pers. PI. lutiyfv. away, Fut. (f>i^\ao^tu; Perf. tffdl- 

jQiifVj, to nourish, E,p. second Aor. ^uwt ; Plup. SipOlfit^tf, Ep. Aor. 

ttoitifov, I nourished, J*erf. TEiQoqxx, ((jp&lfjr^i; etc., §227, A, (c) ; Ep. 

liitrans. ; Aor. Pass, iiijucpriv, third Aor. Pass, third Pers. Ph u7ii(f&L- 

Pers. PI. TQavpfv. S^fv. 

0uh'o}, to sJww, Ep. qxtsli'tDv, enlight- q)i).i(x}, to love, Ep. Aor. i(f>lXu(xi]v[(f>l- 

ening ; Ep. Aor. Pass. f(jpcx«>'i9^»;i'; Ao>j'r«/, (fiXiti). 

Pert'. 3Iid. or Pass, niquij^ui, third q>oa^(x)^ to speak, Ep. Aor. nicpoadov^ 

Pers. Sing. nicpuvTui ; Fut. 7if(jp>;ao- § 219, 7. 

|[/«i ; second Aor. quirfoxsv, II. A, 64. cpvQa), to ^ncarf, Ep. and Poet. (fVQaa, 

(psldo^u(xi, to spare, Ep. second iVor. etc., §223, 6. 

Mid. .Tf(jpi^ot^7;i', 7r£!pi^tcri9"«t, §219, (fvo), to produce, Perf. jrEqptJcw, Ep. 

7; from which comes Tiscpidt](Topai. third Pers. PI. mcpiudi, Part, nfqpu- 

(jps'^o), /o corrn/, qpf'^Ts Ep. instead of wr«?, 7rf(jpi;L't«, § 223, 13 ; Impf. Ep. 

giE^f Tf, § 229 ; Ion. and Ep. forms inicpvaov. 

are, Aor. r\vfiy.n, ivslxui, etc., tjvei- Xu!^npai, Ep. to yield, Aor. Wid. y.iy.n- 

xduTfv; Perf eV/jrf/^^w/,; Aor. Pass. ^otro, § 219, 7 ; Aor. Act. y.iy.adop 

iji'eIx&TjV', — Ep. second Aor. Imp. and Fut. y.sy.ad)}a<x}. Trans., to rob. 

oias, Inf oluipsv, §223, 10; first xaiQM, to rejoice, Ep. Fut. xf/afjij- 

Aor. a^-o^aaf, Herod. 1,157. Comp. ao), y.E/uQ-i](Topai; first Aor. Mid. 

6, 66. avbiidTog instead of dvoicTTog. /riQaro', second Aor. y.s/i'tQovio, 

(fsv'/o), tojlee, Ep. JiKfvypivog, escaped, xexugono, § 219, 7 ; ynyaQVfbig, § 223, 

§ 223, 14. 13 ; Perf xf/ixQpsrog, Eur. ; verbal 

cp&uvM, to come he/ore, Ep. cp&upsvog, Adj. /aniog. 

§ 227, A, (a). _;f ai'^f/i'co, Ep., to hold, to receive, Aor. 

(f&iiQb), to destroy, Ion. Fut. dincp&a- i'/adov; Perf with the sense of the 

Qtouui instead ofq)&aQ}]crop,tti ; Aor. Pres. xi/up8(x ; Fut. yslfTopixi, comp. 

duxcpdifjaui, §223, 6. snix&ov, mlaopai. 

(f&irbi, consume, and Ep. q)&Lb}y to xsm, to pour, Ep. Fut. yiVM ; Aor. 

consume, and commonly to perish, iysva ; second Aor. Mid. xvjo^ /l- 

(Ep. first Pers. long), Fut. rjp5i- ^sro?, § 227, A, (e). 



CHAPTER HI. 

FORMATION OF WORDS. 

§ 231. Radical luords . — St e m s . — D erivatives. (324.) 

1. Words are formed, (a) bj'^ derivation, and (b) by composition, in accord- 
ance with certain laws. 

2. Those words, fi-om which other words ai-e derived, but which are 
themselves underived, are called radical words (vocabula primitiva). A 
radical word has two parts, the root and the inflection-ending, e. g. tgicp-ta, 
y^acp-m, (ffg-ia, Xiy-xa. 



282 RADICAL WORDS. STEMS. ^DERIVATIVES. [§ 231. 



3. All radical words are either verbs or pronouns. The roots, i. e. the 
letters, the articulated sounds, which remain, after the rejection of the in- 
flection-endings, are all monosyllabic. Still, roots are not always pure, but 
often appear in a strengthened form, e. g. dux-v-o), Ix-vi-oiuui, nv^ 
-(xv-o), T 1' (/)/ -ft'y-w, a k -liTx-ofiai, ni- n q u -ay.oi. Comp. §§ 139, and 157, 
1. Yet, these strengthened forms extend only to the Pres. and Impf. 

4. Those words, (vocabula derivata) which are derived from radical words, 
are, 

(a) either Stems, i. e. such w^ords as are formed fi'om radical words by 
substituting, in the place of the inflection-ending of the radical verb, a de- 
clension-ending either of a substantive or adjective ; this declension-ending 
is designed merely to give the general meaning of the verb to the substan- 
tive or adjective, but it does not indicate the precise nature of the idea 
expressed by the substantive, e. g. the idea of persons, things, the ab- 
stract, or the precise nature of the idea expressed by the adjective ; here 
belong several endings of the third Dec, e. g. -g, the mark for the gender 
(o yvip, 1] blip, 6 /5/]|, /j ;iTL'|, v vav-g, o i) ^ov-g, 6 i] nal-g, instead of nald~g ; 
in many words the g is omitted, see § 52, 1) ; the endings - 1 g {')] anav-ig, 
toant, ^i iXn-lg), and -vg {o (nu/-vg, ?; hx-vs)', also the endings of the first 
and second declensions, e. g. -?/, -a, -og, -ov [vIx-tj, XItt-tj, ^7^-a, TiXovx-og, 
v6(T-og, Qod-ov) ; finally several adjective-endings, e. g. ~og, -r], -ov {(flk-og, 
-7}j -ov), -ig, -Eta, -V {yXvx-vg, -ela, -v), etc.; 

(b) or Derivatives, i. e. such words as are partly formed from radical 
words, partly from stems, by assuming a particular derivation-syllable with 
a particular signification, e. g. /ova-o-bJ, to gild, qi]-jcjq, orator, yga(p-ix6g, 
skilled in painting. 

5. The root is often lengthened in the derivative word, § 16, 3, e. g. Xijd- 
~ri from Xad^-ilv, yJiv from /wy-ay ; or it requires the vowel of variation, § 
16, 6, e. g. TQscp-b), tgocp-rj, TQoq)-6g, igofp-ifiog, tgncp-sQog. There may be, 
also, a strengthening of the consonant, §§ 139, 1, and 157, sq. ; or a doubling 
of the final consonant A, e. g. xaXXog from y.tdog ; some stems also take a redu- 
plication, e. g. 071-0)71-7^, 65-0)5-7), txy -(o/-6g, 2'l-(TV(f-og fiom XLyf^-JZ, comp. 
aocp-6g, Finally, still other changes are made in the root, as has been 
seen § 16. 

6. The change of s into o (seldom into a) and of (i into ot, § 16, 6, requires 
special attention. It occurs, (a) in oxj1:ones of the first Dec. in ^ and «' of 
more than one syllable, e. g. jgocp-r), nourishment, from tqscp-m, ^ov-r^, a re- 
maining, from f.iiv-0}, qioo-d, a carrying, from (fig-b), tiloi(p-Tj, salve, from 
aXiicp-b}', — (b) in dissyllabic bar}'tones of the second Dec, which denote a 
result of an action, e. g. Xoyog, word, from Xiy-a, cf>6v-og, murder, frnrn 
^EN~fL, comp. tntqivov, vofiog, a law, firom vifi-w, — (c) in dissyllabic oxy- 



§ 232.] FORMATION OF WORDS.-— DERIVATIONS. VERBS. 283 

toned substantives of the second Dec, in -ftog, which, for the most part, 
denote an active object and often have a substantive meaning, e. g. nXo/- 
ftoc, plait of hair, from nXsK-oi, aioX-fiog, garment^ from oTtAA-w ; jio^ti-c?, 
attendant, from ni(in-oi, aoqi-og, ivise, from ^L*l)-Sl, sapio, T^oqp-c'?, nourish- 
i;j«", nowisher, from Tgicp-cx)-^ — (d) in monosyllabic substantives of the third 
Dec, e. g. cpXu^yfame, from q>Xs/-ia', d6(j^, aiiteJope, from diQx-opui ; — (e) in 
ox}toned substantives in -svg and Adjectives in -« c, which, however, have 
sometimes a substantive sense, e. g. T^oqp-fi-c, nourisher^ from T(>t(p-a), imoQ 
"dg, scattered, from a-JifQ-nv, Xoy-uc, chosen, from Xsy-M, 8()0}A-ag, running, 
from zlPEM-P-, comp. dgnp-ny, — (f) in all derivatives of the forms men- 
tioned, e. g. in substantives in -u[iog, adjectives in -ipog, verbs in -«a), -ioj, 
-6(0, -tioj, -/'sW, e. g. nXoy-apoc', iqocp-iuog', qp^oy-sw, from cp&ov-og, Siop- 
doj, (from d6i.i-og, and this from dip-b)), etc 

Remark. The change off into a, comp. §16, 6, is found only in a few 
old poetic derivatives, e. g. iQacp-^Qog, 

A. Derivation. 
§232. I. Verbs, (325.) 

1. All derivative verbs end in -aw, -ioj, -Iw, -0 w, -via, -t v m, -a'^w, 
-l^oj, -o^w, v^co; -aivbj, -vv o), -alow, -sIqo). All these verbs 
must be considered as denominative, i. e. as derivatives from substantives 
or adjectives ; for although the stem-substantive for several verbs of this 
kind is not in use, yet the analogy of the others requires that the stem of 
these also should be assumed. 3Iany of these derivative verbs, especially 
many in -ia and -dco, take the place of roots which are not in use, e. g. 
(piXiw, XLpdoi. — On the formation and signification of these, the following 
things are to be noted : 

(a) Verbs in -aw and -«^w, which are mostly derived from substantives 
of the lii'st Dec, and those in -i^ca which are derived from substantives and 
adjectives of all declensions, are partly transitive, partly intransitive, since 
they denote either a condition or the exercise of agency or activity, e. g. toX- 
puMy, to he hold, fi-om joXfia, holdness, /oXdw, to he angry, fi-om ;/oA?/, gall, 
youoj, to iveep, from yoog ; 5ixa^w, to judge, from liUtj ; fAn^/^a?, to hope, from 
iXnlg, oqI^w, to limit, from oQog, ulri^ca, to heg, from tuirig, heggar ; — Verbs 
in -a ^ wand -t'^w formed fi-om proper names, express the striving to be 
similar to single individuals, or to whole nations, in custom, nature, lan- 
guage, sentiment. Such verbs are called Imitative verbs, e. g. 8(x\Qu*^uh to 
he a Dorian, i. e. to speak or think as a Dorian, /lo)Qifvg; eXXrjpiXo), to per- 
sonate the custom or language of a Greek, pr]8l^bi, to he a Mede in sentiment. 

Remark 1. Verbs in -/^w often signify the making something into that 
which the root denotes. See (c). 



284 FORMATION OF WORDS. SUBSTANTIVES. [§233. 

Rem. 2. Verbs in -t'^w and -I'Cu) are very rare, e. e. uQ/jn'Coh to fit, ioni^o), 
to creep. — By tlje ending -d'^o) also, verhs are formed, uhicli denote the 
repetition or strengthening of the idea expressed by the simi)le verb; these 
are called Fre{juentati\ e and Intensive verbs, e. g. ^iJiid'Cot, jacto, from ^t/rro), 
jacio, (Tjftii^u}, to 5/g/i much and deeply, from aiivo), to sigh, tixu^'a, properly, 
to compare on all sides, hence, to conjecture. 

(b) Verbs m -a w and -svoj are derived from substantives and adjectives 
of all declensions, and commonly express the intransitive idea of the primi- 
tive, for the most part, the being in a condition, or the exercise of agency, but 
they are sometimes transitive also. When the stem ends in -sg, which 
is the case, e. g. in adjectives in -?;?, -ic, this -eg is omitted, and when it 
ends in -fv, this -sv is omitted, when the syllable sv is appended, e. g. q)Uioi, 
to he a friend, to love, from epilog, vnv/ico, to he unfortunate, from aTV/rjCf 
stem uTV/sc, evduipovict), to he prosperous, from evdalpcav, stem ivdui^iov, 
ayoQfvoj, to speak in public, from ayogu, market, /jacriXevb}, to be a king, from 
^aadsig. 

(c) Verbs in - o o) , which are mostly derived from substantives and ad- 
jectives of the second Dec, those in -alvm, which are commonly derived 
from adjectives, more rarely from substantives, and those in -vvoi , from 
adjectives only, generally denote the making or transforming something in- 
to that which the primitive word signifies ; in hke manner several in -i^o), 
see Rem. 1, e. g. xQVfTota, to gild, from XQ^'<^og, ayvlQia, to make pure, from 
ayvog, nXovti^ixi, to make rich, to enrich, from nXovTog, hi'xalroj, to make white^ 
from Xsvy.og, (iaovvo}, to burden, from ^aQvg. 

Rem. 3. From the Fut. of several verbs, are formed verbs in - o- « / w , 
which denote a desire for that ivhich the primitive word signifes ; these are 
called Desiderative verbs, e. g. yehxadb}, to desire to laugh, from yflao), to 
laugh, noXfpujfiix), to desire to engage in war, from noXmi^b), nagadojabib), to 
be inclined to surrender. 

§233. 11. Substantives. (X}6,327.) 

Substantives are derived, 

1. From verbs and substantives, and ex-press, 

a. A concrete idea, i. e. the idea of an active person: 

(a) With the endings ~svg (Gen. -swc) for the 3Iasc., -si a or -La a a 
for the Fern.; -Tt]g (Gen. -ov) mostly Paroxjtones, -xriQ and -toaq 
Paroxjtones, for the Masc, ^t q i a Proparoxjtones, -r q ig , -t i g and -ig 
(Gen. -iSoc), -T £ I Q a Proparoxytoue, for the Fem. ; ~iav for the 3Iasc., 
-a IV a for the Fem. ; - ai g for the Masc, - wig and - o)'i'v rj for the Fem., 
e. g. IfQtvg, pi'iest, Fem. Ugfia, from uQog ; ttiA/y'iTjc and -i]Q,flvie-player, Fem. 
avXriTQin, aiXriTQig, from ai/fai; (tojiviQ, deliverer, awreion, from abi^bi; tto- 
XiiTjg, citizen, nolliig from noXig', Qi}TbjQ, orator, from 'P£-J2; d^sgunaVf ser- 
vmU, -^sg una IV a, from -d^igaip. 



§ 233.] FORMATION OF WORDS. SUBSTANTIVES. 285 

{/5) With the eiurm<r -6 g (Gen. -ov\ seldom, and only from verbs with the 
vowel of variation, ^ '231, G, (c), e. g. nofinog, attendant, from nifinb), 6 r\ rqo- 
<p6g, nourisJier, nurse, from T^e'qpto, aQOjyog, an ally, from agiiyf^' 

b. They ex])ress the abstract idea of what is signified by the primitive : 

(a) From verbs, 

(a) with the endings -a tg (Gen. -ascag) and -a la, substantives which 
denote the active idea of the verb, e. g. nga^ig, actio, an acting, from nqajio) ; 

(/?) with the ending - ^6g (Gen. ~ov) such as denote the intransitive idea 
of the verb, e. g. o8vQy.6g, weeping, from odvQo^ai', 

(/) with the ending ~ }ia, such as denote the effect of what is signified 
by the transitive action, e. g. nqayixa, something done, fivri(xa, monumentum, 
something which reminds ; 

[8) with the endings ~^r], -t], -a, (all for the most part Oxytones), and 
(fi-om verbs in -f vw), -sia , such as denote sometimes a transitive relation, 
and sometimes the effect of that relation, e. g. tofxrj, a cutting, from rifivoj, 
aoidi], song, from asldw, q)&OQoi, Tiaidsla ; 

(g) with the endings -og (Gen. -ov), -tog (Gen. -jov) and -eg (Gen. 
-ovg\ such as denote pai'tly, and indeed generally, an intransitive relation, 
partly also a transitive, and partly the effect of that relation, e. g. Xoyog, 
word, from Xi/ca, tcoixvrog, lamentation, to xi^dog, care. 

(b) From adjectives (and substantives, which are sometimes used in an 
attributive sense), 

(«) with the endings -/a , from adjectives in -og, and some in the third. 
Dec, e. g. (Tocpla, wisdom, from aocpog, svdaifiovla, happiness, from tvdal^caVf 
Gen. -ov-og; 

(/5) - i a (Proparoxytones) from adjectives in -•»;$ and -ovg, whose stem 
ends in e and o, with which the t of the ending coalesces and forms ti, and 
01, thus -fia, -oia, e. g. aXij&fia, truth, from dXrjd^ijg, Gen. -s-og, svvoia, be- 
nevolence, from Bvvovg, Gen. svvo-og ; 

{/) -(Tvvf] from adjectives in -wv (Gen. -ovog)and -og, e. g. awcpgo-ijiyri, 
modesty, from (TW(jp^o)v, Gen. -ov-og, dixaio-avvr], justice, from dlxaiog ; 

{d) -XT] g, Gen. -Ttjiog (commonly Paroxytones) from adjectives in -og and 
-vg, e. g. laoiTjg, Gen. -oirjTog, equality, from iaog, 7iaxvii]g, thickness, from 
Ttcc/vg ; 

[s) -og, Gen. -£05 = -ovg, from adjectives in -vg and -ij?, and such as 
form the Comparative and Superlative in -icov and -laiog, e. g. ra^o?, to. 
Gen. Toixovg, swijlness, from taxvg, xpsvdog, to. Gen. -oi??, falsehood, from 
ipEvSijg, ttlcr/og, to, baseness, from alaxQog, alax^MV j 

(^) - a $ -a5o^, only in abstract numeral substantives, e. g. 7] ^ovag, unity, 
dvotg, dualiiy, iQiag, a triad. 

Remark 1. In abstracts in -xla, which express both a transitive and in^ 
38 



286 FORMATION OF WORDS. SUBSTANTIVES. [§ 233. 



transitive relation, from compounds in -tog and -ttjc, Gen. -ov, the t is com- 
monly clian<red into a, e. p. u&lo&ztia and -alu {ud).oditrfi\ uduvuaia 
{u\^uvajoc;\ uxuO^uqitIu, o^v^X^ijjIu, etc. Conip. ^ 17, (j. 

Rem. 2. Tiie older Attic })oetry .souictinies makes the a long in the end- 
ings -fiw and -oi«, e. g. uvuidilu, jiqovoIu. 

2. From substantives alone, the following classes denoting the names ot 
persons and things, are derived : 

(a) Gentile nouns, i. c. the names of persons derived from their country, 
in -8vg, (Fern. -lq. -tdog), -tjrjg, (Fern. -Irig), -air^g, (Fem. -uiig), -i^xriqj 
-WI7;?, e. g. /fojQisig, /Jcogig, — i'(5«^irj;?, -tug, ^TiaQTiuTTjg, etc. 

(b) Patronymics, i. e. the names of persons derived from their ancestors, 
with the endings - Idijg, Fem. -Ig, G«n. -idog ; also - ladrig;* but sub- 
stantives of the fii-st Dec. in -»j? and -agj and many of the second and third 
Dec. whose stem ends in i, and some others, have -a d tj g, Fem. -dg, Gen. 
-ddog, e. g. IlQia^-ldTjg, Fem. JlQia^-lg from IlQiafx-og, UriXsidr^g from Ilrj- 
Xsvg, Gen. IlrjXe-og, Ksygonldrjg from Ksxgoip, Gen. -on-og, IIuv^old}]g from 
ndv&oog, -ovg ; TsXafxav-Ludr^g from TsXafxo^v, Aivsddrjg from Alvsag, Osa- 
TLadtjg, Fem. OsaiL-dg from Osajiog. 

(c) Dhninutives (^jroxo^io-itxa), frequently with the accompanying idea of 
contempt, with the endings -lov which is the most usual, -uq lov {-dtriov) 
and -vXXlov, -vXXlg, -vd q lov , -v (p i ov {-ucpLOv) which belong 

mostly to the language of the common people and to comedy ; /?, (Gen. 

-Idog and -tdog), -t d lov formed from - Ig; lay.og, - layr] {-layuov, 

-l/vrj, -ixvLov) ; id svg, (but only of the young of animals), e. g. ^hquh- 

lov, youth, from fislga^, -ax-og, naLd-lov, a little child, from nalg, Tcai8-6g ; — 
naid-aQLOv ; - da lov instead of -uqiov only in aooduiov (from y.oQa, young 
woman) because g precedes ; fisLQax-vXXiov, dy.av&-vXXlg fi*om uxuvd^a, thorn, 
vrja-vdgLov, islet, ^(o'{j-q)iov, little animal, xgi'a~d(pLOV from xgvaog', — ttl^ 
vay.-ig, little tablet, from nlva^, ufiu^lg, little wagon ; vria-Hdiov, islet, from 
vridog, ygmdiov instead of -ddiov from ygiag, olyudiov instead of olxi- 
IdLOV from olxla ; — vsavl-axog, vEavl-axr] from vsavlag ; -lay. lov seldom, 
e. g. xoivXlaxLov fi'om xoxvXtj ; - I/vt], - 1% v l ov only in noXl/vr}, noXl/viov 
from noXig, xvXl^vrj, xvXl/viov from xvXl^; — Xay-idevg, young hare, from Xa- 
ybjg, usT-LdEvg, young eagle, from dsTog. 

(d) Designations of place, with the endings -lov (in connection with tlie 
preceding vowels -ulov, -hov, -mov) and -slov, which denote the abode 
of the person designated by the primitive word, or a place consecrated to 
a Divinity or hero ; - oj v (Gen. -uvog), seldom - f w y , and ~ (ov lu , which 

* This form is used, when the syllable preceding the Patron}Tnic ending 
is long, otherwise the word would not be adapted to hexameter verse, since 
one short syllable would stand between two long syllables, thus, nrjXi^tdrjg. 
—Tr. 



§ 234.] FORMATION OF WORDS. ADJECTIVES. 287 

denote die resitleiice of persons or a place filled with plants, e. g. tQyaa-- 
fi](}-iov, workshop, tioni c^/affT?;'^, imd so others in -iijgiov from -ti'iq or 
"iTjg ; sometimes also this ending is used with reference to vessels, e. g. 
TfOJiJQiov, drinki7ig vessel ; xovqhov, barber's shop, from Tcovgevg, -s-ag, several 
in -tov {-eiov) liave another signification, e. g. TQOcpelov, wages of a nurse, 
from T(>o(;psi'?; Or/anov from Or](jevg, -■E-wg,'Adrjvcciov, Movasiov; — avdgwv 
and yvvaixMv, apartments for men and women, Irnibiv, stable for horses, Qodojv 
and ^odcoviu, hedge of roses, negiaieQEUv and nsQKnsgtov, dove-cote. 

(e) Substantives which denote an mstrument or a means of accomplishing 
some object, with the endings -t g ov and - t ^ « , e. g. ^vcnga, curry-comb, 
didaxxgov, tuition-money, lovigov, water for washing, Xovigov, bath; also to 
designate place, e. g. og/J](Ttga, dancing-room, instead of the ending -xrigiov. 

§ 234. III. Adjectives. (328-330.) 

1. From verbs ai-e derived adjectives with the follo^ving endings: 

(a) With the ending -o g, which is annexed to the stem of the verb. 
These adjectives express the transitive, intransitive or passive idea of the 
verb from which they are derived, e. g. (puvog, brilliant, from (paivtOy Xomog, 
the remainder ; the verb-stem of many is not in use, e. g. xaxog. 

(b) AVith the endings - t X 5 , -7;, -ov and - Lfiog, -ov, -ifiog, -rj^ 
-ov or -aifiog, -ov , which denote ability, fitness, aptness. Of these, those 
in -lyiog have a transitive signification, those in -i^iog both a transitive and 
passive, e. g. ygacp-ixog, fit or able to paint, Tgocp-ijiog, nviritive, la-<npog, 
curable. 

(c) With the endings -v 6g, -r\, -ov with an intransitive or passive signi- 
fication, e. g. 8u-vcg, frightful, (/lEISl), tjE^-vog, honored, honorable, [as^opm], 
(Txvy-vog, hated, hateful, [UTTril), no^sivog {no&io)), desired. 

(d) With the ending -log with a transitive signification, - aXo g, -iq , 
- ov and (from verbs in -aw) -rjXo g , --q , -ov with a transitive and in- 
transitive signification, e. g. Su-Xog, timid, sxnay-Xog (instead of ixnXayXog 
from iy.7iXrj(T(j(f)), frightful, cpiLd-caXog, sparing, atytjXog, silent, ctTiairjXog, deceitful. 

(e) With the endings -agog, -a , -ov (from verbs in -aw and -alvoa) 
with an intransitive signification, e. g. xaXagog, slack, piugog, stained. 

(f ) With the endings -fxwv, -fxov [Gen. -ovog) with an intransitive 
signification, e. g. p.vr\-p,wv, memor, {MNASl), voi]uo3v, intelligent, [voico). 

(g) With the endings -r^g, -sg (Gen. -sog), e. g. nXijgrjg, plenus. 

(h) With the ending -dg (Gen. -adog), with a transitive, inti'ansitive or 
passive signification, e. g. q)og-dg, bearing, {(pigo)), dgop,dg, running, {JPJE- 
MSl), Xoydg, chosen, [Xiyio). 

(i) With the endings -to?, -ttj, -tov and -riog, -xia, -xiov 
verbal adjectives ; those in -x6 g denote either a completed action as the 



( 



28S FORMATION OF WORDS. ADJECTIVES. [§ 234. 

Pcrf. Pass. Part, e. g. Xsx-tog from Xiya), didus ; or the idea of possibility, 
which is tlieir usual signification, e. g. uQa-iog, visible. In their formation 
most of these follow either an existing or an assumed Perf Pass., e. g. 

^ovXev-m (ii-(iov).iv-Tai, ^ovXev-iog, -ziog 

Tifiu-b) Tc-zZ/^Tj-Tat iifir]-i6g 

(f(t)Qd-(o 7ie-cp(x'>ou-iai (fuiqu-xiog 

(f)iXi-(n Tis-iflXrj-xai, qtiXTj-jog 

xi-oi ys-xij-Toii %v-i6g 

TilsH-b) Tti-nXsx-xat nXoi-iog, -xiog 

Xi'/-(x) Xs-Xex-Tai, Xex-iog 

aisX-X-oJ s-ainX-rat azaX-iiog 

1HV-M [TA-Sl] li-iu-xaL ra-iiog 

dl-dio-fii {JO-SI) de-8o-iat do-i6g, -xeog. 

Remark 1. Very many verbal adjectives, however, follow the analogy 
of other forms of the verb, not according to any definite rule, but take 
precisely such a form as suited the ear of the Greeks. Thus a considerable 
number followed, for example, the form of the first Aor. Pass., e. g. uIqb-o), 
fjQs-d^rjv, al^s-Tog ; Trwv-w, i-nav-a-drjv^ nav-a-iog, -riog ; /Qa-oixui, i-XQ^~ 
a-drjv, xqri-a-Tog, -riog ; aTQS(p-(a, e-(TrQscp-&riv, aTgeu-Tog ; tostt-o), i-xqicf)~ 
d^rjv, iQSTi-Teog; TQsq)-(a, i-&Qiq)-&r]v^ d^Qtn-iiog^ 'i-aTT]-f2L, iaiu-^rjv, axu- 
Toc, -xiog\ ejiaivi-b), inrjvs-dTjv, inaive-xog', — some the form of the second 
Aor. Act., e. g. t/w, s-iT/i-xov^ ffx^-xog ; alqioj, nXs-xov, eXs-xog ; 'irjfxi, t-xov 
(commonly thov), ttqp-€-T£o?, £V-£-To?; Ttv^7j,iu, s-ds-xov, -d^e-xog, -xiog; — 
some the form of the Pres. Act., e. g. /ueVo), fisv-sxov, fxsvs-xog, -xsog ; sj^ut, 
I'-xov, l-xiog; so an-sv/s-xog from.^£TXJi-TON {svxofiai); dvva-zog {8vva- 
^ai); cprji^l, (pa-xoVj cpu-tog. 

2. Adjectives are formed from substantives and adjectives ; 

By the ending - t o g (in connection with the preceding vowel of the stem 
^ttLog, -siog, -oLog, -wog, -vm)?), and - iy.6 g, (when v precedes, yog, and when 
t, -axog). These adjectives have a very general signification. They fi-e- 
quently indicate the mode by which the agency denoted by the adjective is 
expressed, ofi:en also, and very generally, that which proceeds from an ob- 
ject and is connected with it, e. g. ovgdv- tog, pertaining to heaven, xa&ag-iog, 
cleanly, but xa&agog, dean, iXev&sQtog, liberalis, but iXsv^Egog, liber; dyo- 
Qouog, belonging to the market place, [dyoQix], -d^igsiog, summer-like, {d^sQog, -s-og), 
alddlog [aldoig, -6-og), rjQMog and 'JiQOJog; TQinijxviog ; dovXtxog ; SrjXvxog, 
fioinaxog. 

Rem. 2. In several words, the ending -aiog, § 17, 6, is used instead of 
-t-iog, e. g. q)tXoxi]aLog [cpLXoxTjg, -rjxog), sxovatog {exav, -ovTog). 

3. Adjectives are formed fi-om substantives alone, 

(a) With the ending -slo g (mostly Paroxj'tones), which are formed from 
names of persons, especially fi-om proper names, but in respect to their 
signification they are like adjectives in -Lxog, e. g. dvdQeiog, yvvaUuog^ av- 
^qaniiogj "Ofirigsiog. 



§ 235.] FORMATION OF WORDS. ADVERBS. 289 

(b) With the endings -sog = -ovg and -ivog , which denote tlic ma- 
terial of which anything is made, hke the Enghsli ending -en, e. ^. xqia-iog 
= j^pvffoD?, golden, ;^aAx£o? = ;|faAxot'?, brazen, ^iX-ivog, wooden, crxvjivog^ 
made of leather, leathern. 

(c) With the ending -ivog, seldom -Ivog, derived from substantives. 
These express certiiin relations of time, in some cases, also, an abundance 
or fullness, e. g. eaixEQ-ivog, vespertinus, ;^5^fo--tvo(:, hesternus; oguvog, 
tnountmnous, [oQog, Gen. -c-oc). 

(d) With the endings -sLg, Gen. -svTog, always preceded by a vowel, 
viz. rj from words of the first Dec, and o from others ; -q 6g, -sq 6g ^ 
-rjQog , -dXiog ^ which denote fullness or abundance, e. g. vXy]-sig, 
woody, nvQ6-iig,Jirery ; alax-Qog, base; voa-sQcg, and voff-r^Qog, morbid, sick; 
^(0(x-aXiog, strong. Exceptions to those in -Eig^ are dsvdQjjeig from devdgoVj 
XaQtsig from xagig. 

(e) W^ith the ending -i^gtog with the transitive sense of verbal sub- 
stantives in -TjQ and -tjc, e. g. a onijQiog, preserving, that preserves. 

(f) With the ending -aidrig^ Neut. -oidsg (formed from -o-e< 5?)? from 
%uSog, form, quality). These adjectives denote a quality or resemblance, 
but often also a fullness or abundance, e. g. qiXoycadr^g, resembling fame, 
TTOtw^/jc, abounding in grass. 

(g) With the endings - Log (Fem. -id), -nog, -ixog (Fem. -x^, -tx?;), 
- »j V 5 (Fem. -tjvi}), and when t or ^ precedes, -u v6 g (Fem. -dvij), -Ivog 
(Fem. -tV»j), Gentile adjectives, which are also frequently used as substan- 
tives, but particularly, adjectives in -tjvo?, -dvog and -7vog, which are form- 
ed only from names of cities and coimtries out of Greece, e. g. Koqiv&-Log, 
-la/d&rjvalog, -alct, Xlog instead of -uog from Xiog, "AQyuog from*k^-/o?, 
-i-og ; jiay.i8aii.tov-iy.6g ; Kv^ix-r^vog, -rjvij {Ki%ixog), Saq5i-av6g, ■ avi] 
[ZaQ^tLg, Ion. Gen. -l-tav), Ayxvgavog ('Aynvga), TagavT-lvog^ -Ivt] [Taqag, 
-avT-og). 

§235. IV. Adverbs. (331.) 

1. Adverbs are formed fi-om verbs : 

With the endings -d tj v or, when the radical word has the variation 0, 
-ttdrjv, which demote manner, e. g. xgv^drjv, secretly, [xQvmto), yga^-drjv, 
scribendo, {ygdcpa}), (TJioQ-ddrjv, sparsim. 

2. From verbs and substantives : 

With the ending -dov or -adov, -rjdov, mostly fi-om substantives. 
These also denote manner, or, when derived from substantives, the external 
form, e. g. dvacpavdov, aperte, dLaxgidov, distinctly, ^oTQvdov, grape-like, in 
clusters, {^otgvg), IXadov, catervatim, dysXrjdov, gregatim, xvvrjdov, like a dog. 

3. From substantives, pronouns and adverbs, adverbs ai-e formed to denote 



290 FORMATION OF WORDS. COMPOUNDS. [§ 236. 

tlic three relations of place, viz., iv/ience, whiOm- and ivlitrt, by the endingH 
-& £ v, -8 t{-(j i) and -ft t, e. g. ovQUi'O-OivJ'rom litavtn, ovQUPuv-de, into or 
to heaveUf ol't^avo-di) in keaven, uXXo-^tv, aliunde, ukXo-at, alio, ukXo-&Ly 
alibi. 

Remark 1. Words of the first Dec. retain their a or 7y before -^sv, those 
of the second, their o; and those of the third, the o of the Gen. ending, e. g. 
OXvfxnludey, —iiix(jTr]-&fv, ol'xo-x^tv, lillo-x^ev; but the vowels «, t; and o 
are often exchanged with each other, e. g. ^I'^o-d^iv from ^i'^a ; MeyuQo&sv 
from MsyoiQa, id. 

Rem. 2. Adverbs in -w, and also others append the endings to the un- 
changed vowels, e. g. uvco-^sv, adTOi-^sv, s^io-i^sv, iy.ti-^(.v, eyyv-&i, tvdo- 
x>ev, tvdo-&i. Some forms of the comparative in -legog lengthen o into a>, 
e. g. (ificpoTSQw-dsv. In some of the above forms, o) can be shortened into 
o in poetry, and then rejected entirely, e. g. E'Qo-d^iv, TiQou-^ev, instead of 
I'lco^fv, TTQoaoj&sv, and in imitation of Doric usage, a is often omitted be- 
fore &, e. g. oni&tv, sxio&sv, instead of onia&ev, ty.xoa&iv. 

Rem. 3. The ending -^s is commonly appended to substantives only, 
and to the unchanged form of the Ace, e. g. dkaSs, to or into the sea, {dkg), 
Uv&fods from IIv&o), oTxovds only Epic, elsewhere oi'xuSs from the stem 
'oil, as (fvyads from fl^YZ, instead of (jDV/^jv^f which is not in use/EXevat- 
vdds. In pronouns and adverbs, -a s is appended instead of -^£, e. g. ixH-as, 
aXXoas, siEQwaE, ovdix^oo^s, j^loas, more seldom in substantives, e. g. oXy.oaE. 
— In plural substantives in -«?, tr<5£ becomes ^£, e. g.\4&ijva^t, Or/^a^s'j 
but some substantives in the singular, also, follow this analogy, e. g. 'OAi',u- 
nla'Cs, so the poetic adverbs, ^vga'Cs, foras, ega^e, /a^ua^s, humum, from the 
obsolete substantives, equ, yafj-d, earth. 

Rem. 4. Instead of -ds or -as the Epic dialect has -dig also, e. g. yufid- 
dig instead of ya^d'Cs, dXlvdig instead of viXXoaE, and ol'xadig, domum. 

Rem. 5. Several pronominal forms with the usual suffix, have, between 
the stem and the suffix, the syllable ay, which is to be accounted for by 
the ending -axig coming before the aspirated relative, e. g. noXX-ay-cd-ev 
from TioXXdoiig and o&ev, navT-ay-oGE ; this occm-s also in most pronominal 
adverbs of place in -t?, -of, -ot, e. g. dXX-ay-ov, aUbi, noXX-ay-ou, Tiavj- 
ay-7J, TioXX-ay-i], navx-ay-ol. 

§236. B. Compounds. (332,333.) 

1. Every compound consists of two words, one of which explains the other 
more definitely. The explanatoiy word usually stands first, e. g. vav-fxayla, 
sea-fight. The word which is explained by the other, shows to what class of 
words the compound belongs, i. e. whether it is a substantive or verb, etc. ; 
thus, e. g. vav-^ayia is a substantive, vav-^ayElv a verb, vav-fidyog an ad- 
jective. 

Remark 1. The explanatory word takes the second place in the com- 
pound but seldom, and mostly in poetic words, e. g. dELOidalfitov, i. e. SeI- 
accg Tovg dalfiovag. 

2. Both words stand either in an attributive relation to each other, (a sub- 
stantive with an adjective or with another substantive in the Gen.), e. g. 



§ 237.] FORMATION OF WORDS. COMPOUNDS. 291 

xax-f^id = ««x/j ($ig, had condition ; Inn-ovQiq = \nnov ovQ(i ; or in an 
objective relation, (a verb, adjective or substantive with the Case of the 
substantive or with an adverb), e. g. innorgoipslv, InnoTQOcpog; vavfiu/HV 
{i. e. vaval f^dxfff^ai), vavfidxog, vavixa/la; tUTV/uv, evrv/rig', aviaxdvai, 
avvuTXUJog^ dvdaTttaig. 

3. The verb can be compounded with prepositions only, e. g. arto-, ex-, 
avu-^ngo-, ifi-, 8ia-, xaia-. ttuqu-, ngoa-^alveiv; comp. § 237, 5 ; thesub- 
stiintive and adjective, either with substantives and adjectives, or with pre- 
positions, or with separable and inseparable adverbs and prefixes, e. g. ao)- 
fiaro(fvXa^y ■i]dv-X6yog', nsgl-aTacrig, did-Xsvy.og ; tv-xvx'i]g, dv-ahiog', the 
adverb, with the prepositions only, e. g. inQi-uTctdov. 

Rem. 2. All other compounds are formed by derivation from words pre- 
viously compounded, e. g. ev-iv/uv and ev-xvxcvg from iv-ivyj]g. 

Rem. 3. (a) Separable adverbs are such as are used alone, as well as in 
composition, e. g. st, icell, 7ih]v. except, «'//«, at the same time, uy/i, near, aqri, 
now, recently, ay(xv{dy(t-), very, ndXiv, again, notlai, long since, dig from dvo, 
bis, or the same as 8i'/vt, dis, separately, nuv, ivholly ; EvrvyHv, svivyrjc, hap- 
pily ; 7iXi}fj(^ih'jg [nh^v, psXog), violating harmony ; nlrjpfifXtiv, nXffxuilrjaig ; 
afucngoyvKo, to run together, afxaiQoyla ; ayyi^urnv, to go near to, dyyj&u- 
Xaaaog, mari propinquus ; dq-tidaXi'ig, now blooming; viyaa^ivrig, dydqgoog, 
dydvriq)og, very snowy ; Trali^^SXainog, that buds again; naXaicpviog^ planted 
long since; digyiXioi, two thousand ; dl(f&oyyoc, having a double sound; ndv- 
(Tocpog, all-wise. 

(b) Inseparable adverbs are such as are used only in composition. They 
are as follows : 

(a) »j/u i-, half, semi, e. g. 'i]fu(fXsxTog, semiustus. 

(/5) dvg- expresses difficulty, adversity or aversion, and is often the an- 
tithesis of fu, e. g. drgrvyelv and ivrvyuv, dvcdai^ovla, misfortune; 

[y] a Privative, usually uv- before a vowel, has the force of the Latin in, 
and expresses the negation of the idea contained in the simple word, 
e. g. uaocpog, unvjise, ciTifila, dishonor, oinaig, childless, dvuliiog, in- 
nocens. 

(5) a Collective [d&QoiaTiy.ov) and Intensive, like the Latin con in compo- 
sition, expresses community, equality, or a collective idea, and hence 
also intensity, e. g. (communit}^, especially in the names of kindred 
and companions) (i8£Xcp6g,brother, from dsXcpvg, ivomh ; (equality) «t«- 
XavTog, of the same iveight, amdog, even; (in a collective sense) d&Qoog, 
collected, {^(jeoj, -d^Qsopai, to sound), uoXX-i]g, collected, fi'om uXi]: or nli]g, 
dyuQix), (xytXrj; (intensity) wify?;?, intentus, aamog, very shady, vi^go- 
^og, making a loud noise. 

Rem. 4. The Euphonic a, § 16, 10, must be distinguished from the Col- 
lective a, e. g. ardyvg and uaTa^vg, an ear of grain, anQom] and datfqo- 
Tti'i, lightning. 

§237. Formation of Compounds. •(334,335.) 
1. When the first part of the compound is a verb, § 236, Rem. 1, the pure, 



292 FORMATION OF WORDS. COMPOUNDS. [§237 

sometimes also the strengthened, stem of the verb remains unchanged, if 
the following word begins witli a vowel, e. g. (psQ-avyiji;, nud^-aqx^tv \ or 
the final vowels c, o, t, also the syllables crt, £cr, cat, go, are annexed to the 
stem of the verb, if the following word begins with a consonant ; a also is 
annexed when the following word begins with a vowel, e. g. Sax-i-^vfiog, 
XLn-o-Taxirjg and Xem-o-Toixjrjg, TSQTi-t-xiQavvog,i/eQ-ai-ysX(agj qxQ-ia-^iog, 
Taf.i-s(Ti-xQOig, eX}(-s<jl-:is7TXog, fii^o^uQ^agog = (Aiy-ao-^., ^lipaanig = q'm- 
a-aanig, nXtj^Lnnog = nXijy-a-innog. 

2. When the first part of the compound is a substantive or adjective, the 
declension-stem of the substantive generally remains unchanged, e. g. first 
Dec. vi>cr]-(f6Qog, ayoga-vofiog ] second Dec. Xoyo-ygacpog, ia-i'ifxtgog by 
Elision, xaxovgyog by Crasis, Xayio^oXog [Xayoig); third Dec. aaxv-vofiog, 
't}8v-X6yog, ^ov-qpog^og, vav-fia%ia ; nvg-cpogog, ixEXay-/oXla, navr,yvgig ; in 
some, the union-vowel p is annexed to the stem, e. g. aoi^ai-o-cpxjXoL^, cpvaL- 
o-X6yog, dadov/og by Crasis, instead of dad-o-fx^g ; in neuters in -o?. Gen. 
-£-og, the £ is elided before o, e. g. ^icp-o-cpogog, or the declension-stem in -£?, 
§61, (b), is retained, e. g. 'isX£(T-q)6gog ; so also in other neuters, e. g. xsgug- 
pSXog, (p(ag-q>6gog. 

Remark 1. In the first Dec, however, the union-vowel o is often found 
instead of the declension-stem, e. g. dix-o-ygacpog [51x7]), Xoyx-o-q)6goc ; so 
also the ending -rj or -a is annexed to words of the second and third Dec, 
e, g. &avairj-(p6gog, aamdi^-cpogog', neuters in -og, Gen. -sog, PI. -rj, fre- 
quently vary between the o and rj, e. g. ^tcpocpogog and ^icprjcpogog, axsvocfio- 
gog and ay.Evrjcpogog. 

Rem. 2. In some words of the third Dec, more seldom of the first and 
second, i is annexed to the pure stem, as a miion-vowel, e. g. nvglnvovg, 
alyi^SoTTjg ; fivdiinoXog {fivartjg), [xvglnvovg. In several words a euphonic a 
(o-t) is inserted, e. g. fioyo-d-Toxog, &to-a-8x&gla, together wath the regular 
■&S08X&gi(X, vav-ai-nogog. 

3. When the first part of the compound is an adverb, only those changes 
take place, which arise fi'om the general rules respecting the change of 
consonants. 

4. Respecting the second part, it is to be noted, that the words beginning 
with «, f, 0, in composition, regularly lengthen the three vowels, (if the last 
part of the compound is a simple) into t] and w, e. g. EVTJvsuog from uvefAog, arga- 
jfjyog from ayw, £li}V(ag firom ai'^g ; {s) dugi'igsrixog from ignuug, dvgijXaTog 
fi*om ilttvvoj', (o) avwcpsXijg from cq>BXog, navaU&gog fi'om oXXi'(xi, avwvi'nog 
from oVo/za. 

5. In relation to the end of the word, the following things should be 
noted, 

A. In ttie Greek language, as has been seen § 236, 3, a verb can be com- 
pounded only with prepositions ; but if it is necessary to compound a 



§237.] FORMATION OF WORDS. COMPOUNDS. 293 

vorb with anothor ]){irt of speech, this is never done immediately, but by 
mejms of a derivation from a compound word cither actually existing or 
assumed. Then the derivative-ending, commonly - i(a , is regularly ap- 
j)endcd to tliis compound word, e. g. from Xmiovg rgscpEiv, to keep horses, the 
derivative is not InnoTgicpeiv, but by means of the compound substantive 
IjiTioTQocpog, it is Innoxqocfifw ; so &so(Ts^i(o from -d^Eocrs^i^g, vavfiaxsiv from 
vavfui;(og, tvti'XHV from evTVxrjg. 
B. The compound word is an adjective or substantive. 

a. The second partis derived from a verb, and has the following endings, 
(o) Most frequently -og, ~ov, e. g. '&rjQOTQ6q)og, nourishing wild beasts, 

S^TjgoTQocpog, nourished by wild beasts. See § 75, Rem. 4 ; 
(/5)-»?? {-Tr]g) or - ag (Gen. - o v), -riQ (-i^?), - x w ^, commonly as 

substantives with a transitive signification, e. g. sisoyiirjg, benefactor, 

vofio&iirjg, legislator, fxvgonojXrjg, ogvi^o&Tjgag, naidoXsroog ; 
iy) -V?i - « ?j commonly with a passive or intransitive signification, e. g. 

S^EOipiXrig, beloved of God, Ev^adrjg, docilis, svrtQenrjg, becoming ; 
(^) -S (-1)} e. g. ipsvdofiagTvg from MAPTTfL, vofiocpvXa^. 

b. Or the second part is a substantive, 

(a) Both pai'ts of the compound stand in an attributive relation to each 
other, since the fii'st contains a more definite explanation of the last. The 
substantive remains unchanged. The first part is an adverb or preposition, 
sometimes also a substantive or adjective, e. g. ofiodovXog, a fdlow-slave, 
^ovXtfiog, bulimy, aygonoXig, citadel. 

(b) Both parts of the compound stand in an objective relation to each other, 
since the last denotes the object of the first. This division includes a large 
number of adjectives, the fii-st part of which consists either of a verb, or, 
though more seldom, of an adjective, of a separable or inseparable adverb 
or of a preposition used as an adverb, e. g. dsiaidaifxwv = 6 lovg dalfiovag 
delaag, irtixaiQinaxog = o io7g xctnoUg iTiLX(xi^QO}y> xay.odal^wv = o xtxxov dal- 
(xova sxcav, dvgsQcog, one who hxis an unhappy love, evd^sog = 6 tov S^eov iv sav~ 
jto l^ifcoy, anoiHog = 6 ano tov 6iy.ov wv, ujiaig = o naldag ovx l/wy. In all 
these examples the form of the substantive remains unchanged, where the 
substantive has a form which does not differ from the masculine and feminine 
form of the adjective, but where this is not the case, the substantive assumes a 
corresponding adjective-ending, viz. -og (Gen. -ov), -ag, (Gen. -to), -tj? (Gen. 
-ovg), -t5 (Gen. -5o?,) -wr and (when it ends in -v) -g, e. g. avvdEinvog {-dEm- 
vov,) a fellow-guest, Ev&vdmog {81xt}\ atip.og {ttuiq), dex'tjfJ.EQog {i}nigtt), cpiXo- 
XQVf^aTog [xgij^ia, ;^^?j/iai«), aarofiog (o-ro^ia), EV/Ewg {/rj), having a fertile 
soil, XEiTiovEwg {vavg), one who deserts the ship, avb)q)eX7]g (to *6cpEXog), avaXitig 
[uXxri), uxgri^wv, adaxgvg, Gen. -vog (to duxgv). 

c. Or the second part is an adjective, 



294 FORMATION OF WORDS.— COMPOUNDS. [§ 237. 

The adjective retains its form, except tliat those in -vg commonly take 
tlie ending -ij^;; the first part consists either of a suhstantive or an adverh, 
e. g. ainv'/tliojVy urbi vicinus, nufuocpog or Tiaaaocpog, -ov, vtry ivise, avofxoiogj 
-ov, unlike, TTQodrjXog, -ov, arjdi'ig from ^iSvg, nodaix-qg from atxvg. 



SYNTAX 



CHAPTER I. 
SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE. 



SECTION I. 

Parts of a Simple Sentence. 

§ 238. Na t II re of a Se n tenc e. — S it bj e c t. — Pr e die ate. 

(336, 359—363.) 

1. Syntax treats of sentences. A sentence is the expression 
of a thought in words, e. g. To Qodov S-aXXei ; 6 av&Qconog d-vijxog 
iariv. The conceptions of the mind are related partly to each 
other, and partly to the speaker, — these are combined together 
and form a thought. Conceptions are expressed by what are 
called essential words ; their relations to each other, partly by 
inflexion and partly by what are called /or??zaZ words, § 38, 4. 

Thus, e. g. in the sentence To xaXov qodov S^aXX-SL iv tw jov naTQ-og 
xtJtt-m, there^'are five essential words, viz. y.alog^ godov, -d^uXXsiv, ttot?/^, 
jcrjTiog ; their relations to each other are expressed partly by their inflexion 
and partly by the formal v/ords to, tv, toj, tov. 

2. Every sentence must necessarily have two parts, a subject 
and a predicate. — The subject is that of which something is 
affirmed; the predicate that which is affirmed of the subject, 
e. g. in the sentences, to Qodov S^cUIec — o av&Qwnog d^v^rog iativ, 
70 Qodov and 6 avd-QaTzog are the subjects, S^dllei and d-v)]r6g iariv^ 
the predicates. 

3. The predicate properly contains the substance of the sen- 
tence; the subject is subordinate to it and can be expressed by 
a mere inflexion-ending of the verb, e. g. 8l8(xi- ^ i, (i) give. 

4. The subject always has the force of a substantive, and 
hence can be expressed either by a substantive or a substantive 



296 SYNTAX. SUBJECT. PREDICATE. [§ 238. 

personal pronoun or numeral ; or by an adjective or participle 
used as a substantive ; or by an adverb which becomes a sub- 
stantive by prefixing the article ; or by a preposition followed 
by the case it governs ; or by an infinitive ; finally every word, 
letter, syllable, and every clause can be considered as a substan- 
tive, and hence, with the neuter article commonly agreeing with 
it, can be used as a subject. The subject is in the Nom. 

To godov daXXbi. "Eya ygaqxa^ a v yQaq)Sig. Tqelq ')]X&ov. 'O 
(Tocpog sldalfKav iaiiv. 01 (p & ov ovvt eg fiiaovvjuL. 01 ndlai uv- 
dgtloi t'jaav. Ol tisqI Milt id dr]v xaXoJg e/xaxsaavTO. To d id uaxs lv 
xaXov iaiiv. X. R. L. 9, 2. ejiEiuL TJj dqixfi crco'C^aS-at ilg zov nXilb), 
XQovov fidXXov, 1] if] naxia. To at avvdsafiog icniv. To ^xa [lay^ov ia- 
Tiv. To yvbid^i a saVTOv xaXov iaxiv. 

Remark L In all languages, the abstract is very frequently used for the 
concrete (metonomy), so that the same word can denote the one as well as 
the other. Thus in Homer, yivog, yevsr], yovog instead of vlog. 
H. I, 201/ SlxEavov If, &s6}v yivsaiv , parentem; also in the tragic and 
other poets, the following words are used to denote persons, viz. novog, 
(TTvyog^ aTt], 7i)jfj,a^ vocrog, sgig, (j.ijVLg, fiiJTig, t ifi a I, etc.] 
ay sfiovEV fi a instead of 7]yefj.MV, vvfKpEVfxa instead of vt'iuqp?;, v ^ q ic- 
fj. a , etc. ; in prose, y iXoig, a ridiculous man ; Xi] q o g , nugae instead of 
nugator ; oXs& Qog , pernicies instead of perniciosus homo ; o ^log, veiy 
commonly signifies the means of living, to o cp sX og , strength (robiu'), etc. ; 
also the collective nouns nQso-jS sia instead of jiQia^eig, ^vfi^axla in- 
stead of ^v^^iaxoi, cpvyi] instead of q^vyddfg, (pvXuHT} instead of cpvXaxig. 
In like manner the name of a place is sometimes put for the persons in it, 
6. g. ■& iax (i ov instead of d^iaiai, 2Jidojv/'A^v8og instead of ^idmuoi, 
etc. The name of the inhabitants is veiy frequently put for the name of 
the place, as in Latin, e. g. Th. 1, 107, ^omicav aiqaitvaavTav ig /I oj g id g , 
TTjV ylay.edaifxoviwv /jLt^Tgd^oXiv. 

Rem. 2. Where the Accusative wath the Infinitive occurs, the subject is 
in the Ace, as will be seen, § 307, 3. In indefinite and distributive desig- 
nations of number, the subject is expressed by a preposition and the Case 
it governs, e. g. Elg text aq a g 7]X&ov, about four came. X. Cy. 8. 3, 9. 
dniaaav TiQuiof jxiv tcov dogvcpogojv slg z sr g an igx iX lov g, efiJigoud^EV 
ds Tc5v nvXbJV tig t ecr a a g a g, digylXiOi 8s exaiigcad^fv twv nvXwv. X. H. 
6. 5, 10. tcpvyov slg Auy.i8al^ova twv n^gl ^Tdcnmtov TiytaT'Xiv mgl ox- 
taxodi'ovg. So xad^ iy.ddxovg, singuli, y.ard. s&vii, singulae gentes. 

Rem. 3. In the following cases the subject is not expressed by any spe- 
cial word, 

(a) When the subject is a personal pronoun, it is not expressed, unless it 
is particularly emphatic, e. g. Fgdifo), ygdcpeig, ygucpfi ; 

(b) The verbal idea contained in the predicate is such, that it cannot ap- 
propriately belong to eveiy subject, but only to a particular one, the sub- 
ject being, as it were, implied in the predicate. Thus, olv o / oev st 
in Horn. sc. 6 olro/oog, the cup-bearer pours out the wine ; ■& v s i in Her. 



§ 238.] SYNTAX. SUBJECT. PREDICATE. 297 



80. o &VT1J0. X. An. 3. 4, 3(). infl eylyvioaxov nlrovg ol l:^XXT]V(g ftovXo- 
fiirovg anieyai yal diay/ekkoixivovg, fX7jQV^e (sc. o xi'iQV^) Joig"EX~ 
Xrf(n naQnaHtviiiTaadai. So ar] jj, alv s ^ if/ a dXn i yy i, iadXni- 
yltv , sc. ffaXmxT^g. So wc must explain i;f4, v iqis i, ft q ovt il , 
d aT Q dm e I ^ sc. o Zfi-?. Th. 4, 52. sasiae, there ivas an earth- 
quake. X. C y. 4. 5, 5. (TvaxoTd^ei,, it is dark. 

(c)The subject is easily supplied from the context; thus in designations 
of time, e. g. iiv iyylg r,Xiov dvafMwv (sc. fj rifisQa). In this way the 
word ^eog is very frecpiently omitted in certain phrases, e. g. n a q s- 
Xs L fioi, sc. o -d^eog, God permits, affords an opportunity = licet, e. g. 
Her. 3, 73. ii^Tv n aqi^ti dvaaodaua&ai rr^v dqx^'l^ '■> ^^^ nQOffrjfxai- 
V E I, sc. o S^sog ; n q o/ mq s7 fiOL (sc. t« nqdyp.ttia), things prosper to 
me, I succeed, comp. Th. 1, 109. In such ex-pressions as (f acr I, Xs- 
yov(T I, etc., the subject avd^goinot is regularly omitted, as it is easily 
supplied by the mind ; 

(d) Sometimes the subject is supplied from some word of the sentence. 
Her. 9, 8. lov ^la&^ov ir e Ix £ ov y.al crcpi ijv TiQog riXs'i, sc. to ziH/og. 
X. C}'. 2. 4, 24. noQiV(TO(xaL svOvg ngog t« ft aa lXs l a , y.ctl i}v ^h dv- 
■&lajr]Tai, sc. o ftacriXevg. So also in other cases, e. g. PI. L. 864, d. 
n a I 8 L (i, xQcofiEvog, ovdiv ttw t u v toiovtojv (sc. nalSojv) diacfiQOiv ; 

(e)With the third Pers. Sing, of the verb, the indefinite pronoun rt? is 
fi'equently omitted. PI. Criton. 49, c. outs dviadiy.siv dsl, ovts xay.ojg 
noiHv ovdivtt dv&Qwnwv, old dv oiioiv ndaxjl ^^ avxMV, so often 
with the Inf ; but if a participle stands in connection with the Inf , 
e. g. Eur. M. 1018. xovqpcog q)iQsiv XQV -^vv^ov ovxa Gvpcpoqdg, the 
participle must be construed as the subject. 

Rem. 4. Impersonal verbs, i. e. such as in English agree with the indefi- 
nite pronoun it, are not used in Greek ; for such expressions as 8u, xQV^ 
8o)CH, nQSJiEi, e'isffTL{v), ivdixtiaL {it is possible), y.oeXutg, sv exbi, l/ft Xoyov 
(consentaneum est), Xiyerai [it is said), etc., the Greek language always con- 
siders as personal, the following Inf. or substantive sentence being regarded 
as the subject of these verbs. The indefinite pronouns, one, they, are com- 
monly expressed by tig, or by the third Pers. PL Act., e. g. Xsyovcri, cpaac, 
or by the third Pers. Sing. Pass., e. g. Xsysiai, or by the personal Pass., e. g. 
qnXoi'^ni, (fiiXji, etc., they love me, you, etc., or by the second Pers. Sing., 
particularly of the Opt. with dv ^ e. g. cfalrig dv, dicas, you may say, one 
may, can say. 

5. The predicate is always a verbal idea, and hence is ex- 
pressed either by a finite verb, or by an adjective, participle, 
substantive, pronoun or numeral with the formal word dvaiy 
which, in this relation, is usually called the affirmation or copula^ 
since it connects the adjective, substantive, etc. with the subject, 
and forms one thought, e. g. » 

To q68ov ^aXXst. 'O dv&Qionog S-vtjtog iaxiv. ^Ad^ dv utoI 
slaLv ol -d^sol. ^11 dQEiTj xaXri egxiv. ^jlyaS-i] nttQulcpaalg iariv 
ixaiqov. Kvgog »]v ft aa iX sv g. Tovto lo 7Tgdyp,d iatt xods (in this 



298 SYNTAX. SUBJECT. PREDICATE. [§ 238. 

case an essential word must always be supplied with the pronoun, e. g. 
tods TO nquytia). 2v i]a d^ a tiuvkov n q ojTog. Ol uvdQeg t](r av t gelg. 

Rem. 5. 'J'hc finite verb denotes both the thing affirmed (id quod praedi- 
catur) and the relation of tliat wliich is affirmed to the subject or speaker; 
the relation to the subject, is denoted by the personal-endings of the verb; 
the relation to tlie speaker, l)y its Modes and Tenses, e. g. the ending of 
the verb Afi'/w shows that its subject is in tlie first person, and its being in 
the Ind. mode Pres. tense, indicates that the speaker asserts something di- 
rectly, at the present time. But if the predicate is expressed by an adjec- 
tive or substantive with elvai, the thing predicated is denoted by the ad- 
jective or substantive, and its relation to the speaker by drai, e. g. tvSuifioiv 
slfj.1 = si'daifiovi-co, tvdalijicjv si =^ Evdaifiova-sig, svduifiovsg taovjai = tv- 
daifxov^-aovGLv. 

Rem. C. It is necessaiy to distinguish between the sense of the word h- 
vai, as a formal word, and as an essential word ; wlien used m the latter 
relation, it has the idea of being or existence, of tarrying, living, being in a cer- 
tain condition, etc., e. g. arii S^sog = ^sog iaiiv wV, as in Her. 3, 108. xov 
■&siov ri nqovoiT] i (Ttt i ov a a aocpr,. 

Rem. 7. In order to give greater emphasis to the predicate, the simple 
idea expressed by the verb, is resolved into the participle and copula dvai,. 
This mode of expression, however, is more usual in poetry, although it is 
found also in prose, particularly in Herodotus, comp. Rem. 5. Eur. C. 381. 
nwg, w TalainwQ t) i s jracr/oyxf? rads; Id. H. 117. i)v aniv8 otv . 
Her. 3, 99. un aqv sc ^sv 6 g iax i. Id. 9, 51. t) vijaog iax i uno rov 
^Aatanov 8iy.a aiadlovg ans/ova a. PI. L. 860, e. d ruirn ol'iwg s/ ovt a 
sax Lv . Dem. 01. 3. (v. 1.) 11, 7. xalx uvsyvoj-AOTsg ^ cr « v , they would 
have been convinced of these things. 

Rem. 8. The copula elv ac is sometimes omitted, though commonly only 
in the Ind. Pres. ; sivai is sometimes omitted, even when it is not a copula, 
but properly a verb. The following are the cases where this ellipsis most 
frequently occurs in Greek, 

(a) In general propositions, obsen'ations and proverbs. Eur. O. 330. o 
fisyag ul^og ov f^ovifiog iv ^goiolg. X. Cy. 2. 4, 27. crTqaiia yag i} 
qaairi [o66g) Ta/laTrj ; 

(b) Veiy often w ith verbal adjectives in - t £ o ? , as also with other expres- 
sions denoting neces^i^y and didy, e. g. avay/.rj, %qsojv, -d^sfxig, 
etxog, also with xaiqog, ojga and the like. Dem. Ph. 3, 129, 70. r,fup 
y vjisq xijg ilsv&eQictg ayojvidtsov. Id. Cor. 296, 205. aii^lag — 
iv dovhvovai] t// noXsL q)£Qsiv uvayy.rj; 

(c) Often with certain adjectives, e. g. t t o i fi o g , nqo'&vfiog, olo gx s. 
dvv ax 6 g , q a d to v , j^ttAfiTTov, dij ). ov, u $ lov , etc. PI. Phaedr. 
252, a. [i] ipv^rj) dovXszEiv kxoiixrj. Dem. Ph. 1. 48, 29. f/w naaxsLV 
OTioi'v sxoifiog. X. C. 1, 1, 5. di^lov ovv, otl oix «V [Soinqaxrjg) 
nqoiXeysv, u ^i] inlaxEVSv aXri^svanv. Comp. ib. 2, 34. 

Rem. 9. The Ind. Impf is but seldom omitted, e. g. Aeschhi. Ctes. §^71, 
vv^ iv ^saco (sc. »]y) nal naqijf^sv xi] vanqaln ug xijv iy.xlriuutv ; the Ind. Pres. 
also is not very often omitted after conjunctions, e. g. onoxs, ind (comp. X. 
C. 1, 46.) ; on the contrary, very fi*equently after oil and wg, that, e. g. X. 
C. 1. 2, 52. lsy(ov, wg oidsv ocpsXog. The subjunctive is but seldom omitted 



§ 239.] SYNTAX. COMPARISON. ATTRIBUTE AND OBJECT. 299 

after the relative og av, and especially after conjunctions, e. g. PI. Rp. 370, 
e. wv ttv avrolg xQtiit (sc. j)). Also the ellipsis of the Opt. is not of very 
frequent ocoinreiice, e. g. X. Cy. 1. 4, 12. rig yaq uv, Siponjav, aov ys Ixuvd- 
ifQog UHaoti (s<% ft';;) ; lb. 2. 3, 2. t/V (xav %uelg rixMfifP, di'jXov, oic oV T£ noli- 
fiioi av T/,/i«rf^ot (sc. ?«'/;(/«»•). The ellipsis of the Imp. is veiy rare, e. g. S. 
OC. 1480. 'iXaoQ, co daluiov. X. An. 3. 3, 14. jolg ovv -d-edlg x^Q^? (sc. eitrTw), 
oTi OV (Tvv noXlj] ^cofi]], vtlka avv oXr/oig ijXdov. The participle is veiy of- 
ten omitted, especially after verba inielligendi and declarandi, e. g. X. S. 3, 7. 
drjkov /f, OTt (pavXog (sc. wV) (pavov^ai, but elsewhere also, e. g. X. C. 2. 3, 
15. axonu U/sig xal ovdaiuaig TiQog aov (sc. 6Vr«), et nullo modo tibi conve- 
nientia; even in such cases as Th. 4, 135. xsi.uojpog jdevTuvTog y.al ngog tag 
i'ldt] (sc. oVtoc). The Inf. is often omitted after doHslv, ')]ytla&ai, vo^ilQuv 
and the like, e. g. Th. 7, 60. ^ovhvTsa tdoxfi. X. Cy. 1. 6, 14. ujilovtu [xs 
ixiXsvaag Tolg aigaiTjyixoig (sc. ftVat) vo^i^o^ivoig avdgdcri diaXiysad^ai. 

§239. Comparison. — Attribute and Obj e ct. (^52.) 

1. "When it is necessary to indicate, that the predicate belongs 
to the subject in a higher or lower degi^ee than to another ob- 
ject, this relation is denoted by the Comparative, e. g. V 7Tart]Q 
fieii^cov 8(77 iv , tj 6 viog. — '0 ao(f6g iA,d).Xov '/aiQ£i ty dgety, rj 
roig XQniiuoiv. And when the predicate belongs to the subject 
in the highest or lowest degi'ee, as respects all other objects 
compared, the Superlative is used, which commonly takes with 
it a pai'titive Genitive, e. g. Zcoy.qdr^g Ttdvtcov 'EXXtjvcov go q}(or a- 
tog t]v . — ooq)6g ndvzoiv {j-dXiat a sti id^v fisT z?jg dQETTJg. 

Remark 1. The Comparative is strengthened or more definitely stated in 
the following ways : (a) b}^ bt l, still, even, etiam, e. g. /usl^cov sx i , still great- 
er ; [h) by fi ax g o) , oXlyo), noXXca, art oioXko), oo-w, too-outw; 
f/kiy a, oXly OV , n okv , o aov, t oa ovto, which show how much more 
or less of the qualit}^ expressed by the adjective is intended, e. g. ttoXXcj 
ixsi^^ojv, multo major, /ar greater, n oXXm st i fxel^ovsg, multo majores etiam ; 
(c) sometimes by ^aXXov . Her. 1, 32. [xd XXov oX^LC^xEgog taxi {far). 

Rem. 2. The Superlative is sti-engthened or more definitely stated in the 
following wav'S : (a) by x « / , vel, even, e. g. xal fidXiaxa, very greatly indeed; 
(b) by w ords denoting measure, viz. n oXXm , fiaxg m , noXv, n agd 
noXv, offo), xodovxoi, e. g. txoXXo) «^<(TTog, multo praestantissimus, 
fiaxgo) agiaxog, longe praestantissimus ; (c) even by the Superlatives 
nX slax ov , fxiyiaxov, fid X tax a, e. g. S. OC. 743. TcXslax ov dv~ 
^gwnb)v xdxiaxog. Th. 7, 42. (xaXiaxa dsivoxaxog ; (d) by the relatives 
€0? {oTx (ag), ox L and ^ , oiog , § 343, Rem. 2, e. g. w g xd/iaxa, quam 
celen-ime, o x i fidXiaxa, fj dgiaxov, e. g. PI. Apol. 23, a. n oXXal fiiv dnix- 
S^SLttl fxoi yfyovadL xal olai xaXan(uxaxaL xal ^agvxaxai. X. An. 4. 8, 2. 
Xwgioy olov x^kinmiaxov ; (e) by «t?, unus, signifying the one, e. g. Her. 6, 
127. vX&s ^(xivdvgldTjg ^v^aglxrjg, og inl nXsHcrxov dh x^^^^? ^^? dvi]g 
dnixETo. X. An. 1. 9, 22. dwga nXslaxa slg ys dvrjg a)»' iXdfi^ave (C. 
Tusc. 2. 26, 64. amplitudinem animi unam esse omnium rem pulcherrimam) ; 
(f) a peculiar mode of strengthening the Superlative, is by joining iv xo7g 



300 SYNTAX.— AGREEMENT. [§ 240. 

with it, in which case the Superlative must Ix) repeated, e. g/0*'£Q(ag ir 
jolg n Qta (i vxaxoq iaii (i. e. iy joig nQta^viuioig oi'tri). Her. 7, 137. 
JOVTo fioi iv Tola I d^EioTarov (paiytiai yivia&ai. Pi. Symp. 173, b. 
^(xmouTovg (Qaarijg lop iv xolg fiuXiaja jup totc Tlie construction 
with tlie Feni. is found only in Thuc, e. g. 3, S\.{(nuaig) iv lolg nQbtzr) 
iyiveio. lb. 17. «y 7o7g nkilaTai vijsg. In such instances, toT 5 must 
be considered as Neut. In like manner, the expression ofiOLU lolg was 
used with the Superlative. Her. 3, 8. ae(iovxui di'/iou^ioi niaxig uvx^Qwnwv 
o (xolu T o2 a I ^riX i<jx a (sc. affiouevoig), ut qui maxime. Th. 1, 25. /otj- 
lAUiiov di'vufifi, bvxeg xax ixelvov xov /qovov '6 fi l u x ol g 'EXh'ivwv nlov~ 
a I b)x ux I g. 

Rem. 3. The relation of the Superlative is often expressed more emphati- 
cally by employing negative adjectives or adverbs of the Superlative form, 
preceded by o v {Litotes), instead of positive adjectives or adverbs of the Su- 
perlative form, e. g. ov/ ^jy icrx a , ov x ax tax g , ovx iXa % icrx g , 
stronger than fiuXiaxa, jSiXxiaxog, (.tiyia-xog. Sometimes, also, it is expressed 
antithetically, e. g. ov/ ijxiax a, aXX a iiixXiux a. 

2. A sentence consisting of a subject and predicate may be 
extended by defining the subject and predicate more exactly. 
This more exact definition of the subject, (which is called an at- 
tribute), is caused, either by the addition of an adjective, e. g. 
TO y.aX6v Qodov, or by a substantive, which maybe either in 
the Gen. — an attributive Gen. — e. g. o tov ^aailscog xTJTiog, 
regis hortus = regius hortus, or in the same Case as the subject, 
i. e. in apposition, e. g. Kvqog, 6 ^aaiXevg. The more exact defi- 
nition of the predicate (which is termed the object), is made 
either by the Cases of the substantive, by prepositions wdth a 
substantive, by a form of the Inf., or by an adverb, e. g. '0 (joq:6g 
triv ccQETrjv acrxer. TIeqI rrjg TzatQidog iiax6(ied-a. ^Anit- 
vai ETiid^v^m. KaXojg ygaq^eig. 

§240. Agreement. (364.) 

1. The predicative verb agrees with the subject in Person and 
in Number; the predicative or attributive adjective, participle, 
pronoun and numeral, in Gender, Number and Case. The 
attributive adjective agrees with its substantive in all the Cases. 
So a predicative or attributive substantive agrees with the sub- 
ject, when the substantive denotes apersorij and hence it either 
has a particular form for the Masc. and Fem. gender, or it is of 
common gender ; but when the substantive denotes a things it 
agrees with the subject only in Case; the gender and number 
may be different, e. g. 



§ 240.] SYNTAX. AGREEMENT. 301 

'l^ycb /gd<pa)^ iTV ygdipeig, ovTog yqacpu. 'O ttv&()(ajiog d^vtjiog faxiv. *II 
aQSiij xaXi] iaxiv. To noay/jia aidXQOV eaxiv. Ol [Eklrjvfg noksfiixunaTOi 
^crav. ' O xaXog natg, i] <T0(f7) yvvf], to fitxgbv rsxvov. Kvgog I'^v (iaaiXtiig. 
TofiijQig i]v ^aalkeia. Kvgog, 6 ^aadsvg, Tofxvgtg, i] ^aaiXeia. On the con- 
trary, Tr|»' d^vyaxiqa, d s ivo p xt xuXXo g xal (i iy e& o g , i^dyav 
Olds iiniv {his dauglder a wonder in heavty and size) X. Cy. 5. 2, 7. 

2. The predicative adjective or substantive agrees with the 
subject in the manner above stated, when the following verbs, 
which do not express a complete predicate sense, take, as it were, 
the place of the copula : 

(a) The verb vnaQx^iv, to be the cause of, to exist; 

(b) Verbs which denote groiving^ becoming, e. g. yiyvea&aiy cpv. 
vaiy av^dvead-ai ; 

(c) The verbs fitveiv, to remain, and TiatacT^vai, to be establish- 
ed; 

(d) Verbs of seeming, appearing, showing one^s self, e. g. ioixi- 
vai, (faivea&cci, drjXoijo&ai ; 

(e) Verbs of being named, e. g. aaXsTo'&aiy ovofjid^ead^ai, Xeyea- 
d^aij axoveiv, to be esteemed, like audire ; 

(f ) Verbs which signify, to be appointed to something, to be 
chosen, to be named, e. g. cuqeia&ai, dnodErAvva&ai ; 

(g) Verbs which signify, to be regarded as something, to be 
recognized as something, to be supposed, e. g. vo^ii^eod^aij 
XQiv£(T&ai, VTtola^^dvEO&ai ; 

(h) Verbs which signify, to be given out as something, to be 
received as something, to be cast off, and the like, e. g. 

KvQog iyivBTO ^aaiXtvg tCjV UsQauv. Tovroig 6 fplhnnog fisyag 
rjv^ij&T} (Dem.). ^AXxi^iddijg ^gi&T] (Txqaxriyog. 'AvtI (pikwv xal ^iv(ov 
vvv xoXaxsg xal y^-edlg i/&Qol axov ova lv [audiunt) Dem. Cor. 241. 

Remark 1. When the verbs mentioned under (e), (f ), (g), (h), have the 
active form, they take two accusatives. 

Rem. 2. The verb « I v « i , when used as an essential word, § 238, Rem. 6, 
as well as several of the verbs above named, may be joined with an adverb, 
when they express a complete predicate sense, and thus be made more de- 
finite, e. g. 2(axq(xxrig r] v [lived] a si avv Tolg vioig. KaXta g ^ xaxoi g ia- 
T IV [it is well, etc.). J elv cag sa av iv cpvXaxfiat ol Ba^vXcovioi (dihgenter 
rersaianfur in custodia) Her. 3, 152. eIvul is very often connected, as 
well as the verbs y iyv Bad^ a i and 7isq)vxiv a i, with adverbs of place 
and degree, when there are no corresponding adjective forms, as dlx(x, 
X<>i(} is t sxaj, fiaxq dv , nogqta, iyyvg^ TiXfjcrioVf 6 ftov, vcXtg^ 
40 



302 SYNTAX. EXCEPTIONS TO THE RULES OF AGREEMENT. [§ 241. 

ft u XXov , ^u u X I a J a , c. fi. 7 otai A^i]vido)v aTQairiyolat, iylvovio S 1% a 
ai yvojfiai, (seiitentiac in diversas partes disctdtbant) Her. (>, 109. 

3. When a Demonstrative, Rel. or Interrog. pronoun is the 
subject of a sentence, and the predicate is a substantive with the 
copula tivaij or one of the verbs mentioned in No. 2, the Eng. 
sometimes use a Neut. pronoun, e. g. it is a good man ; on the 
contrary, the Greek commonly, and the Latin regularly, put the 
pronoun by means of attraction, in the same gender and number 
with the substantive to which it belongs. The same thing 
takes place when the pronoun is in the Ace. and depends on a 
verb of nai7Wig; or when the pronoun is a predicate, e. g. 

OvTog iffTiv 6 uvi]q. Avxt] icril nrjyij xal aQxrj ndvTOJV jojv x(x- 
xm'. Ovioi dyj'A&rjvntol ys dixtjv avT'i]v y.aXoiaiv, ixkXu yQuqtijv PI. 
Eutyphr. priiic. JIuqu tmv nqoytyivri^ivtav fiav&dviTB ' a virj yug d g IffTt] 
d I d aaxnXla X. Cy. 8. 7, 24. Tig iaii nrjyi] Tj]g apsri]?; Ildvifg 
ovTOi, ro^ov eldlp, ovg to nXrj^og crvvsX&ov y.al dox((jdauv lytyaipB X. C. 
1. 2, 42. 't'dy Tig (plXog fiot yzvo^izvog ev tioihv i&eXj], ovt 6 g fioi ^lo g f ort 
{Jiic mihi est vidus) 3. 11, 4. 

Rem. 3. Still, the Greeks often place the pronoun in the Neut. Sing., e. g. 
*'£(TTL di T OVT TVQavvlg PI. Rp. 344, a, where in Lat. it would be, Est 
autem haec tyrannis. Tovt 6 iaTiv »; dtxa lo a vvt] lb. 432, b. Tovt o 
nriyi] xnl a q XV xtvi^asajg Phaedr. 245, c. *£y(oys (fr/jul t avT a uiv cpXv u - 
g lag hvul X. An. 1. 3, 18. The Neut. PI. is sometimes used instead of 
the Neut. Sing. See § 241, Rem. 3. The Neut. pronoun denotes the nature 
of an object ; on the contrary, the pronoun that agrees with a noun, denotes 
the quality of the object. Hence there are cases Avhere the two forms of 
expression cannot be interchanged, e. g. Tl tan cp &6vog; quid est invi- 
dia ? and tig iaxt (p^ovog; quae est invidia ? 

§241. Exceptions to the general rules of Agree- 
ment. (364-374.) 

1. The form of the predicate in many cases does not agree 
with the subject grammatically, but in sense (Constructio 
xara avv^<5iv or ad intellectum). This construction is found 
very often in Collectives, also with the names of cities and 
countries, when they are employed for the inhabitants, and 
in Abstracts which are used instead of Concretes, § 238, 
Rem. 1. 

Her. 9, 23. TO nXr^^ og in s^ orf&yja av . Th. 4, 32. o aXXog (ttqu- 
Tog dni^atvoy. 5, 60. to aTQUTonsdov dvexf^QOVv, 2,21. 



§241.) SYNTAX. EXCEPTIONS TO THE RULES OF AGREEMENT. 303 

Tiavil TfJOTKo (tvT]oedi(Tro »; n 6 X i f xal lov JJeQixXia iv OQyf] tlxov. With 
attributive adjectives, this construction is rare and only poetic, e. g. II. ^^ 
84. q)lXi rixvov ; but it is very common in prose with a Part, which stands 
in a remoter attributive relation, e. g. Th. 3, 79. cTTt xi]v noXtv iniulBov 

— cV noXljj Titoct/i, x«i (jpo,.5o) ovx ag . X. Cy. 7. 3, 8. w ayuOi] yal niGxi] 
xp t'x »j, olx]] ^h anok in ojv yjfiag. X. H. 1. 4, 13. o ex tov aaitoq ox Xog 
ridgoia^'q TJQog Tag raic, -d^avfid^ovTEg xal Idilv ^ ovXo fi sv o l tov 
^AXxti^iudr^y. It is veiy frequent with the pronouns, Th. ] , 136. (pn'/ei ig Ksq- 
xvQuv uig avxCiv (sc. KsQxvQaluv) evsQ/sxTjg. 4, 15. ig Ti]v 2n d qttiv 
wg i]yyiX&T} ta ytytvrifxiva nttn IlvXov. sdo^sv avxolg (sc. Tolg J^naQTiiXTaig). 
X. Cy. 3. 3, 14. (TvyxaXicrag ndv ToaTQatLOiTixov sXt^s ngog avTOvg Toid- 
ds. Also w^ith the relative pronoun ; see on the adjective-sentences, § 332, 5. 

Remark 1. "When the subject is expressed by the Neut. of the article t o 
or T a in connection w ith a substantive in the Gen. PI., the predicate com- 
monly agi-ees with the attributive genitive. S. Ph. 497. ta t uv d i axo - 

V av — TOV oi'y.nd^ i] n e ly ov axcXov. PI. Rp. 8. 563, c. to twv -d-f] t) l oj v 

— iXsv ^ s Q (OT £Q d efjTiv (the Sing, icnlv is used on account of the Neut. 
Pi. fXev&fQoh{()a, according to No. 4). 

Rem. 2. Closely related to the construction just stated, is the following, 
namely, when a substantive subject ^^"ith an attributive substantive in the 
Gen. PI. expresses periphrastically a substantive idea, the Participle which 
stands in a remoter attributive relation to the subject, agrees in Case with 
the subject, but in Gender and Number with the substantive in the Gen., 
which expresses the principal idea of the periphrasis. Od. >L, 90. t^X&s S' inl 
ifjt'xv Otj^aiov Ts I Q s(T la XQ^f^fov (jy.rjmQov ex ct)v . II. /5, 459, o (> - 

V i & (ov 7ieTer,voJv e&vea noXXa — I'v^a xal sy&a noTuvTai d y aXXo - 
{.i ev a I nTSQvyeaaiv. 

2. When the subject is expressed, not as a special and defi- 
nite object, but as a more general idea, the predicative adjective 
is put in the Neut. Sing, without reference to the gender and 
number of the subject. (In English we sometimes use the 
words, thing', or aiij/ thing, or anj/ things). Sometimes the pro- 
noun r'l, or the substantives / (> ^ .m a , TtQciyiia, are connected 
^\dth the adjective. When the adjective is in the Superlative, 
the English inserts the article the, or a. 

II. /?, 204. ovx d y a d^ 6 V noXvxoiqavlr]' elg xolqavog earta. Eur. O. 
760. deivov ol noXXol, xaxovQyovg otuv eyjaai nQOcndxag. M. 329. 
nXifV ydq Texvav e'}j.oiye cp IXt ax ov n 6X i g . H. F. 1295. at fiex a^ oXal 
XvnrjQov . Her. 3, 82. ^ fiov v aqx Iv xgdxiaxov. PI. Rp. 2. 364, 
a. xaXov fiev fj a aq) q oav vrj xs xal $ ixa lo avvrj, /ftyLtTToy fiivxoi 
xal inin ovov . Also in abbreviated adjective sentences, e. g. Her. 3, 
108.^ Xiaiva, iov laxvgoxaxov xal & q acrvxaxov, anal iv x^ 



304 SYNTAX. EXCEPTIONS TO THE RULES OF AGREEMENT. [§ 241 . 

/?/&) TtxTst if, PI. Rp. 4. 420, c. o» o(p&aXfjiol, xalXurtop o'y, ovx 
oaxQfioj ivaXTjli/jfiifoi tialv. Her. 3, 5.3. Tvpavyt? ;if p >) ju a aipaXtgov. PL 
Th. 122, b. avfi^oi'Xr] ls(Jov x QV f^^i • I^eni. Ol. 1. 21, 12. unug fxiv Xoyog, 
av anfi t« n^ay^ata^ ^ar aiov t i cpaiviiai xal xiv 6v. 

3. When the subject is an Inf. or an entire sentence, the 
Greeks usually place the predicative adjective in the Neut. Pi. 
instead of the Sing., where the English use the pronoun it, e. g. 
it is pleasant to see the sun. This occurs most frequently in 
verbal adjectives in -tog and -rtog; in those in -rt'og and in many 
in -Tog, the Inf. is implied in the word itself; where these verbal 
adjectives are followed by the Dat., the Dat. is to be translated 
as a Nom., and the verbal adjective as a Pass, verb, e. g. d[Avvt8a 
ioTL rm, some one is to be helped; matd iazi toig qiiloigy friends 
are to be trusted, e. g. 

Her. 1, 91. ti]V nsngtofiivriv (xotgav udvvma iaii anocpvysELv xal ^eo). 
3, S3. 8 ij X a J OTL del iva ye xiva ijfiewv (iaaiXea yevia&ai. Th. 1, 86. ovq ov 
naq ttdoxia toig 'A^TfValoig iailv, ovds xal Xoyotg 8 laxQnia aXXa 
T LfKOQTjTsa iv tdxBt. 4:, 1. 01 5 vv at u i]V iv tw nagovrt, xoig Aoxqovq 
afivvead^ai. 

Rem. 3. In like manner, the Greek very often uses the PI. javxa, jddi, 
sometimes also ixelva, to express an idea in the most general manner. 
Th. 6, 77. ovx^'lojvsg id d e slalv^ ovS' 'EXXrjgnovTioi, uXXd /JojQiijg. Aeschin. 
Ctes. p. 55. olx eaii t av x a oqx^j ^^i^ i^ ^^^ ^^ officer. Id. Leg. p. 50. 
xavx^ eaxiv 6 Txgodoxrjg. PL Phaedon. 62, d. dXX'' o avorjxog dvd^gwnog 
xdx civ olrjxfeir) x avx a , q>evxxiov livoti dno xov deancxov. 

4. The subject in the Neut. PL is connected with a verb in 
the Sing., e. g. 

Tec ^q3o xgix^t' Ta ngdyfiaxd iaxixaXd. Od. t, 438. xaJ 
TOT eneaa voftovS* i^iuavx o a gasv a jutjAw. Eur. M. 618. xaxov ydg 
avdgog dug ovr^div ovx ex a . 

Rem. 4. This construction holds also in adverbial participial phrases, 
e. g. d 6 ^ a V X av X a , quum haec visa, decreta essent X. An. 4. 1, 13. 
do ^av de x avx a, ixTjgv^ai/ ovx(o noislv. Yet, X. H. 3. 2, 19. do^avx a 
ds X avx a xal tx eg av d- ivx a , xd fiiv axgaxevjuaxa dnr,Xdev. 

Rem. 5. There are some exceptions, however, to the rule just stated ; they 
may be for the most part referred to the following cases, 

(a) When the subject in the Neut. PL denotes a person or living crea- 
tures, the verb is veiy often put in the PL in accordance with the con- 
strudio xax a avveaiv. Th. 4, 88. xa x iX rj, the magistrates, 6 fi6~ 
(T a y T a i^inefxipav. 7, 57. x oo-dd s fiexd ^A^rp>ai(av i^vrj 
iaxgdxevov. PL Lach. 180, e. t« fxeig dxta d i,a Xsy 6 f^tvoi 
in i^ifivijvxa t JSuxgdxovg xal Cipodga en atv ovq i,v . 



§ 241.] SYNTAX. EXCEPTIONS TO THE RULES OF AGREEMENT. 305 

(b) When the idcn of a division into parts, or of a plurality composed of 
several imrts (these parts having relation to various places and times) 
is to Iw nmde prominent, e. g. X. An. 1. 7, 17. rainr] rfj v^iqa ovx 
ifxaxitraxo ^vKTiXevq, ak}^ vjtoxo)QOVVT(av (pavfQec ijaav kuI Xtitimv xal 
avi^Qtxtnbiv i'x^V ti okX a, many traces litre and there. Cy. 5. 1, 13. 
TO fio X ^V Q ^ avd^QMTtia naavov, oijuat, xwv ini&vjxiuv axi)ain 
iaji, xttTieiTa SQwta air i ciJvT a i , the charge is made in a different 
manner and at different timts. Th. 5, 20. s^(o (praeter) tovtuv n(iog xov 
MotvTivixcv xaVl^Tiidai'Qiov TtoXsftov xul eg akka afiCporsQoig ufiagxi'i- 
fxaj a syivovio, mistakes at various points and times. 

(c) The poets from Homer down, except the Attic, very often use the 
PI. simply on account of the metre. 

Rem. 6. The plural subject, masculine or feminine, is connected in the 
poets, tliough rarely, with a verb in the Sing. Pind. Ol. 11. (10.) princ. // 1- 
XiytxQVsg v (iv ol vaiiQwv oiqxo^'' ko/Mv t ikkst a l. This construction 
is very limited in prose-writers ; it occurs with tat t and ?) v , which then 
become, as it were, impersonal exj)ressions ; this takes place only at the 
beginning of a sentence, (comp. il est cent usages). Her. 1, 26. ian ^ixa^h 
xi]g Tc nak(xn]g nokiog xnl xov vrjov eTira axudioi. PI. Rp. 5, 462, e. lort xul 
iv xaig akkaig nokzatv agxovxig xb xoil dijfAog. In like manner the Greeks 
regularly say i'aiiv, oi', sunt, qui. See §331, Rem. 4. The construction 
mentioned § 242, Rem. 3, is different from this. 

5. A subject in the Dual very often has a predicate in the PL 
e. g. ^vo (JTQaToa avex^Q^<y civ . 

Rem. 7. The Dual is not used in all cases where two objects are spoken 
of, but only where two similar objects are mentioned, either naturally con- 
nected, e. g. TTo^s, x^^^Q^t ^^^^ o^* such as we conceive to stand in a close 
and reciprocal relation, e. g. two combatants, two friends, etc. 

Rem. 8. The Dual is very often exchanged for the PL, especially in par- 
ticiples, e. g. II. A, 621. t o t 5' Idqw ccTTSipvxovxo ;^tTtyywv axdvxs 
noxl nvoiriv. PI. Euthyd. 273, d. iys k aadx7]v a (xq) (a ^kixpavxsg 
tig dkk'i]k(a . 

Rem. 9. A subject in the PI. sometimes has a verb in the Dual, when 
two objects mutually connected, or two pairs are spoken of, e. g. II. 5, 452, 
sqq. Mg ^ ots ;|f£/^a^^ot n ox a fio I, xccx 0Qfa(pL g s ovx sg , sg fiia/uy- 
X6iav (TVfi^dkksxov o^Qifiov vd(t)Q, — (ug xcov ixi(Tyo(xiv(av ysv^xo taxv xs 
(po^og XE, (two streams running on opposite sides are compared with two hos- 
tile parties). II. &, 185, sqq. Zdv^s xs xul av Zlodagyf, xul Aid^otv ytufins xs 
81e, vvv i20Lxr,v xofxidijv an ox Iv £Xov , — 191. uk)^ i (po fi ugx sT,x o v xul 
(TTt tvd sx ov, [tivo pairs). 

Rem. 10. Two additional instances of the attributive relation, which re- 
spect the Dual, are yet to be noted, 

(a) A substantive in the PI. is very often connected with the Dual dvw, 
dvo, dvolv. II. €, 10. dioi vUeg. H. t, 4. uvsfiot, dvo. Aesch. Ag. 
1395. dvo7v olfiayfiUfTiv. F}. Rep. 614, c. dvo xdafiuxa ixofiiva akkij- 
koiv] 

(b) Feminine substantives in the Dual are commonly connected with 
the attributive in the Masc. Dual, since the Dual ending of attributives 
is regarded as, at the same time Masc. and Fem. (of common gender), 



306 SYNTAX. EXCEPTIONS TO THE RULES OF AGREEMENT. [§ 241. 

e. g. afnqxa tw nolte — tw yvvaixe — (x^Kfu) loiizo) to) rifiiga — roiy 
yhvfffioiv — jovio) j(x) lixva — jovxoiv loiv xivi^aioiv — to* ocJai. PI. 
Phaedr. 237, (1. t/^uwv iv kydaTO) 5vo Jivi laiov ids a ap;jfo»'T£ xat 
ayovte,oiv ino^t&a — •xovxtt) di x. t. X. Tlie Fern, form of 
the article t «, is extremely rare. e. fi. tw ^' oiv yoga S. Ant. 769; 
oflener in the form t «Iv, e. g. X. H. 6, 4. 17. PI. Tim. 79, d; so ix 
T alv d t 5 ov (T a I V nctQdivoiv S. OC. 445. x avt a lv ^i 6 v a i v \h. 
859. £x lavTttiv 1149. xavxaiv de xalv diaOijxaiv Isae. 5, 15; 
but X av X a seems not to occur. 

6. When the predicate is a substantive with elvai, or one of 
the verbs mentioned § 240, 2, the verb sometimes agrees by 
means of attraction, as in Latin, with the predicative substan- 
tive nearest to it, e. g. 

Her. 3, 60. to ^riy.oq xov ogv/fiaxog knxa ax a d lol sla i. 2, 15. a t 0ij~ 
jSaL Al'/v n xog iy.dXisxo. Th. 3, 112. i ax 6 v 8 v oj X 6 cp w fj 'ido- 

flivf] IJ/^/jAw. 4, 102. TO /blQLOV XOl'XO, OTTfQ TTQOTfQOV ^Ev VBtt 8 ol ixa- 

Xovvxo. Isocr. Paneg. 51, b. £ cr t t uqxiy.iaxaxa xdv idvoJv y.al fie- 
yiaxaq dvvaaxslag s'xovxa 2^xv&aL xat Ogax^g y.al nigaai. So also in the 
participial construction, e. g. Th. 5, i. yaxaXafjt/juvovat y.ai (^Qixiwlag, ov 
&QVfia iv rfi yteovxlvj]. PI. L. 735, e. xovg ^iyiaia i^r]fxaQT7]x6xag, avid- 
rovg 8s ovxag, fisylcrxijv 8a ova av ^X d§r^v TioXsMg, djiaXXdxxsiv ft'to- 
&sv^ instead of uvxag. So also Her. 3, 108. i} Xiaiva, i ov ia/VQaxarov 
y.ttl & Q aavx ax ov , dna^ iv tw /j/o) TtV.Tffc IV, instead of fotcra. Comp. 
No. 2. 

7. A superlative connected with a partitive Gen. commonly 
agrees in gender with the subject, more rarely with the gender 
of the partitive. 

II. 9, 253. [alsx ov) o g^S^ ixfia xu qx la x 6 g Tf xal ax tax o? tiexst]- 
vwv. X-) 139' XLQ xo g^ iXacpQoxaxog tisxstjvojv. Her. 4, 85. o /Z o y - 
Toc mXayibJV dnuvxojv nicpvxs S^covf^atricoxuxog. Menandr. p. 193. 
(Mein.) j'ocr to V ;^aAf7rwTaTo? q)&6vog. X. C. 4. 7, 7. o i]Xiog xov 
ndvia xQ^vov tiuvtwv Xa fin q ox ax o g mv 8ia{A£vfi. PI. Tim. 29, a. o 
xoafiog xdXXi(TXog xcitv ysyovoxcov. Plutarch. Consol. ad Apoll. II. i) 
XvuT] xttXsTibixdxr] na&ojv. On the contrary, Isocr. ad Nicocl. extr. oi//- 
(SovXog dyad^og xqrioimaxaxov xal xvgavvixioxaxov an d vxav 
X XT] n dx 0) V iaxl. 

Rem. 11. When the idea of personality in general is to be expressed, the 
Masc. may be used in relation to a Fern, name, e. g. Zi'v^Xr^Xv^naLv atg tfis 
xaxaXsXfiftfxivai d88Xq>al xe xnl d8fXq;i8al xal drsipial xoiaviai, oicT fivai iv 
xfi otxia iia<jaQfgxai8fxa xovg iX6v& sq o vg {fret Tnen) X. C. 2. 7, 2. 'H 
axslqog oiaa fioaxog ovx avi^aai, xixjovxag u XXov g , oix e/otu avxr 
xsxva, she cannot endure that others (Masc.) should bring forth young, Eur. 



§ 242.] SYNTAX. AGREEMENT OF SEVERAL SUBJECTS. 307 

Andr. 711. So, also, the tracric poots use the Masc, when a woman speaks 
of lierself in the PI., e. <r. S. El. 301. Electra sjiys of herself, 7iiaov^i&\ d 
j(()}'j, nuTQi ii(40)()ovfisyot. 

Rem. l'^. Sometimes the first Pers. PI., or the Pers. pronoun first Pers. 
PI. is usetl, tor the sake of modesty, instead of the Sing., since the speaker 
represents his own views and actions as comnjon to others. TJiis usage, 
which is very frequent in Latin, is rarely found among the Greeks in the 
Common language. 'Jl 'AXxitSnidrj, y.ul ij fiflc irjlixovToi cVrt? dfivol t« toi- 
avia i],ufVj and I was at that age sluirp in those matters, X. C. 1. 2, 46. "Ev- 
yoid 7io&^ h^'iv (mihi) iyivno Cy. 1. 1, 1. Tli^X ^h ovv jbjV7tQit%^sv70)v 
iv TO) Tjaoovii laiT il'x fis V flnuy. Among the poets, particularly the 
tragedians, this use of the PI. is more frequent, and a transition from the 
Sing, to tlie PI. often takes place, e. g. Eur. H. F. 858. "lUiov unQTvgo- 
(Mtcr&u dQcoa, a d(juv ov ^oilofxai. Hipp. 24^. a I d o Vfi s d^ a yotg la 
XiXf'/uiva fio I . 

Rem. 13. In an address directed to a number of persons, the Greek em- 
ploys several peculiar turns, 

(a) The Smg. of the Imp. slni and some others, which denote a sum- 
mons or animating call, e. g. u y s , cf eg s , Id i , is frequently con- 
nected in the Attic writers with a Voc. PI., or with several vocatives, 
e. g. PI. Euthyd. 283, b. tlni ^ol, w ^biy.Quxiq ts y.ul v^ilg ol uXkoi. 
Dem. Chers. 108, 74. tiJis fxoi, f^oihvsa&s. 

(b) In an address directed to several persons, the predicate in the PL is 
often comiected with a Voc. which denotes only one of the persons 
addressed, so as to make the principal person prominent. Od. /?, 
310. ^Av J iv , ovnaig taxiv vneQcpidloLai (xs& v ^Xv dulvva&ai. ^u, 82. 
vtja l^vvsTE, <p a I d i ^ Odvorasv. X. H. 4. 1, 11. It, eqpjj, 
v(xilq, d) ^Hginnlda, y.ul dcdaaiCETS aiTov ^ovXridijrai uttsq 
ij^iug' ol fisp dij uvaaTuvTsc idlduay.ov. A change of the Sing, and 
PI. often occurs among the tragedians, when the chorus is either ad- 
dressed by others, or speaks itself, since the poet has in mind, at 
one moment, the whole chorus, at another their leader, e. g. S. OC. 
167. ^eIvoi, fii) d^i ddiyr^&b) aoi nimsviTug. 

(c) The second Pers. Imp., instead of the third, is rarely connected (some- 
times in the Attic dialogue), with the indefinite pronoun rt? or tt a 5 
T 4 $ , or with a substantive and itc, e. g. Ar. Av. 1186. x w q st Ssvqo 
71 dc vnr,Qhrjg • j o^Evs nd q Ttc. Hence, also, the transition from 
the third Pers. to the second, e. g. Eur. Bacch. 327. (345.) (tt si/ st <a 
TIC (x)g id/og, iX^MV ds &dy.ovg roicd\ \v olo^vooxoTid, fio^Xolg igiahov 
xuv dx Q Eipov s^unuXiv, y.al — [is & sg . 4^omp. Larger Grammar, § 
430, 2, (/). 

§ 242. Agreement of Several Subj e cts . (375-377.) 
1. Two or more subjects, have a plural verb ; plurals of the 
Neut. gender, have a Sing. verb. When the subjects are of like 
gender, the adjective is of the same gender and stands in the 
PL; but when the subjects are of different gender, the Masc. 
in proper names, takes precedence of the Fem. and Neut., and 



308 SYNTAX. AGREEMENT OF SEVERAL SUBJECTS. [§ 242. 

the Fern, of the Neut. ; but in common nouns, the adjective 
is often in the Neut. Pi. without respect to the gender of the 
subjects, e. g. 

fl> IX iTiTt og xal AXs^ av 8 Q g noXld ts xul -d^avfiaaju s^ya u n e- 
dti^avTO. II oil u le xal xaXu xal x^ av ft aaT u iy iv tz o . 2(a- 
XQoi I T] g xal nXttx oiv ■)) a av a oq> ol and 2. x, 11., aoqiol ovieg. 'H 
fiTlrtj Q xal 1] &vy dtrj Q i] a a v xaX a l. 'll o qy i] xal fi daw sa la 
si a I xaxal. 'O dvriQ xal // yvvi] uyu&ol tla-iv. II. /3, 1.3G. a* ^b 
nov ijjj.ixfQul T aXox L xal vT,7iia xixva cVcti' ivl fjfyuQoig noz id iy (xt- 
V a L . X. Cy. 3. ] , 7. Mg side n azsQ a zs xal firjTBQa xal a 8 (X(povg xal 
zi]V kavzot yvvalxa aly ^aXojzovg y sy svfj (liv ovg , iddxgvasv. Her. 
3, 57. '^v i] dyogd xal to nQViavrjiov naQioj Xl&o) r^axri^iva. X. C. 3. 1, 
l.Xi&ot, zs xal nXiv&ot xal ^vXa xal xsgafiog dzdxztag sQ^ifi- 
fiiv a ovdsv % gija- ifid iaziv. 

Remark 1. The agreement of the predicate is often determined by its 
position. Here the three following cases occur, 

(a) When the predicate precedes the subjects, it often agrees with the 
first subject, e. g. PI. Lys. 207, d. (piXsl as 6 naziiq xal i) firiTr]g. 
Her. 5, 21. £ t TT £T0 acpi xal o/t'ifiaza xal ^sgdnovzeg xal i] Tidaa 
noXXr) naqaaxsvi) ; 

(b) But when the predicate follows the subjects, it sometimes agrees with 
the last subject, e. g. X. R. Ath. 1, 2. ol nivrjzsg xal 6 dij i^o g nXsov 
I'/ f i . PI. Symp. 190, c. al zi^al avzoig xal zd Isqa zd naqd zdv 
dv&Qb)7i(ay iicpavl^szo', 

(c) Yet when the predicate stands after the first subject, it always agrees 
with it, e. g. Th. S, 5. M sXsag Adxoiv d(p i xvslzai xal 'Egfist- 
(ovdag Ori^alog. 

Rem. 2. Sometimes the verb, though it follows diflTerent subjects, agrees 
with the first subject, so that the remaining subjects appear subordinate, 
e. g. X. An. 1. 10, 1. /S« (Ttisi;? 8s xal ol aiv avzw 8i(oxvi)v sign In - 
zsL. So, also, Avith the attributive adjective, e. g. X. An. 1. 5, 6. inzd 
c^ oX ov g xal i]^io^6Xiov Azz ixov g . 

Rem. 3. The verb sometimes stands in the Sing., when several common 
nouns in the PI. precede, if it is intended to represent those nouns as mak- 
ing up one whole, e. g. PI. S. 188, b. xal n dxvai, xal xdXa^ai xal sqv~ 
(Ti^ai sx nXsovs^lag xal uxodfilag nsgl aXXtjXa zuv zoiovzwv y iyv sz a i 
dgoizixojv. 

Rem. 4. "WTien the subjects are connected by ?j — i], aut — aut, xal — 
X a f , et — ef, ovz s — ovzs, neque — neque, the predicate agrees with the 
subject standing nearest to it, if each subject is regarded as independent, e. g. 
?; ovjog, 1] ixs7vog dXr]dri Xsy si, aut hie, aut ille vera dicit ; but if the sub- 
jects are not considered as mdependent, but as a connected plm-alit}', then 
the predicate is in the PI., e. g. Dem. Aph. 817, 12. d zlrjfAOCpatv 'ij Orjginni- 
8rjg sx ov a i. 

2. When several subjects of different persons are connected, 
the first person takes precedence of the second and third, and 



§ 243.] SYNTAX. REMARKS ON THE USE OF THE NUMBER. 309 

the second of the third, and the verb is commonly put in the 
PI, e. g. 

*£/& x«t (TV /QOKpo^sv, ego et tu scribimus. ^Eyu xal ixuvog yqacfofifv^ 
ego et ille scribimus. ^Eyix) unl ah xal UtXvog ygaqiofisv, ego et tu et ille 
scribimus. ^v xal ixsh'og /^wcjptrf, tu et ille scribitis. '/i/to y.nl ixHvoL 
YQtucfionn'. 2v xal ianvoi /Qucpnt. 'jly.uq xal ixupoi yqacpontv. 'Ty,ug 
xat ixdvog yQaqjsis. 

Rem. 5. Sometimes the person of the verb agrees with the subject near- 
est to it, e. g. X. C. 4. 4, 7. Jifqi lov dixaiov ttcivv vifxaiviv £/?<>' dnni>, rtQog 
a oijs at oil liy aXXog ovdslg dvvixLi liviHnilv. PI. Phaedon 77, 

d. oftMg di jjoL doxslg av t£ xal 2i^^iag iidiwg «V xal tovxov 8ianqay^a- 
jsiaua&ai (peitractare) tov loyov. 

§243. Remarks on Certain Pe culiaritie s in the 
use of Nu mb er . (35o.) 

1. The Sing, has sometimes a collective sense and takes the place of the 
PI. ; thus in the poets, SaxQVOv , axi ig^ ar a yaiv , at axvg, harvest, 
etc.; in prose, xt-^a, ta&ijg, Xld^og, nllv&og, w^ttcAoc, »; ^n- 
nog, cavalry, t) uanlg , a body of troops, etc. 

2. Entire nations, that live under a monarchical government, are some- 
times designated in prose, by the Sing. e. g. o nigiri^g, the Persians, o 

A Q a ^ I o g , o Av 6 6 g , 'AaavQ lo g, etc. This rarely occurs in respect 
to nations that have a free government, e. g. rov'EXlrjv a q)Uov nqogdi- 
a&ai Her. 1, 69. The words aTquria^Trje, noXsftiog and the like, are some- 
times used in the Sing, instead of the PL 

3. The PI. properly belongs only to common nouns, not to proper names, 
names of materials, or abstracts ; still, such nouns in certain relations take 
the PI., namely, when they express the idea of the common noun, thus, 

(1) Proper names, (a) in indicating several individuals of the same name, 

e. g. d vo Kax vlo i; (b) in denoting persons that possess the nature or 
the qualities of the individual named, e. g. PI. Theaet. 169, b. oi 'Hq ax- 
Xisg Tf xal Oi]cri eg, men like H. and Th. 

(2) Names of materials occur somewhat often in the PL, since either the 
single parts, which make up the material, or the different kinds of which 
it is composed, are contemplated, e. g. xpd fia^ o i , nvqol xal xq id^ al; 
i'lXioi, sun^heams, like soles ; iivsfiog xal vSara, olvoi noXvjiXiig, oivoi 
naXaioi; ^vla xal Xi&og, etc. 

(3) Abstracts in the PL denote classes and specific instances, particular 
conditions and circumstances, e. g. Herod. 7, 158. vfuv fisyaXai dxftXiai. 
It xul inavqiang yfyoraai. 3,40. ifiol at aal (jsydXat eItvxIoh 
oiic uqtaxovai, §o i^^Vf inimicitiae, ajdasigf seditienes, qnXlai^ 

41 



310 SYNTAX. THE ARTICLE. [§ 244. 

TaXa i7i(0Q lai, aeruiniiac, ■& uv ut o i, mortes, ipyxv J^"^ dixXTir), 
•d^v fiol , juiinii, (jpo/5ot, 9^ov7;o"«t?, rejlcciions, uTiix\)eiai, uv - 
dgiuLy brave deeds, vyieiai, xai svi^iai twv aw/iu'rwi', like valetu- 
diues, etc. n iax sig, testimonia, svv o lag dovvai, largesses, honorary gijls, 
xd() iTEg, presents ; in many cases, the PI. denotes a plurality of j)arts, e. g. 
nlovTOi, divitiae {TtXoviog, riches, abstract), ya^iOL, nui)tiae, vvuxtg, 
horae nocturuae, i u(p a I, fiincra, etc. So, c. g. in English, How long 
these nights are ? when 07ie night is meant. 

Remark. The Greeks commonly use the PI. both in Abstracts and Con- 
cretes when they refer to a PI. Adj. e. g. xuxol tocc ^'V/ag, y.ulol t« uo'i^utu, 
uQidTOi Tw$ cfvasig, xul ralg /vaiy.(xtg y.ul lolg aaifiaai acpa)d6y.evoL X. Cy. 1. 
3,10. 

4. When neuter adjectives, pronouns and numerals are used as substan- 
tives, the Greek, like the Latin, always employs the PI. The Sing, of ad- 
jectives used substantively is put in the Neut. when an abstract idea is ex- 
pressed as an independent whole, e. g. to xaXov, the heautiful in the absti-act, 
TO naxov, the bad. The PL, on the contraiy, denotes a concrete idea, i. e. 
the different parts, classes or conditions which are implied in tlie abstract, 
e. g. T« aala, res pulchrae, t« y.axa, mala, the evil deeds, things, etc. 

§ 244. The Article. (419-428.) 

1. The substantive as a subject, as well as in every other re- 
lation, has the article 6 tJ to, the, when an object is pointed out as 
definite, or when viewed by the speaker as an individual of its 
class, or the class itself, or the material, and the abstract idea 
when regarded in a definite point of view, (the idea being con- 
ceived by the speaker as limited, or as defining the entire na- 
ture of a person or thing). The substantive without the article 
expresses some indefinite individual of a class, the class itself, 
the material, or the abstract idea, in a manner altogether gene- 
ral, without limiting or defining that of which the idea is com- 
posed. 

""Av & Q (an og, (a) a man, as an individual, i. e. some one of the race of 
men ; (b) man, a man, as a species ; o av&QOJTiog, (a) the man, as an 
individual, the man whom I have in view as an individual, distinguished 
from other men ; (b) the man as a class or species, as I conceive him to be 
something limited and defined in respect to his entire nature or constitu- 
tion ; — '/ aXa, milk, to yd I a, the milk {as a particular substance) ; a ocp la, 
wisdom, 7] (7 o(p la, tlie wisdom, [as a definite attribute). When the Inf. is to 
be considered as an abstract substantive, it has the article, e. g. t o ygd- 



§ 244.] SYNTAX. ^THE ARTICLE. ;311 

<petv. The abstract noun takes the article when it expresses a concrete 
idea, e. g. ») (Txafftg, the (particular) tiuiiult, to ngu/na, the (j)articukir) 
deed; hence also the PI. ul (tt da s i q , t« n qii y ^lar a. 

Kem. 1. From what has been said, it follows, (a) That the substantive, as 
llie suiyect of a sentence, may stand with, or without, the article, according 
as it is intended to be expressed, either as a definite, or an indefinite, ob- 
ject; (b) on the contrary, that the substantive as a predicate must be gen- 
erally without the article, since the predicate does not denote a definite 
individual, but ordy the abstract idea of a quality in general. Her. 1, 103. 
VI' I i] rtfiiuu f/Ej'fro, the day became night. Isocr. Nicocl. 28, a. lo/og 
aXr^d^Vic y.ul yofttiuog y.al d'muioq ipv/Viq dyu\^i,c xat niajrig si'do)l6v iaTi. 
But when the predicate denotes a definite, a before mentioned, or a well- 
known object (Xo. 6), it of course takes the article. Her. 1, G8. (jvvi^ullsjo 
r o v' O Q ia T 7iv joitov tlvui, he concluded that this was the Orestes, name- 
ly, the one before mentioned. 5, 77. oi (5' Inno^oTat iy.a'/.iovjo ol na/Jsq, 
the rich bore the name of InKo^otai, {before mentioned). In passages like 
X. Cy. 3. 3, 4. o }ikv TaiTft nnoiv naQi'ilacrev' 6 Ss 'AgfisvLog av^nQ0V7iiy.7ts 
aal ol uXkoi ndrisg livdqbmoi, avay.aXoivxig xov eveQysxijv, xov ix v 8 qa 
rov uya&ov. — An. 6, 6, 7. ol ds uXXol ol nagovTig twv crrgaitaTuv 
imxfiQovai ^aXkfiv ihv ^i^Lunov, dvay.alovvug rov ngodoTrjv, the aiti- 
cle denotes, that the ideas expressed by benefactor, honest man, traitor, point 
to a definite action either before named, or well-know n. 

2. Hence the article is used in order to denote the whole 
compass of the idea, since all which belongs to it, is taken to- 
gether and expresses, as it were, a definite whole, e. g. o av&Q w- 
n ^^ -Ovrjog hzij man, (i. e. all men) is mortal, i] dv^ Qe la y.a- 
Xi] iazip, i. e. all which is understood by the idea of drdgeia, 
to y dXa rfiv loziv. 

Rem. 2. The English indefinite ai'ticle a has a two-fold signification. It 
denotes either a class generally, as a man, where the Greek uses the sub- 
stantive only, e. g. av^Qwnog — ; or it denotes, like the definite article, an 
individual of a class, but not one who is distinguished from the others ; 
here also the Greek employs the substantive alone, e. g. av&gionog, i. e. 
some man, it not being determined what man ; still, a substantive is ofl:en 
used with the indefinite pronoim jlg, quidam, e. g. avd-gconog rig, homo 
quidam; yvv!] Tig ooriv si/sv. Tig, as an enclitic, commonly follows its 
substantive, but, sometimes, in connected discourse, it stands before. 

Rem. 3. Common nouns sometimes omit the article, where, according to 
the statement m No. 1, it would be inserted. This omission takes place, 
(a) In appellations, denoting kindred, and the like, where the particular re- 
lation is obvious of itself, e. g. nan'iQ, i^rjir^g, vlog, udsXcpog, nalSsg, yovug, 
aivi']o, husband, yvvi], wife, etc. Comp. the expressions, Fcdher has said it, 
Mother comes ; (b) AVhen two or more coordinate substantives are united to 
form one whole, e. g. nrxldig y.al yvvul/.Eg (like English ivife and child, horse 
and rider), noXtg y.al ol/.iat, [city and houses) Th. 2, 72; (c) When common 
nouns are, at the same time, used as, or instead of, proper nouns, e. g. 
y'lhog, oigavog, aaiv, used of Mhens^ nohg, of a particular city, which is known 



312 SYNTAX. THE ARTICLE. [§ 244. 

from the context, yi}, of a particular country, ^uaiXivg, of a particular king^ 
conivionly the. king of Persia, etc.; other hke expreKsions are urf^iog, x/t'dua- 
ua, etc. The omission of the article is altogether natural when a coninion 
noun has an abstract signification, or exjjresses an action, or the manner 
of an action, most frequently in connection with prepositions, e. g. iynadut 
v^toi'c, to account them gods. ^Lnl dtlnrov 0.0 tlv, to come to supper, i. e. to eat, 
X. C. 1. 3, 6. 'ii'(f)' 'innou iivai, horse-hack, 'linl 0r)O(tv i^iitui, i. e. ad venan- 
dum, X. Cy. 1. 2, 9. JIokqov tman'mivov i}hio/uv ijil ^i v y o g Xn^tiv Y.otlt- ' 
Toy, i] ijij imaiu^ivov, ad vehendum, X. C. 1. 1, 9. 'iiVit vdwg livui, aquatum 
ire. Her. 3, 14. 

Rem. 4. The names of the arts and sciences, of the virtues and vices, of- 
ten omit the article, even where they occur in a definite relation, since, as 
well known appellatives, they have come to be used as proper names, e. g. 
JJaviu (xev ovv s^oiys doxn t« xalu y.ul ra ayuOa «ax;jT« livixt, ol/ \]maia 
de (TbycpQoavvr]. X. C. 1. 2, 23. ^J^ml ovv xu ts dUuiu y.<jtl t« lilkix y.uXd 
T£ xal uyudu navta uQsrfj n^unsjai, diiXop drat, un y.al d ixa loa vvt} xal 
7; ulXt] numu UQtiij aocpiu iaji 3. 9, 5. En lux i; ^ r] u()a aocplu itrilv 4. 6, 7. 
MaXiaxn yuQ f(xf(AtXiiy.iL avro) innLy.Tjg Cy. 8. 3, 25. The article is of 
course omitted when an abstract conception is expressed as an action, e. g. 
'iiV (p lXo(J ocp i a C^aiv, in philosophizing, (in philosophando) PI. Phaedon. 
68, c. The substantives (x s y s & o g , nXii \^ o g , v ip o g , ev q o g , /5«- 
>& g , y iv o g and the like, are very often found in the Ace. or Dat. with- 
out the article, since they are used, as it were, in an adverbial sense, e. g. tto- 
lafibg Kvdvog ov o (xa, si) q og dvo nXi&QOJv, two plethra wide, X. An. 1. 2, 23. 

3. The article is very often used with common nouns, in or- 
der to show that what belongs to an object, or is requisite for 
it, which stands in relations of indebtedness or of hostility to it, 
is so necessarily.^ ^ 

^ X. Cy. 3. 3, 6. '£v&(ju^s yuq, d sxaaxog to fxi q o g a^iinaivov 7toir,asiE, to 

oAoi' avxo) xaXug s/siv {partem, cui praeest ; centuriam suam). 8. 3, 3. vfljiag 
ds xoTuxav {to)V (TtoXbiv) to fisQcg sy.ucina xmv i^yffiovcav, ixiXsvcrsv avjovg 
jovxoig xovpuv xovg aviojv (plXovg (partem debitam). An. 7. 6, 23. uXXu, 
(paivixs av, Wei, xa evsxvQU xoxs Xa^slf, cag y,r}ds el e^ovXsxo i^vpaxo uv 
xavxa i^anaxav, the necessary measures to guard against deception. 5. 6, 34. 
ol axQaxiuxuL rntiXovv avib), st Xijipovxav u7iodi,dg(X(TXOVia, oxl ti] v 8 ly.rjv j 
ini&'^croLSV, the due, deserved punishment. 

4. Hence the article very often takes the place of the posses- 
sive pronoun, when it is connected with such substantives as 
naturally belong to a particular person, mentioned in the sen- 
tence. In such cases, the English uses the possessive pronoun. 

Ol yovBig T a xixvct augyovcnv, parents cherish children, i. e. their chil- 
dren. * crxQaxriyog x oi g ax q ax i(ax ag inl xovg noXfpiovg uysi. Kv- 
gcg xs iiajanr{8}']aag ano xov (xgp.axoq xhv &(oguxa ividv xul avalSag 
inl xov 'inn ov xa n aXxa ilg xag x^^Q f>^S I'Aw/Js X. An. 1. 8, 3. 



A 



^ 244.] SYNTAX. THE ARTICLE. 313 

5. Since the article may make one of several objects distinct 
and prominent, it is often employed, when an object stands in 
a distributive relation to the predicate of the sentence. 

nQO^airovai di ^iiadov 6 KvQog vniaxvii^cti' Suasiv uptI duQsixov rgia 
i]^idu()fixvi r o V fiTjvog i (o ajQaTiMTj] [singulis mensibus singulis militi- 
buSy three haJf-Darics a month to each soldier, comp. English so much the pound) 
X. An. 1. 3, 21. (comp. 5. 6, 23.) zluQsiy.ov exuajog olatt i ov ^tjv o g vixuJv 
7. 6,7. 'ode avvt&ia&fig tiv tva ipojfiov hi oipo) nqoni^niiv^oxt ^i] 
naQilrj noXXd, dvvaii «V alvnug tw etl /gtja&ai {singula panis frusta, to 
dip each morsel into the different sauces) Id. C. 3. 14, 6. 

6. Since the article was properly and originally a demonstra- 
tive pronomi, it follows of course, that it is often used in a de- 
monstrative sense. The simplest case is the following, viz. when 
an object is first mentioned, as an indefinite individual, it does 
not take the article, but when it is named the second time, it 
has the article, because it has been already referred to and is 
known, e. g. Eidov avdoa- 6 ds avijQ (loi D.e^ev. Hence the arti- 
cle is used when the speaker jf?om^5 to an object, e. g. 0f(>£ fiui, w 
7t(u, TO ^i^Xlov , the book = tliis or that hook. In similar cases 
the article may be used with material nouns, e. g. /iog {xoi to 
y dXa, the milk, which had been pointed out; and even when a 
part only of the material is referred to, the article is employed, 
though such nouns elsewhere are always without the article, 
e. g. nlvto zov oi'vov, of this wine. The article is often used 
in speaking of persons or things known and celebrated, where 
the Latin uses the pronoun ille, e. g. o -/.alog naXg, that beautiful 
boy; this is very frequent in proper names. See No. 7. 

" Ore Zigtrig aynqng jr\v av ag id^ firjr ov ax q at iviv 'ijXd^iV ini Trjv 
'EXldda [that numberless host) X. An. 3. 2, 13. 

7. Proper names as such, i. e. so far as they in themselves 
denote individuals, reject the article. Still, they take it, when 
they have been already mentioned, and then the article serves 
to point them out. No. 6, or when they have not before been 
named, if it is intended to designate them as well-known and 
distinguished, No. 6. 

Zw/.odtrjg tqpTj. 'Evixtjaav Or\Saioi ^aysdaijiovlovg. A^goxo^ag ov rovi 
inoiriasv, ak)^ intl ijxovB Kvqov iv KiXixia ovia, dvaaigiipag ix (Poiv Ixtig 



314 SYNTAX. THE ARTICLE. [§ 244. 

TiuQu (iaaiXia ajiijXavviv X. An. 1. 4, 5. Kvqov d& (iSTunifiTieiai {/fuQuog) 
— avn^3itini ovv u Kit q og ^. An. 1. 1, 2. Ano x ov ^f/.taaov Xiytxui 6 
B 6 QE aq iifV ^JIq El x} V I av uQTidaaL P). Pliacdr. 2*20, 1). 

Rem. .5. Proj)cr names, even in conn(U'tion with an adjective, do not com- 
inoniy take the article, e. ^. aocpog 2'(uy.(}drrjg, the ivise Socrates. 

Rem. G. When a noun in ajjposition, accomi)anied by the article, follows 
a proper name, the latter docs not take the article, e. ^. Ko ola o g, 6 xojv 
Ai'8mv i^uaihvg. Still, the article is used if it lias a demonstrative sense, 
e. g. o K Q ola og, 6 tw»' ylvdbtv /5ao-/Afv?, and designates the proi)er name 
as one already mentioned or known. The noun in ayiposition is accompa- 
nied by the article, when the latter serves to distinguish the person or tiling 
mentioned from others of like name, or when the person or thing named is 
to be pointed out as one known ; on the contraiy, a noun in apposition 
does not take the article, when it gives only an indefinite explanation, e. g. 
Her. 1, 1. '^IlQodoxog 'AXiyMQvaacrEig, Herodotus of Halicarnassus, Th. 1, 1. 
Oovy.v8idr]g^A&i]valog, Th. an Athenian, or of Athens. The names of rivers 
are commonly placed as adjectives between the article and the word noia- 
(xog, e. g. o "^'Akyg noxapiog [the river Halys) Her. 1, 72. o "A/jloiog notuy.6g 
Th. 2.. 102. iul lov ^doov noTafiov^ enl xov Hvqu^uov noxa^ov X. An. 1. 
4, 1. snl xov EvcpQdii]v noxa^ov 11. nqog xov 'AQd^i]v noxuiiov 19. The 
same holds of the names of mountains and countries (rarer of islands), 
when these are of like gender with the words in apposition, ^^jJ, axQov, oqoc, 
rijffog, etc., e. g. inl x/))v Solvytiav y.M^riv Th. 4, 43. to 2ovviov uy.()ov, r} 
OsariQbJxlg yij, 1) Jijlog vi](Tog ; xov 2'y.6ui3Q0v oQovg Th. 2, 96. But if the 
gender is not the same, the noun in apposition must have the article, e. g. 
TO) OQEi xfi FEQavEla Th. 4, 70. xriv ay.qav xo Kvvog arjfAcc 8, 105. xi]g ^'idr^g 
xov oQOvg 108. 

S. When adjectives or participles are used as substantives, 
they take, (according to No. 2,) the article. The English, in 
such a case, either employs an adjective used substantively, as 
the good; or a substantive, as the speake?' ; or the indefinite ar- 
ticle a or an; or resolve the participle by ivho, ivhich, (is, qui). 
This usage is very frequent in Greek, and extends not only to 
present participles, but to the others. 

'0 (Toq)6g, the wise [man), a wise [man), ol dyad^ol, ol naxol, ol diad^ovxeg, 
the judges, ol Xiyovxeg, tJie orators, xo vcyax)6v, xo y.aXov, xu y.ald, 6 ^ovXofiSvog, 
quivis, xv/fav , whoever happens. "0 nXsiaxa wcpsXaiv xo xoivov fXEyiaxatv 
xi{xbjp a^iotxai. 'O nXiXcrxa (L cp sXt^ a a g xo x. ft. x. a'^tovxai. nXslaxa 
bycpEXriabiv x. y.. ix. x. u^iwd^ricrsTai. Av&ig ds 6 'tiyrjaofisvog oldelg 
\<jxai [deinde autem, qui nobis viam monstret, nemo erit) X. An. 2. 4, 5. 

But when only a class in general, or a part of a whole, is to 
be expressed, the article is omitted, e. g. dyad-ol, good, cpiloao- 
(povvzeg, fAa&ovteg ; xaxa y,al alay^Qa sTtQahv. 

9. But the participles take the article when the discourse re- 



§ 244.] SYNTAX. THE ARTICLE. 315 

lates to definite individuals in the sense of those^ loho ; a parti- 
ciple with the article is very often appended to a preceding sub- 
stantive in the way of apposition, in order to give prominence 
to the attributive meaning, somewhat in the sense of eum^ earn, 
id dicOj qui, quae, quod, or et is quidem, qui. 

Her. 9, 70. tt^wtoi egi]Xd^ov Ti/iiiTUL ig to Tsl/og, xcft tvv ayrjvriv tov Mag- 
Soviov o'vToi saav oi 8 l a q na a av r s q, and these are they that robbed^ etc. 
X. C. 2. 6, 18. ov fxovov ol Idiwiat jovio noiovaiv, alXoi aal noXsig a i rwv ib 
xaXwv ^aliaja eTTifiEkofisvai, y.al t« alaxQa ly/.iaTa nQogisfitvai, 
noXlaxig noXefiiytag s/ovat nqog aX.XriXag. 3. 5, 4. BoicotoI {msv, o i nqoad-tv 
ovd' iv jfj savTMV toX fzcavTS g 'A&r]vctloig aviv Aaysdai^ormv js ymI tcov 
aXXav nsXoTtovvTjalbJV avjndnia&ai, vvv uJisiXovaiv aviol y.a^ eaviovg i^- 
§aXHV ilg Tiiv^'ATTiy.riv. 

10. The Greek may connect adverbs of place and time, more 
seldom of quality and modality, with substantives by means of 
the article, and thus give to adverbs the sense of adjectives ; and 
so, also, the Greek may change adverbs into substantives, when 
a substantive is omitted. In like manner a preposition with its 
Case may be made to express an adjective or substantive 
meaning. > 

II uvb) TioXig, ' (XiTa^h Tonog. Oi sv&uds av&QconoL or ol fr^ot^f. '0 
vvv (jaaiXsvg. Ol naXai aoq)ol avdQsg. Ol xozt. "ll avqiov (sc. ^ifxiga). 'H 
i^aiq>vT]g ^hxaaiaiig. ""O au, what is always; so to and t« vvv, now, i. e. 
at the present time, to naXai, formerly^ in the former time, to ngiv, to alxiya, 
immediately. Ol navv tcov aTgaTLOiTuv, the best of the soldiers. To y.agTa yjv- 
Xog. II uyctv a^iXua. " oiioXoyov^ivwg dovXog. Th. 6, 80. t/jv otyivdC- 
vcog dovXilav. So to nufijiav and to naganav, omnino, to y.agTa, to na- 
ganoXv. " rtgog Tovg Iligaag noXiuog. Ol negl cpiXoao(plai/. the philosophers. 
01 iv uaiH. "ll iv Xfggovrjao) Tvgavvlg. 

11. The Neuter article, to, may be placed before every 
word or part of speech, when the word is considered, not in re- 
lation to its meaning, but is used as a form of speech, or when 
a preceding word is repeated without regard to the structure of 
the sentence. The Greek, by prefixing the article, may give 
even to whole phrases the form and meaning of an adjective or 
substantive. 

To TVTno), TO Tvnisig. Dem. Cor. 255, 4. vfiug, w avdgsg " A&rivcuoi' to 
d" vfXElg oTav dnoj, TTjv noXtv li'/<a. PI. Rp. 327, c. h lit Xhjistui, to 



316 SYNTAX. POSITION OP THE ARTICLE. [§ 245. 

yjv 7T sla (Ofiev I fia g, u g x QV ^/w«? aqpelvat. Her. 8, 79. axaaia- 
'C,fiv 7if(jl TO V 6 xoj sf) g '»} iiioiv nXi o) u y a^ a ti) v n at q id a iq- 
ya (TST a t. 

§245. Positio7i of the Article. (429.) 

1. The article is sometimes separated from its substantive by 
particles, e. g. /^eV, bt, ye, xt, ydg, drj, by the indefinite pronoun 
r'ig (in Herodotus very often), and by avtog tavrov. 

Tov fjisv vcvSqu, jr,v ds yvvalxa', if a preposition stands before the article, 
the prose-writers say either, ngog 8s toi' upSqu, or nQog ilv uvdqa de, but 
not TiQog TOV 8s avSqa. Toiv Tig TLsqaibiV Her. 1, 85. Toig avTog avtov m]- 
fiaaiv ^aQVvstUL Aeschyl. Ag. 845. 

2. When several substantives are connected by xai or re — y.ai, 
the article is either repeated with each, in which case the sepa- 
rate notions expressed by the substantives are considered inde- 
pendent of, or as contrasted with, each other ; or the article is not 
repeated, in which case the separate notions are considered as 
forming one conception. 

J^a)y.Qdii]g ndvia r\ysixo &sovg si8ivui, t« ts Xsyofisva y.al nQonxo^iiva nut 
ta (TLyfi ^ovXsvofisva (the first two members form a whole, but the last is 
contrasted with them) X. C. 1. 1, 19. Al gadiovQylai x«t ix tov nagaxQr,^a 
ridovtxl 2. 1, 20. Al SJii^ihiai twv xaXuv ts xuyn^btv sqywv ibid. Ta ts 
av^cfSQOvia xai xsyiiQi(T(xiva 2. 2, 5. Ol aiQuir^yol xou Xoynyol An. 7. 3, 21. 
To ysyaXoTCQsnsg ts xcel sXsvdsQiov xal to iixnsirov ti xul uvfXsv^SQOv (here 
the first two and also the last two form one conception) X. C. 3. 10, 5. 
Toiig ayqovg tovc savrov x«t olxlag Th. 2, 13. Ol nai8sg ts xal yvvulxsg 
(so many Codd.) PL Rp. 557, c. 

3. When the substantive having the article, is connected with 
attributive words, viz. the adjective, participle, adjective pro- 
noun or numeral, a substantive in the Gen., an adverb or pre- 
position with its Case, § 244, 10, then, in respect to the position 
of the article, the two following instances are to be distinguished 
from each other : 

(a) The Attributive is united ^^-ith its substantive to express 
a single conception or idea, e. g. the icise man = t]ie sag'e, and 
denotes an object, which by the attributive belonging to it is 
contrasted with other objects of the same kind. In this case, 



§ 245.] SYNTAX. POSITION OF THE ARTICLE. 317 

the atlribulive stands either between the article and the substan- 
tive, or it stands after the substantive with the article repeated, 
or the substantive stands first without the article, and the attri- 
butive follows with the article. 

V) aynffoQ uvi]q or o aiiiQ o aya&og or a.vviQ o ayadog (in contrast with 
the bad man) ; ol nXoiaioc iroXcTcxi or ol noXlrai ol nXovaiOL (in contrast with 
poor citizens); 6 ff^iog Ttai/jQ or 6 TjnTtjQ o s'jjoc, ol rgng avd^sg or ol uvdQfg 
ol 7Qf7g ; o lajv \4di]i'(xlb}v diijxog or o dqijog 6 rwv ^Ad^^valmv (in contrast with 
another people) ; ol viv lird^Qomoi or ol uv&gwnoi ol vvv ; 6 TCQog zovg Jleg- 
aag noXffxog or o TroAf/zoc o nijog lovg UsQaug ; oitio 'd-aXdaarjg jrjg Imvwr ; 
TVQuvvlg )) if XeQ(T0vi](jio. 

Remark 1. In the first position (o oiya&og avijQ) the emphasis is on the 
attributive, e. g. /Jtl Ttuidslag yoLVMnlv i6 d^ i] X v ysroc ij^uiv roj t mv ag ^ s- 
VM V {yivEi) PI. L. 805, d. In the last position (o vcv)]q 6 aya&og or uvtiQ 
o u'/ai^oc) on the contrary, tlie idea expressed by the substantive is, at the 
same time, contrasted with that of another substantive, e. g. Tl dinopsQEt 
av&Q0i7iog ay.Qa.xi]g ^ r] qI o v tov axQarsaiuTov X. C 4. 5, 11. "J/ ags- 
TTj avvtan /jh S^eolc, (jvpscttl dl av&QW7toig Tolg aya&olg 2.1,32. 
To otQiajov ov t i' g vofiovg iarlv laxvsiv, uX)^ uvdga ihv ^txa cpgov)]- 
(lEMg (iacriXiy.ov PI. P. 294, a. zlioiy.ovviui, al fisp rvgavvldsg y.al oX ir- 
y UQ X I a L xoXq t q 6 n o ig tmv i cp f a t tj y. 6 t a v, al ds. n oXs i g (republics) 
al 8t^fioy.QaToi\uevai lolg v 6 fi o ig rolg y.Eif^svoic Aeschin. 3, 6. To liin m ov 
10 fxiivbiv {sc. iwv 2y.v&Mv] ovroi fxdysTai, to 8s b n X it uy.ov to ys ruv 
'liXXrjvcav^ wg e/w Ae'/o) PI. Lach. 191, b. '£yd) fxsv oiv iy.ilvovg rovg uvSgag (pr?- 
fil ov fiovov rwv aco n a T (o V twv T/^sTfowv nmigag fivai, aXXu ital ttJc i X sv- 
■&Bglug rijg ts i]fiETig(xg xal ^vfinavTCov, tcHv Iv tjjSs xfj ^jnilgoj PI. Menex. 
240, e. /JiE^ig/ovTocL rug ie (TVfj.q>ogc(g Tag iy. rov n oX s (xo v tov ngoq 
uXXr,Xovg r^^xiv yEyEvr/jiEvag y.al Tag m (^eX t i a g Tag iy. Tijg <tt g ai £ tag xii? 
in sheIvov ifjo^ivag Isocr. Paneg. 43, 15. Sometimes the position varies in 
the same sentence, e. g. Ta g ^EyaXagijdovag y.al t a ay a & a t a 
fisyaXa tJ nEi&d) xal ?; yagTEgla xal ol iv tm xaigM novoi y.al y.UdvvoL na~ 
gixoviai {great pleasures and advantages) X. Cy. 3. 3, 8. IlMg tiote ?'/ ax- 
Q UTO g dixaioavvrj ngog a d ixlav ti)v ax gax o v e/ei ; PI. Rp. 
555, a. Then the second position does not differ from the first. 

Rem. 2. When a substantive denotes an action in the abstract and hence 
contains also a verbal notion, the attributive expressed by a preposition and 
its Case, is [placed after its substantive without the repetition of the article. 
So also, when an attributive explanation comes between the article and the 
Substantive. "iT (Tvyy.ofAidrj ix t(7)v aygajv ig to aaxv Th. 2, 52. '^H vvv i'//£- 
tiga ogyr] ig MLTvXtjvalovg 3, 44. 

(b) The attributive is not connected with its substantive to 
express an independent or complete idea, but is to be regarded 
as the predicate of an abridged subordinate clause. In this 
case the attributive is not contrasted with another object of the 
same kind, but with itself, it being designed to show that the 
42 



318 SYNTAX. POSITION OP THE ARTICLE. [§ 245. 

object is to be considered, in respect to a certain property, by 
itself, without reference to another. The English is here gen- 
erally lik(; the Greek, and uses the delinite article. In this case 
the adjective without the article is placed either after the article 
and the substantive, or before the article and substantive. 

'O uvijQ uyad^og or aya&og 6 f<vr,o, the good man = ayudog oiv, the 
man who is good, inasmuch as, because, if he is good. 01 uvdqumoL luiaoiai 
TOP ixvdQa y.ay.6v or xaxov xov uv8q(x, they hate the, had man, i. e. they 
hate the man, inasmuch as, because, if he is bad. On the contrary, lov y.ay.ov 
avdga or tov avdQa jov y.cty.ov, the bad man, in distinction from the good ; 
hence, rorc fxsv vcya&ovg av&Qb'movg ayanajfiev, lovg ds yaaovg fxiaovfiiv. 
'0 ^aadiig ijdiag xaqiQnai, lolg noXhuig a y a-d-olg, good citizens, i. e. if or 
because they are good ; on the contraiy, rdlg aya^o~tg noXhaig or jotg noXi- 
Taigidlg aya&olg, good citizens, m distinction from bad citizens. 'O&wg 
Ti]v \pvxi]v yQailffTTjv tw ap&QMHb) spscpvcrsv, a soul, as it is the most ex- 
cellent, X. C. 1. 4, 13. Ol vno tov rjXlov yaTaXtxfinofiSvoi la ;^^aj)uaTU ^ £- 
luvT £ Q a. t/ovuLV, « blacJccr skin ; the blackness of the skin is the conse- 
quence of the yaTaXdiJ,Tisa&ai vno lov rjXiov 4. 7, 7. ^ Lvinfjr^aav is lug 
cr>:rjvag sQrjfiovg xal ici /Qn^ona dn'iQnavav {quia deserta erant) Th. 1, 49. 
^$tw (postulo) TOL'? -d^EQunoviag i^oi fthucp'&ova la inni;d(ia naqaa- 
asva'Ceiv, uvxovg ds lArjdsvog tovicov anjead^dL (= utgis avxu aifd^ova elvai,) X. 
C. 2. 1, 9. 

Rem. 3. If a substantive having the article is consti'ucted with a Gen., 
the position under (a) occurs, only when the substantive with its Gen. forms 
a contrast with another object of the same kind, e. g. o iojp "AdTjvaiwv dij- 
fiog or o dijfiog o imv \4&7jvcil(ov, in contrast with another people ; the em- 
phasis here is on the Gen., e. g. Om uXXotqiov rjyHiai dvai o^A&rjvaiiav 
dri^og TOV Or]^ a lojv dijfiov, avafjifxvt'icry.EtitL ds y.al rug t a v n q o- 
y 6 V (av T mv savj oii slg r ov g Orj^alovg n q oy 6 v ov g evsQyecrlag 
Dem. (Psephism.) 18, 186. On the contraiy, the Gen. without the article is 
placed either before or after the other substantive, when the substantive de- 
notes only a part of that expressed in the genitive, in which case the em- 
phasis is on the governing substantive, e. g. o dri/j.og tcuv ^A&T]valo)v, or Twy 
^A&rjvaib)v 6 dijf^og, the people and not the nobles. Hence, with this posi- 
tion, not an attributive, but a partitive genitive is used ; the Athenian peo- 
ple is not here considered in contrast with another people, but a part of 
the Athenian people is contrasted with another part of the same, viz. the 
nobles. Compare further, i] J^wy.QixTovg q)iXoao(pla or rj cpiXoaocpla i] J^wx^o- 
Tovg, i. e. the philos. of Soc. the Socratic philos., in contrast with the philos. 
of another, e. g. Plato's, the Platonic, with 7} cpiXoaocpla J'uy.gaTOvg or .^w- 
yQiXTovg i] cp., i. e. the philosophy of Soc. and not something else of his, e. g. 
his life. "^'SlgnsQ oly.lag t« x dj o}& sv (domus infimas partes) la^vgora- 
T« ilvai 8h, oltw yul twv ti q d^s ojv tug a q / dg y.ot.1 tag vn od^ ia tig 
dXtj^sig ical $ixalai sivai nqoarixst P^m. 2, 10. Toviov si) $&Qiips xal inal- 



§ 245.] SYNTAX. POSITION OF THE ARTICLE. 319 

deivty, tog doxfl \4 &r]v a loiv t oJ nXtj &£ i, to the muUitude, not to the m- 
tellif^eiU, VI. Menoii. JK), b. To si dog r o v n a c d 6 g (contnistcd ^vitll 
jovfofiu Tov nuidcc) PI. Lysid. *204, e. 

Rem. 4. When the genitive of the substantive pronouns is used instead 
of the possessivcs, the reflexives f'fjnvrov, aeavrov, etc. are ])hiced accord- 
ing to (a), e. g. 6 (fAUVTov nrtTi'jQ or o timti)^ o (fiavTov, etc.; but the simple 
personal pronotuis fiov, aov, etc. stand without the article, either after or 
before the substantive which has the article, e. g. o tcuji'iq (aov or ftov o na- 
TfjQ, o 7TaTr,(j aov or ctov o naTtjo, u ;r«T»;o avrov («lt/;c) or uvxov [avjijg) 6 
naji'iQ, my, thy, his (ejus) father, 6 ntxTiiQ i)fib)r, i\uo)v, vojv, ttvibJv or vfiojv, 
VfibJv von', ai'jojv o 7nijr,Q, our, your, their (eoruni) father. Li the Sing, and 
Dual, the enclitic forms are always used, and these can stand before the 
substantive only in connected discourse, but not at the beginning of it. 

Rem. 5. The difference between the two cases mentioned is very mani- 
fest in the adjectives ax^o?, jj so og, I'tr/aTo?. When the position 
mentioned under (a) occurs, the substantive with its attribute forms a con- 
trast with other objects of the same kind, e. g. ?; fisar] noXiq, the middle city, 
in contrast with other cities, i] io/diT] v^o-oc, the most remote island, in con- 
trast with other islands. ^Eq xo sa/vixov I'^i/jua ii]q vmov, in contrast with 
other t^v^aai Th. 4, 35. When, on the contran,', the position mentioned 
under (b) occurs, the substantive is contrasted with itself, since the attribu- 
tive detines it more clearly. In this last case, we usually translate these ad- 
jectives into English by substantives, and the substantives with which they 
agree as though they were in the genitive, e. g. inl ico oqsi uy.goj or sri axooj 
Tw oQsi, on the top of the mountain, properly on the mountain where it is 
the highest; tV fisaj} xfj noXst or if TJj noXsi ^sar^, in the middle of the city, 
iv ia/drj] rfi r»)(/w or iv v/joo) jfj saxdnjl, on the border of the island. 'Ev [xs- 
aoig Tolq noksuioig uni&uvs X. H. 5. 4, 33. Kttxtt usaov xov y.iy.lov Cy. 2. 2, 
3. IIsqI axQuic xmg yjqol 8. 8, 17. 

Rem. 6. In like manner, the word noroq has the position mentioned un- 
der (a), when it expresses an actual attributive explanation of its substan- 
tive, e. g. ixovoq naiq, the only son ; on the contrar}', the position mention- 
ed under (b), when it is a more definite exjjlanation of the predicate, e. g. 
naig fjovog or fxovoq o rtnlq nai'^sv, the boy plays alone [imthout company). 
MovTjv Ttuv urd-QUTibiv (y).b)xxav) inolr]actv[ol &so\) o'iav aQ&Qoiv xi]v (fwv^v, 
i. e. 7j Ttuv ar&Q. ylurxu jdovrj scnlv, 7]v inoiritrav oXav ■/.. x. X., they made the 
human tongue only, capable of articulating sounds, X. C. 1. 4, 12. 

Rem. 7. When a substantive has two or more attributives, one of which 
hmits the other, § 264, 2, either the limiting attributive with the article 
stands first, and the second follows with the article and substantive, or the 
limited attributive with the article stands first, and the limiting attributive 
follows with the article and substantive. Ai u)lai at -a ax a xo a u fia 
Tjd ovai, the other bodily pleasures, PI. Rp. 565, d. 'Ev xotq ixlloiq xoXg 
ifiolq X (^ li LO iq Lys. 281. "Ev xfi xov /J lo q xfj fi^ylaTT] so Qxy Th. 1, 
126. 'Eg al'iov xov ial xo) aio^uaxi xov Xifjsvog xov stiQov nvqyov 8,90. 
"Ev xjj dqxaln xj] r, p,sx eq a (p ojv J] PI. Cratjl. 398, b. To h 'Aqxudia x 6 
xov J log isQov Rp. 565, d. The limiting attributive can also stand be- 
tween the substantive and the limited attributive ; in this case the article 
is placed before each of the three parts, e. g. t « t £ /;f tj t« suvtuv x ik p,a~ 
xQct antxiXsirav Th. 1, 108. Finally, the limiting attributive with tlie arti- 



320 SYNTAX. ARTICLE AVITH PRONOUNS AND NUMERALS. [§ 246. 

cle is i)laced first, and is followed by the limited Kiil)suintive and its attri- 
butive, both without the article, e. ^. Jl^og luq naijoix/t av^cpoquq ev- 
d a ifiov a g Kur. I lel. 476. luXaq iyu) lijq iv ^n'/Ji ^v ^ [i oXx) q (i u q liaq 
Ar. Acharn. I'ilO. ^Ano iwv iv ifi JSiqcojiji noXeoiv^l^lXrjvidbJv X. H. 
4. 3, 15. Tug vnh ly olxovaag noXsig'^EXXTjvldug 8, 26. 

Rem. 8. Wlien an attributive ])articii)le lias a more definite explanation 
belonging to it, their relative position is as follows, 

(a) 'O UQog jov noXfuov aiQ a & st g ax q axr]/ 6g 

{h)'0 a T Q (X T 1] y 6 g 6 nqog rev noXfftov alQt&tig. 

When there are two of these more definite explanations, one stands either 
after the substantive or after the participle, e. g. Trjv TiQog Ev^ovXov yspofii- 
VTjv nlcrxiv v fi2v Aeschin. 3, 25. ToJv )ta& vfiixg mnqay^ivbiv xaAwy t ^ 7i o - 
Xii Dem. 18, 95. Ti]g vvv vnaQxomrjg avjoj 5uf«/i£w$ 4, 4. Tag naq 
vf^aiv v7iaQ/ov(Tixg a vz b> zif^ixg 20, 83. 

{c)'0 aiq f-d- slg nqog tov noXsfxov ar q ajrjy 6 g 

(d)'0 alg sd^ slg (Jt q m rjy 6 g nqog zov n6Xfy.ov 

(e) ' 7iq. T. n. az q axrjy o g alqa&slg (this position is most frequent, 
when the participle has two explanatory words belonging to it), 
(c) Ti]v vnaqxovaav zfi noXec d vv a fiiv Dem. 8, 10. (d) I'ljv n q o g- 
ov a av a 8 % I (X V ZM nqdyfiazi 6, 8. (e) Tag vno zoizov ^Xa a q>T} [j, i ag 
8lqT)ij.ivag 18, 126. A i rzqo zov uzo^azog vi]Bg vav(xaxovaav Th. 
7, 23. To nqog Al^vtjv fisqog Tszqafifievov 58. When there are 
two or more explanatory words belonging to the participle, they are either 
placed between the article and the substantive, e. g. Tr] v zozh Orj^uioig q (o- 
fxr}v aal (Jolay vti a qx ovaav Dem. 18, 98 ; or they are so separated, 
that one is placed either before the participle or after it, e. g. i naoa zov- 
Tov X6 y L TOTS qrjS^ ivT sg Dem. 18, 35. Tavz7]v tijv ano zov zonov 
a (J (fdX ELav vtv a qx ova av t jj tioXei 19,84. 



§246. Use of the Article tvith Pronouns and Nu- 
merals, loith and ivithout a Sub stantiv e. 

1. The article is sometimes used with personal substantive 
pronouns in the Ace., either when the personality is to be made 
prominent instead of the person merely, or, what is more fre- 
quent, when a person previously mentioned is referred to. 

Tov envzov d)) Xiyatv ftdXa aefxvojg xal iyxMfiid^oJV {his important per- 
son) PL Phaedr. 258, a. /Isiqo ^/;, ?} d^ vg, sld^v rifiiav. TLol, icprjv iyw, 
Xiysig, y.al naqa xivag z ovg ti^ a $ (i. e. xal zlveg elalv ovioi, oig Xiytig ^iiiag) 
PI. Lys. 203, b. 

2. The article is used with a substantive, which has a pos- 
sessive pronoun belonging to it, when the object is considered 
as a definite one ; the position of the article is according to § 245, 
3, (a), so that the adjective pronoun stands between the article 
and the substantive, e, g. o iiiog natriQ, 6 cog Xoyogj thy icord (de- 



§ 246.] SYNTAX. ARTICLE WITH PRONOUNS AND NUMERALS. 321 

finite), o fito^' nah\ my son, a definite one, or the only one ; on 
the contniry, the article is omitted, when the object is consider- 
ed indefinite, ifiog ddeXqjog, a brother of mine, it not being deter- 
mined which; i^og Ttcag; nannog fi^sreQog Lys. Andoc. (sub fin.). 

3. A substantive to which the demonstrative pronouns ovrog^ 
odf., i'Asivog and avzog, ipse, belong, regularly has the arti- 
cle ; as these pronouns are not considered as attributives, but 
either as substantives (he, the man), or are taken in a predicative 
sense {the man, icho is here), they stand either before the article 
and the substantive, which is then in apposition with the pro- 
noun, or after the article and substantive, comp. § 245, 3, (b) ; 
thus, 

ovTog 6 avijo or o avriQ ovtog, not o ovzog dv^Q. 

tjde )] yv(6fi}j or t^ yvcofitj rjde, 

ixeh'og 6 dv^Q or o dvrjQ ixeivog, 
y avTog 6 ^aailevg or o ^aoiXevg avtog, but o avzog ^aaikevg signifies 
idem rex, the same king. 

Remark 1. The substantive does not take the article, 
(a) When the pronoun is used as the subject, and the substantive as the 
predicate, § 244, Rem. 1, e. g. avxri iaxlv uv8qoq aqni], this is the virtue 
of a marij Pi. Men. 71, e. Avrr] sai(o Ixavi) unoXoyltx Apol. 24, b. Kl- 
vTjffig aviTj fifylffTT} di] lolq'JElXrjcrLv eyivno, this was the greatest agitation, 
Th. 1, 1 ; hence a distinction must be made between jovtco tm 8i8aa- 
xdXo) ;(Qb}VTai, they have this teacher, and tovtm did. /o., they have this 
man for a teacher. Tey.jxrjQio) roijo) xQcofifvoq (which signifies tovto ia- 
11 Tsyfiijoiov, b) ixQyjro) X. C. 1. 2, 49. TavTrjv yvM^-qv s/o) (which sig- 
nifies aviT] iatlv i) yvcofirj, rjv s/bi) An. 2. 2, 12. If, however, the predi- 
cate substantive denotes a definite object or one already mentioned, it 
takes the article, e. g.'Onois (.S'wx^mttj?) rt toi Ao/fo dis^loi, dca twv 
fidXicrxa o^oXoyov^iivoav inoQiiiTO, vo^I'I^mv lavTtjv Tr}V aacpaXsiav sivai 
Xoyov (banc esse firmam illam disputandi rationem, viz. such a mode 
as had been clearly shown by previous examples) X. C. 4. 6, 15. 
(b)When the substantive is a proper name, e. g. oviog, iy.Hvog, aviog 2w- 
Ttuuirjq. Jiiv&v8r]fiog oviocrl X. C. 4. 2, 3. NixrjQuiov joitov Symp. 2, 
3. XaQ^uidi]q ovioal 2, 19. Aviov Mivcova An. 1. 5, 13 ; or when a 
common name is use^ instead of a proper name, e. g. Aviov ^aaiXiwq 
An. 1. 7, 11. 

(c) When the idea of an object is to be expressed absolutely, the substan- 
tive is joined with the pronoun avi 6 q without the article. Avn) 
dsaiioxfia avxijq dovXslaq PI. Parmen. 133, d. Av xr\q iniaxriuriq ov 
fiixi/oufv 134, b. Otx avTov dsaixoxov di'jjxov, o iaxi 8tajx6xi]q, ixtl- 
vov SoiJXoq tax IV 133, d. 

(d) When ovxoq avriQ is used to denote emotion, especially contempt, 
instead of the pronoun (ru. Ovxoal dvr]Q ov numsxai cpXvaQoJv ', 



322 SYNTAX. ARTICLE WITH PRONOUNS AND NUMETTALS. [§ 246. 

£ijie jiioi, (o — wxontTf?, ovx ula;(VVfL uvofuara x^T]oti'b)P = blockhead, why 
dont you cease. "^ P). (iorg. 489, }). Ovu o\y unit Xiytiq, w 2wxr>Mrf5, 
aAA iilkov iivii iQ(i)xa. -i'. Ovjoq u v i] q ol/ VTiOfxivH wipslovfiivog 
= this fellow cannot bear to be benefited, Ibid. 505, c. 
(e) The poets often omit tlie article, where the prose-writers must use it. 
Rem. 2. When the pronoun oi/ioj belongs to a substantive having the ar- 
ticle and an attributive, it is often placed between tlie attributive and the 
substantive, e. g. ^l iw*' neXonovvtjalojv avx a l vi]iq Th. 8. 80. 7/ axtvr] 
avxT] o56q X. An. 4. 2. 6. 

4. The article is used with a substantive, with which roi- 
ovTog, TO log d 8, Tooovrog, TTjli-Aovrog, agree, when the 
quality or quantity designated by these, is to be considered as 
belonghig to a definite object, one before mentioned or known, 
or as belonging to a whole class of objects previously named. 
The article commonly stands before the pronoun and substan- 
tive, e. g. roiovTog avijQ d^aviiacrog icziv, ra toiavza nqdynarct 
'AaXd EGTiv. On the contrary, the article must be omitted, when 
the object is indefinite, an?/ one of those ivho are of such a na- 
ture^ or are so g'reat, e. g. Toiovrov dvdQa ovx dv i7iaivoi\g. 

'Aq ovv dvvaio xov x o i ov x ov d^mnxov cpllov vo^l^eiv; (i. e. talem, 
qualis antea descriptus est) X. Cy. 5. 5, 32. Ilbjg av oiv 6 to tovxog avrjg 
diacp&elgoL xovg viovg (i. e. talis vir, qualem descripsimus Socratem) C. 1. 2, 8. 
Ta V xoaovxav y.al xolovxwv ixya&wv vfuv xai xolg aXloig ^Ad^rjvaloig 
exovxfg %c(Qiv {in relation to what precedes) Dem. Cor. 327, 305. 'OqCjv 
xovg xTjX Lxovx ovg cpvXdxxoviag fidXi(Txa xag yvvatxag (relating to the 
preceding yiqaioj, but at the same time designating the whole class of the 
ysQaiol) X. R. L. 1, 7. 

5. When ti dg , Tidvr eg belong to a substantive, the follow- 
ing cases must be distinguished, 

(a) When the idea expressed by the substantive is consider- 
ed as altogether a general one, the article is not used, e. g. nag 
dv&Q(07tog, ever?/ man^ i. e. every one to whom the predicate man 
belongs, ndrreg dvd-QCJTZot, all men. Then,/7a? in the singular, al- 
ways signifies each^ every. Tldg is often translated by mere, or 
utter, e. g. 'EQcog iv Tzdarj dvaQ)^ia xai dvofiia ^cJj^ PL Rp. 575, a. 
ndina dya&d xa< aaXd dneQyd^ovtai Polit. 284, a. 

{§) When the substantive to which ndgy ndvtEg belong, is to 
be considered as a whole in distinction from its parts, it talies 
the article, which is placed according to § 245, 3, (a), e. g. 'H nd- 
ffa y^t the whole earth, ol ndvreg TzoXhaij all citizens loithout ex- 



§ 246.] SYNTAX. ARTICLE WITH PRONOUNS AND NUMERALS. 323 

ception. This usage is more seldom than that under («). This 
construction occurs also with olog, but it is still rarer than mth 
;rat,'. Here the singular nag always has the sense of whole. 

JlfiQfxa&ai ixQh) aotvfi au^dv ti)v n aa av 2 ly.tXiav Th. 4, 61. * E5o- 
Itv alxoiq ov Toig naQovTag fiovov (xnoxruvai^ alXa xnl xovq txTiavxag 
il/«Tivl»jv«toiv 3, 36. To olov avcr/xr} jit navxa (^sQ'r} dvui PI. Theaet. 
204, a. \4y&Q(i)Tioi(n '/aQ Tolg nuai xoivov lov^a^ttoidvuv S. Ant. 1023. 
^Exiircag fioi qpatVfxai, cognsQ la jov nQogainov fioQia e/si nqog to oXov 
n Qogconov PI. Prot 329, e. Hence it signifies, in all, the whole. ^vvsnXrj^ 
g(a&r](Tctv vijsg ai n a cr at 8iy.a (xaXiaia xal exaTOP Th. 3, 66. 

(y) When the words luhole or «//, intended merely as a more 
explicit explanation, belong to a definite object and hence one 
which has the article, nag is then placed according to § 245, 3. 
(b). This is by far the most frequent use of Tzag, ndviFg. 
The word olog also is usually constructed in the same manner 
in connection with a substantive and the article. 

Ol (TJQttJLOJTaL hXov JO ffT Q UT 071 s8 OV 01 71 a V OT U 71 a V TO (TT Q tt- 

T 6 71 ed OV. OlaxQaxibJxat 7i dvx sg oi'7iuvxsgoicrxQatib)~ 
X a I xaXoJg efia/itravTO. Jiu x i]V txoX tv oX rj v or d id oXrjv j i]v 7x6- 
Xlv. Jia^Salvovai Txdvxsg elg x6 Bv^dvxiov ol ax gat iuxai X. An. 
7.1,7. El V710 xij g 'LXXd 5og jtdarjg d^Lo7g iix uqexti d^av^di^ia&ai,, 
xrjv 'EXXdda txeiqccxsov bv tiolhv X. C. 2. 1, 28. 

6. When rAaaiogj each, ever(/, belongs to a substantive, the 
article is omitted, as with Tiag in the sense of each, every, when 
the idea expressed by the substantive is considered as general, 
e. g. xad^ i-AUdtr^v i^fisqavy every day, each day ; when, on the con- 
trary, the idea contained in the substantive is to be made pro- 
minent, then the article is joined with it, and is always placed 
according to § 245, 3, (b). 

Kaxd. X Tjv i) fisg uv ex daxrjv Dem. Cor. 310, 249, or xaS^ exdtrrrjv 
T'ijV'tjfiiQCiV, every single day, but ovy. oXlya icrxl xad^ exdaxrjv ^ (i i gav 
{quotidie) loiavxa oqav xe xnl axovav X. C. 4. 2, 12. '^A sxda xjj ijX ix i a 
TXQogxixaxxai tioihv, 8i,T]'/ri(7Cfied-a X. Cy. 1. 2, 5. TvQavvovvxai vixo dixa 
dvdQcSJv, ovg yimav^qog xaxiaxrjasv iv exdaxj] tx 6 X t i H. 3. 5, 13 ; but 
' O XI iiv iv X fi y f) ix d <7 rrj xaXov ?/ aya&ov f], (iFfivi^aovxai^ in every sin- 
gle land, Cy. 8. 6, 6. Kal TJ/f^wy ^sv i]v 6 deaTioxtjg kxd CFxrjg xij g ol- 
xiag An. 7. 4, 14. 

7. When iadisgogf each of tivo^ a^gxo and d[x(f6t€Qogf both^ be- 



324 SYNTAX. ARTICLE WITH PRONOUNS AND NUMERALS. [§ 246. 

long lo a subslanlive, the article is always used with it, since 
here only two knovm^ therefore definite objects can be spoken 
of. The article is here placed according to § 245, 3, (b). 

^Etu t 6Jv TiXfV Q 6Jv ixax iQ oiv X. An. 3. 2, 36, or im ixax iq w v 
Twv nX Bv q (xiv^ t u cot a a ficp 6t sq a or ufxcpoieqa z u ojt«, «/i- 
(foTv Tolv %tqolv or xolv /sqolv uncpolp. Ka& kxut iq o v 
TO V iqnXov V Th. 4, 14. T o5 ojxl 6 x a 1 1' ^ o) X. Ven. 5, 3*2. 

8. In respect to the pronoun avrog and the indefinite pro- 
nouns or numerals alXog, treQogj Tiolvg, nleicov, TtltT- 
(jTog, the following things are to be noted, 

(a) AvT 6g preceded by the article signifies the same, idem, e. g. o avtog 
av&qtxmog, idem homo, t a v t 6, the same ; but o av&qwnog uvrog or nmbg 6 
uv&qbmog, homo ipse. 

{h)*'AXXog without the article has the sense of the Lat. alius, being the 
opposite of ipse {uvrog), but with the article it signifies the rest, reliquus, the 
others, ceteri, e. g. 7/ ukXrj'EXXag, reliqua Graecia, ol uXXoi av&qwnot^ the other 
men, in relation to definite individuals, or the others, ceteri homines ; et sq og 
without the article signifies one of two (it not being determined which), or it 
forms a contrast with o aviog and denotes difference or contrast ; 6 et sqog, 
the other, i. e. the definite one of two, e. g. ?) siiqot, /slq rft kiiqci /^^T«t ; o I 
STsq L in reference to two parties. 

(c) The following cases of n oXv g, n oXXoi . are to be distinguished, 
(a) in noXvg novog, noXXi] anovdi], noXvg Xoyog, noXXol av&qconoi without, 
the article, an object is denoted as indefinite, e. g. IIoXvv e'xovaaL n ovov 
atsXng trj? tov oviog ^iag aniq/ovTai PI. Phaedr. 248, b. IIoXXol av- 
'd^ q (an ol Tov nXovTov oqiyoviaL ; (/5) but if the object is represented as 
definite, or one previously mentioned or known, the article is used with 
the substantive, and noXig is then placed as an attributive between the 
article and the substantive, e. g. i] n oXXi) an ov 8 1) to aXrj&slag Idslv ns- 
diof {magnum illud, de quo dixi, studium) PI. Phaedr. 248, b. ' Slv niqu tov 
n oXvv X6 Y o V inoiuxo ^ Avutayoqag [multum ilium sermonem, e scriptis ejus 
satis cognitum) 270, a. 'JSv t alg noXXalg / svi asa i (among many gen- 
erations mentioned) Phaedon. 88, a. ; ol noXXol uv&q an oi signifies 
either the many men named or a multitude of men belonging together in oppo- 
sition to the parts of the w^hole, hence also ol n oXXo I, the many, the popu- 
lace, plehs, e. g. "Oaa ol oXlyoi rovg noXXovg fii] nEtaavjsg, aXXu y.qa- 
Tovvtfg yqixcpovdi X. C. 1. 2, 45 ; what is true of the Positive, is true also of 
the Comparative and Superlative, e. g. 'jEav cplXovg ij noXiv wqpdEty dij], 
noiiqw 7/ n Xe Icov a / oXi) Toviav inifiEXEia&ai, tw lug iyo) vvv, -^ toj wg av 
(Aunaql^Eig diania^ivb) (the greater leisure, considered ai a definite thing, or 



§ 246. SYNTAX. ARTICLE WITH PRONOUNS AND NUMERALS. 325 



as a definite whole) X. C 1. 6, 9. Ei idldov, ijtl toltw av idldov, onMg 
^fiol doig fiuov fi)j unodoir] vfitv to tiIeIov An. 7. 6, 10. "j^ntjuL r^ 
aQSJJj aw^fa&ai tig r 6 v nXilio yqovov fxuXXov, r] tj] xayia R. L. 9, 2 ; 
ol nksiovg signifies the mflr/on'/^ in opposition to the minority {ol eXua- 
covg), therefore a definite whole; ol nkelar o i, tJie most, also to be con- 
sidered as a definite whole ; again, n oXv g is joined with the substantive 
having tiie article according to the position mentioned in § 245, 3, (b) ; no- 
Xvg is then to be taken in a predicative sense, e. g. "EtteI ecoga noXXu t« 
XQ i a [flesh in great abundance) X. Cj". 1. 3, 6. ^cpiai n oX a to an o q a. 
^VfiSfiS t/XOT a [sc. ogoivTsg) Th. 1,52. IloXXrjv tijv all lav fi/ov [thy 
had censure in great abundance, i. e. were veiy severely censured) 6, 46. 

(d) ^ OXiy I, few, e. g. oXlyoi ar&QMnoi : ol oXly o i, the few, i. e. either 
the few mentioned, or to be considered as a definite whole, viz. emphati- 
cally the Oligarchy, considered as a w hole, in opposition to ol n oXXol; 
e. g. IJqia°tig ol Mr^Xioi nqog juiv to nXiid^og ova r,yayov, iv de lulg ngyalg 
xocl t olg X ly I g Xsyeiv ixiXsvov Tli. 5, 84 ; but when only an indefinite 
idea is expressed by the word uXlyog the article is omitted, e. g. IlQodod^i]- 
yai liiv TioXiv vti oXlycav, by oligarchs, not by the oligarchs. 

9. When a cardinal number belongs to a substantive, the ar- 
ticle is omitted, if the idea expressed by the substantive is inde- 
finite, e. g. TQsTg ccvdQeg rjX&ov ; the substantive, on the contrary, 
takes the article which is placed, (a) according to § 245, 3, (a), 
when the substantive with which the numeral agi-ees, contains 
the idea of a united loliole ; hence also, when the number of 
objects is to be represented as a sum-total., after the prepositions 
a^(fi, nsQi, Eig, vmQ ; but the article is here used most frequently, 
when a preceding substantive (without the article) is referred 
to, which has a cardinal number agreeing with it. 

Ol T(av §a(TiXiwv ohoyooL didoaat Totg tqigI d anxvXo ig oyovvTsg 
Ti]v (pittXrjv, i. e. with the three fingers, i. e. the three generally used, X. 
C\\ 1. 3, 8. 'Hv, oTfc sTsXEVTa, u ^icpl X a nEvirjxovTa err}, he had reach- 
ed about the sum offlfly years, X. An. 2. 6, 15. 'irniug slg r ov g xsxq a- 
X t gy iXiov g avvtXsyovxo avib), y.ccl xo^oxai. sig xovg fivglovg Cy. 3, 
2, 3. Tolg KegxvQaloig x wv six oa l v bojv ov Tiagovauv, (referring to the 
preceding words ol IQgxvgaloi bIxogi vavacv avxovg xgEipdfisvoi, Th. 
1, 49). 

(§) But the article is placed according to § 245, 3, (b), when 
the numeral is joined with the definite object, merely to define 
ii more explicitly, and when the numeral had not been previ- 

43 



326 SYNTAX. ARTICLE AS A DEM. AND REL. PRONOUN. [§ 247. 

ously mentioned, e. g. 'E^iaitaavTO oi ^tru ThnrxXtovs onXirai ilXioi 
or ;(/'Xfo/ 01 ^etu 11. onXlrai. 

§ 247. Tlie Article as a Demonstrative and Rela- 
tive Pronoun. (4io.) 

1. The article u t) to had originally the sense bolli of a demonstrative 
and relative pronoun. 

2. h\ the Homeric poems, the pronoun 6 i) to has almost wholly the 
sense of both a substantive and adjective demonstrative pronoun, which re- 
fers to an object and repi'esents it as known or already spoken of, or brings 
it before the mind of the hearer, e. g. II. a, 12. u yuq rjl&s &oug inl vijug 
"'jl/aicav. 29. T?) V S' e/d) ov Xvuw. Od. x, 74. ov yaQ f.ioL S^ifxig iail tco^l- 
^Sfisv old" anonifinfiv ardga x 6 v, og xs d^tolaiv anixd^rixai nay.aQiuGLV. 
Hence, in Homer, the substantive is found in verj' many instances without 
the aiticle, where later writers, particularly the Attic, would use it. Comp. 
n. a, 12 seq. with PI. Rp. 393, e. Yet there are, iu Homer, evident traces 
of an approximation or agreement of this apparent article with the 
real article, which was not fully developed before the time of the At- 
tic wTiters. Thus in Homer, as in the Attic writers, it gives the force 
of substantives to adjectives and paiticiples, e. g. o uQiajog, v viy.r,(jag, o 
ysgaiog ; so also, to ttqIv, to ngocrd-ev ; it is found in connection with a sub- 
steintive and an attributive adjective or adverb, and the attributive is placed 
between the article and substantive, e. g. toiv ttqotsqwv iiiojv H. )., 691. tov 
Se^Lov Xfinov xp, 336. ol svsg&E Ssol |, 274. to (Jov yegag a, 185. to gov fisvog 
a, 207 ; so it is used in case of apposition, e. g. Od. A, 298. -/.al ytrjdrjv h8ov 
j7]V TvvSagiov 7iaguy.0Liiv. Od. ^, 61. avaxisg ol riot ', flmher, uvivysg ai 
7i8gl dlqigov D. X, 535. uvdgbjv tojv tots i, 559. vlslg ol Jolloio Od. w, 497 ; 
also with the demonstrative, al y.vvsg aids t, 372 ; it also takes the place of 
the possessive pronoun, e. g. H. X, 142. vvv fxh di) tov n ut go g asiy.ia 
TLdSTs Xoj^Tjv, of your fcdJier, and denotes what belongs to an object, e. g. Od. 
0, 218. ly'Aoa^sXTS to. TsiyJ siatgoi, vijl fxsXalvrj (the Tsv/sa belonging to the 
ship). 

3. The demonstrative use of the adjective aiticle is not uufi-equent in all 
the post-Homeric writers, § 244, 6 ; but as a demonsti-ative substantive pro- 
noim, it was retained, in certain cases, through eveiy period of the lan- 
guage ; thus m Attic prose, 

(a) To y s, to 8e [an the contraTy), very frequently at the beginning of 
a sentence ; o fiiv [is quidem), o di {is autem), ol 8 i (u auiem) very 
frequently at the beginning of a sentence ; tt ^ o tov {ti g otov), 
formerly ; often xal t 6v, tijv, et eum, et earn, at the begmning of a 



§ 248.] SYNTAX.— CLASSES OF VERBS. 327 

sentence, e. g. X. Cy. 1. 3, 9. xat rov xdBiaai dovvai. But in the 
Noni. xat o?, x«» »), xal o'l are used, § 334. 
(b) In such phrases as, t o v y. nl t 6 v, to xal to, this man and that man^ 

this thijis: and that thing, t « xal xa, varia, bona et mala, 
(c)It is used immediately before a sentence introduced by o ?, oaog or 
Otoe, which sentence expresses periphrastically the force of an adjec 
tive, or especially, an abstract idea. PI. Phaedon. 75, K oQiyuui rov 
o ioTLV I'aoy (= rov I'aov ovjog). Prot. 320, d. ex y7\g xal nvQog fil^uv- 
Tfs xal T w V o 0- a nvgl xal yfj xsgavvvtai. Soph. 241, e. sirs fxifir^fid- 
Twy, HTE cpavraafittTiov aviiav r, xal Tifgl Tf/vtuv t w v, oauL nsgl rav- 
Tce eltTi. 
(d) In sucli phrases as, 6 fii v — o 8 i, ol (xi v- — o I d i, the one, — the other, 
som£, the others. Isocr. Paneg. 41. ug fisv rovg v^gl^ovTsg, xdlg ds dov- 
Xsvovtfg. Very frequently to fii v — x o 8i, xa /us v — x a 8 i, partly 
— partly, x f^ ^ i v — x fj 8 e, on one side — on the other side. 
4. In the Homeric language, the demonstrative o n xo, is frequently used 
in place of the relative. II. a, 125. aXXa xa //iv noXiav iU'^gad-Ofxev, x« 8i- 
daarai {quae ex urbibus praedati sumus, ea sunt distributa). The relative 
use was transferred from Homer to the Ionic and Doric wTiters also ; so 
the tragedians take tliis liberty, though rarely. Her. 3, 81. x a ^kv "Oiavrig 
(ins, XEXi/d^b) xauol xatxa • t a 8' ig to nXri&og avw/e qjsgeiv to xQctTog, yvca- 
fiTjg Tr,g aglarr^g i]fidgir,xs. Comp. Larger Grammar, Part 11. § 482. 



§ 248. Classes of Verbs. (337.) 

The predicate or verb, in reference to the subject, can be ex- 
pressed in different ways. Hence arise different classes of 
verbs, which are indicated by different forms. 

(a) The subject appears either as active^ e. g. '0 Ttaig yQctqjsi, 
TO av&og d- all SI . — But the active form has a two-fold signifi- 
cation, 

(«) Transitive, when the object to which the action is direct- 
ed, is in the accusative, and therefore receives the action, 
e. g. TvTiTco rov 7iai8a,, yqdcfa ttjv iTziaToXrjv, 
(§) Intransitive, when the action is either confined to the sub- 
ject, e. g. To avd-og d-uXXai, or when the verb has an object 
in the Gen. or Dat., or is constructed with a preposition, 
e. g. 'Emd^vfjico trig dgezfjg, x^^Q^ ^S (^ocfU, ^adiXoa sig rrjv 
noXiv. 



328 SYNTAX. CLASSES OF VERBS. ACTIVE FORM. [§ 249. 

(b) Or the subject performs an action, which is confined to, or 
is reilcctecl upon itsell", c. g. Tuttto^iui, I strike myself; (iov).tvo[iaiy 
I advise myself or I deliberate ; rvnTo^ia rr^v xtquh'jv, 1 strike my 
oicn head; mcraajQiCfo^ai rrjv yijv, I subjugate the land for myself; 
d^vvo^at rovg noXe^uovgy I keep off the enemy from myself — Mid- 
dle^ or reflexive verb. 

Remark 1. When the reflexive action is performed by two or more sub- 
jects on each other, e. g. TvmovTai, they strike each other, diaxtXivoviuL^ they 
exiiort each other, it is called a reciprocal action. 

(c) Finally, the subject appears as receiving the action, i. e. 
the action is performed upon the subject, e. g. Oi orQarimrai vno 
zav Trolejj^iojv idic6x{>t]aav, loere pursued^ — Passive, 

Re3I. 2. The Act. and Mid. have complete forms. For the Pass., the 

Greek has only two tenses, viz. the Fut. and Aor. All the other forms are 
indicated by the Mid., since the passive action was considered as a re- 
flexive one. 

Remarks on the Classes of Verbs. 

§ 249. A. Active Form. (338.) 

1. Many active verbs, especially such as express motion, 
have besides a transitive signification, an intransitive or re- 
flexive sense ; comp. the birds are moving^ the carriage is break- 
ings the snoiv is meltings and the Lat. vertere, mutare, declinare, 
etc. 

"AxEQcav noxafioq iq§ aXXti ig t/jv Xlfj.VT]v Th. 1,46. 'H BoX^ri Xlfivri 
i^irjiTiv ig ■d^alaacrav 4, 103. ^Eyyig r\'/ ov oV'EXXrivsg (comp. to draw near) 
X. An. 4. 2, 15. So also dv ay b lv, to go back, to withdraw, d id y siv, per- 
stare, are found in prose ; — i Xavvsiv or iXai'vsLV 'inno} (X. An. 1. 8, 1.), 
to ride, nQogsXaiveiv, adequitare ; — many compomids of §dXXiiv, e. g. i ^- 
^dXXsiv and slg^dXXetv, to fall upon, ix^dXXsiv,to spring forth, (is- 
T a^ dXXs Lv (like mutare), d i a ^ d XXsiv, to cross over, n g og ^ dXXs iv 
xivi, to seize hold, crvfx^dXXsiv iivl, manus conserere, in i § dXXnv, to 
fall upon, vTisg^dXXsiv, to project, to go over ; — x Xlv nv and its com- 
pounds, e. g. ini'/.Xivfiv, to incline to something, dnoxXlveiv, dechnare ; — t ge- 
ne iv, like vertere, ennginEiv, se permittere ; — o- jgecpeiv (like mutare) and 
its compounds; — maleiv, to strike against, to stumble, ngogmaUiv, e. g. 
fieydXag ngoginTaiaav, to suffer a total shipwreck, Her. 6, 95 ; — a n aXXdx- 
xeiv, to get off', — compounds of (5 1 ^ o y a t, e. g. ixdidovuL, to discharge it- 
self [of & stream), eTiididovai, proficere; — compounds of isvai, e. g. dvii- 



§ 249.] SYNTAX. CLASSES OF VERBS. ACTIVE FORM. 329 

yoi, to desist, ^(piivai l(rx^'QV '/tXtoTi (iiululgere) PI. Rp. 388, e ; — compounds 
oC (iicrysir^ ftiyvvvai, c. g. avf^tfilay^tv, commisceri, Tzgog^iyvvvai, to 
Jight with, also appropinquare, e. g. nQogsiui^av jm tel/st Th. 3, 22 ; ai'Qs iv, 
to raise, to break up, to set out, (of ships, to tveigh anchor), also compounds, e. g. 
ol jSag^agoi uTiTjQav ix ttJ? zJi'jXov {to set sail) Her. 6, 99 ; uvtulqeiv tivI, to 
Jighty to iirithstand ; — a vvccnt siv, manus conserere ; — sx svv,to land, e'xsiv 
7iv6g (desistere) Th. 1, 112 ; s/nv with adverbs, as sv, xaXcjg, xaxojg, like bene, 
male habere ; l^fiv afj,cpl tl, in aliqua re occupatum esse ; nQogs/Eiv, atten- 
dere, or appellere, to layid ; ngoi/siv, praestare; sni/siv, se sustinere, or ex- 
spectare, in mente habere, e. g. inCixov (nqaxzvia^ai ; y.axixnv, se retinere, 
also to land; nuqi/HV, e. g. x^ fxovaiyji, musicae se dare ; aus/etv, to be dis- 
tant from ; avxi/siv, resistere ; — tt (j ixxx siv with adverbs, e. g. cv, y.ay.ojg, or 
with the Ace. of adjectives, e. g. naXa, Y.ay.6., to be happy, to be miserable ; — 
d lax Q i ^ siv {consumere), versari ; — compounds of cpig s t,v,e. g. dincpiodv, 
to be different, difFerre, vnfQcpsQsiv, {tm'mere) nXovxb) ; — c(vaXafi(5avsLV, 
retici, recreari ; — o Ixslv, admmistrari, e. g. noXig oIheI Plat. ; — x sXsvx av, 
to end, to die ; — x ax oq& oi v, to succeed ; — v ixav, to prevail, e. g. cV/xa ^ 
XHQwv xbjv yvbjfiiojv (like vincit sententia) Her. 6. 109 ; — i XXsln stv, officio 
suo deesse, anoXmsiv, to remain behind ; etc. 

2. Several active verb? with a transitive signification, which 
form both Aorists, have in the first Aor. a transitive significa- 
tion, but in the second Aor. an intransitive : 

dvo), to wrap up, first Aor. sdijaa, to wrap up, second Aor. %bvv, to go in, down, 
Xax-rj^ui, to station, " saxTja a, I stationed, " saxrjv, I stood, 

q)i'co, to produce, " "icpvaa, I produced, " scpijv, I ivas produced, 

(TxiXXca, to make dry, " (lo-x;jAa,Poet/m«cfe dry,) " eaxXrjv, I withered. 

So several active verbs with a ti-ansitive signification, which 
form both Perfects, have in the first Perf. a transitive significa- 
tion, but in the second an intransitive : 

i/HQw, to wake, fij'st Pf i/rj/iQxa, Ihave waked, second Pf i'/Qi]yoQoc, lam awake, 
oXXi'fiifperdo, " 6X(i)Xsxa, perdidi, " oXiaXa, perii, 

nsld- (0, to persuade, ^^ ninuxa, Ihave persuaded, " jxirtoid^u, I trust. 

Moreover some second Perfects of transitive verbs, which do 
not form a first Perf., have an intransitive signification : 

ayvvfii, to break, second Pf say a, I am broken, 
qiy/vi'^ii, to tear, " tqqbiya, I am torn, 

xr^xo}, to smelt (iron), " xixrjxa, I am smelted, 

Txi]yvh\ui, to fasten, " nsnriya,Iamfastened, 

ai^Tiu}, to make rotten, " aiarjua, I am rotten, 

cpalro), to show, " nicprjva, I appear. 

Remark 1. The Pass. aXiaxoixat, to be taken, has an active form in 



330 SYNTAX. CLASSES OF VERBS. MIDDLE FORM. [§ 250 

the Perf. and Aor., viz. iuXojxa, I have been luke.n, « «' A w v , / ivas taken, 
§ 361, 1. 

3. Intransitive active verbs are often used in the place of the 
passive. 

'j^TsXsvTTj(T av vn ^A&Tjvalwv (intorfecti sunt) Her. (), 92. MsyaXct n c- 
uovxot. (eversa) 7iQi]y^aza vno ijacrovojv 7, 18. /luvoitQOV ivofii'Cov alvai xa- 
xbjg vno Twv noXitwv axovstv [audire], ?/ xaXwg vtieq trig noXsag unod^vria^ 
xsiv Isocr. Paneg. 56, 77. So ixn Itit eiv vno iivog, expelli ab aliquo; 
veiy often (psvyuv vno Tivog, fugari ab aliquo, or in a judicial sense, accu- 
satum esse ab aliquo, e. g. uus^uag (psvyeiv vno jivog ; — nda/Biv vno Tivog, 
affici ab aliquo. 

Rem. 2. It will be seen, § 279, Rem. 5, that intransitive active verbs are 
frequently used in poetry in a transitive sense, e. g. uaTgdmsiv aiXag, /5at- 
vsiv noda. 

Rem. 3. The transitive active is not unfrequently used, when the subject 
does not itself perform an action, but causes it to be performed by another ; 
yet this usage is admissible, only when it is evident from the context or 
from the nature of the case, that the subject does not itself perform the ac- 
tion. ^. An. 1. 4, 10. KvQog tov naQoidsicrov E^ixoipe y.al t« ^aalXua 
xatsx avasv. So frequently dnoxisivEiv, ■&dnxeLV, oixodofisiv and similar 
examples, often also diddaxsLv, naidsvsiv, comp. PI. Prot. 320, a. 324, d. 
Menon. 94, b. 

§250. B. Middle Form. (339-343.) 

1. The Mid. denotes an action, which is performed by the 

subject, and is reflected upon or confined to the subject. Such 

verbs may be called reflexive. The two following cases are to 

be distinguished, 

(a) The Mid. denotes first an action, which the subject directs 
immediately to itself, so that the subject is at the same time also 
the object of the action. In English we here use the active 
verb with the Ace. of the reflexive pronoun, e. g. rvTirofiai, I 
strike myself^ iTvU)d{x?]r, I struck myself, rvipof^ai, I shall strike 
myself. This use of the Mid. is more rare than that mentioned 
under (b). The following verbs, which will be presented in the 
Aor. form, belong here : 

"Anixoi, to keep off, dno(T xiad- a i , se abstinere, to keep one's self off, to 
abstain ; dndy^ai tivd, to throttle, to hang some one, an dy^aud^ a l, to 
throttle or hang one's self; t vip acr-d- a l, xoipaaS^aLjto beat one's self, 
olxlaaad-aL, migrare, in l/^ aXia & a i jlvI, to apply one's self to some- 
thing, nagaaxevddacr'&cci, se parare, Td^a(T ■& a i, to place one^s sdf 



§250.] SXNTAX. CLASSES OF VERBS. MIDDLE FORM. 331 

in order of battle, e. ^. ovto) fiiv KfqHvqatoL italavxo, Th. 1, 48 ; nqo q- 
&ia& a I , se adjungere, to agree loith, 6 q fx la aa & a i, nad^oQ^lcrua- 
^ o « , to laiid, comp. Th. 4, 45, x v x X w rr « a i9- a t , to encircle, comp. Th. 5, 
72, but xvxX(o&i]vai, to stand or place one^s self in a circle, jqaniud^ai^to 
turn one^s self, (Th. 5, 29. 73.) ; iyyvT^aaaS- at, to pledge one's self; n av- 
aaax^ai, to cease, from navo), to cause to cease, d el^acrS- a i, to show 
one's self; particularly verbs which express an action performed by the 
subject upon his own body, e. g. Xovaaa<^at,, v lip aad^ a i , ocl e l- 
ipaa& a L, /()/o-«o-Ti>«f, Cua aa& ai, yvfxvacracT'&aL, xaXv- 
ip aa & a I , i(0(Tfn'](jaa&ai, afucpiiaaa&ai, ivdvaaa&ai, ix- 
d V(T aa ^ a I , x£ I q uaS^ a i , anoixoQ^aad^aL, se absiergere, a n o - 
~liv^a<j d a I, se emungere, anoiiJi'jaa(T-&aL, se absiergere, aj £q> av cu- 
aaa & a i; ajelXad & a l, to get ready, toft one's self out ; also some few 
verbs which express such a reflexive action, as corresponds with an in- 
transitive one, e. g. cp vXd^a aS^ ai, to be on one's guard, to be cautious, 
but cpvXaiTsiv Tivd, to guard some one, ^ ovX svaaaS^ a t, to deliberate, but 
§ovXtvuv iivi, to advise some one, ysvaa(T-&ai, to taste, ysisiv, to cause to 
taste, to give a taste of, x ifxco q ijaaa %)^a i, to avenge ; the reciprocals d t, «-, 
xaxaXvffaa&a I, nqoq xiva, to be reconciled to any one, (fvvS-iffS^ai, 
to bind one^s self, to agree ivith any one, (tti s Icr a ad^ a t, pacisci ; here be- 
long, also, most deponent middle verbs, § 197, Rem. 2. 

Remark 1. This immediate reflexive relation is also expressed (a) by 
middle verbs with a Pass. Aor., e. g. diaXvEiv, to separate, diaXv^rjvai, diaXv- 
aiad^ai to separate one's self, discedere, see § 197, Rem. 3 ; (b) by the active 
form e. g. fnia/^uXXEiv, to change one^s self, see §249, 1; (c) by the active 
form with the Ace. of the reflexive pronoun, e. g. inaiviXv sotviov, dvaQxav 
savtov, to make one's self depend on any one, vinoy.Qvnrsiv lavjov, id^lQuv eav- 
xov, naQs/SLV kavxov, unolvsiv kavxov, to free one's self, drtoacpaxxsiv eavxov, 
dnoxxdvHv lavxov; the Mid. then has the signification of the Pass., thus, 
inaivHcr&ai, uno(jq)dtxi(j&ai, laudari, intei-fici, jugulari ab alio, and has for 
its Aor. and Fut. a Pass. form. 

(d) The Mid. denotes an action, which the subject per- 
forms upon an object within its sphere, i. e. upon one be- 
longing to it, or standing in immediate relation or contact with 
it. In English, we commonly use here either a possessive pro- 
noun or a preposition with a personal pronoun, e. g. 

Tyjixofiai, ixvipdpr^v xi]v xEcp(xh]v, I strike, I struck my head, xvnxuv x., to 
strike the head of another, Xovaacr&uL xovg nodag, to wash one's oivnfeet, Xov- 
tiv X. 71., to wash the feet of another, aTioxQvipaaS^ni xd savxov, to conceal one's 
oum affairs, nsQig^ij^aad-ai xixojva, suam vestem, to rend one's own garment, 
nfgiQ^ri^ai, alius, that of another, naQacrxiff&oci xi, to give something from 
one's own means, e. g. yaC'^, hence also, to show, e. g. svvoiav naqix^ad^at,, on 



332 SYNTAX. CLASSES OF VERBS. MIDDLE FORM. [§ 250. 



the contraiy 7r«^£/f/v nvl nQu/fxaTU, cpoftov, etc. to cause trouble, fear j etc., to 
some one; — anodil^av&ul tl, e.g. tQ/ov, ^vojjMT^v, dvvaiuiv, to sJiow one's oum 
work, etc., inayytU.aa&ai ri, to promise ; reciprocally, vti^aax^al ti, aliquid in- 
ter se partiri, to divide something ivith each other, so fisQi'aaa&ai ; — noii'iaa- 
(T&al Tl, to do or make something for one^s self, e. g. HQi]vriv, anovdug, {noiHV, 
to do or accomplish,) kXia&ac tl, sibi sumere, hence to choose, u^ua&ul tl, to 
take up for one's self, to lay on one's self ui'()eiv ji, to take up something in or- 
der to lay it upon another, nQij^aa&aL xQi]fiaTd riva, sibi ab aliquo pecuniam 
erigere, fiia^waaa&ai, conducere, to hire for one's self, but pia&ojaui, locare, to 
let out, psTansfiipacrd-aL, to cause to come to one^s self, to send for, Kaiuaiqi- 
ipacr&aL, y.atadovXojaacT&ai yi]v, sibi subjicere terram, uvagTijaaa&al XLva, sibi 
devincire, to make dependent on one's self, unoXvaaad^al iivi,to free for one's 
self, to ransom, noglaua&al tl, sibi aliquid comparare, [nogi^siv tl tivl, alii ali- 
quid comparare), y.ofxlaaa&ai, e. g. Illaraulq naidag y.aX yvvaixag ixy.Exopia- 
fiivoi r\(Tav eg jocg 'A&i^v<xg Th. 2, 78 ; 7iTi](Taad^ai, nagaaxsvaaacT&al re, sibi 
comparare; ■&i(j&ai and ygaipau&ui vofiiovg are used of one who makes laws 
for himself, or of a law-giver, who is himself, also, subject to the laws which 
he has made for others ; on the contraiy, d^hlvai and ygaipai vofiov are used 
of one who is not subject to the law which he has made, or generally of 
one who gives laws to others, without expressing any further relation, e. g. 
*'Exoig aV stftHv, oTi ol ocvS^gumOL zovg aygacpovg vo^ovg e-& svt o ; '£y(jj fisv 
■&Eovg olfxac rovg v6p,ovg xoviovg xdlg av&gMTioig &Hvai X. C. 4. 4, 19; — 
upvvaa&ai Tovg noXfplovg, propulsare a se hostes, anoKTaa&ai xaxd, a se pro- 
pulsare mala, unoni^ipaa&al Tiva,ase dimittere, dnoaflaaa&ai ii, a se depellere 
nagaiirjdaa&ai, deprecari, diad^iu&ai, dnodoa&ai, to sell, dnojgsipaa&ai, 
dno^aXia&ai, unoxgovaaad-ai. This is much the most frequent use of the 
middle. Several deponent middle verbs also belong here. 

Rem. 2. The IMid. in the same manner as the Act., § 249, Rem. 3, can be 
used, when the subject does not itself perform an action, but causes it to be 
done by another. There is this difference, however, in the two cases, that 
in the Mid. the action always refers, in some way, to the subject. ''O TTair,g 
tovg naidag ididd$aTo [in aid sva at o), which is either as much as to say, the 
father educated the children for himself, or, if it is clear from the context, he 
caused them to be educated, (like X. C. 1. 6, 2; on the contrary, diduay.eiv, 
7raf(5ti'fij' are used without respect to the subject, §249, Rem. 3.); xiigaa&ai, 
to shave one's self, or to get shaved. 'Agysioi acficxiv uy.orag noiriadfifvoi 
dvi&faav ig /IsXcpovg, Her. 1, 31. ITavcrixviac Tgdne^av IJegaiyriV nagstl&STO, 
caused to be set before him, Th. 1, 130. Ol Aay.idaifioviOL y.ijgvy.a nimjjavxBg 
xovg vfy.goig disx o^laavxo, caused to be removed, 4, 38. 

Rem. 3. The reflexive relation of the Middle to the subject is oflen so 
slight, that in our mode of considering it, it almost disappears, and some- 
times consists only in a veiT gentle intimation, that the action will be com- 
pleted to the profit or loss of the subject, e. g. B. o, 409. ovxs nors Tgusg 
Javaaii' idvvavxo cpdXayyag gij^dfievot (in suum commodum) iiXi<ilr](ji> 



§ 2-51.] SYNTAX. CLASSES OF VERBS. THE PASSIVE. 333 

fii/t'jfitvai. Hence the reflexive pronoun is not seldom used with the Mid- 
dle, particularly in antitheses, in order to bring out emphatically the reflex- 
ive sense which exists in the Middle only in a general and indefinite man- 
ner, e. g. J'froqotuv fiovlsvstai — kixvTO) oiOfiu y.iu dvpnfuv n e q irr o ii'j- 
(T it(T & a I, to s:ain a name and power for himself, X. An. 5. 6, 17. 'iiTt £- 
d s i ^(ivj o Tccg « i- t w v a(jfiiig Isocr. Paneg. 58, 85. '^Pud^v^ov a VTolg 
X a T £ 0- T )J (7 « >' T o rov (iiov C3, 108. Triv i [xavt ov '/vw(Ariv a u ocp UL- 
yofievocld. Permut. 309, 22. 

Rem. 4. In many verbs, the Active and Mid. appear to have a similar sig- 
nification ; but on a closer investigation, the difference in the meaning is 
obvious ; the Active expresses the action absolutely, or objectively, without 
any accessaiy idea ; the Middle, on the other hand, expresses the same ac- 
tion in relation to the subject, or subjectively. Hence the Middle is em- 
ployed when the literal meaning is changed into the figurative, e. g. Sloikhv 
of an outward arrangement, SioixflaOat of an intellectual ; oiJt'C,uv literally, 
oQi^^a&ai figuratively, (jTa&fjar only in a literal sense, to measure, but orra- 
■&/jaff&ai also in a figurative signification, aliquid secum perpendere ; so in 
derivative verbs in -tvo) and -svofxai, the active form is used absolutely, lo 
he in a certain state ; the Middle, on the other hand, signifies, to act the part 
of that which is indicated by the root, to show one's self as such, to have the 
tendency or habit, to act as such, e. g. novriQiioi, to he had, TiovrjQivofJui, to de- 
mean one^s sefhudly, noXixFVM, to he a citizen, nohnvo^ni, to live and act as a 
citizen, rafiisia), to he a manager, Tufjtsvo^ai, to conduct business, to arrange, 
especially in a metaphorical sense, e. g. lovg v6(xovg. Derivatives in -l^o^xau 
correspond in sense to those in -Evouai, e. g. uaxnyofiai, to demean myself 
as a citizen, /n{}uvrl^opai, to act in a politic manner. Still, derivatives in -i^to 
of names of nations reject the Middle, e. g. dcagi^w, to demean myself, or to 
speak like a Dorian. 

§251. C. The Passive. (344,345.) 

1. From the reflexive signification of the Middle, the Passive 
is derived. Here the subject receives the action from another 
subject upon itself. Hence the subject of the Pass, always ap- 
pears as the receiver of an action, e. g. 

MaoTiyovfxai; 'Ciifjuovprniviio ttvog), I receive hlows, punishment, I let myself 
he struck, punished = I am struck, punished (by some one), (Sldniofxai, aSt,- 
yovpai, I suffer injury, injustice, 5i6ucrxonaL, I let myself he instructed, I receive 
instruction, I learn, hence vno rivog^from some one = doceor ab aliquo, nsl~ 
■&op,(xi, I persuMde myself, or I permit myself to he persuaded, vno xivog, hysome 
one = I am persuaded. 

2. Still, there are but two tenses, the Fut. and the Aor., for 
w^hich special forms are provided to express the passive sense 
of an action ; the remaining tenses are expressed by the Mid. 

3. Hence the following rule, viz. The Fut. and Aor. Mid. 

have onlv a reflexive (or intransitive) meaning; but all the 
44 



334 SYNTAX. CLASSES OF VERBS. THE PASSIVE. [§ 251. 

Other tenses of \hv. Mid. serve at the same time to express the 
Passive. 

Remark 1. Still, tlie Fiit. Mid. lias Koinetiincs a Pass, sense. Mu<tti~ 
/ (tia Et a I, a T Q s [3 X 0) (T s T u L, dtdiiasiai, iy.xuvdi'ianui loyipO^uXfiO), jsXtiiojv 
nuvTu jtay.cc 7iuOii)v uvaay.Lv8vXiv i]afT m PI. Rp. 301, e. 77J loiv ■/f)r)Uvno)V 
unavii X mX V a ovT a L Tli. 1, 142. 'j/v iig /^ovXTjOtj y.<xxo^ ytrtaOui, y.oXa<j- 
^rjasiui rfi n^momt] ^rifila ' ol ds cx/uOoi t l ^r^v ovx u l rolg nQo^rjXovdiv 
uk^Xoiq TJ)c «^6TJ]c, hut tilt hruvt shill he honored ivii/i tJie hefdlmg rewards of 
valor, 2, S7. Ufol imv crcftTSQOJV cpooi'(jl(})v, wg e7ti^ovXivaofiivb)v, 
noXXuxic 7TQ(xyi.tma (i/ov X. Cy. 6. 1, 10. Oix u'/vooirnc, oti svedQiv- 
a LVT vno lojv TioXf^loiv H. 7. 2, 18. So ahva} s uXu^a o fxcti. But iii 
many instances, the Pass, sense is only apparent, e. g. '// -noXtg (iouxia ria- 
■dilaa fAf'/(xXa ^i]fiLMasTui, shall suffer great loss therefor, in contrast with 
^(ja/ia •//(7i9-. Tli. 3, 40. ^ou 'Cwvtoc, (jeXtiov -O- Qsip ovt a l y.al n a id sv- 
(T ovT a I, they shall grow up better and educate tliemselves, PI. Crito. .54. a. 

Rem. 2. The use of the Mid. Aor. instead of tlje Pass, is, in all instances, 
only apparent ; so Od. &, 35. yovQCj ds dvo) xal TTsvTijxovztc xq iv a a & wv 
xaxa drijuov, means, let them select theinselves ; on the contrary, 48. y.oiQb) Sa 
zQLv&ivTZ di'ixi y.. nsvi., the selected. Hes. Sc. 173. xanQoi doiol u n ov- 
g a fxevo l ipv/ag, they had deprived each other of life. Pi. Phaedr. 244, e. 
Toil 6g&a)g navivii xul x ar a a/ o fisv o), " in fine phrenzf and in ecstasy. 

Rem. 3. It has been shown, § 197, and Rem. 3, (comp. § 250, Rem. 1), 
that the Aor. Pass, of very many verbs is employed by the Greeks to denote 
a reflexive and intransitive action, e. g. ^oiXof.iui, I will, i^ovXt] &r)v, I 
loilled, ei'cpQalvca, I gladden, cheer, sv(pQahojxai, I am glad, svqiQdv&rjv, I 
was glad. Li a few verbs, the Pass. Fut. is used in the same way, e. g. 
i]dofxaL, I rejoiced, va&rjv, I rejoiced, riu&rido^aL, I shall rejoice. See § 197, 
Rem. 1. 

Rem. 4. The author or cause of any person or thing being in a Pass. 
state is generally expressed by the Prep, vno with the Gen. e. g. Ol (jiqa- 
TioQTUL vno Tbjv n X 8 ^i I oiv idi(o/&r](Tccv. Instead of vno, ngog with 
the Gen. is used, when at the same time a strong aiid dkect influence of a 
person, or of a thing vicAved as a person, is to be expressed, e. g/^T///«^fo-- 
S^ai, adixHa&ai nqog Ttvog. BavavGLxul liyvui slxoTcog otdo^ovvTai 
n (JO g T cov TioAfcoj'X. 0. 4, 2; also n aq a with the Gen. is used when the 
author is exhibited as the one from whose vicinity, or through whose means 
internal or outvvard, the action has come ; hence used specially Avith nsfxns- 
(j&ai, dldoad^ui, wcpsXtla&ai, avXXs/Ea&ai, Xiysad-ai, ofioXoyelird^ai, ar,uulvB- 
a&tti, snLdsixvvcrd-ai. (demonsti-ari), e.g. *" O a/ysXog ins/xqi&rj nag a 
^ a(T iXi 03 g. "li neylairj evTvyia rovTco to> avdgl n a g a ■& scov d s d o t a l. 
JJoXXa ygrifxuTa Kigta nag a twv cplXwv aw s lX sy fu.sv a rjv. Ta 
dbigu ns i^n ST a t n ago. tov ftaaiXsvovTog Her. 7, 106. Ta n a g a 
T av S^ SMV (7i]^aLv6fj.sva X. C\. 1. 6, 2. Ilaga n uv z oav 6 fioXo- 
YE~ixav An. 1. 9, 1. 'Oi^xai ydg fxs nagu aov aocplag nXrjgad-rias- 
(rd- aL PI. Spnp. 175, e. "Ex is still stronger than nagd ; yet it is seldom 
used by the Attic writers, e. g. lExftVw avtrj rj yayga ix ^ a a iXi cog id 6- 
■&7] X. H. 3. 1, 6 ; in Her., however, e x is veiy often used instead of vno 
simply. The use o^ vno with the Dat. is almost wholly poetic, e. g. da^rivai 
vn 6 TLVi,in Attic prose only in certain connections, e. g. vlog vno t m 



§ 252.] SYNTAX. REMARKS ON THE DEPONENTS. 33-5 

n aj gi rf&gnft^svog PI. Rp. 558, d. Tvyxavu vito TraidoTglftrj uy a~ 
il/ 10 TX(nuidti\uiyo.: Lacli. 184, e. Wlien the Passive condition is jiot caus- 
ed by persons, but by things, the Dat. is commonly used = Lat. Abhuive, 
e. ir. '7/ jToAiC n XXalg a v ^ (foq uTg ijiii^sTO. 

Rem. 5. The Dat., however, very often stands where persons are spoken 
of, particularly in the Perf. tense, and regularly with verbal adjectives. The 
Pass, has in such instances an intransitive or reflexive sense, and the Dat. 
indicates the })erson that takes part in the action, or for whom the action is 
performed. While v n 6 with the Gen. denotes merely the author of the 
passive action, the Dat., at the same time, denotes that this action stands m 
a relation to the author, e. g. "Jig fi o i nQonoov dsSrjXonui, i. e. as the thing Jias 
been before pointed out by me, and for me now stands as pointed out, Her. 6. 123. 

4. It is a peculiarity of Greek, thai the Act., not merely of 
transitive verbs with the Ace, may be changed into the personal 
Pass., like the Latin, but also the Act. of intransitive verbs with 
the Gen. and Dat. 

<J^ d^ ov ov fxai vno Tivog (from cpd^ovuv rivi, invidere ahcui), i. e. / expe- 
rience envy from some one, (in Latin, on the contrar}^, invidetur milii ab aU- 
quo), TitaxsvofiaL and an latoi) fxa i, vno XLvog (from TtLtriivnv mid 
anKTXHv tivl\ I am trusted, I am distrusted. Th. 1, 82. 7ip.Hg In "Advivalav 
ini^ovXsvofis&a [ini^ovlsveLV Tivi). PI. Rp. 3. 417, b. y.al ini^ovXiv- 
ovxiQ, y.al en L^ ovX sv 6 IJ.SV I didiovat ndvra tov ^lov. 8. 551, a. aaael- 
la-i 8i] TO uil TifiUfisvov, u^sXeXTat, ds to aii^a'C,6ixsvov. X. S. 4, 31. ou- 
x£Tt antiXov^ctL, a).X ridr] uTisdai aXXoig. Soag/'&rivaL, xq axrj&ri- 
va I, tj ysp.ovEV&rjVai, y,axa(pQOvr]&i]vat vnu xtvog (from olq^hv, 
nQuxiiv, 'tjyE^ovtvsLV, y.axacpQOvuv xivog), in 1% s lqt} -d-i] v a l (from ini/SLQsiv 
xivi). 

RE^T. 6. The Greek may, also, form a Pass, from other intransitives, yet, 
for the most part, only when the subject is a thing, particularly a Neut. pro- 
noun, or a Part, when used as a Neut. substantive, e. g. Kal fiixQa a fxuQ - 
Trj& Evx a [vel parva peccata) X. An. 5. 8, 20. "Axvxri&ivxbiv [rerum in- 
feliciter gestarum) Dem. Cor. 298, 212. ^Enl xovxoig iyoj aXr]& sv o fiivo tg 
didwfil (Toi xr]v ipLr\v dt^iuv [ea conditione, ut haec vere dicantur) X. Cy. 4. 6, 10. 
^Tjovdcig nuQa^s^dad-ai [migrata esse pacta) Th. 1, 123. ^Ev bvI drdgl 
noXX(x)v uQsxug xLvdvvsvs(T&ai [in periculum vocari) 2, 35. Oh ^adiov 
Ttt vno noXXwv y. ivdvvsv&svxa vcp svog gij&iivaL Lys. 5, 112. 

§252. Remarks on the Deponents. (346.) 

It has been seen above, § 102, 3, that Deponents are simply verbs, wiiich 
occur either in the Mid. only, or in the Mid. yet with a Pass. Aor., and with 
a reflexive or intransitive signification ; and, also, that they are divided into 
Mid. or Pass. Deponents, according as their Aor. has a Mid. or Pass. form. 
The reflexive sense in many Deponents is so slight, that they seem to be, 



336 SYNTAX. TENSES AND MODES. [§§ 253, 254. 

in our mode of legurding ihein, merely transitive verbs, e. g. di/ofjiai Tt, / 
take (namely, to myself) somttldng, iQyuQo^ui t<, ^lui^ofiui riva, etc. Such 
Deponents are often used in a Pass, sense, particularly in the Perf. and in 
the Pass. Aor. Examj)les of die Pres., Impf and Fut. are very rare, and 
are found only in such Deponents as have in single examples an active form, 
e. g. ^Lu'C,Kjdai, (xJVtlaOui. 

JJixvja uTCiiQyaajai tw ^f o3 PI. L. 710, d. MEfiijxrjixivog (ad imi- 
tationem expressus) Her. 2, 78. llu ivTsO^VfiTjfxsvov {well-considered) 
PI. Crat. 404, a. Nijig oi'x ix Q^'](T^'n(T av (adhibitae sunt) Her. 7, 144. 

Remark. Several Deponents have both a Mid. and Pass. Aor. ; the Pass. 
form has then a Pass, sense, e. g. idE^vcfirjv, excepi, ids/ ^rjv, exceptus 
sum ; i[i caaa ixrjv^ coegi, i ^ l a a & r^ v, coactus sum ; ixTTjaix^rjv, mihi 
comparavi, i x i -^ & t] v, comparatus sum {I was gained) ; oXocpv q na ^ ai^to 
lament, 6loq)V()&ijvai, to he lamented ; uxiaatr^ccL, to heal, ix y. e a & ij- 
V a I, to be healed ; dnoxQlvad&ai, to reply, anoxgiS^ijvui, to be sepa- 
rated. In a few verbs only are both Aorists used without distinction of 
meaning, § 197, Rem. 1. 

§253. Tenses and Modes. 
The predicate or verb may be divided in relation to its sub- 
ject, into the following classes, 

(a) Tenses, by which the relation of time of the predicate 
is expressed, since it is designated either as Present, Future or 
Past, e. g. the rose blooms, ivill bloom, bloomed; 

(b) Modes, by which the relation of the affirmation con- 
tained in the predicate is expressed, inasmuch as the relation 
of the predicate to the subject is denoted either as an actual fact 
or phenomenon, as a conception, or as a direct expression of the 
will. The mode which expresses a fact, e. g. the rose blooms, 
is called the Indicative ; the mode which denotes a conception, 
e. g. the rose may bloom, is called the Subjunctive ; the mode 
which denotes the direct expression of the will, is called the Im- 
perative, e. g. give. 

§254. A. More Particular Vieiv of the Tens e s. i^is.) 
1. The tenses may be divided, in accordance with their form 
and meaning, into two classes, namely, (a) into Principal tenses, 
which, both in the Ind. and Subj. always indicate something 
present or future ; (b) into Historical tenses, which, in the Ind. 
always denote something past, in the Subj. (Optative), some- 



§ 255.] SYNTAX. PRINCIPAL TENSES. 337 

times that which is past, and sometimes that which is present 
or future. 

2. The Principal tenses are the following, 

(a) The Present, (a) Indicative, e. g. yQucpo^isv, scribirnus ; (/5) Subjunctive, 
e. g. yQuq)0)fiev, scribainus ; 

(b) The Perfect, («) Indicative, e. g. yf/Qucpansy, scripsimus; (/S) Subjunc- 
tive, e. g. yf/()(x(pw(Xiv, scripseritnus ; 

(c) The Future, Indicative, e. g. y^dipoixfv, scribemus, we shall write ; 

(d) The Future Perfect, Indicative, e. g. ^f^3ovhi(To^at,f I shall deliberate, I 
shall be advised. 

3. The Historical tenses are the following, 

(a) The Aorist, (a) Indicative, e. g. i'/gaipa, I wrote; ip) Optative, e. g. 
ygaipaifxi, I might ivrite, or I might have written; 

(b) The Imperfect, («) Indicative, e. g. e/gaqiov, scribebam ; (/?) Optative, 
e. g. yijucpoijii, scriberem ; 

(c) The Pkiperfect, (a) Indicative, e. g. iyr/qacpuv, scripseram ; (/5) Opta- 
tive, e. g. ys/Qttq)oifii, scripsissem ; 

(d) The Optative of the simple Future, e. g. yguipoiijty I would unite, and 
of the Fut. Perf, e. g. ^s^ovlsvffolj^Tjv, I should have deliberated, or / 
have been advised, when in narration, (and consequently in reference to 
the past), the conception of a future action, or of one to be completed 
at a future time, is to be expressed, e. g. o ayye/.og eXtysv, oxt, ol noXi- 
fiLOi V ixTia lev, the messenger said, that the enemy would conquer, 
slsysv, oxi nixvxa vno xov argairiyoii sv ^ s^ ov Xsva o li o, he said 
that everything would be well planned by the general. 

§ 255. (a) Principal Tens es ^ Present, Pe rfe c t , 

Future. (379—381,383,389,390.) 

1. The Pres. Ind. represents the action as present to the 
speaker. In the narration of past events, the Pres. is often used, 
particularly in the principal clauses of a sentence, and often in 
subordinate clauses, since in a vivid representation, past time is 
viewed as present (the Present historical). 

Totmriv xi]v lacfQov ^aailivg fisyccg n o l eI avxl iQiifiarog, ineidtj nvv- 
S-avtrai Kvqov ngogdavyovTa X. An. 1. 7, 16. 'Up xig Jlgiajxiduv vsu- 
Taiog IIoXijdojQog, 'Exa^rjg nalg, ov ix Tgolag ifiol nairjQ d id ua i nqia^og 
iv dofioig TQScpsiv Eur. Hec. 1116. The Pres. Hist, sometimes stands in 
passages where, in addition to the narration by adverbs, like nori, ndXa i, 
Poet, nuqog, the time is considered as past, e. g. Ziovx ugaxovaag Tialda, ov 
ixaw^Bt noxi Eur. El. 419. 

Remark 1. An action is often viewed in Greek as present, w hich belongs, 
indeed, to the past, but at the same time extends to the present, or in its 
results reaches to the present. In this manner, the following verbs particu- 



338 SYNTAX. PRINCIPAL TENSES. [§ 255. 

larly are used, (a) vorl)s of porcf'ivin^, o. ^. uxovta, nvv&uvofiai, altr- 
-& av o (u n c, y ly v Mcrxo), /u a v 0^ u v o), like Lat. (tudio, video, etc., and Erig. 
to hear, la see, to perceive, to observe ; (b) cpsvy lo, I have ^ven myself to Jli^M, 
and I am now a fugitive, lioiice to live in exile, v ly.oj, I am a victor, ?) t i aJ- 
^ « t, / am vanquished, y I y v o n a i, I am descended, etc. ; (c) in poetry, (jp o - 

V iv (a, I am a murderer, e. g. S. Ant. J 174, -O^vrj ax w, lam dead, S. El. 113, 
J ixt 0), y E vv M, I am a father or mother, Eur. Ion. '35G. Her. 201)., etc. This 
usage extends to all the Modes and Partici})ials of the Pres. as well as to 
the Impf. Offiiaxoy.XEa olx uxovsig uvdQa uyu&ov ytyovora PI. Gorg. 
503, c. TldvTa nvv d^ nv 6 (xev oq o Kq6l(T0<; Eirffins eg ^^jroiQTrjv ayyalovg 
Her. 1, 69. Ti di', av e/.uvo axi]y.oaQ, on Mvaol y.ou niaidaL iv rf, iSatrdioig 
Xwoa xnxi/ovTsg iovuvu napv ;(b)Qlu dvvaviai ^pv iXev&sQoi ; — Kal tovxo y , 
£(jp;;, uxovb), hast thou heard 7 ay.ov o), yes, I have known of it, X. C. 3. 5, 20. 
"AnayyiXksTs^AQLcdo}, oil Vf^ng ysv txw fisv ^aaLksa, xal, wg oQtixE, olddg r,fxlv 

tiL ^tt/£Tat An. 2. 1, 4. Tajv vLxaivTcav iail y.al xa iavxoiv aui'^siv xul xa xojv 
TjXTOJfiEVOJV XufziSavsiv 3. 2, 39. /iaotlov xal IJaQvaaxidog naldeg yly- 

V ovT a I 8vo 1. 1, 1. 

Rem. 2. Ol'x o fia i and ?)' x o), with Pres. forms, are often translated in 
Eng. by Perfects, namely, ol'/ o fia l, I have departed, and v y.to, I have come ; 
yet 1/ o ^i oc,i, properly means, lam gone, and ij y. co, I am here, (adsum), e. g. 
Mrj XvTiov, oxL ^AgdcTTiag ot/sxai. slg jovg noh^lovg, that .^. is gone{ = 
ti'ansfugit) to the enemy, X. Cy. 6. 1, 45. "llyco vsxgojv xEV&f.i(t}va xnl axoxov 
nvlag hnuv Eur. Hec. 1. ''T^Eig y,6Xig ucpixptta&E, ottol o]fielc ndlai ^xofXEV 
X. Cy. 1. 3, 4. 

Rem. 3. But the Greek often considers an action as present, which, though 
not yet accomphshed, is either still in progress, or is considered as begun. 
This usage also belongs to all the Modes and Participials of the Pres. as 
w^ell as to the Impf It specially holds of the Pres. of ««// 1, which, in the 
Ind. has regularly the meaning of the Fut., / shall go ; the Subj. includes 
the meaning of the Fut. in itself, § 257, Rem. 4 ; but the Inf and Part, have 
the meaning both of the Pres. and Fut. ^'EnEuxa td xa vvv ovxa iv xw 
nagadslaoj d^rjQia d 18 oj/u, I aoi, xai uikla navxodana a vXXe^ (o X. Cy. 1. 3, 
14. 3J^LTvXv.vulo(, ETil My]&vfxvav wg nQodidofjiEvriv iaxgaxsvaav (putan- 
tes parari ibi proditionem) Th. 3, 18. In like manner often the Pres. Part, 
after verbs of motion, e. g. *// nuQuXog Ig xm§ ^Ad^i]vag enXevasp, u n ay y iX- 
Xovcra x« ysyovoxa X. H. 2. 1, 29. Kal xw ^lysi d n ojXXv /j. e & a, xnl 
/Lwv nXEiffxt] 7jv, we expected to perish. An. 5. 8, 2. Ovx ev&vg d cpt] cr (o al- 
Tov, ovd' a 71 £ L fj, I, dX}! EQri(Top,ai avxov xal i ^ et a a (x) PI. Apol. 29, e. 
^£txeI /j MavdavT] naQstrxEvd^Exo ug dn loii cr a ndXiV ngog rov urdga, idEiio 
avxrig yAaxvdyrig xaTaXtntlv tov Kvqov X. Cy. 1. 3, 13. 

Rem. 4. But actions or events wholly future are sometimes indicated as 
present, by the use of the Pres. tense, when in the view of the speaker the 
action or event yet future is vividly apprehended, or when he is so firmly 
convinced of its occurrence, that it appears as already present, e. g. ^Ev fxia 
fidyy] xtjvdE Tijv ywQav nQogxxdcr&E xal exeIvi]v fiuXXov eXevS^eqoijts 
Th. 4, 95. "llv d-dvrig av, nalg '65' ExcfEvyEi fiogov aov 8' ol S^EXovarjg 
xax&avEcv, x6v8£ xxivoj Eur. Andr. 381. 

2. The Perf. Ind. represents a past action as present in rela- 
tion to the speaker. The action appears as completed at the 



§255.] SYNTAX. PRINCIPAL TENSES. 339 

time of speaking. Also in narratives, the Pcrf. is sometimes 
used, since the action is separated from the past, and is plact^d 
in the present view of the speaker. This relation is like that 
indicated by the Historical Present. 

riy Qacpa xy]v fjiiatoXriv, I have written the letter, the letter is now ivrit- 
<en, whether written now, or some time ago. 'H TioXig sxTtatai, The 
city is now built, it stands now built. ''AcrTvdyrjg imp iv Mrjdoig tjuvtmv 8sa- 
n6Tf]v eaviov 7t£noli]x£v X. Cy. 1. 3, 18. Ovdiv iaxL nigdaXswjsQov tov 
vixav ' o yuQ xgaiMv «,aa nuvra (TVV')]gTiaxs, y.txl Tovg urdguc^ y.al Tag yv- 
vaixag 4. 2, 26. Tama tmv ano ITfXonovvijCFOV criqaTriywv inihyo^dvwv, 
il7jXv& £ avi]Q ''A&i]vaXog, ayyilXwv ijxsiv rov (iixQ^aQov eg^Anixi^v, an Athe- 
nian is come and is here, instead of came, Her. 8, 50. 

Rem. 5. Since the Perf. brings past time into close connection with the 
present, the Greeks in many Perfects contemplated less the peculiar act of 
completion, than its result as exhibited at the present moment, and hence 
they used the Perf, in order to indicate a condition that was occasioned by 
the completion of the action. In English the Perfects of many verbs are ex- 
pressed by tlie Pres. and Impf, e. g. jix^vrjxa (1 have died), / am dead, 
xsV.TTj^ai (I have ohtaiued), I possess, re&uvfiaxa {1 ha.Ye been wondering), 
I am astonished, ^s^ovX(V(j.tti (I have taken counsel with myself), I am deter- 
mined, ni(p7]va (I have shown myself), / appear, oida, novi (I have seen), / 
know, li&tjXa (I have blossomed), / bloom, nsnoLd-a (I have convinced my- 
self), I trust, ^S'jrjxa (I have gone away), / am going, (iEfivyjfjat, memini (I 
have remembered), I am mindful, xsxXrj^aL (I have been named), I am called, 
etc. Many verbs, especially such as express the idea of to sound, to call, em- 
ploy no Pres. and Impf, or but very seldom, so that the Perf and Plup. 
seem to take throughout the place of the Pres. and Impf, e. g. aixqaya, I 
cry, properly, I am a crier, (xi^ivxa, I roar. 

Rem. 6. The transition from the completed action to the condition ac- 
complished by it, is more obvious in the Pass, than in the active. Comp. 
1] dvQa xixXi Lcrx a I, , the door has been shut, and it is now shut. So 
particularly the third Pers. Sing. Perf Imp. Pass, is often used, when one 
w^ould declare with emphasis, that the thing spoken of should remain fixed 
in its place, e. g. XEXfi(p&o), reliquum esto, nsneiQaad-w, let it be tried, vvv 
ds Tovzo TEToXfxrjud^b) siTTslv. So tlic luf. iu the Oraiio obliqua, X. H. 5. 4, 7. 
i^covTsg ds httov, ri]v &VQav xixXua^ui, let it be shut, and remain shut. 

Rem. 7. The Perf in all the forms is used with special emphasis, even 
of future actions, since the occurrence of such actions is affirmed with the 
same definiteness and confidence, as if they had already taken place. II. 
0, 128. /7«iV0|U£j'f, (fqivag tjAs, discfd^oqag! SooXtoia, like perii, in- 
terii, actum est de me. PI. Phaedon. 80, d. ^ ^vxi] '^fuv t) Toiavtr] xal ovrco 
Tiiq)vxv1a, a7iaXXaTT0(iivr] xov (jta^aiog, £V-&vg d i an scp v arjx a i xal 
a n oXojXsv . 

3. The Fut. Ind. denotes an action as future in relation to 
the present time of the speaker. The Greeks very often use 



340 SYNTAX. PRINCIPAL TENSES. [§ 255. 

the Fut. Ind. in subordinate clauses, even after an Hist, tense, 
to express that which shou/d, must or can be, where the Latin 
employs the Subj. ; the other forms of the Fut., particularly the 
Part., are also so used. 

Nofiovg vJiaQ^oiL del joioviovg, 8l wv rdlg fih u/a&olg tvufiog xa^ iXivds- 
qoq o ^iog nuQucrxEvaa&ijaETai, toilg ds y.axolg lamivog te xal uX- 
^Eivog xal a^ioiTog 6 aiuv in av ax ela st a i, X. Cy. 3. 3, 52. Ol fig iriv 
^aaiXixi]v ji/vtjv natdniofisvot, il diacpaQOvac ruv i^ uvdyy.rig xay.ona&oi'yTO)v, 
SI /£ 71 E IV I'j a ova I y.al Si^/ijaovai xal q ly wa o v a i y.ul a y qvtc vt]- 
(TovcTLy if they must hunger, etc. C. 2. 1, 17. *'j^do^£ toJ drjfio) tqiixxovtu 
ccvdQccg hXiad-ut, ol Tovg naiqlovg v6[xovg ^vyygocipovat, y.aif ovg n a- 
I n Evaova I H. 2. 3, 2. 

4. Commands, exhortations, admonitions, entreaties, and, in 
connection with the negative ov, prohibitions, are often ex- 
pressed by the Fut. Ind. since the accomplishment of what is 
affirmed is not demanded, as is the case in the Imp., but is 
made to depend on the will of the person addressed, and is 
only expected. On the contrary, the Fut. is used, in connection 
with the negative ov, interrogatively, when, in a strong and in- 
dignant tone, the accomplishment of that which is stated, is ex- 
pected necessarily. 

"0 Q a ovv y.al n q o-&v fiov xaTiStlv, sav nag ngoTsgog i(j.ov ISi^g, xal ^oi 
<p gdasig PI. Rp. 432, c. "Jlg oiv no cijasj e y.al n eI& sa >&£ [lot, Prot. 
338, a. Ov dgaaELg rovxo, tliou unit not do this, as I hope = do it not ; 
butov dgacTSig jovto ; wilt thou not do this'? = do it. Ov navaji Xi- 
ywv ; non desines dicere ? instead of desine dicere. PI. Symp. in. oh nsgi- 
fiEVEig ; unit thou not wait ? Dem. Phil. 2, 72. o v (pvXd^Ecr&^, scpvr], onojg 
ip fii] dEpTioTrjv EvgrjTs. But when in this manner, a negative command is to 
be expressed, the negative (xrj is to be used with ov ; and when two sen- 
tences of this kind, one with an affirmative meaning and the other with a 
negative, follow each other, ov stands in the first sentence, ^?; in the last. 
Ov ^v cpXvagi](TEtg; Ov fxr/ XaXi^aaig, dXX aKoXov&i]<JEig i^ol] in- 
stead of (XT] cpXvdgst, fii) XdXei, dXlL ay.oXov&£i. PL S3'mp. 175, a. ovx ovv 
xaXslg avxov y.al fti] a cpria £ t,g. 

5. The Fut. Perf. Ind. expresses an action as completed in 
future time in relation to the present time of the speaker, e. g. 

Kal Tolcn f^ s ^i^ et a i ia&Xa y.aKO^o'iv Hes. Op. 177. II noXiTEia lEXiag 
xsy. 0(T (Ai'jaEJ a L, idv 6 xoLOViog avxiiv ijiiay.onf] cpiXa^ 6 xovxav iniaxi}- 
fttav PI. Rp. 506, a. The Fut. Perf of those verbs whose perfects are trans- 



§ 256.] SYNTAX. HISTORICAL TENSES. 341 

lated by the present tenses of other verbs, see Rem. 5, must be translated 
by tljc simple Fut, e. g. liffivrjaofiai, meminero (/ shall remember), I shall be 
mijidful. 

Rem. 8. The Fut. Perf, like the Perf., Rem. 7, is used instead of the 
simple Fut., to express a thing emphatically, e. g. (f'^w'^f, zott n sn q a^tT ai 
Ar. Plut. 10-27. 

Rem. 9. The Fut. Perf. is used in Greek only in the pi"incipal clauses of 
a sentence, and in subordinate clauses introduced by otc and aV, that. In 
all other subordinate clauses, the Aor. Subj., (more seldom the Perf Subj.) 
is used instead of it, in connection with a conjunction compounded of «V, 
as iar, intiv, imiduv, oiav, ttqIv iiv, tqx uv, og uv, etc., e. g.'l^av lovio 
Xi^Tjg , si hoc dixeris. 

§256. Historical Tenses^ Aorist, Imperfect and 
F I up erfect. (sso, 384, 335, asr, 388.) 

1. The Aor. Ind. expresses past time, separate from the pre- 
sent of the speaker, in a wholly indefinite manner, with no oth- 
er relation, e. g. synuxva, I icrote, Kvqog nolla 'i&vr^ Ivv/.r^o^v. It 
thus stands in contrast with the other tenses which express past 
time ; still, so far as it indicates past time indefinitely, it may be 
used instead of either of these tenses. 

2. Both the Impf. and Plup. Ind. express, indeed, an action 
as past, but always represent it as having relation to another 
past time. The Impf. expresses the action as contemporary 
with this other past time ; the Plup. expresses the action as al- 
ready past, (finished before this other past time). 

^£V w av h7i a I'Csg , iyui sy q a(f>ov . "Ois iyyvg rj a av ol /jixQSaQot, 
oi'EXlrjysg ifid/ovTO. 'Oj8 ol ^aq^aQOv in skijXv-& s(T av, oV'ElXrjvfg 
ifittxo VTO. T6t£ (or iv tuvtjj ttj fi ot / jj) oV'EXXrjvsg &ao^ah(>naTa 
f^cc/ovTo. ^Ensidi] oVElXrjvsg in sXr] Xv & sa av, 01 noXi^ioi ansnE- 
(fEvysanv. '^Ots ol avfifia/OL inXria la'Qov, ol A&r^vaXoL lovg Iliocrag 
iv Ev iii7]xsa av. "Ey Ey qa (pE iv Tr,v iniaioXijv, I had luritten the letter 
[he/ore the friend came). 

Rem. 1. It is to be noted that the Greeks, when the relation of the past 
time to another past time can be easily inferred from the context, and no 
special emphasis lies in this relation, freely use the Aor. instead of the 
Vhip., e. g.^EnELdi] ol'ElXr^vEg inr^X^ov, olnoli^iOiunEnECfiEiyEaav. The 
Aor. is often employed even instead of the Perf, when the relation of the 
past time to the present need not be expressed emphatically. 

3. Hence the Aor. Ind. is used in historical narrations, in or- 
der to indicate the principal events, while the Impf Ind. is used 

45 



342 SYNTAX. HISTORICAL TENSES. [§ 256. 

to denote the accompanying circumstances. The Aor. narrates, 
the Impf. describes. Hence in the narration of past events, the 
Aor., which introduces the principal facts, is very often ex- 
changed for the Impf., which describes and paints ; the Aor. is 
often, also, exchanged with the Hist. Pres., which, like the Aor., 
relates the principal events, and places them vividly in the pre- 
sent ; the Aor., not seldom, is exchanged with the Plup., some- 
times with the Perf. By this interchange of the tenses, the nar- 
ration has the greatest liveliness of representation, and the finest 
shades of expression. 

'H^og 8" 'EbigcpoQog utn qioag igioiv in} yaiav, T^ifiog nvqy.ixiri ifiaqalvt^ 
TO, 71 ava at 8s cpXo^ II. ip, 228. Tovg mlTuamg i8a^ avt o ol ^otQ^agoi 
y.ai i fi d% ovTO' inel 8 iyyvg riaav ol onXlxai, itgaTiovTO' xal ol 
nslTadTcu sv&vg sXnovro X. An. 5. 4, 24. avvb^t) tw adoxrjro) xal 
i^anlvrjg oifi(poTEQb}&£V lovg "A&rjvaiovg S-OQV^tj&rlvttL ' xal to ^ev ivojw^ov 
xigag avTojv, onsg 8t) aal nQonExojg^jxsi, EvS^vg unoggayh ecpvy s' xal 
6 BgufflSag, v7iox(ogovvtog 7]8ri aviov, ijimagiojv tw ds^lb), t it g (a axsT a l' 
xal niGOVTa avjov ol ^iv 'Ad^tjvatoi, ovx alaS-dvovzai, ol 8e nXrjcrlov 
agavTtg dni^vii/xav' xat o fj.sv KU(ov, (ag to ngt^iov ov 8 1 sv obIxo (xi- 
VBiv, sii&vg (pEvycov, aal xaialrjcp&Eig vno MvgnLvlov nEXracnov, a tt o -d- y ?;- 
Cicsi' ol 8s amov ^vaxgacfivTEg otiXItui i]^vvovto x.t.X. Th. 5, 10. 'O 
Hsv noXifiog dnavKov rjfiSg twv slgrj^ivav an ectt s grjx s' xal ydg roi tieve- 
(TiEgovg 7iS7ioli]XE, xal noXXovg nLv8vvovg vnofisvEiv ^j v a y y. a cr e, yal ngog 
tovg'^'EXXrjvag 8ia^s^Xi]y.e xocl ndvia xgonov jet aXaiTt (a g rjxsv rj^vig 



Rem. 2. Inasmuch as the Aor. Ind. represents a past action as inde- 
pendent and completed, unconnected with any other past time, and as the 
Impf. Ind., on the contrary, represents a past action as always connected 
with another past action, being, consequently, employed in exhibiting an 
action in its duration and progress, and hence used in description, — so an 
exact moment, or point of time, is denoted by the Aor., while the Impf, on 
the other hand, denotes duration or continuance. Yet these two significa- 
tions do not exist in the tenses themselves, but rather in the nature of the 
principal facts, which are expressed absolutely, as independent and com- 
pleted, and in the natiu-e of the attendant circumstances which are repre- 
sented as continuing. Nothing can in itself be described as momentary or 
continuing ; the action of the longest continuance can be expressed by the 
Aor., as well as one of the shortest continuance by the Impf, when the 
former is to be represented as the main idea, the latter as an accompanying 
ch'cumstance. 

4. On the use of the Impf. and Aor. Ind., the following things 
are to be noted, 



§ 256.] SYNTAX. HISTORICAL TENSES. 343 

(a) The Inipf. appears sometimes to stand instead of the Pres., since an 
action ^vhicll continues into the present time, is referred to a past time in 
which it occurred, or was known to the speaker. KvQog i^iXuivsL — inl 
Tov Xakov TtoTUfwv, ovTtt TO tl'Qog nXid^fiov, nh'jQt] d i/^va)v fisyakuv y.ul 
■jiQction; ovg ol ^vgoc ■&soig ivofxi^ovxaladLxtlvoixsVoiVj which the 
S}Tians held for gods, namely, as I then saw, X. An. 1. 4, 9. "AcplxovTo 
TTQog TO Mr^dlag xakoifievov TH/og ' — an six ^ ^^ Ba^vkuvog ov nolv 2. 4, 
12. Tr] ds ngcoirj 'ijfisgcc oKpUovto inl xov noTUfiov, og oi^t^e ti]v T£ twv 
MaxQm'cov [^wgav] y.al ji]v tmv ^xv&iv(dv 4:. 8, 1. 'Atuq w sTolge, hq ov To^e 
^v TO dbvdgov, icp oTisQ 7J'/ig ^fxug PI. Phaedr. 230, a. Ovx lig uyud^og t« 
noXLxixa Il£Qixl7Jg'i]v ex tovtov toD Ao^ov, namely, when he so appeared 
to us, consequently ^ olx (ig aya&og i(niv, w? i cp alvsx o Gorg. 516, d. 

(b) The Aor. is often used in general propositions, which express a fact 
borrowed from experience, and which in English is translated by the Pres., 
or by the verb is wont, or is accustomed, with an Inf. The Greek, instead 
of repeating things or facts in detail, selects a single case, which it describes 
fully, and in this maimer embodies the general idea. 11. g, 177. aid ts /liog 
xgdiTdCov voog aiyio/oio, ogrs xal alxi^ov avdga (po^sl, xal a q) eIX st o 
yix7)v grfidlag. X. Cy. 1. 2, 2. at fxsv yag nXdaxaL noXug ngogrdxTovai xotg 
noXlxaig /.o} xXiuxeiv, fir] agnaCsiv, xal xaXXa xa xoiavxa wgavxcag ' i}v de xig 
Tovxctiv XL naga^alvij, ^rjfilag alxolg ine-d- saav. Dem. Ol. 1(2). 20,9. 
oxav ix TiXsovs^lag xal itovrjglag xtg, ugjieg ovxog {0iXin7tog), hrxvaff, Vj ngaxt] 
TigocpatTig xal fiixgov nxataixa anavxa avE/alxiaE xal 8 tiXv a s v. 

Rem. 3. When the idea of being wont to do, as fomid in the Aor., is to be 
made prominent, or when a native habit is to be expressed, the Greek uses 
the verbs (fiXuv and s&sXelv. Her. 7. 10, 5. cp lXeel yag 6 S^Eog xa vnsgs- 
Xovxa navxa xoXovsiv. 157. tw sv ^ovXsv&svxl ngr^yfiaxi xeXevxt] ug xo inl- 
Tvav xgr^axi] i& eXei iTXLylvsa&ui. 

(c) Hence in poetry, and often in comparisons, the Aor. is used instead 
of the Pres., since comparisons contain facts that are known and founded 
on often repeated experience. B. y, 33 — 36. wg 5' ot£ xlg xs dgdxovxa idmy 
nuXlvogaog dnEaxt] ovgEog iv ^r\aar^g, vno xe xg6y.og sXXa^E yvia, aip x 
dv EX Mg^(y £v, wxgog xe fiiv eIXb nagEidg ' S>g avxig xa& ofiiXov sdv Tgta- 
(ov vtyEgMx^v (sc. lldgig). H. n, 482. rlgniE S*, ug oxs xig dgvg rj g insv. 

(d) The tragedians often use the Aor. in dialogue as an unpassioned or 
emphatic expression of a judgment, which has respect, indeed, to the pre- 
sent time, but which the speaker wishes to represent as already coniirmed 
in his experience. The English often translates such Aorists, in a verj^ im- 
perfect manner, by the Pres. Here belong especially verbs expressing 
passion, etc., e. g. a tt £ tt t f o- «, iy sXaaa, in-^vEcra, Mfia^a, i&av- 
(j.a(ra, diKafioaa, riad^Tjv. S. Phil. ]434. « d" av Xafyg ah axvXa xov- 



344 SYNTAX. TENSES OF THE SUBORDINATE MODES. [§257. 

$£ loTi (TigaTov, Tolwy ifiojv ^rr]^iTu, Ti(Jog nvquv c,«'/V xojjt'C^' x«t aol tuvt , 
"jl/dXawg Tixvov„ n aQi'jv ta u, this 1 counsel tliee = let this counsel he given 
to thee by me. Eur. Med. 223. /(>j) 8k livov fiiv xatQia Tigoc/oiQiiv (se accom- 
modare) noXei, oid^ vtaxuv jivea , o?Ti? uL&ddrig yf/og nr/.nog nolliaig ior- 
tIv uf.ia&l(xg vno (iiec Jaudo, iiec unquam laudavi). llec. 127G. Polym. xal 
aviV y uvayy.T] naldu Kaaauvdgav ■&avilv. Hecuba, un imva a, this thought 
I ahho)' = a thought ivhich I have abhorred. 

(e) AVitli like eftect the Aor. is apparently often used by Attic writers, in- 
stead of the Pres. in urgent appeals, which are expressed in the form of a 
question introduced hy tI ovv ov or tl ov. The speaker wishes, as it 
were, to see the desired action already accomplished. X. Cy. 2. 1, 4. it 
OLT, Ecpr] 6 Ki'Qog, ov y.al ti]v bvva^iv el {.tag (mol, quin igitur mihi — re- 
censes? ivhy hast thou not already said it to me ? instead o^ say it to meforth- 
ivith! 5. 4, 37. Tt ovv, tcfi], cu FaduTa, ovyl tu (aev Jsiyr] q^vXay.fj i/vga 
in i7](T ag ; PI. Phaedon. 86, d. el ovv ng v^ojv svnoQcaTsgog ifxov, zl ovx 
unsxQivaTo; is quam celerrime respondeat. The Pres. is, also, so used ; 
still it is in cases when the expression is far weaker, e. g. Tl ovv, rj 5' o?, 
ovx £ g (OT a g-, stronger than igaxa., but weaker than Ti oiv oly. ij g (o x tj - 
a ag or ij gov, PI. Lysid. 211, d. Ti ovv ov aaoTi ov [j,ev H.. C.S.I, 10. 

(f ) The Aor., like the Perf , § 255, Rem. 7, is used, when the speaker 
confidently considers a future event as already taken place. II. d, 160 — 162. 
d'Tisg yag xe xal avxix "OXv^niog ovx ixslsaasv, sy. xs y.al oips xeXeI, avv xs (ib- 
yciXco anixLaav crvv acpi^aiv xscpaXfiOL yvvaiU te aocl xExhoaiv, i. e. then have 
they paid its penalty. Eur. Med. 78. ancaXoixEa-d-" ug , eI xuhov ngogoloo- 
(J.EV VEOV naXuLco. 

§257. Tenses of the Subordinate Modes, (sse.) 

1. As the Aor. Lid. expresses a past action as independent 
and completed, and as the Impf. Ind., on the contrary, repre- 
sents the action in its duration and progress (since it always re- 
fers to a past action which is related to another past action, be- 
ing used in description and delineation), so the Aor. of the sub- 
ordinate modes, viz. the Subj., Opt. and Imp., together with the 
■ Aor. of the Inf. and Part., are used when the action is repre- 
j sented as completed; the Pres. of the subordinate modes, to- 
gether with the Pres. of the Inf. and ' Part., and also the Opt. 
Impf, are used, on the conti'ary, when the speaker would de- 
scribe an action in its duration and progress. In this manner 
the following forms stand contrasted, 



§ 257.] SYNTAX. TENSES OF THE SUBORDINATE MODES. 345 

(a) The Aor. Subj. and the Pres. Subj., e. g. (pi"/o)fin' and cpsvyoi^tv, let us 
Jfee ; Af/w, aa (xad^ tj g and 'iva ixav&avvg, in ordtr tliat tJiou mayest 

learn ; 

(b) The Aor. Imp. and the Pres. Imp., e. g. cpv ye and cp svy t, Jiee ; 8 6 g 
and d Idov fiot, to ^i8Xlov, give. Mi] -& ogv^ sir s, o) uvdofg ^AO^t}- 
valot, u)X i fi fxslv aT s fxoi, olg edsr,&ijv VfXMV, fxrj d^OQV^dv tcp oig uv 
Xs/oi (tlie principal fact is here contained in ijujj.HvaTE, the more exact 
specification in &oqv^uts) PI. Apol. 30, c ; 

(c) The A or. Inf . and tlie Pres. Inf, e. g. e&Bloj cpvyiXv and (psvysiv^ 
I wish to flee ^ '/.eXsvcj as d o vv a l and d id 6v cc l hoi to ^lSUov. Kuli- 
aag o Kvgog Agaam-jV Mrt8ov, tovtov iy.D.evcrs diacpvla^av avio) t{]v 
IE yvvutxa y.al t/;v axrjvt^v X. Cy. 5. 1, 1 ; hkewise 5. 1, 2. Taiiriv oiv 
ixehvaiv 6 Kigog diacpv). ujtslv tov "Agaanriv, ecag uv Xa^rj (in re- 
lation to the subordinate clause). The Aor. and Pres. [nf. may, how- 
ever, refer to a past action ; in this case, the former, like the Aor. Ind., 
is used to express the principal facts, the latter, like the Impf Ind., 
the accompanying circumstances, e. g. "A&rivatoL )Jyov(n, dixaUog i | £- 
Xd a a i [Toig TlElacryovg)' y.aTOiy.i]fiivovg yaq zovg Ilslf^ayovg vtto to) 
"TfiTiaaol, ivd^EVTEV ogfiswfiivovg, adLxisLV xdda- cpoiTav yug alel 
T(xg (jcpiTegag d^vyuTegag ts y.al rovg 7ial8ag iii X'8o)g' ov yag eIvul 
TOVTOV Tov ygovov acflcn yen olxsTag' oy.ojg df^ eX-&ouv avrai, Tovg JleXaa- 
yovg vno Vjjgtog ^ t-u a -& a I acptag y.. t. X. (Or. recta, i^T]Xo. aaf-isv 
ol ydg IlfXuayol ?) d ly.ovv Tads ' e q) o Ir (ov, etc.) Her. 6, 137 ; 

(d) The Aor. Part, and the Pres. Part. ; comp. Xd&e cpvycav and Xdv&avs 
cpEiycav. UsgiijiXcoov Sovvlov, ^ovX6y.svoi (f&rivai a n ly.o usv o i Ig 
TO aoTv Her. 6, 115. Still, it is to be noted, that the Part, of the Aor. 
is commonly used of past time; 

(e) The Aor. Opt. and Impf Opt, e. g. sXsyov, ha fid S^ o ig and 'iva [x a v~ 
S-dvoig, in oi'der that thou mayest learn, ut disceres; sl'&s tovto y s- 
V iTo and ylyvoiTO, O that this might he ! 

2. The Aor. of the subordinate modes and participials forms a 
contrast to the subordinate modes and participials of the Perf. 
and Plup. ; the former denotes an action as absolutely past or 
ended ; the latter, on the contrary, represents it as related to the 
finite verb ; by this relation the subordinate idea of the duration 
of what is denoted by the verb, i. e. the consequences of the ac- 
tion, is naturally derived. In this way the following forms stand 
contrasted, 

(a) The Aor. Subj. and the Perf Subj., e. g.'^'Ov av yvoigifiov [yvcov r<5//), 
aanaymxi, Tcav fxridev TiwTiOTB vn avTOi) dya&ov 71B7i6v& ]] PI. Rp. 



{ 



346 SYNTAX. MORE PARTICULAR VIEAV OF THE MODES. [§ 258. 

376, a. * Etklt uvayxd^o) tiuIlv i^efxttv, axx uv xexXo (p (oa I fiov Ar. 
Eq. 1148; 

(b) The Aor. Opt. and tlic Plup. Opt., c. \r/'jj:8uaoLV, fii) Xvaaa xiq wgntq 
icvalv rifxiv e (in ecTo c and i fxmnx 0)110 l X. An. 5. 7, 27. "AyrjuiXaog 
ids}}x^7] Ti]g noXtotg, affuvat aviov zumriq Ti]q aTqaxr^ylaq, XiybiVy oxi rot 
nar^l avtov noXXa VTirjgsruixov ?; tmv MaviLveo)v noXig iv loXg nqog 
Meaat'jvrjv noXifioig H. 5. 2, 3 ; 

(c) The Aor. Inf. and the Perf. Inf. ; comp. ajio&aviiv witli TE&vrjuivat, ; 

(d) The Aor. Part, and the Perf. Part. ; comp. anod^avm with Ts&vrjxutg. 

Remark 1. From the above explanation, it is evident why the Aor., 
though an Hist, tense, has still a Subj. meaning together with an Opt. ; 
the Aor. Subj. stands contrasted on the one hand with the Subj. Pres. ; on 
the other, with the Subj. Perf. 

Rem. 2. Verbs of thinking, hoping, speaking, swearing, willing, denying, 
delaying, entreating, convincing, commanding, prohibiting, hindering and 
the like, whose object may be viewed as future, are connected at one time 
with the Fut. Inf , at another, with the Pres. Inf , and, at another still, with 
the Aor. Inf The Aor., which is used most frequently, denotes an action, 
as absolutely ended ; the Fut. is employed, when the idea of future time 
should be made specially prominent ; the Pres., when the idea of a perma- 
nent condition is affirmed. 

Rem. 3. The infinitives and participles exhibit merely thie condition of an 
action, as either continuing, or completed, or future and impending ; but 
the period of time (the present, the past, the future,) to which the cuxum- 
stances of any given time belong, is indicated by the Ind. of the verb, which 
is the predicate of the sentence. Hence every Inf and every Part, may re- 
fer to every Ind., whatever be the period of time to which the Ind. relates, 
e. g. cpr]yl {scp7]v, cpi^aoi) a^iaQxavEiv, ^fiagTr^xivccL, aiiaQTi]a£(j&ui ; oi8a ufiag- 
tdvwv, 'tjfiaQTrjy.Mg, dixagTrjcrofisvog ; yeXwv XiysL, eX^ys, Xs^ev, etc. 

Rem. 4. The Imp. always belongs to the present time, but points to the 
future. The different forms of the Imp. exhibit only the different condi- 
tions of actions, comp. No. 1, (b). The Greek Subj. points universally to 
the future, and is never used of present or past time, like the Eng. and Lat., 
e. g. / think the matter may he in a good state, or if the thing be in a good state. 
Hence the Greek Fut. has no Subj., but an Opt., since there is often a neces- 
sity in narrations of expressing the conception of a future action by a past 
tense, e. g. ^lyyeLXsv, otl ol noXi^uoi v Lxt'^cr lev, "that the enemy would 
conquer.''^ Where it appears to be used of past time, it must be expressed by 
the Fut. Perf The Greek Opt., indeed, belongs, according to its formation, 
to the historical tenses, but it is used not only of the past, but of the present 
and future. 

§ 258. B. A 771 ore particular Vieiv of the 31 o des. 

(391 f.) 

1. The Modes are three in number, the Indicative, the Sub- 
junctive (the Optative) and the Imperative, § 253, (b). 



§ 258.] SYNTAX. MOKE I'ARTICULAR VIEAV OF THE MODES. 347 

(a) The Indicative is the mode which expresses a fact or a 
phenoinenon. 

To godoy &aXXsL. 'O naTijg y iy q acp s tiiv innjToXt]v. Ol noXi^ioi, 
an i <p V y o V. Ol noUrai rovg noksfiiovg v i n 7] a o v <t l v. 

(b) The Subjunctive is the mode which denotes conception. 
The Subj. of the Hist, tenses may be called the Optative. 

* lafiev ! tamus ! Tl noiufiev ; quid faciamus ? Om s^bj, otiol tq an ca- 
/t* a t, nescio, quo me vertam. Ovx elxov, onot t q an i (j,rjv, nesc'iehfim, 
quo me verterem. ylsya, 'iv e18 f] g, dico, ut scias, in order that you may 
know it. "EXs^a, 'iv sld sir] g, dixi, ut scires, in order that you should know it. 

(c) The Imperative is the mode which denotes the immedi- 
ate expression of the will, directed as a command either to a 
person present, or to one absent, e. g. yQaipov, yQucpe, zvrite, yQCL- 
(fstoj, let him ivrite. By command, is not always to be under- 
stood one of an urgent nature, but entreaties, admonitions, 
counsels, may be expressed by the Imp. 

2. The Modes exhibit the relation in which a thought, that is 
expressed, stands to the mind of the speaker. Hence they de- 
note nothing objective, i. e. they never show how an action is 
in its actual occurrence ; the Ind., in itself, denotes nothing ac- 
tual ; the Subj., in itself, nothing possible ; the Imp., in itself, 
nothing necessary ; the language represents these ideas by spe- 
cial expressions, e. g. aXrid-wg^ dvvaad^ai, del, XQVy etc. The modes 
express subjective relations solely, i. e. the relations to the mind 
of the speaker, since they show how the speaker conceives of 
an action. A mental operation is either an act of perception, 
an act of conception, or an act of desire. The Ind. is the mode 
of perception ; it indicates that which the speaker conceives or 
represents as a thing seen or appearing, whether an actual, ob- 
jective fact, or a conception ; even the future, which, in itself is 
something merely imagined, can be conceived by the speaker 
as a fact, and hence is expressed by the Fut. Ind. The Subj. 
is the mode which expresses conception ; it indicates that which 
the speaker conceives and represents as a conception, whether 
it has an actual objective existence, or is a mere mental concep- 
tion. The Imp. is the mode which expresses desire ; it denotes 
that which the speaker conceives and represents as something 
desired, whether it be an actual objective necessity or not. 



348 SYNTAX. USE OF THE SUBJ., OPT. AND IMPERATIVE. [§259. 



§ 259. Use of the S ii bj u native^ Op tative and Im- 

pe rati v c. (400-408.) 

1. The Pres. and Aor. Subj. are used in Principal sentences, 

(a) In the first Pers. Sing, and PI. in exhortations and warn- 
ings (and may be called the adhortative Subjunctive), where 
the Eng. uses let^ let us, with the infinitive ; the negative is 
here f<v. 

(b) Li the first Pers. Sing, and PI. in deliberative questions 
{deliberative Subjunctive), when the speaker deliberates with 
himself what he ought to do ; the negative is also fi7j. 

^'iMfisv, eamus! let us go ! Mi] i'ojfisv. ^'A'/e [cpigE, la) Imiiev. ^^igs 
l'8(a Her. 7, 103. (I^sgt d/], rj d' og^ n elq a& (o ngog vjxixg aTioXop'jdaax^ai 
PI. Phaedon. 63, b. Such a summons is very often expressed in the form 
of a question preceded by ^ovUl ; yet in this case, the subjunctive is a sub- 
ordinate clause dependent on jjovIsl, e. g. BovIsl oiv, 810 sl'dr] -d-afj-sv 
TtSL&ovg ; PI. Gorg. 454, e. Tl n i oj ^sv ; quid faciamus ? what shall we 
do'^ El'n (0 fisv, rj aL/cofiEv; Eur. Ion. 771. In Ilol Tig cpgovTldog sl- 
S^ jj ; S. OC. 170. Tig is used instead of the first Pers. ( = not sk&a or 
ll-d-MfiEv, like ndl cpQEvuiV eX^co ; 310). Jli>} egwiiai ; shall I not ask?- X. C. 
1. 2, 36. "Oaa oi oViyoi lovg nollovg fxi] nEiaavxEg, uXXu y.gaTot'VTsg '/Qaq}OV- 

(TL, TTOTEQOV §laV q) bJ fX E V, 7] flJ] cp (a fl E V E I V a L ; 45. 

RE:\rARK 1. In the second and thu'd Pers. the exliortation takes the form 
of a command or wish, and hence is expressed by the Lnp. or Opt. Od. 
/, 77. eXS^ 0) (I Ev d' ava txnTv, (ioi) 5' or/.Lcna /evolto. Yet there are 
also passages in which the second Pers. Subj. stands in coimection with 
a/E and cpegE instead of the Imp., e. g. <l^Eg , c5 texvov, rvv y.al to Trig ri]aov 
1.1 a d-T]gS. Ph. 300. 

Rem. 2. On the use of the second Pers. Subj. with ^u?) to express a prohi- 
bition, e. g. jii] yguipijc^ ne scribas, see Xo. 5. 

RE:\r. 3. A wish is very seldom exj^ressed by Eid-E with the Subj. instead 
of the Opt. El'&' utd-egog uvea mMxadsg u^vtovov diu 7irEi\uaTog eXmgI 
(.1^, without variation, (o si aves me sursum in aetherem per am-as striden- 
tescapiant) S. Ph. 1094. Comp. £l'd-E tivec evral diy.ui'on- vijiivalon' iv^Ag- 
ysL (puvMCTi Tixpomiv Y.U1'. Suppl. 1028. El&^ — uYaxiov Eidog uvtI tov 
y.aXov Xdij b) (in some Codd. XaSslv) Hel. 262. 

Rem. 4. In the third place, the subjunctive is somewhat frequently used 
in principal sentences, in the Epic language instead of the Fut. Ind. though 
with a slight difference of meaning. Both express a present conception of 
a future action ; but the Fut. Ind. represents what is still in the flitiu-e as 
known and certain in the view of the speaker, while the Subj. represents 
what is future as merely a concession or admission of something expected. 
D. ^, 459. y.ai noxs Tig el'Ttj) a i ?-, and one 3la.t say = admit that one will say. 



§259.] SYxNTAX. USE OF THE Sl'BJ., OPT. AND IMPERATIVE. 349 

II. ij, 197. 01' yocQ Tie: fif /Sit] yt sxoyv ocsxovra 5 1 »j t « t, one loill not force me 
away = J iriJl not admit that one will, etc. a, 2()2. ov yuQ no) tojol? iSov 
atioag, ovSs I d co ft a i, nor do I expect that I shall see such men, nor am I to 
see ; ovds oii'Ojunt, nor shall /(ceriainly) see. Od. ^, 201. ovx wx oItoc uvIiQ 
dtfQoq f^QOTOc, Olds y iv i]T a L. tt, 437. oi'x lor' o'vxoq ur)]o, oiS' taatruL 
ovdi y £ r r] T a L, it is not to be expected that he will he. 

Rem. 5. The frequent use of the Subj. with oi8 k (xr, in the Attic wri- 
ters is wholly analogous to the principle just stated. See under § 318, 6. 

2. The Opt. Impf. and Aor. is also used in principal sen- 
tences, to denote deliberative questions, (i. e. such as express 
doubt and propriety), but in reference to the past. 

Theocr. 27, 24. noXXol }i ffivcoovTo, voov 5' efiov ovtlc e'uds ' — y.al t/, cpl~ 
Xog, ^ £ ^ a I u I ; yu^oL nXrjd^ovffiv urlag^ i. e. quid facerem ? sc. turn, quum 
multi nuptias meas ambiebant, sed eorum nullus mihi placebat, what could 
I then do ? 

3. Besides the above usage, in which the act of conception 
belongs to the past, the Subj. of the historical tenses (Opt.) is 
also used, where the act of conception is a present one. When 
a present conception is expressed by the subjunctive, e. g. lojfievy 
eanius, ri EtTTcousv ; quid dicamus ? then the realization of what 
is conceived may be assumed or expected from the present 
point of time. But when a present conception is expressed by 
the Opt. (Subj. of the historical tenses), the speaker places him- 
self as it were out of the present, and no longer keeps up the 
living connection between the present and what actually exists, 
and represents the conception as one separate from his present 
point of time. Hence a present conception expressed in this 
way connects itself very naturally with the subordinate idea of 
uncertainty. Accordingly, in relation to present conceptions, 
the Greek uses the subjunctive of the historical tenses (Opt.) in 
principal sentences, in the follo\\dng cases. 

(a) Generally to express a presupposition, a present or future 
uncertainty, an undetermined possibility', presumption or admis- 
sion. The prose-wTiters here commonly use the modal adverb 
av with the Opt., § 260, 2, (4), (a), but the poets very frequently 
use the Opt. without av. A negation is here expressed by ov 
(ovx). 

^£ avTO ai'TO) avipoiov htj y.al 8ioiqjOQOi\ ayolf] yi not to) uU.to o^oi— 
ov i] (plkov y iv Lzo , that would scarcely he like or friendly to another^ 

46 



350 SYNTAX. USE OF THE SUBJ., OPT. AND IMPERATIVE. [§ 259. 

PI. Lysid. 214, d. ^ AnoXofiivy]q ds rfj? ipv/ijc; tot I'/dij Ti]v qivcnv xriq aa&s^ 
Viluq in t, 8 1 LKv V L jo ao)^u xat t«^i; auniv d t, o ix o n o (aninio ex- 
stincto tiini vero corpus iiiibecillitateni suani ostendatet iiitercidat) Phaedon. 
87, e. Li fisv ^VftfiovXevoifit, u (iiXiiaiu (joi 8oxf7 fhai, ttoXXu (jol xuyu&n 
Y iv IT 0' li de (.u], tuvuvjIu, then many blessings wovld attend mt, X. An. 
5. G, 4. 

(b) To express a wish. ^tJ is here used in a negation. 

n. X, 304. fX7j f^av aanovdl ys nal uyJaaig u7ioXol}i7)v, vmy I not perish ! 
S. Aj. 550. w nut, /BVOLO nai^og ti<TV/iaTi(Dog, iu d' uXX' ofioiog ! xul yi- 
vol av ov xaxo?, may you he more fortunate than your faiher^ hut in other things 
like him ! then you would not he wicked. X. Cy. 6. 3, 11. 'AXX\ to Zev fii/Lars, 
Xa§HV fioL yivoLTO uliov, atg iyu ^oi'Xo^aL. The wish is commonly in- 
troduced by ft'i^«, El yug. Od. /, 205. si yuQ (fiol Joaai'ivdE -&fo} dirufiiv 
nuQccd-slsv! X. Cy. 6. 1, 38. si y uq yivono! (Poet. Ctg like uti- 
nam. Eur. Hipp. 407. aq a noXo lto Tnxyy.avMq !) 

Rez^i. 6. When a wish is expressed, which the speaker knows cannot be 
realized, the Ind. of the historical tenses is used, e. g. LI'S^e tovto iylyvETo! 
sl'd-E TOVTO iyivETo ! utinam hoc factum esset ! O tJiat this ivere done, or com- 
monly, O that this had been done ! So w qp e X £ i: yguipai ! O that you had 
written! X. An. 2. 1, 4. aX)i acpEXE (xev KvQog Cliv ! O that Cyrus were 
still alive ! Also eI'S^s, el y uq a c w(p£Xov, Eg, e{v) with the Inf., par- 
ticularly in poetr}'-. On the wish expressed by nug av with the Opt., see § 
260, 2, 4, (d). On the infrequent use of the Subj. to denote a wish, see 
Rem. 3. 

(c) A command is also expressed in a milder way, in the 
form of a wish. 

Od. I, 408. Ta/iGTU juol evdov eTuigoL eIev. H. y.i'iQV^ xlg ol snoi- 
TO yEQaliEQog. Aiist. Vesp. 1431. sgdoL Tigilv v/.uaTog EidElri li/vriv. X. 
An. 3. 2, 37. eX fzsv ovv aXXog tig ^eXtlov oqu, uXXojg i /sx a' eI ds y,i], Xel- 
Ql(joq)og fisv riyolxo. 

(d) Generally the Optative is used to express a desire, wish 
and inclination. A negation is here expressed by ]"//• 

Theocr. 8, 20. xavxav [xiyv ovgiyya) xaT& eItjv, I should desire to place, 
TM ds to5 naxgog ov yMTa&rjaoj. Her. 7, 11. fiJ] yag eI't]v ix /fagslov yEyo- 
V(ag, fit} TLfxwgrjffdfXEvoq, "Ad-Jivalovg, I would not be descended from Darius, 
unless, etc. 

(e) In direct questions the Opt. is used, when a mere admis- 
sion or presupposition is expressed. 

(a) In Homer the interrogative clause then foniis a kind of antecedent 
to the conditioned clause, i. e. to the clause depending on the condition ex- 



§2o9.] SYNTAX. USE OF THE SUBJ., OPT. AND IMPERATIVE. 351 



pressed by tlie question. H. 8, 93, sq.i] qoc vv fiol ti ni-d-oio, ylvudovog 
vis daiq>QOV', TXuii]g h ( v MsvtXao) i7ti7iQoiy.evTaxvvl6v, noKTi de as Tota- 
eaai x^Q^^' ^^'' ^^^og ctgoio {the same as si' xi (xol tcIx^ o lo, t Xa ii^g xev, 
etc.). Here n i&oio, etc. is the interrogative clause containing the condi- 
tion, and xX a I- /; c, etc. the conditioned clause depending on the preceding. 
When the question has two members, the first, expressed by the Opt. with- 
out aV, contauis the condition, the last, expressed by the Opt. with «V, con- 
tains the conditioned clause. II. $, 191. tJ y« vv ^ol xl nl-d-oLo, (plXov xi- 
xog, XXL xBv (I'jiu, 718 xiv a QVi](jaLO xoxeaaaixsvr] xoye d-VfZM ; (/5) In the 
Attic writers, the Opt. is also used in a question without reference to a 
conditioned clause. These questions, however, always imply a negative. 
Aesch, Chocph. uX)^ inigxoX^ov uvdgog (pgovrjfici xlg Xiyoi; ivho could 
describe? — no one, i. e. who can you suppose coidd describe'? S. Ant. 
604. Tfav, Zfi), SvvaaLv xlg ardgMV vnsQ^uala xaxaa/ot; ivho could re- 
strain? i. e. ivho can he supposed to restrain? Arist. Pint. 438. uva'fAnoXXov 
xal d-soL, not xig (fvyoi; Dem. Phorm. 921, 1. x«t otra ^sv sins fisxu xijg 
aXi]&Etagj |U?) /griad-e xey.i.irjglbj' a d eipemaxo xo vaxegov, niaxoxsga xavd^ 
V noXtt 3 LXB dvai ; haec vos veriora existimaturos quis piitet ! PI. Rp. 
437, b. «^ oiv — navxa xa xoiavxa xatv ivavxlcov aXXrjXoig S^sli^g ; can you 
consider all such things to be opposite to each other? i. e. can I assume that you, 
etc. 

Rem. 7. The deliberative Opt. No. 2, differs from this. 

Rem. 8. All the cases mentioned under (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) ai-e to be regarded 
as elliptical sentences, which may be analyzed like the conditional sentence 
si' XI s/ ig, d lij g «V, if you had, you would give. 

(4) The following things in addition are to be noted respect- 
ing the Imp., § 258, 1, (c). Although the Imp. always refers to 
the present time, or that which the speaker considers present, 
yet the Greek has several Imp. forms, viz. a Pres., Perf. and 
Aor. These forms, however, do not express a different re- 
lation of time, but only the different condition or circum- 
stance of the predicate. The difference between the Imp. 
Aor. YQciipov and the Pres. yQacps, has been explained, § 257, 
1, (b). The Imp. Perf. has always the sense of the Pres. e. g. 
fit{Avtj6o, memento, be remembering, remember,^ d-vqa xsxXfi/- 
(7x>aj, let the door be shut (and remain shut). See §255, Rem. 5. 

5. In negative or prohibitive expressions with /^jJ (ne), the 
Greek commonly uses only the Pres. Imp., not the Aor. Imp., 
but instead of it, the Aor. Subjunctive. 

Jkf rj y gacfs or ^u ?; y gdiptjg (but neither p; /?«<JP/??5 nor firj ygaifjov). 



352 SYNTAX. MODES AVITII THF. ^rOBAl. ADVERB ttV. [§260. 



J\fii '/ Q a (p i T (<t or jj If ytjnipri. ne scrihito, (l»iit neither fxi] '/ou{f)Tj, r\or 
^ij y()(/.il>itTi'i). l\l t] /jot uvrllt'/f or ^ i] uoi i< v i ili^ij g. Dein. Mid. 
58'^, \~). (.{ )j y.i/tiu K;tc Kiyiiv^ d t y. u (T i) 1 f, oi ut dnt.: diy.uiTT(U' fA 1] /^or/- 
x( I'j (T Tj T t TO! /IfTOliVoTt dniU' fll] ( i O (J X t I T E ' llfUP doiE HiP /UQIV TUV- 

ii]v. Ifl. Cor. l294, 196. xnl ^ov — ^i]5tlg 7i]t> tufQi^oli]v [verba mea om- 
nem modum excedentia) & u v fiixir ]], m/.A« (jn ivvo'utq, o /fc'/w, dtoiQriaaTOi. 
Til. 3,39. y.oXuadtjKjjauv ds /.ul viv u^lmq t;"]^ udiy.lug, y.ul fj.i] TOig ^iv oXl- 
yoig 1} ahla n q o ct txf fi, lov ds di'/iuov an oXv(JT]x f. 

Rem. 9. Yet sonietiines in the Epic poets, though very seldom in otlier 
poets, ^n] is found with the second Pers. of the Aor. Imp., e. g. II. ^, 410. 
To5 |U>J ixoi nuTSQceg noit' oyob] £vx)^8o &V(j.(J[). Frequently even the third 
Pers. is found m the Attic prose writers. X. Cy. 8. 7, 26. fxridtlg idsioj. 

6. The third Pers. Imp. is very often used, the second more 
seldom, to denote that the speaker admits or grants something, 
the correctness or incorrectness of which depends upon himself. 

OL'iix)g s X £T 0), b)Q ah U/ug, admit that it is as you say, PI. Symp. 201, c. 
'/ioixero) dh i) ipv/i} ^Vf-icpiTO) dwd^ust, VJiomifiOV ^sv/ovg te xal iiVi6/ov 
Phaedr. 246, a. Aiyixta nsgl uviov, ojg v/.ixaiog yiyvoxjy.ti, admit that it is 
said, Th. 2, 48. 

Rem. 10. The Imp. in the formula olad^ u dgaaov — o7(j&^ o)g noiqaov, 
usually in the Attic writers, is to be explained by a transition, frequent in 
Greek, from the indirect to the direct form of construction. The use of 
the third Pers. Imp., not only in dependent questions, but also in other sub- 
ordinate sentences, is according to the same analogy. Her. 1, 89. viv oiv 
Tioiri(Tov bids, u toi uQiayot, t« tyaj Xsyio' y.oiiKTOp icjv doQVCfOQOJV inl nd- 
ajiffL Tj,rn nvlr^ai cpvXuxovg, ot X 8 y 6 vt ojv — , Mg (rq^sa (sc. /o?/'u«t«) upay- 
nuib)g t/ji dtxixitv&iivaL to) zJu (ot XsycvTMV = y. ul o It o i X s y 6 v x b) v). 
Th. 4, 92. dtl^ai, c T t — y.i lia ^ mg av, may they he permitted to retain ! 

Rem. 11. On the transition of the third Pers. Imp. to the second, see § 
241, Rem. 13, (c) ; on the use of the Fut. instead of the Imp., see § 255, 4. 
and on the Opt. with uv in the sense of the Imp., § 260, 2, (4) (b). 

§ 260. Th e Mo des in conn ect ion ivith the Mo dal 
Adverb av [yJ, yJv). (393—395.) 

1. The Modal adverb av, together with which the enclitics yJ, 
y>8v, Doric j<«, y-dv, are used in the Epic and Lyric language, de- 
notes the relation between a conditioning expression or sen- 
tence and a conditioned one, since it indicates that the predicate 
of the sentence to which it belongs, is conditioned by another 
thought either expressed or to be supplied. Hence the realiza- 
tion of the predicate depends upon the realization of another 
predicate. Therefore, w^here a predicate is accompanied by aV, 
the predicate seems to be conditioned. 



§ 260.] SYNTAX. MODES WITH THE MODAL ADVERB ttV. 353 



2. A complete view of the use of av cannot be presented un- 
til condilional sentences are treated of. Yet, as it is used in all 
kinds of sentences, it is necessary to explain its construction 
here. It is connected, 

(1) With the Fut. Ind. The predicate expressed by the 
Fut. Ind., seems to the speaker, at the time then present, always 
to depend on conditions and circumstances. Whenever this 
idea of dependence is to be made specially prominent, av (Epic 
xi) can be joined wdth the Fut., yet this construction is rare in 
the Attic dialect. 

Od. ^, 540. u S" ^Odvasvg ekd^ot — , aiijja x s avv o) naidl ^lag an or la e~ 
T a I avdQMV. II. |, 267. aXk I'd^, f/w ds y.i r o l XaQinav fiiav unXoTsguwv 
<5 ci) a w oTTViifisvuL, dabo, scil. si tibi lubuerit. X. C}'. 6. 1, 45. v^QiaTi)v ovv 
von'i^oiv ai'Tov, EV oiS' OIL aa^ivoQ av nqoq avdga, oiog av ei, an allay i] - 
CETtti (so in the best Codd.). 7. 5, 21. oiav ds y.al ai'ff&wfTai v^ag svdov 
ovr ag, nolv av eVi jxallov, ij vvv, a/^quoi eaovTUL vno tov iy.nsnlijx^ai 
[av is wanting in only two Codd.). 

Remark 1. With the Pres. and Perf. Ind., av is not used. For that which 
the speaker expresses as a present object, cannot at the same time be ex- 
pressed as something, the reahzation of which is dependent on another 
thought. In those passages where av is found with the Pres. and Perf. Ind., 
either the reading is questionable, or av must be referred to another verb 
of the sentence, e. g. Ovit oiS' av si nsiaaint instead of fi rn'mai^u av Eur. 
Med. 937 ; so often vofil^co uv, oi^at av and the like, followed by an Inf , 
where uv belongs to the Inf. ; or it is to be considered as an elliptical mode 
of expression, as in X. S. 4, 37. syia ds ovto) nolla g/w, (xig fiolig amu y.al 
iyo} uv uvTog svqIidko, I have so many things that I tvith difficulty fnd them, in- 
deed if I should seek for them myself , I should not Jind them. Nor is uv used 
with the Imp. For what the speaker expresses as his immediate will, can- 
not be considered as dependent on a condition. The few passages referred 
to in proof of the use of av with the Imp., are all, critically considered, 
questionable and prove nothing. 

(2) "y4v is used with the Ind. of the historical tenses, and in a 
two-fold relation, viz. 

(«) To denote a dependent action, the reality or possibility of 
w^iich is denied, i. e. it is affirmed that something might 
take place under a certain condition, but did not take 
place, because the condition was not fulfilled. The con- 
dition is then expressed by ei with the Ind. of the histori- 
cal tenses. 

Ei TOVTO slsysg {sls^ag), r\^aqT av sq [i] ^UQTsg) av, i. e. if you said 



354 SYNTAX. MODES WITH THE MODAL ADVERB OLV. [§ 260. 

this^ you ivere ivronsr, or in I^nglish we soniotimcs use rlic Plup. and say, if 
you had said this, you would have been uroriir, hut now 1 know that you did 
not say it, consc(iuontly you arc not wrong ; Lat. si hoc dixisses, errasses (at 
non dixisti ; ergo non errasti). Ju tl si'xoijisv, i d Id ofiiv {td o fxEv) liv 
if ive had anylhino^, we ivould give it to you, or if we hid had anything, we 
woidd have given it to you ; si quid hahuissemus, dedissemus. Also without an 
antecedent sentence, e. g. ^xuQyjg cxv, laetatus fuisses (scil. si hoc vidisses). 

Rem. 2. Here belong also the expressions, o^o firjv uv, tyvoiv a y, r/ o" - 
'&6^'i]v av and the like, as hi Latin, putares, crederes, diceres, cerneres, vi- 
deres, you [one) could believe, or you [one) would have believed. Here il naoij- 
ad^a, d' Tig sleys, si sidsg, eI i8vvu^i]v and the like, as conditioning antece- 
dent clauses, are to be supplied. *'Ev&a di] eyvb) xiq liv xovg b^OTifiovq 
nsnaiStv^iivovg, wg du (turn vero videres) X. Cy. 3. 3, 70. "EvS^a St) sy v w 
TLg av, oaov u^tov h')] to q^iXeca&ac uq/ovtu vno tmv v.oxofxivmv 7. 1, 38. 
EvS^vg (Tvv TOVToig slgjirjdriauvTEg tig Tov TTTjAOV d^uTTOv, i] Mg xtg uv olsxo, 
fiSTmgovg i^exoiiKTav Tag a^ia^ag (celerius, quam quis crederet) An. 1. 5, 8. 
En SQ ^ (xtff &7j d^ av Tt? KanHva tdcav {one might be encouraged if he saw 
those things) Ag. 1, 27. 

Rem. 3. With the Ind. of the historical tenses, av is often omitted. Then 
the speaker has no reference, in his representation, to the condition con- 
tained in the protasis or antecedent, on account of which the action ex- 
pressed in the apodosis or conclusion could not be completed, but he em- 
phatically represents the predicate as an actual fact. X. An. 7. 6, 21. EcnoL 
8^ Tig av ' Ovy.ovv aicr/vvj] ovtoj fxoDQc^g s^anaTCfifisvog', Nal (xa Jla r/ a/v- 
voy.riv fiSVTOL, si vno TioXefilov ys ovTog i^i]7iaTrj&'i]v ' cplXoj d^ ovti i^unuTav 
al'a/iov [xoi doxsT sivai, i] s^aTraxaaS-ai. Lycurg. Leocr. p. 154, 23. si fj.sv 
ovv t,(x)v STvyxavsv b "AfxvvTag, sxslvov avTov 7iaQsix6(xi]v' viv ds Vfiiv xa- 
Xb) Tovg avvEidoTag. There is very frequently an ellipsis of av in expres- 
sions, which denote the idea of necessity, duty, reasonableness, possibility^, 
liberty and inclination, e. g, / ^ rj j^, sdsi, bjq)sXov, verbal adjectives in 
X£o g, 7CQ grjxs, xa ig 6 g ■^v, sinog i) v, xaXov ri v, alo xQov riv, 
a^iov 1) V, KaXojg sixs, i^ijv, vjirJQX^^ sfisXXsv, i ^ o v Xo firjv . 
lujs. 123, S. X Q V V ds as — , sI'ttsq riaS'a ygijaTog, noXv (xaXXov — ^VjVVTijV 
ysvsa&ai ' vvv ds (Tov to. sqya cpavsqa ysysvr(iui y.. t. X., you ought or you must. 
X. C. 2. 7, 10. si (J.SV Tolvvv aiaxgov xi s^sXXov sgydaaa&ai, S^dvacov dvx 
avTov TCQoaiQSTSovrjV' vvv d^ a fisv doxsl xaXXiaxa y.al ngsTcudsaTsga 
yvvaitlv slvai inlaTavTai, Mg loins yt. t. X., mors praeferenda erat. So also 
with the Inf. lb. 1. 3, 3. outs ydg SsoTg scprj zaXoJg sx si v, si Talg fxsydXaig 
-d^vaiaig fxaXXov i] Talg (T/Aiygalg sxaigov. Very often without an antecedent 
sentence, q. g. aid x gov rjv TavTa noistv, turpe erat, it would be base, i^i] v 
TavTa noLsXv, licebat ; y aXoi g si x^- 

Rem. 4. In all the above expressions, however, av can be used ; so also in 
Latin, the Subj. is sometimes found instead of the Ind. Dem. Phil. 1. 40, 
1. si ydq sx tov ngosXrjXv&oTog xQovov t« dsovTU outoi avvs^ovXevaav, ovdsv 
a V vjiidg vvv sd si ^ovXsvsarS-ai. 

Rem. 5. The Pres. tense of XQV^ ^^h ngog^y.si, y.aX(^g sxsi, etc., is used of 
things, which can yet take place. Comp, possum commemorare, perhaps I 
can do it, and poteram commemorare, but it could not be done. 



§260.] SYNTAX. ISIODES WITH THE MODAL ADVERB IIV. 355 

Rem. 6. *'Av is very naturally omitted, if in the apodosis there is an Ind. 
of }U» historical tense of the verb iciv dvvEvsiv, to be in danger, to seeing 
since the verb by itself denies the existence or reality of the action expres- 
sed by the Inf. connected with it. Th. 3, 74. /j noXig sjcivdvvsvae naaa 
diacp^afjrjrai, el «)'f,t/oc inf/ivno r^ (pXoyl inicfO{)og ig aizriv, Aeschin. c. 
Ctes. 515, R. ft (.n) (5^6,«w (icktg f |f (jpL'/o^/fv elg /J(}.q)Ovg, ixivdvvsvcrafxev 
uTtoUa&at. So if in the apodosis, 6 Xly ov, fi lxq o v, t ax a^ nearly, al- 
most, are joined with the Ind. of a historical tense. Plat. Synip. p. 198, C. 
£/w/f iy&vfiovf^srog, oti avTog oi'x oiog t tao^tu ol'S' iyyvg tovtmv ovdsv x«- 
lov HTTslr, VTi alaxvvTjQ 6 Xly ov an o d g a g o) % 6 (irjv, n nrj ei/ov. With- 
out a protasis, e. g. X. Cy. 1. 4, 8. y.al irug diaTirjdoJp uvtm 6 'innog nvTmi 
eig yovara, xal fiixQ ov aaxslvov i^izq ux^Xia t.v. Comp. the Lat. prope 
[paene) ceddi, J came near falling. 

(§) To denote that which takes place in certain cases, under 
certain circumstances, i. e. a repeated action. The his- 
torical tense most frequently used here is either the Impf. 
or ihe Aor. ; the Plup. is used, only when it has the sense 
of the Impf. The condition under which the action is re- 
peated, is either actually stated, and is then expressed by 
£1, OTE, etc. with the Opt., or it must be supplied from the 
context. 
Eintv «V, he ivas accustomed to say, lie would say as often as this or that hap- 
pened, as often as it was necessary, and the hke. X. C. 4. 6, 13. e I ds Tig av- 
Tu nsgl lov avTiXiyoL, inl t'))v vnoSsaiv inavijysv av ndvra tov 
Xoyov, as often as one contradicted. 1. 3. 4. £ t 8s tl d o^slsv aim) (2'wx^a- 
th) arifxalvsa&ai naga raiv ■&£(av, r/Tiov av in £l(T-&rj naga tw arjfiaivofiEva 
noii]aai,ri si' Tig avTov snsi&sv odov la^stv -tjysfiova TvcpXcv — oivtI ^XsnovTog, 
An. 2. 3, 11. si' Tig amw SohoIt} twv ngog tovto TSTay^svwv (3Xaxsvsiv, — 
s 71 a lev a V. 1. 5, 2. oi fxev ovoi, ircst Tig diwxoi, ngodgufiovTsg av scrTa- 
aav, as often as any one pursued them. 3. 4, 22. onoTS ds didaxoiev al nXsv- 
gal Torj nXaiulov, to fisaov av s^en l(xnXaa av. 

3. With the Subjunctive. As the Greek Subj. always re- 
presents the object it describes as something future, § 257, Rem. 
4, the connection of this mode with av is very natural ; av repre- 
sents the future object described as conditioned and dependent 
on circumstances. The following cases are to be distinguished, 

(a) The Subj. expressing exhortation, § 259, 1, (a), is never 
used with av (as). 

(b) The Subj. expressing deliberation, § 259, 1, (b), is used 
with av (yJ), though but seldom in direct, more frequently in in- 
direct questions, if there is a condition to be referred to. 



356 SYNTAX. MODES AVITJI THE MODAL ADVERB UV. [§ 260. 

Ti TcoT uv ovv XiyojfiEv — ; what shall we therefore say, if the thing is 
so? etc. PI. L. ()55, a. tyCt yuQ tovto, o) IlQOTu/oQa, ovy. olfirjv didaxTov et- 
r«/, (Tol de XiyovjL ova i'/o) onb)g uv u n lar o) (i. e. il ah Xt/fig) Prot. 319, b. 
"Av d (XV ijiueig VLxoii(j,cv, ).f).vjxirrig ii^g yECfVQug ol/ t^ovaiv ty.HvoL, onov uv 
cpvyoxiLV (only in two Codd. unov cpvyMaiv) X. An. 2. 4, 20. X't di aoi 
fiij <5oxfi, axEipui, iuv (i. e. si uv) toSe aoi ^luXlov UQiaxt) C. 4. 4, 12. 

(c) The Subj., which is often used in the Homeric language, 
instead of the Fut. Ind., § 259, Rem. 4, is frequently found with 
av, which is to be explained in the same manner as it is with 
the Fut. Ind., No. 2, (1). 

El di y.s (17} duiMo-LV, syd) 8s hev amog EAw^atll. «, 137. Oly. av rot 
/ Q a i(T fii] al&ag tg II. /, 54. 

(d) In subordinate clauses in the waiters of all periods. In 
this last case, civ {yJ) usually stands with the conjunction of the 
subordinate clause, or combines with the conjunction and forms 
one word. In this manner originate idv (from d av), inav, orav, 
OTtorav, ttqIv civ, hd' av, o&i civ, ov civ, otzov civ, ol civ, onoi civ, rj civ, 
0711] civ, 0&8V dv, oTtod-ev dv, etc., og dv (quicunque or si quis), o'log 
onolog dv, baog dv, onoaog dv, etc. In all these expressions, the 
thing assumed is considered 7?o.95/Z>/g ; it is assumed that some- 
thing is possible in the future ; the future occurrence of it de- 
pends upon the assumption of the speaker, e. g. Idv tovro Xsyrjg, 
if you say (shall say) this, viz. according to my assumption, or 
as I expect, dfiaQTi^orj, you loill be ivrong. 

(4) With the Opt., very seldom with the Opt. Fut., e. g. Ly- 
curg. Leocr. 146, § 15. 

(a) The Opt. with dv is used to denote a present or future 
uncertainty, a mere undetermined possibility, presupposition, 
admission or conjecture, § 259, 3, (a), dependent on a condition. 
This condition also commonly expresses a mere presupposition, 
admission or conjecture, e. g. ei n ^loig, dotr^g dv, if you had any 
thing-, you vwuld give it (you may perhaps have something, and 
then you may give it to me). But the conditioning protasis is 
very often omitted, and is supplied either by the context, or, if 
the condition is general and wholly indefinite, it is left to the 
judgment of the hearer or reader. T^e Attic writers in particu- 
lar, use this mode of expression, to denote firmly established 
and definite opinions and views of anything, and even to de- 



§260.] SYNTAX. MODES WITH THE MODAL ADVERB UV. 357 

note actual facts with a degTce of reserve, moderation and 
modesty. A negation is here expressed by ov{x). 

Iler. 3. 8*2, ardgog kvog jov uQiaiov (i. e. d ccQiazog ti'r]) ovSiv ixfjavov av 
qpaye/r/, nothing icoiild seem better than. 9, 71. lottra fxiv y.al cp&cro) uv 
c I'ji le V, they might have said these things from envy. 1, 2. fit] a a v 8' uv 
o'l'Toi K())'i7sg, these might have been Cretans ; also used of the present, they 
might he. 7, 184. i'ldr, mv ixydgsg uv slsv iv avxotdi tsaafOEg fiVQiddsg y.al 
tl'xoffi. 5,9.yivoLTO d^ av nuv iv tm fiaxQM X^^^^J^ ^^^ migld happen. 
X. Cy. 1. 2, W. di]OMVTBg ovy. u V uQiaTrjiraLS v, while hunting they might 
not breakfast = they do not breakfast. 13. iTritdixv lu. nivxi yal Hy.ouLV sir} 
diaifXiataaiv, sl'ijaav fiiv av ovtol ttXslov tl yeyovoTsg i] nfVTi']y.orTa trr} 
ano yevsiig. PI. Gorg, 502, d. /tri^iy/oQia aga rig sutlv ^ noii]Tixij. Call. 
^Htlvixai. Socr. Ovy.ovv i] grjTogixi) drjfirjyoQiu uv si't]. 

Rem. 7. If the Opt. is used without Ixv, as § 259, 3, (a), the action is ex- 
pressed with gi-eater emphasis and definiteness, since the speaker has no 
reference to the conditioning circumstances, which might prevent the reali- 
zation of the thing conceived. Comp. gna -d^sog y OHmv y.al irjlodiv updga 
ff « w 0- « i, the propitious deity, I think, can save, Od. /, 231, and iruomixL av, 
COULD, MIGHT save, if he wished. Hence the omission of av in the freer 
language of poetr}', is far more frequent than in prose, which has more re- 
gard to the precise relation of the thmgs described. 

(b) So also the Opt. is used with av, as a more modest and 
mild expression of a command or request, since the thing de- 
sired is represented as dependent on the will of the person ad- 
dressed and is conditioned by him. Here also a negation is 
expressed by ov{y.). 

PI. Phaedr. 227, c. liyoig av instead of Xiys, properly, you might speak, if 
it pleased you. Tim. 19, b. uy.ovo lx av rjSi] t« jhetci xavxa mql xijg no- 
Xudag. S. El. 1491. xoiQolg av, you might go. J\. (3, 250. with a degree of 
irony, OsquIt — Va/eo — .' ov yag iyo) crso q>r}pl ysgEioTsgov ^goTov allov 
EfjfiiVttL — • TO) ovx av ^aadvag ava azofx s/tav ayogsvoig, yal acpiv 
ovtidid T£ ngocpigoig, vocttov te cpvldaaoLg! instead of fxrj dyogsvs, 
etc. In the form of a question, X. Hier. 1, 1. dg uv p.oi iS- slij a a ig, w 
'isgbiv, diriyi](jua&UL, a dxog tldivui as (jsXriov ip,ov', would you be inclined, 
viz. if I should ask you. With ou in the form of a question, H. s, 456. o ly 
av 5ii tovd^ uvdga fzixyrjg igvauio pejsl&iov ; might you not, could you 
not restrain the man, instead of, restrain him. In a sharper and more urgent 
tone as an exclamation, II. w, 263. ovy uv dij ^loi uy,aiuv i cp on kla a atTs 
xdyKna, TULxd Ts Tidvt in id- six s, Xva ngijaawt^Ev udolo ; would you not 
get ready, if I commanded it ? 

(c) The Optative with oiv has the same force in interrogative 

47 



35S SYNTAX. MODES WITH THE MODAL ADVERB UV. [§ 260. 



as in oilier scntencps, and may commonly be translated by the 
auxiliaries can^ covlcl, 'woiiUL 

H. 0), 3G7. ft' ilq <ji Idono — , rig uv 8i] jot, voog t Irj ; how would you then 
feen II. T, 90. ulXu jI xev (iiUifiv; ivlud could I do? H. Ph. 1393. ti 
dr,i uv yjfiflg d q oi ij.fv ] Dcrn Pliil. 1, j). 4.3, 10. Uyiiul Ji y.uhov ; yivoi- 
TO yuQ uv 71 i((xir6jigov, oj MuKidvov aviiQ^A&riPulovi y.aTunoXfjAO)V ; can 
there be any stranger news, than — ? 

Rem. 8. Comp. not Tig cpfv/fi; ivhither does one Jlee? A rist. Plut. 438. ttoI 
Tig (pvyoi; ivhiiher may one jlte'l (more definite than with ltv\ Eur. Or. 
598. -nol Tig liv cpvyoi; whither would oneJlee9 ivhifher could onejlee'? S. Aj. 
403. 71 ol Tig ouv (fvy]) ; whither shall onejlee or is one tojlee? 

(d) The Attic writers often express a wish, in the form of a 
question, hy tz cog and the Optative with ccv, since the inquiry 
then is, how something mighty could, ivoidd take place under a 
given condition. 

Soph. Aj. 338. w Zev, — nag kv tov al^vXmaTov — oXscractg TsXog d u- 
vo t {xt y.avTog ; how might, could, would I die ? instead of, O that I might die ! 
Eur. Ale. 867. nojg uv oXolfirjV, PI. Euthj'd. 275, c.Trwg av xaXoJg 
aoi dtTjyTjaal^rjv, 

Rem. 9. When the Opt. is used to express a wish, the conditioning adverb 
uv is omitted, §259, 3, (b). II. ^, 281. wg y.i ol av&i yalu yuvoi is not 
properly expressed as a wish, but as a doubtful condition, thus [tag = ov- 
Tcag) the earth should then open for him. 

(5) av {x8) is used with the Inf. and Part., if the finite verb, 
which stands instead of the Inf. and Part., would take it. 

(a) The Inf. with civ after vei'ba sentiendi and declarandi, 
verbs of feeling or declaring, or, when the Inf. is used, as a sub- 
stantive. 

El TL bI^bv, scpr], d ovv a I av, or in direct discourse, h ti ei/ov, I'Soy.a 
av, he said that if he had anything, he would give it, dixit, se, si quid habuis- 
set, daturum fuisse. EXtl b/oi, ecpr), doijvai uv, or in direct discourse, fl'it 
B^oifii, dolrjv av, dixit, se, si quid haberet, daturum esse. Oifiai yag om uv 
«/a()/o-Ta»$ j^OL t^B IV, I think you would not he unthankful to me, if I entreated 
the king, etc., or in direct discourse, oiy. av axugiaTag ^oi l'| o i t f ; instead 
of the Fut. the Pres. or Aor. is generally used, b/oitb, axolriJE X. An. 2. 3, 
18. "Oorw yaq (lili^w dtvufiiv b/bi 7] agxv^ Toaoino) fiixXXov uv ijyT^(TaTO ttVT7jv 
xal xaTUTtX-ij^BLV Tovg noXling R. L. 8, 3. Flaig Byjig ngog to i^e- 
Xstv av iivai axXr/Tog inl dBLTivov', (the same as ttw? f];f£/c; id^iXoig av 
Isvai ay.XrjTog inl dslnvov,) PI. Symp. 174, b. E\ ovv Xiyoifii, bv old^, ojt 
SrjfitjyoQBlv av fXB cpairjg 'PI. R. S50, e. 



§ 261.] SYNTAX. POSITION AND REPETITION OF UV. 359 

Rem. 10. In Latin the Inf. with Sv is expressed as follows, 

y(jii(f>fiy liy = scrii)tnrum esse, yr/Qatpivai txv = scri|)turum fuisse, 
/(jaif'txi liv z= (a) scriptiu'iun fuisse, or (b) as Pres. scripturum esse, 
yqixii^fiv «V = scripturum fore. 

(b) The Participle with av Siher verba sentiendi, verbs of feel- 
ing, or when the Participle can be resolved into a subordinate 
clause. 

Her. 7, 15. sigiayM 8e wde uv y ivo fisv a Tavxa, il la^oiq tijv ip}V 
crxsvr,Vj reperio, sic haecfutura esse, si sumas vestes meas. X. C. 2. 2, 3. at 
jioXsig tnl rdlg jx^ylaioig adixTj^aai ^rifiiav ^avaxov nsnoirixaffiv, wg ovx uv 
fid^ovog xaxov (pu^oj tijv udiy.lav n a va ovt s g, existimantes se non gravi- 
oris mali metu injuriam coercituros fore. Th. 6, 38. oI'te oVtk, ovts uv y s- 
vo^fva loyonoiolaiv (i. e. « ovxs iaxlv, ovr av yivono). Isocr. 
Archid. 129, 62. inluTafjiaL rovg^A&rjvalovg vnig^ys rijg aaJTfjQitxg rrjg iifiETB- 
Qag oTioiy uv n o ii'ja ovt a g. So, also, with the case absolute, X. An. 5. 
2, 8. icmoTXHTO, nonQOv tl)] yguTTov untiyeiv y.ul TOtg 8iu^i§^y.ojug, i] vmI 
xoig on).ling diu^i^tt^Hv, ug uXovxog av tou ;^a)^£OU (= yo^/^wv, ciit to 
/(i)giov uloL 1] uv). 

§261. Position and Rep e tit ion of av. Jiv loithout 

a Verb. (396,397.) 

1. When av stands in connection with a conjunction and the subjunctive, 
§260, 2, (3) (d), it either unites with the conjunction and forms one word, 
e. g oxav. for ox av, so indv, imidav, or it is placed immediately after the 
conjunction, e. g. txqIv uv, og uv. In the last case, however, small parti- 
cles like 5f, T£, fiiv, yuQ, sometimes come between, e. g. og § uv. 

2. As liv represents the predicale as conditional, it ought properly to be 
joined with the predicate, e. g. Uyoini uv, ehyov uv ; yet it commonly follows 
that member of a sentence which is to be made emphatic, e. g. PI. Criton. 
53, c. y.al ovy. oXu uaxri^ov uv cpavua&ai, xo xov Swyquxovg nqljiy^a' 
Hence it is regularly joined to such words as change the idea of the sen- 
tence, viz., to negative adverbs and interrogatives, e. g. oix av, ovS' uv, ov~ 
noi uv, ovSsTTox av, etc. — xlg liv, xl uv, xl S' av, xl dr.x av, nwg av, nwg 
yuq uv, u(i uv, etc.; — also to adverbs of place, time, modality and other 
adverbs, which, in various ways modify the expression contained in the 
predicate and define it more exactly, e. g. ivxav&a uv, xox uv, ilxoxojg av, 
I'awg uv, xuy uv, ^ukitrx uv, ijy.iax uv, fioXig av, oxoXfi av, gadlag uv, guax 
uv, xu/iax uv, acpodg uv, r,de(i)g uv, nuv instead oi y.al av, etiam, vel, etc. 

Remark 1. In certain constructions, the Opt. with av is removed from 
the dependent clause, and joined with the principal clause ; this is partic- 



360 SYNTAX. ATTRIBUTIVES. [§262. 

ulaily tlio case in tlie phrase, ovx ol8^ uv il. PI. Tim. 26, V>. f/o) /uq, a 
fiiv xOtq ijnovau, oiy, uv oid(x tl 8vvul^i]v unuvjn iv ^vr,^ri nuliv ),ufliiv. 

Rem. 2. In certain i)arentlietic sentences, mV, wliicli is joined with the 
Opt., is phiced first, thus j)articularly, «V Tig utioi, (puirj. PI. Phaed. 87, 
a. Tt oi'v (,) uy cpuuj o Xoyog (,) tri vnii(jitig\ 

3. ^Av is very often re])eated in the same sentence, y.i very seldom. The 
reason of this is two-fold, 

(a) It is used once at the beginning of the sentence, in order to show, in 
the outset, that the predicate is conditional. This is particularly the case, 
when the principal sentence is divided by intervening subordinate clauses, 
or when several words precede the verb to which av belongs, war' «»', tl 
a&ivog Xu^otfic 8riX(x)(j a i (x av oC aliolg qiQovM, S. El. 333. 

(b) The second reason is rhetorical. "Av is joined with the word which 
requires to be made emphatic. If the emphasis belongs to several words 
in one sentence, mV can be repeated with each. But besides this, av can be 
again placed after the conditioned verb to which it properly belongs. PI. 
Apol. 35, d. (iaq)Ojg y oc q civ, el Jisl&oifii vfiag, &sovg liy dLddaxoi^i ^i] 
i]y H(T&m i'liag sivai, Eur. Troad. 1244. u cp av si g av ovtsg ova av v fxvrj- 
S^slfxsv av Movaaig. 

Rem. 3. Homer sometimes joins the weaker as with av, in order to make 
the conditionality or contingency still more prominent. II. v, 127 sq. Vo-- 
zavio q)alayyEg — , ag ovx av xsv "Agrjg cvoaaiio fiEiEl-&(ov, ovie x ^A&rjVttiT), 

4. ""Av is very frequently found with a conjunction or a relative without a 
verb, when the verb can be easily supplied from the context ; thus especially 
to? av, ojgTi £Q av el, nojgyagav, nojgS' ovttav, vgnsQ 'cTv ^ 
and the like. flio^ovfiEvog, wgn eq av el nalg (i. e. Mgneg av cpo^olxo, el 
nalg el'rj) PI. Gorg. 479, a. 



SECTION II. 



§262. Attributives. (4io.) 

Attributives serve to explain more definitely the idea contain- 
ed in the substantive to which they belong, e. g. ro xaXov Qodov, 
[xsy ag nalg. The attributive may be, 

a. An adjective or participle, e. g. to ytaXov qoSov, to av&og 
'& dXlov; 

b. A substantive in the genitive, e. g. ol tov dsvdQov xag- 
7101 ; 

c. A substantive governed by a preposition, e. g. '^TZQogt^v 
noXiv 686g', 



§263.] SYNTAX. ELLIPSIS OF THE SUBSTANTIVE. 361 

d. An adverb, e. g. oi vvv av&gcoTioi', 

e. A substantive in apposition, e. g. KQolaog, 6 ^aailevg. 



§ 263. Ellipsis of the Substantive to lohich the 
Attibutive belongs. (4ii.) 

When the substantive which is to be more fully explained by the attribu- 
tive, contains a general idea or one which can be easily supplied from the 
context, or one which is expressed by a previous word of the sentence, or, 
by frequent usage in a particular connection, may be supposed to be known, 
then the substantive, as it is subordinate in the idea to be expressed, is of- 
ten omitted, and the adjective or participle is used as a substantive. Sub- 
stantives which ai-e often omitted with attributive adjectives, are the follow- 
ing, av&QOJJTog, avd-godnoi, uvrjg, avdgeg, ywi]^ yvvaiy.sg, ;^gi]jj.a, ygrt^uTU, 
ngu'/ixa, nga/ficcia, ijf^sga, yi], ycoga, fiotga, odug, yetg, yvMy.7], ^>fl(pog, ts/vtj, 
nuXsjiog, etc. ; those omitted with the attributive genitive are, naTi'ig, ^i]Ti]g, 
rlog, Tialg, d-vyuzrjg, a8eXq)6g, avTjg, husband, yvvi], ivife, oly.la, oixog, ycoga, 
y^, land. 

a. The attributive adjective, adjective pronoun and participle without a 
substantive. 

(a) Such as denote persons, ol S^vtjtoI, mortales, ol aocpoi, ol ysivuixsvoi 
instead of yovilg, ol e/opxeg, the rich, ol (pvXaiTovzsg {cpvlay.fg], ol dixu^ovTsg, 
judges, ol XiyovTsg, orators, etc. 

(/j) Such as express names of things, tw rjfiiTnga {/gii^ara), res nostrae, 
ta ffn't, res meae, everything which relates to me, xa y.aku, res pulchrae, rix y.a- 
xd, mala, §243, 4, ?/ vaisgala, ?] iTiLOvaa, ?] ngmrj, dsvriga, etc. [rjfzigtt)', i] 
noXf^la iyaiga), the enemy's country, ?] cpLXla, a friendly country, ij olxovnivri 
(/>5), the inhabited earth, i) uvvdgog [yii), a desert, i) svd-na [odog], xiw Taylinrjv, 
quam celerrime ; t/jv I'arjV {fxoTgav) unodLdovuL, ?; nmgMiiivi] {fiolgu) ; i] de^id, 
ri agiaTsgd i/tlg)', i] vixojda [yvoj^ri); tijv ivavTiav [i}j)](fov) xl&iad^ui', i] grj^ 
TogLy.7] [xiyrrj). 

(/) Such as denote abstract ideas, x6 y.alov, xo uya&ov, or xuya&uv, the 
beautiful, the good, xo sixv/ig, good fortune, xb dvaia&rjxov, want of feeling, 
TO y.0Lv6v, commonwealth, e. g. xmv ^uixImv, xo S^agaoiv, confidence. 

[8) Such as denote a collection or class of persons, to ivavxlov, the enemy, 
TO vni]y.oov, the subjects. Adjectives m - t x o y especially belong here, e. g. 
TO noXixiy.ov, the citizens, xb unXixiy.ov, xo oIxexixcv, xb 'EXXtjvlxov, xo ^ugSug- 
Lxov, xb Innixov, etc. The plural of such adjectives is often used to denote 
a number, collection or series of single events, e. g. t« Tgai'iy.d, the Trojan 
war, xd 'JBXXrjviy.d, the Grecian history, xd yavxty.d, naval-war, but also naval 
affairs. 



362 SYNTAX. ATTRIBUTIVE ADJECTIVE. [§264. 

b. TJie attributive ^^enitive without the governing substantive, e. g. ^AXi~ 
^avdQog, 6 fl'diTiTtov {vlug) — iv iidov {oly.(o) iivui, tig udov {olxov) (X&tlv — 
ilg didaaxakov, slg nkuTojvog (poiiuv, Ttifmeiv, sig tIjv Kvqov [yr^v) iX&iiv — 
T« tiig Ti'Xfj?, iht events of fortune, xa tj)? noXiwg, the affairs of stale, t« tov no- 
Xifiov, the wJiole extent of the war ; t« ^A&rjvulo)v (foovuv, ab Atheniensiuin par- 
tibus stare; xa x^g o^/hg, x« xt/? iiuTieiglug, xo xwv ijii&vniMV, that which per- 
tains to anger, the nature or essence of anger, etc. ; x6 tmv naldoov, the custom 
of hoys, xo xcuv aXubiv. 

c. The attributive adverb is used without a substantive, e. g. ol viv, ol tots, 
01 naXai, ol iv&udt [uv&qmtiol), tu oI'xol [tt q ay fxai a), res domesticae, ?; t|7J?, 
{ij^ega), thefoUoiving day, etc. 

d. The attributive substantive or substantive pronoun with the preposi- 
tion by which it is governed, e. g. ol y.a&' r,}j-(xg, our contemporaries; — ol up.- 
cpl or negl Tiva, e. g. nXuTiovu, signifies (a) a person with his companions, 
followers or scholars, ol upcpl IleialaTguTOV, Pisistratus and his troops; ol 
up(fl OaXi'iV, Thales and other philosophers of his school ; 'Aga Xsyeig Ti]v twv 
S-EMV y.QidLv, 't]V ol 7t sgl KixgoTTadi ageTriv exgLvav, which Cecrops and 
his tribunal on account of their excellence, decided, X. C. 3. 5, 10. — (b) more 
seldom the companions, followers or scholars alone, without the person 
named. — Further, ol avv tlvl, ol psTa Tivog, the followers, etc. of any one, ol 
i'Tio Tin, the subjects of any one, ol ano Tivog, asseclae ; ol iv wcrxft, ol Tisgl 
cpiXoaocflav, ol negl t)]v &rigav, ol ocfxqjl tov noXepov, etc. ; — xa Tvaga tlvoq, 
intelligence respecting any one or commands of any one ; — xo y.ai f'ps, to in 
ips, as far as in my power, as far as in me lies. 

§264. a. Attributiv e Adjective. (412-415,588.) 
1. The attributive adjective (participle, adjective pronoun and 
numeral), expresses a quality which belongs to an object, e. g. 
the beautiful and blooming- rose. On the agreement of the ad- 
jective with the word which it defines, see § 240. 

Remark 1. The participles Xryopsvog and y.aXovusvog are used, where the 
Latin has qui dicitur, vocatur, quem dicunt, vocaut, etc. and the English the 
phrase so-called, e. g. ylaysdaipovioi tov If gov xaXoi' psv ov noX^pov imga- 
Tsvaav Th. 1, 112. 2y.0Ti(av, ono3g 6 naXov^svog Ino twv aocfiUTTOjr y.oapog 
scpv X. C. 1. 1, 11. 

Rem. 2. It has already been stated, § 245, Rem. 5, that the adjectives a/.- 
gog, lUSffoc, in/aTog, must in certain cases, be translated into English by 
substantives. 

Rem. 3. Many personal nouns which denote an employment, station or 
rank, are treated as adjectives, and the word tivi'ig is joined with them, if 
the man is to be considered in relation to his employment or station ; but 
the word avr^g is omitted, if the man is considered as merely performing 



§ 264.] SYNTAX. ATTRIBUTIVE ADJECTIVE. 363 

the duties of n particular office or emplo)'nient. Thus m'r,Q fiuvng signifies 
a man who is by i)rofeysion a prophet, and (.ntviig witliout a.t>r,Q, a nian who, 
for the time being, acts as a proj)het ; tlius uvy,Q (iacrihig^ urIjQ JiQarvo?, 
arr,g 7ioti.t)jr,uvt)Q ^ijToiQ, etc. ', also in the respectful form of address among 
the Attic orators and liistorians, e. g. ardQfg dr/.uaTnl, ardgsg aiQUTiMzai. 
So Hkewise with national names, e. g. uviiq ''A&T}r(uog,\4;j8i]Qi.ii;g. Tliis 
usage is still more extensive in poetry. See Larger Grammar, Part II, § 477. 

2. When two or more attributive adjectives belong to a sub- 
stantive, the relation thus expressed is two-fold. The relation 
is (a) coordinate, when each adjective is a more full explanation 
of the substantive, in which case they are commonly connected 
hj i<ai, z€ — Hat. Where there are several adjectives, the con- 
nective is used only before the last; (b) the relation is subordi- 
nate, when a substantive with one or m.ore adjeclives forms, as 
it were, one idea and is more definitely defined by another ad- 
jective. In this case there is no connective between the two 
adjectives. Comp. § 319 sq. 

^ayxQonrjg u/a&og aal aocpog uviiQ rjv. II ol Xol u/a&ol uvd^^g or tt o l- 
Xol (xya&ol xal aocpol uvdQsg. 11 o XX a y.aXa eg/a. "0 i fiog sToigog ao- 
<f>6g. OvTog o uvijQ u/a&og. Tg sTg uya&ol ardgsg. To tt g ojt ov xa- 
Xov nga/fia. Od. i, 322 sq. laTog v7]og seixoaogoio jx e X a I v t] g. 

Rem. 4. Adjective pronouns and numerals stand most frequently in the 
subordinate relation. The numeral tt oAA o / is used in Greek, like wiw/^i 
in Latin, generally in the coordinate relation, while the English commonly 
uses the subordinate, e. g. nolXu xal xaXa eg/a, multa et praeclai'a faciuora, 
many noUe deeds. 

Rem. 5. In the Greek, the attributive adjective, very frequently takes the 
force of a substantive, and the substantive to which the adjective properly 
belongs, is put in the attributive genitive. Here the following cases must 
be distinguished, 

a. The substantive stands with the plural adjective W'hich takes the gen- 
der of the substantive, e. g. ol xgr^cnol tmv ar&guirbjv, tw anovdoLa joiv 
Tiga'/fxazbiv. 

b. The adjective which becomes a substantive is sometimes in the Neut. 
Sing., sometimes in the Neut. PI. Th. 1, 118. oVAd^ip'oloL sttI (.liya e/ca- 
gr^auv dwdixscag. Thus many phrases with nuv, e. g. elg nav xuxov 
acpixvslad-ai, iv navil xaxov dvui, elg nav ngoeXrjXv&E (j.ox'd-rjglag. 
Moreover, the Neut. pronoun is very frequently joined with the genitive, 
especially in prose. Th. 1, 49. ^vvsTieaov eg xoiiToavdyxrjg. X. An. 1. 
7, 5. f v T Loix 0) Tov xLv d vv V. Dem. Ph. 1, 51. slg xov^" v ^ g eojg 
iXi]Xv&(v. 

c. The adjective is in the Sing, and takes the gender of the substantive 
which it governs, instead of being in the Neut., e. g. ?; ttoXXj] tJjc neXonov- 
vriaov instead of to nolv xl]g 77. The word i]ixi\Tvg is most frequently 
used in this manner, often also noXvg^ rcXsiav, nXsZaxog and other 



364 SYNTAX. ATTRIBUTIVE ADJECTIVE. [§ 264. 

superlatives, e. g. o i'lfxi^avg rov ynovov, inl ij] ijfiicrsin jTjg ^JJ?. X. 
Cy. 4. 5, 1. 7T£|UnrfTfi lou aiiov xov i]p.i(Tvv, lun' u(jTUiv Tovg ii^latig. 
Til. 7, 3. T 7/ y 71 kf lar7]v t/J? aiQuniig nu{)ijuli\ so rcoXlii ii]g Xo^Qngy 
iQV TcXtlaTOv jov XQOvov. Til. 1, 2. Tjy? /f;? t) uQlaxri ud rug fxtrui^o- 

3. The Greek like the Latin, frequently uses the attributive 
adjective to define the subject or object, not by itself, but only 
in reference to the predicate. In this way the relations of place, 
time and number and also a reason, condition, the way and man- 
ner can be expressed by adjectives, which agree with a sub- 
stantive in gender, number and case. 

a. Adjectives of place. Od. cp, 146. l^s /iv/olruTog aid instead of 
iv //I'/oMttTO). Also, TTQbiiog, vcFiuTog^ ui(Tog, nXa/ioc, lusisoigog, u'/.qog, &v^ 
Qolog, ^aX(X(T(Tiog, etc. S. Ant. 785. cpoirag vns gnovi i o g instead of 

rrf vasQ top noviov, Th. 1. 134. Xva (xi] vnal&Qiog (sub dio) TalanibiQoiri^ 
Here belong also nag, sy. aaro g, ezdisgog, ui^cpo}, ufxcpoTegog, etc. 
§246. 

b. Adjectives of time, e. g. oifJiog, vv^iog, [isaovvxiiog, ■&£Qiv6g, /d-i^ogj 
iaqivog, yji^sqivog, etc., especially those m -« t o g, e. g. dsvTSfjotog, rgnaiog, 
etc., xQonog, etc. II. a, 497. 7] s (j irj 5' ccvi/Si] fiiyav ovqavov instead of >)ot, 
early. X. An. 4. 1, 5. azoTialovg disX&Hv to nsdlov, in the tioilight. 
Tst agi ttlo g, nsfinralog acpUsio, on the fourth, Jjfth day, / g 6 v lo g 
TjX^sv, after a long time. 

c. Adjectives denoting manner and other causal relations, e. g. o|i'?, xa- 
y^ig, alcpvldiog, ^gadvg, inoanovbog, aanovdog, ogyuog ; hwv, axcav, ctoxvog, 
i&sl6vTT]g', ijavyog; avyvog, noXvg, a&goog, nvy.vog, anavLog, ^xovog, e. g. 
vnoanovdoi ixni]faav = vjio crnovdvug. Th. 1. 63. Toig vsy.govg vno cr- 
n ovd ov g anidoaav idlg noTLdaLaTaig. 

Rem. 6. But when the above qualifying terms cannot at the same time 
be referred to the subject or object as qualities, but belong solely to the 
predicate, the adverb must be used. 

Rem. 7. The distinction bet\veen tt^wtoc, n g ojjrjv and n g an ov, 
fio V o g, (X 6v 7]v and jj 6v ov t))v snuTioXqv sygaips appears when the sen- 
tence is analyzed : n g bn og, (.16 v og mean, lam the first, the only one of all 
who has wnlten this letter, like primus scripsi ; ng Miriv, (x 6 v r]v Ti]v enicr- 
joXiiv i'ygaipa, this letter icas the first, the only one I have written ; the adverb 
71 g ioT ov on the contrary, is placed in contrast with a following (or at least 
an understood) 'inenn, utcx, e. g. n g ojt ov fxsv tj^v ini(7ToXrjv sygaipa, 
£ n 8LT a a.lXo n Enoh](Ta, or ngiaTOv means, first, the first time ; so the ad- 
verb jxov ov places the predicate in opposition to another predicate, fj. 6- 
V ov sygu'^a T7;i' i/iiaroXm; I have only written the letter, (not sent it). 



§§ 265, 206.] SYNTAX. ATTRIBUTIVE GENITIVE. 365 

§ 265. h.Att r ibutive G enit i v e. (432, a:u). 

1. The attributive genitive represents the substantive, particu- 
larly as an active, efficient object, i. e. such as calls forth, pro- 
duces, gains and possesses, includes another object, so that tlie 
substantive, which is added in order to limit or define, appears 
as a thing called forth, produced, gained and possessed, in- 
cluded. 

Ol Tov dirdgov y.aQjroi or ol xagnol ol rov divdgov or tov davdgov ol yag- 
nol or ol yagnol tov divdgov — 1) tov ^(DxgaTovg aotpla or 17 ao<f>ia 7, tov 2. 
or tov -T. 1) (jocfla or 7; aocpla tov 2. On the position of the article, see 
§ 245, Rem. 3. 

2. The attributive genitive is named, according to the mode 
of its origination from the sentence, the Subjective, the Ob- 
jective (Causative), or the Passive genitive. 

(a) It is called the Subjective Gen., when it takes the place, in the sen- 
tence, of the subject, e. g. ot tov divdgov y.agjTol, arising from to div- 
dgov (figsL y.ngnovg — to t^c (T o cp I a g ydXlog, arising from 7] a cp la 
nagixft yuXXog — t« tov "Ofxrigov Tion'juuia — o tov ijaaiXiag vlog — 1] tov 
avdgog ugsTi^. 

(b) It is named the Objective or Causative Gen., when it takes in a sen- 
tence, the place of the object of an intransitive verb, e. g, tj t iil ? a cp lag 
in L& vfil a, the desire for wisdorn, {erci&Vfjoj tj]c aocplag), 6 t/J? uost/^c tgwg, 
vututis amor, the love for virtue, [iga) t>]c ttosujc), svroLu TLVog, good-will to- 
wards one, {svvovg dfil tlvl), inifjiiXEia tmv nolf^Lyoiv eg/MV, cura rerum bel- 
licarum, {i7iijj,doiixaL twv 7ioKf[iiy.6iv XgyMv). "II tmv W.aiaiiMv imaTgaTua 
instead oi nghg Tovg II. Th. 1, 108. iv ano^aQU Tr\g yijg instead of inl tt)? 

Pi?' 

(c) It is called the Passive Gen., w^hen it takes, in a sentence, the place of 
the object of a transitive verb, and so expresses an object affected, or caused 
and produced fey a transitive action, e. g. ^ Tijg noXtotg yilaig from xT/^5t Tr,v 
noXiv — o Tii]g eTiiaToXrig ygacpsvg from ygacpsv inioToX/jV — ?; twv y.aXcjv sg- 
yav ngrx^ig. 

Remark. A deeper insight into the subject of the attributive Gen. may be 
best obtained in the remarks on the Cases. Hence, in order not to treat of 
the Gen. in a detached manner, only a few general observations are here 
subjoined. 

§266. c. Apposition. (434.) 

1. A substantive is said to be in apposition, which, for the 

48 



366 SYNTAX. APPOSITION. [§ 266. 

sake of p^iviiiir a inorc oxact definition, is put in the same Case 
with anotluT substantive or with a suljstantive personal pronoun, 
and vvvn with a personal pronoiui which is implied in a verb; 
when it is the name of a person, it is also put in the same gen- 
der and number, § :240, 1. 

KvQOi;, o [j u(T lit (' g, To^vqiq, t) ^SuaD.fia; r/.tlrog, o (juailivg. 
X. Cy. .'). 2, 7. T>iv dvymiqa, duvav re xa IX o c y.ul ^ i y i d^ o q, t^o/oiv oide 
fintv. Til. 1, 137. O f (X LdT oy.Xij g ijxa) jti/qu as. Liic. D. D. 24, 2. u Si 
Jll a i a g xr^g "djXavTog di,axovoiiy.at, uvToig instead of f/ w o IMuiug sc. 

vlog. 

2. When a substantive in apposition is connected with the 
possessive pronoun, it is put in the Gen., since the possessive 
pronouns take the place of the Gen. of the personal pronouns. 

"I'lxig Tov ad^Uov (j'log — za^a lov diVTrp'ov v.ir/.a — a7] Ti,g y.alliajr^g 
iv^oocpla. In English such a Gen. with the possessive may be often ex- 
pressed by an exclamation, e. g. "Eha'iQM juv aov tov uS-liov (jIov, I pity 
thy life, O wretched one !, or by an accessary clause, e. g. / pity thy life, thou 
ivho art so miserable. The Gen. of apposition is to be thus explained where 
adjectives stand in the place of the attributive Gen. PI. Ap. 29, d. ^Ad^ r) - 
vatog Sv noXsajg Tijg (xey lajT] g instead of\4&rjvu)V, 7i6Xeo)g. On the 
expressions o rffihsQcg, vfisTEQog, aqiSisQog avTbJv tidctijo, see the re- 
marks on the pronouns. 

Remark 1. On the ellipsis of the words viog, nulg, -d^vydirjo, yvvi], etc. in 
apposition, see § 263, (b); on the use of the article in apposition, see § 244, 
Rem. 6. 

Rem. 2. A substantive in the Nom. or Ace. sometimes stands in apposi- 
tion with the whole sentence ; in the Nom., when the noun in apposition ex- 
presses a judgment on the whole sentence; in the Ace, when the noun in 
apposition denotes a thing accomplished, a result, a determination, or a 
purpose, e. g. Eur. Or. 496. ind yag llinvivaEv ^Aya^i^vbav ^lov, 7iXr,ytlg xtv- 
yaiQog Ttig fj.aig vjieQ y.doa, — aia/iaTOV &Qyov! II. ft>, 735. i] rtg 
''A/ulmv [aliuv] ^lipsL xhiQtg tXtiv dno nvqyov, Xvyqov o Xi& q ov. Eur. 
Or. 1105. '^EXivTfV yauvb\^iv, MsviXfoj Xv7ir]v n l y. q a v, '\. e. okie hvul Xvnrjv 
7iiy.Q(iv. Aesch. Ag. 225. etXt] xf^viijQ yEria&at -d^vyaTgog, noXi^cov, a q oj- 
y dv (o)CTf (irai aQoiydv). In like manner, a Part, or adjective is sometimes 
added as a clause in apposition to a whole sentence, e. g. Ihl&u CAnoXXbtv) 
"'OQiaTr/V fjrjTtQ , ?;' (T(p fynruio, xTiTraL, n qo g ov x un avT ag avxXeiav 
cp 8Q ov, a deed that brings no fame, Eur. Or. 30. Kal dij naQUjai aufia, aol 
l^sv 01 (plXov Suppl. 1070. 

Rem. 3. The Inf is also sometimes used as a clause in apposition with a 
word, especially with demonstrativ^e and relative pronouns, so as to define 
more exactly an idea before expressed in a general manner. Ov yu(j in\ 
%QVT^ y.d&rjiaL o dty.auti'jg, ijil tw y. ajaxaql^Bij&ai xa dUaia PI, 



§ 2(36.] SYNTAX. APPOSITION. 3G7 

Apol. 35, c. '.4tto to? (xvto^iutov nv vfjlv tovto fyivno, ffjk rfxhvnvni 
(Jij 38, c. '^A dif nQocrirtxiiJUi t/J navrixj}, i n laxo n elv Tovg "Ji^Qonug y.al 
loT^e vf IV Synip. 188, c. 

3. With a substanlivp, which expresses the idea of phiralitv, 
one or more sn])3tanlives that denote the parts of that ])lnrality 
or of that whole, are often connected in apposition in the same 
Case, while the noun expressing the whole or plurality should 
properly stand in the Gen. This kind of apposition may be 
called distributive or partitive. Here belong especially the 
words txaoTog, i/.aTeQog, nag, every one^ ol fitv — o\ 5f, aU.og aV.ovy 
alius aliurn^ one this, another that, one another, or vice versa, 
a).log a)lo&Ev, alius aliunde, one from one loay, another from an- 
other way, or one on one side, another on another. The subject, 
which denotes the whole, may be implied in the verb. 

Od. «, 424. dij TOTE y.ccy.y.elovTeg e/iav oly.ovds excxcTog, in siiam qiiisqiie 
domuni sese coiitulerunt. Her. 3, 158. e^ievov iv ttj eawTov T«it I'y. am og, 
in suo quisque ordine manseriint. Th. 1, 89. otx / «t al fj ev jioXXal 
fnFmb'r/.sauv, oily a l ds nsoiiiaav. X. R. L. 6, 1. tv raig aXhtig noXtuv 
To>v la iTot' ixnaxog xal iiu18mv yen oly.iio)V y.al /grjixuTwv u q y ov a iv, 
suis quisque liberis iniperant. Cy. 3. 1, 3. 8iE8l8qaay.ov i'jdi] e'y.aaTog 
ill tu fiauTOi, ^uvh.(j,tvoL Tu oviu r/.riodoiv noLua&ai. C. 2. 7, 1. t cf ? vm o- 
Q lag ys to'v cfiXtov x <i i: ^ikv 8i ayvoiav SJisiQaTO yvo^urj a/.tldf^ai, x « ? 8 e 
dt ivdtiuv did'tiTy.oiv y.uia dvvai.tLV akli'jXoig fJiagy.slf. PI. Charm. 153, 6. y.al^s 
oig eidov slgiovra i^ uTiQogSuy.rirov, 8v&vg 7iu66o)&tv ^jana^ovTo a XXo g 
iikkox)^ Ev Still, in this case the verb sometimes agrees, not with the ap- 
propriate subject, but with the words h'y.a'TTog, nag, subjoined. X. Au. 1. 8, 
9. ndvTfg olroi xaru e&vr] iv nlnLalu) 7ih']0iL dv&QMnbiv e'y.aiTTOv t if v o g 
inoijeisTo. Tiie partitive apposition is often accompanied by a partici- 
ple. X. Cy. 3. 1, 25. t'vLOL (foSoi'^EvuL, ^r, lijcp^^ivTfg unoOuvoiiiLv, Ino 
rov cpn^ov Tiooarto&vi'ay.ovffiv, ol (.lev ^inTovvreg saviovg, oi di 
an a yx 6 fi £v L, ol d e. dnoacpnTxc jxsvol. Her. 3, 82. a vxo g tx a- 
az og (i o vXo fxEV og xogvcpalog dvui yvbijir,Gl ts viy.fjv, ig i'/&fa fifydka dk- 
h]koLat, an Ly.viovT a L. Here belong those passages, in which, after the 
principal subject, another subject in the Nom. and connected witli a Part., is 
mentioned, being expressed by a special substantive, which, however, makes 
a part of the principal subject. Th. 4, 73. (o I ^A&rjv aloi) ijirv/a^ov, koy l- 
^o lAEv I, yjil 1 ixilvMv crTQaTtjyol /i>; dvilnakov fivuL acplfTt tov y.lvdv- 
vov, the Athenians kept silence^ since even their generals, namely^ the Athenian, 
suppose that, etc. 

Rem. 4. In the same manner in poeti-y, especially in Epic, but very seldom 



368 SYNTAX. OBJECTIVE RELATION OF SENTENCES. [§§ 267, 268. 

in prose, two objects (commonly in the Ace.) are joined to one verb ; the 
iirst of these (hniotes the entire thinj,', the other, tliat part of it to which tlie 
action of the verb is particularly directed, both being in tlie same Case. 
This figure may be called (r;^ >; ^ « xmi'A' olov y.ul fiifjog. The whole 
ex})resses a plurality, yet so that a distributive; apposition may take place. 
JIolov a 8 tnug cpvytv l' (jxo g uduvTO)v Od. a, (Jh 7'() oi u g di i^ofjog utvug 
vni]ki'x)s y vX a I'xuajov Jl. v, 44. ^A/ a tola lv di fiiya uOivog tfi^al 
sxti (TT 0) xagdltj uXlrjXxov noh^lQuv rjds fiuxsaifui 11. |, 152 sq. 



SECTION 111. 

§267. The Objective Relation of Sentences. (435.) 

As the attributive relation of sentences serves to define the 
subject (a substantive idea) more particularly, so the objective 
relation serves to define the predicate more particularly. By 
the object, is to be understood all that which, as it were, stands 
over against, (objectum est) the predicate, i. e. everything by 
which the predicate is more particularly defined, namely, (a) 
the Cases, (b) Prepositions in connection with Cases, (c) the 
Infinitive, (d) the Participle, and (e) the Adverb. 

§268. I. The Cases. (436.) 

1. All the relations, which the language denotes by the in- 
flection of the substantive object, were originally relations of 
space. 

2. The action of a verb, as connected with the substantive 
object, is contemplated under the idea of motion. In this man- 
ner the object of the verb appears in a three-fold aspect, namely, 
first, as that out of which the action of the verb proceeds, second- 
ly, as that towards which the action of the verb tends, thirdly, 
as that by or in which the action of the verb takes place. In 
this way three Cases originate, namely, the Genitive, denoting 
the motion or direction ivhence, the Accusative, ivhUher, and the 
Dative, used not to denote the duration, but the place, lohere. 

3. The relations of time were viewed in the same man- 
ner as those of space. Thus the Gen. (the whence-case) de- 
notes the time,/rom which an action is conceived as proceeding; 
the Ace. (the whither-case), the time to which, or over beyond 



§ 269.] SYNTAX. CASES. REMARKS ON NOM. AND VOC. 3G9 

which the action is conceived as proceeding ; and the Dat. (the 
whcre-case) the time in which an action is conceived as existinjr. 
4. The relations of causality, also, were regarded as denoting 
the relations of space. The cause (the ground, the origin, the 
author), was conceived as the outgoing of an aciion from an ob- 
ject in space (Genitive) ; the effect (the result, the consequence), 
as a motion in space tmcards an object (Accusative) ; the means 
(the instrument), as the resting of an action at^ in or with an ob- 
ject in space (Dative). 

§ 269. Ft em arks o n t h e No m inativ e and Vocativ e, 

(437, 438.) 

L The Nom. and Voc, so far as they do not express any objective rela- 
tions, cannot be considered as Cases ; the Nom. is the form for the sub- 
ject, and the Voc. is the form which is used in a direct address to a person 
or a thing. But the predicative adjective or substantive, which is joined 
to the subject by the copula fi>«t, is expressed, as in other languages, 
by means of agreement, by the nominative ; and even the objective rela- 
tion of an action, as seen in the verbs referred to in § 240, 2, is viewed in 
the Greek and Latin as a relation of agreement, and is expressed by the nom- 
inative ; the English language in most of these verbs may express this re- 
lation as objective by means of prepositions, e. g. He is turned to a beggar, 
he is made or chosen /or a general, he is known /or a dever fellow. 

Remark 1. In the verbs ovofza'Csiv, cvofid^sff&aiand the like, the Inf eivat, 
is often connected with the Nom. or Ace, and thus in some degree the re- 
lation of the action is indicated. Her. 4, 33. Jug ovofiu^ovai /lr,).ioi slvac 
'Tjifov/rfV T£ xttfc ylaodi'/.TiV. 5, 99. UTQairj/oig ullovq unidi^s instead of 
anidsL^s, MtXr,(jl(x}V sir a i. ' 

Rem. 2. When the object o^ nvai, and /L/vsad-ai is an abstract, the Latin 
uses the Dat. instead of tlie Nom., id mihi honori est, but the Greek always 
employs the Nom. Her. 3, 15G. e/w ifilv 7jzw fity tax ov u y a& 6v, /iu~ 
Qtio) ds y.rxi rj] ajquxui y.al IJsQarjaL fisyiajov xaxov. X. C. 2. 3, 6. 
XuiQscpMf ifAol 'C,ri ^l u fiixlloy, rj u) cp iX el u icrzLV. 

Rem. 3. As the Nom., being the Case of the subject, denotes an object as 
independent, the Greeks readily use it in the quotation of a name, com- 
monly in connection with opoua, inuvvfxux, particularly in the phrases, oVo- 
/itt iarl ^uoi, ovoua t/u), but even also without these substantives, in connec- 
tion with verbs of naming in the active, though in that instance the name 
may stand in apposition in the Ace. Her. 3, 85. /lagvloj 8s ?]v Innoy.ofioc, 
xa ovvofia i]v Oi^ocQrjg. 1,199. MvliTza 8i. auliovcn lijv^AcpQodlirjV. 

2. Sometimes the Nom. seems to stand instead of the Voc. in connection 
with a direct summons or call; but in all instances of this kind, the Nom. 
contains an explanatory exclamation, which itself becomes a sentence. 
Here belong particularly the following instances, 



370 SYNTAX. GENITIVE. RELATION OF SPACE. [§§ 270, 271. 

(a) OvTog either alone, or in connection with the Nom. of a i)roper 
name, is often used \vhen one calls out to another, in the sense, ho there! 
PI. Symp. 172, a. u *ha}.i]qt v ?, t(f »;, o vi o q ^Ati olXo8 Mtyoq^ ou nfQt- 
fisvug; whicii means, 5ee / this is that JJpolbdonis, tJie Pliakrean, who comes 
there ! 

(b) Very often in this way, the Nom., with the article, standing in appo- 
sition, is subjoined to a call or direct address. 

PI. Symp. 218, b. I de olyAxui, y,(xi si rig liXXog tail ^iSrjXog ts xal 
a/Qotxog, ni'Xag ni'xvv fir/dki/g joXg mitIi/ ini&sa&s (the same as, ijjiHg 5e, oi- 
xirai ovjfc). X. Cy. 4.5, 17. i&i ^sv oiv av, s(fT), o nqEu^viaxog, in- 
stead of o-u, og ii nq.). 

§270. (1) Genitive. (44o.) 

The Gen. is the Whence-case, and thus denotes, (a) in a lo- 
cal relation or in a relation of space, the object or the point from 
which the action of the verb proceeds, e. g. ei'xeiv odov, cedere 
via; (b) in a causal relation, the ground, origin, or author, es- 
pecially the object, which calls forth, produces, excites, occa- 
sions, the action of the verb. e. g. im{>vfi6j ztjg aQSTtjg, § 268. 

§271. A. Local Relation or Relation of Space. 

(441, 442.) 

1. The use of the Gen. expressing a purely local motion is 
rare and only poetic, e. g. El {a^ t6v8e nEiaavzeg Xoyoj ay o ivt o 
vijaov [ah insula ahducerent) S. Ph. 613; this relation is com- 
monly indicated by prepositions with the Gen., e. g. «7ro, from^ 
i'A, out of, TTaQCi, from, from the vicinity of an object, etc. 

2. But the Gen. very often denotes the relation of separation 
(separative genitive), namely, in verbs of separating, disjoining, 
loosing, keeping one's self from, desisting, ceasing, keeping 
off from, freeing, depriving, differing from, missing, devia- 
ting from ; thus in prose, TzaQa/ojQeTv, v7tox(an8i^v, ai'/.aiv and vTzei- 
y.Eiv, vnaviGTa6\fai and ih'azaa&ai, voacpil^Eiv, y^coQiL^eiv, dioQiXeiv; dqji- 
Evai, dcptEGO-ai, dTTEyatv, aTTE'^scyO-ai, navEiv, navead-ai, xcoXvEiy,.iQ7]TVSiv, 
EiQyEiv, IvEiv, eIevOeqovv, (CTiaXXdrzEiVy gteqeTv, dnoatEQEiv, X^iQ^^^i ^Q^' 
{lovv, diacpEQEiv, diiaordvEiv, acpaXXEod^ai, ipEvdEaO^ac, etc. ; diEXEiv and 
aTrtjEiv, to be distant, etc. 

Her. 2, 80. ol vfon^goL aiTioiv Tdltniiqm^iniqoKn avvTvyxdvovxig tXy.ov- 
a I T i] g 6 5 V. X. Cy. 2. 4, 24. vn ox o) g s2v tov n s8 iov. Hier. 7, 



§272.] SYNTAX. CAUSAL RELATION. 371 

^. 71 a gax 0}Q(Xv odov. Syinp. 4, 31. vn av laravr ai 8e f^oi ijdrj y.ai 
■& iixb)v Ttui u 8 utv ill <n uvT It L 01 nXoiaioi. Vectig. 4, 4G. « ji i^ z i 
t(x)v a gyi'QflMV i) iyyijuxa noXtq Msya^u noXv nXnov 7bti> mvxuy.oalMV 
aiadlun'. PI. IVIenex. 24(j, e. innsT)]^i] /MQi'Qofxivr] 8iy. aioavvrjg. 
II a V o fj,u I yoXov. yl v o), « rr « I ). a i T «') Tivu x ax m v. Her. 3, 81. 
y V wfiTjg rijg u q itrr i]g i, fj a g t i] x s. 5, 6'2. rvQavvuiv 7} k s v \)^ s () b't & r]~ 
aav. 3, G5. TJJc,' ^ttaiXij'i'r^g sot £ q i] fia i. X. Ilier. 7, 3. ^oxh {joi Totro) 
d lu (p i Q s Lv ariiQ tmp uXImv ^wwr, ro) iifii'jg ogiy^ai^aL. Wivdo- 
fiat, atptxXXofiai iXnldog, do^rjg, ivy rig. ^A(f)li]y,l iiva t?7? 
an I a g. An out i q (a lira t m v u y a\)^ m v. 

Remark 1. Many of these verbs are often connecteci with the prepositions 
uno and £x, e. g. iXev&f^ovv, Xvfiv, tlgyfiv, unn'gysiv, e^eifjyHr. fQi]TLfiv. 

3. Also with adjectives, adverbs and substantives expressing 
the same idea, e. g. ilev-O^snog, ^6i>oq, y.ad^aQog, y>av6g, ^'Qiifiog, yvixvog, 
OQCpavog^ xpilog — diuqjoQogy uXXotQiog, dXXoiog, tiEQog; with many 
adjectives compounded of a privative ; with dvev, xcoQig, nh]vy 
tico, r/.ag, ^V/«, ntQuv, etc. 

E. El. 387. ul 8s aixQxsg al xival cfQEV(x)v ayitX^m uyoQug tiaiv. 
Her. 3, 147. « 71 « i9^ »/ ? xaxiov. Th.l,<8.q)iXovgnoiHodai, sTSQOvg twv 
vi'V ovTbiv. X. C. 4. 4, 25. TroTf^oi' lovg d^iovg i]yfi t« Sixuia vofioOsinyj 
9] u XXa r biv 8 ixa I bi v. Cy. S.S, 55. un a 18 svr o g fiova i xijg. So 
OT I fiog in a iv (av. Avcrig, iXs v& e q la xuxbtv. Her. 8, 144. ixu g 
Xq6vov[u&eA of time instead of place). 6, 103. nigrjp Trjg o8ov. 
Dem. Phil. 1. 49, 34. tov naayfiv uItoI xaxojg e'Sra ysn'iaEa&e. 

4. Here are classed verbs of originating and beginning, e. g. 
uQXSG^ai, uQX£iVy VTZUQxeiv, 'AaTaoy^eiv, i^aQxeiv. 

*'Aqxe(t &a I X iv g e. 2,, Tov n oX ifi ov, means in general to begin 
something, 2'iv jolg SEolg u g y e(T& a i ygij navTog sgyov, but«^/cfv, 
vn ufjy ELV, xax u Q y E iv means, among other things, to do something 
Jirst, to begin, hence to bt the cause or author, 'll ^yioa xdlg'EXXriaL /j Ey uX wv 
xaxcjv a g ^E I Th. 2, 12. 'Ttux gy s iv u8 ixut v egycav, ev e g y eg l a g. 

Rem. 2. *A gy e(t & a i uno xivog, e. g, ano xoiiv axoiyilbiv means, to pro- 
ceed from a thing, and thus to begin. 

§272. B. Causal Relation. 
The Gen. in the causal relation signifies, also, a going' outy 
proceeding from^ but not, as in the local relation, a mere out- 
\v.ard relation, but an inward and active one, since it expresses 



372 SYNTAX. GENITIVE, AS THE EXPRESSION OF ACTION [§273. 

the object by whose inward power the action of the subject is 
called forth and produced. 

§ 27;i. (a) Tli e G enitiv e as the general expres sion 

of action. (444—459.) 

1. The Gen., expressing action, stands, in the first ])lace, as 
the Gen. of the origin or the author (Genitivus orig-inis or aifc- 
toris) and is connected with verbs of producing, arising, having 
originated or arisen, e. g. yiyveoOai, cpveiv, (fvvai, elvai. 

Her. 3, 81. M ^ / cr T w J' a v 8 q uv ohog (consentaneum est), uQicna ^ov- 
Xsv^ara ylvsad^at. X. Cy. 1. 2, ]. naxQog fisv di) Uysiai o Kigog 
y iv so & ai K a II ^ V a V, IlfQabJv ^aadiojg ' o ds Kuji^3var]q o'viog roi 
JIfQcrsidojv yivovg I'lv' ni]TQog di ofzoXoythuL Mav8uv7]g ysvs^ 
a & a L. PI. Meiiex. 239, a. jx lu g hi]t qo g navifg adsXqjoi (p vvrig. 

Remark 1. Commonly the preposition tx, more seldom «7ro, is connected 
with the genitive. Hence the attributive Gen., mentioned above, § 265, 2, 
may be explained, e. g. o xov ^ a a ilea) g viog, i. e. o [iy.) lov ^aaiXscag 
{ytvvr,d-Hg) vlog^ tw rav av&gcdnbiv ngdyfiaTa. 

2. The Gen. of action stands, in the second place, as that 

object which has gained another, made it its own and possesses 

it, as the owner, possessor (Genitivus ^055e5Som or posse ssiviis). 

This Gen. stands, (a) with the verbs ehat, yevsad^aij noieia&ati to 

claim to one^s self; (b) with the adjectives i'diog, oiaeTog, leQog, y.v- 

Qiog. 

Antiph. 5. 140, 92. 70 ^ej' axovaiov aunQirifia Trig Tvyrig iarljiuds 

kxomiov T 1} g yvMfirjg. Lys. Agor. 135, 64. £/€ j' £to o Ei(xoiQ7]g oliog 

Niy.oxXeovg, belonged to JVicocles, was Ms slave. Th. 5, 5. iy svet o 

3Is(Tarjvi] Aoy.(i mv Tiva ygovov. Trig t^^'T^V? yvtai^rjg eivat, ejusdem senten- 

tiae esse. Eaviov dvau, to he one's own master. Dem. Phil. 1. 42, 7. t/v 

V fjLwv nl T 6}v e&sh'}(7r}Ts y £v sa & a i, non ex aliis pendere. Also sival 

Tivog, alicujus esse, alicui addictissimum esse, e. g. sirai fl^dtmiov, sivat 

Tov iSeXjlaiov, studere rebus optimis. X. Ages. 1, 33. t7/v Aaiav iavicov 

noiovvxai. Isocr. Paneg. 46, 29. ?] noXig rifxojv y.v q I u yn'O^iirrj xo i- 

ovxtov ayad-ojv ovh Icp^ovr^cTS xolg uXXoig. X. An. 4. .5, 35. r^yovdiv 

ai'jov {xov 'ircnov) Isqov dvai xov 'llXiov. 5. 3, 13. o IsQog/ojgog 

Tij g 'Aqx Efi id og. Dem. Ol. 1. 26, 28. ol ylvSwoi x wv iqtsaxriy.oxcov 

{ducum) id 10 1, fiLjd-og 8 ovx ecrxiv. 2.32,16. xavxrjg y.vgiog x^ig 

X (x)g ag yevijaETai. In the attributive relation, §265, 2, e. g. xov ^aa i~ 

Xsoj g yS]Tioc, y ^ coy g ax v g agsxi], naxijg NsonxoXifiov. 

Rem. 2. The Gen. is connected with verbs of declaring and judging, as 



§273.] SYNTAX. GENITIVE, AS THE EXPRESSION OF ACTION. 373 

it is witli flrai. Dem. Ol. 2. 34,21. 5 1 x o / o v noXlxov xq iv w ttjv twv 

(c) Hence the Gen. denotes in connection with shai (a) the 
object to which anything peculiarly belongs, which peculiarity 
is commonly expressed by an Inf. ; (/5) a property or condition 
of the subject (Genitivus qnaliiativvs). 

Ardgog tffTiv aya&ov sv noiuv Toig (pllovg. ti English this 
Gen. is translated in various ways, e. g. it is the business, mamier, custom, 
peculiarity, duty, mark of a hrave man ; it becomes a brave man ; it bespeaks 
a brave man ; a brave man is wont, and the like. Dem. Phil, 1, 54. y. a v.- 
V Q y ov i (Txl y.Qi&ivT, being sentenced, uno&avHV, (Tt q axr) y ov ds fi.cc- 
XOfterov rolg noXff.uoig. Ol. 1. 18, 2. eaxi xmv ula/g cav {N eut.), fiuU.ov 
ds TWV a t CT / / 0" T 0) v, Ti6h(x)v, b)v Tjixiv Tioxb xvgiOL, q^aivsa&UL ngoisfiivovg. 
Chers. 102, 48. doy.H xavT a y.al d an dv7] g fityotXrig xal novwv noX- 
Xav y.al ngayfiaxElag sivai. Aphob. 1. 814, 4. f|U6 I'ttt ix(ov 
ovxa. X. An. 7. 4, 16. ^iXavog MuyJaxiog, ex uv oxx ayal 8 sy.a wv, 
irrjfialvsi, tJJ aaXniyyi. 1. 4, 11. o Ei'q)gdxrjg noxafiog xu svgog iaxt xsxxd- 
g (av (Txad l(av. 

Rem. 3. Here, also, belong the expressions ijyncr&ai, noLeta&ai, d^nvub 
n oXXoi', nXsf'a X ov, oXly ov, iXaxlfy^ov, etc., since the worth of a 
thing is conceived as a propert}". 

3. The Gen. of action stands, in the third place, as that ob- 
ject which embraces one or several other objects as parts be- 
longing to it ; the Gen. represents the whole in relation to its 
parts (the partitive Gen.). This Gen. stands, 

(a) With the verbs, £« i'ttt and yiyvEcd-ai; ri'&Evai, ri- 
-& ea-d^ui, Ttoieiad-ai, ^ysiad^ at., numbered among-, accounted^ 
and with many others. 

Th. 1, 65. xal tti'xog ij&sXs x cov fisv 6 vt av siv a i, one of those remain- 
ing. X. An. 1. 2, 3. ^ y xal 6 Swyqaxrig xav dfxcpl MlXrjxov axQaxsvo- 
[iivbiv. Cy. 1. 2, 15. oV av uv iv xdlg xsXsloig {avdQacn) diayevuvxai 
uvsnlXr,7ixoi., oi'xot x (o v y sg a lxsq oiv ylyvovxat, reckoned among the 
elders. Dem. Phil. 3. 122, 43. 57 ZiXud iuxu xi] g ''Aa lag. Plat. Phaed. 
68, d. rov d^dvaxov riyovvxat ndvxEg ol uXXol x mv fisylaxojv xaxatv si- 
vai. PI. Rp. 376, e. fiovaLxijg d\ dnov, xlS-T]g Xoyovg ; ad musicam 
refersne sermones? Pliileb. 60, d. (pgovrjaLV xal dXrj&rj do^av Tijg avxrjg 
I 8 sag xL&ifisvog. Rp. 8. 567, e. noiE'la&al xtva xwv 8ogvq> 6- 
g 0) V. Her. 7, 6. xaxiXiyt twv xQV^ f^^'*'') recitabat vaticiniorum sc. par- 
tem). So xifivEiv yr\9, devastare terrae, sc. partem. 
49 



374 SYNTAX. GENITIVE, AS THE EXPRESSION OF ACTION. [§273. 

Rem. 4. The })artitive Gen. is very oftcii used in the uttrihiilive relation, 
§ 2(J5, 2, thus, 

(a) With suhstaiitives, e. «:. aiuyot fg idiaoq^ aoi^uxioQ (Jkoog; 

(b) Willi suhstaiitive a(lj<'rtivos, in the j)ositive, con)i)arative and superla- 
tive, wlien the ])artitive expresses the hiiihest de^'^ree ; uith substan- 
tive j)ronouns and numerals, oi/o?;(TTot Tti>y uiDou'moir, ol tu (fQovuvV" 
rtg iixtv itvd^{jMnon> — noVkol, o/.r/oi, Tirig, nltiovfg, ttIhujoi, lotv uv- 
SQo')riuiv. In addition conip. above, §2(j4. Rein. .5. On the contrary, 
ol dvtjToi uvd Q(xmoi^ siuce the ])ro[)erty of niorUility belonj^s to the race ; 
nolXol or u).iyoi av&()M7ioi expresses a whole consistin*^ of many or 
few (a jjreator small number of men), noD.ul or lUyoL uvdQb'trjotv de- 
notes the many or few as a part of the whole ; so iQilg yj^ilg ii^^r, 
i. e. ive were three in all, Avhere in Eng. it would be, there were three of 
lis, TQHg ijiMv 7](Tav, i. e. iJiere were three of us, (of our number) therej 

(c) With adverbs, as follows, (a) of place, e. g. nov, nov, m), nodiv, ov, 
-i], 01'dai.iou, navTU/i], tioqqo) and n(joao), further, etc. Her. 2, 43. ov- 
dajji] Alyvmov. Pi. Rp. 3. 403, e. fldiriti, onov yijg iari. 
Hv J av d^ (X TTj g ij X i x i a g, j ov X6 y ov. ^Oquts, o i nqosXr^lvd^fV 
a a sky slag Dem. II avr n/ ov j ij g y^g, ubivis terrarum. II 6 q- 
Q (X) a 0(f) I a g iXumeiv or i']y.tiv. — (/5) of time, e. g. o ip s t f/ c i] fi i~ 
Q (xg, T i' X Q V V, j^j g i) X ixlcig. Tq Ig tij g ■>) fieq ag. 11 o X- 
Xun ig Ti] g rj }XSQ ag. 

Rem. 5. The partitive Gen. with a superlative, sometimes refers, not td 
the superlative, but to the subject. Her. 7, 70. ol ix t?J^' yiiSur^g AlOionsg 
ovXoTnrov rql/b^^a txovai niivr wv a v & iJ (o ti o) v. So always with 
adverbs, X. Cy. 3. 1, 25. navT uv t wv 8 siv oj v o qpojjo? (.t uX tax u y.u^ 
janXijTJSt lag xpi'x^g. 

(b) With words which express, («) the idea of participation, 
sharing in, of community, of having things in common, e. g. 
IxEtr/Eiv, fihmTi fioi, didovai, y.stadidovai, TtQogdidovai, Siadidovai, y.oi- 
vmvelv, -Aoivovod-cu, EnaQy.Hv, to communicate^ ovvsQyog, auoiQog, etc. ; 
and the three words, -Aoivog, iaog, oiioiog, which commonly, how- 
ever, are connected with the Dat. ; — (^5) those which express the 
idea both of physical and intellectual contact, of holding and of 
laying hold of, of being connected and of hanging together, e. g. 
d-iyyavaiv, -ypaveiv, ccTrzead^ai, dQatTeo^ai ; 7.an^dvead^ai, fiETa-, GvXXa^- 
^dvEiv, E/ii; dvziXafj^avE6&ai.; ovvaiQEG&ai; a/EaOai, to adhere to, 
to border upon, dvz-, nEQiEXEO&ai, ylr/EOx^ai ; iTzr/coQiog, (fiXog, also 
with the Dat,, ddtXcpog, did8oxog, often also with the Dat., itijgy 
iq)E^tjg, more rarely with the Dat., nqoad^Ev, tfiTTQao-O-Ev, omad^Ev, fis- 
la^v, and many other adverbs ; — (7) those which express the 
idea of acquiring and attaining, e. g. Tvyj^dvEiv, acquiring and 
hitting-, Xayxdvsiv, Eqji'AVEioOai, yiXr^QOfOfiSiv (with Gen. of the thing, 
to inherit; with Gen. of the person, to be the heir of some one ; 



§273.] SYNTAX. GKMTIVr.jAS THE EXPRESSION OF ACTION. 375 

with Ace. of tlie thing and Gen. of the person, to inherit some- 
thing' fVom one, 7TQ0i;i;x€i [ftoi jivng, something belongs to me) ; {8) 
those which express the idea of striving to acquire something, 
e. g. oQr/eaOaiy icpieaOca, dvrtTioitiaOai, ad aliqiiid contendere, po- 
tiri, lyTnh7ita\>ai, to turn one^s self to something, to regard, to 
have respect to, oToy(c'^Er)\>ia,to aim at something. 

X. Cy. 1. 2, 15. e'lfo-Tt Tovroig x«J ug/biv y.al ti^aiv ftsTi/SLV. R. 
L. 1, 9. Tov ^ur yivovg y.cd xriq dwiifisog xo lv o) v o v a i, xttv de 
Xqr, utiT 0) V ovy. urr in o i ov vt uv [sibi vindicant). Cyr. 7. 5, 78 sq. & a l~ 
novg fiiv y.al ipv/ovgxal (tItcov y.ut noxotv y.al vtcvov uvu/y.r] xal 
Toitg doikoig fi er ad I d ova I, noXf fxiyii g d^ in latii ixtjg y.al fieksTrj g 
ov fieiadoieov. C. 1.2, 60. ^a)y.Qdr7]g nuaiv ucp&ovaig ini] ^y.Ei t 6jv 
kavTov, Cy. 1.3,7. tmv XQtMV diaSidovav Tolg x^egansvTalg. Th. 
6, 39. oXiyaQ/la t a> y ^h y.Lvdvvwv rdlg noXXolg fisTadidoiai,, tmv d 
cj(fs).tfi(ji)v ol nltovfXTH fiovov^ alXa y.al ^i\unuv ucpslofiivr] e'/EL. PI. Pliaedr. 
238, b. T« TOVTOJV udskcpd [horum similia). X. An. 4. 1, 17. i] noqda 
b (10 la cpvyijg iyivizo. Hel. 4. 4, 6. (o|tov icxL) x ojv yt xakXlaxcDv y.al 
fityldxojv a y a& djv 6 q sy o (lev ovg d^isnaLvoxuxyjg x sXevx ij g 
TV/ i7v. 4. 8, 18. ijv 6 OsQaardgog ov fxovov aihixi]g dya&ug, d).Xd y.al a X~ 
x?), dvxenoLslxo [ad fortttudinem enUtbatar). Cy. 1. 2, 3. novriQov 
Xivog i] alaxQov egyov i cp lea& a l. S. 3, 10. fnaLvoicrt, y.al dand- 
^ovxaL oi xoioixoL {ai\uijtt/oi) xovg c/xotovg, vojui^ovxeg avvtqyovg avxovg 
sivai xovxoLvovdya&ov. Pi. Syrap. 181, c. v jj g s (a g iifioigog. 
Menex. 241, c. egyov xo tvov Aaxed ai (lov Imv xs xal ^A&rjvaiujv 
(hke communis aliciijus rei). Anx o ^a l xijg /sigog. Her. 1, 93. Xlfivij 
s/ sx a c xov arinaxo g ixtydkrj, borders on. 3, 72. egyov i y co (is-d- Uj 
opus aggrediamur. JJEgLS/ofxai xivog, cupide aliquid amplecti. Th. 1, 
140. xriq yvojfiTjg xi] g avxijg e^ o fiai. 4, 10. avdgEg ol IwagdfXE- 
voL xoI'Se xov X lv d V V v. pi. Rp. 2. 362, a. dX-q&Elag i / 6 y.Ev ov, 
cum veritate conjimctum. 'AvxlX a ^3 s a & a i xiav nguyf.idxb)v, capessere. 
Isocr. Nicocl. 22. b, c. ineidlj &V7}X o v a w (laxog ax v/Eg, d& av uxov 
de ip vy rj g, migb) x),g (pv/i'ig d&dvaxov luvrfiijv xaxaXimlv. Tvy/dvEiv^Xay- 
xdvELV ygriudibjv, Evxvylag — xvyzlv XEXsvxijg, 6v6(Aaxog, etc. Isocr. Paneg. 
80, 187. ovx iq) ixv ov fiaL xov {u, sy id- ov g, sc. xajv ngayfidxuv, non as- 
sequor. PI. Crit. 52, c. ovx ixEuvovg xovg Xoyovg altr/ivr], ovxs -^ fi uv, x wv 
V 6 uoJVj ivxginp. X. C. 4. 5, 11. doxElg pioi XiyEiv, wg dvdgl 7\xxovl X(ov 
dt,u xov ao\uuxog ridovb)v ndfinav o v 8 Ef^ id g a g sxij g n g o gijxE i. Dem. 
in Aristocr. 690, 14. o ixol xXrig ov o fiova l xij g v (.i ex ig ag 86 $r]g xal 
Twv V fisxigwv a y a & m v. 

Rem. 6. In verbs expressing participation, sometimes the word deno- 
ting a part stands in the Ace, e. g. X. Hier. 2, 6. ol xvgavvou twv 



376 SYNTAX. GENITIVE, AS THE EXPRESSION OF ACTION. [§ 273. 

fi(/laT(x)V ayuO^MV n Xflaj a ^tTi/ovaL. An. 7. 8, 11. tVa p; fitja- 
S ols f TO lAtQog x()r]fjuib}v. Accordin*^ to the analogy of verbs of touch- 
in*!;, vcrlis of entieatin*:: and conjininjr, are connected with tlie Gen., which 
denotes the person or thijig, l)y whom or wliicJi oik; entreats or conjures, 
e. g. Xiaaea&aLy IxsTivfiv, ly.vuaOui, since tlie snpphcant, touching the knee 
or the image of the thvinity, utters his i)rayer. Od. /5, (if5. lioaouui r^^iv 
Zvivog Olv^iiriov rjds Oi^iOTog, So XlaataOuL 7iur(j6g, Toy.ijojv. Comp. li. x, 
454, fiev ^iv tfifXlE yiveluv ;(fiQl Tia/tlrj uipuutvog ki(jai(T\)uL. 

Rem. 7. TJic poets connect many other verbs with the Gen., among wJiich 
ai'e those mentioned under (b). II. tj, 56. fxea a ov 8 ovq og e >L w y. Od. 
y, 439. ^ovv d' ayijTjv xsqocojv. II. «, 197. Jar^TJ? de xo^ijg tie 
JlrjXflwva. In plirases, like Xa^uv Jiva yovvwv^ onnsa&ul tlvu yivdov, etc., 
the knee and the beard are conceived as the objects, on which the person 
who touches and lays hold, hangs, and, as it were, depends. Here belong, 
also, in poetry, 

(a) Verbs of tasting physically and intellectually, grasping, reaching to, and 
hence of striving after an object, e. g. in i fia l8(T& a t cxoniXov, 
dcagav, voutov. 

(b) Several verbs, which properly express the idea of a very hasty motion 
towards an object, and are then changed so as to express an intellectual 
effort, and longing, e. g. inelysa'&aL, oQfiaa&aL, i7TL^aXXe(T-&ai, inuia- 
Gsiv, rushing upon something, etc. II. t, 142. in s Ly 6 }isv6 g neg ^'Agrjog. 
E. I, 488. (X) g fj, 1] & rj d^ "Axaiiavxag. H. S^> 68. ^'i]TLg vvv iv a g ojv 
in L^ aXXo fiEv og fx^TonLddsv ^iixviTO). 

(c) Verbs of aiming, e. g. to^sislv, axoviiCsiv (in prose with ftg, and with 
the meaning, to hit, to wound, with the Ace). II. g, 304. "Exziag S' am 
AlavTog axovT l(Ts dovgl cpaeivM. II. ip, 855. ?) g cig uvayu t o $ - 

EVE IV. 

Rem. 8. According to the analogy of verbs of aiming and striving, above 
named, so we find xara x^ovog o/A/xaTa 7r?j|«i, uXeIv inl 2u^ov, to sail towards 
Samos, as if setting out for it, (on the contrary, inl ^a^ov, to Samos). The 
Gen. of aim, object, occurs in the attributive relation, e. g. in odog, voaxog 
Tonov Tivog, way, return to a place. 

Rem. 9. There also belong here, (a) the adverbs Evd^v (Ion. Id-v), straight- 
forward to something, fii/gL, to, up fo;— (b) verbs of meeting and of approach- 
ing, which, still, in prose, are commonly connected with the Dat. ; — (c) ad- 
jectives and adverbs expressing the same idea, e. g. avrlog, ivavxlog, naga- 
nXi]<nog, still oftener joined with the Dat., ccvtIov, nXrjalov, etc. Her. 6, 95. 
I^oj' (dirigebant) Tag W«? iS-v tov "EXXrjgnovTov zed t^? Ogrjcxt] g. 
2, Si. t) Ai'yvmog rrjg ogsLvijg KlX ixltcg ficcXidTU xr] uvtIt) xinai. 
Dem. Ph. S. 117 , 27 . n Xri a 1 V Ori^ iav y.al "Ad^rjv cov. 

4. The Gen. of action stands, as the Gen. of the place at 
ivhich, and the time when, an action happens. The fact or the 
event belongs, as it were, to the place and the time, proceed 
in a certain measure from them, and are supported by them ; 
hence the place and the time are conceived as supporters of the 
action. 



§273.] SYNTAX. GENITIVE, AS TUE EXPRESSION OF ACTION. 377 

(a) The Gen. of place is almost exclusively poetic. 

II. (>, 372. Wqpo? ^ ov cpctU'ixo n a a rig yal7]g, els' oQtwv. II. i, 219. 
avTog ^' avTioy i^fv Odvaaijog \)^iloio toI/ov tov stsqov. Hence, 
especially in Epic })oetry, with verbs of going, or of motion, the place or the 
way to wljich the going or the motion tends, and to which, as it were, this 
action belongs, stands in the Gen., e. g. 11. §, 801. BQxovxai n e8 io lo. ;f , 23. 
-distv 71 ( 8 io 10. »', 64. TT e <5 / t (!| diwy.uv oqvwv. So the prose, Uvai tov 
ngoaa. 

Rem. 10. Hence the adverbs of place, ou, nov^ nov, unov, amov, ovdafiov, 
aXXaxov, etc., and hence, also, adverbs of place with the suffix ^ev appar- 
ently instead of adverbs of place with the suffix &l, e. g. evdodsv, iyyv&iv, 
T'rj).6-&sv, ey.TO(T&sv, etc., e. g. II. q, 5S2."Ey.T0Qa d' i y y v & ev laia^uevog wt^i'- 
vfv ^ATtoXXwv. 

(b) The Gen. of time often occurs both in poetry and prose. 
The space of time within which something happens, as if the 
supporter of the action, may be expressed by the Gen. 

*'Av&r) d^dXXei rov l'«^og, the spring is conceived as the producer or 
supporter of flowers. So S-sgovg, xeifxm'og, ijfAsgag, Ttjg kittJc iifisgag, vvxrog, 
dtlXrig, oTiMQTjg, as Eng. of a morning, he did it of a fine morning, also ^rivog, 
ivtavTov, etc. with attributives, e. g. tou wi'toD, tou ngoTigov, ey.aajov, etc. 
Hence the adverbial expressions ugxvig, at the beginning, and tov XoLnov,for 
the future. Her. 4, 48. *'Jo-t^o? t'oroc «ft «lto? swlto) giu koI -d-sgovg y.al 
Xsifiotvog. 6, 12. TO t' Xo lti o iJ //tj niLd^Mixsd-a uvzou. PI. Phaed. 59, 

d. i^ijX&ofisv TOV &£(Tfj,biTriglov ha nig ag. Ov (xay.gov xgovov, avyvov, noX- 
Xov, nXsloTOv, oXlyov xgovov, noXXwv vfisgwv, ixoiv, etc. Her. 3, 134. Tavxa 
oXlyov xQovov sarat, teXsv^isvcc. X. An. 1. 7, 18. ^acnXsvg ov (xaxurai 
d ixa 1] fieg (OV. PI. Symp. 172, c. n oXXav ix av ^Aydd-av iv&dds oix 
STiidEdilfxrfXSV. 

Rem. 11. By the Gen. of time, the Gen. absolute may be ex-plained, e. g. 
T i) Kvgov ^aaiXevovTog noXXd ts y.al y.aXa sgya vtto tcov UsgaoJv 
ingdx&r]. 

Rem. 12. Prepositions are often used to define this relation more exactly, 

e. g. ix noXXov xgovov, dcp eanigag, inl Kigov, Cyri aetate, did noXXov XQO- 
vov, ivTog or I'crw noXXov xgovov. Comp. the remarks on the prepositions. 

Rem. 13. On the distinction between the Gen. and Ace. of place and 
time, see the remai'ks on the Ace, § 279, 6. 

5. The Gen. of action, finally, stands as the Gen. of the ma- 
terial out of which anything is made, formed, and, as it were, 
produced, or the source out of which something is drawn. 
This Gen., stands, 

(a) With verbs of making, forming, etc. 



378 SYNTAX. GENITIVE, AS THE EXPRESSION OF ACTION. [§ 273. 

Her. 5, 82. ;if « A X u noiiovxixL ta u/aluaTU. 2, V]8. iajoMuivri i<ru 
vdoQ k l& V. Til. 4, 31. kQv^a uvt6\)i i,v X I 0^ 0)v XoyudrfV n in o ti] fiiv ov. 
Ill llic attributive relution, c. g. tanoi^u lilov, jquth^u uf)yv()lov^ axi(favoq 

Rem. 14. This relation is very often ex{)rcssed by the Dat., and more de- 
finitely by the prepositions t| and utio, also did. 

(b) AVilh verbs of fulness and want, e. g. TiXi^O^eiv, nlr^Qovv, 
TTifinXuvat, yefiEiv, ^Qi&etv ; vuogeiv, adtreiv, evnoQEiv, etc. ; dnoQUVy 
Tit'naOai, dEio&aij deiy onavi^eiv, /qi^, etc. ; Tzltog, nltjQtjg, fiEotogj nXov- 
oiog, duGvg, etc.; 7zer?]g, Evdti^g; ahg [satis). 

X. Synip. 4, 64. (Tfo-a/^gyo? nlovzov ti]v ipv/J]v saofxai. PI. Apol. 
26, d. T« 'AvalayoQov ^n^Ua y 8(481 tovtmv xmv Xoywv. I^vnoouv, 
aTioQelv, nivea&ai, (snaviL,fLV xixiv /()7?/iaTwy. X. Cy. 3. 1, 3. ^ t « ^ s o y t o) v 
y.al eXavvovTwvTo nsdlov ixsax 6v. An. 2. 4, 14. (5 « cr u ^ d iv 8 q ojv. An. 
1. 2, 7. nuQadsiGog fiiycxg, uy gi cjv S^ijq Itav nkriQ r]g. 1. 4, 19. ivTuv&a 
riaav yiM^ai nollal, y^Eoxal aixov y.al ol'vov. [n the attributive rela- 
tion, e. g. dinag ol'vov. 

(c) With verbs of eating, drinking, enjoying, satisfying one's 
self, and in the figurative sense of having the enjoyment, use 
and advantage of something, tod^ieiv, cpuyeiVj evaydoOai, tziveiVj 
yEVEiv, xoQEGao&ai; aTToXavEiv, etc. 

'£(!& Is LV y.Qsaiv — xoQsaacr&ai (p o q (i i] g — n Iv blv ol'v o v . 
X. Cy. 1. 3, 4. drdyxv) aoL dnoysvEa&aL xovxtav xuv navxodanmv ^gmfxd- 
Twv. 1. 3, 10. x«t xl 8/], to J\V(js, xuXXa (uifioi'ijsvog xov ^uy.av, ovy. an tgq o- 
q)r]<T ag xov ol'v ov, C. 4. 3, 11. dnolavsLV n dvx (ov x oiv d y a& uv, 
but unoXavELV x lv 6g x t, e. g. dya&d or x«x«, to receive good or evil from 
some one. Fsv eaS- ul xi^xrig — y evelv xivd xiuijg. 

Rem. 15. The Ace. stands with verbs of eating and drinking, (a) when the 
substance is represented as consumed wholly or in a great quantity; or (b) 
when the common means of nutriment is indicated, that which every one 
takes. Od. t, 347. Kiy.Xo^ip, z/J, tt / « o iv ov, end cp dy e g dvdgofxsa y.qia 
X. Cy. 1. 3, 9. oix ixnlofiat, avxog xuv oivov. 1. S, 6. y. q s a ys e v a) / o v, 
£.„IC/V^ --ii**** hmrtily. 6. 2, 28. v8axL ^^^Lyy,iv}]v del xi)v /j d^av ia d^ is i. Ibid. 
fiexd ds xov dlzov idv olvov in vnlv (a (xev^ ovSev ^uhov t/ovaa ri ipv/tj 
avttTr«L'(r£T«i (spoken of a habit). So ia^lsiv y.gsa and y.gsojv, nivsiv 
oivov and ol'vov. PI. Symp. 176, c. n oXvv niv e lv oivov. 

(d) With verbs of smelling, emitting an odor, etc., tiveTv, 

O^ElVf TlQOg^dXXElV. 

^'O^Biv I'bjv, fiVQOv nvslv, nQog^dXXsLV ft v gov, nvslv xgd- 
y ov, o^sLV Tig fxv (OV. Ai\ Ran. 341. wg i)dv fioi n g oginv tva e x oi- 
gsLbJv ng eojv. 



§273.] SYNTAX. Gr.MTIVEj AS THE EXPRESSIOxX OF ACTION. 379 

Rem. 1G. The Poetic Language connects many other verbs with the Gen. 
of the ninterial, c. g. anoaxll^siv ahlqirxTog, {vfxvag, nvQog jj e i X ia a i^ 
ftev^kovsa&ai (v^^siog noia^oXo. See Larger Grammar, II. § 527, Rem. 

(e) Willi several verbs of sensation and perception, namely, 
axovHv, dxQoaaOca, uTzodr/^EG&ai, to assent to ; ahddveo&ui, oocpQai- 
psaOat; cvm-puf, to comprehend, with Gen. of the person; so like- 
wise, with verbs of remembering and forgetting, mjivi]6y.Hv (iivd 
Ttvoi;)j fiifiv/ja/.eaO^ai, iTnlavO-dveaO-ai, hence Xd&Qa, Xa&Qaiojg and 
xQvq>a Tivog. 

Her. 1, 47. y.al y.(xiq)ov (Tvvli]fiL, y.al ov (p av ivvr o g ay.ovw. 1, 80. 
w? o(T (f Q an Tu/jUTu T (jjv y.ufiTjkwv ol XrtTcoL, yal sidov alnag, onlaca 
aviaTQfcpov. X. 11. 4. 4, 4. t tj ? xq avy 7j g fj a & ovt o. An. 1. 1, 8. ^acri- 
Xsvg T ij g -uiv ngog eavTov inn^ovXrig oly r](T'd^uvsTO. Cy. L 3, 10. 
orx u y Q o 0) fiev L t o v udovrog Wjt/j'i'fTf udEiv uqkttu. Phaed. 92, d. 
jtitjrf euavTOv ^i]t uXXov ujTodi/sa&ai Xiyoviog, o.g 7] i/'i^j; ttniv uo^xovla, 
to agree with. 'Ayoheiv dly.rig, to hear a cause, ala^avsad-at, i]dovix)y, oai^rig, 
XQavytlc, -^OQi'-Sov, iSor^&fiag. 'Tti fiv rj (T a I Jira r o v Xoyov. X. Cy. 
8. 3, 8. T i; cpx} 6v ov in eXiXmno. In the attributive relation, nvi] ^utj 
Ttuv xaxbj V. 

Rem. ]7. The attributive Gen. has a far greater extent of meaning, e. g. 
ay/sXla t/J? Xlov, de Chio, eQcoTrjuig tivoc, like quaestio alicujus rei, instead 
of de ahqua re. 

Rem. 18. With verbs of hearing, and perceiving, there stand (a) the person 
alone in the GJen., which represents the person as the source fi'om which 
the perception appears, e. g. ukovm ^or/.Qarovg, I hear Socrates, i. e. his ivords : 
(b) the thing alone, and this is put either in the Gen., which expresses the 
substance as a wiiole, of wliich one sees, as it were, single parts, or the 
meaning and contents of which he perceives intellectually, e. g. ulad^dre- 
ad^ai y.Quvyr,g, to perceive, as it were, single tones of the cry, uitT&urea&ai iixir 
/jorAJjc, to perceive something of the plot ; or in the accusative, ^vliich shows 
that one perceives with his senses, the totality of a thing, e. g. zJl m> al~ 
u&urovTac {ol (ir^gbmoL) ixaara, the senses by ichich men ohserve evei-y 
object, X. C. 1. 4, 5. '^fig j-o&ovjo t ?; v ^ oi'id^ tiu v, when they noticed the 
approaching succor = saw loith the eyes, therefore, also, eb)Qb)v Th. 2, 94. On 
the contraiy X. H. 4. 8, 19. ula-diod^ui, xr, g ^ orjd^ e lag, they observed some- 
thing of the succor. The Ace. of the person seldom occurs with alo&uve- 
cdai, which then has tlie meaning of udirai, e. g. AladuropuL di y.al t v~ 
Quvvovg rivdg, ot ovib) nuvMdL /^r/iawTcm' X. Symp. 4, 36. Verbs of 
hearing, perceiving, observing, as well as remembering, often govern the Ace. 
of the thing, sometimes, also, of the person. They are often connected 
with the Gen. of the person and the Ace. of the thing. See under (f). X. 
Cy. 3. 1, 1. o "AQuiviog, o)g ijy.ovas x ov ayyiXov xu naqa xoi) Kvqov, 
iliTiXuyii, as in the Lat. audire aliquid ex aliquo ; so avviivui xivog xi, e. g. 
£710?. MfpLvr,ij9^ai x'o nqaypa. 

Rem. 19. '^xo v£ ty, vnaxov siv, xaxaxovsiv with tlie meaning 



380 SYNTAX. GENITIVE, AS THE EXPRESSION OF ACTIOxN. [§ 273. 

to ohey^ often tuk(j tlio Gon., and accordin<( to tlic same analog n sl& e^ 
(T & a t, yet Keldoni, and a n e t x) si v ] ho also x a j i] x o o g, vni']xo og with 
tlie tjcn., nion; seldom with tlie Dat. Her. 3, (i*^. nqouyontvu T)fuv Ji'juc'^- 
d log ^ a<T iXTj og axo ve iv. 3, 101. /J a q siov ^aa iXij og oldufxa 
vni'ixova uv. 1. 1, 20. vvv (Lv i ^ io n el 6 6 ^ iv o i ylvta&s iXsv&SQOL. 

(f) Finally, the Gen. of the material stands with verbs of 
seeing, hearing, experiencing, learning, considering, knowing ; 
of judging, examining, saying ; of admiring, praising, blaming, 
OQuv, {ysuadai, oy.oneiv, vtzovoeTv, ivvoe.Tv, yiyvcoa'ASiv, ETZioraad^ui, tids- 
vcu, ivd^vfiEiadai, etc. ; nvvd^dveadai, ai6d-dveo&ai, fiavdaveiv, xqiveiv, 
i^erdl^eiv, XtyeiVj dijXovv, etc. ; uyaad-ai, d^avfid^siv, BTiaiveiv, [itficpead^ai, 
iptyEiv, and the Gen. indicates the object (commonly a person) 
about which or whom, one perceives, sees, contemplates, 
knows, examines, an action, external indication or some single 
circumstance ; or of whom one learns, hears, afhrms some- 
thing ; or in whom one perceives something to admire, praise 
or censure. That, which is perceived in the object, or affirm- 
ed of it, is added in the Ace. of a substantive or substantive 
pronoun, or in an accessary clause, or in the Gen. of the Par- 
ticiple, which may, at the same time, denote the person. 

X. C. 1. 1, 12. Uqcotov fxsv a i; T (u J' {^JojxgccTTjg) i (txott s l, tiotsqu noxs 
vofilaavjsg ixavoig ridrj Tocv&Qioniva stdivoti sg/ovrai, inl to tisqI toiovtwv 
cpQOVilC^iv, 7} TM fiiv av&Q(a7iELa TTagivTsg, xa daifiovia ds axonovvTEg, ty/ovv- 
xav Tu TiQogijxvoia 7iq(xtt8lv. 1. 6, 4. iTrio-jisipotfxs&a, tl xaXsnov j] (T&rja a i 
Tov fi ov ^ lov, in my manner of life. An. 3. 1, 19. d l a& eoj ^8V o g av- 
T w V, oariv lAEV ;^ci)^av xal o'idv exolev. Cy. 7. 2, 18. tyv w y.al fiaXa aiona 
ifiov TioLovvTog, he perceived in me that I was doing an absurd thing. PI. 
Gorg. 463, d. ag ovv av fia&o ig anoxg Lvocfii v ov ; instead of ag ovv 
av (lov fj.(x&OLg, a a7iov.glro(icci ; wilt thou then have understood my answer '? 
Th. 4,6. iTiv&ovTo rilg TIvXov xaTEiXrjfAfisvi^g, instead of invd: 
T))g IlvXov, oxi y.axEiXr]fi}AEvrj t)v. 5, 8S. j] a & o v x o x ei x i Co vx m v, instead 
of j](jd; aviMV, oTi xsixl^oiEv. The Gen. of person alone, PL Phil. 51, c. eI 
fiov ^avS-dvELg, instead of eV fiov fi., a Xsyoj. Her. 6, 76. a y a. (t & a l 
xov^E g a(T Lvov ov Txgodidovxog xovg noXiyjxag. Th. 1, 84. x6 ^ga- 
dv y.al ^eXXov, o ^ e }xcp ovx ai fidXiaxa ?; fioj v, f^i] aluxvvEa&E. X. Cy. 3. 
1, 15. ft a y aa a I x ov n ax g 6 g, rj oaa ^E^ovXsvxai, r/ oaa ningax^, ndvv 
aoi (tvjjPovIevco xotxov ^i^fla&ai. Ages. 2, 7. xu8^ avxov ayafiai, oxi 
nagEdXEvaaaxo. 8, 4. iyu xal xoixo inaivb) ^Ay rjff iX d ov, xo ngog xo 
dgiaxELV xo~Lg" EXXriaiv VTngidHV xr\v ^aaLXiag ^Evlav. PI. Men. 95, c. Fog- 
y lov ^dXiaxaxavxa a y a^ai. Theaet. 161, b. o & av iid^w xov ixal- 



§274.] SYNTAX. CAUSAL GENITIVE. 381 

Q V. Criton, 43, h. ao v ndXai ■& a v (i « $"&>, ala&nvo/uivoc:, ag iidiuig y.a- 
\)fvd{ic. Rp. 38S, a. noXXu 'O fxi] q ov in aiv ov vr eg aXXa xoiro ova 
inaiviao^ifdn. 

Rem. 20. The verbs above named imply in themselves an Ace. e. g. oqm 
rivet or T/, axoTTM rivu or t/, tTuxirio, ipiyw, i^ifjcpofiai, a/c/^ual to« or rt. 

(g) In expressions of being acquainted with, ignorant of. of 
being skilled and unskilled in, of making trial of, of ability and 
dexterity, e. g. f^meiQog, uTzeiQog, iTztazij^cov, Iniordiievog, dvemaiiinav, 
TQt^wv, avyyvojficjv, dda/ig, dnaldevrog, idt.(ort]gy neiQciod^ai, aTzeiQCog, 
^fvcog 6/£/t; with adjectives in -ixog (derived from transitive verbs) 
which express the idea of dexterity. 

^'£(.1 7T f I Q og or in icr t 7j fiwv f f'^ut i^]g li/vr^g. Her. 2, 49. t // ? &V(t lag 
xuvxrig ovx a 5 aij g, aXX' SfinsLQog. — 'A n a id evTog a g sri] g, fiov- 
<T Lxi] g. X. Cy. 6. 1, 37. (jvyyvwfiiav t mv av-& q o»7t Iv mv n q ay- 
fiaT o)v. — ^ An e I Q Mg i' x siv rivog. — 'A noneiQatj ^ a i yv(x\urig. (In 
the poets this use of the genitive is still more extensive.) II. o, 412. ximo- 
vog^ ug (5« ts nddr^g iv s 18 fj a o cp i ag. ^. C. S. 1, 6. n a q a a x s v a (t t l~ 
X 6v T b) V fig Tor noXf^ov lov aTfjarrjyov eivuiXQ^J >^«* nogiaiLxov tojv 
in irrjd e i. b)v xolg (ngaTitoraLg. PI. Euthyphr. 3, c. dLduaxaXiy.og t>j5 
avTov aocp'iag. PI. L. 643, d. tiXs lo g rijg lov nquyiiaxog aQtTi]g^ showing 
one^s self perfect in a thing, 

§274. (b) Causal Genitive, (460-465.) 

The second division of the causal genitive includes the geni- 
tive, which expresses the cause, i. e. the object, which calls forth 
and occasions the action of the subject. This genitive stands, 
1. With many verbs which denote a state or affection of the 
mind, viz. 

(a) A desire and longing for, im&vfieiv, Iquv, eQcorrAmg sxsiv, or 
diay.eia&ai ; dixpfiv, TTEivfiv ; 

(b) A care for, a concern for, imfAFlsiad^ai, qiQovztXeiv, yiri^EGd-ai, 
TTEQioQuax^ai, TTQooQav, vTieQOQfiv, to despise, tiqovoeiv, [xsXet, [A.eTa(i8Xei, 
dfAeXtiVj oXiyajQEiv, (fEidead^ai ; 

(c) Pain, grief, pity, olocpvQE^'&at, TTEvd-ixojg exeiv ; eIeeiv and otx- 
reiQEiv with the Ace. of the person and Gen. of the thing; 

(d) Anger and indignation, ogyit^Eod-ai with the Dat. of the 
person and the Gen. of the thing, xalETiMg (pEQEiv ; 

(e) Envy, (pOovEiv with the Dat. of the person and the Gen. 
of the thing, inicp&ovcog dLaxEiad^ai', 

50 



382 SYNTAX. CAUSAL GENITIVE. [§ 274. 

(f) Admiration, praise and hlume, -O^avnuteiv and ayaa&ai 
(with the Ace. of the person and the Gen. of the thing, some- 
times also with the Gen. of the thing and the Gen. of the per- 
son, which depends upon or is governed by that thing, see Rem. 
2), <^i,).ovVy tvdaijiovtXeiv, Inaivtiv, fit^irfEod-ut, all with the Ace. of 
the person and the Gen. of the thing. 

PI. Rp. 408, a. ogd^og towg Tiicfvye ^oay.lov T£ v.ul y.uXov aiocpQO- 
vcog T£ y.ul fiovaixoig iqav. 438, a. ovdng noxov cTrr^VjUfl, u'f.la 

X 07](TT V TIOTOV, KOl OV CT l T V , (iXXu / Q 7] (T T O V gItOV 71UV~ 

Tsg ytxQ (xqa twv aya&oJv in t&v y.ov a iv. Symp. 181, b. ol cpuv- 

XOL TWV aV&QCOJT(i)V T CO V G bi fj, (X T (O V fluXXoV, 1] T b) V Ip V / b) V S Q 0) <T t V. 

186, b. TO uvofxoiov av fiolcov in U'&v (xeX xal i q u. 216, d. -Tw- 
xQotTTjg iQojTLXbjg diixxELTciL T bj V y,aXb)v. X. Cy. 3. 3, 12. (Xi'^o?) 
xaxtlvovg inoh]aiv i q oiT ly.u) g txtiv tov rjdr] n o lelv tv. X. O. 13, 9. 
n £ Lv (y>(T L TOV in a Iv OV ov/ i}Ttov tviui tmv Cfvaewv, i] aXXui t aiv a L- 
T bjv TE y.al 71 OT bjv. Attributive, e. g. %a)c, inL&v^la uQEjiig, amor, cupi- 
ditas virtutis. Th. Q,\^. y.i]8 z(j& u i ri) g n6X8b)g. Her. 3, 151. inoXiog- 
xse [Ba^vXbivlovg) (f> g ovt I^ovt ag ovdh xij g n oX lo gzlrj g. 3, 159. tov 
gLtov n g 00 g av. X. Cy. 1. 2, 2. JlEgacov vo/iol [ag/ovTai) tov xolvov 
ayad-ov in l^eXov ^ev o l. MsXel fxol Tivog. 5. 1, 22. rMjgva nee- 
gdaofj-Ui noLsiv f^r,noTE fiET a ^sXija a L Trjg ngog ifis odov. Id. C. 1. 2, 
9. vn EQO g av inoUi twv y.aS^EdTcoTbJv v 6 f^biv Tovg awovTag. Th. 4, 
124. Bgaaldag tt] g Msv drjg n Eg l o g m fXEV o g. X. H. 5. 4, 1 . d^iol ovTt 
TMV cKTE^ovvTwv, ovTE Twv OLVofSia noLovvTbJV a ^eXov <ji. Cy. 8. 
7, 15. iavTov xrj d et a l 6 n g ov o wv u 8 eX q) o v. Attributive, e. g. 
q)govTlg tmv naldav, cura liberorum, care for children. So inifiEXijg Tivog. X. 
Cy. 5. 4, 32. o Kvgog axovaag tov (isv n dd- ov g bjy.T e Lg ev avTov. 5. 2, 7. 
T7JV d^vyuTsga, nEv&ixwg E/ovtrav tov u d EXcp ov TE&vrjxoTog, 
i^dyuv ads EinEV. Symp. 4, 37. TOVTOvg olxTslgb) ttj g ayav / uXEnrjg 
V 6a ov. Atti'ibutive, e. g. aXyog ETulgojv [de amicis) ; moreover vrith adjec- 
tives also (though only in poetiy), and especially in exclamations with or 
■without interjections. Eur. Or. 413. ol'fio l d i uy ixwv, olg iXavvofxai tu- 
Xag ! X.Cy.S. 1,39. (fEv TOV dvdgog ! PI. Rp. 509, c. "AttoXXov, d a l- 
^ov lag vuEg ^ oXrig! X. Cy. 2. 2, 3. t tJ ? ^ VXV ?> ^o ifis vvv y.Xri&ivja 
devgo tT^eIv ! O ill fortune, that I am called hither at this time ! Lys. c. Philon. 
187, 11. y.a&i(JTr^y.E tl sd-og dlxaiov ntxaiv dv&gwnoig, t (av ai/xwy a^txT/- 
(XUT biv fidXiaTU ogyi^EuS^at toI; ^laXKnu dvvufxivoig (xi) ddixslv, Totg ds 
nevTidiv ')] ddvvuTOig tm aw^arL avyyvbiixr^v e/eiv, did to riyE'ia&UL dxoviag 
avTovg d^ugTavELV. In poetiy, the Gen. is much more frequent with verbs 
expressing anger, e. g. H. |, 266. 'iZ^ax^Tjo? TiEgi/ojaaTo, naidog koto. 



§274.] SYNTAX. CAUSAL GENITIVE. 383 

Od. a, 69. {lIo<Tsi8da)v) KvxXoyTtog xexoXtora i, ov 6(p&akfiOii aldbifftv, S. 
Aiitig. 1177. ;iaT^^ fii]rlaug q)uvov. Eur. Or. 749. I'aag aoi -d^vyuxiqoq 
S-vfioifisvog. Attributive, e. g. /oXog nvog, ira alicujus instead of de uli~ 
quo, anger respecting some person or thing. fPx)^ov eIv jivl rijg ao(flag. Th. 
1, 75. «|to/ iapev dg%iig /s rjg Bxopiv To'ig"EXXr]<TL y.i] o'mwg ixyuv in ^(f>&6- 
v (ag S I ft X sT (T & (X I, it is not just that we should he envied on account of our 
sovtreigntij. So also in poetry, neyalgoj, e. g. Aescli. Prom. 627. ov ^s- 
yatQb) Tovdi aoi db)QrjpaTog. Attributive, e. g. (jpi^^oyo? Tiyoc. X. Cy. 2. 
3, 21. Toi'Tov ovv 6 Ki'Qog d y a(T-& si g ri] g xe tt q uotijt og y.ul xi] g d i- 
datTxaXlag aal xi^g in l ^eXsla g, ixaXsas nal xavxTjV xi)v xu'^iv inl xo 
Stlnvov avv xm xa^idg/oj. Symp. 4, 45. ^rjXoj as xov nXovxov. PI. 
Synip. 194, e. 8oxov(TL ndrxsg xovg dvdgo'movg svd a Lfiov l^siv x mv uy a- 
^wr, biv o dsog avxolg ai'xiog. Ion. 530, h. noXXdxig ys i'Cv X wcr a vpdg 
xoig ^aipcoSovg xijg xi/VT^g. Dem. Cor. 296, 204. xlg ov/. uv dydauLxo 
X b)V dv d Q oiv i'/.sivwv xij g a q sxijg; illorum virorum viHutem. Lys. 
Simon. 100, 44. -& uv {.id'C oj pdXiaxu x o ix ov x ij g diavolug, hujus men- 
tern. Id. Eratosth. 124, 'il. i& av ft aa a xi] g x 6Xp,i]g Twy Xsyovxwv. 
So ^vith adjectives, e. g. PI. Phaedon. 58, e. sv d a Ip, cov fioL 6 dvvQ icpai- 
vsxo y.ui xov X Q 6 n ov y.al x mv Xoy w v, b)g udtwg y.ul ysvvulojg exsXsvxa. 

Remark 1. The Gen. with the above verbs is often governed by preposi- 
tions, especially n sq I, e. g. iniixElila&uL, q^govxl'sSiv nsgl xivog. Some verbs 
which denote a state or an affection of the mind, do not govern the Gen., 
thus no&slv, to long for, to feel the want of always governs the Ace, 
and so (piXsXv, dyunav, gxsq y s iv, to love ; the last two also in the 
sense of to he contented with, take the Dat. = Lat Abl. Several of the above 
verbs have also different constructions, in which case they commonly ex- 
press different ideas, q. ^. cp q ovx I'Qslv x lv o g or n s q I x iv o g X. C. 1. 
1, 11. 4. 7, 6. to he anxious for something, but cf q ovxI'Qslv x l, scrutari, inves- 
iigare ; — n qovos7v, ngoogav r i, to perceive heforehand, to consider he- 
forehand ; vn SQOQ (iv x l and x lv og, despicere, in the same sense. In poe- 
try, piXsL sometimes takes for its subject a noun denoting a thing, in the 
Nom. ; but in prose, it takes only a Neut. pronoun in the Nom. The verb 
is then used personally, MsXria ova lv 5 ' ipol Xnno u II. y., 481. Tu v- 
X a (xsv ovv & soj peXrj a s l F\. Phaedr. 238, d. 

Rem. 2. The verbs d^uvpd'QsLv and uy acr& at have the following 
constructions; (a) the Ace. of the person or the Ace. of the thing alone, 
when the wonder or admiration extends to the whole person or thing, or 
to the whole nature of a person or thing, e. g. &uvpd'C(a xov axQuxriycv, S^av- 
pd^a xi]v ao(fluv; — (b) the Gen. of the person and the Ace. of the thing, 
when one admires something in a person, e. g. ^uvpuQw Swy.gdxovg xi-v ao- 
cfilav ; — (c) the Ace. of the person and Gen. of the thing, when one admires 
a person on account of some quality, e. g. S^avpd'^M Zcoy.guxri xi^g (Tocpiag, 
see 1, (f); — (d) Gen. of the thing and the Gen. of the person depending up- 
on it, when I wonder at the quality of a person, or admire the quality of a 
person, e. g. d^uvpdC,^) ^wy.gdxovg xi^g aocplag, see 1, (f); — (e) the Ace. of the 
person, and instead of the Gen. of the thing, a preposition, commonly inl 
with the Dat., e. g. -d^aypd^o) Soixgdxri inl xfi aocpla. 



384 SYNTAX. CAUSAL GENITIVE. [§274. 

2. With vcrb.s wlTu-h express ihe idea of requital, revenge, 
accusing and condemning, the den. denotes the guilt or crime 
which was the cause of the reciuilal, revenge, etc. Hence this 
is true of JiimQu'indai which governs the Ace. of the person and 
the Gen. of the thing, as well as of verbs relating to judicial 
proceedings and of accusing and condemning, e. g. ainaaOaiy 
iTTuiTiuoOui, diojy.tir, ti\'dytiv, VTZuytir, yoacftaOai, 7Tnogy.(/J.ti(7\)(a, all 
w^ilh the Ace. of the person and the Gen. of the thing, inf-hnai, 
iyy.aleip, inioy.i]nTead^ai, all three with the Dat. of the person and 
Gen. of the thing; qjevyeiv, to be accused; Sr/.u^eiv, y.Qiveiv, aiQti'vy 
to convict, all three with the Ace. of the person and the Gen. of 
the thing, and aXojvui., to be convicted. 

Her. 3, 145. rovg iniv.ovQOvq t iji o) q i] a o fi a l t ?] c Iv&uSe u n i^ l og, on 
account of the invasion of this land, 'l^n a it i a a-d u i Tiva cfovov. Her. 
G, 104. [MiXTLudsa) ol s/&qoI i d Ioj^ av t v g aw Ido g tt, g iv Xsgaovi^voK 
^£71 s^ Lsv a I TLvl (f) uv V. FQucpsa&al riva nagavofiojv. ^l^ sv- 
y s iv xloTii] g, (p 6v ov, aa e(S si a g. KglvscT'&ai u a f ^S e I a g. X. 
Cy. 1. 2, 7. niqiTai dmaQovai aal s/ vAi] fx ai o g, ov evsy.cc uv&gcojioi /ut- 
aoiiuv JU£V alX)']Xovg fidXidTa, dixa^ovjai ds i]y.i(TTa, uxagKnlag. C. 1. 2, 
49. xma vouov (i'lcffTt) n ag av o lag sXo vt i. xal tov naisgu diiaai. Dem. 
Aphob. 846. in laxT^nTsad- al tlvl tcov ipsvdo^agxvgiMV. 8G1, 
58. cp svy s LV ipi-vdofiagtvgt,(av v no Tivog. "AXoiv a i y.Xoni\g. 

Rem. 3. Also the punishment for guilt is put in the Gen., but this 
Gen. is to be considered as the Gen. of price, § 275, 3, e. g. -d^arnrov y.gl- 
vsLV, y.glvEad^ai, dibr/.siv. Sometimes the prepositions nsgl and I'vExa are 
joined with the verb, e. g. diwyMv xiva -jieoI qpovoi;; and avil with TifiwgHa^ai. 

3. Finally the Gen. of cause is also used in the following 
instances, 

(a) With TOV ^1] and the infinitive. See § 308, 2, (b). 

(b) With the adverbs f u, yaXojg, ixsTglutg, and the like, also with w ?, 
n w g, on 03 g, j], u n ]], ovTcog^cjds, u g a v t a g, connected with the verbs 
E/EiV and 7]'^ ELV, sometimes also with styui and other intransitive verbs, 
the object by which a condition is caused or occasioned, is put in the Gen. 
KaX(x g E% (o n o d wv, I am well in respect to my feet. Her. 6, 116. ^A&r]- 
valoL, a g no d a v eI/ ov, TO-XLaxa i^oi]d-Eov eg to uaxv. 5, 62. ;( gr] /xd- 
T(ov EV ijxovTEg. So Ei, xuXotg, fisTglMg e/elv (jIov, cpgEvoJv, yivovg dv^ 
vd^Ewg. OV'EXXtjVEg oDtoj? Ei^ov o^ovolag ngog dXh]Xovg. X. Cy. 
7, 5, 56. c' T 0} T g onov ex el g. H. 4. 5, 15. uig t d^ ov g Ey.aaTog eI^ ^ v* 



§275.] SYNTAX. GEN. DENOTING MUTUAL RELATIONS. 385 



§ 273. (c) G e nit I v e denoting- c 67' tain Mu tiial Re- 
lations. (4CG— 470.) 

The third division of the causal Gen., includes the Gen. by 
which certain mutual relations are expressed, e. g. the relation 
of the ruler to the snbject. As a ruler necessarily supposes a 
subject, and a subject a ruler, the one may, in a measure, be 
considered the cause or occasion of the other. Hence the Gen. 
is used, 

1. AVith verbs which contain the idea of ruling, preeminence, 
excelling, prominence, and the contrary, viz. such as contain 
the idea of subjection, inferiority, to miss, e. g. an opportunity, 
aQX^ir, '^QUieTv, deaTto^stv, TVQavvaTv, zvQavvevetVj aiQareyelv, stutqotzsV' 
eiv, iTziGTUTsh; ^aaileveiv, r^ymovevuv, ijyelcd-aij etc. ; with the adjec- 
tives, hyy.Q(CTi]g, dy.naTi'ig ; — TTQoe/siv, nEQitivca, TiEQiylyvtGx^ai, nQoara- 

reiV, VTTEQ^U/./MV, V7lEQ(f^'QElP, TTQCOTSVeiV, TTQEO^EVtlV, TTQOy.QlVElV, TtQOZl- 

[ifp, 7i).E0PEy.TEii', etc. ; — iitidod^ai, vozeoeTv, v6zeq(l,eiv, ilu7Tovo\}ai, 
fiEiovaO^ai, ^EiovE'ATEiv, voTEoov alvai, ijzrora eIvui, etc. 

Her. 7, 97. T ov vaviixov scnQaTijysov o'iSs. 99. i] y sfiov sv g 
'Alix a Qvlrjcrai oiv. S,15. in it q on iv s iv Al y v n x o v. 142. ovje f.iob 
HoXvxQUTrig r,0Eay.E dsano'^cov uv d q o) v 6 ^ o Iw v hoiVToj. Th. 1, 69. 
o Ao/o? TovEoyov iy.o OCT ei, fama superabat rem ipsain. X. Cv. 1. 1, 
2. a gx ovT sg fisf tin y.al ot ^ovy.olot t al v ,5 o al v, xttt ol InnocfooSol t cu y 
Xnnoiv, y.ril nuvjfg 6e ol y.a/.oi\uevoL voiuHg, ojv Sv inicnarcxxri ^wcuv 
tlxoTOjg uv uQ/ovTsg tovtuiv voiui'^oivTO. 4. 1, 14. fuol ds doy.sT r i] g 
fisylarrig ijdovi/g no'/.v (.lu/uaru avucpioHV iy yg uj i] dvui. 5. 1, 14. 
ia ixo/di}ou av&Qoont,u naa oJv, oluai, t cuv intd^v^ioiv uyQarij iari. 
Her. 6, 61. xuXXiotsvosl to nuidlov naasMV t w v iv SnvtQTri yv- 
vaixuv. Th. 1,81. Tutg oTT/.oig uvxoJv xul to) nh]&£L in ( g q) i q o fx sv. 
X. Cy. 3. 1, 19. Tu/sc nsgLsyivov ai'Tov. PI. Gorg. 475, b. axupcous^ 
■da, aga Xvnj] vneg^uXXsi, to udiy.Hv tov u d iy.t7,<T-d- a i, yal uXyovat 
fiaXXov ol adiyoivtsg, ?/ ol udr/.oiixivoL (the Ace. is more usual with vnfg- 
^dXXsiv). L. 75'2, e. n g ect ^ sv siv twv noXXiav noXsiov. So also 
avixECT^ai t iv og usually with a participle, to endure. PI. Rp. 564, e. 
ol'x a V i/ ST a c tov liXXa Xiy ovx o g. Apol. 31, b. uvsx^o&ai t ojv 
oly.tioiv u u s X V fi i V (o V. "lIi t a a & (x i twv inidvfiibJv. Dem. Cor. 
308, 244. oL(5(/aoL i)tt ri d el g ani]l&ov t d v nuga (InXlnnov n g ia '5 e- 
oiv, being overcome by or yielding to the envoys. X. C. 1. 3, 3. 2!(xr/.gajr,g &v- 
aiag ■&i(av ^ixgug una fxixgaiv ovdsv ^jyeiTO fiSioia&ui, t u v un o ttoA- 



386 SYNTAX. GEN. DENOTING MUTUAL RELATIONS. [§ 275. 

XuJv yal (xs/uXojv noXXu yal fitydXa -d^vovx (av. Ilier. 4, 1. fieyaXov 
ctya&ov i^s I ov sxr eh '^Tax t q I'^elv twv xuiquv^ twv e^yav. 
X. Hier. 1, 18. xaviTj xfj svcpQoavvr) xHg iXnldog fie t ov exx o v a i xvguvvot 
X(ovldio)xcjv. '2, 1. fiELOVEXxovvxug y.(xl a It o)v xa\ n ox C)v aal 

O IpbJV. 

KF.^iiXARK 1. 'lly Efiov eve Lv and 7j y eld d^ a I in the sense of to go be- 
fore, udov, to shoiv the ivay, govern the Dat. ; xgaxeTv in the sense of to 
conquer, regularly governs the Ace, but in the sense of to rule, the Gen. 

Rem. 2. That in which one excels another, in prose, is usually i)ut in 
the Dat., though it is often expressed by prepositions, e. g. tv xtvi, d'g xi, 
xuTix XL, STil xivi. — "Ttxo govcming the Gen. is often used with i]xx(xa&ui, 
e. g. Th. 1, 62. TO criQcczontdov '}] a a uxo vno xojv^'Ad^rjvalojy. 

2. The comparative and adjectives in the positive, which 
have the force of the comparative, e. g. numerals in -daiog and 
-Tzlovg; devT€Qog, TTEQizzog, etc., govern the Gen. of the object used 
to express the comparison. 

X. Cy. 7. 5, 83. ov dvinov xov ccQ/ovxa x (ov a q% o fisv (av tiovi^qoxs- 
gov TiQogijXEL sivuL. Eur. Med. 965. /^ucog ^£ xg slaa ojv fxvglwv X6~ 
y (av ^goTolg.. Her- 7, 48. x6 "EXXrivixov (STgaxtv^a cpalvsxuL n oXXan Xi]~ 
(JLOV Ecrsa&ai xov i] y-EX ig o v. 8,137. dLnXijaLog iysvExo aviog 
so)v X V, he was twice as great as before. 6, 120. v ax e g o i anixofiEvoi x i} g 
(TVfi^oXi]g (proelio) l^Eigovio hfiojg ■&Erjaaaxf()CL xovg M)]dovg. OvdEvbg 
dEvxtgog. Ovdsvog vcrxsgog. Tatv agxovvxiavnEgixxa xii]~ 
aaadai. 

Rem. 3. Sometimes the object of comparison is denoted, like some re- 
lation of space, by ngo and avxl with the Gen., or by naga and ngog with 
the Ace. See prepositions. 

3. With verbs of buying- and sellings e. g. coveia&ai, dyogd^etv, 
TtQiao-d-atj 'Atdad-ai, naQokaiA^dveiv ; TicoXalv, aTZodidoa&aiy TTegididoa- 
d-ai, diSovai; — also with verbs signifying to exchange and bar- 
ter, e. g. dXXdrzeiv, dXXdtzaad^ai, dia(^£i^£6&ai, XvEtv, etc. ', — with 
verbs of valuing, e. g. zifiav, Tijidod-ai, Ttoieiad^ai, d^iovv, d^iovo&ai, 
and with the adjective d^iog (Gen. of price). 

Her. 3, 139. iyo) xamrjv n caXso) (aev oi'dsvog /grjfAaxog. 5, 6. {ol 0g'i]'iy.Eg) 
av Eovx a L xag yvvaty.ag naga xwv yoviojv %gr}ydx(ov ^EyaXoiv. X. C. 2. 1, 
20. xwv Ttovojv n b)X o v(T IV riyl,v ndvxa xdyd& ol x^soL Cy. 3. 1, 36. av di, 
di TiygdvT), Xi^ov fxoL, noaov av nglaio, (agzE xi]v yvralxa unoXaStlv. 
'j£yo) fXEV, BcpTj, (X) Kvgs xdv xijg ipv/yg ngialfirjv, agis fiijnoxE XargEvaac 
xavTTjV. II. ^,236. xev/s a ^ei^ev, ygvaia /aXxElav, ky.axo^i^OL ivvEa^oicov. 
X. Cy. 3. 1, 37.y.ai av di, oj 'Aguivie, dndyov xriv xs yvi^ouxa xal avxovg nat^ 



§§276,277.] SYNTAX. accusative. RELATIONS OF SPACE. 387 

dag, fiTldev avTMV x « t « v> f / ?, nulla re pro lis deposita. Dem. Phil. 2. 
()8, 10. x£y.Qt(Ti}E fiij d e V 6 g uvxeQdovg t« xolvix jmv 'JCXXijVwv tc q o i- 
(T & a t, /u//(5' ariciXlu^aad^ai ^ )] 8 e f^i u g / a q n og (.n]8 u) (p f I e i- 
ag tijv Eig ^ovg '!L'AA//J'«? evpoiuv. II. A, 514. ti]rQog yaQ avijQ noXXotv 
avT a^ to g a XX wv. Her. 3, 53. o ylvx6q)Qb)v o vdi avnxQlaiog r, ^ l- 
<aae tov (fi^ovia Tr,v ay/fXliiv. 6, 112. ift()t;^ovTO a ^ l w g X 6 y o v. A^l- 
ovv Tivtt 7 I fxyj g. X. Cy. 2. 2, 17. eyb)ys ovdev uviao'neQov vofxi'^oi tojv iv 
av&Qionoig sivai rov t mv la m v tov rs xcxxov xal aytt&ov a^iovad^ai. 
Ti/uftv Tivl Jivog and xiva rivog, e. g. dexa ruXdvTOJV, tov ^avchov, to Jine or 
pimish one ivith, to sentence one to a pimishment, to consider one worthy of pun- 
ishment. So the JNIicl. t l ixaa & a L tivi vcQyvglov, d^avaiov, to impose a Jine 
or penalty of death upon one ; commonly, however, dlxrjv is here supplied. 

Rem. 4. With verbs denoting to barter, to exchange, the relation is usu- 
ally considered like a relation of space, and is denoted by uvtI with the 
Gen. 

Rem. 5. The Gen. with substantives (attributive Gen.) expresses a much 
greater viu'iety of relations, than the Gen. with verbs. For where two ob- 
jects are immediately connected with each other, there is always a mutual 
relation between the ideas they express ; the one depends upon the other, 
seems united with it, to proceed from it or in some way to belong to it. 
Hence the rule ; fVhen two substantives are connected unth each other, the sub- 
stantive ivhich completes the idea of the other and defines it more fully, is put in 
the Gen. As adjectives or participles are, in their nature, nearly related to 
the substantive, many adjectives also govern the Gen., when the verbs from 
which they are derived, take the Ace, e. g. xqutIutov naiQag "EXXviVav 
tg acp scg (like natus alicujus). S. Ph. 3. 

Rem. 6. Sometimes one substantive governs two genitives ex-pressing 
different relations. Her. 6, 2. 'laTicuo^ vnidvvs t av ^I mvojv rrjV r,yE^ovl- 
Tjv tov TiQog /laquov n oXi^ov, the command of the lonians in the war 
against Darius. 

§276. (2) Accusative. (471.) 

The Ace. is the Whither-case, and hence denotes, (a) in rela- 
tion to space, the goal, limit or point to which the action of the 
verb is directed, e. g. aorv fioleiv, to go to the city ; — (b) in the 
causal relation, it denotes the effect, consequence, result of an 
action, as well as the object on which the action is performed. 

§ 277. A. Relations of Space. (472.) 

The Ace, expressing the relation of space, denotes the boundaiy, place or 

object towards which the subject moves. Hence this Ace. is used with 

verbs of motion, going, coming, etc. ; yet this usage is found only in the 

poets, especially in Homer. Od. y, 162. oi ^Jiiv unoaTgiipavTeg e^Sav viag 



388 SYNTAX. CAUSAL RELATIONS OF THE ACCUSATIVE. [§ 278. 



(XjjcfuXliKTng, they went to the ships. II. a, 317. y.vlcrar] S* oioavov hf, arose to 
heaven. Od. a, 17(). nolXol Winv uveQfg rifjtitQov do). H. OT. 35. uutv Ku5- 
f.iHov fioXfh'. Eur. Med. 7, M)]8eia nvqyovq yijg tnXiva ^ fo)).y.iag. 

Remark. In jn-osc and usually also in poctr}', the Ace. is jroverned by a 
preposition, which defines still more definitely the relation indicated by the 
Ace, e. g, £ig, in — into, o)g, to, yjxta, downwards, uvd, upwards, into, over, 
inl, upon, nf(jl and apcpl, around — round about, ptxa, into tfie midst, after, 
•JiQog, to, into the presence of, ttuqw, near to, vno, under, e. g. Uvui eg rhv no- 
)uv, TTQOfXdHv big lov ^ixdiXiu, TifQl OY afiCfl xviv tcuXlv (ialvtiv — inl xov 
S^Qovov ava^ahiLV — iXduv p,ixa Tqomg — livai nagix ^uaiXiu — Hvai ngog 
*'OXvp-nov — Isvav vno yuiuv. 

B. Causal Relations of the Accusative. 

§278. (a) Accusative denoting- Effect. (473-475.) 
The Ace. denoting effect is used as in other languages, e. g. 
YQacpoj ImaroXrjv. The orighial and simplest form of the Ace. 
denoting effect, i. e. the Ace. of the object produced, is where a 
verb either transitive or intransitive, takes the Ace. of an abstract 
substantive, which is either from the same stem as the verb, or 
has a kindred signification, e. g. ii^x^v iidi^cOai, to fight a fight^ 
pugnam pugnare. An attributive adjective or pronoun com- 
monly belongs to the Ace. 

PI. Symp. 181, b. ovxog iaxtv (0 1'^ w c), ov ol cfalXoi xmv ccv&gatnojv i ga- 
ff l v. Fl. h. 680, e. ^ a (T iXslav naaolv diy.aiOTaxviV ^aaiXevo^^voL. 
Prot. 325, c. in LfzeXoiivTaL naauv ini^iXtiav. Dem. Aph. 845, 4. 
Sio^aL vfib)V dLy.ulav diriffiv. X. An. 1.3, 15. at q axrjyi]ff ovx a i(xs 
xavxr^v xijv ffxgaxrjylav. 6.3,6. ei'Tt'/^ c « >' toito to £vxv%i](xa. 
Id. H. 7. 1, 5. nXdaxovg y.al fxr/laTOvg ay mv ag i]y(nvL(T^ivoL v.nxa -d^u- 
Xaxmv iXtt/jaxa fih anoTexv/rjyccxE, nXslaxa ds y.ax(x)Q-&o)yaxs. Andoc. M3'st. 
5, 31. uQaaup^svoi tag pr/hxag uqag v^lr. So y.aXag ngu^i? ngaxxuv, 
igya^sff&uL e'gyov xcdov, ugxnv diyulav agyjiv, alaygav dovXtlav dovXsvELV, 
fiiyav noXsfwv uoXe^hv, xaXmi]v voaov voffsiv. Jiiydiipovg ax g axsta g 
i^rjstrav (like s^odov i^isvai). Th. 1, 112. ^aysdaifioriOL xov Ugov y.aXov- 
fiEVOv noXsfiov i(TX gvcxsvffav (like axgaxeiav axgaxsvHv). So ogy.ovg 
o^vvvai, aadsvEiv voffov, Qv (tlov. X. Hier. 6, 7. ttoIov 8i xiva vnvov 
ixoLfiu. If the idea of the verb permits, the passive construction also can 
be used, e. g. *0 oheXog i][uv noXsfxog ovxcag inoXsfirj&rj PI. Menex. 
243, e. KdXal ngd^sLg ngdxxovxai. So also with adjectives, e. g. 
Kay.o\ ndffav y.ay.lav PI. Rp. 490, d. 

2. In place of the substantive from the same stem as the verb, 



§ 27S.] SYNTAX. ACCUSATIVE DENOTING EFFECT. 389 

or having tlie same signification as the verb, an attribute of such 
a substantive can also be used; in this case, the verb frequently 
has a pregnant signification (constructio praegnans)^ since the 
verb, at the same time, contains another idea in addition to 
its obvious one. 

IVtx«v fn*XWi ^^ conquer a battle, i. e. to win a battle ; so "OXv^nia. viy.av, to 
conquer m the Olympic games, Th. 1, 126. IVtxav rav^a/lag, to gain a naval 
victory, 7, 6G; viy.uv '/vmi.it)v, sententiam vincere, viyjp' 8iy.i]v, to carry one's 
opinion triumphantly ; like ^f'^w d^isiv, t« sTiiriy.La, dayyihu, 5<«.?«T)y'^m, 
yividXia, icc ylvy-ULa, yafiovg d-vsir, to offer a sacrifice on account of victory, a 
festive offering, etc., i. e. to celebrate the victory, etc. by a sacrifce ; to TliQcixov 
bjQXHTO X. An. 6. 1, 10; tcxqixttsiv noXstxoVy i. e. turbando bellum concitare, as 
it is said, bellum miscerc, PI. Rp. 567, a. Passively, noXsfiog ngog Tohg 
"Ai-KfidQug ixaq ax&r] Deni. Cor. 277, 151. 

3. Special notice, in like manner, should be taken of the fol- 
lo\^nng constructions, mostly confined to poetry, where, also, 
instead of the substantive from the same stem as the verb, or 
with a kindred signification, the attribute of such kindred sub- 
stantive is put in the Accusative. 

(a) Verbs which express the idea of to shine, to burn, to fow, to pour, to 
shoot or spring forth, e. g. afngdnxfiv yogywnov asXag, to lighten a 

fearfully bright light, i. e. casting a bright and terrifc light, Aesch. Pr. 356 ; 
S^aXXeiv ^lov Pers. 617. "i^gspvov a'lfi sd &v a a, I poured out black 
blood, S. Aj. 376. Tiyysiv, (nd ^slv duy.gva, alfia, Xapnstv as- 
Xag, gslv yvcXa (all confined to poetry). 

(b) Verbs which express sowid, laughter, panting and smelling ; here, in- 
stead of the substantive, commonly an adjective merely, or even a 
pronoun is used, e. g. cp&iyyscrd-aL xanuvov, dad-evig; 7,dv ys~ 
Xfiv, i]8v 7tv si V, jxirsa nv elo vt sg 'ji/aiol, ^Agsa nvelv, Martem 
spirare, o^slv ^/Sv', ^egivov ts xal Xiyvgov vnrjxsl [6 tonog) tw tc5v 
isnlycov yogo) PI. Phaedr. 230, c. 'Av exci yx aa i ts pdXa aagdoviov 
Rp. 337, a. 

(c) Verbs signifying to see, to look. Od. x, 446. avg nvg ocp&aXudlffL ds- 
d ogTidg. So^XsTisLV, 8igy.sa&uc ^'Agr,v, o g uv dXx7jv, dsgxE- 
a-d" a i dsLVov, apsgdaXsov, Taxsgd ; cpo^ov ^XinsLV. D. /?, 269. d/gsTov 
18 (a V, looking foolish. PI. Ion. 535, e. y.XalovTug te y.ul 8hvov itx^Xs- 
novxag. 

Remark 1. By this use of the Ace. many adverbial expressions can be 
explained, since the place of the Ace. with the adjective belonging to it, is 
supplied either by a pronoun alone [xovxo, x68s, xavxa, xd8s, xl, xi, ol8iv, 
51 



390 SYxNTAX. ACCUSATIVE OF THE OBJECT. [§ 279. 

fn]8iv, 0, (X, etc.), or by a ricutcM* adjoctive, e. g. Tuvxu Xvizuad^av yul x uv- 
T « ;jf«/(jf tv Tolg noXXdig, to frritvt at the same things and to rejoice at the same^ 
Dem. Cor. 32.3, '^1)2. Oav ^ocaju iy.nX->\TiovJui PI. Syrnp. 1!)2, c. T« 
HQuxKTxa ijv&rjtrav Tli. 1, II). So fxaxoov xXaUiv ; rr « y t a iv8ai}xovnv ; 
wg)fP.aVj ^Xanxfiv, ^tj^lovv fi sy uXu, fi ix q a, iviQytxuv x u (Asy lctt a^ rj d v 
yfXav, ^iy a or i^iy uX a (fQovtlv. 

Rem. 2. Several adverbial exi)ressioiis have oriffinatcd fi-orn this usage, 
e. g. /«()tj', gratia, /uoiv ifj^i'iv, ai]v, mea, tiia gratia, db^Qtuv, gratis, dMxlvr]Vj 
nQolyia, fiaxrjv, iiicassiim. So also xovro, xavzu, therefore, xl, ivhy, o, therefore. 
Eur. Ilec. 13. veonaxog d^ r,v JlQiu^id^v ' o y.al ^e yi'jg vmUnf^ipav. PI. 
Prot. 310, e. a^A' av x a x avx a vvv t^vm nugu as, on this very account. 

4. The Ace. denotes also the object merely aimed at, the de- 
sign of the action. Such an Ace, however, is almost always a 
pronoun or a neuter adjective, — a preposition, e. g. els, riQog, Ini, 
being commonly used with substantives. The following words, 
in particular, belong here. 

XQija&ai xivl xi originating from xgiia&al xlvl xQslav, to use some- 
thing for something ; nelS^ slv originating from tih&elv xlvcc ntlaiv, in ai- 
QBLV, in ox Qvv SLV, TTQoy.aXstffS'aL, avayxa^siv xtva x i, etc. 
Ovx s/(o, o XL % Qi^a o fiai avxM. Ti dyj/grjaofisS-a xovxoj ; Tr, xgrivrj 
T cc nXdaxov « | i « i% q mvxo, ad res maximi momently Th. 2, 15. TIekt- 
S^T] V u L x^]v avaxcagt^ffiv (instead of the usual construction ng x. uvoc- 
XiOQ.) ib. 21. Ta vxd as inoxqvv(o. "Ajiig/o^aL, nglv vno aov x i ^iil- 
'Cov avayxad'&fivaL PI. Phaedr. 242, a. Tovxo om anEtS^e xovg 
^(oxccLsag Her. 1, 163; but inoxgvvsLV stg ikx/jiV. 

Rem. 3. The Ace. denoting purpose, applies to the manner according to, 
or in which something takes place. Here the fundamental idea is that of 
striving for an object. Thus xgonov, xovxov xov xgonov^ hunc in modum, 
nuvxa xgonov, xlva xgonov, dly.rjv, in morem, oj^oia, in like manner, imxrjdEg, 
consulto, xa/og and xaxa xa/og, celeriter. Commonly, however, preposi- 
tions are used with such adverbial expressions. 

§ 279. (b) Accusative of the Ohj ect upon ivhich the 
Action is pe rfo rmed. (476-483.) 

Only those verbs will be mentioned here, which, in Latin, take 
some other Case than the Ace. or are constructed with preposi- 
tions. 

1. The verbs (oq)eXHv, ovivavai, ovivaad-ai, agtCAeiv, commonly 
with the Dat, ^Xdirreiv, ddinEiv, v^Qi^eiv, Xvfiaivec'&ai, Xco^dad-ai, gi- 
vsa'&ai, XoidoQEiv, to chide ; evGE^ecv, dae^Eiv ; Ao;^ «y, eve^qeveiv ; ri- 
(jLcoQEiad^uL ; d-EQaTTEVEiv, doQvcpoQEiv, ETiitQOTiEVEiv, to pi'ovidc ivith a 



§ t379.] SYNTAX. ACCUSATIVE OF THE OIUECT. 391 

guardian; xoXaxeveiv, x>co7TEVEtv (^canteiv Poet.), nQogiivvEiv, ntiO^eiv; 
d^tei'liea&ui (Poet, respondere), remunerari ; (fvldrTEaOai, tvla^ti- 
6\^:u ; fiiuna&at, ^ijXovv, to emvlate. 

X. C. 1. 2, G4. {^MKQuiriq) cpvcveQog riv-^eQansvcov t ov g a-^avaTovg. 
Acschiu. Ctes. 618. rig up eD] dijjia/w/og roiovTogy ogTig t ov ftev dij ^ov S^ (a- 
71 svaa I dvvaiTO, rovg ds xaiQovg, iv o'lg i]v ata'^ea^uL tjjv tioXcv, unodono ; 
III i& siv TO TiXT]& og. X. Hier. 4, 3. ol tioXItui 8 0(iV(f> og ov g v jxiv 
aXkijXovg avtv /.iia&ov. R. L. 12, 5. fieraaTQaionsdevovTal ye {ol Aaxe- 
8ai^6viot) f.ii]v nv'/.va koI jov alvEdd^ai jovg n oXsfi lov g tvsxa, y.al 
Tov McpsXelv T o V g (plXovg. C. 4. 3, 15. ixuvo 8s. u&VfiM, ort ^ol doxel 
Tag Twv x^fwv BVEgysalug ovS* av ug noTS uvd^QUTiwv d^lmg %agi(nv 
« (U £ / /5 f (T v^ « f. Her. 6, 138. iX6x7}aav Tag twv ^A&rjvalwv y vv aX y. a g. 
Th. 1, VS'^. IlXsiffT ag X ov, tov Ason'idov, ovtu ^aaiXia y.al viov 
m, intTQon eviv (o Ilavaavlag). X. H. 5. 1, 17. it 7J5iOj', i] firjdsva 
ay^QCjTicov xoXax sveiv, fxr^jE "EX Xtjv a, fxvrs ^ a g 3 a q o v, uviy.u (iLa&ov ; 
— n gogxvvilv ^ aa ilia. PI. Rp. 334, b. wcpsXElv [xev t oi/g cp t - 
Xovg [dotal) 7] dixaioavvr], ^XdjiTstv ds xovg i^^govg. "Adixslv 
Tovg (plXovg, v-Sgl^Eiv Toiig naldug. UoXXuxig xal dovXoi t l fj> (o- 
g ov vT ui TOV g ad Ixovg SedTioTag. X. Cy. 1. 4, 8. ol cpiXaxsg iXoi- 
dogovv avTov (but the Deponent loidogsla&ai tivl, to reproach). 

Remark 1. Some of the above verbs take a Dative or a preposition with 
its proper case, («) w (jp £ ^ « I y tivl though very seldom among the poets ; {^) 
« 5 ixtXv slg, ngog, and nsgl tlvu ; {y) da £ i3 slv elg, and nsgl tlvu, bv a s- 
^ sJ V el'g Tivu, mgi, ngog tlvu ; [8) Xv (laiv sg d^al tivl freipiently ; [s) X w- 
P uffx^ at Tivi sometimes ; [l) v (j glt,Eiv ug Tiva often ; {rj) in LTgo7lsv- 
£ I V Tivog somewhat frequently, § 275, 1. 

Rem. 2. zl w g tier d- a i, like the Latm donare, has a double construction, 
either tivc tl, to present something to some one, or Ttvd tivl, to present one ivith 
something. 

2. Verbs which express the idea of doing good or evil to any 
one, by word or deed, e. g. svEgyezeiv, -Auy.ovQyEiVy y.ay,o7ioiElv ; evXo- 
yEiVy y.ay.oXoyEiv ; ev, y.aXojg, yay.ag Xr/Eiv, eItteiv, dnayoQEVEiv. 

S. Aj. 1154. aVi^5»a>7rf, jU?/ 8gd Tovg TE&vrjxoTag xaxbjg. X. Cy. 
1. 6,09. xaxovgy eIv TOvg cplXovg. Evsgy eteXv tt^v naT g 18 a. 
X. C. 2. 3, 8. nojg 8 uv iycj uvEnLGTrjfKav slriv d8£Xcpo) xgiiiad^ai, inicTafxtvog 
ytxalzv XiysLV tov ev Xiy ovtu, y.al ev no leIv tov ev no lovvt a; 
TOV (xivTOL y.al Xoybi y.al sgyo) nsLgaifXEVOv s fx i dviav ovx av 8vvaL^r,v 
otV IV Xiy ELV, ovi ev noielv. So also xaXd, y.ay.u noiElv, Xiyecv tivu. 
See § 280. 

3. Verbs signifying to persevere, endure, to wait, and the con- 
trary, e, g. iitvEiVj TiEQi^ikVEiv, d^aQQEiv ; (pEvyEiv, dnoqiEvyEiv, dnodidQaa- 

•AEIV, dQaTZETEVElV. 



392 SYNTAX. ACCUSATIVE OF THE OBJECT. [§ 279. 

Mri (pevys lov nlvdvvov. Ouq^hv SdvuTov, non reformidare mortem, 
X. An. 3. 2, 20. t u g /xlv fiu x u? x^ uq^ eIts, endure. Cy. 5. 5, 42. it tl- 

vig as iifiMffiv, aruanu'^ov x«t ao't/fi uvTovg, \vu. at xul ■& a^ ^i] a wa lv, 
that ifuy may confide, in you, lUfiducia te compledantur. 'O dovlog unid g a 
Tov 8tisnojriv. PI. Symp. 21G, b. d q un er e v o) ovv ulxbv y.ul (pEV'/M. 
Deiri. I. Phil. 50, 37. ol twv tiqu/jxutwv hul()oI ovfisvovGL tij v ijfisTiguv 
^gadvTijTU. 

Rem. 3. After the analogy of cpevysLv, other verbs also, which contain 
the idea of fleeing, e. g. those signifying to turn hack from, to retreat from, to 
abhor, are constructed with the Ace, though but seldom, e. g. vno % oj q dv 
TOV ox^ov ; ixatiiv a I xlvdvvov, reformidare ; vnsHjginea&ui, ixTQe- 
nsaS^ a i, v7ie^8Qx^^^^h unodTgiipsa'd-aL. O agg eIv tlvl sig- 
nifies to have confidence in something. 

4. The verbs to be concealed, and to conceal, lav&uvEiv, y.QVTt- 
reiv, celare, nQVTiTeGd^ai. ; — also the verbs (pO dv eiv, antevertere, 
le i 7Z sir, i 71 lis i7t e iVj deficere ; — verbs of swearing or swear- 
ing by. 

PI. Rp. 365, d. &E0vg ovte Xavx^dvsiv, ovte ^laaaa&ai 8vvux6v. 
KgvnxEiv x iv d x i, see § 280. Her. 6, 115. nsguTiXcaov 2ovviov ^ovXo- 
[isvoL (p&i]v at Tovg^AS^fjvaiovg dnLxofxtvoL eg xo uaxv. "En lXeItiei, 
fiE 6 XQOvog, ^ 'ijfiiga. X. An. 1. 5, 6. to axgrxxevfia 6 alxog inik im. 
*0 jxvvfii 7C dvT oc g d^ eov g. Hence [id, ov fj>d, v al fid, vi} /lla. 

Rem. 4. The two impersonal verbs del, and XQ'^> hi the sense of to need, 
are constructed with the Ace. of the person and the Gen. of the thing or of the 
person, of which or whom one is in need ; this construction, however, belongs 
only to poetiy, e. g. Od. «, 124. fiv&riaEai, oxxeo he xQV- Aesch. Pr. 86. 
avxov ydg a e d eI Ug o firjd^ i co q. J el with the Dat._ of the person be- 
longs to prose and poetry, e. g. Ph Menon. 79, h. S e2 ovv gov xijg avxr,g 
igoi)Xi]aEMg. In the sense of necesse est, opus est, with an infinitive, the Ace. 
of the person is common with both verbs, e. g. 8eI ixg^'i) o"£ xavxu ttoleIv ; 
the Dat. is much more rare, and with XQV belongs only to poetr}^ X. C. 
3. 3, 10. Ev croL dsoL diddaTiELv. Comp. X. O. 7, 20. S. Ant. 736. « ;. A w 
yag ^ pol XQ'H 7^ xijgd^ dgxELV x^^^^?' 

5. Many verbs denoting a feeling or an affection of the mind, 
e. g. q)0^EiO'&ai, deioaiy rgeiv; aiGyyvsod-ai, revereri, ai^sio&ai; dvg- 
lEQaivHv, iy.7zlijrT86d-a(, y.ataTtXi^TTsa&ai ; Slocpvgeo&ai. 

X. Cy. 8. 1, 28. fidXXov xovg aldopivovg aidovvxat xtov dvaidcav 
ol uv^gmnoi. An. 1. 9, 6. Kvgog agxxov noxk imcpEg o (ievtjv ovh 
Exg E a sv. Cy. 3. 3, 18. [ol noXiy.LOi) fidXkov i) jid g cp o ^ i] a o v x a i, oxav 
dy.omacnv, oxi ovx w? (po§ovfiEvoi nxTJ a a o {iev a vxovg oIxol xa&iniEvoi. 
AldX'^v p. a I xov S^hov. 1^. Jj. 2, 11. a I d e2 a -d- a l xovg clg/ovxag. 
Cy. 1. 3, 5. xccl as, a ndrniE^ (iva axx 6 fisvov x avxa xd p g (Ofiaxa 



§ 279.] SYNTAX. ACCUSATIVE OV THE OBJECT. 393 

6^0). PI. Symp. 173, c. tov? ixa'iQovq cA«cu. Dem. Cor. 290, 185. 
xax anXay iiv ai xov (l> IXiinxov. In poetry this use of tlie Ace. is 
imich more extensive. 

Rem. 5. Verbs wliicli express the idea of motion, hke transitive verbs, 
sometimes take the thing put in motion by them, as a passive object in the 
Ace; this construction is used in poetry, sehlom in prose. The following 
verbs especially belong liere, ^ a Iv f iv, utaa s iv, n e(i uv, n XeIv, qe- 
TXfiv, anBvdsLv, etc. S. Ant. 1158. tv/t] y.muqQinhL xbv svrv- 
tio i'VT a. ^J^x^ttivsip, in a'i'ir a s lv n 6 d a, d'ia a siv / sq a, ^ ua iv, 
n SQ fiv TT ^ «, all poetic. Th. 6,39. x ax a a n s i d s iv, accelerare. In this 
way, verbs expressive of sound, with the construdio praegnans, sometimes 
take the object which is })ut in motion and sounded, in the Ace. II. A, 160. 
'innoi xi Iv' o x^a x(j ox dX i^ov cua nxoutwio yscpiQU^. Her. 6, 58. X i- 
^TfXa xQoxsovifi, pulsant. So witli tlie construdio praegnans, the poets 
also Siiy, v/fov ;^ o o t v e l v, iXlaaiiv^ deum choreis, saltando celebrare. 
Comi). Larger Grammar, Part II. § 552. 

6. Verbs of motion take the space or loay in the Ace, these 
being the objects on which the action of the verb is performed ; 
so also the time during which an action takes place, in answer 
to the question. How long? is put in the Ace, as being the ob- 
ject measured by the action ; so too measure and weight, in an- 
swer to the question. How much ? are put in the Ace, these also 
being the objects on which the action of the verb is performed. 

BulvEiv, TTS^ay, sqtieiv. noQEVEa&ai 656v, hke to go the icay, comp. itque 
reditque viam. Eur. Med. 1067. dXt sifx l ydg dtjxXrjpovEaxuxrjv 6 dov. 
X. Cy. 2. 4, 27. pr,xL x d 8 vg ^3 ax a n o qev ov, uXXd xeXsvi aoL xovg ij/s- 
povag xi]v ^aoxr/v iu86v) i] y eI(t& a i. An. 4. 4, 1. in o qev d-T}a av 8lu xjjg 
'u-iQfiEvlug nEdi'ov dnav xal XEtovg y riXo cp ov g. R. Equ. 8, 10. ?/v 6 
piv (psvyr] inl xov Xnnov navxoXa /co^/a, per varia loca. Cy. 1. 6, 43. 
dysiv {axgaxidv) ?'/ axEvdg i] nXaxtlag odoig. Dem. I. Phil. 49, 34. 
uyiDv xal (fiEQMv xoig nXiovx ag x r,v & aX uxx av. Xgovov, xov /govov, a 
long time, (different from ;f^ov&j, avv ygovco, by time, easily), vvxxa, i]i.isgav. Her. 
6, 127. ij ^Lf3agig Tjy.fiu'CE xovxov xov xgovov ^dXiaxa. X. An. 4. 5, 24. 
xaxaXaj-ifidvEi xi]V dvyaxiga xov xw^dg^ov ivvdxrjv rjfiigav yryaurjiAS- 
vr,v, who had been married nine days. Cy. 6. 3, 11. xul x&kg 8s xal x g lxi]v 
ri ^ig av xo avxo xovxo engaxxov. Dem. Phil. 3. 116, 23. Va/vaav 8s xl xal 
Or^^aioi xovg xeXevx aiov g xovxoval x Q ov ov g fisxd xr,v iv Aevx- 
rgoig ^dyr^v. Her. 1, 31. (sxa8lovg n ivxs xal xEdasgdxovxa 8ia- 
xofilaavxEg dni/.ovxo eg xo Igov. 6, 119. dni/jiv 8 sxa xal 8 ltixocf io vg 
axa8iovg. 6, 1-35. MLXxLd8rig dninXsE Ildgov noXiogxi',(jag xe e | xal eI'xo- 
<j L i)fiigag. X. C. 3. 6, 1. ov8sno) eI'xoctlv sxrj yfyovwg (like viginti 
annos natus. Here belongs the Ace. with d vv a a ■& a l, to be worth. Her. 



394 SYNTAX. ACCUSATIVE OF THE OBJECT. [§279. 

3, 89. TO Ba^vXwviov idXavTov 8 vv ut u l J:1v ^ o'cd ag kftdofi-tjxovxa 
fiviag. 

Rem. G. In poetry the Ace. of space is sometimes used even with verbs 
denoting rest, e. g. nHa&ac, azTjywi, ija&ai, ■O^uaaeiv, y.ai^iQuv, etc., instead of 
iv witli the Dat., as in prose. Here also the Ace. represents the space as 
the object whicli receives the action of the verb, or as the ol)ject taken posses- 
sion of, e. g. S. Phil. 145. [xonov ngogidtiv i-&iXsig,) ovr iv a xtlr u i, quern 
jacens occupatum tenet). Conip. Larger Gram. Part II. § .554, Rem. 3. 

Rem. 7. The following prepositions are joined with the Ace. to define 
more fully the extension in space and time, viz., avd,from a lower to a high- 
er place, e. g. uvd 7ioTay.ov nkelv, dvd vvy.Ta; — x«t«, from a higher to a 
lower place, e. g. y.aTix noiufiov nXuv, Hard xov ^lov ; — ufxcpl and tuqI, round 
about, e. g. ^alvHv d^cfl (or niql) xi]v noliv, ajxcpl xov /hiiima. tuqI xd Mi]- 
dixd, — vno, under, vcp ^IXiov, vno vvxia, sub uoctem ; — vjiig, over ; — 
nuqd, near by, along,'by the side of, e. g. naqd xov noxa^ov noQhvuj&ai, naq 
olov xov ^lov ; — ini, upon, e. g. inl vwxa S^uldoarig nlilv, inl noliv XQO- 
vov, — did, through, e. g. did diafiaxa [jalveiv, did vvhtu; — fxtxd xuvxa, pos- 
tea; — nqog eansQav, towards evening. 

Rem. 8. From this use of the Ace. to denote space, time and quantity, 
very many adverbial expressions have originated, (a) xijv xa/lajr^v {u86v), 
celerrime, xijv ngooxi^v, primum, xijv Evd^uav, recte, ixaxgdv,far, dllriv xul dl- 
Xfjv, sometimes here, sometimes there, etc._ II. ip, 116, noXld d" uv avx a, xd- 
xavxcc, nd Q avxd xs, doxiiid t riX&ov ; — {h) ai'ifj-Egov, to-day, avgiov, 
to-morrow, dgxi]v, xijv dgyviv, properly at first, omnino, xiXog, xo xeXsvialov, 
finally, reov, lately, ng6x8gov,7ig(x)xov, xo ngojxov, lo nglv, xo al'iUu, xaviv, xo 
ndltti, xo nalaiov, xo Xoinov, etc, — [c] noXXd, saepe, la ttoAAw, plerum- 
que, noXv, fisya, fisydXa, y^iyiaxa, oXlyov, fiixgov, fimgd, avyvd, ^ay.ga,, I'aov, 
Toaovxo, ndvxa, etc. So also iiiiyog, nXij^og. 

7. Finally the Ace. is used with intransitive or passive verbs 
and intransitive adjectives of every kind, to explain these more 
fully. Here, also, the Ace. represents the object as acted upon 
or suffering, since it denotes the thing to which the action ex- 
pressed by the verb or adjective, refers or is directed. This 
Ace, which explains more fully the word to which it is joined, 
is used most frequently in reference to the body and mind. 

Her. 2, 111. ydy,vsiv x o vg 6(p&aXfxovg. S, SS. x d g cp Qsv a g vyial- 
VEiv. X. C. 1. 6, 6. aXyelv xovg nod ag. 4. 1, 2. cpavighg yjv ^ojxgdxrjg 
ov xwv xa (TWfiaxa ngog (ogav, aXXd xoiv xdg ipvydg ngog agnt^v sv 
mcpvy.oxojv iq)iefj.fvog. PI. Rp. 453, b. diacpigsL yvvi) dvdgog xi]V (fvaiv. 
462, d. av&gunog xov d dxx vXo v dXyu. KaXog iaxL xa o fifi ax a» 
Kaxog taxL xrjv ipvyijv. So dya^og, cocpcg, q)g6vifiog, /gi^crifiog, xgrjaxog, 
dlxaiog, etc., with the Ace. "Ayad-hg xs%vrjv xivd. Her. 3, 4. c^ttr?;? 
not yv(a^i]v laavog, noil xd n oXsfiLU dXy.ifiog i]v. X. Cy. 2. 3, 7. dvsa- 
TT] (PsgavXag to a ca fi a ova dcpvi]g, y,al x^]V ii)V/7jv ova dyevvd dvdgl 



§280.] SYNTAX. TWO ACCUSATIVES. ^95 

ioixiog. S. 4, IS. dstvog twut//?' tt'/j' te'/vtjv. So S-avfxaazog to (xe- 
ys&og, TO xdlXog. The English commonly uses prepositionH to ex- 
l)ress the force of this Ace, e. g. in, in respect to, of, or when it stands with 
an adjective, tlie English sometimes changes the Ace. of the thing into a 
j)ersontd suhstaiitive, and makes the adjective as an attributive agree with 
it, e. g. a/adog T£/yr;v, a good artist, comp. Eng. he is a good shot, i. e. 
marksman, or the prepositions of or ivith are placed before the substantive 
denoting the thing, and the attributive adjective is made to agree with that 
substantive, e. g. vsavlag yaXog lijv ipv^riv, of or ivith a beautiful soul. 

Rem. 9. Sometimes the prepositions uc, ngog, y.ajd are used with the 
Ace, in which case the relation is analogous to an Ace. of space, denoting 
direction, as diacfiqnv ng tl, e. g. dg aQsn'iV. X. C. 3. 5, 1. ivdo^oxEQa 7] 
noktg slg t« noXsuiy.a eoTui. ^0(p6g ngog tl. 

Rem. 10. From this use of the Ace, many adverbial expressions have 
originated. Thus the expressions of measure, d'Qog, vipog, fisyi-&og, ^a-&og, 
fiiinog, nXij&og, iXQid^i.i.ov, also yivog, ovo(.m, ^sgog, to gov lASQog, nQoqjua-iv, 
under pretence, to uXri&dg, yr(xi(j.rjv efirjv. Her. 6, 83. KXsavdgog yivog iojv 
flHyaXn'g an AQy.adirjg. 7, 109. Xlfivr] iovaa ivyxaveL (i)gsi zQiijy.orTa otk- 
Slmv ri]v nsQlodov, in circumference. X. An. 2. 5, L fierce javia acfl- 
yovTO inl tov Zix^mov noia^ov to tv q o g jmagoiv nXi^Qwv. 4. 2, 2. ol 
{.tiv inoQivovTO to nXijS-og Mg digxlXiOL. Moreover tovvuvtIov, tuvavTla, 
on the contrary, zaXXa, in respect to other things, to oXov, omnino, a^cpoTiga^ 
toDto (Tttt'Ttt) (xiv — TOtTo (Tttt'Tw) dt, olSsv, in no respect, rl, in some respect, 
noXXd, ndvTU, etc. To in i^i, lovn «^f£, zovnl ae, to slg ijxi, quantum ad 
me (te). 

§280. Tivo Accus ative s . (484—488.) 

In the following instances the Greek puts two objects in the 
Ace. with one verb. 

1. In the construction mentioned above, § 278, 1, if the verb 
has a transitive sense, e. g. cpdiav (pdeiv, the idea consisting of 
a verb and substantive, with which an adjective usually agrees, 
being blended into one, at the same time may be extended to 
a personal object, e. g. cpiloj fi£ydl7]v q)diav (= cpda) rov naida. 

Her. 3, 88. /Wjuovg xovg ng (oxovg (matrimonia nobilissima) i y «- 
[I EB 6 /lugiiog Kvgov b vo ■& v y a x i g a g, "At o a a d v ts y.al "A g t v a x oi- 
V rjv. 1 54. koivxov Xw (i dx a i Xm^tjv a v 'ij x e cr x o v. Th. 8, 75. w ^- 
jcoa uv xovg axg ax tatx ag xovgfXEylaxovgogxovg. X. Cy. 8. 
3, 37. £^£ 6 naxi]g xrjv xoiv n a IS ojv naid Elav inaldEVSv. PI. Apol. 
19, a. MiXrjrog fiz i y g dip axo xi]v y g acpiiv x avxrjv. 36, c. ex aa x ov 
svEgyEXElv xi]v fj.EylaxrjV EVEgysaiav. Her. 1, 129. ^£i7r?^ o y, 
TO {=o)fiiv id^olvLQE. Th. 1, 32. T ?; y V av fiax't'dv dnsojadfiE- 



396 SYNTAX. TAVO ACCUSATIVES. [§ 280. 

-& a KoQtvdiovg (like vUrjv vixuv). PI. Gorg. 52*2, a. noXXa xal 
rjdia xul nuvTo5 an a e I at x o vv Vfiug. Especially witli verbs of 
naming, after the analogy of 6Vo,ua ovo^d'Quv tlvu, X. O. 7, 3. aaXov al 
US TovTo TO ovofiu. PI. Rj). 471, (1. uvaxaXovvTig xavra t« 
ov 6 (jiixra kavT vg. So fif/dXaj fiixgd, nldoi^ jUs/^oj, co^sAav, ^kuniEiv, 
adixsly Tiva. 

Remark 1. Instead of the substantive of the thing effected, the Ace. of a 
pronoun is frequently used. X. Cy. 1.3, 10. jdllu fxi/xoifitvog loy 2uiy.av. 
An. 5. 7, G. TOVTO v^ug i^unairiaaL. This is es[)eciully the case with 
verbs of praise and blame, after the analogy of iyxMfiLov f/y.o)fj.i(i'i^siv xtyaand 
the like. PI. Symp. 221, c. noXXu fisv oisv dt> Tig y.ttl dXhx t/oi ^ittxauir/v 
inaiviaai. Rp. 363, d. t « D t « 8i] y.ul uXX a to iavi a i y y. (n ^ l u~ 
^ov a L 8ixaL0(TVvrjv. 

2. Phrases denoting to do or sa?/ good or evil^ take the object 
to which the good or evil is done, in the Ace, e. g. dyaO-d, y.aXd, 
ycay.d ttoieiv, TtQazTEiv, £Qyd^E6x)-cu, etc., Xtyeiv, einsiv, etc., nvd. 

Her. 8, 61. tote 8)] 6 0EixLaioy.Xsrjg nslvov ts yjxl Tovg KoqivS^iovq 
n oXXtt TS xul xaxoc tXsy s. X. Cy. 3. 2, 1 5. ovdsTKaJioTS inuvovTO tt o I- 
X a xay.a ri fid g noiovvTsg. 

Rem. 2. Instead of the Ace. of the object acted upon or suffering, the 
Dat. is sometimes used, which is considered as the Dat. of advantage or 
disadvantage [Dativus commodi or incommodi). Dem. Aphob. 855, 37. tL (TO i 
noirjffwffiv ol fiaQivQsg ; quid tui tibi prosint testes ? X. Cy. 1. 6, 42. nQOcr- 
xoTiEi, Tt (TO L nonjcrovaiv ol aQ/ofisvoi, what will your subjects do for you ; on 
the contrary, with as, what will they do to you. An. 4. 2, 23. ndvia inolriaav 
T o7,g dno d^ av ov(T Lv, showed all honors to the dead. Cy. 7. 2, 27. lilv tuv- 
TDC jj-OL 7ronJ(7r/c, a Xiysig, if you perform for me those things. So also in 
the sense of, to do something with some one, as PI. Charm. 157, c. ovx dv 
£xoijA£v,o Ti TToioliutv (TOi. Butthc Dat. oftcu depends upon the adjec- 
tive, e. g. Dem. Cor. 243, 55. dLcnsXel TigdTTOJv yixl Xsyoiv t« ^ sXt lot a 

T M 81'] fl Oh 

3. With verbs, (a) of beseeching, imploring, desiring, inquir- 
ing and asking, alzeiv, dnaizELv, TZQazreiv, to demand, eli^nQazzEiVy 
TTQaiTEGxyai; iQojzaVj sQaad'ai, i^etd^eiv, tazoQsTv, dviazoQHv ; — (b) of 
teaching and reminding, 8i8dGiie(v, naidaverv, dvaixfiAv?jay.eiv, vtzo- 
miivria-AEiv, (with both of these the Gen. of the thing is more 
usual) ; — (c) of dividing and distributing, baiead-ca, diaiQEiv, zsfi- 
vEiv, diavEfiEiv, y.azavE^Eiv'^ — (d) of depriving and taking away, 
GTEQEiv, dnoazEQETv, ovXav ; — (e) of concealing or hiding, 'AQvntEiVy 
{xEvd-Eiv Poet.) ; — (f ) verbs signifying to put on and otf, to clothe, 
ivdvEtv, iy.dvEiv, dfj,q)iEvvvvai, TieQi^dlXea&ai. 

Her.Sfl.nifupugKocy^iaTjg eg Alyvniov y.ijgvxa uI't ss^^Afia a iv &v^ 



§ 280.] SYNTAX. TWO ACCUSATIVES. 397 

y aiiqa. 5S. a v t o v g kxar ov raXavxa tn Q'i]^av. X. C. 1. 2, 00. 

OvdeVtX TTiOTlOTf fXKTx^OV Tj]c (TL'J'OVa/w? £ TT () « | Ot T yw/.QUTtjg. 11,4. 

ly 2\. o'lfQiniridag atTel Tov'AyrjalXaov onX Ix ag te ^g dic^dlovg 
xal jt ekx uffT a g aXXo v g i oa o in ovg. Cy. 6. 2, 35. tm ng T(>oqpi/v d i- 
ov X a i^ ex a ^Ex s x o v g vcp v^tv. Eur. Hipp. 254. noXlu d id a a xe t, 
yaQ fjL 6 TToXig (Sloxog. AuUyth. 5. 131, 14. o /Quvog xal ?/ i^nEiqia x a fj.)] 
xaXiog Bx ov X a ixdiddaxEL x ov g vc v & g m n o v g. Her. 1, 136. n a t- 
8 EV V(T I X V g 71 aid a g x q I a ^ o v v a. 6, 138. yXMaaav xe xi]v 
Axxixijv xal x g 6 7t ov g XMv^A&riva'iMV ididacrxov xovg Jialdag. 
X. An. 3. 2, 11. ava^vrjao) v ^u g xal xovg xivdvvovg. Hier. 1, 3. 
vnifiVTjffdg (j,s xa iv xo) l8i(axixo) /5to). Her. 7, 121. t o £ t c (xoigag 
o lEiglrjg d aad /xev og n dvx a xovns^ov a x g ax ov. Ts [j,v s lv, 
d La ig e7,v x l fiigij, fio I g ag. X. Cy. 7. 5, 13. o Kvgog x o ax g dx sv- 
(.la xaxsv E ij^is dcodExafisgr]. PI. Polit. 283, d. disXajfAEV avx^v 
{xijv f^EX gi] X Lxi)v) dvo fxigr}. X. Cy. 4. 6, 4. to r [lovov fioi xal 
cp IXov TV aid a d cp e IXex o xr\v xpv xt] v. Eur. Hec. 285. xov nd vxa 
S' oX^ov 7] nag ev fx dcpElXExo. Dem. Aphob. 839, 13. t 9) v xifi'ijv 
d 71 oax Eg eI ixe. Phil. 54, 50. x d i] jxix e g a rm a g dii ogx Eg eI (o ^l- 
XiTiTiog), Kg V Ttx b) as x 6 «Tr/ij^a. Eur. Hipp. 912. ov ^r^v cp iXovg 
yE, xaxi (xuXXov 1] cp IXo v g, xgvn xe lv dlxaiov a d g, TidiEg, dv gTT g a^l- 
ag. X. Cy. 1. 3, 17. TTttT? fiiyag, (Aixgov l/cov /tiwva, EXEgov Tiatba 
fi ixg 6 V, fiiy av ex ov x a ;f iTwv«, ixdva ag avxov, xov ijbp savxov 
ixElvov 7]ficpiBaE, xov ds ixELvov avxogividv. Her. 1, 163. t£ t;^ 0$ 
71 sgt ^ aX i(T^ a L xr] v tioXlv. 

Rem. 3. Several of the verbs mentioned above are constructed diffe- 
rently, commonly, however, Avith some difference in the sense expressed; 
thus, alx eIv XL 71 ag d x iv og\ i g ojx av xivarcEglxLVog; with 
verbs signifying to divide and distribute, the Ace. is not nnfrequently gov- 
erned by the prepositions Eig, sometimes also by xaxd, e. g. xoig nollxag eXq 
6| {loigag SleIXov, or the word fxigog, etc., is governed directly by the verb, 
and the object to be divided, is put in the Gen., depending on jjigog, etc., 
e. g. 810 /joigag Av8wv ndvxojv SleT/.ev (Her. 1, 94); passively, 8b)8Exa Usn- 
(jbjv (pvXal 8ii,grjVTaL X. Cy. 1. 2, 5. Verbs signifying to deprive and take 
away, have the following constructions, 

(a) a 7c oa X Eg eIv and dcp a lo eI(t & a c with the Ace. of the thing 

alone, e. g. Jlug dv ovxog e&eXol xd a XX ox g la duoaxEgElv X. Ag. 

4,1. XdXa^ui xa xaXwg iy v (aa ^liv a {proviso) xal tieti irj fxi- 

va dcpaigovvxai, to take away, to destroy, O. 5, 18; the Ace. of 

the person alone is but rarely found, in some instances, however, with 

d qi a L g eI (T & a L = to deprive of, e. g. Andoc. 4. 32, 27. xoig TToXlxaig 

oi'x E^ i(T0V xgrjxai, aXld xovg (aev a q) a l g v j.i e v g, xovg Se xin- 

xtav ov8Ev6g d^lav xr,v 8rifxoxguxlav djioqinlvEi. 

{h)(TXEgEXv, U7t <TX Eg eTv, d(paLgE7(j&al x l v d x i very oCteu. 

(c) (TT Bgelv, uTioaxEgElv x ivd x lv g very often, see § 271, 2 ; but 

52 



398 SYNTAX. USE OF THE ACC. "WITH THE PASS. [§281. 

acp a i,Q s1(T & u I very soldoin lias tliis ronstruction ; when it hiis, it 
sigiiilics lo restrain^ to -prevent, Ol oipi'^ofu-voi ucpaiQovvTai rag [iiy 
Tivvaq Tou (v^eIv top Xa/u), uviovq de ryg b)(ptXtlug X. 
Veil. (), 4. 

[i]) 01 cp a LQ fta & u I, u n oar f Q siv with tlie Gen. of the person and 
tlie Aec. of the thing; they then sij^nify to take something from some 
one, to withdraw somethijig from some one. This is a more rare con- 
struction. Oi TvXiovey.iai x u) v ii XXiav u (p a i q av fxsv o i xq i] (xa- 
T a savTovg doHOvat nXovjlC,fiv X. C. 1. 5, .3. 2 v ^ ^a^ I (^ ? « 9 « '- 
Qovf^iBVov T-t] g n 6X Eit)g [= tmv n oXltujv) Dem. Cor. 232, 22. Jfi 
iL ftovXovTai iiiLTrjdsvEiv y.ttXojv, ovdsvog uTioaTEQBl, [ra xwr^yi- 
(Tia) X. Ven. 12, 8. Ogrig, ixrj uXXoav hixvr ov a n o err e q mV) 
aacpaXdag dslzai (properly, aliis se subducens, i. c. ab aliis desciscens ; 
eavTov is here to be considered as the Ace. of the thing, Th. 1, 40. 

Rem. 4. On the two accusatives with the verbs nu&siv, inoTQVvnv, inal- 
QEiv, TiQoy.aXsladai, c,vttyy,d^8Lv, see §278, 4. 

4. Moreover, two accusatives, one of the object acted upon, 
and one of the predicate, are used with the verbs mentioned 
§ 240, 2, when they are changed from the passive to the transitive, 
consequently with verbs of making', ttoieTv, rid-tvai, reddere, choos- 
ing, appointing, aiQsia&ai, creare, etc., estimating, explaining, re- 
presenting, finding, contemplating, recognizing, e. g. vofii^eiv, ^ysT- 
6&aij etc., saying, naming, praising, chiding, e. g. h'yetv, ovofia- 
t,eiv, xaXeiv, giving, taking, receiving, e. g. TiaQaXa^eiv di-^ead^ati 
etc., producing, increasing, forming, teaching, educating. 

KvQog T o V g cp IXovg in o Itja s nXovalovg. Ila i8 ev eiv two, 
(7 cp 6 V. No fi I ^8 t V, i] / eIuS- al Tiva avdqa ay a-& 6v. 'Ovo- 
fia^ELV TLva o" (p Lcnrj.v. At g sTcrS^ al xiva OTQuxriyov. X. 
Cy. 5. 2, 14. T ov.r (0 ^ Qv av avvdEinvov n a g i X a ^ sv. Dem. Chers. 
1 06, 66. noXscag Eycoys nXovTov o] y ov fi. a l avfiixa/ovg, n iax lv, 
Bvv lav. Andoc. 3. 24, 7. i] Eign'jvrj tov drjfi ov tmv \4&7jvalo)V uipr}- 
Xov rigs xal y.axso'Trja'EV la y^v g 6v. 

Rem. 5. On the use of the Inf. siv a i with the Ace, see § 269, Rem. 1. 

§ 281. Remark on the use of the Accusativ e ivith 
the Pas siv e . (490.) 

1. Since the Greek considers the Pass, form as reflexive, § 251, 1, it fol- 
lows that, on the cliange of the Act. to the Pass., the Ace. may remain 
with eveiy transitive verb which in the Act. takes an Ace. of a thing as an 
object that receives an action, e. g. [yomovai tm fihtana), xotitovtul t a 
fisT (OTtoc, which may mean, either tJiat they strike themselves on the fore- 
head, they strike their forehead, or they let their forehead he struck, they are 



§281.] SYNTAX. VSE OF THK ACC. WITH THE PASS. 399 

stricken on the forehead ; Her. 7, 69. "Aqcc^iol ^eigag vn E^atxftivo i 
t(T a »', Aldlonsg ds naQdaXeug ts xai lEOvxiaq Svufifiivoi. This reflex- 
ive inoaiiitig of the Pass, occurs not merely in forms wlierc the Mid. at the 
siirne time takes the phice of the Pass., Ijiit, also, in the Pass. Aor. and Fut., 
e. g. Illijy elg t j/ r i(S(f) alij v, struck on the head, Her. 0, 38. This re- 
flexive meaning is, also, found in the second Perf. Act., which is used in 
the place of the Pei-f. Mid., e. g. 'Tno tov ipvyovg lovg d uxt vkov g toiv 
nodojy vm oa satjn 6t sg X. An. 4. 5, 12, which amounts to the same as 
what is said just before, 8 is(pd^ uq fievo l vno tjJc xLuvog to v g Icpd^ aX- 
/n ovg. 

2. Hence when the verbs mentioned § 280, 1 and 3, which in the Act. 
govern two accusatives, ai*e changed into the Pass., the Ace. of the 
person or of the object that receives an action is changed into the Nom., 
but the Ace. of the thing, or the effect remains, (a) Ovrog ^ih'xoi o enaivog 
iaii xaXcg, ov ah vvvinaLvel vji uv8qojv ailix)v nKnivtcr&ai V\. Lach. 
181, b. Tq uv (.la t l(t & elg n ol). ot (sc. igaiuaja) Th. 4, 12. "0 v o fia 
TO (Jiiv TiQUiTOv Zuyy.lr} i]v vno rbjf ^cxeXojv xXrjd-slaa (?] ^ixfA/a) 6, 4. 
'// xQiaig, rj V iy.gl&T] Lys. Agor. 134, 50. Ta fiiy ictt a x i ix7]d^r,v a i 
S. OR. 1203. Js<jf.i6v dvgs^rjvvarov I'ky.ezaL ds&elg Eur. Hipp. 
12.37. (b) Mov(Jt7(y]v vno Au^uqov naLdsv&slg, qt^toqcxtiv ds 
in "AvTicfwvTog PI. Menex. 236, a ; so d l8 ax-d^r/v ai, Tsxvrjv vno iivog, 
iQ(OTf]&T]vai TTiV yvb:i^r)v vno rivog. JT/} xal olxi}(TSig tm avxa ./-■' 
l-iB Qt] diavsfiTj-d^TjTco PI. L. 737, e. 'j/i o ^aadscag nsnQuy(xivog 

1 ov g cp 6 Q ov g Th. 8, 5. ''A cp a i g s & ri v a t, aTtoaTsgrjd^ijvai t i]v 
u g yi]v vno tivog. K gv(fi&i]v u I t t, cela/i aliquid. JJei crS^rj v a t, 
Ti]v ava xiogrjaiv, § 278, 4. AVith verbs of putting on and putting off, 
the Pass, does not appear to be used, for a^qxivvvad^ai ynuvu occurs only 
with the meaning to put a garment on one's self, but not / let myself be clothed 
by another, the garment was put on me by another. 

3. As the Greek may form a personal Pass., § 251, 4, of eveiy intransitive 
verb, which has an object in the Gen. or, Dat. e. g. ai.is).oi\uui, i]^EU]&riv 
(f&ovovfiai, icf&ovri^Tiv, so also this Pers. Pass, may be formed with such 
transitive verbs as have, together with the Ace. of the thing, a Dat of the per- 
son, since the Dat. of the person is changed into the Nom., but the Ace. of the 
thing remains. Th. 1, 1. 26. oi tmv 'Ad-rjv a Iojv in ltet g a ft fxiv o l 
Ti]v (pvXuy.Tjv (quibus custodia demandata erat, fi'om innginoj tivI t7/v 
(fvXuy.ijv,) referring to the Greeks, who had been entrusted with the watch, who 
had undertaken the watch. 5, 37. ol Kog IvS- lol tain a in saTaXfis- 
VOL uvfyoygovv', 1, 140. si h'yx(ogr,a8-[F, y.al a XX a ti fxsl^ov iv&vg 
inna%&rj(TE(Td^e. X. An. 2. 6, 1. ol aTgaxrjyol unoTfiij&ivTsg 
tag xsq> aXa g ixeXivtrjoav. 



400 SYNTAX. DATIVE. LOCAL DATIVE. [§§ 282, 283, 

§282. (3.) Dative. (m.) 

1. The Dat. is the Where-case, and hence denotes, (a) in a 
local relation, or relation of space, the place, at or in 2vhich, the 
action of the subject occurs ; (b) in a causal relation, the object, 
vpon 2vhich the action of the subject appears, or becomes visi- 
ble, i. e. the object which is made to share or be concerned in 
an action. This object is (a) a person, or conceived of as a per- 
son, e. g. §0T]d^(o roig noXiraig or r^ nolu ; (^) a thing, or con- 
ceived of as a thing, e. g. dydXXo^ai rri narj. In this way the 
Dat. may be treated under three divisions ; in the first, the 
Dat. is regarded as a Local object, in the second, as Person- 
al ; in the third, as the Dat. of the thing. 

§ 283. A. Local Dative. (492-494.) 

1. The Dat., as a local object, designates the place in (by, 
near, at) which an action occurs. This use of the Dat. is al- 
most exclusively poetical ; in prose, prepositions are commonly 
connected with the Dative. 

H. I, 663. avTUQ^AxdXevg ev8s ^f/w y.Xialrjg svnriiiTov. n, 595. 'EX- 
Xd d L olxla valbiv. /3, 210. xi)^a noXvcploh^OLO d^aldauriq aly taXo) jus- 
yaXco (SgifiiTai. S. Trach. 171. {sq)rj) ttjv naXaiuv (priyov av8i]fjal noie 
/I bid u>v L. Here belong the Locative forms very common in prose, viz., 
Magad^bJVL, "Eksv&lvL, Ilvd-oli, ^I(T&ficft, oixot, "A&ijVTjat, nXaxaiuai, etc., also, 
Taviji, Tj]dE,here, j], where. . So also, Od. 0, 227. IIvXIolq l fiiy s^oxcc 
dojuuTa valwv. 

2. Hence the Dat. is used to express association and accom- 
paniment, 

(a) In connection with the attributive pronoun a^ro^, in or- 
der to express the idea of together ivitJi. 

Her. 3, 45. t« Tiy.va xal Tag yvvcuyMg 6 IIoXvxgdir7]g ig rovg vKngoly.ovg avv- 
eiXijaag £«/£ Holixovg vnouQiiiyai avTolai vstagolxoiaL. 6, 32. t«s 
noXi-ocg ivETilf^TiQacrav uvtoXgl Tolai t^otcrt. X. H. 6. 2, 35. al a;ro 
2^vgaicov(7bJv VJjEg dnaauL kaXooaav avT o2g av d g u cr tv together with the 
men. 

(b) With verbs of going and coming, the object with which 
one goes or comes, stands in the Dative. These Datives are 
commonly collective nouns, e. g. (yzQatcp, aroXo^, TrXr^d^ei, etc., 
or they stand in the Plural, e. g. czQazKozaig and the like. 



§ 2S4.] SYNTAX. THK DATIVK AS A PERSONAL OBJECT. 401 

Her. 5, 99. ol ^A^rivaloi anixiaro ei'xoa i, vrjViT i. 6, 95. tnXfov 1 1 «- 
xo a lj](T t X Q lit] Q iG i iq ii]V ' I(avh]V. Th. 1, 102. 'j&rjvaloi, tjA^ov tt X ?;- 
^ft ovx oXlyi^. 2, 21. f</5aA(uv axQaxM JlkXoTiovvTjalcav. 4, 39, ol 
IhXonovyi]aioL avf/(x)Qri<jav t (x^ (nqazM ex tijc: IIvXov. X. Cy. 1. 4,17. 
avroq Tolg 'innoiq [equitatu) nQogsXaaag n^og tw iiov JW^jJwv (pgovQLa 
xarefisivsv, 

3. The local relation is extended to the time in which any 
thing happens, and then from the time to the circumstances, 
under which anything happens. 

This occurs in prose with the following and similar substantives in con- 
nection with demonstratives, ordinals and other attributives. T fj d e xfi 
V V XT i, T avT J] T fi 1] fxs Q <x, ex slv 7] r fi i) fi eg a, t ^ a if t ^ vvxt i, 
TioXXolg STsai, tqItoj iJ.rjvl, t jj avTi] w q a, tw etiiovti stsi, 
i xelv 10 T g5 8 t £ i, T qJ v ar i q o) eT e i, j ovt o) t w iv iuvtm etc. X. 
An. 4. 8, 1. T ^^ n Q (x)T ji i] (xe q a iKfly.ovTO enl lov noTaixov. So, Jlava&rj- 
vaioig, JLOvvaloig, TQu/cadolg xaivdlg^ at the time of the Pan., etc. The preposi- 
tion ip is employed, (a) when the substantive stands without the attributive, 
e. g. iv jfi %uegn, often also when a demonstrative stands with it, e. g. iv tovto) 
Tw iviavib) ; (b) if continued time is to be indicated, iv in all instances must 
be added ; hence it is used with substantives in connection with cardinals 
and the adjectives oXi/og, ^ga/vg, nr/.Qog, TioXvg, etc., e. g. diijyn/ov iv 
Tgialv 'i]{iegaig ^. An. 4. 8, 8. Od. ^, 253. in Xeofxev B o g s jj uvi^ioi « x- 
g a i'i xaX(a, vnth a good wind, 11. «, 418. tm as xaxr] ouaj] rixov iv fieyar 
goLcnv, under. Her. 6, 139. iniav ^ogsjj avs(xco avrrjixegov vtjvg i^avvarj ix 
T?j? vfxeTsgrjg ig ji]v riy.sTigr}v, tots naga8(x)<J0(xev. 

§ 284. B. The Dative as a Personal Object. 

(495—506, 511.) 

1. Both the Dat. of the person and of the thing denotes an 
object, at or in ivhicli the action of the subject appears or be-*^ 
comes visible ; both denote an object which is made to parti- 
cipate in, or to be connected with, the action of the subject; ac- 
cordingly, the language regards the Dat. of the person and of 
the thing from the same point of view. The distinction is 
merely this, viz., that the former is a personal object, or is con- 
ceived of as personal, and consequently it has the power of 
will ; the latter denotes an object which is a mere thing, or con- 
ceived of as a thing, and of course is without will ; as the idea 
denoted by the term ivhere is intermediate to that denoted by 
ivhence and lohither, so the Dat. (the Where-case) stands in 



402 SYNTAX. THE DATIVE AS A PERSONAL OBJECT. [§284. 

the relation of a person to the Ace., (Ike Whither-case) and in 
the relation of a thing to the Gen., (tlic Wlicnca-case.) 

2. The Ace. denotes an objeet aeled iij)on ])y the subject ; 
the Dat. of the person, on the contrary, denotes an object 
merely aimed at by, and made to share in the action of the 
subject; the action of the subject is indeed employed on the 
object and becomes manifest in it, yet it does not make it a 
passive object, or one that receives an action, but the object ap- 
pears itself as active in distinction from the subject ; between 
the subject and the object a reciprocal action takes place. The 
Gen. denotes the immediate cause ; the Dat. of the thing, 
on the contrary, a mediate, indirect cause, i. e. the ground, the 
means, the instrument ; the Gen. denotes an object as calling 
out and producing the action of the subject; the Dat. of the 
thing, only such an object as exhibits in or upon itself the action 
of the subject. 

Remark 1. In poetry a local airri or object is wevy often conceived of as 
a person, and is indicated by the Dat. ; this sometimes occurs, yet seldom, 
in prose. II. o, 369. naai &bo1qLV xstgag avh/ovTsg. So ai'g£(T&ai, 
ETialgmd-ai doQV tlvL II. s, 709. Xlj^vj] xsylijuivog KfjcpKrldi,. •q, 218, 
TTQOicaXiaa-aTo xaQfij], Th. 1, IS.^AixsLVOxlrig 2a(jLloiq i]?.&ev. 3,5. av- 
T olg MsXiag Aay.MV acpixvuTai. 

Rem. 2. From this use of the Dat., the fact may be explained, why many 
verbs of motion compounded with the prepositions etg, ngog, eni, etc., take 
their object in the Dat. ; also why most adverbs are susceptible of the Dat. 
(or Locative) inflection, § 101, 2, (b), including both the local Dat. and that 
which expresses the direction ivhither, (the Dat. of the person), e. g. xai^iul, 
humi, huraum ; so, likewise, the adverbs in -r„ e. g. alltj ; those in -w, e. g. 
avco, nixToi, etc. ; those in -o t, e. g. nedoT, humi, humum ; evTavdoi, hue and 
hie (but 01, OTTOi, Tio't, always indicate the direction whither). 

3. Most verbs, which take the Dat. of the person as an object, 
aimed at, or connected with it, express the idea of union and 
community, e. g. didovai, Tiagsxeiv, vmaxvua&ai, aQ7zdt,eiv xi tin. 
The following classes of words may be mentioned, 

(1) Verbs expressing community, communication, e. g. o/xt- 
XeTv, fiiyvvvai, iilyvvad-ai, xoivovv, iioivovod-ai, y,oivo3V8iv, dt-, 'AazaXXdz- 
reiv, to reconcile, di-, xaralldrTEad-ai, to reconcile one^s self to, ^e- 
vovad-ai, aTzavdea&ai or 67tovddg Tzoisia&ai, TTQatTEiv, (agere cum ali- 
quo) ; eiTZsiv, Xeyeiv, diaX8yE0&ai, EviEcd-ai, y.azaQdo&ai, etc. ; also ad- 
jectives and adverbs, sometimes even substantives which express 
a similar idea, e. g. y>oiv6g, ovvTQocpog, 6viAq)covog, ovyyEvrjg, fisramog, 
and many other adjectives compounded with avv and fiEtd. 



§284.] SYNTAX. THK DATIVE AS A PERSONAL OBJECT. 403 

'Ofillftv ToXg aya&olg dv&QOiTiobg. Her. 3, 131. o /tijfioxi'idrjg 
II X V X Q a T t'i u fi I k 1] a s. G, 21. noXisg avraL ^aXiaia aXXi^Xtja l e^ct- 
VM&Tjffav. i.i'/fff^at roig -d^Eolg. X. IT. 2. 2, 19. (nxBv8Bax>ai 
\4&i]vrtloig. 3. 2, 20. « ^ ^ )j A o k anov8ag inoiTjaavxo. Isocr. 
Paneg. 42, 9. at nga^sig al ■n:Qoysysvi]fiivai y.oival naa iv ^) fjZv y.arfXflcp- 
xhr,aav. On the Gen. with xoLvog, see § 273, 3, (b). 

(2) Verbs of contending, litigating, emulating, e. g. eQiTetv, fid- 
ysa&ai, TzoXefieTvj dycoviXsad^ai, dixd^eoOai, dfi(pig^r^7sTPj etc. ; also of 
going towards, encountering, meeting and approaching, as well 
as of those expressing the opposite, as of yielding, e. g. vnoazijvai 
and vq:taTaa{^ca ; dnavTav, vnavrav, VTtavziduiv, nlr^aidt^tiVj 7TE).d^Fiv, 
ifi7iEXdi^E6&ai, iyytZsiv, etc. ; erAeiv, vTzef-ASiv, x^Q^^^^ TiaQaxcoQeTv, etc. ; 
the adjectives and adverbs Tthioiog, IvavTiog, iyyvg, n^'lag, etc. 

Oi "ii/A /jrf c avdQfio)g t otg TI i g a a ig i fia/ ia avr o. Mi] sI'xets 
To7g n X £ fi 1 I g. Xgi] rote i/ ^ g oXg riig ijfiETigag ixcagag) nagaxoi- 
qr,(jui Isocr. Archid. 118, 13. On the Gen., see §271,2. '"Tnoarriv at, 
avT olg [nig d u ig) Ad-i]vuiOi ToXtxrjaavTsg, ivr/.rjaav aiiovg X. An. 3. 2, 11. 
'Tcp I (TT a a d- a L ^v fi q) o g ci7 g Th. 2, 61. "0}.wiov 6 n o I to ad TisXai^Ei 
PI. Sj'mp. 195, b. "i^oj'TO uvtIol toIo-l Aay.idaiuovloiGi Her. 6, 77. T\j^ 
gavvog linug e^^gog sXmdsgtK y.al v 6 /xo tg b v a v x l o g. On the Gen., see 
§ 273, Rem. 9. 

(3) Verbs of entreating, counselling, inciting, of following, 
accompanying, serving, obeying and trusting, e. g. nQogrdr-Tsiv, 
InitdrzEiv, TtaQaivsTv, 7iaQay.eXe,vEG&ai, etc. (but 'Aelevsiv with Ace. 
and Inf ) ; tnead^ai, dy.oXov&£Tv, diadr/ead-ai-, to succeed; nsi&sc' 
'&ai ; vnay.ovEiv, dnRid^elv, TziaTEveiv, nF.noid^tvai, etc.; the adjectives 
and adverbs dy.oXov&og, dy.olov&cog, sTzousvojg, diddoxog, s^tjg, icps^r^g. 

X. Cy. 8. 6, 13. TovTMv, mv (instead of a) vTv v filv nagaxEXsvofiaL 
oidiv T olg d ovXo ig ngogTaxTbh Her. 3, 88. Agd^ioi ovdafia y.aTi]- 
y.ovaav snl dovXotrvvj] Hi gav (t l. 6, 14. ivccvixdxsov dv7]y,ovaTi](TavTEg 
TOfcCTt ax g ax 7] y old I. X. Cy. 1. 1, 2. xug dyilag xuvxag Edoxoi'iiEV ogav 
fiulXov E&iXovaag T[sl&E(T-&ai xolg v o fiEv a iv, v xovg uv&gwTiovg x olg 
agyovdi. 8. 6, 18. to5 i^fisoLVO) u y y iXoi [cpaal) xov vvxxEgivov 8 i a- 
dsyEa^c/.L. PI. Rp. 400, d. EvXoyla uga y.al fvagixoaxla y.al Evayi^uoavvr] 
y.ul Eigv&nta e vrj & e i(x u zoXov & eI. Eur. Andr. 803. y.uy.ov y.axM 8 id- 
8 oyov. PI. Phaedon. 100, c. axoTiEL 8)] xd E'S,i]g iy.slvoLg. 

(4) Expressions of similarity and dissimilarity, of likeness 
and unlikeness, of concord and discord, e. g. ior/Jvui, 6[aoiovv, 
o[4,oiovad^ai, oiioiogj ofioiajg, laog, iGoag, ii^cpEQi^g, similar^ naganXrimog, 



404 SYNTAX. THE DATIVE AS A PERSONAL OBJECT. [§284. 

naQanhioimg, 6 avzog, idem, ufia ; diucponog, discordant, hostile, diu- 
cpcovog; and very many words compounded with oi^ov, ovv, fierd, 
e. g. ofiovoeTv, ofioylcorTog, ofKavvfiogy avfiqjcoveiVj ovfiqjcovog, ^vvo)86g. 

Her. 1, 123. rug nad^ag zug Kvqov tji(tl Iwvtov ojjiOiovfiEvog, com- 
parans. (5, 23. o "Priylov xtQuvvog diuq)ogog [rjv) x ola i Z uynXulo itr i. 
X. Cy. 7. 1, 2. b)TiXt<jfiivoL ndvjfg riaav ol tkqI tov Kvqov r olg avx olg tw 
Kv(joj oTiXotg. 5.1.4. ofxolav roft? dovXaig sixs X7]v ia&i]xa {lldv- 
^sioc). 7.5,G5. 6 (Tldrjgog dv laol xovq dcrd-evsig xolg la-%vg o7g iv xca 
noXi^o). Isocr. Paneg. 43, 13. ;faA€7rdy iaxuv I'aovg xovg Xoyovg xw fisyi^ 
•d Si T(av sgyojv i^svgslv. Th. 1, 49. tj vuvfiaxlct n e^o naxla nqogcfi- 
gtjg {i]v). 

Rem. 3. On the Gen. with ofioiog, see § 273, 3, (b). The coordinate, 
copulative particle, y.cd, is not seldom employed with adjectives of equality 
and similarity instead of the Dative. Her. 1, 94. ylv8ol vcfxoLcn [xiv naqu- 
nXtjaloLai /QEutvTai x « V'EXXrjvsg. So iv t'tro), laa, oixoImq, ugaviug, y.axu 
ravTii nal, etc. PI. Ion. 500, d. ov/ 6 fio I a g nsjioirjy.affi y. a I "Ofxrigog. Comp, 
similis et, ac atque. There, also, occur, particularly in the Attic prose 
writers, the particles of comparison, wg, Mgnsg ; these are used w ith laog, 6 
avxog. Dem. Phil. 3. 119, 33. xov avxov xgonov, atgnsg, y.. x. X. 

(5) Expressions denoting what is becoming, suitable, befitting, 
pleasing, and the opposite, e. g. nqtmiv, aQfiozzEiv, TiQogyxeip (with 
an Inf. following), nQSTiovtag, dTTQSTZcjg, eiy,6g iari, ely.otcog, aQsay.eiv 
(dvddvEip Ion.). 

X. Cy. 7. 5, 37. /5ao"t A«t i]/£lxo n gin el v. PI. Apol. 36, d. xl ovv 
ng Bizet, dv8 gl ttevtjx l. Her. 6, 129. smvx o) dgeax cog ogxiizo, sibi 
placens. X. Cy. 3. 3, 39. dgiayEiv vfilv neigoivxaL. 

(6) Verbs of agreeing with, reproaching, being angry, envy- 
ing, e. g. o^oXoyeTv, etc. ; [^t[uq}e6d'ai, to reproach ; fisj^cpea&ai 
Tivcc, meaning to blame, loidogeTadai, to reproach, Imrijiav, ly- 
'xaXeiv (rivL zi), ImxaXeXv (rivl zi), iTziTzX^ztELv, oveidi^eiv, ivo'/Xeiv, etc. ; 
'&vfiova&a[, ^Qijiovad-ai, '^aXEnaiveiv, etc.; cp&oveTv, ^aay.aivEiv, to envy ; 
^aa-AaivEiv zivd with the meaning to calumniate. The Ace. of the 
thing very often stands with the Dat. of the person. 

Her. 3, 142. f/al xd [= a) xo) tc iXag eti lit X)](7 a ca, avxog y.axd dvva- 
fiLV ov noiijcroj, Th. 4, 61. ou x olg dgyjiv ^oyXofiEvoig (x i f^i q) o (.i a t, 
dXXd xolg vnay.oisiv sxo i jxox e g o i g ov a iv. Dem. Ol. 2. 30, 5. r]v mx- 
Xel vf-ilv 6 fl^lXiTTTTog. X. An. 2. 5, 13. AlyvTixlovg, olg fidXiaxa vj^iug vvv 
yivdxjyoa xE&VfiojfiEvovg, y.oXaaea&E. Cy. 1. 4, 9. o -d-siog a v x o) iXo i- 
d g eIxo, xi]v S^gacFVTi]xa oqmv. 4. 5. 9. Kva^dgiig i^gifiovxo t w Kv~ 
gca y.al xolg Mri^oig xco xai cdmovxag avxov Egr}fiov oi'/ea&ah 



§ 284.] SYNTAX. THE DATIVE AS A PERSONAL OBJECT. 405 

(7) Verbs of helping, benefiting and averting, e. g. u/^^- 
yftVy duvysir, dXt^eiy, 7(uconeiy, ^0},{>tiv, iniy.ovQEiv and the like, e. g. 
drroXoyeidOui, IvauehTr, InaQy.th', /QaiafiHv, also several verbs com- 
pounded with (TvV, e. g. cv^cptQEiv, conducere, av^TTQaiTEiv, cvvsq- 
yeh; etc., and many adjectives of the same and similar signifi- 
cations, e. g. XQr;aii(o.\ ^hc^enOi^ epilog, r/^O-Qog, etc. 

X. R. L. A, o. u Q r, ^ V a I t/]| ttoIsi tiuvtI ad-ivH. C\\ 3. 3, 67 (at /r- 
vainfg) UtTevovai ndrTag f^)) (fsvy^iv yaiulinovTag «vt«?, d X )^ a ^v v u t, 
nctl a I T aUg, xal t sxv o i g, xal a cp I (t iv a v t olg. 4. 3. 2. t ovt o ig 
ydg (faaiv uvdyy.jjv dvai ngo&vuMg dXi^siv. Eur. Or. 922. COQSfTTtjg) 
rj&iXj,(js T t }.i 0) Q &lv TT.UTQi, y.a/.i]v yvvol'/.a '/.udEOV y.uxtx'/.TUvwv. PI. Ap. 
28, c, H T I j^ CO g J] u E ig n ut g 6 yXo) t oj kz a I g oj tov (forov. 

Rem. 4. Hence the Dative stands, in general, with verbs and adjectives 
of all kinds, when the action takes place for the profit, favor, honor, 
harm, disadvantage, of a person, or an object conceived of as a person, 
{Dativiis commodi d incommodi,) where the English uses the prepositions to 
or for. Here belong particularly the rites performed m honor of a divm- 
ity, e. g. ogx^lij&ai lolg &iolg, aTicpavova^ui S^ico. Her. 6, 138. "AgTSfxidt 
ogryiv uyeiv. So, also, the Dative is used with y./.vsiv (Poet, or rather Epic) 
to express, y.Xvd-l {xoi, listen to me favorably. Here belongs, also, the plu-ase, 
mostly poetic, 8i/jad-ul tl Tivi, to receive one into favor, since it involves the 
kindly additional idea that the reception of a thing as a relief, will be re- 
garded as agreeable to the person. Od. tt, 40. wc uga cforrjaag o I ids^u- 
To xdXxEov fyxog. See Larger Gramm. Pait. 11. § 597, Rem. 3. 

(8) Verbs of observing, finding, meeting with something in 
a person. 

'TjI Xa IX ^ uv s I V 8n to} toiol-to), oxt slrj&rig Tig dv d^ g conog {sc'A. 
iaTir) PI. Rp. 598, d. "LTiga 87], (Lg I'otxf, t ol g cpvXa^tv tv gi] y. a ixsv 
421, e. Ougaoiicn ^idXidTu noXiuiOL, oTav Tolg ivavjloig TTguyjjaxa 
y.ul ddXoXiag nvv&dvwvTa.L X. Hipp. 5, 8. 

(9) The Dative stands with s or tv and £ t(T iv in order to de- 
note the person, or the thing conceived of as a person, that has 
or possesses something. The thing possessed stands as the 
subject in the Nora. 

Kvg 0) ■)] V fisyd/.T] ^uaildu. — To Ig tcX ovff lo eg nolXd nagafiv d^id 
(fuffiv Biv a I PI. Rp. 329, e. 'Ha a v Kg la en dvo TTotdeg Her. 1, 34. 

Rem. 5. The possessive Dat., or the Dat. of the possessor, is to be dis- 
tinguished from the Gen. of the possessor, § 273, 2. The Dative is used, 
when it is asked, what the possession is (what has one ?), and the posses- 
sion designated is contrasted with other possessions, e. g. Kvg oj f,v (js- 
ydXrj ^aadsla^ Cyru^ had, among other things, a great kingdom ; the Gen. is 
53 



406 SYNTAX. THE DATIVE AS A PERSONAL OBJECT. [§ 284. 

used, when it is asked who the possessor is (whose is this ?), and the pos- 
sessor is contrasted with otlicr jjossessors, e. g. Kvqov i]v fir/ui.ri ,^uai- 
Xdu, to Cijrus {and not to another) belonged a great kingdom. The Dative de- 
scribes the person as one to whom the possession has been imparted, di- 
vided, given ; the Genitive, as one who has himself gained possessioD, from 
whom the possession has proceeded. 

(10) The Dat. is used universally when an action takes place 
in respect to a person, or a thing conceived of as a person, so 
that the person is in some way a sharer of it. Here belong 
the following instances, — 

(a) In certain formulas, the Dative designates the person to whose judg- 
ment, consideration or estimate, an idea is referred, and thus it first gains a 
certain authority, e. g. Her. 1, 14. uIti&h da Xoyoj / g so) fzsv oj ov Koqiv- 
■&LUIV Tou driuoa'ov tirnv 6 ^ijaavgog (recte aestimanti non est thesaurus 
Corinthiacus.) Th. 2, 49. to 8^(ii'&ev amofiivo) ao^ija ovx uynv -d^fQ/Jtov 
iv, " the external pait of the body, when one touched it, was not verj' hot." 
The Datives fh^iuvji,, f^iovri, uva^aviL, virfQ^uvn and the like especially 
belong here, where objects are to be locally defined. Her. 6, 33. «n:o'/w- 
lirjC uTiitV.aaiJi'fxEiog u runr/.og dTQaicg lu in c/.uiaifqa i gnle ov 1 1 rov 
*J^l).r]<:7TurT0V c/io^s navia. X. Cy. 8. 6, 20. naviu lu advr], oaa Zvqlav in- 
/? « r T t oliiu {xs/fji fQV\)-Quc ■du'uuTirrig. Also the expression Cig a v v sX ov- 
T I ilnny, to say it in brief, ])ro])erly in order to say it when one has compre- 
hended the tvhole, e. g.'Aitv uq/ovioiv ovdiv liv ol'if xwAor, ol'ia uyud^hv yi- 
voiTO, big fAfi' (T V V a ).6 r T t Hiih\ ovdi/.juftv X. An. 3. 1, 38. 

(b) The Dat. of the person often stands in connexion with i^tg, in order 
to show that the thought which is expressed, is not general, but only has 
value according to the opinion of the person named. X. C. 4. 6, 4. o aqa 
JUL TTfot TOiX' dioig voui^uu uSdig oq&o)g uv y ^\v svas^Srig oiomfisvog tl'q {nos- 
tro jiidicio). S. OC. 20. fiUXQuv yuq, oig y s q ovr l, 7jQovinu}.r,g u6uv. Ant. 
1161. Kqioiv yuq 7JI' ^rjlunog, b) g ifiol, noii. PI. Soph. 226, c. TWj^tlav, 
o')§ i (J t, ay.iipiv fjinuTTfLg. Her. 3, 88. yu^ovg lovg nfjbnovgfytt^ft II i g- 
(Ti](Ji u /yu^Ho? (matrimonia ex Persarum judicio nobilissima). Altogeth- 
er usual in the phrase (i^iog sl^ui Tivog t lvi, or even without the 
Gen., u ^ tog ilixl x iv l, I am of value in the estimation of some one, X. C. 
1. 2, 6'2. ffiiil fjiv d)] 2'a)y.gaTrjg Totoijog wV eduxEi Tii.nig u^iog iirai rf] 
n 6 X 1 1 ^luXXov, i] daruTov^ rather merits honor than death as it respects the city. 
PI. Symp. ]85. b. ovTog iuiiv o tjJc Ovgavlag ^tol tguK y.ul olguviog y,ul 
noXXoi lihog y.u\ ttoXsl y.ai Id Lcai a i g. 

(c) Here belongs the use of the Dat. of a person with a Part, of verbs 
which express the idea of wUling, desiring, and the opposite, e. g. (lovXo- 
fiiva, rido^ivca, ocafxivo), iXnofiivca, a^^ofiivco, in connexion with verbs, most 



§ 284.] SYNTAX. THE DATIVE AS A PERSONAL OBJECT. 407 

frequently with ilv a i and yi/vi<r&at. Her. 9, 16. r]8 oy.iv o i,a iv 
^lulv ol Xcyoi ys/ovam. Th. 6, 46. lo) Nixia nQogSs/ofiivo) i]v 
Ttt nfql TOW ^ J^yi(JTu'uiiv. PI. Rp. 358. d. aX\ 6(ja, tX a o t ^ovXofiivo) 
(sc. Rrrt'i'), u Xeyu), whether I say what pleases you. 

(d) The Dat. of the personal pronouns, first and second persons, is often 
used so as to show that the intercourse of the speaker, or of the person 
spoken to, is conducted in a confidential and pleasant manner, (Dativus 
eihicus). X. Cy. 1. 3, 2. oQatv dl] xlv y.oafuov rov nunnov, ffifiUnoiv uiio), 
sXfytv (o Kvf)og)' 'SI (jnisQ, wg xalog fioc o nunnog. 15. i]v de fiS y.aiot- 
Unr^g iy&ads, y.m (ludu) Ircnsisiv, oiav fxiv iv lUgauig w, oi}ial a o t iy.tlvovg 
tovg uya&ovg tu ns^ixa ^ndivjg vix}']tTHv. 

(11) The Dative often stands with the Perf. Pass, (rarely 
with other tenses of the Pass.), in order to denote the agent. 
The Pass., in this case, expresses a stata, or condition, and the 
Dat., the author of this condition who is at the same time the 
person for icliom this condition exists, while by vno wdth the 
Gen., the author merely is expressed. 

Her. 6, 123. wg fuoi tcqotiqov d eS r, Xmt a i. Dem. Aphob. 844, 1. dtl 
diriyij(Taa9ai ra tovtoj ti sti q u y fiiv a nsul )jud)i>. 01. 1. 26, 27. il n i- 
TiQ axTuL Tolg aXkoLg. In this way a Perf Act., which is wanting, 
may be supplied, e. g. TaiTw luoi kils/.Tai. 

(12) The agent, also, stands, regularly, in the Dative waththe 
verbal adjectives in -w and -rfW, {) 234, l,i,) both when they 
are used, like the Latin Gerund, impersonally in the Neut. 
Sing. -Tov, -Tiov, or in the PI. -7«, -zba, § 241,3. or personally, like 
the Latin Gerundive ; those derived from transitive verbs, 
i. e. such as govern the Ace, admit both the Impers. and the 
Pers. construction; but those derived from intransitive verbs ad- 
mit only the impersonal. The verbal Adj., used impersonally, 
takes its object in the same Case as the verb from W'hich it is 
derived. 

'Aqayqvy.xovlaTLv vfilv; Arist. Lys. 656. Elni Tig, urt, roUg alXoig 
luvx Evy.Ta d'q X. Cy. 3. 2, 25. ^Aay.rjjiov (or -Tea) fort a o l rr,v uijsti'jv. 
"Eni&vurfiiov iail rolg av&Qconoig ri;g ugsTijg. '£7ri/«^7/T£ov iaxl 
(TO I TO) E^yoh (I^rifxl di] j3or]dr}Tsov iirat To7g Tiodyjuaaiv Vfxlv Dem. Ol. 
3.14,17. Kolaaiiov icnl col juv ar&gctmov. 'Eay.rjTEu sail a o i ij ugs- 
xi]. "fLcpdrfTia aoi i] TioXig iujlv X. C. 3. 6, 3. So the Deponents, 
§ 197, e. g. {xiiur,iiov iuTiv i]jj,lv jolg uya&ovg fi:om (jn^uad-ai Tiva or ^ui- 
fjLTliioi. ilalv Viixiv ol ayadoL 



408 SYNTAX. THE INSTRUMENTAL DATIVE. [§285. 

Rem. G. The verbal adjectives of tliose verbs ^vbose Middle form has a 
Pass. iiieairiii<(, as well as a reflexive or intransitive, have, likewise, iii the 
impersonal Neut. form with iaii, a two-fold signification, and when an ob- 
ject is subjoined, a two-fold construction, e. g. ntiariov iailv ii^Ip uviov, 
we must co7ivince him, from nnO-o) tivu and nenniov iailv i\^1v xdlq vofioig 
[ohkmpcmndum est a nobis Icgibus) from ml^ouul riri, obtempero alicui ; 
U7Tu)J.(xy.Tsov fffT/y »//uIv avTov 10V yMxou from una'/.lunnv tuic lOii y.axov, 
and anaUMXTkov iaiiv ij{.tlv tov uvxfito'mov tiom unulXuirtax/ui Tivog, to get 
rid of something. 

Rem. 7. Not seldom, however, hi comiection ^vith verbal adjectives in 
-T « c, the agent is denoted, among the Attic writers, by the Ace, since 
the Ace. implies the idea of the impersonal verb d si with the Iiif, e. g. PI. 
G org. 507. d. tov (iovXo^svov Evdalpova iivai ab)(f)OOGVvriv dioy/.TSov 
xal a(j/.i]xiov. Often, also, the construction of verbal adjectives is changed 
mto the Inf ; in this case the agent must necessarily stand in the Ace. X. 
C. 1. 5, 5. fnol f-ih doxtX — iX ^v S^ a q oj uv d qI sv xt s ov hvul fii] xvynv 
dovXov To/oL'Tou, 6 V X s V o V X u de — Ix ex ev e iv xovg &iovg x. t. X. 

§ 285. C. The Dative of the thing- (Instrumental 

Dative.) (5U7— 510.) 

1. The Dat., as indicating objects without life or conceived 
to be such, expresses relations which in Latin are denoted by the 
ablative, and in other languages by the instrumental relation. 
They are, as has been seen, § 284, 2, expressed as follows, 

(1) The gTOund or reason, e. g. (po^o) dmp,d^ov, evvoia, ddrxircy 
cpo^cp, v^oEi TioiHv Ti ; cspccially with verbs denoting a disposition 
or frame of mind, e. g. xalqeiv, 7]8eo&ai, dydXleo^ai, iTzaiQEO&aij 
IvTtHod^ai, dXyeiv ; -O^avixd^eiv ; iXTti^eiv ; oz^'gyeiv, dyanav, dQsay.ead^aij 
dQxela&ai, to be content ivith something-, dyavay.zHv, dvg'/eocarsiVj 
^aXsTtcjg qiEQEiv, di&Eod^ca ; aiay^vvead-ai, etc. 

Her. 6, 67. aXyriuag t(>> iTisiQOJTi'jfxaxL sine. 4, 78. d l a Ixj] cv- 
8ap,cug 7] Q sax ST o S^xv -d- Lxfj. Th. 4, 85. ■& av iid'Qw tij a.rcoxXs l~ 
asi f.iov Tcuv TTvXojv. 3, 97. sXnl^etv t jj tv/j]. 2^tsq'/siv ToXg 
n a Q V a I V. ^Ayanav x ol g ■UTra^/oi^o'ty a y a ^ ol g. XaXs- 
nbiq cpsQEiv TOi?7r«^ou(Tt7T^w/,u«(7i X. An. 1.3, 3. Aid %vv sa-d- av xolq 
nsJiQayfisvoig C. 2. 1, 31. PI. Hipp. maj. 285. e. slxoTOjg a o i % oclg ov- 
er lv ol i^axsdaiporioi, ixTS noXXu sldoTi. AydXXsG&ui t^ vlxj], 
"Ay av axxstv tw & avdx to, dvg y eq a Iv slv x olg Xoy o iq. Dem. 
Ol. 3. 13, 14. ay ant] (T a q xolq nsjiQuypEVOig i]<jvxlav <Tyf]asi. "la- 
yvsiv Tolq (TcofiaaL X. C. 2. 7, 7. So, also, with adjectives, e. g. layvgog 
ysQcrlv, Tayiq noalv, etc. 

Remark 1. The preposition inl, in, upon, at, is veiy often connected 
with the Dat. ; commonly in, %aXE7tcoq cpsQEiv inl xivt, S-avfiu^Eiv irci xivi. 



§285.] SYNTAX. THE INSTRUMENTAL DATIVE. 409 

(Q) The moans and inslrnnient, by which an action is accom- 
plished (with which? by which?) Hence the Dat. also stands 
wiih ;((>// (J i>«t (uti), and its compounds, and with voiit'Ceiv, to be 
customari/, to be in, common use. 

BdXXeiv lid- Lg, ay.ovii^siv a i;^^f «7 c. X. Cy. 4. 3, 21. o {^sv innoxiv- 
Tur^o," 8vo7v 6 (p & aX ^ o7 V nQOiWQuzo y.al dvolv wtolv ^jxovev iyta 
di r sxT aga L fisv o (p & aXfiolg TexfiaQOVfiai, TeTTW^trt. ds wcrt nqocti- 
(T&rjffoixai, ' noXXix ydq (fuat y.al XrtTtov uv&QMnoig -lolg o(pd^aX^o1g ttqoo-' 
QMVxa 8r^Xo\}v, noXXa 8s xolg ual ngoaxovovTa (TrjfiaipsLV. 18. Trgovosly 
ixir ys f'^w ndvia t [] uv & g (an Ivrj y v (o ^i j], t ccl g 8 s %sg(rlv onXocfogr\~ 
ata, Suo^o^uL 8s Tto Xtitko, xov 8^ ivavrlov uvaigsipbi xfj xov Xmiov go't^urj. 
Her. 3, 117. oIxol oov, o'lnsg l[ungo(T&ev iu&saav ygdad^ai x (o v8axL, 
ovy. s^orxsg avx to y ga a & ai, (TV{.i(p o gf] ^sy dXt] 8 luy g soivx ai. 
Dem. Cor. 277, 150. ysvfi tt g o q) u a s i t avxr] y.axsygo). But x « t «- 
X gi] cr& a L and 8 i ay gi} a & a l with the meaning to kill, govern, as Trans., 
the Ace. Conip. Her. 6, 135 ; Antiph. 1. 113, 23. With y g ij a & a i a se- 
cond Dat. often stands, by means of attraction, so as to express the aim, de- 
sign, e. g. ygMual aoi maxo) cpllfo, as in the Lat. utor te Jido amico, I have 
thee for a true friend. On the Ace. with ygiia&at, see § 278, 4. Her. 4, 117. 
(f oiv fi ol ^'avgofAUxai v o fil^ova l I'y.v&ixfi. Th. 2, 38. « / w o- 1 y.al -& r- 
(j I a L g 8 I sxrjiT i Lg v o ^Ll^ov a i. 

(3) As the means there may be expressed by the Dal., 
(a) the material, out of which ( = of which) anything is 
made ; — (b) the standard, according to which anything is mea- 
sured, judged of, or done; hence the Dat. stands particularly 
with verbs of measuring, judging, concluding, e. g. aza&fAdad-at, 
yiyvaoy.Eiv, Ei/.d^siv, y.nivEiv, zEHixaiQsa&ai ; also in general, in or- 
der to indicate a reference to an object, or a more exact defi- 
nition, e. g. with verbs signifying to become distinguished, 
verbs of excelling, those signifying to be strong and powerful, 
as well as the opposite, and with very many adjectives, (in- 
stead of the Ace. used to express a more exact definition, § 297, 
7) ; in English, the prepositions to, according to, are used in 
this case ; — (c) the measure, by, according' to, which an action 
is determined, especially with comparatives and superlatives, as 
well as with other expressions, which include the idea of com- 
parison, in order to show how much an action or quality is 
greater or smaller than another; — finally, (d) the way and man- 
ner in which anything is done (how ?) 



410 SYNTAX. CONSTRUCTION OF PREPOSITIONS. [h 286. 

Her. 3, 57. u/noij xul TO nnvTuvt'iiov ITaQlo) ll&oj ijay.rjuiva (^v). On 
the Gen. of the iTmicrial, see § 273, 5. Her. 2, 2. t o to v to* (izu&firjad- 
liEvo i n Q 1] / (u UT L, ex tali re judicantes. 7, IG. t /) o- /J ia-O^iJT l x ix fiui^ 
Q 6 ixEV ov, er lua veste judicium faciejis. X. Cy. 1. 3, 5. t Iv l 5/j al t Ey.[xu i- 
Q 6 fx s V o g, (X) 7r«2, ),i/fig ; 3. 3, 19. <xl ^u/ui y. q Iv ovj u i fj-ixXXov x aXq ijjv- 
/(xlc, i] Tccig jJ)V aoi^uTOiv ^oifxuig. H. 7. 3, G. o'vtol nuviug uv&Q0)7ioi'g 

V7lEQ^S(3Xl]Xa(Tl T oX ft J] T £ y.lU fJ L U Q I fX. CH. 1 ^ 7 . I (T X V B L V T I J 

ff b) fi a <T I. Cy. 2. 3, 6. r/M ovre tx on Iv ^ixi x a/vg, ovr b x sQalv la- 
X y Q o g. Hence xo) ovu, xrj uX>,d^tia, to* Ao/'w, to5 tQ/M, according to the na- 
ture, etc. ; also /vb^uj] acpaXrivui, ipsviT&ijvuL Th. 4, 18, Her. 7, 9. Her. 1, 184. 
^sfilga^uLg /evsjidi ni vx s n qoxiq ov i/ivsxo xijg NiTwy.oiog. So noX- 
Xb), uXi/oj fisl^wv. Her. 6, 89. v ax ig icr av ijfiigjj fiifi xr^g avyy-EL^ivrig, 
a day later than was fixed upon. IQQ.noXu Xoylfij] i] "EXXug ysyovs u<t- 
-& Ev Edxigri. Here belong, also, ^Tjiutouv xLva xiXlaig dQuxfioug, S^ccvaxM 
and the like. Her. 6, 136. ^rffjLcoaavxug ds {xov 8t]i.iov xov MiXxiddsa) xaxd 
Ti]V (xdiy.iTjv 71 Evxrixovx a x aXdvxo ig i. Th. 4, 73. tw ^ eXx laxb) xov 
OTiXixiy.ov ^Xaq)&nvaL, jaduram facere. II. y, 2. Tgcosg fjisv y.Xay yfi t' ev o- 
nfi X I'aav, ogvid^Eg btg. X. Cy. 1. 2, 2. ^la sig oh.lav nuqiivai. So ^w>;, 
iiiLfiEXELoi, dq^oalfx (sc. odb)), Idla {t8J)), ni^rj {o8bj\ aoLvj] {o8o)), in common^ 
xbi xQOTCb) xoLbt5E\ xo^^Ldj], propcrly udth care, hence, very much, anovdjj, with 
pains, aegre, scarcely, hardly, aXXrj, xuvxtj, dixfi, duplici modo, Ety.fj, frustra. 
Comp. ^ 101, 2, (b). 

§ 286. 11. The Construction of Prepositions. (512-515.) 

1. As the Cases show the relations of place, or the direction, 
luhence, ivhither, luhere, and the causal relations, which were 
originally conceived of as expressing the relations of direction, 
etc., so the prepositions express another relation in space, in 
which the extension or dimension of things in space, is consid- 
ered, viz. the juxtaposition of things, b?/ the side of, before, be- 
hind, around, at, or the local contraries of above and below, 
loithin and without, before and behind, etc. ; hence this is called 
the relation of dimension. 

2. The Cases connected with the prepositions, show in which 

of the three above mentioned relations of direction, ivhence, 

lohither and where, the relation of the dimension expressed by 

the preposition must be conceived. 

Remark 1. Thus, e. g. the preposition na g a denotes merely the local 
relation of vicinity, the near or ly ; but in connection with the Gen., e. g. 



§ 286.] SYNTAX. CONSTRUCTION OF PREPOSITIONS. 411 

t] i ^ e naQu tov /5 « o- * A «' a) c, it denotes, at the same time, the direction 
whence, (he cniue from near the kinjr, de cliez le roi)\ in connection with the 
Ace, e. g. j) s I n tx Q (t tov fiacTiXsa, at the same, time the direction 
ivhither (he went into the vicinity or presence of the king); and in connection 
with tlie Dut., e. g. iuti] ttuqu to* ^aaiXeli, at the same time the 
where, which expresses no direction [he stood near the king). 

3. The prepositions according to their construction may be 
divided, ,. 

(a) into prepositions which govern the Gen., a v t t, before [ante], il.n6,from 
[ab, a), ix, out of [ex], n go, instead of {pro); 

(b) into those which govern the Dat., i v, {in with abl.) and a vv, with 
{cum). 

(c) into those which govern the Ace, av a, up, e I g, {in with ace), to g^ 
to; 

(d) into those which govern the Gen. and Ace, 8 l a, through, y.axa., down 
from {de), v n i g, over {super), fiExa, with ; 

(e) into those which govern the Gen., Dat. and Ace, a ficp I, about, i n I, 
oUy naga,by,7tsg i, around — about {circa), ngog, before, and vno, un- 
der {sub). 

4. According to the relations of dimension which preposi- 
tions denote, they may be divided, 

(a) into such as indicate a juxtaposition, n agd and u (icp l, near, in I, at 
or to, a vv and p.BTu, loith ; 

(b) into such as express local contraries, sti I, to, av a, at, vn i g, over, and 
V n 6, under, xax u, down {under), n g 6, n g 6 g and uvt I, before, in 

front of, and the improper prepositions oti lad^ sv, after, behind ; i v 
and f I g, in, within, and i x, i |, from, out of; d t «, through, and n eg I, 
around, outside; tag, to, up to, and an 6, from, away from. 

5. The relation of dimension expressed by prepositions is trans- 
ferred to the relations of time and causality, e. g. 01 noXi^oi ano 
trig ^ 6Xeo3 g an i^pvy ov. A ti o vvat o g anrjld-ov. Ano 
^v fi l-i a'/^ I a g avzovoiioi elaiv. 

6. Each preposition has a fundamental meaning, which it 
everywhere retains, even when it is connected with two or three 
Cases ; but it receives various modifications according to the 
different Cases, because the relation of space varies with every 
Case. Comp. Rem. 1. The fundamental meaning of preposi- 
tions appears in the clearest manner in indicating the relations 
of space, and, for the most part, in those of time ; but in the ex- 
hibition of causal relations it is often very obscure. 



412 SYNTAX. PREPOSITIONS WITH THE GEN. ONLY. [§ 287. 

Rem. 2. All the prepositions were oriirinally adverbs of i)lace. See § 300, 
1. The prepositions enumerated in No. ;3, may be called Proper preposi- 
tions, inasmuch as during the period when the language was cultivated, 
they either were not used at all, or but very seldom as adverbs of* place, 
without a substantive; accordingly, they are used regularly as prepositions; 
they differ from the Improper prepositions ; of these latter, the following clas- 
ses may be named; (a) those which are partly adverbs of place, partly other 
adverbs, which, thougl) regularly used as adverbs, are sometimes, in connec- 
tion with a substantive, used as prepositions, e. g. unonqodfv, uvit\ dl/a, '(/{un ; 
— (b) substantives in connection with the Gen., e. g. dr/.rjv, instar, %uqiv, 
gratia, etc., probably also, tvsxa, on account of. 

1. Prepositions with the Genitive only. 

§287. (1) 'AvTi and tzqo, before. (516,517.) 

1. AvTL (Lat. ante^ before^ in the face of^ opposite^ etc.), has 
the original meaning in the face of [before^ over against)^ 

(1) in a local sense (in prose seldom) ; (2) in a causal or figura- 
tive sense, (a) in protestations, instead of the common word 
TiQog with the Gen. ; — (b) with expressions denoting compari- 
son (e. g. with the comparative degree), estimation, weighing, 
compensation, as with verbs expressing the idea of trading, sale, 
barter, value, likeness or unlikeness, preference ; — (c) of the 
cause or ground, when it expresses the idea of making compen- 
sation, as in avd'' ov, dv&' ojv,for lohat ? wherefore ? — (d) of sub- 
stitution, giving an equivalent, etc. 

(1) {To xf'^Qi'OV tail) daav nlzvat dLaXsLJiovaaig tae/alaig, avd^ ihv kaTrj- 
xoTsg ocvdQtg ti uv nauxouv 1] vtto tmv cpiQo^ivbiv lld-oiv, y vno tmv xvXivdov- 
fiivojv, hehind ivMch, since the trees stood before the soldiers, X. An. 4. 7, 6. 

[2) {a)^AvTl n at d (!)v t c5 v 5 s — ly.sTsvofA,8v, sc. as, as it ivere standing be- 
fore, S. OC. 1326. (b) [ytvxovgyog y.aTSLQ'/ao-aTo) iv rfi nohi at q stmt e- 

Qov dvai Tov HaXov -ddrccTov avrl alu^qov ^lov X. R. L. 9, 1. Ti]V 
TsXeviijv u vtI tt] g rbJv ^ojvtwv <t (ott] q I ag riXXu^avTo PI. Menex. 237, a. 
naiijg vlov av tl ti avT 03v tmv aXXwv XQri(xaxwv ngoTLfxa. So al- 
QHd'd^ul Tl avTi TLvog, iustcad of the common jivog. Tijv iXev&Eglav eXolfirjV 
avavxlwv l/co tt cc >' t w v X. An. 1. 7, 3. (d) z/ot'Ao? avxl dsano- 
TOV. ^Avxl Tjixigag vv^ iysvETO Her. 7, S7. Avzl xov fxuj^^a&aL 
nudsa&aL id^iXei X. Cy. 3. 1, 18. "Avil is never used of time. 

2. TTqo has the fundamental meaning, on the foreside {pro, 
j9rae, figuratively, m behalf of), (1) local: — (2) of time; — (3) 
causal and figurative, (a) in behalf of (for the good, for the weal) ; 



§ 28S.] SYNTAX. PREPOSITIONS WITH THE GEN. ONLY. 413 

with comparisons, (hence with the Com. degree) with words ex- 
pressini^: estimation, like avrij but always with the accessary 
itiea of p/acifig- before, preference, hence especially with words 
expressing prelercnce ; — (b) of an inward, intelleciual cause, oc- 
casion, inducement (only Poet.) on account ofjjrae, e. g. 11. q, 
(367. 7tq6 qio^oio, prae metu. 

(1) Ol 7ioXif.iioi ( ITT gar on idnaavTO nqo twv TTi]q noliwq nvlbiv. (2) 
llqo i]ids (J ag vmijld^or. (3) Uuvt fg u^icoaoval as 7i q b a v t w v ^ovXev- 
(ff&ai X. Cy. 1. 6, 42. Maxtcr&ui, uno&aveiv n go rij g nargidog, Sta- 
yivdvpsviiv ngo (iacriXibig X. Cy. 8. 8, 4. Jiy.aioJtgov ojfirjv y.al y.dX- 
Xior fiiat n g o tov cpevysiv Tt xal anodidgd(T)(£LV vne/Eiv rfi tio- 
Xsc 8Ui]v^i]VJiv mV tJtttj Pi. Pljaedon. 99, a. Uqo noXlov Tion'jaaa&al 
T/, 71 g 6 7iokXi7)vxgr)fidT(x)v Tifi/jcraa&ai ti. [Tovtop) ti g o nuvxwv 
X gr^^id I MV xnl n 6v mv ngiaifUT^v uv (flkov fiOL dvui X. C. 2. 5, 3. JJ go 
xovxov Tf i9r«r«i mV jUwAAov f'AoiTO PI. Symp. 179, a. ^Jmaivuv ngo d l~ 
X a I oar V V7j g u8iy.luv Rp. 361, e. 

Remark. The reason that the prepositions uvtI and tt (> o are not con- 
nected with the Dat., like prepositions of tlie same meaning in other lan- 
guages, but with the genitive, is owing to the fact, that the Greek language 
regards the relation denoted by before^ in front of not merely as local, but im- 
plying action, a relation of dependence. The like holds of the prepositions 
vTisg, ngog, did, d (np l, nsgl, ini, v n 6 with the Gen., since the 
Gen. points out the place as the supporter of the action, consequently, de- 
notes, as it were, a relation of dependence. See § 273, 4. 

§ 288. (2) ^ n 0, fr o m, and i^y « x, out of (5i8, 519.) 
Preliminary Remark. These two prepositions denote an outgoing, a 
removal, departure, but an 6 denotes rather an outward removal, ex (1^), on 
the contrary, ahvays as a going out from within a place or object; and in 
the causal relation, the former denotes a remoter cause, the latter, one more 
direct. 

1. ^7T 0, ah, from, denotes, (1) in relation of space, (a) a mov- 
ing away from a place or object in connection with verbs of 
motion, also of freeing, and the like, e. g. Iveiv, IXev&sqovv, also of 
missing, § 271, 2, hence, aTzo o-aotiovj and then it is transferred 
into an intellectual deprivation, as in an iXnidcov, ano yvojixr^g, ali- 
ter ac sperabam, putabam (as if aberrans ab exspectatione, ab 
opinione) ; (b) distance from a place or object with verbs of 
rest ; — (2) used of time, departure from a point of time (from, 
after) ; — (3) causal or figurative, (a) of origin, as in ehai, yiyvea- 

54 



414 SYNTAX. PREPOSITIONS WITH THE GEN. ONLY. [§288. 

Om; (b) of a whole in respect to its parts; (c) of the author 
with the Pass., instead of vtzo, §251, Rem. 4, but always with 
the accessary idea of on the part of; (d) of the occasion ; (e) 
of the material; (f) of ihe means and instrument; (ir) of con- 
formity. 

(1) (a) ''a no T tJ c nuXs uig unicfjvyov ol noUfjtoi. (b) 'O Xoyog ovx una 
xov ay. 6 no V ido^sv elQVia&aL X. S. 2, 10. {Al niduutl noliiq] uno x> «- 
'ktt(T(ji]q ^uV.ov 0)xi(j&r](Tniv Th. 1, 7. (2) '^ tt o t avirjg z fj g i) {xt q a c, 
ano V vxTog, u (p kirnsg ag, uno t mv alio) v, after the mealj X. R. 
L. 5, 8. (3)(a)l4 7ro "AlK^alavog y.ai r/vrig Jllr/ay.Uog iyirovio y.ul 
XM^T« A«|U7r^ot Iler. 6, 125. [h] Tag tqli'iohq^ aimQ rjauv uvto) uno imv 
tcaxaXsicp &Ei(T av Th. 4, 9. Tu un 6 ti] g d eiqt] g, ornaments on the 
neck, Her. 1, 51. So ol ano ^ovl ij g, qui sunt a consUiis, ol u n o II kd- 
T Mvog, ol ano rijg "A n a d tj fi I a g, etc. {c)''F.n q u/S-tj a n avTuv 
oicJ^v 8Q/0V u^toXoyov, on the, part of Th. 1, 17. (d) '^ jr o d ixai o avvrjg, 
out of on account of Her. 7, 164. To5 uno xojv noXsiuiwv (fo^o), metu 
ab hostibus, X. Cy. 3. 3, 53. '^9 s aviov, from his own impulse, (e) Tgi- 
q>HV TO vavzixov ano n g go d cov Th. 1, 81. {f)''Ano tmv vpniooiv 
vpiv noXf^EL [fPlXinnog] a v ji (id/ (ov, sociorum vestrorum ope, Dem. Ph. 1. 
49, 34; hence many adverbial phrases, e. g. uno OTopuTog, una yXbmr^g n- 
ndv, by heart, uno anovdijg, zealously. {g)''A7i OvXv pn ov ovgsog xa- 
XiovTUL OvXvpniTjvoiHer. 7, 74:. Ano ^yppa/lag {in virtue of)uvj6- 
vopoL Th. 7, 57. 

2. 'E^, i'/., ex, out of {opposite of f'^, f/?), denotes (1) in rela- 
tion to space (a) removal either from within a place or object, 
or from immediate intercourse or communication with a place 
or object, used with verbs of motion ; hence in reference to an 
immediate succession of one object after another ; (b) distance, 
in connection with verbs of rest, on the outside of (Epic), e. g. 
ix ^e).8(ov, extra telorum j actum ; — (2) used of time, immediate 
succession, departure from a point of time, then especially a di- 
rect unfolding of one thing from another, an immediate conse- 
quence ; — (3) in a causal and figurative sense, (a) of origin ; (b) 
of the whole in relation to its parts, or in relation to what belongs 
to it, often with tlie accompanying idea of choice and distinc- 
tion ; (c) of the author with passive or intransitive verbs, instead 
of vTio, almost exclusively Ionic, used particularly by Herodotus, 
seldom in Attic prose ; (d) to denote the occasion of anything ; 
(e) of the material; (f) of the means and instrument; (g) of 



§289.] SYNTAX. rUEPOSITIONS WITH TIIK DAT. ONLY. 41*3 

conformity, to denote that one thing is done, happens, etc., ac- 
con/i/iii' to another ; it is then translated by according' lo,, afters 
foi\ in virtue of. 

( 1 ) VJ X T ^ c n oX^Mq uJi7jl\>ov, ex r rj g fi u/V? i'(pvyov, ix yijg ivav- 
f.idxr,(Tttt', out from the land. PI. Polit. 289, e. ol 8s noXiv ex no Is cog uX- 
XuTJOvTeg xaia -^dXaTjav xal ne^jj. Apol. 37, d. xuXog uv (xoi o ^log h't) 
aXXjjv t^ otXXijg n oXsojg u}x(i(jOjxivoj (comp. ex alio loco in aliiim mi- 
graiiti). (2) 'ii| yjxsQag, ex quo dies ilhixit, £x vvxxog or ex vv x- 
T tii >', ex Tittid (ov, e ^ v a t s q o v, subsequently, ex xov Xo m ov. Her. 
9, 8. f J fifi eQr^g eg i}^ueQT)v dva^aXXonevoi, ex die in diem. 1, 87. ex de 
al&QiT]g Ts xal vrjvsjxhjg (TvydQafihiv e^uTilvrjg vecpea. Th. 1, 120. ex 
fiev elQTjvrjg noXefielv, ix ds noXe^ov ndXiv ^v^^t]vai. X. Cy. 3. 1, 17. 
o aog nurijQ ev iffde tJ] fiiix r,fieQ(x e^ acpqovog a(oq)Qa)v yr/evi^rai. (3) 
{a) Eivai, yi/rea&cci ex Tivog. {h)^I^^ 'Ad^Tjv aiuv oluqiaioi. (c) Her. 
3, 62. T« evTejaXfiiva ex tov Mdyov. Ibid, ngodedoa&av ex riQtj'^dcmeog. 
(d) 6, 67. tq)evye zJiiuaQr^iog e x 2^nvcgTrjg ex to l o it d e oveidsog. So ex 
7t avjlg xov v ov PI. ix § lag and the like. Her. 2, 152. ex riig 
oipiog Tov ovelgov. (g) PI. Criton. 48, b. ex twv o^oXoyovixevwv 
Tot'To axenieov. So ovo^uC^ead^au ex zvvog^Xo be named after or for some 
one, (like virtus ex viro appellata est Cicer.). ^Ex xov ; why ? 

Remark. The adverbs which, as improper prepositions, take the Gen., 
have been already mentioned, in treating of the Gen. Besides these ad- 
verbs, the following substantives, as improper prepositions, take the Gen., 
a. d IxTjv {8 e ^ ag, Poet.), instar ; — b. / dg iv (more poetic than prose), gra- 
tia, for the sake of commonly placed after the Gen., seldom before it. In- 
stead of the Gen. of the personal pronouns sfxov, aou, etc., the possessive 
pronoun, as an attributive adjective, is regularly used with /dgiv, e. g. f',u7jV, 
(Tr,v /dgiv, mea, tua gratia; — c. evex a [efsxsv before consonants, svexa be- 
fore vowels in the Attic writers, nvexu and hvsxsv, Ionic, but not wholl;^ for- 
eign to the Attic dialect, ovvey.a in poetiy), causa, gratia. The Gen. can 
stand before or after fliis word. It very frequently signifies, ivith respect to, 
concerning, in regard to. Her. 3, 85. ■&dgate xovxov s'iv exe, ivith respect to 
this, he of good courage. It often denotes a remote reason, e. g. by virtue of 
by reason of. PI. Rp. 329, b. u yug i)v xovx m'xiov, xdv e'ywxu avid xavra 
enenov J t; ev ex a ye yr^g w g, i. e. by reason of old age ; — d. ex rjx t (poetic 
only), by or according to the ivill of [a god), Jiog exrjxi, Homer and Hesiod. 
In the other poets it has the signification of Ivexa. 

§ 289. 2. Prepositions with the Dative only. ''Ev and 

avv {^VV). (520, 5-21.) 

1. 'Ev {hi Poet., dv and elvl Epic) denotes that one thing is m, 
vpon^ by or near another. It commonly indicates an actual 
union or contact of the two objects spoken of, and hence is the 



416 SYNTAX. PKErOSITIOxN'S WITH TIIK DAT. ONLY. [§ 28l). 

opposite of fx. It is UHed, (I) in relation to spacc^ (a) the be- 
ing ill, inclosed in, encireled, surrounded, used of place, clothing 
or })ersons, and translated by in, among, in the midst of, before, 
in the presence of (corani) ; then it is transferred to external and 
internal conditions or state in which one is or is engaged, or is 
found, by which he is, as it w^ere, sun-ounded, — to the business in 
which he is engaged, to persons, in whose hands or power 
something is placed ; it also denotes (b) the being upon some- 
thing, and (c) the being near a thing, particularly of cities, near 
which (in the territory of wdiich) something took place, espe- 
cially a battle; — (2) in relation to /?"??/ e, § 283, 3 ; — (3) in a 
causal and figurative relation, (a) of the means and instrument; 

(b) of the manner; (c) to denote conformity. 

(1) (a) Ev Tji 71 oXsL, iv Tji vT^(T(o^ iv 2nuQTi] TOVTO iyevsTO. PI. 
L. 625. b. ftyctTTttvAwt iv Totg vip 71X0% g d iv d q sa Iv slai ay.iUQuL ^Ev 
onloig, iv t 6^0 eg dLayojvl^sv^aL', iv icr&ijji, iv CTeq)avoig, 
a'oivned ; iv rotg avS-QMnoig {inter). Dem. Chers. 108, 74. Tifxo- 
S^wg noT iy.Hvog iv v^lv idrjf^rj/o^rjiTfv [coram). "Ev noli^oj, iv bq- 
y 0), iv d a LT I, iv <jd o /? o), iv 6 q y fi tivai. PL Criton. 43, c. xai uXXot. 
iv TO lavT a ig ^v fj.(p q alg aXlcrxovTaL. Phileb. 45, c. iv TOiovTOvg. 
V otyi]}ia\j Lv ixo^BvoL. Gorg. 523, h. iv n aajj sv 8 a ifiov Ifjt oixilv Her. 

2, 82. oi iv no L I'j a e i ysvo^svoL Th. 3, 28. ol iv n g ay (juta l. X. Cy. 4. 

3, 23. ol [isv dt] iv t vt o l g t olg X6 y l g i]iTuv. PL Phaed. 59, a. i v 
q)iXo(Tocpin sivai. Ol iv ysaigyluLg', iv t iy v t] sivai. Hence va- 
rious adverbial expressions have originated, e. g. iv I'ao) sivai, to be equal ; 
iv rjdovf] fxol iajLV, it is pleasing to me ; so also with t/fiv and noitlcr&ai, e. g. 
iv u(xoio), iv iXa(pQb> nofuTd^ai, to esteem equally^ to esteem lightly. ^Ev ifiol, 
iv cr o I iaxL tl {penes me, te) ; hence the phrase iv savTo) sivai, to he in one's 
senses, sui compotem esse ; (b) iv o q sa iv, iv Xn n o ig, iv & q or ig; 

(c) "H iv MavTivsla ^ayr], near. — (2) 'ii> tovtm t o» XQovoy, iv w, 
while, during, iv nivrs ij^sgaig. — {S) "Oguv, ogixa&ai, oTTTsa&ai iv 
oq)S-aXij,o7g, Foet., then in other connections among the poets, iv nvgl 
y.aifiv, iv dta^b) dricrai, iv /sgci Xa^ElvUom. In prose, especially in 
Xenophon, iv is used to denote the means, in the exioressions dr]).ovv, dijXov 
slvai, (rr}fialvEiv ev Tin. X. Cy. 1. 6, 2. oti fisv, a> nal, 01 d^eol as 'iXeoi ts y.al 
EVfiEielg nsfinovai, xal iv Isgot g dij Xov xal iv ovgavloig atj fxs 10 ig. 
8. 7,3. iarj {.11} V ax i fioi yal iv Is g ol,g Kal iv ovgavloig ar] fxslo i g 
xal iv olcavolg nal iv (pi]ixaig, ax iygrjv noisivy.al a ov/. i/gijv. Ev 
S Ihj], iv a lOJTcfj. Th. l,77.iv Tolg (xo lo ig v6 (jlo ig tag xgiasig 



§ )290.] SYNTAX. PRKPOSITIONS AVITll THE ACC. ONLY. 417 

noitlv. So iv jue^ft, according to his part, in turn. ^Ev ifiol, ev aol, iv exflvoj 
Poet, ex (according to) nieo, tuo, illius judicio. 

2. ^vf {^vv mostly old Attic) corresponds almost entirely with 
the Latin ciun and the English ivilh ; it always expresses the 
idea of participation and accompaniment, (1) in relation to 
space, \vhere the accompaniment frequently implies help or as- 
sistance ; — (2) in a causal sense to denote (a) ihe means and 
instrument, (b) the manner, (c) the measure or rule, by which 
the action of the verb is measured, as it w^ere, or determined, 
(d) conformity. 

(1) 'O OT^ttT/J/Og aVV TOtS (ST Q at LMT U iq m'fXWQTlfTtV.- 2VV d^Eb), 

with the help of God. 2 vv j lv c drai or ylyviaduL, ah alicujns pariihxs 
stare, a vv x lv l iJ.(xxea&aL, to fght in company loith one, to aid one in 
fghting. (2) (a) X. Cy. 8. 7, 13. v xTtjaig avxatv (so. Jiiaibiv q^lkwv) taTiv ov- 
da^iag a i v t jj ^ I cf, aXka fiallov a v v t jj sv ( g y s a la. (b) IJgoisvni' 
a V V iCQavyi),<Tvv yskwTL iX&Elv. X. Cy. 3. ], 15. TioTegu d' rjyj], (a 
Kigs, ccfairov drai, avv xw trw a y ad^ vi luq Tiixiaglag noLH(7&c/.i, ij a vv 
"^V ^V ^Vh''^'^ (c) 1. 3, 17. 0" t v T oi v6(xco ovv iy.sXsvsv uel tov dixaa- 
rijv tiiv ipiiqiov Ti&ia&ui. {d)2vv t oj v 6 p oj ri]v xpricfiov li&iadui — -avv 
Tti) dixalb). 

Remark. Of the adverbs used as improper prepositions, there belong 
here ixpa, una cum, and several which are constructed also with the Gen., 
as has been seen, in treating of the Gen. and Dat. 

§ 290. 3. PREPOSITlo^s with the Acc. oivly; ^Av a, slg 

AND (X> g. (522—524.) 

1. Jlvd signifies from a lower to a higher place, and forms 
the strongest contrast to y.uTci with the Acc, which signifies 
from a higher to a lower place ; the use of dvd is more frequent 
in poetry than in prose. Ii is used (1) in relation to space, (a) 
to denote a direction towards a higher place ; (b) to denote the 
extension from a lower to a higher place, signifying throvgliovt^ 
through^ and used both with verbs of motion and rest ; — (2) in 
relation to time, to denote its continuance, 7?er; — (3) in a causal 
sense to denote manner, and particularly in a distributive sense 
with numerals. 

(1) (a) Od, /, 132. to (f^lloi, ovx uv d tj rig av o ga od^v gr\v ava^alt], 
to the lofty gate. This use is rare and only poetic ; in prose only in the 
phrases avu xov noxapov, dva goov nXiiv, up tJie stream, the op- 



418 SYNTAX. PREPOSITIONS WITH THE ACC. ONLY. [§ 290. 

posite of, xaiu noTafiuv, doivn the stream ; (b) II. y, 547. {(pXEip) uv a y w- 
T a -d^iovau diufinf(Jtg (ab iiifiiiia dorsi j)arto usque ad cerviceni) ; so uva 
dMjjia, itvu ajQUTov, ava (j.dxTjVf uvit of-idov, uvu ucnv, uru S^ifiov, etc., all 
in llonier; Her. G, 131. xal ovT(a^Alx^aLO)vi^ui, i^o')adr,(juv uvu ti]v 'EX- 
Xa8u. X. Vect. 5, 10. « V a nuauv yijv y.ul -O^uIuttuv H(Ji]vrj tccut. 
Hier. 7, 9. u v u ar 6 fiu l/s/v. (2) Her. 8, 12^3. uvu t uv noXtixov 
TOVTOv. So uvu nuaav r i] v rifiSQUV, per totum diem. Tlie substan- 
tive must here have the article ; without the article uvu nuauv i]fitQuv, sig- 
nifies daily, uvu nuv tTog, every year. See No. 3. u vu vvuru, per nodem. 
7, 10. uv u X Q 6v ov i^avgoL rig civ, at the time. (3) \4vu xfjutog, with all 
one^s might, avu fiigog, hy turns; uvu nuv ttog, quotannis, avu 
nivTs n a g aaii / -/ ug Trig rinigug, five parasangs daily. Her. 4, 101. tj 
686g 'ijfiEQTjcrli] ava dirjy.oo-La (tt u d i a (7f^/56,5A7/T«t (supputautur in sin- 
gulos dies itineris ducena stadia). 

Remark 1. In the Epic and Lp-ic languages, uvu is constructed with the 
Dat. also ; instead of it iv is elsewhere used, e. g. avu ay.rjTnQoj, w/wo), Fuq- 
yuQO) uy.go) in Homer. So svdsL 8^ uvu axumoi zliog ahxog Pind. 

2. Ek {k Ionic and old Attic) is only a different form of iv, 
and denotes the same relations of dimension as are expressed 
by Ivy but always with the idea of the direction idiither ; hence 
it is used of motion into the interior of anything, up to any- 
thing, into the immediate presence of, generally with refer- 
ence to reaching a definite boundary or limit. (1) in rela- 
tion to space, (a) to denote a limit in space ; (b) a limit in 
quantity (about, up to) ; (c) extension; (d) in the sense of be- 
fore, in the presence of, coram^ but with the idea of the direc- 
tion 2t?/iz^Aer; — (2) in the relation of time, to denote a limit 
(till, towards) ; (3) in a causal sense, (a) of a mental aim, ob- 
ject or purpose ; (b) of the manner ; hence with numerals in a 
distributive sense also ; (c) particularly with the meaning of in 
respect to. 

(1) (a)'/£Vat elg ti]v noAiv; so also of persons with the accompa- 
nying idea of habitation. PI. Apol. 17, c. sig I'^u a $ slg Uvul, i. e. ng to di- 
xaajriQiov dciivuL. Among the Attic -vvTiters, also in a hostile sense, con- 
tra. Th. 3, 1. iarQaTBVduv ig ti]V "A t t l y 1] v. (b) Th. 1, 74. vuvg eg rug 
TBigayoGiug. {c)'£y S^uXdcrcn^g slg d^ uXaacr av. PL Gorg. 526, b. dg 
yul ndvv illoyi^og ys/ovsv elg t ov g uXXovg'EXXrjvag, ^AgLaial8i]g. 
(d) Aoyovg noteia&UL slg tov 81] y.ov [coram). PL Menex. 239, a. oi na- 
Tfgig TioXXa 87] y.al xuXd un((fi]vuvT0 slg nuvxag dvd-gwnovg. (2) 



§291.] SYNTAX. — i'HErosrno\s with the gen. and acc. 419 

"I'^g ijiXiov xaradvvTa, till sunset , Homer, hence «tj k an iQ av, to- 
wards evejuiif^j properly to evening as a boundaiy ; so in prose, ng t?;v vais^ 
Qa^av, on the following day, elg jqlrriv r,fiiQav. (3) {a)'j'^/or,auTo rolg /ni]ixr/- 
(jiv tig T )) V 71 6 k I V. Jll'g ri\ for Avhat ? slg y.iqSogTL 8quv. (b) 
K] g xukov r.xsig, opportune, f t ? ru/og, quickly, slg dvvafiiv, accor- 
ding to one's ability, slg sxnjov, centeni,slg d v o, bini. (c) Oavftu'Cfiv, 
inaiiflv lira fig t t, diaqiofiv jirog fig uQHTtjv, cpoovifiog, svduy.itjog 
fig T t, fig 71 dvj a, in evei-y respect ; pltTifLv, uno^XiTisiv slg t« ti^k/- 
// a Ttt, like Tigog. 

3. -Qb, flc/, /o, does not like the other prepositions, denote the 
relation of dimension, but only the direction ivhilher ; it is used 
only of persons or of the names of cities, when they stand for 
the inhabitants. 

Th. 4, 79. -B()«o-/(5a? aqp/x£TO Mg ITfQdixy.av y.al fig ttiV Xalyidty.y'iV. 
Dem. Phil. 1. 54, 48. nqia^fLg nino^cpfv m g ^ ua ilia. Th. 8, 36. ijjjojto? 
a' c Ti]v MlXrjTov [ad Milesios], 

Rem. 2. This o)g is to be distinguished from that which stands with fig, 
(Til and 71^0$ with the Acc. viz., wc ffc, oig inl, ugiTQog riva. This Mg is 
not a preposition, but, m the same manner as when it is joined with the 
participle, it expresses a supposition, and does not denote an actual direc- 
tion to a place, but only one supposed, and lience mtended. X. An. 1. 2, 1. 
axfQoi^fi big fTil T ovx ov g to oTQaTfv^a [quasi his helium illaturus). 
Hence this c5? also stands with the prepositions governing other Cases, e. g. 
Th. 3,4. fy.TiXow f'noirioavTo tojv vtbiv big ircl vavfiaxtcc, as though they 
would Jight a naval battle. ], 134. oi 8s TTOirjadfifvot /aXxovg drdQiavrag dio 
ag dvrl Jlava av tov uvi&taav [quasi essent Pausaniae loco.) 

4. Prepositions with the Genitive and Accusative, 
did, Kara, VTzeg, net a. 

§291. (1) /I la, through. (525.) 

I. With the Gen., (1) in relation to space, (a) to denote a mo- 
tion extending through a space or object and again coming out 
of, through and out again, out of; Homer expresses this relation 
still more distinctly, by uniting the preposition ty- or ttqo with 
did, e. g. Od. Q, 460. dih iiEydqaio dvaxcoQaiv; (b) to denote ex- 
tension through something, but without the accompanying rela- 
tioi} mentioned under (a) of the coming out of the thing or 
space ; on the Gen., see § 287, Rem. ; — (2) in relation to time, to 
denote the expiration of a period, after, properly to the end of a 
period, through and out; — (3) in a causal sense, to denote origin 



420 SYNTAX. PREPOSITIONS WITH THE GEN. AND ACC. [§ 291. 

(raro) and the author (very frequent) ; (b) to denote quality 
(possessive Gen.) in connection with elvai and yr/vead-at; (c) the 
means; (d) manner; (e) worth (rare) ; (f) comparison (rare). 

(1 ) (a) Her. 7, 8. (jiXXo) ihxv aiQajov d i u xi] g I^v q amrj g inl tt\v '£XXd~ 
8a. 2, 26. d Ls^iovr a Slu nuarjg LvQo'niTjg.. 7, 105. i^i^XavvE lov 
(TTQuiov dia T^5 O QTj'i'y.T} g inl Tijv'^Jj^XXdda. 3, 145. 5f«xv(//«g diu Tijg 
yoQyvQTjg, to look out through the prison, (b) Od. ft, 335. did vriaov twv, 
did 71 sd lov, per campum. X. Hier. 2, 8. d id n oXs fxi ag noQevsad^ai. 
Figuratively in the phrases, did 8 ixa loav vrjg iivai, to go in the way of 
justice, I. e. to he just, d i u t o i> d ix a I ov noQsvsa&ai, did cp 6 tS ov ioxt- 
a&ai, to fear, Eur. Or. 747. /J id (piXlag Uvai tivI, to he friendly to one^ 
X. An. 3. 2, 8. [2] /J l* exovg, 8 id noXXo v, fiay.gov, o ). I y o v / q 6- 
vov, also 8 i' oXlyov, 8 id noXlov without /ooyou, or 8 1 d xQov ov 
TjX^s, he came after a long time ; 8 id navTog i ov / qov ov Toiavxu ot-x 
tysvsTO, during the whole tim£ ; 8i.dr\(jisQag, didwuTog. So also of 
an action repeated at stated intervals, e. g. 8 id x qItov sxovg <Tvvr]iaav^ 
every third year, tertio quoque anno, always after three years (through and out 
again), 8 id nifinxov ex ov g, 8 id n ivxs ix wv^ quinto quoque anno, 
8 id xqlxrig ^jfiigag. (3) (a) Jid ^aaiXiojv nEcpv/.cog X. Cy. 7. 2, 24. 
ndvxa 81,' eavxojv nQdiXEa&ai, to accomplish everything by themselves, 8 1^ 
kavxov nxTjcraa&al XI. (b)z/i« cp6(jov slvai, 8l s^^Qag ylyv8a&ai 
xivi, 81^ eg 18 g, qyng, d a cp aXslug nvai or ylyv^a&ui, to he hostile^ 
angry, safe, (c) z/ 1" o q)& aXfj,(dv oqdv, s^siv xivd ^ t' gyii g, 8 id x^i- 
Q (av B/siv, to work upon, to he engaged in, to handle ; also of persons, e. g. 
^'Enga^av xavxa 8l Ev gv fid / ov Th. 2, 2. (d) /lid an ov 8 rig, 8ia 
X d/ovg noiBiv xi. (e) S. OC. 584. 81' v 8 sv 6 g noiHa&ai, to consider of 
no value, (f ) Her. 1, 25. ■&iTjg d^iov 8 la nd vx wv x ajv dva-d^7}fj,dxo)Vf 
in comparison with. 

11. With the Ace. (1) in relation to space to denote exten- 
sion through a place or object, throughout (only poetic) ; 
(2) in relation to time to denote extension through a period of 
time, throughout ; (3) in a causal sense (a) to denote the rea- 
son (oZ?, propter) ; (b) of the person by whose means something 
is accomplished. 

(1) (a) Eur. Hipp. 762. 8 id novxiov xvp,a inogtvaag ifidv avaaaav. 
{2) /t la vvy.xa. (3) X. An. 1. 7, 6. sarxi (isv i]pXv i] dgyi] ri naxgom rcgog 
(jikv fiE(j7]p^glav pi/gig ov 8 la xav fia ov 8vvavxai oly.eiv civ&gco-Toi. 4. 5. 
15. 8 id rag x o i avx ag ovv uv a yx ag vnhXurcovxo xivsg xcov axgaxioixSiV. 
(b) z/ 1' r; fid g avv Ssolg £/«t« x7]v8s xijv ywgav X. An. 7. 7, 7. Kay.ol 8o- 
xovfisv sivai 8 i d xovxov [hujus culpa). 



§ 292.] SYNTAX. rREPOSITIONS WITH THE GEN. AND ACC. 421 

§ 292. (2) Kar d, from above, doivn. (526, 527.) 

I. With the Gen. (1) in relation to space, (a) of motion from 
a higher to a lower place, dcsiipcr, deorsinn; (b) of a direction 
towards a place or object below, doiumuards, (on the Gen., see 
§ 287, Rem.) ; (c) seldom of rest in, upon or at a place or ob- 
ject; — (2) in a causal and figurative sense, to denote the cause 
or occasion. 

(1) (a) H. a, 44. /?/] 5i x a x' OvXv^noio y.agrivwv. Her. 8, 53. fQuljiTsov 
kcovTovg y. a T a tov xtlxsoq xwrw. [h)Yiev.7,Q. vi(f>ttvlt,iad^ai y.ut vi zriq 
■&aXd(j(Tr]g. QS5. y.uTadsdvyJvaL x ar a rijg -& a X a a arj g. X. An. 7. 1, 
30. £v/Oj.i(xi fivglag ffxiya y.axa yvig bgyviccg yevia&UL, to he sunk under the 
earth. So figuratively of the direction to a lower object, as jo^iveiv y.aza 
T IV g, nuhiv y.ard x iv g, to strike at something (the preposition denoting 
the direction of the blow, viz. down), Tvnxuv y.ax a y.oggrjg, on the head, 
§ 273, Rem. 8 ; (c) Her. 1. 9. stieixv y.axa vcoxov yivr}, upon the hack. Th. 4, 32. 
71 ax a V (ax ov sivai. 33. j{«t« v (axov y.u&taTriy.svui. (2) yts/fiv y.uxa 
T Lvog. dicere de aliqiia re ; in this connection, the idea of hostility especially 
is expressed by the preposition, e. g. Xsysiv, Xoyog yaxd x iv g, against one. 
X. Apol. 13. ipivdsa&aL y.axvt x ov -& eov; but also in an opposite relation, 
Dem. Phil. 2. 68, 9. u yea (xsyioxov iaxi xaS-^ v fiwv eyy.M^aov, in honor of 
you. Aeschin. Ctes. 60. oE a ax a /li^noad- svovg enaivoL', further, axo- 
71HV X ax a X Lv og, where it can be translated by secundum, in respect to ; 
so also in Attic adjurations and oaths, e. g. iv/sa&ai, o^oaai yaxd x iv og, 
and the like (to implore, to swear by a person or thing, as if resting upon 
it), so also tvyja&ai y.u& sy.axcju(jrig, yaxd ^oug. 

II. With the Ace, y-atd forms, in relation to space and time, 
a strong contrast with dvd, in respect to the point where the mo- 
tion of the action begins, but it agTees with dvd in denoting the 
direction to an object and the extension over it. The use of 
dvd is more confined to poetry, but xaxd has no such limitation.' 
(1) In relation to space, (a) to denote the direction of the action 
to a lower object ; (b) to denote extension from a higher to a 
lower object, throughout, through, over ; (c) in the historians in 
the sense of e regions, over against, opposite to; — (2) in relation to 
time, to denote its extension or duration ; — (3) in a causal sense, 
(a) to denote purpose and design ; (b) conformity and the respect 
in which anything is considered, and hence also a reason, on ac- 

55 



422 SYNTAX. PREPOSITIONS WITH THE GEN. AND ACC. [§ 293. 

count of; (c) an iiKlcfinile mojisure, about; (d) the manner; 
hence also witli exj)hinalions of number, in a distributive sense. 

[\) [fi) BalXuv 'Auiu yaaTtQu, and the like in Homer. Her. 3, 14. 
7T()(Qr]fam' al nafiOivoL y.uTu % ovg n miq ng^lo the fathers sitting ; then 
of* the course of a stream, y.uTu {}6ov, doxim the stream^ (see «»'«). (I)) Her. 
3, 109. al i'/idvui xai a n a a uv rrjv yijv tltn. Kcna, yrjv, y.uiu -d^aXad- 
aav noQ^vfG&ui. (c) Th. 2, 80. nHiai ?/ KfcpnlXifvla y.uzu ^Ay.aqvavlav. 
{^) K ax a Tov a vxov xq 6v ov, y.mu tov n qot tgov noXefiov, ol 
Hard T LV a, contemporaries of any one. ('i) (a) Her. 2, 152. x « t « ). ri'ir} v 
iynXbtaavToig. T]i. xaxa d^iav ?]xf^y, spectatum veiiisse. Kuxu rl; 
why') wherefore') (b) Kara vofxav^ y.axa luyov, ad rationem, pro 
ratione, in conformity ivith, according to, naiu yvMftrjv ti)v ifiijv. 
Iler. 2, 3. y.ata xriv xQocpijv twv nuldojv xoauvia tXsyov, in respect to 
nourishing. Her. ycuxa tov iCQT^jriQa ovTiag t(T/s. Kaxd x l, in some 
respect, quodanimodo ; y.ax^ ov d iv, y.axa ndvx a, in every respect, y.axu 
X vxo, hoc respectu, hence propter hoc ; Th. 1, 60. y. a x a (p illav uvxov 
oi Tililaxoi ex KoqIv&ov axQaxiwiai i&eXovxul ^vritmovxo, on account of. 
Deni. Chers. 90,% ovg a ax a x ovg v 6 ^ovg E(f vfiiv iaxiv, oxav §ovXr^a&B, 
xoXd'Csiv. Kaxa (pva lv, secundum naturam, y.ax a d vv a (miv, according 
to one^s strength, y.axd y.(i dxog, with all one's might, (c) /v « t a s | ?j x o v- 
Ttt I't?^, zaxd fXiy.Q 6 Vy gradually, y. ax" oXlyov, y.axd noXv, noX- 
X d, hy far. (d) Ka&^ iiav/ toe v, quietly, -a ax a xd'/og, a ax a avvxv- 
X lav, casu, yux a x 6 la x^ Qov, per vim, naxd [isg og, in order, in turn. 
Her. 6, 79. unoivd iaxi dm fiviai y,ax" avdga, viritim; xaxu xatfiag, 
vicatim; xaxd fii]va, singulis mensibus; k«^' rjfxiqav, %v y.a& I'v, 
one after the other, i. e. singly, xad^" snxd, septeni. 

Remark. In composition, ytuxd regularly governs the Gen., which ex- 
presses the object which caused the action of the verb, and extends over it, 
according to the relations mentioned under No. I, (2). An Ace. of the 
thing very often stands with the Gen., e. g. y.axrjyogHV xl xivog, to accuse 
some one of something, y.axayiyvcoaysiv xl, (e. g. uvoiav, y.XoTo'jv) xivog, xaxux- 
qIvuv xivog S^dvaxov, y-axadiyd^siv xivog S^dvaxov, y.axai}j7}(pi^sa&ai xivog dsi- 
ilav, KaxaipevdeaS^al xivog ; y.axacpgovsiv xivog, despicere, xaxaysXixv xivog. 

§ 293. (3) 'TntQ, s up er, o v e r . (528.) 

I. With the Gen. (1) in relation to space, to denote resting, 
abiding over or above a place or object, § 287, Rem. ; — (2) in a 
causal sense, (a) for, for the good of ; (b) to denote an internal, 
mental cause, instead of the more usual vno with the Gen. ; (c) 
with verbs of entreating, imploring, /or the sake of some one ; 
(d) to denote cause, then in connection with tov and the Inf, 



§294.] SYNTAX. — I'RErosrriONs with the gen. and acc. 423 

to denote purpose, which by the language is considered as the 
cause; (e) to d(Miote the respect in which anything is consid- 
ered, instead of ihe more nsnal TitQi \v\\h the Gen. 

ir. Wiih the Acc, motion over, above and beyond, used in 
relation to space and time and also to measure and number. 

I. (1) X. C. 3. 8, 0. o i]hog too digovg in eg ^fiuiv xwt tmv (ntyoiv 
noQEVOfieyog amav avrm' -nufjix^i. Her. 7, 09. ^AQaiSiMV xal AI&iottmv xmv 
V71SQ Aiy VTiTov oly.TjfiivMV i]qx^ ^AgaafiTig. '^Tn i q &aX aaarjg oly.eiv. 
(2) (a) Max^a&aL U7r«^ Tr,g najQidog, tojight in defence of something, as 
if standing over it; 6 vn e g iij g ^EXXa d o g S^dvurog ; nokijsi'sa&ai, axqa- 
xr]yuv vnig xivog, in alicujus gratiam ; vneg tmv tz g ay fiux cav 
(TJTOvdd^eiv, dsdiivuL vneg xivog, timere alicui. (b) vnsg nsvd- ov g. 
(c) II. ft), 466. xal fiiv vnsg n ax gog ncu (itjx sg og rjvy.6fioi,o Xlaaeo 
xai xixBog. (d) PI. Syinp. 208, d. vneg u gsxi] g d& av dx ov xat x o i~ 
avxrig 86%rig evxXtovg navxsg ndvxa noLOVcnv. Dem. Phil. 1. 52, 43. 
vneg xov (li] na&s7v xaxwg vno <PiXinnov. U. Her. 4, 188. gmxiovai 
vnsg xov 86 (lov, over the house ; vneg 'EXXtj gn ovxov oixelv, beyond; 
vnsg XT] V -i] Xixiav, vnsg d v v a fi i v, vnsg a v & g wn ov. Her. 5, 
64. ^7r«^ T« X saa sgi^xo vx a sxr]. 

§ 294. (4) Msr «, 7V i t h. (534.) 

I. 3l£T«, derived from iitaog (within, between) denotes the 
middle of something. With the Gen., jMfcrcc denotes an inti- 
mate connection, and participation, (comp. .uettj^iv) ; the Gen. 
denotes the w^hole, of which the subject of the sentence con- 
stitutes a part ; it consequently differs from avv with the Dat., 
which merely denotes the connection (company) of one ob- 
ject with another, without the one being considered a part of 
the other (comp. cvvbieiv). It is used (1) in reference to space, 
in the midst, among ; then to denote an active participation in 
aid of some one, with ; — (2) in a causal and figurative sense, 
(a) to denote the means or manner ; (b) conformity. 

(1) Eur. Hec. 209. fiexd vsxgwv xsido^ai, to lie among the dead, and one's 
self to he dead. PI. Rp. 359, e. y.ad^r,(TS-ai fisxa x(av ciXXojv. Msxd 
Tivog ud'xsijd^ai, to fight in company ivixh one. Dem, Phil. 3. 117, 24. fxsxd 
xojv 't}5ixr)fj,sv(av noXffiHV. Eivai ^sxd xivoq (ab alicujus partibus 
stare). PI. Rp. 467, e. (jco&r^aovxai, fj>exd n g sa^vxig av riysfiovav 
enofisvoL, they follow the older leaders, and as it were, hold fast to them, 
wholly different from snsa^ui fieid xlvoc and avv xivi. (2) (a) Th. 1, 18. 



424 SYNTAX. PREPOSITIONS WITH THE GEN. AND ACC. [§ 294. 



HBTU xivdvvoiv Tag jj,iUjag tioiov^evol, i. e. surrounded by, in the 
midst of dangers. X. C. 3, 5, 8. /uct uQtxijg nQiozemiv, as it were in 
an intimate connection with virtue. Dem. Pliil. 3, 130, 74. vfuv oi nqoyovoi 
rovio TO ysQug ixTi]GttVTO y.ul Y.uTiXinov fiExu noXXdv y.ui n e y aX wr 
xLvdvvojv. (b) Lsocr. Archid. 129, GG. Tovg vofiovg, fASxJ^ ojv ol/.oivTsg f.v~ 
duLiAOvsdTvcTOL TMV 'LXli'ivbiv itdttv, agreeably to ivhich, [lojv vofxwv i/6fiiV0if 
legibus quasi adliaerentes) ; (xet it t ov Xoy ov, in conformity tvith reason. 

II. With the Ace, (1) in relation to space, (a) (Poet.) to de- 
note a direction or motion into the midst of something, a striv- 
ing to be united with a person or thing, in a friendly or hostile 
relation, and generally to denote a succession in space ; (b) to 
denote an extension of space between two objects, in the prose 
phrase [ler a x^iQug e/siv ti, to have something' in hand; — (2) 
(prose and Poet.) to denote succession in time and in order 
( if-er) ; — (3) in a causal sense (only Poet.), to denote purpose 
and conformity. 

[l] "[y.uT & ai fiSToi TQbjag xal A/ a lov g, to come into the midst of the 
Tr. and Gr. 11.^,460. ix'i'ffaojv Mgr cuyvniog ^£t« ;^?)v«^, among tliz 
geese. Seldom used -of things. |(5, 376. og fi^ /usx an qrixr ovg sq id a g 
Y.ul y E ly.8 a ^ciXXel, into the midst of contention. Bijvai ^et a N sin o q a^ 
to go to JVestor, properly into a connection with him, /5/J dk ^ex 'idofj. s- 
V ij u, to go to Idomen. to follow after him, properly to go into the engage- 
ment, or battle with him, II. r, 297. II. y, 492. Xaol etiov^ agEl te jxetu 
HT iXov EffTiETO fxijXa, behind thc ram. (2) Ms t a tov tov naidog d- uv a- 
TovX. MEtct T a V T a, after ; the Ace. often has a participle agreeing 
with it, e. g. Her. 1, 34. |U£t« SoXwva olxo (jlev ov, after the departure 
of Solon. M Ed^ rj (jisQ a v, interdiu, in the day time, (properly after the 
break of day) X. An. 4.6, 12. KaxEtvog eXa^E (xet ifis dEVXEQog Cy. 2. 2, 
4. IIoliv [eI^ov] TTjV 7iXovcria)TaTT]v iv xfi "Aala fxExu Ba^vX^va 7. 2, 11. 
(3) Od. a, 184. nXilv (iet a % a X x 6 v, ad aes petendum. Eur. Ale. 67. Lv- 
Qva&iojg nifiipavTog UnnELOv fiExa oxVl^^- II. o, 52. tw xf lloaeidawv 
yE — vtlipa fisradTQEiiJEiE voov fXExa gov xui ifiov xij g, according to 
your desire and mine. 

Re3Iark. Mexu is constructed with the Dat only in poetry, particularly 
in the Epic, to denote merely local union or companionship in place ; in 
prose, Ev and avv are used instead of it. It commonly stands with the plu- 
ral, or with the singular of collective nouns; the words with which it stands 
may denote persons or things considered as such, and the parts or mem- 
bers of animate things, e. g. |U£T adavuToig, ivith, among, fXExa oxgaxo) ; jxExa 
X^QfTh noai, yivvGi, y(xfi(pr)Xulg, [in the midst of), between, fXExa (pgEalv, in the 
mind, fiExa vr]vui, xv^iOKTb ; /ueia nvoifiq avs(j.oiOf Homer. 



§ 295.] SYNTAX. PREPOSITIONS WITH GEN., DAT. AND ACC. 425 

5. Prepositions with the Genitive, Dative and Ac- 
cusative, « /w ^ /, 71 SQ I, in I, TT a Q ti, 7i q 6 g, vno. 

§ 295. (1) 'A II cp I and tieq L (52a, 530.) 

1. The prepositions dficpi and tzsql express nearly the same 
relations of space, viz. around, about ; aiicp l, on both sides, tzeqi, 
on all sides ; they also agree almost entirely in their use, but 
differ in this, that ^ncpl is confined mostly to the Ionic dialect 
and to poetry, while tieqi belongs to all the dialects, and hence 
expresses a far greater variety of relations and has a more gene- 
ral apphcation. 

2. 'A ^qj I denotes in general the smTounding of something 
(on both sides), the being near and close to something. 

I. With the Gen. (1) in relation to space ; (a) to denote re- 
moval from that which surrounds (Poet.) ; (b) to denote dwell- 
ing or rest around something, § 287, Rem., though seldom ; — 
(2) in a causal sense, to denote the occasion of something 
{around, for, on account of), though but seldom in prose, tteqI 
with the Gen. being generally used instead of it. 

II. With the Dat. (1) in relation to space (Poet, only), to de- 
note rest around, at, near, among ; — (2) in a causal sense (very 
seldom in prose), (a) to denote the cause or occasion, as with 
the Gen., with this difference, that with the Dat., the relation of 
causality is considered as wholly local ; (b) to denote an inter- 
nal and mental reason (Poet.). 

III. With the Ace. (1) in relation to space, to denote local 
extension {round, at) ; — (2) to denote time and number ap- 
proximately ; — (3) in a causative and figurative sense, to denote 
a mental dwelling upon an object, taking pains, and being em- 
ployed about it. 

I. (1) (a) Eur. Or. 1460. ci ficpl n oq cpv qewv n in Xojv ^lq)rj anrnjavrfg, 
from the garments which were around the sword, (b) Her. 8, 104. u fzcpl 
tavxrjg ohiovai jijg nohoq. [2) Ma/sa&ccL a^cpl rivog. X. Cy. 3. 
1, 8. £15 y.uiQov r^Kuq^onwg t^§ d Ixrjg ay.uvarjg nocQMV T7]g u^cpl tov n a- 
iqoq. II. [1] TiXay.b)v afxcpl (nrj&eaaiv 11. /?, 388. "Ay.cpl uladoig 
s^sa&ai, to he surrounded hy branches, to sit among. (2) (a) II. n, 565. a ficpl 
vsxvt xaTaTsd-vswTi ^nxm&a.i. II. ;^, 157. « |ti qp t yvvaial vtX/ea 
ndaxiiv. Her. 6, 129. ot ^vijaiij^fg sgiv elxov afiq)l fiovu iitj]. 62.90- 



426 SYNTAX. PREPOSITIONS WITH GEN., DAT. AND ACC. [§ 29'3. 

(Si^&tlg u fi(pl 71} y vv a lii L 3, 32. a (a (pi tm 0^ av ut oj aviijg di^og Xt- 
ynav Xo/og, {h)^A(X(pl (f> 6 (i w, prat metUy u ficpl ■&vfiotf prat ira. III. 
{\)'K..Cy.Q.%W,[avXXiyETai)xo aiQaxiv^a ufx(pl xov llaxtrnXovnoT- 
ufiov. 2.4,10. Ts&ijQuxu a lit (pi tm oQia. Hence also of the per- 
sons around any one, as m ol a fxcp i x iv u, see § 203, d. (2) yf ^u ff t xov 
/ e t |U (5 v a, about unriier^ a fxcpl 5 f IXrjv, siih vesperam, u ix(pl xov g (iv- 
^ io V g, cir<nter. (3) *.E%siv a fi(p I x i, to be employed about something, e. g. 
(Xjxcpl dilixvov, u^icp mnovg, (igfiaxu. 

3. Hen I signifies all round, round, a circle. 

I. With the Gen. (1) in relation to space to denote the tarry- 
ing around an object. This use of it is confined to poetry, and 
even here is very rare, comp. § 287, Rem. — (2) in a causal and 
figurative sense, (a) to denote the cause or occasion of a re- 
spect ; here it stands in a gTcat variety of connections, about, 
concerning', for, on account of, in respect to; — (b) to denote a 
mental cause, (for, from, prae), though seldom ; (c) to denote 
the relation of a person or thing to that which belongs to them, 
which, as it were, surrounds them and refers to them, (Gen. of 
the possessor) ; (d) to denote worth and superiority. 

(1) Od. €, 08. avxov, there, xsTavvaxo negl anelovg yXa(pvgo%o 
rifxeglg. 130. xov y.tv iyo)v icrcibjaa tieqI XQOTiLog (5f,5ac5ra. (2) (a) 
ilia/sff^oft, ano&avslv nsgl xijgnaxQldog; with verbs denoting a 
physical or mental perception, axoveiv, tldevai, etc., Avith verbs of saying 
and asking, e. g. Xsysiv nsgl xivog, Xoyog ntgi xivog, with verbs of anxiet)% 
fear, and such as express all other affections, e. g. (po^tia^at nsgl naxgldog, 
ini^iXua&ai, iTiip.iXua mgl XLvog. Dem. Phil. 1. 52, 43. xtjv fih ugx^jv xov 
TioXi^ov yaysvrj^ivrjv n egl xov x l ^(o g rj (t a(T &• a i ^IXimiov. {h)ntgl 
ogyr^g, prae ira, Th. 4, 130. (c) Tw nsglxivog, the affairs, fortune, 
(drcumstances of any one, etc., ol n sg I x iv og, those belonging to any one, 
and as it were surroundmg him. Dem. Phil. 1. 50, 30. iv xolg mgl xov 
71 oXs fi ov yal xfj xoviov nagaaicfvrj aiaaTa omavxa (sc. itrxlv). (d) In the 
Common language, nsgl noXXov, mgl nXelovog, nsgl nXslaxov, n^gl oXlyov, 
nsgl iXdxTovog, negl iltxxhxov, mgl ovdsvog Tiould&at or ijysla&al xl, to 
value high, higher, etc., so also TiEgl noXXov saxiv ijplv, of great value. 

II. With the Dat. (1) in relation to space, to denote rest around 
or near something, with the idea of surrounding or encircling 
it; — (2) in a causal sense, (a) like a/^gp/ with the Dat., but much 
more frequently ; (b) to denote an external or internal reason 
(Poet.). 



§296.] SYNTAX. PUEl'OSrnONS with gen., DAT. AND ACC. 427 

(1) Her. 7, Gl.TTf^i tjjctl xtipaXfjai elxov liaQag. PI. Rp. 359, d. 
nsi}l r f, /ci^t ^^I'o-oi/y ^«xTtAtov<]pg()ff>'. {2) [a) Muxea&ni nsQi xtvt, 
(Poet.). Tl). 1, ()0. (5f(5toTC? nsql tw % (a qI ok 4, 70. duaag negl II e- 
Xon ovvf]aio ig. (),i).TiBgl tw i^aviov UM^aTv oQ^udio. Iler. 3, 
ii5. n sqI suivr m dsinuivovia. PI. Phaedon. 114, d. S^uq^hv n sq l t iv i, 
to he of good courage about something, (b) Ilfgl xu(jfxari, cpo^oj, frd^ivn, odv- 
VTj, prae, as it were swrounded by. 

III. AVith the Ace. (1) in relation to space, around, (a) to de- 
note motion round about something, into the circle or vicinity 
of an object (Poet.) ; (b) to denote extension around, in or at, 
through something, with verbs of rest ; — (2) to denote time and 
number approximately; — (3) in a causal sense, to denote the 
respect in which anything is considered. 

(1) (a) L. X, 139. tcsqI cpgivag i]Xvd^ loirj, the clamor came round his 
mind ; (b) Her. 3, 61. Kafi[imri xqovI'Covtl n sqI AXyvnJov iuuvKTiiaTat 
uvdgsg MayoL, round in .Egypt. 7, 131. o ^£v tisqI IlisQirjv disTQi^Ss 
•ijfiifjag av/vdg. Th. 6, 2. wxovv ^I^oiviHsg nsgl rcuauv ti]v 2 ly.sX Lav 
axQug T£ inl rj] ■&aXdaari unoXaijovTsg xal la STiixtlfieva vrjaldia {circa S). 
Hence oi ntq I t iv a, those around any one, ol n eqI UXctTava, § 263, d. 
Comp. a ficpl. (2) Th. 3, 89. tieqI jovrovg jovg/govovg. IIsqI 
fivg iov g. (3) "AphX^g X/elv nsoliiva. X. An. 3. 2, 20. i^a^agrdvuv 
7t e Q i rtva. 1. 6, 8. adixog tieqI ttva. C. 1. 1, 20. ffftxjp^omi' nigl 
r ov g ^ s ovg. Al n t qI to a (Xt pa tjdovui, tdc n sgl i^v agsjvvj 
the essence of virtue, what pertains to it. 

§ 296. (2) 'E n I, upon. (531-533.) 

With the Gen. (1) in relation to space, (a) to denote rest up- 
on a place or object, to denote contiguity to a place, a/, near io, 
§ 287, Rem. ; (b) to denote a direction to a place, § 273, Rem. 8 ; 
— (2) in relation to time, to denote the time in or during which 
something takes place, §273, Rem. 12; — (3) in a causal and 
figurative sense, (a) with verbs of saying, swearing and affirm- 
ing before any one, (as it were leaning or resting on some one) ; 
(b) to denote the occasion or author, especially in the phrase, to 
be named after some one or some thing ; (c) to denote con- 
formity, with verbs signifying to examine, to judge, to consider, 
to say and to shoiu ; (d) to denote dependence or resting on 
something, a continued remaining on something ; (e) to denote 
the manner ; (f ) to denote the purpose, which is then consid- 



428 SYNTAX. PREPOSITIONS WITH GEN., DAT. AND ACC. [§ 296. 

ercd by the language, as the cause, with the verb tax^rjvatf and 
the like, to be set over something-^ and in certain phrases. 

(1) (a) PI. Menex. 24G, d. olV inl y^jg, ovd^ vno yijg. Her. 7, 111. to 
fiavTij'iov TOVTO ifJTL in I io)v ol^euiv tmv 111)71101: ux o) v. G, 129. 
£71 atT?K (tt;? t q a7ii'C,rig) 6qx)](iuto. 2, 35. tw ux&eu ol f^av urdgsg 
enl Twv necp aX8b)v (poQsovaL, al de yvv(xly.fg inl iCtv btfiojv. X. An. 
4. 3, 28. 6 Hii'OCpMV niiiiijag uyytXov xflsisL {uitovc) aiiov huvul inl xov 
norufiov, at, near the river, (b) Tli. 1, 11 G. ttIhv inl 2 u (.10 v. X. Cy. 
7. 2, 1. inl SuqdeMV (psiysiv. Dem. PJiil. 3. 123, 48. uva/oiQilv in* 
o\'y.ov. (2) Her. 6,98. inl zJaQslov iyivizo n)Jo) y.uy.u jfj "l^XXudi, in 
the time of Darius. X. Cy. 1. G, 31. inl tmv r,fiSTSQ(av ngoyovav. 
So in iuov, fcp ^]/u^bJV, iq) vfjb)v,mea, nostra, vestramemoria. The Gen. often 
stands in connection with a participle, but always with the present ; hence 
inl often denotes the duration of time, e. g. inl Kvqov ijuadsvovrog, during the 
reign of Cyrus. (3) (a) yif'/ar inl dLxuo-TOJV, inl fiuQTvgwv, before, 
in the presence of properly, resting or leaning upon. Dem. Cor. inw- 
HoaavTO inl z wv ex q a t rj y w v. Similar to the preceding is. Her. 9, 11. 
dnav in" ogy.ov, quasi substrate vel supposito jurejurando, leaning or 
resting on the oath, (b) KviXslad^ai inl x iv g. Her. 7, 40. Nl(touov xa- 
XiovxuL Xnnoi inl x v d s. 74. inl Av 8 ov x ov "Axvog sa/ov Tr,v 
inojvv(.tlriv. Ti]v inoivvf^iav noiutr&ai inl xivog. "Ecp savxov, of one's 
own accord, sua sponte, inl nQoq)uaLog Her., praetextu. Aiysiv inl x iv og, 
dicere de aliqua re. PI. Charm. 155, d. inl xov y.aXov Xiyojv n a 186 g. 
(c) ZrjxsTv XL inl xivog, y.glveiv xl inl xuvog, ay.onuv xt inl XLVog, 
Xiyuv XL inl xivog, inidsl^al xl inl t iv og, etc., as it were resting upon. 
PI. Rp. 597, b. ^ovXel ovv, s^rjv, in av xcjv xovxwv xov fui(j.rjxi]v xovxov 
^rjxriaufiev, xlg nox iaxlv ; visne, ad haec ipsa imitatorem istnm exigamus? 
475, a. el ^ovXsi, i'cprj, in^ i fiov XiysLV nsgl xwv igcoxLy.MV^ oxi oltco notoiat, 
avy;(0)gbj xov Xoyov xaguv, ita ut de me rei exemplum petatur. [dyEcp eavxoij, 
savxbjv, fjfiojv aixojv, havxrig, hy one's self, separately, properly, resting or de- 
pending on one's self, independent of others. Her. 5, 98. olxiovxag xT]g 
fpgvylr/g ybigov xs y.ul yMfiriV in" scovxojv. 4, 114. ohscofisv in rjfxscov 
avxav. Here seems to belong the phrase so frequently found in the At- 
tic historians, viz. lE qp" ev 6 g, inl x g l cov, xsxx a g cov xsxax&ai, axiivai, 
one, two, three deep (properly to be placed or stand on one, the row rests up- 
on one, etc.). Dem. Phil. 1. 42, 6. av y.al vfitlg inl xi] g x l avxrj g i&s^ 
Xii](jrjxs ysvia&aL yvoj{.ir)g, firmiter adhaerere huic rationi. 9. oi'x oiog t 
iaxlv, l/tov a y.uxicrxganxaL, fxivsiv inl z vx (av. Phil. 2. 66, 3. y.wXvauLX 
av iy.Hvov ngdxxuv xavxa, icp" b)v iaxi, vvv, quibus nunc studet. So fievsLV 
inl avolag. (e) DenL Cor. 230, 17. ovxe dLxalcag, ovx in" aXr}d-slag 



§ 296.] SYNTAX. PREPOSITIONS WITH GEN., ACC. AND DAT. 429 

ovdsfiiag flQTjfiivcc, as it were, resting on truth, (f) Her. 5, 109. in^ ov 
irax^Vl-^fy, <*ni rei praefecti sumus. Dcm. Cor. 26G, 118. inl tov S f m- 
Qtxov xcaaaiaddg. Hence ol fnl tc5>' n q ay fxax biv, those intrusted 
with business. 

II. AVith the Dat., (1) in relation to space, (a) to denote not 
only tlie tarrying or resting upon, as with the Gen., but also 
(b), and more frequently, in the wider sense of, at, by or near a 
place or object; — (2) in relation to time (mostly only poetic) ; — 
(3) in a causal and figurative sense, (a) to denote dependence 
(penes) ; (b) to denote a condition under which something takes 
place; (c) the purpose, design or determination; (d) to denote 
tlie goal or aim ; (e) to denote the reason, with verbs expressing 
an affection of the mind, § 285, Rem. 1 ; (f ) to denote measure 
and price. 

{!) {a)lLh. 1, 56. {noTLdaiuTuii) oly.ovaiv inl tw Iff&uo) iijc Tlalh'ivrig. 
Her. 7, 41. tovtsmv /Ulol inl t ol g 8 6 q aa t mil zmv (T(/.VQbn)jQiov ^otoft: 
(i/ov XQvaiac. (b) Her. 3, 16. ano&avuvTa t&aijjev inl x fj a l ^vgijai. 
7, 89. 04 fPolvixfg TO nuhtiov or/.sovinl t fj "L o v \} q fj & aid a a]]. So 
also where one thing is said to be along with another, or in addition to, e. g. 
ia&ifLV i nl tw cr It oj o ip o v, to eat the oipov with bread, X., inl t o5 a t- 
TO) nlriLV Id., inl t jj it v X i y. l a d ( i v F]. Hence, inl t ovt o t. c, on 
or in addition to this, i. e. besides ; finally it is also nsed to denote a succes- 
sion of things in time and space. Od. tj, 120. oyxvtj in' o y/vrj yrj^da- 
Ttsi, pear on pear. X. Cy. 2. 3, 7. uriuTf] in' ai'TO) (I^sQavXag, after him. 
06vog inl cp 6 v o), murder upon murder, Eur. (2) 'JS tt t vvy.tI (II. t^, 529). 
(3) (a) Her. 8, 29. in' fi^lv icm 7]vdQunoSia&ai i\usag [penes nos est, vos 
servos esse). Dem. Chers. 90, 2. e qp"* v^iJv icTi [jovrovg] y.old'Csiv. (b) 
^£nl T ov r 0), in" ov 8 sv i, hac, nulla conditioue, nullo pacto. Her. 3, 
83. inl TovToj vnf^laTafiat jr,q oiQ/vg, in" mte vn ovdsvug vusoiv 
ocQ^o^uai. (c) Her. 1, 68. inl y.axo^ uv^QMnov crldrjQog avsvQTiTai (in per- 
niciem, hominis). So inl jovtoi, hoc consilio. X.S.I, 5. TlQwiayoQa 
nolv aoyvQLov ded^xiyag inl aocpla (ad discen^am sap.). PI. Ap. 20, e. 
ipivSsTal T£ y.al in i 8 i a § olf] j i] i fifj Isysi. Hence ol inl t utg 
ft 7] X a V at g, those placed over the machines, ol inl t oUg n g a y ^ a a l, 
those intrusted unth business, inl t o> ■& s o) q ly.o) mv, the one charged with 
the money for the public shows. Dem. Cor. 264, 113. (d) Aiynv inl x ivi, 
to pronounce an eulogy on one ; vo^ovg ■Qio'&aL inl [for] x iv I PI. And so 
ovo^uQdv or y.ahlv xi inl x vv i, non\en alicui imponere. Also, against, 
in a hostile sense. Her. 6, 88. to nav firj/arriaaad^ai in" Aly ivt'jxi] a i. 
Th. 1. 102. xijv yevoixivT]v inl xm Mij8(o Iv^^axlav, (e) FeXav, ^iyu 
56 



430 SYNTAX. PREPOSITIONS WITH GEN., ACC. AND DAT. § 297. 



qioovHV, fjalv^(jf}ai, ayavay.rnv, etc. in I j i v t. [f )'K. Cy. 3. 1,4S. in I 

n u<j 0) av iO^iloig iljv yvralxu aov axovaai [quanlo pretio) ; 

III. With the Ace, (1) in relation to space, (a) to denote the 
limit, the direction or motion on a place or object ; (b) to de- 
note extension upon an object, motion upon, over ; — (2) in re- 
lation to time, (a) to d(uiote the limit of time (until), as well as 
the limit of quantity (about) ; (b) to denote extension over a 
period of time (during) ; — (3) in a causal and figurative sense; 

(a) to denote purpose, design; (b) conformity, manner; (c) to 
denote the respect in which anything is held. 

(1) (a) \4)'a^3aivEiv i cp" 'in nor, inl d^Qovov. [h] Ultlv inl olvo- 
na 7f y T y, Homer. Od. A, 577. £ tt' ivvia xbIto niXt&Qa. Kkiog 
navrag en a v & q cun ovc, Horn., to yMlXiarov y.ul uqiajov yivog in^ 
av & Q bin ov q PL, inl d e^ id, i n^ u q l a t s q ci, upon the right, left side, 
to the right, left. (2) (a) "ii'qp' ia ni q uv, until evening ; [h] inl noX).a q 
1] p, i Q a Q, i cp 1] psQ av. Th. 4, 1. to "P/i/iov inl n o I v v yqovov 
icnaaia^t. 94:. ol on ).It a l inl o'/.tco nuv to argaTOTT^dov STa^uno. IL'.t* 
piya, noXv, nXiov^ psl^oi^, puXXov, pay.gov, inl touov, iqi'' oaor, TSTu/^ai inl 
noXXovg X. (3) (a) Her. l,S7.intSrjQav tgVwt (venatum ire). 3, 14. 
inl vd(x)Q lira I (aqiiatum u'e). Hence inl tl; wherefore') In a hos- 
tile sense, e. g. CTQUZsviad-ai inl Av8 ov q, iXavvuv inl ITeq a ug, prop- 
erly, upon one, i. e. against ; (b) £ tt' la a, equalhj, in the same way. Her. 3, 
71. rifV iniyilgr/aLv lavirjv ph ovtm avvjayvvE UjSovXbig aXX^ inl to a co- 
cp Q V e(TT EQ ov avTr]v Xaf2;juvE, more according to or with, reflection, (c) 
PI. Rp. 370, b. diuq)EgMv inlnga^LV. To in i p s (quod ad me attmet). 

§297. (3) TlaQci, hy^ yiear. (sss.) 

Tlaqa denotes nearness to something, by, near. 

I. With the Gen., (1) in relation to space, to denote a re- 
moval from near a person (Poet., also from near a thing; — (2) 
in a causal sense, to denote the author. 

(1) "EXd^elv n ag a t iv o q, like the French de chez quelqu'un, from near 
some one, from some one. (2) (a) yet almost entu'ely in relation to space, 
Her. S, 140. ayyEXiT] ijy.Ei, nag a ^aaiXijog. So it is regularly used of 
ambassadors, e. g. ayyEXoi, ngia^Eiq n ag a t iv o q, ayyeXXstv n a g a 1 1- 
vog, lanagaTLVog, the commission, command, etc., from any one ; (b) 

(b) with passive verbs, see § 251, Rem. 4 ; (c) with verbs of learning and 
hearing, e. g. pavd^uveiv nagd tlvoc, uxoveiv nagd rnog; {d)nag sav- 



§ 297.] SYNTAX. PREPOSITIONS WITH GEN., ACC. AND DAT. 431 

Tof, IffVTtuy, sua sponte; (e) with verbs of giving and the like, e. g. 
71 a Q kuv X ov didovai, from himself, i. e. from bis own resources. 

II. With the Dat., (1) in relation to space, to denote rest near 
a person ; — (2) in a causal or figurative sense, to denote a refe- 
rence to the judgment or opinion of a person. 

{1) "LaiT] nag a to" ^aaiXiX. (2) Her. 3, ICO. nuQu /laoeloj 
x^ t TT/, judice Dario, m the opinion of. 1, 32. tt u q £|U o /, meo judicio. 
86. Toig n u Qu a (p la i av x oXa i doxsoviug oAjjlovg. Dem. 01. 1. 18, 3. 
ToaoiTO) SuvuuaToiiQog naQu n ix a i roul^ijui [u fldlinnog). 

III. With the Ace, (1) in relation to space, (a) to denote a di- 
rection or motion into the vicinity of a person (Poet, also of a 
thing) ; (b) to denote a direction or motion near a place and by 
it, along, along by, by ; (c) to denote extension near a place or 
object (along, />c/'), generally to denote indefinite nearness (by); 
— (2) in relation to time, to denote extension (during) : — (3) in 
a causal and figurative sense, (a) to denote dependence, the 
possessor (penes) ; (b) to denote a comparison and estimation; 
hence (c) to denote conformity, with verbs of considering, show- 
ing and the like ; (d) to denote a reason, wholly like propter^ 
by virtue of^ on account of. 

(1) (a) Her. 1, 36. «7T<xfcO"i9^at TT « ^ti Kgolaov. (b)77a^M Ti]v B a .3 v~ 
Xoivu Ttaoiivui, along, near, by Bab f on. From this have originated various 
ethical exjjressions, e. g. naou ixolgav, near fate and by it, i. e. against, contrary 
to fate, TiaQU do^uv, praeter opinionem, tiuq iXnldu, nagu cpiaiv, tiuqu to 
dlxaiov, nana xovg ogyovg, Tingu dvvauLv. It is the opposite of yMia, e. g. 
x«T« (jolgav, dvvuuiv. Hence it has also the signification o^ besides, praeter, 
e. g. n ag a x avr u, praeter haec ; (c) Her. 9, 15. ti a g u xov \4.(t uk 6v, 
along the ^isopus. Dem. Ol. 1. 24, 22. ?] xi/ri nagu. n uvr iaxl xu xoiv 
av&gomwv ngd'/fiaxa {per omnes res dominatur. Her. 4, 87. oixog y.uxs- 
hlcf&t] 7x a gu x ov vr/ov. {2) Ilag Tj fii g av, n ng a x u v n 6). sfiov 
[during), n ugu xrjv n 6 a iv, inter potandum. So also of single points 
of time, during which something takes place, e. g. n ug a v x ov x ov x Iv- 
dvvov, in ipso discriminis tempore. (3) (a) Isocr. Archid. 126. difjioloyaxo 
n ug u X ovxo V '/eps.(T&ui, xi]v aojxriglav avxolg, constabat, in hoc iis positam 
esse salutem. Her. 8, 140. nvv&uvea&s xi]v vvv nug ips ioiaav divapiv. 
(b) Her. 7, 20. ojgxs ^i]xe xov /lugtlov iaxoXov) xov inl ^y.vd^ag nag a x o \i- 
xov fir,dsv (f>alviaOai. So n a g oklyov noiua&aixi, to make of little 
account. II a g oklyov, n aga fxiy.g ov, 3 g a/v, nearly, almost, n ag a 
nolvj by far, nag ovdev xld-tad^ai, to make no account of; after com- 



432 SYNTAX. PREPOSITIONS WITH GEN., ACC. AND DAT. [§ 298* 

parisons and expressions implying comparison, as ilXXog,, iTtQog, diucpoQog. 
Til. 1, 2.'3. r,}.lov ialfiifjEig nvxvoTSQUL tcuqu tu in xov nolv xquvov 
(iivr^fiOvevufiEva. PI. PJiacd. 93, a. olds fiijv noulv ii, ovdi it naaxuv uXXo 
nag u uv iy.uru ij noiji i] ttuct/t]. Hence of alternations, ijf^tQU n a q i] (j, 6- 
Q ccv, one day in distinction from another^ every other d/iy, alternis diebus, also 
nuQ i)i.ugav alone. Oiten Avitii the additional idea of preference, prae, 
praeter. X. C. 1. 4, 14. tt a ^ « t« It XX a ^oj«, aJgnsQ &iol, ol uvOgunot 
^lOTfvovin, in compaiison with, beyond, other animals, (c) Dern. Aph. 1. 824, 
34. 7t a Q a J ov X6 y v, ov unocpsgovaLv, inidsc^M, in conformity ivith, prop- 
erly, holding an object near to another, (d) Dern. Phil. 1. 4.3, 14. ov8k omoq 
nag a xtjv avTOii g(a^i]V loaovTov inrjV^riTaL, oaov n a g a tijv rjfiE- 
TS g uv ufisXsiuv. So 71 u g u toDto, propterea, nag o, quapropter. 

§ 298. (4) JT(> ? , b efo r e . (536.) 

Tlgog (formed from ?7^o), denotes before ^ in tlie presence of. 
I. With the Gen. (1) a local relation, or relation of space, 
which expresses a direction or motion from the presence or 
view of an object, especially from the situation of a place ; — (2) 
a causal relation, to indicate that a thing proceeds from an agent, 
from the presence of a person exercising some power, or of an 
object conceived as a person ; (a) of derivation ; (b) of a pos- 
sessor and of the property to whom or which anything belongs, 
§ 273, 2, (c) («) ; (c) of an author or cause. 

(1) Her. 3, 101. oly.sovai n g o g v ox ov a v i fi ov. 107. n go g jj,sa t] ^u^ 
^g 07] g "Agtti^tT] iail [ab oriente instead of in orientem ybysus, towards the 
east). X. An. 2. 2, 4. enead-s toj ij/ovfi&voj, t« (jev vno'^vyia I'/ovTeg ngog 
T II 71 T a 1.1 V. [2) [a.) 71 g g ti ar g 6 g, 7i g og fj.r}T g 6 g, onthe father''s 
or mother'^s side, [h) n g o g yvvaiy.og iaii, it is the manner of women, 
Ttgog d iy. T]g iaxlv, it is conformable to justice. Antiph. 2. 121,2. ?; i.iev 
do^a Twv 7Tgct/&svT0jV 7i g o g t 6j v XtysLV dvvajxsvcov iaxlv, ij ds ocXt'j- 
S-eta 71 g 6 g t c5 v dUaia y,al oaua 7i g aisu ov t mv. Also, uvai ti g 6 g 
T ivog, stare ab aliquo. Th. 4, 92. 7iicfTsvaavTsg toj &eoJ ti g 6g 'i] fiav 
easa^ai. (c) Her. 2, 139. ha xaxov ti 7i g 6 g &£6Jvi]ngogav&g(x>~ 
71(0 V Xa^oi. 7, 5. GTgaTriXurE^ stiI rag \4&i]Vttg, \va Xoyog as £/;/ Tigog 
avS- g (071 (OV aya&og, ut lauderis ab hominibus, as it were, in the presence 
of men ; also with ay.ovfiv and like verbs ; <.with passive verbs, see § 251, 
Rem. 4, and instransitives. Her. 1, 61. aTi^(XL,Ba&aL 7i g o g IIskt l(tx g (x^ 
Tov. 73. Taina ti g 6 g Kv a^(x g so) Tia&ovTtg. AVith forms of swearing 
and protestation, e. g. 7igog & eatv. per deos, properly, before the gods. 



§298.] SYNTAX. PREPOSITIONS WITH GEN., ACC. AND DA'I". 433 

II. With the Dat., to denote a resting before or vnth an ob- 
ject; also of being emploijed in or ivifh a thing; linally, in the 
sense oi besides^ in addition to, (jjractcr). 

Th. 2, 79. ig iio/yiv yia&laravTUL ol ^A&rjValoL n g o g avxfi rfj TioAct. 
Eivni, yiyvsad^ui, n g 6 g n g u y ^ a a i. Ilgog t ovj oi, n g 6 g t ovto Lg 
(praeter ea). 

III. With the Ace., (1) in a local relation, or relation of space, 
(a) of the site of a place, or direction of an object, toivards, 
(where, also, the Gen. may be used, see No. I, 1) ; (b) of per- 
sons, or of things conceived as persons, standing both in friendly 
and in hostile attitudes ; (c) of the extension of a thing; — (2) 
to denote an indefinite approximation of time; — (3) causal 
and figurative, (a) to denote the aim, object; (b) fitness, con- 
formity ; hence (c) the reason, propter; (d) a comparison, 
for the most part with the additional idea of preference (^prae, 
praeter) ; (c) with the meaning in respect to. 

(1) (a) n gc g atari ^^ g lav, n g 6 g sa n sg av. Th. 2, 55. {■)) yi] ) 
n g o g HsXonovvrjaov ugu. (b) X. An. 5. 7, 20. 1'o/ovTwt ngog ?j/i«?, 
to us, properly, come before us. 7. 6, 6. vfxag ngun «|o,ufv ngog a vx ovg. 
5. 4, 5. diaooj&iivai ^ovlof^sda ngog z i]v '^EXl a d a {ngog xovg'^'ElXr^vag), 
uiiysiv, ayogsvsiv, i^sTu^sLv x l ngog x iv a; (rnovdug, av^fia^lav noitla^av 
ngog x iv a, urtth ; fza/sd&ui, noXi^xuv ngog x iv a, against. These 
plirases everywhere imply the meaning to come into the presence of, before 
the face of any one ; also, Xoyi'^sad-ai, ay.iipaa&ai, iry.onuv, h'&Vfiua&uL 
ngog eavx 6v, secum reputare ; likewise, {^'eiygaxrig ijv) ngog y s l ^uoiv a 
y.al ■& s g g '/.at navxag novovg -/.(xgiegr/MnaTog, against, X. C. 1. 2, ]. 
(c) ^(jjxgdxrjg ye y.al ngog x o v g u Xlo v g av & g ojn ov g y.oofxov xr, no- 
XsL nagstys, among all other men, etc. the preposition here extending the idea, 
ibid. 61. {2) n gc g i] ^i g a v, against, about the break of day. (3) (a) Dem. 
Phil. 2. 71,2Z. navxodana eigri^ivu xalg nolmi ngog cpvXay.i]V y.al a m- 
ftjQ lav, (b) Her. 1, 38. ngog t ?) v oip i v x avxrjv xov ydjxov xovxov ea- 
mvaa, in accordance with this view. So y.giveiv xi n g 6g x i. Also, n go g § l- 
a V, violently, against the will, ngog dv ay y>'j v, ngog rj d ovi'jv, ngog 
dxg l^ SI av, accurately, m conformitj' with accuracy, etc. {c) Ilg 6 g x avx a, 
properly, in accordance with this, hence /or this reason, therefore, (d) Her. 8, 
44. "^^Tjyatot ngog ndvxag xovg a II ovg [a v ^ y.uy^ov g) nagsy6{AS- 
voi vrlug oydor/.ovxn y.al ky.axov, i. e. equal to all the other allies, as much as the 
rest put together. So also to denote an exchange, e. g. PI. Phaed. 69, a. iido- 
vug ngog ridovdg yal Xvnag ngog Xvnag yal cpo^ov ngog cpo^ov 



434 SYNTAX. PREPOSITIONS WITH GEN., ACC. AND DAT. [§ 299. 

nuiuXXixTTia&ut, y.ul ^hC,u) tt q 6 g iX utt (a^ ojgntQ vofxliTixura. (e) ^xottuv, 
(iliTciiv 71 Q 6 g T (, diaifioiiv n (j 6 g uqiujv, x«At/ff ngog d g o ^ o v^ 
71 () o g 71 u X Tjv, TtXiog ti g o g a q kx riv. 

§299. (-')) 'T7z6, sub, tinder. (537.) 

I. With the Gen., (1) in a local relation, or relation of space, 

(a) to denote a motion from a lower place, forth from vnder, 
away from under, (more obvious in the Horn. vnt-A wdth Gen.) ; 

(b) to denote a quiet rest under an object, §287, Rem.; — (2) a 
causal and figurative relation ; (a) to denote the author with 
passive verbs, § 254, Rem. 4, and instransitives ; (b) an out- 
ward or inward (intellectual) ground, occasion, influence ; (c) a 
mere instrumental cause, means, mode. 

(1) (a) Od. t, 140. al'Tag iTil v.qaihg Xifiivog ^hi ayXaov I'^to^, y.Qi]vri vtio 
(TTi slovg, " under the grotto out." rj, 5. vtt o a ti rivrj g Xvelv mTiovg. X. 
An. 6. 4, 25. [!Zivoq}(x)v) Xu^mv ^oiv v 710 a [i a ^r] g (repay laadjxivog i^or^^&H. 
(b) II. -d-, 13. q'njjM ig l(X(jTagov — , f^i pd&unov v 71 /d^ovog idxi ^iqt~ 
■&QOV. '^Tno y i] g olxelv. (2) (a) JCiHvia&UL vtio TLVog, uno&uvuv 
V 71 6 T iv g. (b) Her. 1,85. v no tTj g 71 a g so v (J7]g u v /.i cp o ij g, ^^ un- 
der the influence of present misfortune, on account of existing calamity.''^ 3, 
104. u 710 Tov y.avfiajog ol y.vo^r]/.Eg dcpatisg yU'oviai vno yi'/v. Th. 2, 
85. VTIO dvifiojv xttfc v7t6 otTiXolag spdisiQupsv oly. oXi'yov yqovov. 
'^Tri a V ay y. rig. "Tno fis&Tjg fiulvsa&UL, F\. "Xno qlyovg. Her. 1. 
85. V Ti o d s V g xal y.ay.ov qjojvijv sggi]^8. So v ti 6 ;( u g d g, q) & ov ov, 
6 g yi] g, vctt sl g lag, ffojcpgocrvvrjg, ucpgocrvvrjg, etc. (c) Her. 7, 21. 
ojgvacrov v ti fiacrTlyojv, also of persons, 9, 98. v ti 6 xtj g vy, o g Jigoi]- 
yogsvE, ^^ under the help of the /leraW," i. e. praeconis voce ; particularly of 
the accompaniment of musical instruments, e. g. Her. 1, 17. iaigaTsvsro 
VTIO a aXTt ly y lov. So v ti avXovxogsv£iv,v7i6 q) g iily y iov, vtio 
TV ^Ti a V oiv, etc. 

II. With the Dat., (1) in a local relation, to denote a quiet 
rest under an object; — (2) causal and figurative, (a) to denote 
the author (almost exclusively poetical), see § 251, Rem. 4; (b) 
to indicate the means, as with the Gen., but only Poet. ; (c) to 
denote subjection. 

(1) "Ttio y fj eivuL ; used of mountains, at the foot of, e. g. vn o. TfiojXto 
VTIO Tw 'Tfirjff a M. [2) [a.) /Ja^uiivai v 71 6 t iv i, tiljiislv vtio tlvl. (b) 
'Ttio ^ocg^lTb) /ogsvsLV, v ti^ avXoi, etc. {c) IIoLstv tl vtio tlvi, to 
subject something to one, and Tioiuad^al xi v q)" eavx o), sihi subjicere. Her. 



§ 300.] SYNTAX. rECULIARITIES OT TIIK PREPOSITIONS. 435 

7, 157. rj]v'JCXXd8a in^ hcovTO) noiijaaad-ca. Tli. 1, 110. Aiyvmog vno 
P aa iXtl i y ir ST 0. 

III. With the Ace, (I) in a local relation, (a) to denote the 
aim, direction or motion downwards; (b) extension under 
an object; — ('2) the relation of time, (a) to denote an approxi- 
mation in respect of time, approach to a point of time; (b) ex- 
tension in time ; — (3) causal, to denote subjection. 

(1) (a) ^lirai vno yi]v. X. An. 1. 10, 14. u tt o avxov [xov X6 (f ov) 
(nr](jag xo (TTgtxTevfxa TtifinsL ylvyuov. (b) Her. 2, 127. VTnaiL o\y.)]^uja 
xno yr\v. 5, 10. xti vno Tr]v uqxtov aoiy.)]Ta dov.isi dvai. X. An. 7. 
4, 5. iv Totg vno to ogog y.cofiaig. (2) (a) "Tno vvy.TUy sub noctem, 
towards, vno t r, v n q iottjv inEk'&ovaav v vy.i a\ so also vno tl, ali- 
quatenus, ?7i 50 ?ne measure, (b) Her. 9, 51. i'tto t t] v vvy.xa, during. (3) 
X. Cy. 1. 5, 3. [KvQog) dLune^nsc nQog rs Tovg v cp^ eavTov ndviag, y.al 
TtQog Kqolaov. 6. 2, 11. o ai'D.oyog tmv vno ^ aa ilea ^aQ^Sdgojv. 

§ 300. R e m arks on the Pe culia r itie s of the Pre- 
positions. (533—544.) 

1. The proper prepositions were originally, (except Mg, to), adverbs of 
place, § 286, Rem. 2, i. e. they denote an action in relation to place ; in this 
way nearly all are very often used in the Homeric language. This use is 
also frequent in Herodotus, but is much more limited in the Attic writers. 

Od. ^, 40. nollov yttQ uno nlvvol flat n6).r,og. i, 116 — 118. rijo^oc — 
indvvaTai vh'itaa , iv d' aiysg dnfiqitjiai yfyduaiv liyqiuL. Also in Her., 
e. g. 3, 39. iv ds dh xal Aur^lovg uls, under them, i. e. in iis, among them. 
II. 0-, 562. ^g'Afxrfc S" uvu ^oTQveg ijrrciv. Od. t, 184. tt £ ^ t d' avh) vipi^l!] 
didfjTjTO y.uTMQvyseaat ll&oiuiv. a, 66, og nsgl fiev vuov iujl jSgmair, he is 
over, i. e. eminent. ■&, 44. Ttji! ydg ga ^sbg nsgl db)y.iv doi8t]v, in a special 
manner. II. a, 529. xthvov d" sn i i.ii]lo(ioTrigc/.g, in addition, besides. Also 
not rare in Her., inl d s, thereupon, turn ; ^ sxa ds ( posted) Her. -, nq 6g 
ys, ngog ds veiy common in Homer, also in Attic poetry and prose. 

Remark 1. When two prepositions st<md together in poetiy, most fre- 
quently in Epic, the first always has an adverbial meaning, but the second 
may be connected as a preposition with the Case of a substantive, /t l a 
nqo, through and oid, II. ^, 393. T«r'i'T«i ^£ ts nuaa {^oslrj] 8iu n q 6. 
'a i-i (fl n s Q i, round about, Od. A, 608. u fxcpl nsgl axrj&Hraiv. II. (p, 
10. oxd^cci S' u /.icpl nsgl fisydi! I'ayor. /?, 305. a ^cpl n egl ygip'tp'. U ix- 
gsH with the Gen. near to, with the Ace. along up, along before, e. g. Od. i, 
116. n a gix Xifiivog. (j., 276. dXlu nags^ xiiV vi^ttrov iXavvsTS vija ^d- 
XaivKv. ndgs^ {as a Paroxytone) often in Her. with the meaning besides, 
e. g. 3, 91. n dgs^ r oi> dgyvglov. 'Tnix, under, away, in Homer, also. 
Her. 3, 116. Xiysxai vn sx xo)V ygvnbiv ugnd'^fiv \4giij.a(Tnovg. An on g o 
cpignv II. n, 669, 679. Jlsgl n g 6. II. X, 180. nsgl ngo ydg ty/ji x^isv, 
around and before. 



436 SYNTAX. PECULIARITIES OF THE PREPOSITIONS. [§ 300. 

Rem. 2. Also tlio iiniJi'oper |)r(!j)ositions I'vfxrx and /uqlv, though very 
seldom, arc connected with tlie })roj)er |)rei)ositions, us in Enir. on account 
of ^ for the sake of utto (Soi'fg tvey.a, for the cry's sake. Lys. Evandr. 793. 
71 s qI Jbiv tv oliyuo/iti uo^ixviwv tv sxf v. 

2. Since in composition the pre])ositions retain their original meaning as 
adverbs of place, and as the older language hlibitually uses the prepositions 
as adverbs of place, it follows of course, that the ancient language often 
employs the simples, and separates the preposition as an adverb from the 
verb, where the Attic writers regularly use the compounds. The two fol- 
lowing instances must be distinguislied, 

(a) Those where the preposition is separated from the verb. II. y, 
34. VTio Ts 7Qo[iog eXXcx^e yvXa. y, 135. naQvc d^ ^//«« fj.ay.QU ni^ 
TTij y £V. d, 63. inl d' tip ovxa l &eoI uIXol. d, 161. Ey, te y.nl uipE t £ ^ « T. 
-d-, 108. ovg [mnovg] nox un^ Alvslav EXofifjV [Elea&ai tlvu tl II. n, 56). 

Rem. 3. Here belongs, especially, an abridged mode of expression which 
consists in this, namely, when, in several sentences following each other, 
the same compound should stand with each sentence, it is placed only 
with the first, Avhile in the others the preposition merely is repeated, e. g. 
II. ip, 799. xofTW fih doXt/oay.iov Ey/og S^i^x" ig ayojva cpEQOJV, y.axa d ua- 
Tilda xal xQvcpaXEiav. Often in Her., e. g. 8, 33. y,axa fjsv Exavaav /igv- 
fiov noXiv, y.axu ds XagudQtjv, w^here, still, the first may be taken as Tme- 
sis. See Rem. 4. 

Rem. 4. In the later periods of the language, and particularly in the Attic 
writers, the prepositions are so closely connected with the verbs, that both 
mingle and form one whole. It is only from this time that there is what may 
be properly called Tmesis, i. e. the separation of a verb united with a preposi- 
tion so as to form one whole, by means of one or more intervening words. The 
Tmesis of compound verbs is found somewhat often in Her. ; also in Pindar, 
and in other poets, seldom in. the Attic poets in the lyric choral songs, and still 
more seldom in the dialogue ; but when it does occur, only a particle comes 
between tlie two parts of a word, so that the unity of the idea is not de- 
stroyed. Her. 7, 15. ^Eg'S')'jg av a xe Ed q a fj. e ex xijg y.omjg y.ai nifinEi ayyEXov. 
8, 89. w TT (JEV Ed- av E o (TXQaxi]y6g. Eur. Iph. Aul. 1365. d i" uq o A oj A «- 
fXEV. The Attic prose remains free from this license with a few^ special ex- 
ceptions, e. g. Th. 3, 13. p) ^vv y.ay.Mg ttoleIv avxohg fiEx^Ad-rivatuv, uXXa 
^vveXsv&eqovv, so as to make the contrast emphatic. PI. Gorg. 520, e. a j't' 
EV noLElv QXidi eI EV noiricFag xavxriv xt)v Evsgysalav u v x^ ev nEitr Exa i. 
PI. Pliaedr. 237, a. ^v^i fioi Xu^ect&e xov fj.v&ov, to take part. 

(b) Those instances where the preposition is separated from the Case 
of its substantive. Here also, throughout Homer, the preposition exhi- 
bits its original adverbial meaning, and belongs to the verb ; both, i. e. 
the verb and the adverbial preposition, form one verbal idea, and this (not 
the preposition alone) governs the Case. II. e, 292. xoi) d" a no fuh yXbJa- 
aav xttfiE (Gen. of separ.). i, 382. nXslcFxa do fi o ig iv yxrifxaxa xElrat, " lies 
ivithin the house." o, 266. a fi cpl ds xaixau co fx o ig ai'aaovTaL, " on the 



§ 300.] SYNTAX. PECULIARITIES OF THE PREPOSITIONS. 437 

shoulders ubout,''^ {local Dative), tt, 291. i v yuq UuTfJoxXog qpo/5ov ijxfv una- 
fftv, "he ca-^t tear into all" (Dat. of aim), §284, Rem. 1. So the Ace. de- 
noting local aim, object, §277. II. &, 115. tw ^' tig o.fiCporsQO) /lioj^i]dEog 
a QfiuT a /J'/TJjv. Ace. of the object receiving an action, § 279. II. /5, 
156. \'l d-rjvairjv "llqri n q 6g fiv^ov tsinsv. 

Rem. 5. In the instance last mentioned, a Tmesis is admitted only when 
mere particles, like (uiv, di, ri, ^«, ydq, vcq, (5' «^«, come between the pre- 
position and the Case of the substantive, — a very frequent usage of the post- 
Homeric period, and even in the Attic writers. Comp. Rem. 4. 

3. It is a peculiarity of the Greek, particularly of the Homeric language, 
that it often connects i)repositions followed by the Dat., with verbs which 
express the direction ivkither; and, on the other hand, prepositions followed by 
the Ace, with verbs whose signification presupposes a quiet resting in a place 
or object. This construction arises from a blending of two ideas, since the 
speaker either conceives and expresses, along with the idea of motion, that 
of the rest which succeeds ; or along with the idea of the rest, that of the 
motion which precedes. Hence this may be called the Construdio praes^ans. 

(a) The verb of motion involves the idea of the rest which succeeds, 
when prepositions with the Dat. stand instead of prepositions with the Ace. 
The idea of rest (the relation to the continuing result of the action) must 
then be regarded as the predominant one. The principle above stated 
holds with the following prepositions, e. g. 

With i V, particularly in the Epic language. II. 6, 370. i] d^ iv yovvaai. 
nlnrE JicavT]g 8t l^qp^o^ir?;, " he fell on his knees, and then /a?/ on his 
knees." Od. «, 200. iyo) fxcxvTivaofiat, ug ivl ■& v fio) u&uvutol ^ uXX ov a l. 
L. X, 743. ^QtTiE d' iv y.ovlriaiv. In prose, tlS^svul iv xbq(tIv, 
like the Latin, ponere et collocare in manibus. X. H. 4. 5, 5. ig 8s to 
"Hqulov y.axscpvyov, and then ol 8" iv tw "Hq a l(o xoctanscpsvyoTsg (as 
a completed action) i^jjeaav. PI. Euthyd. 292, e. iv xavxri xij an oq la 
ivsntTtTcoxsLv. (Caes. B. G. 5, 10. naves in littore ejectas esse. Sail. 
Jug. 5. in amicitia receptus). Also with a ficp I and n eq I with the Dat. in- 
stead of the Ace. II. X, 17. xvr]iM8ag fisv noona n eqI y.vi] f.i jia iv s&rjy.tv, 
" he put them around his legs, so that then they set fast." Od. oft, 434. a ficpl 
nvql ax i] a u L x q I n o 8 a. With i n I. II. a, 55. xo) yuQ inl q)QS(Tt 
■&ijy.s ^m Xivy.MXivog'lIqri (like iv cpoEal '&sivni). With n g 6 g. Od. i, 284. 
via fiiv fioi y.axiu^E [ToasL8dMv ivoai/d^iav, n q 6 g nix qtjg l ^ aX wv. 289. 
vvv 8s 8l'o) lAiXQipag, were axvXay.ac, noxl yalrj aonxs. So SdXXsiv 
Tioxl yuLT). With VTT 6, in prose, in the phrases, L'TTo xlvi y lyv ta d^ a v. 
to come under the power of any one, noislv xl vno xivi, alicui aliquid 
eubjicere, noLsia&aL vcp kavxo), sibi subjicere, §299, II, (2), (c). 

Rem. 6. In the following and like examples from Homer, the Dat., with- 
out doubt, expresses the relation of aim, yilgag IdXXfiv inl alxo}, vy.ai ^iXog 
inl xivi, nifxipitL oveiQOV inl xivt, iXavvsiV Xnnovg inl vrjvalv, xixalvEa&ai To|a 
inl xivi, dXXia&ui inl x(,vi, fidxsadai, inl xlvi, nixscri^ai in ixvOsaiv. See 
§ 284, Rem. 1. 

57 



438 SYNTAX. PECULIARITIES OF THE PREPOSITIONS. [§ 300. 

(b) Tlie verb cxi)ressing rest involves the idea of the motion which \)re- 
cedes, when the proposition slg stiinds with the Ace, instead of tlie prepo- 
sition i V with the Dat. The idea of the preceding motion must then be re- 
garded as predominant. 

II. o, 275. t(puvrj Xlg tie o56v, came into the road and appeared. Her. 
4yl4. (p av ijv u t i g II q oxovvt] a ov. Eur. Iph. T. fJQO. u)X slg uvuy- 
xr]v as Ifxsxy u. Jler. 3, (Yi. nQotj/oQ^vs ax ag i g fiia ov t« ivxtiuX^iva, 
placing himself in the midst and there standing. Very frequent in prose is 
71 a Qtiv a I sig to n ov t ivd, to have come to a place, and to l>e present 
there ; comp. " he is in church, in town, on the land." X. An. ]. 2, 2. n u qtj- 
cr av sig ^aQ d e lc. Her. 8, 60. i g jr]v ^ uXay,1v a vnixn six a l 
{•^tv Tsxva T£ xrxl yvralxsc, conimjed in safety. PI. Rp. 468, a. lov t,Mvia slg 
T ov g n oXsy.lo V g u X 6 v t u, i. g. slg xoig noh^lovg nsaovTu uXCtvui. 

(c) Verbs signifying to Jiang, and to hang to, to adhere to, etc., are 
connected with the i)repositions u7t 6 and iy., (as in Lat. with ah and er), in 
order to express, together with the idea of suspending anything to a place, 
or of hanging to a place, the idea of hanging down from a place. 

Od. S; 67. y.ad' d^ in n aa a alocp i nQs^aasv cpoQfiiyya Xlysiav, he 
hung the lyre on the peg, so that it then hung down from it. X. C. 3. 10, 13. 
S^agaxsQ ex t w v m (acov xQSfxufisvoi. So avuQTuv tl sx xivog. Her. 4, 
10. ix T b) V ^bidTriQiav cpogslv (pLulag, " on the girdles, so that the bowls 
hung down." In poetry, this usage is \ery widely extended. See Larger 
Grammar, II. § 622, (c). 

Rem. 7. Adverbs of place are sometimes used, like prepositions, m the 
sense of the constructio praegnans, viz. (a) adverbs denoting rest instead of 
the direction whither. S. Trach. 40. xslvog d^ onov (instead of onoc, quo) 
^s§rixsv, oldslg olds. X. H. 7. l,25.o7iov (jovXr^&slsv s^sX& slv. — (b) 
adverbs expressing the direction whither, instead of adverbs expressing the 
relation where. Eur. H. F. 74. not n<nriQ anscTi yrig', 1157. nol xaxatv 
iqri^Uiv svQb) ; quo me vertam, ut requiem inveniam? Arist. Av. 9. onoc 
yi]g sa^sv, where are we ? Dem. Chers. 102, 50. tt o t uvadvousd^a; 
quo nos vertamus, ut perniciem vitemus ? Pliil. 1. 51, 40. o nXviyslg usl xi]g 
nXrjyrjg s/sxai, xav higcaas nuxa^rj xig, ixtlas slaiv ai x^^Q^?' 

(4) A second peculiarity m the construction of prepositions is, when the 
article (alone or with a substantive) in connection with a preposition follow- 
ed by the Case which it governs, has a substantive idea, and when the pre- 
position iv, which expresses in the most general manner the relation of the 
place ivhere, should be used, this preposition is changed either into un 6 
and ex or into elg, attracted, as it were, by the verb, expressed or under- 
stood, which denotes either the direction whence or whither. This construc- 
tion may be called the attraction of prepositions, e. g. 

(a) "a no and sx instead of sv, or n ug a with the Gen. instead ofTxugd 
with the Dat. Oi ex xtjg ayogug av&gunoL oniicpvyov instead of ol sv 
xfi ay og a avS-gwnoL anicpvyov ix xrjg u y o g a g. X. H. 4. 6, 4. navxsg 
ol ix x6)v ay gCiv "Axagvavsg icpvy ov eg xa aaxr). Th. 1, 18. ot « x t tj 5 



§ 300.] SYNTAX. PECULIARITIES OF THE PREPOSITIONS. 439 

a II rig 'Jilkkddog {rvQarvoi) v:io yJaxfdaifiOvlMV xttT fXv k^ r}(rnv. 3, 22. 
i'ja&ovTO ol ex tmv niQyMV (pvkaxsg. 7,70. ol u n o iwv ttuxa- 
iTT Q ot fid T M y roTt; axoriloig (xqmvto. PI. Apol. 32, b. vfihXq rovg dty.u utqu- 
T7]/ovg TO re o vk u v bXo (.lev o v g Tuvg ex x i) ? v av fia/ lag l3o i'Xt(T\}s 
ud^Qoovg xQueiv. Phaed. 10i>, e. ol ex ttJ? d^ak uTTTjg l/Oveg dvaxvn- 
jovreg. Dein. Phil. 3. 114, 15. tovq tx ^'s()^lov t el/ov g arquxiMTag 
i $ s ^3 a X £ V. X. An. 1. 1,5. bgng (5' a q) ixv oIt o tmv tt a (j ix ^aniXeiag 
TiQog uvivv instead of luir naod (iaaiXu ovtmv naqw ^aadeiog ucfixvolxo. 

Rem. 8. The same principle of attraction holds, also, with adverbs of 
place, e. g. ixel&sv and evdo&tv instead of exsT and evdov. Dem. Ol. 3. 13, 
15. dyroel lov ixelO sv nohfiov deigo ij^ovia. X. Cy. 1. 3, 4. iva i^craov t« 
oi'xade no&olr]. See Larger Grammar, II. § 622, Rem. 2. 

(b) Eig instead of ev (far rarer]. Her. 2, 150. tleyov ol enixMgiOL, o)g eg 
tijv ^VQTiv xr]v eg yii^vi]v exdidol tj Xi/uvt) avxt] vnb yrjv. X. H. 1. 
7, 29. ^tiQaaivldrjg {ixiXevsv) enl xovg eg Mix vX r^vriv noXe^ilovg xi]V xa^Lcr- 
XTiv nXelv ixnavxag. 

5. On the repetition and omission of prepositions, the following things 
are to be noted, 

(a) In a series of coordinate substantives, the preposition is either repeat- 
ed before each single substantive, when each is meant to express a single 
idea, e. g. PI. Tim. 18, c. xax d xe noXefiov xal xax a xi]v dXXrjv dlcxixav, or 
the preposition is placed only before the first substantive, when the ideas 
are meant to express one whole, e. g. X. C. 1. 4, 17. tts (>t xmv ev^dde xal 
tieqI xav ev Alyvnxca xal ev 2 ix eXla cpoovxi^siv, instead of xal 
Tiegl x(av ev 2ixeXia. 2. 1, 6. ayvfjvdaxMg e/eiv n g 6 g x e ipv%r} xal ■& dX- 
nt}. IK.. Yi. 1. 1, ^. a 71 6 XE X Si V V e (a V X al X ri g y i] g. PI. Phaed. 99, a. 
ii] neql Me y aq a i] Boicoxovg. 

(b) When a substantive connected with a preposition, is followed by a 
relative pronoun standing in the same Case with the substantive, the prepo- 
sition in prose is often repeated before the relative, but more frequently 
omitted, PI. Symp. 213, c. u ti" ixdvov xov xqovov, a (p^ o v xoixov r^Qdirdr^v^ 
Th. 1, 28. dlxag ri&tXov dovvai ev IhXonovvi]ao) n a q a noXeaLV, aig uv dfi~ 
cpoxeqoL ^Vfi(^(x)aLv. X. S. 4, 1. ev xm XQovia, m Vfiwv dxomo (Cic. Fin. 4, 20. 
Zeno negat Platonem, si sapiens non sit, eadem esse in causa, qua tyran- 
num Dionysium). 

(c) The preposition is often omitted in the questions and answers of a 
dialogue, e. g. PI. Soph. 243, d. n egl 8 e xov fxeylaxov xe xal dgxty/ov tiqoj- 
xov vvv axenxiov. Theaet. Tlvog di] Xeyeig-, X. S. 5, 5. olad^a ovv, l'<jp^, 
6(f)&aXfiMV xivog evexa deofje&a ; JvXov, ecpr], oxi xov ognv. 

(d) The preposition in the second member of a comparison connected 
with the particles of comparison w ?, otgneg, ?J, is very often omitted, yet 
more seldom when both members of the comparison are expressed, e. g. 
PI. Rp. 330, c. neql xd xqi]naxa ajiovdd'Covaiv, (ug egyov iavxojv 



440 SYNTAX. ON THE PRONOUN. [§§ 301, 302. 

Til. 6, 50. w? 71 ag a (p IXo v g xal tvEQyirag^ 'AChrjvaiovg adtbig 
uniivuL. 

6. The natural place for prepositions is directly before their substantive. 
But this arrangement is often changed in the following instances, 

(a) When a particle follows the substantive, like ye, ixiv, yuQ, fisv ydg, 5i, 
ovv, also ^lev oi'v, av, yal, etiam, jolvvv, i'dbjg, also oifiai used as an adverb, 
then the above small words often come between the preposition and the 
substantive, e. g. iv }ih fiQ^'ivr], tv fiev yuQ uQrivr]. 

(b) The preposition ngog in imprecations and exclamations is separated 
from its substantive. Soph. O. C. 1333. n g 6g vvv as xgrjv wv, ngog ■d^eatv' 
ofioyvUov aUcj TiL&ia&oci. So in Latin, per te deos oro. 

(c) The preposition sometimes follows its substantive, though it then is 
subject to anastrophe ; in Attic prose this takes place only with negl when 
connected with the Gen., but here it is very frequent. PI. Rp. 469, b. ngw- 
Tov ^h ay d gano 8 iff iiov nig l] it is also separated by other words. 
Her, 6, 101. x ovx ov 0-9* ifieXs nig l. PI. Apol. 19. c. w y iy d ovdh ovtb 
fiiya ovTe afimgov nig l inai'(a. See § 31, IV. 



SECTION IV. 

§301. The Pronoun as Subject, Predicate, At- 
tribute and Object. 

1. Pronouns denote the subject, predicate, attribute and ob- 
ject, when these latter are not to be represented as expressing 
the meaning of objects or qualities, but when it is to be shown 
merely that an object has reference either to the speaker him- 
self, or to the person addressed, or to another person or thing. 

2. All the rules, which have been stated on the substantive 
and adjective, also apply to substantive and adjective pronouns ; 
still, a few remarks are here subjoined on the use of the pro- 
nouns. 

§302. I. Personal Pronouns. (353,354.) 

1. Both the substantive personal pronouns, as the subject in 
the Nom., e. g. iyco, av, Tjfieig, etc., and the adjective (possessive) 
pronouns, as attributives, e. g. ifiog natriQ, are used in Greek, 
as well as in Latin, only when they are specially emphatic ; 
hence they are particularly used in antitheses, and, also, for the 



§ 302.] SYNTAX. PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 441 

sake of perspicuity, e. g. Kul a v javra sTTQu^ag. Kui 6 a 6 g Tza- 
Ttjo uTit&anv. E -/ (o ftev unsifu, a v dt fitvE. But where this is 
not the case, they are omitted, and the substantive pronouns 
are expressed by the verb-endings, and the adjective (possessive) 
pronouns, by the article prefixed to the substantive, e. g. FQaq^co, 
yQCiCfstg. 'H fitiTriQ elne fjioiy my mother. 01 yovelg aztQ'/ovai to, 
T 8 X V a, their children. 

Remark 1. Tlie distinction between tlie accented and the enclitic forms 
of the personal pronouns, e. g. ei^ov and fiov, etc., § 87, lies in the greater 
or less emphasis with which they are pronounced in a discourse. Thus, 
llie accentuated forms are always employed, e. g. in antitheses, e. g. f/.iov fiiv 
xras'/ikaaf, as di in}]vj,<jEv. On tlie use of the Gen. of the substantive pronoun 
instead of the Adj. (possessive), see Rem. 4. On the apposition in the Gen. con- 
nected with the possessive pronoun, e. g. tjusTfoog a vtcov 7xuTr,Q^ see § 266, 2. 

Rem. 2. The adjective personal pronouns sometimes take the place of the 
objective Gen. Od. A, 201. aoq no&og (like Ter. Heaut. 11. 3, 66. desiderio 
tuo instead of tui). X. Cy. 3. 1, 28. nroln y.al cpiXln ti] sixfi, beuevolentia et 
amore mei. 

2. The reflexive pronouns are always used in such a man- 
ner, that they refer to an object as already named (Subject or 
Object) since this object is opposed to itself as an object or 
attribute, e. g. 

(a) In reference to the subject, "O aocpog savjov xquth. 2v a (.avxo) 
agiaxeig. ^0 nuig havxov inixivil. 01 yovslg ayartbmi rovg kavxMV 
naldag. FvmdL a s avT ov. Olrog 6 avr,Q ncivTa di euvTov fisfid&ij- 
xev. 'O (TiQaT7iyog i'Tio x(x)V eavxov aigaTiuxi^v ani&avsv. 

(b) In reference to the object of the sentence, X. Cy. 1. 1, 4. Kvgog diij- 
vsyxs x6)v (iXXoiv ^ aa iX i w v, xwv aq/ug d t, savxbJv xxr^aafxivcov 
Ar. Nub. 384. uno a a vx ov f/w a e didaib). 

(3) The reflexive pronouns may be used in Greek, as in 
Latin, in the relations above named in connection with an Ace, 
followed by an Inf., or with a participle, also in such subordi- 
nate clauses as stand in a close relation to the principal clause, 
particularly in sentences expressing design, and in dependent 
interrogative sentences, as well as in all other subordinate 
clauses which do not proceed from the speaker but from the 
subject in the principal sentence. The English language com- 
monly here uses the personal pronouns him, her, it, instead of 
the reflexive pronouns of the third person. Also in this case 
the reflexive is referred either to the subject or to an object. 



442 SYNTAX. PERSONAL PRONOUNS. [§ 302. 

When the subj(^ct of the principal sentence is diflercnt from 
thai of the subordinate sentence (or of the Ace. followed by 
the Inf.), the retlexive may be either referred to the former or 
lo the latter, its particular reference being determined only from 
the context. 

'O XV q aw oq vo^lQu Tovg noXlxuq vjitjqithv kavro). X. Cy. ]. 1, 5. 
TJ)v e&voJv JOVTOJv t)Q^(v {Kvgog) oi'&^ eavTot ofioyXoiTTOiv oVtwv, ouie 
ulh']loiQ. C. 1. 2, 8. inlaTevE [2' a) y. q u t i] g) xiav ^vvuviwv eavToi Tohg 
ajiods^ft^uvovg, iXTiEQ aviog idoy.lfiu'^iv, ilg tov nuviu. ^lov suvtm is xal 
aklTjloig cpUovg ayad^ovg eafa^oa. 52. 6 xajij/ogog tcpr] lov ^ojx^wttjv 
avansl&ovTa rovg vtovg, wg avTog d'r] aocpciuaTog re y.clI liXXovg ly.uv(oiaiog 
7ioir\auL iTOcpoig, ovioj diaxidivni Tovg ea l'tw avvovTug, ojgTS furjdufiov nuQ 
avTol.g TOvg aXXovg dvai n(Jog e av t 6v, in comparison with him. Th. 2, 92. 
Tot ravayia, oua ngog ifj kavTojv [yji) '^v, uveIXovto {= ja vavayia la 
nqog itj savTwv yrj ovia). Her. 8, 24. oaoL tov (TTgaTov tov suvtov 
i]<jav vfngol e^aips. Comp. the examples in Rem. 3. 

4. On the contrary, the derived Cases of the pronoun avrogj 
-1^, -6; e. g.ccvr ov, -ijg, avz oj, -^, avz 6v, -^ v, -o, « v r w v, or those 
of a demonstrative pronoun, are universally employed, when 
an object is not opposed to itself, but to another object, e. g. 
TzaztjQ avTcp^ {to him, the son,) adcoxs to ^ipJov, aitgyco aviov, him, 
dTrs'/ofiat avrov^ from him. The pronoun avrov^ etc. does not 
here ditfer from the personal pronoun of the third person. 

Rem. 3. The personal pronoim ou, oi, etc. has commonly a reflexive 
sense in the Attic -writers (but, in the Ion. writers and in the poets, also 
the meaning of the personal pronoim). But in this case, it is regularly em- 
ployed only when the reflexive relation has respect, not to the nearest sub- 
ject, but to the remoter one. It is in general much more freely used than 
the compound reflexive, since it is, also, employed where the union with 
the principal clause is much looser, e. g. '0 iiQuvrog rofxi'^n Tovg noXlxag 
VTirionnv a i (but not 6 ivqavvog /agii^STal o I). Th. 5, 73. ol ^A & tjv ulo t, 
b)g i^sy.Xivsv [6 "Ayig) uno acpav to aiQOLTEv^a, y.a^ 'tjav/lav iaoj&rjaav. 
6, 32. ^vvsnsv/ovTO ds y.al o aXXog ofxiXog, juv je noXnojp yal eV rig uXXog sv- 
vovg TTagijv acfhu. Even after yag, e. g. X. H. 1. 7, 5. ol (ngariyyoi ^quxia 
i'y.aaTog ansXoyritjaTO ' ov yag ngovTE&T] acplcL Xoyog yum tvv vo^ov. 
But Thucydides and some later writers use it, also, in relation to the near- 
est subject, e. g. Th. 7, 5. o FiXinnog steIxi^e rotg Xl&oig /gw^Evog, ovg ol 
^A&r]va1oL ngonagE^uXovio ucplffiv. The forms o t, aq)l(ji and 
(T(pag have sometimes the meaning of personal pronouns, ol, him, her, e. g., 
X. Cy. 3. 2, 26 ; a cp la l, to them, e. g. X. H. 6. 5, 35 ; acp a g, them, e. g. Th. 5, 
49. when the object to which they are referred, is more impoi-tant in re- 
spect to the sense, than the subject of the sentence. Still, it is to be re- 
marked in relation to this pronomi, that when it would have a reflex- 



§ 302.] SYNTAX. PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 443 



ive sense, the compoiiiifl reflexive iavj ov, -fj ? etc. is commonly employ- 
ed instead of it ; and that >vhen it has the meaning of the l*(;rs. pronoun 
third person, the corresponding ibnns of avjog are nsed l)y th(! Attic 
writers instead of it. The form ov (o v) is used in prose only in PI. Syinp. 
174, d. Rp. t)17, h. ()17, c. ; i'(e) 327, b. 617, e. Symp. 17.5, a. c. 2:i3, I). ; 
01 occurs far ofiener (seldom o'l), and aqpclc, 0-9 cur, a (plat, acpvigy 
somewhat ot\eu. 

5. In the instances mentioned under No. 3, the correspond- 
ing forms of avzog are used very frequently instead of the re- 
flexive pronoun ; and this always takes place where a member 
of a sentence or a subordinate clause is represented as proceed- 
ing, not from the mind of the person to whom the pronoun re- 
fers, but from the mind of the speaker (aullior), e. g. 

X. Cy. 1. 4, G. KvQo^ tov J^dy.a e'dtlTO nuvTMg arj^uaivsiv a i'toj, ottots 
i/Xbigoir] slgiivai TiQog tov ttutijiov, C. rogabat Sacam, ut indicaret sibi, quan- 
do tempestivum esset). 19. [Ol TioXsfiioi) evd^lg a(f>](jov(n tjjv Xeiuv, inn- 
dav Idcjal Tivag i:i avjoh g ilaivovTug (contra se), C. 4. 7, 1. Tijv eav- 
Tov yvb')^r}v ccTiscpaireTo ^or/.guTrjg ttquc Tohg o^iXovvxag uvjok Apol. 33 
{^(oxgaTrjg) syvio tov tii 'Qf,v to TS&varuL uv to) -/.qhttov hvul. 

6. In compound reflexive pronouns, the pronoun avtog ei- 
ther retains its exclusive power, or it does not, i. e. it excludes all 
other persons or things, except those spoken of, from partici- 
pation in the action, or it is not used in that exclusive sense. 

(a) Isocr. Panath. 16, 242. dUaiov Icftl (fuovg fxsv TioLiliaSai tovc o^olwg a l'- 
T ol g Ts (or a (f la I te a vt olg) y.al Tolg ulXoig xQM^ivovg, (fo^^dod^ui ds 
xal dsdiivai Tovg ngog acp a g ^lev a vt ov g (or s a v t o v g) oly.eioTUTa dia- 
HEi^ivovg, Tigog ds Tovg ciXXovg aXXoTQiMg {se ipsis and se ipsos). Th. 4, 102. 
inoUovg a cp (ov t s a vt aiv xai tmv uXXmv tov ^ovXo^svov nE^npuvTig. 

1, 60. TiEunovaiv e ai'z w)' t£ i&sXovTug xal tmv uXXmv niXonovvr^aiMV fiia- 
-d^io TtEiauvTtg. 8, 8. icp eavTOJV Slevoovvto uXXio cnoXoj nXelv [soli per se). 
The Nom. aviog is sometimes added to strengthen this exclusive power, e. g. 
PI. Phaedon. 94, e. ovte yaq uv *^0^))^(>) 6(.wXoyolifiEv, ovte kvtoI i] ^tv 
avTolg. — (b) Ol aTQUTLwiaL tuxqeI/ov eavTovg (or a cp a g avTovg) 
avdQsioTuTovg [se). Isocr. Plat. 12, 301. ovde xoivovg a cp u g a vt ovg na- 
qaaxilv sToXfir^auv. Th. 7, 82. Tragidoaav ol navTsg acpag avTovg (or 
kavTovg) {se). 

Rem. 4. The reflexive possessives are either used as simples, e. g. Dem. c. 
Nicostr. 4, 1250. twv xgrj^'iicov aoi laiv ifiMV y.i/grjixi. c. Nausim. 11, 
993. diy.aioTEQOv dijTiov to. rj^sTEQU i)iAug iaTtv t;;Eiv\i] Tomovg. c, Boeot. 

2, 1010. vfiilg an ttVTsg Tovg vfisTSQOVg Tiatdag uyanuTE. Ol ttoXItui tw 
aqiST EQa ab)'Quv imigwvTo, or with the addition of the Gen. of aviog ac- 



444 SYNTAX. PERSONAL PRONOUNS. [§ 302. 

cording to § 2GG, 2, or instead of the possessives, the Gen. of the compound 
substantive rellexivos is employed, and in Prose, this Gen, is uniformly 
employed with the Sing, of the Pronoun {mine, thine, his, thus o i fi uvt ov^ 
a f a VT V, havTov nc/CTt')^, and not o f/xog uvtov, 6 trog uhxoii naTrjQ, 
which last mode of exj)ression is found only in poetry), and with the third 
Pers. PL, it is more frecpient than the possessive ; the Gen. of ulrioc is com- 
monly employed with tiie PI. of the Possessives. It may thus be exhibited, 
S. ifiaviov [arnvjov, iaviov) 7ian]o not o efiog {abc, og) avroii n. 

rijv ijxitvTou {(Tsaviov, eaviov) fUTjisQU not xi]v i^'r\v [arjv, ijv) uvrou fx. 

Toilg ffAavTov {iTfuvjov, eavTov) Xoyoig not jolg i^uolgiadlg, oig) avioii k. 
P. ijiASTffjog wLToij' Tt(xiijQ cxtrcmcly rare 6 tijimv uvxmv tt. 

Ti)v vfitT8()nv uvTbn' ixrjTSQa extremely rare t;jv vfiMV (/.ltmv fi. 

T« ^^£rf(;« «L'rD)i'</,u«^r/;jU«Ta extremely rare ta tijimv uvtojv a. 

u a(f)ixs()og hvimv nait'jQ more frequent o kaviMp nnirjo, but not 

acfoJv uvTbJv n. 
Here also the Pronoun avxog either retains its exclusive power or gives it 
up, (a) 'O nalg v^jqI^sl tov iavt ov naiEQa {suum ipsius patrem). '^Tfxng 
v^qI^ets Tovg V fxsT £ Q ov g avTCJV naiioug [vestros ipsor um patres). Ol 
naldsg v^oiCovcn Tovg savr ojv naiEQug [suos ipsorum p). X. Hier. 3, 8. noX- 
Xovg ds y.ai vno yvvaLxmv xiiiV havx mv rvgdwovg discpitaQfiivovg [svQrjfTug) 
(a suis ipsorum conjugibus). X. An. 6. 1, 29. [vo^I^m) ogzig iv noXipoj wv 
(TTnaid'^SL 7i()og uq/ovtu, tovtov n^og TrjV savToii dbJirjoiav axaaid^uv 
(contra suam ipsius salutem). In order to strengthen the exclusive power, 
the Pronoun avxo g \s frequently inserted, uvxo g xov efinvxoii, etc. ; avxog 
is, also, sometimes placed between the article and the reflexive of the third 
Pers., e. g. Aeschin. Ctes. 85, 87. y.axaXilv/.s xi)v avxog avxov dvva- 
axdav. — (b) Th. 2, 101. ^xgaxovUrjv, xijv s ixvx oi> ddeXifrjv, dldwai 2^f.v&r]y 
suam sororem. Aeschin. fals. leg. 30, 40. n^og de xijv ^ovXi]v xov ddEXcpov xov 
i ^ avx o\) y.ai xuv addcpidoi'f ital xov laxQov BTxejj-ipcx. Th. 6, 21. noXv ano 
rilg i]juex£Qcig avxMV piXXop^tv TrAflv (a nostra patria). Lysias. ?)/oi}- 
vxttL ovy.ixL xolg a (p exsq o Lg avxojv ufia^jx/juna-i xov vovv v^dg tiuqe- 
^siv. Her. 5, 87. {Xe/ovctlv) El(JMxav sydaxrjV avxitav {xmv yvvaixuv), oxt} 
sVij 6 E a) vxi] g uvi'jq (ubi suus vir esset). X. H. 4. 4, 17. ol Aay.sbai^ovLOL 
Twy havxwv av}jfid;(b)v yax£q)Q6vovv. 

Rem. 5. It is very rare in good classical authors, that the Gen. of the 
Pers. Pronoun is used to indicate the nearest subject as its antece- 
dent, e. g. PI. Lach. 179, c. alxLcauE&a xovg naxEQag i\^MV, oxi 'tifiug fiiv 
eI'mv XQVcpnv (instead of xovg rj/uExsQOvg Txaxsgag or xovg rifXExigovg 
atxMV n.). Antiph. 1, 114. iycj d^ vp.dg vjieq xo\j naxqog fuov xEdvioixog at- 
TGipra (instead of vniu xov i/.i avxov naxQog). Th. ^, ^. iixl xdg iv tji 
KsQKVQa vuvg a cp m v tTCEfxipav (instead of irtl xug iv x. K. a cp ex sq ag 
avxbJv v. or xixg e a u t w r v.). 

Rem. 6. The pronoun avxog with a reflexive meaning, regularly stands after 
both the substantive and adjective (possessive) personal pronouns, whether 
the exclusive power of avxog be retained or suppressed, e. g. tjuwv avxMV, 
vfiiv avxolg, acpdg avxovg, 6 ipixEgog avxMV naxi']g, etc. In the Attic ^vriters 
the exceptions to this position are extremely few, e. g. X. Cy. 6.2, 25. vvv 
ds rd BTxixrjdEia {i]^uug) dsl elg xiiV odov avay.Evd'^ta&ai' avxolg xe ij plv, 
ital oTioaoig XExgdixoaL xQ^p^^oc. Rutin other writers, also, such exceptions 



§302.] SYNTAX. PERSOiNAL PRONOUNS. 445 

are quite rare, e. g. Her. 5, 91. o-i7/tvw(;j<0|Ufi' avtolai iifx~iv ov noiij- 
aaai oQ&ug. Tliis position is never found with the third Pers. PI., conse- 
quently never avxovg acpcig instead of acpuq amovg. But when the 
Pers. pronoun is used with the reflexive sense, then aviog, used in \\s exclu- 
sive sense, may either precede or follow the })ersonal pronoun, (a) aviov 
ifxox) ii^iov), avTio ffioi iftoi), uvzov i^s (fxe), avxovg iji^ocg, etc., e. g. PI. Phae- 
don. 91, a. « I'T 0) ifiol on ^dkiaia do^SL oviwg s/eiv. Syrnp. 220, e. avv- 
diiataas y.ul t« onht x«t avxov ifxi. X. C. 2. 9, 2. ijSioig y uv (sc. ■&()&- 
i^ai^ii Tov uvdun), icpTj, H /i/y (po^oifxr/V, otimc fii] in avxov fxs xodnoLXO. 
[b] (fiov avxoij ffjoi aixut, ae uviov, ij^uiv avxMv, etc., e. g. Dem. Ol. 3, 36. 
nox^ev dllodiv ia/VQcg ya/ovsv i] nag iifiwv avxMV flHhnnog; X. C. 3. 
8, 9. xov S^igovg 6 ijAtoc vnsQ y^udov avxojv y.al xuv an/oiv nooEvoj^evog 
(Txiuv naqixii'. Cy. 5. 5, 20. as fih avxov dcprixa. 6. 1, 14. tntyai 
rifilv avxoXg liaiv. PI. Apol. 41, a. ifioiys y.al avxoj '&avfia<ixi) uv 
ft>; i) diaxQi^t] uvio&i. 

7. The reflexive pronoun is very often used instead of the re- 
ciprocal pronoun, in all the persons. 

Dem. c. Olympiod. 1169. TOi^' i]y,Xv avxolg diaXs^ofis&a. PI. Rp. 621, 
c. dixaLoaivr,v ixexu (pQovijdEMg narxl xgono) errLxr^demofifv, ha y.al i]fxlv 
alxolg cplXoi Mfxsv, y.al xolg \)^e9ig. L,ys. 1\4. STisLddv i\u7.v eyoj urjvlao}, 
ngog vfxug avxovg xgiifj^a&s xunsixa xaS^ 'iva ty.aaxov v ^Iv aixoUg 
dmx&t'ioscr&i. X. C. 3.5, 16. qi&orovaiv kavxolg ixukkor, ?; xo7g aXXoig 
av&gojnoig. 

Rem. 7. Both the reciprocal and reflexive pronouns are used when the 
action refers to an object that has been named. Both consequently express 
a reflexive idea, and are related like the species and genus ; since now 
the genus includes the species, so the reflexive may take the place of 
the reciprocal, in cases where it is readily understood that several persons 
so perform anything in respect to themselves that the action appears as re- 
ciprocal. But when the reciprocal is used in order to make s avxov 
tH aax og, antithetical, while the reflexive, used for the reciprocal, is con- 
nected with aXXovg, it is clear that the reciprocal must then necessarily 
stand, where the antithesis t avxov ey.aaxog is either expressed or im- 
plied, e. g. Isocr. Paneg. ^dlXov yalgovaiv inl xolg dXXriX m v y.ay.otg, ?; 
xolg avxwv tdloig uya^o7g {\. e. i] inl xolg avxov ty.uarog ayadolg), they 
rather rejoice in each other^s evils, than in their own good, i. e. than each one, 
etc., [S. Ant. 55, 56, 145, 146.] PI. Phaedr. 263, a. dfj(fig^8rjTol^sv dXXi]- 
Xo ig xe y.al i] (.ilv av loXg. On the contraiy, it is natural that the reflex- 
ive should be regularly used, where other persons, either expressly or by im- 
plication, are contrasted, e. g. Isocr. Aegin. 387. nfQl nXsovog i) jiu g avxovg 
r,yov^£&a, ij x ovg ddsXq)ovc. de Pac. ol fiiv ( OexxaXol) aq) ia iv av- 
xolg noXf^ixovaiv, inter se, non contra exteros hostes. X. C. 3. 5, 2. fu- 
fifviaxigovg 8s noxsgovg kavxolg sirai vofiiCfig ', with the Nom. avxoif 
added,_e. g. X. H. 1. 5, 9. (tJa) (jyo-ns'tv, oriMg xwv "JsXXy'irotv firjdsvsg la- 
yvQol (xtrriv, dXXa navtsg da&siitg, avxol iv savxolg axaaLuQovxsg. So 
o^oXoyila&ai, a^cpig.6rjXHiT&at,, ditvsydijvai, ivavxiov sivat, and ngaTiuv 
a (f l(T Lv a V xolg ov h avxol, g. But where an antithesis is neither ex 

58 



446 SYNTAX. PRONOUNS. [§ 303. 

pressed nor understood, then the reflexive and the reciprocal are used 
witliout distinction, often in tiie same sentence, nienjly lor tlie sake of vari- 
ety, e. g. X. C. 2. (j, 20. cpdovovrifi, s avt o v g (jiaoiaif u X ki] Xovg. 7, 
12. uvil vipo(}0}uiv(x)v k a V T u g ijdiwg uXXijXug ho')(jo)v. 

8. The reflexive pronoun of the third Pers. often takes the place 
of the rellexive of the first and second Pers. The reflexive then 
denotes not a definite person, bat only confines what is express- 
ed by ihe reflexive to the subject; hence it has often plainly the 
meaning of t'Siog ; the particular person, to whom it refers, must 
be clearly denoted by the construction of the sentence. 

X. C. 1. 4, 9. ov8s yaQ iVjV eavTov av ys ipvxi]v o()«?, your own sovl; 
afavTov is a false reading. 2. 1, 31. tov 8s uuvtmv rid/criov ay.ova^uxoq 
inah'ov savriig, (xvi}xoog ei, your own praise. Andoc. de myst. uvjog^ 
Hev uvT ov wTKxiXXvov (instead of i^aviov). PL Prot. 312, a. at 8k ovy. uv 
ala/vvoio elg rovg "£XXr}vag aviov aocpiaTr,v nnqixbiV] Isocr. Paneg. 
diETsXiaccfXiv aajixaluacoL nqog a cp u g u v t o v g. X. H. 1. 7, 19. eL'^?j(j£T€ 
acpag uvtov g i)^uaQTrjy.6Tag t« ^syiaia. ig -d^eovg. 

Rem. 8. In the Epic language, this usage occurs only with a cpla i and 
og [suns). II. y., 398. cpv^iv § ovXtv o cte fiera acplaiv (instead of jufi^-' 
Vfilv). Od. I, 28. ovTOL eycays i] g yalr^g dvvafiai yXvy.sgwTSQOV uXXo 

§303. II. The remaining- Pronouns. (535,536.) 

1. Ovr og, ovzoj g, t oiov r og, r ooov r g, and 8 e, code, 
roiogde, Toao g8s, are commonly used with this distinction, 
viz., that the fu'st four refer to what immediately precedes, the 
others, on the contrary, to what immediately follows. 

Her. 6, 53. Tuvra (the foregoing) ^ucy yiay.z8ai^6vioi Xiyovtn — • t«5€ 
(the following) 8s — e/cu yQacput. Th. 1, 53. ol fxh 8ij {KoqIvS^lol) xoiav- 
za einov — ol 8s^A&rjvaloL Totals anex^lvavTO. 

Remark]. Still, not seldom ovrog, joLovzog, roaovxog, ovTjag 
refer to what follows ; far more seldom o 8 e, to l 6 g 8 e, joa 6 g8 e, 0)8 s 
refer to what goes before. X. C. 1. 2, 61. Al/ag Ivo^aaxog inl rovxo), yi- 
yovE, as follows. Th. 2, 34. io8e fisv -damovdi,, in reference to what pre- 
cedes. But often o 8 e, d) 8 e, etc., are so used that they exhihit an ob- 
ject as present, as it were before our eyes, e. g. X. Cy. 3. 3, 35. iyoj 8b 
Vfuv ^Ev naQaivwv, nolovg TLvag xqt] Eivai iv tw to i w 8 e, xuv al(T/vvoifir,v 
av (= in praesenti rerum_^statu). Regularly, however, o I to g precedes the 
relative sentence, e. g. ovt 6 g iaxLv, ov Ei8Eg av8Qa. 

2. The adjective demonstratives are often used in poetry, 



§ 303.] SYNTAX. PRONOUNS. 447 

especially in Epic, and sometimes in prose, according to the 
statement in § 264, 3, instead of the adverbs here^ there. 

Od. a, 7G. aXi w/fi', »;(Uft? o'i^t nfQiq>Qa^(a^e&a ndvisg, let lis here ddih- 
erate. 185. vrjvg 8i /.loi, i'jd^ e'<jjr,xEV in vc/qov voacpi noktjog. Od. tr, 239. Mg 
vvv 'JQog ixslvog in avXuridL ^vqtkjlv rjaiaL, there. Th. 1, 53. i]fj,ug 
TOvgSs TtQunovg Xuf^ovisg /(jijaaa&s u}g noX(iJ,loig, nos, qui hie sumus. PI. 
Rp. 3*27, b. ?'i^0|i/7jv, 07T0V drj. OvTog, t'qpTj, onicrxhv TrgogiiJ/fjui, here he 
comes behind thee. Hence in the Attic poets av)]Q ods instead of «/w, e. g. 
S. OT. 1464, and o vr o g in prose instead of av, e. g. PI. Gorg. 489, b. ov- 
z oal avijQ ov navGixai (fXvvcQoJv ; instead of at ov namu. 

Rem. 2. In the E|)ic language, in the case of two sentences following each 
other, the subject is often repeated in the second by o y t with a certain 
emphasis, where there can be no doubt in regard to the subjects, in order 
to bring out prominently the identit}^ of the subject for both sentences, e. g. 
II. /?, 6G4. ««(//" ^^ vijag btitj^?, noXiv d oy s (idemque) Xvcov aydgag ^fj q)sv- 
ytav inl noviov. II. o, 586. AvxlXo/og ^ ov [ahvb^ d^oog nzQ iwv noX((xtaTrig, 
aX'/i o y UQ tiQsas. So also in the Epic language and particularly in Her., 
far rarer in the Attic writers, o di is used of the same subject in connection 
with several actions following each other in a series, where we may trans- 
late u 8e by, on the contrary, then, etc. Her. 6, 3. Tijv ^h ysvofisvt]v aiToXac 
alxlr^v ov fxuXa i^cpaivE, 6 Ss sXeys acfi, on the contrary. X. An. 4. 2, 6. ov 8i 
— ivxaid^a e'^evov, ug xaxi/ovxeg to ItxQov ol d^ ov xaxd/ov, iidemque. 
This usage very often occurs in Horn, and Her. in disjunctive clauses, i} — ij 
eye. Od. /S, 327. i'j xivag in JJiXov a^sL ufjvvxoQug — , ij o ys yal 2nuqxri- 
■&EV. Her. 2, 173. Xu&oi av ij t o i ^aveig, i) oy e anonXrjy.xog yevofxEvog. 

o. The pronoun avr 6g properly av rog, means again he, and 
also, himself, ipse, e. g. o vlos aviog or avTog 6 viog. So avTo 
rovzo or rovz' uvzo, hoc ipsum, this itself, (not another). When 
£y.aazog is used with avzog, the latter always precedes. 
Her. 7, 19. -O^tlcov aviog 8y.aoTog xd TZQoy.EiiAEva dcooa Xa^aiv. 
In the oblique Cases, it takes the place of the third person 
of the personal pronouns, § 302, 4. In connection with the 
article, avzog has the meaning of ide7n, § 246, 3. On the posi- 
tion of the article with avzdg, himself, in connection with a 
substantive, see § 246, 3. 

Rem. 3. Horn, and Her. often use avxog so that it takes the place of 
the reflexive pronouns of the three persons. Od. d, 247. liXXco ^' ctvxov 
(instead of skvtov) qpwtt xaxay.QVTixwv ifiaxfv. ^, 27. ool 8e ya^xog a/Edov ecr- 
riv, tVa XQ^l xaXa jxev uvxt^v (instead of aavxijv) Evvvaditi. Her. 7. 10, 1. 
TO 8e avxolat tvEaxi 8elv6v, c,«£ gol dlxaiov iaxt cpgd^ELV, quid autem in 
nobis timendum insit. 

Rem. 4. From the exclusive force of this pronoun, the following specific 
significations arise, (a) only, alone, solus, (ipse, non alius). X. An. 4. 7, 11. 



448 SYNTAX. PRONOUNS. [§ 304. 

ulXov ovSii'u [nanay.aXinaq) /oiqh uvt 6 g; [h] even and himse'f, like ipse^ e. g. 
Avxoq V 2'iiy/.()aii]c idu/.rjvtrtv; (c) of himself, sponlt, like ipse; ((]) in the 
Hoin. lan^Miaf^e, uvrug very often fornis an antithesis to some jjerson or 
thing, which is not what is understood by uvtuq, e. g. the soul in distinction 
from the body, or the body in distinction from the soul, e. g. II. «, 4. uv~ 
joi'g di eXwQia rtv/e y.vvfacriv^ or a man in distinction from his affairs, or 
associates, etc. Hence aviog is sometimes used of a lord, master, e. g. « v- 
To g fcpa ; (e) it is used with ordinals and corresponds to the English himself, 
e. g. Th, 1, 46. KoQLV\}loiv cnQuTrjyog i]v Zsvoxltldr^g n i fim o g uiz 6 g. 

4. The indefinite pronoun Ttt; serves, in connection with 
adjectives, indefinite namerals and adverbs, like the Latin qid- 
dam, to bring out distinctly the idea expressed by these words; 
this may consist either in strengthening or weakening the idea 
according to the meaning of the word or the connection of the 
discom-se ; but with pronouns and cardinal numbers, it corres- 
ponds to the Latin /(?re, almost^ somewhat, 

Miyag rig avrig, fxiy.Qog rig, nag Jig, I'yMaTog rig, olddg rig, uXI/ol Tirig, 
nolog Tig, noaog Tig, ^ga/v Tt, iyyvg tv, tr/fc^ov xt, navv ti, navTanaul tl, 
noXv Tl, oi'dev ti, nuXai tv, diaq)tg6vTbig tl. /I tLVt]V Tiva Xsyeig dvvafiiv 
T?5? agsTyjg nvai, incredibilem quandam vim. X. C. 1. 1, 1. )} ygacpii y-ax 
avTov [Swy.gaTovg] t o lu d e Tig i]v, haecfere. 3. 6, 5. Xetov, noa a i t ivig 
ilai (sc. ai ngogodoi TJj noXsi). So ov t (o t t, or ovtoj, udi ncog, sic fere ; 
jgeig Tivsg, about three. 

Rem. 5. The proper place of the pronoun x t ? is this, — as an enclitic it 
follows the word to which it belongs, e. g. avrjg Tig, y.aX6g Tig uvr,g. But 
sometimes, in connected discourse, it precedes, e. g. stTTi toIvvv Tig sh]&rig 
Xoyog. On the relative and interrogative pronouns, see what is said on the 
adjective and interrogative sentences. 

Rem. 6. The indefinite pronoun one, any one, is usually expressed in 
Greek, (a) by x i c, e. g. Olz «V x t § tvgoi avdga aocptozsgov ; (b) by the third 
Pers. PL, e. g. Xsyovai ; (c) by the second Pers. Sing, of the verb, especially 
by the Opt. with av, a. g. cpultjg civ, dicas, one may, can say, although the 
English frequently translates the second Pers. by you, e. g. you may, can say. 

§304. Prospective and Retrospe ctiv e Use of the 

Pronoun. (357.) 

1. The personal pronoun of the third Pers., viz. ov, 01, t, ^Iv, and the de- 
monstrative o, 1], TO, are frequently so placed in Homer as to direct the at- 
tention and refer to a following substantive. H. v, 321. amUa x o) piv snsiTa 
y.ax lq>&aXp6Jv xeev axXvv, II rj X sldjj "Ax iXri i. II. q>, 249. Xva fx i v nav- 
asLS novoto, dlov 'A x i X X ^ a. 

2. Ill the same way, the Neut. of a demonstrative is used to prepare, as 
it were, for a following substantive, or a following Inf or entire sentence. 



§ 305.] SYNTAX. INFINITIVE AS AN OBJECT AND ATTRIBUTE. 449 

PI. Apol. 37, a. TovT ov Tt,t< w^uat, iv nQViavsio) a nijaeojg. X. Cy. 8. 7, 
25. Tt yuQ Tovr ov lAuy.ccoimtQOv, t o v y fi (xi x i^ r^v aL\ PI. Gorfr. 515, e. 
aXXa. joSb ^ol sins irrl tovtio si liyovxaL'AS^rjvaloL diet IIsqi- 
xXia ^eXilovg yeyovsvac. Dem. Phil. 1. 41, 5. oidsv — t ovto aa- 
Xug ixilroc, ott t avt a fiev iariv an uvt a t a / m q I a ad^Xa xov 
n oXifxo V xslfisva iv [liur m. Conip. § 266, Rem. 3. 

3. On the contrary, a demonstrative pronoun, particularly aiTog, is fre- 
quently put in the same sentence after a preceding substantive or pronoun, 
partly for the sake of perspicuity, e. g. when between the Case and the 
verb which governs it, there is an unusually long intermediate clause, and 
partly for the sake of rhetorical emphasis. Such a pronoun, again resumes 
the preceding substantive or pronoun, and either recalls it to the memory, 
or fixes the attention particularly upon it. Her. 3, 63. u di fxoL Mtxyog, 
Tov ( == ov) K(*^[imrig inliqonov xwv ohlojv anids^s, ovxog zuvTit. ivsxslXaro. 
Th. 6, 69. a t olxia i tov TiQoaa-rslov indX^sig Xa^^avovaai, a vx u i vnTjg- 
Xov Bov^a. So also with the personal pronouns ; here the enclitic forms are 
regularly used, when the pronoun is employed to resume a preceding word. 
Eur. Phoen. 507. ifi ol (xiv, si y.al ^i) xad^ '^J^XXi'jvojv /O^ova xe&gaufzsd^ , aX'/^ 
ovv ^vvsxd fxoL doxslg Xiysiv. 



SECTION V. 



The Infinitive and the Participle used as an 
Object and Attribute. 

§ 305. A. The Infi n i t i v e . (545.) 

The Infinitive expresses the idea of the verb abstractly and 
differs from the substantive in the following respects, 

(1) The Inf. without the article can be used only as a Noni. 
(subject, see § 238, 4,) and as an Ace. (aioxvvofAm Xeyeiv) ; 

(2) Yet so far as it retains the nature of the verb, 

(a) It denotes, by different forms, the different condition of 
the action, viz. duration, completion or what is future and im- 
pending, § 257, Rem. 3, e. g yQacpsLv, to ivrite or be writing, y^- 
yqacpivaij to have ivritten, yQci^paij to ivrite or to have ivritteriy 
yqdxpeiv, to ivrite, the English having no Inf. Fut. ; 

(b) It has Act, Mid. and Pass, forms; 

(c) It has the government of the verb, i. e. it governs the same 



450 SYNTAX. INF. AS AN OBJECT WITHOUT THE ARTICLE. [§ 306. 

Case as its verb, e. g. yQacpuv ett lar olrjv, imx>vfitiv r rj g d q e- 
r rjg, fidx^cO^cci r olg tz o X e fit o i g; 

(d) Its attributive qualilication is an adverb, and not, as in 
the case of an actual substantive, an adjective, e. g. yalwg dno- 
OaveTv (on the contrary, 'AuXog -O-uvuTog). The Inf. will first be 
considered without the article, and then with it. 

§306. I. Infinitive as an Object ivithout the Ar- 
ticle. (o4(>-554.) 

1. The Inf. is used, as the object in the Ace, to express some- 
thing effected or aimed at, with the following classes of verbs 
and adjectives, 

(a) With verbs, which denote an act or expression of the 
will, e. g. §ov).o^m, i&eloj, fitXlo), iTTi&Vfia, dhco, diHaixo, ^qroj, tzqo- 
'&v[iovfiai, TZQO&v^og eifir, iTzr/eiQco, TtEiQcofiai, ^ovXevofiat., TiaQaaxevd- 
i^ofiai, umavMiiai, roXfi^, vTzoixavco^ ei'co&a, etc. — dtoixai, to entreaty 
ly.STSvcOy TiaQaivoj, iTtirsXXco, TtaQo^vvco, mid-co^ GVfx^ovXevcOj vov&eza), 
y.eXevo), nQogrdrzm, etc — «'«, avyxcoQOj, d^ieXw, etc. ; — so also the op- 
posites of these, e. g. dt(^o(xa, gjo^ovf^at, (pevyco, dva^dXXofiai, oxroJ, 
etc. — aTrayoQEVco, xarsj^co, xcoXvo), etc. ; — ^ov/^iav, TiQayfiaza, do/^oXiaVy 
o'/Xov TZaQSXco rivL 

B ovXo fj.aL y gd cpsiv. 'En t&v ^b) no g sv eaS- a i. ToXfiMvno- 
fxivBiv Tov ahdvvov. TJaq aiv m gov y q dcptcv. Her. 5, 49. ava- 
^dXXo^al Toi unoxglvsax^uL. Tb. 3, 110. rfi uXXtj uxQaTia a^a n a- 
Q saxEV d^sT o ^ 7}d- slv in aliovg. PL Gorg. 457, e. (p o ^ o v fx a i ^ t- s- 
Xiyx^^y ff£. Fhaedon. 98, d. a fxsXi] <T a g Tag wg aXrjd^wg aUlag Xey s Lv. 
Dem. Ol. 3. 16, 25. rig av avxov lit xaXvaeL devgo ^ ad I^elv. X. Ag. 
1, 7. 'Ayr]crlXaog vniatr) daxoXlav atrw (to} (^adiXel) n ag i^siv cTgarsv- 
uv inl TOvg'-EXXrjvag. Dem. Chers. 102, 53. ^jav^ tav no lov a iv ixslvco 
ngdxTBLV, oTL^ovXstat. 

Remark 1. On the difference between the Inf. and the Part, with alaxv- 
vea&ai, aidila&ai, dvix^ad^ui, vno^iviiv^ zXrivai, mgiogav, inngensiv, dg/sa- 
S^ai, navsiv, navTolov yi/vsa&aL, nagacntEvd^ea^ai, neigdcrd^at, inslysa&uij 
see § 311. 

Rem. 2. The verb nsl& siv, to persuade, regularly takes for its object a 
substantive sentence, expressed by the conjunction wg and a finite verb ; it 
takes the Inf more seldom. X. C. 1. 1, 1. noXXdyug i&avi^aaa, r/ori nors 
Xoyoig 'Ad-i]valoi<g sniia av ol ygaipdfiBvoL ^(oxguTrjv, w g d^Log c it] -d^avd- 
Tov Tji noXu. 

Rem. 3. In order to express more definitely the idea of something which 
is to be done, effected, etc., the Greeks sometimes join the conjunction 



§ 306.] SYNTAX. INF. AS AN OBJECT WITHOUT THE ARTICLE. 451 

Wk,*T« with the Inf. which is governed by verbs of this class. Her. 7, 6. 
av in f i(T s Jc'^lcw. cogxE tcolbslv Tavia. Sometimes, also, in order lo 
make the purpose or object more emphatic, onoig, or b)g with the Suhj., 
Opt. or Fut. Iiid., is used. So in Attic prose the verbs nQO&vfiHcr^ai^ diu- 
roelij&ai, ntjxarria&ai, 7iaQ(xx(Xfvea&ai^ diuxsXevsa&ai, notgaaxsvu^^fad^ui are 
connected with ojiiog and the Fut. Ind. 

(b) With verbs, which denote the action of some power of the 
mind or the exprese^ion of it, e. g. loyiUa{)-ai, yyf.iaO^aty vofiiXeiVj 
iXmX^v, evx^aO-ai, do-Aeiv, -Aivdweveiv, etc. — Xt'yetv, (fdvai, etc., and 
the opposites of these, e. g. dQvtioOcu, to deny^ dnKirtlv, etc. 

No ft 1^0) (TcpaXrjvaL. ^l^).nl^bi £ I'x t'/7j (t f t v. Avtt] i) do^u y.a- 
Xojg do ml s/elv. Th. S, 74. i] nolig iy. iv d vv sva e nuau diucp&a^ 
gi] V a I. Aiy 10 si d iv a i ra via. 

Rem. 4. On the difference between tlie Inf and the Part, after the verbs 
axovfiv, Hdivni, InlaTacrd^ai, i-tav&uvEiv, yiyvanTxeiv, (xi^iv/jay.HT&ai. nvvd^d^ 
vfa^ai, al(T&tiV(a&ai', dsixviiraL, uyyilX^iv, Xiyeiv, (pgu^sLv, (fuli'iff&aL, see 
§311. 

Rem. 5. It will be seen, § 3"29, that, after the verbs above mentioned, 
the object may be expressed by a complete substantive sentence with 
c5? or oTt. 

(c) After verbs which denote ability, cause, power, capacity 
or faculty, e. g. dvva^ca, dwccTog, udvvazog, o'log t eiiii, r/co, (possum) 

€GTIV, TrdoeCTlV, £i8GTlV, 8V£0Tl, (licet) 71010), diaTtQdtTOflCay.aTEQyfdt - 

^ofiaij etc. — deivog, powerful^ capable^ fit^ Uavog, ImTTJdetogy :<an6g, 
ijitcov, aiTwg el^t, etc. ; — after verbs of choosing, appointing, nam- 
ing, educating, teaching. 

zlvva^ai uoieIv Tuina. Her. 2, 20. Tovg hrialag avifiovg iivai al~ 
T lov g 7iX7j& V e IV rov noTUfiov. 7, 129. uvb)vi\uovg jovg u'/.lo vg siv a i, 
no lis I. 5, 97. aTgmrjyov an o 8 i^ avT sg uitmv sivai, Mf),6.v&iov. 
Oiog T^ slfilnoisliv tuvtu. X. Cy. 1. 4, 12. jlg yag av <tov ys Ixa- 
V (x>T e Q g uHiTUi. 3, 18. ^ftvoTf^o? biducpy. iiv. JJoLoJaeysXav. 
Zliddaxb) as y g d cp eiv. 

Rem. 6. On noiuv with the Part., see § 310, 4, (b). 

Rem. 7. The result, the thing to be effected, which is expressed by the 
Inf. with these verbs, is sometimes slated more definitely by adding the 
conjunction wgrs. PI. Prot. 338, c. advvuTov vfuv, togxs IJgbnayogov 
Toi'dt aocpbmgov jlvu kXia d^ a l. So often in Plat, ixavog ajgrs. X. 
Ag. 1,37. inolrjcr ev (sc. Agesilaus), wgi' dvfv cpvyr,g xal ^avuTuv Tag 
noXiig di,uTtXi(Ttti. 

(d) The Inf. is also used after the verb TTecfvy.tvai, after the im- 
personal verbs and phrases TigogTqy.ei, tiq^tzei, avfi^aivei, del, XQ^h ^vay- 



452 SYNTAX. INF. AS AN OBJECT WITHOUT THE ARTICLE. [§ 306. 

xaiov, dixcuovj (ocpt'hfjiov iati and the like, — after verbs of giving, 
taking, going and sending and many others ; after adjectives of 
various significations, e. g. u^iog, dixatog, loorthy or icorth, ^jSvgj 
QfiSiog, xalenog and many others, — after abstract substantives, es- 
pecially in connection with thai and yiyvEod-ai, to express a pur- 
/ pose or a determination, a result or effect. 

Th. 4, 61. 7ti(pvxe to vcvS^qiotielov dtu nuvTog uq/slv niv lov Hy.ovioq, 
dpvXa (TffBa^ a L ds to eTiLov, to rule the yielding, but to guard against the 
assailing. "llxo (xsv (xavS-dvetv, ad discendum. Th. 2, 27. rolg AI/lvi]- 
Taig ol Aay.ESaifxovLOv tdoaav Ovqiav oly.slv zal Ti]V yiiv vifxsa&ut. 
PI. Apol. 33, b. o^olwg y.al nXovcrlo) xal nivriJi n a qi^ w ffiavTov iq oazuv' 
^'A^Log iaxL &av^d^e(T&ai. Her. 4, 53. Boqvadsvrjg n Ivscr & a l i'} d La- 
tog «(TTt, dulcissimus ad bibendum. 6, 112. jsMg rjv toTctl "ElXrjaL y.al to 
ovvofia TO Mi]do)v cpo (5 og dxova a i,a terror to hear. O av ^a Id iaS- a i^ 
a wonder to see. 

Rem. 8. Homer makes the Inf. depend on adjectives also, to express the 
same relation as is denoted by the explanatory Ace, § 279, 7. II. y., 437. 
d-ELELV S' dvefiOKTLv ofxoloi (tTTTTOt). In a similar manner, the Inf. sivui 
in the phrase hy.wv s iv a l, must probably be explained, willing according 
to his nature, i. e. really. Her. 7, 104. hy.ajv ts eIvul ovd^ uv fiovvofiuxi- 
OLfiv. PL Phaedr. 252, a. cS^sv di^ ex ova a sivai ovy. unoXsljisTac ^ ipv%V' 
This phrase is used but seldom in affirmative sentences. 

Rem. 9. Like the usage of S^av^a Idsa&ai, the Inf. oqav, elgoqav 
and id eTv, are sometimes joined with verbs of appearing and showing one's 
self. X. Cy. 5. 4, 11. at inavix&Eaao^Evog j]a, onoloq rig (falvrj idslv o 
Toiai'Trjv ipv/i'tv s/cav, I came to see what soi't of a looking person you are, you, 
who have such a soul. 

Rem. 10. It is a peculiarity of the Greek, that, instead of the Pass. Inf., 
it commonly uses the Inf Act. or Mid., with the adjectives mentioned under 
(c) and (d), e. g. dwajog, oi^iog, etc., and with substantives, e. g. d^rd'^xa, (p6~ 
^og, and with verbs of giving, etc. Such Infinitives, the English translates 
both actively and passively, e. g. Tavia qadiu eaji ^a&slv. Kalog iai.iv 
id slv, pulcher est visu, he is beaidiful to see or to be seen. Th. 1, 138. li^iog 
■& av f.id a a i. PI. Phaed. loyog duvuiog x a t a v o i] a a i . The active 
subject of the Inf. is easily supplied, in all examples of this kind, e. g. 
/le is beautiful for us to see. A Dat. is often expressed with such an Inf., e. g. 
PI. Rp. 599, a. qadta noLslv fii]v sidoTL zhv dh]&uav. So ^^aixqatijg 
ndai naqel/sv kavrov sqojTuv, he yielded himself to all to question, i. e. he 
permitted all to question him. 

Rem. 11. From the use of the Inf. after verbs of wilhng, wishing, en- 
treating and imploring, the following peculiarities in the use of the Inf. are 
to be explained, 

a. The Inf. is very frequently used instead of the Imp., in the Epic wri- 
ters, not unfrequently also in other poets, and even in Attic prose writers. 
The Inf. must then be considered as the object depending on the Imp, of a 



§ 307.] SYNTAX. NOM., GEN., DAT. AND ACC. WITH THE INF. 453 

verb of williiijnr, which is to be suppHed, e. g. e&bXe. But if any qualifica- 
tions of the predicate are connected with the Inf., these as referrin*]^ to the 
subject (TV contained in tiie omitted Imj)., are put in the Nom. The Imp. 
is also ot\en interchanged with the Inf. Od. a, 290 sqq. vo(ni]anQ 8ij 
EJitna (fiATjv ig ntxTQi'da yalav ai'jfid js oi / « t- « ^, nai inl xjsqs<x xt f q t'i'^ n l 
— x«t uvigi /n/r€o« d o uv a i. II. /?, 75. J'jd^ng 8' alXo&sv a'/.Xog Iqtjtvslv 
inhaaiv. 11. C, 92. ?) 8k — oX^aaa yXrj'idt -d^i'ijag leijolo 86noio, ninXov — 
■&slvai ^Adijvalrjg tnl yovvaaiv ifCxoftoio. Her. 6, 86. ctl' 8/] fioi y.al ra 
;(Qi]ftaTa 8i^ai, xal Td8s tu avfi^oXa ai7i^s Xa^iaV og (5' uv i'/CDV tuvtu vtnat- 
Tsrj^ TOL'TW d7to8ovvai, ei redde. Th. 5, 9. av 5f, J(X!:aQi8a, — ai(frL8ib}g 
Tvig nvXng d r i $ag in sx^ slv yal insl/sadaL ug Tax LaTa ^vfj filial. 

b. When the Inf. refers to the third Pers., its subject as well as the ac- 
companying qualifications of the predicate, are in the Ace. This Ace. with 
the Inf is to be considered as the object of a verb of wishing, which is to 
be supplied, e. g. tixouai, 86g, noUi, or of a verb denoting what ought to he, 
must be, e. g. ;(qi}, 8el ; so in clauses containing a wish, entreat}^ precept 
and compact 11. rj, 179 sq. o)^£ 8s Tig ujiEayEV, I8(av fig ovqavov svqvV 
Zsv ndrtQ, i} AXavra Xa;(ETv, ij Tv8iog vlov, i} ai'Tov ^aaiXrja 
noXv/gvaoio Mvy.ijvrjg! Aesch. Suppl. ^sol noXaai, firj (is 8ovXHag tv- 
XHV. X. Ven. 5, 11. xov 8s xvvrjysxrjv sxovxa i^isvai i](iiXr,(is~ 
yrjv iXacpgdv ia&tjra sjtI to xvvrjysaiov — , xov 88 d qxv (o q 6v sn sa & a t. 

c. Hence the Inf is sometimes used in reference to_ the first and second 
Pers., in questions denoting indignation. Her. 1, 88. w ^aaiXsv, xoxtgov X s~ 
ye IV TiQug as rd voiuv xvy/dvoj, r} dLydv iv tw naQsovTi, ygovo) ; shall I 
speak or be sileiit ? Od. x, 431. d 8s}Xot, noa i'fi ev ; il xay.uv {(izIqsxe xov- 
TMV ; ivhither go, i. e. whither will you go ? 

d. Finally, the Inf is used instead of the Opt, with cctydg, slds, to express 
a ipish. Od. CO, 375 sq. a'l yd q, Zsv xs ndxtg — , xolog iuv xol ;(&L^6g iv 
7]fisxsgoi(TL 86(uoi(n xsv^i s^cav wfioicnv, i cpsax d fisv a l xal d^ivvsLV av- 
8gag fivTjoxiigag ! instead of icpsaxaliiv x. dfivvot^ii. 

§307. Nom., Gen., Dat. and Ace. with the Infini- 
tive. (558—560.) 

1. Most verbs which take the Inf. have, in addition to this 

object, also a personal object, which is put in the Case that the 

verb requires, e. g. J e o fxa t o ov iX&eiv. 2Jv fi ^ ov Xev co aoi 

G(o(f!QovaTv. 'E n r Q V V a <ys iid^Ea&ai. 

Remark 1. So also xsXsvsLVy which signifies to impel, to urge, hence to 
command {juhere), in Attic prose, is always constructed with the Ace. and 
the Inf, e. g. xsXsvb) as ygdq>siv,jubeo te scribere. 

2. When adjectives or substantives are joined with the Inf. 
to define or explain the predicate, they are put, by Attraction, 
in the same Case with the personal object. 

Gen. with Inf. Jsofial aov n go&v^iov slvav. X. H. \.5,^.Kvqov 
iSiovxo wj TiQ 0-&V fi oxdx ov n^og xov noXs^iov ysvsQ&ai, 
59 



454 SYNTAX. NOM., GEN., DAT. AND ACC. WITH THE INF. [§307. 

Dal. icilli Inf. 2vi,(iovhv(x) aoi nQo&vfioj iivui. X. An. 2. 1, 2. ido^i 
r olg T(x)V Ji.lli]v(x)v ar q uttj'/ ol g (TvaxsvaaafiivoLg 
a ii/ov y.ul t^on). laufxivotg ti^oibvul. Ilipparch. 7, 1. 

71 Uril 7TQ0Cl]y.fl U QX OVT L if ()0V i fU 0} livUL. 

Jlcc. with Lff. "KnoTQVvoi at nQo-O^vfAOV tivui. Kihio) at nqoO^v- 
fxov thai. 

Rem. 2. Very freqiieiilly, however, the qualifications of the i)rcdicate 
which arc joined witli the Inf. and refer to the object of the governin*: or 
l)rinci[)al verb, are not put in the same Case as tliis object, l)ut in the Ace. ; 
this is explained by considering the object of the governing verb at the 
same titne as the subject of the Inf, see Rem. 3, e. g. dtofxai v^iMv v^iug 
(5o7]-&ovg /trsa&ca. Her. 6, 100. \4 S^ rj v a i a) v ids7}&i]auv aiflai ^orj- 
x^ V g ytviij&ni. In this sentence, "Ad-rivai'oiv is to be considered as the 
object of idei'idrjaav, and the subject of ytviad^ai. Tb. 1, 120. av^QMv aa- 
cfQovMv fitv iaTiv, d fii) udiy.olvTO, 7/(7L'/«^5tj', u Y a^ (x)V di, adcxovfiivovg 
iy. ^sv HQiiVTig noXti.tHV. Her. 3, 36. cVfTf/Awro xolai -& t q an ova t Xa- 
^ ovxag luv anoyTtivat,. X. An. 1. 2, 1. Z sv la i]y.Hv TiuQiy/ytds X a (3 6 v~ 
ra Toi'c urdgag. Cy. 2. 1, 15. s^b(ttl d^ vi.il v, si ^ovXtads, Xu^ovxag 
OTcXa tig y.hdvvov ifi^alvtiv. 

Rem. 3. Verbs which take for their object a substantive mereh^, in the 
Gen. or Dat., sometimes take, in the construction with the Inf, this object 
in the Ace, since both objects are united in one. Lys. Fragm. S. 3, p. 144. 
dsofiai ovv v^cig av//v(x)ixriV t/tiv. Th. 4, 97. n q o ay o qsv tiv av- 
lovg in Tov Uqov an lovxag aTroqpE^fai^at t« (rqDSTf^tt ayroir, instead of 
avTolg aniovaiv ano(p. X. C. 4. 7, 1. ^wx^rii?/? avrd Qy.t Lg iv Tulg ngog- 
rixovaaig ngu'^taiv avTovg{TOvg ofxiXovvrag aiTO)) thai in t (xtXel- 
r 0. So also the verbs tin si v, Xiy t iv, (p g u^t lv, cp mv tlv, in the sense 
of inhere, are constructed with the Ace. and the Inf, in the Attic poets. 
S. Ph. 101. Xiyo) a iyo) doXo) ^iXoxTt'iTrjv Xa^tlv. Also n q o g v y. t i, n q i~ 
n SL, t^taTL, avfi^aivti, ^v ^q) o q 6v i ar i with Dat. or x\cc. with Inf, 
d si, X QV,'^ 279, Rem. 4. PI. Ion. 539, e. ovy. av n qino i yt in lX i] a fio- 
V a tivui g aip M d ov uv d g a. 

3. Besides the instance already mentioned, the Ace. with ihe 
Inf. is used in Greek as in Latin, in the following instance. When 
a subject with its predicate, e. g. o dya&ug avrig evdaifwvai, is made 
the object of om* thought or wish, the subject is put in the Ace. 
(rov ayad-ov avdQa) and the predicate in the Inf. {evdaijiovHv), e. g. 
A^ofui^co T ov ay a&o V civdQaevdaifioveiv, I believe that the 
good man is happy. If the predicate is expressed by an adjec- 
tive, participle or substantive with ehai, ytyvsod-ai, etc., § 240, (2), 
e. g. dyad-og dv/jo evdai{xcov ioTiv, then these words also are put 
in the Ace, e. g. Noi^iXco rov dy wd^ ov dv d Qa av d ai jj ov a 
alv ai. 

4. But when the subject of the governing or principal verb is 



§307.] SYNTAX. NOM., GE\., DAT. AND ACC. WITH THE INF. 45o 

at the same time the subject of the Inf. aho, the subject is not 
expressed by the Ace. of a personal pionoun in Greek, a.- in 
Latin, but is wholly omitted, and when adjectives or substan- 
tives stand with the Inf., to explain or define the predicate, they 
are put, by attraction, in the Nom. 

Oi'uuui ujxuQXHv^ I believe I have erred, or, that 1 have erred, credo me er- 
rasse. Oi'ei a^aqjuv. Oujai afiagrslv. Oluiis&a afiaQXttv. Oi'ofxai sv- 
d a ifibi y hvul, I think I am happy, or, that I am happy, credo me beatum esse. 
OI'el t V d a ifiiav sivai. Ol'sTUi s v 8 a l fxia v dvai. Ol6{i8&a avdalfiov- 
e g sivai. 'O arQairj/og tcprj n (j 6 d^v jxo g tivai ini^orj^uv. Her. 7, 136. 
Jg'^^Tjg ot'x t(jp7/ o ^ olo g easax^uL ylay.hdui^iovloiai, ' xs Iv ov g fisv yag avy- 
^iai, T« ndficav avt^ganoiv vofiifxa, an o kt tlv <xv x ag '/.t]gvy.ttg, avxo g 
[ipsum instead of se ipsum) 8s xuxixa ov noujasiv. 

Rem. 4. If, however, where the subject of the governing verb and the 
Inf. is the same, the subject of the Inf. is to be made emphatic, which is 
particulai'ly the case in antitheses, then the Ace. with the Inf. is used, as in 
Latin, e. g. Her. 2, 2. ol Ar/vmiOL ev6(j.i^ov hcovToig ngcajovg yevsad^at, 
7XUVXWV ui'd^QWTiuv, 86, uou alios homines. 1, 34. Kgolaog ivofxiQi loivxbv 
slvat nuvxbiv ulSuoxaxov. — The enclitic pronouns are sometimes used 
without any special emphasis. PI. Rp. 400, b. oi^al p. s uy.Tfy.ohai. 

5. When the governing w^ord is an oblique Case of a partici- 
ple, the qualifications of the predicate which are connected wdth 
the Inf., are put, by attraction, in the same Case as that parti- 
ciple. 

PI. Apol. 21, b. TjX&ov inl xiva xatv 8 oy.o vvx wv a o cp (ov drat, venie- 
bam ad aliquem eorum, qui se sapientes esse opinabantur). Her. 1, 176. tdjj' 
vvv Avy.lfxiv (papsvcov Zcav&Imv dvui ol ttoV.oI iter l i7it]).v8eg, eorum. 
Lyciorum, qui se Xanthios esse dicebant. 

6. The Ace. with the Inf., like the Inf. alone, is used after the 
following classes of verbs and expressions, (a) of willing and 
the contrary, § 306, 1, (a) ; (b) of thinking, believing, saying, 
§ 306, 1, (b) ; (c) of causing, appointing, naming, § 306, 1, (c) ; 
(d) after the impersonal verbs and expressions signifying must^ 
ought, should, it liappeifis, e. g. del, TtQogriy.ei, nqinu, ehaziv, imeiy.sg, 
aaXov, xay.ov, (etc.) ioTiv, avp^aivEi. 

Rem. 5. With the impersonal verbs and expressions above mentioned, 
the Ace. with the Inf is not to be regarded as the grammatical object, but 
as the grammatical subject of the sentence; but logically, i. e. in respect to 
the sense, the Ace. with the Inf must here be regarded as the logical ob- 
ject, and the impersonal expressions as transitive verbs, e. g. Her. 3, 124. 



456 SYNTAX. INFINITIVE WITH THE ARTICLE. [§308. 

idoxfi ol Tov nixriqa Xovadat. [xiv vno rov /Jiog, }(Qua&ai, di vjio tov 
i}Xiov [e 8 6 X i i ol = i)'/eho). Thus it can also be explained why the 
Greeks and Latins in quoting a phrase, e. g. evdalfxova sivai, felicem esse, 
jSaaiXitz tivai, regeni esse, use this construction. 

Rem. 6. Tlie Greeks are fond of changing the impersonal construction 
into tiie })ersonal, by elevating the object into a subject, making the imper- 
sonal expression, personal, and referring it to the person of the subject. 
This is the case, (a) with Xiyixai, ayyiXXiTai, o^oXoyilxuv and 
the like ; (b) with 8 okbX., it stems ; (c) with avfi^alvti, accidit ; where 
this last verb is used personally, the subject stands before it, while with 
the Ace. and the Inf it follows the verb; (d) in the phrases 8 Ixuiov, «$- 
lov, i n 18 o^ov, 8 vv axo V, a fit] x av ov, xaXenov iaxiv, etc.; (e) 
in the phrase toctovtov 8i(j) with the Inf. followed by utgi* with the 
Inf or Ind. {tantum abest, ut — ut) so far is it from, and n o XXo x) 8 ion with 
the Inf 

Aiy^xaL xov (SaatXia anocpvyeiv and Xiyexat 6 ^ aa t Xev g 
dJiocpvysiv. X. Cy. 5. 3, 30. o AcrirvQiog slg xijv /wQav (u^^uXXeiv uy- 
yiXXsxai. An. 2. 1, 21. XsXva&aL fj.oi 8oxfl xal i) ixuvojv v^Qig xal 
T} rifisxiga vnoxpla. On the Ace. with the Inf, see Rem. 5. Pi. Phae- 
don. 74, a. a^ ovv ov xaxandvxuxavxa av^^alysi Ttj v ava fivrja ly 
livai fxiv atp ofxoiojv xxX. 67, c. x ad- aga ig shut ol xovxo ^vfi^aiysi, 
J Ixa 10 g slfiL xovxo ngaxxsiv instead of 8ixai6v iaxl {j.s xovxo ngdxxsiv. 
J Ixa log ttfi I sivai iXsi'&sgog. Her. 6, 12. in 18 o^o i xcovxo xoixo net- 
uEod^al ilai. X. Cy. 5. 4 19. u^ioi yi ia ^sv xov yfyEvr)fj.svov ngayfia- 
xog xoviov uTxoXavaai xi ayadov. Isocr. Paneg. 76, 168. xoaovxov 8 i- 
ov<j IV iXsHv, a>gx£ xal fxaXXov x«lgovaiv inl xolg dXXi{X(ov xaxolg, so far are 
they from pitying, thai they rather rejoice even, etc. 

Rem. 7. The personal construction with the verbs 8oxhv, ioixivai, Xiyta- 
d-ai and the like, extends also to clauses w ith tu g expressing comparison, 
as is the case in Latin with ut videor, ut videris, etc. instead of ut videtur. 
PI. Rp. 426, b. oix ijiaivexr^ d, eq)riv iyoo wg so ixa g xb)V xoiovxoiv civ8gwv. 
X. An. 1. 10, 18. ijaav 8^ avxai, o) g iXsyovxo, xsxgaxoaiai aua^ai. 6, 3. 
25. ol noXifxioi 8i, lug y tjimv i8 6x ovvy xoino Ssiaavxsg duijX&ov. 

Rem. 8. On the Ace. w ith the Inf in exclamations, see § 308, Rem. 2. 

§308. II. Infinitive ivith the Article. (56i,562.) 
1. The Inf. with the article is treated in all respects like a 
substantive, and, indeed, is such, since, by means of the article, 
it can be declined through all the Cases, and is capable of ex- 
pressing all those relations, which are indicated by the Cases of 
substantive, with and without prepositions. On the contrary, it 
here also, as in the Inf. without the article, § 305, 2, retains the na- 
ture of a verb, e. g. (a) ro yQdq:eiv, to yQaipai, to yeyQa(ptvai, to ygdip- 
eiv; (b) TO etiic toXjiv yodcpeiv, to Tjjg dgeTrig iTiid-v^eTv, to 
ToTg TioXefiioig [laxsad^ai ; (^c)t6 naXoSg ygdcpeiv, to -a a X cog dno- 
'&av€iv, the beautiful death. Yet pronouns in the Neut. Sing., as 



§308.] SYNTAX. INFINITIVE WITH THE ARTICLE. 457 

attributives, are connected with the Inf. In this way, whoh; 
chiiises, by prefixing the article, are represented as one extended 
substantive idea. 

2. When the Inf., whether used as a subject or object, has 
subject and predicate qualifications belonging to it, both these, 
as in the case of the Inf. without the article, are put in the Ace, 
because the Inf., even as a subject, is considered dependent^ § 307, 
Rem. 5. When, however, the subject of the Inf. is not differ- 
ent from the principal subject of the sentence, it is not express- 
ly stated, and the predicate qualifications are put, by means of 
attraction, in the same Case as the principal subject of the sen- 
tence, i. e. in the Nom. 

(a) Nominative (subject). X. Cy. 5. 4, 19. to a fiagrdvsiv av&gu^ 
novg ovTag ovdiv, oitxai, S^ctv^aajov. 7. 5, 82. ov to /i?) Xa^slv 
xa uyuxtu ovxta yi xalenov,, (a;7iEq to Xa^ovra (TT s grj&ilv a l Xv- 
ntjQov. 

(b) Genitive, both as an attributive and as an object of a verb. X. An. 
1. 3, 2. KliuQ/og fiixoov i^iq)vyi- xov fii] xaTa7i£TQ0)&t}vaL. Cy. 1. 
4, 4. (x)g ds TTQoijysv 6 /Q^rog aliov {tov Kvqov) aw tw ^tyid^H fig wgav 
TO V 71 go grjjS ov ysriad^oci. 1. 5, 13. xi ovv icrriv i] xov aXiluad- a l 
dixaiorsgov, ij xov x oH g (f IXo ig agrj y elv xdXXiov ; C. ] . 2, 55. -^w- 
xgdxTjg nagsxiiXsL inijitXiiad^at xov dg cpgovijj.(axaxov eiv a i x al 
bxpsXifKotaxov. The Gen. is often used to explain the preceding sub- 
stantive, e. g. PI. L. 657, b. V '^rjxrjtng xov xuivfi ^r^xsXv an fiovaixjj 
Xqria&aL. With prepositions, e. g. « v t t, instead of, or in the sense of the 
Latm tantum abest, ut — tit, x (^ g t g, except, besides, fii/ g i, until, i •/., from, 
in consequence of, dvsv, vnthout, especially svexa and vnig ^vith the 
Gen. in connection with |U>), in order that not, in order not. Th. 1, 69. « y t * 
xov in eX&sIv {invadere) avxol dfivvfa&at ^ovXsa&s fidXXov iniovxag. 
X. H. 3. 4, 12. "Ayr/alXaog dvxl xov inl Kaglav isv a l, sv d-v g xu- 
Vttvxla uTToaxgitpag sjil fpgvylag iTTogsiexo. Hier. 4, 3. dogvq:ogoi'aiv inl 
xovg xaxovgyovg vTZsg xov ixt]diva xuiv TioXiratv ^luIoj &aruTO) uno- 
^vt^axEiv. Very fi-equently xov, xov fii] is used to denote a purpose, 
an object, in order that, in order tliat not, § 274, 3, (a), since by the language, 
as is frequently the case, that which calls forth the action is substituted 
for that which is to be done or for the result. Th. 1, 4. Mlvwg xo Xrjaxixov 
xa&figev ix xr,g ^aXdaarjg xov x a g ngogodovg ^aXXov lev at avxM 
in order that his revenues might come in better. X. Cy. 1. 3, 9. ol xaiv ^acn- 
Xicav olvoxooL sig xt^v dqitrxsgav [oXvov) iyxtccntvoi xaxaggocpovai, x o i) dr, 



458 SYNTAX. INFINITIVE WITH THE ARTICLE. [§308. 



ft (paQfiaya fyyiouv, fiy Xv a n sX s7v avroTg. (3, 40. t o v fxi] d l a cp sv^ 
/ e LV xov X a y (J) V in twv dixivoiv ay.onovg y.aOixjTT^g. 

(c) Dative. PI. PJiacd. 71, c. t ol i^fjv iiTil xl tpavxiov, (ogmQ tw i/Qij/o- 
Qsvui TO xaO^tvdiiy. Witli attraction, Tli. 2, 42. nuOnv fxuXXov tj/rjaufiivuv 
■i'l TO) s V d 6 VT eg <t m i^ la^ u l {cedendo servari). X. llier. 7, •}. doxn tov- 
TO) diacpEQELr avijo tmv uXXo)V ^wojj^, t w t i fiij g 6 q i y e u & a i, to differ from 
other anim(ds in this, that. With prepositions, e. g. e n I with the Dat., on 
the condition that, it<. PI. Gorg. 45G, e. (ot yovng Tovg naTdocg Tolg naidoTQl- 
^aig) Tiaoidoaav in I tw dixulcog xQi]<jd-aL TOVTOLg (rot? onXoig) 
noog Tovg nolifxlovg. S. Aj. 554. sv tw cp q ov slv — ^diarog ^log. 

(d) Accusative. PI. Gorg. 522, e. kvto to uno&vijaxEiv ovdilg 
cpoi^tiTai. With prepositions, e. g. n qog with the Ace, in order that, e I g, 
in order that, in order to, especially d lu with the Ace, on account of, because 
that. X. C. 1. 2, 1. 2'cay.QaTrig n q o g to (^etqIwv 8 eIct 3^ a l nEJiaidEV- 
fiEvogi'^v). Cy. 8. 1, 3. (xiyiuTOV ayadov to nELx^aoynv cpalvETca stg to 
y,aTn7CQUTTEiv T a ay a ■& a. With Attraction, X. Ven. 12, 21. ?] a^rr?) 
navTuxov ndgEcnL Slvc to Eivai u&avaTog. Cy. 1. 4, 3. o KvQoq 
6 La TO cpiXofxaS-ijg Eivai noXXa xovg JiaQovTug avrjQona, y.al oaa av- 
Tog vn uXXmv (sc. avrjocaTUTo), d i a to a y % Iv ov g Eivai Tayh anEXQt- 

VETO. 

Remark 1. Many verhs and verbal expressions, which are commonly con- 
structed with an Inf. merely, sometimes take also the Inf. with the article 
T o, even when they would have their object, if a substantive, in the Gen. 
The addition of the article, gives greater emphasis to what is expressed by 
the Inf. X. C. 3.6, 6. to nXovcnwTEQav ti]v noXiv tioie'Lv ava^aXov- 
fiE&a. Cy. 1. 6, 32. oi'x ansi/ovTO oiid^ ano twv cplXcov to ^i] ov/l 
nXEovEy-TEiV amojv n elq (X(t& a i {ans/Ea&ul Tivog). Th. 3, 1. tov nXu- 
UTOV ofiiXov Tb)V ipiloiv Eiqyov to fxrj t« iyyvg t?;? noXEwg ytay.oVQ- 
y eIv [EtQyELV Tivd tlvoq). pi. Lach. 190, e. iycj al'T Log (sc. ft^ut) to ae 
dnonQlvadd-ai {aiTiog eI^L Tivog.) But when a preposition precedes 
an Inf , the article can never be omitted, because then the Inf becomes an 
actual verbal substantive. 

Rem. 2. Both the Ace. of a substantive and the Inf with the Ace. of the 
article, are used to express exclamations and questions implying indigna- 
tion. In poetry, however, the article is sometimes omitted with the Inf. 
X. Cy. 2. 2, 3. izELVog navv dvia&Eig eitte ngog Iwi'Toj' * T7]g TV/rjg, to e (j, s 
viiv icXt]&Evza 8 E II Q o tv/eTvI that I have just now been called hither ! 
Without the article, Aesch. Eum. 835. ijAE Tca&Elv ra^e, cpsv, i (i s 
TaXulcpQova y.ma y dv oIx.eIv, dxiETov, (pEv, fxvaog ! 

Rem. 3. There are many phrases, used as adverbial expressions, in 
which the article to is placed before the Inf which stands in connection 
with an adverb or a preposition and its Case. These must be regarded as 
adverbial Accusatives. See § 279, Rem. 10. The Inf eIvul denotes a 
state or condition, e. g. to v vv Eivai, the present state, condition, and as 
an adverbial expression, with respect to, or according to the present state of 



§ 309.] SYNTAX. THE PARTICIl'LE. 459 



affairs, pro prnoscnti tcniporis conditione, to tij^i^gov ilvai, pro ho- 
dierni dioi ooiulitioiie. X. An. l.(), 1), to xutu xovxov elvai, so fur 
as he is concerned. H. 3. 5. 9. to ^u c v in" ex slv o ig slv a l anolo'tXms, 
so far as it depends on them. 

§ 309. T/i e Par tic ip I e. (5G3). 

1. The idea of the verb, as expressed by the participle, is 
that of an adjective. The participle is like the adjective, bolh 
in its form and in its attributive use ; for it has three genders 
and the same declension as the adjective, and cannot, more 
than the adjective, be used independently, but must always de- 
pend upon a substantive, and hence agrees with it in Gender, 
Number and Case. 

2. On the contrary, the participle differs from the adjective, 
in retaining, like the Inf., the following properties of the verb, 

(a) The participle has different forms to denote the different 
condition of the action, viz, duration, completion and what is 
future and impending, e. g. yQacprnv, ivritin^^ yEyQaq)(6g, yqdxpagy 
one icho has icritlen, yodu^cov, one icho icill icrite, § 257, Rem. 3. 

(b) The participle has Act, Mid. and Pass, forms, e. g. yQciw- 
«?, YQaxpufiEvog, yQacpeig. 

(c) It governs the same Case as its verb, e. g. ygagjcov Inia- 
Tolriv, iTzi&vfiav rijg aQSTTJg, iiay^oiievog xoig TioXsfiiorg. 

3. The participle is used in Greek as follows, 

(a) In all respects like the adjective either as an immediate 
attributive qualification of a substantive, e. g. 6 jQacpo^v TzaTg 
or TiaTg 6 yQcicpcov, the ivriting- hoy ; or as a predicate in con- 
nection with ehai, e. g. ro godov dvxt ovv iari v. 

(b) To denote such an attributive qualification of the sub- 
stantive as is expressed in English by placing the participle 
after the substantive, or by translating it by the relative, 2cho, 
ivhich, e. g. Fvv^ rig oqviv €?/£ '/.ad-' a'AaGr^v ijiA^Qav coov avrfj ria- 
7ov6av, a hen layings or ivhich laid an egg daily. 

(c) It is used, agreeing with the object of a verb, to com- 
plete the idea of the object, e. g. o^w dvd-QcoTrov rQ^iovra. 

(d) To denote, adverbially, subordinate qualifications of the 
principal action, e. g. KvQog yelwv eItiev. 

Remark. As tlie ii^e of the participle, mentioned under 3, (a), is explain- 



460 SYNTAX. THE PARTICIPLE. [§ 310. 

ed in §§ 204, 1. and 238, Rorn. 7, and as No. (b) has no further difficulty, 
only the usage mentioned under 3, (c) and (d) now remains to be consid- 
ered. 

§3i0. The Participle as the completion of the 
verbal idea. (r>f,4— 574.) 

1. As the participle is an attribute, and consequently expresses 
an action as already belonging to an object, only such verbs can 
take a participle for their complement, as require for this com- 
plement an action which, as an attribute, belongs to an ob- 
ject, — this object being in some action or state. 

2. The participle here agrees in Case with the substantive 
object of the principal verb, but this object is in the Case which 
the principal verb otherwise requires. Jiy.ovco ZwAQatovg and 
ijxovad Tioze ^Jaxgdrovg tzeqI qiD.cov d laXeyofisvov. XaiQco 
o 1 and X^^Q^ ^®* iX& ovt i. 'Oqoj dv& qcottov and oqoj d v- 
{y Q(07tov % qif^ovt a. 

3. But when the subject of the principal verb is also the ob- 
ject of the same verb, as ol^a {iy(o) ifiavzov d^vr^rov ovruy then the 
personal pronoun, which would be the object of the verb, is 
omitted, and the participle is put, by means of attraction, in 
the same Case as the subject of the principal verb, i. e. in the 
Nom. Comp. §307, 4., e. g. olda d-vr^zog ajv. For more ex- 
amples, see No. 4. 

Remark 1. Yet the Ace. of the personal pronoun and participle, as the 
object of the principal verb, is expressed, when the subject as an object is 
emphatic. Comp. § 307, Rem. 2. X. Cy. 1. 4, 4. 0^/, « y.qdxxmv fihsv wV, 
zavxa nqovnaXHTO To'vg (jvvovTug, uk)i uTtsQ sv fjdsi iavxov ^Tjova ovtu, 
ravja i^ijQX^' 5, 10. nsQLsldov avrovg yriQCc advvoiTOvg ysvo^ivovg, 
they permitted themselves to become enfeebled by old age. 

Rem. 2. With a v v l d a, avy/iyvciKTy.a i fiavt 10, the participle 
can either refer to the subject contained in the verb, or to the reflexive pro- 
noun which stands with the verb ; if it refers to the subject, it is put in 
the Nom., if to the pronoun, in the Dat., e. g. avvoida {(Tvyyiyvcoaxw) ifiav- 
TO) sv noLijuag or avvoida ifjavTM ev noLijaavTi. PI. Apol. 21, b. iyo) ^vv~ 
oidaifjavTut a ocfo g tit v. 22, d. i [lavr 0} ^vvfidsiv ovdsv etckt- 
1 n (.liv M. But when the subject is not at the same time the object, but is 
different from the object, then the object with its participle is either put in 
the Dat. e. g. (TiryoiSd aoi ev non'jaavTi, — X. S. 4, 62. t/ ^u t avvo kt& a 
TOLOVTOV (Iq y a(7 (xsv M', (quid me tale commisisse scis ?) or (though more 
seldom) the Substantive is put in the Dat, but the participle in the Ace, 
e. g. 6/(0 a L avvoiSa iv noii'ia avca. X. O. 3, 7. iyta gol avvoid a 



§ 310.] SYNTAX. THE PARTICIPLE. 461 

^jil fiiv yo)fi(i)5(oy x^iay xttl TTOtvv TTQoil' uv i(TT u (x sv ov, y.ctl ndvv fiLY.Qav 
udov ^adii^oria xal f'fxs av an tld^ ov t a 7TQod\f.iMq avyx^iutrftuL. 
Also kai'&drco ifiaviuv noibiv t i. X. An. 0. 1, 2*^. (ot imitl.;) tXa- 
& ov avT ov Q iul TO) Aocjpo) ysvofispoL. — With e o i x i v « /, to appear, 
to stem, to be like, and '6 jxo lov siv a i, the participle in relation to the sub- 
ject, sometimes stands in the Nom., though more frequently in tlie Dat., and 
with ouoiov firai, in the Dat. almost without an exception. X. 11. 6. 3, 8. 
i Ix uj B ii'(}uvvl(Ji fidkXov i] noXnuaiq i] 8 6 (isv o i. An. 3. 5, 13. v ^ o lo i, 
rurav d-avfidCovTsg. PI. Menon. 97, a. o /u o t o / iaf-isv ovy. ugOwg wao- 
koyrjHoat. Rp. 414, c. soixuc, iq:>r), oxvovvti uyuv. 

4. The verbs and expressions, with which the participle is 

used as a complement, are the following, 

(a) Verba sentiendi^ i. e. such as denote a perception by the 
senses or by the mind, e. g. oQav, daovsiv, ddivai, to knoiv, Imxyta- 
c&aij to knoifj, fiav&dveiv, to perceive, yiyvaay.siv, to knoic, iv&vf^sTij- 
■&ai, to consider, nwOdveod-ai, to perceive, alo-O-dvEodai, iA.i[ivi]6y.Ea- 
&ai, i7ii).av\}dvEad-at, etc. 

Th. 1. .32. ijfislg u d vv ax o i o g w jisv ovTsg TreQLysvia&aL. 'O q oi as 
rgixovra. ^Axo v £ lv with the Gen. of an immediate perception, and more 
frequently with the Ace. of the mediate perception. X. C. 2. 4, 1. ijy.ovcr cc 
8s noTE avTov xal negl cplloov 8 laXsy Ofiiv ov. H. 4. 8, 29. ij y. o v a s 
T ov O Q aav ^ ovXov ngogiovxa. Cy. 1. 4, 25. Kufi^var^g ^jxavasv 
dvSgog ijdjj eg/a 8 lu/s ig l^o iJ.£v ov tov Kv gov. i8 a S^vrjiog wv. 
O i8 a utvS-gojTiov S-vriTov ovx a. Her. 3, 1. w ^aailsv, 8 1 a^ e^ Xrj~ 
fiEv g vjio Afidaiog ov^uvd-dvEig; 40. ri8v n vv S^ d v e <j & a i u v 8 g a 
cf IXov y.al ^eIv ov ev ngriauovta. IL. C 2. % \. al a d^ 6 ^i e v o g 8i 
7T0TE yiufiTcgoaXsa ngog xi]v lAtjiiga xaXETialvovxa. With the Gen., 
§ 273, 5, (e). 4. 4, 11. j] a-d^rja ai ovv TKanoxi [lov ipEv8o}iagxvgovv-' 
xog r, (Tvy.ocf>avxovvxog. 

(b) Verba declarandi, i. e. verbs which signify to declare, to 
show, to make clear and the like, e. g. dsixvvvai, to shoiv, to exhi- 
bit, 8rj).ovv, drjlov Tzoieiv, (paivEiv, to show, (pafvsa&ai, to show one^s 
self, apparere, drjXov and (fiavsQov ehai, DJyieiv, ihleijeiv, to prove, 
to convict, aXiay.ead-ai, to he convicted, tioieTv, to represent, evqio-aeiv, 
to find, etc. 

Her. 7, 18. Agxd^avog, og ngoxEgov an o (ttt ev 8 oiv (xovvog E<f a ivEXO, 
xoxt in L(T7T £v8 o)v q>avEgog iiv. 6. 21. "Ad^^vaiot 87]lov in o Irja av 
vnEgcc/&E(T&ivxEgxj] Mih]xov uXaxiEt. Isocr. Evag. 190, d. toTc nonj- 
xaig xov g & e o v g o'lov x iaxl n o lij a a i y.al 8taXE/oiJEVOvg y.al 
avvaywvL^oiiEvovg, oig uv ^uvXrj&biai^v. Dem. Aph. 1. 819, 20. ^«^/w? 
iXsyx^H^^ST^oit' ifJ&v 86 (xEvog. 
60 



462 SYNTAX. THE PARTICIPLE. [§310. 

Rem. 3. Instead oftho impersonal phrases (J/JAor etrji, cpuvfqov iaii, (pai- 
rfJHL, apparet, the Greek nses the jiersonal ronstruclion, cornp. § 307, Rem. 
6, e. g. d ij k 6 i: e I fi i, cp u v s o 6 g sljxi,(paivoiJ,utri}v Tzaroldu ev n o ltj- 
(T a g. X. An. 2. G, 23. ai to y o) v (f uv s q 6 g ^iv t] v ovdiyu, otoj di (palrj 
(filag firm , Tovno tv d rjXog i y iyv zt o i tc i ^ o v X f v o) v. PI. Apol. 23, d. 
y. UT n d 7}Xo L y I y V V J u I noognoiovjifvot fjiv ildtvui, tid ox s g de 
o v8iv. 

{v.) Verba aJJ'eciuum, i. e. verbs which denote an affection of 
the mind, e. g. x^oqeiv, ijdaoO-uij dyu).lca&ai, ayanuv, to he content, 
dyOeoOai, uyaray.zeh; aidtiaO^ai and alaxvvecOui, to be ashamed, 
USTCcutXtloOcfA, uETaiieltL, ooyi'l^sadui, ^aQi>v£a\}(a, oadi'oj^', yaltTZco^ 
qiEQEiv, etc. 

X. H. 6. 4, 23. (J &Hig noV.ay.ig / a l q f i, tovq ijh> iiiy.QOiq (.iryulovg n o i o) y, 
Toic 5s ufyt/J.Gvg ^iiy.Qovg. Hier. 8,4. d i u). s y 6 fu sv o I t£ u y alio h id^ a 
Tolg nooTiTij.ir^uivoig utillov, i] t olg ix tov i'aov i]utv ovau. Th. 1. 77. a,8 l- 
yovfxsvov ol ar&QCDTtoi i-iallov ogylCovTai, i] ^ La'C,6 niv o i. 4,27. 
(ot ^Adrjvaioi) uetsuHovto Tag cr-covdag ov 8 i '^ a j^ 8 v u l. 5, 35. Tovg ix 
jr/g vt](Tov dscTfiojiag fiiTs^iilovTo UTTodEdwy. oTsg. Eur. Hipp. 8. t t- 
jjtta ^isv i X alq ova iv [ol dsol) avd-fjbmwv vno. Xa Iq oj a o l el & 6v- 
T I. PL Rp. 475, b. LTTO (j^iy.qoTiQ(})v y.ul (f avloT i q mv t i fx (o fi ev o t 
a. y a 71 (a a L V. 

(d) Verbs signifying to satisfy one's self with something, to 
enjoy something, to be full of something, e. g. Tboneod-aiy ifini- 
nlaod-ui, IIE6T0V ehai and the like. 

Od. a, 369. vvv fih 8 aivv (xsv o i TSQ7i(aix8&a, II. w, 633. iml t « ^- 
n7](T av sg alh]lovg u g 6 covTsg. S. OC. 768. ^sgto g i] v &vfiovfisvog. 
Eur. Ion. 924. ol' tol <jov ^Htkuv ifinmlafiuL n go g ojn ov. Her. 7, 146. 
imuv javia S-i] e v fzsv o i, s oj a c TilrjQ isg. 

(e) Verbs signifying to oversee, to permit, to permit to hap- 
pen, to bear, to endure, to persevere, also to be vrearied, and to 
be exhausted, e. g. tteqi- y.a&- elg- icfOQuv, TTooitG&ai, to neglect, to 
permit, avEyEad^ai, y.uQzsQEiv, vTZOfia'veiv, hnaQEiv, perseverare, aai^vetVj 
dvTtiTzeTv, etc. 

Her. 7, 168. ol n sq Lomir] sent i] 'Ellug an ollv fxivr]. 101. si Ellrj- 
vsg vn [J.SV so V a t yilqag f/^ot avTaELq6/j.svoi. 9,45. liTiaqisjs 
fiivovTsg. 3, 65. [viAtv inKTy.i'jTtTca) ^i] n sq I'ld tlv tt)V i] y e fi ov irjv 
ai'Jig ig Mr,dovg nsQLsl&oiKTav. Isocr. Archid. 125, 47. an slno i fisv 
uv uxovnvTsg ts xal liyovTsg, el ndtrag rag Toiavrag nqa^sig i^srd^oi- 
fisv. X. Cy. 5. 1,26. oqavxig <ts uvs^o fis& a y.al xaqxsgrjtr ofisv 
vno cov sv eqy STOV ^sv I. An. 5. 1, 2. drtsiqr^y.a ijdrj cvaxsva^o^ 



§ 310.] SYNTAX. THE PARTICIPLE. 463 

fASvog xnl ^ a8 1'Qwv nou xq ixoav kcu ta onXa cp s q wv xat iv rd^ei I o) v 
xal qpi'Artxtic q>vkuTtMV xin fi tx/ 6 f^isv o g. Tli. 1, 8G. rovg $v^(^u- 
Xovg ov TisQiotpofisd-a ced ncovfxiv o vg. 2, 73. 'A&rivmol (paaiv, (v 
ovdevl 1) [iu g nQoia&UL u d i y. o v jli s v o v g. For a v i/ ^(^^ a i with the 
Gen., see §275, 1. 

(f ) Verbs sigiiifviug to begin, and cease, to make cease, to 
be remiss in something, e. g. aQieodai.vnaQiEiv] naveiv, naveod^ai^ 
Xi'iytiv, diaV.dzieiv, dnalXuzzeaxiaii ^e&i'ea&ai, XeiTiea&cu, ialsmeiv, 
iTzdmnstv, etc. 

Her, 6, 75. KXsofiivrjg 8s naQala^uv tov crldrjQov, uq/^to ex tmv xvrj^iiojv 
soiVTov Xo)^(0fi£vog. II a V (a o"? a d ixo vvt a. 11 avowal as a d t~ 
xwv. X. O. 1, 23. [al inL&VfilaL) alx i'C,o ^^v a v tu UM^aia twv avd^qia- 
7i(ov xal T«? ipi'X^g xal Tolg ol'xovg otnors X 7] y o v a i v, sgx civ aQxanriv aurolj'. 
xal dXXa ys di] ^vqla iniXsliKa Xsycav, to omit in speaking. Symp. 
'jSXXsinsraL si' noiMV lovg svsqysTovvjag savTov. PI. Phileb. 26, b. 
18G, b. u Q^o fia L dno Tiig luTQixrjg Xiy (ov. Menex. 249, b. Tovg tsXsvti]- 
cai'TW? T I jiM (J a ovdsTTOTS ixXsln s I (?) noXig). 

(g) Verbs signifying to be fortunate, to distinguish one's self, 
to excel, to be inferior, to do well, to err, e. g. evtv^eiv, vixav, y.Qa^ 
reiv, 7jTTa<ydca, ev tzoieiv, dfiaQzdveiv, ddiy.siv, etc. 

Her. 5, 24. « ^ in olrja ag a q) lxo fisv o g. Th. 1, 53. ad lxsZts noXi- 
fiov li QxovTsg xal anovdag Xvovxsg. 2, 71. o v d ixaia no lsIt s ig 
yr,v TijV TlXaTaLSMV axQaxsvovTsg. 'AfjaqxavsLg la vra n o loiv. 
PI. Phaedon. QQ, c. sv y" in olrja ag dv a }ivri a ag fis. X. Hier. 11, 
14 sq. ndvxag [xovg (plXovg) nsiQM v txixv sv n o lmv idv yUq xovg (plXovg 
xqaxfjg si) noLoJv, ov i^irj aoi diivuviaL uvii/etv ol noXifuoh. An. 2. 3, 
23. olx rixxtjaofis&a sv noiovvxsg. 

(h) The verbs neiq aa d- ai (especially in Herodotus), to try 
or attempt somethings TzaQaGzevd^sGd-ai (usually with co g 
and the Fut. Part.), and the Ionic phrases Ttollog el^i, sy- 
nEifiai, yiyvofiai, to be urgent about , to lay it to hearty to 
consider of importance. 

Her. 7, 9. insLqy'i^rjv in sXavv b)v snl xovg avdqag xovxovg. PI. 
Phileb. 21, a. OL'Koii*' iv aol nsiqm^sd-a ^aaavl^ovxsg xavxa\ Th. 
2, 7. 01 A^r^valoi naqsGxsvd'Qovxo ug noXsurjirovxsg. Without 
(x)g, 18. {ol nsXonovv)]aLOL) nqogiSoXag naqsaxsvd^ovxo noir]ff6f.isvoi. 
X. H. 4. 1, 41. naqsaxevdC^T^o noqsv(T6(.isvog. Her. 7, 1.58. o Fi- 
Xbiv noXXoq svixsixo Xsyo)v. 9, 91. noXXog r^v Xiaao^svog 6 



464 SYNTAX. THE PARTICIPLE. [§310. 

U^vog. ^ J 98. zl ti'ioxijg i]v noXXoq vnl nuvxoq uvUooq utviOfiEvog. 7. 
10, 3. 71 an olo L iyivovxo 2i'y.v&ui 5 kC fiiv o i^Iiovvov Ivaui xhv noqov. 

(i) Certain exprcsriions, mostly impersonal, c. g. it is fit, use- 
ful, profitable, good, agreeable, shameful, it is to my mind, and 
the like; after these, however, the Inf is equally correct, and 
even more frequent, when the action of the dependent verb is 
not considered as already belonging to the subject, but as re- 
sulting or following from the action implied in the above im- 
personal expressions. 

n Q in SL y.0 i a / a & ot ovx i and aya&o) eivca. Th. 1, 118. inrjQoyxMV 
xov diov^ H (sc. uvTolg) Tioleinovaiv a ^s Lvov s a r a l. PL Alcib. 1. 
113, d. ay.oTiovaLV, unoxiga gvvoIuel ng u^aa lv. 

(k) The verb '^xeiv signifying to be in a condition or state ^ 
forms with the participle an apparent periphrasis of the simple 
finite verb from which the participle comes. This periphrasis 
is only apparent, since no form of the finite verb would denote 
the full force of ii^iv, which in this construction always expresses 
the continued condition of the action, similar to the Latin ali- 
quicl pertractatum habere. 

Her. 3, 65. ^oAw s^ovctl avxr^v [xi]v ijysfiovlrjv) XTtjcrafiEvot. 6, 12. 
avdgl (Pcay.ai'i ala^ovi in lt gixjj avTsq ri^iag avzoig &x ^ (^^ ^- ^' ■^' !• 

3, 14. noXXa /^/)|U«t« sxofxsv av^gn axoxsg. Dem. Phil. 3. 113, 12. 
xal (I>egccg 7Tgojr]v wg cplXog sig OsxxaXlav iX&cov b/el xaraXa^av. On 
the contrary, s^oj XiysLV, I can say. 

(1) Finally, the participle is used as a complement with the 
following verbs, («) r v 7 ;f a j' co, to happen ; {§) lavO-dvoo, to be 
concealed ; [y] d lar eXm, biaylyvo^ai, d idyai, to continue ; 
[8) (pd-dvoj, to come before^ to anticipate; {e) oixo fiai, to go 
aiva?/, to depart. In English, these verbs are often rendered by 
an adverb, and the participle connected with them, by a finite 
verb. 

Her. 1, 44. 6 Kgdiaog cpovia tov naidog iXdv&ave /S 6 a x a v, unob- 
served, sea'etly. 3, 83. y.al vvv avxr] 1) oixlr] d tax eXs e l jaovvt] sXev^ igtj 
iovaa IIsgcriMv, continually. ^ i a y w, d lux eX w, diaylyvofiai xaXa 
n o idj V, continually, always. 1, 157. oj /eto q) ev y ojv, he fled away. 6, 
138. oiyovTO anoTiXiovxEg. 0\xo fia u cp ig ojv, I carry away. Th. 

4, 113. Exv^ov onXlxai iv xf, ayoga xaS- Evd ovt Eg (ag nEVxi'y/.ovxa, hap- 
pened to he sleeping. Tvyxdva is always used, where an event has not 



§311.] SYNTAX. DIFFERENCE BETWEEN PART. AND INF. 465 

taken place by our intention or design, but by the accidental cooperation of 
external circumstances, or by the natural course of things. In English it 
can generally be translated by happen to be, chance to be, sonictimcs it can- 
not be translated at all. X. Cy. 1. 3, 12. ;(ale7T6v 7]v iilXov cp & a a a i lolio 
n I I'j (T a V T a, it was difficult for another to do this before him, or to anticipate 
him in doing it. Her. 4, 136. icf)&r]aav nolXot oi -^y.vdui rovg Utfjaug 
inl xi]v yicfvqav anijiofisvoi, long before the Persians. The conjunc- 
tion ttqIv ij (or 1] alone) with the Inf. can also follow (p&uveiv, e. g. Her. 6, 
116. € cp S-ija av a n i x 6 /.i s v o i, n qlv rl rovg ^aqSuqovg i']y.£iv. Ov 
q>&dvsiv followed by xal, y.al sv&vg, may be translated by scarcely — when, 
no sooner — than, e. g. Isocr. Paneg. 58, 86. [ol Aay.i5aLy,6vL0L) ovy. ecpd^Tj^ 
aav 7t V & 6 fisv o L lov negl tijv AiTiy.ijv Ti6Xff.iov, y.al navTwv tmv uXXwv 
afieXij(Tavi(g rjy.ov iiyTiv ufiviovvTsg, the Lacedaemonians no sooner heard of the 
war in Attica, than they left everything to come to our defence, or they scarcely 
heard, when, etc. So in the phrase, ova uv cp-d^ av o ig no loJv it, you 
shoidd do nothing quicker, i. e. you cannot do it too quickly, or do it quickly. 
X. C. 2. 3, 11. ovy. uv (p-d^ (X vo ig ley to v; (quin statim loqueris ? i. e. quan- 
locius dicas?) 3. 11, 1. ol*;* aV (pd^ avoir, tcprj, axoXod-ovvrEg; ivill 
you not follow immediately ? ovx av q) & dv o ig negalvwv; ivill you not be 
quickin saying this, will you not say it quickly? (i. e. statim reliqua conclude.) 

Rem. 4. The relation expressed by Xavd- dvstv and cp&dvE iv is 
sometimes so changed, that they take the form of participles and thus sene 
to complete the idea of the principal verb. X. Cy. 3. 3, 18. q)&dvovr8g 
ijdTj d J] oil (IS V rijv iy.dvwv yijp. 6. 4, 10. ^ (Ji Xa& ovaa avrov avvE- 
(psln sr 0. 

Rem. 5. The Part, of the verb slvai, connected with adjectives or sub- 
stantives, with several of the above named verbs, is sometimes omitted, even 
when HvuL is an essential word ; also after Vei'ba sentiendi and declarandi, 
e. g. Dem. Ph. 1. 45, 18. sidojg iviQEndg vfiug. 54, 41. tdv h Xiggovijab) 
nvd^ria d- B fldXiTinov (sc. opra, tarinjing) ; very often with cp a l v o fi a t, 
not seldom also with r v y x a v by, d i ar iX cu, d l a y l y v o fj. a l, e. g. ^. C. 
1. 6, 2. uvvnodj-^Tog zs y.al ux'nodv d t, ar sXslg. 

§311. Remarks on the differ en ce between the 
usage of the Participle and Infinitive. 
Some verbs of the classes above mentioned are also constructed with the 
Inf., yet with a different meaning. 

1. "Axoveiv constructed with a Part., implies an immediate perception, or 
if indirect, yet one that is sure and well-grounded ; constructed with the 
Inf, it implies a perception not immediate but derived by hear-say, e. g. 
'Axov (X) avrov diaXsyofxivov (i. e. ejus sermones auribus meis per- 
cipio). Kup^vdTjg ijxovas rov Kvq ov dvSQog ijdrj sqya ^ t a / £ t- 
qi^ofjiEvov. See §310, 4, (a). But X. Cy. 1. 3, 1. Idslv ined^vfiH 6 



466 SYNTAX. — differexcp: bkt-vveen part, and inf. [§311. 



AffTvd/rjg lov Ki'Qor, oti ijyovs, ex aliis audiverat, xaXov xaya&ov af- 
Tov tiv ai. 

2. JLidivat and stt lar aa a l witli tlie Part., to know, Avitli llie Inf. to 
know how to do sometking:, to he able. O'l d a {e n i a j a fi a i) x^ioig a c- 
^6 fievog, I know that J honor the gods ; but, Eur. llipj). lOOlJ. in la t a- 
jU a t -dfovg a i ^ E IV, I know how to honor the gods. S. Aj. (JtJG. tlu o- 
fisaxta {Asv d^tolg sly. el v. A\so v o {x I ^ e i v with tha meaning, /o 6e 
convinced, to know, {Etdsvai) is connected with a Part.; still, this occurs 
very rarely. X. An. G. G, 24. vofxi't^E d\ iuv fui vvv u7ioxTtu'i]g, — 
ixydga ayadhv u n o xt e Iv o) v. 

3. MavxfavEiv willi the Part., /o see into, to /^erceire, with tlie Inf. <o 
learn. Mav & uv w (t o cpo g o')v, I perceive that I am wise, a o q: 6 g si- 
V ai, J learn to he wise. X. Cy. 4. 1. '[S. fj, u x> i] a o v r u l iv uvt lov- 
a-&ai {Tolg noXEfi'oig). 

4. Fi/vaxTxELv witli the Part, to know, to perceive, with the Inf. to learn, 
to judge, to determine. Fi y v (vaxco ayti&ovqoviaq Jolg (ttquti- 
wraig tov g uy wv ccg, I perceive that the prize-fights are usefid, but 
ay a & hg siv a i, I judge that, etc. X. Apol. 33. {2'o}y.Qonrig) sy v w 
Toil 8j I ^rjv TO T E&va V a I uvtm xQElaaov f t v « t, judicavit. Isocr. 
Trap. 3G1, d. syvaaav Uauiojva Sfjol nagudowai jov nvu^a, they con- 
cluded to give up, etc. 

5. AiaS^uvEff&ai with a Part, to perceive, to ohserve, to understand, to 
/earn, with the Inf. fo think, to imagine, opinari. Ala ^ avowal as 
(uiya nagct ^aaikfl dvvafiEvov Th. 6, 59. ala^wvo^Evog uv- 
z ov g fiEya nu.Qa ^aaiku zlugeioj d v v a a d' a l. 5, 4. ovy.etl inl lovg 
ullovg I'^/fiat, ala d- 6 ^Ev g oly. uv tieI&eiv uiiovg, opinans, se 
lis nou esse persuasurum. 

6. IIvv & dv EaS- a L with a Part, to learn, to hear, to perceive ; with an Inf. 
it is used with the same difference of meaning as in the case of dxov- 
ELv. Uvv&uvofxal as Xiyovr a. Lys. Nicom. 1 84, 17. nvvd-a- 
vop.al IE (XV TOV IsyEiv, mg daslSw y.ocTaXv(xiv zdg S^valag, ex aliis 
audivi. X. H. 1. 4, 11. otvrjx&7] inl xuxaay.onfj juv TQu'jQCxn', oi? invv- 
•& dv sj AaxEdaifxovlovg avTo&i, n a q aaxEVu^Eiv. Th. 5, 
55. TivS^ 6 fiEvo L Tovg AaxEd a Lf.iov lov g i^EazqaxEvad-ai. 

7. MEfivija&ai with a Part, to he mindful, to remember, with the Inf. 
to contemplate doing something, to intend, to endeavor. Mi^viip-ai sv 
n o iTj a ag zovg noXlzag, I remember to have done good ; ev n o Lrj a a l, 
I strive, wish, to do good. X. An. 3. 2, 39. fx e {i v i] a -if o) dvi] g u y a- 
S- g eIv a I. Cy. 8. 6, 6. [ov auigdnai) o xi dv ev xjj yi] Ey.uaxj] xaXov 
i] dya&ov fj, fXEfiVi]aovxaL y.al dEvgo an on Efxn e lv. S. 4, 20. 
(.1 E fj. V 1] a 7] 8 L axg i&rj V ai nEol xov y.dXXovg, thou wilt prepare to con- 
tend with me. 

8. (Palv EaS^ a L with a Pai*t. to appear^ apparere, to show one's self, with an 
Inf. to seem, videri. ^Ecp alv exo y.X a Iwv and xX acE iv. X. S. 1, 
15. xal dp.a Xiycav xavxa dnffiVxxEXo xe [o yEXmxonoiug) xn] xf] cpoiv^ 
aacpwg xXa lelv icpalvExo, to seem to weep. Th. 2, 20. avxoi o /w^og 
i(p a Iv EX ivaxQaxonsdEvaaL. 

9. 'Eo Lxiv a L with a Part, to be manifest, to be like, to resemble, § 310, 
Rem. 2., with the Lif. to seem, videri, ^Eoixaxs xvgavvlai fiixXXov, 7] 
noXixdaig ijdofxEvoi. X. Hier. 7, 1. solxev, tcprj, fuiya xi Elvat 



§ 311.] SYNTAX. DIFFERENCE BETWEEN PART. AND INF. 467 

1] iifii]. Cy. 1. 4, 9. noifi, oTiMg (iovln' av yixQ vvv ys rifiMV tot- 
yaq ^3 affilev g tiv a i. 

10. \4y y tXXs IV with a Part, is used of the annunciation of actual events, 
with an Inf. of the annunciation of thin»;s still uncertain, merely assum- 
ed. Dein. Ol. 2. (3). 29, 4. txnrjy y sk d^r) fhlhnnoq vf/lv iv 0(jay.i] tqI- 
Toi' // liiufJTOv hog tovtI "llQatov xst/o? noliOQy.MV (a settled fact). 
X. Cy. 1. 5, 30. 6 ^AaavqioQ stg lijv /mquv e fx^S u lis lv uyyillnui^ 
whether he had made an actual irruption or not, is luicertain. 

11. zlsixvvvat, and an ocp alv £iv with a Part, to show, to point out, 
with an Inf. to teach. *.Lid £ i ^ cc as vc 8 i y. i] a a v t a. X. An. 2. 3, 14. 
ucfiy.ovTO tig xutfiag, o 9tv a n sd si^ av oi ijyeiAovEg X a (x ^ dv s iv tu 
inuridfia. Dem. Cor. 272,135. [i] ^ovXi] Alax'^^'^^) y-^'' n q od 6ti]v 
street xal Tiaxo vow {\ulv anicpaiv sv (docuit). But the Inf. is 
placed after 8 tixvvv ai, when the object of this verb is not to be rep- 
resented as a thing perceived, but as a thing possible, e. g. X. C. 2. 3, 
17. vLv8vviV(Tiig e 71 1 d sl^ a i, gu jasv /orjcrTog t£ y.al cpdadeXcfog siv a l, 
fxfli'oc,' ds (pavXog if xal ovy, a^icg svei>yi{jlag. 

12. /JriXovv with a Part, to disclose, to reveal, with an Inf. to say, to an- 
nounce, to command. /IrjXoi as ccdixoiivTa. X. Ag. 1, 33. ;</j^r;'- 
fiaTV idi]Xov, rovg fxiv fXsi'>9fQiag dsojxsvovg Mg ngog av^i^xiy/ov 
ai'Tov naoslv ai [edixit, ut adessent). 

13. Jlotslv with a Part, to render, to represent, § 310, 4, (b), with an Inf. 
(a) to cause, (b) to suppose, to put a case. IJoiwffsysXMvta. JI o i oj 
as y sX av. PL Symp. 174:, c. axXtjT ov etto irj a sv {"Ofi7]Qog) e X~ 
■Qovxa Tov MsvsXfbiv £7il i-tiv ^oivriv. X. An. 5. 7, 9. txolm 
(5' v^a? i%anaTi]^ivTag y.ul y. axayoiiTsv&svjag iti' s(jloi) 
vxsiv 81 g fPuaiv, I ivill suppose, I loill put the case. 

14. Al a X ^ V i (T d a t and aldtlia&ai Avith a Part to he ashamed on ac- 
count of something which one does, with an Inf to be afraid to do a thing, 
to omit something through fear or shame. Ala/ vv o fxa l xuxa tt ^ « x- 
Tcov TOV q)iXov and aia/vvofiaL nana Jt q a tt s iv tov (plXov. X. 
Cy. 5. 1, 21. Tot'To fAsv (sc. anodidovnL xuoiv fn^na) fxe dvvaa&ai) ovy. 
a l u y vv ft fx L Xsy onv to. ds ' "Lav fisvi]Ts nao epol anodbiUM, tov- 
To, sv I'dTS, aiaxw Ifirjv av slnelv. S. Aj. 506. aid t a a l fxsv 
nuTEQa TOV (TOV if Xvy()bi yf'igci n q oXsln mv. X. S. 8, 33. tovtovc yaq 
av sffYi ol'ta&ai, palujia alSfXa-d^au aXXi!]Xovg an oXs Iti s t v. 35. 
al8 ovvT a L Toig naqovTag an oXsln s iv. R. L. 9, 4. ncig av Ti? 
ala/vv^EiT] Tof yay.ov (Tvvxrivov n aq aXa § siv. 

15. IIsQLOQav §310, 4. (e) is constructed (sometimes without marked 
distinction, though seldom,) with an Inf as avy/MQUP, ear, e. g. Th. 
4, 48. ot«5' ilgiivui sq)uauv y.aia dvpufiiv nsqioipsa&ai ovds- 
V a, they icould not permit that any one should enter. 'Kn it q in s iv, to 
permit, is comnjonly connected with an Lif , rarely with a Part. X. An. 
1. 2, 19. Tavii]v t)}v yo'igav in ix q s ip s d v a gn a a a l Tolg'LXXrjcnv. 
Isocr. Pac. rj noXtg c/.vxolg ova in lt q iip si naqa(ialvov<jt tov 
vopov. The verbs av sy sa d^ a l and vnofxivsiv with the mean- 
mg of audere, are constructed with the Inf Her. 7, 139. y.uTapsivavTsg 
av say ovT tov iniovxa inl T)]v ytoQtjv di^aad-ai. 

16.*'A(j y sa & a I with a Part., when it has the meaning of being in the be- 
ginning of an action^ or when the way and manner, in which the begin- 



468 SYNTAX. THE PARTICIPLE. [§312. 

ning of an action takes place, is to ])e stated ; with an Inf., when it means 
to he^into do somtthimr, to commence, (sotnethiiig intended), "JIq ^avz a 
ju Jil/T] olxodofjiOvvTii; and olxodoixilv. Th. 1, 107. ?'/ ^ ^ « v- 
70 yul ru fuixy.fju Ttl/^ ^AOrivalot olx o d o fitlv. X. Cy. 8. 8, 2. ix q ^ o- 
fiai didtxaxMV iy. Totv duMV. C. .'i. \, ^. nod^fv »/' C ^ « ^ d a e 8 l- 
d (X ax Eiv lyv aTQaii^yiav. 5, 22. ottotc tj u)Mltit> i'j (j ^o) fiuvS^uvEi v. 
6, 3. £x Ttvo? i*Q%li Tj)v noXiv evsQ/STslv. 5,15. {^Adrjvaloi) uno 
iCiV ncniqbiv u^;forT«t yiax acp q ov tUv twv yfQULrifjojv. 

17. Ilavsiv with tlie meaning to hinder is constructed with an Inf., e. g. 
PI. Rp. 416, c. Tuq oly.ijaeig xal lijv ulh]v ovalav ToiavTTjv avidlq nags- 
(Txsvda&aL {dil), ring fii'jrs Tovg (piO.uy.ug wg a q la j ov g livav naV" 
(TO i (xinovg xil. 

18. Ueiq u (T & a I. with a Part., to make trial of anything, to practise, § 310, 
4, (h), still this construction is rare ; with tlie Inf. to attempt to do some- 
thing ; naQaaxEvu^sad^ai is very often connected with the Inf. 
The Ionic phrase n avT o2o v ylyvEcrd^aL is constructed with the 
Ace. and Inf Her. 3, 124. navTolr] eyivsto pi) unodripijaat 
toy n oXvxQttT sa,she used every expedient, etc. 

§ 312. Th e Participle us ed to expr e s s Adv erhial 
sub 7' din ate Relations. (575—584.) 

1. The Part, is also used to denote that attributive qualifica- 
tion of a substantive, by which, at the same time, the predi- 
cate of the sentence is more exactly defined. In this case, the 
Part, expresses the adverbial relations of time, cause, motive or 
design, condition, and concession, way and manner. 

The English often uses a Part, in this case, e. g. he said laughing, [y s~ 
lav)', the city, besieged by the enemy, suffered much distress, {nvXig vno twv 
nohplwv noXioQxovpsv t]']. Instead of the Part., the English often 
uses either a subordinate clause, or a substantive wuth a preposition. In 
translating from English into Greek, when one wishes to use a Pait. in- 
stead of a subordinate clause, the following things are to be noted, 

2. When in English the subject of the subordinate clause is 
either the subject or object of the principal clause, then, both 
in Greek and Latin, the conjunction of the subordinate clause 
must be omitted, the finite verb of the subordinate clause 
must be changed into a participle which agrees in Gender, 
Number and Case with the subject when the subject in both 
clauses is the same, but with the object in like manner, when 
the object is the same in both clauses ; and, finally, the pro- 
noun in the principal clause, which denotes the subject or ob- 
ject, is omitted. This may be called the Participial construc- 
tion^ e. g. 



§ 312.] SYNTAX. THE PARTICIPLE. 469 

When the enemy Jied, they were pursued by the enemy. Ol noXi^ioL cpv^ 
yovTsg V7T0 jmv noXf^ilvdv idLMx&'rjaai'. When the Persians made an irrup- 
tion into the country, the Greeks went out against them. Tolg IIsQau tg 
sig ji}v yi^iy slg^aXovaiv oV'EkXtjvsg ijvavTKoS^ijaav. 

3. But when in English, the subordinate clause has a sub- 
ject, which is neither the subject or object in the principal clause, 
then, both in Greek and Latin, the conjunction of the subordi- 
nate clause must be omitted, the subject of the subordinate 
clause be put in the Gen. (Lat. Abl.), and the finite verb of the 
subordinate clause be changed into a Part, agreeing with this 
Gen. in Gender, Number and Case. This is called the Gen- 
itive absolute, e. g. 

" Jf'hen the ]>odies are exhausted tlie animal spirits become weaker." 
Tuv a 03 i^aT (ov -d^tjlvv o fisv oiv, y.al al ipv/al noli) ug^ojaroTSQaL yly- 
vovTUL X. O. 4, 2. 

Remark 1. The reason why the Greeks choose the Gen., has been seen 
in treating of the Gen., § 273, Rem. 11. 

Rem. 2. Subordinate clauses may be used instead of the participial con- 
struction, either for the sake of greater emphasis, or for perspicuity. 

4. The Participial construction and the Genitive absolute are 
used, as is seen in No. 1, in order to denote, 

(a) Some relation of time, where the English uses subordi- 
nate clauses, with the conjunctions siyice, as, (used of time), af- 
ter, ivheru ivhile, or a substantive with a preposition. 

X. C. 1. 2, 22. noXXol t« xqi]^aTa avaXcoaavrsg, av ngoa&sv and- 
yovTO y.sgdojy, alayQa vofil^ovTsg sivai, tovtcov ovx ans/ovTai, ajler wasting 
their money. So the frequent circumlocution with no Li]o-a g in the sense 
of thereupon. Her. 6, 96. ivingrjaav nal ra Iga y.al ttjv noXiv ' jama ds n a i-q- 
aavTsg inl rag uXlag vi'jfTovg avdyovTO, or with the repetition of the Part, 
of the preceding word. Her. 7 , 60. navrag tovtm tw Tgonaj i^rjgl&fit]- 
a av agi-d-{ii]aavTsgds y.axa s&vea dihaaaov. Gen. absolute, D. a, 88. 
oi'Tig i fiev ^ojvTog xal inl /d^ovl degxo^EVOto trol xolXjjg naga vrjval 
^agdag yngag inolasL. 

Rem. 3. The following participles, which may be sometimes translated in 
English by adverbs, also belong here, («) ugyofisvog, in the beginning, 
originally. Th. 4, 64. an^g y.al a g y 6 fisv og einov. (This is to be distin- 
guished from a g^d fiev og an 6 t lv og, which may be translated, prima- 
rily, especially, before all. The Part, dg^dj^svog agi'ees, for the most part, in 
Number, Case and Gender, with the substantive to be defined more ex- 
actly, e. g. PI. Rp. 600 e. olxoi'v Ji-&(Ofisv an 6 '^0 ^ii'ig ov dg ^afisvovg 

61 



470 SYNTAX. THE PARTICIPLE. [§ 312. 

TtfivT ag TO Ig noir^Tixovg fjifir,iug fldioXiav uQtiijg tlvai, that all the 
pods, parlkuUirhj Homer, etc. SonK.-tiriicsi, liowovcr, tljc Part, uqlu^ivos 
aiirccs with tlic; snlyoft of the sentence. PI. Syriii). 173, d. 5oY.Hg jxoi vnty- 
vojg nuvTU^ ur&Quiriovg uOliovg iiyHaOut 7T).r,v 2^o)y.(juTovg, unu aov u q^u- 
fiev og. ) — (/5) TiXiVT o) v, JhuiUi), at last. PI. Kp. 3(>2, a. xiXevtmv nuv^ 
Ttt y.uy.i). naO(x)r arudy.ndvlfvdriaiTai. X. An. (j. 3, 8. T£>1 e l't Oivxt? x«» 
ano Tou i'duiog fi(jyov (roi c />7J./^r«?) ol Oouy.fg. — [y] /JiuXmoiv / q 6v ov, 
after a ivhile, subsequently, or 8iuX. ttoXIv, oXlyov yq., e7ti(ryotv noXvv /oo- 
rov, fir/Quv. PI. Phuodon. 59, e. ov noXvv ovv ygovov in lu / ojv »jx«. 

Rem. 4. The Part, in the Gen. sometimes stands without a suhject, when 
the subject can be readily supplied from what goes Ijj'fore, or when the 
subject is indefinite, where a demonstrative pronoun, or the words nQuyiuu- 
TM, /Qr/unia, uv&QunoL, etc., used in a general sense, may be understood. 
Th. 1, 11(3. JIsQiy.Xrig oj/STO y.uTu Tit/og inl Kuivuv y.ul KuQtug, i gay y tX- 
'&8VT o)v, OTL (holvKTauL v)]ig sji avToi'g TiliovdLV. X. Cy. 1. 4, 18. arm a v- 
■&ivT(ov ds Toj AaxvixysL^ oit noXiixLol naiv iv ti] yo'^Qct, e^e.j07}&(i y.ocl aviog 
n(Jog T« oQia. 3. 1, 38. d laay.riv ovvt oiv ds (sc. «tTai*') ixstu to delTivov, 
iTxijOtTO 6 Ki'Qog. Also in the Sing. Th. 1, 74. aacfug dr^X o) & ivx o g, oil 
iv Toig raval xaiv 'EXXi']V(}W t« TTQuy^ura iyivEzo. Comp. the Latin cognito, 
edido, petito, etc., instead of postquam, cogniium est, etc. 

Rem. 5. In order to define the time more exactly, the preposition i re I is 
frequently connected with the Gen., yet only w'hen the Part, is in the Pres. 
tense, e. g/j^nl Kv q ov (jacriXsvovTog. See § 296, I, (2). The rela- 
tion of past time is sometimes made more definite by the preposition fisx a, 
after, with the Ace, e. g. Her. 6, 132. p.eToc ds to iv Maoa&ajvt tq oJp.a 
ysv 6 fj.sv ov MiXxLad^g «l'|fTo. See § 294, II, (2). The indefinite relation 
of time expressed by about, nearly, is indicated by vno with the Ace, e. g. 
vno Ti]v TV Q coTTjv intXd^ovdciv V vxTa, § 299, III, (2), and wliere 
two or more actions occur at the same time, this relation is expressed by 
ap.u with the Dat., e. g. li fi" ri fiig a diacpo}(Ty.ov(T jj, as soon as day- 
break, a fx a td} (j It 0) ay. fxd^ovT i, simulac fi'umentum adultnm est. 

Rem. 6. Li order to determine more exactly the relation of time, adverbs 
of time ai-e often used with the participial construction and the Gen. abso- 
lute, viz. avT ly.a, ev &v g, i % a I (f v t] g, p.sT a^v, a p. a. PL Rp. 328, c. 
EV&v g ovv ps 18 o)v 6 KicpuXog i](T7ia^eT6 ts xul drnv, simul ut me conspexit. 
Lys. 207, a. o l\hvi^ivog iy. Tr,g ojiAtJc p st a^ v n a lQcov ilgiQysTai, U'hile he 
played. Phaedon. 77, b. oncog ^i] u pa unod-vriay.ovTog t ov u r d- q (u- 
71 ov diaay.sdavvvTai ?/ ipvyrj, as soon as the man dies. Her. 9, 57. y.ul a ^ a 
xuT aXaS ovT eg TiQogey.suTo acpi, as soon as they had come up with the enemy, 
they attadied them. Th. 2, 91. iTiaLOJvi'Cov ts a^a nXiovTeg, inter navi- 
gandum. 

Rem. 7. In order to denote more clearly and emphatically the result 
of the action expressed by the Part, the following adverbs are verj^ often 
appended to the predicate of a sentence, viz. ivr avS-a, o vtu, ovt o) di], 
b) d s. X. C. 3. 10, 2. iy. noXXwv avvayovTsg xft fj ey.aaTOv xaXXiaTu, 
V T a g oXu tu acapuTU y.aXa noiHTt cfaivia&UL. 

(b) A cause, reason, where the English uses secondaiy clauses 
with the words since^ because^ asy inasmuch as, or a substantive 
with a preposition. 



§ 312.] SYNTAX. THE PARTICIPLE. 471 

X. C. 1. 'i, 2?. TToXXoi T« ;^()^//«T« «i'«Awo"«rTf?, wr 7TQoa-&Ev anuyovio y.fq- 
^wi', ttiu/Qci V o fi 1^0 VTfg drui, tovtmv ovk ctnsxovTCii, "many Iiaving 
squandered their estates, did not abstain from those gains from which they 
before abstained, because they accounted them base." 

(c) A motive, or a design, a purpose, where the English uses 
in order to^ with the Inf., or that, so that, with a finite verb. To 
denote this relation, the Fut. Act. Part, only (sometimes the 
Pres. Act.) is employed. This usage occurs most frequently 
with verbs oi g-oing; coming-, sending. 

Her. 3, 6. to vio \q yo ^la l cp q a a m v. 6, 70. eg /telq)ovg xQrja6jj.svog 
Ttj) xQriairjglb) nogsvsTaL. X. C. 3. 7, 5. as /s d id d^iav oi q fxtj^ at. 
nifiTKa as li ^ V T a, I send thee that thou mayest, to, in order to, say. 

(d) A condition, where the English uses a secondary clause 
with lohen, if; or a concession, where the English employs a 
secondary clause with the word although. 

X. Cy. 8. 7, 28. jovg q)lXovg EvsgyEXovvTsg y.al rovg iydqavg dwriasff-- 
^8 xoXa^siv, if ye confer benefits on fiends, etc. Isocr. Paneg. 41, 2. t wv 
a&XtjT ojv dig ToaavTrjv gMf^rjv Xa^ovtoiv, ovdsv uv nliov yivono Tolg «A- 
Xotg, kvog dk uvdgog sv (p qovi](T avTO g, anavTsg av unoXameiav oi ^ovXo- 
fxevoi xoivwvEiv zijg exsivov diavolag. X. Cy. 3. 2, 15. tag oXlya dwufXEVoi 

TlQOOQnV avd^QOJTlOV JISQC TOV fisXXoVTOg TloXXu imXElQOVlXEV ngaTTSLv! Al' 

though men can foresee little, yet, etc. 

Rem. 8. When the Part, expresses a concession, the particles y,at, y.a /- 
UEQ, xfjCLTo L (rarelv), y.al t avr a, are subjoined. X. An. 1. 6, 10. ngog- 
fy.vvri(Tav x a In Eg e18 6t sg, otl enl ^aruTO) ayoiTO. Eur. Ph. 1618. oux Sv 
ngodolriv ov d ett Eg n gd aa otv y.ay.aig. PI. Prot. 339, c. oi'ds y.oi efijuiXsMg 
to Ilmd'AELOV vsfxExai, y.alTOi aocpov nugd (pbnog slg rj fiiv ov. PI. Rp. 
404, h."Oj.irigog iv Toig twv rigwcav soTidasaiv ovte lyd^voLV avTovg hajiri, y. al 
1 av T a ETcl d^aXccTTTj ev ''EXXi]gn6vT0i oviag, though they ivere, etc. The words 
(i a)g^ eIt a, y.nx a, eti e n a, xunEita, are often added to the predicate 
of the sentence. Her. 6, 120. vcpTEgoi Se dmy.o fx evo i ttJ? (Tv^i[joXi]g, (proe- 
lio), luEigovTO ofioig d-Ei](Taad^ai lovg Mi'i^ovg. PI. Charmid. 163, a. vno-- 
& E ^EV g aMcpgoavvriv Eivai to tw ec.vtov TtgaxxELV ettelt a ovdsv cpriat y.w- 
XvEiv y.al Tovg t« Toir dXXcov ngaiTovjag atocfgovslv. "0 fA Mg is often in poe- 
try subjoined to a Part., e. g. Aesch. S. 712. nsl-dov yvvai^l y.amsg ov axig- 
ywv o^(x)g, or, (which also sometimes occurs in prose) is placed before the 
Part., e. g. PI. Phaedon. 91, c. 2'ifxjjlag cpoiSsixai, fit) ?} iitvyrj o fxong y.al -^sio- 
TEQOV xal xuXXiov ov xov (Tw,u«Tog ngoanoXXvi]xaL. 

(e) The way and manner, also the means, where the English 
sometimes uses a participial noun with a preposition. 

rsXoiv EiTiev, he spoke laughing. X. Cy. 3. 2, 25. Xrj'i^ 6 (xsv o l ^waiv 



472 SYNTAX. THE PARTICIPLE. [§ 312. 

(rai)tii vivuiit, they live by phindcring). C. 3. 5, IG. TiQouiQOvvjai fxuXlov ov- 
TM xfQduU'SLv UTC uXh']Xb)v , i] avvbJcpsXovvtEg aviovq. Is(K:r. Paiiath. 
241, (1. Tovg"]l}.Xi]va.q idldu^uv, ov tqotiov dioixovvitg lug uvToJv tiutqI- 
dag xal riQog o'lg n o Is fio vvrsg fxf/ulrjv tt]v Vi7,P.«(5a noL7,atLuv. So often 
X g (x> (xBv g with the Dat., where the Eiijrli.sh may use the i)rei)Osition ivith^ 
e. g. 71 oXlf] tixvri xQoifxsvog rovg noXffxiovg iviy.Tjaev. 

Rem. 9. Here belongs the phmae, X r] q f 7 g t'/wy, or in tlie question, 
t/ XTjQslg I'/ tor; i. e. thou trijlest so, or ivhat is the reason that thou so 
triflest ? proi)erly so hehavest thyself. PI. Gorg. 490, e. noHu vTiodi'jfiaTu 
q)Xv ag sTg t/ av ; ivhat makes you always prate so much about sJwes ? Here 
belong also the Part, q) eg 6 fxsv og, and q) i q mv, summo studio, maximo 
impetu, used intransitively, commonly with the accompanying idea of cen- 
sure, with verbs of motion. Her. 8, 91. oxcag da xtvsg rovg ^A'&rjvalovg dia- 
(pvyoiev, cp SQ 6 ^£v V (cum impetu delati) igijumov eg lovg Alyivi]ittg. 
8, 87. [vavg) diMxofzivrj vno t^? ^ATTLHijg (pig ov a a hi^uXs vr'^C (fiXlri (cum 
impetu aggressa est amicam navem). 

Rem. 10. In like manner the Greek employs the participles sxoav, 
uy biv, (psQ(x) V, Xa^ojv, where the English may use the preposition ivith ; 
sx to ?^ is used both of animate and inanimate objects which may be in the 
possession of any one, ayuv of animate objects, cpiqcav of inanimate, Xa(jwv 
of both, e. g. X. Cy. 1. 3, 1. EQyj.tai ')] MavSavrj ngog tov nmigu xal xov 
Kvgov thv vlov ex ova cc, with her son Cyrus, etc. So 6 Kigog ^Icpog <jp s- 
gwv 7tgogi]XaaEV, 'innov aywv rjXd^sv, inniag Xapbjv xovg noXEnlovg xa- 
Tsdi^jo^ev. The Homeric and Poetic language often connects the participles 
l/cov, cpigojv, Xa^MV and uycav w'ith verbs of giving, placing, etc., in order to 
present the idea of the action that preceded the giving and placing, graph- 
ically, as it were, before the eyes of the hearer. II. tj, 305. doixs ^i(fog ug- 
yvgorjXov aw xoXeco t s q) ig wv xal ivT{j.i]jo) xsXa^^vi. 

5. Instead of the Gen. absolute, the Ace. is also used, but 
this is confined almost wholly to instances where the Part, 
stands without a definite subject, consequently where the verb 
is impersonal, e. g. i^ov, ivhile, ivhen, since it is or ivas al- 
loived, (fi-om assort, it is allowed, it is laiufid,) or with imperson- 
al phrases, e. g. alaxQov or, luliile, because, since it is or icas 
shameful, (fi-om aloygov hriv, it is shamefid) . The idea of ex- 
tension in time, which is expressed by the Ace, § 279, 6, is, in 
this construction transferred to the state or condition of an ob- 
ject ; the conjunctions, ivliile, since, express this coiTcsponding 
relation. 

(a) Accusative absolute. PI. Menex. 246, d. ^]ntv i^ov Qv fii] xaXag, 
KaXwg algovfisd-a fiaXXov ztXEVxav. Her. 1, 129. nagsov uvtm (iaaiXia ys- 
vsa&UL, a'AAw nsgtE&ijxE to xgaiog. 5,49. nagixov (quum liceat) t?J? 
Aairig naarjg agxuv Evnsiitog, aXXo xi algr\atad^B ; 3, 65. a^tXcpeoxxovog, o^- 



§ 312.] SYNTAX. THE PARTICIPLE. 473 

div dsov (qmim fas nou esset, fieri non deberet), yiyova. So n a q n- 
a Xov or vn a g/ or, n agov, quum lir.eat, liceret ; rv/ov; d 6 ^av av~ 
To7t,', (luum iis visum sit, or essei, doxovv (quum videatur, videretur); 
71 Q ogijx or, quum deceat, deceret. Passive participles, Th. 1, 125. d e- 
do/fiivov ds ul'Tolg, fv&hg fiiv (xdvvaTa it]v inLXfiQUV anugaaxsvoig ov- 
(TLV. Eigii^iv ov, quum dictum sit, esset. Adjectives with ov, e. ^. ul- 
a X g 6 V o V, quum turpe sit, esset ; u 8 tjX ov ov, d vv a z 6v ov, a dv p a- 
T ov o V. Also without o v, e. g. dijXo v. 

(b) Accusatives absolute. The subject is, however, commonly only a 
neuter pronoun, not a substantive. Her. 2, 66. r avt a ds y iv 6 fx sv a, 
these things having occurred, etc., nivd^sa iisyala jovg Aiyvmlovg aaxaXafi- 
(Sdvsi. Th. 4, 125. I'ldtj aucpojigoig (.dv doxovv avritxo)gHV, v.vgw^kv 8s 
ov8sv (sed quum nihil decretum esset), f/co^otT sti oTxov. X. H. 3,2, 19. 
8 6^ avj a 8s t a in a xal nsguvS-svra, t« ^sv (nguiivficna anii'k&sv. 

Rem. 11. The Gen., however, stands with those impersonal verbs Avhere 
the subject is in a degree implied in the verb, e. g. vovtog, aaXni'CovTog 
§ 238, Rem. 3. (b). Elsewhere the Gen. seldom occurs with impersonal 
verbs and phrases, e. g. X. Hipp. 4, 2. a8ijXov ovTog, si xtX. 

6. The particle of comparison cog is connected with a Part., 
when the action expressed by the Part, is to be indicated as 
something imagined, conceived of, especially as a conjectural 
reason. Such a Part., connected with <» s, signifies the same 
thing as a Part, of a verb denoting to thinkj or to say, followed 
by an Inf , or Ace. with an Inf. 

(a) Simple Participle. X. Cy. 1. 1, 1. ol xvoavvsiv snixHgi](TavTig, y.av 
onoauvol'v xgovov agxovTsg Siayspojvjai, d'ai\ua'^ovxai^ m g aocpot ts y.al sv- 
rvxtlg ysysvrjfxivoi properly, are admired, being thought to be wise men, 
= vofii'^ofisvoL (Tocpoi Ts y.al sviv/stg ysyfvrjCr&at). PI. Rp. 329, a. aya- 
vay.rovaiv, tag (xsyalov tivmp unsaxsgriixsvoi (i.e. i]yovy.svoi (isy. 
T. ansaxsgr^ad^ui). "Sl g is veiy often connected with the Fut. Act. Part., when 
a purpose in the mind of another is expressed, X. An. 1. 1, S.^Agxix^sg^rjQ 
avXla^i^avsv KvQov wg anoaxsvojv. So also veiy often, w-ith nagcc- 
(Txsva'^sa&aL^ § 310, 4, h. 

(b) Genitives absolute. X. H. 7, 5, 20. iiugriyysdEV uvzolg nagady.sva^s- 
<T&ai, w? ^oixrjg i a o ixsvr] g {'i.e. Xi y cav fiayriv tasad-ai). 5. 4,9. sy.ijgvi- 
xov iiiivuL navxag Ori^ulovq, oj g xaiv xvgavvMV x s&v swx (av (quia tyi'an- 
ni mortui essent). Th. 1, 2. sg "iwviav vaxsgov, ag ol'X Ixavrjg ovarjg xi}g 
\4xiLy.rig, unoiy.lug s^iTisfiipav (i. e. vo(xl^ovxsg ol'x lxavi]V sivai). 

(c) Accusative absolute. PI. Rp. 425, a. xdlg rjfxsxsgoig Tiaialv svvo- 
(icaxigov sv&i'g naidilxg (is^sxxsov, m g, naguvc^ov yiyvofxsvrjg avxijg, svvo- 



474 SYNTAX. THE PARTICIPLE. [§ 313. 

(lovg re xal anovdulovg avdQag uv^uriad^aL u dv v ux ov ov. X. An. 5. 2, 
12. o 8s Tolg ntlxuaiulg nuac 7iuQiiy/(XXe dii]/y,i'Xb}fjiivovg Uvul, ojg, onoiaf 
(TTj^i^vT], uxovTi^tiv S s tj a V. So btg t^ov, wg nuQov, etc. 

((I) Acciisjitives al)S()lute. X. C. 1. 2, 20. dio xul roug vlug ol nuriQig, xuV 
wffi aM(pgoveg, oftwg ano xoiv novr,no)V uvx^QMnwv t'iQ/ovaiv, oi g Tt]V juiv 
Tb)V XQtjOTbJv u ^ I, ?. I u V (X(jy.i]aLV ovcav ii,g UQiTijg, ttjv di io)v novrfQOiV 
xaiuXvaiv. 3, 2. ei/fTO di nqog rohg -Ohohg unXbtg luyud^u bidovui, aig 
t ov g x} f i' g Kullidxa eld or u g. This construction is very common, 
and is not limited to a pronominal subject, like the one mentioned in No. 
5,(1)). 

Rem. 12. A peculiar use of the Gen. absolute, in connection with w g, 
occurs with the verbs sid sv ai, inlaxuaS^ai, v oetv, 1% eiv yv(o- 
^iriv, d I tty'SliaS^ a L X7]v yvcafirjv, q>QOvxrCeivi also sometunes with 
Xiy ELV, and the like verbs, where, instead of the Gen. absolute, the Ace. 
of the substantive with a Part, or the Ace. with an Inf., should stand as 
the object. The result of the action of the Gen. is commonlydenoted by 
ol'ro) joined to the predicate. X. An. 1. 3,6. coc ifiov ovv lovxog, 
onrj av y.ai Vfj,e1g, ovxo) xriv yv ca ^tjv s/ sx s {me iturum esse, quocunque 
etiam vos, stati^ite). Cy. 2. 3, 15. w g ovv i fxov ys y.al aycoviovfievov 
xal, onolog av xig w, y.axu xijv a^lav ^s xifxav a^icjcrovxog, ovxoyg, i'cfT], 
b) KvQS, ylyvMO-y.s. PI. Crat}l. 439, c. d lav otjS^ svx eg w§ iovxcov 
X e an avx biv asl y.al q eovx mv [repidantes, omnia semper ire et Jluere.) 

Rem. 13. Instead of w c, w gnh q [quasi] is sometimes connected with the 
Pait. In order to bring out emphatically an objective ground or reason, 
the particles axe {axe drj), oia, oiov (in the Ionic writers, also, wgxe) 
are connected with the participle. Her. 6, 79. axe ttvxvov iovxog xov 
aXaeog, oiy. MQMv ol ivxog xovg exxog. X. An. 4. 8, 27. axe S^ e (o fiiv av 
TWJ' exaiQuv, iToXXrj (fiXoveixla iylyvexo. 5. 2, 1. ot 7\oA/of, axe ixne- 
nx axoxeg [ex] xmv ohiaiv, inasmuch as they had been driven out of their 
houses, etc., noXXol ijcrav a&gooi xul vneqexadr^vio inl xwv axgav. Th. 2, 5. 
Tjaav xal av&QbmoL y.axa xovg ayqovg, o \ a anqogdoxi^xov y.axov iv elgijvr} 
yevofievov. PI. Charm. 153, a. oiov dia ygovov afpiyixivog aani- 
vag fja enl rag ^vv^&eLg diaxQi^ag. 

§ 313. Sp e cial peculiarities in the Participial 
construction. (sss-ost.) 

1. The Nom. of a Part, often refers to a preceding substantive in the 
Dat., Ace. or Gen., when the Dat., Ace. or Gen. in the preceding clause in- 
dicates the object in a grammatical point of viev/, but the subject in a logi- 
cal respect, e. g. in doxel ^loi = iyw rjyov^ai, I think. 

(a) Dative. Th.3, 36. edo^ev avrolg (i. e. iipriCflcravxo, voted,) avxovg 
naqovxag ^ovov anoxxeJvai, alXa xal xovg anavxag JllixvXrjvalovg inixa- 
Xovvxeg x.x.X. (as Sdlust. Jug. 102. populo Romano melius visum — rati). 
6, 24. eg bi g ev in ea e n aa i v {= ene&i\uovv navxec) ojuolwg exnXevGai ' 
xotg (liv ngea ^vx ig I g ag — xaxaaxgeii)Oiueroig icp a enXeov, — xolg 
S' iv TjXixia — EV iXn idsg ovxeg (Tb]&r,<Tead^ai. (b) Accusative. Eur. 
Hec. 970. aldag fl t/£i (== aldov^ai) iv xo)8e noxfioj xvyx^ivova'' Xv elfu 



§313.] 



SYNTAX. THE PARTICIPLE. 475 



vvv. (c) Genitive. Her. 4, 132. z/ a (> c / o i^ ?/ yvaifxT) etjv (= iylyvcaaxfv) 
tixa^tov. Til. 4, 23. T« nf()l IIvXov vn u fx cp o x if) wv xaxu KQuioq 

inoXsfiflTO (=T« 7lf qI II. a(U(fUTfQOl ETloXsfXOVv), Ax}-1]V ttlo (, fiiv TIjV 

yijaov n s q m Xsovt t g — , IIsXonovvijdioL de iv ij"! ^Jlntiqo) ax q ax- 
OTisdsvofisvot (conip. § 2(j(), 3). Sometimes the Ace. and Dut. of the 
Ptirt is constructed according to the sense of the preceding phrase or 
clause, and not according to its grammatical form, e. g. S. El. 479, sq. 
V n £(T X I (J, I ^gdaog udvnvoMV y.Xvovaav a^fxloig ovsiquxmv (instead 
of x^Qiiaog fn s exsi nXvovaav). Th. 1,G2. 7/v 8e yvMixi] x o v \4q ta- 
rs tag {^sdo^s xo) 'a Q tax el) x6 fisv ^ed^ iaviov aigoixoTiEdov axovxi 
iv XM^Ia&f.ao innrjoslv xovg^Ax^rjvaiovg. 

Remark 1. On the Nom. of the participle in the partitive apposition, see 
§ 266, 3. The Nom. of the Part, sometimes stands hi a sentence alone, 
without a finite verb, so that the Part, apparently, but only apparently, takes 
the place of the finite verb. The finite verb must then be supplied from 
the preceding or following sentence. Her. 1, 82. Aay.i8uL^iQVioi ds xu ivav- 
xla xoixcav s-d^svxo vofxov ov yuQ xoixwvxEg nqo xomov ccno xovxov 
Tio^uv (sc. vo}.iov edEvxo). So also with conjunctions, e. g. fl, iuv, oxav, etc. 
X. C 2. 1, 23. oQb) as unoQovvxa, nolav odov inl xov (jlop XQunrj' sav ovv 
ifis cpiXiiV 71 1 7] a ot ft E V g {scW. xy]v inl xov ^lov odov ZQantj). In very 
many passages, however, the Part, may be exT^lained by inserting eI(xL 

2. The genitives absolute sometimes occur where the subject of these 
genitives is not different from the subject of the predicate, or an object of 
the predicate ; here it is to be noted, that the subject of the participle is of- 
ten wanting, since it can be easily supplied, see § 310, Rem. 4. The rea- 
son of this peculiar construction is commonly found in the tendency to ex- 
press the member of the sentence with greater emphasis. 

Instead of the Nominative. Th. S, 13. ^ otjS^ tja dvx (x)v v (xmv nqo&v- 
H(og noXiv nQogXrupsa&E, you aiding, you ivill more readily, etc. 70. y.al eg X6- 
yovg xaxaaxuvxav [Kegy-VQalcov) eiprjcplaapxo K egy.v q a%o l. X. Cy. 
1. 4, 20. xuvxa eln ovxo g av xov edo^e xi (sc. aiixog) Xeyetv xco ^Aaxvayei. 
Instead of the Accusative. Her. 9, 99. ol Sa^ioi, anLxofiEvojv "Ax^t]- 
valb)V a 1/ (xa X (OX (t) V — xovxovg Xvaix^evot nuvxug anone^novai — 
eg xug^A&r,vag. Instead of the Dative. Th. 1, 114. y.ul eg avxiyv 8lu^3e- 
^fjxoxog r^di] IIeq vaXeov g — riyyiXd^rj wutw [lleQiyleT). 

Rem. 2. These examples must be distinguished from those in Homer, 
where the Gen. of a Part, follows a Dat. of a pronoun, or the Dat. of a 
Part, follows a Gen. ; instead of the_ possessive Gen., Homer sometimes 
uses the Dat. Od. i, 257. 7]fiXv d" avxs y.axey.Xaa^'q cplXov i]xoq dsiauv- 
x(t)v cp&oyyov xe (jugvv avxov xe tteXoiqov {= ij fi m v rixog). 458, sq. td» 
xi ol iyyJq)aX6g yE dia aniog aXXvdig uXXf] &eivo(j,8vov galoixo uQog ov- 
8ei. H. $, 14:l.^AxQeldrj, vvv 8ij nov "AxiXXijog uXoov ySjQ yi]S-Ei ivl axyj- 
■&EaaL (povov y.al q)v'Qav ^A/aiojv d e q y. o fj. i v oj. 



476 SYNTAX. ADVERB EXPRESSING OBJECTIVE RELATION. [§314. 



SECTlOiN VI. 

§314. The Adverb, as expressing the Objec- 
tive relation. (^y.) 

The objective relation is, finally, expressed by adverbs. Ad- 
verbs denote the relation of place, time, way and manner, the 
quantity of a predicate or attribute, or of another adverb, e. g. 
iyyvd-av jjX&ev, X'^ ^^ aTit^rj, aaXc^ g ccTTtd^avev, noXXd'Aig rj),- 
'Oev ; these are to be viewed in a certain sense as resembling 
the Cases of substantives, since by them, as has been seen, the 
relations just mentioned are expressed. Hence it is seen why 
most adverbs have a definite inflexion for Cases, e. g. ov, idiere, 
avco, y,dr(o, oi, Oixoi, tti^, otzi], etc., § 101, 2. 

Reimark. In addition to the above adverbs, the language has other 
adverbs, w^hich do not, hke those mentioned, define the predicate more ex- 
actly, but express the relation of the predicate to the subject. These are 
called Modal Adverbs. They denote the certainty or uncertainty, the ex- 
tension or limitation, the afiirmation or negation of the proposition ; or they 
exhibit the proposition interrogatively. Several of them have been changed 
from adverbs to mere suffixes, and hence always depend on a particular 
word, which by them is made emphatic. The interrogative adverbs will 
be treated under the subject of interrogative sentences. The remaining 
adverbs mentioned, are here treated more particularly. 

§ 315. A. z///, dijta, S-^v, drjd-ev, d^Tzov&ev, dai. (591—593.) 

1. jdi] is the abridged form of }]di], being conformed to it in usage ; but 
it cannot, like ijdr], stand as the first word in a sentence (except in the Epic 
d)) TOTE, turn vero, di) yuQ. jam enim), but is used as a mere suffix, § 314, 
Rem. It denotes in general that which is certain, sure, settled, a pointing to 
something known {already, now, even, certainly) ; it is not used of a particular 
time exclusively, but may refer to any time. It is very often employed, in 
order to denote a consequence which follows of itself, nothing further being 
taken into the account. Tama, a vvv drj Xiyeig, just now, a vvv d 1) 
sksyEg, even now. X. Cy. 4. 1, 23. vvv d ?/ ah drjlcoasig, el uXrj&rj eh/Eg, now 
certainly. Ovdav 8rj y.axov nEnov&anEV, nihi\ jam or nihil dum. Ovdh di) 
xaxov TiELaofiEd-a, niliil jam = further. With an Imp. or Subj. expressing an 
exhortation, it signifies now then. X. C. 1. 2, 41. dlda^ov d j/ nQog tmv d^Ewv, 
now then teach. ^'Io3{j.ev di], now then let us go, come now. After relatives, it 
often denotes a reference to a thing which is known. X. Hier. 11, 8. xal 
nQbJTOv [iEV EV&vg y.aTEig/acTfiEvog av Elrjg to (pdEld&ai vno twv aq'/o^iEvav, 



§ 315.] SYNTAX. ADVERBS. 477 

ov d 1} av irxi &vj.toty Ti7;^(I»'5ic, qiiod uti satis constat expetis. Hence in f idij^ 
whereas, [since now), qiioiiiam (i. e. qiiuin jain), because now, i)iiisqiie, in re- 
spect to something conceded, known ; w? di\, seeing that, quandoquidem, d 
8}], si jam, if now. In a scries of sentences connected li}' y.al, dn is placed 
after the word whicli is to be made emphatic. PI. Men. 87, e. vyina, cpr/.- 
/jsv, yal la/lg xal y.aV.og y.al nXo ii t o g 8ij. So y.ul to ^?) ^iyLOTOV, 
further, ullog js — y.al di) xal. Her. 1,30. elg AI'/vtctov aTily.no nr/Qa 
*'Aj.iaaiv, y.al 8 t] y.al sg ^ugdig naga KgoXaov. — Ti ovv dij; Jlcog ovv 5?); 
How now then, how I pray '^ 

2. In general, 8 i] is very often used in order to render emphatic and de- 
fine more exactly, the word after which it stands surely, even, (in English 
often indicated only by the tone of voice). X. Cy. 2. 3, 13. fisya q)Qovovaiv, 
OTt nsnal8svvTaL 81] xal ngog Xi}xov xal nqog di'ipav xal ngog glyog xaQTSQHV, 
just because they have been taugJit, etc. PI. Prot. 320, a. 8s8ioig tisqI uvtov, 
fii] 8ia(pdaQfi 8)] vn "Alxi^iadov, lest he should be corrupted, forsooth. With 
adjectives and numerals, it has either a hmiting or enlarging sense, accord- 
ing to the nature of the adjective or numeral, e. g. /xovog 8 r], quite alone, iv 
^ga/H 81], aad-svrjg 8rj, nolXol Si], nollaxig 8ri, xqajLOTOL 81]. With a 
pronoun it expresses the distinction, importance, prominence of a person 
or thing as known, e. g. sxEivog 8ri, that [well-known) man, ah 81) ravxa hoX- 
fxi](Tag; ovtco 8rj, evrav&a 5»;; so with other interrogative pronouns, X. C. 
4. 4, 10. xal nolog 81^ (Toi, scprj, omog Xoyog iaxiv; Eur. Med. 1012. rt 
8ri xaTT]q)iTgoi^(xa xal 8axQVQgo£Tg; So Tl 8 rj noxs ; what then in all the 
ivorldf Tig 8r] ovv; ivho then now, who I pray '^ With an indefinite pro- 
noun, it increases the indefiniteness, e. g. ccXXol 81^, others, whoever they may 
be, oaog 8/], onoaog 8r„ ogxtg 81], nescio quis, t,fiv onocrov 8 rj xQovov, who 
knows how long ? With conjunctions and other particles, it signifies, (a) even^ 
precisely, e. g. w? 81], lira 87'], indeed, just exactly, just even ; (b) truly, when a 
thought is to be expressed with assurance and decision, e. g. ^ 8 ?;, 1] fi «'- 
Xa 81], xal 81'], 8t^ nov, certainly indeed [= quite surely), [Dein. Cor. 33. 
tavja yaq dlxatd eail (iol nsgl twv avxiav roXg aXXoig Sijnov], ov 81] nov, 
yet surely not at all [= certainly not), yaq 81], for surely. 

3. /liira, which is formed from 8 ?), serves like 81^, only in a higher de- 
gree, to render prominent, and more exactly define the word, which stands 
before it. It raay be joined with all the parts of speech, in order to define 
them, whether it be to extend or limit them. It is veiy often used after 
interrogatives, e. g. rt ^tJt', insi8uv tovto yivr^Tau; quid turn demum 
dicetis, quiun hoc factum erit? It is also quite frequently employed in 
answers [even, precisely so, certainly so). Also, 1] 811% a, yes, forsooth, v 
8 rjT a, minime vera, fx i] Sijt a, certainly not, e. g. ^^ 5 »J t a 8gdarjg tavxa ; 
xal 8ti]x a, and forsooth. 



478 SYNTAX. CONFIRMATIVE ADVERBS. [§ 31 G. 

4. The enclitic i^ ?J v is a Doric particle, but it also ap|)ears in the Epic 
Iniiguaire. In Homer, Oi^v has always an ironical sense, like the Attic (5»J- 
Txov, lolihiul douhl^ccrUiinbj. II. ;5, 104. ov i]v /.iiv nuliv uvjig uvi,(TSi ^v- 
(.lug (t/i'ir(i)o rsimUiv (jiiai)S,ag unidtluig inifaaiv. 

5. zJ 7} Q-fv (from di] anrl l/»/V) almost always ex{)resses scorn, irony (sci- 
licet, iriih/, indeed) ; it denotes very seldom a mere, simple explanation. X. 
Cy. 4. 0, 3. atfnffiipduriv [rov vlov), }iiya (pQovuJv, un 8 7, d^ sv {tru'y) ivg 
(iuyJiliotg dvyciToog oipoijiriv juv euuv itov p'wucrTjv. 

G. J )] r[ ov 'J sv (from 8)]-iov and &riv\ I hope so indeed^ certainly {nempe, 
ironically). X. Cy. 4. 3, 20. f'/oi 8e t}v InnfVfLV uuOot, oxav ftiv cnt tol Vrr- 
7T0V ysri'iuui, tm tot Innoy.ErTuigov 8 r,n o v '} « v SLUTTQu^ofiui, I shall, as I 
hope, ad the pad of a centaur. 

7. z/« t is a lengtliened form of 8)] (as rut of r{]\ It is used only in the 
phrases il 8ul\ Tiojg 8 a I; it expresses the idea of surprise, wonder, [hoiv 
so'? ain^ iu^ itant'? itane vero?) 

§ 316. B. Co nfi r in ativ e A d v e r b s . (594.) 

1. M i'l V (Dor. and Ep. {uav) expresses, like vero, confirmation, assurance, 
protestation, truly, and often, like vero, is used in antitheses, still, but. It can- 
not, however, stand as the fust word in a sentence, as it commonly depends 
on another word, and that the most important in the sentence, particularly 
on particles. Its use with particles is as follows, (a) 7/ u t] v, indeed, cer- 
tainly, hence used particularly with oaths, asseverations, or solemn promises. 
X. Cy. 4. 2, 8. T« ni(JTa 8l8ojaiv avrotg, i] fii]v oig (pD.oig y.al ttkttoIs XQri- 
a^a&m uvTolg. — (b) Ov jiii'iv, 1^1] ^i]v, truly not. — 'c) K al ui]v. and in- 
deed, yes surebj, very good. PI. Phaedon. 58, e. y. al p >; v tyuiys d^uvuuaia 
%-iud-ov TTaoayn'uun'og. Kal pi'iv is often used, when a new assertion is 
adduced to strengthen the meaning. Od. )., 582. y.ul ui) v Tarxulov ngn- 
8ov ; so, often iu the dramatic writers when attention is to be directed to 
the entrance of a new person. Also y.al p i]v y.al, et vero etiam, and in- 
deed too; y.al pi]v o v 8 i, and indeed not even. — (d)'^AA« pijv, at, sed 
vero, hut, but indeed. In a question, T I pt] v : n: cu c p i] v ; quid vero ? quid 
quaeso ? 

Re3iark. Instead of p tj v, the Ionic writers employ the shorter form 
fiiv, which, as well as pi]vandi fuav, is also found in Horn. So in the Attic 
dialect, f.isv is sometimes used instead of pi]v, e. g. in an answer. X. C. 
I. 4, 4. noTEQa yvco^UTjg soya y.()lvfig; — nosTisi uiv t« f;T oicptXila yiyvopiva 
yvb^pr,g BQyu dvai. This confirmative ^w s v, instead of ^»;i', occurs in the 
following connections, (a) Msv t o l expresses confirmation, surely, very of- 
ten iu antitheses, like vero, to denote a hmitaiion ; so, x«t psvToi, ov 
pivT I, « A A « usvT L. — (b) Msv ov V or pkv ovv, sane quidem, quite 
certainly, yes indeed, is used, for the most part, only in repetitions, e. g. navv 



§ 317.] SYNTAX. EMPHATIC SUFFIXES yt, nSQ, tOt\ 479 

ft sy ov I', very often wlien some correction is made. X. C. 2. 7, 5. ol nn~ 
((« (Tot Toi'ro)»' oldiv eiuTTavTai noiflr; — Jlihiu fiiv ovv, but those with you 
know nothing: of these things'^ yes, everythinp;, immo omnia. 8o o v or ft )) fts- 
voir, iinmo uon. — ^c) JMsrdij or /.itv d n], quite ccrtaiiily, always in the 
jihrases >) jUfr(5iJ, or fifvd}], uD.u {.ifrd/,, xal fisvdij, yi (xsv — 
8)', instead of/] fiijv dt], etc. On the concessive ,ufV, see § 3'22, 3. 

2. 7/ expresses confirmation, pro/edo. In order to strengthen it, jj,rjv is 
often snbjoined. 7/ n o v, surely indeed^ often ironically. The Epic i; t o t 
like i], strengthens tlie meaning. 

3. JN' V in the Epic expresses a protestation, asseveration, bnt always in an 
ironical or scornful manner (like the Attic 8r,Tiov\ well now, indeed, nempe. 

4. Nij, the Lat. nae, expresses a protestation, but only in affirmative sen- 
tences, e. g. vi] Toj' zJla, in truth. — From vri is formed the lengthened vai 
(as dal from di,), which has the same meaning, and is often used with fiu. 
— Mu denotes, likewise, an asseveration in affirmative sentences, val fitx 
tov zlla^ in negative, ov^ia tov zlia. But where fiu Ala is expressed 
without a negation, then a negative clause precedes or follows, or it is clear 
from the context and from an appended adversative particle, that the sen- 
tence is to be understood as negative, like X. C. 3. 13, 3. 



§ 3 1 7. C. E m p h a tic s uffi x e s y f , 71 e q, to L (595—597.) 

1. JHq is the enclitic, and hence the abridged form of the adverb niqi, 
through and through (Lat. per). The radical meaning of nsQ is through and 
through, throughout. Iliq agrees with yi in this, viz. that it expresses an in- 
crease, but it diffijrs from ys, as it denotes the outward dimension of this 
increase, consequently, its measure, size, contents ; yi, on the contrary, dec- 
notes the inw^ard quality of this increase, consequently, the degree, the real 
value, or strength of it. Li the Common Language, Triq is not used alone, 
but in relation to another thought. Hence it is often connected with con- 
junctions and relatives, e. g. OQUBQ, throughout, or the very same, who, oaoqriFQ, 
altogether as great, e. g. oic'c Tif^, throughout, or entirely of such a character, as^ 
etc., oTTOv 71 ((J, everywhere, wherever, od^fv tuq, even hence, ivhcnct, t(x)gniq,sofar 

forth, as far as, indniQ, since, ins id i^heq, forasmuch, seeing that, whereas, d'nsQy 
if indeed, if moreover. In Eng. the meaning of both particles is often given 
only by heightening the tone of the word to which they belong. 

2. Fs denotes emphasis, an inward force, certainty, assurance, and thus 
renders an idea emphatic and marked ; it may be used either to augment 
or limit the force of a word, e. g. iyix) ys, I indeed, av ys, ovTog ys, nolXa ys, 
okiya ys, etc. It depends, like the enclitics, on the word whose meaning 
it renders emphatic. In connection with relatives and conjunctions, it 
serves to strengthen and complete a clause. So, ogy s, who or which indeed^ 



480 SYNTAX. NEGATIVE PARTICLES OVA AND fit]. [§ 318. 

qui quidem, ojgnEQ y e, tlye, if indeed, siquidem ; after tlie adversative con- 
junctions, xuLToi, ys, uXXot ys, etc. (like ({uamquatn quidem, verum qui- 
dem), yi makes an antithesis prominent, since it defines more exactly, lim- 
its or corrects what precedes. X. C. 1. 2, 3. xuItol ys ovdtndmoit vnia/j- 
10 diddaxaXog hivai roiiov, ^^ certainly Socrates made his pupils useful men, 
althoufrJi,''^ etc. Fi is veiy often used in reiterations and answers, in order 
to indicate that they either confirm, or augment, supply, limit or correct, 
the thoughts contained in the preceding question. 

3. Toi (enclitic) means surely, certainly, certe, and serves also to render 
an ohject marked and prominent. It is often connected with pronouns, e. g. 
iyu') TOL, tywyi toi, 1 surely, ijiung jol, lavja toi. It is particularly employed 
in quoting or referring to general prepositions and proverbs, since by it an 
assertion is refeiTed to a general truth and receives confirmation from it. 
Theogn. 74. navqol to l noXXojv ttkttov e/ovai voov. With adversative par- 
ticles, e. g. aaiTOL, tamen, quamquam (properly for surely), fiivToi, ta- 
men, § 316, Rem., wt dg rot, dXXd to l, but certainly. Also, ovtol 
{ fzi^To t), ceiiainly not, y ccQToif for indeed, ijto l — ?], still stronger I'ltov 
y s — ^, either indeed — or. 

§318. D. Negative Particle s^ ov -a and iirj- (sa^eos.) 

1. u (like its compounds, e. g. o v d s, ovte, ov d slg, etc.) is an objec- 
tive negati,ve ; ^ ?) is subjective, i. e. o t' is used when something is denied 
absolutely, independently, objectively ; ^ rj (and its compounds), on the con- 
trary, when something is denied in reference to the conception or the will 
of the speaker or of some other person (subjectively). Both are commonly 
placed before the words to which the negation is to be applied. 

2. Hence oin stands (a) in all sentences asserting or affirming arAthing, 
whether they are expressed by the Indicative or Optative ; hence also (b) in 
subordinate sentences with otl and cu ?, that; (c) in simple interrogative 
sentences, both direct and indirect ; (d) in subordinate sentences express- 
ing time, with ots, in sidi], etc.; (e) in sentences expressing the ground 
or reason with otl, 8v6ti, stisI, etc.; (f) in those expressing the con- 
sequence with bjgT8 either with the Ind. or Opt.; (g) in adjective sen- 
tences with o g, o gj Lg, etc., which give to the attributive a concrete or ob- 
jective sense ; (h) when an absolute negative meaning is to be given to a 
single word in a sentence, e. g. ovx dya&og, o v y.ay.wg. 

(a) Toi)io 1) ylyvtToiL, ovx iyiviio, o\^ yEvi](jnai. TavTa ovx uv 
ylyvoLTO. — (b) Oi8a, on Tama, ovx syivsTo. ^'Ehytv, otl toito ov/ 
o'vTOjg sixEv. — (c) Tig ovx ulcr/vvETai (or oiix uv alcr/vvoLTo) xaxu Xiyojv 
tov dya&ov aV^^a ; — 'Ag ov S^avfid^eig tov ^^caxgdirj ; — Ov dgdcrsLg tovto ; 



§318.] SYNTAX. NEGATIVE PARTICLES OVH AND filj. 481 

— Ov TitQifiivelg; §255,4. — M^ov, tl {whether) ovx r,^ctqrtq luira Xi- 
^ag. PI. Pliaed. 70, c. axE^Jiui^fx) a — , tli u(tu iv "/iidov tlalv ul ijvyal 
jflfVTJjffurJuv JMV uv&Q(ti7T0)Vj uts xul OV. — (cljOxf V y. i]lx)ov ol noli- 
fitoi, ol'l^XrjVfg ^av/u'C^ov. — (ej'Oxt ol ^uq^^uqol ov/ i)Tir,dri(juv, o\ 
*'£kkT}Vsg xa oqt] o v naiiXmov. — (f) X. Cy. 1. 4, 5. Ta/h t« -^r^fiia uvriXw- 
xsi {Ki'Qo:)y wcxf 6 ^Aajvuyrig ovxst ti/iv avTO) avlXiynv S^rjgiu. — 
{g)^AyijQ, ov ovx ddsg. Av/jq, ov ovx uv d^avi^ui^oig. 

3. Mi^ on the contrarj', stands, (a) with commands, warnings ; hence 
with the Imp. and with tlie Siibj. used in an imperative sense ; (b) with 
wishes and exliortations ; (c) with dehberative questions, § 259, 1. (b) ; 
(d) with sentences expressing a purpose in connection with 'iva, etc.; (e) 
with conditional sentences in connection with el,ic/.v, oj av, in a v, I' w g 
u V, etc. ; (f ) with sentences expressing an effect or consequence in connec- 
tion with ojgtE and an Inf.; (g) in adjective sentences with b g, ogTig, 
etc., which imply a condition or design, in general w^hen a subordinate 
clause contains an idea which is expressed only as a conception, supposi- 
tion ; hence used, m cases where a common reflection is more precisely 
delined, and where the sentence may be resolved by is, qui with the sub- 
junctive = ita comparatus, ut ; (h) in du-ect and indirect interrogative sen- 
tences, which express fear, anxiety on the part of the inquirer, and hence 
demand a negative answer ; (i) m forms of swearing, and not seldom w hen 
one sweai's that somethmg shall not happen, but sometimes also, when one 
swears that somethmg has not happened ; in the latter case, the feeling by 
which the denial, or abhorrence is expressed, is denoted by ^ ?). Comp. 
English beware ! instead of no. 

(a) Mi] yQucps, [xij yQaipjjg, § 259, 5. — (b) El'&s fn) youcpoig ! — Mtj 
rovTO yivoLJO ! — M i] l'(a(X£v ! — Mr, you(po}fisv ! — (c) PL Symp. 213, a. 
aXlu fxot, XiysTi, flgloj, ?/ fiiy, ai'ixnUa&s, i] ou; Rp. 337, b. rcMg Xiyeig', fii] 
unoxtjivbi^ai i shall I not answer thee ? — (d) Aiyta, \v a {.i i) noifiq. — (e) 
El fii] Xiysig. — "Euv fxi] Xeyrjc. — "Ox ay Taiia fii] yivr,Tni. — (f) PI. 
Phae don. 66, A. txnXriTTti (to dCi^a), wgzi firj dvraad^nt in uvtov xa~ 
■d o Q av TuXrj&ig. — (g) PI. Phaedon. 65, a. doztl, oj ^7] d sv r,dv raiv tol- 
ovruv, fiTjd E [xni/si amatv, ovx u^tov sivai- 'Cfiv (^ it tlvl fir/div, etc.), hence 
o TL fii], except, nisi (properly ov8iv bxi (x^, in this case generally used for 
ft firj). Her. 1, 32. iv xwi fiaxQoi yg^voj noXXu ^iv ian tdiaiv, x« (^ «) fXTj 
rig id^sXiL {multa, quae ita sunt comparata, ut). — (h) Mi] iidvr,y.iv 6 naTi]Q ; 
my father is not dead, is he? = is it not to he feared that my father is dead ? 
(I^o^oifAaL, fii] nuTViQ 7s&vr,y.sv ; I fear lest my father is dead. 31 i] dfjuasig 
xoi'To ; you will not do this, will you? Mi] dsiXol icroy-tda; shall ice he cow- 
ards? Mil rodblg ; \4(ja fx i] roang ; — (i) Ar. Eccl. 999. ^u Tt,p^Aifoo8lTrjr — 
(xi] '/ ai a' (X(jp>)(7w, / idll not let you go, the thing shall not he. Aor. 194. fxu 



4S2 SYNTAX. NEGATIVE PARTICLES 0?;X AND jW?/. [§318. 

y ^j V — pij'yo) vor)ua y.ouipoifnov i'jy.ovtTu Tib), Beware! I have not listened, 
^it'j is often us(m1 with tli(3 Jiif. X. An. 7. G, 18. ojjvicj i\u7v -dtovg unuviuq 
y.ul nuintQ ^ r] d e u f'jjol Idla vnid/hio ^'tvOr^g i/jiv. 

Remark 1. In all the instances above given, exce|)t (a) (b) (g), ov is used 
when a single word in the sentence is to he made negative, e. g. O v goi- 
^hv \ nefremus'^ Isocr. Paneg. 71, G. )M/j6vTfg e^uyuc/ulovg loiv ''Juh]vo)v, 
oIl iv rulg aviijitv o v/ o'lol t riaav t,J,v {nequirent) ; licnce in the phrases, 
V d f} g '6 gT ig o v; o v 8 sr o g ot ov o v, etc., § 332, Rem. 12 ; so also in 
ovx £'(7i9^' oTTCi)? o V ; for these expressions are, as it were, blended in a 
sijigle word, like nullus non. El ov d m a e l [rtcusahit). Dem. Cor. 320, 
283. w?T oxj fiffxvijad^ai (= ohlivisci). 

Rem. 2. On o vx uv Uyoig laiTa, instead of fn) Itye see §2G0, 2. (4) (b), 
o I dQuirsig tovto is instead of ^ij dQaajig, and o v dQuatig tolto ; = do this 
indeed, see § 255, 4. 

4. Ov stands regularly witli the Inf , after verbs of saying, asserting, etc.; 
also after verbs of believing, when an Infinitive clause contains an assertion ; 
on the contraiy, ^tJ stands after verbs of commanding, willing, praying, 
persuading, conceding, after verbs expressing what ought to, should, must 
take place, as well as in all phrases where the action appears only as sup- 
posed or conceived. For the same reason fi i] stands with the Inf which 
has the article, since here, not a single, definite case is pointed out, but 
only something general, consequently only that which exists in the concep- 
tion of tlie speaker. 

X. C. 1. 1, 19. [ol Tiollol) ol'ovTai rovg &E0vg la ^h flStvai, lu (V ovx 
udEvai. 2, 4. TavTi]v t))v I'^lv [vivendi rationem) ti^v jijg ipv/iic ini^ihLuv 
ova i^nodii^Eiv s (p r], 1, 5. niGJEVoiv &E6ig ttoj^ ovy. iirai x^sovg ivou t- 
'Ctv. 4. TioU.olg Twv ^viorzaiv UQoriyoQtVEV zu ^h noislv, t« ds fir] 
TiOLUv. 20. &ai'fid'C(f} ovf,07iMg noii iiislcr&rjauv AS^rjValoi 2'w}(i)dTrjv 
tieqI jovg d'iovg jji) (jMCpoovitv. 2.1,3. to ^in cpEvysiv Tuig norovg. 

Rem. 3. When an abstract substantive or substantive adjective stands in- 
stead of the Inf, then either ovz or fj.i'] may be used, according to the 
manner in which these are resolved, e. g. Ar. Eccl. 115. deivuv d' iauv ri 
fiVj e fins iQ Ik {= el fii] ilg iaxLV efiTifiQog). Th. 1, 1S7. yQCupag tijv 
T(av yeq)VQmv ov d idXv a lv (= on or co, [that] al yicfVfjui o v diskvd^i]- 
uav). 

Rem. 4. With some verbs, e. g. cpdvat, oXsa&ai, d^Lovv, vtil- 
(T/rsto-^at, the negation, which properly refers to the Inf , is usually 
joined with the finite verb, thus ov cprifii, like negn, to deny, refuse. X. 
An. 1. 3, 1. ol (TTQUTiMiai ovy. i(paaav Urixi lov riQoao) {negaverunt se 
it ur OS esse). Th. 2, 89. ^viExdhrru [vfidc], ovy. u^lmv t« ^u^ 8iiva iv 
oQoo)8La lyjLV, desiring that you should not fear ivhat is not to be feared. 

5. With the participle or adjective fi ?] is used, only when these can be 
resolved by a conditional clause, or are equivalent to such a clause. — in 
all other cases, o v is used. v 8vvdfiEvog, one who cannot, or is unable, ov 
^ovXofiEVog, nolens, olx avayy.aiov, unnecessary, la ov y.aXa /?oi'Afi//«T«, 



§ 318.] SYNTAX. NEGATIVE PARTICIPLES OVX AND /<//. 483 

turpia consilia ; o ov n tar f van', is qui non credit, or quum [since) non credit, 
or qxtin non credit, o o v (pdouoqo),', is qui non philosophatur, o fiij niariv- 
oiv,si quis no7i credit. X. An. 4. 4, 15. oi'toc /uq eS6y.fi y.al nQoTfiyov noV.u 
ijdf] uXridfvaai lOKxira, Ttf uvra is (og bvra, y.al t« fii] vvra atg o vy. ovra, 
if anijthing was not, he represented it as not being. Oidoc as rairu o l ttol- 
i](Tuvja. ^'Jf//file T)]V noXiv o v TToXiogxriduaav. X. C}'. 1. 2, 7. vv uv 
yvbJtTi di'iafjevoi' jnh ;/a^i»' anodidurai, f.i i^ (tTTodiduvTu di, y.old'^ovaL jov- 
Tov la/VQMg { ^^ iav iiva xtX.). 3, 1. K). rl yuQ uv — /QfjauLT av iig Iff/v- 
Qta I] aidgiloj fxij acucpoori (^= d pi) aiocpoojv h>i). 

G. If in a negative sentence, tliere are indefinite pronouns or adverbs, e. g. 
any one, any how, everywhere, at any time, ever, etc., tliese are all expressed 
negatively. These negative expressions neither destroy nor strengthen each 
other, since they do not stand in an opposite relation, but each of them is 
to be considered independent. The negatives nu;st be of the same kind, 
i. e. either ovy. or m]. 

PI. Rp. 49.5, b. apiy.Qtx cpvaig older lue/a ovdinois ovdevu ovts 
IdionviV ovT f TTuliv dgix. Lysid. 214, d. o y.ay.og o v t uyado), ovt s y.uy.iTi 
oi'dsTcors slg a).r,d)j (pdiav SQ/STai. Hipp. Maj. 291, d. (to yalov), o 
jU7;^£7ioTf at(j/(jov pridvtpoi' ixvidsvl cfavurai. So also \There the 
■whole is negative, the parts are likeM-ise negative, e. g. o v dvrajai o i't' 
£L' Xt/fiv VT fv TToielv TOL? (ptkovc, he can neither — nor ; in like manner 
also V d s, pvj d E, not even, ne — quidem, are used in a negative sentence, 
e. g. ov divaiai olds viv sv noiHv rovg cflXovg. 

Rem. 5. If the finite verb is connected with a participle, the negation, 
when it refers to both, is usually placed with the Pait., though only when 
the Part, precedes tlie verb. Th. 1, 12. ^eiu lu 7'^o;/x« ?; "Ellas hi ps- 
lavloTaxo y.al y.aior/.l'^no, o)crs pv i] it v/ a a aa a av^i^S^ijvuL (i. e. oicTS 
pi) }](Tv/rxiT(/.i y.al {.i r, av^rjdt'irai,). Where the negative is so placed, it 
must be considered as belonging to the whole sentence, and not to a single 
word. 

7.' v pi\ with the Subj. or Fut. Indicative, is elliptical, since witli ovy. 
a verb denoting anxiet}^ or fear, which is sometimes also expressed, must 
be supplied, and pi] must be refen-ed to this verb. Hence ov ^i] is used, 
when the idea to be ex"pressed is, it is not (o i) to he feared that [pi]) some- 
thing will happen, e. g. ov pi] yivrjiaL Tovxo, non vereor, ne hoc fiat, this 
CERTAINLY loill nOt Juxppen. In a question W'ith the second Pers. of the 
Fut. Indicative. Ar. Nub. 505. ov fii) lalrjcrEig, all* ay.olov-d^i'jasLg epoi; 
J shall not expect that you will talk = do not talk, § 255, 4. 

8. After verbs and expressions of fear, timidity, anxiety, uncertainty, 
doubt, distrust, — denying, hindering, abstaining, refusing, avoiding, — pre- 
venting, forbiddijig, contradicting, the Inf is commonly followed by the 
negative /m»j, instead of the Inf. witliout pi^, since the Greek repeats with the 



484 SYNTAX. NEGATIVE PARTICLES OV'A AND jM?/. [§ 318. 

Inf. tilt' negative contained in tlie idea of these words ; — tiiis is done in 
order to strengthen the negation of the sentence. 

KmX V (o as fn] luviu noiuv, J prevent you from doing this. Her. 3, 128. 
Jiu^Hoq un (xy o Q f V e L Vfilv /u v dooKfooieiv ^OqoiTtu. GG. o I/Qt^^uanrjg 
t^uQvog riv fii] viTiOY.itlvaL ^''fusQdLV. Th. 3, G. if;? fuiv d^uXuaarfq iIq- 
yov (11] /oija&ui Toig ]MnvXr]vulovq. 5, 25. un i a/ a vj o fii] inl xi]v 
exuT8(J0)v '/tjv (TJQaTsvaai. 

Rem. G. But ^vhen expressions of fear, anxiety, doubt and tiie like, are 
followed by (in with the Ind. or Subj. (Opt.), ,u») must be considered as an 
interrogative, numne, whether not, e. g. dadoLxa y.i] utio&uvv, rnetuo, ne mo- 
riatur, u?) ji&vriy.iv, ne inortuus sit, Iftar ichtther he is not dead, has not died 
= I fear that he is dead, or has died. On the contrary, ^i] o v with the Ind. 
and Subj. (Opt.), is used after the above expressions, when it is meant that 
the thing feared will not take place or has not taken place. Jidor/.a, fiTj 
o vn ano&uvr], ne nan moriatur, that he may not die, ididoly.fiv, [u.7j ov y. ano- 
'duvoL, ne non moreretur, that he would not die, dsdoiy.a, fiij ov ji&vrfy.sv, ne 
non mortuus sit, that he has not died. 

9. Even when the conjunctions oti, a)g with the finite verb, follow ex- 
pressions of doubt and denial instead of the Inf , the negation is sometimes 
repeated in the dependent subordinate clause by ov. 

X. R. Ath. 2, 17. agvslad^ai, Tolg alXoig, otl ov naQrjv, to deny to 
others that I was present. PI. Menon. 89, d. otl S* ovy. tariv sn Ldxy'i^ir], axs- 
xpaL, iuv (JOL doy.oj slxoKag a 7i lo't slv. ' Dem. Ouet. 871, 14. co? ^' ovx 
iy.Hvog iysoogysi ti]v yi]V, ovy. rjdvvaT ixQvr]d^i]vaiy Phil. 3, 124, 54. ovb 

UV U QVl] & slsV BVlOL,b)g ovx slac TOlOl'TOl. 

Rem. 7. So ov is sometimes used even after ij (quam) following the com- 
parative or comparative expressions which are for the most part connected 
with a negative. This usage is regular in French, e, g. il donne plus que 
vous n' avez donne, and is designed to make the idea of diversity (conse- 
quently a negative idea), which is contained in the comparative, more em- 
phatic, (the gift of one is different, not equal to that of the other; he gives 
this more, and you do not give it more). Her. 4, 118. i]xei 6 JlsQarjg ov d iv 
TV fx aX Xov iji i](iiag, ?; o v y.al inl Vfisag. Th. 3, 36. tJ/ vaTigaia fxnd- 
voia Tig Evdig i]v al'Tolg y.al a.v(xXoyi(T(xog b)y.ov to ^ovXsvfia xal fiiya tyvu- 
u&ai noXiv oXviV dLacp&slgai (i aXXo v, i] ov Tovg ahlovg. IlXr^v ov is 
sometimes used in the same manner. Dem. Cor. 241, 45. tiA?) v ovx icp 
eavTovg sxaaToov olo^dvav to dtivov ri'^siv. 

10. Mi] ov with the Inf is used instead of the Inf without negation, with 
expressions which denote preventmg, hindering, ceasing, abstaining, deny- 
ing, contradicting, concealing, doubting, despau'ing, distrusting and the like, 
when ov or another word which may be considered a negative, is placed 
before (.li] ov. 

V d iv y.wXv El o"? (U ?} ovx anod'uvuv, nothing hinders you to die, i. e. 
from dying. X. An. 3. 1, 13. d yerr,(T6(XE&ci iirl ^aaiXtl, t I i (xn o d ojv (= 



§ 319.] SYNTAX. COORDINATE SENTENCES. 485 

oiidsv i^Ti.) fii) ot'X^ {I'jinug) v^Qi^ofiivovg ano&avslv; Vect. 3, 7. ov ^il^- 
eXnlg slf.ii to fn) ou/t nqod^vfiwq av rovg noXlrag slg Ta xoiaina ilqcpi- 
Qfiv. Cy. 2. 2,20. aiax Q ov {= ov aaXov) oV avidiysLv, fi^ ovxlrov 
nXslinaxalTiovovvTaxal McpsXovvraTo aoivov, tovtov xal fisyiaxwv a^iova&UL. 

Rem. 8. With the really negative expressions, ov dvvafxai, a diva- 
tog, o V X OLO g x slfii, ovd e fj-la firj x ctvi] tax i{z= o v dw ut 6 v 
i(TT i), OV X o (J Lov sax IV, ovx sixo g s crx i v, it is not prohable, o v 
(p 1] fx I, and the like, and also such rs u v o la, avorjxov sax i, the fol- 
lowing Inf. is actually made negative by the accompanying fi i] or y. i) o v, 
since the above expressions, when separated from the negative connected 
with them, have no negative force. Ov dvvafiai fx r] noislv, non possum 
non facere. X. Apol. 34. ol'ts fii) fiSfivija&ocL dvvunai avrov, ovts fx^fivrj- 
fiivog /u ?} ovx snatvslv, I muM think of him, and if I think of him, I must 
praise him. PI. Rp. 427, e. ovdsv Xsysig' av yag vusaxov t,r^Ti]asiv, wg ovx 
oaiov aot ov ,a ?; o i* ^otj&sIv dixaioavvj] sig dvvafiiv navxl tqotto), since it 
woidd not be nght for you not to render assistance. Her. 7, 5. ovx slxo g 
i ax i ^ A&i]Vttlovg igyaaafiivovg noXXa ijdr] xaxa JJiQaag, fxi] ov dovvai dl- 
xag, x(ov (= w»') inolrjaav, it is right that the Athenians should atone for tJieir 
injustice. PL Symp. 218. c. jr«Vt; « v o ?/ t o )^ r,yovfiaL sival aot, fi't] oi xal 
xovxo /a^/^fd^tti, stultum judico tibi hoc non gratificari. Ov (frjfiL xovto 
fii] UTW? l/av, ?iego id sic se non habere. — Also after the ex'pressions 
8 s LVOV sivui, aiaxQov, alaxvvrjv siv a i, alaxvv sa^ a i, \yhich 
contain a negative idea, the Inf follows with fir] ov, when it is to be made 
negative. X. An. 2. 3, 11. w?t£ naaiv aiaxvvtjv sivau, fir\ ovx I 
avajiovdd^siv, so that all were ashamed not to be busy. 



CHAPTER n. 
SYNTAX OF THE COMPOUND SENTENCE 



SECTION VII. 

§ 319. A. Coordinate Sentences. (609.) 

When two or more sentences stand in an intimate connec- 
tion with each other, there is a two-fold relation to be dis- 
tinguished. They are either so related to one another as to 
form one thought, each, however, being, in a measure, indepen- 
dent of the other, e. g. Socrates was very ivise^ Plato also luas 
very wise ; or they are wholly united with each other, since the 
one defines and explains the other, and the one appears as the 



486 SYNTAX. COPULATIVE COORDINATE SENTENCES. [§§320,321. 

dcpciicknt member of the other, e. g. since the spring- has come, 
the roses bloom. The first class of sentences are called Coordi- 
nate, Ihe last Subordinate. 

Remark 1. Both tlic codrdinnte and siilmrdinate coiijiinctions aro pro- 
perly used only to connect whole sentences ; but \vhen several sentences 
have several members in common, these common members are usually ex- 
pressed but once. In this way the sentences are either merely abridged, — 
which is done (a) when the common subject of several sentences is used but 
once, but each sentence has its own predicate, e. g. Ol'JCllTjvtc idlg 
noXffxt'oig in E& EVT ital xaAw? ifia%E(icjcvTo, — 'b) when the common 
predicate of several sentences is used but once, but each sentence has its 
own subject, e. g. 01 ^kv "ii A Xriv Eg naga jov norafiov, ol d e Ueq g ai> 
iv ofjEGLV iajgaTOTiEdsvcravTO', or the sentences are united in one, 
e. g. ^"ojx^«T7jc ?]j^ Gocpog y.al uyad^og, instead of -S". i]v aoq)6g yal 2. r]y aya&og. 
2. y.al IJluTMv -tjiTav aocfol. S. xal UX. tjaav (Toq)Oc v,al uya^oL 

Rem. 2. In respect to the grammatical connection, all coordinate sen- 
tences are alike; they are all treated grammatically as principal sentences; 
but in respect to their meaning and logical relations, they may be different. 
For every thought which forms a compiete supplementary member of 
another thought, can be expressed in a coordinate sentence, which w-as al- 
ways the case, in the earliest use of language, e. g. to £«^ ?]>l^f, y.ulju 
^6da oiv&El, instead of o t s to eixq »; A ^ s, tw q. a. 

§320. Different form s of Coordinate Sentences, 

(610.) 

There are three forms of coordinate sentences, viz. the Copu- 
lative, Adversative and Disjunctive. Also such sentences as 
stand in a causal relation to each other, may be coordinates. 
Such a coordinate may be called a causal coordinate. 

§321.1. Copulativ e Coordinate Sentence s. (6io— eis.) 
1. The copulative coordinate sentence is one in which the thougjits, that 
are considered independent, are united together in such a manner, that the 
thought expressed in the coordinate sentence, gives a greater extent to the 
thought of the preceding sentence. The copulative coordinate sentence is 
either a mere succession of words, or a climax. The copulative coordinate, 
consisting of a succession of words, is formed, 

(a) By Hal, et, and, more seldom in prose by the enclitic t i, que, and ; 
these two words have, in general, the same difference of meaning as et and 
que. Kal connects members of a sentence equally important, or those in 
which the one following is stronger than the one preceding ; hence it often 
expands the idea of the preceding member or is a more full explanation of 
it [ac, atque, et quidem); ts appends some addition which belongs to the 



§321.] SYNTAX. COPULATIVE COORDINATE SENTENCES. 487 

preceding member; — (b) in a more emphatic and definite manner hy xal 
— xa I, et — et, both — and, not only — but also, more seldom by t 6 — t i ; 
the difference between the two in this case is, that with the former {y.al — 
x«t) llie single members appear more independent and forcible, than with 
the latter (le — rg) ; hence the former is used, when the members are of 
different kinds or are antithetic ; — (c) by ts — y. at, both — and, not only — 
but also, when it is to be indicated that the connected members stand in 
an intimate connection with each other ; by the stronger x a /, the second 
member is emphatically joined to the first; they often correspond with the 
Lat. quum — turn, when the discourse proceeds from the general, to the par- 
iicidar and more important. 

^oj}(gdi7]g jiai JlXarcav aocpol ijaav. PI. Apol. 23, a. ^ avd^Qwnlvr} (jo(ptct 
oXlyov Tivog «|/« iml nal ovdevog. So noXXa xal novrjQa, noXXct xal 
fXfydXa', hence y.al Tuvra, and that too. X. An. 3. 2, 16. ansiQOi ovtsg av- 
Tbjv {twv TToAf/z/wr), TO T £ TTXti&og li^Exqov 0Q(X)VTig, ofiwg SToXfirjcraTs — Uvul 
elg airovg. PI. Phaedr. 267, a. TktIuv ds Fo^ylav te idaofxEv svdsiv, — 
*'Av&Qcanot, xal dya&ol y.al aaxol (but not xal xay.ol, x a I novriQol). Kal 
nevTjrfg, xal nXomioi. K al xqi'r^axa, x«t av8(jfg. Kal vvv, xal 
d si. Kal TT^wTK, y.al vaTaxa. X. C. 1. 2, 4. xov aiofiarog avTog is ovx 
^fiiiXft, Tovg X d^sXovvxag ovy, infivu. KaXog xs xal dya&og. In antithe- 
ses, ^Aya&d x i y.al y.ayd, the good as well as the evU, /grjaxol x e xal novrj- 
goL, xd X s EQyu ofxoloig xal oXXoyoi. X. Hier. 1, 2. nri diacpEQEi 6 xvqav^ 
VLxog XE xal 6 idioixixbg ^log; UoXXd xs xal xaXd sfjya diiEdsi^axo. Her. 
6, 114. noXXol XE xal ovvoixaaxov. ^AXXoi xe xal 2(.oy.qdxrig {quum alii, 
turn S.). Her. 6, 136. MiXxiadsa ka/ov iv axonaxL oi xe aXXoi, xal fidXiaxa 
Zdv&LTinog. Hence a XXm g x e xal [quum aliter, turn, not only in other re- 
spects, but also), especially, but liXXwg xe without xal signifies p'aetereaque, 
adde quod, i. e. and especially. The connection is expressed still more 
strongly by x i — xal 8i) xal [quum — turn vero etiam). PL Rp. 357, a. 
o rXavxMV dtl X E*dvdQEi6xaxog aiv xvy/dvEL nqbg dnavxa, xal dij xal tote 
xov OQaavfid/ov xi]y djioQqrjtnv oix dnEdi^axo. 

Remark 1. Ka I has this intensive force, also, when it stands at the be- 
ginning of a question, where the interrogator takes up, with surprise, the 
remark of another, and from it draws a conclusion, which shows the inva- 
lidity or absurdity of the other's statement. X. Cy. 4. 3, 11. dXX' d'noi xig 
ar, uxi naldeg ovxeg ifidv&uvov. Kal noxfQa nixldtg eIctl cpoovtfxo'ixsgoL, 
(ogxE fxa&Elv xd (pQa'C6fj,sva xal dELxvv(j.sva, i] avd^Eg', = ac multo njinus pru- 
dentes sunt. So especially xal natg-, PI Ale. 1. 134, c. dvvuixo uv ng ^e~ 
tadiduvai, o /ji) e/h; — Kal nwg ', = ac minime quidem. 

Rem. 2. Ifniore than two members succeed each other, they are con- 
nected in the following manner, (a) with the first member the connective is 
omitted, and the other members follow, connected by x«t repeated ; (b) 
xai — xal — xat, etc. ; (c) x s — xi — xe, etc. ; (d) t « — xal — xal, etc 



488 SYNTAX. COPULATIVE COORDINATE SENTENCES. [§321. 

X. Cy. 1.4, 7. agxTot re noXXovg i]drj nXrjaiuauviug diicp&nQav xal XiovTig 
xal xungoL xal nuQddXsig' ul ds tXu(foi nul dooy.adtg x«t ol u/qiol 
o'ieg x« t 01 uvoc ol u/qioi uvivtlg Haiv; (<;) ri — z i, etc., aui (Epic) Od. 
y, 413. J'l)^i(fQo)v T£ 2TQuilog te JltQatvg t "A()r]x6g Tt xal avil&iog 
OQaai'i.u,drjg. (f) tb — re xai — xal, etc. (.soldoiii) X. C. 2. 2, 5. yvvi) 
vjiodf^ajj,svr] ts (pi^ei to cpOQTcov tovto, ftuQvvoiutvr] te xal xivdvvevovaa 

— xal — xal xiX. After xal two members, considered, as it were, one 
'whole, can follow with z s xal. Her. 7, 1. {inhale Ixumoiai,) x a I vtag 
TS xal 'iJinovg x a I a7iov xal nXola. X. An. 4. 4, 2. (xoj^t^) fit/aXi] 7£ i]v 
xal ^aalXeiov ts si/e tw aaTgajiTj, xal inl TaUg nXsliTTuig oixluig TVQatig 
ini]aav. But xal — ts are never used as corresponding })articles, in the 
Attic language ; where they are found in this position, the member intro- 
duced by T£, is only a mere addition to the preceding one. Th. 1, 54. Ko- 
qlv&ioi fisp xQaTT^fjavTsg — xal uvdQag s/ovTsg aV^^aXbiZOvg ovx iXaaaovg 
XiXlcav, vaxjg t s {praetereaque) xaTadvauvTsg nsgl t^dofirjxovTa saxr^tjav tqo- 
nacov. In like manner xal — te does not have the sense of^ etiamque. 

Rem. 3. As an enchtic, t s must always rest upon a preceding word. 
This word will be that to which ts specially belongs in the member to be 
connected. But where the article, the attributive genitive and prepositions 
are used, ts commonly stands between these and the word it connects, e. g. 
ja TS dwQa, usqI ts slgrjvr^g xal tioXs^ov, StaxgaTOvg ts aocpla xal 
agsTi], If T£ belongs to the whole sentence, it is usually subjoined to the 
first [necessaiy] word of the sentence. Her. 6, 123. oauvsg tq)svy6v t s tov 
navTa /qovov Tovg Tvgdvvovg, ix (zrjxavrjg ts Trig TOVTOiV s^sXinov ol Uslukj- 
Tgazldai ti)v Tvgavvlda. It is, also, often joined to the predicate of the sen- 
tence, if that precedes, although it should stand after another word. X. 
C. S.5,S. bj {qua re) noXXol sJiaigofisvoL n g oTgsnovTa I ts dgsTtjg ejil- 
fisXslaS^ai xal aXxi^Oi ylyvsa&au (instead oi dgsTi]g ts in.). 

Rem. 4. In the Epic Avriters (and in imitation of these in the Lyric wri- 
ters also, though more seldom in the latter, and in the Attic ^^Titers in only 
a few fragments), ts is very frequently joined with conjunctions and relative 
pronouns, in order to represent, in a more definite manner, the antithesis 
and the intimate connection between the corresponding members. This 
T£ either stands in both of the members, in which case the first ts refers to 
the following member, anticipating it, as it were, and the second refers 
back to the preceding, or more frequently it stands in only one of the cor- 
responding members ; so often si'n sg t s — t £, or £ t tt « ^ — t £ ; ju £ y t £ 

— 8s TS OY dXXd TS, as on this side, so on that ; ts, however, can be 
omitted in the first or last member, hence, fisv — ds ts or dXXd ts; 
fisv TS — ^£ ordXXd, or even the whole first member is omitted, and 
is supplied by the mind, from the preceding, thus ds t s, dXXd ts, also 
without }isv, ds — T£, also ts — h s, ts — avTug, are corresponding 
particles ; xal ts, atque, yet to this, is used, when the corresponding mem- 
ber is contained in the preceding (no/ oni?/ — hut also). II. t, 509. tov ^i 
}isy ^vi]<jav, xal t sxXvov sv^a^svoio. AIsoo^te, fte, z6"/io (not only in the 
poets, but also sometimes in Herodotus), ogT ig ts, olo g ts, oa og ts 
(= To7og, o'log ; too-oc:, oaog, of such a nature, so great, as much as), ojgT s, so 
as, so that, utg si t s, uts, rjVTS, on (a g t s, o t s t s, then, when, 6 & i t s, 
Xv a T s, there, ivhere. In Attic prose, the following combinations still re- 
main, viz. clog TE sl^i with the Inf , signifying / am in the condition^ 



§321.] SYNTAX. COPULATIVE COORDINATE SENTENCES. 489 

w ? T f, SO tliai, wgflt 8 and e ? t «, (i. e. ig o re), quoad. Moreover, intl^ 
T£, poslquam, ns used by Herodotus, needs to be mentioned. 

Rem. 5. Kai is originally an adverb, a/50, etiam. But the idea of em- 
phasis which is exi)ressed by x a I, also, necessarily supposes a relation to 
another clause, e. g. x al 6 J^aixQaTrjg Tuma eXe^BV {sc. ov fxovov ol aXloi, 
or atgnsQ xul ol aXXoi). According to the nature of the corresponding 
member which is to be supplied, the emphatic xa I may have either a 
strengthening (eycn, yet, entirely, etc.) or a weakening force {even only, only 
even), e. g. Kal xaTixysXug (.lov. Kal av ravxa ^iXs'^ag', — xal (laXXov, 
yet rather, xal Tgig, xal xd^ra, xal navv, xal noXvg, xal nug — xul 
ndXttt, even long ago, xal x^^^i ^^^ aviixa, xal vvv or %ji xal vvv — 
nal b)g, xal ovKag, vel sic, — xal f^ovog, xal ft?. With questions, e. g. 
Dem. Pliil. 1, 53. xt xqi) xal nQogdoxav ; what is one even to expect only ? 
{z=z nihil plane exspectandum est). In Homer, this xal often refers 
back to an antecedent clause expressing time, and may then be translated 
by immediately. II. «, 478. 'ijf.iog d' rjfjtyivsia qxxvf} QododdxrvXog ^Hoag, xal 
TOT BTCsiT dvdyovTO fxsTa aTQaxbv evqvv 'AxaioJv. 

2. If the successive clauses are negative, they are connected, 

(a) By ovd i {fi ?y d i), when a negative member precedes ; (b) by jt a t ov 
{xal fi ij), when an affirmative member precedes ; this is the regular form 
in Attic prose ; but m the Ionic and poetic writers ovds or [irjde can also be 
used here ; (c) in a more emphatic and definite manner by ovt e — ov- 
T € {{XT^T 8 — /W »; T c), neque — neque {neve — neve), neither — nor, when two 
or more successive members are negative ; {d)hy ov ts — t s {seldom x a /), 
neque — et, — not — and ; as not — so also. 

X. Cy. 3. 3, 50. ovx av ovv To^oxag ys (?) xaXrj naQalvscrig aya&ovg noi')]- 
autv) — ov8h (j,i}v dxovTLGxdg, ovds y,i]v Iniiiag. C. 3. 7, 9. diaidvov 
^dXXov ngog to aaviM nqogixuv, xal ^ »j dfiiXei zwv Trig noXfMg. Dem. 
Cor. 254, 85. q)alvofxai xolvvv eyo) /dfjnog TEivxrjy.Mg tots xal ov ^s^ijjsoig^ 
ovds TLfxMQiag. Th. 3, 14. inanvvais — xal fiij ngorja&s 'ijfxdg. PI. 
Lysid. 207, e. i(0(nv aqa as a ^ovXsl ttolsIv xal ov d sv sjnnXi]TTOV(nv, 
ovds diaxcoXvovat, noislv cuv av sJiL^Vfifig. — vt s & sol, ovts av- 
•&gi0TT0i. — X. An. 2. 2, 8. Mjxotrav — fn^Ts 7iQo8(aasLV dXXi]Xovg avfifiaxol 
rs sasa&ai. 5. 1, 6. ovts yaq dyogd saTiv Ixavt] — , tj xg xmga noXf^ia. 
Th. 1, 118. ol AaxiduifiovLOL ulcrd^oiisvou ovts sxmXvov, si ^u?) inl (iqaxv, 
7j(rvxa^6v T 8 TO nXsov tov xqovov. 

Rem. 6. The followbig connective forms are more rare, and belong 
mostly to poetiy, viz. ovts — ov, ov — ovts; t s ov — xs (Th. 2, 22.) 
ixxXrjfflav ts ovx inolsi — , x^v xs noXiv iq)iXaaas)', ovts — xs ov 
(Th. 1, 126. OVTS ixstvog sit xaTsvorjae, to t s y.avTH0V ovx idriXov) ; v- 
T € — ovds, neither — and not, which is fomid also in prose. 

Rem. 7. Ovds expresses either an antithesis {hut not), or it serves to 
connect a new clause {and not). When ovds — ovds follow one another, 
they are to be translated by not even — and not (never by neither — nor). X. 
C. 3. 12, 5. tv ydg I'a&L, otl ovds sv aXXco ovdsvl dywvi, ovds sv ngd^si, 



490 SYNTAX. COPULATIVE COORDINATE SENTENCES. [§ 321. 

oi'df/jiix (jfiov i$fig 5ia to (iiXriov to iTMfia naotuyiivud^itL. Ovdt in disjunc- 
tive scMtoiicos, corresponds to xut in j)ositive sentences, treated in remark 
5, and si«rnifies also not, not even, ne-^quidem, e. fr. oi'(5' o xQUTicnog tioX- 
fiijaev avTot (xdx£(T(^oiL — ^ovdiii^, ne unua quidem, ot^' oi?, ne sic qui- 
dem, etc. 

3. Emphasis or climax, as has been seen, §321, I. is expressed by the 
simple X a /, but more definitely by, 

{•d) ov fiovov-^-aXXu xa I [aX/! ov d i)', (b) ov ^6v ov oTt, also 
by ov/ otL fiovov) or ov/ otl {onag) or ^tt?) oxt, fiij cnwg (i. e. 
ovK tQb), OIL or oJtMg, fxi] Xiys, otl or onojg) — uXXu xal {a XX' ov d i\ 
not only-— hut also {but not even), when the less important member precedes 
the more important; (c) ov/ o;rta$ or (xi) otl {onag) — aXXu xai 
{aX^ ovdi), not only not — hut even [but not even), when either the more 
important member precedes the less impoi-tant, or when two strongly an- 
titlietic clauses are opposed to each other ; (d) ov — aXXa xal, not — 
hut even, — ov — aXlL ovd s, not-^^not even, «A^' oldi being stronger than 
aXXu xal. SoixgaTrig ov fiov ov aocpog 7jV, uXXa xal aya&og. PI. 
Symp. 179. b. xal p)v V7tiQano&vr](TXHv ys fiovoL i&sXovaLv ol (quvtec, o v 
(1 ov ov oT I ardgeg, a XXa xal yvvalxig [non modo — sed etiam). X. C. 
2. 9, 8. ol'x OTL (xovog 6 Kgliojv iv ijav/ia i]v^ uXXu xal ol cplXoi 
al'Tov. Ovx onwg lovg noXffilovg sTQiipavTo oVEXXi-jVec, uXXa xal 
T71V /ooQuv avTbJV ixdxmaav. Dem. Cor. 271, 1. ov/ oiiMg xdgiv aviolg 
[Tolg ''A&i}vaioig) e/fig, a XX a xal ^la&bicrag aiaviov xard tovtoh'I noXnsvrj 
{nofi modo non ^— sed etiam), Dem. Phil. 2, 67. [jovg Ori^alovg iiynio) ov / 
onbjg dvTiTigd^Eiv xal diaxuXmsLV, dXXa xal avaiQaTsvafLv. Isocr. 
Plataic. 297. ov % on ojg Ttjg xoiv^jg iXEv&EQlag fj-fTe/ofiiv, uXX' ov d e 5ov- 
Xilag nkTgiag ')]^L(adrjfA.EV tv/hv {non modo non — sed ne — quidem). X. 
Cy. 1.3, 10. fiTj oTiojg oQxua&ai iv qv&fiM, a XX oi'd^ oQ&ova&ai idi- 
vaa&E {non modo non saltare, sed ne rectis quidem pedibus stare poteratis). 
C. 1. 6, 11. lip olxlav 1] aXXo zi ojv xixTr](fai, voi^l'CoJV dgyvglov a^LOV (ivat, 
ovdsvl av fii] OTL TiQolxa dolfjg, dXX" ovd^ sXanov jijg dUocg Xa^cav {iion 
modo non gratis des, sed ne si minus quidem accipias, quam est illarum re- 
rum pretium). 2. 3, 8. tov xal Xoyai xal sgyca neLQcofisvov ifis dviuv ovx 
av dvvaifii]v our' ev Xsysiv ovt' ev tcoleIv, dXX ovds ntiqaao^aL. An. 
1. 3, 3. {8aQELXovg) Xa^oiv ovx slg to i'diov xaTsd^i/xrjv i/iol, aXX' ovds xa- 
■&r,dvTcttd-rj<7a, dX'K slg vfiag idandvav. Dem. Mid. 24, 541. o v novrjgog, 
aXXd xal ndvv xgrjaTog. 

Rem. 8. Ov (xovov — dXX d without xal is used, when the second 
member includes the first, whether the second is greater in the extent of 
the thought, or in the degree. Isocr. Phil. 5, llLov fiovov inl TovTav 
avTOvg oipEL Ti]V yvw^riv ravTr^v I/ovt«?, a XX inl navTtov o fio lag. 
Panath. 32, 250. ov (xovov av svqs&eItjv inl To7g vvv XEyofiivoig Tavrrjv 



§ 322.] SYNTAX. ADVERSATIVE COORDINATE SENTENCES. 491 

EXdiv rr}v didvoiav, aXk' o ^oltog in I navTOiv. X. C. 1 . 6, 2. l^uxiov 
ijfU(fi«Tav ov fjLOVOv (favXov, uXXa to avjo -^igovg xe xal ^tiif^oivog. 

§ 322. II. Adversative Coordinate sentence s. 

(G16— 621.) 

1. An adversative coordinate sentence is one in which the clauses that 
are contrasted with each otlier, are united and form one thought. The op- 
position or contrast is of such a nature, tliat the thought expressed in the 
coordinate clause either merely limits or restricts the thought of the pre- 
ceding clause, or wholly denies it, e. g. he is indeed poor, hut brave — he is 
not brave, bid cowardly. But brave, and^but cowardly are here coordinates of 
the preceding clauses. When the preceding clause denotes a concession, 
it is called a concessive clause. Limitation is expressed by 5 g, aXXoi 
(but), ttTti^ [avTag epic), x « t t o f , (jl&vtol, o^wg; denial of the pre- 
ceding clause, by a XX a. See No. 6. 

2. z/ fi most generally has an adversative force, and hence can express 
every kind of contrast. In respect to its signification, it ranks, like the 
Lat. autem, between the copulative connectives [ts, y.al) and the adversa- 
tive [aXXoL etc.), since it contains both a copulative and adversative force, 
and hence either opposes one thought to another (adversative), or merely con- 
trasts it (copulative). Hence it is very frequently used in Greek, where the 
English uses and. The new thought being different fi-om the preceding, 
is placed in contrast with it. 

3. The mutual relation between the concessive and adversative clauses, 
is commonly expressed by the concessive ^jlsv, which, as it denotes con- 
cession and admission, points forward to the second member expressed by 
8 i. As 8s can denote both a strong and slight contrast, so its signification 
is sometimes stronger and sometimes w^eaker. 

4. The original signification of fxev (arising from ^r,v, § 316, Rem.) is tndyf 
in truth ; yet its signification is not always so strong as this ; indeed in 
innumerable places its force is so slight, that it cannot be translated at all 
into English. 

To fi sv aq)iXifj,ov xaXov, jo 8 s fiXa^Egov ala/gov. Th. 3. 68. 8iiq)&si,- 
gav nXaTULScav fiiv avxav ovx iXdaaovg 8iay.oaioiv, ^ A&rivalwv 8e nevxa 
xal slxoaiv. 

5. Msv — 8s are especially used in the following cases, 

(a) With divisions of place, time, number, order and persons, e. g. 

^Evxavd^a fxiv — exeI 8 s, sv&a (isv — sv&a 8 i, xoje fisv — xoxs 8 s, 
noxs fisv — noxE 8 s, at one time,-^-at another, sometimes — sometimes, dlXoxs 
usv — dlXoxE 8 i, ujxa ftsv — u^xu 8 s, sometimes — sometimes, ngwxov fi sv 
— BTtEiJu 8s, x6 ^sv — TO 8 E, xci [X s V — Ttt 8e and TotTO fxiv — xovxo 



492 SYNTAX. ADVERSATIVE COORDINATE SENTENCES. [§ 322. 

d £, partly — partly, on the one side — on the other, both — and, not only — but 
also, 6 IX bv — 6 di, hie — ille. 

(b) When several predicates belon*; to the same olyect, and also, when 
several actions refer to the same object. 

S. Ph. 239. i/b) yivoq fiiv hjul jijg tisqiq^vtov ^xvqov, n)Jo) d^ ig oi- 
xov, avdufiai ds nalg^AxtXewg NwmoXsinog. So also in tlie principal and 
subordinate clause. Her. 1, 103. ot igi^uXov fisv ig Tr}v''AairfV, KiixufQiovg 
i'/.^aXovxeg ix t^? EvQOjnrjg, xovtoktl d s inLdnofiivoL (pivyovai ovxta ig tijv 
Mi]8Lxr]v XMQT]v anlxovTO. 

c. Where the same or an equivalent word is repeated in tsvo different 
clauses. 

X. C. 2. 1, 32. iyoj (TvvELfii [xiv S^Eolg, avvsifii 8" av^Qomoig 
Tolg aya&o7g. 1. 1, 2. 2'ojy.Q(XTrig S-vcov cpavegog t) n oXXdx ig fxiv ol'y.oL, 
noXXuxig d s inl xwy xolvojv rijg noXsag ^afioJv, Yet this principle is not 
always obser\^ed. Miv is regularly omitted, when 8 8 y.ui follow, e. g. 
2.8,5. xaXtnov yug ovtoj tl noLi](Tai, wgrs iir^8h a^iugTHV, x (/^Xetiov 
8 E y. a\ avafiCXQTriTcag tl noLTjaavTU uvj ayvcofxovi y.qnf, nsQiTV/elv. 

Remark 1. When fiiv stands in an adjective or adverbial clause, it is 
sometimes repeated, for the sake of emphasis, in the coiTesponding demon- 
strative or concluding clause. Her. 2, 121. y.alx 6 v (i. e. ov) ^ikv xaXiovcn 
S-igog, tovtov y.sv ngogy.wiovcrl ts y.al £V noiovai' tov 8s /ft^ojva 
y. T. X. So also, when instead of the adjective clause, the Part. Avith the 
article is used. Isocr. Paneg. 52, 60. xw fisv VTTEosvsyy.ovTi Trjy av&gco- 
nlvTjV q)V(nv {'^Hgayln), — tovto) fikv [b Evgvcr&svg) innuTzav — 8iETiX«TiV. 
So also ^liv twice preceding has 8s tsvice following ; this always imphes 
a strong emphasis. PI. Apol. 28, e. iya ovv 8slvu av elrjv eigyacrfiivog, w 
avdgsg ^Ad^rivuloi, si, org fiiv fis ol ag/ovrsg stuttov, ovg vfislg sXXsa&s 
agysLV pov, y.al tv noTL8ala y.al iv "AiicpinoXsL y.al inl /ItjXlo), tots fisv ov 
iy.slvoL STttTTOV Bixsvov — y.al ixiv8vvsvov ocTio&avslv, t ov 8s &sov tolttov- 
Tog. b)g iyoj oirj&riv ts xal vnsXa^ov, (piXoaocpoivTU fxs 8slv L,]]v y.al i^STU^ovTa 
ifxavTov y.al Tovg uXXovg, svt av d- a 8 s cpo3ri&slg ij S-dvuTov t] aXXo otl- 
ovv ngdy^ia Xlnoifii ti]v tu^lv. Yet this parallelism is but seldom found 
so regularly carried out. 

Rem. 2. On the position of fisv — 8 i, the following things are to be 
noticed. They are commonly placed after the words, which are opposed 
to each other ; yet they are often to be refeiTed to the predicate or to the 
whole clause. X. C. 1. 1, 10. y.al sXsys fisv {2^03y.guTr]g) wg tu noXv, 
Tolg 8e ^ovXoiuivoLg i^iiv dy.ovsiv. An. 3. 4:, 2. sn a& s fisv ol8iv, noX- 
Xa 8 s y.ay.u iv6}xi(Ts tt o ir/ cr a l. When a substantive or adjective is con- 
nected with the aiticle or a preposition, (uiv and 8s are commonly placed 
between the article and the preposition, and between the preposition and 
substantive or adjective, e. g. ngog fisv Tovg (piXovg — ngog 5" ix- 
■&Qovg; yet this conformity is by no means obseiTed in corresponding 
members, e. g. X. C. 1. 1, 12. toc fisv av^gomsia nagsvTsg, to. 8aifi6- 
via 8 s (jxoTvovvTsg riyovvTav t a ngogiy/.ovTa nguTTSLv. 2, 24. 8 lo, fisv 



§ 322.] SYNTAX. ADVERSATIVE COORDINATE SENTENCES. 493 

xuXXoQ — ^/« 8 vv a ft IV di, or the opposite, Isocr. Paiieg. 64, 114. fv 
Trtic 71 o li T (iai g {.tsv — iv de ralg avvdi^xaig. 

Rem. ;^. It is evident, that any other adversative connective instead of 
Si, can follow ^usr, e. «r. nXhi, ttr«o, etc. But in i)hice of the adversative 
connectives, sometimes also the copulatives t£, y.al are used, by a kind of 
anacoluthon, or the construction is entirely changed, without any reference 
to /wiV. 

Rem. 4. The adversative connective which would be expected to follow 
flit; is sometimes omitted, although there is a corresponding adversa- 
tive member. This is the case, when the word expressing the contrast, is 
such, as of itself without di, to make this contrast sufficiently manifest, as 
e.g. with « »' T« i; i^« fiiv — ixsX, and almost always with tiquitov 
fiiv — tTtsna. Secondly, even the clause expressing the contrast, can 
be wholly omitted, in w Inch case, it must be supplied by the mind ifi i v 
solitnrium). Her. 3, 3. Xiyuai '68i o Xuyog, ifiol fjikv ov ni^avog (to me 
improbable, perhaps probable to others). ^Eyw fttv oix oida ', btg (iiv 
Xiyov(nv\ ralxa fisv r,iuv r,yysi}.i Ttc ; oi^ai ^iv, I'iyovfiUL fxiv, 
d ox(o (isv, o i'x oida fisv and the like, I indeed think. 

Rem. 5. On accoimt of its general signification. Si, like autem, frequently 
connects sentences even, when they stand in a causal relation to each oth- 
er ; then the hearer or reader is permitted to gather from the context the 
particular mode of connection. Thus Si very often expresses tiie reason, 
and is used instead of ^a'^. 

Rem. 6. Li questions. Si is used as an adversative, when the interrogator 
gives vivacity, by omitting the concessive member, e. g. X. C. 2. 9, 2. y.al 
6^. EtTii inoi, scpri, u KqItuv, xvvag Si ioi(f£ig,'iva col loig Iv/.ovg un:6 
Twv TiQoSuTcov a7ieQi'xo)ffi ; (you are unwilling to support a man who could 
protect you from your enemies, a>'d tet do you keep dogs '?) Again, Si has 
a copulative force and continues the question which had been inten-upted 
by the answer of the other, e. g. X. C. 3. 5, 2. ovy-ovv ol(jd^a,iq)Tj,oTi nh'j&si 
uev olSip fiilovq H(Tlv''A&r^va1oL Boion^v, — OiSa ycxQ, icfrj. 2(x)fiaTa 
Si ayu^a y.al xaXa norsoa t y. Boi ojtojv oi'ei nXdw uv iy.Xsy&rjVaL, ?/ i^^A&r]- 
rwy. The same principle holds in answers. 

Rem. 7. Kal — Si, (in the Epic writers y.al Si not separated), and, 
though more seldom, the negative ovSi — S i, in which connection Si has 
an adverbial force, can be translated by and on the other hand, and also ; and 
on the other hand not. X. H. 5. 2, 37. oV te uXXol nqoOi'nwg to} TsXfVjia vnrj- 
giiovv, y.al ?; twv OrjSauov Ss noXig iTQO^vfxojg ^vriTiSfiTie y.al onXhag xnl 
Inniag. An. 1. 8, 20. xal olSiv ovSi roirov nad^ilv tcpaaav, o i' S' aXXog Si 
70)v'^b^XXrjV(ov iv TaiTtj rfj fid/V £^«^fv oiSug oiSiv. 

Rem. 8. In the concluding clause of a sentence, as in principal clauses. 
Si has a double force, either adversative, or merely contrasting. Sometimes 
fxiv stands in the first member. 

a. The adversative Si in the concluding clause, expresses the contrast 
between that and the antecedent clause. It is used (a) after hypothetical 
antecedent clauses, though dXXu also is often found instead of Si ; {^) after 
relative antecedent clauses, and such as denote comparison. («) X. Cy. 5. 
5, 21. aA/, (I fji'iSe tovx , l'(fr], ^ovXzl anoxQiraadui, av Si toivtsv&sv Xiys, 
so but say then. (/5) 8. 5, 12. Mgneo ol unXliai, oltco Si xul ol nsXTaaTul 
y.al 01 TO^OTat, so on the otJier hand, etc. 

64 



494 SYNTAX. ADVERSATIVE COORDINATE SENTENCES. [§322. 

b. After an anteceilont clause denoting: time, 6i cornrnonly Ijj.s a con- 
trasting force, yet soinetiines an adversativ*.' also (very often in the Homer- 
ic lan^uiMjLTC, also in Herodotus, but seldom in tlie Attic writers). Od. /L, 
387. ki;t«o ififl ipv/uQ fiiv (XTifay.id(/.iT u).).vSig u).).r] uyvi] Ihoa£q)uVfiu yv- 
vnixMv xfrjXvjfoucoi', ijXi^e (5' inl ipv/i]^Aytx^ti^rovoQ'AT(nl6uo. ?*«) otpott — 
Tuif oa 8 i, oTioTf — (5£, tMQ. — 5 i. X. An. 4. 1, ^. inn bi ucfl/.orro, tr&u 
o fiif "^i lyQr^g 7T0iaj.iuQ TxtxvTunmnv unaQog i]v dm to [jixO^og y.ul (usyfS'og, Tut" 
Qodog {traiis'Uus) ds ovx ijv — , eduxfi ds rolg cn^aTiwiuig diix loiv Iqiotv no- 
^^vriov Fivai, on the contrai-y. As di is used alter antecedent clauses, so 
also in like manner after participles. PI. Symp. 220, b. y.ui. tzots uvrog na- 
yov oVou d^ivoiuTov, 'aolI 7idt>T0)v — iveiXiyi.iifo)v roig nodag iig nlXovg xal 
aovnyUdag, oi'jog 8' iv jovtolc ilf,ii i/Mv luaiiov — , o'tavTifi) y.ul nqonQov 
n(x)&SL (fOQHV. X. C. 3. 7, 8. d-av(xa':^M uov, si ixslvovg ^aSioig xeiqov ^i- 
V og, TovToig ds f.ir]8ivu Toonov oui 8vv{]aia3aL Ti(jogtyf/d)ivai. 

Q.^Alla (Neut. PL of uXlog\ hut, [sed, at,) yet, however, generally expresses 
difference and separation. It always stands at the beginning of the sen- 
tence. According to the nature of the preceding member, it denotes pre- 
cisely the opposite of what is affirmed in the first member, so that the first 
member is abrogated by the last, and hence both cannot be true at the 
same time. ''AXXu is so used (a) w^hen a negative precedes, e. g. o ly ol 
TcXomiob sv8ulfiovsg slaiv, a X H ol uyixd^ol-, (b) when an affirmative clause 
precedes, and the negation of the opposite follows, where in English, we 
may or not translate cxXlu, e. g. ey.sl^sv, a),)! oix iv-&£v8s r^Qnudd^r^. — 
Again aXXa merely denotes something different from what is affirmed in 
the first member, so that the first member is abrogated only in part, i. e. is 
only limited or restricted {yet, however). 

TovTo TO ngayfia cjcpsXifAOV fxsv iaiiv, uXX ov xaXov. The use of 
a XX a is very frequent in objections {^ at), also in questions, when the 
question expresses a contrast, or when an objection is introduced in the 
form of a question. Dem. Cor. xt yocQ y.al (3ovX6jj,svol fxsT£7ii}in8a&' av 
avTOvg , inl tijv hqtivtjv ', «AA' vnrjQ/sv anaaiv. AXX irrl tov noXsixov; 
a A A,' avTol tibqI siQi'jvrjg i^jovXsma&s. Eur. Med. 325. Ao/or? rxvaXolg' ov 
ycxQ av Tislaaig noxL ^'■"AXt i^sXiig fis, iiov8Ei> al8s(jca Xnag f very fre- 
quent]}'' aXJi i] — / but really — ? X. An. 7. 6, 4. xal oX httov ' "A X )^ i] 
Srifxaycoyet o uvr^q Tovg ixv8Qag ; 

Rem. 9. "AXXa is used in negative, non-concessive clauses, when by it not 
the opposite of the first member is to be expressed, but the general signifi- 
cation of the preceding negative clause is to be restricted by an exception. 
Here cxXXa is the same as nXr^v or d }ir„ nisi, and can be translated into 
English by except, than. Here also it expresses something different from 
the preceding negative clause, and not included in it. In the first member, 
aXXog (hsQog) is commonly placed, e. g. ovdelg uXXog, aXXix, and this aXXog 
points forward to the following aXXa, coiTesponding with it. X. An. 6. 4, 2. 
iv ToJ ^sVw uXXt} /ifij' noXig ovdeixla ovxs cpiXia, ovts 'EXXrjvigj aXXd, Oqix- 
y.sg Y.ou Bid^vvol. 



§323.] SYNTAX. DISJUNCTIVE COORDINATE SENTENCES. 495 

Rem. 10. In the frequent combination ofttX)^ tJ after a prccedinir nega- 
tive, or alter a question implying a negative, or even after tiie addition of 
tVxAoc, l'iei)0<; to tiie negation, thus, ova, o v 8 av « A T ij; o vd iv uX'/.o, 
a A A* »y ; oi'<5i»' I'r s q or, u X)^ ij; xl aXXo, uXt i']\ aXXo xi (with a 
preceding interrogative j)ronoun), uXk »/', — uXk seems to be merely w/J.o, 
but on account of its close connection -with ?;, it ai)pcars to have changed its 
accent [akXo i\) and to have lost it [uX'k i]). X. An. 7. 7, 53. u{)yiQiov'iiiv 
ovY. f]^w, u X k i] (xiYQov XL. O. 2, 13. oi'TC uXXos; Tjomoxs. juoi ■nuqia'/i. xu. iav- 
xov dioiy.Hv, aX)! i] av rvrl f&iXHcnuQS/^fiv. PI. Phaed. 97, d. ov d sv u X- 
X ay.ojJHv n(jogijy.fiv «vv^^o).Tq), a X X t; xo aniaxov y.al xo piXxiaxov. 

Rem. 11. Also the following elliptical expressions are to be mentioned, 
viz. o t' fxi] V a XX d or o v fiiv x o i uXXa, yet, veruntamen, ov '/ u q 
uXX u, then certainhj, certainly. These must be completed by joining v/ith 
the negative the verb of the preceding clause, or in place of it, such ex- 
pressions as TO IT eysvsxo, xovx iaxlv. X. Cy. 1. 4, 8. o 'innog ninxfL ftc yo- 
vttxcc. y.al fiiy.Qov xaash'ov i^nQttXTjXKTsv' ov fi v v [scW. e^sxgapjXLasv) aXii 
ijisj-ifivtv o KvQog (uoXig Tioig, y.al o Xrinog i^avsaxt). 

Rem. 1*2. \4XXd is, moreover, used to denote a transition to a different or 
an opposite thought ; this is the case in exhortations and exclamations, gen- 
erally when the discourse is suddenly interrupted, and something new is 
quickly introduced, e. g. aX]i tvxvxoii;g! — dXt aval — uX)! eia ! — also 
Avhen one answers or replies quickly and decidedly, e. g. dXXd ^ovlouai, 
icell, I win. 

7. From the adverb a v, on the contrary, again, rwsus, and ci q a, igitur, 
have originated the Epic a ix a q and the prose ax dg. They always 
stand at the beginning of the sentence, and have the signification of 8s or 
uXXd, but, yet, as it seems with this difference, that, on account of their 
composition with uga (igitur), they are more closely and intimately con- 
nected with what precedes. — Mevx ol has been already treated, § 316, 
Rem. Kaixo I, yet, verum, sed tamen, atqui (§317, 3), is used especially, 
when the speaker washes to correct somethuig he had said ; the Latins use 
quamquam in the same way, e.g. y.ulxoL x I (fTfiu ; quamquam quid loquor ? 
"Ofiojg (from 6u6g, equal, like), nevertheless, yet, however, places tlie second 
clause, as an unexpected one, m opposition to the first. Th. 6, 50. Au}iU/og 
Hev xuvTu si7io)v ofiojg ngogs^sio y.al avxog xj) ^AXxL^iddov yvafij}. "AX'k 
fiojg is still stronger. 

§ 323. III. Disj unctiv e Coordinate Sentences . 

(62-2— 627.) 

1. A disjunctive coordinate sentence is one in which the clauses compo- 
sing the entu-e sentence, are united into one whole, one of which excludes 
the other ; hence the one can be considered to exist only when the other 
does not. This disjunctive relation is denoted by, 

"//, or, aid, vel, or more emphatically and definitely by ij — rj, aut — aut, 
vd — vd, either — or; slxe — b X x s (with the Ind.) or e «' y t £ — idvxE or 



496 SYNTAX. DISJUNCTIVE COORDINATE SENTENCES. [§323. 

avTE — a Vie (with the Subj.), jiue — sive, whdhtr — or, when the speaker 
"wishes to show, that he does not know whetiier he should decide for the 
one or the other ; on the mode used in these hypothetical disjimctive sen- 
tences, see § 339. 

'O TTttTTj^, i] b vVoq ai'Tov ujii&uvtv. — "JI o TiaTi'jQ, i} u vlug avxov unidu- 
viv. Til. 4, 118. ti da Tt Vfxiv sIts xuXXiov, tl'i s dixaioKQOv lovtojv doy-sl 
Eivai, lovTfq ii yiaxidulfiovu diduay-STE. PI. Rp. 493, d. eI't iv '/QU(piy.fi, 
SIT iv fiovaiy.jj, sits d ij iv noXmy.fj. Apol. 27, c. f I'z oi'v y.uivu, tiT s 
naXaia. 34, e. sI't ovv uXrjdig, eI't ovv ipEvdig. Rp. 45.3, d. a y t e iig 
slg xoXi'u-6i']&Qay fxixguv ifmear], a v ts elg to fiiyiajov niXayog fiiaov, ofiwg 
ye VH oi'dsv ijTTOv. 

Remark 1. The following forms, also, ai-e sometimes used, viz. c i — 
ei'j £ [si — ^ sive) ; eIte — slds {sive — si vero), when the second member 
contains something opposite to the first; site — ?/'; ?/ — eije (seldom 
and only Poet.); when eIte is used but once it is poetic. 

Rem. 2. The disjunctive connectives ?J — tj, in the Epic writers, very 
seldom in the Tragediems, ai'e united with ^t<£V and di, e. g. tj fxsv — r^ di. 
In this case, they do not have a disjunctive, but like xul — x«/, te — ts, a 
copulative force. Instead of ^^£, 1^7] is also used according to the necessi- 
ties of the verse. II. e, 128. oq:Q ev yiyvaxry.jjg tj uev -^eov, r^8 e xat ufdQu, 
both — and, not only — but also. 

2. The particle i'j is not only used to denote the disjunctive relation, but 
also in expressing comparison, in which it does not exclude or express the 
opposite of the precedmg member, but only expresses separation or diffe- 
rence. As in its disjunctive relation, one ij corresponds with another, so 
here 7/ stands in relation to a word, which expresses a difference, e. g. aXXog, 
ovdelg uXXog, uXXoTog, ivavilog, Idiog, diucpEQCx), etc., also in relation to com- 
pai-atives, as well as to all w^ords which have the force of a comparative, 
e. g. dLTtXdcFLog, TiQiv, (p&av(x), etc. Ph Phaed. 64, a. ovdiv aXXo aviol 
iiinrjdsvovcnv, ?; ano&pi](Ty.iiv ts xal lE&vdvoci. 

Rem. 3. The comparative ?/ is sometimes used after the omitted ^aXXov 
or after a positive. This is the case (a) after expressions oi willing, choosing, 
and the like, because these contain the idea of difference, separation or prefe- 
rence, e. g. ^ o V X E a S^ a L, e& eXelv, a I q eI a S^ a i, a'lQEa iv 80 vva l, 
i 71 1.& V i^eIv, 8 e X t (t ■& a i, l,t]t e\v, Xv a i r sXeIv { = potius esse). II. a, 
117. ^0 xjXo^l eyb) Xaov aoov Efjpsvai, rj anoXead^aL. Lysias de aif. t\T. 1. 
^Tj T V G L y.EQ^alptiv, 1] ri^uag JiEi&Eiv. X. Ag. 4, 5. [Ayr^aiXuog] ji q eIt xal 
aw TO) yfvvuluj ^eioiexteIv, i] alv tw udtKoj nXiov E/^EiV. Andoc. Myst. 62. 
lE&vavuL vofii^ovaa XvaneXtlv, t/ ^j]p. 

3. The object with which another is compared, is expressed either in 
the manner mentioned under No. 2, in a coordinate sentence introduced by 
the comparative ?), or it is denoted by the Gen., (§ 275, 2). The Gen. can 
be used for all Cases, most frequently for the Nom. and Ace. But the 



§323.] SYNTAX. DISJUNCTIVE COOIIDINATE SENTENCES. 497 

Gen. is not admissible, when ambiguity would be occasioned by the use of it, 
—and it is never admissible when the time of the two sentences is difierent. 
Eur. Or. 1154. ovy. i'aTiv oudep xq slaaov, i] q>iXog aaq)rjg, ov TiXoviog, 
oil Tvgavvlg (or ovdh xQflaaov q)lXov). Th. 7, 77. ildrj rivsg y.ul ix 8 siv o~ 
tsQCiv i] T i(av8 s icrcj&riiTav, from a more dangerous situation than tJiat 
from which we would save ourselves. II. a, 2G0. ildrj yag noz iyia y.al a g e i- 
0(T IV 1] S7T e g V idlv av d g da iv u) ^llrja a, with braver men than ivith 
you. Her. 7, 10. av ds fiiXXsig iji civ d gag ajganvha&ai noXh d[j,sivo^ 
vac, rj ^xi'& ag. But Eur. Or. 715. niaiog iv xaxdlg dvr,g xgelaacxtv 
yaXrjvrjg vavTlkoiaiv slgoguy (instead of rj yaXrjvrj). Th. 6, 16. 7igogr,y.£L 
fiOL (laXXov k I Eg oiv — agyjiv (instead of i] eisgoig). Od. i, 27. ovxot tyo)- 
ys 1] g y a trig 8i'rai.iaL yXvxsgMTsgov dXXo Idia&ai. Her. 2, 134. nv- 
ga{j,i8a de xal oviog unsXlnsTO noXXov iXdaao) rov naxgog (instead of 
1] 6 najrig or properly instead of ttJs toD nargog). 

Rem. 4. With the neuters nXsov, nXslo), aXaxTov, wiien they stand 
in connection witli a numeral, 7y' is commonly omitted, without change of 
construction (comp. decem plus or amplius homines). PI. Apol. 17, d. vvi^ 
iyoj ngonov inl dixaaii'igiov upa^Bijr^y.a, trr] yeyovbtg ti X s I a) h^j8oui]y.ovia 
(annos plus septuaginta natus). The neuters nX&ov, (xtlov, etc. often 
stand as adverbs in the Ace, in connection with substantives of a different 
Gender and Number. X. Cy. 2. 1, 5. Inniug fih aiu ov ^ eIov 8ia(j,vgi(i)v. 

Rem. 5. Sometimes also the particle ij is found with the Gen. Such ex- 
amples are to be explained in a tvvo-fold manner. The Gen. either expres- 
ses a relation peculiar to itself, in which case it is wholly independent of the 
comparative, e. g. PI. L. 765, a. |U>) eXoittov ij TQiuxovTa yryovMg eioiv (so it 
is proper to say ylyvEo&ui Tgidy.ovja iiuiv § 273, 2, c.) ; or the Gen. is a pre- 
parative demonstrative pronoun, with which the clause introduced by tj 
may be regarded as in apposition or as explanatoiy of it. Od. ^, 182. ov 
(isv yitg xovyE xg slaaov y.al agsiov, tj o6^' o^ocfgoviovxE vov^aaiv 
oixov E/Tjxov uvi]g 7/(5f yvpi] (== xoi) oxe — EyTjxov). 

Rem. 6. {Comparatio compendiaria.) In comparisons, the Greeks often 
compare not the attribute of one object with that of another, but the at- 
tribute of one object with the other object itself to which the attribute 
would belong. In this case the Gen. is regularly used. X. Cy. 3. 3, 41. 
^wgav E/EXE ov8ev ijxxov rj^wv (instead of xijc rjuEXEgag) evxi^ov. More- 
over, in eveiT other comparison, this mode of expression is often employ- 
ed, e. g. II. (), 51. a'i^uxl ol 8evovxo x6 (i at XaglxEaaiv b p,o1a l (in- 
stead of xa~ig XMv Xagixwv). Comp. the examples under § 284, 4. 

4. \Vlien two attributes or predicates (adjectives or adverbs), are compared 
with each other in the same object, then both are put in the comparative 
and the last is annexed by ;/'. 

O ttxx (OV, T] aoq)(axEgog, celerior, quam sapientior, more swift than 
wise, or not so wise as swift. PI. Rp. 409, d. nXEOvdxig novrjgoXg, ?/ xgrioxdig 
ivivyxdvojv aocpbXEgog, ?; a fia-& iax Eg o g SoxeT, Eivai aixoj xe y.ul aX- 



49S SYNTAX. DISJUNCTIVE COORDINATE SENTENCES. [§323. 

Xoiq. Iler. 3, G5. inoirnju t a/ vj e q a, »7 or o (p mt ( n a (celerius, fjuarn 
pni(lciitius). 

5. Tlic subject is coinparotl witli itscltj i. e. the subject cxJiibits at some 
time a quabty in a liighor dcj/rce, tliun usual. In this case, the Gen. of 
the reflexive pronouns e(.iavrov, ataviov, tuviov, is used with the com- 
pai'ative, and the pronoun avTog with the pronoun of the third person. 
The other mode ol* expression by ?] is not admitted here. 

B sIt l(ov Hfxl i f.iavTo V. BEXzlmv u crsavT ov. li sXi i o) v 
iauv uvxoq iuvxov. Th. 3, 11. dvvuiuTfQOL uvtoI avTOiV iylyvov- 
To. In like manner, the superlative is used in connection with u vt 6 g 
and the Gen. of the reflexive pronouns, when the subject is to be repre- 
sented, as, at a given time, exliibitrng the quality belonging to it, in the 
highest degree (in a higher degree than at any other time). ^'Aq lutoq 
avT 6 g 8 avT o V. \4g IcrTrj avrr] h(xvTi]g. X. C. 1. 2, 46. iXd^i. <jol, 
(o negii(),sig, tots (jvw/evo^r^v, oif dEuvoTaxog auvTOV tuvtu i](T&a, 
when you had the highest distinction in these things, higher than at- any other 
time. 

6. There is a pecuUar mode of comparison, when an object in relation 
to some qualit}^, is compared not with another object, but with a whole 
thought (sentence), this thought being expressed by a substantive wliich is 
put in the Gen. depending on the comparative. Here also the otlier mode 
of expression by ij, does not occur. 

Her. 2, 148. TJaav al nvoccfildsg Xoyov fii^ovsg [oratione majores, i. e. 
majores, quam ut oratione explicai'i possit). Th. 2, 50. /ivo^usrov y.oela- 
cov Xoyov TO Eidog Ti]g voaov. Tlqay^a iXnldojv xq eItt ov. In- 
stead of substantives, participles are also used, e. g. dsovTog. PL Rp. 410, 
d. ol ysv yvyvadTLxf] ay.Q(XTto ;(gricrafA£VOi uyQKOTsgoL tol' diovTog 
ano^ttlvovaLv. 

7. When it is to be indicated, that a predicate or an attiibute is in a 
higher or low^er degree than could be exjiected, considering the measm-e 
of another object, then the comparative is constructed with ?/ y.aTa, or 
(though seldom) 7] n g 6 g with the Ace. 

Th. 7, 75. fiE l^bj ?j K a T « day.gva nsrzovd-oTac. PI. Rp. 359, d. ve~ 
xgog (jLEb^av 1] v.a-i a vd- g btno v. X. H. 3. 3, 1. ("Ayig) eti/e c e ^vo- 
rig ag 1] x«t« av & g (an ov Tacpr/g. Comp. Liv. 21, 29. proelimn airo- 
cius, quam pro numero pugnantium, editur. In English, we can say, in 
translating such passages, greater than could have been expected consid- 
ering the number, and the like, or too great considering, etc. 

8. If the predicate or attribute is represented as being in so high or low^ 
a degree, that another cannot exist with it, then the compai-ative is used 



§ 324.] SYNTAX. CAUSAL COORDINATE SENTENCES. 499 

with i] wgT s and the Inf. c. g. 7C«x« fjiei'CM i] v, -ij Mgjs xXnhi v, 
evils greater than one could weep for. See §341. 3, (a). 

Rem. 7. Tiie comparative is frequently used -without the second mem- 
ber of the comparison, and can then he translated by giving a strong em- 
pliasis to tlie positive, or more frequently by joining the adverbs too, pretty, 
soiiieivhat, a little, right, to the positive. (Comp. English, too sweet, pretty, 
somewhat, a little warm). In all cases of this kind, such thoughts as, than it 
teas before, them ^vas iisual, proper, right, becoming, were more or less dis- 
tinctly before the speaker's mind. Her. 3, 145. ]\faLuv8()to} ds to* rvQavvo) 
i]v «(5fA(jpfoc i'nofxuQyoTSQog (hebetioris ingenii). G, 108. ^.MfTs' sxa- 
aTSQb) oly.io per, too far. So })ai'ticularly the neuters upsLvov, ^bkriov 
{better than is right,], ituDuov, pullov, ;(hqov, cwTy^iov, y.ay.ior, also vidmqov, 
(more seldom xa/7'OTf()ov, as xotn'ocis used synonymously with vjcorf^^oc), and 
the like, especially with a negative, e. g. oil v.aD.iov, ovx ausnov, ov yay.iov, 
ov y.QHTTOv, ov '/UQOV, OV ^(4ov [not so easy, as it seems), etc. Her. 3, 71. tiols- 
siv uvTiy.a pot doy.esi nal pij vnfQ^SaXta&ui ' ov yag a (.isivov (scil. than if 
we did it immediately). PI. Phaedon. 105, a. nahv ds uvapipvi'ysy.ov ' ov 
yuQ X £2g ov Tiolkdy.tq ay.ovsiv. 

§324. IV. Causal Coordinate Sentences. (028—032.) 

1. Finally, these sentences may be so arranged, that the last may denote 
either the cause or the effect of the preceding sentence, or the consequence 
flowing from it. 

2. The Greeks denote the cause by '/ ag, which is never the first word 
in a sentence, but is commonly placed immediately after the first word, 
r'a^ is compounded of /s and ixga, and hence denotes both a confirma- 
tion, assurance, {ys, yes, certainly,) aud at the same time, a result, conse- 
quence, [a Q a, igitur, now, therefore). Hence, according as the one or the 
other meaning prevails, y a g may express, (a) a reason, (b) an explanation, 
(c) a confirmation or assurance ; and hence it may be translated, (a) by foVj 
(b) that is, for example, (c) indeed, certainly. 

PI. Phr.edr. 230, b. r>) ttjv'ITquv, tcuXtj ye rj ycnayoiyrj ' ?/ ts y u g nXuruvog 
avTij piiK oip(piXacpi)g t£ y.al viprjlij, ceiiainly, by all means, =for. Tag is 
used as explanatory, especially after demonstratives, and such phrases as 
'iiV.p^]giov di, pctgTvgiov ds, aripnov ds, di'jlov 8s scil. for/, dsUvvpu 6s, sdijkiocrs 
di, (TxstijmT&s ds, and the like. It expresses confirmation or assurance, par- 
ticularly in rejoinders and replies. X. C. 3. 5, 10. dga Xsystg ti]v tmv S^sm' 
KQiaLV, ijv 01 TTsgl Ksy.goTia di dgsi.i]v sy.givuv, — yJsyu ydg, yea certainly. 
10, 2. fx TioXXm' avvuyovTsg tul £| sy.d-jTov y.aXXiGTa, ovTwg oXa tu acopixTcx xaXct 
noislzs (fitlvsadai\ — FIoioipsv ydg, scprj, ovTbig. — In sentences expressing 
a summons, desire, command and inquir}% the meaning of ydg, as deno- 
ting a consequence or result, clearly appears. Arist. Ran. 251. tovtI nag 
vpMV Xap^dvco', Jsivu ydg nsiaops&a! am I so treated by you'? ivell! tlien 



500 SYNTAX. CAUSAL COORDINATE SENTENCES. [§ 324. 

we shall have hard thins^s to hear ! Kay.Mq y <* Q e^oXoio ! now so mayest thou, 
etc. So, el y a. Q, ti'& E y a Q. X. C. 1. 7, 2. utl 5' othjOyi tlfyiv, uidi idi- 
daaxiV JCv&i'iJbini&a yuQ-, t(fr], n Tig ^u*/ dip uya&og avlriiijg doxHv ^ov-^ 
AoiTO, t/ «V (xi'TO) noiriiiov ui] ; now then we ivould consider. 1. 4, 14. ov y ag 
ndvv aoi x«Tw»5/yAov, otl naQU tu ixlXa ^oia wgniQ \}fol uv&qmuoi fiioTiVovai ; 
now is it not clear to thee ? (nonne igitur — ?). II. tr, 182. 7^t S^iu, rig yug 
us &fbjv f'fiol uyydov r,xEV ; now then ivho has sent you ? X. C. 2. 3, 17. y.al 
6 XaiQiy.Qujrjg Einsv ' Jmv oiv., efiov tcxvtu noiovviog, ixEivog iiiidiv iSeXtIcov 
ylyvriTai; Tl yvcQ aXXo, tcprj 6 ^MxgviTrjg, ij xtvdvvevafig, x. x. X. ; now what 
else has happened then, that you will run the risk, etc. ? Dem. Ph. 1. 43, 10. 
y sv tT y ag av TL y.uivoTEgov, i] 3fay.£dd)v uvlig 'A&rjValovg y.uTUTioXEfibJv ; 
ivhy, can there be a greater novelty ? So, Tl ydg; quid ergo ? Kal tl yag ; 
and how now then ? Uwg y dg ; and n 6& sv ydg; as au emphatic nega- 
tive answer = by no means. Ilaq ydg ov ; (instead of it, tto-^ev ds ov 
is used with an antithesis) as an emphatic affirmative answer. X. C. 4. 4, 
13. ovy.ovv 6 fxsv tw dly.ata ngaTTcov dlxaiog, o 8s tu adixa udiy.og; 11 C g ydg 
ov ; to be sure, how not ? 

Remark 1. The explanatory sentence with ydg very often, particularly 
in Herodotus, precedes the sentence to be explained, e. g. Her. 6, 102. xal, 
it]v y d g 6 Maga&b)V STiiTrjdEbnaTOV /co^tov ttJ? 'ATTiy.ijg ivLmiEvauL, eg toDto 
(Tqpt xaTTiyisTO 'l7nilr]c. So especially with dXXd ydg, at enim, indeed, dXH 
OV ydg. FL Aipol. 20, c. i)^gvv 6 ^rjv av, el i]ni(jTdp.r,v TavTa' dXl^ ov ydg 
snl(TTctp.ai. 

Rem. 2. The two sentences, the preceding explanatory one with ydg, 
and the one which follows whose meaning is to be strengthened, are often 
so closely connected with each other, that the subject of the latter is trans- 
ferred to the former, and then is made to depend on it. Th. 8, 30. idlg iv 
tT] ^dpo) ^AS^TjvaloLC ngogncpiyiisvai ydg i](Tav y.al ol'y.o&Ev aXXai vyjsg 
y.al (TTgaTriyol, y.al Tag ano Xlov ndaag y.al Tag dXXag ^vvayayovTsg i(jov- 
XovTO, etc., instead of ot — ^A&i]va1oi — s^ovXovto, avTolg ydg, y.. x. X. 

Rem. 3. Kal ydg commonly means/or also, rarely etenim, but sometimes 
the y.al corresponds to a following y.al, thus, nam et — et. 

3. The effect or result is denoted, 

(a) By M ^ a {hence, then,) which never stands as the first word in a sen- 
tence, though commonly near the beginning, but sometimes at the end for 
the sake of emphasis. It expresses an effect which is understood of itself, 
which comes as a matter of course. In many passages, it hardh' admits of 
translation into English, since it often implies only a very slight consequence, 
and merely refers to something mentioned, to something existing in the 
context, or only in the conception of the speaker, in conformity with which 
the thing is in the state in which it is affirmed to be. Hence it is very 
often used like the English indeed, that is to say, in such explanatory clauses 
as more exactly define, or distinguish, something before said, or pointed 
out. 



§ 0'2A.] SYNTAX. CAUSAL COOUDINATE SKNTKNOK?. COl 

Luc. Jup. trng. 51. ft ftul ^lofiol, fieri yal ■Qbo'v aXXu fjijv eicrl (itx)^ol' fialv 
ixga xul d(ol. X. Cy. 7. 3, (>. T«Drw axoi'(r«? o Kvqoc enahuio li^u lov 
firjQoVy " wlien lic hiul heard of" the death of his friend, tJien he smote on 
his thigh," as was natural. It is olleii connected with an Inipf., when the 
idea of hc-ing undeceived in regard to a former opinion, resulting from a 
better view now entertained, is to be expressed, e. g. L 4, 11. oi ncAidi-g, oig 
uQu i (pX v a Q oil 1^1 sv, ore tm eV tw nufjadslacn xItjOiu e&)]()0)}.i6V of.ioiop 
bfioi'/k doy.el tirixt, oiurnft} el'iig Ssdiafiiva ^am &r,Qo])j^ '"'' now how childish we 
were then, as I now indeed see." 1. 3, 8. 2:uy.a ds, cpanxc rov L4(;Tr(//;,r, 
Tol oh'o/ooj, iiv f/M (.uiXnTTu TLftio, oi8si' 8ld(t)g ', 'O dt -uxag a j; « y.(y.X6g ts 
wv iTvyxtJtye, y.al Tij.ir]v t/ow ngogaystv joig 8io^dvovg^AaTi(r/oiQ, now ihe 
Sacian happened to he beautiful. 9. o) —«';<«, an6XoiX(xg ' ey.^ulu) trs iy. ri'/g ti~ 
(.u]g' Tit T6 yuo «AAa, ipuvai, aov y.dXXiov olvoxoijao), y.r/.l ovy. e/.Tilotxai uvTog 
rov oivov 01 8^ u q a tuv ^aaiXsMV oIvo/col — yrnuQ^ocpolfft. Dem. Cor, 
2.32, 22. hoXfia Xi/siv, uig u g a fyd) — y.sHix^XvyMig Hr^v ji]v ttvXlv (t>V f'^'^it^J'') "^ 
noiijauadai, that I indeed. Hence the use ofyug and the strengthened 
form yuQ ti Q a. — Z-'t a g a and ft // // aga correspond to the Latin si 
forte, nisi forte, if perchance, if not, often ironicd. X. C. 1. 2, 8. n^g t'lv ovv 
TOioi'Tog uvljo 8iucp&itgoL jovg viovg] ft (xij aga i) xi'^g ugETifQ ejiipiXita 
8iaq)&ogd iaiLV, (properly, thai if such an excellent man can corrupt the young, 
then we must draw the conclusion that, etc. So also, ft u g a, num forte, ivhether 
therefore. X. C. 4. 3, 9. axonoj, si aga xl eon lolg -dsolg I'g/ov, i] urOgco- 
TTovg ■&£garjsi£iv, ivhether the gods have any other employment than, etc. 
*'A g a stands very often in interrogative sentences. Aesch. S. 91. rig a g a 
QvatTaL; rig 8' a g^ knagy.iau d-sMV, quis igitvr defendet? quls igitur 
arcebit ? 

Rem. 4. ^'Ag a seems to be derived from the yevh^'APJl, i. e. to be fifed, 
adapted, suitable, and hence to express the inward relation, ilie immediate 
connection of two thoughts, and in such a manner that one seems, as it 
were, to be entirely fitted to the other, — the one perfectly corresponding to 
the other { = precisely, even). In this sense it is used in Homer, e. g. II. r], 
182. ey. (5' tdogs y.X7igog xvpstjc, ov a g' i'l^iXov avTol, which precisely, Ti](xog 
a g a, jvst then, o t' a g a, even, when, tot' a g a, precisely then, si firj aga, 
if not then, o) g u g a, exactly so ; ovy. — , dXX' aga, not ■. — but even ; t tt f / 
g a, since even, y a g g a, for indeed. Homer uses aga, in general, in order 
to connect thoughts together, which are intimately related, and are unfold- 
ed from each other. 

Rem. 5. The lyric, tragic and comic writers also employ the lengthened 
form aga instead oT u g a. Thus si aga. fi'r' aga, instead of ft aga, 
(It aga. On the interrogative aga and on aga in interrogatives, see § 344. 

(b) Ovv (Ion. 0)*'), which commonly has the second or third place in a 
sentence, means, coTistquently, hence, therefore {ergo, igitur)-, it appro] ))iately 
points out the effect of a cause, the necessary consequence of what pre- 
6.5 



502 SYNTAX. ASYNDETIC CONNECTION OF SENTENCES. [§ 325. 



cedes, and is accordingly fur stroiig-er lliaii uqu, and it is also used in a 
more general sense. 

Rem. G. Ovv is used as a suffix to pronouns and conjunctions, and in 
this case retains its meaning as denoting an effect, oqxiq ovv, ognsQ ovv, aaot 
ovv, y.h ovv, yovv, <5' ovv, u)X ovv, ht ovv, yuq ovv. It expresses a con- 
clusion, a setting aside of everything else and a jjcrsisting in that whicli 
is affirmed ; hence it may express a confirmation and assurance. So o qx it; 
ovv, hgnsQ ovv, whoever he may he, oaoi ovv, how many soever, fiiv 
V V, yes indeed, § 316, Rem., y oiiv, certainly, surely, ov xovv, truly, certain- 
ly not, d^ o vv,uXX^ ovv, ax aq ovv, but to be sure, bI'te o v v, be it this 
or that, y a Q ov v,for surely, ei d' ovv, if then. 

Rem. 7. Ovy. ovv, as a Paroxytone, means, (a) non ergo, not with a ques- 
tion (thus oi'ic is used in connection with the syllogistic ovv, ergo) ; 
still the form ovu ovv occurs in this case ; (b) nullo modo, nequaquam, by 
no means, not interrogatively (thus ovx is used in connection with the em- 
phatic suffix ovv), most frequently in answers, e. g. X. O. 1, 9. ovxovv 
Efioiys doxH. — OvKovv, as a Perispomenon, (a) in a question, Tionne igitur'? 
nonne ergo'? X. C. 2. 2, 12. ovxovv, icpr] 6 X, xal toj ysiiovi ^ovIel av 
ctQsaxsiv ; — ^'Eyaiys, scprj. Also in this case it occurs in the form ovx ovv, 
as w^ell as ovy.ovv, which last has been adopted in modern times, yet 
certainly it is to be limited to such questions as involv^e a special emphasis 
in the negative, and so ovxovv is equivalent to nonne certe ; like S. Aj. 79. 
ovy.ovv yil^g r^duuToi; elg ix&Qovg ysXav, (b) not interrogatively, ergo, igitur. 
X. C. 3. 6, 6. ovy.ovv, BcpT], to fxsv nlovcTLWTsgav rijv noXiv noLUv avu/ja- 
Xov/is&a. This last arises from its use as an interrogative, and ovy.ovv is 
in this case properly nonne igitur f The frequent use of this interrogative 
form has caused a gradual weakening in the interrogatory tone, and hence 
its sense as implying a question has become obscure, e. g. " is it Twt true 
therefore that we shall put off"? :^ consequently we shall put off" 

(c) Tolv vv, which never stands as the first word in a sentence, is de- 
rived from the Epic t o}, therefore, and the slightly deductive vvv, now, 
derived from the adverb of time, vvv, it is used, (a) in order to make 
a transition, thus, in a particular manner, x«t toIvvv, and now, bt i to /- 
vvv, moreover then; (b) in order to indicate a conclusion, therefore now, so 
then. Tolyaq (compounded of the Epic tm , therefore, audi /a^) corres- 
ponds to the Latin ergo, therefore ; still stronger is xoLyaqTOi, on this ac- 
fiount even, and to ly aq ovv, on this account then. They commonly stand 
as the first word in a sentence. 

§ 325. Remark on the Asyndetic (d i sj unctiv e) 
Conne ct i on of Sentence s . (633.) 

1. In certain cases sentences are connected without any conjunction 
(oicrw^sTfoc), 

(a) In pathetic and impassioned discourse, e. g. II. Xi 295. (of Hector) otjJ 
dh iionotcf)i](Taq, ov8^ oiX"^ sxe fidXivov ey/og ' Jijicpo^ov d^ iy.ixXsL XEvy-uamda, 



§ 326.] SYNTAX. PRINCIPAL AND SUBORDINATE SENTENCES. 503 

(.tnyQov «r(r«c, // ts« fiiv doov ftay.(i6v. — (b) The asyndeton is very common 
in explanatory clauses, which are elsewhere connected by aQ(x, {there/ore, 
fhen^ that is), and ytxQ. The second clause gives a more exact explanation of 
what was stated only in a general, indefinite, indistinct manner in the first. 
So particularly when there stands in the first clause what may be called a 
jM-epiu-ative demonstrative, e. g. tolto, to^f, outw?, w5f, etc. X. An. 3. 2, 19. 
kvl ^lovM nqoixovffiv ii^dig ol liuiug' cfsvyuv aiio7g acrcpaXeare^ov iirriv, i] 
i]fuv. — (c) Related to the above is the asyndetic construction in the begin- 
ning of a discourse or new paragraph, which is intended to strengthen a 
preceding thought. PI. Phaedon. 91, c. \4U^ Uiov, scprj. ngmov (is vno^u- 
vriduTE (jc slsysTE, idv (jtj (paivwuai fiS{j,vrj(isvog. — (d) The connecting pai'ticle 
is otlen wanting, but is, in a certain degi'ee, involved in another word. 
This appears especially with demonstratives, e. g. ovTCxig, Tuuog, xoiog, etc., 
as in Latin with sic^ talis, tantus, etc. — (e) Asyndeton is very common before 
T a TOLavTa, cetera, all a, ol allot m tlie enumeration of several ob- 
jects, y.al being omitted, as et before cetcri, alii, reliqui, in Latin, when these 
words have a collective sense, i. e. when one would bring together in these 
expressions all which is still to be named in addition to that which has 
been already mentioned. PI. Gorg. 503, e. olov h §ovlu IdsTv rovg ^oj/qu- 
(fovg, rovg olxodoj^ovg, Tovg vavjirjyovg, xovg ullovg Travrag drj^iovQyovg. 
— (f ) In poetry, particularly in Epic, two or four adjectives, belonging to 
one substantive (of which each two form a whole), or even three are often 
placed together, without a connective, if they are the so-called Epitheta 
ornantia, which, as it were, paint the object. II. n, 140, 802. sy/og (Sgi&Vf 
(xiya, (TTi^agov, y.Eyogv&nivov. Od. «, 97. y.alct nidila, af-i^goaia, XQvaua. 



SECTION VIII. 

B. Subordinate Sentences. 

§326. Principal and Subordinate Sentence s. 

(634—637.) 

1. When sentences, which together present one united 
thought, are so related, as to their import, or contents, that the 
one appears as a dependent and merely completing or limiting 
member of the other, then their connection may be expressed 
either by coordinate conjunctions, as ^al, dt, ydg, aga, etc., e. g. 
TO tag rilOe, za 81 goda dv&8i; or in such a manner that the sen- 
tence, which, as to its import merely completes or limits the 
other, is manifestly in its outward form, a dependent, or a sim- 



504 SYNTAX. PRINCIPAL AND SU^OUDINATE SENTENCES. [§326. 



ply completing, or limiting mcmbcT of the other, e. g. ore to 
euQ /;P. i9-f, Tu (^odu (lyOtL This mode of connection is called 
the Subordinate. 

2. The clause to which the other as a supplementary mem- 
ber belong3, is called the princi])al clause ; the limiting or dc- 
lining clause, the subordinate clause, and the two together, a 
compound sentence. 

E. g. In the words, " The man, who came from the camp of the enemy, 
announced to Cyrus, as night began, that the enemy had fled," — the man 
announced, is the principal sentence ; tJic remainder, are subordinate sen- 
tences. Every principal sentence, if it refer to another sentence and is 
made dependent on it, is, in relation to that, a subordinate sentence, e. g. 
Xenophon relates that a man, who — had announced ; so eveiy subordinate 
sentence, when new subordinate sentences arise from it, may be consid- 
ered in reference to these, as a principal sentence, e. g. "that the enemy, 
ivhe7i they had received {7iformation from Cyrus, fled." 

3. Subordinate sentences stand in the place of a substantive 
(substantive subject or object), or of an attributive adjective, or 
of an adverb, and hence must be regarded as substantives or 
adjectives, or adverbs, expanded into a sentence ; accordingly, 
there are three classes of subordinate sentences, viz. substan- 
tive sentences, adjective sentences and adverbial sentences. 

Thus, e. g. in the sentence, " The victory of Cyrus over the enemy was 
annoimced," the subject may be expanded into a subordinate sentence, 
viz, " That Cyrus had conquered the enemy, was announced ;" further, in the 
sentence, " Sing to me, O Muse, the far- wandering man," the attributive 
far-wandering, may be expanded into a subordinate sentence, " vlrdQU fiot 
evvETis, Mot'croc, nolrnqonov, ug y^ala nollu Tildy^S-r]." Comp., 
"He announced the victory of Cyrus over the enemy," with "He an- 
nounced, that Cyrus had conquered the enemy ;" " In the Spring tlie roses 
bloom," with, " ivhen the Spring is come, the roses bloom." 

Remark 1. The use of subordinate sentences in Greek is not so common 
as in English, since the Greek makes a much more frequent use of Partici- 
pials than the English. Comp. " when the enemy had come," with toiv 
TTohp^iMv iXdovTUiv ; " wdien he had done tliis, he went away," Avith tuv- 
T« TiQa^ag une^r] ; " C} rus, who had conquered the enemy, came back to 
the camp," with KiQog lovg nolf^iovg vixijcrag tig to (iTQaTOTiidov uvTjXS^ev. 

Rem. 2. To substantive sentences belong also interrogative subordinate 
sentences, or dependent (oblique) interrogativ^e sentences ; for these form 
the object of the principal governing verb, e. g., " He asked me wheth- 
er my father had returned, i. e. concerning, or after, the return of my father ; 



§ 327.] SYNTAX. SUCCESSION OF TKNSES. 505 

" lie sliowcd, icho had plotted the conspirac}/, i. c. " lio showed tlic au- 
tlior of the conspiracy ;" " Ho wrote iiic, ichen he should depart, i. e. tho 
time of his de|)artiire," etc. Still, the laws relating to dei)endent interro- 
giitive sentences, and those relating to direct sentences, are so often hlend- 
cd together, that hoth will he treated in a special section in the secpiel. 

Rem. 3. The relation of snhordinate sentences to the ])rincipal sen- 
tence, is indicated in Greek by conjunctions, and also by the relative pro- 
noun, which in an adjective sentence has the meaning of an adjec- 
tive or participle. Conjunctions are correlatives, i. e. relatives which 
stand in a reciprocal relation to demonstratives in principal sentences, 
e. g. u 1 6 g iijTiv o uvtjo, ov ftdig. To ^udor, o av&n iv rot '/.i'jtko, 
xaXXitTTov iajtr. "j^h^s rovio, ort o ai&Qionoi ud^uriaog tajiv. Tol-t 
og — o'l og; o a oy — t o ao vr oj; lo g Us^ix, o vr jog f/ivnu. ()%Tp y.u- 
Xb)g TiavTix tnoa^tv, togTS ijialyov (.i^yltiTov u^iog i]v. "Ots o Kvoog ijk&e, 
TOT€ TTCfVTfc ^fyal(x)g i/aQr/dav. "Lf.tfive (.t^/Qt tovzov, o u o ^aadsvg 
6n7]l&fv. A substantive may also stand instead of a demonstrative cor- 
relative, e. g. fV ToiTO) Toj ;{q6vo), ore (instead of tot?, ote). Still, when the 
reciprocal relation is not to be brought out em])hatically, the demonstrative 
is commonly not expressed, e. g. ^'JiihUv, otl o uvd-Qwnog a&dvaiog iaiiv. 
KaXcJg navTu tnoaisv, togif. y.rk. "Ote u Kvijog ijX&E, Tcurifc ^f/dXwg 
i/nqr^fjav. "Jl^nivt, (.li/ni ov o ^uau.tig eni'/Xd-fv, etc. Even both pro- 
nouns may be in certain cases omitted, e. g. "L^elve, fji/Qi u ^SacriXivg i7ii]X~ 
dzv. 

Rem. 4. The form of a demonstrative, in the principal sentence, either 
actually expressed or understood, determines the nature of the subordinate 
sentence. The substantive demonstrative refers to a substantive sentence ; 
the adjective, to an adjective sentence ; the adverbial, to an adverbial sen- 
tence. The subordinate sentences, however, have particular characteristics 
by which they may be distinguished from each other, viz. the introduc- 
tory conjunctions and the consti'uction connected with these. 

§ 327. Succession or Sequence of Tenses in Sub- 
or din at e Sentences. (638.) 

1. The relation of time in a subordinate sentence, is, in general, not to 
be referred du'ectly to the present time of tlie speaker, but to the relation 
of time in the principal sentence, it being defined by this relation. Hence 
the following rule, " The Tenses of subordijiate sentences must coiTespond 
to those of the principal sentences," thus, 

(a) The principal tenses,* in the principal sentences, viz. the Present, 
Perfect, Futiu'e and Future Perfect, are followed in the subordinate sen- 
tences by a principal tense m the Indicative or Subjunctive, (on the 
Aorist Subj., see §257, Rem. ],) namely, (a) by the Present, when the 
predicate of the subordinate sentence refers to the same time with that of 
the principal sentence ; (/5) by the Perfect, w^hen the predicate of the sub- 
ordmate sentence denotes an action which is completed before that of the 
principal sentence ; (/) by the Future, when the predicate of the subordi- 



506 SYNTAX. SUBSTANTIVE SENTENCES. [§ 328. 

nate sentence is fiitm-e in relation to tlic predicate of tlie principal sen- 
tence, e. g. AyyilXiTai^ ri//diuL, u/yi).di]atTui^ oil ol noli^iov (fiiyovaiy 
— OTi ol noli^iiOL TTfqjSiyuaiv — un ot nolinLOi cpn'^oviut', the Aorist, 
[tifiyor] may take the [)lace ol" the Perf., as has l)(;en seen §25G, Rem. 1. 
Tovio XiyM^ lovio ^oi likixiui, tovto Af'^w, 'ivu yiyvoxTxrig or 'ivu yvo)?. 

Rkim. I. The historical tenses oflen follow the j)rincipal tenses. This 
occnrs, (a) when a subordinate sentence stands in a recii)rocal relation to 
another sid)ordinate sentence, so that the predicate of* the former does not 
refer directly to the relation of time expressed in the principal sentence, 
hut to the relation of time expressed in the other predicate. Dem. Ph. 3. 
118,30. i'(TT8, OTi, ova fisv vjio Aay.i8at(xovi(x)v i] vcp vf^oiv tnaaxov 
oV'Ellriviq, ttXl oiv vtio yvr}aio)v ys opicov tT^c; '^Jikkadog v S i, y. o v v t o. The 
same princi})le holds, when the predicate of the subordinate sentence is 
conditioned by tiie predicate of another sentence, e. g. fl^Tjf^ I, oil, u zov- 
xo Xeyoig, a fi (x q r a v o i g a v. 0rj fi I, otl, d tovto tl£y£g{tu^ag), i] ^aq- 
T s g u v; (b) the Impf Ind. stands, when a past action is to be considered as 
continuing at the time spoken of. Her. 3, 89. Ityovat Hsgaai, ug /Ja- 
QHog -)] V xantjXog. 

(b) An Historical tense, viz. the Imi)f., Plup. and Aor. in a principal sen- 
tence, is followed in a subordinate sentence by an Hist, tense in the Ind. 
or Opt., namely, (a) by the Impf in order to denote something then occur- 
ring ; (/5) by the Plup. so as to denote an action already completed ; {y) by 
the Aor., (§256, Rem. 1); [d) by the Fut. Opt. to denote an action still fu- 
ture, e. g. ^HyyillsTo, ijyydTO or rjyysX&r), otl ol noUfiiOL Eq)?vyov, tq)vyov, 
(fvyoLBV^ snecpEvyEcav, necpsvyoisp, (pEv'^oivio. Tovto ehyov, tovto (xol iki- 
XsxTo, iV sldsltjg. ^E818ovv, idsduxELV, idojy.d gol to pi^SXlov, \va Xd^oig. 

Rem. 2. Very often, however, in lively narration, the Greeks refer the 
predicate of a subordinate sentence directly to the present time of the 
speaker, without any regard to the principal sentence, so that, therefore, an 
historical tense in the principal sentence is followed by the same tenses 
which accompany the principal tenses. A dependent clause then assmnes 
the character of an independent or direct clause or discom'se (an objective 
mode of expression); the speaker, in his lively conceptions, brings tlie past 
into present view ; the past becomes present to him. By placing in con- 
trast the Hist, tenses in the principal sentence to the principal tenses with 
their conjunctions in the subordinate sentences, the subordinate sentences 
become more important than the principal. X.^n. 2. 1, 3. ovtol tlsyov, 
OIL KvQog Ts-d-vfjice V. Cy. 2. 2, 1. in sfisksz o 6 Kvqoq^ otiots avaicr)- 
voTev, OTibjg (lyaQKiTOTnTOL Xoyoi i ^ (iXrj d^i']a ov t a i. Her. 1, 29. 2'oAwv 
unE8i]^ri(TE EiEa dsxa,Xv(x drj /ui] Tiva tmv voficov dvayy.aa&fj Xvaau 
TMV E&ETO. Comp. the remarks on oblique discourse. 

§ 328. 1. Substantive S e nt e n c e s . (639.) 

Substantive sentences are substantives or infinitives expanded 
into a sentence, and, like substantives, constitute the subject, 
as well as the attribute and object of a sentence. 



§329.] SYNTAX. SUBSTANTIVE SENTENCES. 507 

§ 329. A. Sub slant i v e Se n t en c e s i ntro d ii c c d by 
oil or w g, that. (040— 643.) 

1. Substantive sentences introduced by on and (og, that, 
express the object of verba senile ndi and declarandi, e. g. oquv, 
axovsif, voEiv, fiavd^di'Sir, yiyvoja'AEiv, etc. ; h'yeiv, di^lovv, dtiy.vvvaiy 
«;7'tlP.fn', etc., § 30(5, 1, (b) ; the subordinate sentences, in the 
second place, introduced by on, express the object of verbs of 
feeling and emotion, e. g. {yav[Ad(^eiv, dy\>E6\>(a, (lyava-Artlv, alaiv- 
t'sa&ai, fie)icpe6\}u(, etc. ; ozi is also used in order to introduce a 
subordinate sentence, which contains an explanation of the 
principal sentence, or of a single word in it. 

Remark 1. Sometimes n 10 g and the Poet, ovvsxa (properly in as 
far as), also o&ovvsxa,m the tragic poets, are used nearly in the same 
sense with on, ilmt. , 

Rem. 2. When a subordinate clause is referred to a Pass, verb or to an 
impersonal phrase with lailv, e. g. 8i]lov, dsivov, alcr/Qov lativ, and the like, 
it stands as the grammatical subject. 

2. The predicate of this substantive sentence may be express- 
ed, (a) in the Ind., (b) in the Opt., (c) in the Opt. with dr, (d) 
in the Ind. of Hist, tenses with civ. 

3. The Ind. of all the tenses is used, when what is affirmed 
is to be represented as a fact or phenomenon, something cer- 
tain or actual. In a special manner the Ind. is used regularly, 
when the verb of the principal sentence is a principal tense, viz. 
the Pres., Perf. or Fut. On the Opt. occm'ring after a princi- 
pal tense, see § 327, Rem. 1. 

4. The Opt., on the contrary, is used, when what is affirmed 
is a supposition, therefore, in a special manner, when what is 
stated as the opinion of another is to be indicated as such, 
§ 345. When the Ind. is changed to the Opt., then one thought 
is represented as a fact, the other, as a mere conception, some- 
thing uncertain. 

X. Cy. 1. 4, 7. ot 5' s'Xfyov, otl uq/.tql noXXovg ijdrj nhjaLuauvrag 8 i s- 
q)d-6L^av. Th. 1, llA.ijyysXd^r], ori MiyaQa acp ia Trjxe, y.al JIsloTior- 
vi]GLOv ft eXXov(t Lv egj^uXXsiv ig ji]v ^AiTi/.rjV. Her. 3, 140. nvvdavnaL 
(Hist. Pres.) o ^vXoumv, afgij ^aaiXTfti] n e q LiXr]Xv&o l ig tovtov tov uv- 
dqa. X. An. 1.1,3. TiaaacpsQVTjg dtaSdXXsL {R'lst. Fres.) rov Kiqov nqog 
tlv addcpov, (w$ ini^ovXsvoc avTio. Cy. 1. 1, 3. ore ^iv dij Twi^Ta ivs- 



508 SYNTAX. SUBSTANTIVE SENTENCES. [§ 829. 

■&vuovixidit, o'l'iTotg (yiyvitnT'/.n^iv rtFol (xuio)V, to g uvdQomin nEtfvy.oTi nuvcMV 
iMV (xlh)iv i^uov lit] ^(i)U)V, i]V uvUoMiKxtv u(j/iiv, Arj. 2. 1, 3. o'l'ioL tXiyoVy 
OIL Kvnog ixii> 7 8 vr]y. Ev, \doiixiog Se ti e cp e v y oi g e I't) xul Xe y oi, oit 
JuvTTjv liiv rjfXE()av n^o^^uti^'tl^v up ulioug. 

Rem. *3. Tlio Ind., and more particularly the Iiid. of the piincij)al tenses, 
standing alter a Hist, tense in a i)rincipa] sentence, olten aives tlie coloring 
of a direct discourse to a sentence, ^ '^27, Rem. 2. Hence it sometimes 
happens, that the form of the oblique discourse is either partially or wholly 
changed into that of the direct. X. Cy. t. 4, 28. ivTav&a 81] lov Kvqov ys- 
X(i(TUL TE ex TMP n^otrdEv da^QVOiv zai ilnuv avTuj uthovtu S^uqqhv, oti tt «- 
QEmai uvTolg ollyov ^qovov oigiE o^ixv cr o l i%iaTixi xmV /3ov).r] ua- 
^aQdaf.ivy.TsL Hence otc may be used, when the exact words of another 
are (pioted in the same form in which they were spoken by him, when in 
Eng., a colon or marks of quotation are used, e. g. X. Cy. 3. 1, 8. eIjie d\ 
OT I' J^lg zaiQov ?i>ifi?, £(p??, he said " you have come at the right time." An. 
2. 4, 16. riQo^Evog EtTTEv, 1 1 ' AvTog Ei^ui, uv Qriiilg. It is even used before the 
Imp., e. g. PI. Criton. 50, c. Xawg uv eI'tcoiev [oi v6^oi\ oil' 'Jl — wz^jwtf?, 
w?) & c<v fia^E Tti XsyoixEva, 

5. The Opt. with av is used, when what is afFirmed is pre- 
supposed as conditional, as a supposition, conjecture, or as an 
undetermined possibility, §260, 2, 4, (a). 

X. An. 1. 6, 2. xmalXayElg ds ovrog Kvqoj, eItiev, eI auTuj dolt] ImiEug 
%iXiovg,oTL Tovg TTQoyuiaxuloviag Ijiniag i] Harcty.uvoi uv iyEdQEvauQj 
■)j ^oii'Ta? TioXXovg avTojv eXol, y.al xcoXikteie tou xueiv EKiovxag. Cy. 1. 
6, 3. fiEiivrjfiai uxovaug nojs (tov, otl EixoTwg av xal nuQU d^Ecav ttquxtixoj- 
TEQog eI't], wgriEQ xal tiuqu av&gMnutv, ugTig fij], utiote ev unoQOig sir}, tots 
y.oXaxbVoi^,, dXX ote tu agidTa tiquttoi,, tote fiixXiaTU twj^ -^ewv ^e(xvo)io ijo g- 
T ig fi7] xtX. instead of iX iig p] xtX.). Dem. Aphob. 851, 22. ot^«, oxt 
navTsg u v o (i o X o y ^] cr u l t s. 

6. The Ind. of the Hist, tenses with civ is used, when the af- 
firmation is to be expressed as what is conditional, whose ac- 
tual existence or possibility is denied, § 260, 2, (2) («). 

Dem. Aphob. 830, 55. e t ^ih o 7iut))q rin Ict te l TovToig, drjXov, ot u ol't 
av TuXXa E n ET Q E71EV, ovi av TavSt 0VT03 xuTaXiTiojv avTolg scpQu^sv. 
Lys. c. Agor. 137, 75. oldsnoTE nEicrEig ovdivu uv&gojTiojv, 0*5 Ogvvixov 
anoxTtivag a q) e I &7j g liv, si fxi] y.fyuXa tov dtjf^ov tCjv A&i^valiov xul uvi]- 
HEffTtt xaxa Elgyacroj. 

Rem. 4, Impersonal forms of expressions are often changed into those 
wd;jich are personal, the subject of the substantive sentence being trans- 
ferred to ilie ])nneij)al sentence and the impersonal expression becoming its 
predicate. Comp. §§ 307, Rem.- 6, and 310, Rem. 3. Th. 1, 93. xul 8i]Xi] 

1] olxo8o(xlu. ETL xul VVV EdTlV, T L XUTU (T7l0vd7]V SyivETO. X. C. 4. 2, 



§339.] SYNTAX. FINAL SUBSTANTIVE SENTENCES. 509 

21. {doxH o ToiovTog) 8 ij Xoc rrj /li tivai, oria ojsio fldsvai ovx oi8iv. 
X. O. ], 1J>. o T f norijooTaToi fiiTij oi'di (te Xav&dvovaiv. 

Kem. 5. In tho [)lacc of a substantive sentence introduced by ort or o)g, 
the Inf. (Ace. with the Inf.) or the Part, may stand after several of the 
verbs nieutioned in No. 1. That there is a diftercnce in respect to the 
meaning between the construction with the Inf. and tliat with the Part., 
lias been seen in §311 ; but the difference between the construction with 
a Part, and that with oti or wc, is only in form. The difference between 
the construction with oit and utg with the finite verb and that of the Inf., 
(Ace. with Inf.) is this, viz. that in the former, the affirmation is more 
objective and definite ; in the latter, on the contrary, subjective and in- 
definite. That the distinction between the three modes of construction 
is often very unessential, is clearly seen from the fact, that examples are 
found in which ti)e satne thought is expressed by the same writer in diffe- 
rent places in each of the three forms, e. g. Her. 6, GS. e^uyyslhi, ojg ol 
Tiulg / iy ov s. 65. ots ol i^ijyyeds 6 oiy.iirjg n al d a ysyovivai. 69. 
oTf ai'Tw (J V liyysX^r^g yiysvr][iivog. 

Rem. 6. The verbs ^ifivrjixaL, old a, axovw and others of similar 
meaning, are not untrequently followed by an adverbial sentence, intro- 
duced by OTS, instead of a sul)stantive sentence introduced by oil or wg. 
This construction seems to arise from an ellipsis, as rov /quvov, e. g. (xifi- 
vr^ixai {jov %q6vov), ote javra tXs^ag, as in Eng. " I remember very well 
ivhen the war broke out." X. Cy. 1. 6^ S. ^i^vr] fiat yal jovto, oxf, aov 
XtyovTog, avvidoxsL y.al ffxol vnsQixsyi&ig livuL t^yov to y.aXwg uq/hv. Comp. 
memini, quum darem ; vidi, quum prodiret ; audivi eum, quum diceret. 

Rem. 7. Verbs expressing emotion, No. 1, are often followed, (instead of 
by a substantive sentence introduced by oxi or wc), by a subordinate sentence, 
introduced by a conditional or interrogative el, if, whether, when the object 
of admiration, etc., is not to be represented as actually existing, but as 
merely possible, or as still a matter in question, e. g. S^ocvfid^o), on lavra 
ylyvsTUL and d jitvTa ylyvetai. Attic politeness, which often blends in its 
language a coloring of doubt and a certain indeterminate manner of ex- 
pression, often employs this form even in settled and undoubted facts. 
Aeschin. Ctes. oix ay an a, si jxij diy.rjV bdomsv, he is not satisfied, that. PI. 
Lach. 194, a. dyavaxro) et ovioal a vom ^i] olog x ft^t ilnuv. Rp. 348, 
e. xo5« s&otvfiaffa, it iv uosT-^g y.al aocpUtg rl&rjg fxigfL ti^v udixlav, 
ii]V 8s 8iy.uio(TVV7)v iv jolg ivaviloig. Dem. Mid. 30, 548. ovy. fja/vv'&Tj, 
ft TOLOVTO xay.ov inotysi xw, that he occasions such a calamity for one. 

Rem. 8. Instead of oil ovt oj g, the relative w c, that, often stands, and 
instead of ox i to i ovt o g oroxt to a o g the relatives olog, oa o g are 
used. PI. Phaed. 58, e. iv8at(ib)v fioi 6 dvi]Q iq)aLvsTO, w g d8EbJg y.al ysv- 
valojg hiXEVTu, that he so, etc. Her. 1, 31. aVAgyslai l^ay.dqL'Qov ttiV fxtjTSQa, 
'i(»v Tsy.v(av ixvgrjtTE, that she is possessed of such children. 

§330. B. Final Substantive Sentences, introdu- 

duced by Iva, etc, (G4i— 649.) 

1. The second class of substantive sentences are the final, i. e. 

those which indicate an end, intention, aim. These sentences 



510 SYNTAX. FINAL SUBSTANTIVE SENTENCES. [§ 330. 

am introdnccul ])y the following conjunctions, Iva, (og, o n co<; 
( cp o a Poet.), i V a n i] , m g /i // , o tt ca g fi i] . 

2. The mode used in fnml sentenee.s is conmnonly llu; sub- 
junctive or optative, since an intention or aim is something that 
is imagined or conceived. When the verb of the principal 
sentence is in a principal tense, i. e. Present, Perfect, Future, or 
an Aorist with the signification of the present, §§ 256, 257, then 
the final conjunction, i. e. the conjunction expressing the aim, 
intention, is followed by the Subj. mode; but when the verb of 
the i)rincipal sentence is in an historical tense, i. e. Impf , Plup., 
Aor., then the final conjunction is followed by the optative. 

TavTa y Qu cp CO, ys/Qucpa, y q aipw^Xv' eX ^ j] g, ut venias, tlud thou 
maycst come, yti^ov (with tlie sense of the Pres.), Xv sld m, die, ut sciam, 
that I may know. Taina ey g a cp ov, iy fy q a q) elv, eygaipa, tV t).- 
S-o ig, ut venires, that thou mightest come. II. I, 289 sq. uX)^ lO^vg iX ocvv sz e 
^(avv/cig 'innovg l(p&i^03V /Javaojv, IV VTisgifgov si'xog ugrfcr&s, ut gloriam 
voh\s paretis ; but, II. ?, 1 — 3.bv&' av Tydstdj] zIlo^i']8h nuXXug^Ad^^vr] 6 oj- 
y. e jxEvog koI S^ugaog, liv" ty,di]Xog j^etcc nacnv "'AgysloLOL ysvo no, ids v.Xioq 
ia&Xov a QOLTo,ut clarus Jieret et gloriam sibi pararet. t, 347. Jupiter said to 
Minerva, aXX I'&i ot vixiag ts vmI afx^gocFtrjv igaTuvi]v otu^ov (with the 
sense of the Pres.), hi (Tzij&faa, Xv a [xtj {xiv Xi^og Xy. i]t a l, ut ne fames eum 
occvpet ; but, 352. i] d" AxiXHii viy-zag ivl aTi]diaai yc/l vifi^goalr^v igaTHVi]V 
(TTwl', Xva ^i] fiLv Xi^og aTEg7i'i}g yovva^ Xy.ono, ut ne occuparet. Dem. 
Cor. 239, 39. y sy g cy.cp a vfuv, Xv « ^ ?; etiI nluov iv o yXria 0^ e nsgl tovtmv. 
X. Cy. 2. 1, 4. Tfc ovv, I'qp^ o Kvgog, ov y.al zijv dirafiiv tXEiixg {aol = Xe^ov 
[lOi, § 256, 4, (e), oncog — ^ovXev a fXE& a, onojg av ugiaxa uyMVi'sOi/jiE- 
S-a; 1. 2, 3. {tx zrjg toiv negcrmv sXEV^sgag ayogag y.aXovfiivrjg) t« {.iev m'tu 
xal ol ayogaHoL an e Xi] X ccvt a i Elg aXXov Tonov, ag jji) fxiyvvrjTaL 77 
TovTwv Tvgijrj zfj zajv TiETTaidtvixEVMV Evy.oa^la. 15. Xva ds aaqiazEgov di]- 
Xiad-i] naaa i] IlEgaojv noXizEla, iAiy.gov eh av el ^ i, paucis repetam. 4, 25. 
Kafi^mr/g zov Kvgov a 71 e y. cc X el, on (og zu iv IlEgaaig sni/MgLa in lze- 
Xo Itj. 

Remark 1. The Subj. often follows an historical tense, namely, (a) in a 
lively narration, where past actions are regarded as present (objective man- 
ner of representation, §327, Rem. 2); (b) when the intention or effect of 
the same is to be represented as continuing in the present time of the 
speaker, (a) Her. 1, 29. ^'oXcxiv an Edi] fi')]a e ezeu diy.a, Xva dij fitj ziva zojv 
vofiMv avayaaff&ji Xvaac zuv e&ezo, " Solon was absent ten years, in or- 
der that he might not be compelled,''^ etc. 7, 8. aiXXoyov IlEgniojv zojv aglazcav 
in tsEZ 0, Xva yvMfxag ze n v&tjz a t acpEwv y.al avzog iv naai sin 7] za 
■&sXei. Th. 4, 1. xal igE^£^Xi]XE(Tav ixi^a ig zi^v "Priyi'vcov ol Aay.sdaifio- 



^ 330.] SYNTAX. FINAL SUBSTANTIVE SENTENCES. 511 

yioi, iVw fii] {oVPr,ylvot) ini^orj&Mai rotg MEaarjvloig. — (b) Od. A, D3. 
Ttnr air', lo <5mr/,i'f, A/ttou' qpJoc t]fXloio ijXv^fg, o(pQa I'djj riy.vug x«t 
(triontn /oiQor. Her. 7, 8. dto v/.itug vvv f'yd) (xvviXs^u, iVa to (=o) 
roito TToi](janY vnfQxHiof.iai ifiiv. Deiii. Pliil. 3. 117, 26. T«cr noktig «i- 
T(i)v mtofin tijce I xtd Tfro«o^/«c x ai i ar tj ir t v, 'iv a fjT] fiorov y.aia jioXetg, 
itXlu y.ut xuTu e&yj] d ov X s v coa iv. PI. Crit. 43, b. iulTJidig as olx tyei- 
Q o V, Vv « cue ildiaTu 8 1 ii y i] g. 

Rem. 2. On the contrary, an inTroductory princij);!! tense, or an Aor. 
Nvitli the meaning of the Pros., is sometimes follo^ved by an Opt., (a) when 
tlie present of a ])rlncipal sentence is an liistorical present, or when the 
speaker has contemi)lated a past action as connected with the present 
time ; (b) wlien the speaker adduces the intention or pui-pose which a per- 
son entertains, not as coming fj*om }iis own, i. e. the speaker's mind, but 
from tliat of the person himself, so that the intention is indicated as one 
that had a previous existence ; (c) when in a principal sentence, the Opt. 
stands with or without a v, §§ 259, 3, (a) and 260, 2, (4), (a), then an Opt. 
conuuonly follows, for the conceptions in the principal and subordinate sen- 
tences are represented as separated from the present time of the speaker, 
§ 259, 3 ; still a Subj. may follow, when the sense expressed by the Opt. 
relates to the present time, (a) Eur. Hec. 10. ttoViv ds crvv f\uol XQiaov ex- 
n ifiTT f I h'id-qa nuTrjO. iV, h'tiot ^iXiov tsi/tj niaoi, jolg ^cZaiv si'rj nuial fn) 
(Tnihig Slav. X. An. 4. 6, 1. tovtov d' ^l^jiia&eva — n uq a d id wa l qpu- 
XuTTsir, ono)g, ft xaXcog rjyrjaairo, s'/otv xal tovtop ocnioi. Ar. Ran. 24. 
avrog ■judl^oi xal norco, tovtov d' 6/o), 'iva fii] t aX an a ltt o) q oIt o, 
j.n,8^ axd^og cf i q o i, I let this one ride on an ass = / placed him on an ass, in 
order that he might not suffer hardship, (b) PI. Rp. 410, b. uq oiv, r\v 8" syai, 
bi rXuvxnn', xul ol xad^KJTurTsg fiovaixfj xul yv^vuaiixr] nai8si!Eiv ov/ ov 
i'nxd Tivfg olorruL xa&iCTTaaLV, Ilv a tjj f.isv to acZua S^SQajisvoLVTO, 
Tij 8f T),v ipvxr,v; the view of the lawgiver, i. e. his puniose. X. An. 2. 
4, 4. I'tTwg 8s Tiov {^aaiXsvg) ?'/ uTioffxamsL ti i] uTiOTft/L^st, oi c UTiOQog ? ?'?; t^ 
686g, the view^ of the king, (c) Theogn. 881. ugr,rT] xal jiXoItoq s/ol 
TccXiv, tcfou fUT alXb)v X fxn a^o L fiL. Soph. Aj. 1217 sq. y sr o Ift av, 
Xv iXuiv iTTSOTL TiovTov ngoSXr/fx aXi/.XvaTov — , Tag Ugug unojg iiQogsl- 
noLutv ^Adi'pug. Ph. 325. &vuov yivoiTO yjinl nXvjQMdal noTs/iv al 
JMvxijrai y v olsv — , (jtl yj] —xigog ur8Qb)v aXxlfiMv jU?)tj;o tcpv. Eur. Troad. 
698. TtaWa t6v8s 7Tai86g Ix&Qiipaig av, Tgolag fisyniTOV bJCpEXrjfx, Hv" 
oV TiOTs (X (Tov yfvofjtsvoL 7Ta'i8sg ^'iXiov naXiv xut o i x'kt e lav xul noXig y &~ 
V on^ Ell. X. Cy. 1. 6, 22. u 8i) n sla avg inuivHV as TioXXovg, on w g 86- 
^nv Xafioig — , uqti e'^rjnuTrixcjg slrjg av. 2. 4, 17. xal avTog 8s syuv Tijv 
liXXr^v 8vvau.iv n s i g b^ fi ij v (sc. av) ui] ngoabi v^mv sivai, Xv a, h nov xaigog 
Jt'»y, in L(p av e17]v. On the contrar}', PI. ApoL 28, d. aiTtxa, (pj/cxt, t s- 
■& v a IrjV 8!xijv inid^slg Tb) a8ixoiVTL, Xva fXT] ev&a8e f.isv b) xaTayiXacnog. 
X. An. 2. 4, 3. ovx inioT:ai^s&a, otl ^aaiXshg Vjuag anoXiaai negl navTog av 
noil] a a no, Xva xal Tolg aXXoig'[EXXrj(jL (poi^og i] inl ^aoiXia fiiyuv oTga- 

XEVHV, 

3. When two or more final sentences follow each other, the 
Subj. is sometimes changed to the Opt. The two sentences 
are then placed in a kind of antithesis to each other, since the 



512 SYNTAX. FINAL SUBSTANTIVE SENTENCES. [§330. 

former expresses the consequences of the purpose or aim as 
certain; the latter, witliout this accessory idea, and thus as un- 
certain, undetermined, or only derived from something gone 
before. 

II. 0, 597 sq. '£xTo^L yaq ol &Vfiog ((iovXiJO xv8og otji^ca JlQiUfiidp, 'iva 
vrjval noQMvlai dtanidasg nvQ i^^aXri uy.nnotiov, Osjidog d^ i^ulaiov uqtjV 
naaav en ixgrjv sit. Her. 9, 51. eg tovtov 8i] jov /mqov e^ovXeiauvTO 
fxnaaTi,vaL, Xv a xal vdaTi 6/ wa i x^oi<T&uL acpd^ovoj, xal ol iTinitg Cifiug (i-q 
aivolazo. 8, 76. tcDv^s 8e e'lvexev aviiyov [ol IlsQaai) rug vilag, 'iva 81} 
Tdl<JL"EXX}](TL firj88 (fvyeeiv i^fi, ull^ anola^cpdivieg ev X]] 2aka}xivL 8o1ev 
jlaiv Tojv en ^AgTSfXiaiM. 

4. The final conjunctions, cog and o tz ca g (more seldom iva), 
are sometimes followed by the modal adverb a v, which points 
to a conditioning sentence. 

Od. e, 167 sq. ni^xjibi 8i tov ovqov omaS^ev, wg us ^at uay.y'j&rjg aijv 
naiQiSa yalav llxijaL, al he d^ eo I /' i&sXoja i. -i?-, 20 sq. xal (alv fxa- 
iCQOTsgov xal nciacrova S^i^xE iditr&at, atg xev fPaiiixeacn epilog ndvTsaai, 
yivoLTO, sc. el ngog rovg <I>(xir}xag acplxoLTo. Her. 3,44. e8£}]&rj, ox(og 
av yMl nag emJTOv neixipaq eg 2uy,ov 8ioLTo ajgaTov, ut, si opus esset, 
exercitum a se peteret. X. Cy. 5. 2, 21. 8lu x^jg ai]g x(*}goeg u^eig vi^vig, onojg 
oiv sl8 afievj a ts 881 (flXio, xai noXe^ia voixl'C^lv, " in order that, when we 
set our foot on the land, we may know^'' etc. H. 4. 8, 16. e8(jixe xgri^uxa "Av- 
xaXxl8M, oncog av, nXrj g ca-d- ivxo g vavxixov vno jiaxe8aLy.o~ 
vicav, 0% X8 "A&TjvaloL xal ol avfxfxaxoL avxCiV fiakXov xijg elgi'jvrjg ngog- 

8 so LVX 0. 

5. The final conjunctions, iva and co g (more seldom oncog), 
are connected with the Ind. of the historical tenses, when an 
intention is to be expressed, which is not accomplished, or 
which cannot be accompHshed. In this case, in principal sen- 
tences, the Ind. of an historical tense stands both with and with- 
out av. 

Ar. Pac. 135. ovxovv ex gi] v as Ilrjyaaov 'Cev^UL nxsgov, on cag e cp alv ov 
xdlg S^solg xgayixcaxsgog. PI. Criton. 44, d. si yag co q) sX ov o'lol xs sivau oi 
noXXol xa (xsynrxa xaxa itsgyaQsad^ai, Xv a olol xs t]aav av xal aya&a 
za fisyLOxa, xal xaX^g av si/e. Lys. Simon. 98, 21. i^ ovXo fiTjv 8^ av — , 
^IfiOiva xi)v avxrjv yv(0fi7]v i(iol e/eiv, Xv" a^cpoxsgoiv -^ficav axomavxeg xaXrj&ij 
Qa8l(ag s y v oi x e xa Sixala. 

6. Verbs which express care, anxiety ^^ consideration^ endeavor- 



§331.] SYNTAX. ADJECTIVE SENTENCKS. 513 

infc or striving after an object, effecting:^ and admonish in ij;-, o. g. 
fniftfhia&ai, q^onvTiXsiv, dtdit'vai, cpvlaTZEiv, axoneiv, oxt'ipaaO^uf, ^ov- 
Ieveg&m, OQctVj TioiEiVy TTQaTisiv (curai'c), (Jirj^avdad^at, TtuQaxaltiv, 
naQuyyeXletr, nQOEmtlv, aheiaOaij d^iovv, dyej k/j then, and the like, 
are followed by the conjunctions oTtcog (oTzcog fii] ), sometimes 
also by wt,', accompanied either by (according to No. 2), the 
Subj. and Opt., or by the Fut. Ind. when the accomplishment 
of the intention is to be represented as something definitely oc- 
curring and continuing. 

X. Cy. 1. 2, 3. ol IlEQatxol vo^ol in ifislovr a i, o n ta q xi]v ciQ%i]V fj, i] 
xoiovToi BffovT a L oi ttoXItui, oioi 7iov7]guv »; aia/gov egyov icpiea&ai,. 3. 2, 
13. tttg di xaXaig i'| « t t« Vfxiisga, ^]v q)iloi yiri^a&e, fi^tol (ifXr\aiL. Dem. 
Ol. 1. 21, 12. a^Aon elaS^ E — touto, w ixvdgsg''A&rjvaloL, oTiug ^i] Xoyovg 
i Q ova t (iovov ol na(i v^div ngia^sig, alio, y.al igyov Ji dfixvvsiv l'| o va i v. 
PI. Ion. 530, b. a y 8 d/], on (ag xal t« IIuvu&rlvaLa v ixt'} a o }x ev. The 
Fut. Ind. also stands very often after an historical tense, according to § 327, 
Rem. 2 ; far more rare in this case is the use of the Fut. Opt. X. Cy. 8. 
1, 43. «7i £// sA £ IT 5' 71 (og (Ai'iTS dffnoi, ^7}jE unorol nois suolvto. 

Rem. 3. Sometimes on ojg liv is connected with the Fut. Ind., and it 
then refers to a condition implied in the same clause. Her. 3, 104. ol 8i di) 
'ivdol TQonco ToiovTO) y.al ^81'^8l /giui^usvoL 8)mvvov(tl inl tov xg^'f^ov Xtloynr- 
fiivojg, X w ? dv xavfiaicav twv d-8g^0Tu.T(av iovxtav 8<j ovx ui iv xfi dgnayj] 
(i. e. otttv xavfj,aTa d^sg^iOTaxa f^). 

Rem. i/'On (a g or on (og jxij with the Fut. Ind., or with the Subj., some- 
times has relation to a word to be supplied, viz. o g a, 6 gar s, vide, videte, 
X. An. 1. 7, 3. on 03 g ovv da t a & 8 dvdgsg d$i0L T/jc iXsv&eglag, "(see) then 
that ye are men worthy of liberty." PL Menou. 77, a. dX)^ on m g fit) oi% 
olog T Eao^ac noXXd loiavxct Xiy8iv. A similar ellipsis occurs in the 
phrase, 8 81 a' (sc. axonslv) unwg in the Attic poets. Soph. Aj. 556. 8 eI 
a on (ag naxgbg 8 8l^ 8 ig iv ix^golg, o'log it o'lov "igdcpr^g. 

Rem. 5. Verbs expressing care, anxiety, are veiy often followed by onoig 
(sometimes also by tig) dv with the Opt, in order to express the idea of 
anxiety, solicitude how something might happen, § 260, 2, (4), (a)» In this case, 
on (ag and w g are clearly adverbs, [how). X. Cy. 2. 1,4. ^ovXsvaofis- 
-d- a, on (og dv dgiaxa dyavi^olfXEd-a. 

§331. 11. Adjective Sentences. (C5o,65j.) 

Adjective sentences are adjectives or participles expanded in- 
to a sentence, and they express, like adjectives, an attribute, or 
a more exact definition of a substantive or substantive pronoun. 
They are introduced by the adjective relative pronouns, og, ^', 



514 SYNTAX. ADJECTIVE SENTENCES. [§ 331. 

o, ogrig, rjtn;, o ti, olog, etc., which, like the adjective, agree 
with their substantive in Gender and Number. 

Ol noXifiioi, oi unicpvyov = ol u7io<f>vy6vtiq noXtt.tioi. 'Ju -nou/fiu- 
T«, « 'Ali^(xvd(jog tn(jci^Ev (t« 1*710 ^AXs^drd^ov nQa/^ivTu nfjuyfiaza or 
tu TOv\4kf^uvd(jov TiQa/iAaTa). 'll nolig, iv fj 6 IIsiahTfJujog Tvouvvog i]v 
= 1) V7i6 lov JIuaiaTQUTov rvQavvevd^slaa noXiq. 

Remark 1. Horner often uses the prononn ? in a demonstrative sense. 
II. (jp, IDS. ulla y.ul u g dsldoiy.s zliog fjsyuXoio xsquvvov. So also, o'l — o'l, 
these, those, the one, the other. In the Attic writers, as well as in Ionic prose, 
this usairc is confined to the following instances, (a) x a t u g, y. al ?;', instead 
of xat ovTog, y.ai uvzr]. X. Cy. 5. 4, 4. xa t o g i^anuTr/^dg dior/.n uvu y.ga- 
Tog. 4. 5, 52. xal oT yiXatjavxtg eiJiov. Antiph. 1. 113, 16. x a t 1] vnia- 
XETO. In the oblique Cases only the article, ^ 247, 3, is used, e. g. y.al rov, 
et eum. — (b) og ^iv — g di in Demosthenes, yet veiy seldom, often in 
later writers, and earlier in Doric writers, as well as in Hippocrates; and 
it occurs not only in the Norn., but also in all the Cases of the Sing, and 
Plural. Dem. Cor. 248. noXfig^EXXr^vlSug ug ^iv uvaigoiv, elg ug de rovg 
cpvyixdag y.arayoiv. — (c) og y.al u g, this and that, it not being determined 
who, any one that you please, (very seldom). Her. 4, 68. za? fjumXr^i'ag lazlag 
iTzioQy.r/y.s o g y. ul o g, exclusively in the Nom., in the Ace. zov y.ul zov, zo 
y.al z6, see § 247, 3. — (d) in the phrase 7] 8^ o ?, ») ^' ^', he, she said. 

Rem. 2. The reciprocal relation in which the substantive stands to an 
adjective sentence, and an adjective sentence to a substantive, is expressed 
thus, viz. a demonstrative adjective pronoun, or tlie article o i] zo, standing 
in a principal sentence, refers to a relative adjective pronoun standing in a 
subordinate sentence, while this adjective pronoun, on the other hand, re- 
fers to the demonstrative or tlie article, e. g. ovzog 6 «v/;o, ov ddsg, z6 
Qodov o uv&ti. So also, zoioiJzog, olog, z oao vzog, o(t og, § 326, Rem. 3. 
But when the object, to which the relative refers, is to be represented as 
expressing a general meaning, then the article is omitted, and the relative 
is referred immediately to the substantive, e. g. uvijo, og y.aXog iaziv = avi\q 
y.uXog. When the relative is referred to a personal pronoun, theii the i-ela- 
tive takes the place of the demonstrative, e. g. f/w, og — av, oc, etc. When 
these pronouns have no especial emphasis, they are omitted, and the rela- 
tive is referred to the person indicated by the inflection of the verb, e. g. 
v-aXHig inolr^oag, "og zavza enqa^ag. 

Re^i. 3. The demonstrative, to which the relative refers, is often omit- 
ted, and not only when the Cases are the same, but when they ai-e milike, 
if the pronoun has no particular emphasis ; hence this takes place espe- 
cially when the omitted demonstrative denotes some indefinite object, and 
is equivalent to zh, soine one, or when the relative og, ogzig, may be resolved 
into si quis. Eur. Or. 591, 3. ya^oi 8" oaoig ,u£v sv_ nlnzovaiv ^qozwv, 
[zovzoLQ sc] }jityMQiog alwv ' olg de fit] niTizovaiv iv, {ovzol sc.) tw t 
h'dov Eial zd zs d-VQu^e dvgzv/slg. Th. 2. 41. oidsv noogSsousvoi ovze 'Oui']- 
Qov inaivezov, oize [z Lvog sc.) ogzig etxegl fXEV zo alzi/.a zsgipsi y.zX. 

Rem. 4. When the relative stands as a substantive, i. e. when it refers to 
a substantive pronoun, either expressed or understood, then the adjective 
sentence, like the adjective standing without a substantive, has the mean- 



§332.] SYNTAX. AGREEMENT OF THE RELATIVE PRONOUN. 515 

ing of a substantive, e. g. r,X&ov o'l a g l(tt o t i]a av = i]X&ov ol ixqiaxov 
(sc. vLv8{t{(;). — Hero beloiijrs also, the plirase, taiiv, di, e. g. Xiyovai, sunt, 
qui dicaut, there arc who say it, some people say so. This ])hrase has become 
so tixed, that conunoiily neither the number of the rehitive Jias any effect 
on the verb tan, nor does tiie tense undergo any change, when the dis- 
course rehites to])ast or future time ; thus this phrase lias assumed through- 
out, the character of a substantive pronoun, (tVfot), and thus, since i'aTiv 
may be connected with every case of the relative, has a full inflexion, e. g. 

Nom. tffTiv o'l (= kvioi) vt7TEq)vyov 

Gen. BffTLV d)v (=ivlo}v) tinid/no 

Dat. ea r IV o'k; {== iv to lq) ol/ otnog ibo^zv 

Ace. scTTtv oi'g {=£vlovg) uniy.TEivfv. 
Th. 2. 26. XAfOTio^Troc: t/Jc naQa&ulaaalov sajLv a idj',coaE. So in the 
question, ear iv o'it lv s g', X. C. 1. 4, 2. sa t iv o'v gi iv a g uv&^m- 
Tiwv IE ^aipaxag sjil tjocplri ; 

Rem. 5. In like manner, the following phrases, formed witli IVrtv, are 
used like adverbs to express any time, 

sax IV oTE = EvioTE, cst quando, i. e. interdum, e. g. tcniv ore Tu- 

ear IV t'r« or o n o v, est ubi, i. e. aliquando ; 

e err IV ov or Evda, est ubi, somewhere, in some places ; 

ohx £(tS-^ on ov, nunquam ; 

tax IV j] or ojcrj, quodammodo, in ichatever manner ; 

oxjy. EGTiv on (Jig, nullo modo, o v •/. euxlv 07i(xig ov, certainly. 

Edxiv onojg; in the question, Is it possible, tliaf) 

§332. Agreement of the Relative Pronoun. 

(G5-2— 659.J 

1. The relative pronoun agrees in Gender and Number with 
the substantive or substantive pronoun (standing in the princi- 
pal sentence), to vvhich it refers; the Case of this relative, how- 
ever, depends on the construction of the subordinate sentence, 
and hence is determined either by the predicate, or by some 
other word in the subordinate sentence, or it stands as the sub- 
ject in the Nom. 

"0 uvi]Q, OV tiSeg, epilog }xov iaxiv. 'll uqexi], rig nuvxEg ol uya&ol ini- 
■&vpovaiv, piya uyu&ov iaxiv. Ol oxQUTLonaL, olg i^ayEou^Edu, uv8qei- 
oxuToi i]uav. Oavfiu'^o/xEV ^(jjy.QuxTj, ovi] aocpia fiEyiaitj i]v. "Ein&vpoi- 
fi£V T?5? uQExrfg, Tf TiTjyrj iaxL Tiavxcav iwv y.ulojv. 

2. The person of the verb in the adjective sentence is deter- 
mined by the substantive or substantive pronoun (\\ hich is either 
expressed or implied) to which the relative refers. ^Vhen the 
relative is connected with the first or second person, then the 
English uses the form, I am the one 2vho, 1 icho^ Thou ivho, etc. 



516 SYNTAX. AGREEMENT OF THE RELATIVE PRONOUN. [§ 332. 

'/i/w, o g ygdcfo), o-i', o g ygucpfig, 6 avi^Q or exnvogy og yQcccpft. Th. 2. 60. 
ifiol TOLOVTCo ui'd(ji hqyii^nj&s^ o g oidivig ol'ofi at i\(T(Jbiv that. Isocr. 
Paiieg. Tibjg ovx ildr] dlxaiov iaxiv vfiug inaivslv, oXrtvtg — ji}v uq- 
XTjv xuTaa/Hv ij 8 vvi] d^ij ^ev; after the Voc, the second person common- 
ly stands, e. g. u v & g m n e, o $ "iifiug ToiavTa xaxa inolrjuug. 

3. When the relative refers to two or more objects, it stands 
in the plural, and agrees in Gender with the substantives, when 
they are of the same Gender ; often, however, it stands in the 
neuter, when the substantives denote inanimate objects. 

PI. Apol. 18, a. iv ixElvji zfi cpcovj] te xal tm tootto) eXe/ov, iv o'lguEQ 
iiE&QoiiJfirjV. Th. 3, 97. jj f^dxr}, dcco^Eig te xul vna/otyat, iv olg ct^cpoii- 
QOig i\a(Jovq rjoav ol Ad^rjvaioL. X. Cy. 1. 3, 2. ogojv aviov XExo(T(jir]ijiivov 
xal ocf&al^biv V7ioygaq)fj, xal XQWfiaTog iviQiipEi xal xojuaig nQog&iroig, a 
8i] vo^L^oL Tjv iv Mrjdoig. Isocr. Panath. 278, b. ravja 5' eIttov, ov nqog ti}v 
Evai^SEiav, ovds ngog xriv Sixaio(Tvv')]V, oi'ds ngog Tr,v cpoovrjcriv ano^Uipag, a 
av dujk&Eg. 

4. If the substantives are of different gender, then the rel- 
ative, when persons are spoken of, agrees in gender with the 
Masc. rather than the Fern., etc. §242, 1; but where things 
are spoken of, it is usually in the neuter. 

Od. /5, 284. & av ax ov xul KriQu iJE)Mivav, o g di^ crept, (t/e86v iari. 
Isocr. de Pac. 159, a. 7]y.o}iEV ixxXi](naC,ovxEg tceqI te noli^ov xal Elgrjvrig, a 
^E/iaTTjv E/EL dvvafjLiv iv Tw /5/w Twv av&goojiojv. Dem. Cor. 317, 273. i).nl- 
d(OV xal ^rjlov xal TifAuv, a navza ngogr^v xdlg tote 7igaTTO}iivoig vn i^ov. 
Sometimes, also, the relative takes the gender of the last substantive, e. g. 
Isocr. 1. d. 163, a b. i]v 8e ti]v Elgi]vrjV noir/crcofiE&a, fXETu noXlijg aacpaAEiag 
TTjV n6)uv oiy.r,(TOfxEv, anallayivTEg noli^oiv xal xivdvvwv xal Taga/ijg, 
Etg r,v vvv ngog a)J.i]).ovg xaTEaTr,fiEV. 

5. There are many exceptions to the rule stated under No. 1, 
respecting the agreement of the relative. In relation to gender 
and number there are the following cases, 

(a) Constructio aara (yvvsa iv, ^211, 1, not often in prose 
mth the names of persons, but frequently with collective nouns, 
or substantives which are to be considered as such. 

Her. 8, 128. nEgisdgafie o fii lo g — , o t aiTlxa to To^Evya Xa^ovTEg — l'<jp£- 
Qov ijtl Tovg UTgaTr^yovg, Th. 3, 4. to twv A&rivalav v uvt ix 6v, ot cjq~ 
uovv iv Tji MaXia. PL Phaedr. 260, o,, n X i] & e i, oXnsg dixdaovai. 



§332.1 SYNTAX. AGREEMENT OF THE RELATIVE PRONOUN. 517 

Remark 1. The followinir cases beloiifr here, 

(a) The substantive to which the relative refers, is in the Siiijr., hut tlio 
relative is in the PI., when it does not refer to a definite indiviclual of the 
class, but to the whole class, and in this way takes the signification of o'log. 
This usage, however, is more frequent in poetry, than in prose. Od. ^u, 
1)7. xijT og, u jjifjlft ^oaxfL ayaaiovog "A^cfnqlir]. PI. Rp. 554, a. avyjxT]- 
Qog yi rig uv y.ul ujio nariog nfQiovalav noioifisvog, ■&i](T(tVQonoiog a vi'j g, 
vg dr] (cujusniodi homines) x«i inaivn to nXij&og. 

(b) On the contrary, a relative in the singular refers to a PI. substantive, 
when the relative has a colleciive signification, e. g. ocTig, og av with the 
Subj., quisquis, quicunque. 11.^, 367. viv av xovg uXlovg iniHcro^aL 
(persequar), ov as xiysito. So in particular, Trayzfc, o?t/? or o? aV (never 
Troj'Tfc o'lTivsg, but always nuvreg oaot or ogrig), e. g. Th. 7, 29. nu vr a g 
!$>/?, oro) iviixouv, xal naldag y.al yvvalxag ycidyoviBg. PI. Rp. 566, d. 
aaTia^nai n a v t ag, o) a v mqiTvyyavri. 

Rem. 2. The relative is put in the Neut. without reference to the gender 
of its substantive, wiien the idea contained in the substantive is not to be 
considered as a particular one, but as general, § 241, 2, or the relative is 
not so much to be referred to the substantive alone, as to the whole sen- 
tence. S. O. T. 542. dg oiyl fiwgov san xovyyugri^i] aov, avev t£ nlri&ovg 
xal cplkwv TV g aw 18 a &rig(jv, o nXij&SL yQrjjuaalv & uklaxsTUL. 

(b) When a predicative substantive, in an adjective sentence, 
is in the Nom., § 240, 2, or in the Ace. § 280, 4, the Gender and 
Number of the relative frequently do not correspond v^dth that 
of its substantive, but by means of a kind of attraction, with 
that of the predicative substantive, which is considered the more 
important. 

Her. 2, 17. i] fih (o 5o§) ngog ^w jginsicci, to (= o) y.alkjai nrjX ov- 
(Tiov (T TO ft a. 5, 108. TTjv ay.grjv, at icaXevviai xXrj'vdsg TTjg Kvngov. 
7, 5A. Ilega mov ^Icp og, Tov{=ov)dxLvdiC7jv xaXiovai. PI. Phaedr. 
255, c. t) Tou gsvfiaTog ixslvov nTjyu'j, ov Xfisgov Zsvg ravv^rjdovg igajv 
covofiuae. PhUeb. 40, a. A o / o t fii'jv elaiv iv exdaioig ijfiuv, dg iXn Id ag 
ovofid^oixev. 

Rem. 3. So also when the relative does not follow its own substantive 
immediately, but a predicative substantive, it sometimes agrees with the 
latter, as being the more important, instead of agreeing with the former. 
PI. L. 937, d. y.al di'xr} iv dvd-gcuTcoig nwg ov xaX6v,o ndvTa ijfiegaiy.s t« 
uv&gbimva ; Gorg. 460, e. ovdinoT av si'i] ij g^ to g lxt] d 8 ikov n g dy~ 
fxa, y UH negl diy.aLoavvrjg Tovg Xoyovg noiuTai. 

6. In relation to the Cases, there are the following exceptions 
to the rule stated under No. 1. When the relative should be in 
the Ace, and refers to a substantive in the Gen. or Dat., then, 
when the adjective sentence has almost entu'ely the force of an 
attributive adjective or participle, the relative is commonly put 

67 



518 SYNTAX. ATTRACTION OF THE RELATIVE PRONOUN. [§332, 

in the same Case, as its substantive;. This construction is call- 
ed attraction. Attraction also takes place, when instead of the 
substantive, a substantive denrionstrativc, § 331, Renn., is used. 
The demonstrative, however, is omitted, when it contains no 
special emphasis. By means of attraction, the substantive is 
frequently transposed and stands in the adjective sentence. 
See No. 8. 

Th. 7, 21. a/MV uno t ojv tioXswv ojv tTieicre ( = Tfe/v muTd^HdMv) aiqa- 
Tiav. X. Cy. 3. 1, 33. aw rolg ■& rja av g nig oig o nuTr]Q kuxUliiiv 
( = Tolg VTio Tov ncciQog accTaXsKp&staL). 2. 4, 17. onoie ds ov TtQOiXrflv&oirjg 
avv fj sxoLg dvvd^ti. 3. 1, 34. iyoj ds V7it,a/vovf^ai, -ijv 6 x^sbg ev 8i8o), 
av^ b) V uv ifiol davELajig, alia nhlovog a^La evsgysTi^creiv, instead of uvtI 
TovTOJV, a. PI. Gorg. 519, a. oiav to, «^/am nqoganoXimmi ngog olg ixT)]- 
uavTO, instead of ngog Tomoig, a. Phaedon. 70, a. (?) ^lvxr]) unrjlXa/jievr] 
TOVT (av T MV y.ay.wv mv ah vvv 5?) dLrjXd^sg. Isoer. Paneg. 46, 29. w y 
%Xa§EV anaaiv fisTsdcjuEv, instead of tovtwv a. Evag. 198. to lovt o ig 
B&ea LV o'ioLg Evayoqag fisv eixEV. Th. 5, 87. ex tmv naqovKav x«t oiv 
vQUTs, instead of xal by. tovtuv, a oquts. The preposition is frequently re- 
peated, e. g. Dem. Chers. 96, 26. a 9' ojv aydgsL xal nqogaiTu nai davd- 
^ST«t, ano rovT^cjv Siaysi, instead of an t oviav 8Layu to v ayslgEL or 
« q)' (av uysigsL — diaysL without cctto tovtcov. 

Rem. 4. By attraction, the adjective sentence acquires entirely the nature 
of an adjective or participle, which combines with its substantive to form a 
single idea, and which also agrees with it in form, e. g./algw t alg ema- 
Tolalg alg sygaipag ( = /a/^co ralg vno aov ygafpslaaig iniaxoXalg). The 
connection of the adjective sentence with its substantive by attraction, is 
still more clear and beautiful, when the adjective sentence is transposed 
and stands in the place of the substantive, e. g. yaigo) a I g tygaipag in ia~ 
ToXaX g. 

Rem. 5. When predicative substantives or adjectives belong to an attract- 
ed relative, these must also be attracted. Dem. Cor. 325, 298. i^i ol'tc x«t- 
Qog — ngogrjyaysTO b) v Ey.giva 8 ma Iwv xal av^ucpsgovjcov tj] naiglSt 
ov8ev ngoSovvai, instead of a exgiva 8lxaLa aal av^cpegovra. Ph. 2. 70, 17. 
oig ova IV v fisr s g l g exsi {^PlXmnog), Tovxovg — aacpaXwg y.ixTrjTaL. 

Rem. 6. The Nom. and Dat. of the relative veiy seldom suffer attraction. 
Her. 1, 78. ov8sv yo) elSoxsg t w v { = m v) i)v negl 2'ag8Lg ts yal avxov Kgol- 
(Tov, instead ofrovTuv a r^v. X. Cy. 5. 4, 39. riysTo 8s yal t(xiv eavzov ratv te 
•niaxwv, oig i]8eto^ xal co v (for iyilvtav, oig) ijn iar £ i noXXoig, i. e. secum 
duxit multos suorum, et fidorum, quibus delectabatur, et eorum, quibus dif- 
fidebat. 

Rem. 7. Adverbs of place, also, sometimes suffer attraction, since the re- 
lative adverb takes the form of the demonstrative adverb, or, when instead 
of the demonstrative adverb a substantive precedes, the relative adverb 
takes the form, which expresses the relation denoted by the substantive, 



§332.] SYNTAX. ATTRACTION OF THE RELATIVE PRONOUN. Ol9 

Til. 1, 80. 5(fxo^i'.^ovTO fv&ig (sc. ivTtv&iv) o S^ e v (instead of oJ, iihi) l-tic- 
UO^OTo ntudug. S. Ph. 481. f^-^aXov ju onr] f/iXfig uyuv, eg uvxlluv, i g 
71 Q a) Q (t V, f ^' 71 Q V jAVJjv o Tc t (itistead of* oi', ubi) i'jXKna niXXia lovg na~ 
qdvTag uXyvyily. 

7. The relatives oiog, oaogy ogzigovv, iili-Aog, are attract- 
ed not only in the Ace. but also in the Nom., when the verb 
elva I and a subject formally expressed are in the relative clause, 
e. g. oiog ah el, oiog iy.sivog or o ^(o-AQaztjg iati. This attraction is 
made in the following manner. The demonstrative referring 
to the relative, which is in the Gen., Dat. or Ace, is omitted, but 
the relative is put in the Case of the preceding substantive or of 
the omitted substantive demonstrative, and the verb eivai of the 
adjective clause is also omitted, and the subject of the relative 
clause is put in the Case of the relative. Such a blended or at- 
tracted adjective clause, has, in all respects, the force of an in- 
flected adjective ; the connection of the adjective clause with 
its substantive is still more complete and intimate, when the 
substantive is placed in the adjective clause, e. g. from yaQiL^onai 
dvdnl ToiovTcp, oiog av el, is formed 'laQCCoiiai dvdoi. oicp ooi, or, by 
transposition, yaQ(t,o^ai oio) ool dvdQi. In English the above re- 
latives may be translated by as or such as. 



Gen. 
Dat. 
Ace. 
Gen. 
Dat. 
Ace. 



•/UQi^ofiUL oXb) a ol a V d Q I 
inuivw olov as u v 8 q a 
£^to oVwv V fi (av av 8 Q ojv 
XaQi^Of/ai o'lo ig v fxlv av d o a a l 
ijiaivo) 0^0 V g v uu g av 8 q ag 



iga oIlo V (T V 
XaQi^otxaL oX 10 a o i 
inaLVb) olov as 



sgw Lcov V fx w v 
/aQi^nfiai oXoig VftZv 
inaivco o'iov g v jxa g. 

Th. 7, 21. noog av8oag Tolnr^govg a Vo v g y.al ^A&r)v a iov g, instead of oIol 
^A&rjvalol naiv. Lucian. Toxar. c. 11. ov (favlov to sgyov, avSql o'loj a ol 
TioksfiLarfi fiovona/ijaai. PI. Soph. 237, c. oVo) ys i^iol navTanaaiv 
UTiogov (sc. iaTi, instead of tw toiovto), oiog ys iyco ilfxi, anogov iaxiv. Her. 
1, 160. inl fiia&o) oaoj 8t]^ mercede, quantulacunque est. PL Rp. 335, b. 
saiiv ago. 8iy.aiov av8g6g ^Xdmsiv xal bvxivovv ctv^gcamov, instead of 
ar&ga)7Tix)v y.al ogrigoiv iariv. X. An. 6. 5, 8. saTrjaav a7is%ovreg oaov 
71 svTBxalS sxa ataSlovg, instead of joaovio, oaov slal n. aiddioL. 

Rem. 8. Attraction also takes place, when oiog or oiog xs, is used in- 
stead of w?T?, and is constiTicted with the Inf, signifying, I am of such a na- 
ture, character, that, (is sum, qui with the Subj.). The relatives in such cases 
can be translated by such as to, such as can, are accustomed, ready, etc., § 341, 
Rem. 2 Dem. 01. 1. 23, 19. [nsgl aviov 6 flilXinnog s/jl) joLovtovg uv- 
&g(a7i ovg oXovgfis&va&svTug o^;^£to-i9-at. Luc. Hermot, c. 76. 



520 SYNTAX. ATTRACTION OF THE RELATIVE PRONOUN. [§332. 

J^ T ft) 7 X (5 TO LOUT la o 10) fiijTe Xvnitd&ai fir\T oQyi'C^a&ai. The 
(leiiioustrative is coininonly omitted. X. C. 1. 4, 12. fxovrjv ti]v taiv av- 
S^QUTKav [yXiJoTTav) stioItjituv {ol x)-eol) o'luv u qx^ qovv t« zr^v (fiav^v, 
X. T. A. 

Rem. 9. Wlicn the adjective clause has the signification of a substantive, 
§ 331, Rem. 4, the article is sometimes placed before the attracted otog, 
»}AtKo?, and, in this way, the adjective substantive clause acquires the 
force of an inflected substantive, e. g. 



Norn. 
Gen. 
Dat. 
Ace. 



oiog av avrjQ 
Tov oiov aov uydgog 
TO) oVft) aol uvdqi 
TOV oiov as avdga 



oi otot vfiug avdgEg 

TMV oioiV I'flMV Uv8qO)V 

Tolg o'loiq vyTiv uvbguav 
Tovg o'lovg VfjLug uvSqag. 



X. Cy. 6. 2, 2. oi d e oio I ti sq v fis7g avSqeg noXXaxig teal xa ^ovXevo- 
fxsva xaTafiav&dvovcnv, men like you. H. 2. 3, 25. yvovTsg fxev Tolg oXoig 
7]fj,lv Tt xal vfilv xaX8Tir]v noXizuav eivuL drjuoxgaTtav, such men as we 
and you. Ar. Eccl. 465. ixslvo dsivov toIcf vv rjlly.oiuL v (av, instead of 
TrikinovToig, rjXiy.OL vm icrfxev. 

Rem. 10. A similar kind of attraction occurs also in such modes of ex- 
pression as S-av^auThv og ov 7iqovx(oq7](ts = -d-avfiaaTov foriv oaov 
nQol'/ojgrjas, mirum quantum processit, instead of mirum est, quantum pro- 
cesserit. Even in PI. Rp. 350, d. fiSTu IdgwTog S-avfiaaTov oaov, in- 
stead of S^avijaaTov iaxiv fisd^ oaov. Hipp. M. 282, c. xgi'i^uTa tka^s S^ av^ 
fiaaTu oa oc, instead of -d^avfiaaxov ioTiv, oaa. Her. 4, 194. ol 6a (sc. nl- 
S^tjuoi) aq)L a cp& ov L o ao i iv Tolg ovgmi ylvovTai. Also in the adverbs 
S^avfiaaTbJg u>g, S-av^aalcag ag, e. g. S^av^aalag m g adXiog yi~ 
yovs, instead of S^av^aaLov iaTtv, t5§ a&Xiog yiyovs. PI. Phaed. 66, a. vnag- 
(pv ag u)g aXr]x}ij Xsysig. Symp. 173, c. V7isgq)U(ag ag /ftt'^ft), instead of 
VTiegcpvig sotlv, ug yalgoa. 

Rem. 11. Sometimes an attraction takes place directly the opposite of 
that mentioned in the adjective clause under No. 6, since the relative does 
not take the Case of its substantive, but the substantive, the Case of the re- 
lative which refers to it. This may be called inverted attraction (Attractio 
inversa). This attraction occurs most frequently, when the substantive of 
the principal clause attracted by the relative, should stand in the Nom. or 
Ace. S. Tr. 283. Tagd^ agnsg slgogug, e^ bX^mv a^rjXov slgoiaai (jIov, 
ni]y.ovai ngog as. Lysias pro bon. Arist. 649. ttjv ov a lav i]v xaTtXins tm 
vIh, ovnXslovog «|t« saTtv. X. H. 1. 4, 2. sXsyov, otl J[ay.e8aif.i6vi0L nav- 
T03V wv deovTdL nsngayoTEg iiEv nugu §aaili(xig. Sometimes the demon- 
strative pronoun is found in the principal clause, to supply the Case of the 
substantive which is attracted into the Case of the relative. PI. Men. 96, c. 
a^oXoyr^ya^iiV, n g ocy (laT og ov firiTS didaayaloi, fiijie fia&rjTul dsv, tov- 
T didaxTov fxr] hvul. 

Rem. 12. This inverted attraction is veiy common with ov 8 slg o gT ig 
V after an omitted iarlv. PI. Prot. 317, c. ovdsvogoTOVov ttocvtojv 
av VfiMV y.ttd^^ riXiziav nazrjg htjv. Phaed. 117, d. aXalojv y.al ccyavuy.ioiv 
ovdsva ovTLva ov naxiy.Xavas twv nagovTwv. Dem. Cor. 295, 200. 
nsgl d)v ovdsva y.lv8vvov ovtlv" ov/ vjisfisivav ol ngoyoroi. In 
this way the phrase ovd elg o gz ig ov appears as a pronominal sub- 
stantive (nemo non), which can be declined through all the Cases, e. g. 



§332.] SYNTAX. THE RELATIVE PRONOUN. 521 

Nom. ovdsig ogrig ovx av ruita Tioi^uiiev 

Gen. V 8 sv 6 g otov o v y-aifyiXaafV 

Dat. ov 8 Evl T 0) ovx uni>i<jlvmo 

Ace. ovdsva ovxiva ov xaiiy.Xavusv. 
Rem. 13. The inverted attraction is also found sometimes with adverbs 
of phice, since the demonstrative adverb takes the form of the relative. 
S. OC. ]227. /5/)rat xeI&(v o&tv ntg i'jxsi (instead of xuat, o&ev). PI. 
Crit. 45, b. noXXaxov yag xal alkoae o n o l av acpUr)^ ayani\aoval as 
(instead of aXXaxov onoi). 

8. The adjective clause very frequently stands before the 
principal clause ; then, when the relative refers to a substantive, 
the substantive is transfen-ed from the principal to the adjective 
clause and subjected to the government of the verb in the ad- 
jective clause. This change of the substantive into the adjec- 
tive clause is called transposition. When the attributive quali- 
fication expressed by the adjective clause is emphatic, a demon- 
strative, referring to the substantive which is connected with the 
relative, follows in the principal clause. But the demonstrative 
is often used for perspicuity also. The transposition of the 
substantive can also take place, when the demonstrative stands 
before the adjective clause. 

Og ^fiag noXXa ucya&a inolrjaiv, ovTog ani&avsv, or og rjfiag noXXct 
aya&a ijiolrjasv, ani&avi-v, or ovrog ani^av^v, o <; ri^aq xtX., or ani&a- 
VEV, g xjX. — "O V ddsg avdQa, ovx 6 g eariv, or o vx 6 g icrxiv, o v u- 
8eg uvd Q a. PI. Lys. 222, d. ndXiv aoa — , ov g xo ngooxov X6 y ovg ans~ 
^aXofis&a nsgl cpiXlag, dg x ovx ovg EigntTiTMy.afiEv. Eur. Or. 63, sq. i] v 
yug y.ax or/.ovc eXkp, ox eg Tgoluv enXei, na gd^ ev ov — , xaixn yiyr]&E. 

Rem. 14. When attributive adjectives belong to the substantive, they are 
frequently separated from their substantive in the principal clause, and in- 
troduced into the adjective clause, when they serve at the same time to ex- 
plain more fully the adjective clause or are to be made emphatic. Or the 
substantive together with the attributives is introduced into the adjective 
clause. Sometimes also the atti'ibutive adjective remains, while the sub- 
stantive with which it agrees, is transferred to the adjective clause ; then 
the attributive is emphatic. Eur. Or. 842. noxvi' ^IlXixxgn, Xoyovg axov- 
crov, ovg gol dvgxv/slg r^yM (fig mv^ hear the. words which I bring to you 
as sad, i. e. the sad words, etc. Th. 6, 30. xotg nXoloig xal o crrj a XXt] n a- 
Q aaxsvi] ^vveijcsxo, ngoxegov il'gTjxo xxX. (instead of xal xf, aXXj] nagaaxsvfij 
0(77}). Eur. H. F. 1164. tjxw $vv aXXoig, ot nag \4a(anov goug fisvovaiv 
dv oTiXo I yr,g "'A&r^vaiojv x6 go l. Ar. Ran. 889. exsg o v ydg daiv, o i- 
(Jiv sv/ofxaL d-eolg; 

Rem. 15. A word in apposition with the substantive to which the rela- 
tive sentence refers, is sometimes attracted into the subordinate clause, and 
subjected to its government A word thus transposed serves to explam 



522 SYNTAX. MODES IN ADJECTIVE SENTENCES. [§333. 

more fully tlie adjective clause. Od. a, 09. KvxXcinog xf/oXonui, ov 
o(pd aX(iov u),uo)aev uvxiiftov 11 o X v (p ij fiov, ivfwm Ulysses blinded, al- 
thoiurfi he ivas the god-like Poli/phemus. 1*1. llipj). Maj.281, c. rl note to al- 
Tiov, oTt 1 nakuLol ixelvoi, o) v ovo/uara ^fyaXa XiynuL inl aocfla, 
11 LTT uxov xal B i a V T g, cpaivovtaL unfxofxivot zwv noXiiiXMV 7i(>a|- 
E(av\ 

9. When a clause, or a participle used instead of it, is sub- 
ordinate to the adjective clause, the two^ are commonly united 
together, the relative taking not the construction of the adjec- 
tive clause, but that of the subordinate clause, i. e. the relative 
assumes the form which the omitted demonstrative of the sub- 
ordinate clause would have had. 

Isocr. de Pace p. 16, 168. avd^qwnovq alQovfxe&a jovg (lev anoXidag, rovg d 
avTOfj^oXovg, olg on ox a v x ig nXs lav a ^ l(t& 6v d id oj, fisx inEiKov 
e(p Tjfiixg axoXov&7]aov<TLV (instead of o'l, onoxav xtg avrolg dir- 
db), aAoXov&r,aov(TLv). PI. Rp. 466, a. oxl xovg (pvXa'/cag oi'x evdalfiovag 
TioidlLfiev, olg i^ov Jidvxa exelv xa xmv ttoXlx (ov, ovdev exoisv^ 
(instead of oV, i^uv avxolg — , ov8h t/ouv). Dem. Phil. 3. 128, 68. noXXa 
av ilndv exoiev ^OXvv&lol viip, a xoi el TXQosidovxo, ovu av anojXovxOy 
(instead of o V, ei xavxa xoxs nQosld., am uv utt.). 

§333. Modes in Adj ectiv e Sentences, (eeo— 662.) 

1. The Indicative is used, w^hen the attributive qualification, 
is to be represented as actual or real^ e. g. ri TzoXig, tJ xriXeraij ^ 
ixziad-Ti, ^ xriad^tjcTEtai. The Fut. Ind. is very frequently used 
to denote what should be done or ihe purpose^ e. g. CTQarr^ovg al- 
qovvzai, ol r(p (IhliTZTzq) tz oXs fii] a ov o iv, § 255, 3. Also after 
negatives, the Greek employs the Ind., where the Latin has the 
Subj., e. g. TzaQ ifioi ovdeig, ogrig {irj ixavog ioTiv I'aa noielv l}ioi 
(nemo, qui non possit). 

2. The Ind. is also used, as in Latin, in such adjective sen- 
tences, as are introduced by the indefinite relatives, e. g. ogtig, 
quisquis, ogtig dtj, quicunque, ogrig dr^ tzote, oaog drj, oaog ovv, quan- 
tuscunque, oTtocog, oTioaogovv, etc. 

Her. 6. 12. dovXrJLrjv vno^uvau, 7fXig suxai, qualiscunque erit. X. An. 
6. 5, 6. B&aTcxov, onoaovg inEXotfu^avev tj cxQaxid. Here the idea 
of indefiniteness is denoted by the relative, and need not be further ex- 
pressed by the verb ; but it is otherwise, when this idea of indefiniteness 
is contained in the predicate, see No. 3, and 4. 



§ 333.] SYNTAX. MODES IN ADJECTIVE SENTENCES. 523 

Remark 1. The Fut. Iiul. with xs (only Epic) is used, when it is rep- 
resented, that sonjetliin^^ will tak(! place in the future under some condi- 
tion, § !2()0, '2. (1). II. I, 155. (V d' av8()sg valovai no).vQur,vfg, noXv^ovjuL, 
o 'i X s e d(i}Tiyr](n S^fov oig t i ui^aova iv, who tvill honor him, if hb 

SHALL COME TO THEM. 

3. The relative with av, e. g. og liv, ij av, o av, ogrig av, etc., is 
followed by the Subj., when the verb of the principal clause is 
one of the principal tenses (Pres., Perf. or Fut.), if the attribu- 
tive qualification or the idea expressed by the verb, is to be 
represented as merely conceived or assumed. Hence it is also 
used in indefinite designations of qvality or size^ and also in 
expressing an indefiriile frequency^ {as often as). The adjec- 
tive clause can commonly be considered as a conditional clause, 
i. e. as one which expresses a condition under which the action 
of the principal clause will take place, and the relative with av 
can be resolved into the conjunction (.av with rig or any other 
pronoun and the Subj. 

X. Cy. 3. 1, 20. ovq 5' av (iflzlovg tivkg tavTcov ^ yt] a oi v t a i, rovroig 
noXXay.ig y.al aviv uva/y.t]g i&iXovai nsi&Ea&at. 1. 1,2. uv&qwtiol di in 
ovdivag i^uXXov ai'vlaTavTCii, ij inl rovTovg, ovg av ai'ad^ mvt a i ag/siv 
avTwv ijiixsiQOVVTag. 7. 5, 85. ov g av o q a xa naXa y.al jaya&a irtLTtj- 
Ssvoviag, TOVTovg Tifirjao). 8.8,5. o nolo I Tivsg yug av ol nQOtnaxaL 
(Off L, TOLot'TOL xal ol VTi uvTovg wg inl to noXv ylyvovxai. Her. 6, 139. ^ 
dk Jlv&irj aqiiag {iiiXiVSL)'Ad-r]valoi(n dixag didovuL Taviag, tug (= a g) av 
aviol ^Ad-r^valot 8 ixda off i {quascunque — constituerint). II. /5, 391. ov 
di X iyoiV anavsi'ds fiuxrjg i&sXovTa voi^ato fiLUva^nv naqa vrival y.oqw- 
viaiv, ov ol tneua agy.iov iffffuxaL cpvyiuv xvvag ij8' omvovg, as oftejv 
AS / perceive or shall perceive. 

Rem. 2. The Subj. is also used, when the adjective clause forms a part of 
a comparison, viz. when the adjective clause contains the condition or 
assumption, under which the object to which the adjective clause refers, 
belongs to the comparison. In this case, the principal clause may have 
either a principal or historical tense. II. v, 179. 6 5' avi f'nsffsv, fifXlrj ag, 
ijj ousog y.OQV(f)fi — yaXy.w lajxvofiivr] rigiva y&ovl cpiXXu n sX a ff ff tj. g, 
110. logjs XIq ifvyavsLog, ov ga y.vvtg rs y.al avSgsg ano OTad^fidlo SluvTaL. 

Rem. 3. The modal adverb a v is so closely united with the relative, as 
to form with it one word, as in otav, inav, etc., § 260, 2. (3.) (d), and 
hence should be separated from the relative only by smaller words, such 
as 8i. This uv is ver}' frequently omitted in the Homeric language, often 
also in the Tragedians, and sometimes in Herodotus, seldom in the Attic 
prose writers. 

4. The relative (without av ) is connected with the Opt., in the 



524 SYNTAX. MODES IN ADJECTIVE SENTENCES. [§ 333. 

first place, with the same sif^nifieation as when followed by the 
Subj. and av (No. 3.), but referring to an historical tense in the 
principal sentence. Hence it is used in general and indefinite 
statements ; so also in expressing indefinite frequency, — in 
which case the verb of the principal clause is usually in the 
Impf. or in the Iterative Aor. Here also, the adjective clause 
may be resolved by «t with the Opt. 

Til. 7, 29. TTuvTug s^i]g otm evTv/ o lev, y.ul naldccg y.a\ yvvouHag htsI- 
vovTsg. II. /5, 188. ovtlvcx (asv ^aailiju xal t^oxov uvdgu xt;^tt7j jov 8 
ayavdlg inssaaiv eQtjTvaacry.s naQudiug. 198. 'ov d^ av 8)]f40V x uv- 
dga I' do I, ^oowvtu t icpsvQOi, tov dy-nrnQO) ikdaaans. Th. 2. 67. 
ndvxag ydq di] x«t «^/a? rov nolifiov ol yiay.idaifjovioi, o a ov g la ^ o tsv 
iv tfi S-aXdaaj}, ojg noXs^lovg diecpS^SLQOv. X. Cy. 3. 3, 67. lxstsv- 
ovai [Hist. Pres.), otoj ivTvyxdvoLSV^ (jii) cpsvysLV. 

5. In the second place, the Opt. without av is used without 
reference to the tense of the principal clause, when the attribu- 
tive qualification is to be represented as a mere supposition, 
conjecture or assumption, or as an uncertain and doubtful con- 
dition, § 259, 3. (a). Then, the adjective clause commonly 
forms a member of a principal clause expressed as a wish. 

X. Cy. 1. 6, 19. Toii fiiv amov Xsyuv, d p; cracpug sldslr], q)sid((T&aL del, 
he must beware of saying anything, which he does not know or unless he knows 
it. II. Q, 640. sir] d^ ogjig sTcuQog dnayyslXsis Tw/iora JlrjXsidT). 
Ar. Vesp. 1431. egdoi Tig, i>]v sxaaiog si d sir} jsxvrjv. PI. Phaedr. 279, 
c. TO 8y] )rgvaov nly&og sl't] jxol, oaov fii^TS q)8QSiv, ^?/t dyEiv dvvaLT 
allog, 1] 6 a(O(pQ0iv. X. S. 8, 17. i/g juianv dvvaLT^ av, vcp^ ov st~ 
8 s Irj y.aXog ts xal dyadog vo}ii^6y.Evog ; 

6. The Opt. with av is used, when the attributive explana- 
tion is to be represented as a conditional supposition, conjecture 
or assumption, § 260. 2, (4) (a). 

X. C. 1. 2, 6. Tovg 8s Xafx^dvovTug t»]$ ofiiXlag fiicr&ov dv8Qano8i(TTdg 
EavTMV dnsy.dXsL, 8iii to dvayyaXov amdlg sivai 8iaXiyt(j&ai, nag (av av 
Xd^o LEV Tov fiLcr&ov, from whom they migJd or could receive a reward. PL 
Phaedon. 89, d. ovx saiiv o t i dv Tig fisTCov tovtov y.amv ndd^ o l. 

7. The Ind. of the historical tense is used with av, when it 
is indicated that the attributive qualification could take place 
only under a certain condition, but did not take place, because 
the condition w^as not fulfilled, § 260, 2, (2), (a). 



§334.] SYNTAX. ADJECTIVE AND SUBORDINATE CLAUSES. 525 

Od. f, 39 sq. TToAA', oa^ civ oldinoxs Tgolrjg i^rJQUj'' ^Odvaaevg, iVneQ 
ctTii'ifiOJV t'jkd^ (, Xaxoov dno Xri''C8oq aiaav. Eur. Med. 1339. ovu stniv ijj ig 
Tovi av 'l^kXr^vlg ywrj etXr), quae sustinuisset hoc. PI. Apol. 38, d. olg 
a V [Xoyoig] s'nsLa a, si al fxrjv duv anuvja noLstv xal Xiyuv. On the Ind. 
of tlie historical tenses in intermediate clauses of a conditional sentence, 
see § 339, Rem. 1. 

Rem. 4. On tlie Inf. in adjective clauses, in the oratio obliqua, see § 345, 6. 

§ 334. Connection of several Adjective Clauses. — Exchange of 
the Subordinate Clause loith the Adjective Clause. — Relative 
instead of the Demonstrative. (663—665.) 

1. When two or more adjectives follow each other, which either have 
the same verb in common, or different verbs with the same construction, 
the relative is commonly used but once, and thus the two adjective clauses 
are united in one, e. g. uv^q^ vg nolXa /jsv atyad^a Tohg cplXovg, noXXa ds xaxu 
Tovg TioXf^i'ovg snga^sv — uvrjQ, og nuq rifxiv r\v naX [og) vnb nuvxoiv icpiXsijo 

— avi'iQ, ov e&avfia^ofisv xal [ov) navTEg icplXovv. But when the adjective 
clauses have different verbs with a different construction, the Greek com- 
monly either omits the relative in the second adjective clause, or introduces, 
in the place of the relative, a demonstrative pronoun, mostly avjog, or a 
personal pronoun ; in this way the relative clause is changed into a demon- 
strative one, and acquires the nature of a principal clause, (a) Od. t, 110. 
afinsXoi, uXts (psQovaiv oivov eQLcnacpvXov y.oil {sc. cig) acpiv {KyxXcjiieaai) 
/liog ofi^Qog ai^Ei. Isocr. Panath. zov Xoyov, o v uXlyo) fxev tiqoteqov fisd^ 
ijdovrig diijX&ov, fiiy.QO) d^ vaxsgov ^jj-eXXs (as Xvnrjasiv, and which was to 
grieve me. Lys. Dardan. 166. olg vfiEig ;f a^tflci^s xal (sc. ov g) jiQo&vfio- 
TSQOvg nou]a8TS. Dem. Cor. 252, 82. uvtmv, ov g ?; /uisv noXig w^ i^^govg 

— ccm'jXaas, aol ds riaav cplXoL (sc. o i').^ X. An. 3. 2, 5. "Agiuiog ds, o v fifislg 
r}-d-sXoixev (^aadsa xad-iaxavaL xal {sc. w) idcaxa^iEV y.al (sc. nag^ ov) iXd- 
^Ofisv TiLGxa — , ri^ug xovg Kvqov cplXovg naxcjg noiuv nsLQaTat. — (b) PI. Rp. 
505, e. o 8i] diaixEL [xsv dnaaa ipv/i] y.cu tovtov evexk navra ngaTTEi. Dem. 
Phil. 3. 123, 47. ylaxEdaifiovioi, o t S^aldTir^g fisv ^]qxov y.al yi]g anuarjg, ^acn- 
Xsa ds ai'^jiaxov Ei^ov, vcplaTUTO d' ovdsv uvt ov g instead of ovg ovdsv vcpla- 
Tuxo, quibus nihil non cessit. X. Cy. 3. 1, 38. nov ds sxeTvog iaxiv 6 uvriq, 
o g avvE&i'iQu tjixIv xal av fxoi fiuXa sdoxEig ^avfiu^siv avxov. 

2. The adjective clause frequently takes the place of other subordinate 
clauses, e. g. Oav^iaaxov nouslg, o g Tjfitv ^ev ovdsv dldojg, in tfmt or because 
you give u^ nothing, X. C. 2. 7, 13. The adjective clause is veiy frequently 
used instead of a hypothetical adverbial clause, comp. 333, 3 ; so also in- 
stead of an adverbial clause introduced by w $ t £ ; the last case occurs, 

(a) after ovxtag or w5e. Dem. Chers. 100, 44. ov ydg ovxm y svrj&rjg 
iaxlv vfiwv oidslg, o g vnoXa^^dvEU. X. Cy. 6. 1, 14. xlg ovxcxk la^vgog, 
o g Xl^(a y.al glysi dvvuix dv juaxofjsvog axQuxEvea&au 

(b) after xoLOvxog, xrjXLy.ovxog, xocrovxog. In most instances, 
these demonstratives are followed by the corresponding relatives oiog, 
oaog, which, like the adverbial clause introduced by wgxs, usually 

68 



526 SYNTAX. ADVERBIAL SENTENCRS OF PLACE. [§§ 335, 336. 

have an Inf. dajjcnding njjon thoin. PI. Apol. e/o) rv/xuvo) otv toi- 

ovTog, o'log vnu lou \>iov iji nuXu d s8 6 a S^ a i. X. An. 4.8, 

12. doxil ToaovTOv ;f oj^HOj^ '/.uTuff/Hv — , (T ov t^oi joig iaxutovg 

Xo^ovg y Ev id x)- H V jotr noXtfiiojv xfQurojv. 

3. The rehitive pronoun serves not only to connect subordinate clauses 

with the principal one, but it is also used to connect clauses in general, in- 

asniucii as it takes the place of a demonstrative standing in the sentence 

and referring to a word of the preceding clause. This mode of connecting 

sentences belongs to the Latin as well as to the Greek, although it occurs 

very rarely in tiie latter compared with the former. Thus in Greek, e. g. 

it is altogether common for clauses to begin like tuvtu Se flnorifg, iuvtoi 

8s (xy.ovauvng, fjna ds twi'tw, iy. jovtov dt, wg di t«l't« tysvEio, etc., where 

the Latin generally uses the relative qui. 

§ 335. IIL Adverbial Sentences. (ggc.) 

Adverbial sentences are adverbs or participles and substan- 
tives used adverbially, expanded into sentences, and, like adverbs, 
denote an adverbial object, i. e. such an object as does not com- 
plete the idea of the predicate, but merely defines it. Hence, 
they express a more full explanation of the place, time, reason, 
manner and mode. Adverbial sentences are connected with 
the principal sentence by relative adverbs, e. g. ov, o-&i, cog, ore, 
etc. The relative adverbs of the subordinate clause, have, in 
the principal clause, corresponding demonstrative adverbs ex- 
pressed or understood, by which both clauses are united into 
one, e. g. ore to aao rjld^s, tots tu avd-)] ^cilXti — a g eXe^ag, o v- 
t CD g iTZQCi^ag. 

§ 336. A. Adverbial Sentences of Place. (667.) 

Adverbial sentences denoting place are introduced by the re- 
lative adverbs of place, ov, {j, om], onov, sv&a (ubi) ; od^tv, ev-Oev 
(unde) ; oi, onoi, ?], onri (quo), and, like adverbs of place, express 
the three relations of direction, ivhere, lo lie rice and ichWier. 
The use of the Modes in these sentences, is in all respects like 
that in adjective sentences, § 333. 

Her. 3, 39. oy.ov yuQ Id^vaEiE (ngaTEVEa&ai, ndvia oi exmqee evtv- 
/iojg (indefinite frequency). Th. 2, 11. ETcscr&E (fxacf), ottol av rig i]yn~ 
t a V. X. An. 4. 2, 24. y.axonEvoi ds oi noXifiioi y.al, onjj eItj cttsvov %(a- 
glov, TiQoyxTaXa^iSavovzig iy.(oXvov rag nagodovg (Opt. on account of ixraXvov). 
Cy. 3. 3, 5. i&Tjga onovnsQ inttvyxuvoLEv S^riQioig, ivherever, PI. 
Apol. 28, d. ov (XV Ttg kavTov rd^j], iviav&a dsl fiivovja aiydvrsvsiv. 



^ 337.1 SYNTAX. ADVERBIAL SENTENCES OF TIME. 527 



§ 3ii7. B. Adverbial Sentences of Time. (CCS— c74.) 

1. Adverbial sentences denoting time, are introduced by the 
following conjunctions, ore, o;roT€, cog, ^vty.a, ivhenjp o), tag, ivhile ; 
fTiei, iTieid/j, postquam, i^ ov, i^ ozov, also fj wr, ex quo, and «(p' 
ov, since ; tzqIv, 7in]v ij, priusquam, e(og, ecog ov, elg o, 'igze, i^r/Qi or 
aXQi ov, fu'xQi OTov, fie'xQi, till, until. 

2. On the use of the Modes, the following things are to be 
observed, 

3. The Ind. is used, when the statement is to be represented 
as a fact ; hence in mentioning actual events or occurrences. 

Her. 7, 7. ug avsyvoKT'&T] ^^sQ^rjg (jTOttTUEcr^ai inl Tijv '^E'kXaSa, cy- 
■& avxa aTQcnri'Li]v noiinai. 1, 1 1. wq r,ixeg-q nx/jaja t y sy ov 8£ (w? ra- 
X^cncc, quum primum, as soon as). X. H. 1. 1, 3. tfxdxovio, fie /gig at 
^A&r]vaioi uvinlsvaav. All. 1. 3, 11. y.al s ca g ys fisvofXEV uixov, 
axsTijiov /uot do'/.H dvai, onaig C}g atrcfaXiaTaju (isvovfisv. 

4. The conjunction tag, iill^ like the final conjunctions, § 330, 
5, is followed by the Ind. of the historical tenses, when an object 
is to be represented as unattained or not to be realized. 

PI. Gorg. 506, b. ifditag a v KaXXinXu xovroj sti d isXsy 6 fir]v, I' w $ avTo} 
X)]v rov \4fi(piovog a7Tsd(ay.a giidiv uvtI trig tov Ztjdov, lubenter cum hoc 
Calhcle collocutus essem, usque dum eum (Calliclem) ad philosopliiae studium 
revocassem. 

5. The Subj. is used, when the statement of time or the as- 
sertion contained in the predicate, is to be represented not as 
something definite, but merely as something conceived and gene- 
ral, not as unconditioned, but as depending on circumstances, 
and is to be referred to the predicate of the principal sentence, the 
verb of which is in one of the principal tenses. In the Common 
Language, the conjunctions take the modal adverb av — orav, 
OTTOTuv, rjvi/i uv, indv [tn^v], iTteiduv, tiqIv av, mg av, ^tjQt av, egr av, 
§260,2, (3), (d). 

6. Accordingly the Subj. is used with the above conjunctions 
from or av to 71 qIv av, when the statement of time is also to 
be represented as the condition under which the predicate of the 
principal sentence will take place. The Subj. is also very fre- 
quently used, to denote indefinite frequency, comp. § 333, 3. 



528 SYNTAX. ADVERBIAL SENTENCES OF TIME. [§ 337. 

But with conjunctions which signify till^ the Subj. expresses an 
object expected and aimed at. 

PI. Prot. 335, b. eniidav av ft ovXt] diaXiysa-&ui, ojg tyoi Suva fiat inta- 
•L^a^, T0T8 aoL dcaXi^o^ai,. Dem. Ph. 3. 128, G9. c w § uv cr oj ^»j t a t to 
axd(pog, tote xqtj xal vavTrjv yal yvftEQvy'jTriv tcqo&v^ovq eivui, dum servari 
possit. X. Cy. 3. 1, 18. noXiv d\ tcpr), ovno) e at q a nag uvTiTUTTO^ivr^v ngog 
noXiv sTBQaVf ^]Tig, insidav t]Tt ri-d^ ri, naqa/Qri^a Tamn uvtI tov ^ua/eo"- 
d^uL nsl&EO'&ai, e^iXel. 3. 3, 26. otceq hcu vvv etl noiovcnv ol ftaqfiaqoi ftixav- 
Xslg ' onoTttv aTQaTonEdEVo^vTcti, Tucpgov neg ift dXXovT ai, svne^ 
Toijg did Ttjv noXv/ELQlav, as often as. 

Remark 1. The Subj. is also used in the Epic language, when the ad- 
verbial clause forms a member of a comparison, smce here a case is sup- 
posed, comp. § 333, Rem. 2. II. |, 16. ug d^ ote noQcpiigt} niXayog — * 
ug 6 yigojv wgfiaLVE. o, 624. iv 8^ sjiEa, wg ote y.v^a S^of] ev vrfi n iaria iv. 

Rem. 2. On the Subj. after an historical tense instead of the Opt., and on 
T a y, ETcdv, nglv dv, etc. with the Opt. in the oratio ohliqua, see § 345, 
Rem. 4. 

Rem. 3. The mode of connection by ote, otiote, nglv, etc. without av with 
the Subj., is frequently found in the Epic language, sometimes also in Ionic 
prose, and not seldom in the Attic writers with fiixgi and nglv. 

7. The Opt., like the Subj., is used with conjunctions of time, 
but in reference to an historical tense of the principal clause. 
When the Opt. is used to denote indefinite frequency, an Impf. 
or an Iterative Aor. usually stands in the principal clause, and 
the conjunctions ozs, Itzei, etc. (except those which signify before 
and until), are translated by as often as. 

Od. £, 385. agcTE $" inl ygccmvov Bogirjv, ngo ds nvfiuT ecc^ev, Ecjg oys 
^aLi]y.E<j(n cpLXrjQBTuoLaL (XLyslrj (but ogvvai, Bogirjv y.al dyvvcn xvfiaTu, Eojg 
dv — i^^yfi)' II' >«) 14. avTug o t^ ig vi]ag te Id o l xal Xaov ^A/Uiojv, noXXag 
EX xEcpaXTJg ngo&EXvfivovg eXxeto /aliag, as often as. Her. 6, 61. oxag 
eveIxele ri Tgocpog {to naidlov), ngog te TOjyaXfia icrxa xal iXlcr a eto 
TTiv -d-Eov dnaXXd^uL tjJ? dvgfiogq)li]g to nacdlov, as often as. PI. Phaedon. 
59, d. nEgiEfiEvoiAEv ovv kxdcFTOTE, Ecj g dv Lx ^ eIi] TO dEfffiMTi'igLOV. X. An. 
6. 1, 7. on OTE ds [ol "EXXrjvEg) avTolg {Tolg noXEfiloLg) in lo leVj gadlojg 
d n EcpEV y ov. 

Rem. 4. On « v in the principal clause, see § 260, 2, (2), (/5). 

8. Moreover, the Opt. without av is used with conjunctions 
of time, without reference to the time of the principal clause, 
when the statement of time is to be represented as an uncertain 
and doubtful condition, as a mere supposition, conjecture or 



§ 337.] SYNTAX. ADVERBIAL SENTENCES OF TIME. 529 

assumption ; generally when the subordinate clause forms a 
part of a principal clause expressing a wish, § 333, 5. 

Pl. Amat. 133, a. o tt o t c to (pdoaocpnv alaxfjov '^/rjatxlfxrjv nvaif 
ov^ «V avdQMTiov vofxiactiftL t^aviov dvai, ivhtn J shall assume. X. Cy. 
3. 1, 16. nwg 5' «v tote nhltnov it^iot ylyvoLVX ol avd^QOinoi, ottots 
udixoi'VTfg uXlaxo ivt o ; — II. o-, 465. «t yag fiiv d^avaTOLO dvgrjx^og mds 
dvvalprjv — anoxQvipat, utb (alv fioQog alvog Ixdvoi. PI. Rp. 501, c. xat 
TO {.isv otv, oifiai, i^aXsi (p lev, ro ds iy y gd cpo i £v, siog o Tt fiixXiaTCC 
uv&QOJTisia ij^Tj slg haov ivdsxsTai S^EOcpiXij n o iija s l av. 

9. The conjunctions ttqlv [TtQOTeQov rj), besides the construc- 
tions mentioned, is also followed by the Inf. The different 
constructions of tiqiv are to be distinguished as follows, 

(a) When a past event, one that has actually occurred, is spoken of, the 
Ind. of an historical tense is used, (No.. 3). 

(b) When a future action, one merely conceived, is spoken of, which 
can be considered as the condition of the principal clause, the Subj. is 
used, if the subordinate clause refers to a Pres., Perf. or Fut. in the princi- 
pal clause, but the Opt, when the subordinate clause refers to an histori- 
cal tense in the principal clause (No. 5 and 7), in both cases, however, only 
when the principal clause is negative. 

(c) But when the action is to be represented only as a conception, a con- 
ceived limit, not as an mdependent occurrence, but only as a subordinate 
and incidental designation of time, the Inf is used. Hence the Inf. can 
stand both for the Ind. of an historical tense, and for the Subj. or Opt., 
when it does not serve to define more fully the subordinate clause. 

Isocr. de Big. 348, b. ov ngoTsgov tnamavTO, nglv xov js nuTiga ix rov 
(TTgaTonidov (X8j£7i8fj.ipavto, xal tojv (plXwv avTov jovg fxsv ocnixTSL- 
ywy, tovg d^ ex jijg noXeug i^s^aXov. X. An. 6. 1, 27. oi* ngod&ev 
inavaavjo noXf^ovvTeg, nglv in o Irja a v nuiaav ti]v noXiv ofioXoyelv 
Aaxsdaifxovlovg xal aviuv lyyi^ovag dvai. Eur. Med. 279. ovx unsific 
ngog dofiovg ndXiv, nglv civ as yalag jegfiovwv i^o) /5«Xw {= iav fx7j 
ngoTsgov as sx(idX(xi). X. An. 5. 7, 12. ^i] otnsX-&r}Ts, nglv av dxov- 
ariTS. II. g), 580. l^^^j'w^ ovx s&sXsv cpsvysiv, nglv nsigijaaLr 
^AxiXi]og (= si PI ngoTsgov nsLgrjaaiio]. X. An. 7. 7, 57. oi inixi^dsioi, iv 
Tw axgaxoniSo) [avxov) idiovxo (ii] ansX^slv, nglv unaydyoixo 
axgdxsvfxix xal Oi'^gavi nagadoltj. Her. 6,119. /iagslog, nglv fiiv 
alxfiaXwiovg y svia &ai xovg ''Egergiiag, ivslxs acpt dsLVOv xoXov. 7,2. 
saav /iagsioj, xal ngoxsg ov ij ^aaiXsvaaL, ysyovoxsg xgs7g naldsg, 
X. An. 1. 8, 19. n glv da x6^sv(xa i^Lxvs7,aS-ai, ixxXlvovaiv ol ^ug^agob 
xal (psvyovai. 10, 19. tt § t v ydg drj x axaXv a a l xo axgaxsvfxa ngog agt- 



530 SYNTAX. — advi:rbial sentences denoting cause. [§ 338. 

GTOV, (iuaiXtvq icpavi]. An. 4. 1, 7. inl fxiv to iIuqov uva^ahsi XBighocpog, 
7t(ilv iiva al<j {y i(T d^ a i xixtv noXefiiiov. Cy. 7. 1,4. nglv di oquv 
tovg noXffilovg, dg jglg aviTiavas to arqaxivfia. 2. 2, 10. nid^avol d' ovT(og 
d(Tl Tivig, w^Tf, 71 Qiv E I 8 iv a t 10 7i()ogTa(T(j6/ji8vov, nQOTSfjov ntl&oviai. 

Rem. 5. Tlie Homeric naQog, when it is not used merely as an adverb, 
is always constructed with the Inf. II. o", 245. sg d' u/OQtjv aysQOvzo, tt «- 
Qog doQTioto fiidsa&ai. 



C. Causal Adverbial Se:^tences. 
§338. I. Adverbial Sentences denoting Cause, 

(675.) 

1. Such as express the cause in the form of adverbial sen- 
tences denoting time by means of conjunctions of time, viz. 
0T£, oTiozEy cog, imi, qaoniam, puisque, it^caz^^e, 5mce, «W5;^, 
quoniam, and onov, quandoquidem. In these adverbial sen- 
tences, the Ind. is the prevailing Mode, but yet the Opt. with 
a V, § 260, 2, (4) (a) and the Ind. of the historical tenses with 
av, §260, 2, (2) (a), can also be used. 

11.9,95. fx/] us y.THp , in si ov/ ofio/daiQiog "Ey.Togcg slfxi, quoniam 
sum. X. An. 3. 2, 2. yalsna fisv xa. nagovToc, on oz s [since) uvdQbJy cnQaz- 
Tiywv TOioi'zojv (TT E Q 6 {is& a y.al Xoyaywv y.al (TzoazLbniav. Dem. Ol. 1, 
in. 0T£ zolvvv zavd^ ovzcag sysL, nQogrjyst ngo&vfiwg i&sXsiv axoi'siv. PI. 
Prot. 335, d. ^g'o^uwt oi'v aov naQoc^stvaL IJiMV, w g eyoj ovd^ av kvog ^)diov 
axov(T a I fii 7] aov. II. 0, 228. vnosi^sv yslgag Ef^dg, in si ov r,EV ctvL- 
dgazl y izElsa&rj, since, if he had not escaped, the thing ivoidd not have 
been accomplished ivithout effort. 

Remark. "En it also introduces interrogative and imperative clauses, 
where we must then translate it by /or. For the explanation of this use, 
see § 341, Rem. 4. 

2. Such as express the reason in the form of substantive 
sentences by the conjunctions on and d lozi (formed from dia 
rovzo, OTi) and the Poet, ovvey.a (formed from tovtov hey.a, 0) or 
od^ovvey.a (instead of otov hsxa). The Ind. is here, also, the 
prevailing mode, when the statement is not contingent. 

Ph Euthyphr. 9, e. a^a to oaiov, ozl oaiov iuzi, qidshai vno tmv &e- 
wv, »;, T i q> iXstz a I, oaiov iazi ; 



§ 339.] SYNTAX. CONDITIONAL ADVERBIAL SENTENCES. 



531 



§339. II. Conditional Adverbial Sentence s . 

(G7&— 683.) 

1. The second kind of adverbial sentences are such as ex- 
press a condition and are introduced by the hypothetical con- 
junctions £t and ^av {'/;v, av, which must not be confounded 
with tlie modal adverb av). The principal clause expresses 
what is conditioned by the subordinaTo claiise, or the con - 
sequen£e_^udrel[ect of the siil)ordinate clause. As the condi- 
tioning clause pre(.-('d(\- \\\v cundilioncd, or the reason, the result, 
the lormeT^he "subovdiiiate clause) is called the Protasis, and 
the latter (the principal clause) the Apodosis. 

2. The relation which the conditioning and conditioned state- 
ment have to the conviction or persuasion of the speaker, in 
Greek, is expressed in the following manner, 

I. In the first place, the condition is expressed by the Tnd., as 
a reality or fact, and hence as something certain. Two cases 
are here to be distinguished, 

(a) In the Protasis, e l with the Ind. of all tenses is used, and 
also the Ind. of all tenses is used in the Apodosis, when both 
the condition and that which is subject to the condition or re- 
sults from the condition, are considered by the speaker as a re- 
ality or fact, and hence as certain, whether the thing spoken of 
is objective or not. The result is very frequently a necessary 
one. If the Apodosis contains a command, the Imp. is used, 
and when this command is negative, the Subj. also, § 259, 5. 

El Tovio Xiyeig, afxaQTuvEtg. El S^tog i (t t i, (Tocpog iaTiv. 
X. Cy. 1. 5, 13. eI ds tc/.vtu iyo) Xiyw tisqI v^dv alia yiyvomy.cov, fuav- 
70V i^an ar a (here something is spoken of, which in his heart the speak- 
er wholly denies). EX n^x^^^i ^ o g. El rovTO n sn o i')]xag. iiiairtl- 
a&ai S^Log ft. Her. 3, 62. o) 8ianoja, oix t^ni juvja alri&sn, oxo)g (= oxt) 
xoTsaoi ^jjsfjdig addcpfug 6 aog inavEajTjxe — • f/w yaQ avTug — bdaxpd ^lv 
XSQUiT^ai ifisbiVTov' si fiEf vvv ol Tsdvemsg uvsaT&aai, n q og 8 ixso 
101 y.ul Aarvdysa rov I\l)'idov i-navaaT/jasa&ai' si d^ I'otti, bknsQ tiqotoii, 
oh HI] xl xoL sy. ys v/.dvov vsmsgov avu^la(jri]<ysL (here in the first condi- 
tional clause, something is spoken of, the opposite of which the speaker is 
persuaded is true). EX xi cT/f, koI idldov. El xovto inenoirj- 
X s I, g, ^rffiiag uiiog 7jo-^a. El i^Qovjfjcrs, y.al ijax Qaip sv. Elxoi- 




532 SYNTAX. CONDITIONAL ADVERBIAL SENTENCES. [§ 339. 

TO Xi^Eig, 01(11 UQri) (Tj). X. Cy. 2. 1, 8. bV xt TTslaovtaL MTJdotj 
ig llegaag to detvov ij^fi. 7. 1, 19. si (p& ua o fisv Toiig noXsfilovg xa- 
raxjavovTsg, ovdtlg tJiLKxiv an o\} av sli u i. 

(b) 111 the Protasis, e I with the Ind. of the historical tenses is 
used ; in the Apodosis, also, the Ind. of an historical tense is 
used, but in connection with av, when the reality, both of the 
condition and that which is subject to the condition, is to be 
denied. This form is used only of the past, or where there is 
a reference to the past; here it is aflirmcd that something could 
take place under a certain condition, but did not, because the 
condition was not fulfilled. The use of the tenses is the same 
as in simple sentences. See § 256. 

Here the negation of the reality is not contained in the form of expres- 
sion itself, for the Ind. of the historical tenses necessarily always denotes a 
past occurrence or fact ; the negation is merely an inferred one, that is to 
say, it consists in this, that a conclusion or inference is drawn from the 
past and applied to the present, and a reality in the past is opposed to 
what is not a reality in the present. The past reality expressed in the con- 
ditional sentence stands in opposition to another present reality (either ex- 
pressed or to be supplied from the context), which contains precisely the 
opposite of that past reality, e. g. if the enemy came, we were destroyed, i. e. if 
the enemy had come, we should have been destroyed, but now the enemy has 
NOT come ; from this contrast it is now inferred, that the assumed fact if 
the enemy cam£, did not take place. 

jB I TOVTo slsy Eg, fi(ia q.t av Eg civ, si hoc diceres, err ares, if you said 
this, you erred, or if you had said this, you woidd have erred ; but you have 
not said it, consequently you have not erred. PI. Apol. 20. b, c. rig, riv 5' 
£/tu, y.al noduTTug', y.al noaov didaaxEL', £vr}vog, E(f>i, w Stay-qctTEg, IlagLog, 
nivTE {ivoiv. Kal iyco tov Evtjvov ifiaxagKra, eI Mg alrj&(og e/el xavTTjv xi]v 
TE/vTjv H«t ovTcag E(i(iEXbjg didoicFXEL' i/b) yovv xul avjog ixaXXvvo (xtjv te 
xal rj^ gvv 6 fir^v a v, el ijTTiaTdjxrjV jama' aXl^ ov y ag in I a Ta- 
fia l, (o avSgeg "A&r^va'toi (here also something past is spoken of, as is ev- 
ident from ifxaxagiaa). 31. d. eI iyoj ndXuL in kx^''QV^ ^ ngdzzEiv to, 
noliTiya ngdyfxara^ ndXai av an oXiaXri xat oIt av Vfiag tacpEXr}- 
xt], ovT av i^xavxov. Th. 1, 9. om av ovv vrjcrcav iygdiEi CAyafiifi- 
VMv), El (11] Xi xal vavTLxbv « I;^£v {he ivoidd not have ruled ober the islands 
unless he had a fleet ; but he had a fleet, consequently he could rule over 
the islands], PI. Gorg. 516, e. eI i]aav dvdgsg dya&ol^ ovx av noiErav- 
Ta En aa x^'^-) \f ^^^U — Cimon, Themistocles and Miltiades — had been good 
men, they would never have experienced this injustice. X. Cy. 1. 2, 16. xavia 



§ 339.] SYNTAX. CONDITIONAL ADVERBIAL SENTENCES. 533 

Si ovx uv id vv avT {ol JIsQaai) noittv, s I fir] xal dialrr] (jfTQia i/goiv- 
T o. 3. 3, 17. £ i fiiv (Asl^MV Tig y.lvdvvog sfiskkiv riftlv dvat ixtl (sc. iv rfj 
7ToXfini(t\ ij iv&dde (sc. iv rfi cpdia), i'aoig to aacpaXitnaTOV ?] « v algniov vvv 
Se I'doi fiiiv ixeh'oi {ol y.hdvvoi) i'trovTai, 7]v rt ivd^dds vnofitvojfxev, i]v je fig 
jfjv fxfivcov (twv 7ToXEfii(x)v) lovTsg vjiavToi^sv avTolg (here also a past action is 
spoken of), " if a greater danger impended over us when we were in a 
hostile coiintr}-, than in one that was friendly, perhaps then the safer 
course ought to be chosen ; but now, since we are armed, the danger here 
and there will be equal." 8. 3, 44. a^ij^^, iKpri, Xiysig' d yuQ xol to 
I'/ftv, ovrtag, ugnEQ to XafiSdvsiv, j]dv tjv, noXv av d iscp s q ov ivdaif^ovlcc 
oi nXovaioi tmv 7TE>r,ra)v, in reference to the preceding conversation. An. 
7. 6, 9. Tjuttg fiEv, CO udaxEdai{.i6viOL, xal nocXai civ r] ^ev nag vf/iv, a I fiT) 
Zivocfwv dEVQO tjiuag TTElaag dnr^y ay ev. Lys. defens. Call. 102, \. eI (jev 
tteqI uXXov Tivog ij jov aoofiaiog — KaXXlag rjywvl^ETO, e^i^qxel uv 
fioi, xal t« nagu tcov aXXwv ilgr^^iva' vvv 8i fxoi doxsl ala/gov iirai — 
firj ljorj&)i(TaL KaXXla id dlxaia. Purg. sacril. 109, 15. £ I juev alaxgov i]v 
/jovov to nguytia, I'acog uv Tig tuiv nagiovjiav rjf^sXrjdE' vvv ds ov TiEgl 
ulux(:vr^g, dXXd TCEgl ttJ? fj.EyiaTi]g ^rjfiiag ixivdvvEVOV. 

Remark 1. On the omission of uv in the Apodosis, see § 260, Rem. 3. 
Intermediate sentences, which ai*e joined to such conditional sentences, 
are likewise expressed by the Ind. of the Hist, tenses (without av), if they 
stand in close connection with those tenses. X. C. 1. 4, 14. ovte ydg (Soog 
av E/())v (Tcofia, avd^gamov da yvw^riv, advvaT dv nguTTsiv u e ^ ovXeto 
(efficere posset, quae vellet). 3. 5, 8. eI (xev i^SovXofiEd^u /griUUTiov uvTovg av 
ol uXXoL Ei/ov dvimoiiiffd-ui (si vdlemus eos sibi vindicare opes, quas alii 
haberent). 

11. The condition is expressed, in the second place, as a con- 
ception. The Greek has two different forms to denote this re- 
lation, 

(a) In the Protasis, ei stands with the Opt., and in the Apo- 
dosis, the Opt. also stands, but in connection with av. (The 
Fut. Opt. is here not used). By this form, both the con- 
dition, and the thing conditioned, are represented as a present 
or future uncertainty, as an undetermined possibility, a mere 
conjecture or supposition, without any respect to its actual ex- 
istence or the contrary, its possibility or impossibility. This 
form corresponds to the English usage, where historical con- 
junctions are used in the Protasis and Apodosis, e. g. If thou 
haclst gold^ then thou ivouldst give it. 

E I TovTO Xey Dig, afiagxdvoig av, if thou shouldst say this^ then thou 



534 SYNTAX. COxVDITIONAL ADVERBIAL SENTENCES. § 339.] 

wouhlst err. — PI. Symj). 175, d. jl tiv tx^^ — )*^ loiovxov il'r] ij aoqiuy 
bjgi tit Tov 7iXi}(>faTi()ov tig lov y.ivbntqov (itlv rii^ojv, iuv unjcxtfit&a m/.AjjAwi/' h 
yuQ ol'Tw? i}(fi y.ul -fj (JO(pla, tioXXov TtfiMfjat, Tr]v nuqu aol xuiuy.Xi(nv. Lysid. 
20G, c. t i' i-ioi i & tXij (T a L g avruv nou](Jui. ilg Xoyovg O.Otlv, laoyg uv d v- 
rui^urj}' aoi ijiLt^i74(H,u /qij ml'to) diaU/taOui. Mciie-x. 23(J, a. xttt t/ ay 
tyo I Q tlntlv, si d t o I at Uytiv ; Ilii)}). Maj. 28Q, d. f t 7 " ^ tld tlrj g, 
oaov uQyvQiov ft'(.>yaa(.tai, ■& av ^xu a u ig uv. Ion. 537, e. tl' as i () o I /t ^ v, 
fl [whether) ij, o-vij] liyvrj yiyvu'iay.outv Tt, uQL(>y.i)iiy.ii to wltu iyot is 
yal av, y ulh], q) ix I )] g uv Siinov if; avjj'i. Tii, 4, »J1. luyiaTu d^ uv 
anidhxyl] uIjov ysvotzo, el irnog ulh]lovg ^v y. (i ulrmtv. X. An. 5. 
1, 11. t\ oi'v cuTT^aui.nvoi naqu TQunt'Covvilwv ^ay.Qu nlolu yaxuyoifisv 
— , lawg uv oi'y. u n o q y a a i f-isv xo,«i^Jyt,\ .5. G, i). y.ul o IlaQ&iviog 
u/jazog' icp ov eX&ont uv, tl tuv "AXvv diuijnli]Ts. G. 2, 21. si 
ovv y.aTuXintivitg tu ay.si"rj fv no tgvijvio /mqIoj o>? tig }iuyrfV na(jsay.s\'uafxivoL 
i'o t ,u f r, Xa(xK u V t« ItQu (iuXXov n q o y oi {j oli] ijyUv. 

(b) In the Protasis, iav stands {t]v, ar) with the Sabjunc- 
tive, and in the Apodosis, the Ind. of a principal tense, com- 
monly the Future (also the Imperative). By this form, the 
condition is represented as such, that its actual existence still 
depends on circumstances, and hence is expected by the speak- 
er, and is regarded as possible. The thing conditioned, or the 
inference drawn from the principal clause, is expressed by the 
Ind. as what is certain or necessary. 

Rem. 2. Since the Greek Subj. always refers to the future, hence suv 
with the Siibj. almost always corresponds to s I with the Fut. Ind. ; the only 
distinction is, that by a I with the Fut. Ind. the condition is expressed as 
what will take place in future ; but by « « j' with the Subj. the condition 
is expressed as such that its existence as an actual fact, is merely sup- 
posed or expected by the speaker. The Subj. does not have its ground in 
the conditioned relation itself, but in the fact, that, aside from this relation, 
it is used to denote a concession expected by the speaker, § 259, Rem. 4. 
"Euv Toiio Xsyrjg, a fj, uqtij a ]], if thou sayest this, shalt say it, thou 
wilt err. ^Eav z l sy (a (isv, d (oa o fxsv. — '£.' uv r ovt o Xi^jjg, ufiuQ- 
it'iarj {si hoc dixeris, errahis). PI. Rp. 473, d. i uv fuij 1} oi q)iX6aocpoL (5 «- 
a i,Xsva a a iv sv zulg noXsaiv, ij oi ^uaiXrig xs vvv Xtyo^tvoi y.ul diruazuL 
cpiXoaoepr^amai yvrjaiug it nul Ixavag, xul tovto slg tuvtov ^v {xtc sa i], 
dvvufiig Ts noXnixri tiuI cpiXoaocpla, ova eaiL xaaav nuvXa xuXg noXsai. 
Lysid. 210, c. iuv fisv ugu aocpog y iv fj, w nul, nuvisg aoi cplXoi aul nuv~ 
Tsg aoL olxtloL saovTui. X. An. 1. 8, 12. xuv tovto, stpi], j'tjjw^fy, 
Tiavif ri^iv n tnolriTu L. 

Rem. 3. ^Edv with the Subj. and si with the Opt. are also used in re- , 



§ Oo9.] SYNTAX. CONDITIONAL ADVERBIAL SENTENCES. fOSo 

spect to an indefinite frequency. Comp. § 333, 3 an<l 4. In the plnce of 
ear with the Snhj., el with the Opt. occurs, when the conditionini,^ sen- 
tence is MKule to depend on an Hist, tense. Still, see § .345, 4. On i d v 
with the Opt. and s I with tJie Inf in oral, obliq., see § 345, Rem. 4, and No. G. 

o. In addition to the common forms of the Apodosis which 
have been mentioned, and which correspond to those of the 
Protasis, the Apodosis is very often found in a form that does 
not correspond to the Protasis. The following cases occur, 

(a) The Opt. witli uv in an Apodosis, very often follows ft with the 
Ind. and idv with the Suhj., when the thing conditioned or d6duced is 
contrasted as uncertain, doubtful, an undetermined possibility, with a con- 
dition which is certain, or which is receivefl as certain. The Greek, par- 
ticularly the Attic dialect, veiy often employs this form of the Apodosis 
in a certain kind of pohte w^ay, when speaking of settled convictions, §260, 
2, (4), (a). 

(a) El TOLJO Xiysig, ufxaoTuvotg civ, if thou assertest this, thou 
wouldst en*. PI. Ap. 37, c. nolXi) fisvx uv us (pdoipvxia t-/ o i, si oviMg dko- 
yiajog slfi i. 30, h. st jxsv oiv xavxa Xsyojv d l acp-d- s Iq (o Tovg vsovg, xavx 
uv eiT) ^la^squ. Ale. II. 149, e. y.ul yuQ uv dstvov sltj, si ngog tu doJQU 
y.at Tug d^valug o no^lsTiovaiv rifxwv ol S^sol, uXXd (xi] TiQog Tr\v ipvyr^v, 
uv Tig oaiog y.al dUuiog olv Tvy/uvr,. X. C. 1. 2, 28. si d^ uvTog [S'coy.Qurrfg) 
ab)(foovo)v diSTslsL, nug uv diy.ulwg Tijg ovx ivomvig uvrot y.ay.lag uhluv 
syoL; Th. 6, 92. si Jiolsfxiog ys uv acpoSgu siV.anTov [noceham), y.uX dv 
Cfllog bjv ly.uvwg uj cp s I o I rj v. 

(/5) El with the Ind. of the historical tenses is used in speaking of the 
denial of a fact, and in the Apodosis, the Opt. is used with liv. In this 
case, the Opt. with a v either refers to the present and future, or to the 
past. II. /5, 80. si fA8V Tig Tov ovsigov^Ayutaiv uD.og sviansv, ipsidog y.sv 
q^utfxsv y.ul voacpi'^olfzsd-u fiaXXov vvv 8^ i'dsv, og fxiy ugiaTog 
^Ayuicjv svysTUL slvai, " if another had told the dream, we should assert it to 
be a falsehood, and not believe it." H. e, 311. y.ul vv xsv svd^ unoXo uto 
uvu% uv^QMV Alvslug, si yrj uq o|u vot] a s /liog &vyuTr}g ^Acpgodm], "and 
^neas would certainly have perished there, if Aplirodite had not observed 
it." 

(/) X. Apol. 6. ijv de ulaS-uvcj/AUL -/slooiv yiyvofisvog y.ul x « t a /z €\a- 
(f oy^UL sfiuviov, nojg u v iyw u v t]de(og (j tot sv o l y,L ', PI. Menex. 239, c. 
i uv oi'v ri^islg sTii/SLgoi^uev tu uvtu Xoyo) ipiXu) xocrfxslv, jdy u v dsvjsgoi, 
(p a L V 1 [I s d- a, tlien we should have been inferior. 

(b) On the contrary, the Ind. sometimes follows s I with the Opt. in the 
Apodosis. Her. 1, 32. ov yug tol 6 fiiyu nXovoiog fiuXXov xov Itc Vfiigr^v 



536 SYNTAX. ELLIPSIS OF THE PROTASIS. [§ 340. 

BxovTog oX^ib'neQog iuti, si ^t] ol tl'/jj in lano ixOy nuviu %a).u tyovxa 
TiXsvir/aui ii) tuv [iiov. X. C. 1. 5, 2. ti ^' inl ttXiviff jov ^lov ytvofitvoi 
(3 ovlo l^f & u TO) iniTQiipai ?/ nuldag uq^ivaq nuLdsvaai, tj ^vyaTsgag 
naQ&ivovg diu(fvXu^aL, ?; ;|f^>)j^ar« SiuaojauL, uq u^ioniajov tig xavxa ri/rj- 
(T 6 ixE^ a xov anQuxi] ; 

(c) Tlie Iiid. of tlie historical tenses with « v in an Apodosis follows, 

(«) sometimes £ I with the Ind. of a principal tense, if the condition is 
regarded as a fact or something actually existing, while the thing condi- 
tioned or deduced, is not considered as a real existence. X. Hier. 1, 9. s t 
yuq ovxbi xavx a/ s i, nojg a v noXXol fisv in e&v fiovv tvquvvhv — , nojg 
ds ndvxeg i^i^Xovv av xovg xvgdvvovq ; if this were really so, why should 
many strive after the tyranny, and all esteem tyrants as happy ? Eur. Or. 565 
sq. s I yixQ yvvaixsg ig toS' ij^ova lv S^gdcrovg, avdgag cpovEveLv, naxacpvydg 
TtOLOVfXEvai eg xiava — , nag ovdh avxaig 7] y oiv oXXvvoa noaug; 

(§) rarely e a v with the Subj., PI. Phaedr. 256, c. but very often 2 1 with 
the Opt., when, in the Apodosis, an action repeated in past time, is indica- 
ted, see § 260, 2, (2), (/5), but seldom when the reality of the thing deduced 
is denied, e. g. X. Cy. 2. 1, 9. s i ex ifx i, (ag jaxiaT a v onXct ino lov firjv 
natji nigaaig xolg nqogiovdiv. PI. Ale. 1. Ill, e. eI ^ ovXrj& eItj fiEV sl- 
SivaL fXT) fiovov, noloL avd-gwTiol Eitnv, ocX)^ onotoL vyisLVol, »/ voawdEig, dga 
ly.avol a V rj a av didtxaiiaXoL ol noXXol ; 

(d) The Ind, of a principal tense in the Apodosis, is sometimes contrasted 
with the Ind. of an historical tense in the Protasis, («) affirmatively, 
Dem. Cor. 293, 195. eI fiexd xcov Orj^alcav rjf/lv ayavL^o^ivoLg ovxwg e'i- 
fxagjo nqa^ai, xl XQV TiQogdoxav ; — (/5) negatively, Th. 3, 65. e I fiiv yug 
t]^Eig avxol nqog re ti]v ttoXlv iX&ovxsg e fj,a% 6 (ie& a { pugnavissemus) xal 
Tip yi]v edjiov^Ev [devastassemiis) aig noXiiiLOi, dd lhov (j^ev el di avdgeg 
vfiojv ol Txgaxoi — eTtenaXeaavTo [advocaverunt], xl ddixovfiev ; 

§ 340. Remarks . (684, 685.) 

I. Ellipsis of the Protasis. The Opt. with av often stands without the 
conditional Protasis; yet this is contained in an adjective sentence, or in a 
pai1:iciple, or, in general, in a word of the sentence which may be expanded 
into a conditional Protasis, e. g. in the adverb ovxojg, in a preposition, or it 
is indicated in what precedes or follows. '0 g xauia Xiy ol, a fj,agx:dv o l 
a V, whoever should say these things, would err. Tavxa Xi^ccg, a fiagxdvo ig 
av. Ovx(o y" av d{j.agxdvotg. Very often, however, the Protasis is 
actually wanting ; particularly general Protases are almost always omitted, 
since they can be easily supplied, by such phrases as, " when one wishes," 
" If it is allowed," " If I can," " If circumstances should favor," e. g. i5 o v- 



§ 340.] SYNTAX. ELLIPSIS OF THE APODOSIS. 537 

Xoi^riv av (scil. tl dvvai^rjv), velim, ijdiwg uv ccxovaatfii; often also, 
•the conditioned Apodosis must be supplied, as well as the conditionint^ Pro- 
tasis, e. g. Iler. 9, 71. dXXcc juvra fih xal cp&ovo) uv sI'ti o lev (sc. tl uTioifv). 
Cornp. § 2G0, 2, (4), (a). Under like conditions, also, the Ind. of the histori- 
cal tenses with av often stands without a conditional Prdtasis, e. g. Tamoc 
X i^ ag 1] {.I aQT £ g a v. *'Av iv a t icr ft o v ovx a v tovto (tvv i^rj. ^E^ o v- 
X 6 ,u t] V ccv (sc, el idvvafiTjv), veliem (different fi"om (iovXolfiriv « r, as vel- 
hm fi*oni velini), i ^ ovXi^ &t]V uv, veliem or voluissem. *'£v&a 8i] sy v oig 
uv (sc. n nnQr,(T&a), turn vero videres. See § 260, Rem. 2. 

2. Elli|)sis of the Apodosis. On the contrary, the Apodosis may be 
omitted in"ceftain cases, 

(a) In expressions of desire, e. g. eI'&s tovto ysvoLTO (sc. EVTV/hg av 
EiT]v\ O that this might be! eI'&s tovto eyivsTo (sc. EVTvxi]g av t]v), O that 
this had been! Comp. §259, 3, (b), and Rem. 6. 

(b) Often in agitated, impassioned discourse, [Aposiopesis). II. a, 340 sq. 
eXtiote d ai'TE xq^lw i^utio yivrjiai aeixia Xotyhv ufxiivuL Tolg aXXoig — . 

(c) When the Apodosis may be easily supplied from the context; this 
occurs in Homer in the phrase eI d^ e& sXEig with or without an Inf- 
II. qp, 487. si d iS-sXecg noXifiOLO daiJiAsvac (sc. ays, fiaxov ifxol)' ocp(} ev 
Eldjjg. Very often also in Attic writers, where two conditional clauses are 
placed in contrast by eI {e av) fiiv — el [i av) d e fxiy, in the first the 
Apodosis is omitted, since it contains a thought which can be easily sup- 
plied, and the discourse hastens on toi the following more important thought. 
PL Prot. 325, d. xal lav fxsv anojv TiEld^rfTUL (sc. xaXojg 6/£i) ' el 8 e (xi], — 
EV&vvovaiv unedaXg xal nXrjya'tg. 

3. A partial ellipsis of the Protasis occurs in the Homeric phrase si d' 
aye, i. e. el di ^ovXel, ays. II. a, 524. el d^ ays tol xecpaXf] xaTuvsvaofxat. 
Also when el d i or el d^ ay e is used as an antithesis, where the verb 
must be supplied from the context. II. a, 302 ; i, 46. aX)^ aXXov fisveovin 
xaQ7ixofi6(tiVTsg''Axaiol, elg6v.E TiEQ Tgolrjv dianEQaofXEV' eI ds xal avTol {sc. 
fii] fxevEovai), cpevyovTwv avv vrjval (flXriv eg naTQtda yaXav. 

4. El de is used instead of £4 d e firj and el ds (it] instead of el 8 L 
When two hypothetical clauses are contrasted with each other, el 8e\s of- 
ten used, instead of £t de (ii], since by the corresponding member alone, the 
first member is negatived. PI. Prot. 348, a. >« a r (isv ^ovXj] en egonav, 
tToi(x6g el(il aoi naqexeiv (sc. ijie) anoxQuvo^ievog ' i av d e ^ovXrj, av sfiol 
nagatTXE. On the contrary, a negative clause is followed by e t de u ij, in- 
stead of ft ds, since this form has become altogether common in negativing 
the antecedent clause. X. Cy. 3. 1, 35. ngog twv S-euv, fxi] ovtoj Xiys ' e I 
ds fir], otherivise, ov d^aggovvTa (is e^eig. 

5. When el fii^ has the meaning of except^ another el is sometimes sub- 



538 SYNTAX. DKDUCTIVE ADVERBIAL SENTENCES. [§ 341. 

joined, thus dfii) d, like nisi 5i, except, unless, wliile tlie i)redicate of et p' 
is omitted. PI. Synij). 1205, e. ov yuo to kavioif, oifitti, Ixaaioi uuTiu^oviav, 
el fii) £1 Tig Tt» i^isv ayot&ov oixnov xaXu. 

G. "Av in the Protasis with il and the Opt. or the Ind. of the historical 
tenses. Sometimes uv is found, also, in tlie Protasis, so that it contains a 
condition for the Apodosis, while itself is dependent on another condition, 
not commonly expressed hut implied, e. g. il tavra Xiyoig uv means, "If 
thou slioiddst say these things, in case circumstances should permit, in case 
an opportunity should present, in case one should ask thee," etc.. X. Cy. 3. 
3, 55. Tovg 8^ anaidevTOvg navTanaaiv agsTrjg d^avfxa^OLfx av, si' tl nliov uv 
(acpelrjffSLE Xoyog y.albjg ^i]&slg elg uvdQuya&lav, ij xovg unuLdsvTovg [lov- 
(Tixijg afffiu fJKxXa y.a).bjg aa&h dg (xovatxriv. PI. Prot 329, b. i/oj sineQ 
uXXco TO) uv&gai7iojv n ei& o Lfj.r]v av, xal aol nel&oixuL, si ulli alii, 51* id 
mihi ajfirmet fidem habeam. 

7. When v.al is connected w ith si [iav), the hypothetical Protasis con- 
tains a concessive meaumg, and the Apodosis, an adversative meaning; 
the Protasis denotes a concession ; the Apodosis, often in connection with 
o fib)g, tamtn, denies the expected consequence, and places another conse- 
quence in opposition to that expectation. Kal either follows 1 1, e. g. c t a a I 
— or precedes the same, e.g.y.al si — . Li the first case, xal means aiso^ 
and refers not merely to el, but to the entire concessive clause, and el v. a I 
means if also. In the last case, yal means even, but also (implying degrees), 
and singly refers only to the condition, and y.al el means even if, e. g. s t 
K a t S^vrjiog el^i, if 1 also am mortal, xal el a&uvuTog i]v, even if I were im- 
mortal. S. O. R. 302. tioIlv ^eVj el nal fiij ^Xiiieig, cpoovelg d" ojAO)g, oXa 
vofjoi ^vvcdxiv, etsi (quamquam) caecus es, vides tamen, quo in malo verse- 
tur civitas. Aesch. Choeph. 296. y.el ^ir] nijioLS-a, zovQyov e<jx iygaaisov, 
etiamsi nori fido, perpetrandum facinus est. 

Remark. Concessive clauses are far oftener expressed in an abridged 
form by the participle, either alone, or m connection with y.al. y.alneq, etc., 
§ 312, 4, (d) and Rem. 8. 

§341. III. Adverbial Sentences denoting' Conse- 
quence or Efje c t . (Rsg— rso.) 

1. Adverbial sentences, denoting a consequence or effect, are 
adverbs of way and manner expanded into a sentence, and are 
introduced by the conjunctions (agre and more seldom w ^, to 
which, in the principal sentence, the demonstrative adverb ov- 
zojg, (either expressed or understood), corresponds, e. g. ovroo 
y.aXog ioziv, cogze d^av(id^ead-cu {==d- av ^laa toog y.aXog iaziv). 



§341.] SYNTAX. DEDUCTIVE ADVERBIAL SENTENCES. 539 

Still, tliese scMitonces have oflon the meaning of a substantive 
or Inf. standing in tiio Ace. and denoting an etieet, and lience 
must be considered as substantive sentences. In this last case, 
the relative (ogrs of the subordinate clause corresponds to a de- 
monstrative substantive pronoun, either expressed or to be sup- 
j)lied, c. g. rovjo, in the principal sentence, e. g. dvtTteiae SiQ^ea 
7 ov J Oy (agz s noimv tavra, Her. 

2. The Ind. is used in these sentences, when the consequence 
or effect, is to be indicated as a fact, as something palpably and 
actually exhibited ; when the consequence does not refer to a 
single word of the principal sentence, but to the entire principal 
sentence, coVt^ can be translated by itaqne. The negative is in 
this case, ov, §318, 2. 

Her. 6, 83. *L4()/o? dk avdqwv i/rj^jiadr] otxw, w?t£ ol dovXoi, avTibiv 
sa X ov navTa la nqr^y^axa. X. Cy. 1. 4, 5. xaxv de y.al tu sv roi naqadii- 
cfb) ■&i]qia uvt}Xcoy.fi, ojgiE o^A(TTvayr]q ol'/.ix si/ev ocItco (tvIU'/hv -d^riqia. 
]5. aal ToXombv ovTwg i^crd^rj r/J tots d^i'jQn [o 'AdTvdyrig), w ?t 5 asl, onoTS 
oiov TC strj, a vv E^jj £1 xw Kiqm, y.al iiXXovg te noXXovg n aq eX u a ^ av t. 

3. The Inf., on the contrary, is used, when the effect is to be 
represented as merely conceived, existing only in the mind of 
the speaker, limited to the inward relation of things, or admitted 
as possible. The principal and the subordinate sentences stand 
in the closest relations to each other. On attraction with the 
Inf., see §^07, 4, and on the negative, § 318, 2. The particular 
cases where the Inf. is used, are the following, 

(a) When an effect or consequence is specified, wliich has its ground in 
the nature or condition of an object. X. C. 1. 2, 1. etv 8k nqog to fisTqlaiv 
dt'ia&aL nsjiaLdEVfiEVog (o ^'cjy.qaTrjg) ovTwg, ugxE navv fimqu xsxTTj^Evog 
Tidvv qndliag exelv dqy.ovvTa. Cy. 1. 1, 5. idvvij&r] dk {Kvqog) ini~ 
■&Vfilav Efi^uXElv Toaam7}v tov ndviag wItuJ xaql^£a&ai, wgTE usl t], uvtov 
yviafij] d^iovv y.VjSsqvua&ui. 2, ]. cpvvai dk 6 Kvqog XiyExav — - (piXoxi- 
fjLOTaiog, bjgTE nuvta (ikv novov uvaTXijvai, nuvTa dk y.lvdvvov vno- 
fiElv a L Tov inaivEia&ai 'iviy.a. For the same reason, i] wgx e [quam ut) 
is used with the Inf., after a comparative. Her. 3, 14. to nal Kvqov, tu fukv 
oixrfia r^v fii^o xaxd, i] bi g t e dvaxXaisiv, greater than that any one can 
bewail, i. e. too great, etc. X. C. 3. 5, 17. (po^ov(xai dsi, fxt) ti fiEl^ov i] w ?t t 
cpiqEiv dvvacrd^tti, nay.hv ti] tvoXsl avfx/Si^. Hence aicxf with an Inf. may 
also be used to explain a foregoing sentence, e. g. Th. 4, 23. IItXo7iovvj]uiot 



540 SYNTAX. DEDUCTIVE ADVERBIAL SENTENCES. [§341. 

^ 

bi iv ir\ 7]7iEiQ(t) (TTQaTom8evadiJ.EVot,,xal nQog^oXuc noiovjutvoi lot xd/n^ axo- 
novvTiq naiqov^ n tig nagaTiiaOL, mgre jovg uv8()ug a oi a a i, watching 
for an opportunity^ if any should occur^ by which their fellow-cUizens could be 
saved. X. C. 1. 3, 6. o loTg nhlajoLg ioyoidiaTUTov ianv, w?t£ (fvld^aa- 
^av TO vnkq jov xaigov ifintTiXua&aL, zovio ^udlcjg ndvv [^owgixiTjg] k(pvXuT~ 

TETO. 

(b) When the consequence is to be represented as barely possible. X. 
An. 2. 2, 17. nQavyr^v noXXi]v inolovv xaXovpTsg uXXi^Xovg, Mgrs nuX xohg no- 
Xf(Alovg dxov s IV, ut etiam hostes audire possent, ^grs ol fisv iyymaia tCjv 
noXfjj.i(ov xal ecpvyov, a fact. 1. 4, 8. ovte dnoTCEcpEvyacnv ' t/oi yuq xQi'^QEig, 
oj gx s eXs2v xo ixElvav nXoXov. 

(c) When the consequence or effect includes, at the same time, the idea 
of intention or aim. X. R. Eq. 12, 11. Ctg ^liv 8k fii] ^Xdnxsa&ai, 
-d'Euv tXsoJV ovxaVf xavxa onXa' ojg 8s xovg ivavxlovg ^Xdnxsiv, fidxoct- 
gav fiEv {xixXXov, ij ^l(pog enaivovfiEV. Th. 2, 75. ngoy.aXvy.^axn iixE 8Eg6Eig 
y.al 8t(p&Egag, oigTf xovg igya^ofiivovg y.ccl xd %vXa ur^xs nvgcpogoig o'iaxolg 
^dXXE(T-d-ai, iv aacpaXsloc xe eIv a l. 

(d) When the consequence is to be indicated as a condition of what is 
affirmed in the principal sentence, [under the condition, that, or it is presup- 
posed, that). Dem. Ph. 2. 68, 11. i^ov avxo~tg xuv Xoluwv ug/Eiv 'EXXtjvojv, 
agx avxovg vnay.ovELV ^aaiXfl, quum possent ceteris Graecis ita imperi- 
tare, ut ipsi dicto audientes essent regi. X. Cy. 3. 2, 16. y.al xoixo inluxiOj 
I'cpi], CO Kvgs, oxL iya, a gx e an EXdaa l XaX8alovq dno xovxoiv xav axgcav, 
noXXanXdaia av l'(5(y;<« %gi]^axa, tuv av vvv s/Eig nag ifiov. Dem. Cor. 252, 
8. noXXa fikv av xgri^iaxa kScoy.s 0iXiaxl8i]g, wgx b/elv JlgEov. 

(e) When instead of a an Inf alone, the Inf with w ? t s is used for the 
sake of emphasis. Th. 1, 119. 8 Er]& ivx sg — Exdaxcav I8ia, w ? i f iprjcpl- 
(T ao'd'aixov noXsfiov. 2,101. dv a n el&ex a i vno SevS^ov — ,wgx ivxd- 
%EL an 8X& eIv. 6, 88. y.al oi Koglvd^ioi EV&vg iprjcp ta d (j> evo l avxol ngui- 
xot, oigx s 7id(T7) ngo&vfilcc a fj,vv s lv y.xX. X. H. 6. 1, 9. yal A&T]va'loi> 
8s — ndvxa n o Li^a a lev av, agxs avfifiayoi i)fuv yEvsa&ai,. 

(f ) In general, when the speaker, without respect to the objective rela- 
tion of things, apprehends, in his mind, solely the causal connection be- 
tween the cause and the effect. In this way a consequence actually exist- 
ing may be expressed by atgxE with an Inf. X. An. 1. 5, 13. i]XavvEv inl 
Toi'g Msvwvog, a gx ixEivovg iy.nsnXijX^oii' >^«* avxhv Mivcjva yal x g i- 
% E iv inl xd onXa. 

(g) In oblique discourse. X. Cy. 1. 3, 9. [xov Kigov) EvaxTjuovwg nag 
TTgogsvEyy.Elv y.al iv8ovvai xtjv qndlrjv xbj ndnnoj, ojgxs xjj fitjxgl ttal tw 
^AaxvdyEL noXvv yiXona n ag aa/ slv. 

Rem. 1. When the Inf, connected with wgie depends on a condition, the 



§ 341.] SYNTAX. DEDUCTIVE ADVERBIAL SENTENCES. 541 

Tiiodnl mlverb wV is subjoined to the Inf., §260, 2, (5), (n). Tli. 2, 49. ra 
driui; oItojs' sxixIsto, togre ?;(5ic7T« up ig vSmq ipv^^Qov (T(pag alrohg () l. n- 
j f I V. X. An. C). 1, 31. y.ul juoL oi \hol ovTtog iv Tolg IfQolg f(jr/^ ?/)'«!', ai^ie 
xitl iSitoTrjV ixv yvuivvci, on twit?;? t% |UO»'tf^;^/«g «7r«/f(;t^«fc jU£ ^a (i. e. 
yixi H Tig idi MTT]g el)]). 

Rem. 2. Instead of ojgiE with an Inf , a rehitive, particularly oiog, o o- o c, 
is very often used in coimection with an Inf. ; this relative corresi)onds to a 
denjonstrative, })articularly xotovTog, ToaovTOC, either standing in the princi- 
pal sentence or to be supplied. PI. Crit. 46, b. f/&) — zotovToc (sc. 
fit//), oiog TOiiv f'jUOJV fi}idfvl uXXo) nsl&sa&UL, ij to) Xoyoj. X. Cy. 1. 
2, 3. ol IJfQffiy.ol vofioi iTTifisXovrai, on ojg ti]v aQ/tjV fxi) toiovtol eaov- 
jai ol noXcTai, oioc novriQov iivog i} aia/QOV soyov icpisa^ai,. X. H. 
6. 5, 7. TOiovTog o ^^rdamnog 7/v, oiog fii) ^ ovX saS- a t noXXovg 
txnoxTivvvvui T(ov noXnojv. Th. 3, 49. ^ /aev tcf&aas t o v ovt ov, oaov 
ni'tyi]T(s avsyvoxsvat to iprjcpiana. 1, 2. vffxo^fvoi to. «l'twv t/.aaxoi^ 
0(7 ov tx n o'Cjjv, so far that they could live on it. On the attraction in this 
mode of expression, see § 332, Rem. 8. 

Rem. 3. Special mention must be made here of parenthetical clauses, 
which often occur, and are apparently independent, and which are intro- 
duced by wg (seldom atgis) with the Inf. A limitation is very often denoted 
by these clauses. That, of which such a subordinate clause gives the con- 
sequence or effect, must be supplied, e. g. toiovtoj xqotzo). Th. 4, 36. ug 
Hiy.qhv iisyotXo) six a a a i. So co ^ sriog sin eIv, ut ita. dicam, propemo- 
dum dixerim, m g avveXovxt, sin si v, ut paucis absolvam, at g y s (j. o i 
doxslv, ut mihi quidera videtur, properly tali modo ut mihi videatur, ag 
e fi £ £v i^Efivrja&ai. Such clauses are very often expressed in an 
abridged form without a)g,e.g.ov tioXXm Xoy m eItt slv, especially o X L- 
yov, fx Lx Q V, n oXXo V d slv, ita ut paulum, multum absit, and in the 
still shorter form, oXiyov, prope, paene. According to the same analogy, 
cio-ov, a a, o 1 1 connected with an Inf, are used instead of w c. Rem. 2, 
e. g.oaov yi fl sldsvai, quantum sciam (properly pro tanto, quantum 
scire possim), o r i fl Eid sv ai. In like manner, ug is used in Herod, 
with the meaning /or, with the Inf. in sentences which express a limitation. 
2, 8. TO ci/' di] ano '^HXiovnoXiog ovxixi noXXov xmqIov, wg sivai Alyvn- 
T ov, ut in Aegypto, /or Egypt, i. e. considering its whole extent. 

4. The Opt. without civ {?, used, when the predicate of the 
principal clause is expressed by the Opt., §§ 333, 5, and 337, 8 ; 
with a V, when the consequence or elfect is to be expressed as 
a conditioned expectation, supposition or conjecture, § 260, 2, 
(4), (a) ; finally the Ind. of the historical tenses is used with 
av, when it is to be stated, that the consequence will take place 
under a certain condition, § 260, 2, (2), (a). 

X. O. 1, 13. H rig xQMTo tm aQyvgiaj, ojgxE xaxiov xo aw^u f;ifOt, 

ndg oiv Eli xo agyvgiov avxw McpiXifiov eI'i]', "If any one should use his 

money so that he should reduce his body into a worse state, how," etc. Isocr. 

Arch id. 130, 67. tig xoaavitjv a^illuv iXrjXv^aaiv, aiax ol ftsv xsy.xr,i^syot, 

70 



542 SYNTAX. COMPARATIVE ADVERBIAL CLAUSES. [§ 342. 



Tag ovalug t]diov uv ilg t)]v OuXajruy lu acfjinu ulxoiv i fi i^ a XXo i sv, f, 
lolg diOftivoig i n ag xia f t,av. PI. Menex. 23<), d. aol yi du ^nQi^fa&ui, 
b) gj s au V oXi/ov, il' ^f nflsCoig ttnodvvTa ogxW^^^^^i /aQiaai/^ijV 
lev. — Syinp. 197, a. jo^ixriv yt jU»/V v.uX Iut(ji'/.1iV x«t fiuvTiyijv AnoXXbiv 
UVSVQ8V, intd^Vfiiag xui c'^wroc Tf/fjuovtvaurTog, wct£ y.ui o'lrog "j^Qonog uv 
dr] fxa&r^jy]g. — X. Ag. 1. 26. nuvxfg noXfur/.u ottXu xuifcry.sva'^ov, w?T£ 
T/jv TxoXiv ovTO)g uv i}yi^(Tb) TToXiuov ioyuaTiiOiov fivai. Drm. Cor. 23(), 
30. oix uv 0)0X1 '^()fiiv avTov [fhlXmnov), wgis xr^g fl(ji]v}}g civ 5 it] ^ u q- 
T7|xf t xal olx uv UfJCpociQU six^> y-u'' T-V^ ilQiiV)]v, y.ul tu x^qIu. 

Rem. 4. When wcte is connected with the Imp., or the Suhj. with 
an imperative meaning, § 259, 1, (a), then the dependent clause is sud- 
denly changed, with rhetorical emphasis, into the Oratio recta. Bern. Phil. 
3. 129, 70. y^ttcpb) ds, 6) g t f, «V [iovXrjad^s, xsigoTovricruTs. So wcts 
can be connected with an interrogation. Dem. Aphob. 858, 47. h l naTr,Q 
TjTilaTei Toi'Toig, dijXov oil olt uv itxXXu ejiiTotnev, oix up i/.siv ol'ito xuiu- 
XiTibJV avToTg icpQu'^ev, oj gj e tv 6 & ev I'crucriv; (ergo unde scierunt ?) 
Comp. § 344, Rem. 6. 

Rem. 5. Instead of wct« with the nieaning ea conditione, ut ; ita, ut, the 
post-Homeric language also uses icp o»ts (more seldom e (p o>), to which, 
the demon sti'ative in I tovtoj in the principal clause, either expressed or 
implied, corresponds ; this occurs in connection either with the Fut Ind., 
or with the Inf., e. g. Her. 3, 83. inl zovxm 5s VTif^linauru rr,g UQyJ]g, 
i 71 0) T s in ovdsvog i\uE(av a q$ o fia l. X. H. 2. 2, 20. inoiovvio f}Qi]vi]v, 
icp 0) Ttt TE fiaxga TEtyr] xal xcv fleifjniu xad^iXovxug AuxEdai^ovloig etce- 
ud^cii. 4,38. ol dE dLYiXXa'^av^ i cp^ ojte EiQi'ivriV — e/elv. 

D. Adverbial Clauses denoting AV a t and Manner 
AND Quantity. 

§ 342. I. Co mp arative Adv erhial Claus e s denot- 
ing Way and Manner. (goo— 69i.) 

1. By comparative adverbial clauses denoting way and man- 
ner, the predicate of the principal sentence is compared in re- 
spect to quality^ i. e. in respect to ivay and manner^ vath the 
predicate expressed in the adverbial clauses. They are intro- 
duced by the relative adverbs, mg, agrs, co gTZsg^ oTzmg, to 
which a demonstrative adverb, e. g. ovrcag, in the principal 
clause, either expressed or understood, corresponds. 

2. The use of the modes in these adverbial clauses corres- 
ponds with that in adjective clauses, §333, e. g. Ai:yng ovtcog, 
cog qjQoveig. Zsvg Sidcoijiv, oTzcog i&slsi or onag av iO-e- 
lyj § 333, 3, sy.dazco. Very often cog civ or cogTzag av is used 
with the Opt, § 333, 6. PL Phaed. 87, b. if^ol yag doxel oiioicog 



§313.] SYNTAX. COMPARATIVE ADVERBIAL CLAUSES. 543 

Xt'/E(7&ai TUVTKy (Ug7T£Q CCV Tig TTEQl avd^QMTlOV VqjdvTOV TrQSg^VTOV 

dnoOiii'ovTog Xtyot lovzov tov Xoyov. 

Remark 1. In comparisons, either tlie Present tense or Aor. is used 
■when the compared object is placed in present view, § 25G, 4, (c). In re- 
spect to the Modes, it is to be noted, that in Homer, tlie adver})s of com- 
j)arison w c, oi c t f , i] v t f, are connected either witli the Pres. or Aor. Ind., 
when the conifKirison is stated as an actual f;ict, or with the Pres. Siibj,, or 
more conmionly with the Aor. Subj., § 3l33, Rem. 2. ; the Aor. Snbj. often 
retains the apj)earaiice of the Fut. by the shortening of the Mode-vowel. 
11. X, 183. CO ? ($€ ntvfq 7XB(j\ ^ijXn dvgMQj](TOVTai iv avX^i — , wc twv 
Yi]5v}ioq vJivog anb ^Xicpaoouv oXmXsl. (>, 434. wcte aTTjXrj fxivsL I^utts- 
8or, TjT inl Ti'Uf5o) dvifjog £OT/)xft. x. 485, sq. ug ds Xsmv fiijlotmv aar]jidv- 
Toiaiv infXdMi' luyeffLV ij ui'faat y.av.a cpQovsMV ivoQOVdr]' al? uh Gqt'}- 
'ixDcg avdQag inoj/sio Tvdiog vlog. 

Rem. 2. OvTMg (w?) — w ? are used to express a ivish, asseveration, and 
so that the clause of comparison, introduced by utg, exjDresses the object of 
the protestation. Thus in Latin, ita me dii anient, ut ego nunc laetor. II. 
r, 825. si yag i/a)v ovtm ye zliog noLg aiyio/OLO h'7]v — , wg vvv rjfiSQr] 
7Jds xaxov (psQfL ^AqyeioLai naat ^aXn. 

Rem 3. In clauses introduced by a. g, at gn s q^ w ? t e, an attraction in 
regard to Case sometimes occurs, particularly in the Ace. Lys. Accus. 
Agor. 492, 136. ovdaiuov ycxQ tanv ^AyoquTov \4&r}vouov sivai w gn sq O q a~ 
(TV ^ ovXov. The Nom. often stands, (for which a verb must be supplied 
from the context). Dem. Mid. 363. ixQi]v avxov t« ovia dvaXiaxovxa, ai g- 
n SQ sy (a, o'vTM fih ucpuLQtla&aL jrjv vlxrjv. 

Rem. 4. V2? in connection witli a substantive (for which a predicate 
must be sup])lied from the principal clause), is used like the Lat. ut, in 
order to explain the predicate in the principal clause. This w g, ut, ex- 
presses either comparison or limitation, and in the fii'st case is to be trans- 
lated by as, in the latter by /or; the former occurs, when it is presupposed 
of an object connected with w c, that it possesses in a high degree the thing 
affirmed in the predicate of the sentence ; the latter, when it is presup- 
posed of an object, that it possesses only in a small degree what is affirmed 
by the predicate of the sentence, S. O. R. 1118. Ad'Cov yaq rjv, ti'nsQ rig dX- 
Xog,'niijT6g, Mg vofisvc dvi^Q [lit pastor, as a shepherd;) the fidelity of 
shepherds being supposed. But Th. 4. 84. ijv di ovds ddvyarog, ug ylaxs- 
d a Lfxov Lo g, sItthv {ut Lacedaemonius, for a Lacedemonian ; it being presup- 
posed of Lacedemonians as a thing known, that they were no great orators. ' 

§ 343. II. Co mp arative Adverbial Clausesivhich 
express Quantity/. (692.) 

1. In comparative adverbial clauses which express quantity, 
the predicate of the principal clause is compared in respect to 
quantity, i. e. in relation to its magnitude or degree, with its 
predicate. The compared predicates are contrasted either as 
equal or unequal to each other. 



544 SYNTAX. COMPARATIVE ADVERBIAL CLAUSES. [§343. 

2. The equality of tlie predicates in (expressed in the follow- 
ing manner, 

(a) The adverbial clause is introduced by the relative o a qj 
(0(7 1'), and to this the demonstrative roaovrqj{Toaovrov)^ 
corresponds in the principal clause. 

X. Cy. 8. 1, 4. Toaovrov diacpSQEiv yj^uag dtl tcIjv doi).o)v, uaov ol fxiv 
Soi'loL axoptEg tolg dianorrxig v7ir]QEroiaiv. "It becomes us to excel slaves 
by as much as" etc. 

(b) The adverbial clause is likewise introduced by the rela- 
tive oacp [oaov], and to this corresponds the demonstrative to- 
6ov7(p {rooovtov), in the principal sentence; the predicate 
of both clauses, however, stands either in the comparative or 
superlative. 

X. O. 7, 42. <T (a av v.al i^iol y.oivavog, y.al naicrlv ol'y.ov cpvXa^ a fi e l- 
V (ov ylvji, T cr OVT 0) xal t l (liwri q a iv to} ol'y.o) sat] [quo [quanto] melior 
— eo [tanto] honoratior, the — so much the.) Hier. 1, 19. o u oi av nXslo) 
Tig naQa^r,Tai xa nfonia rajv ly.avuiv, to a ov x w & a a a ov y.oiiog ifj.- 
TTLTiTSL rijg idoidfjg. Th. 8, 84. ocrto ^alLdxa y.al iXiv&eqoi i](Tav vuv- 
Tai, T 0(1 OVT CO y.al -& q ntr vt ax a ngognsdovTsg tov fiicrd^ov anjjTow. 
The Superlative may also stand in the first member, the Comp., in the last. 
Dem. Ol. 1. 21, 12. otro) yaq st o i jiot aT amoj (tw Xoy oj) doy.ovfxiv 
XQTi]ad^ai, TOffOVTco fiaXXov aniUTOvai navxeg alxco. 

Remark 1. Sometimes x o cr ovtm is omitted, especially when the re- 
lative member of the comparison follows. PI. Gorg. 458, a. (xeI^ov yag 
avTO ayu&ov r,yovuai, ouojnsQ (j,s7^ov uya&ov iaxiv aixov anallayrjvai 
nay.ov Toi f^sylaxov ?/ ukXov anaXXd^ai. WTien o a o) — t oa ov tw are omit- 
ted, both clauses may be blended into one, e. g. X. C. 4. 1, 3. al agiaTat 
doy.oiaai dvai (fvaeig ^laXiaxa naidelug dsovxac. 

Rem. 2. A comparative clause, introduced by co c, on (o c, f,, (as) o (tov, and 
expressing a possibilirv^, often serves to strengthen a superlative. X. C. 2. 
2, 6. inmiXovvTai ol yovelg ndvxu noiovvug, on^xig ol Traldsg avrolg yivoivxaL 
(a g dwaxov^^sXTLCTToi, as good as possible, quam fieri potest optimi). 
Cy. 7. 1, 9. ^^ av dvvoijiai xa/io-TW. For the like purpose, also, 
olog, OTL are used in coimection with ehai. X. C. 4. 8, 11. idox^t tol- 
ov T g uvai, olog a v si'tj a q tax 6 g ys dvviQ yal svduL^ovscrTaxog. 
In consequence of the omission of the verb, the following elliptical expres- 
sions originate, w$ agKTxaolovxaXsnwxaxov, oxt, fidXLaxUj 
etc., § 239, Rem. 2. So, likewise, the expressions w? dXr,-&a?, in fact, ag 
ttT£/yc5c, utterly, Mg ndvv, ag stxI to 7roAil,_plerumque, are to be explained ; 
also ag I'y.aaxoi, i. e. sxaaxoi, wg sxaaxot i^aav. 

3. The inequality of predicates, which are compared, is ex- 
pressed as follows, viz. a coordinate clause, introduced by the 



§ 344.1 SYNTAX. INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. 545 



comparative particle »/, is appended to a comparative. See 

Rem. 3. The relation of quantity is expressed thus, viz. the predicate of 
the principal clause is compared, in respect to its magnitude or degree, 
Avitli its consequence or effect, and is denoted by a deductive subordinate 
clause with w ? i « and the Inf. If the degree of the predicate in the prin- 
cipal clause stands with its effect in an equal, relation, then the predicate of 
the prhicipal clause is in the positive, e. g. ovitog ay 8 g el 6 g iariv, bjgrs 
d^ av i.id^ea& a t. But if the relation expresses an inequality, i. e. if the 
predicate of the principal clause is such as denotes a higher degi^ee in an 
object than can be found in any other object, then the Comparative is used 
with 7] w c T £ and the Inf. e. g. ra xaxu ^tl'C,oi ((jtIv, i] m gx t ixv ay.la l- 
B I V, greater than that one, i. e. too great to be bewailed. See § 341, 3, (a). 



SECTION IX. 
§ 344. I. Interrogative Sentences. (G93— 704.) 

1. Interrogatives are either independent of a preceding sen- 
tence or dependent upon it, e. g. Is the friend come? and 1 do 
not know whether the friend has come. The first is called a di- 
rect question, the last, an indirect. Both may consist either of 
one member, or of two or more members, e. g. Is the friend 
come, or Is he not come, knoivest thou not ivhetherhe is coming? 
or ivhetherhe is not coming? According as the question refers 
to an object (person or thing) or to a predicate, the questions 
are divided into nominal and into predicative questions, e. g. 
ivho has done this ? (nominal question), and hast thou irritten 
the letter? (predicative question). 

2. The nominal questions, i. e. those questions, in Vvhich the 
inquirer wishes to receive an answer on a single point, are in- 
troduced by the substantive, adjective or adverbial interroga- 
tive pronouns, th, nmog, noaog, nozeQog, nmg, tz^, ttov, no&i, nod^ev, 
TToaE, etc. If the nominal questions are indirect, then they are 
introduced by the interrogative pronouns, (§ 93, Rem. I,) com- 
pounded with a relative, e. g. ogzig, onoiog, onoaog, oTiorsQog, 
oTTcog, oTir], onov, oTto&ev, otzocss, etc. 

Tig i)ldsv; — Tl noiug ; — IIolov trs snog (pvyiv iQyog odorTMv; — 
liwg liyfig ; — Uo as cpivysis ; — Oix oJda, o gr ig iuxlv. — Ovy. oida^ 
ort (a g tovjo xo nga/fia enga^iv. 



546 SYxNTAX. INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. [§344. 

Remark 1. Often, liowever, Uie indirect question takes the character of 
tlie direct, and then the (hrect interrogative j)r{)iionns are used instead of 
the indirect. Sometimes in clauses that immediately follow each other, 
the first clause takes the indirect interrogative, the last more seldom, 
the direct interrogative. Ovy. o/(5«, rig Tuina t7r^«|?v. X. C. 4. G, 2. sljii 
(UOL — Trot or ti voixiC,Hq siatSduv thai : yet there follows immediately, t/«t? 
ovv flnuv, onolog ng u sl<Tf[ii]g scttlv', Conij). Rem. 2. PI. Crit. 48, a. 
ovx lioa ijfiiv ovTO) (pnorTiffTsov, r I sqov(tlv ol noV.ol ?/^mc, u)X u t l u snu'i'oiv 
TifQi Twv dixalojv y.al udly.cov. X. C. 4. 4, 13. ol yuQ u\(7&(xvo^ul aov, unolo v 
vofiLiAov, ij Tiolov dU(xiov liyug. — In indirect questions, the simple relative 
is sometimes used, instead of the indirect interrogative, e. g. og instead of 
ocTic, o'log instead of onolog, etc. 

Rem. 2. The adverb noTs is sometimes appended to the interrogative, 
in order to express the desire of the inquirer for an answer, or to denote 
wonder, or emotion in general. X. C. 1. 1, 2. nolo) ttot' ixQ^^auvzo xix- 
firjQlb)] 1. noXXdxig i&ai\uaaa, tIo-l ttots Xo/Oig ^AS-yjvatuvg tntiaav ol 
'/QayjdfiSVOL I^MXQaTtjv, wc «|toc sl'i] &uvdxov zfi nohi. R. L. 1, 1. i&uvfiaaa, 

OT en 71 OT E TQOJlb) TOl'T S/ivETO. 

Rem. 3. The aiticle is prefixed to the interrogative, when the one has 
mentioned an object or quality, in order to define it more exactly, while 
the other does not expect this more exact definition, but interrupts the dis- 
course, and, by means of the article referring to that general definition, 
asks " w^iat that means." PI. Phaedr. 277, a. ^oixq. Nlv d)) ixelv a V/dT], 
CO fPaldQs, dvvoc/jE&a xglvstv, jovicov (xifioko/rjfiivcav. 0. Ta re ol a ; (in re- 
ference to the precedmg ixslva). 279, a. ^^mxq. Niog lit, w fI>UldQs,'lao- 
xQvtTrig' (xivTOi fiavievofxaL xai al'Tov, )J/SLv i&iX(t). <P. To nolov d/j ; 
So T« nola ravja Uyug; From this mode of expression, that is to 
be distinguished, in which a substantive with the article or a demonstra- 
tive, follows an interrogative without the article. In this case, the inquiry 
relates to the condition or state of an object already existing. II. tt, 440. 
n o\ov TO V ^v & ov siiTitg ; Avliich the Eng. translates by means of two 
sentences, " What is that word, that thou hast spoken ?" The word is al- 
ready spoken, and the other asks, what it means. Her. 7, 48. daiuovLs dv- 
dQwv, xola (= noTa) xavTa Xi/sig eivul dvo ^ol noksfiKOTaia, ichat is that 
of which thou speakest^ PI. Gorg. 521, a. sjil re oteq av ovv ^e naqaxaXflg 
rhv d^iqantiuv Tijg TioXsag ; (= noTsga iailv i] S-Egdjieia, icp I'jv fis nagaxa- 
Xslg;). 

Rem. 4. In order to bring out emphatically the object of a question, when 
there is an antithesis, or a transition in the discourse, the words which de- 
note this object, often precede, in connection with t / ^ s, and then the 
predicate of the proper interrogative clause is commonly placed with a se- 
cond interrogative. PI. Rp. 341, d. t / d s xv^EQvi\Tr)g ; o OQ&oJg xv^sgvriTrjg 
vcxvTMV dgxcav iaTiv, i] vavTrjg ; Gorg. 502, a. t l di 6 nmriQ avroii MsXrjg ; 
^ 7100? TO ^iXxLcnov jSXinav idoxsi, gol xi&aQwdslv ; 

Rem. 5. The expressions, t I fiaS- cjv, z I n a& uv, cur, always imply 
censure, and they differ in this, viz. that the first expresses design, the last, 
contingency, e. g. Tl p.aS- wv xo\)to inoirjirag ; what has come into your mind 
to do this '^ Tl nad-Mv tovto iirolrjcrag ; quid expertus hoc fecisti ? what 
lutppened to you, thai you did this ? Ay. Nub. 339. xl n ad- ova at — ^vr]- 
Tttlg (i^atTL yvvaiUv ; 1510. it ydg iia& ovx^ ig deoig v^gl^eiov ; 



§344.] SYNTAX. INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. 547 

Rem. (). A rhetorical turn of the Greek hingiinge, wliich often recurs, 
consists in this, viz. that a subordinate clause, introduced by a conjunction, 
is suddenly chan<:[ed into a direct interrogative clause, still in such a way 
that the earlier construction remains unaltered. In such a case, the Eng. 
changes the subordinate sentence into the principal, and the principal into the 
subordinate. X. C 1. 4, 14. av 8e aiKpoTSQatv Tcoy nXslaiov u^iutv tstl'/tjjcw? 
ovx ohi aoi S^fohg inifisXtixT&ai, aX)^ oiav zl n o n] a tair l, vofntUg avxovg 
aov (fQovjl^fLV ; but ivhai must the gods do, to make you believe that they care 
for theef Deni. Phil. 1. 43, 10. nort u xi)r] TiQa^sTs; insiduv it ysvr}- 
r a i; but luhat must take place if ye shall do your duty? Hence the elliptical 
expressions, iV a rl; tot: zi; {sc. ysvTjzai) to what purpose, for ivhat object '? 
oz t zl; (sc. yr/VETtti), on what ground'? So also in an adjective sentence, 
e. g. PI. Pliaedon. 105, b. ft yaq I'qoio fis, w av zl iv zm aMiiazL iyyivT]- 
z a L, S^egiAov tazoci, ov ztjv ocacpaXij cfol (qG) anonQiacv, if you would ask in 
what condition of body he must be, so that he might be warm ? So also z I ov 
is inserted in the midst of clauses without change of construction {nihil non). 
Deni. Cor. 241, 47. v^Sqi'Cojasvmv y.al zl yccty.op ov/l ncurxovzojv nuacc i] oi- 
'Aovfjevr] ixsaztj yiyovs jcQodozow. 

Rem. 7. The Greek may place two, or even more interrogatives, without 
Tial, under one common predicate, e. g. 77 w? zl a(j uv aywri'Col^s&a ; 
how and what? [Comp. Eng, '■''what and what manner of time," zlva i} 
nolov xaiQov, 1 Pet. 1: 11.] Pi. Rp. 400, a. ttoIk 8^ 6 nolo v ^lov (xipi^- 
f^aza, ova l^w Xiyeiv, lohat imitations and of what life? Dem. Cor. zlq zl- 
vog al'nog iazi; So also with the relative. Isocr. Archid. 124, 42. zlg ovx 
oidsv, f| otwj' ^v(ucpoQOiv slg oarjv Evdaifiovlav xocTeazTjirav. 

Rem. 8. Both the relatives and interrogatives in Greek are very often con- 
nected with a participle. Thus a great brevity in expression is effected ; 
the Eng. in this case changes the Part, together with the interrogative or 
relative belonging to it, into a principal sentence, and the finite verb into a 
subordinate sentence. X. C. 3. 7, 3. zvjV ds e'lxijv dvva^iv, i'cpi] o Xagfildrjc, iv 
nolo) Eg y M y.azafxa&ojv zavzcc fiov yazuyLyvcaaxsig ; by what work hast 
thou learned my ability, so that thou couldst pass such a sentence about me ? The 
Greek may also place an interrogative in an interrogative clause between 
the article and the participle belonging to it, and in this way blend the two 
questions into one. X. C. 2. 2, 1. y.azafiEf^ii&rjy.ag ovv zovg zl noiovvzag 
zo ovoi.in zovzo unoy.alovaL ; instead of y.azaiJ.ejid&7]yMg,zhug zo ovouazoizo 
unoy.uXovaiv, xal zl noiovaiv ohzoi, oig zo ovofia zoiizo anoxaXovaiv ; 

3. Predicative questions, i. e. those where the inquirer desires 
only an affirmation or denial to his inquiry, are expressed in 
English merely by placing the finite verb first and by the ac- 
centuation, e. g. Art thou sick? Hast thou seen thy friend? 
In Greek, also, the predicative question is indicated, in the first 
place, merely by the tone of the question and the position of 
the words, since the word on which the stress of the question 
lies, takes the first place in the sentence ; still this mode of ex- 
pression is not veiy common ; it is used most frequently, when 
the question involves a certain degree of emotion. 



548 SYNTAX. INTERUOGATIVE SENTENCES. [§ 344. 

Od. f, 204. ouTOj df] oiyovde (plXr^v ig nuTolda yaluv avTixa vvv id^iXnq 
Uvai ; Tliis appears vory ofton with negatives, e. g. Ovy i&tXsig livai; 

4. Ill the second j)l;ice (aiui ihis usage is far more common), 
the predicative question is introduced by certain interrogatives. 
In indirect questions, these interrogatives are translated by 
whether. When the predicative question consists of more than 
one member, in such a manner that one member is excluded 
by the other {dU junction)^ § 3:23, then one of the interrogatives 
stands in the first member, while /;, or (an), stands in the second 
and following members. 

5. The interrogatives in the predicative questions are the fol- 
lowing, 

(a) 'i? implies an asseveration, §316, 2, and hence is used when it is pre- 
siij)posed that the object of the question is actually present. X. Cy. 1. 4, 19. 
i) ovTOi, {(jp);, at narcTtE, noXi^iol elaiv, 6c ((pscrTrjy.acn rotg mnotg rjQSfxa ; IloXi- 
fiioL (xivTOL, 8(pr]. PI. Rp. 341, e. ?J oQ&cog gol ^oxw, fc(jp?jv, aV ujitiv ovtw Xi- 
y(ov, ?; ov ; ''Oq&oJc, ecpTj. Veiy often in connection with other particles, e. g. 
fxjjv, § 316, 1, 8ij, drj nnv, § 315, 1, 2, drjra, § 315, 3, aoa, ydg, § 324, 2, 3, (a), 
x«t, Tiov, § 316, 2, noi) aga. X. O. 4, 23. x/ Xi/sig^ cpuvai, w Kvqe; 7] yix q 
(TV joig aalg /EQdl tovtcov tl icpvisvaag ; ^^ JVow hast thou actually planted?" 
'H y UQ ; is it not true ? PI. Hipp. Min. 363, c. t] y a g^ (o '"irtJila, idv xi 
EQGiTU as ZoiTiQaiTig, dnoxQivEl ; 'II nov ; surely indeed f PI. Lysid. 207, d. 
t) 71 ov, Tjv 8 iycd, to AviSi, (Tcpodga cpiXEt as 6 naTTtQ y.al ?/ fnqTTio ; Uuvv ys, 
Tf 5' og. Still, t) 71 ov is used when the inquirer would express doubt 
whether the actual existence of a thing is to be admitted or questioned. 
Eur. Med. 695. ij ttov jetoIixtjk I'gyov arcT;x'iOTor to(5£; " has Jason iTitfec^ 
dared this thing." 

(b) 'Aga (onW post-Homeric) originates from the illative a g a, igitur, 
§ 324, 3, (a), and hence implies the idea of consequence, effect ; by frequent 
use, however, the appropriate meaning, igitur, becomes weakened and ob- 
scured; hence the illative particles u g a, ovv, are sometimes added in a 
question introduced by uga. This last particle leaves it undecided, whether 
the inquirer expects an affirmative or negative answer. Hence if it is to be 
definitely indicated, that either an affirmative or a negative answer is ex- 
pected, then in the first case, dg^ ov [nonne), is used; in the last case, 
(xg a |U ?) [num, whether or not) ; fi r\ always expresses solicitude, fear. X. C. 
3. 6, 4. u g^, E(f7] ^coy.gaTVjg, wcttjo, cpllov olxov ti ai'|Jjo"ai ^ovXolo, 7tXov- 
(TiojiEgov avzov iTTL/ELgoLT^g dv TToiTjaaL ; Hdvv fxsv ovv,ecpr}. 10, 1. a ^ a, 
S(p7), a UaggdaiE, ygacfuy.i] iajiv i] Elxaala Tcuy ogw^ivav ; — "A Xi] &i] X i y £ ig, 
tcptj. 2. 6, 16. dg" ovv oia&d jtvag, ot dvoxfeXElg ovtec bicpEXl(.iovg divavTai 



§ 344.] SYNTAX. INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. 549 

(jr/Aoi'f noiH(T&ai ; Met JC ov 8riJ^ l'(fT]. 3. 13, 3. « ^' ovv, tcpr], xat oi- 
X6T«/ aov ttx^OYiai nlvoviiq ts uvto y.ai Xovo^fvoL ocvtoj ; Ma juv zlC, Icpt], 
profecto non aegre ferimt. 4. 2, 22. u q' ovv dice tijv tov xaXxUfiv ufxa&iav 
Tov 6v6^iaro<; JOiTov rvyxuvovcLV ; Ov drJTa. 1.5,4. aQu ys o v XQ^ 
Tidyja uvdga, ijyr,(Tdiusyov t>/V iyxgureiav aQeTi]g dvai xgrjiilda, xatTTjy ttqoj- 
lov iv jfi ipvxii icaTctaxsidaaadaL ; nonne certe. 2. 6, 34. a q a fii] dia^dX- 
Xsa&at do^sig In e^ov ; 4. 2, 10. xt de di] ^ovXojuevog dya&og ysvia&ai, tq)T}, 
tu i:,'ii9^L(57jjuf, avXXey£ig t« yqu^^uTa ; — ^A q a fi'ij lajQog ; ecprj * — Kal o Ev^ 
■^i'drj^og' Ma Jl\ tq^t], ovx eywys. O. 4, 4. dga fMi) ulaxwS^oJfxEV tov 
JlfQdoJv ^aaiXia fxiuijaaa^ai ; A double question, PI. Euthyphr. 9, e. 
d Q a TO oaiov, oti oaiov ian, (piXnTui vno twv ^eaJv, tj, ort cpiXtiTai, oaiov 
icni ; Is then that which is holy loved by the gods because it is holy, or is it holy 
because it is loved '^ 

(c) M bjv (probably originating from p; and the confirmative ovv, § 316, 
Rem.), corresponds entirely to the Latin num, whether, is it so ? and hence al- 
ways leads to the expectation of a negative answer. For the sake of perspi- 
cuity, the particles ovv and /u»; are often added, e. g. ^u c5 v ovv, fiuv fxrj. 
But if the negative ov is added to ^wv, then the question is affirmative, 
{nonne). PI. Lysid. 208, c. dX)^ aqx^i- "^k <yov ; "Ods naidayoiyog, scprj. M(av 
dovXog ojv ; but not a slave, is he 7 Eur. Hec. 754. tI xQW^ fiaaTevovaa ; 
fj, oiv iXtv&fQov al(ava S-ia&ai ; ^ddiov ydg scttI aoi. Hecuba answered, 
Ov dijTa' Tovg xaxovg de Tificogovfiivrj aldova tov ^VfinavTa dovXsvaai S^sXto. 
Eur. Andr. 82. (j, wv ovv doxEig aoi (pgovilaai. tIv dyy sXojv ; PI. Phaedon. 
84, c. Ti, EqiTj, ifuv t« Xex^^vtu ; fx uv firi doxsl ivdibjg Xiysa-d^aL ; — "Ev olg 
TV XQV^ noislv £/i£ ; (X(ov ov % dnsg inolow ; nonne, qux)d fadebam ? 

(d) The same holds of oi/ and fit] when used without dgu, as when 
used with it, see (b), i. e. ov is used in affirmative questions, fiiq in negative. 
OvH id^sXsig livttL ; non or nonne vis ire ? do you not wish to go ? PI. ProL 
309, a. ov (TV juivToi 'Ofirigov inaiviirig h; are you not in fact an eulogist? on 
fiivTOL, see §316, Rem. On ovaovv {nonne igitur) and ovxovv {nonne 
certe) in a question, see § 324, Rem. 7. X. C. 4. 2, 10. dXXu fi -tj a^j^tisxTcov 
^ovXsi ysvicr&aL; Ovx ovv sy(ay,s(pr]. l4U« fir] yecofiSTQijg S7ii-&vfi£lg, 
tqir}, yBvia&ai dyad^og ; Ov d e y£b)/j.iTQi]g, s(pr] htX. 2, 12. fj, r] ovv, scprj, 6 
Ev&v8rjixog, ov dwu/xai iyoj xa Tijg dixaioavvr^g £gya s^rjy^craad^aL ; do you 
think that I am unable, etc. ? The negative ov belongs to the single word 
dvvbjfiuL. This interrogative ftrj is used very often in an indirect question, 
after expressions of considering, asking, inquiring, of solicitude and fear. It 
appropriately means, whether not ? but in Eng. can be often translated by 
that. X. C. 4. 2, 39. cp gov tI^oj, fit] xgaTiaTov 17 [loi aiydv, I am anxious 
whether it is not best. For more examples of fxrj and also for the construc- 
tion, see § 318, Rem. 6. 

71 



550 SYNTAX. INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. [§344. 

(e) /ilia ami kjisna, and more cinpliatically x«t«, xuti b it a, in- 
troduce questions of astonislinionl, indi^'nation and irony. They express 
antithesis or contrast, ajid yet, since they show that an unexpected conclu- 
sion has been drawn from a previous thou^dit, §312, Rem. 8. X. C. 1. 4, 
11. iv i'(j&i, tcjpTj, on, fl vo(j.i^oi^ui ^tolg uvx^Qomoyv t* (f^qovii^nv, ovx uv 
OfjieXolriv avTMV. ^. 'Etcelx ova qui (fQ0VTi'C,uv ; at nQoiJov usv uovov twv 
^(aojv liyd^Qotrrov OQ&ov api(TT7](Tav xtX. Cy. 2.2,31. x an situ toiovtov 
ovTa ov cpilui; al'Tov ; 

(f) IIoTEQov [noTEQCi) — ij (llomer ?/ — ?/) is used like the Latin 
utrum — an, in direct and indirect double questions. Iloi^qov is sometimes 
omitted in the first member. X. C. 2. 3, G. y.al u ^oiv.Quir^q t(f7j' TIoteq a 
di, 0) XaiQby.Qtnsc, ovdtj'l uqeitul divixTav XaiQscpMV, — ij taiiv o'lg xul navv 
txQicrnEL ; Cy. 3. 1, 12. il di, i]v /Qrff.iaTa nollu s/t], iuq ttXovihv, i] nivrjTa 
noiuq ; C. 1. 4, 6. T«tTa oltw tj QOVorjTiy.ojg 7i£7iga/iu&va, UJiooug, tiotequ 
TVXT^q, 1] yvwur^g tQ'/a iaiiv ; 

(g) ^'AXIq tL r/' (abbreviated from uXlo tI iazi or ylyvsiai, ?;') and alio 
Tt has the same signification as nonne. X. An. 4. 7, 5. «A/lo iv rj ovdsv 
%wlvEL naQiivai ; does anything hinder'^ PL Hipparch. 226, e. IxXXo ti oiv 
o\ ys (pLXonEQdilg (piXovai zo y.s^dog ; 

[hy'jl, like the Lat. an, is properly used only in the second member of 
the question ; but often the first member is not expressed in form, but is con- 
tained in what precedes or may be easily supplied from it. ^'ll can then be 
translated hy perchance. X. C. 2. 3, 14. navT aqu av yt. za iv uvd^Qunoig 
(plXzQu tTiKTzafiEvog naXai unEy.Qvmov ' i] oyfE7g,Ecprj, uQ^ai,fi)j ala/oog cpavfg, 
lav TTQozEQog Tov adsXqjov ev Tioifig ; (= -») ccqu — a-zsxQvmov, rj oy.vEig — /) 

(i) El and iav [with the Sabj., comp. §339, 2, II, (b)], whether, is used 
only in indirect questions, and, indeed, properly only in double questions, 
and denotes a wavering or doubting between two possibilities ; but often 
only one member is expressed, W'hile the other is present in the mind of 
the speaker. Hence eI and iuv are especially used after verbs of reflecting, 
deliberating, inquiring, asking, trying, knowing and saying. The connection 
must determine whether the interrogative sentence has an afiirmative sense, 
[whethej' — noi), or a negative one, {whether). 'K. An. 7. 3,37. ay.iipai, si o 
'jSAi^vtoy vofxogxoiXXiov e/ei, [whether — not). C 1. 1, 8. ovzs to> ozquzriyo) dij- 
Xov, si [whether) (Ti^ucpEQEi aTgazrjyslv ovte tw noXiTiyo) dtiXov, si [whether) 
(TVfAif SQEi Ti]g TToXsojg 7ZQoaT(xzElv ' OVZS Tw y.uXijv yi'ifiavTi, Ilv EvcpgaivTizai, dlj- 
Xov, si [whether — not) dice Tavzr,v aviacTErai, ovte tw dvvaTovg iv zj] noXsi 
HTfdsaTag Xa^ovxi di]Xov, si [whether — not) dia TOVTOvg aTEQriasTai Ttjg noXsojg. 
C. 4. 4, 12. anEipai, iav Tods (rot ^aXXov uQia-xr}. PI. Apol. 18, a. diof^ai 
vf.'.a;v TovTw TOV yovv ngogi/siv, si dUaia Xsyo), 7/ //^. 

Kem. 9. Very frequently, especially in Homer, verbs which express any 



§344.] SYNTAX. INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. 531 

action, are constructed wltli this deliberative iiiv with the Siily. and h with 
tlie Opt. (Epic fl xs, ai' xs), in which case a verb hke crxonelv, Ttei(ju(Tiiai, is 
to be supplied by tiie mind. II. v, 172. yXavxioov d' 10 vg (fEQnni (aIvh. i]v 
Jtva TT t (f y }] up^Qwy. Th. 1, 58. noTidaL(~xTaL ds ni^ipavtig ^iv xal tkxq 
^JOr,iutovg ngefj^Sfig, ii' Tiug n (la s cav. 

(k) jyirs — sl'js are used in indirect questions hke si — ij, excei)t that 
by tits — die the indecision and hesitation of the speaker between two pos- 
sibihties, are made more prominent. S. Ant. 38. ;<ai Ssl^tig jd/a, sI't" 
ev/svijg nicpvxag, sI't" ia&la)y xaxij. The poets also say fiTE — ij, or si — 
tlie, or they omit tlie first his altogether. 

6. On the use of Modes in interrogative sentences, the follow- 
ing things are to be noted. The Ind. is used in direct and indi- 
rect questions ; it is also used after f< ?} in indirect questions, 
when the interrogator wishes to express his conviction, that 
that which is the object of his anxiety or fear actually exists or 
will exist. The Subj. and Opt. are used in deliberative ques- 
tions, §259, 1, (b), and 2; but the Opt. (after an Hist, tense), 
when the question is to be represented as proceeding from the 
mind of another^ §345, 4, and also when the question depends 
on a sentence expressing a wish, § 333, 5. The Opt. with av 
and the Ind. of the historical tenses with avy are used as in 
principal sentences, §260, 2, (2) and (4). 

Tl Is/eig; — -£ln s, o r t Xe/ sig ; Th. 3, 53. (jpo/So i\ui&u, fi i) «/z- 
q:orsgbiV r, ij.a QTtjx a (xs v. X. Cy. 3. 1 , 27. oQa, [i ?} ixslvovg av d S7](j sl 
as aoicpgovi'Csiv sti fitiXXov, ij iifiag vvv ddirjasv. Tl si'ji o) [i ev; — Ovx ol~ 
dot, o TL sI'ti (o fisv. Od. £, 473. dsldw, (irj S^i']qsaaiv sXmq xal xvq^a y i- 
V 0) fx a L, that I shall become. X. C. 4. 2, 39. (pQovzl'Coj, fi i] xguiiaiov fi ^ot 
aiyqv, icheiher it is not best. Ovx si/ov, onoi xq anol^riv. ^Aqa ^oi 
i d^ sXrja a ig uv slnslv (sc. sX as iqtajojrjv) ; X. An. 6. 1, 28. ixslvo ivvoM, 
fi ij Xlttv a V tayv a bi q) q ov la & slrjv. C. 4. 2, 30. nqog as ano^XsTTM, s X 
(loi i&sXrjaatg uv s^r}yrjaaa&aL [sc. si §ovXoio). 'A q d as snsiaa 
uv (sc. si' aoL TuijTa sXi^a) ; persuasissemne tibi"7 X. Apol. 28. ai/ ^s, w 
(pl.Xjars^djioXXodwqs, [xdXXov uv i^ovXov fxs oqikv diy.alcag, 7; ddlxcog uno~ 
■d^vijaxovTu ; vellesne'^ Ovx oid^ sX as snsiaa uv. 

Rem. 10. On pLi] [whether — nof) with the Opt. after a principal tense, 
see § 345, Rem. 2. On the Ind. of the principal tenses, and also on the 
Subj. after an historical tense, see §345, 5. When the Subj. is followed by 
an Opt., then the latter, as in final sentences, § 330, 3, expresses the de- 
rived or remoter thought. II. n, 650, sq. cpqu'CsTO ^vfiui — ^isqixrjql^oyv, »/ ^drj 
xal xflvov. "ExTuq yuXxo) 8 jj ojaj] uno x Mfiwv xsv/s sXi]x u i, tj I'rt xal 
TiXrjoviaaLV ocpsXXsLSV novov ulni'v. 



552 SYNTAX. OBLKiUE OR INDIRECT DISCOURSE. [§ 345. 

7. The answer made to questions by yes^ is commonly ex- 
pressed by repeating the interrogative word standing in the 
question. So also when the answer is made by wo, except that 
here ov precedes the word repeated. Yes is also expressed by 
V oLiy VY] 10V J L a, n avv, y, aqt a, ev and the like, cp^fiij (p^!^' 
By (6 J iym without (pf]iif\ and no by ov, ov qjijfii, ova iy(6. 
Commonly also strengthening adverbs are joined with the words 
which answer a question, as y «', § 317, 2, e. g. eycoye, ov-/, tycoye ; 
ydg, §324,2, roi, §317,3, [levzoi, § 316, Rem., ovv, §324, 

5, (h), fiev ovv, ^ 316, Rem. The answer to nominal questions 
is made by naming the object respecting which the inquiry is 
made. 

Eur. Hipp. 1395 sq. og ag fts, diffnoLV, wg e/o), xov a^Xiov ; — '0 q w. lb. 
90 sq. oiad^^ oiv, (SgojolaLV og xad-iarrjxfv vo^og ; — Ovx old a. X. C. 4* 

6, 14. qp r) ? av a^Hvta noXht^v eivac, ov av enuLvug, ij ov iya ! — cPij/u I y a g 
ovv. 

§345. I[. Oblique or Indirect Discourse. (705—709.) 

1. The words or thoughts of a person, — whether he be a se- 
cond or third person or the speaker himself, — may either be 
given again unaltered, in the same form as they were stated by 
us or another person ; then the discourse or thought quoted, 
seems to be independent of the representation of the narrator, 
and is called direct (oratio recta)^ e. g. I thought, peace has been 
CONCLUDED ; the messenger announced, peace has been con- 
cluded ; 

2. Or the words may refer to the representation of the narra- 
tor and thus be made to depend upon a verb of perception or 
communication (verbum sentiendi or declarandi), standing in the 
principal sentence. This is called indirect discourse (oratio 
obliqua), e. g. We believed, that peace was concluded. The 
messenger announced, that peace was concluded. 

3. The principal sentences of direct discourse, to which edso 
belong the sentences introduced by the coordinate conjunctions, 
e. g. nai, ds, yag, ovv, xaiToi, etc., in oblique discourse, when they 
contain a simple affirmation, and denote something which 
happens, has happened, or will happen, are expressed, (a) 
either by the Ace. with the Inf., § 307, 6, or by o r t and w g with 



§ol'3.J SYNTAX. OBLIUl-K OK INDIRECT DISCOURSK. 553 

the finite verb, § 329, or aJso by the participial construction, 
§ 310, 4, (a), e. g. 'EnriyyeiXe z ov g noXs [li ov g aTt oq)vy eiv 
— 1 1 01 TToXsfiioi an (pv y I Ev — t ov g no), efiiovg an o- 
(fvyovrag; when they express a command, admonition, 
wish or desire, (b) by the Inf., § 306, e. g. "Ele^s rolg aTQanxoTaig 
in I & s a & at roTg noXefiioig (Or. recta, ini&eaO-e). 

Remark 1. Intermediate clauses of the oratio ohliqua, and particularly 
such as are connected with the preceding by y ag, although they are gram- 
matically principal clauses, frequently stand in oblique discourse in the 
Opt. without any conjunction to introduce them ; commonly a sentence ex- 
pressed by oTt or ug with the Opt. or by the Inf. precedes. X. An. 7. 3, 13. 
sXsyov noXlol xaia lavTa, ort navxog alia liyou ^av&rig' /eifiojv y oi Q ct^> 
xat oI't£ ol'xade utiotiXhv to5 ^ovXofiiva dvvuiov el'i], y.. t. X. H. 3. 2, 23. 
aTioxgivaf^ivcav 8s twv "llXdoiv, oxt ov noit'iasiav Tat;Ta * eTTiXrji'dag yag 
BXO tev rug noXug' cpqovqav t(fr{vav ol tcfOQOi. 

4. The subordinate clauses of direct discourse, undergo no 
change in indirect discourse, except that, after an historical 
tense in the principal clause, they talvc the Opt. in the place of 
the Ind. and Subj., when the indirect discourse is to be repre- 
sented as such, i. e. when the statement contained in the sub- 
ordinate clause, is to be viewed as the opinion or sentiment of 
the person spoken of. 

Thus, e. ^., iav tovto Xiyrjg, afiagrrjaT] becomes eXsli ae, si tovto X s- 
y ig, auagTjjincr&aL. Her. 3, 75. TsXsvrav sXs/e, oaa aya&a Kvgog Ilsgaag 
7t sn cijxo L, fecisset. X. Ag. 1, 10. Ticraacpigvrjg fisv (afioasv ^AyrjaiXdco, si 
(Tnslaairo, s(og sX& o lsv, ovg n i [iips ls ngog ^aaiXia ayyiXovg, diangoi^ 
^sa&ai ai'TO) acfsd^rwav avTov6jj.ovg Tag iv t^ Aaia noXsig "EXXrjvLdag. 

Rem. 2. The reason why the Greek avoids the Subj. in indirect discourse 
after a principal tense, is that it always uses its Subj. only with reference to 
the Future. But the use of the Opt. after a principal tense is inappropriate, 
because this, as being the Subj. of the historical tenses, always accompanies 
the historical tenses. There are, however, a few single examples, in which 
the Opt. follows a principal tense. But then a thought is quoted as the senti- 
ment of another, who, at the moment of quotation is to be represented as 
one no longer present. Her. 7, 103. o g a, /i?/ fxaTTjv xofiiiog 6 Xoyog o sigrj^i^ 
vog s irj, whether the statement made was not idle boasting. X. Cy. 2. 4, 17. 
av Tig iy.slcrs i^ay/siXtj d/j, ag iyoa ^ ovXo 1(A7}v nsyoiXrjv ^y'lgav noiri- 
aai, if any one announces there, that /i>-tended. C. 1. 2, 34. si fxiv yag [riiv 
Twv Xoyoiv Tsyvrfv) avv Totg og&ug (Xsyofiivoig shai vofii^ovTsg ani/sa&ai xs- 
Xivexs), diiXov ort aqtsxriov s i'r} tov og&oig Xiysiv, if you mean that philosophy 
is not to he used in reasoning right, it is evident that it was your view, that 
we must abstain from reasoning right. Hence if the Greek, after a principal 
tense, wishes to represent a statement as one conceived in the mind of an- 
other person, it must use the Ace. with the Inf instead of otl with the Subj. 



554 SYNTAX. OBLIQUE OR INDIRECT DISCOURSE. [§ o45. 

Thus, e. g. the En^Hsh phrase, He says that ivc are immortal, is not to be ex- 
pressed in Greek hy Xiyti, oti rjfisig ux^uvutol w^tv, or oit r\. uO^. lifjLiv, 
but by Xi'/EL i] ^u g u&avdTovg bIv a t. 

Rem. S. Tlie oblique discourse is sometimes used in the subordinate 
clauses of direct discourse, wjjen the speaker wishes to bring forward an 
exi)ression or thought, not in his own person, but as conceived iii ihe mind 
of another. Ifer. 7, 2. ((nualu^ov [ol nuldsg), u (uh \l(jJU;3u'^afriQ, xaroit 
nQfa^Si'TaTog TE fir] nay'Tog tou yovov, xul otl voiui^ofiera tl'i] ttoo? nuvToiv 
livi^qiaTibiv, TOP 7T QiVi^ IT aiov T)/v uQ/TiV t/EiV Zf'^^?/? 8s, o)g 'AToaar^g Tf nuig 
£t?] y.ul OTL Kigog sir] u xTTjaafxevog Tolac nigarjai ti}v f/.ev&eQLTjV. 

Rem. 4. When the Opt. of oblicpie discourse is used instead of the Subj. 
of direct discourse, all the conjunctions may be connected with civ. Th. 
8, 54. xal iipi](f)havTo nhvaavxa Toy Ilelffavdgov y.al diy.a uvSqug fin avTov 
ngacrfffLV, onj] a v avTolg doxolr] uqigtu t'^eiv. X. H. 2. 4, 18. o fiuvrig 
nagri'/ysiXsv uvioig, fii) TigoTsgov innl&btr&ui, nglv civ Twy acpsrigoyv 7] 
nia ov Tig, i] rgM&Elrj. 5. 4, 47. iy.ihvs ngoxuTalaf^ilv to uy.gov y.al cpv- 
luTteiv, Ecag av alixog bX-&oi. 

5. Very often, however, in Greek the oblique discourse takes 
the form of the direct, since even after an historical tense in the 
principal clause, the predicate of the subordinate clause is ex- 
pressed by the Ind. of the principal tenses and by the Subj., as 
in direct discourse. The actions and representations belonging 
to the past, are transferred to the present time of the speaker, 
§ 327, Rem. 2. 

X. Cy. 2. 2, 1. un jusv ovv in SfisXET o 6 Kvgog, otcote avay.rjvolEv, o rz o g 
EvxagiaTOTciTOL Xo/ol i. ^ ^Xr^d^ i] (t ovt a i. Comp. §327, Rem. 2. H. 2. 
3, 2. e8o^etm dtiuo) TgLay.ovia hXicrd^ai, o t xovg nuTglovg voixovg ^vyyga- 
yj ov(T I, y.nd^ ovg noXiTEVcrovdL. Her. 1, 163. l y. eXe v e t;]? euvto u 
/cagrjg oIxeIv, oxov ^ ovXovt a l. Th. 2, 4. ol nXc/.Tair,g i ^3 ovXev ovt o, 
Ei'x s xaraxaiKTOVo'iv, ojgnEQ exovvlv, Einigi'](TavTEg to ol'y.riua, eI'te 
TV aXXo xgria ovTa i. 1, 107. e8 o%e 5' avxolg cryiipaad-ai, ot oj t g ott o) 
uacpaXiaTaTa 8 luti o g ev cr ovt a l. Her. 1, 29. ogyioiai ^EyuXoLUi y.aTEt- 
XOVTO "Ad^valoi, 8£y.a eteu /griffEud^ai vviioiai, zov g uv acpL ^oXcav d^ijxa l. 
X. Cy. 4. 5, 36. Tovg iTmiocg ekeXevg e cpvXixTTELv rovg ayayovTug, Ecag av 
Tig at] fid V T]. H. 2. 1, 24. Avijav8gog 8s Tag Ta/linag tmv vecov exeXsvctev 
ETTEdd^aL Tolg^Ad^rivaloig' EnEL8dv 8s ix^codL, y.aTi86vTag o tl tto l ov- 
er lv, uttotiXeIv. 

Rem. 5. But the Ind. is also used in the subordinate clauses of oblique 
discourse, when the narrator introduces his own remarks and explanations 
into the statement or thought of another, or when the thoughts in the sub- 
ordinate clause do indeed belong to the statement or idea of another, but 
are to be exliibited as de finite facts or as general truths, or when the thoughts 
of the other are to be represented at the same time as those of the narra- 
tor. In oblique discourse, the Ind. and Subj. are often interchanged with 



§ 346.] SYNTAX. ELLIPSIS. BRACHYLOGY. 555 

tiie Opt. Then the certiiinty, roality and fact ex{)resse(l by the two former, 
are oontra^*te(l witli the uncertainty, possibihty and mere coiicej)tion demo- 
ted by the hittei. X. An, 2. 3, 6. I'^f ^ o v <5«, uti ilxoTa doxo^Ev liyuv 
^aaihl, x«t i]xo LEV ij/ffiavag f/ovTfC, ot «tTOic, i av ul anovdal y iv m v~ 
r ct t, li ^ V a L r, i'v&fv i^ovaL lu inirijdsia. 3. 5, 13. ofioioi ^a uv \}uv- 
l^a^orifg, onoi noik t g sip ovt a i oi'l^krivfg, y.al tI ev voj s/ o l e v. 

6. The Greek can also use the Ace. with tlie Inf. instead of 
the finite verb, in every kind of subordinate clauses. 

Her. 6, 117. avdQa ol doxhiv onXhriV uvxunrivai fiiyuv, t ov (instead of ov) 
TO ysvsLOv Tt]v uanidu nuaav axid^sLV. 6, 84. ^y.vd-aq yaq (so. cpual) 
jovg rofiudag, in si ts acpi Ja()HOv ig^aXs'lv eg Tr,v x(*>QT]v, (itza juvtu 
fieuorivui ^iv jiaaa&ai^ postquam invasisset. Th. 4, 98. ol ''Ad-rfVaXoi tcpa- 
cuv, f I ^iv iTTinkiov dvvTjS-ijvaL rJ;? ixslvuv v.QaTy](TUL, tout mV e/jvv, si 
aniphoreni illoruni agri partem in siiam potestatem redigere possent se earn 
retentm-os. See Larger Grammar, Part IT, § 849. 

Rem. 6. The spirited mode of representation among the Greeks, and the 
desire to make past events appear as present, often changes the indirect 
discourse into direct, or the direct into the indirect. In the first case, there 
is often a change of person, comp. §329, Rem. 3. X. Cy. 1. 4, 28. ivravd-a 
<5/; Tov KiQov ysXoccrai xs iy. twi' iiQocr&Bv day.Qvoiv y.ul sItteHv uvtoj aJiLovxa 
■^aooHv, OTL TTaoia'tui avioTg ollyov yoovov ojcte oquv aoi i^s<nai, xuv 
(jo ikp, aay.ttQdaiuvy.Tsl. On tlie contraiT, An. 7. 1, 39. iXd^Mv ds KXiav^ 
dQog ' Mala fxoXig^ sq^rj, dtuTTQa^ocfisvog r,y.b) ' Xsy slv yaq "Av a%l^ lov^ 
uTL ovy. innrfdEiov el't], y.. t. X. 

in. Special peculiarities in the coiVSTRUCTioN of 

WORDS AND SENTENCES. 

§ 346. Ellipsis. Br achy logy (Z eug m a). Co n t r a c- 
tion. Pleonas m. (tio.) 

1. Ellipsis is the omission of a sentence or a part of a sen- 
tence which is logically subordinate, and hence of less impor- 
tance, but viewed grammatically, must necessarily be supplied 
in order to express an idea or thought. The idea of the omit- 
ted word can only be of a very general and indefinite nature, 
and is frequently contained in the idea of the qualifying word, as, 
e. g. ol ^i^vr^Toi (sc. avd-QcoTToi), y avQiov (sc. rj[A,tQa), or is evident 
from the context or frequent usage, as e. g. in elg didaay.dlov 
Itvui. In like manner, the omitted sentence must express a 
general idea, and hence one which may be readily supplied. 
The single sentences of Ellipsis have been noticed in the 
course of the Grammar. See Index under Ellipsis. 



556 



SYNTAX. ELLIPSIS. BRACHYLOGY. ZEUGMA. [§ 346. 



2. Ellipsis is to be distinguished from brevity of expression 
or Brachylogy. In Ellipsis there is an actual omission of an 
element, grammatically necessary to express an idea or thought ; 
but in Brachylogy, there is not a real but only apparent omis- 
sion of such an element, since it is contained or involved in 
some way in the sentence or in a member of it. The simplest 
instances of brevity of expression have been treated, § 319, 
Rem. 1. The following additional instances may here be 
mentioned. 

(a) One form of a verb must often be borrowed from another. Th. 2, 
11. (a|towt) TTiv TMV nsXag dj] ov v ij t//v eavruv oquv sc. dj^ovfiivrjv. 

(b) In antitheses, one member must often be completed from the other. 
Dem. Ol. 3. 30, 17. ingd^afisv 7]y.Hg (sc. nqog ixdvovg) v.al ixEcvot ngog Tjfiug 
HgrjvtjV. 

(c) From a negative word, an affirmative one must often be borrowed ; 
this takes place most frequently, when an antithetic clause is introduced by 
an adversative conjimction. Her. 7, 104. o vofiog avoj/enavio usl, ovx 
iav cptvynv ovdsv nXri&og av&QOjTicov ix /u«/?j? aXXa (sc. avcjyav) fiivovTOtg 
iv t'^ Tu^i inixQUTseiv, 7] uTToXXvcr&ai. PI. Apol. 36, b. afisXijaag, (hv oi 
noXXol (sc. sTiifisXoivTat.) So from ovdslg the idea of dg or exacjTog is to be 
boiTowed, as in the following sentence from old" dg the subject of the 
first clause, Eig or txaatog is to be borrowed as the subject of the second 
clause. PI. Symp. 192, e. jama axoixrag old" uv slg i^agvrj&slr}^ aXX" 
txTt/voig ol'oLx" av axrj-xosvaL a. t. L 

(d) From a following verb with a specific meaning, a verb with a general 
meaning must be borrowed, e. g. IIoLstv, igyoi^ECT&ai, '/l/vEa&aL, bIvul, avjx- 
^alvsiv ; This is the case in the expressions, x Z aXXo 7;', — oldsv liXXo 
ij — aXXo T L »i, instead of x/ aXXo noLsi or egtlv or the like, 1] otl. Tb. 
3, 39. xt aXXo ovtoi, ^ iTis^ovXevaav, 4, 14. oi yiaxsdaifiovioi aXXo ov- 
dsv ^j iy, yijg ivavfiaxovv. 

3. An important figure of Brachylogy is the so called Zeug- 
ma, i. e. where a verb, which in sense belongs only to one sub- 
ject or object, is connected with several subjects or objects. The 
verb, however, must always be of such a nature as to express an 
idea which may be taken in a wider or more limited sense. 

n. '/, 326. fiXi sy.uarco tVrn^dt asgcrlnodsg y.al noUiXa tsv/s exslto [to lie, 
as well as generally to be in a place, to be in store). Her. 4, 106. icrd^iixa 8e 
(fOQEOVdi TTi 2^i(V&Lyfj o^uoLTiV, yXuffaav 8e idl-qv. A compound verb is 
often used in a pregnant sense, since along with the signification of the 
compound, the signification of the simple is at the same time to be include 



§ 347.] SYNTAX. CONTRACTION OF SENTENCES. 557 

ed. Th. I, 44. oi \4drivouoi fxixiyv wa av K^QxvQaloig Iv^i^axlav (jctj 
Txoii]aaa&ai (instead of fUTS/vojaav xal syvuaav). 

4. The contraction in coordinate sentences has already been 
spoken of, § 319, Rem. 1 ; this is more seldom in subordinate 
sentences, though frequent with those introduced by ogneQ, cognEQ. 

Eur. Med. 1153. q^ikovg vofti^ova' oi'gnfQ av noaig ai&fv (sc. vofAi^j]). 
PI. L. 710, d. Tvcivja (r/fduv an slgy aar a t tw &s(u a n s q (sc. nnsQ/d- 
^jTtti) urav ftovXyj^jj diacfxgovrojg ev nQa^al jiva noXiv. So also fi or si'tisq 
Jig or akXog rig or sVnfQ ttov, htisq tiots, etc. Her. 9, 27. fjulv taii noXla ts 
xal sv I'/ovTa, el jioi<n xal aXXoiai 'JCXXriviov. 

5. Pleonasm is the opposite of the figures just named. It is 
the use of a word, which, in a grammatical point of view, is 
superfluous, since the idea conveyed by it has been already ex- 
pressed in what precedes, either by the same or by another 
word. The desire of perspicuity or emphasis is commonly the 
cause of Pleonasm. 

X. Cy. 1. 4, 19. 1, TjV iri ixdvovg i]^ug iXavvwijsv, VTioxs^uovvTai 't]fiag 
ixilvoL. 3, 15. nsiguaofiaL t&5 ndnno) aya&ojv Innioiv xgaTiaiog wv in- 
nevg av(i(iaxuv amou 

Remark. The grammatical Pleonasm is to be distinguished from the 
rhetorical, which consists in the use of two or even more words of a similar 
signification to strengthen an idea or make it more palpable, e. g. sv&vg 
TiuQaxQi'i/xa, ndXiv ai&ig, del avvi/ojg, tinov Xeycav and the like. See Lai'ger 
Grammar, Part 11. § 858. 

§347. Co 71 traction and Blending' of Sentences. 
Anacol it i h o n. (711—713.) 

1. In the contraction of a compound sentence, sometimes the 
verb which is common to the principal and subordinate clause, 
is placed in the subordinate clause and is made to agree with the 
subject of that clause ; in this way the two clauses are much 
more closely united, than in the common mode of contraction. 

X. Cy. 4. 1, 3. al'Tog oida, olog rjv' t« fxev ydg aXXa (scil. inolsi) otiajreg, 
oifitti, xal navTsg v^ug in l sir s. 

2. When in addition to the finite verb, there is also a parti- 
ciple in a sentence, the parts of the sentence are frequently 
blended with each other, by making the substantive which 
should be governed by the participle, depend upon the finite 
verb. Comp. Larger Grammar, Part 11. § 856, b. p. 609 — 611. 

72 



5o8 SYNTAX. CONTRACTION OF SENTENCES. [§ 347, 

X. Cy. 7. 1, 40. u'vTOL de snfidl, ijnonovvro, y.vy.X(>j tjuvtoOiv noir}- 
aufisvot^ logTE oouiTdui la onla, vnu luiq aoTilaiv {XMi^r/VTo (instead of 
y.v-Alov TTOir^iTuftfvoi iy.tt&r]rTo). 1. (i, J}.3. ottoj? uhv t o i o v j in tOsi iS^i- 
a&svTsg TXQUuuqoi noUiai yivoirio. 2.3,17. toTs^ (5' txiijoiq lintv, vii 
^uXXiiv Sii](jot uvuiQovfibvovg t ul g jS oj). o i g. 

3. A very common mode of blending the principal with the 
subordinate clause, in the manner of aUraction, and one which 
belongs to almost all kinds of subordinate clauses, consists in 
transferring the subject of the subordinate into the principal 
clause and making it tlie object of the latter. Comp. nosti 
MarceUiifii^ quam tardus sit, instead of quam tardus sit INIarcel- 
lus. 

Tier. 3, C8. oviog n^MTog vnomsvas jhv Muyov, oig ovv. ii'i] o 
Kigov ^f.iifjdig. 80. el'dsTe ti]v Kixfj/jiasco i^3qi7, in vaov sTis^t^i/.d^f. 
6, 43. UTisnELQuTO r Mv l/> A lijvwv, o ii iv ry h'/oitr. Th. 1, 72. 
T ?■ y (7 (f £7 i Q av n 6 X L V iSovXorro ai]^iuly^LV, of/Tj iiri dirajjiv. X. Cy. 5. 
3, 40. ol uoyovTig uvtojv in t (.i s X s la d^ ojv, oncog (Ti'ay.EvacTfiivoL wai 
navxa. Ill the same way also, when the subordinate clause forms the ob- 
ject of a substantive in the principal clause, the subject of the subordinate 
clause is frequently transferred to the principal clause, and is put in the 
Gen., as the object of that substantive. Th. 1, 61. /jA^s ^5 y.ul loig^Adi]- 
valoig si'di'g i] a y y c- X l a javnoXtwv, on aq^EaTuai. 97. uua ds y.al 
T^ig aQ/i]g anodEi^iv i/ji iiig tcov "A&ijVcclijjv, iv owj tqoiio yaTimr^. 
So also a substantive on which an Inf depends is often attracted by the 
verb or substantive which governs the Inf. Th. 3, G. ttJc ■& aXaaur^g 
eigyov (ii] yQT^ja&ai zovg JlIiTvXr.valovg. 5,15. inL&t'ixla xwv av- 
dg^v Twv i/, ttJc vii](TOV youiaaa&aL. PI. Criton. 52, b. old^ im-l^v^ 
j.1 la (IS a XXi] g n uXs co g, o id^ a X X co i' v 6 ,w oj v T/.a.jiv — ddivau 

4. The principal clause is frequently blended with the sub- 
ordinate clause, by making the former, as a substantive sen- 
tence introduced by oze or cog, or still more frequently, as a sub- 
stantive sentence expressed by the Ace. with the Inf., depen- 
dent on the subordinate clause. 

X. Aq- 6. 4. 18. cog yag iyw i']y.o v ait nvog, o 1 1 KXiavdoog iy. Bv^av- 
rlov agfioazijg [isXXsi i']^eiv (instead of w? /jxoL'o-a. KX. (liXlsL ^']^eiv). 
Her. 1, 65. oj g d^ ai'Tol Aay.E8aii.i6viOL Xsy ov c l Avy. ov q y ov in n q o^ 
nsvaavTa ix KgrJTrjg ay ay sa & a i Tavxa. 3, 1 4. w c de Xiy sx a i 
V7i Alyvnxlcov, daygisLV (.dv K q ola or. 4, 5. w c d s ^y.vd' a i, Xi- 
y ova I, r £ CO X ax V dndpxcov id-yscav siv a t, x 6 a cp sx eg ov. 



§348.] SYNTAX. POSITION OF WORDS AND SENTENCKS. 559 






5. Anacolutlion (from a privative and anoXov^yog, ~ov, follow- 
ing) is a fi<Turo used to denote a cliange in the construction. 
It takes place when the construction with whicli the, scntcnct^ 
begins, is not continued through it, but is changed into another, 
whicii grauiniatically does not correspond with the foriTior, but 
logically, i. e. in relation to the signification and meaning 
like or similar to it. The cause of Anacoluthon may be attril 
uted to the vivacity of representation among the Greeks, or to 
their desire of perspicuit}^, brevity, strength or concinnity (pro- 
priety or keeping) of discourse. There are two kinds of Ana- 
coluthon, (a) grammatical^ (b) rhetorical. There are also in- 
stances where it evidently originates from carelessness and in- 
attention. The grammatical Anacoluthon, which is, for the 
most part, caused by attraction, has been treated in several 
places in the course of the grammar. Only two instances of 
the rhetorical Anacoluthon, need now be mentioned, 

(a) A very natural and frequent instance of Anacoluthon is, where the 
idea, which occasioned the whole sentence, is placed as the logical subject 
in the Nom. at the beginning of the sentence, but after the interruption of 
the sentence by an intermediate clause, is made the grammatical object of 
the verb of the sentence. X. Hier. 4, 6. (agnzq ol a &Xr]r ul ovx, orav 
tdiojTwv yivojvTai y.QiiiTovsg, tolto avTOig ivcpQaivsL, aXXci crav tujv avTayoj- 
vidTMV i]TT.ovg^ TOUT ai'iovc aviu (instead of toutw EvcpQulvovTai — aviMviai,). 

(b) In order to make the contrasted ideas in a sentence prominent or 
emphatic, they are often placed in the same form at the beginning of their 
respective sentences, although the natural construction of each would ne- 
cessarily be different. PI. Phaedr. 233, b. loiama y^Q o SQcas inidEUvvTcci' 
dvgTV/ ovv r ag fxsv, a [xrj Xvjirjv rolg ulXoig naQs/si, avtaga noiit vofil- 
^siv, svTVx vvT ag ds '/.at tu ^7} tjdovijg a^ia naQ iy.slvojv inaivov avay- 
ya'^SL Tvyy^aviLV, (instead ofnaq evtv/oivtojv 8s xal t« fitj ijdovijg a^ia inal- 
vov avuynaQu Tvyyavuv, or EVTvyovvTag de xal t« f.ir] '))d. a^. tnaivelv avay- 
xa^ti). 



SECTION X. 



§ 348. Position of Words and Sentences, (tm.) 

1. The intimate relation between the members of a sentence 

and between one sentence and another, and the connection of 



560 SYNTAX. POSITION OF WORDS AND SENTENCES. [§349. 

these so as to form one thought or idea, are expressed as has 
been seen, partly by inflection, or by formal words, § 38, 4, which 
supply the place of inflection, parfly by the accent and position 
of the members of a sentence and of the sentences themselves. 
As the accent can be mide prominent only in living discourse, 
and commonly agrees with the position, only the position needs 
to be treated. There are two kinds of position, the usual and 
inverted. 

2. First the usual position. Here the subject takes the first 
place, and the predicate the second; the object stands before 
the predicate, but the attributive follows its substantive. 

Kv^og, 6 ^aadsvg, x«Ac3? ani&avEV. Kvjiqiol ndvv nQod^ifxwg uvim av- 
veaTQUTEvaav. Ilalg fiiyag — apijg aya&og — o mxlg o fiiyag — 6 uvi}Q o 
a/a&og — o nalg o lov Kvgov — o noXsfiog 6 nqog xovg ninaag. But the 
Inf. or the Ace. with the Inf. and the Pait. follow the governing word. 
See the examples under §§ 306, 307, 310. 

3. The rule for the position of several objectives or qualify- 
ing circumstances referring to one verb, is generally this, that 
the most important objective stands immediately before the 
predicate, but the rest follow each other in the order in which 
they were joined to the first objective, the object last added al- 
ways standing before one already existing. 

0V'£XXrjV8g rovg IIsQaag ivUrjaav. OV'E. iv Maga&mu Tovg II. ivUrirrav. 
Ob 'JEXXr]V8g lainrj jfj rifisga iv Maga&mL Tovg Uigaag hlxrjiTav. In this 
way, the adverb of place and time commonly precedes the causal object, 
(tots or TatTj] ttJ %usg(x lovg U. iv'iy.r^crav), the object denoting a person pre- 
cedes that denoting a thing, so the Dat. the Ace. [zov Tialda irjV ygaijfiajiy.riV 
didoKTzo) — TO) naidl to ^l^XIov dldcofit), the adverb of time the adverb of 
place (tots or twl-ttj jfj %uiga iv Maga&covL loig II. iri/.Tiaav). The adverb 
of manner, even when another word is the principal objective, usually 
stands immediately before the predicate, e. g. ol "^'EXXr/vsg tuvtj] xfi r}(iiga 
iv Maga&utvL rohg Ilsgcrag >ca Xw g ivlxricrav. 

Remark 1. The positions of single words, e. g. pronouns, prepositions, 
etc., have been already considered in treating the several parts of speech. 
See Index under Position. 

4. The position of subordinate clauses corresponds with the 
position of the words (substantive, adjective, adverb) whose 
place they take in the sentence, i. e. the adjective sentence, for 



§348.] SYNTAX. POSITION OF WORDS AND SENTENCES. 561 

example occupies the place which the adjective would take ; 
and so of the others. 

PI. Phaedon. 59, e. o ■&VQ0)Q6g, o gn sq el co&s l vnaxovftv, htie ttc- 
gifiivtiv. X. Cy. 3. 2, 3. o Ss Kvqoq, ev lo a vv s X i y o v r o, fd^vsjo ' in el 
de xaka f]v t a Is get avro), avvexaXsas rovg te r(i)V IleQaoJv rj'/ffiovag 
xal toi'g tcwv Mrfdu)v. '£71 si ds ofiov ijaav, skeU toidds. Yet the 
substantive sentences, even when ihey exj^ress the grammatical subject, 
stand after the governing (principal) verb. Ibid. 1. 4, 7. ol d' tXfyov, ox 1. 
a Q XT OL IT oXXov g ridr) nXi](Ti(X(Tavxug d is(p& slq av. 

5. The position is said to be inverted, when the word made 
emphatic by the position is not the word denoting the principal 
idea, but the word denoting the idea subordinate to that. Here 
the predicate is placed before the subject, the attributive before 
the substantive to be defined, but the objective, particularly the 
adverb, is placed after the predicate. 

'dya-d-og 6 civijq. To rijg ageTiig xft'AP.og, or stronger ri^g ags- 
ti] g TO xuXXog. 'O (i aa iXkvg Kvqog. "0 ngog x v g niga a g no- 
Xsfiog. ^Efivt/icravTo xaAw$. Th. 2, 64. cpigsiv xs ygi] xu xs dai(j.6via 
a V a yxa iatg, xa xs ano xwv noXsfilwv avdgslag. 

6. When the subject is to be specially distinguished, it is 
placed at the end of the sentence ; and w^hen in the same sen- 
tence two words are to be made emphatic by their position, 
one is placed at the beginning, the other at the end of the sen- 
tence, e.g. 7T a6 ojv d Qez cj V 7]y£^ic6v ioiiv 1] sv a t ^ e i a. Gene- 
rally both the first and last place in a sentence is considered 
emphatic, when w^ords stand there, which, according to the 
usual aiTangement, would have a different position. 

7. Inversion is still more frequently used in subordinate sen- 
tences, than in the case of the words, whose place they take, 
since it is often necessary for the sake of perspicuity. Substan- 
tive sentences wdth oti, mg, that^ ahd final substantive sen- 
tences, are placed before the governing verb, when the ideas 
they express are to be brought, as it were, more before the eye. 

"Ort fiiyag ix fiixgov 6 ^IXmnog tjV^rjXUL, nagaXslipoa. "iva aacpiaxsgov 
di]X(o&f, naact ^ Usgawv noXixsla, fiLxgbv irtdvsifiL. The inversion of ad- 
jective sentences {ov sldsg avdga, oviog icrxLv) has been already treated, 
§ 332, 8. Inversion is not used in adverbial sentences of time and condi- 
tion, since these, according to the common position, usually precede the 
principal sentence. 



562 SYNTAX. POSITION OF WORDS AND SENTENCES. [§348. 

8. If in a subordinate clause, a word is to be distinguished 
above the others, it is sonieliines placed before the connective 
word which introchices the clause, e. g. toiuvz tozi y.ul Tal/.Uj 
TtEQi. ifiov a 01 TTolhu h'yovGiv. 

9. A means of rendering a word specially emphatic by posi- 
tion, is the separation (Hyperbaton) of two words connected 
together, by introducing one or more less important words be- 
tween them. By this separation, only one of the two w^ords is 
commonly made emphatic, though often even both, at the same 
lime, when both stand in an emphatic part of the sentence. 

Dem. Phil. 3, 110. nollojv, o> ixvdQsg A&tjvuIol, X6/mv yi'/voniv(x)v. 
X. S. 1, 4. oiixai oi'v TToXv av ti]v y.axaay.zvriv [loi Xaiinqoiiqav (favr^vai 
(instead of nolv la^nq,) This separation (Hyperbaton) very often takes 
jDlace in the sentence also. This consists in placing the principal clause, 
as the one less important, within the subordinate clause, and thereby, in a 
logical point of view, making it secondary to the subordinate clause. PI. 
Prot. 331, d. TO yuQ Isvxov tm ^iXavi tcrTiv onjj nQoqioiy.s. X. C. 3. 11, 10. 
(filuv ys y,i]v si oid^ oil sjildTaaai. Isocr. Paneg. 53. wcte tuqI jubv jyjg iv 
To'lq'"EXh]Gi di'vacFTiLag ovx oid^ onoig av Tig aacpsaTsgov inidEl^aL dvvr(&iit]. 
Dem. Phil, ovtoi y,sv yag ag^ovTsg ovnoVig XQovog i^ ov — ^]l&ov. 

10. Ideas that are alike or similar, or especially such as are 
antithetic, are made emphatic in their position, by being placed 
near each other. 

Thus avTog uvtov, etc. g. g. i^ TTvlig avxr] nag avxrig diy.i]V 
XiiipBTai. X. Hier. 6, 2. ^vpilv fiev ijXiy.imicdg '^ d 6 fisv og rjdo^svoig 
ilAol. PI. L. 934, d. ^alvovxai n ollol n ollov g igonovg. Hence, a X- 
Xog ccXXo, alius aliud, aXXog aXXod^L, alius alibi, « A Xo? aXXoas, 
alius alio, aXXo g ixXXo& ev, alius aliunde, aXXog uXXj], alius alia (sc. 
via), etc., of which the English makes t^vo sentences, Me one did this, the 
other that, etc. 



APPENDIX. 



VERSIFICATION. 

§349. Rhythm, 
Rhythm is the harmony produced by tlie alternation of long and short 
syllables. 

The portions into which every verse is divided, are called /ee^. 
The feet used in poetry may be divided, according to the number of 
syllables, into four of two syllables, eight of three, and sixteen of four 
syllables. 

The dissyllabic feet are four : 

^ ^ Pyrrhicli* [rvnov] 

Spondee (tl'xttoj) 

^ - Iambus {ivnoiv) 
— ^ Trochee [xyms). 

* Derivation of names of feet. — Pyrrhichius. This name was assign- 
ed from the celebrated war dance of that name, in which it was used as 
being rapid and energetic. — Iambus. From Iujito), to abuse ; because Ar- 
chiloclius the inventor used it in violent invectives. — Trochaeus. From rgi- 
/(o, to run ; because of its running saltatory style. — Tribrachys. Tglg ^occ/ig, 
as its form denotes. — Spondaeus. So called, because it was used "Lv rcxlg 
anovdulg, in sacred rites, from its solemn sound. — Dadylus. "Ajio rov day.TV- 
Xov, because it is, like the finger, composed of one long joint and two short 
ones. — Anapaestus. From uvunuUo ; because the Ictus was contrary to that 
of the Dactyl. — Ainphiibmchjs.''Aix(f>l ^^Qayig-, because the short syllables 
surround the long one, [u^iCfl). — Cretkus. Because nmch used by the Cre- 
tans. — Bacchius. Used in the Dithyrambic Games in honor of Bacchus. — 
Antlbacddus. The converse {uvzi) of the former. — Proceleusinaticus. From 
y.slsv(jfiu, the boatswain's call or command; because rapidly uttered. — 
Paeons. Because used iu the Paeonic Hymns. — Choriambus. Trochee or 
Choree -}- Iambus. — Antispastus. "AvTia-iuco, to draw to the opposite side; 
because, being converse of the former, it appears to draw the Trochee to 
the other side of the Iambus. — lonicus a majore, lonicus a minore. Feet much 
in use with the lonians ; A majore, when beginning with the long sylla- 
bles; a minore, wdien beginning with the short ones. — Epitritus, 3Iost 
probably from eni and Tgliog; because, iu addition to [irtl) the 3d syllable, 
it has a short one over. — The Diiambus is an Iambic syzygy, admitting the 
Spondee in PI. 1.— The Ditrochaeus is a Trochaic syzygy, admitting the 
Spondee in PI. 2. 



564 VERSIFICATION. [§ 349. 

The trisyllabic are eight : 

^ ^ ^ Tribrach [tivnov) 

Molo3sus {rvmcofiai) 

^ ^ - Anapaest [jETVcpuig) 

— ^ ^ Dactyl [TVTiJsrs) 

^ — ^ Amphibrach {eTVjnov) 

— ^ - Creticus [rvmo^ai) 
^ Bacchius (xfTTTjico) 

— ^ Palimbacchius [TVTiTrjTs). 
The tetrasyllabic are sixteen : 

V. V. ^ o Proceleusmaticus {iivjiETo) 

Dispondee {Tvcp&en'jTfjv) 

^ - ^ - Diiambus {hvmo^riv) 

— ^ — ^ Ditrochee [xvinETaiaav) 
^ — ^ Antispastus {hvq)&7}Tov) 

— ^ ^ - Choriambus [Tvyno^ivov) 

^ " lonicus a minori [sTSTVjjfirjv) 

^ - lonicus a majori [TVipai^Bd-ct) 

— V. V. ;gj.g|- Paeon [Tvino^ivog) 
-^ -^ ^ second Paeon {izvTiTSTB) 
^ ^ - ^ third Paeon (eT€Ti'i//o) 

w V. ^ _ fourth Paeon {iTvn6fir]v) 
^ first Epitritus [hvipaa&rjv) 

— ^ second Epitritus (w TVTiovaca) 

— " - third Epitritus [xv(f&i](jo^cii) 

' ^ fourth Epitritus {TV(pd^sli]aav). 

Simple metres are formed by the repetition of simple feet ; compound, 
by combining the simple feet with each other. 

/ / / 

Simple feet consist of but one Arsis, and one Thesis, e. g. ^^, >--«, ^^-v.^ 
- - , - - - , etc. 

Compound feet consist of two Ai'ses and Theses, of which one Arsis and 

Thesis, taken together, is considered as a single Arsis or Thesis, e. g. "- "^ ^ ^ , 
_' . J . ^ --'--, - - - - or --'--. 

Of the simple feet, only those which have a long syllable in the Arsis and 
a short one in the Thesis, give natural variety, e. g. — ' ^ , - ^ ^ , ^ — -, ^ "' — . 
Hence the trochee and dactjl, the iambus and anapaest, are considered as 
the fundamental feet of all rhythm. The other feet may be combined with 
these by resolving a long into two short syllables, or by contracting two 
short into one long syllable. 



§§350,351.1 VERSIFICATION. 565 



§ 3-30. A?' sis and Th e sis. 
Jhrsis is that part of the foot on which the stress [ictus, beat,) of the voice 
falls. The remaining part of the foot is called Thesis. The Arsis is naturally 
on the long syllabic of a foot ; consequently in the spondee ( — ) and the 
tribrach (""^), the place of the Arsis can be determined only by the kind 
of verse in which they are found. In every verse the original foot deter- 
mines the place of the Arsis in all the other feet which are substituted for it. 
Hence, as the second syllable of an iambus is long, and as the Arsis natu- 
r;dly tails on the long s}ilable, the spondee in iambic verse would have the 
Arsis on the second syllable, thus — -' ; so also in anapaestic verse. But as 
in the trochee and dactyl, the first syllable of the foot is long, the spondee 
in trochaic and dact}'lic verse takes the Arsis on the first syllable, thus - - 
Again, as a short syllable is assumed as the unit in measuring time, and as 
in a long syllable the ictus or force of the voice necessarily falls on the first 
of the two units composing this long, it is evident that where the ti-ibrach 
is used instead of an iambus, it would take the Arsis on the second syllable, 

thus - - ^ , where it is used instead of a trochee, on the first. So where the 
dactj'l takes the place of the spondee with the Arsis on the last syllable, the 

arsis of the dact}'l is on the fii'st short, thus - >- - ; but where the anapaest 

stands for the spondee ( — ), its Arsis is on the first short, thus - " - . 

§ 351. Cae sura. 

Caesura is the interruption of the rhythm by the ending of a w^ord be- 
fore the foot is completed. 
There are three kinds of Caesura, 

1. Caesura of the foot. 

2. Caesura of the rhythm. 

3. Caesura of the verse. 

Caesura of the foot is w^here the w^ord ends before a foot is completed. 
IVt;<); I (Tag id^i | Xel (ttv/s | Qtjv ifxE | olxad' | a/sa^ai. 
In this line there is a Caesura of the foot after each of the syllables aag, 
Xsi, QTjv, and nad\ Only two cases of this Caesura can occm* in a dactyl ; 
for the word either ends after the Arsis, - | ~ " , and forms the masculine 
Caesura, or in the Thesis, - - | - and forms the feminine or trochaic Caesura. 
Thus the Caesuras after aag, lu and qriv are masculine, that after oXy.ad" is 
feminine or trochaic. 

The Caesura of the rhythm is where the Arsis falls on the last syllable 
73 



566 VERSIFICATION. [§§352 — 354. 

of a word ; — and thus tlio Arsis is separated from tlic Thesis. In tlie Hue 
ahovc (niotod, the Caesura of tlie rhythm occurs after the syllahles ira;, 
Iti and Q)]v, the Arsis falling on each of these and being separated from 
the following Thesis by the Caesura. This Caesura can take place only in 
such feet as liave the Arsis on the fust syllable. 

The Caesura of the verse is a ])ause introduced to render the recitation 
more easy. This divides tlie verse into two parts. 

Iji several kinds oJ' verse this Caesura has a fixed place, viz. in the tro- 
chaic, iambic and anapaestic tetrameter, which have their natural Caesura at 
the end of tlie fourth foot. See under these verses below. 

Other kinds of verse may have more than one Caesura, the place of 
which is not fixed. Jn Hexameter verse, however, the Caesura of the 
verse more usually occurs after the Arsis of the third foot. Thus, 

KlU.av IS Ca&sriv, II Tsvsdoio te icpv avaaasig^ 
or in the Thesis of the third foot, thus, 

K(u Toil: drj d^cioffrjas, |j y.al Tivda [javjig ot^vfioov. 

§ 352. Differe n t k i n d s of Ve r s e. 

A verse is often named from the foot which predominates in it. Thus 
the verse is called dactylic because the dactyl is the predominant foot, and 
iambic, because the iambus is the predominant foot. A verse is called aca- 
talectic, when the feet of which it is composed are complete, as trimeter 
iambics, ----[^ — - — |^ — ^— . A verse is called catalectic, when one 
or two syllables are wanting to complete tlie verse, as the trimeter - - - - | 
- - - - I - - - . In dactylic verse, if the last foot wants one syllable, the 
verses are called catalectic on two syllables, e. g. - ^ ^ - ^ ^ - ^ ; if two sylla- 
bles are wanting, catalectic on one syllable, e. g. -'------. 

Verses in wliich the last dipody (a pair of feet) wants an entire foot, are 
called brachycatalectic, e. g. - - - - | - - - - | - -. 

Verses which have one syllable more than enough are called hypercata- 
lectic, e. g. ^ - ^ - | - - - - | ----- . 

§ 853. Vi e iv of the d i ffe r ent k i n d s of Ve r s e. 
The most usual kinds of verse are those which consist of the repetition 
of the same foot. Of these the most frequent arc the dactylic, iambic, tro- 
chaic and anapaestic. 

§354. Dactylic Verse. 
The fmidamental foot in tliis verse is the dactvl, the place of which 
may be suppHed by a spondee. 



1 •% 

§^355,356.] VKRSIFICATION. «567^ 

§ 35o. lie X a m c I c r. 

Tlic Hexameter \vas employed by the Greeks at an early period Tor tlie 
Epic or lieroic poem, and hence this verse is olten called heroic. 

The dactyl is the Amdamental foot of the Hexameter, the verse being 
formed by live repetitions of the dact} 1 ^vith a dissyllabic cutalectus. 



But in each of the first four feet, a 5/>on(/ce may take the place of tlic dac- 
tyl. Sometimes also there is a spondee in the fifth foot, and the line is 
then called sjmndaic, as 

• Ov yag f/w Tgiobtv iviv. rikvd^ov al/firituuv. 

- -\ - -I - " i-^-i-'-i--. 

Besides the Caesura mentioned above after the Arsis of the third foot, or 
in the Thesis of the same, there is sometimes a Caesura in the second foot, 
\vhich is commonly followed by one in the fourth, as 
"// Alag II 7/ idofiEVsvg \\ ij Slog 'Odvcravg 
'llyffiovoiy, II oaTig ol ocqjjv \\ kiUQOiaiv ctfivvai. 
The beaut)'^ of Hexameter verse is promoted by varying the feet by an 
interchange of dact}ls and spondees and by introducing these in differ- 
ent places in diflTerent verses. For the same reason it is desirable that the 
Caesuras should occur in different places in different Imes. 

§ 356. Pentamete r. 

This verse is divided into two parts, each of which consists of two dac- 
tyls and a catalectic syllable, thus, 

Mridi &VQu'^s xshv || ovy. s&iXovz Uvixv. 
Spondees may take the place of the dactyls in the fii'st half, but not in 
the second, because the numbers at their conclusion should run more fi-ee- 
ly, instead of being retarded by the slow movement of the spondees. The 
long syllable at the end of the second half can be short. The Caesura is 
here the same as in the Hexameter, except that there must be a division, 
by the ending of the word, in the middle of the verse. When the word, 
however, is more than two syllables. Elision may taJke place. 

This kind of verse is commonly found only in connection with Hexam- 
eter, a Hexameter and Pentameter following each other alternately. A 
poem composed of these two measures is called Elegiac, being at first de- 
voted to plaintive melodies. 

^'Aqti fiB ysvofiEvov ^wag ^Qiq)og iJQTiaas Jalfiwv Hexam. 
Oix oW tXx aya&av \\ ahtog, hts xaxa)v. Pentam. 



« 



56S VERSIFICATION. [§§ 357 — 359. 

'dnXriQbix '/fi'da, xl fii vrjniov iiQuaaaq u(pvb)', Hexam. 
Tl ansi'dtig ', ou ctol \\ ndvug ocpidojuiO^w, Peiitam. 

§357. Dactylic Te trameter. 

The tetrameter catalectic on one syllable consists of three feet and a 
syllable, e. g. 

IloXXa ^QOxStv bia^H^oniva, 

-"I - --!-'- h- 

The tetrameter catalectic on two syllables consists of three feet and two 
syllables which may form a spondee or trochee. 

The tetrameter acatalectic consists of four feet ; instead of a dactyl in 
the last a cretic is admissible. 

^Tnv odvvag adw^g, vnvs d' aXyimv. 

Miad" , ays KaXXiona ■&vy(XTSQ Jiog. 

§ 358. Dactylic Trimeter, 
The trimeter catalectic on one syllable consists of two feet and a syllable. 
^'Ev&sv ae^o^svov 

The trimeter catalectic on two syllables consists of two feet and two 
syllables which may form either a spondee or trochee, e. g. 
Evgii xvfiaxoi novxco. 

A spondee is very rare in the second foot. 

§ 359. Dactylic Dimeter. 

The dimeter catalectic on two syllables consists of a dactyl and a spon- 
dee or trochee. 

^dafiaxa (Txgov&av 
Tolcrd' 6(j.6cp(avov. 



The dimeter acatalectic consists of two dactyls, and usually stands in 
connection with tetrameters. 

Ovg vno rslxBtn 



^§ 360—363.] 



VERSIFICATION. 



569 



§360. Trochaic^ Iambic and Anapaestic Verse. 

Tlie trochaic, iambic and anapaestic verse is measured by dipodies^ i. e. 
by pairs of teet. Hence verses of two feet, are called monometer,- of four, 
dimeter, of six, trimeter, of eight, tetrameter. The Latins named these ac- 
cording to the number of feet. Thus a verse of four feet was called qua- 
temiuSf of six, senaritis^ of eight, odonarius. Hexameter is generally not 
measured by dipodies. 

§361. Trochaic Verse, 
The Trochee is the predominant foot in this verse. The last syllabic of 
each dipody may be doubtful ; hence the last foot of each dipody may be 
a spondee. Therefore, a spondee is admissible in every even place, (2, 4, 
6, 8). The Arsis or long syllable of every foot can be resolved into two 
short ones, and hence, a tribrach can stand in evei-y place ; a dactyl and 
anapaest can stand in all the even places, instead of the spondee. A dactyl 
is not admitted, however, except in a proper name. 

A trochaic tetrameter acatalectic would then present the following 
scheme. 



/ / / / / / / / 

/ / / / 



§ 362. Trochaic Mo nomete r. 
The trochaic monometer consists of two feet. It is generally found in 
systems of trochaic trimeters, e. g. 

-' " I - - • 

§ 363. Trochaic Dimeter, 
The trochaic dimeter acatalectic consists of four feet, e. g. 
Kol/ldog T« yag evoixoi. 

The trochaic dimeter catalectic consists of three feet and a syllable. It 
is usually found among acatalectic dimeters, e. g. 

Kal 2xv&7jg ofitXog, oX yag (acatalectic). 
"EaxciTOV Tonov ocficpl Mai- (catalectic). 
miv ixov<ji Xlfivav. 

--I- -11-^1-'- 

/ / / / 



570 



VERSIFICATION. 



[^§ 364—367. 



§364. Trochaic Tetrameter Cat a lee tic. 
The trochaic tetrameter catalectic consists of seven feet and a syllable. 
Its Caesura is at the end of the second dipody, and is often omitted by 
comedians, but rarely ever by tragedians, e. g. 

Trjdt 7ia$ iuov, dlor/.e || y.al lov lirdQU nvv&uvov 
"Al Tiveg jrjQovfisv vfidg | ?;V yug fi Tig t^oSog. 



Trochaic tetrameters acatalectic are very rarely used by the Greek poets. 

§ 365. la m hie Verse, 

The fundamental foot in this verse is the iambus. Instead of the first 
iambus, every dipody may have a spondee. Hence a spondee is admissi- 
ble in tlie odd places (1, 3, 5, 7}. 

Again, as the long syllable of every iambus may be resolved into two 
short syllables, a tribrach may stand in every place, except the last ; and 
as the last syllable is common, a pyrrhic is admissible. In the odd places 
a dactyl or anapaest may stand instead of a spondee. A dactyl, however, 
is very rarely found except in the first and fifth foot. 

An anapaest very seldom occurs except in the third place, in the case of 
a proper name, or in the first place when it consists of one word. 

In comic trimeter, however, the dactyl is admitted in the uneven places, 
and an anapaest in all the five places. 

Hence the iambic trimeter or senarius, would present the following 
scheme, 



-- -- -- \-- -- 

/ / / 



§ 366. Iambic Mo nometer. 
Iambic monometer consists of two feet. Its use is veiy rare, and it oc- 
curs mostly in systems of dimeters, 

Kal rolg xoXoig 



§ 367. Iambic Dimeter, 
Iambic dimeter acatalectic consists of four feet, e. g. 



§§ 368, 3C)9.] 



VERSIFICATION. 



571 



"Od^fv dtfxoMi, xdlq ifioXg 

Iambic dimeter cataleciic consists of three feet and a syllable, e. g. 
OsXb) Xiyiiv 'ylTQfidag, 
XaiQons Xomov ijfuv 



This vei*se is commonly found in systems of acatalectic dimeters. 

§368. Iambic Trimeter Acatalectic^ commonly 
called Senariti s . 
This is the most noted of the iambic verses. It consists of six feet, e. g. 
'Jl ti'/.vu, Kixd/^tov joi' nalcii via TQOCpi^, 
'/xTTj^tOiC xXudoKTtv e$E(TTEi.iuivoL ; 
^'AXXwv anovtiv, al'Tog a,(f iXi]Xv&a 






The tragedians admit a dactyl only in the first and fifth foot. It must be 
regarded as a mere exception, when it occurs in the third foot. 
'El to ai'Vf/(x)g xal tcoXXu xnl ra/itag XaXslv 

--h-ll--l--ii"--'i|--- 

The tragedians never admit an anapaest except in the case of a proper 
name, and even then not in the last foot. An anapaest, liowever, may 
stand in the first foot when it is a single word, e. g. 

3IsveX(ag '£Xsvr]v 6 ds JiXiTaifxrijazQag Xi/og, 
JToraiubJv ts nr]/al, novilwv is 'AVfiaiMV 



The most frequent Caesura here is in the third foot. This Caesura, how- 
ever, is often neglected, others being used, or sometimes, none, e. g. 
Eydqojv ado)ga || Smqu y.ovy. ovi\ai^u. 
The Caesura is often found in the middle of the fourth foot, e. g. 

^Enu 7Tar^}Q oi'Tog aog, || ov ^grfveig use. 
The Caesura at the end of the third foot is less frequent. 



§369. Iambic Tetrameter Cat alec tic. 
The iambic tetrameter ii* very much used by the comedians. It consists 



572 



VERSIFICATION. 



[§§ 370—372. 



of seven feet and a syllable. The Caesura, which is often omitted by the 
comedians, is at the end of the fourth foot, e. g. 

Ou (pr)(Ti xgijVttL rovg viovg \ \ aaxtiv ' iyut dt cprifilj 

--'h-'ll--|--li--h-ll"-l-- 

The iambic tetrameter acatalectic is but little used by the Greek poets. 

§ 370 Anapaestic Vers e. 
The anapaest is the predominant foot in this verse. But by uniting the 
two short syllables in one long, the spondee may be substituted for the 
anapaest. Again, the second long syllable of the spondee may be resolved 
into two short syllables, and hence a dactyl take the place of the spondee. 
In the legitimate systems, the tragedians never permit a dactyl to precede 
an anapaest in the same dipody. Hence the following scheme for an ana- 
paestic tetrameter catalectic. 



_' V,V.JI^^_' V.^_: V.^_' ^^J V,W_' 

/ / It / / / 



In this verse the last syllable of each line is not common, but its quan- 
tity is affected by the fii'st syllable of the next line. For example, if the 
last foot of a verse is an anapaest or a spondee, the last syllable of which 
is not naturally long, this syllable is made long by position before the first 
syllable of the following line. Hence an anapaestic series is constructed as 
if it were but one verse. 

§ 371 Anapaestic Mo no meter Acatalectic. 
The anapaestic monometer acatalectic consists of two feet ; e. g. 
OvyccTrjg, atg xqtj, 



§ 372. Anapaestic Dimeter Acatalecti c. 
The anapaestic dimeter acatalectic consists of four feet. The legitimate 
Caesura occurs after the second Arsis. But the Caesura is often found 
after the short syllable which follows the Arsis, e. g. 

"Anolng fl, anoXsig. |[ ol y.aTagv^sig 
Jlgoai^Sr) jucxvla. \\ tig 6 nri8r,<jac, 
IlTEQvyojv iQETfiolaLv II igeacTOiiivr}. 



§§ 373, 374.] 



VERSIFICATION. 



573 



§373. Anapaestic Dimeter Catalectic. 
The anapaestic dimeter catalectic consists of three feet and a syllable, — 
and has no Caesura, e. g. 

£i'Arro x^Qf^? iq)ogsvsiv 

z/t« TOV GOV TTQWHTOV 0(f)Xl]aH. 



fj S74:. A nap ae Stic Tetraineter Catalectic. 
The anapaestic tetrameter catalectic consists of seven feet and a sylla- 
ble. This verse is also called Aristophanean, though not invented by Ai-is- 
tophanes. 

The Caesura is at the end of the fourth foot, sometimes, though rarely, 
after the short syllable immediately following. There is generally also an 
incisure at the end of the second foot, e. g. 

nQOsgei Tig asl Ttov ogvld^wv || fiavxsvofiivco nsgl tov nXov ; 
TZwj 3' vyluav dcoaova avTotg. || ovaav nagu xotai -^Eolcnv ; 
Tojv ag/vgi(ov ' ovtol yag Xaaai. || Xs/ovai ds xoi idds ndvtsg. 



/ / / / / / / 

/ 11/ / / / 



Anapaestic tetrameter acatalectic does not seem to have been used by 
the Greek poets. 



■».*■ -.; 



74 



I. INDEX OF SUBJECTS 



N. B. The figures refer to sections. R. is used for remark 



Abrogation of clauses by aXla 322, 6. 

Abstracts 39 ; used for Concretes 238, 
R. 1 ; in PI. 243, 3, (3). 

Accentuation 29 ; change and remo- 
val of the accent by Inflec, Com- 
pos, and Contract. 30 ; in connect- 
ed discourse (Grave instead of the 
Acute) in Crasis, Elision, Anas- 
trophe 31. Accent, of fii'st Dec. 45 ; 
second Dec. 49; third Dec. 65; 
adjectives and participles 75 ; words 
ending in vg, sla, i; 76, 11 ; ws, ov 78. 
R. 7, and 29, R. 5 ; av, ov 78, R. 9, 
and 65, 5 ; n?, sg 78, R. 11 ; verb 118. 

Accusative 276 sq. ; relations of space 
277; of the object produced witli a 
verb of the same stem or one of re- 
lated signification {^a%T]v fiax^dd^ai ; 
^f;y ^lov] 278, 1 and 2 ; with verbs de- 
denoting to shine, to flow, etc. 278, 3 ; 
object of 278, 4 ; way and manner 278, 
R,3; of the object on which the action 
is performed 279 ; with verbs sig- 
nifying to profit, to hurt, etc. 279, 1 ; 
of doing good or evil to any one, etc. 
279, 2 ; to persevere, to wait, etc. 279, 
3 ; to turn hack, flee, etc. 279, R. 3 ; 
to he concealed, to conceal, to swear, 
and q)&(xvsLV, XslneLv 279 A 'i with du, 
XQTi 279, R. 4 ; ^alveiv, nXelv, etc., 
which denote motion, etc. 279, R. 5 ; 
denoting an affection of the mind 
279, 5 ; denoting space, and in an- 
swer to the questions. How long7 
How much ? 279, 6 ; with words ex- 
plaining more fully an object (x«- 
Xog Tot ofifiuTa, akysi x^y xtcpakriv) 



279, 7 ; with verbs governing two 
accusatives, q)dw (pdlav ae, etc. 280, 
1 ; aaXd, xaxoc noico, Xiya as 280, 2 ; 
with verbs of heseeching, teaching, 
dividing, depriving, hiding, clothing 
and unclothing, etc. 280, 3; with 
verbs of appoiniing, choosing, edu- 
cating, etc. 280, 4 ; in the oxW^ 
y.a^ oXov x. fxigog 266, R. 4 ; Ace. 
in adverbial expressions, e. g. ^a- 
itQov xXalsLV, (jLsya %aiQ£iv 278, R. 1 ; 
%(XQLV, dagsdv, tovto, therefore, 278, 
R. 2 ; ToiJiov xov tqotcov, dixTjv, 
ofxoia 278, R. 3 ; rijv xaxlaxriv ; uq- 
Xrjv, etc. ; noXXd, saepe, oXlyov, etc. 
279, R. 8 ; svqog, inpog, raXXa, etc. 
279, R. 10; with the Pass. 281; 
with verbal adjectives in xeog 284, 
R. 7. 

Accusative with the Lif 307 ; instead 
of the Nom. with the Inf. 307, R. 4 ; 
instead of the Gen. or Dat. with the 
Inf 307, R. 2 ; as a subject after 
XiysxaL, doxsi, etc. 307, R. 5 ; with 
the Art. see Inf ; with exclamations 
308, R, 2 ; in the subordinate clauses 
of the oratio ohliqua 345, 6. 

Accusative with tlie Part. 310, 2 ; ab- 
solute 312, 5 ; with wg 312, 6 ; Ace. 
of Part, instead of another Case 
313, 1. 

Active verbs 102. 249. Comp. Trans. ; 
with the meaning to cause to do 249, 
R. 3. 

Acute accent 29, 4. 

Addition of consonants 24. 
i Agreement 240 sq. ; of the Attrib. 



676 



INDEX OF SUBJECTS. 



Adj. 264, 1 ; of the Rel. Pron. in 
Gend. and Numb. 332; in Qase 
332, 6. 
Adjective (and Part) 74 sq. 215 ; Ac- 
cent. 75 ; of three endings 76, 77 ; 
of two endings 78, 79 ; of one end- 
ing 80; used as a Subs. 2(>3, R. ; 
Attributive 264; as Subs, with the 
Gen [rj tioIXi) lijg yrjg instead of to 
Tiokv ji]g yi'jg) 264, R. 5 ; instead of 
the Adv. 264, 3. 
Adjectives Verbal, see Verbal Adjec- 
tives. 
Adjective Substantive Sentence 331. 

Adjective pronoun used as a Subs. 

263, a. 
Adjective sentences 331 ; used in the 
place of other subordinate sen- 
tences 334, 2. 

Adverb 100 ; formation 101 ; com- 
parison 85 ; as expressing an ob- 
jective relation 314 sq. ; as adjec- 
tives 262, d ; as substantives [ol vvv) 
263, c ; in the sense of the const, 
praeguans (ottoi yvig icrufv, etc.) 300, 
R. 7; (o ixsl^sv noXffiog devgo r/^ti 
instead of o ixsi n.) 300, R. 8 ; ad- ■ 
verbs of place attracted 332, R. 7 ; I 
inverse attraction 332, R. 13. 

Adverbial correlatives 94. 

Adverbs expressing an object 314 sq. 

Adverbial sentence 335 sq. ; denoting 
relation of place 336 ; time 337 ; i 
cause 338 ; condition 339 ; conces- j 
sion 340, 7 ; consequence or effect ' 
341 ; way and manner 342 ; quan- j 
tity with oaco, oaov 343. \ 

Adversative coordinate sentences ex- 1 
pressed by ds, cclXd, etc. 322 ; ne- j 
gative adversative coordinate sen- ! 
tences 321, 2. | 

Anacoluthon 347, 5 ; in the Part, con- 
struction 313. 

Anapaestic dimeter acatalectic 372. 

Anapaestic dimeter catalectic 373. 

Anapaestic monometer acatalectic 
371. I 

Anapaestic tetrameter acatalectic 374. 

Anapaestic verses 370. 

Anastrophe 31, IV. 



Anomalous substantives third Dec. 

67 sq. 214; verbs 1.57 sq. 
Answer yts or no 344, 7. 
Aorist 103 ; Aor. Pass, with a 131 ; 
first Aor. without a 154, 7 ; second 
Aor. with a 154,8; second Aor. 
j Act. and Mid. according to anal- 
ogy of verbs in fii 191 sq. ; se- 
cond Aor. Act. with Intrans. mean- 
ing and first Aor. Act. with Trans, 
meaning 141, 4.— -Syntax 256; ite- 
rative meaning 256, 4, (b) ; in com- 
parisons 256, 4, (c); instead of the 
Pres. 256, 4, (d); Aor. with rl ov 
256, 4, (e) ; instead of the Fut. 256, 
4,(f); Aor. of the Subj., Opt., Imp., 
Inf. and Part., with the sense of the 
Pres. 257. 
Aorist, first and second Mid. always 
reflexive 251, 3 ; Aor. Subj. instead 
of the Fut. Perf. as used in Lat. 
255, R. 9. 
Aphaeresis 14, 5. 
Apodosis 339, 1. ".■■■V— i. 
Apocope 16, 9. 207, 7. 
Apostrophe 13, R. 1. 
Apposition 266; in Gen. with Poss. 
Pron. {e/uog tov a&Xlov ijlog] 266, 2 ; 
Distrib.or Partitive apposition 266,3; 
of relative sentences attracted 332, 
R. 15. 
Arsis and Thesis 350. 
Article 91; 244 sq. ; demonstrative 
and relative 247; with common 
nouns 244, 2 — 6; with abstracts, 
nouns denoting material, proper 
Doims 244, 7 ; with the Adjective 
and Part, used as substantives 244, 
8, 9 ; with pronouns and numerals 
246 ; (tot t/]c no/.sojg, ol neQc rcva, 
ol vvv av&Qco7TOi) 244, 10. 263 ; with 
eveiy word or part of speech 244, 
11 ; position 245 ; article omitted 
with common nouns 244, R. 3 ; with 
abstracts 244, R. 4 ; with participles 
244, R. 8 ; with demonsti-ative pro- 
nouns 246, R. 1. 
Article with the subject and predi- 
cate 244, R. 1. 
Article in apposition 244, R. 6. 



INDEX OF SUBJECTS. 



577 



Article repented 245, 2. 

Article in place of the Poss. pro- 
noun (o 7jrar>/'^ instead of kfiog n.) 
244, 4. 

Articulation of sounds 3. 

Asper, see Spiritus. 

Aspirate before another aspirate 
changed to a smooth 17, 4 ; 21. 

Aspirates 5, (a). 

Asyndeton 325. 

Atonies 32. 

Attic second Dec. 48 ; Attic Redup. 
see Redup. 

Attraction of Gend. 240, 3 ; Numb. 
241, 6 ; witii Prep, and Adv. 300, 
4, comp. 300, 3 ; with the Inf. 3^, 
4. 308, 2 ; with wars, 341, 3 ; witli 
tlie Part. 310, 3 ; of the relative 
332, 6 ; of oiog, oiTog, r,).iy.og, 332, 7; 
inverted attraction 332, R. 12, 
with ol'dug ogrig oi' ; with adverbs 
of place 3:32, R. ]3; attraction of 
the relative in position 332, 8 ; at- 
traction of the relative in a clause 
subordinate to the adjective clause 
332, 9 ; attraction of the Case in 
comparative sentences introduced 
bv OK, wansQ, wars 342, R. 3., comp. 
344, R. 7. and 324, R. 2. 

Attribute 239, 2. 

Attributive relation of sentences 262, 
sq. 

Augment, 108, 3; 119 sq. and 219; 
in compounds 215, sq. 

Blending of two or more interroga- 
tive sentences into one [rig ilvog 
al'iiog i/evtjo) 344, R. 7. 

Brachylog}- 34G. 

Caesura 351. 

Cardinals 96, sq. 

Cases 41 ; Synt. 268, sq. ; Formation, 
p. 57, note ; Case Absolute, Gen. I 
Abs. 3i<;, 3 ; Ace. Abs. 312, 5. | 

Characteristic of the verb 108, 5 ; 
tense 110 ; pure and impure 142, 
2 ; of verbs in fxi 170. ' j 

Circumflex accent 29, 4. | 

Classes of verbs 102. 248. 



Climax in sentences by x«/, ov (jtvov, 
uXku xni, etc. 321, 3. 

Coni|)arisoii of adjectives 81 sq. 216 ; 
substantives 84, R. 4. 216, R. 2 ; 
adverbs 85. 

Conq)arative degree 239 ; strength- 
ening and more definite statement 
239 ; use of i] and the Gen. with 
the comparative 323, 2 sq. ; with- 
out a second member of the com- 
parison 323, R. 7. ; apparently used 
instead of the positive 323, R. 7. 

Comparative i'] and the compar. Gen. 
323 sq. ; compendious compari- 
son 32:3, R. 6. 

Comparative subordinate clauses 342, 
343. 

Compound words 236 sq. 

Concessive sentences 340, 7. 

Concretes 39. 

Conditiojial sentences, see il in the 
Greek Index. 

Conjugation 107 sq. ; in o* 115 sq. ; 
in fiL 168 sq. 

Conjunctions 199. 

Conjunctions SW. 

Consonants 3 ; division 5 ; moveable 
at the end of a word 15 ; changes 
17 sq. ; metathesis 22; doubling 
23; strengthening of and addition 
24 ; expulsion 25, 3 ; omission 25 ; 
final consonant of a pure Greek 
word 25, 5 ; interchange of con- 
sonants in the dialects 202 — 204 ; 
changes of in the dialects, 208. 

Coordinate relation of attributive ad- 
jectives 264, 2. 

Coordinate sentences 319 sq. ; cop- 
ulat. coord, sentences, (t£, y.ui)321, 
1; negative {o'lrs, olds) 321, 2; 
[ov fjovov — u/.Xu y.ui, etc.) 321, 3. 
adversative coordinate sentences, 
{/jiy — di) 322,1—5; («;.A«) 322, 
6; disjunctive (?/' — i] etc.) 323; 
reason {'/n<j) 324,2; consequence 
(mo«, Tolrvr) 324, 3. 

Copula Hvuc 238, R. 8. 

Copulative coordinate sentences 321. 

Coronis 10, R. 1. 

Correlative pronouns and adverbs, 94. 



578 



INDEX OF SUBJECTS. 



Crasis 10 sq. 206 ; in relation to the 
accent 31, II. 



1, (1); of the means or instniment 
with xQrjuOui. and ro/i/^ttv 285, 1, 
(2) ; way and manner, material, 
6tandard,rule and measure 285,1,(3). 
Dative with the Inf. 307. 



Dative 282 sq. 

Dative Local [where'?) 28?}, 1 ; («) av- 

Tolg Tolg 'irtnoig. (/?) (Tigaiot, aio- \ Dative witli tin; Part. 310, 2. 

Xoj, nh'jd^ei, raval, etc. 28^3,2; of i Dative of participle instead of another 

time {when ?) tqItj] 'fif^^Qct ', circum- 1 Case, 313, 1. 

stances under wliich anything hap- Declension of the substantive 41 ; 



pens, 283, 3. 
Dative as a personal object [where ?) lo- 
cal aim or object with verbs of mo- 
tion [nviyjLV /slQag ovquvo)) 284, 
R. 1 ; Dat. of union 284, 3; with 
verbs expressing community, com- 
munication, 284, 3, (1); with verbs 
of contending, approaching, yield- 
ing, witli the adjectives and ad- 
verbs, 7iXr}(Tiog, havclog, i'/yvg, 
etc. 284, 3, (2) ; with verbs of en- 
treating, counselling, inciting, fol- 
lowing, serving, obeying, accom- 
panying, with the adjectives and 



first Dec. 42 — 44; quantity and 
accent 45 ; dialects 211 ; second 
Dec. 46 — 48 ; accent 49 ; gender 
50 ; dialects 212 ; thu-d Dec. 51— 
69 ; quantity 64 ; accent 65 ; gen- 
der 66 ; dialects 213 ; anomalous 
nouns 67 sq. 214 ; defective nouns 
69. 214, R. 2. 
Declension of adjectives and partici- 
ples 79 sq., see adjectives. 
Declension of pronouns 87 sq. 
Declension of numerals 99, 5. 
Demonstrative pronouns, see pro- 
nouns. 

adverbs, axoXov&og, diadoxog, k^ilg, Denominative verbs 232. 

etc. 284, 3, (3) ; w ith expressions ! Deponents 102, 3 ; Passive Deponents 

of likeness and similarity and the : 197, Syn. 252. 

opposite 284, 3, (4) ; with expres- i Derivation of words 232 sq., of tenses 

sions denoting what is becoming, \ 128. 

suitable, pleasmg 284, 3, (5); ofj Derivatives 231, 2, 4, (b). 

agreeing with, blaming, reproach- Desiderative verbs 232, Rem. 3. 

iug, being angry with, eu\Ting, | Diaeresis 4, R, 4, in the dialects 205, 6. 

284, 3, (6) ; of helping, averting Dialects page 1 ; 202 sq. 

and benefiting, 284, 3, (7) ; with aU | Diastole 37. 

verbs and adjectives wiien the ac- ; Digamma 5, 2, (a) ; 25, 2; 200. 

tion takes place for the honor, Dimeter 359. 

profit, loss, etc. of a person, (Da- I Diminutives 233, 2, (c). 

tivus commodi et incommodi) 284, Diphthongs 4, 3. 

3, R. 4 ; with verbs of observing, Distributive coordinate sentences 323. 

finding, meeting with something Distributive apposition 266, 3. 

in a person 284, 3, (8); Dat. of j Division of syllables 36. 

possession with hvul and /i/vsa- i Double consonants 5, 4. 

&aL 284, 3, (9) ; when an action j Doubling of consonants 208, 4.' 

takes place in respect to a person ; Dual number 41 ; 106 ; with a PI. 



284, 3, (10); with the Pass. 284, 3, 
(11); with verbal adjectives in x6g 
and Tsog mstead of vno with the 
Gen. 284, 3, (12). 
Dative of the thing 285 ; of the | 

ground or reason with verbs de- ! EUsion 13 sq. 206, 5 ; ehsion in re- 
noting a disposition of mind 285, , spect to the accent 31, III. 



verb 241, 5 : exchanged for the PI. 
241, R. 8 ; Dual verb with a PI. 
Sub. 241, R. 9 ; D^al of the Fem. 
with the Masc. 241, R. 10, [by 



INDEX OF SUBJECTS. 



579 



Ellipsis 346, 1; of the subject and 
especially of the Subs. 238, R. 3 ; 
of the copula elvat 2:38. R. 8 and 
9 ; of the Subs, to which the at- 
tribute belongs 263 ; of av 260, R. 
3. 6, 7 ; of the Protasis and Apo- 
dosis 340. 

Emphasis in sentences 321, 3. 

Enclitics 33 sq. ; accented 35. 

Epicenes 40, R, 2. 

Essential words 238, 1. 38, 4. 

Etymology 1. 

Euphonic Prothesis 16. 

Expulsion of consonants 25. 

Factitive verbs 232, R. 1 and (c). 

Feminine PI. with verb in Sing. 241 , 
R. 6 ; with the neuter {al [isra^o- 
lal XimrjQov) 24], 2; wdth a Neut 
(to yvvalxtov itm xaXri) 241, 2, sq. ; 
Fern. Dual with the Masc. (tovtw 
Tof Ts/va) 241, Rem. 10. 

Final sentences 330. 

Frequentative verbs 232. 

Formal words 238, 1. 38, 4. 

Formation of words 231 sq. 

Future tense 103 ; Attic 117 ; Doric j 
in (Tovfiat 154, 3 ; without a 154, ! 
4 ; in ovfim with mute verbs 154, • 
5; Mid. instead of Act {ay.ovca, 
anovaofxaL instead of axowco) 154, | 
1, and 198 ; Synt. 255, 3, 4 ; with 
the Inf after verbs of thinking, | 
hoping, etc. 257, R. 2. i 

Future Perf. Act. 154, 6 ; Synt 255, ' 
5 ; instead of the simple Fut. 255, 
R, 8 ; Fut Perf expressed in Lat \ 
as in Greek 255, R. 9. 1 

Gender of the substantive 40 ; first ' 
Dec. 42 ; second Dec. 50 ; third : 
Dec. 66. 

Gender of the adjective, etc. in the 
const xorra (rvvsaiv 241 ; in gene- ' 
ral statements 241, 2 ; with several [ 
subjects 242 ; of the Superl. with 
Part Gen. 241, 7 ; of the relative \ 
pronoun 332. I 

Genitive, attributive 965 ; used «llip- ' 
ticaUy 263, (b). i 



Genitive in the objective relation 270. 

Genitive, separative, with verbs of 
separating, disjoining, loosing, de- 
sisting, freeing, missing, depriving 
271 , 2, 3 ; with verbs of beginning 
271, 4. 

Genitive of the origin and author, 
with verbs of arising, originating, 
producing 273, 1. 

Genitive, possessive, (a) with sivaif 
yiyvBa&ai, (/S) Idiog ohcsiog, etc. 273, 
2. 

Genitive, qualitative 273, 2, (c). 

Genitive, partitive, with elvai and 
yiyvsaS^ai ; Tt.-&ivai,7ioiH(T&ui,riysi- 
<T&aL 273, 3, (a) ; in attributive re- 
lation W'ith substantives, substfui- 
tive adjectives, substantive pro- 
nouns, numerals and adverbs 273, 
R. 4 ; with words which express 
the idea of participation, commu- 
nicating ; with verbs w hich express 
the idea of being connected, hang- 
ing together ; of acquiring and at- 
taining; of physical and intellec- 
tual contact, of lading hold of; of 
hasty motion, striving after an ob- 
ject 273, 3, R. 7, (b); with verbs of 
entreating and conjuring 273, R. 6 ; 
with the adverbs si'&v, l^v, fis/Qt ; 
with verbs of meeting and ap- 
proaching 273, 3, R. 9 ; Part Gen. 
in poetry 273, R. 7. 

Genitive of place 273, 4, (a). 

Genitive of time 273, 4, (b). 

Genitive of material 273, 5; with 
verbs of making, forming 273, 5, 
(a) ; of fulness and want (b) ; of 
eating, drinking and enjoying one's 
self, having the enjo}Tnent of an- 
other thing intellectually, etc. (c) ; 
of smelling (d) ; of sensation and 
perception; of remembering and 
forgetting (e) ; of seeing, hearmg, 
experiencing, learning, consider- 
ing, knowing, judging, admiring 
(f); in expressions of being ac- 
quamted with, ignorant of, of be- 
ing skilled and unskilled in, of 
making trial of, with verbal adje«- 



580 



INDEX OF SUBJECTS. 



lives in tx6g, etc. expressing the \ 
idea of dexterity (g). I 

Genitive of cause 274 ; wiili verl)s 
denoting a desire, longing for (a) ; 
care, concern for (b) ; pain, grief, 
pity, with adjectives having similar 

. meaning, particularly in exclama- 
tions, with interjections (c); with 
verbs expressing anger, indignation, 
envy, admiration, praise and blame 
(d),(e),(f ); with verbs which express 
requital, revenge, accusing and con- 
demning 274, 2 ; Tou with the Inf. j 
274, 3, (a) ; with the adverbs si, 
xaAaic, fiSTQioig, wc, nag, un(ng, ov- 
Tw? etc., with s/BLV, ^'jxslv, sivui 274, 
3, (b). 

Genitive with terbs of ruling, with 
the adjectives iyy.QaTi]g, ax^«T7)c, 
with verbs expressing preeminence, 
excellingjinferiority, subjection 275, i 
1. 

Genitive comparative 275, 2 ; use of 
the Gen. and ?;' with the compar- 
ative 3-23, 2 sq. 

Genitive of price 275, 3. 

Genitive with substantives and ad- 
jectives 275, R. 5. 

Genitive double, governed by one 
substantive 275, R. 6. 

Genitive with the Inf 307. 

Genitive with the Part. 310, 2. 

Genitive absolute 312,3; when the 
subject is the same as that of the 
predicate 313, 2; with dc after el- 
dsvai, roHv, etc. 312, R. 12. 

Gentile nouns 233, 2, (a). 

Grave accent 29 ; instead of the 
acute 31. 

Heteroclites 59, R. 2 ; 67, (b) ; 71. 

Heterogeneous substauiives 70, (b). 

Hexameter verse 355. 

Hiatus 8 ; 206, 7. 

Historical tenses 103, 2 ; 254, 3. 

Hypodiastole 37. 

Hypothetical sentences, see si. 

Iambic dimeter 367. 
Iambic monoineter 366. 



Iambic trimeter acatalectie 368. 

Iambic tetrameter catalectic 369. 

Iambic verse 365. 

Imitative verl)s 232, 1, (a). 

Imperative 104, III ; Synt. 258, 1, (c) ; 
use ot the Imp. 259, 4 ; third Pers. 
Sing. Perf. Mid. or Pass. 25.5, R. 6. 

Imperfect tense 103; analogous to 
verbs in i^l 196. Synt. 256, 2 — 4. 

Impersonal construction, see personal 
construction. 

Impersonal verbs 238, R. 4. 

Inclination, see Enclitic. 

Indeclinable nouns 73. 

Indicative 104, 1 ; Synt. 258, 1, (a) ; 
Fut. with av 260,^2, (1); Impf., 
Plup. and Aor. with uv 260, 2, (2) ; 
difference between the Impf, Aor. 
and Plup. 256; of the Fut. instead 
of the Imp. 255, 4 ; with ov, e. g. ov 
TiavfTT] Xs'/(i)v ib. ; Ind. of the Hist. 
tenses with words expressing a 
wish 259, R. 6 ; Ind. in subordinate 
sentences, see the conjunctions ; 
Ind. in orat ohliq. 344, 6. 

Indirect form of discourse, see oblique 
form. 

Infinitive 105, (a) ; S>Tit. of the Pres. 
and Aor. Inf. 257, 1, (c); Pres. and 
Fut. Aor, after verbs of thirtking, 
etc. 257, R. 2 ; with av 260, 2, (5). 

Infinitive 305 ; without the Art. 306 ; 
after verbs denoting an act of the 
will, fear, aversion, etc. 306, 1. (a) ; 
the action or expression of some 
power of the mind 306, 1, (b); af- 
ter verbs which denote abilit}', 
cause, power, capacity 306, 1, (c); 
with adjectives and substantives, 
with shai, Tiscpv/Jvai and ylyvs- 
a-&tti, with substantives after avfj,- 
^aivsi. ds7, /gi] and the like, after 
substantives, adjectives, demonstra- 
tive pronouns, after verbs of giving, 
sending, etc. 306, 1, (d). 

Infinitive, or Ace. with Inf. different 
from Part. 311 ; Inf., or Ace. with 
Inf., different fi-om or/, wg, that 329, 
. R. 5 ; in forms expressing com- 
mand or wish 306, R. 11 ; in forms 



INDEX OF SUBJECTS. 



581 



expressing indignation 306, R. 11, j Metathesis of the liquids 22. 208, 3; 
(o) ; with cilydQ,sl&i 30(», R. 11, (d). ' of tlie aspirates 21,3; verb 15ti. 
Intinitive with Noiii., Gen., Dat. and Metonymy 2.*38, R. 1. 

Ace. 307. Middle Ibrni 102 ; Synt. 248, (b); with 



Intinitive with the Art. instead of the 
Inf. without the Art. 308, R. 1 ; 
in Noni., Gen., Dat and Ace. 308, 
2 ; in exclamations and interroga- 
tions 308, R. 2 ; as an 'adverbial 
expression (to vvv dvai, and the 
like) 308, R. 3. 
Infinitive Act. instead of the Pass. 

30(3, R. 10. 
Inflection 38. 
Inflection-endings of the verb 109 sq. 

116 ; of verbs in /ui 171, 172. 
Intensive verbs 232, R. 2. 
Interchange of vowels 201 ; conso- 
nants 202 — 204. 
Interpunction-marks 37. 
Interrogative pronouns, see Pronouns. 
Interrogative sentences 344 ; modes 
ill 344, 6 ; connection with the rel- 
ative sentence 344, R. 3 : change of 
a subordinate sentence into a di- 
rect inten'ogative sentence {orav xl 
7rot7j(rwo-<) 344, R. 6 ; blending of 
two or more interrogative sen- 
tences into one {xlg xlvog ahiog Nominal question 344, 2. 
itni) 344, R. 7. Nominative with the change of the 

Intransitive verbs 248, (a) f/5); as Act. construction of the verb w^ith 
Trans, wath the Ace. 249, R. 2 ; the Gen. or Dat. into the Pass., e. g. 
instead of the Pass. 249, 3 ; in the : niaTsvofzaL 251, 4. 
Pass. 251, 4, and Rem. 6. I Nominative Case 269 ; with ovo/^d 



reflex, sense 250; with tiie niean- 
ing to came to do 250, R. 2 ; u heq 
an action is performed to the \noi\t 
or loss of the subject 250, R. 3; 
with a reflex. Pron. 250, R. 3 ; with 
reference to a subjective meaning, 
figuratively 250, R. 4 ; with a pass, 
sense 251. 

Modes 104 ; Synt. 258 sq. 

Mode-vowels 111 ; of verbs in (ut, 171 ; 
in the Dialects 220. 

Motion 15. 

Moveable final consonants 15. 

Multiplicatives 96, 1, (c). 

Negatives, ov, fuij 318 ; accumulation 
of negatives 318, 6 ; apparent Pleo- 
nasm of 318, 6— 9. 

Neuter of names of persons with 
31asc. or Fem. verb 241 ; with Masc. 
or Fem. 241, 2; PI. instead of the 
Sing, w ith verb, adjectives 241, 3 ; 
PI. of pronouns 243, 4 ; PI. with 
Siuff. verb 241, 4. 



Interrogative sentence with the Art 

344, R. 3. 
Inversion 348, 5. 
Iota subscript 4, R. 2. 
Iterative form in axov 221. 

Lengthening of the vowels 16, 3. 207. 

Lenis, Spiritus 6. 

Limitation of sentences 322, 1 — 5. 

Litotes 239, R. 3. 

Local substantives 2a3, 2, (d). 

Masculine PI. with Sing, verb 241, 
R. 6 ; with the Neut (oi noX/.ol 
dsivov) 241, 2 ; Masc. with a Neut 
{uEtodyuov sffTi x«Ao?)241, 1 ; Masc. : 
Pl.withFem.241,R.ll. j 

Metaplasm 67, (c). 72, 214, R. 1. I 

75 



iaxl fxoL, oroixa f'/w, with verbs of 
naming 269, R. 3 ; Nom. of an ab- 
stract instead of a Lat Dat. (mihi 
est hofiori) 269, R. 2; Nom. instead 
of the Voc. 269, 2 ; in oxr,}ia y.a&' 
okov a. fiigog 266, 3, R. 4. 

Nominative with the Inf 307 ; instead 
of the Ace. with the Inf. 307, 4. 

Nominative with a Part 310, 3; in- 
stead of another Case 313 ; with- 
out a finite verb 313, R. 1. 

Numerals 96 scj. 218. 

Number 41. 106 ; Synt 243 ; in tlie 
const y.axa avvscriv 241 ; with verb, 
adjectives in to'c, xioq 241, 3 ; num- 
ber of adjectives with several sub- 
jects 242, I ; number of verb with 
several subjects 242, 2 ; with seve- 



582 



INDEX OF SUBJECTS. 



ral independent subjects 242, R. 4 ; 
number ol'the Rel. Proii. :.i:32. 

Object in a sentence 239, 2. 

01)jective relation of sentences 267 sq. 

Oblique discourse 345 sq. 

Omission of consonaiits 25. 

0])tative mode 104, 11. see tbe Subj. 
Synt. nature of the 0[)t. 258, 1, (b). 
259; with av 2()0, 3, (4); without 
av 2()0, R. 2, 3, 6 ; in exhortations 
259, R. 1; Opt. Delib. 259, 2; to 
express frequent repetition 332, 4 ; 
to express what is presupposed, 
uncertain, possible 259, 3, (a); de- 
sire 259, 3, (b) ; instead of the Imp. 
259, 3, (c) ; wish, inclination 259, 
3, (d) ; in direct questions 259, 3, 
(e); Opt. without av instead of with 
av 260, R. 7 ; Opt. in subordinate 
clauses, see the conjunctions; in 
oratio obliqua 345, 4. 

Oratio obliqua 345. 

Ordinals 96 sq. 

Participle 74 sq. 105, (b); Synt. 309 sq. 
Participle as the completion of the 
verbal idea 310 ; Nom., Gen., Dat., 
Ace. of the Part. 310, 2 ; after ver- 
ba sentiendi 310, 4, (a); verba de- 
clarandi 310, 4, (b) ; verbs denoting 
an affection of the mind 310, 4, (c) ; 
enjoying one's self, etc. 310, 4, (d); 
overseeing, permitting, bearing 310, 
4, (e); beginning and ceasing 310, 
4, (f); to be fortunate, lo excel, to 
be inferior, to do w-ell or ill 310, 4, 
(g); after neigMf^ai, naQaay.na'^o- 
^oci, etc. 310, 4, (li) ; after the phrases 
it is Jit, useful, etc. 310, 4, (i) ; after 
l/fiv, to be in a condition, or state, 
e. g. £/w y.Ti](yajusrog 310, 4, (k) ; 
with Tvyxaro), Xar&dfcji}, dimflo), 
didyo}, qj&dvoj, o\'xo^ai 310, 4, (1). 

Participle different from Inf. after 
several classes of verbs 311. 

Participle as the expression of ad- 
verbial subordinate relations 312. 

Participle with wg 312, 6 ; with aicTS, 
MqnfQ, «T£. o\a, olov 312, 6, R. 13. 

Participle with dvni, instead of a sim- 
ple verb 238, R. 7. 



Participle witli av 260, 4, (5). 

Participle as substantive 2(>3. 

Paiticipials 105; see Inf. and Part. 

Participial construction 309.; anaco- 
luthon 313. 

Particles 38, R. 

Particles exjnessing aim, design 330. 

Parts of J^ieech :38. 

Passive verb 102; Synt. 248, (c). 251. 

Patronymics 2:5:3, 2, (b). 

Pentameter verse :35(). 

Perfect tense 103; with a 131; tte- 
nvafxaL, etc. 223, 14 ; independent 
Bub. and Oi)t. Perf. or Plu[). Mid. 
or Pass. 154, 9; Perf. and Plup. 
analogous to verbs in ^i 193 — 195 ; 
second Perf. with Intrans. meaning 
141,4. 249,2. Synt. 255,2; in the 
third Pers. Sing. Imp. Mid. or Pass. 
255, R. 6 ; with the signif. of the 
Pres. 255, R. 5; instead of the Fut. 
255, R. 7. 

Person of the verb 106; with several 
subjects 242; in adjective sentences 
332, 2. 

Persons change in the oiat. obliq. 
345, R. 6. 242. 

Personal construction, instead of the 
Impers. with Inf. 307, R. 6 and 7 ; 
with Part. 310, R. 3 ; with ort, w? 
329, R. 7. 

Personal ending 111. 113 ; of verbs 

in (ii 172 ; Dialects 220. 
Personal pronouns 87 — 90. 
Plural number 41 ; with the substan- 
tive in the Gen. 241, R. 2; PI. of 
sub. with Dual of the verb 241, R. 

j 9; PI. of sub. in proper names, 

1 names of materials, and abstracts 

I 243, 3 ; change to the Sing. 241, R. 

\ 12; in an address to one person 
241, R. 13 ; the first Pers. PI. instead 
of the Sing. 241, R. 12; Neut. PI. 
in verbal adjectives instead of the 
Sing. 241,3; PI. of verbs with col- 
lective nouns in the Sing. 241, 1 : 
with substantives in the Dual 241,5 ; 
ruds^iy.eira used of one idea 24],R.3; 
PI. changed to the Dual 241, R. 8. 
Pluralia tantum 73, 2. 
Pluperfect 103. Comp. Perf. Synt. 
256,2. 



INDEX OF SUBJECTS. 



583 



Position of words 348. 

Position ot'uv 2()1 ; article o, i), to 245 ; 
proj)ositioiis 300, (J; pronouns, see 
the iniiivicluyl pronouns. Adverbs 
anil particles, see the individual 
ailverhs and particles ; of t^ 321, 
R. 3 ; fiiv and di 322, R. 2. 

Positive degree, see Con)parative. 

Possessive pronouns I^^O. 

Predicate 238, 2. 

Predicative relation of sentences 238. 

Pregnant construction, 303. 

Prepositions 199, Synt. 28G sq. ; as 
adverbs of place 300 ; Tmesis 300, 
R. 4 ; in const. Praeg. txIjitslv iv 
yovvaav) 300, 4 ; witli the Ai't., at- 
tracted 300, 4 ; repeated and omitted 
300, 5; position 300, 6. 

Present tense 103; Pres. and Inipf. 
analogous to verbs in ^l 196 ; Synt. 
255, 1 ; Hist. Pres. 255, 1 ; instead 
of. the Perf. 255, R. 1 ; instead of 
the Fut. 255, R. 3. 

Primitives 231, 2. 

Proclitics 32. 

Pronouns 86. 217 ; Declension 87 sq. ; 
Synt. 301, 1,2; 

Pronoun, correlative 94 ; demonstra- 
tive 302, 1, 2; aliSq 302, 4 ; pros- 
pective and retrospective 304 ; omit- 
ted before a relative 331, R. 3. 

Pronoun indefinite jlq xl 303, 4 ; po- 
sition 302, R. 5. 

Pronoun interrogative, see Inter, sen- 
tences ; with Art. prefixed 344, R. 3. 

Pronoun personal 302; third Pers. 
prospective 304 ; retrospective 304, 
3. 

Pronoun reflexive 302, 2 ; third Pers. 
instead of the first and second 302, 
8 ; instead of the reciprocal 302, R. 7. 

Proportionals 96, 1, (e). 

Protasis a39. 

Prothesis Euphonic 16, 10. 207, 8. 

Punctuation-marks 37. 

Quantity 27 sq. 209 ; first Dec. 45, (a) ; 
third Dec. 64. 

Redundant nouns 70. 
Reduplication 108, 4. 123, 219 ; in sec. 
Aor. 219, 7 ; Att. in Perf. and Plup. 



194; second Aor. 124, R. 2; in com- 
pound words 125 sq.; as strengthen- 
ing of the stem 163. 

Reflexive verbs 102; Synt. 248, (b). 

Reflexive pronouns 88. 

Relation of the Attrib. Adj. 264, 2. 

Relative construction changed to the 
demonstrative 334, 1. 

Relative pronoun 92; Synt. 331 sq. ; 
instead of the demons. 331, R. I ; 
agreement of gender and number 
332; case (attraction) 332, 6; at- 
traction with o'loq, 0(T05, i]Xly.oq 332, 
7; inverse attraction 332, R, 11 
with ovdtlg ogrig ov 332, R. 12 
with adverbs of place 332, R. 13 
attraction in position 332, 8 ; rela- 
tive pronoun of an intermediate 
clause attracted 332,9 ; construction 
of the relative pronoun 333 ; rel. 
pron. changed to a demons, or pers. 
334, 1 ; rel. pron. instead of a de- 
monstrative 334, 3. 

Relative sentence, see adjective sen- 
tence. 

Reciprocal pronoun 89. 

Reciprocal verb 248, R. 1. 

Resolution of conti'act verbs 222. 

Restriction of sentences 322, 1 — 5. 

Rhvthin 349. 

Roots 231, 2. 

Scheme, see (Txijfia in Greek Index. 

Sentences 238, 1. 

Sentences denoting the effect or re- 
sult with aQa, ovv, Tolvvv^ etc. 324,3. 

Shortening of the vowels 16, 4. 207, 4. 

Singular of the verb with Masc. or 
PI. 241, R. 6 ; with Neut. PI. 241, 
4 ; with several common noims in 
PI. 242, R. 3. 

Singular of substantives 243, 1 ; 
changed to the PI. 241, R. 12 ; 
Sing. Imp. e. g. sini in an address 
to several 241, R. 13. 

Sounds of the dialects 200. 

Spiritus Len. and Asp. 6. 

Stem of the verb 108, 1 ; pure and 
imp. 138; strengthening the con- 
sonant and prolonging the stem- 
vowel 139. 

Stem-words 231, 4, (a). 



584 



INDKX OF SUBJECTS. 



Strengthening of the vo\vip1s Ifi, 1 ; 
coMsoiiants 24; stem of im[)ure 
verbs i:i«). 

Subject 23B, 2 ; change of the active 
construct, into tiie Pass., e. g. ni- 
arsvojiai from nuntvoj xivl 251, 4 ; 
eUii)sis of 2;J8, R. a 
Subjunctive Mode 104, II. Pei-f. and 
Pip. Mid. or Pass, with an inde- 
pendent form 154, 9; Subj. and 
Opt. Act. and Mid. of verbs in V}il 
w'ith independent form 176, 5. 
Synt. 258, 1, (b). 259; Subj. Aor. 
instead of Fut. Perf of Latin 255, 
R. 9. 

Subjunctive with av 260, 2, (3) ; (with 
and without av) instead of the 
Fut. Tnd. 259, R. 4 ; (a); deliberative 
259, 1, (a).260, 2, 3, (b); Subj. to den. 
an indefinite fi'equency 333, 3 ; in 
comparisons 333, R. 2 ; with p] 
instead of the Imp. 259, 5 ; in sub- 
ordinate clauses, see the individual 
conjunctions ; in Or. obliq. 345, 5. 

Subordinate sentences 326 sq. ; clas- 
ses 326, 3 ; characteristics 326, R. 
4 ; subordinate sentences changed 
into direct interrogative sentences 
344, R. 6. 

Substantive 39 sq. ; Gen. 40 ; Numb., 
Case and Dec. 41, Dec. I. 42 sq. ; 
Dec. n. 46 sq. ; Dec. UI. 51 sq. 

Substantive 39 sq. ; number 242. 

Substantive instead of adjective 264, 
R. 3. 

Substantive abstract, instead of con- 
crete 238, R. 1. 

Substantive sentences expressing de- 
sign, aim, with to?, oTiwg^ ha, etc. 
330. 

Substantive sentences with 0T^, wg, 
that 329. 

Superlative 81 sq. Synt. 239 ; strength- 
ening and more exact definition, 
239; Gend. with the Part. Gen. 
241, 7. 

Synizesis 12. 206, 4. 

Syncope 16, 8. 207, 6 ; in substan- 
tives 55, 2 ; in verbs 155. . 

Syntax 238 sq. 

Tenses of the verb 103 ; of the sub- 



ordinate modes 257 ; derivation 
128; formation of the secondary 
tenses, use of the same in connec- 
tion with the i)runary 141 ; Synt, 
254. 

Tenses primary and Sec. 103, R. 141. 

Tenses in subordinate clauses 327. 

Tense-formation of verbs in w 127 ; 
pure verbs 129; mute 142 sq. ; 
liquid 149 ; verbs in [xl 173. 

Tense-characteristic, see character- 
istic. 

Tense-endings 110. 

Tense-stem 110, 2. 

Theme of the verb 138, 3. 

Thesis and Arsis 350. 

Tmesis of Prepositions 300, R. 4. 

Transitive verbs 248, (a) (a); with In- 
trans. or Reflex, signif. [tqstio) in- 
stead of TQsnofiai) 249, 1, 2 ; with 
the sense to cause to do 249, R. 3. 

Transition from direct discourse to 
indirect and inverted 345, R. 6. 

Transposition of the attributive ad- 
jective and Subs, (ot /grjajol twv 
av&QoifiMV instead of ol xQWT^oI 
av&QOJTtoL) 264, R. 5. 

Trochaic verse 361. 

Trochaic monometer 362. 

Trochaic dimeter 363. 

Trochaic tetrameter catalectic 364. 

Variation of the vowels 16, 6 ; of the 
stem of impure verbs 140 ; of a in- 
to 231, 6. 

Verb 102 sq. 219 sq. ; division of 
verbs in w according to the char- 
acteristic 127 ; barytones 127 R. ; 
pm-e verbs (and contract) 129 — 137; 
Perispomena 127 R ; impure 127. 
138—141; mute 127. 142—148; 
liquid 127. 149 — 153; anomalous 
in b) 157 sq. ; in fiL 168 sq. ; in w 
which in certain tenses are analo- 
gous to verbs in (it, second Aor. 
Act. and Mid. 191 sq. ; Perf. and 
Plup. 193—195 ; Pres. and Impf. 
196 ; verbs Denom., Frequent, 
Imitat., Litens., Fact., Desid. 232. 

Verb Act. Trans., Reflex., Recip., 
Pass., Inti-ans., Mid. 248—251. 

Verb Jlnitum and infinitum 105, R. 



GREEK INDEX. 



5a5 



Verbal adjecrives in to? and riog'^i. 

1, (i); PI. instead of Sing. 241, 3; 

Construction *284, 3, {V2). 
Verb characteristic 108, 5. 
Versification 349. 
Vowels 4 ; change 8 — 16 ; in the 

dialects 20.5 — 207 ; change of con- 



sonants 17 sq. 208; interchange 
201. 

Weakening of vowels KJ. 
Words 238, 1. 

Zeuirina 346, 3. 



II. GllEEK INDEX. 



Abbreviatio-ns. Adv. adrerb ; adj. adjective; Comp. compare; conip. rom- 
pared; c. a. icith the accusative; c. d. with the dative; c. g. icith the genitive ; c. 
mf. tcith the ivfinitive ; c. part. 7Cii/< the participle ; coU. collective ; Dec. declen- 
sion ; dec. declined ; euph. euphojiic ; ms. instead of ; mi. intensive ; intr. i7itrans- 
itivc; pers. persojial ; prep, preposition; pr'w. jjrivativc ; K. remark ; imns. trans- 
itive. 



A pure 43, 1, (a) ; « priv., 

coll., int. 236, R. 3, (b) ; 

a euph. 16, 10. 
ayaS^og comp. 84, 1. 
ayyaXXea&ai c. dat. 285, 

^1,(1); c.pai-t.310,4,(c). 
uyavaxxHv c d. 285, 1, 

(1); c. pait. 310, 4, (c). 
ayanav c. a. and d. 274, 

R. 1; c. d. 285, 1,(1); 

c. part. 310, 4, (c). 
ayaa&ai c. gen. and ace. 

273, 5, (f ) and xtva ti- 

vog, 274, 1, and R. 2. 
a/yiXksiv c. Inf. and part 
^311, 10. 
ayyiXXETai pers. ms. c. a. 

and inf. 307, R. 6. 
uys referring to several 

persons 241, R. 13. 
ctyvoHv c. part. 310, 4, (a). 
ayogd^sLV c. g. 275, 3. 
ayvuvg dec. 57, R. 2. 
ay/i c. g. 273, R. 9. 
iiyav, with, 312, R. 10. 
ayiavi^sa&ai c. d. 284, 3, 

(2). 
adai'ig c. g. 273, 5, (g). 
adeX<f6g c. g. 273, 3, (b). 
adtxeiv c. a. 279, 1 ; c. 



two ace. 280, 2 ; c. part. 
310, 4, (g). 

arjdiov dec. 55, R. 2. 

'A&6b)g dec. 212, 7. 

al see si ; at yag c. inf. 
^ 306, R. 11, (d). 
; aldelad^ai c. a. 279, 5 ; c. 
I part, and inf. 311, 14. 
i aldolog Comp. 82, I, (d). 
I aldiog dec. 60, (b). 
! ttlgsiv Tiva fisyav etc., 
I 280,4. 

} algfUv c. g. 274, 2. 
I alouad^uv c. two a. 280, 4. 
i aia&dvofiai ins. the perf. 
I 255, R. 1. 

(xlad^dvsa&aL c. g. and a. 
j 273, 5, (e) and (f) and R. 
I 18 ; c. part. 310, 4, (a). 
i ai'aasLv c. a. 279, R. 5. 

alaxQog comp. 83, II. 

alcr/vvsa&ui c. a. 279, 5 ; 
c. d. 285,1,(1); c. part. 
; and inf 311, 14. 

ahslv c. two a. 280, 3. 
\ ahiaa&ai c. g. 274, 2. 
j atTiog EifiL c. inf 306,l,(c). 

axoXovd^og, -hv, -wg^-r^^iL- 
j xo? c. d. 284, 3, (3). 
I dxovxi'Ceiv c. g. 273, R. 7. 



dxovsiv, audivisse, 255, 
R.I. 

dxovsiv c. g. and a. 273,5, 
(e) and R. 18 ; to ohei/, c. 
g. and d. 273, R. 19 ; c. 
inf. and part. 311, 1. 

uy.QaTr,g c. g. 275, 1. 

ay.gciTog 82, 1, (e). 

uy.Qoa(Td^uL c. g.273,5,(e). 

dXyslv c. d. 285, 1, (1). 

dXysLvog comp. 84, 4. 

uXs^Hv c. d. 284, 3, (7). 

uXitvg dec. 57, R. 2. 

aXig c. g. 273, 5, (b). 

dXhxsff&aL c. p. 310,4,(b). 

uXXu 322, 6 ; in a ques- 
tion ib. 

aXXa, aXXoi,ol «noi,with- 
out xal in a series 325, 
(e); dXii ij {oly., ovdiv 
uXt 7/'; ovdsvaXXo^dX)^ 
^ ; Tfc aXXo, uXk ij ; aXXo 
ri, aXX' n) 322, R. 10. 

CcXXd.TTSLV, -sa&UL c. g. 
275, 3. 

dXXriX(x)v dec. 89; usage 
302, R. 7. 

uXXo or aXXo xu ij ellipsis 
346, 2, (d). 

dXXoiog c. g. 271, 3. 



586 



GREEK INDEX. 



aXlog SlXov (aXXog ukXo- I 

^ev) witliaiiotlierNom. 

2m, 3. ^ 
aXXo XL ij and uXXo it in 

the question, nomie344, 

5, (g). 
aXXoTQiog c. g. 271. 3, 
aXg dec. 54, (a). 
uXbJVtti c. g. 274, 2. 
ot'Xwi' dec. 56, R. 2. 
aAo)$dec.48,R.1.70,A, 

(a).72,(b). 
otfia c. d. 289, R. ; with 

part. 312, R. 6 ; c. d. 

and part. 312, R. 5. 
afiagidveiv c. g. 271, 2; 

c. part. 310, 4, (g). 
a^ei^siv, -Etr&cti c. g. 

275, 3 ; c. a. 279, 1. 
afxshoiv 84, 1. 
afxeXtlv c. g. 274, 1 ; c. 
^inf. 30G, 1, (a). 
a^ilXavog elfxi c. inf. ins. 

afiri/avov iaiL c. a. et 

inf. 307, R. 6. 
afioiQog c. g. 273, 3, (b). 
ccfxvvEiv c. d. 284, 3, (7). 
a^(pl prep. 295, 1, (2) ; c. 

d. in a pregnant signif 
ins. c. a. 300, 3, (a> 

UftCpl TISQL 300, R. 1. 

ufj^cpiEvvvvat c. two a. 

280, 3. 
«^(pi?/57?mi^c.d.284,3,(2). 
afiqxa dec. 99, R. 
«v- priv. 236, R. 3, (b). 
«V 260 ; c. ind. fut. 260, 

2,(1); c.ind., impf ,pkip. 

and aor. 260,(2) ; c. subj. 

260,(3); c. opt. 260, (4); 

c. inf and part. 260, (5) ; 

position and repetition 

of«V261. [2, (3), (d). 
av withconjunctions260, 
av HE 261, R. 3. 
uv in Protasis 340, 6. 
av with the opt. omitted 

260, R. 7; with Pres. 

Ind. omitted 260, R. 3 

and 6. 
av ins. idv, which see. 
uva voc. 53, R. 4. 



avd \mi\i. 290, 1. 
uvai^uXXEGx^ai c. inf. 306, 

;i, (h).,_ 

avayxd'CEiv xivd xi 278, 4. 

dvaHU/yd'CEiv c. a. 278, 3. 

avafiLnvijaxsiv c. two a. 
280, 3. 

dvddvEiv c. d. 284, 3, (5). 

dvEniaxrjfibiv c. g. 273, 5, 

avEV c. g. 271, 3. [(g). 

dvix^(T&(XL c. g. 275, 1. 

dvsxEa&ixL c. Inf 31] , 15 ; 
c. part. 310, 4, (e). 

dvriQ dec. 55, 2 ; to de- 
note employment(a»'»)^ 
f^dvxLg) 264, R. 3. 

aviaxoQEbV c. two a. 280,3. 

dvxsxE(T&ai c. g. 273,3,(b). 

dvxl prep. 287, 1. 

uvxid'Cuv c. d. 284,3, (2). 

dvxiXu^^dvE(Td^aic.g.273, 
3, (b) [273, R. 9. 

dvxlog and dvxlov c. g. 

uvxinoiE%<j&ai c. g. 273, 
3(b).. 

a|to? etjU/ c. inf 307, R. 6. 

«|to?, «|/t«)?, a|/OL'y, -oD- 
tr^«t c. g. 275, 3 ; a^og 
xivog eIuI tlvl 284, 3, 

d^iovv c. inf 306, 1, (a). 
anayoQEVEiv [ev, jcaxcog) 
c. a. 279, 2 ; c. inf 306, 

analdEvxog c. g. 273,5,(g). 
dnaixEiv c. two a. 280, 3. 
a7raAA«TT£<r c. g. 271,2; 

-£0-^atc. part. 310. 4,(f). 
ttTravTttv c. g. 273, R. 9 ; 

c. d. 284, 3, (1). 
dnEL^Eiv c. g. 273, R. 19 ; 
^c. d. 284, 3, (3). 
aTiEiTiEiv c. part.310,4,(e). 
ansigog c. g. 273, 5, (g). 

djlEVQWg 8XELV c. g. 273, 

an&xEiVy dnsxE(T&ai c. g. 

271, 2. 
dmaxEiv c. inf 306, 1, (b). 
ttTT/loi)? comp. 82, 1, (b). 
dno prep. 288, 1 ; with 

the meaning oi construe- 



tio praegnans ins. h c. d« 
:300, 3, (c); dno in a 
verb with tlie art ins. 
iv [ol dno xrig dyo- 
(J u g uvO^QO)noiuni(fV~ 

pv) 300, 4, (a). 

«rro — tVfx« 300, R. 2. 

dnod8xtai/uL c. g. 273, 

^5, (e). 

dno8l8oa&ai c. g. 27.5, 3. 

«7ro5<5^f/(rxfU' c. a.279,3. 

dnoXavEiv c. g. 273, 5, (c). 

dnoXo/Eia&at c. d. 284, 
3, (7). 

^AnoXXbiv dec. 53, 4, 1, 
(a) ; 56, R. 1. 

dnonELQaa^ai c. g. 273, 

^5, (7).^ 

dnonqo 300, R. 2. 

rxTTOoav c. g. 273, 5, (b). 

dnoaxEQElv e.g. 271,2; 

xiva 280, 3, and R. 3. 
unoaiilfjEiv c.g.273,R.16. 

UTlO(TXQECpE(T&UL C. g. 279, 

R. 3. 

iinoq)ttlvEi,v c. part, and 

inf 311,11. 

dnocpEvyEiv c. a. 279, 3. 
dnQinodg c. d. 284, 3, (5). 
anxEd&aL c. g. 273, 3, (b). 
liga 324, 3. 

dga ins. a^« 324, R. 5. 
aQa interrogative 344, 5, 
jb). 
dgsaxEiv xivd 279, 1 ; uqe- 

(jxE(T&ai c. d. 284, 3, (5) ; 

c. d. of the instrument 
^285, 1, (1). 

dqnyEiv c. d. 284, 3, (7). 
"Aqtiq dec. 59, R. 2. 
'Aqicnocpdvr^g dec. 59,R.2. 
doy.iia&ai, c. d. 285,1,(1). 
aq^oxxiiv c. d. 284, 3,(5). 
a^vao-.^«ic.inf306,l,(b). 
dqld^tvog dno xcvog, par- 
ticularly 312, R. 3. 
agxELv, to begin, c. g. 271, 

4 ; to rule, c. g. 275, 1. 
ag/Ea&aL c. g. 271, 4 ; c. 

part. 310, 4, (f) ; c. part 

and inf 311, 16. 



GREEK INDEX. 



587 



aQxof^tfvoi, in the be^in- ! 

nin^ 312, R. 3. 
«(Tfj5fiv c, a. 279, 1. 
aaxoVf uffxoiiTjv 221. 
liaufvo? comj). 82, R. G, 
liaaa, liaffu 93. 
acnt]Q dec. 5t>, R. 3, 
ao-T()a;TTftv c. a. 278, 3. 
aaiv dec. (53. 
mat ins. j'twi 144, R. 1. 
uTUQ 322, 7. 
arc c. pait. 312, R. 13. 
uTfQog 10, R. 2. 
"AtU Voc. 53, R. 2. 
«To ius. vTo 144, R. 1. 
uTitt and arra 93. 
«i), ccvToiQ 322, 7. 
avTtxa with pait. 312., R 
ayTo? dec. 91. [6. 

ai'To? iisai^e 302, 4 ; 303. 

3 ; with the art. 246,3,8. 
avTog in avTolg 'iTtnoig, 

together with the horses 

etc. 283, 2, (a) ; 6 al- 
TO? c. d. 284, 3, (4). [2. 
avToxi dec.88 ; usage 302, 
u(f)OiiQU(T&ai c. two a. 

and JLvu Tivog, tivog xi 
280, 3, and R. 3. 
acp&ovog comp. 82, R. 6 
acpiivni, -ka&uL c. g. 

271, 2. 
oL/ded^ai c. d. 285, 1, 

(1); c.part 3J0,4, (c). 
B eii[)h. 24, 2. 
^alvuv Tioda and the like 

279, R. 5. 
^aovvta&at c. part. 310, 

4. (c). 
^acTiXfvsiv c. g. 275, 1. 
(iuGiXzvg dec. 57, 2. 
^wjnaivEiv c.d. anda.284, 
J5«TTsw 212, 3. [3, (6). 
^eXtLojv 84, 1. 
^XanxHv c. a. 279, 1. 
^XdnxHV ^f/aXa, etc. c. 

a. 280, 2. 
(SXineiv c. a, 278, 3. 
(Sorj^tlv c. d. 284, 3, (7). 
(ioiXii c. subj. 259, 1, (b). 
^ovXiff&at cinf. 306,1, (a) 
^ovXivsa&at c. inf: 306, 



1, (a); c. oTTw? and ind. ' 

fut a30, (). 
/Soi'? dec. 57, 2. 
^QETug dec. 61, R. 1. 
/^^/^Hv c. g. 273, 5, (b). 
^Qii^oiKT&ai c. d. 284, 3, 
ia;La dec. 54, (c). [(6). 
ydX(og dec. 212, 7. 
y w^ 324, 2 ; in an an- 
swer 344, 7. 
j'affT//^ dec. 55, 2. 
/fi 317, 2 ; in an answer 

344, 7. 
yeXuv c. a. 278, 3. 
yiXug dec. 171, B, (c). 
yi^Hv c. g. 273, 5, (b). 
ysvvKv, parentem esse 

255, R. 1. 
yivog dec. 61 (b). 
ye^uLog comp. 82, I, (c). 
ysQug dec. 54, R. 4. 
ysvHV, ysisad-aL c. g. 273, 

5, (c). 
yijgag dec. 54, R. 4. 
ylyvEa&ai c. g. orig. 273, 

1 ; c. g. posses. 273, 2 ; 

c. g. partit. 273, 3, (a) ; 

and an abstract sub. foil. 

by inf. 306, 1, (d). 
yiyvsa&m with signif of 

Perf 255, R. 1. 
ylyvsrai fxol xl (iovXo^i- 

VM, iXuofisvoi 284, 3, 10, 

ytyv(x)(Tx£LV c. g. 273, 5, 
(f); i/xm 285, 1,(3); 
c. part. 310, 4, (a); c. 
inf and part. 311, 4. 
yiyvhicrxb} c. log and gen. 
abs. 312, R. 12. 
— ins. eyvaxa 255, R. 1. 
yXi]xwv dec. 56, R. 1. 
! yXIxsa&ai c. g. 273, 3,(b). 
! yovv dec. 54, (c) ; 68, 1. 
I y^avg dec. 57, 2. 
I yQcicfiad^ai c g, 274, 2, 
yi\uv6g c. g. 271, 3. 
yvvKj dec. 68, 2. 
z/ euphon. 24, 2. 
duiQ Voc. 53, 4, (l)(a). 
8al 315, 7. [3. 

Salivd^at o. two aoe. 2^0, 



ddxQv and (5«x(>i'ov 70,B. 
«5aau? c. g. 27.3, .5, (b). 
di 322, in a cjuestion R.(). 
8s suffix 235, 3 and R.3 ; 

after a demons. 95, (c). 
dtdoixivuL c. inf. 306, 1, 

(a). 
dsT c. g. 273, 5, (])) ; c. 

ace. and dat 279, R. 4 ; 

c. inf 306, 1, (d); and 

ace. c. inf 307, R. 3. 
dil a oTiwg 330^ R. 4. 
dsixvvvai c. part. 310, 4, 

(b) ; c. part, and inf 

311,(11). 
dtlva dec. 93, R. 2. 
dsivog c. inf 306, 1 (c). 
dilaai c. a. 279, 5. 
diia&aL c. g. 273, 5, (b) ; 

c. inf 306, 1, (a). 
difiag c. g. 208, R. 
dirdgog dec. 72, (a). 
dsnag dec. 61, (a). 
dsQxsa&ai c. a 278, 3. 
dsano^eLV c. g. 275, (1). 
dsanoxrjg dec, 45, 6. 
^ft'fiv c. a. 278. 2. 
dsvxEQog c. g. 275, 2. 
ds/Ead^aL c. two ace. 280, 

4'; xLvl XL 284, R. 4. 
(5/i 95, (b) ; 315, 1. 2. 
di]&iv 315, 5. 
^/JAoy «i»'at, noLttv with 

part. 310, 4, (b) ; (5/;;io$ 

«,ut noioJv XL 310, R. 3. 
^r/^o? 5Aut oTt 329, R. 4. 
drjXovv c. g. and a. 273,5, 

(f); opart. 310, 4, (b); 

c. inf and part. 311,12. 
jT]firjxr}Q dec. 55, 2. 
/l7]fi0(T&£VT}g dec. 59,R.2. 
dy'jTioxs 95, (b). 
d}]nov^Ev 315, 6. 
|(5;"}t«31.5, 3. 
!(5i« Prep. 291. 
; (5t« TT^o 300, R. 1. 
5t«;'fir' c. part. 310,4,( 1 ). 
diaytyvEa&ccLC. pait.3l0, 

4,(1)- 
diadsxsa&aLj diadoxog, 

diadoxv c.d. 284, 3,(3). 
diadid6vaiC.g.273,3^h). 



588 



GREEK INDEX. 



Siadoxog c. g. and d. 274, 

3,(b); 284,3,(3). 
diai()ih' c.tNvo acc.280, 3. 

with (x)g and gen. abso. 

312, R. 12. [(1). 

dia).sy(a&ai c, d. 284, 3, 
diahnm' xqovov 312,R.3. 
dLuXXanuv c. jJait. 310, 

4, (f). [d. 284, 3, (1). 
8iaXXu,iiiiv, -uTTsa&ui c. 
dLUfisi/3sti&ui c. g. 275,3. 
diurtfxHV c. two acc.280, 

3. 
diarost(T&ai c. onag c. 

ind. tut. 330, 6 ; c. dj$ 

and g. abs. 312, R. 12. 
dianguTTEd&ttL c. iuf.306, 

1, (c). [(b). 

diaieXelv c. pait. 310, 4, 
diucpEQEiv c. g. 271, 2. 
diaq:ogoi: c. g. 271, 3; 

c. d. 284, 3, (4). 
didcpoivog c. d. 284, 3, (4). 
dta/oi](Td^ai c. d. and ace. 

285, 1, (2). 
diddcrxsiv c. two ace. 280, 

3 ; c. inf. 306, 1, (c). 
didoruL c. g. partit. 273, 

3, (b) ; c. g. price, 275, 3. 
dii/Hv c. g. 271, 2. 
dr/.d^Eiv c. g. 274, 2 ; 8i- 

yM^EG&ai c. d. 284, 3,(2). 
dly.aiug siul c. inf. pers. 

ins. (5/xatoj' f oTi c. a. and 

inf. 307, R. 6. 
di'/.aioi'v c. inf 306, l,(a). 
5/x?/V c. g. 28S, R. 
dioQi^Hv c. g. 271, 2. 
5iOTt see oTt. 
dlxa c. g. 271, 3. 
dlipa and 5/i//oc 70, B. 
dnijp' c. g. 274, 1. 
diw'/.sLv c. g. 274, 2. 
(5oxfT»' c. inf. 306, 1, (b) ; 

\-ideri, pers. 307, R. 7. 
doQV dec. 54,(c) and 68,3. 
dogvcpogsly c. a. 279, ]. 
dottrrsTEisiv c. a. 279, 3. 
dgdiTEad-ai e.g. 273,3.(b). 
dvraad-ai c. a. 279. 6 : c. 

inf. 306, 1, (c). 



d'waxog HfiL c. inf. 306, 

1, (c); ])ors. ins. dvva- 

To»' (an c. ace. and inf. 

307, R. (). 
dvo dec. 99, 5 ; with the 

Substin theP1.241,R.10. 
dvg in composition, 236, 

R. 3, (b). 
dvc/fQulrsiv c. a. 279, 5 ; 

c.d. 285, 1,(1). 
dwQsuv^ gratis 278, R. 2. 
dojQslad^ul iivl TL and tl- 

vd Tivi 279, R. 2. 
J'aQuvg dec. 57, R. 2. 
'iViy c. inf 306, 1, (a). 
eav cons. a39, 2, U, (b) ; 

u'hether, an 344, 4 ; iav 

di ins. f«v ds fiij 340. 4 ; 

idv y.al ib. 7. 

fttV T£ €«»' Tf 323, 1. 

iatuL, iuTO ins. r,vTai, rjV- 
To, ojTo 220, 13. 
kavjov dec. 88 ; usage, 
idcov 215, R. [302, 2. 
eyyiC,ELV c. ff. 273, R. 9 ; 

c. d. 284, 3^, (2). 
lyyvg c. g. 273, R. 9 ; c. 

d. 284, 3, (2). 
sy-AaXiiv c. g. 274, 2 ; c. 

d. 284, 3, (6). 
iyy.QUTr,g c. g. 275, 1. 
i'yysXvg dec. 63, R. 5. 
f/w dec. 87 ; usage, 302, 

1. 
i'yorye 95, (a). 
ir,og from 6iV 215, R. 
i&iXsLv c. inf 306, 1, (a). 
SL ins. 7j aug. 122, 3. 
ft ins. rednp. 123. 4. 
fi n. Pers. ins. /; 116,11. 
d cons. 339. 
ft concessive 340, 7 ; in 

wishes 259, 3, (b). j 

f?, an, whether 344, 5, (i). i 
si ydq 259, 3, (b). \ 

u d^ ays 340, 3. i 

el ds elhpt, aiO, 3 : ft ds • 

ins. ft 8s i^ivi and ft ds 

/.n] ins. ft di 340, 4. 
ft xat 340. 7. 
ft' y.s see f «v. 
ft ur, iron. 324, 3, (a) ; « 



/i»j eroepf 340, 5 ; fl/iij 

(I, nisi si, ib. 
fi«, f/«c, ftf, ftay opt ins. 

ui/Ai and etc. 116, 9. 
sldsvuL c. g. 273, 5, (f); 

c. partic. 310, 4, (a) ; dif- 
ference between inf. 
and part. 311, 2; c. cu; 
and g. abs. 312, PL 12. 

el'&s in wishes 259, 3, (b). 

R.3.6. ; c.inf306,R.ll. 
slxd^fiv xi Tivi 285, 1, (3). 
ft'xf tv c. g. 271, 2 ; c. d. 

284, 3, 2. [3, (5). 

slxog, sly.oTfag c. dat 284, 
slyMv dec. 55, R. 2. 
fTuf>', ftTf, slsv ins. ct'i^- 

/ufy, etc. 116, 7. 
f tvat as copula 238, R, 5; 

as an essential word, to 

be, to exist, etc. 238, R. 6; 

with adv. 240, R. 4 ; sl- 

vai witii a part. ins. of 

a simple verb 238, R. 

7 ; «i» at omitted 238, R. 

8 and 9. 
slvat apparendy unne- 

cessajT Avith hvo^id^tiv, 

-sa&uL 269, R. 1. 
sivai c. g. orig. 273, 1 ; c. 

g. possess. 273, 2 ; c. g. 

pai-tit. 273, 3, (a) ; c. d. 

284, 3, (9) ; slvai and a 

subs. c. mf 306, 1, (d). 
fiTTf referring to several 

persons 241, R. 13. 
sinslv f I, y.ay.ojg Tiva 279, 

2; y.axd, xaXd c. a. 280,2. 
ftTTfTve. d. 284, 3,(1); c. 

d. and a. c. int: 307, R.3. 

sToysiv, -a&ai e.g. 271,2. 

tig {eg) prep. 290, 2: con- 
struct. Pregn. ins. ip c. 
d. 300, 3, (b)-; with the 
art. ins. ev (»j Xifivfi exdi- 
dol eg ir]v 2i'QXLV xi]v eg 
Ai^vr,v) 300, 4, (b). 

elg, fjila, sv dec. 99, 5. 
ficwith Superl. 239,R.2. 
elgdysiv c. g. 274, 2. 
eLcrav ma. tauv in plup. 
116,6. 



GREEK INDEX. 



589 



elgoQnv, to permit c. part. 
310, 4, (e). 

HgnQuTutv c. two ace. 
280, II 

eh a with Part. 312, R. 8; 
tittt in a quest. 344,5,(e). 

(1't( — fiT£ 32-3,1; ill an in- 
direct question 344, 5, 
(k). ^ 

nui&ivai c. inf. 306, l,(a). 

ix, e| Prep. 288, 2 ; in 
const. Preg. ins. iv c. 
d. 300, 3, (c); ex in verb 
with the Art. ins. tv {oi 
ix Ti) c u y o g a g uv- 

■&Q0JT101 OCTlSCfV/Ov) 300, 

4, (a). 

kxdg c. g. 271, 3. 
exatnog with the Art 246, 

6. [3. 

ixdvHv with two acc.280, 
ixEl&sv with the Art. ins. 

ixfi (o i X8l& sv noXs- 

lxog8svQor,^ei)S00,R.8. 
ixslvog dec. 91 ; usage 

303,2; with the Art.246, 
ixtiroai (v) 15,l.(e). [3. 
ixEias const Preg. ins. 

ixil 300, R. 7. 
fxjjTt c. g. 288, R. 
ixhUsiv c.parL310,4,(f). 
ixnXr,xTw^ui c. a. 279,5. 
ixatrivai c. a. 279, R. 3. 
ixTQSTtfa&at c.a. 279,R.3. 
kxojv dvat, 306, R. 8. 
tkaiiov without »/ 323,R. 

4. 
iXaxxovad^ai c. g. 275, 1. 
iXuxxwv 84, 6. 
ilu/jaxog 84, 6. 
iXiyXHf c. part. 310,4,(b). 
iXiy/jaxog 84, R. 4. 
cilectv c. g. 274, 1 ; c. a. 

279, 5. 
iXfVx^fQog, eXsvSfQovv c. 

g. 271, 2, 3. 
eXiaueiv &i6v 279, R. 5. 
iXixi'Qiiv c. d. 285, 1 (I); 

c. inf. 306, 1, (b). 
ifxavxov dec. 88; usage 

302,2. 
ifiog ins. fiov, 302, R, 2. 
76 



! tfiTttiQog c. g. 273, 5, (g). 
' ijHTifXd'^fff&ai c. g. 273, 
! R. 9;c. d. 284, 3, (2). 
f'unlTxXaa&ai c. part. 310, 

: ^4, (d). 

tU7XQ0(T&!V c. g. 278,3,(b). 

eu(pfQi}g c. d. 284, 3, (4.) 

iv ins. Tjffav 220, 14. 
j iv Prep. 289, 1 ; const 
I Preg. ins. ft? 300, 3, (a). 

iv TO/?, iv xalg c. Superl. 
i (as TifjMxoi) 2:39, R. 2. 
' ivavxiov, -log c, g. and d. 
, 273, R. 9 and 284, 3,(2). 
i ivdsr,g c. g. 273, 5, (b). 
' tvSodtv with the Art ins. 
tvdov (xi]v svdo&sv xqu- 
Txe^uv qjSQi) 300, 3. 8. 
I ivdvsiv c. two ace. 280,3. 
I iviSQiVEiv c. a. 279, 1. 
j i'vixa,, tvsxfv, f'trsxa, u- 
\ vsy.iv, o'ivsxa c.g.288,R, 
I BvfCTxiv c. inf. 306, l,(c). 
: iv&vfiHG&UL c. g. 273, 5, 
(f ) ; c. part. 3]0, 4 (a). 

eVt ins. svbgxl 31, R. 3. 

ivvQsiv c. g. 273, 5, (f ). 

ivoxXnv c. d. 284, 3, (6). 

ivxuvdu with Pait. 312, 
R. 7. 

ivxQETxsa&ttL 27-3, 3, (b). 

€| Prep. 288, 2 ; see ix. 

i^aicpvrig with Part 312, 
R. 6. 

i^cigx^'-v c. g. 271, 4. 

i^hXiyxuv c. part. 310, 4, 

(b), 

f^ECTTtc c. inf 306, 1, (c) ; 

c. d. and a. c. inf. 307, 

R.3. 
iinuC,Hv c. g. 373, 5,(f); 

c. two ace. 280, 3. 
iM? c. g. 273, 3, (b) ; c. 

d. 284, 3, (3). 
i^laxacT&UL c. g. 271, 2. 
i^oQHOi'v c. a. 279, 4. 

jl'twc. g. 27J,3. 

ioixivfu c. d. 284, 3, (4); 

c. inf. 307, R. 7,; c. 

part 310, R. 2 ; c. inf. 

and part 311, (9). 

60$ ins. i}i6g, aog 302,R.8. 



inaivHv c. g. and a. 273, 
5, (f); Tu« Ta-o? 274,1. 

inaiguv xivd xi 278, 4. 

fc7ra?'pj(Ti^rtt c.d. 28.5,1.(1). 
! indiaffsiv c. g. 273, R. 7. 

BrraixiuaOui c. g. 274, 2. 

£;ra;itf/c dec. 213 19. 
: indv see oiar under '6xt. 

ircugy.HV c. g. 273, 3, (b); 
. c. d. 284, 3, (7). 

irxtl see ore ; in interrog. 
: and imp. clauses 341, 
R. 4. 

iiTsiyfadaL c. g. 273,R.7. 

ineiduv see orav under 

irxsid)] see oTf. [org. 

hJiHxa in question 344, 
! ^5, (e). [8. 

tneira with part 312, R. 

ins^isvat c. g. 274, 2. 

6;r5(7^«t c. d.284,3, (3). 

67n;v see fy-rav. 

fc;Tt ins. STiicm 31, R. 3. 

ini Prep. 296 ; c. dat 

const Preg. ins. c. a. 

; 300, 3, (af; c. g. and 

pait. 312, R. 5. [7. 

iTTiSdXXea&txi e.g. 273,R. 

e.T:i(5o^o? fiut c. inf. 307, 
R.6. 

i-ni^vuHV e. g. 274, (1) ; 
\ c. inf. 306, i, (a). 

iTXixaXilv e. d. 284, 3,(6). 

inixovQHv e. d. 284, 3,(7). 

inuau3uvsa&ai c. gen. 
273,' 3, (b). 

iTxiXuv&uvta&uo e.g. 273, 
5, (e); c. part 310, 4, (c). 

iniXunuv e. a. 279, 4 ; 
; e. part. 310, 4, (f). 
I ini/julta^ai c.g.273,R.7. 
j imiuiXsa&aL, -flcr&ai c. 
ff. 274, 1 ; c. on^w? c. 
I ind. fut 330, 6. 
I inlTisdog coiiip. 82, R. 6. 
i inrciXijadfLV c. d. and ace. 
i 284,3,(6). 

inLaxtjnxiad^ai c.g.274,2. 

f n:ifTr«^uf>'o? e.g.273,.5,(g). 
, ijxiaxita&uL c^.273,5,(f); 
i c. partic. 310, 4, (a); c. 
, part and inf. 311, 2; c. 



590 



GREEK INDEX. 



0%' and gen. abs. 312, i 

R. 12. I 

imaiitxiuv c. jr. 275, 1. ; 

innTri,u(x)V c. ff. 273,5/ jr). I 
iTiKT/Mr yuuror 312, U.3. 
C/T/TUTTftV c. <1. 2H4,3.(3) I 
(Tiiji).lfiv c. inr.30(j,l,(a). ' 
i:TiTt]dfio? c. inf.GOiUslc). I 
ijiixL^iiv c. d. 284, 3, (G). i 
ijTiTfjirifif c. iuf. aiul I 

part. 311, 15. i 

inniiOTisvHv c. ij. 275, i 

1 ; c. a. 279, 1. ^ | 

ETiKfd^orwg diay.H(T&aL c. I 

g.274, 1. I 

fnixsiQHV c. inf.306,l,(a). | 
ijiiXMijioq c. g. 273, 3,(b). ■ 
kjiouevon; c. d. 284, 3,(3)- , 

STlOTQVVflV Tint TZ-278, 4. j 

fQui\ t'oua&ui e.g. 274,1. ! 
ioyd^sa&ai yM.).a, y.ay.d c. I 

c. a. 280, 2. ' [3. | 
sQ8(7&(ti c. two acc. 280, j 
e^fcjtrftvc. t\voacc.260,3. ! 
SQTjUOC, iQTjfioiv c. geii. ; 

271, 2, 3. 
igrjiifiv c. g. 271, 2. 
f^/;jivc. d>284, 3,(2). 
egoiofiivog comp. 82,I,(e). 
Iqoijavc. t^vo acc. 280,3. 
iQioTLy.iag s/slv e.g. 274,1. 
ia&lELV e. g. and a. 273, 

5, (c) and R, 15. 
tffxov, Efjy.ofur^v 221. 
I'^T «V see eaig. 

BQlt see SMQ. 

i'ffTL fioi Ti ^ovXofiirco 

284, 3, (10) (c). 
IVu (licet) c.mf.306,l,(c). 
£VTMviththePl.241,R.6. 
saiiv oV, ojv etc. 341, R. 4. 
I'oT/r 0T5, oTrov, oTTTj, orrwc, 

01*, iVa, ev&a, i] 331, R. 5. 
sa/aTog with the Art. 245, 

R. 5. 
ttsQog in Crasis 10, R. 2 ; 

c. g. 271, 3. [R. 1. 

I'xt with the Comp. 239, 
£TL tioXXm with the Comp. 

239, r! 1. 
£v and £v in the Aug. 121, 

R.: 125, R. 1. 



6V Xe/Fiv, noulv, etc. c.a. j 

279, 2. : 

ft'TTo/HJ'C. part.310,4,(g). j 
iu',?of r? dec. 57, R. 2. ! 
fi'duiuovi^fiVj tidal fi(i)v j 

c. g.' 274, 1. I 

(vdiog Comp. 82, 1, (d). j 
EveQyexHv c. a. 279, 2. | 
iv^MQog Comp. 82, R. G. I 
d'Ov e.g. 273, R. 9. [6. i 
fLi^Lc with Part. 312, R. | 
fvku^jfla&ui c. a. 279, 1. j 
flXo/Hv c. a. 271, 2. 
evnoQHV c. g. 273, 5, (b). 
tl'^ljxstv, -iudai c. part. 

310, 4, (b). 
ildiSuv c. a. 279, 1. 
ft'Ti';fH>' c. part. 310, 4, (g). 
£l>a.^mc.d. 284, 3,(1); 

c' inf. 306, 1, (b). [(c). 
eiby/sladai e.g. 273, 5, 
f(jpi|^c c. g. and d. 273, 3, 

(b); 284, 3, (3). 
ifpisadai c. g. 273, 3, (b). 
icptzvildd-ui c.g.27S.3,[h). | 
icfOQnv c. part. 310, 4, (e). 
gqp' w, i(p toTE c. md. fiit. 

or inf. 34i, R. 5. I 

s/Hv c. inf. 306, 1, (c);: 

c. part. noLi^aag f/w 310, 
^4,(k).^ ^ [274,(3).; 
B/^iv sv, xaXug, etc. c. g. 
I/Etv yvMjjTjV c. ws and g. 

abs. 312, R. 12. 
E/ja&uL c. g. 273, 3, (b). 
ix&Qog Comp. 83, 11. 
^yfw, possum, c. inf. 306, 

s/wv A?j^ai;, g)^i'«9fig 312, 
R. 9; l/wr, ^^Y/^, 312, 
R. 10. 

I'Mg dec. 48, R. 1. 
I'w? constructed 337. 
Za/Qr)b}v 213, 14. 
! ^6 suffix 235, R. 3. 
! Zsvg dec. 68, 4. [279, 1. 
I ^ryioi'v c. g. 274, 1 ; c. a. 
^r^Tsiv c. inf. 306, 1, (a). 
^170$ and ^vyov 70, iV, (b). 
"H, (a) 7; aUernativum, or, 
323, 2; in a question 
344, 5, (h) ; — (b) ?J com- 



parativiim 313, 2 ; after 

tlie omission of finllov 
323, R. 3 ; with nliov, 
nXflb). 'iXunov in a verb 
with the numeral, omit- 
ted 323, R. 4 ; with the 
Gen. after a compara- 
tive 323, R. 3. 

r\ union vowel 237, R, 1. 

»j x«Tu or »J TtQog c. a. 
323, 7. 

i] b)gif. c. inf. 341, 3, (a). 

n 316, 2. 

7] h/jIv 316, 2. 

»] nou 316, 2. 

I with Sup. .343, R. 2. 

»] interrogative 344, 5. 

»1 (5' oc .331, R. 1. 

i']UTai ins. Tjj'Tat 220, 13. 

7//«(r^fn e.g. 273, 3, (a); 
c. g. and d. 275, 1, and 
R.^1 ; c. two a. 280, 4 ; 
c. inf. 306, 1, (b). 

ijyefxovEVfiv c. g. and d. 
275, 1, andRri. 

r,ds, and, 323, R. 2. 

lidsadai c. d. 285, 1,(1); 
c. part. 310, 4, (c). 

7,dvuog comp. 82, R. 6. 

7;5i'c comp. 83,1. [274,3. 

iii(Eiv si', y.ttXoJg etc. c. g. 

TixidTog 216, 2. 

?iza), veni, 255, R. 2. [7. 

ijXi/.og by attraction 332, 
T/jUfV — 'lids 323, R. 2. 
r,/uiL in compos. 236, R. .3, 

(b). 
Tj^to-v? dec. 76, R. 2. 
jyV see €«)'. 
rivi/.n, as, see ot5. 
>;5£,«a comp. 84, R. 3. 
?;owc dec. 60, (a). 
Jja^ai c. a. 279, R. .6. 
Jjo-ffwy, i]tto)v 84. [(c). 
J/fftrwy ft,u/ c. mf. 306, 1, 
^iavyog comp. 81, I, (d). 
7/Toi 316, 2 ; 7/TOi — 7j oyt 

303, R. 2. 
ijTTaa&at c. g. and ltto 

Ttvos 275, 1, R. 2. 
'fjTToia&ai with the sense 

of the Perf. 255, R. 1. 



GREEK INDEX. 



591 



fixtaa&ai c.part.310,4{g). 

ij/M (IfC. ()(), (b). 

i)oIg doc. (30, (1)). 

0ukh^ dec. 71, A. (a). 

^uKXstv c. a. 278, 3. 

-&aQ^Hv c. a. and d. 279, 
3, and R. 3. 

^daasiv c. a. 279, R. 6. 

i^waawv 83, I. 

&uTtQa, etc. 10, R 2 ; c. 
a. 279, ]. 

■^wi'^UKsf <v e.g. and a. 273, 
5,(f); TivdTivog27i,l, 
andR.2;c.d.285,l,(l). 

^saa&ai c. g. 273, 5, (f ). 

^gAav c. ii\t: 306, 1, (a). 

^f><$ 73, 1, (c). 

^£v suffix 235, 3, and R. 
1 and 2. 

■&eQaJismiv c. a. 279, 1. 

&sQdTio)v dec. 68, 5. 

S-i'jv 315, 4. 

^t suffix 235, 3. 
^f//«mvc.g.273,3,(b). 
S-vi](Ty.sLv, mortuum esse, 
255, R. 1. 
x^vyuxriq dec. 55, 2. 
•&VELV sTTirlyua, ysvsd-Xioi, 

yixfiovg 278, 2. 
d^vfiom&ttL c. g. 274, 1 ; 

c. d. 284, 3, (6). 
-donsusiv, &(6msLv c. a. 

279, 1. 
-&(ag dec. 60, (a). 
1 union-vowel 237,1, and 

R. 2. 
Idi, referring to several 

persons. 241, R. 13. 
I'Siog comp. 82, I, (d). 
IdLog c. g. 273, 2. 
idiwTrjg c. g. 273, 5, (g). 
t(5(>a')? dec. 213, 7. 
livaL, dfXL with the mean- 
ing of the Fut. 255, R 3. 
IfQog c. g. 273, 2. 
l&v{g) c. g. 273, R. 9. 
Ixavog c. inf. 306, 1, (c). 
ixEjeveiv c. g, 273, R. 6 ; 

c. inf 306, 1, (a). 
IxvHvd^ai e. g. 273, R. 6. 
tVa, </i«<, m orrfer <^< 330. 
iVa Tt 344, R, 6. 



4(70? comp. 82, 1, (d) 

i'lTog c. g. and d. 273, 3, 
(b), and 284, 3, (4). 

unoQuv c. two a. 280, 3. 

Ix^vg dec. 62. 

IxM ins. i/MQa 213, 11. 

K moveable 15, 4. 

xa&uQog c. g. 271, 3. 

xadi^eiv c. a. 279, R. 6. 

y.ui}i(TT(xv(XL c. two a. 280. 
4. ^ [310,4,(6)! 

xudoQap, to perm{l,c.]mrt. 

x«fc 321,1; with Sni). 239, 
R.2 ; with part.312,R.8. 

xal yuQ 324, R. 1 and 3. 

x(/.l iixv, xal H 340, 7. 

xal f-wXiaTot with Sup. 
239, R. 2. _ [R. 1. 

xal og ins. xal ovTog 331, 

xal ou, xal fit] 321, 2. 

xttfcTai/Ta with part. 312, 
R. 8. 

xatjTSQ with part.312,R.8. 

xalzoi 322, 7 ; with part. 
312, R. 8. 

xaxoXoyslv, xaxonoulv c. 
a. 279, 2. 

xaxog comp. 84, 2. 
xaxog elfiL c. inf. 306, 1, 

(c). 
xaxovQyflv c. a. 279, 2. 
xaxwgAs/fiV, TiOLHVf dgixv 

etc. c. a. 279, 2. 
xaXelv c. two a. 280, 4. 
xaXXiffTsveiv c. g. 275, 1. 
xalog comp. 84, 3. 
xaXovfisvog, so called 264, 

R. 1. 
xdXMg dec. 70, A, (a). 
xdfivHv c. part. 310, 4, (e). 
xaJiSLTa with part. 312, 

R. 8. 
xuQa dec. 68, 6. [(e). 
xuQTSQslv c. part. 310, 4, 
xrtT« prep. 292 ; xaid in 

composition 292, R. 
x«Ta with part. 312, R. 8. 
xaTaxovetv, to obey, c. g. 

273, R. 19. 
xuTaXXaTTBiv, axnad^ai, 

c. d. 284, 3, (1). [3. 
xttTuvifjisiv c. two a. 280, 



xaTanXiiTtfa&aL c.a. 279, 

5. ^ [(1). 

xarnQuffOai, c. d. 284, 3, 
xanxQ/tcv c. g. 271, 4. 
xnTaxQ}',(T{)^ixi c. d. and a. 

285, 1, (2). 
xarwuvTiov c. g. 273, R.9. 
xaxfQyd^sa&aL c.inf 306, 

1, (c). 
xaTSxtLV c. inf 306, 1, (a). 
xaxi'jxoog c. g. and d. 273, 

R. 19. 
xi, xiv, see av. 
xsia&av c. a. 279, R. 6. 
xcAei'str c. inf 306, 1, (a); 

c.a. etinf 307, R. 1. 
xsvog c. g. 271, 3. 
xEQUfifovg 76, I. 
xsQug dec. 54, R. ^. 
xf^(5tW 216, R. 2. 
xsi&eiv c. two a. 280, 3. 
xi]ds(T&aL c. g. 274, 1. 
xivdvvevsLv c. inf. 306, I, 

(b). 

xlg dec. 62. 
xXilg dec. 68, 7. 
xZf'o? dec. 61, (b). 
xXsTiTTjg comp. 82, II. 
xXi]govofxHv e.g. 273,3,(b). 
xXvsiv c. d. 284, R. 4. 
>£y£qpK? dec. 6J, R. 1. 
xoivoc, xoivova^ac c. g. 

273, 3, (b). 
y.oivog, xoivovv, oia&ai 

284,3,(1). 
xoLvoivstv c. g. 273, 3, (b) ; 

284,3,(1). 
xoivbn'og dec. 72, (a). 
xoXaxsvsLv c. a. 279, 1. 
xoQBvvv(j&av c. g. 273, 5, 
Koo)? dec. 212,7. [(c). 
XQUTHV c. g. and a. 275, 

1, and R. I. 
xQaxiiv c. part. 310, 4, (g). 
X^WTiffTO? 84, 1. 

x(>£«c dec. 54, R. 4. 

xQiiacTbiv 84, 1. 

xqivHv c. g. 273, R. 2 and 
5, (f) ; — and -fu&ui, 
c. g. 274, 2 ; xqivsiv xi 
xivL 285, 1, (3). 

xglvov dec. 72, (a). 



592 



OREEK INDEX. 



KooliTfbi 212, 3. »j 

ygoTdXi^nv c. a. 279, R. 5. 
XQOTHP V. a. 27i), R. 5. 
xQVJiTsiv -fa&ui c. a. 279, 

4 ; c. two a. 280, 3. 
xQvq)vi c. g. 273, 5, (e). 
xTuad-at c. g. 275, 3. | 
xi^^^ioc conip. 83, II. I 
xvxevj 56, R. 1. 213, 11. | 
xvviegog 21G, R. 2. 
xi'Qiog c. g. 273, 2. 
xi'wv dec. 68, 8. 
xwa? dec. 61, R. 1. 
x(oXv£iv c. g. 271, 2; c. 

inf. 306, 1, (a). 
jtag dec. 72, (a). 
Aa.5wv, im7/i, 312, R. 10. 
i«//d»'avc.g.273,3,(b). : 
kotyoyc 'dec. 48, R. 1, 70, 

A, (a). 
Xd^Qu, ka&Qalojg c. g. 

273, 5, (e). 
Xad-cov, secretly 310, R. 4. 
Xd).og comp. 82, I, (f ). 
Xafi3ixve(T&aL c. g. 273, 

3,(b). 
XdfiTi8iv c. a. 278, 3. 
Xuv&otvHV c. a. 279, 4. 
Xav&ttvm&ai c. e. 273, 5, 

(e). ^ ^ [4, (b). 

Xav&dvEiv c. part. 310, 

>l«o$ and Xsag 70, A, (a). 

Xiy^iv c. g. 273, 5, (f ). 

Xiy^f'V c. t^vo a. 280, 4 ; 

c.d. 284, 3,(1); c. inf. 
306, 1, (b) ; c. d. and a. 
and in£ 307, R . 3. 

Xs'/eiv c. (x>g and g. abs. 
312, R. 12. 

XiysLV Ev, y.ay.wg c. a. 279, 
2; x«Att, x«xa, etc. c. a. 
280, 2. [6. 

Xiysrai c. a. et inf.307,R. 

Xsyo^svog 264, R. 1. 

Xvyeivc. part. 310, 4, (f). 

;ia'7rar c. a. 279, 4. [(f). 

Xdnsa&ai c. part. 310, 4, 

;L»?pfT? l/wv 313, R. 9. 

XIti bXuIm 68, 9. 

XinuQHv c. part. 310,4,(e). 

Xlg dec. 214, R. 2. 

Xt(7ff€(r^at c. g. 273, R. 6. 



Ao/t^f(ri9aic.inf.306,l,(b). | fiifivrjfiui ore ins. aTi329, 

ilo<(5oofTv 0. a. 279, 1. I R. (i. 

Xoidu(jH(jdui Jivi 284, 3, ' ^i^tfiadai c. g. and a. 

(6). i 273, 5, (f )andTt>'« Ttvog 

Xovta&ai c. g. 273, R. 16. j 274, 1 ; c. d. and a. 284, 
Xo/ur c. a. 279, 1. ! 3, (6). 

XvEiv c. g. Sep. 271, 2 ; c. I (iiv ins. ^?;v 316, R. 

g. of price 275, 3. ' fisv — di 322. 

Xvfiaivsd&ai c. a. 279, 1 ; fi(vdrj 316, R. 

c. d. 279, R. 1. ; fMSvuv c. a. 279, 3. 

;Lv7ra(r^«i c.d. 285, 1,(1). ■ fisvoiv 316, R. 
XvaLTsXHv c. d. 284, 3, (7). | (xiviot, 316, R. 322, 7. 
Xb)^uff&ai c. a. 279, 1 ; | (Asaog comp. 82, 1, (d) and 



c. d. 279, R. 1. 
Xomv 84, 1. [4. 

Md 316, 4 ; fiix J la 279, 
{.laxgog comp. 84, 5. 



R. 5 ; with the Art. 245, 
R. 5. ^ [4,(d). 

^liaxov slvai c. part. 310, 
fisaiog c. g. 273, 5, (b). 



fiaxQc^ with Com. and juexa prep. 294; ,u«Ta ins. 

Sup! 239, R. 1 and 2^| fiiucni 31, R. 3. [(b). 
fidXitna with Sup. 239, fitiadidovuL c. g. 273, 3, 

R. 2. [R. 1. fxnafisXft (xol nvog and 

^dXXov with Com. 239, tv 274, 1, and R. 1. 
^dv 316, 1. ^STafisXsl c. part. 310, 4, 

fxav&dvEiv with sense of (c). [4, (c). 



the Perf 255, R. 1. 



fiETa(iEXuad-aic.peiTt.310, 



Havd-dvEiv c. g., c. g. and i fiera^v c. g. 273, 3, (b). 
a. 273, 5,(f)"andR.20;!^£T«^i!' with part. 312, 



c. pai-t. 310, 4, (a); c. 

part, and inf 311, 3. 
fxaqxvg dec. G8, 10. 
fidaaojv 84, 5. [2. 

fidjTjv, incassum 278, R* 1 
^dytd&ai c. d. 284, 3, (2). i 



R,6.^ , J(W. 

[xsTSinl (xol TLvog 273, 3. 

(lejsxsiv c. g. 273, 3, (b). 

/ig/^t c. g. 273, R. 9; 
ff^^XQh ^«/r?t OTOV, (jdxQJ 
av, see tag. [5. 



^£/« W'ith Com. and Sup. fit] c. imp. and subj. 259, 
239, R, 1 and 2. : pj 318 ; ^u^ pleonastic, 

fisyalQELv c. g. 274, 1. | after expressions signi- 
^E/«gdec. 77;comp.84,8. fying to fear, to doubt, 
(.lEyicnov with Sup. 239, etc. 318, 7. 



^Tj interrog. 344, 5, (d). 
fiij on, fji] onwg — dXXd 

xai {dXXd) 321, 3. 
fir, ov 318, 9. 
^r,de 321, 2. 
fxTjdEig dec. 99, R. 



R. 2. 

fie-&ls(T&aL c. part 310, 

4, (f ). 
fisl^aiv 84, 8. 
fjEiXlaaEcrd^ai c. g. 273, 

R. 16. 
justov without 1] 323, R. 4. fiiy/.iaxog 84. 
^ftc 214, 4. /i^V 316, 1. 

^EioviviXELV c. g. 275, 1. ij,T]vieiv c. g. 274, 1. 
fifLoi'a&ai c. g. 275, 1. ^?)vt? dec. 63, R. 5. 
fiilbjv 84. ^7Jts — (xvixs 321, 2, 

^gAat^ot Tiro? and Tfc 274, H'l]xriQ dec. 55, 2. 

1, and R. 1. iiriXQwg dec. 71, B, (c). 

fdXXuv c. inf. 306, 1, (a). I firjxavaa&at c. inf. 306, 



GREEK INDEX. 



593 



1, (a) ; c. onotg and ind. j 
fut. 330, G. j 

fii/vvvat, ftiyvva&ai c.d. 

284,3,(1). ; 

fuxQog comp. 84, 6. i 

fii,fiH(T&ai c. a. 279, 1. ! 
fiifin'jaxfLv -sa&ai c. g. ' 

273, 5, (e). ; 

fii^vrjirxsadai c.]mrX.310. 

4, (a) ; c. part, aiid inf. 

311,2. 
MlvoK dec. 71, C. ] 

fioi, ethical Dat. 284, 3, 

(10) (d). I 

liovoi; with the Art. 245, ! 

R. G; different from (a6- 

vov 264, R. 7. I 

fiovog c. g. 271, 3. | 

fjiovo(fd'/og comp.82,I,(f ). \ 
fio L', lAol, jiii usage 87, R. 1 . i 
HvxTjg dec. 71, A, (a). 
fivaaTTsa&UL c. a. 279, 5. 
fidtv 344, 5, (c). ' 

N iqislxvajixov- 15, 1. 

20G, G. ^ : 

val 316, 4; val fiu /ila . 

279, 4. 
vaog and yfwc 70, A. (a). I 
vduT) and rctTro? 70, B. 
vdaasLv c. g. 273, 5, (b). 
vcttgdec. 68. 11.214,5. 
vittTog 82, R. 5. 
yew? and vaog 70, A, (a). 
V7) 316,4; vj^Jm 279,4. 
vjJT?? from Wo? 82, R. 5. 
viy.dv "OXvixTiLa, yvwfiTjv 

278, 2. 
nxav with sense of the 

Perf. 255, R. 1. 
vixav c. part. 310, 4, (g). 
yoEiv c. part. 312, R. 12. 

vojjii^sLv c. two c. 260, 4 ; 

c. d. (uti) 285, 1, (2) ; 

c. inf. 306, 1, (b); c. 

part, 311, 2. 

voacpi'Cav c. g. 271, 2. 

vov^eislv c. inf. 306, 1 ,(a). 

vu316, 3. [(b). 

voJTog and vojtov 70, A, 

Ztvovadav c. d. 284, 3, 

(1). „ [(g)- 

livag 6^«v c. g. 273, 5, 



IvfjLcpoQov fart c. d. and 
a. c. inf. 307, R. 3. 

^vy Prep. 289, 2. 

union-vowel 237, 2. 

o- in oTidlog, onoaog, etc. 
93, R. 1. 



ofioiog c. g. 273, 3, (b); 

vfuoiog, OjUOtovy, -oD- 
adui, ofiolojg c. d. 284, 
3,4. 

ofioXoyiiv c. d. 284, 3, (6). 

ofiokoyuTUL c. a. and inf. 



0, 7/, TO dec. 91 : relat. i 307, R. 6. 

demons., as a prop. Art I ofXMg 322, 7 ; with a part. 

see under Article. | 312, R, 8. 

ijA/xoc attract. 332, R. 9. | Ivndl^siv c. d.284,3, (6). 
o oiog attract. 332, R. 9. oniQog dec. 72, (a). 
oys usage 30:3, R. 2. ovivdvai, 

ods, ijde, t68e dec. 91 ; 279, 1. 

usage 303, 1 ; with the Ivo^d^Hv e. two a. 280, 4. 



-aadui c. a. 



Art. 246, 3. 
o8i 95, (e). 
oChv c. g. 273, 5, (d) ; 

c. a. 278, 3. 
6&ovvsyM ins. oTt 329, 

R. 1 ; ^*?2ce, 338, 2. 



ovTorv ins. «T&jff«r 116, 12. 

oTtiiTi^Ev c. g. 273, 3, (b). 

OTTOi in the sense of the 
const, preg. ins, ottov 
300, R. 7. [ore. 

onoiav see orav under 



ol dfj.(pl (nfgi) iiva 263, ' ottots see oie. 

(d). I onov in the sense of the 

Ota c. part. 312, R. 13. j const, preg. ins. oTiot 



OldiTiovg dec. 71, B, (b). 
ol'/.siog c. g. 273, 2. 
olxTHQfiV c. g. 274, 1. 
oly.TQog comp. 83, IL 



300, R. 7; 07101', quan- 
doquidem see ore. 

oixcag with Sup.2.39, R. 2. 

on:o)? ins. on 329, R. 1. 



oiov c. part. 312, R. 13. ' onwg, that, in order that 
olog with Sup. 239, R. ! 330 ; onoig and on^g (ii) 
2; oiog, oiog t Btfii c. j c. ind, fut. ellip. 330,R.4. 
inf. 306, 1, (c). I onojg, when, see ot£. 

oto? ins. oTLJOLovTog 329, 1 ottw?, «5 342. 
R. 8. ; oQuv c. g. 273, 5, (f ) : 

olo? attracted .3^32, 7 ; c. i o(j«>'a>lz)jv278, 3; Avith 
inf. 3-32, R. 8. I verl)s of appearing, 

oio? ins. o)CT£ 341, R. 2. | showing 306, R. 9, c. 
oia^ dgaaov, oiad- wg part. 310, 4, (a). 

noirjffov 259, R. 10. j ofjyii^sa^ai c. g. 274, 1 ; 
ol/onai, abii 255, R. 2. } c. part. 310, 4, (c). 
j ol'xofxai c. part. 310, 4, (1). ; iQiytad^ai c. g. 273, 3,(b). 
j oy.vHv c. inf. 306, 1, (a.) ! oQ&giog comp. 82, 1, (d). 
i oliyog comp. 84, 7. | oQfxacrd^ ai c. g. 27.3, R. 7. 

oXiyo), oXlyov with Com- o^vi? dec. 68, 12. 
I par! 2.39, R. 1. o'?(pavd? c. g. 271, 3. 

i oXiyoioslv c. g. 274, 1. oc, ?;, o dec. 92 ; usage 
\ 6Xoq)VQsa&aL c. g. 274, 331, sq.; agreement in 



1 ; c. a. 279, 5. 
ofiiXslv c. d. 284, 3, (1). 
ouvvvav c. a. 279, 4. 
oiLOia xoXg c. Sup. 239, 

R. 2. . [R.2. 

o/uotoy eTvou c. partic.310, 



gen. and num. 332 sq. ; 
case (attraction) 332, 6 ; 
Attractio inversa 332, 
R. 11 ; attraction in 
position 332, 8 ; og, tj, 
before the intemiedi- 



594 



GREEK INDEX. 



ate clauses, attracted 
332, 9; modes 333 ; og 
changed into a demons. 
334, 1 ; og ins. tiie de- 
mons. 334, 3 ; og ins. 
OTi, since, ins. 'iva, ut 
(after o'uiug, (x)d(, xoiov- 

TOg, TrjXlXOVTOQy T0(T0V~ 

Tog) Mgrs, ins. iuv or tl 

334, 2. 
oc, V, o ; og fisv- og 8e ; 

og xal og demons. 331, 

R. 1. 
oaov (offw) — ToaovTOP 

(toctoltm) 343. 
oaov, o(TM with Comp. 

and Sup. 239, R. 1 and 

2 ; oaov, oVa c. inf., e.g. 

o(Tov y ly* stdivaL 341, 

R. 3. 
o<Tog ins. ort roaog 329, 

R. 8. 
o(Tog attracted 332, 7. 
oaog ins. cogis 341, R. 2. 
ogjLg dec. 93. 
oacpQalpecr&cxL c. g. 273, 
^5, (e). 

OffW TOfTOl'TO) 343, 

oiav see ots. 

oTs and otocv const. 337. 

OTE fundamental mean- 
ing 338, 1. 

OTL with Sup. 239, R. 2. 

on, that, const. 339 ; dif- 
ference between the 
construction of uit with 
a. inf. and part. 339, R. 
5 ; in citing the words 
of another 339, R. 3. 

OTL, since, const. 338, 2. 

oil tL 344, R. 6. 

ov{k) 15, 4. 17, R. 2 ; ou 
at the end of a sent. 15,4. 

oil 318; oil pleonastic, 
after expressions de- 
noting doubt, denial, af- 
ter Comp. and Sup. ex- 
pressions 318, 8, and 
R.7. 

ov yuQ aXXa 322, R. 11. 

ov interrog. 344, 5, (d). 

ov with Sup. negative 



adjectives 239, R. 3. 

ov fxivjoi u'/.Xd 322, R. 11. 

ov fii'i 318, (). 

ov i^i') c. second pers. 

ind. fut. interrog. {ov 

^t] (fXvaQijrreig ; ins. fii) 

(fXvu^ti) 255, 4. 
ov fij)p dXXd 322, R. 11. 
ov fxovov -dXku x«t 321,3. 
01/ pron. dec. 87 ; usage 

302, R. 3. 
ovdag dec. 61, R. 1. 
olds 321, 2. 
ovdeig dec. 99, R. 
ovddg ogxig ov attracted 

332, R. 12. 
ovH eaiiv onov, oribig 

331, R. 5. [R. 7. 

ovHovv and ovxovv 324, 
ovv suffix 95, (b); con- 
clusive 324, 3, (b); in 

an answer 344, 7. 
ovveya c. g. 288, R. ; ov- 

TExa ins. OIL 329, R. 1 ; 

since 338, 2. 
ovg dec. 54, (c). 

ol'TC OlITE 321, 2, 

0L'T0?dec.91 ; usage 303, 
1 ; with the Art. 246, 3. 

oviog, heus! 269, 2, (a). 

ouToal 95, (e). 

ovTcog, wg in expressions 
of desire 342, R. 2. 

ovi o)g with part. 312, R.7. 

OVX OTIMg [oTi), OVX OTi, 

— dXXd ^nl ; ov)( oiov 

— dXXd 321, 3. 
ocpQa, that, so that, 330. 
offQu, unto, see %b)g. 
oipiog comp. 82, I, (d). 
oijjocpdyog comp. 82, 1, (f ) 
Hal Yoc. 53, 4,(1), (c). 
naidsvEiv c. two a. 280, 3. 
TittXaiog comp. 82, I, (e), 
navTolov Eivm, ylyvs- 

a^tti c. part. 310,4, (h); 

c. a. c. inf 311, 18. 
naqd prep. 297 ; itaqd 

c. g. ins. c. d. 300, 4,(a). 
ndQams.ndQmTi 31,R.3. 
naqaivuv c. 4- 284, 3, 

(3); c. inf. 306, 1, (a). 



TtnQaxtXema&at c. d. 284, 

3, (3). 
nuoula/u^dvsiv c. g. 275, 

3 ; c. two a. 280, 4. 
inttjunXt'iaiog c. g. 273, 

R. 9; c. d. 284,3, (4). 
nuoaaHfvd'^iaO^ut 306, 1, 

(a); c. onwg c. ind. fut. 

330, 6 ; c. part, and c. 

&'>?andpart. 310, 4, (h). 
TTUQa/uQHv c. g. 271, 2 ; 

c. d.'284, 3, (2). 
nixqiyi, tiuqUS, ndqe^, 300, 

R. 1. 
naqfAjTwc. inf 306,l,(c). 
7rK^o$i'<>fivc.inf.306,l ,(a). 
nag with the Art. 246, 5. 
nag Tig with the second 

pers. imp. 241, R. 13. 
ndaaMv 216, 2. 
TTttTTiQ dec. 55, 2. 
ndiQcog dec. 71, B. (c). 
navuv, -Ed&ai c. g. 271, 

2; c. part. 310,4, (f) ; 

c. part, and inf 311, 17. 
naxvg comp. 216, 2. 
nsl&eiv Tivd ti 279, 4 ; 

c. a. 279, 1 ; c. inf 306, 

l,(a); c. w?306, R. 2. 
Ttildsffd-ai c. g. 273, R. ' 

19 ; c. d. 284, 3, (3). 
nsivfv c. g. 274, I. 
IlEiQcuevg dec. 57, R. 2, 
TiELQuird-ai c .g. 273, 5. 

(g); c. inf 306,1, (a); 

c. part. 310, 4, (h); c. 

part, and inf 311, 18. 
nsXd'CELV, nsXttQ c. g. 273, 

R.9; c. d. 284, 3,(2). 
7T8PS(T&ai, nsvrjg e. g. 273, 

nsvd-iy.bjg s/siv e.g. 274,1 . 
nsTisQL dec. 63, R. 1. 
mnoL&hai c. d.284,3,(3). 
TiBTTbJv comp. 84, 11. 
ntg 95, d; Synt. 317, 1. 
nsQuv c. g. 271, 3. 
nsgatog comp. 82, I, (c). 
nfQq.v c. a. 279, R. 5. 
718 Q I prep. 295, 1,3. 
nsgi — evExa 300, R. 2. 
neQL c. d. with the const 



GREEK INDEX. 



095 



preg. ins. of the ncc. 

300, 3, (a). 
niQi ins. ntQiftrri 31 ,R.3. 
7i64>if5«AA«>'C.t\vo a,'i80.3. 
TitQiylyvsaO^txi c. g.275,1. 
TXfQididoa&ui C. g. 275,3. 
TKQislrai c. g. 275, 1. 

neQiidiiv see jKQioQav. 
JIsQixXilg dec. 59, 2. 
ntQifMivfiv c. a. 279, 3, 
nsQioQfjv c. part. 310, 4, 

(e) ; c. part, and inf. 

311, 15. 
nsQioQaa&ai c. g. 274, 1. 
tkqI nQo 300, R. 1. 
mqnxoQ c. g. 275, 2. 
TTfqpi'xsVwtc.inf 306,1, (d). 
nrix^q dec. 63. 
nhiQu 78, R. 8. 
nlfmlrj^L c. g. 273, 5,(b). 
nlvsLV c. g. and a. 273, 

5, (c) and R. 15. 
TiLGTEvnv c. d. 284,3,(3). 
TTtW comp. 84, 12. 
jrAfiV c. a. 279, R. 5. 
■nXucrTOV with Sup. 239, 

R. 2. 
nXuta without i] 323,R.4. 
TiXsiMV, nluaTog 84, 9. 
nliov ins. uUmv 78, R.5. 
ttAsov without 1] 323,R.4. 
nXEOP(y.iHv c. g. 275, 1. 
nXm c. g. 273, 5, (b). 
nUwq dec. 78, R. 5. 
nXi]&u> c. g. 273, 5, (b). 
ttA^Jvc. g. 271,3. 
7rA»j(»?j?, ttAtj^ow c. g. 273, 

5, (b). 
nXrfina^^iv, nXr}(Tlov c. g. 

270, R. 9; c. d.284,3,(2). 
nXr,alov comp, 84. 
nloiaioq c. g. 273, 5, (b). 
tiveIv e.g. 273, 5, (d); c. 

a. 278, 3. 
nvv% dec. 68, 13. 
nodtiv c. a. 274, R. 1. 
noX with the const. ])reg. 

ins. Trot (ubi) 300,11. 7. 
noiilv c. g. of material 

273, 5, (a) ; c. two a. 

280, 4. 



noiuv fu, nanioq c. pai't. 

3I0,4,)g);c.a.279,2; 

otyud^a, x«x« etc. c. a. 

280,2; c. inf.306,l,(c). 
noiuv c. part. 310, 4,(1)) ; 

c. part, and inf. 311, 13. 
noiHff&at c. g. 273, 2 

and 3, (a) ; c. g.' of price 

275, 3. 
TToAf.ufty c. d. 284, 3, (2). 
noXig dec. 63. 
TToXXov shai, iyxHfjdaiy 

ylyvfa&UL c. part. 310, 

4, (h). [R. 6. 

noXXov (5£co c. inf 307, 
noXku) with coni[). and 

superl. 239, R. 1 and 2. 
noXv with . Comp. and 

Superl.239, R. Iand2. 
noiTsidoJv dec. 53, 4, (1) 

(a);.56,R. 1. [2. 

TioTS, ilg noTE etc. .344,R. 
TTOTf^w, noxEQOv — Tj iu 

the direct and mdirect 

question 344, 5, (f ). 
nqaog dec. 76, XIV. 
nQOLTTHv «u, 'Aay.Sig c, a. 

279,2; (xya&d, itaxu etc. 

c. a. 280, 2 ; nQtxTTfiv, 

-sad^cci, to demand, c. 

two ace. 280, 3 ; c. d. 

284,3,(1). ^ 

nQSJTHV, TTQSnOVTCOg c. d. 

284, 3, (5) ; c. inf 3%, 

1, (d) ; c. d. and a. c. 

inf 307, R. 3. 
TifjsrTH c. part. 310, 4,(i). 
ngta^fic, nQsa^vTtjg, ngs- 

a.Svg 70, B. 
nQfai3fi'£iv c. g. 275, 1. 
■nQi(T^L(rTog 83, R. 2. 
n{jiaa&ni c. g. 275, 3. 
TTotV, nqlv 1] const. 337. 
no 6 prep. 287, 2. 
TlQoi/JLV c. g. 275, 1. 

TlQO&VfJLOV dvOlL, TIQO&V- 

fiiia&uL c. inf 306, 1, 

(a) ; c. onoag c. ind. fut. 

330, 6. 

TiQoXxa 278, R. 2. 
nqoxaXHQ&ai xLva ti 278. 

4. 



ngoxQivtiv c. g. 275, 1. 
TT^ovofTv c. g. 274, 1. 

TIQOOQUV c. g. 274, 1. 

714)0? prep. 298; c. d. 

with the const. Preg. 

ins. c. u, 300, 3, (a). 
nqoc^ulXuv c.g.273,.5,(d.) 
nqogdidovcac g.273,3,(b). 
TiQogrixsLV c. d. 284, 3,(5); 

c. inf 306,1, (d); c.d.and 

a. c. inf 307, R. 3. 
7iQogi'iy.fi(jOL c.g.273,3,(])). 
ttqSq^sv c. g. 273, 3,(b). 
TiQogxaXiladaL c.g.274,2. 
TiQocxi'VHv c. a. 279, 1. 
ngodTaTflv c. g. 275, I. 
TiQogtaxjSiv c. d. 284, 3, 

(3J;c.inf 306, 1, (a). 

7lQ0Tl}.lUV c. g. 275, 1, 

TtgovgyialjEQog 84, R. 3. 

7iQoq)£Qnv c. g. 275, 1. 

TiQoxovg dec. 71, B,(b). 

nqoMog comp. 82, 1, d. 

nQbJTtieiv c. g. 275, 1. 

nqwiog and nguTov, 264, 
R. 7. 

TiT/Jo-fffiv c. a. 279, 5. 

TiTM/og comp. 82, 1, f. 

nvv&avEad^ttL with the 
signif ofPerf255,R.l. 

nvvOavia&aL c. g. 273, 
5, (f); c. part. 310, 4, 
(a) ; c. pait. and inf 
311,6. 

tcmXHv c. g. 275, 3. 

rrwi:«Vc.opt.260,3,(4)(d). 

"Pudlo-ig cpsgsLv c. part. 
310, 4, (c). 

ga(t)V, ga<JTog 84, 10. 

^stj' c. a. 278, 3. 

gsuEiv c. a. 279, R. 5. 

^01? dec. 47. 

2 omitted 25, 1 ; movea- 

. ble at the end of a word 
15; in the fornjation of 
tenses of pure verbs 
131, and 1 33 ; of pure 
verbs 237, 1 and R. 2. 

aaxTELV c. g. 273, 5, (b). 

(javTox) or afaviov dec. 
88 ; usage 302, 2. 

(TB Suffix 235, 3 and R.3. 



596 



GREEK INDEX. 



aiXag dec. 61, (a). 

arig tlt*c. (>8, J 4. 

iT& ill inflex. changed to 

^ 25, 3. 
(T&a ii»flex. lit), 2. 
cdoiv ins. a&b)aav IIG, 

12. 
(Tf union vowel, 237, 1. 
ulvuni dec. 63. 
(jivka^tti c. a. 279, 1. 
axov, (jxofiriv 221. 
axoTXilv c. g. and a. 273, 

5, (f) and R. 20. 
axcoQ dec. 68, 15. [(d). 
(To/Dat.e//ticw,9 284,3,(10) 
(Tog ins. ctoD 302, R. 2. 
(TJiavi^Hv c. g. 273,5,(b). 
ariivdia&aL c. d. 284, 3, 

(Tjisi'dsiv c. a. 279, R. 5. 
o-TTOi'^ttsftv c. iuf.306,l,a. 
(j-Tovdalog comp. 82,R.6. 
(rras«tv c. a. 278, 3. 
aza&nua&al ri xlyl 285, 

1,(3). 
(mvd'C,Hv c. d. 285, 1,(1). 
(nsQynv c. a. and d. 274, 

R, 1: c. d. 285, 1,(1). 
oTfoav c. g. 271, 2; c. 

two ace, Ttra Ttyo? 280, 

3 and R. 3. 
(ntjvuL c. a 279, R. 6. 
(noxa^E(T&uL c. g. 273. 3, 

(TToaTrj/Hv c. g. 275, 1. 
CL' dec. 87 : usage 302,1. 
(Ti'yyL'/rb)(jx(o i^avzb) c. 

pai-t. 310, R. 2. 
av/yvcojAcov c.g.273;5,(g). 
o"L7/w^Hr c.iiif.306,l,(a). 
(7ivl«v c. two ace. 280, 3. 
(TvuSalvHv c. inf. 306, 1, 

(d) ; c.d. and a.c.iuf.307, 

R. 3. person, 307, R. 6. 
av^^ovXeikiv c. inf. 306, 

l,(a).^ J(7J. 

(jlUTlQUTTSIV c. d. 284, 3, 

(Tvuq:sQSLV c. d. 284,3,(7) ; 

ai'u(fBQH c. part 310, 

4/(1). ^ 
(TV^cpoQov iaiL c. d. and 

ace. c. inf. 307, R. 3. 



avv, ^i'v prep. 289, 2. ! rtlitav, xifiaddm c. g.275, 

aivui()f(jx/ui c. g. 273, 3, 3. 

(I)). jT/uo)Of7vc. d. 284, 3,(7); 

aiTfAovTi 284, 10, (a). riuojfjtla&ui rivu Tivog 

(jvvanf<Ti>ttic..g.273,3,{h). ' 274, 2; c. a. 279, 7. 
avvfgyog c. g. 273, 3, b. it? and rig dec. 93. 
avviivui c.g.and e.g. and ilg or ;i«c iig with the II. 

a. 273, 5, (e) and R.18. \ pers. Imp. 241, R. 13. 
aii'oida ifiavrio c. pait tig usage 303, 4 ; il? 

310, R. 2. '■ "1 omitted 238, R. 3, (e). 

uvrifuovTi 284,3,103 )a). ; Tt$ ins. ogiig in indirect 



(Ti'? dec. 62. 



question 344, R, 1. 



a(fuXXia&ai c. g. 271, 2. i to, tov, tw c. inf. or c.a.c. 
(TCficnv ins. tulv 302,R.8, j inf 308; to c. inf orc.a. 
(T/idov c. g. 273, R. 9. 
oxrinoi xa&' oXov xul fii- 
Qog with the Nom. 266, 



c. inf. in exclam. and 
question 308, R, 2. 

TO xul TO, TOV, Xai TOP 



3. with the Ace. 266, j. 274, 3. 



R. 4. 



TO VVV Etvai, TO TrjflSQOV 



o-/0Aaw)c comp. 82,1, (c). i sivai, to xutoc tovxov 
SorxQUTTig dec. 59, 2 and j iivui 308, R. 3. 

R. 2. I to/ 31 7,3; inanswers344, 

aCog dec. 78, R. 6. ! 7. 

ffcoTf^ dat. 53, 4,(1) (a). jolyuQ, toiyagovv 324, 
T« TOiatTa without xal 3, (c). 

following 325, 1, (e). i roiyagToi 324, 3, (c). 
TaguTTsiv Tiolsfiov 278,2. , xo'ivvv 3*24, 3 (c). 
taiixa referring to one j roiovTog dec. 91 ; TOtou- 



thought, 241, R. 3. 
' Tuxi'g comp. 83, L 
j raojg dec. 72, (b). 
; T« 321, 1 ; T« — xat, ib. 

Tiyysiv c. a. 278, 3. 
I ■^.^a'lQidd^al xl Tin 285, 
] 1,(3). 

TExvovv, parenteni esse 
j 255, R. ( 1 ) 



To'c 5/ut c. inf 549. 
Tolgdscn 217, 4. 
ToX^Hv c. inf 306, 1, (a). 
To$fif/v c. g. 273, R. 7. 
TOO-OL'Tov — oaov ; to- 

aoL'Toj — oaoj 343. 
Too"orTO -ouTw ^vith Com. 

and Sup. 239, R.1, and 
Too-oiToc dec. 91. [2. 



TsXiVTCJV, JinaUy, lastly iogovxov dsa c. inf and 
I 312, R. 3. wcTf c. inf 307, R. 6. 

! TiuvHv c. two ace. 280,3. tou or tov fjrj'c. inf 274. 

I Tsgag dec. 54, (c). 3. 

; TiQTTEcr&ai c. part 310, Tga<fsig Tivog 275, R. 5. 

I 4, (d). T^ftgdec. 99, 5. 

I Tiaauofg dec. 99, 5. Tgi;3(ov c. g. 273, 5, (g). 

j TriXixoiTog dec. 91. ! tohjotjc dec. 59, 2. 

I Tfc 5i 344, R. 4. [R. 5. jvyxuvfiv c. g. 273, 3,(b). 
■ Tlfxa&ur, xl Txa&oiv 344, c. part. 310, 4, (1). 

Ti ou, Tt OL'V oi'256,4,(e). Tupavvfev, -vn'siv c. g. 

Tid^ivai, -sa&ai e.g. 273, 275, 1. 

I 3, (a); c. two acc.280, 4. ti-cjpoj? dec. 72, (b). 

TUTSLv,parentem esse,2oD, 'T^Qi^eiv c. a. 279, J. 

j R. 1. 1 v^giaxoTEgog 82, IL 



GREEK INDEX. 



597 



I'dtaQ dec. ()8, 1(3. 
vlog dec. 72, (a). 
vndynv c. g. 274, 2. 



(jpavat c. inf. 306, 1, (b.) 
q)uvfQug iifiv noibiv it 
310, R. 3. 



XaXmov iaii with ace. 
c. inf. 307, R. (». 
Xalmuiq (fSQfiv c. g. 274, 
i5n^axoi'fiv c. g. 273, R. ' (ffidfu&ai c. g. 274, 1. 1 ; c. d. 285, 1, (1); c. 

ID ; c. d. 284, 3, (3). (jpi^f, referring to several i part. 310, 4, (c). 
inavUrtaad at e.g. 271,2. ' persons 241, R. 13. j Xaoriq dec. 71, A, («). 

vnavjay, vrxavTiu^sn' c. (jcf^o^ufvoc, (pfQwv, 7/irtj*i- '/«^/v 278, R.2; e.g. 288, 
g. 273, R. 9 ; c. d. 284, ! mo 5h/</i*o 312, R. 9;l R.; ;^«(>t»' eVojv, a»)v ib. 
3,(2). I qpEooiv, jn7/i ib. R. 10. /e/o dec. 55, R. 1. 

VTiaqx^tv ^- g- 271, 4 ; cpiQTSQog, qiSQiaiog 21(3,2. ;^di(5ojv dec. 5.5, R. 2. 

c. part. 310, 4, (f.) i cpevysiv with signif. of ;/?j^oi;y c. g. 271, 2. 

vnuiCHv c. g. 271, 2; c. i Perf. 255, R. 1. i;fOfi'?dec. 57 and (38,18. 



d. 284, 3, (2). 
"tTiex 300, R. 1. 
vTifxToinsa&aL c. a. 279, 

R.3. 
vjtf^sQXiiT&ai c. a. 279, 

R. 3. 
rne'^ 293. 
vnfQ^SotkXfiv c. g. and a. 

275, 1. 
vn^QiXfiv c. g. 275, 1. 
vrcfQOQuv c. g. 274, 1. 
VTisQg^i^siv c. g. 275, 1. 
r/TTjxoo? c. g. and d. 273, j B. 

R. 19. I (f^oig dec. 68, 17. 

vnrixuv c. a. 278, 3. \ cp&ovslv c. g. 274, 1 ; c. 

vno prep. 299 ; c. d. in | d. 284, 3, (6). 

const. Preg. ins. c. a. j (plXog comp. 82, R. 4. 

300, 3, (a) ; c. a. and cpiXog c. g. 273, 3, (b) 

part 312, R. 5. 
vno ins. vkeoti 31, R. 3. 



(pivysiv c. g. as xXonrig xo^ova&at. c. g. 274, 1; 
274, 2. I c. d. 284, 3, (6). 

cpfvysiv c. a. 279,3; c.inf. Ixoonnv -dsov 279, R. 5. 



306, 1, (a). 

(fd^dfisvoc, cpd-dg, quickly 
310,4,(1). 

cf&dveiv c. a. 279, 4 ; c. 
part, and with ?;' fol- 
lowing, nglv 7j 310, 4, 

(f&iyysa&at c. a. 278, 3. 



/ovg dec. 47 ; 68, 18. 
XQuiafiflv c.d. 284, 3, (7). 
XQiMv 73, 1, (c). 
XQfcog dec. 69. 
;f9;ic. g. 273, 5, (b); c. a. 

andd. 279, R.4, c. inf. 

306, 1, (d); XQV c. d. 

and a. c. inf 307, 6. 



cp^oyyog and cp&oyyi^ 70, /()>l(r5-«t rtyt xt 278, 4 ; 
c. d. 285, 1, (2). 
XQ(og dec. 68, 19. 
XMQUv c. d. 284, 3, (2). 



VTio^ivHv c. inf 306,1, (a). 

311, 15 ; c. part. 310, 4, 
je). 
vTiofiifivT^aasiv c. two 

ace. 280, 3. 
rTTovoav c. g. 273, 5, (f.) 
vnonivtvaL c. d. 284,3,(2), 
VTio/w^av c. g. 271, 2.; 

c. a. 279, R. 3. 
VfjxfQHv, vaj^QOv fivai, 

vaTsgi'^fiv c. g. 275, 1. 
vcplarad&aL c.d.284,3,(2). 
viptaxog 216, R. 2. 
0ayHP c. g. and a. 273, 

5, (c) and R. 15. 
(palvHV, (palvsa&ai c. 

part 310,4, (b); cpalvo- 

fxttLnoLuvTL ib. R. 3. 
q>aiv£(T&ai c.'inf. and part 

311, 8. 

77 



XCtiQi^uv c. g. 271, 2. 
j ;fw^t? c. g. 271, 3. 
1 /o)oo? and ;k woa 70, B. 
<pc{v) suffix 210. I Wvav c. g'. 273, 3, (b). 

cpOi3fla&ai c. a. 279, 5; j//£/fivc.g.anda.273,5,(f). 

c. inf. 306, 1, (a). | ipnSia&ai c. g. 271, 2. 

(jpovfuo) with signif. of- ipsvdrjg comp. 82, U. 
ipiXcg c. ff. 271, 3. 
PM with Part. 312, R.7. 



Perf. 255, R. 1. 
(jpyttsf^v c. d. and a. c. 

inf 

307, R. 3. 
g)(joluiov 17, R. 4. 
(pQovii'^dv c. g. and a. 

274, 1 and R. 1 ; c. wg 

and g. absol. 312, R. 12 ; 

c. oTiwg c. ind. fut 330, 

6. 
q)Qovdog 17, R. 4. 
cpvsiv ; (jpuyat c. g. 273, 1. 
qpvAwTTfo-^^at c. a. 279, 1. 
XatQHv c. d. 285, 1, (1); j 

c. part. 310, 4, (c). 
XaXtnalviiv c. g. 274, 1 ; 

c. d. 284, 3, (6), 
XaXtnog dui c. inf ins. 



wva|, wv« 53, R. 4. 

bjviicrd-ai c. g. 275, 3. 

cS^Prep. 290,3andR.2. 

ug that, see ot/. 

ug ut, in imshes, [uiinam) 
259, 3, (b). 

wc, a5, 50 as, const. 342 ; 

ovTbig {(og) — wc in wishes 
and asseverations 242, 
R. 2 ; wg with a Subs, 
(according as any thing 
might be expected, dtg 
Aaxt8ain6viog, ut La- 
ced). 342, R. 4. 

«5 with Superl. 239, R. 
2. 



598 



INDEX FOR THE FORMS OF VERBS. 



wg c. (1., as, o)g yfoovxi, ] mg ins. wgiB, so that, sea ] iognfg as, so as, con8t.342; 

(Tic fi-tol, meo jiulido, oj? | wct«. j witli Pjirt. 312, R. 13. 

ffifl do^i] 284, .3, (10) (I)). Mg finnv and cTj? inog tl- i oicrt c. inf. ins. of a eim- 
ac c. i>art. and ras. abs. Tiav 341, R. 3. 1 ])le inf. 300, R. 3. 

312, (>; c. part. fut.312,G. wc elg, inl, n()6g c. a., (ag dicif c. part. 312, R. 13. 
wc ins. oTt otTOJC 32}»,R.8. inl c. d. 290, R. 2. I olcTf «o M«<, const. 341. 

(oc, //ja/, 50 thnl |3.30; o»c xf, &*»$ il 344, R. 6. j otgii as, so as, const. 342. 

c. opt. utinam 2G0, R 9. • Mg b)(ffXov, -sg, -e c. inf. j uicpeXui' c. a. 279, 1 ; c. 



wg, as, see oie. 



259, R. 6. 



I d. 279,R.l. 



III. INDEX FOR THE EORMS OP THE VERBS. 



Abbreviations. A. Aorist ; A. I. first Aor.; A. II. second Jlcr. ; Auff. Aug- 
ment ; Char. Characteristic; Comp. Compare; D\a\ Dialect ; F. Future; r. Pas- 
sive; Yi:. Perfect; Tf. M. Perfect Middle; Tlnp. Pluperfect; R. Rtmark; Red. 
Reduplication. 



Ado) 230. 

ayalo^tti 230. 

uyafiUL 179, 1. 

aydouat 230. 

dydQbi Pf! with Att. Red. 

^124, 2, (6). Dial. 230. 

«/vo£a> 230. 

«/yum 187. 1. Dial. 230. 



aya. 



A. I. 



7/|«, «^ai m 



Time, and Xen.; A. H. 
124, R. 2; Pf.LA. 124, 
2 ; Pf. M. liynai. Dial. 

^230. 

«5w (Poet. cceISo)), F. 
aao^m (dnao^um),Att. 
(diiabj, aaoi not Att), 
Aug. 122, 1. Dial. 230. 

UHQM 230. 

drjdi'CofxaL Aug. 122, 1. 
l4^ili/ 230. 
«t«^w Char. 143, 6. 
atdiofiat, al'dofiUL 166, 1. 

Dial. 230. 
atrEWjfonnation of tenses 

130, (d), 2. 
alvvfiai 230. 
ai^e'w 167, 1. Dial. 230. 
aiQby, (XEiQw 230. 
aia^dvofiai 160,1. [230. 
ato-aw Aug. 122, 1. Dial. 



«tft) Aug. 122, 1. Dial. 
uxaxiCo^^ 230. [230. 

dvMXiiivog 230. 
dy.sofiaL, formation of 

tenses 130, (d), 1. 
dxrjdao} 230. 
dy.ovo}, Pf. with Att. Red. 

124, 2. F. dyovaof.iaL 

Pass, with (T 131, 2. 
uxQodofxaL, F. -uaofiui 
^129, R. 1. 
wAaAa^ta, Chai*. 143, 6. 
uXdonai 230. 
aAofTra^o) 223, 5. 
dXdalvia 230. 
a^aqDw, Pf. with Att. Red. 

124, 2.— M. 162. 
dm(o 166, 2. Dial. 230 j 
dXio^ai or dXilofxaL 230. | 
aAfw, formation of tenses 
^130,(d), 1. ^ i 

aXd^ijffxo}, -d^layM 230. 
dXlayofxai 161, 1. ! 

dXiTalvo} 230. j 

dXy.d&eiv, see aAe'^CD 162. ' 
dXXdaa(o,Ch£ir.y. 143, 1. j 

— A. Land n. P. 141,1 

(iXXofiaL, « in format 
149, R. 2. Dial. 230. 



«Ao«o), F. -affa>.129,R, 1. 
dXvy.zso) 230. 
aAt'axw 230. 
dXq)al)'(o, -dvo) 240. 
duaqxdvoi 160, 2. Dial. 

230. 
ufi'SXlaxo) 161, 2. 
dfMTisyca 159, 4. 
dfiTiXay.lay.bJ 230. 
dfivvw, dfii'va&ov 162. 
ufAcpiyvosoj, Aug. 126, 1 

and 3. 

dfXCpiEVVl'/UL 184, 1. 

dftcpig^riTso), Aug. 126, 2. 
dvtt(ii(x)ayo^ai 161, 3. 
dvaXlcry.a 161, 4. 
WT'^ttvo) 230. 
"ANEOn. 230. 
dviyouai Aug. 126, 1. 
ttvj/'vo^f, Ep. 230. 
dvolyvv^ii, avolya 187, 6. 
(xyo^ji^^oa), Aug. 126, 1. 
UVTUOi 230. 
dviriM, dvvoi formation of 

tenses 130, (b), 1. Dial. 

230. 
uviaya 230. 
a7rai'(»«w 230. 
dnoKflayw 230. 
aTTftAfiO) 230. 



INDEX rOR THE FORMS OF VERBS. 



599 



oitfx&dvofiat 160, 3. 

V(7l6fO(Tf '2.')0. 

anoxQ^ 177, 3, contrac- 
tion 137, a 

tt7TOXOitl}lttl 177, 3. 
IX()UQI(TH(0 230. 

\tPAJl 230. 

uQiaxtt) KJl, 5. 

ocQy.soi, forniat'n of tenses 

130, (d), 1. 
afjfio^w, -TTw,Char. 143,3. 
a^»'i'/iai 188,1. Co JMp.230. 
«^ow,foraiation of tenses 

^130, (e). 

aQTid^w, Char. 143. 7. 

dQVTw, a^t'O), formation 

of tenses 130, (b), 1. 
APSl. r/.QaQ'njy.(f) 230. 
ufTCTbi, ui'affa) 230. 
ccvalvw, Aug. 122, 1. 
^ATzlAZOMAI, Char. 

143, 6. 
^ATPASl, see «7rau^«crf. 

Corap. 230. 
ai'^/x'ro), au^w, 160, 4. 
"ATFISKOMAI, inavq. 

230. 
VLCpr/.rioficu 159, 2. 
vKpiaab), Char. 143, 4. 
\4<PJl, unaqiiay.O) 230. 
uy&o^au 166, 4. 
'^'x-a, «;««//;co 230. 
'^w^, Ep. 230. 

oioiQTO {tiiiob}) 230. 

i?w;;o), Char. 143, 6. 
/?«tVw 158, 1. Dial. 230. 
/SaAP.o) 156,2. Comp. 230. 
/5«7rTa), Char. (p. 143, 1. 
Paqib) 230. 

/5a(rT«>, Cliar. 143, 7. 
BAfl, see (3aiv(xh 
^floftai, ^io^ai 230. 
^tdoixai 230. 
/5i;5«J(y 163, 1. Comp. 

/5«tVa) 230. 
/5</5^waxG) 161, 6. Dial. 
/Jto'w 192, 10. [230. 

^LMaxouai 161, 3. 
/SAttTTTw, Char. /J, 143, 1. 

Red. 123, 2. . 
^laardvo) 160, 5. 
^Xaaqirjfiiw, Red. 123, 2. 



/5A£7t(o,A.ll. P. 140,R.l. 

/JA/rrt.) Char. 143, a 

tiko'tayw 230. 

/?o«'o) 230. 

IJotrxM 166, 5. 

l^ovXofiui 166, 6. Dial. 
230. 

i^iQanato, Char. 143, 3. 

/5^t>w A. IL P. 140, 2. 

;5o/>, Char. 143, 6. 

^5^i7(io/mt 230. [1. 

^vviu, fivvofiai, fjva), 159, 

Ta^uEw 165,1. Conip.230. 

yavvfini 230. 

rA.% see yiyvofAat. 
Comp. 230. 

y^ybjvlay.b) 161,7. Comp. 
yiyojva 230. 

ydvofAUt 230. 

/gAaw, format'n of tenses 
130 (c). 

/eVio 230. 

FENRy see ylyvofiai. 
/ftw, A. P. with 0-131, 3. 
/?ji9^«a) 165, 2. 
y7}Q(xay.b), yrjQdca 161, 8. 

Dial. 230. 
ylyvofiai 163, 2. 
yiyvwcrxb) 161, 9. 
/oriw 230. 

y^riyogsM, see iyslgto. 
Jdi;M 143, 6. 223, 5. 
dalyvfiL 240. 
(5«/a> 230. 
(5«;<j'w 158, 9. 
dufxocM, datnaC^ 156, 2. 
dit^vuM 230. 
(5«^^«vw 160,6. Dial.230. 
duTiojxaL 230. 
J^i2 230. 
(Jg'aro 230. 
(56t 166, 7. 
(5a(5w, Pf. didia 193. 

Comp. 230. 
^£tWi;,ut 187,2. Dial. 230. 
dttv, see 5«. 
AICKSl, see ddy.vvfii and 

5tjuw, formation of tenses 
156, 2. 
diofiaL contract. 137, 2. 
^£^xo/^at,Pf 5c(5o^xa with 



the mennini,'ofth<^ Pros. 
140, 4. Dial. 230. 
diQU), A. II. P. and Pf A. 

140, 2 and 4. 
diyof^tai 230. 
dtio) 230. 
(J«o), formation of tonscH 

130, (d), 2. contraction 

137, 2. 
5tw, see 5ft. 
diuLTaoj, Aug. 126, 2. 
dcay.ovso), Aug. 126, 2. 
8ialiyo(.ira, Aug. 123, 4. 
5f5«ax(.) 161, R. 
/ilziUMI 230. 
5(5^a(Txa) 161, 10. 
dldco}u 175. 
5tC7/|Uttt 180, R. 3. Dial. 

230. 
JIHMI 160, R. 3. Dial. 

230. 
Snjjubi, contracted 137,3. 
(5/0) 230. 

diMy.ta, idib)xa&ov 162. 
dodaaaro S30. 
5o;<£w 165, 3. 
dovnko 230. 
5()aa),forniation of tenses 

131, a 

(5ty«^u«i]79,2. Dial. 230. 
diiM, dvcn 158, 2. Dial. 
'Edcp&r) 230. [230. 

£«a), Aug. 122, 3. For- 
mation of tenses 129, 

R. 1. 
syHQoj Pf. with Att. Red. 

124, 2 ; Pf II. with vow. 

of var. 140, 4. Dial. 230. 
^EriiJl, see q)egM. 
iyyjigsM, Aug. 126, 5. 
idoi), see ea&ib). 
i'Cofiai, see y.a&i'Coi. 
iaato 166, 8. 
iai^o), Aug. 122, a 
'Ee.% Aug. 122, a Dial. 
^Ef/IJl, see o^ao). [230. 
f<;(a;'o), Aug. 121, R. 
'EfKfL, Pf eoiyM, Plup. 

ioiy.fiv 140, R. 3 ; Aug. 

122, 5. Inflection of 

toixa 195, 2. 
eJ'xw, Ewa^oy 162. 



600 



INDEX FOR THE FORMS OF VERBS. 



siliuy, nXia), lYkXu) and 

f'iXXo), see fllo). 
£/Ai'w 230. I 

illu) lG(j, 9. 1 

Hui 181 and 225. 
ilm 181 and 22(5. I 

(\vi\ui, see it^u(piEvvv^i. j 
^EIllSl^ see (^»/u/. j 

f'ioyrvfii 187, 3. | 

fr^/w 187, 3. Comp. 230. j 
^EIPOMAI 1G6, 11. 

Comp. 230. ! 

"EIPTMI, see e^vw 230. ! 
ft(»i'w, see iqio). i 

f/'^ CO 230. [230. 

Hoa, Aug. 122, 3. Dial, 
st'w^w, see id^i^w. 
iXuvvw 158, 3. Dial. 230. | 
fAftw, see s}.aiv(o. \ 

iXs'//co, Pf. with Att. Red. 

124, 2. 
iM!;o), Char. 143, 6. 
^ Dial. 230. 

"EylETOfL, see I'gxo^ai. 
£/.tWw, Alls. 122, 3. — 

Pf with Att Red. 124,2. 
'EyIKTfL, see f/.xw. 
rP-xw 166, 10. 
slna, Pf. IoAttw, Plup. 

iooXnEiv 140, R, 3. Aug. 
^ 122, 5. 

'EyiJl, see atog'o). 
e^soj, formation of tenses 

130,(d), 1. 

i^vr,fuvy.8. see yifivoj. 

iva^ji^o). Char. 143, 6. 

evaio), Pass.w ith a 131,2. 
^EyEOn., see hn\vo(fa. 

"ENEKJI, see qcf^w. 

ivenoj, see (jr^,"t. Comp. 

fVv'o^a 230. [230. 

cytTTTw 230. [230. 

ivrinoi, see (jp?j_ufc. Comp. 

evvvfji, see u^uqihrviAi. 
Comp. 230. 

ivoxXsoj^ Aug. 126, 1. 

I'oixa, see^LIKfl. Comp, 
230. 

lo^/a, see '£PrJ2. 

fo^Ttt^w, Aug. 122, 5. 

ina'Cbi 230. 

snavglaxa 230. 



fni^vfiio}, Aug. 126, 5. t^/ 178, R. 3. 
inlajuiiui 171), 3. Dial. j)jutoj 220. 

2:30. j einio), Char. <jp 14.3, 1. 

tJTw, Aug. 122, 3. Comp. 1 diXw see idilta. 
tQUftui 179, 4. [230. I ^tQOfivu 230. 

€^cfw. Comp. tpajuat. | ^c'w 154, 2; contract. 
(Q'/d^ofAai, Aug. 122,3. 137, 1. Comp. ip f^w. 
I'^/w 230. I ^riXio) 230. 

'iiPr/2, plup fw^/a J 122, OHlin. 230. 

5. — Perf with vow. of ^lyyctvft) 160, 14. 

140, R. 3. [var. 230. ; ^A«oj,formation of tenses 
£^(5co see 'EPr.a. Comp. I 1.30, (c), [230. 

igndb), perf with Att. ' ^y/jcrxw 167, 13. Comp. 

Red. 124, 2. Dial. 230. ^outtw from TagdiTio 



iqunbi 230. 
iniaao) 14.3, 3. 
tQidaivo) 230. 
igl^o) 230. 
"EFOMAI see '£IP. 



[3. 



1.56, R. 
^^at to Pass, with tr 131,3. 
^QvXXI^o), Char. 22.3, 5. 
d^giTiTU), Char, g; 143, 1. 
^^w(Txcol56,2.Dial.230. 



eom'^co, r^TTOj, Aug. 122, i ^iVw and ^i5(u 158, 4. 



tgob) 166, 12. 
iQvyydvo) 160, 13. 
igvi^abb) 230. 
f^i'xw 230. 
bgi\uai see c^vw 230. 



^ito, formation of tenses 

^ 130, (b) 2. 

'idgoo), contract. 137, R, 

1. Dial. 230. 
Idgvoi 130, (b) 1. 



e^LO), formation of tenses ; V^co see xad/^co. 



223, 1. Comp. 230. 
EQX^i^^^ ^67, 2. Comp. 
I 230. 

■ iu&l(o, ead^a 167, 3. 
! IffTittCd, Aug. 122, 3, 



tTj^i 180. Dial. 230. 
Ixviofiai, Vxw 159, 2. See 
dq;r/.viouui. Comp. 230. 
IXuoxouai 161, 14. 
'lAmil 230. 



I £l'a(5£ see avtJayw. Comp. j iXXta see cJylco. 

j 230. ^ I J,ua(7(ra), Char. 143, 3. 

I sl'^w see na&ndto. j tb-«ui 230. 

I dQlavM 161, 11. i(rT7;,ut 175. [149, R. 2. 

: ix&uyonai see driE/d: la/ralvoj, u in format. 

l];^(o 166,14. Comp. 230. layrioiiui and i'axojjctt 
i I'l/yto 166, 15. see vniaxviofxai. 

\Zu(o, contract. 137, 3. "tH see ftut. 
j Comp. fj/ow. [i«(o. KAzl-, KAIJ-, see xat- 

^srvvfii 184, 2. Comp. i j^iura. 

^Evyviui 187, 4. I xa&i^oijai, Aug. 126, 3. 

^ao, formation of tenses ^ xa^idoii^ui. 154, 5. 
: 130,(1), d. xa&ndoi 166,13. 

^mrvfJi 186, 1. xu&rifiai, Aug. 126, 3. 

; 7j|?«(rxw, rj3dia, 161, 12. y.adl^w 166, 16. 
' TjyEQS&oiiiai see uysigct). xalvvuai 230. 
j Comp. 230. ,i«/co 154, 2. Dial. 230. 

\r,(Qi&ofiaL see aljoto. x«ilao,formation of tenses 
; Comp. 230. I 130, (d) 2: Opt. Plup. 

, II ^ai 190. Dial. 230.^ | 31. or P. 154, 9 ; metath. 

i ^l^pgoTov see a^agrdva. \ in Pf 156, 2. 



INDEX FOR THE FORMS OF VERBS. 



GOl 



icafiyoil58,10. Dial. 230. 

xaTr;/o^£0», Aiiir. 12G, 5. 

xdu) see xitioi}. 

xflfxai ISi). Dial. 230. 

Xfiifd) 230. 

KEISl see xsluai. [2. 

xtXtvo), Pass, with a, 131, 

xeUio 230. 

xiXo^rxL 230. 

xiviioi 230. 

xf^«»')'i'^t 183, 1. Dial. 

230. 
xfQdaivb), H in format 

149, R. 2. Pf.I.A.149, 

6. Comp. 230. 
xfui^o) 230. 

x?;(5to 16(), 17. Dial. 230. 
xidvufiai 230. 
xiVi'wat 230. 
xigvdd) 230. 
x</«»'0), -ojiiai 230. 
xi/Qr/ui 177, 1. 
x/w 230. 
xAttsW, Char. ^/ 143, 8. 

F. Pf. xEzAayioj and 

'^o}im 154, 6. Dial. 230. 
xXaio) 166, 18. 
xJltf w formation of tenses 

130, (c). 
xXsloi Pass, with a 131, 3. 

Dial. 230. 
xXsnro), Char, tt 143, 1. 

F. M., A. 11. P. 140, 2. 

Pf I. and Pf M. or P. 
xXsbj 230. [140, 5. 

xXr/i(o, xXfiQ) see -/.Xsio) 230. 
xXlvo), Pf. i\.. and 31. or 

P. and A. I. P. 149, 7, 

and R, 4. 
xXi'(o 230. 

xyatw, contract 137, 3. 
xvcocrab), Char. 143, 3. 
xof>, Char. 143,6. [R.2. 
xoiXaho), d in form. 149, 
xoXoio), Pass.with al31,3. 
xoTTTw, Char, n, 143, 1. 

Dial. 230. 
xoQivvvfii 182. Dial. 230. 
xoiBbi 230. 

x^ttsW, Char. ;' 143, 6. 
x^atVw 230. [Comp. 230. 
xqifiajxai 179, 5. 



xQffidvwfii 183, 2. I 

x^iVoi Pf A. and M. or j 

P. and A. I. P. 149, 7, 1 

and R. 4. [3. | 

xQovo), Pass. Aviih <r 131 

XQl'TTTiO 14.3, 1. 

xQbj^M, Char. 143, 6. 

xxt'ioucn^ Red. 123, R. 1 
Suhj. of Pf and Opt of 
Plup. 154, 9. 

xTtivvfu 188, 2. 

xxdvo), F. xT^yw. A. I. tx- 
xfira. Pf A. txTova 141, 
4. Pf P. 149, R. 3. 
Poet and Dial. 230. 

xtIvvvui see xtuvvv^i. 

xrvnio) 165,4. [2. 

xvXio), Pass, with a 131, 

xwi(o 159, 3. 

xvQica, xvQb) 230. 

Att'/xdv(a 160, 15. Dial. • 
230; 

AAZTMAI 230. : 

Xa/uSdvo) 160, 16. Dial. 
230. [230. 

I Xuv&dvoi 160, 17. Dial. ; 

I kday.oj 230. : 

A«yoj, (a) to say, without j 
Pf A. ; Pf 31. liXv/^cn. 
A. P. iXix&riv.—{h) to 
collect, and in com- 
pounds Pf siXoxa, 31. 1 
or P. ilXr/ficu 140, 5 ; 
Aug. 123, 4; A. II. P. 
iXsyriv and A. I. P. 140, 
R. 1. Comp. ytEXn.. 

Xdnm, A. hXlnov Pf II. 
XiXoLTxa 140, 4. A. IL 
A. and P. 141, 3. 

Xina, A. II. P. 140, R. 1. 

Xsvy.uiv(D,d infor.l49,R.2. 

Xsvaaca, Char. 143, 3. 

Xtvoi, Pass, with a 131,2. 

yJLXH 230. 

Xifiaino), Cliar. 143, 3. 

Xiaaoiiui, Char, x 143, 3. 

ioi'w, contrac^ 137, 5. 
Dial. 230. • j 

>Ll'w, formation of tenses ' 
130, (b) 2. Dial. 230. 

Malvo^iai 230. 
i i^aiofiai 230. 1 



Hav&dvia 160, 19. Dial. 
fidQvnuni 230. [2.30. 

/i «(» 1 1'^€ w, - vgofiui I ( i5,.5. 
fidirau), Char, y 143, 1. 
}ia(jxi^M, Ciiar. 143, 6. 
fid/ofiai KK), 19. Dial. 
il/.4i> 230. [240. 

fiediaxbi 1()1, 10. 
Hfiootjui 230. 
/if;.a'l()6, 21. Dial. 2.30. 
iumw 166, 20. 
^cAoj see /xiXsi. Comp. 
ftnoivdo) 220. [230. 

fxivbj 166, R. 2. Comp. 

MAP-. 
^fQfur]Qt^b}, Char. 22.3, 5. 
fiTjxdoiuui 230. 
fiialvw, fxiijvai, fiiuvat 

149, R. 2. Dial. 2.30. 
p>i'^il87,5. Dial. 230. 
ij.iuv7,axa) 161, 17. 
fiiayit) see filyvv^t. 
fioXoi\uui see /j^.wcxw. 
//I'sW, ^0 sitcA-, 166, 22. 
/ii'^'oj, ^0 groan, 143, 7. 
(ivxdojuui 230. 
(Uiw, formation of tenses 

130, (b)l. 
3'«/t.) 230. 
vdaaw 143, 4. 
ysix«w 230. 

vHaaof.iai see vlaaofiai. 
ri^o) 166, R. 2. 
r£w 154, 2. 
v£w (vri&bi). Pass, with 

(T 131, 2. 
yfi'w, Pf 31. or P. with 

and without a 131, 3. 
vlaaoficu, Char. 143, 3. 

Dial. 230. 
voioi contract. 205, 5. 
vvaxd^co 143, 7. 
Zico, formation of tenses 

130, (d) 1. 
Ii'^w, ^vQoiJiai 165, 6. 
tto), Pass, with a, 131, 2. 
'0(5u>, Char. 143, 6. 
odvaua&ni see ^0JT2^ 

^OMAI230. 
0^(0 166, 23. 
olaxi^Q] Aug. 122, 1. 
olyvv^if ol'/(o see aroly. 



602 



INDEX FOR THE FORMS OF VERBS. 



Old a see vgata. Comp. 

2:^0. 
oidulyoij oiduvb) 1(30, 9. 
nlxoi'oioi 12'2, 2. 
oiuai see olofiai. 
ol^u'f.M 122,2. 
oif.ib't^o) 143, G. 
on7> 122, 2. 
ouo/oioj 219, 5. 
o^'ow, Aug. J22, 2. 
ol'oiuud (J(),24. Comp.230. 
otoo), olw&riv 122, 1. 
010-1060) 122, 2. 
ol/ot^aL 166, 25. 
ol'to) see ol'ojutti and qpe'^w. 
hXifT&aivWy -dvoi 160, 10. 
oAAr^i 182, B. 
oAoA I'^w, Cliar. 143, 6. 
ofiaQTsco, Epic oixaoTiiiriv 

222, R. 1. 
o^vv^i 182, B. 
onoHlara, Epic ouoxAfOi' 

222,1. A, (2). 
ofxoQyvi'ixi 187, 7, 
oyft^wTTw 143, 3. 
ovivTjfiL 177, 4. 
ovo^uai 230. 
"OHTJl see o^kw. 
o(»«w 167, 4. 230. [R.2. 
ogyotlvo), a. in form. 149. 
"OPEFISTMI 230. 
Iqiyoj 230. 
o^vf/^i 230. 
oQvaooi, Char, p' 143, 1. 

Pf. with Att. Red. 124,2. 
oacfQaivonav 160, 11. 
^ Dial. 230. 

olqiw^ Aug. 122, 4. 
otT«w 230^ [230. 

'0(p£aa) 166, 26. Dial. 
o(f £';.;.a) 230. 
ocfXiay.avbJ 160, 12. 
/Zatiw, Char. 143, 7. 
7r«iw 166, 27. [2. 

naXaloi Pass, with a 131, 

TTttXAtO 230. 

naQavo}jibi, Aug. 126, 5. 
Ttaootvao, Aug. 126, 1. 
TTKO-aw, Char. 143, 3. 
7ra(r/wl61, 18. Dial.230. 
naTEOfAm 2.30. [4. 

7r«i;(y, A. P. with a 131, 



ntldoij Pf. II. ninoiS^a 

140, 4. Dial. 2.30. 
TTfa'rtti), contract. 137, 2. 

TTfXTf 0), TtixTbi, TltUb) 143, 

TTfAfi^o, 230. [2. 

nd^fji'So), Char. 223, 5. 
7r£>Tiw, Pf. I. and Pf. M. 

or P. 140, 5. 
JlJllSOSl, see ndaxM. 
TifTinivb), a in format. 

149, R. 2. 
TTf^Mw, formation of 

tenses 130, (c). 
niq^b) 166, 28. 
Trg'^ ^0)230. 
nndvvvui 183, 3. 



7r£To^«i 166,29. Dial.2.30. 
j Titv&ouai, see iivv&dvo- 
I fxai. Dial 230. 

j TTf'qpVOV, tTTfCjDI'OV 230. 

|;r7)/j'r.atl87,8.Dial.230. 

ntlvttfiaL 230. 
I nlfinlr,{iL 177,5. Dial. 230 

nifiTigriUi 177, 6. 

TTn'd) 158, 5. 

nnxiaxo) 161, 19. 

TtiTTQday.ca 161, 20. 

tt/titw 163, 3. Dial. 230. 

Ttirvdo) 230. 

7rA«>, Char. // 143, 8. 

7i)jx&(x), see 7rfA«aW. 

nXucraoi^ Char. 143, 3. 

ttAexw A.II. P. 140,R. 1. 

TTAEw, formation of tenses 
154, 2 ; contract. 137, 1. 

7i)J]iTa(a, Char. / 143, 1 ; 
A. n. P. 140, R. 2. 

nkvvb), Pf A. and M. or 
A. I. P. 149, 7 and R. 4 

7r;.w(u 2.30. 

ttWco, formation of tenses 
154,2. contract. 173, 1. 

no&s(a, format, of tenses 
130, (d), 2. 

TToAf^u/sW, Char. 223, 5. 
! TTOviw, format, of tenses 
I 130, (d)^2. 

j TTQuacTb), Cliar. y 143, 1. 
I ngiaa&ttt 179, 6. 
! TTglb), Pass, with o- 131, 2. 
j 7r^oi9^i'^or'|i/«i,Aug.l26,5. 
1 jiTaio), Pass.with o- 131,2. 



' nrrie<T(o 230. 
miaao) 143, 3. 

tttl'o) 130, (b), 1. 

nvv&dvofifu 160, 20. 

Vrn'rw 2:30. 
j ^uTTTo), Char, (f 143, 1. 

^f'^w, see tgdb) 230. 
' ^J£o), formation of tenses 
154, 2 and 192, 7. 

'^PJ^, see qpjja/. 

(i>;/vi'|Ut 187, 9. 

^i/£tu 230. 

i^tyoa}, contract. 137, 3. 

glTitb), Char, (p 143, 1. 

gvnSta, Red. 219, 6. 

^I'ffTa^w, Char. 143, 6. 

^ti')vyi'jUt 186, 2. 

>"aA7r/>, Char. // 143, 8. 

aaob) 2.30. 

(T°ivvv^L 184, 4. 

CTfi'w, Pass, with cr 131, 2. 

(7£La) 230. 

(Trj(2ulv(o, 7) and a in 
format 149, R. 2. 

(TxaTTTO), Char, (p 143, 1. 

(jy.fddvvvfAL 182, 4. 
; axf'A/lw, ff/jfP.f'w 166, 30. 
' (Ty.idvai.iaL 230. 
! o-u Of w, contract. 137, 3. 
' aoi'Tai, aovao {aov), see 

o-£i'w. 
' andb), format, of tenses 
\ 130, (c). 

a7ieigbi,V^. tanoga 140,4. 
i aruCb), Char. 143, 6. 
I ffTaXd^oj, Char. 143, 6. 

(TTfA/a), A. n. P. 140, 2. 

<TT8vd^(i), Char. 143, 6. 

arigyoi, Pf II. I'oro^/rt 
140, 4. 

cTSQSb), cnsgliTy.b) 161, 21. 
Dial. 230. 

cnrigi^'x), Char. 143, 6. 

o-t/jW, Char. 143, 6. [5. 

(TTogivvi\uL,(n6gvvfii 184, 

(TT^f'cpw A. II. P. 140, 2. 
Pf. 31. or P. 140, 6. 

(ngoLVvi'fii 182, 186, 3. 

axvyibi 230. 

cri-Att'o), Ep. (7ri?iT7/V 222, 
R. 1. [143, 6. 

uvgi^ca [crvgiTTO)], Char. 



INDEX FOR THE FORMS OF VERBS. 



G03 



W^ 



ccpa^o), (rqpdfTTO), Char, y 

]4;i, 1 and C). 
acfvi^u), Char. 143, G. 
c/dco, format, of tenses 

1:30, (c). 
<7^/^w, Char. 143, 5. 
acii^o), see aaoo) 230. 
TAFJl 230. 
TAyiAn. 230. 
Tavi'o), format, of tenses 

223, 1. Comp. 230. 
TUQaacrtxy, d^qaxxw 156, R. 

Dial. 230. 
TOffaw, Chai'. y 143, 1. 
THvw 149, R. 3. 
TfAf'to, format, of tenses 

130, (d), 1. 
xi^ivw 158, 11. 
TEM-Q. 230. 
TC^TO) 230. 
T«T//ov, see TEMfL. 
TExgalvco 163, 4. 
T£t/0) 230. 
T/£ia 2.30. 
jl&rifiL 175. 
TtXTO) 143, 2. 
TtVvr,ui 285; Comp. 230. 
xf vco 158, 6. 
tirgab) 163, 4. 
riTQbhxo) 161, 22. 
t/w 158, 6. 
TAii,uf 177, 7. 
T/x>)/&) 230. 
T()87rG),vow.of var. in A.II. 

A. M. P. 140, 2; A. I. A. 

M. P. 141, 3; Pf I. A. 

and Pf M. or P. 140, 5, 

6. Verb. Adj. TQsnrog 

and with middle sense 

TQanriTtog. 



T^cqpo), Pf. rirgocpa 



(pgsb), formation of ton- 



4. Pf jM. or P. 140, 6. j ses, 131, 2. 
A. I. P. iO{j(<:p\>rfV, ra- i qtQiaau), Char. x. 143, 1. 
rer than A. II. P. iiod- \ q)vyyuvb){(ftvyo)) 160,22. 
(pr)v 140, 2. Dial. 230. (pv()(o 2:30. 



verb. Adj. x^gmTog. 
TQSx(a 167, 5. 
T^au, format, of tenses 

130, (d), 1. 
TQi^o), Char./ 143,6. 
Tvyxdvw 160, 21. 
Tvnib) 166, 31. 
'TnffiviJi/.V)tE see 7jfiV(a 

230. 
vniaxvionai 159, 4. 
vnvbiTtw, Char. 143, 3. 
t5ft), formation of tenses 

with a 131, 2. 
fp AIJl see eadlb). 
(palvoj 151, Dial. 230. 
q)ixay.b} 161, 23. 
(psldojuuL 230. 
fPENJl see nicpvov 220. 
(jps(>w 167, 6. comp. 2.30. 
(pEvyco see (pvyyavm 

comp. 230. 
(p^^fc 167, 7, 178. 
(p^avo) 158, 7, Dial. 230. 



yi'w 192, 11. comp. 230. 

Xtt^o/itti 230. 

XniQb) 166,32, comp.230. 

XvtXaM, formation of ten- 
ses 130, (c). 

%avddv(a 160, 23. comp. 
230. 

ydayiM 161, 24. 

;^f>, Char. 5143,5; Pf 
II. x£/o(5a 140, 4, Fut. 
Xfffov^ttL 154, 3. A. I. 
and II. A. 154, 8. 

yio), formation of tenses 

'154, R. 1.230. 

XOb), Pass, with o- 131, 2. 

XQaofitti, formation of 
tenses 129, R. 2.; A. P. 
with (T 131, 4 ; con- 
tract. 137, 3. 

Xgdo), formation of ten- 
ses 129, R. 2. contract 
137, 3. 

XQTi 177, 2. 



cp&iiQO), A. II. p. 140, 2. 1 /^/ca, formation of ten 
Pf n. 140, 4. comp. 230. | 'ses 130, (a). 
(p^tVw 158, 8. Dial. 2SO.xQo^r>vvfii 186, 4. 



(pdeoi 135. Dial. 2-30. 
(pXiyw, A. II. P. 140, 2, 

R. 1. 

(flvCo) Char. 143, 6. 
qpoixao), Ep. (jpotTJjTTjv 

222, R. 1. 
q)Qdyvvfj,i 187, 10. 
(pQaCw 148. Dial. 230. 
(fodaaw, Char. / 143, 1. 



¥%t'w, Pass with 0-131,2. 
xputa^ Pass, with a 131,3. 

contract. 137, 3. 
.//g>w, A. II. P. 140,R.l. 
V/v;^a), A. U. P. 141, R. 
'J2;9^£co 165,6. 
Mviofiat, Aug. 122, 4. 

comp. TiQiaa&ai. 



ERRATA. 

Page 3, line 18, read Ausfahrliche for AusfUrliche. p. 4, 1. 17, twenty for 
thirty, p. 17, 1. 18, read tjv^ov for tjv^ov. p. 18, 1. G, tragoedus for trageodus. 
p. 28, 1. 10, TO, Si for rdSi. p. 28, 1. 23, ends in for is changed into. p. 31, 1. 6, 
(p for &. p. 31, 1. 35, smooths for smooth breathings, p. 35, 1. 24, d'aXnajQi^ for 
d-a?.7to^jj. p. 41, 1. 31, Jtvxa?uojv for ^ttx. p. 48, 1. 32, TroAAd for ttoDm. p. 
52, 1. 13, reflexive for reciprocal, p. 53, 1. 1, tiioirjatv for tTioir/aav. p. 55, 1. 30, 
^Ihnnoi for ^iOJuTinob. p. 58, ]. 8, ata* for o^at. p. 60, 1. 2, " AvSqofiida for 
*^v8^ofie§a p.^61, 1. 4, ^i'xT? for ^x?;. p. 67, 1. 33, clod for tec. p. 92, 1. 12, 
deciension for delension. p. 103, 1. 15, ilS^)* for 'i§qi. p. 103, 1. 19, iSgida for 
V%^"a. p-i 113, 1. 22; oc for o^^. p. 122, 1. 35, v for v. p. 122, 1. 37, i^axoacooTos 
for f|a. p. 122, 1. 38, iTrraxoatooTog for ixr. p. 134, 1. 22, ^e^ovhvurig for /?£- 
^ovltv-ATi?. p. 136, 1. 23, oj for w. p. 156, 1. 17, ho'tlvov for ty.olh'ojv. p. 163, 1. 
37, ocpdioj for andtoj. p. 170, 1, 22, tj^Ttaoa for ^Ttaaa. p. 175, 1. 8, KTEN ^ox 
KTJN. p. 178, 1. 1, dyeXkoXftc for dytlloi^i. p. 180, 1. ],*7/Af/()w for*>f/'()w. 
p. 182, 1. 11, '-Bz/i? for 'j&^.Q. p. 185, 1. 28, Par^ for Pas5. p. 186, 1. 21, /?*'- 
^vGfxai for ^t^vofia, p. 187, 1. 13, dfiaQxavoj for dfxaQrdvoj. p. 195, 1. 6, jutXriaei, 
for fiikijasi. p. 196, 1. 23, ]]^t&Tjv for j^Qtd'r^v. p. 197, 1. 15, r^vsyxov for ijvfyvox. 
p. 202, 1. 25, /Wt? forVarf. p. 211, 1. 30, -ft' for -Zsj/. p. 214, 1. 34, ^aav tor ^oav. 
p. 222, 1. 30, e§^dv for f'^^ccv. p. 225, 1. 27, jj§£iv for jj§6iv. p. 230, 1. 1, erase 
the word not. p. 235, 1. 7. erase i/tc personal endings and the hyphen before 
ifie, etc. p. 269, 1. 22, TEQNAA for TEOI^AJ. p. 170, 1. 31, ^^'^£tv for 'i^Seiv, 
and f;^77 for ^§7]. p. 272, 1. 12, Part, for Pa^s. p. 278, 1. 2, Pari, for Pa^^. p. 280 
1. 1, Part, for Pass, p. 289, 1. 18, erase the hyphen before eJSog, p. 296, I. 21, 
^oSov for QoSov, p. 296, 1. 30, juyvQOTtohv for fxrjTQOin. p. 297, 1. 46, to for to. 
p. 301, I. 1, iyta for f^w. p. 302, 1. 1, fmXXov for /ud?2ov. p. 302,1. 5. f/V«t for 
f/Wi. p. 306, 1. 15, Al'yvTtTog for Alyu. p. 307, 1. 14, rd for t«. p. 311, 1. 47, 
aari; for aarv. p. 312, 1. 8, i^vioyuv for -^vioynv. p. 312, 1. 29, "Evo/uus for ''Evojuils- 
p. 315, 1. 21, fV^a'^f for tV^. p. 321, 1. 16, avrog for avrog. p. 340, 1. 28, ^fo:ru- 
T?]V for SsoTTOTTjv. p. 354, 1. 8, ojojuTjv for uio^riv. p. 360, 1. 25, aV for aV. p. 
364, 1. 15, inhq for v^Iq. p. 372, 1. 28, ^Eavrov for 'Eavrov, p. 377, 1. 7, iraSioto 
for TtiSioLOj. p. 378, 1. 33, eaf for Ae afe. p. 382, 1. 35, rvytlv for Ti';^£tJ'. p. 399, 
1.22, yvo')fi7jV for yvoivrjv. p. 405, 1. 1, aQijyscv for «?/'()/. p- 408, 1. 36, AaxaSat- 
fioviot for Jax. p. 411, 1. 9, aTro for aTTo. p. 416, 1. 27, TTOtica&at for Trotr. p. 
451, 1. 23, SiaTTQaxTOfiai xarsQyd. for SiaTTQaTrouatxarsQ . p. 453, 1. 27, al'for ai. 
p. 466, 1. 11, fiav&dvitv for juav&avsiv. p. 501, 1. 15, eiQijvrjv for siQijurp'. p. 505, 
1. 13, oi'rw for ovtoj.. p. 510, 1. 1, ottws for ottw. p. 531, 1. 30, oxojg for ojfw?. p. 
534, 1. 5, a for a. p. 540, 1. 1, GT^aroTtsSsvodjusvoi for oTQarosTt. p. 562, I. 25, 
'^hxiohatg for fjhxioL p. 563, 1.23., Amphibrachijs for ^^imphhi. The accent of a 
few oxy tones was broken off by the impression. 



Zj4^f^,A;^^<^^^^ ^ ^'^ «c<-»i-^ 






Ze^tvc^/cc/v^ /^fc^^. ' ^^ 



^>r\ 



/ / 



fu/C. 



f*^ 









71^ c 



lajSL. 



X-w-W*^ fi^^O^ t^>^,.^tf . CLr^^y^^ -»"^^ 



f^LtJ^-^ 



